98 Jeep Cherokee Repair Manual

GROUP TAB LOCATOR
IN Introduction 8O Power Distribution Systems
INa Introduction 8P Power Lock Systems
0 Lubrication and Maintenance 8Q Vehicle Theft/Security Systems
0a Lubrication and Maintenance 8Qa Vehicle Theft/Security Systems
2 Suspension 8R Power Seats Systems
3 Differential and Driveline 8S Power Window Systems
5 Brakes 8T Power Mirror Systems
6 Clutch 8U Chime/Buzzer Warning Systems
6a Clutch 8V Overhead Console Systems
7 Cooling System 8W Wiring Diagrams
7a Cooling System 9 Engine
8A Battery 9a Engine
8B Starting System 11 Exhaust System and Intake Manifold
8Ba Starting Systems 11a Exhaust System and Intake Manifold
8C Charging System 13 Frame and Bumpers
8Ca Charging System 13a Frame and Bumpers
8D Ignition System 14 Fuel System
8E Instrument Panel Systems 14a Fuel System–2.5L Diesel Engine
8Ea Instrument Panel Systems 19 Steering
8F Audio Systems 19a Steering
8G Horn Systems 21 Transmission and Transfer Case
8H Vehicle Speed Control System 21a Transmission and Transfer Case
8Ha Vehicle Speed Control System 22 Tires and Wheels
8J Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Systems 23 Body
8K Wiper and Washer Systems 24 Heating and Air Conditioning
8L Lamps 24a Heating and Air Conditioning
8La Lamps 25 Emission Control Systems
8M Passive Restraint Systems 25a Emission Control System
8N Electrically Heated Systems

XJ INTRODUCTION 1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION METRIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

BODY CODE PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 THREADED HOLE REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TORQUE REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
FASTENER USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . 1
INTERNATIONAL VEHICLE CONTROL AND VEHICLE SAFETY CERTIFICATION LABEL . . . . . 2
DISPLAY SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION • Body Code Plate.

• Vehicle Safety Certification Label.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER • Frame rail.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is To protect the consumer from theft and possible
located on the lower windshield fence near the left fraud the manufacturer is required to include a
A-pillar. The VIN contains 17 characters that provide Check Digit at the ninth position of the Vehicle Iden-
data concerning the vehicle. Refer to the VIN decod- tification Number. The check digit is used by the
ing chart to determine the identification of a vehicle. manufacturer and government agencies to verify the
The Vehicle Identification Number is also authenticity of the vehicle and official documenta-
imprinted on the: tion. The formula to use the check digit is not
released to the general public.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DECODING CHART
POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

1 Country of Origin 1 = United States
2 Make J = Jeep
3 Vehicle Type 4 = MPV
4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating F = 4001-5000 lbs.
5 Vehicle Line F= Cherokee 4X4 (LHD)
N = Cherokee 4X4 (RHD)
B = Cherokee 4X2 (RHD)
T = Cherokee 4X2 (LHD)
6 Series 2 = SE
6 = Sport/Classic
7 = Limited
7 Body Style 7 = 2dr Sport Utility
8 = 4dr Sport Utility
8 Engine P = 2.5L Gasoline
S = 4.0L Gasoline
9 Check Digit
10 Model Year X = 1999
11 Assembly Plant L = Toledo #1
12 thru 17 Vehicle Build Sequence
2 INTRODUCTION XJ
GENERAL INFORMATION (Continued)
VEHICLE SAFETY CERTIFICATION LABEL

A vehicle safety certification label (Fig. 1)is
attached to every Chrysler Corporation vehicle. The
label certifies that the vehicle conforms to all appli-
cable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. The
label also lists:
• Month and year of vehicle manufacture.
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The gross
front and rear axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) are
based on a minimum rim size and maximum cold tire
inflation pressure.
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
• Type of vehicle.
• Type of rear wheels.
• Bar code.
• Month, Day and Hour (MDH) of final assembly.
• Paint and Trim codes.
• Country of origin. Fig. 2 Body Code Plate Decoding
The label is located on the driver-side door shut- BODY CODE PLATE—LINE 3
face.
DIGITS 1 THROUGH 12
Vehicle Order Number
DIGITS 13, 14, AND 15

Open Space
DIGITS 16, 17, AND 18

Car Line Shell
• XJT = Cherokee 2WD (LHD)
• XJJ = Cherokee 4WD (LHD)
• XJB = Cherokee 2WD (RHD)
• XJU = Cherokee 4WD (RHD)
DIGIT 19
Price Class
• L = Cherokee (All)
Fig. 1 Vehicle Safety Certification Label—Typical
DIGITS 20 AND 21
BODY CODE PLATE Body Type
• 72 = 2–Door
LOCATION AND DECODING • 74 = 4–Door
A metal body code plate is attached to the left
(driver’s side) of the dash panel in the engine com- BODY CODE PLATE—LINE 2
partment. There are seven lines of information on
the body code plate. Lines 4, 5, 6, and 7 are not used DIGITS 1,2, AND 3
to define service information. Information reads from Paint Procedure
left to right, starting with line 3 in the center of the
plate to line 1 at the bottom of the plate (Fig. 2). DIGIT 4
The last code imprinted on a vehicle code plate will Open Space
be followed by the imprinted word END. When two
vehicle code plates are required, the last available DIGITS 5 THROUGH 8
spaces on the first plate will be imprinted with the Primary Paint
letters CTD (for continued). Refer to Group 23, Body for color codes.
When a second vehicle code plate is necessary, the
first four spaces on each row will not be used because DIGIT 9
of the plate overlap. Open Space
XJ INTRODUCTION 3
DIGITS 10 THROUGH 13 DIGIT 5
Secondary Paint Market Code
• B = International
DIGIT 14 • C = Canada
Open Space • M = Mexico
• U = United States
DIGITS 15 THROUGH 18
Interior Trim Code DIGIT 6
Open Space
DIGIT 19
Open Space DIGITS 7 THROUGH 23
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
DIGITS 20, 21, AND 22 Refer to Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) para-
Engine Code graph for proper breakdown of VIN code.
• EPE = 2.5 L 4 cyl. MPI Gasoline
• ERH = 4.0L 6 cyl. MPI Gasoline INTERNATIONAL VEHICLE CONTROL AND
DISPLAY SYMBOLS
BODY CODE PLATE—LINE 1
DIGITS 1, 2, AND 3
INTERNATIONAL VEHICLE CONTROL AND
Transmission Codes
DISPLAY SYMBOLS
• DDQ = AX5 5–speed Manual The graphic symbols illustrated in the following
• DGS = AW4 4–speed Automatic International Control and Display Symbols chart are
used to identify various instrument controls. The
DIGIT 4 symbols correspond to the controls and displays that
Open Space are located on the instrument panel.
INTERNATIONAL CONTROL AND DISPLAY SYMBOLS
Fig. 3
4 INTRODUCTION XJ
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION GRADE/CLASS IDENTIFICATION

The SAE bolt strength grades range from grade 2
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION to grade 8. The higher the grade number, the greater
the bolt strength. Identification is determined by the
THREAD IDENTIFICATION line marks on the top of each bolt head. The actual
SAE and metric bolt/nut threads are not the same. bolt strength grade corresponds to the number of line
The difference is described in the Thread Notation marks plus 2. The most commonly used metric bolt
chart (Fig. 4). strength classes are 9.8 and 12.9. The metric
strength class identification number is imprinted on
the head of the bolt. The higher the class number,
the greater the bolt strength. Some metric nuts are
imprinted with a single-digit strength class on the
nut face. Refer to the Fastener Identification and
Fastener Strength Charts.
Fig. 4 Thread Notation Chart – SAE and Metric

XJ INTRODUCTION 5
FASTENER IDENTIFICATION
6 INTRODUCTION XJ
FASTENER STRENGTH
XJ INTRODUCTION 7
FASTENER USAGE Figure art, specifications and torque references in

this Service Manual are identified in metric and SAE
WARNING: USE OF AN INCORRECT FASTENER format.
MAY RESULT IN COMPONENT DAMAGE OR PER- During any maintenance or repair procedures, it is
SONAL INJURY. important to salvage metric fasteners (nuts, bolts,
etc.) for reassembly. If the fastener is not salvage-
Figure art, specifications and torque references in able, a fastener of equivalent specification should be
this Service Manual are identified in metric and SAE used.
format. The metric system is based on quantities of one,
During any maintenance or repair procedures, it is ten, one hundred, one thousand and one million
important to salvage all fasteners (nuts, bolts, etc.) (Fig. 5).
for reassembly. If the fastener is not salvageable, a
fastener of equivalent specification must be used.
THREADED HOLE REPAIR

Most stripped threaded holes can be repaired using
a Helicoilt. Follow the manufactures recommenda-
tions for application and repair procedures.
METRIC SYSTEM Fig. 5 Metric Prefixes

The following chart will assist in converting metric
WARNING: USE OF AN INCORRECT FASTENER units to equivalent English and SAE units, or vise
MAY RESULT IN COMPONENT DAMAGE OR PER- versa.
SONAL IJURY. Refer to the Conversion Chart to convert torque
values listed in metric Newton- meters (N·m). Also,
use the chart to convert between millimeters (mm)
and inches (in.)
CONVERSION FORMULAS AND EQUIVALENT VALUES

8 INTRODUCTION XJ
METRIC CONVERSION
XJ INTRODUCTION 9
TORQUE REFERENCES cations Chart for torque references not listed in the
Individual Torque Charts appear at the end of individual torque charts.
many Groups. Refer to the Standard Torque Specifi-
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
XJ INTRODUCTION 1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION MANUFACTURER PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

E-MARK LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION • Vehicle Safety Certification Label.

• Frame rail.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER To protect the consumer from theft and possible
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is fraud the manufacturer is required to include a
located on the lower windshield fence near the left Check Digit at the ninth position of the Vehicle Iden-
A-pillar. The VIN contains 17 characters that provide tification Number. The check digit is used by the
data concerning the vehicle. Refer to the VIN decod- manufacturer and government agencies to verify the
ing chart to determine the identification of a vehicle. authenticity of the vehicle and official documenta-
The Vehicle Identification Number is also tion. The formula to use the check digit is not
imprinted on the: released to the general public.
• Body Code Plate.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DECODING CHART
POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

1 Country of Origin 1 = United States
2 Make J = Jeep
3 Vehicle Type 4 = MPV
4 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating F = 4001-5000 lbs.
5 Vehicle Line J = Cherokee 4X4 (LHD)
J = Cherokee 4X4 (RHD) EXPORT
N = Cherokee 4X4 (RHD)
B = Cherokee 4X2 (RHD)
T = Cherokee 4X2 (LHD)
6 Transmission N = 5 Speed Manual
A = 3 Speed Auto
B = 4 Speed Auto
7 Body Style 7 = 2dr Sport Utility
8 = 4dr Sport Utility
8 Engine M = 2.5L Diesel
P = 2.5L Gasoline
S = 4.0L Gasoline
9 Check Digit
10 Model Year X = 1999
11 Assembly Plant L = Toledo Assembly#1
12 thru 17 Vehicle Build Sequence
2 INTRODUCTION XJ
E-MARK LABEL MANUFACTURER PLATE

An E-mark Label (Fig. 1) is located on the rear The Manufacturer Plate (Fig. 2) is located in the
shut face of the driver’s door. The label contains the engine compartment on the radiator closure panel
following information: crossmember adjacent to the Body Code Plate. The
• Date of Manufacture plate contains five lines of information:
• Month-Day-Hour (MDH) 1. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2. Gross Vehicle Mass (GVM)
• Country Codes 3. Gross Train Mass (GTM)
• Regulation Number 4. Gross Front Axle Rating (GFAR)
• Regulation Amendment Number 5. Gross Rear Axle Rating (GRAR)
• Approval Number
Fig. 2 Manufacturer Plate
Fig. 1 E-Mark Label

XJ LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 0-1
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

JUMP STARTING, TOWING AND HOISTING . . . . 9
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CLASSIFICATION OF LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PARTS AND LUBRICANT
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

When service is required, Chrysler Corporation
INTRODUCTION recommends that only Mopart brand parts, lubri-
Service and maintenance procedures for compo- cants and chemicals be used. Mopar provides the
nents and systems listed in Schedule “A” or “B” can best engineered products for servicing Chrysler Cor-
be found by using the Group Tab Locator index at poration vehicles.
the front of this manual. If it is not clear which
group contains the information needed, refer to the INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
index at the back of this manual. Chrysler Corporation uses international symbols to
There are two maintenance schedules that show identify engine compartment lubricant and fluid
proper service based on the conditions that the vehi- inspection and fill locations (Fig. 1).
cle is subjected to.
Schedule “A” , lists scheduled maintenance to be
performed when the vehicle is used for general trans-
portation.
Schedule “B” , lists maintenance intervals for vehi-
cles that are operated under the conditions listed at
the beginning of the Maintenance Schedule section.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving
conditions.
Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
Fig. 1 International Symbols

0-2 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE XJ
CLASSIFICATION OF LUBRICANTS GEAR LUBRICANTS

Only lubricants bearing designations defined by SAE ratings also apply to multiple grade gear
the following organization should be used to service a lubricants. In addition, API classification defines the
Chrysler Corporation vehicle. lubricants usage.
• Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE)
• American Petroleum Institute (API) (Fig. 2) LUBRICANTS AND GREASES
• National Lubricating Grease Institute (NLGI) Lubricating grease is rated for quality and usage
(Fig. 3) by the NLGI. All approved products have the NLGI
symbol (Fig. 3) on the label. At the bottom NLGI
ENGINE OIL symbol is the usage and quality identification letters.
Wheel bearing lubricant is identified by the letter
SAE VISCOSITY RATING INDICATES ENGINE OIL VISCOSITY “G”. Chassis lubricant is identified by the latter “L”.
An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the vis- The letter following the usage letter indicates the
cosity of engine oil. SAE 30 specifies a single viscos- quality of the lubricant. The following symbols indi-
ity engine oil. Engine oils also have multiple cate the highest quality.
viscosities. These are specified with a dual SAE vis-
cosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot tempera-
ture viscosity range.
• SAE 30 = single grade engine oil.
• SAE 10W-30 = multiple grade engine oil.
Chrysler Corporation only recommends multiple
grade engine oils.
API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

This symbol (Fig. 2) on the front of an oil container Fig. 3 NLGI Symbol
means that the oil has been certified by the Ameri-
can Petroleum Institute (API) to meet all the lubri-
cation requirements specified by Chrysler
Corporation.
Refer to Group 9, Engine for gasoline engine oil
specification.
Fig. 2 API Symbol

FLUID CAPACITIES MANUAL TRANSMISSION
FUEL TANK AX5 (4X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 L (3.7 qts.)

AX5 (4X4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 L (3.5 qts.)
All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76.4 L (20.2 gal.) AX15 (4X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 L (3.3 qts.)
AX15 (4X4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 L (3.3 qts.)
ENGINE OIL
TRANSFER CASE
2.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 L (4.0 qts.)
4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 L (6.0 qts.) SELEC-TRAC 242 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 L (2.85 pts.)
COMMAND-TRAC 231 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.0 L (2.2 pts.)
COOLING SYSTEM
FRONT AXLE
2.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 L (10 qts.)*
4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 L (12 qts.)** 181–FBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.48 L (3.13 pts.)
*Includes 2.2 L (2.3 qts) for coolant recovery reser- REAR AXLE
voir.
**Includes 0.9 L (1.0 qt) for coolant recovery reser- 194–RBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.66 L (3.5 pts.*)
voir. 8-1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.08 L (4.4 pts.**)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION * When equipped with TRAC-LOK, include 3.5

Dry fill capacity* ounces of Friction Modifier Additive.
** When equipped with TRAC-LOK, include 4
AW4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.8 L (16.5 pts.) ounces of Friction Modifier Additive.
30RH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.67 L (9.86pts.)
POWER STEERING
*Depending on type and size of internal cooler, Power steering fluid capacities are dependent on
length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or use of engine/chassis options as well as steering gear/cooler
an auxiliary cooler, these figures may vary. Refer to options. Depending on type and size of internal
Group 21, Transmission for proper fluid fill proce- cooler, length and inside diameter of cooler lines, or
dure. use of an auxiliary cooler, these capacities may vary.
Refer to Section 19 of the service manual for proper
fill and bleed procedures.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
INDEX
page
GENERAL INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
GENERAL INFORMATION • Rotate the tires at each oil change interval

shown on Schedule “A” (7,500 miles) or every other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES interval shown on Schedule “B” (6,000 miles).
There are two maintenance schedules that show • Check coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
proper service for the Cherokee. • After completion of off-road operation, the
First is Schedule “A” . It lists all the scheduled underside of the vehicle should be thoroughly
maintenance to be performed under “normal” operat- inspected. Examine threaded fasteners for looseness.
ing conditions.
Second is Schedule “B” . It is a schedule for vehi- EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
cles that are operated under these conditions: The scheduled emission maintenance listed in bold
• Frequent short trips driving less than 5 miles (8 type on the Maintenance Schedules, must be done at
km) the mileage specified to assure the continued proper
• Frequent driving in dusty conditions functioning of the emission control system. These,
• Frequent trailer towing and all other maintenance services included in this
• Extensive idling manual, should be done to provide the best vehicle
• More than 50% of driving is at sustained high performance and reliability. More frequent mainte-
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C) nance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
• Off-road driving conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
• Desert operation driving.
Use the schedule that best describes the driving
conditions. FLUID FILL LOCATIONS AND LUBRICATION
Where time and mileage are listed, follow the POINTS
interval that occurs first. The fluid fill/check locations and lubrication points
are located in each applicable group.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check engine oil level, add as required. SCHEDULE “A”
• Check windshield washer solvent and add if
required. 7,500 Miles (12 000 km) or at 6 months
• Change engine oil.
Once A Month • Replace engine oil filter.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear • Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
or damage.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals 15,000 Miles (24 000 km) or at 12 months
as required. Check electrolyte level and add water as • Change engine oil.
needed. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Check fluid levels of coolant reservoir, power • Lubricate steering linkage.
steering, brake master cylinder, and transmission • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
and add as needed.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for 22,500 Miles (36 000 km) or at 18 months
correct operation. • Change engine oil.
• Replace engine oil filter.
At Each Oil Change • Inspect brake linings.
• Inspect exhaust system. • Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
• Inspect brake hoses.
30,000 Miles (48 000 km) or at 24 months • Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
• Change engine oil. 30,000 miles (48 000 km) or 24 months since last
• Replace engine oil filter. change.
• Replace air cleaner element. • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Replace spark plugs. • Drain and refill manual transmission fluid.
• Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary.
• Lubricate steering linkage. 82,500 Miles (133 000 km) or at 66 months
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. • Change engine oil.
• Drain and refill transfer case fluid. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
30,000 miles (48 000 km) or 24 months since last
37,500 Miles (60 000 km) or at 30 months change.
• Change engine oil. • Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
• Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only). 90,000 Miles (144 000 km) or at 72 months
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid. • Change engine oil.
45,000 Miles (72 000 km) or at 36 months • Replace engine air cleaner element.
• Change engine oil. • Replace spark plugs.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Inspect brake linings. • Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid.
• Flush and replace engine coolant at 36 months, • Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
regardless of mileage. • Inspect brake linings.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
52,500 Miles (84 000 km) or at 42 months 97,500 Miles (156 000 km) or at 78 months
• Change engine oil. • Change engine oil.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Flush and replace engine coolant if not done at • Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
36 months.
• Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only). 105,000 Miles (168 000 km) or at 84 months
60,000 Miles (96 000 km) or at 48 months • Replace engine oil filter.
• Change engine oil. • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
• Replace engine air cleaner element. 30,000 miles (48 000 km) or 24 months since last
• Replace ignition cables. change.
• Replace spark plugs. • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Lubricate steering linkage. 112,500 Miles (180 000 km) or at 90 months
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. • Change engine oil.
• Drain and refill transfer case fluid. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Inspect brake linings.
• Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
67,500 Miles (108 000 km) or at 54 months 30,000 miles (48 000 km) or 24 months since last
• Change engine oil. change.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
• Inspect brake linings. • Drain and refill manual transmission fluid.
• Lubricate steering linkage (4x4 only).
120,000 Miles (192 000 km) or at 96 months
75,000 Miles (120 000 km) or at 60 months • Change engine oil.
• Change engine oil. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Replace engine air cleaner element.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Replace ignition cables.
• Replace spark plugs.
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. • Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid.
• Drain and refill transfer case fluid. • Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Inspect brake linings.
Important: Inspection and service should also be • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
performed any time a malfunction is observed or sus-
pected. 27,000 Miles (43 000 km)
SCHEDULE “B” • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering linkage.
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
• Change engine oil. 30,000 Miles (48 000 km)
• Replace engine oil filter. • Change engine oil.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Replace engine air cleaner element.
6,000 Miles (10 000 km) • Replace spark plugs.
• Change engine oil. • Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
9,000 Miles (14 000 km) 33,000 Miles (53 000 km)
12,000 Miles (19 000 km) 36,000 Miles (58 000 km)
• Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡ • Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡
• Inspect brake linings. • Inspect brake linings.
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid.
15,000 Miles (24 000 km)
• Inspect engine air cleaner element, replace • Replace engine oil filter.
as necessary. • Lubricate steering linkage.
42,000 Miles (67 000 km)
18,000 Miles (29 000 km) • Change engine oil.
• Change engine oil. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid. 45,000 Miles (72 000 km)
21,000 Miles (34 000 km) • Replace engine oil filter.
• Change engine oil. • Inspect engine air cleaner element, replace
• Replace engine oil filter. as necessary.
24,000 Miles (38 000 km) 48,000 Miles (77 000 km)
• Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡ • Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡
• Inspect brake linings. • Inspect brake linings.
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid.
51,000 Miles (82 000 km)
• Flush and replace engine coolant. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Inspect engine air cleaner element, replace
as necessary.
54,000 Miles (86 000 km) • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Replace engine oil filter. 78,000 Miles (125 000 km)
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Change engine oil.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid. • Lubricate steering linkage.
57,000 Miles (91 000 km)
• Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
60,000 Miles (96 000 km) 30,000 miles (48 000 km) since last change.
• Replace engine air cleaner element. 84,000 Miles (134 000 km)
• Replace ignition cables. • Change engine oil.
• Replace spark plugs. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary. • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid.
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. • Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡
• Drain and refill transfer case fluid. • Inspect brake linings.
• Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡ • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Inspect brake linings.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. 87,000 Miles (139 000 km)
• Lubricate steering linkage. 90,000 Miles (144 000 km)
• Change engine oil. • Replace engine air cleaner element.
• Replace engine oil filter. • Replace spark plugs.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Lubricate steering linkage.
• Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
69,000 Miles (110 000 km) • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Change engine oil. • Drain and refill manual transmission fluid.
• Lubricate steering linkage. 93,000 Miles (149 000 km)
96,000 Miles (154 000 km) • Flush and replace engine coolant if it has been
• Change engine oil. 30,000 miles (48 000 km) since last change.
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. 114,000 Miles (182 000 km)
• Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡ • Change engine oil.
• Inspect brake linings. • Replace engine oil filter.
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Lubricate steering linkage.
99,000 Miles (158 000 km)
102,000 Miles (163 000 km)
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. • Replace engine air cleaner element.
• Replace ignition cables.
105,000 Miles (168 000 km) • Replace spark plugs.
• Change engine oil. • Inspect drive belt, adjust tension as necessary.
• Inspect engine air cleaner element, replace • Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid.
as necessary. • Drain and refill transfer case fluid.
• Lubricate steering linkage. • Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡
• Inspect brake linings.
108,000 Miles (173 000 km) • Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints.
• Change engine oil. ‡Off-highway operation, trailer towing, taxi, limou-
• Replace engine oil filter. sine, bus, snow plowing, or other types of commercial
• Lubricate steering linkage. service or prolonged operation with heavy loading,
• Drain and refill automatic transmission fluid. especially in hot weather, require front and rear axle
• Drain and refill front and rear axles.‡ service indicated with a ‡ in Schedule “B”. Perform
• Inspect brake linings. these services if the vehicle is usually operated under
• Lubricate steering and suspension ball joints. these conditions.
• Drain and refill manual transmission fluid. Important: Inspection and service should also be
performed any time a malfunction is observed or sus-
111,000 Miles (178 000 km) pected.
JUMP STARTING, TOWING AND HOISTING
INDEX
page page
SERVICE PROCEDURES JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 TOWING RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING . . . . . . 11 TWO-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING . . . . . . 10
HOISTING RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SERVICE PROCEDURES (2) When using another vehicle as a booster

source, turn off all accessories, place gear selector in
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE park or neutral, set park brake and operate engine at
1200 rpm.
WARNING: REVIEW ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (3) On disabled vehicle, place gear selector in park
AND WARNINGS IN GROUP 8A, BATTERY/START- or neutral and set park brake. Turn off all accesso-
ING/CHARGING SYSTEMS DIAGNOSTICS. DO NOT ries.
JUMP START A FROZEN BATTERY, PERSONAL (4) Connect jumper cables to booster battery. RED
INJURY CAN RESULT. DO NOT JUMP START WHEN clamp to positive terminal (+). BLACK clamp to neg-
MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY INDICATOR DOT IS ative terminal (-). DO NOT allow clamps at opposite
YELLOW OR BRIGHT COLOR. DO NOT JUMP end of cables to touch, electrical arc will result.
START A VEHICLE WHEN THE BATTERY FLUID IS Review all warnings in this procedure.
BELOW THE TOP OF LEAD PLATES. DO NOT (5) On disabled vehicle, connect RED jumper cable
ALLOW JUMPER CABLE CLAMPS TO TOUCH clamp to positive (+) terminal. Connect BLACK
EACH OTHER WHEN CONNECTED TO A BOOSTER jumper cable clamp to engine ground as close to the
SOURCE. DO NOT USE OPEN FLAME NEAR BAT- ground cable attaching point as possible (Fig. 1).
TERY. REMOVE METALLIC JEWELRY WORN ON
HANDS OR WRISTS TO AVOID INJURY BY ACCI-
DENTAL ARCING OF BATTERY CURRENT. WHEN
USING A HIGH OUTPUT BOOSTING DEVICE, DO
NOT ALLOW BATTERY VOLTAGE TO EXCEED 16
VOLTS. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED
WITH DEVICE BEING USED.
CAUTION: When using another vehicle as a

booster, do not allow vehicles to touch. Electrical
systems can be damaged on either vehicle.
TO JUMP START A DISABLED VEHICLE:

(1) Raise hood on disabled vehicle and visually
inspect engine compartment for:
• Battery cable clamp condition, clean if necessary.
• Frozen battery.
• Yellow or bright color test indicator, if equipped.
• Low battery fluid level.
• Generator drive belt condition and tension.
• Fuel fumes or leakage, correct if necessary.
Fig. 1 Jumper Cable Connections—Typical
CAUTION: If the cause of starting problem on dis- CAUTION: Do not crank starter motor on disabled
abled vehicle is severe, damage to booster vehicle vehicle for more than 15 seconds, starter will over-
charging system can result. heat and could fail.
0 - 10 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE XJ
SERVICE PROCEDURES (Continued)
(6) Allow battery in disabled vehicle to charge to • Do not allow passengers to ride in a vehicle
at least 12.4 volts (75% charge) before attempting to being towed.
start engine. If engine does not start within 15 sec- • Always observe state and local laws regarding
onds, stop cranking engine and allow starter to cool towing regulations.
(15 min.), before cranking again. • Do not tow a vehicle in a manner that could
jeopardize the safety of the operator, pedestrians or
DISCONNECT CABLE CLAMPS AS FOLLOWS: other motorists.
• Disconnect BLACK cable clamp from engine • Do not attach tow chains, T-hooks, J-hooks, or a
ground on disabled vehicle. tow sling to a bumper, steering linkage, drive shafts
• When using a Booster vehicle, disconnect or a non-reinforced frame hole.
BLACK cable clamp from battery negative terminal.
Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery positive GROUND CLEARANCE
terminal.
• Disconnect RED cable clamp from battery posi- CAUTION: If vehicle is towed with wheels removed,
tive terminal on disabled vehicle. install lug nuts to retain brake drums.
TOWING RECOMMENDATIONS A towed vehicle should be raised until lifted wheels

A vehicle equipped with an SAE approved Wheel- are a minimum 100 mm (4 in) from the ground. Be
lift towing device can be used to tow all Cherokee sure there is adequate ground clearance at the oppo-
vehicles (Fig. 2). When towing a 4WD vehicle, use site end of the vehicle, especially when towing over
tow dollies under the opposite end of the vehicle. A rough terrain or steep rises in the road. If necessary,
vehicle with a flat-bed device can also be used to remove the wheels from the lifted end of the vehicle
transport a disabled vehicle. and lower the vehicle closer to the ground, to
increase the ground clearance at the opposite end of
the vehicle. Install lug nuts on wheel attaching studs
to retain brake drums.
FLAT-BED TOWING RAMP ANGLE

If a vehicle with flat-bed towing equipment is used,
the approach ramp angle should not exceed 15
degrees.
TWO-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING

TOWING-REAR END LIFTED (SLING-TYPE)
WARNING: WHEN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
AND THE DRIVE WHEELS ARE SECURED IN A
WHEEL LIFT OR TOW DOLLIES, ENSURE THE
TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK POSITION (AUTO-
Fig. 2 Tow Vehicles With Approved Equipment MATIC TRANSMISSION) OR A FORWARD DRIVE
NOTE: A vehicle equipped with a SAE approved GEAR (MANUAL TRANSMISSION).
sling type towing device can be used to tow a Cher-
okee with the rear end lifted, provided the Cherokee
CAUTION: Do not use steering column lock to
is not equipped with a factory installed trailer tow
secure steering wheel during towing operation.
package. Damage to the harness connector bracket
may result from sling contact. 2WD XJ vehicles can be towed with the front
wheels on the surface for extended distances at
speeds not exceeding 48 km/h (30 mph). If the vehicle
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is equipped with a factory installed trailer tow pack-
• Secure loose and protruding parts.
age, use a SAE approved wheel lift device.
• Always use a safety chain system that is inde-
(1) Attach J-hooks around the axle shaft tube out-
pendent of the lifting and towing equipment.
board of the shock absorber.
• Do not allow towing equipment to contact the
(2) Place the sling crossbar under and forward of
disabled vehicle’s fuel tank.
the bumper.
• Do not allow anyone under the disabled vehicle
(3) Attach safety chains around the frame rails.
while it is lifted by the towing device.
XJ LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 0 - 11
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position to (6) Secure steering wheel in the straight ahead
unlock the steering wheel. position with a clamp device designed for towing.
(5) Secure steering wheel in the straight ahead (7) Shift transfer case to neutral.
position with a clamp device designed for towing.
(6) Verify that steering components are in good TOWING-REAR END LIFTED (WHEEL LIFT)
condition. (1) Raise front of vehicle off ground and install tow
(7) Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. dollies under front wheels.
(2) Attach wheel lift to rear wheels.
TOWING-REAR END LIFTED (WHEEL LIFT) (3) Place transmission in neutral.
(1) Raise front of vehicle off ground and install tow (4) Raise vehicle to towing height.
dollies under front wheels. (5) Place transmission in park (automatic trans-
(2) Attach wheel lift to rear wheels. mission) or first gear (manual transmission).
(3) Place transmission in neutral.
(4) Raise vehicle to towing height. TOWING-FRONT END LIFTED
(5) Place transmission in park (automatic trans- To prevent damage to front fascia components, use
mission) or fist gear (manual transmission). only a Wheel-Lift type towing device or Flat-Bed
hauling equipment.
TOWING-FRONT END LIFTED (1) Raise the rear of the vehicle off the ground and
To prevent damage to front fascia components, use install tow dollies under rear wheels.
only a Wheel-Lift type towing device or Flat-Bed (2) Attach wheel lift to front wheels.
hauling equipment. (3) Place transmission in neutral.
If using the wheel-lift towing method: (4) Raise vehicle to towing height.
(1) Raise rear of vehicle off ground and install tow (5) Place transmission in park (automatic trans-
dollies under rear wheels. mission) or first gear (manual transmission).
(2) Attach wheel lift to front wheels.
(3) Place transmission in neutral. EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS
(4) Raise vehicle to towing height.
(5) Place transmission in park (automatic trans- WARNING: REMAIN AT A SAFE DISTANCE FROM A
mission) or fist gear (manual transmission). VEHICLE THAT IS BEING TOWED VIA ITS TOW
HOOKS. THE TOW STRAPS/CHAINS COULD BREAK
FOUR-WHEEL-DRIVE VEHICLE TOWING AND CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY.
Chrysler Corporation recommends that a 4WD
vehicle be transported on a flat bed device. A wheel Some Jeep vehicles are equipped with front and
lift or sling type device can be used provided all rear emergency tow hooks. The tow hooks should be
wheels are lifted off the ground using tow dollies. used for EMERGENCY purposes only.
If the vehicle is equipped with a factory installed
CAUTION: DO NOT use emergency tow hooks for
trailer tow package, use a SAE approved wheel lift
tow truck hook-up or highway towing.
device.
WARNING: WHEN TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

AND THE DRIVE WHEELS ARE SECURED IN A
HOISTING RECOMMENDATIONS
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for emergency vehicle
WHEEL LIFT OR TOW DOLLIES, ENSURE THE
lifting procedures.
TRANSMISSION IS IN THE PARK POSITION (AUTO-
MATIC TRANSMISSION) OR A FORWARD DRIVE
GEAR (MANUAL TRANSMISSION).
FLOOR JACK
When properly positioned, a floor jack can be used
to lift a Jeep vehicle (Fig. 3) and (Fig. 4). Support the
TOWING-REAR END LIFTED (SLING TYPE) vehicle in the raised position with jack stands at the
(1) Raise front of vehicle off ground and install tow front and rear ends of the frame rails.
dollies under front wheels.
(2) Attach J-hooks around rear axle shaft tube out- CAUTION: Do not attempt to lift a Jeep vehicle with
board of shock absorber. a floor jack positioned under:
(3) Place sling crossbar under and forward of
• An axle tube.
bumper.
• A body side sill.
(4) Attach safety chains around frame rails.
• A steering linkage component.
(5) Turn ignition switch to OFF position to unlock
• A drive shaft.
steering wheel.
0 - 12 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE XJ
Fig. 3 Vehicle Lifting Locations Fig. 4 Correct Vehicle Lifting Locations

• The engine or transmission oil pan. WARNING: THE HOISTING AND JACK LIFTING
• The fuel tank. POINTS PROVIDED ARE FOR A COMPLETE VEHI-
• A front suspension arm. CLE. WHEN A CHASSIS OR DRIVETRAIN COMPO-
NENT IS REMOVED FROM A VEHICLE, THE
NOTE: Use the correct sub-frame rail or frame rail CENTER OF GRAVITY IS ALTERED MAKING SOME
lifting locations only. HOISTING CONDITIONS UNSTABLE. PROPERLY
SUPPORT OR SECURE VEHICLE TO HOISTING
HOIST DEVICE WHEN THESE CONDITIONS EXIST.
A vehicle can be lifted with:
• A single-post, frame-contact hoist.
• A twin-post, chassis hoist.
• A ramp-type, drive-on hoist.
NOTE: When a frame-contact type hoist is used,
verify that the lifting pads are positioned properly.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
page page
SPECIFICATIONS FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

ENGINE OIL—DIESEL ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SPECIFICATIONS MANUAL TRANSMISSION

Recommended lubricant for AX15 transmissions is
ENGINE OIL—DIESEL ENGINES Mopart 75W–90, API Grade GL–3 gear lubricant, or
Use only Diesel Engine Oil meeting standard MIL- equivalent.
2104C or API Classification SG/CD or CCMC PD2. Correct lubricant level is from the bottom edge, to
no more than 6 mm (1/4 in.) below the bottom edge of
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE the fill plug hole.
Approximate dry fill lubricant capacity is:
CAUTION: Low viscosity oils must have the proper • 3.10 liters (3.27 qts.) for 4–wheel drive applica-
API quality or the CCMC G5 designation. tions.
• 3.15 liters (3.32 qts.) for 2–wheel drive applica-
To assure of properly formulated engine oils, it is tions.
recommended that SAE Grade 15W-40 engine oils
that meet Chrysler material standard MS-6395, be TRANSFER CASE
used. European Grade 10W-40 oils are also accept-
able. COMMAND-TRAC 231 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 L
Oils of the SAE 5W-30 or 10W-30 grade number
are preferred when minimum temperatures consis- FRONT AXLE
tently fall below -12°C.
Model 181 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 L
FLUID CAPACITIES REAR AXLE
FUEL TANK Model 194 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 L*
8-1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 L**
Diesel Engine Equipped Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . 76.4 L
* When equipped with TRAC-LOK, include 4
ENGINE OIL ounces of Friction Modifier Additive.
** When equipped with TRAC-LOK, include 5
2.5L Diesel Engine (includes filter) . . . . . . . . . 6.5 L ounces of Friction Modifier Additive.
COOLING SYSTEM
2.5L Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.0 L

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION SCHEDULE—A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE—DIESEL ENGINE . . 2 SCHEDULE—B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION • Check all fluid levels.

• Check correct torque, intake manifold mounting
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE—DIESEL ENGINE nuts.
The following are engine related Maintenance • Check correct torque, exhaust manifold mount-
items which are unique to Diesel engine-equipped ing nuts.
vehicles. Refer to the 1997 XJ Service Manual for • Check correct torque, turbocharger mounting
gasoline engine and non-engine related Maintenance nuts.
Schedules. • Check correct torque, water manifold bolts.
The service intervals are based on odometer read-
10 000 KM
ings in kilometers. There are two maintenance sched-
ules that show proper service intervals. Use the • Change engine oil.
schedule that best describes the conditions the vehi- • Change engine oil filter.
cle is operated under. Schedule-A lists all the sched-
20 000 KM
uled maintenance to be performed under normal
operating conditions. Schedule-B is the schedule for
• Change engine oil filter.
vehicles that are operated under one or more of the
• Replace air filter element.
following conditions:
• Check drive belt tension.
• Day and night temperatures are below freezing.
• Check glow plug operation.
• Stop and go driving.
• Retorque cylinder head bolts.*
• Long periods of engine idling.
* Engines equipped with a steel head gasket do not
• Driving in dusty conditions.
need this service procedure performed. Refer to
• Short trips of less than 8 kilometers (5 miles).
Group 9, Engines for head gasket identification.
• Operation at sustained high speeds during hot
weather above 32°C (90°F). 30 000 KM
• Taxi, police or delivery service.
• Trailer towing.
AT EACH STOP FOR FUEL OR SCHEDULED 40 000 KM
SERVICE STOP • Change engine oil.
• Check engine oil level. • Change engine oil filter.
• Check engine coolant level. • Replace air filter element.
• Inspect drive belt. • Check drive belt tension.
• Visually inspect intercooler for obstruction. • Check glow plug operation.
Clean as necessary. • Replace fuel filter/water separator element.**
• Visually inspect radiator for obstruction. Clean
as necessary. 50 000 KM
• Inspect for fuel, oil or coolant leaks. • Change engine oil.
• Inspect battery cable connection and excessive • Change engine oil filter.
corrosion.
• Inspect for presence of water in fuel filter/water
separator, drain if necessary.
SCHEDULE—A
1 000 KM
60 000 KM • Check correct torque, exhaust manifold mount-
• Change engine oil. ing nuts.
• Change engine oil filter. • Check correct torque, turbocharger mounting
• Replace air filter element. nuts.
• Check glow plug operation. • Check correct torque, water manifold bolts.
• Replace drive belt.
• Check engine smoke. 1 000 KM
• Replace engine coolant. • Change engine oil.
70 000 KM • Check all fluid levels.
• Change engine oil filter. 5 000 KM
80 000 KM • Change engine oil filter.
• Replace air filter element. • Change engine oil.
• Check drive belt tension. • Change engine oil filter.
• Check glow plug operation. • Replace air filter element.
• Replace fuel filter/water separator element.** • Check drive belt tension.
90 000 KM
• Change engine oil. 15 000 KM
• Change engine oil filter. • Change engine oil.
100 000 KM
• Change engine oil. 20 000 KM
• Change engine oil filter. • Change engine oil.
• Replace air filter element. • Change engine oil filter.
• Check drive belt tension. • Replace air filter element.
• Check glow plug operation. • Check drive belt tension.
EVERY 40 000 KM AFTER 80 000 KM • Retorque cylinder head bolts.*
• Replace fuel filter/water separator element.** * Engines equipped with a steel head gasket do not
**The fuel filter/water separator element should be need this service procedure performed. Refer to
replaced once a year if the vehicle is driven less than Group 9, Engines for head gasket identification.
40 000 km annually or if power loss from fuel star-
vation is detected. 25 000 KM
EVERY 10 000 KM AFTER 100 000 KM • Change engine oil filter.
EVERY 20 000 KM AFTER 100 000 KM • Change engine oil filter.
• Change engine oil. • Replace air filter element.
• Change engine oil filter. • Check glow plug operation.
• Replace air filter element. • Replace drive belt.
• Check drive belt tension. • Check engine smoke.
• Check glow plug operation. • Replace engine coolant.
SCHEDULE—B 35 000 KM
500 KM • Change engine oil filter.
• Check correct torque, intake manifold mounting
nuts.
40 000 KM • Replace air filter element.
• Change engine oil. • Check glow plug operation.
• Change engine oil filter. • Replace drive belt.
• Replace air filter element. • Check engine smoke.
• Check drive belt tension. • Replace engine coolant.
• Replace fuel filter/water separator element. 85 000 KM
• Change engine oil filter. • Check drive belt tension.
• Replace air filter element. • Check glow plug operation.
• Check glow plug operation. 95 000 KM
• Check drive belt tension. • Replace fuel filter/water separator element.
• Replace fuel filter/water separator element. EVERY 5 000 KM AFTER 100 000 KM
• Change engine oil filter. EVERY 10 000 KM AFTER 100 000 KM
• Check glow plug operation. EVERY 20 000 KM AFTER 100 000 KM
• Replace fuel filter/water separator element.
75 000 KM
80 000 KM
XJ SUSPENSION 2-1
SUSPENSION
CONTENTS
page page
ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ALIGNMENT
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

WHEEL ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SPECIFICATIONS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . 3
SERVICE PROCEDURES
PRE-ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
GENERAL INFORMATION edges of the front tires. Incorrect wheel toe position
is the most common cause of unstable steering and
WHEEL ALIGNMENT uneven tire wear. The wheel toe position is the final
Wheel alignment involves the correct positioning of front wheel alignment adjustment.
the wheels in relation to the vehicle. The positioning • STEERING AXIS INCLINATION ANGLE is
is accomplished through suspension and steering measured in degrees and is the angle that the steer-
linkage adjustments. An alignment is considered ing knuckles are tilted. The inclination angle has a
essential for efficient steering, good directional stabil- fixed relationship with the camber angle. It will not
ity and to minimize tire wear. The most important change except when a spindle or ball stud is dam-
measurements of an alignment are caster, camber aged or bent. The angle is not adjustable, damaged
and toe position (Fig. 1). component(s) must be replaced to correct the steering
• CASTER is the forward or rearward tilt of the axis inclination angle.
steering knuckle from vertical. Tilting the top of the • THRUST ANGLE is the angle of the rear axle
knuckle rearward provides positive caster. Tilting the relative to the centerline of the vehicle. Incorrect
top of the knuckle forward provides negative caster. thrust angle can cause off-center steering and exces-
Caster is a directional stability angle. This angle sive tire wear. This angle is not adjustable, damaged
enables the front wheels to return to a straight component(s) must be replaced to correct the thrust
ahead position after turns. angle.
• CAMBER is the inward or outward tilt of the
CAUTION: Never attempt to modify suspension or
wheel relative to the center of the vehicle. Tilting the
steering components by heating or bending.
top of the wheel inward provides negative camber.
Tilting the top of the wheel outward provides positive
camber. Incorrect camber will cause wear on the NOTE: Periodic lubrication of the front suspension/
inside or outside edge of the tire. The angle is not steering system components may be required. Rub-
adjustable, damaged component(s) must be replaced ber bushings must never be lubricated. Refer to
to correct the camber angle. Group 0, Lubrication And Maintenance for the rec-
• WHEEL TOE POSITION is the difference ommended maintenance schedule.
between the leading inside edges and trailing inside
2-2 SUSPENSION XJ
Fig. 1 Wheel Alignment Measurements

XJ SUSPENSION 2-3
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM
CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTION
FRONT END NOISE 1. Loose or worn wheel bearings. 1. Adjust or replace wheel bearings.
2. Loose or worn steering or 2. Tighten or replace components as

suspension components. necessary.
EXCESSIVE PLAY IN 1. Loose or worn wheel bearings. 1. Adjust or replace wheel bearings.
STEERING
3. Loose or worn steering gear. 3. Adjust or replace steering gear.
FRONT WHEELS SHIMMY 1. Loose or worn wheel bearings. 1. Adjust or replace wheel bearings.

3. Tires worn or out of balance. 3. Replace or balance tires.
4. Alignment. 4. Align vehicle to specifications.
5. Leaking steering dampener. 5. Replace steering dampener.
VEHICLE INSTABILITY 1. Loose or worn wheel bearings. 1. Adjust or replace wheel bearings.

3. Tire pressure. 3. Adjust tire pressure.
EXCESSIVE STEERING 1. Loose or worn steering gear. 1. Adjust or replace steering gear.
EFFORT
2. Power steering fluid low. 2. Add fluid and repair leak.
3. Column coupler binding. 3. Replace coupler.
4. Tire pressure. 4. Adjust tire pressure.
VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE 1. Tire pressure. 1. Adjust tire pressure.

SIDE 2. Alignment. 2. Align vehicle to specifications.
4. Radial tire lead. 4. Rotate or replace tire as necessary.
5. Brake pull. 5. Repair brake as necessary.
6. Weak or broken spring. 6. Replace spring.
2-4 SUSPENSION XJ
SERVICE PROCEDURES
PRE-ALIGNMENT
Before starting wheel alignment, the following
inspection and necessary corrections must be com-
pleted. Refer to Suspension and Steering System
Diagnosis Chart for additional information.
(1) Inspect tires for size and tread wear.
(2) Set tire air pressure.
(3) Inspect front wheel bearings for wear.
(4) Inspect front wheels for excessive radial or lat-
eral runout and balance.
(5) Inspect ball studs, linkage pivot points and
steering gear for looseness, roughness or binding.
(6) Inspect suspension components for wear and
noise.
WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Before each alignment reading, the vehicle should
be jounced (rear first, then front). Grasp each
Fig. 2 Caster Adjustment
bumper at the center and jounce the vehicle up and
down several times. Always release the bumper in TOE POSITION (LHD)
the down position. Set the front end alignment to
specifications with the vehicle at its NORMAL RIDE NOTE: The wheel toe position adjustment is the
HEIGHT. final adjustment. The engine must remain running
during the entire toe position adjustment.
CAMBER
The wheel camber angle is preset. This angle is not (1) Start the engine and turn wheels both ways
adjustable and cannot be altered. before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering
wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead
CASTER position.
Before checking the caster of the front axle for cor- (2) Loosen the adjustment sleeve clamp bolts (Fig.
rect angle, be sure the axle is not bent or twisted. 3).
Road test the vehicle, make left and right turns. If (3) Adjust the right wheel toe position with the
the steering wheel returns to the center position drag link. Turn the sleeve until the right wheel is at
unassisted, the caster angle is correct. If steering correct TOE-IN specifications. Position the clamp
wheel does not return toward the center position bolts as shown (Fig. 4) and tighten to 49 N·m (36 ft.
unassisted, an incorrect caster angle is probable. lbs.).
Caster can be adjusted by installing the appropri-
NOTE: Make sure the toe setting does not change
ate size shims (Fig. 2).
during clamp tightening.
NOTE: Changing caster angle will also change the
(4) Adjust the left wheel toe position with the tie
front propeller shaft angle. The propeller shaft
rod. Turn the sleeve until the left wheel is at specifi-
angle has priority over caster. Refer to Group 3 Dif-
cations. Position the clamp bolts as shown (Fig. 4)
ferential & Driveline for additional information.
and tighten to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).

(5) Verify the right toe setting and turn off engine.
(6) Road test the vehicle on a flat level road to ver-
ify the steering wheel is centered.
NOTE: Once the toe setting is correct, the steering

wheel can be re-centered by adjusting only the drag
link.
XJ SUSPENSION 2-5
Fig. 3 Steering Linkage (LHD)

bolts to their original position and tighten to 49 N·m
(36 ft. lbs.).

(4) Adjust the right wheel toe position with the tie
rod. Turn the sleeve until the right wheel is at cor-
rect TOE-IN specifications. Position the clamp bolts
to their original position and tighten to 27 N·m (20
ft. lbs.).

(5) Verify the right toe setting and turn off engine.
(6) Road test the vehicle on a flat level road to ver-
Fig. 4 Drag Link and Tie Rod Clamp (LHD) ify the steering wheel is centered.
TOE POSITION (RHD)
NOTE: Once the toe setting is correct, the steering
NOTE: The wheel toe position adjustment is the wheel can be re-centered by adjusting only the drag
final adjustment. The engine must remain running link.
during the entire toe position adjustment.
(1) Start the engine and turn wheels both ways

before straightening the wheels. Secure the steering
wheel with the front wheels in the straight-ahead
position.
(2) Loosen the adjustment sleeve clamp bolts (Fig.
5).
(3) Adjust the left wheel toe position with the drag
link. Turn the sleeve until the left wheel is at the
correct TOE-IN specifications. Position the clamp
2-6 SUSPENSION XJ
SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
Fig. 5 Steering Linkage (RHD)

SPECIFICATIONS ADJUSTMENT PREFERRED RANGE MAX RT/LT
DIFFERENCE
ALIGNMENT CAMBER − 0.25° − 0.75° to + 1.0°
(fixed angle) 0.5°
NOTE: All alignment specifications are in degrees. TOTAL + 0.25° 0° to + .05°
TOE-IN 0.45°
THRUST ANGLE 0° 6 0.15°
ADJUSTMENT PREFERRED RANGE MAX RT/LT
DIFFERENCE
CASTER + 7.0° + 5.25° to + 1.25°

8.5°
XJ SUSPENSION 2-7
FRONT SUSPENSION
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION FRONT AXLE BUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

SUSPENSION COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TRACK BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SHOCK DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FRONT HUB BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION WHEEL MOUNTING STUDS-FRONT . . . . . . . . . 12
SHOCK ABSORBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SPECIFICATIONS
COIL SPRING/JOUNCE BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
STEERING KNUCKLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 SPECIAL TOOLS
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 FRONT SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION • Dual-action shock absorbers

• Coil springs
SUSPENSION COMPONENTS • Upper and lower suspension arms
The front suspension is a link/coil design (Fig. 1). • Stabilizer bar
This suspension is use on Left Hand Drive (LHD) • Track bar
and Right Hand Drive (RHD) vehicles. The suspen- • Jounce bumpers
sion is comprised of: Link/Coil Suspension: This suspension allows
• Drive axle (4WD), tube axle (2WD) each wheel to adapt to different road surfaces with-
Fig. 1 Suspension Components (LHD)

2-8 SUSPENSION XJ
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION (Continued)
out greatly affecting the opposite wheel. Wheels are CAUTION: Suspension components with rubber/
attached to a hub/bearings which bolts to the knuck- urethane bushings (except stabilizer bar) should be
les. The hub/bearing is not serviceable and is tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is
replaced as a unit. Steering knuckles pivot on important to have the springs supporting the weight
replaceable ball studs attached to the axle tube of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If
yokes. springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle
Shock Absorbers: The shocks dampen jounce and ride comfort could be affected and premature bush-
rebound of the vehicle over various road conditions. ing wear may occur.
The top of the shock absorbers are bolted to the body.
The bottom of the shocks are bolted to the axle
spring bracket. NOTE: Periodic lubrication of the front suspension/
Coil Springs: The springs control ride quality and steering system components may be required. Rub-
maintain proper ride height. The coil springs mount ber bushings must never be lubricated. Refer to
up in the fender shield to a bracket which is part of Group 0, Lubrication And Maintenance for the rec-
the unitized body. A rubber isolator is located ommended maintenance schedule.
between the top of the spring and the body. The bot-
tom of the spring seats on a axle pad and is retained
with a clip. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
Upper & Lower Suspension Arms: The suspen-
sion arms are different lengths, with bushings at SHOCK DIAGNOSIS
both ends. They bolt the axle assembly to the body. A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber
The lower arms use shims at the body mount to may be caused by movement between mounting
allow for adjustment of caster and drive shaft pinion bushings and metal brackets or attaching compo-
angle. The suspension arm travel is limited through nents. These noises can usually be stopped by tight-
the use of jounce bumpers in compression and shocks ening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists,
absorbers in rebound. inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attach-
Stabilizer Bar: The stabilizer bar is used to min- ing components. Repair as necessary if any of these
imize vehicle body roll during turns. The spring steel conditions exist.
bar helps to control the vehicle body in relationship A squeaking noise from the shock absorber may be
to the suspension. The bar extends across the front caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermit-
underside of the chassis and connects to the body tent. This condition is not repairable and the shock
rails. Links are connected from the bar to the axle absorber must be replaced.
brackets. Stabilizer bar mounts are isolated by rub- The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjust-
ber bushings. able. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber
Track Bar: The track bar is used to locate the must be replaced. To test a shock absorber, hold it in
axle laterally. The bar is attached to a body rail an upright position and force the piston in and out of
bracket with a ball stud and isolated with a bushing the cylinder four or five times. The action throughout
at the axle bracket. each stroke should be smooth and even.
The shock absorber bushings do not require any
CAUTION: Components attached with a nut and
type of lubrication. Do not attempt to stop bushing
cotter pin must be torqued to specification. Then if
noise by lubricating them. Grease and mineral oil-
the slot in the nut does not line up with the cotter
base lubricants will deteriorate the bushing.
pin hole, tighten nut until it is aligned. Never loosen
the nut to align the cotter pin hole.
XJ SUSPENSION 2-9
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (5) Remove the stabilizer bar link and shock
absorber from the axle.
SHOCK ABSORBER (6) Remove the track bar from the body rail
bracket.
REMOVAL (7) Remove the drag link from the pitman arm.
(1) Remove the nut, retainer and grommet from (8) Lower the axle until the spring is free from the
the upper stud in the engine compartment (Fig. 2). upper mount. Remove the coil spring clip and remove
(2) Remove the lower nuts and bolts from the axle the spring.
bracket. (9) Pull jounce bumper out of mount.
(3) Remove the shock absorber.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION (1) Install jounce bumper into mount.
(1) Position the lower retainer and grommet on the (2) Position the coil spring on the axle pad. Install
shock stud. Insert the shock absorber through the the spring clip and bolt. Tighten bolt to 21 N·m (16
shock tower hole. ft. lbs.).
(2) Install the lower bolts and nuts. Tighten nuts (3) Raise the axle into position until the spring
to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.). seats in the upper mount.
(3) Install the upper grommet and retainer on the (4) Install the stabilizer bar links and shock
stud. Install the nut and tighten to 10 N·m (8 ft. absorbers to the axle bracket.
lbs.). (5) Install the track bar to the body rail bracket.
(6) Install the lower suspension arms to the axle.
COIL SPRING/JOUNCE BUMPER Install mounting bolts and nuts finger tight.
(7) Install the front propeller shaft to the axle.
REMOVAL (8) Install the wheel and tire assemblies.
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. Position a (9) Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
hydraulic jack under the axle to support it. (10) Tighten lower suspension arms nuts to 115
(2) Remove the wheel and tire assemblies. N·m (85 ft. lbs.).
(3) Mark and disconnect the front propeller shaft
from the axle. STEERING KNUCKLE
(4) Remove lower suspension arms mounting nuts For service procedures on the steering knuckle and
and bolts from the axle (Fig. 2). ball joints refer to Group 3 Differentials And Driv-
eline.
Fig. 2 Coil Spring & Shock Absorber

2 - 10 SUSPENSION XJ
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Continued)
LOWER SUSPENSION ARM (4) Tighten the nut at the axle to 75 N·m (55 ft.
lbs.). Tighten the nut at the frame bracket to 90 N·m
REMOVAL (66 ft. lbs.).
(1) Raise and support the vehicle.
(2) Remove the lower suspension arm nut and bolt FRONT AXLE BUSHING
from the axle bracket.
(3) Remove the nut and bolt from the rear bracket REMOVAL
and remove the lower suspension arm (Fig. 3). (1) Remove the upper suspension arm from axle.
(2) Position Spacer 7932-3 over the axle bushing
on a 4x2 vehicle and right side on a 4x4 vehicle.
(3) Place Receiver 7932-1 over flanged end of the
bushing. (Fig. 4).
(4) Place small end of Remover/Install 7932-2
against other side of the bushing.
(5) Install bolt 7604 through remover, bushing and
receiver.
(6) Install Long Nut 7603 and tighten nut too pull
bushing out of the axle bracket.
Fig. 3 Upper and Lower Suspension Arms

INSTALLATION
(1) Position the lower suspension arm at the axle
bracket and rear bracket. Fig. 4 Bushing Removal
(2) Install the bolts and finger tighten the nuts.
(3) Remove support and lower the vehicle. (7) Remove nut, bolt, receiver, remover and bush-
(4) Tighten the front and rear nuts to 115 N·m (85 ing.
ft. lbs.).
NOTE: On 4x2 vehicle and right side of 4x4 vehicle,
leave Spacer 7932-3 in position for bushing instal-
UPPER SUSPENSION ARM lation.
REMOVAL
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. INSTALLATION
(2) Remove the upper suspension arm nut and bolt (1) Place Receiver 7932-1on the other side of the
at the axle bracket. axle bracket.
(3) Remove the nut and bolt at the frame rail and (2) Position new bushing up to the axle bracket,
remove the upper suspension arm (Fig. 3). and large end of Remover/Install 7932-2 against the
bushing (Fig. 5).
INSTALLATION (3) Install bolt 7604 through receiver, bushing and
(1) Position the upper suspension arm at the axle installer.
and frame rail. (4) Install Long Nut 7603 and tighten nut to draw
(2) Install the bolts and finger tighten the nuts. the bushing into the axle bracket.
(3) Remove the supports and lower the vehicle. (5) Remove tools and install the upper suspension
arm.
XJ SUSPENSION 2 - 11
(2) Position the stabilizer bar on the body rail and
install the bushings and clamps. Ensure the bar is
centered with equal spacing on both sides. Tighten
the bolts to 75 N·m (40 ft. lbs.).
(3) Install the links and grommets onto the stabi-
lizer bar and axle brackets.
(4) Tighten the link nuts at the axle bracket to 95
N·m (70 ft. lbs.).
(5) Tighten the link nuts at the stabilizer bar to 36
N·m (27 ft. lbs.).
(6) Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
TRACK BAR
REMOVAL
Fig. 5 Bushing Installation (2) Remove the cotter pin and nut from the ball
stud end at the body rail bracket.
STABILIZER BAR (3) Use a universal puller tool to separate the ball
stud from the frame rail bracket.
REMOVAL (4) Remove the bolt and flag nut from the axle
shaft tube bracket (Fig. 7).
(2) Remove nuts, retainers and grommets from the
(5) Remove the track bar.
links at the stabilizer bar (Fig. 6).
Fig. 7 Track Bar (LHD)

Fig. 6 Stabilizer Bar (LHD)
INSTALLATION
(3) Remove the links mounting nuts and bolts (1) Install the track bar at axle tube bracket.
from the axle brackets. Loosely install the retaining bolt and flag nut.
(4) Remove the stabilizer bar clamps from the (2) It may be necessary to pry the axle assembly
body rails. Remove the stabilizer bar. over to install the track bar at the body rail. Install
track bar at the body rail bracket. Install the retain-
INSTALLATION ing nut on the stud.
(1) Inspect stabilizer bar bushings. Replace bush- (3) Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
ings if cracked, cut, distorted, or worn. (4) Tighten the retaining bolt at the axle shaft
tube bracket to 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.).
Fig. 8 Hub Bearing & Knuckle

(5) Tighten the ball stud nut to 81 N·m (60 ft. WHEEL MOUNTING STUDS-FRONT
lbs.). Install a new cotter pin.
REMOVAL
FRONT HUB BEARING (1) Raise and support vehicle.
(2) Remove wheel and tire assembly.
REMOVAL (3) Remove brake caliper and rotor, refer to Group
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. 5 Brakes for procedure.
(2) Remove the wheel and tire assembly. (4) Remove stud from hub with Remover C-4150A
(3) Remove the brake caliper, rotor and ABS wheel (Fig. 9).
speed sensor, refer to Group 5 Brakes.
(4) Remove the cotter pin, nut retainer and axle
hub nut (Fig. 8).
(5) Remove the hub bearing mounting bolts from
the back of the steering knuckle. Remove hub bear-
ing from the steering knuckle and off the axle shaft.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install the hub bearing and brake dust shield
to the knuckle.
(2) Install the hub bearing to knuckle bolts and
tighten to 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.).
(3) Install the hub washer and nut. Tighten the
hub nut to 237 N·m (175 ft. lbs.). Install the nut
retainer and a new cotter pin.
(4) Install the brake rotor, caliper and ABS wheel
speed sensor, refer to Group 5 Brakes.
(5) Install the wheel and tire assembly.
Fig. 9 Wheel Stud Removal
(6) Remove support and lower the vehicle. INSTALLATION
(1) Install new stud into hub flange.
(2) Install three washers onto stud, then install
lug nut with the flat side of the nut against the
washers.
(3) Tighten lug nut until the stud is pulled into SPECIAL TOOLS
the hub flange. Verify that the stud is properly
seated into the flange. FRONT SUSPENSION
(4) Remove lug nut and washers.
(5) Install the brake rotor and caliper, refer to
Group 5 Brakes for procedure.
(6) Install wheel and tire assembly, use new lug
nut on stud or studs that were replaced.
(7) Remove support and lower vehicle.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE CHART
Remover/Installer Suspension Bushing 7932
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Shock Absorber
Upper Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m (8 ft. lbs.)
Lower Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
Suspension Arm Upper
Front Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Rear Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 N·m (66 ft. lbs.)
Suspension Arm Lower
Front Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 N·m (85 ft. lbs.)
Rear Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 N·m (85 ft. lbs.) Nut, Long 7603
Stabilizer Bar
Clamp Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
Link Upper Nut . . . . . . . . . . . 36 N·m (27 ft. lbs.)
Link Lower Nut . . . . . . . . . . . 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.)
Track Bar
Ball Stud Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 N·m (60 ft. lbs.)
Axle Bracket Bolt . . . . . . . . . 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.)
Track Bar Bracket
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 N·m (92 ft. lbs.)
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.) Bolt, Special 7604
Support Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.)
Hub/Bearing
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.)
Axle Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 N·m (175 ft. lbs.)
Remover C-4150A
Remover Tie Rod End MB-990635

REAR SUSPENSION
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

SUSPENSION COMPONENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING LEAF SPRING AND SHACKLE BUSHING . . . . . . 16
SPRING AND SHOCK DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . 14 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SHOCK ABSORBER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION of the vehicle when the fasteners are torqued. If
springs are not at their normal ride position, vehicle
SUSPENSION COMPONENT ride comfort could be affected and premature bush-
The rear suspension is comprised of: ing wear may occur.
• Drive Axle
• Leaf Springs
• Dual-Action Shock Absorbers DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
• Stabilizer Bar (optional)
• Jounce Bumpers SPRING AND SHOCK DIAGNOSIS
Leaf Springs: The rear suspension system uses a A knocking or rattling noise from a shock absorber
multi-leaf springs and a solid drive axle. The forward may be caused by movement between mounting
end of the springs are mounted to the body rail hang- bushings and metal brackets or attaching compo-
ers through rubber bushings. The rearward end of nents. These noises can usually be stopped by tight-
the springs are attached to the body by the use of ening the attaching nuts. If the noise persists,
shackles. The spring and shackles use rubber bush- inspect for damaged and worn bushings, and attach-
ings. The bushing help to isolate road noise. The ing components. Repair as necessary if any of these
shackles allow the springs to change their length as conditions exist.
the vehicle moves over various road conditions. A squeaking noise from the shock absorber may be
Shock Absorbers: Ride control is accomplished caused by the hydraulic valving and may be intermit-
through the use of dual-action shock absorbers. The tent. This condition is not repairable and the shock
shocks dampen the jounce and rebound as the vehicle absorber must be replaced.
travels over various road conditions. The top of the The shock absorbers are not refillable or adjust-
shock absorbers are bolted to the body crossmember. able. If a malfunction occurs, the shock absorber
The bottom of the shocks are bolted to the axle must be replaced. To test a shock absorber, hold it in
bracket. an upright position and force the piston in and out of
Stabilizer Bar: The stabilizer bar is used to min- the cylinder four or five times. The action throughout
imize vehicle body roll. The spring steel bar helps to each stroke should be smooth and even.
control the vehicle body in relationship to the sus- The spring eye and shock absorber bushings do not
pension. The bar extends across the underside of the require any type of lubrication. Do not attempt to
vehicle and is bolted to the axle. Links at the end of stop spring bushing noise by lubricating them.
the bar are bolted to the frame. Grease and mineral oil-base lubricants will deterio-
Jounce Bumpers: The jounce bumpers are used rate the bushing rubber.
to limit the spring and axle travel. They are bolted to If the vehicle is used for severe, off-road operation,
the frame rail above the axle. the springs should be examined periodically. Check
for broken and shifted leafs, loose and missing clips,
CAUTION: Suspension components with rubber/
and broken center bolts. Refer to Spring and Shock
urethane bushings (except stabilizer bar) should be
Absorber Diagnosis chart for additional information.
tightened with the vehicle at normal ride height. It is
important to have the springs supporting the weight
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING (Continued)
SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER DIAGNOSIS
SPRING SAGS 1. Broken leaf. 1. Replace spring.
2. Spring fatigue. 2. Replace spring.
SPRING NOISE 1. Loose spring clamp bolts. 1. Tighten to specification.
2. Worn bushings. 2. Replace bushings.

3. Worn or missing spring tip inserts. 3. Replace spring tip inserts.
SHOCK NOISE 1. Loose mounting fastener. 1. Tighten to specification.

2. Worn bushings. 2. Replace shock.
3. Leaking shock. 3. Replace shock.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION INSTALLATION

(1) Install the shock absorber lower eye on the
SHOCK ABSORBER spring bracket stud. Install the shock absorber and
upper bolts on the body bracket.
REMOVAL (2) Tighten the lower nut to 62 N·m (46 ft. lbs.).
(1) Remove the shock absorber upper bolts from (3) Tighten the upper bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.).
the body bracket (Fig. 1).
(2) Remove lower attaching nut and washer from STABILIZER BAR
the bracket stud. Remove the shock absorber.
REMOVAL
Fig. 1 Rear Suspension Components

(2) Disconnect stabilizer bar links from spring (2) Position the rear eye in the shackle bracket.
brackets (Fig. 2). Loosely install the attaching bolt and nut. Do not
(3) Disconnect the stabilizer bar brackets from the tighten at this time.
body rails. Remove the stabilizer bar and links. (3) Position the axle. Install the spring bracket,
U-bolts and nuts. Tighten the nuts to 70 N·m (52 ft.
lbs.).
(4) Connect the stabilizer bar link to the spring
bracket.
(5) Remove the hydraulic jack.
(6) Lower the vehicle.
(7) Tighten the spring front eye attaching bolts to
156 N·m (115 ft. lbs.).
(8) Tighten the spring rear eye attaching bolts to
108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.).
(9) Tighten the stabilizer bar link to 74 N·m (55 ft.
lbs.).
LEAF SPRING AND SHACKLE BUSHING

For front bushings bend tabs DOWN before
removal. Use an appropriate driver tool and force the
original bushing out of the spring eye.
(1) Assemble tools shown (Fig. 3). Tighten nut at
the socket wrench end of the threaded rod until the
bushing is forced out.
Fig. 2 Stabilizer Bar

INSTALLATION
(1) Position the stabilizer bar links at the spring
brackets. Install the attaching bolts and nuts and
(2) Attach the stabilizer bar to the body rail brack-
ets with the bolts. Tighten to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.).
(3) Remove the supports and lower the vehicle.
LEAF SPRING
REMOVAL
(1) Raise vehicle at body rails.
(2) Remove the wheel and tire assemblies.
(3) Support axle with hydraulic jack to relieve axle
weight.
(4) Disconnect the stabilizer bar link from the
spring bracket stud.
(5) Remove nuts, U-bolts and spring bracket from
axle.
(6) Remove nut and bolt attaching spring front eye Fig. 3 Spring Eye Bushing Removal
to shackle. (2) Assemble and align the bushing installation
(7) Remove nut and bolt from spring rear eye. tools.
(8) Remove spring from vehicle. (3) Align the bushing with the spring eye or
shackle eye and tighten the nut at the socket wrench
INSTALLATION end of the threaded rod. Tighten until the bushing is
(1) Position the spring front eye in the bracket. forced into the spring eye.
Loosely install the attaching bolt and nut. Do not
tighten at this time.
NOTE: The bushing must be centered in the spring SPECIFICATIONS
eye. The ends of the bushing must be flush or
slightly recessed within the end surfaces of the TORQUE CHART
spring eye.
(4) For front bushings bend tabs up after installa- DESCRIPTION TORQUE
tion. Shock Absorber
Upper Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
Lower Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 N·m (46 ft. lbs.)
Stabilizer Bar
Clamp Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
Link Upper Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 N·m (9 ft. lbs.)
Link Lower Nut . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Spring
U-Bolt Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 N·m (52 ft. lbs.)
Front Pivot Bolt . . . . . . . . . 156 N·m (115 ft. lbs.)
Upper Shackle Bolt . . . . . . . 156 N·m (115 ft. lbs.)
Lower Shackle Bolt . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
XJ DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVELINE 3-1
DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVELINE

CONTENTS
page page
194 RBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PROPELLER SHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

8 1/4 REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 TUBE AND 181 FBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PROPELLER SHAFTS
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION REAR PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
PROPELLER SHAFT JOINT ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DOUBLE CARDAN JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PROPELLER SHAFT JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SINGLE CARDAN UNIVERSAL JOINT . . . . . . . . . 8
PROPELLER SHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5 ADJUSTMENTS
UNBALANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3 ADJUSTMENT AT AXLE WITH LEAF SPRINGS . 14
VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 3 FRONT AXLE ANGLE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . 14
SERVICE PROCEDURES SPECIFICATIONS
DRIVELINE ANGLE MEASUREMENT PROPELLER SHAFTS AND U–JOINTS . . . . . . . . 14
PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 5 SPECIAL TOOLS
PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE MEASUREMENT ... 5 PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 7
GENERAL INFORMATION Tubular propeller shafts are balanced by the man-

ufacturer with weights spot welded to the tube.
PROPELLER SHAFTS The propeller shaft is designed and built with the
The propeller shaft (Fig. 1) transmits power from yoke lugs in line with each other. This is called phas-
one point to another in a smooth and continuous ing. This design produces the smoothest running con-
action. The shaft is designed to send torque through dition. An out of phase shaft can cause a vibration.
an angle from the transmission (transfer case on Before undercoating a vehicle, the propeller
4WD vehicles) to the axle. shaft and the U-joints should be covered. This
The propeller shaft must operate through con- will prevent the undercoating from causing an
stantly changing relative angles between the trans- unbalanced condition.
mission and axle. It must also be capable of changing
CAUTION: Use exact replacement parts for attach-
length while transmitting torque. The axle rides sus-
ing the propeller shafts. This will ensure safe oper-
pended by springs in a floating motion. This means
ation. The specified torque must always be applied
the propeller shaft must be able to contract, expand
when tightening the fasteners.
and change operating angles when going over various
road surfaces. This is accomplished through univer-
sal joints, which permit the propeller shaft to operate LUBRICATION
at different angles. The slip joints (or yokes) permit The slip yoke on the front propeller shaft is
contraction or expansion. equipped with a lubrication fitting. Use a multi-pur-
3-2 DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVELINE XJ
Fig. 1 Front & Rear Propeller Shafts—4WD

pose NLGI Grade 2 EP lubricant. The factory • Angles that are equal or opposite within 1
installed universal joints are lubricated for the life of degree of each other.
the vehicle and do not need lubrication. All universal • Have a 3 degree maximum operating angle.
joints should be inspected for leakage and damage • Have at least a 1/2 degree continuous operating
each time the vehicle is serviced. If seal leakage or (propeller shaft) angle.
damage exists, the universal joint should be replaced. Engine speed (rpm) is the main factor in determin-
Refer to Group 0, Lubrication and Maintenance, for ing the maximum allowable operating angle. As a
additional information. guide to the maximum normal operating angles refer
to (Fig. 2).
PROPELLER SHAFT JOINT ANGLE
When two shafts come together at a common joint,
the bend that is formed is called the operating angle.
The larger the angle, the larger the amount of angu-
lar acceleration and deceleration of the joint. This
speeding up and slowing down of the joint must be
cancelled to produce a smooth power flow. This is
done through the phasing of a propeller shaft and
ensuring that the proper propeller shaft joint work-
ing angles are maintained.
A propeller shaft is properly phased when the yoke
ends are in the same plane, or in line. A twisted
shaft will make the yokes out of phase and cause a Fig. 2 Maximum Angles And Engine Speed
noticeable vibration.
When taking propeller shaft joint angle measure- PROPELLER SHAFT JOINTS
ments, or checking the phasing, of two piece shafts, Two different types of propeller shaft joints are
consider each shaft separately. used:
Ideally the driveline system should have; • Single cardan universal joint (Fig. 3)
• Double cardan (CV) universal joint (Fig. 4) DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
None of the universal joints are servicible. If one
becomes worn or damaged, the complete universal VIBRATION
joint assembly must be replaced. Tires that are out-of-round, or wheels that are
unbalanced, will cause a low frequency vibration.
Refer to Group 22, Tires and Wheels, for additional
information.
Brake drums that are unbalanced will cause a
harsh, low frequency vibration. Refer to Group 5,
Brakes, for additional information.
Driveline vibration can also result from loose or
damaged engine mounts. Refer to Group 9, Engines,
for additional information.
Propeller shaft vibration increases as the vehicle
speed is increased. A vibration that occurs within a
specific speed range is not usually caused by a pro-
peller shaft being unbalanced. Defective universal
joints, or an incorrect propeller shaft angle, are usu-
ally the cause of such a vibration.
UNBALANCE
NOTE: Removing and re-indexing the propeller
shaft 180° relative to the yoke may eliminate some
vibrations.
Fig. 3 Single Cardan Universal Joint
Fig. 4 Double Cardan (CV) Universal Joint

DRIVELINE VIBRATION
If propeller shaft is suspected of being unbalanced,

it can be verified with the following procedure:
(1) Raise the vehicle.
(2) Clean all the foreign material from the propel-
ler shaft and the universal joints.
(3) Inspect the propeller shaft for missing balance
weights, broken welds, and bent areas. If the pro-
peller shaft is bent, it must be replaced.
(4) Inspect the universal joints to ensure that they
are not worn, are properly installed, and are cor-
rectly aligned with the shaft.
(5) Check the universal joint clamp screws torque.
(6) Remove the wheels and tires. Install the wheel
lug nuts to retain the brake drums or rotors.
(7) Mark and number the shaft six inches from the
yoke end at four positions 90° apart.
(8) Run and accelerate the vehicle until vibration Fig. 5 Clamp Screw At Position 1
occurs. Note the intensity and speed the vibration (13) If the additional clamp causes an additional
occurred. Stop the engine. vibration, separate the clamps (1/4 inch above and
(9) Install a screw clamp at position 1 (Fig. 5). below the mark). Repeat the vibration test (Fig. 7).
(10) Start the engine and re-check for vibration. If (14) Increase distance between the clamp screws
there is little or no change in vibration, move the and repeat the test until the amount of vibration is
clamp to one of the other three positions. Repeat the at the lowest level. Bend the slack end of the clamps
vibration test. so the screws will not loosen.
(11) If there is no difference in vibration at the (15) If the vibration remains unacceptable, apply
other positions, the source of the vibration may not the same steps to the front end of the propeller shaft.
be propeller shaft. (16) Install the wheel and tires. Lower the vehicle.
(12) If the vibration decreased, install a second
clamp (Fig. 6) and repeat the test.
(7) If the propeller shaft runout is not within spec-
ifications, verify that the runout of the transmission/
transfer case and axle are within specifications.
Correct as necessary and re-measure propeller shaft
runout.
(8) Replace the propeller shaft if the runout still
exceeds the limits.
RUNOUT SPECIFICATIONS
Front of Shaft 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)

Center of Shaft 0.025 in. (0.63 mm)
Rear of Shaft 0.020 in. (0.50 mm)
Measure front/rear runout approximately 3 inches (76
mm) from the weld seam at each end of the shaft
Fig. 6 Two Clamp Screws At The Same Position tube for tube lengths over 30 inches. For tube lengths
under 30 inches, the maximum allowed runout is
0.020 in. (0.50 mm) for the full length of the tube.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
DRIVELINE ANGLE MEASUREMENT
PREPARATION
Before measuring universal joint angles, the fol-
lowing must be done;
• Inflate all tires to correct pressure.
• Check the angles in the same loaded or
unloaded condition as when the vibration occurred.
Propeller shaft angles change according to the
amount of load in the vehicle.
Fig. 7 Clamp Screws Separated • Check the condition of all suspension compo-
nents and verify all fasteners are torqued to specifi-
RUNOUT
cations.
(1) Remove dirt, rust, paint, and undercoating
• Check the condition of the engine and transmis-
from the propeller shaft surface where the dial indi-
sion mounts and verify all fasteners are torqued to
cator will contact the shaft.
specifications.
(2) The dial indicator must be installed perpendic-
ular to the shaft surface.
(3) Measure runout at the center and ends of the
PROPELLER SHAFT ANGLE MEASUREMENT
To accurately check driveline alignment, raise and
shaft sufficiently far away from weld areas to ensure
support the vehicle at the axles as level as possible.
that the effects of the weld process will not enter into
Allow the wheels and propeller shaft to turn. Remove
the measurements.
any external bearing snap rings (if equipped) from
(4) Refer to Runout Specifications chart.
universal joint so that the inclinometer base sits flat.
(5) If the propeller shaft runout is out of specifica-
(1) Rotate the shaft until transmission/transfer
tion, remove the propeller shaft, index the shaft 180°,
case output yoke bearing cap is facing downward.
and re-install the propeller shaft. Measure shaft
Always make measurements from front to
runout again.
rear.
(6) If the propeller shaft runout is now within
(2) Place Inclinometer on yoke bearing cap (A) par-
specifications, mark the shaft and yokes for proper
allel to the shaft (Fig. 8). Center bubble in sight glass
orientation.
and record measurement.
This measurement will give you the transmis- (4) Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus
sion or Output Yoke Angle (A). A) to obtain transmission output operating angle.
(5) Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place
Inclinometer on pinion yoke bearing cap parallel to
the shaft (Fig. 10). Center bubble in sight glass and
record measurement.
This measurement will give you the pinion
shaft or input yoke angle (B).
Fig. 8 Front (Output) Angle Measurement (A)

(3) Rotate propeller shaft 90 degrees and place
Inclinometer on yoke bearing cap parallel to the
shaft (Fig. 9). Center bubble in sight glass and record
measurement. This measurement can also be taken
at the rear end of the shaft.
This measurement will give you the propeller Fig. 10 Rear (Input) Angle Measurement (B)
shaft angle (C). (6) Subtract smaller figure from larger (C minus
B) to obtain axle Input Operating Angle.
Refer to rules given below and the example in for
additional information.
• Good cancellation of U–joint operating angles
(within 1°).
• Operating angles less than 3°.
• At least 1/2 of one degree continuous operating
(propeller shaft) angle.
Fig. 9 Propeller Shaft Angle Measurement (C)

Fig. 11 Universal Joint Angle Example

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (3) Remove the universal joint strap bolts at the
pinion shaft yoke.
FRONT PROPELLER SHAFT (4) Disconnect the propeller shaft at the transfer
case and remove the propeller shaft.
REMOVAL
(1) Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands. INSTALLATION
(2) Scribe alignment marks on the yokes at the (1) Position the propeller shaft with the yoke ref-
transfer case. Place marks at the pinion shaft and at erence marks aligned (Fig. 13). Install the propeller
each end of the propeller shaft. These marks will be shaft.
used for installation reference (Fig. 12).
Fig. 13 Reference Marks on Yokes

Fig. 12 Front Propeller Shaft
Replacement universal joint straps and bolts
must be installed.
(2) Tighten the universal joint strap/clamp bolts at
the axle yoke to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque.
(3) Tighten the flange to transfer case bolts to 27
N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT

REMOVAL
(1) Shift the transmission and transfer case into
Neutral.
(2) Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands.
(3) Scribe alignment marks at the pinion shaft and
at each end of the propeller shaft. These marks will
be used for installation reference. Fig. 15 Rear Propeller Shaft
(4) Remove the universal joint strap bolts at the
pinion shaft yoke.
(5) Pry open clamp holding the dust boot to propel-
ler shaft yoke (Fig. 14).
(6) Slide the slip yoke off of the transmission/
transfer case output shaft and remove the propeller
shaft (Fig. 15).
Fig. 16 Crimping Dust Boot Clamp—Typical

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
SINGLE CARDAN UNIVERSAL JOINT
DISASSEMBLY
Fig. 14 Dust Boot Clamp Individual components of cardan universal joints
are not serviceable. If worn or leaking, they must be
INSTALLATION replaced as an assembly.
(1) Slide the slip yoke on the transmission/transfer (1) Remove the propeller shaft.
case output shaft. Align the installation reference (2) Using a soft drift, tap the outside of the bear-
marks at the axle yoke and install the propeller shaft ing cap assembly to loosen snap ring.
(Fig. 15). (3) Remove snap rings from both sides of yoke
Replacement universal joint straps and bolts (Fig. 17).
must be installed. (4) Set the yoke in an arbor press or vise with a
(2) Tighten the universal joint strap/clamp bolts at socket whose inside diameter is large enough to
the axle yoke to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque. receive the bearing cap positioned beneath the yoke.
(3) Crimp clamp to hold dust boot to propeller (5) Position the yoke with the grease fitting, if
shaft yoke (Fig. 16). equipped, pointing up.
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY (Continued)
CAUTION: If the cross or bearing cap are not
straight during installation, the bearing cap will
score the walls of the yoke bore and damage can
occur.
Fig. 17 Remove Snap Ring

(6) Place a socket with an outside diameter
smaller than the upper bearing cap on the upper
bearing cap and press the cap through the yoke to
release the lower bearing cap (Fig. 18).
Fig. 19 Press Out Remaining Bearing

ASSEMBLY
(1) Apply extreme pressure (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1
or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores to aid in installa-
tion.
(2) Position the cross in the yoke with its lube fit-
ting, if equipped, pointing up (Fig. 20).
Fig. 18 Press Out Bearing

(7) If the bearing cap will not pull out of the yoke
by hand after pressing, tap the yoke ear near the
bearing cap to dislodge the cap.
(8) To remove the opposite bearing cap, turn the
yoke over and straighten the cross in the open hole.
Then, carefully press the end of the cross until the
remaining bearing cap can be removed (Fig. 19).
Fig. 20 Install Cross In Yoke

3 - 10 DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVELINE XJ
(3) Place a bearing cap over the trunnion and
align the cap with the yoke bore (Fig. 21). Keep the
needle bearings upright in the bearing assembly. A
needle bearing lying at the bottom of the cap will
prevent proper assembly.
Fig. 22 Remove Snap Rings

the outboard side of the link yoke enough to grasp
the bearing cap with vise jaws (Fig. 23). Be sure to
remove grease fittings that interfere with removal.
Fig. 21 Install Bearing On Trunnion

(4) Press the bearing cap into the yoke bore
enough to install a snap ring.
(5) Install a snap ring.
(6) Repeat Step 3 and Step 4 to install the oppo-
site bearing cap. If the joint is stiff or binding, strike
the yoke with a soft hammer to seat the needle bear-
ings.
(7) Add grease to lube fitting, if equipped.
(8) Install the propeller shaft.
DOUBLE CARDAN JOINT

DISASSEMBLY
Individual components of cardan universal joints
are not serviceable. If worn or leaking, they must be
replaced as an assembly.
(1) Remove the propeller shaft.
(2) Using a soft drift, tap the outside of the bear-
ing cap assembly to loosen snap ring. Fig. 23 Press Out Bearing
(3) Remove all the bearing cap snap rings (Fig. (6) Grasp the protruding bearing by vise jaws. Tap
22). the link yoke with a mallet and drift to dislodge the
(4) Set the joint in an arbor press or vise with a bearing cap from the yoke (Fig. 24).
socket whose inside diameter is large enough to (7) Flip assembly and repeat Step 4, Step 5, and
receive the bearing cap positioned beneath the link Step 6 to remove the opposite bearing cap. This will
yoke. then allow removal of the cross centering kit assem-
(5) Place a socket with an outside diameter bly and spring (Fig. 25).
smaller than the upper bearing cap on the upper
bearing cap and partially press one bearing cap from
XJ DIFFERENTIAL AND DRIVELINE 3 - 11
(1) Apply extreme pressure (EP) N.L.G.I. Grade 1
or 2 grease to inside of yoke bores to aid in installa-
tion.
(2) Fit a cross into the propeller shaft yoke (Fig.
26).
Fig. 24 Remove Bearing From Yoke

Fig. 26 Install Cross In Yoke
(3) Place a bearing cap over the trunnion and
align the cap with the yoke bore (Fig. 27). Keep the
needle bearings upright in the bearing assembly. A
needle bearing lying at the bottom of the cap will
prevent proper assembly.
Fig. 25 Remove Centering Kit

(8) Press the remaining bearing caps out the other
end of the link yoke as described above to complete
the disassembly.
ASSEMBLY
During assembly, ensure that the alignment
marks on the link yoke and propeller shaft Fig. 27 Install Bearing Cap
yoke are aligned. (4) Press the bearing cap into the yoke bore
enough to install a snap ring (Fig. 28).
(5) Install a snap ring. (8) Install snap rings.
Fig. 30 Install Link Yoke

Fig. 28 Press In Bearing Cap (9) Install the centering kit assembly inside the
link yoke making sure the spring is properly posi-
(6) Flip the propeller shaft yoke and install the tioned (Fig. 31).
bearing cap onto the opposite trunnion. Install a
snap ring (Fig. 29).
Fig. 31 Install Centering Kit
Fig. 29 Press In Bearing Cap

(7) Fit the link yoke on the remaining two trun-
nions and press both bearing caps into place (Fig.
30).
(10) Place two bearing caps on opposite trunnions
of the remaining cross. Fit the open trunnions into
the link yoke bores and the bearing caps into the
centering kit (Fig. 32).
Fig. 34 Seat Snap Rings In Groove

Fig. 32 Install Remaining Cross
(11) Press the remaining two bearing caps into
place and install snap rings (Fig. 33).
Fig. 35 Check Assembly

CLEANING AND INSPECTION
Fig. 33 Press In Bearing Cap PROPELLER SHAFT

(1) Clean all universal joint bores with cleaning
(12) Tap the snap rings to allow them to seat into
solvent and a wire brush.
the grooves (Fig. 34).
(2) Inspect the yokes for distortion, cracks, and
(13) Check for proper assembly. Flex the joint
worn bearing cap bores.
beyond center, it should snap over-center in both
directions when correctly assembled (Fig. 35).
(14) Install the propeller shaft.
ADJUSTMENTS
ADJUSTMENT AT AXLE WITH LEAF SPRINGS
Adjust the pinion shaft angle at the springs with
tapered shims (Fig. 36). Install tapered shims
between the springs and axle pad to correct the
angle. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for additional
information.
Fig. 37 Front Axle Angle Adjustment

SPECIFICATIONS
PROPELLER SHAFTS AND U–JOINTS
Fig. 36 Angle Adjustment at Leaf Springs
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
FRONT AXLE ANGLE ADJUSTMENT Bolts, Transfer Case Yoke . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Adjust the pinion gear angle at the lower suspen- Bolts, Axle Yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.)
sion arms with shims (Fig. 37). Adding shims will Bolts, Axle Yoke . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.)
decrease the pinion gear shaft angle but will increase
the caster angle. The pinion gear shaft angle has pri-
ority over the caster angle. Refer to Group 2, Suspen- SPECIAL TOOLS
sion, for additional information.
PROPELLER SHAFT
Inclinometer—7663
TUBE AND 181 FBI AXLE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION HUB BEARING AND AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . 23

181 FBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PINION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 PINION SHAFT SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 STEERING KNUCKLE AND BALL STUDS . . . . . . 25
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TUBE AXLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BEARING NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
DRIVELINE SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 FINAL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
FRONT AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
GEAR NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 AXLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
LOW SPEED KNOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 CARDAN U-JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 ADJUSTMENTS
SERVICE PROCEDURES DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND
LUBRICANT CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . 41
AXLE BUSHING REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 PINION GEAR DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
AXLE SHAFT OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 SPECIFICATIONS
AXLE SHAFT—CARDAN U-JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . 21 181 FBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 181 FBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SPECIAL TOOLS
DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 181 FBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
GENERAL INFORMATION The 181 FBI axle has the assembly part number
and gear ratio listed on a tag. The tag is attached to
181 FBI AXLE the housing cover by a cover bolt. Build date identi-
The 181 Front Beam-design Iron (FBI) axle con- fication codes are stamped on the cover side of the
sists of a cast iron differential housing with axle axle shaft tube.
shaft tubes extending from either side. The tubes are The differential case is a one–piece design. The dif-
pressed into the differential housing and welded. ferential pinion mate shaft is retained with a roll
The integral type housing, hypoid gear design has pin. Differential bearing preload and ring gear back-
the centerline of the pinion set above the centerline lash is adjusted by the use of shims (select thick-
of the ring gear. ness). The shims are located between the differential
The axle has a fitting for a vent hose used to bearing cones and case. Pinion bearing preload is set
relieve internal pressure caused by lubricant vapor- and maintained by the use of shims (select thick-
ization and internal expansion. ness).
The axles are equipped with semi–floating axle
shafts, meaning that loads are supported by the hub LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
bearings. The axle shafts are retained by nuts at the A multi–purpose, hypoid gear lubricant which con-
hub bearings. The hub bearings are bolted to the forms to the following specifications should be used.
steering knuckle at the outboard end of the axle tube Mopart Hypoid Gear Lubricant conforms to all of
yoke. The hub bearings are serviced as an assembly. these specifications.
For vehicles with ABS brakes, the ABS wheel • The lubricant should have MIL–L–2105C and
speed sensors are attached to the knuckle assem- API GL 5 quality specifications.
blies. The tone rings for the ABS system are pressed • Lubricant is a thermally stable SAE 80W–90
onto the axle shaft. Do not damage ABS tone gear lubricant.
wheel or the sensor when removing axle shafts.
The stamped steel cover provides a means for
inspection and servicing the differential.
• Lubricant for axles intended for heavy-duty or complete a turn. The difference must be compensated
trailer tow use is SAE 75W–140 SYNTHETIC gear for to prevent the tires from scuffing and skidding
lubricant. through turns. To accomplish this, the differential
The 181 FBI axle lubricant capacity is 1.48 L (3.13 allows the axle shafts to turn at unequal speeds (Fig.
pts.). 2). In this instance, the input torque applied to the
pinion gears is not divided equally. The pinion gears
CAUTION: If axle is submerged in water, lubricant now rotate around the pinion mate shaft in opposite
must be replaced immediately to avoid possible directions. This allows the side gear and axle shaft
premature axle failure. attached to the outside wheel to rotate at a faster
speed.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL
The differential gear system divides the torque
between the axle shafts. It allows the axle shafts to
rotate at different speeds when turning corners.
Each differential side gear is splined to an axle
shaft. The pinion gears are mounted on a pinion
mate shaft and are free to rotate on the shaft. The
pinion gear is fitted in a bore in the differential case
and is positioned at a right angle to the axle shafts.
In operation, power flow occurs as follows:
• The pinion gear rotates the ring gear
• The ring gear (bolted to the differential case)
rotates the case
Fig. 2 Differential Operation—On Turns
• The differential pinion gears (mounted on the
pinion mate shaft in the case) rotate the side gears DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
• The side gears (splined to the axle shafts) rotate
the shafts GENERAL INFORMATION
During straight-ahead driving, the differential pin- Axle bearing problem conditions are usually caused
ion gears do not rotate on the pinion mate shaft. This by:
occurs because input torque applied to the gears is • Insufficient or incorrect lubricant.
divided and distributed equally between the two side • Foreign matter/water contamination.
gears. As a result, the pinion gears revolve with the • Incorrect bearing preload torque adjustment.
pinion mate shaft but do not rotate around it (Fig. 1). • Incorrect backlash.
Axle gear problem conditions are usually the result
of:
• Insufficient lubrication.
• Incorrect or contaminated lubricant.
• Overloading (excessive engine torque) or exceed-
ing vehicle weight capacity.
• Incorrect clearance or backlash adjustment.
Axle component breakage is most often the result
of:
• Severe overloading.
• Insufficient lubricant.
• Incorrect lubricant.
• Improperly tightened components.
GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubri-
Fig. 1 Differential Operation—Straight Ahead Driving cant, incorrect backlash, tooth contact, or worn/dam-
When turning corners, the outside wheel must aged gears.
travel a greater distance than the inside wheel to Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed
range. The range is 30 to 40 mph, or above 50 mph.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of pinion gear shaft bore will also cause low speed
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration, knock.
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, accelerate the vehicle to the VIBRATION
speed range where the noise is the greatest. Shift Vibration at the rear of the vehicle is usually
out-of-gear and coast through the peak–noise range. caused by a:
If the noise stops or changes greatly: • Damaged drive shaft.
• Check for insufficient lubricant. • Missing drive shaft balance weight(s).
• Incorrect ring gear backlash. • Worn or out–of–balance wheels.
• Gear damage. • Loose wheel lug nuts.
Differential side and pinion gears can be checked • Worn U–joint(s).
by turning the vehicle. They usually do not cause • Loose/broken springs.
noise during straight–ahead driving when the gears • Damaged axle shaft bearing(s).
are unloaded. The side gears are loaded during vehi- • Loose pinion gear nut.
cle turns. A worn pinion gear mate shaft can also • Excessive pinion yoke run out.
cause a snapping or a knocking noise. • Bent axle shaft(s).
Check for loose or damaged front–end components
BEARING NOISE or engine/transmission mounts. These components
The axle shaft, differential and pinion gear bear- can contribute to what appears to be a rear–end
ings can all produce noise when worn or damaged. vibration. Do not overlook engine accessories, brack-
Bearing noise can be either a whining, or a growling ets and drive belts.
sound. All driveline components should be examined
Pinion gear bearings have a constant–pitch noise. before starting any repair.
This noise changes only with vehicle speed. Pinion Refer to Group 22, Wheels and Tires, for additional
bearing noise will be higher because it rotates at a vibration information.
faster rate. Drive the vehicle and load the differen-
tial. If bearing noise occurs, the rear pinion bearing DRIVELINE SNAP
is the source of the noise. If the bearing noise is A snap or clunk noise when the vehicle is shifted
heard during a coast, the front pinion bearing is the into gear (or the clutch engaged), can be caused by:
source. • High engine idle speed
Worn or damaged differential bearings usually pro- • Loose engine/transmission/transfer case mounts
duce a low pitch noise. Differential bearing noise is • Worn U–joints
similar to pinion bearing noise. The pitch of differen- • Loose spring mounts
tial bearing noise is also constant and varies only • Loose pinion gear nut and yoke
with vehicle speed. • Excessive ring gear backlash
Axle shaft bearings produce noise and vibration • Excessive side gear/case clearance
when worn or damaged. The noise generally changes The source of a snap or a clunk noise can be deter-
when the bearings are loaded. Road test the vehicle. mined with the assistance of a helper. Raise the vehi-
Turn the vehicle sharply to the left and to the right. cle on a hoist with the wheels free to rotate. Instruct
This will load the bearings and change the noise the helper to shift the transmission into gear. Listen
level. Where axle bearing damage is slight, the noise for the noise, a mechanics stethoscope is helpful in
is usually not noticeable at speeds above 30 mph. isolating the source of a noise.
LOW SPEED KNOCK

Low speed knock is generally caused by a worn
U–joint or by worn side–gear thrust washers. A worn
FRONT AXLES
DIAGNOSIS
DIAGNOSIS – CONTINUED
SERVICE PROCEDURES REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

LUBRICANT CHANGE DRIVE AXLE ASSEMBLY
(2) Remove the lubricant fill hole plug from the REMOVAL
differential housing cover. (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
(3) Remove the differential housing cover and (2) Position a suitable lifting device under the
drain the lubricant from the housing. axle.
(4) Clean the housing cavity with a flushing oil, (3) Secure axle to device.
light engine oil or lint free cloth. Do not use water, (4) Remove the wheels and tires.
steam, kerosene or gasoline for cleaning. (5) Remove the brake rotors and calipers from the
(5) Remove the sealant from the housing and cover axle. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures.
surfaces. Use solvent to clean the mating surfaces. (6) Disconnect the wheel sensor wiring harness
(6) Apply a bead of Mopart Silicone Rubber Seal- from the vehicle wiring harness, if necessary.
ant, or equivalent, to the housing cover (Fig. 3). (7) Disconnect the vent hose from the axle shaft
tube.
(8) Mark the propeller shaft and yoke for installa-
tion alignment reference.
(9) Remove propeller shaft.
(10) Disconnect stabilizer bar links at the axle.
(11) Disconnect shock absorbers from axle brack-
ets.
(12) Disconnect track bar.
(13) Disconnect the tie rod and drag link from the
steering knuckle. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for
proper procedures.
(14) Disconnect the steering damper from the axle
bracket.
(15) Disconnect the upper and lower suspension
arms from the axle brackets.
(16) Lower the lifting device enough to remove the
axle. The coil springs will drop with the axle.
(17) Remove the coil springs from the axle.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The weight of the vehicle must be sup-
ported by the springs before suspension arms and
Fig. 3 Typical Housing Cover With Sealant
track bar fasteners can be tightened. If the springs
Install the housing cover within 5 minutes are not at their normal ride position, ride height and
after applying the sealant. handling could be affected.
(7) Install the cover and any identification tag.
Tighten the cover bolts in a criss–cross pattern to 41 (1) Install the springs and retainer clips. Tighten
N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque. the retainer bolts to 21 N·m (16 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) Refill the differential with Mopart Hypoid (2) Support the axle on a suitable lifting device
Gear Lubricant, or equivalent, to bottom of the fill and position axle under the vehicle.
plug hole. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications in (3) Raise the axle and align it with the spring
this group for the quantity necessary. pads.
(9) Install the fill hole plug and lower the vehicle. (4) Position the upper and lower suspension arms
Tighten fill plug to 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.). in the axle brackets. Loosely install bolts and nuts to
hold suspension arms to the axle brackets.
(5) Connect the vent hose to the axle shaft tube.
(6) Connect the track bar to the axle bracket.
Loosely install the bolt to hold the track bar to the
axle bracket.
(7) Install the shock absorbers and tighten the (14) Remove the coil springs from the axle.
bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) Install the stabilizer bar links to the axle INSTALLATION
brackets. Tighten the nut to 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.)
torque. CAUTION: The weight of the vehicle must be sup-
(9) Install the drag link and tie rod to the steering ported by the springs before suspension arms and
knuckles. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for proper track bar fasteners can be tightened. If the springs
procedures. are not at their normal ride position, ride height and
(10) Install the steering damper to the axle handling could be affected.
bracket and tighten the nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
torque. (1) Install the springs and retainer clips. Tighten
(11) Install the brake rotors and calipers. Refer to the retainer bolts to 21 N·m (16 ft. lbs.) torque.
Group 5, Brakes, for the proper procedures. (2) Support the axle on a suitable lifting device
(12) Connect the wheel speed sensor wiring har- and position axle under the vehicle.
ness to the vehicle wiring harness, if necessary. (3) Raise the axle and align it with the spring
(13) Align the previously made marks on the pro- pads.
peller shaft and the yoke. (4) Position the upper and lower suspension arms
(14) Install the straps and bolts to hold the propel- in the axle brackets. Loosely install bolts and nuts to
ler shaft to the yoke. hold suspension arms to the axle brackets.
(15) Check and fill axle lubricant. Refer to the (5) Connect the track bar to the axle bracket.
Lubricant Specifications in this group for the quan- Loosely install the bolt to hold the track bar to the
tity necessary. axle bracket.
(16) Install the wheel and tire assemblies. (6) Install the shock absorbers and tighten the
(17) Remove the lifting device from the axle and bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque.
lower the vehicle. (7) Install the stabilizer bar links to the axle
(18) Tighten the upper suspension arm nuts to 75 brackets. Tighten the nut to 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.)
N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten the lower suspension torque.
arm nuts to 115 N·m (85 ft. lbs.) torque. (8) Install the drag link and tie rod to the steering
(19) Tighten the track bar bolt at the axle bracket knuckles. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for proper
to 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.) torque. procedures.
(20) Check the front wheel alignment. (9) Install the steering damper to the axle bracket
and tighten the nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque.
TUBE AXLE ASSEMBLY (10) Install the brake rotors and calipers. Refer to
Group 5, Brakes, for the proper procedures.
REMOVAL (11) Connect the wheel speed sensor wiring har-
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. ness to the vehicle wiring harness, if necessary.
(2) Position a suitable lifting device under the (12) Install the wheel and tire assemblies.
axle. (13) Remove the lifting device from the axle and
(3) Secure axle to device. lower the vehicle.
(4) Remove the wheels and tires. (14) Tighten the upper suspension arm nuts to 75
(5) Remove the brake rotors and calipers from the N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten the lower suspension
axle. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures. arm nuts to 115 N·m (85 ft. lbs.) torque.
(6) Disconnect the wheel sensor wiring harness (15) Tighten the track bar bolt at the axle bracket
from the vehicle wiring harness, if necessary. to 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.) torque.
(7) Disconnect stabilizer bar links at the axle. (16) Check the front wheel alignment.
(8) Disconnect shock absorbers from axle brackets.
(9) Disconnect track bar. AXLE SHAFT—CARDAN U-JOINT
(10) Disconnect the tie rod and drag link from the Single cardan U–joint components are not service-
steering knuckle. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for able. If defective, they must be replaced as a unit. If
proper procedures. the bearings, seals, spider, or bearing caps are dam-
(11) Disconnect the steering damper from the axle aged or worn, replace the complete U–joint.
bracket.
(12) Disconnect the upper and lower suspension REMOVAL
arms from the axle brackets.
CAUTION: Clamp only the narrow forged portion of
(13) Lower the lifting device enough to remove the
the yoke in the vise. Also, to avoid distorting the
axle. The coil springs will drop with the axle.
yoke, do not over tighten the vise jaws.
(1) Remove axle shaft.
(2) Remove the bearing cap retaining snap rings
(Fig. 4).
Fig. 5 Yoke Bearing Cap Removal

(4) Compress the vise to force the bearing caps
into the yoke. Force the caps enough to install the
Fig. 4 Axle Shaft Outer U–Joint retaining clips.
It can be helpful to saturate the bearing caps (5) Install the bearing cap retaining clips.
with penetrating oil prior to removal. (6) Install axle shaft.
(3) Locate a socket where the inside diameter is
larger in diameter than the bearing cap. Place the PINION SHAFT SEAL
socket (receiver) against the yoke and around the
perimeter of the bearing cap to be removed. REMOVAL
(4) Locate a socket where the outside diameter is (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
smaller in diameter than the bearing cap. Place the (2) Remove wheel and tire assemblies.
socket (driver) against the opposite bearing cap. (3) Remove brake rotors and calipers. Refer to
(5) Position the yoke with the sockets in a vise Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures.
(Fig. 5). (4) Mark the propeller shaft and pinion yoke for
(6) Compress the vise jaws to force the bearing cap installation reference.
into the larger socket (receiver). (5) Remove the propeller shaft from the yoke.
(7) Release the vise jaws. Remove the sockets and (6) Rotate the pinion gear three or four times.
bearing cap that was partially forced out of the yoke. (7) Measure the amount of torque necessary to
(8) Repeat the above procedure for the remaining rotate the pinion gear with a (in. lbs.) dial-type
bearing cap. torque wrench. Record the torque reading for instal-
(9) Remove the remaining bearing cap, bearings, lation reference.
seals and spider from the propeller shaft yoke. (8) Using Holder 6958 to hold the pinion yoke,
remove the pinion nut and washer.
INSTALLATION (9) Use Remover C-452 and Wrench C-3281 to
(1) Pack the bearing caps 1/3 full of wheel bearing remove the pinion yoke (Fig. 6).
lubricant. Apply extreme pressure (EP), lithium–base (10) Use a suitable pry tool or a slide hammer
lubricant to aid in installation. mounted screw to remove the pinion shaft seal.
(2) Position the spider in the yoke. Insert the seals
and bearings. Tap the bearing caps into the yoke INSTALLATION
bores far enough to hold the spider in position. (1) Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the
(3) Place the socket (driver) against one bearing lip of pinion seal. Install seal with Installer C-3972-A
cap. Position the yoke with the socket wrench in a and Handle C-4171 (Fig. 7).
vise. (2) Install yoke on the pinion gear with Installer
W-162–D, Cup 8109, and Holder 6958 (Fig. 8).
(3) Install the pinion washer and a new nut on the
pinion gear. Tighten the nut only enough to
remove the shaft end play.
(4) Tighten pinion nut to 217 N·m (160 ft. lbs.).
(5) Rotate the pinion shaft using a (in. lbs.) torque
wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the read-
ing recorded during removal, plus an additional 0.56
N·m (5 in. lbs.) (Fig. 9).
Fig. 6 Pinion Yoke Removal
Fig. 9 Check Pinion Rotation Torque

(6) If the rotating torque is low, use Holder 6958 to
hold the pinion yoke, and tighten the pinion shaft
Fig. 7 Pinion Seal Installation nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.) increments until proper
rotating torque is achieved.
(7) Align the installation reference marks on the
propeller shaft and yoke, and install the propeller
shaft.
(8) Check and fill the gear lubricant. Refer to the
Lubricant Specifications for gear lubricant require-
ments.
(9) Install the brake rotors and calipers. Refer to
Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures.
(10) Install wheel and tire assemblies.
HUB BEARING AND AXLE SHAFT

If the axle shaft and hub bearing are being
removed in order to service another component, the
axle shaft and hub bearing can be removed as an
Fig. 8 Pinion Yoke Installation assembly.
CAUTION: Do not exceed the minimum tightening REMOVAL
torque when installing the pinion yoke retaining nut (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
at this point. Damage to the pinion bearings may (2) Remove the wheel and tire assembly.
result.
Fig. 10 Hub, Knuckle and Axle Shaft

(3) Remove the brake caliper and rotor. Refer to
(4) Remove ABS wheel speed sensor, if necessary.
Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures.
(5) Remove the cotter pin, nut retainer, and axle
hub nut (Fig. 10), if necessary.
(6) Remove the hub to knuckle bolts (Fig. 11).
(7) Remove the hub from the steering knuckle and
axle shaft, if necessary.
(8) Remove hub bearing and axle shaft assembly
(Fig. 12), or axle shaft from axle. Avoid damaging
the axle shaft oil seals in the axle housing.
Fig. 12 Hub Bearing and Axle Assembly

INSTALLATION
(1) Thoroughly clean the axle shaft (Fig. 10) and
apply a thin film of Mopart Wheel Bearing Grease,
or equivalent, to the shaft splines, seal contact sur-
face, and hub bore.
(2) Install the brake rotor shield to the knuckle.
(3) Install the hub bearing and axle shaft assem-
bly, or axle shaft, into the housing and differential
side gears. Avoid damaging the axle shaft oil seals in
the axle housing.
(4) Install the hub bearing, if necessary.
Fig. 11 Hub Bearing Bolts (5) Install the hub to knuckle bolts and tighten to
(9) Remove the brake rotor shield from the hub 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.) torque.
bearing or knuckle (Fig. 10).
(6) Install the hub washer and nut, if necessary.
Tighten the hub nut to 237 N·m (175 ft. lbs.) torque.
Install the nut retainer and a new cotter pin (Fig. 10).
(7) Install ABS wheel speed sensor, if necessary.
(8) Install the brake rotor and caliper. Refer to
(9) Install the wheel and tire assembly.
(10) Remove support and lower the vehicle.
STEERING KNUCKLE AND BALL STUDS

Ball stud service procedures below require removal
of the hub bearing and axle shaft. Removal and
installation of upper and lower ball studs require the
use of Tool Kit 6289.
KNUCKLE REMOVAL
(1) Remove hub bearing and axle shaft.
(2) Disconnect the tie-rod or drag link from the
steering knuckle arm. Refer to Group 2, Suspension,
for proper procedures.
(3) Remove the cotter pins from the upper and
lower ball studs. Fig. 13 Steering Knuckle Removal/Installation
(4) Remove the upper and lower ball stud nuts. UPPER BALL STUD REPLACEMENT
(5) Strike the steering knuckle with a brass ham-
(1) Position tools as shown to remove and install
mer to loosen knuckle from the ball studs. Remove
ball stud (Fig. 14).
knuckle from ball studs (Fig. 13).
Fig. 14 Upper Ball Stud Remove/Install

Fig. 15 Lower Ball Stud Remove/Install

LOWER BALL STUD REPLACEMENT (4) Remove hub bearings and axle shafts.
(1) Position tools as shown to remove and install (5) Note the installation reference letters stamped
ball stud (Fig. 15). on the bearing caps and housing machined sealing
surface (Fig. 16).
KNUCKLE INSTALLATION
(1) Position the steering knuckle on the ball studs.
(2) Install and tighten the bottom retaining nut to
109 N·m (80 ft. lbs.) torque. Install new cotter pin.
(3) Install and tighten the top retaining nut to 101
N·m (75 ft. lbs.) torque. Install new cotter pin.
(4) Install the hub bearing and axle shaft.
(5) Connect the tie-rod or drag link end to the
steering knuckle arm. Refer to Group 2, Suspension,
AXLE BUSHING REPLACEMENT

Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for the proper axle
bushing procedures.
DIFFERENTIAL
Fig. 16 Bearing Cap Identification
REMOVAL
(6) Loosen the differential bearing cap bolts.
(1) Raise and support vehicle.
(7) Position Spreader W–129–B, utilizing some
(2) Remove the lubricant fill hole plug from the
items from Adapter Kit 6987, with the tool dowel
differential housing cover.
pins seated in the locating holes (Fig. 17). Install the
(3) Remove the differential housing cover and
allow fluid to drain.
holddown clamps and tighten the tool turnbuckle fin-
ger–tight.
Fig. 19 Spread Axle Housing

(10) Remove the dial indicator.
Fig. 17 Install Axle Housing Spreader (11) While holding the differential case in position,
remove the differential bearing cap bolts and caps.
(8) Install a Guide Pin C-3288-B at the left side of (12) Remove the differential from the housing.
the differential housing. Attach Dial Indicator C-3339 Ensure that the differential bearing cups remain in
to guide pin. Load the lever adapter against the position on the differential bearings (Fig. 20).
opposite side of the housing (Fig. 18) and zero the
indicator.
CAUTION: Do not spread over 0.50 mm (0.020 in). If

the housing is over-spread, it could be distorted or
damaged.
(9) Spread the housing enough to remove the dif-

ferential case from the housing. Measure the dis-
tance with the dial indicator (Fig. 19).
Fig. 20 Differential Case Removal

(13) Mark or tag the differential bearing cups to
indicate which side of the differential they were
removed from.
(14) Remove spreader from housing.
INSTALLATION
If replacement differential bearings or differential
case are being installed, differential side bearing
Fig. 18 Install Dial Indicator shim requirements may change. Refer to the Differ-
ential Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash proce-
dures in this section to determine the proper shim
selection.
(1) Position Spreader W-129-B, utilizing some
items from Adapter Kit 6987, with the tool dowel
pins seated in the locating holes (Fig. 21). Install the
holddown clamps and tighten the tool turnbuckle fin-
ger–tight.
Fig. 22 Differential Bearing Cap Reference Letters

(10) Install the hub bearings and axle shafts.
DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARINGS

REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential case from axle housing.
(2) Remove the bearings from the differential case
with Puller/Press C-293-PA, C-293-39 Adapter
Blocks, and Plug SP-3289 (Fig. 23).
Fig. 21 Install Axle Housing Spreader

(2) Install a Guide Pin C-3288-B at the left side of
the differential housing. Attach Dial Indicator C-3339
to guide pin. Load the lever adapter against the
indicator.

the housing is over-spread, it could be distorted or
damaged.
(3) Spread the housing enough to install the case

in the housing. Measure the distance with the dial
indicator (Fig. 19).
(5) Install differential case in the housing. Ensure
that the differential bearing cups remain in position
on the differential bearings. Tap the differential case
to ensure the bearings cups are fully seated in the
housing.
(6) Install the bearing caps at their original loca-
tions (Fig. 22).
(7) Loosely install differential bearing cap bolts.
(8) Remove axle housing spreader.
(9) Tighten the bearing cap bolts to 61 N·m (45 ft. Fig. 23 Differential Bearing Removal
lbs.) torque.
INSTALLATION
If replacement differential side bearings or differ-
ential case are being installed, differential side bear-
ing shim requirements may change. Refer to the
Differential Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash pro-
cedures in this section to determine the proper shim
selection.
(1) Install differential side bearing shims onto dif-
ferential case hubs.
(2) Using Installer C-3716-A and Handle C-4171,
install differential side bearings (Fig. 24).
Fig. 25 Axle Seal Installation

RING GEAR
NOTE: The ring and pinion gears are service in a
matched set. Do not replace the ring gear without
replacing the pinion gear.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential from axle housing.
(2) Place differential case in a suitable vise with
Fig. 24 Differential Side Bearing Installation soft metal jaw protectors (Fig. 26).
(3) Remove bolts holding ring gear to differential
(3) Install differential in axle housing.
case.
(4) Using a soft hammer, drive ring gear from dif-
AXLE SHAFT OIL SEAL ferential case (Fig. 26).
REMOVAL
(2) Remove differential assembly.
(3) Remove the inner axle shaft seals with a pry
bay.
INSTALLATION
(1) Remove any sealer remaining from original
seals.
(2) Remove sealer from axle tube to housing junc-
tion, if necessary.
(3) Install oil seals with Discs 8110 and Turn-
buckle 6797 (Fig. 25). Tighten tool until disc bottoms
in housing.
(4) Install differential assembly.
Fig. 26 Ring Gear Removal

INSTALLATION (5) Using Remover C-452 and Holder C-3281,
remove the pinion yoke from pinion shaft (Fig. 28).
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts that held the ring
gear to the differential case. The bolts can fracture
causing extensive damage.
(1) Invert the differential case and start two ring

gear bolts. This will provide case-to-ring gear bolt
hole alignment.
(2) Invert the differential case in the vise.
(3) Install new ring gear bolts and alternately
tighten to 95–122 N·m (70–90 ft. lbs.) torque (Fig.
27).
(4) Install differential in axle housing and verify
gear mesh and contact pattern.

(6) Remove the pinion gear and preload shims
from housing (Fig. 29). Catch the pinion with your
hand to prevent it from falling and being damaged.
Fig. 27 Ring Gear Bolt Installation

PINION GEAR
The ring and pinion gears are serviced as a
matched set. Do not replace the pinion gear without
replacing the ring gear.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential assembly from axle hous-
ing.
Fig. 29 Remove Pinion Gear
(2) Mark pinion yoke and propeller shaft for (7) Remove the front pinion bearing cup, bearing,
installation alignment. oil slinger, if equipped, and pinion seal with Remover
(3) Disconnect propeller shaft from pinion yoke. D-147 and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 30).
Using suitable wire, tie propeller shaft to underbody. (8) Remove the rear pinion bearing cup from axle
(4) Using Holder 6958 to hold yoke, remove the housing (Fig. 31). Use Remover D-149 and Handle
pinion nut and washer. C–4171.
(10) Remove the rear pinion bearing from the pin-
ion with Puller/Press C–293-PA and Adapters
C-293-39 (Fig. 32).
Place 4 adapter blocks so they do not damage
the bearing cage.
Fig. 30 Front Bearing Cup Removal

(9) Remove the depth shims from rear pinion bear-
ing cup bore in axle housing. Record the thickness of
the depth shims.
NOTE: The pinion depth shims can be very thin. Fig. 32 Inner Bearing Removal
Verify that all shims have been removed before pro-
ceeding. INSTALLATION
NOTE: Pinion depth shims are placed between the
rear pinion bearing cup and axle housing to achieve
proper ring and pinion gear mesh. If the factory
installed ring and pinion gears are reused, the pin-
ion depth shim should not require replacement.
Refer to Pinion Gear Depth to select the proper
thickness shim before installing pinion gear.
(1) Place proper thickness depth shim in rear pin-

ion bearing cup bore in the axle housing.
(2) Apply Mopart Door Ease, or equivalent, stick
lubricant to outside surface of rear pinion bearing
cup. Install the bearing cup with Installer D-146 and
Handle C–4171 (Fig. 33). Verify cup is correctly
seated.
lubricant to outside surface of front pinion bearing
cup. Install the bearing cup with Installer D-144 and
Handle C–4171 (Fig. 34).
(4) Install front pinion bearing, and oil slinger, if
equipped.
Fig. 31 Rear Bearing Cup Removal
Fig. 35 Pinion Seal Installation
Fig. 33 Rear Pinion Bearing Cup Installation
Fig. 34 Pinion Outer Bearing Cup Installation Fig. 36 Rear Pinion Bearing Installation
(5) Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the CAUTION: Never loosen pinion gear nut to
lip of pinion seal. Install seal with Installer C-3972-A decrease pinion gear bearing rotating torque and
and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 35). never exceed specified preload rotating torque.
(6) Install the rear pinion bearing and oil slinger,
if equipped, on the pinion gear with Installer W-262 (11) Check bearing preload torque with an inch
and a shop press (Fig. 36). pound torque wrench (Fig. 39). The torque necessary
(7) Install pinion bearing preload shims onto the to rotate the pinion gear should be:
pinion gear (Fig. 37). • Original Bearings—1 to 3 N·m (10 to 20 in. lbs.).
(8) Install pinion gear in housing. • New Bearings—2 to 5 N·m (15 to 35 in. lbs.).
(9) Install yoke with Installer W-162-B, Cup 8109, (12) If rotating torque is above the desired
and Holder 6958 (Fig. 38). amount, remove the pinion yoke and increase the
(10) Install the pinion washer and a new nut on preload shim pack thickness. Increasing the shim
the pinion gear. Tighten the nut to 217 N·m (160 ft. pack thickness 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) will decrease the
lbs.). rotating torque approximately 0.9 N·m (8 in. lbs.).
Fig. 37 Pinion Preload Shims–Typical
Fig. 38 Pinion Yoke Installation

(13) Tighten pinion shaft nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.)
increments until the maximum tightening or desired
rotating torque is reached.
(14) If the maximum tightening torque is reached
prior to achieving the desired rotating torque, remove
the pinion yoke and decrease the thickness of the Fig. 39 Check Pinion Gear Rotating Torque
preload shim pack. Decreasing the shim pack thick-
ness 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) will increase the rotating
torque approximately 0.9 N·m (8 in. lbs.).
(15) Install differential assembly.

DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the ring gear.
(2) Using a suitable roll pin punch, drive out the
roll pin holding pinion gear mate shaft in the differ-
ential case (Fig. 40).
Fig. 41 Pinion Mate Gear Removal
Fig. 40 Mate Shaft Roll Pin Removal

(3) Remove the pinion gear mate shaft from the
differential case and the pinion mate gears.
(4) Rotate differential side gears and remove the
pinion mate gears and thrust washers (Fig. 41).
(5) Remove the differential side gears and thrust
washers.
ASSEMBLY
(1) Install the differential side gears and thrust
washers.
(2) Install the pinion mate gears and thrust wash-
ers.
(3) Install the pinion gear mate shaft. Align the Fig. 42 Mate Shaft Roll Pin Installation
roll pin holes in shaft and the differential case.
(4) Install the roll pin to hold the pinion mate with mineral spirits. Apply a bead of Mopart Silicone
shaft in the differential case (Fig. 42). Rubber Sealant, or equivalent, on the housing cover
(5) Install the ring gear. (Fig. 43).
(6) Lubricate all differential components with Install the housing cover within 5 minutes
hypoid gear lubricant. after applying the sealant.
(2) Install the cover on the differential with the
FINAL ASSEMBLY attaching bolts. Install the identification tag. Tighten
the cover bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
(1) Scrape the residual sealant from the housing
and cover mating surfaces. Clean the mating surfaces
• Bearing cups must not be distorted or cracked.
• Machined surfaces should be smooth and with-
out any raised edges.
• Raised metal on shoulders of cup bores should
be removed with a hand stone.
• Wear and damage to pinion gear mate shaft,
pinion gears, side gears and thrust washers. Replace
as a matched set only.
• Ring and pinion gear for worn and chipped
teeth.
• Ring gear for damaged bolt threads. Replaced as
a matched set only.
• Pinion yoke for cracks, worn splines, pitted
areas, and a rough/corroded seal contact surface.
Repair or replace as necessary.
• Preload shims for damage and distortion. Install
new shims, if necessary.
ADJUSTMENTS
PINION GEAR DEPTH
GENERAL INFORMATION
CAUTION: Overfilling the differential can result in
Ring and pinion gears are supplied as matched
lubricant foaming and overheating.
sets only. The identifying numbers for the ring and
(3) Refill the differential housing with gear lubri- pinion gear are etched into the face of each gear (Fig.
cant. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications section of 44). A plus (+) number, minus (–) number or zero (0)
this group for the gear lubricant requirements. is etched into the face of the pinion gear. This num-
(4) Install the fill hole plug. ber is the amount (in thousandths of an inch) the
depth varies from the standard depth setting of a
pinion etched with a (0). The standard setting from
CLEANING AND INSPECTION the center line of the ring gear to the back face of the
pinion is 92.08 mm (3.625 in.). The standard depth
CARDAN U-JOINT provides the best gear tooth contact pattern. Refer to
Clean all the U–joint yoke bores with cleaning sol- Backlash and Contact Pattern Analysis paragraph in
vent and a wire brush. Ensure that all the rust and this section for additional information.
foreign matter are removed from the bores.
Inspect the yokes for distortion, cracks and worn
bearing cap bores.
Replace the complete U–joint if any of the compo-
nents are defective.
AXLE COMPONENTS
Wash differential components with cleaning solvent
and dry with compressed air. Do not steam clean
the differential components.
Wash bearings with solvent and towel dry, or dry
with compressed air. DO NOT spin bearings with
compressed air. Cup and bearing must be
replaced as matched sets only.
Clean axle shaft tubes and oil channels in housing.
Inspect for;
• Smooth appearance with no broken/dented sur- Fig. 44 Pinion Gear ID Numbers
faces on the bearing rollers or the roller contact sur-
faces.
ADJUSTMENTS (Continued)
Compensation for pinion depth variance is If a new gear set is being installed, note the depth
achieved with select shims. The shims are placed variance etched into both the original and replace-
behind the rear pinion bearing cup (Fig. 45). ment pinion gear. Add or subtract the thickness of
the original depth shims to compensate for the differ-
ence in the depth variances. Refer to the Depth Vari-
ance chart.
Note where Old and New Pinion Marking columns
intersect. Intersecting figure represents plus or
minus the amount needed.
Note the etched number on the face of the drive
pinion gear (–1, –2, 0, +1, +2, etc.). The numbers rep-
resent thousands of an inch deviation from the stan-
dard. If the number is negative, add that value to the
required thickness of the depth shims. If the number
is positive, subtract that value from the thickness of
the depth shim. If the number is 0 no change is nec-
essary.
Fig. 45 Shim Locations
PINION GEAR DEPTH VARIANCE

PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT (4) Place Arbor Disc 6732 on Arbor D-115-3 in posi-
Measurements are taken with pinion bearing cups tion in axle housing side bearing cradles (Fig. 48).
and pinion bearings installed in the axle housing Install differential bearing caps on Arbor Discs and
without any shims placed behind the rear pinion tighten cap bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
bearing cup. Take measurements with Pinion Gauge
Set 6774 and Dial Indicator C-3339 (Fig. 46). NOTE: Arbor Discs 6732 has different step diame-
ters to fit other axles. Choose proper step for axle
being serviced.
Fig. 48 Gauge Tools In Housing—Typical

(5) Assemble Dial Indicator C-3339 into Scooter
Block D-115-2 and secure set screw.
(6) Place Scooter Block/Dial Indicator in position
Fig. 46 Pinion Gear Depth Gauge Tools—Typical in axle housing so dial probe and scooter block are
(1) Assemble Pinion Height Block 6739, Pinion flush against the rearward surface of the pinion
Block 6733, and rear pinion bearing onto Screw 6741 height block (Fig. 46). Hold scooter block in place and
(Fig. 46). zero the dial indicator face to the pointer. Tighten
(2) Insert assembled height gauge components, dial indicator face lock screw.
rear bearing and screw into axle housing through (7) With scooter block still in position against the
pinion bearing cups (Fig. 47). pinion height block, slowly slide the dial indicator
(3) Install front pinion bearing and Cone-nut 6740 probe over the edge of the pinion height block.
hand tight (Fig. 46). (8) Slide the dial indicator probe across the gap
between the pinion height block and the arbor bar
with the scooter block against the pinion height block
(Fig. 49). When the dial probe contacts the arbor bar,
the dial pointer will turn clockwise. Bring dial
pointer back to zero against the arbor bar, do not
turn dial face. Continue moving the dial probe to the
crest of the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
If the dial indicator can not achieve the zero reading,
the rear bearing cup or the pinion depth gauge set is
not installed correctly.
(9) Select a shim equal to the dial indicator read-
ing plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
etched in the face of the pinion gear (Fig. 44). For
example, if the depth variance is –2, add +0.002 in.
to the dial indicator reading.
Fig. 47 Pinion Height Block—Typical

NOTE: If an oil slinger is used behind the inner pin-
ion bearing, deduct the thickness of the slinger
from the dial indicator reading and use that total for
shim selection.
Fig. 49 Pinion Gear Depth Measurement—Typical

DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND GEAR Fig. 50 Axle Adjustment Shim Locations
BACKLASH (1) Remove differential side bearings from differ-
ential case.
INTRODUCTION (2) Remove factory installed shims from differen-
Differential side bearing preload and gear backlash tial case.
is achieved by selective shims positioned behind the (3) Install ring gear on differential case and
differential side bearing cones. The proper shim tighten bolts to specification.
thickness can be determined using slip-fit dummy (4) Install dummy side bearings D-348 on differen-
bearings D-348 in place of the differential side bear- tial case.
ings and a dial indicator C-3339. Before proceeding (5) Install differential case in axle housing.
with the differential bearing preload and gear back- (6) Install the marked bearing caps in their correct
lash measurements, measure the pinion gear depth positions. Install and snug the bolts (Fig. 51).
and prepare the pinion gear for installation. Estab-
lishing proper pinion gear depth is essential to estab-
lishing gear backlash and tooth contact patterns.
After the overall shim thickness to take up differen-
tial side play is measured, the pinion gear is
installed, and the gear backlash shim thickness is
measured. The overall shim thickness is the total of
the dial indicator reading and the preload specifica-
tion added together. The gear backlash measurement
determines the thickness of the shim used on the
ring gear side of the differential case. Subtract the
gear backlash shim thickness from the total overall
shim thickness and select that amount for the pinion
gear side of the differential (Fig. 50). Differential
shim measurements are performed with axle
spreader W-129-B removed.
Fig. 51 Tighten Bolts Holding Bearing Caps
SHIM SELECTION
NOTE: It is difficult to salvage the differential side
bearings during the removal procedure. Install
replacement bearings if necessary.
(7) Using a dead-blow type mallet, seat the differ-
ential dummy bearings to each side of the axle hous-
ing (Fig. 52) and (Fig. 53).
Fig. 52 Seat Pinion Gear Side Differential Dummy

Side Bearing
Fig. 54 Differential Side play Measurement
Fig. 53 Seat Ring Gear Side Differential Dummy

Side Bearing
Fig. 55 Hold Differential Case and Zero Dial
(8) Thread guide stud C-3288-B into rear cover Indicator
bolt hole below ring gear (Fig. 54).
(9) Attach a dial indicator C-3339 to guide stud. (15) Rotate dial indicator out of the way on the
Position the dial indicator plunger on a flat surface guide stud.
between the ring gear bolt heads (Fig. 54). (16) Remove differential case and dummy bearings
(10) Push and hold differential case to pinion gear from axle housing.
side of axle housing (Fig. 55). (17) Install the pinion gear in axle housing. Install
(11) Zero dial indicator face to pointer (Fig. 55). the pinion yoke and establish the correct pinion
(12) Push and hold differential case to ring gear rotating torque.
side of the axle housing (Fig. 56). (18) Install differential case and dummy bearings
(13) Record dial indicator reading (Fig. 56). D-348 in axle housing (without shims), install bear-
(14) Add 0.008 in. (0.2 mm) to the zero end play ing caps and tighten bolts snug.
total. This new total represents the thickness of (19) Seat ring gear side dummy bearing (Fig. 53).
shims to compress, or preload the new bearings when (20) Position the dial indicator plunger on a flat
the differential is installed. surface between the ring gear bolt heads (Fig. 54).
(21) Push and hold differential case toward pinion
gear (Fig. 57).
Fig. 56 Hold Differential Case and Read Dial Fig. 58 Hold Differential Case and Read Dial
Indicator Indicator
(22) Zero dial indicator face to pointer (Fig. 57). (27) Rotate dial indicator out of the way on guide
stud.
(28) Remove differential case and dummy bearings
from axle housing.
(29) Install side bearing shims on differential case
hubs.
(30) Install side bearings and cups on differential
case.
(31) Install spreader W-129-B, utilizing some items
from Adapter Set 6987, on axle housing and spread
axle opening enough to receive differential case.
(32) Install differential case in axle housing.
(33) Remove spreader from axle housing.
(34) Rotate the differential case several times to
seat the side bearings.
(35) Position the indicator plunger against a ring
gear tooth (Fig. 59).
Fig. 57 Hold Differential Case and Zero Dial (36) Push and hold ring gear upward while not
Indicator allowing the pinion gear to rotate.
(37) Zero dial indicator face to pointer.
(23) Push and hold differential case to ring gear (38) Push and hold ring gear downward while not
side of the axle housing (Fig. 58). allowing the pinion gear to rotate. Dial indicator
(24) Record dial indicator reading (Fig. 58). reading should be between 0.12 mm (0.005 in.) and
(25) Subtract 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) from the dial 0.20 mm (0.008 in.). If backlash is not within specifi-
indicator reading to compensate for backlash between cations transfer the necessary amount of shim thick-
ring and pinion gears. This total is the thickness ness from one side of the axle housing to the other
shim required to achieve proper backlash. (Fig. 60).
(26) Subtract the backlash shim thickness from (39) Verify differential case and ring gear runout
the total preload shim thickness. The remainder is by measuring ring to pinion gear backlash at several
the shim thickness required on the pinion side of the locations around the ring gear. Readings should not
axle housing. vary more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.). If readings vary
more than specified, the ring gear or the differential
case is defective.
After the proper backlash is achieved, perform GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS
Gear Contact Pattern Analysis procedure. The ring and pinion gear teeth contact patterns
will show if the pinion gear depth is correct in the
axle housing. It will also show if the ring gear back-
lash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be
adjusted within specifications to achieve desired
tooth contact patterns.
(1) Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide, or
equivalent, to the drive and coast side of the ring
gear teeth.
(2) Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the
pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the
pinion gear. This will provide a more distinct contact
pattern.
(3) Using a boxed end wrench on a ring gear bolt,
Rotate the differential case one complete revolution
in both directions while a load is being applied from
shop towel.
The areas on the ring gear teeth with the greatest
Fig. 59 Ring Gear Backlash Measurement degree of contact against the pinion gear teeth will
squeegee the compound to the areas with the least
amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the
ring gear teeth to Gear Tooth Contact Patterns chart
(Fig. 61) and adjust pinion depth and gear backlash
as necessary.
Fig. 60 Backlash Shim Adjustment

Fig. 61 Gear Tooth Contact Patterns

SPECIFICATIONS
181 FBI AXLE
Axle Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hypoid
Lubricant . . . . . . . . SAE Thermally Stable 80W–90
Lube Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.48 L (3.13 pts.)
Axle Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.07, 3.55, 3.73, 4.10
Differential Side Gear
Clearance . . . . . . 0.12–0.20 mm (0.005–0.008 in.)
Ring Gear Diameter . . . . . . . . . 18.09 cm (7.125 in.) Plug—SP-3289
Backlash . . . . . . . . . . . 0–0.15 mm (0.005–0.008 in.)
Pinion Std. Depth . . . . . . . . . . . 92.1 mm (3.625 in.)
Pinion Bearing Rotating Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Original Bearings . . . . . . . . 1–2 N·m (10–20 in. lbs.)
New Bearings . . . . . . . . . 1.5–4 N·m (15–35 in. lbs.)
181 FBI AXLE
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Fill Hole Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.)
Diff. Cover Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Bearing Cap Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.)
Adapter—C-293-39
Ring Gear Bolt . . . . . . 95–122 N·m (70–90 ft. lbs.)
Axle Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 N·m (175 ft. lbs.)
Hub Brg. Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.)
Lower Ball Stud . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Upper Ball Stud . . . . . . . . . . . 101 N·m (75 ft. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
181 FBI AXLE
Puller—C-452
Puller—C-293-PA
Wrench—C-3281
SPECIAL TOOLS (Continued)
Dial Indicator—C-3339 Remover—D-149
Installer—W-162-D
Driver—C-3716-A
Cup—8109
Handle—C-4171
Remover/Installer—6289
Installer—D-146
Tool Set, Pinion Depth—6774

Installer—6761
Installer—6752 Gauge Block—6733
Installer Discs—8110
Spanner—6958
Turnbuckle—6797
Installer—C-3972-A
Spreader—W-129-B Remover—D-147
Adapter Kit—6987 Installer—D-144
Pilot Stud—C-3288-B Installer—W-262

194 RBI AXLE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

194 RBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 FINAL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 PINION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION PINION SHAFT SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
TRAC-LOKY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 RING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
BEARING NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
DRIVELINE SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 TRAC-LOKY DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
GEAR NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 AXLE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
LOW SPEED KNOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 TRAC-LOKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL NOISE . . . . . . . . . 50 ADJUSTMENTS
TRAC–LOKY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND
VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
SERVICE PROCEDURES GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS . . . . . . . . 76
LUBRICANT CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 PINION GEAR DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 194 RBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AXLE SHAFT SEAL AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . 59 TORQUE – 194 RBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
COLLAPSIBLE SPACER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 SPECIAL TOOLS
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 194 RBI AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
GENERAL INFORMATION The 194 RBI axle has the assembly part number
and gear ratio listed on a tag. The tag is attached to
194 RBI AXLE the differential housing by a cover bolt. Build date
The 194 Rear Beam-design Iron (RBI) axle housing identification codes are stamped on the cover side of
has an iron center casting (differential housing) with an axle shaft tube.
axle shaft tubes extending from either side. The The differential case is a one-piece design. The dif-
tubes are pressed into and welded to the differential ferential pinion mate shaft is retained with a
housing to form a one-piece axle housing. threaded pin. Differential bearing preload and ring
The integral type, hypoid gear design, housing has gear backlash is adjusted by the use of selective
the centerline of the pinion set below the centerline spacer shims. Pinion bearing preload is set and
of the ring gear. maintained by the use of a collapsible spacer (Fig. 1).
The axle has a vent hose to relieve internal pres-
sure caused by lubricant vaporization and internal LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
expansion. A multi-purpose, hypoid gear lubricant which con-
The axles are equipped with semi–floating axle forms to the following specifications should be used.
shafts, meaning that loads are supported by the axle Mopart Hypoid Gear Lubricant conforms to all of
shaft and bearings. The axle shafts are retained by these specifications.
C–clips in the differential side gears. • The lubricant should have MIL–L–2105C and
The cover provides a means for servicing the differ- API GL 5 quality specifications.
ential without removing the axle. • Lubricant is a thermally stable SAE 80W–90
For vehicles equipped with ABS brakes, the axles gear lubricant.
have a tone ring pressed onto the axle shaft. Use • Lubricant for axles intended for heavy-duty or
care when removing axle shafts to ensure that the trailer tow use is SAE 75W–140 SYNTHETIC gear
tone wheel or the wheel speed sensor are not dam- lubricant.
aged. Trac-lok differentials require the addition of 3.5 oz.
of friction modifier to the axle lubricant. The 194 RBI
Fig. 1 Shim Locations Fig. 2 Differential Operation—Straight Ahead Driving
axle lubricant capacity is 1.66L (3.50 pts.) total, allows the axle shafts to turn at unequal speeds (Fig.
including the friction modifier if necessary. 3). In this instance, the input torque applied to the
pinion gears is not divided equally. The pinion gears
CAUTION: If axle is submerged in water, lubricant now rotate around the pinion mate shaft in opposite
must be replaced immediately to avoid possible directions. This allows the side gear and axle shaft
premature axle failure. attached to the outside wheel to rotate at a faster
speed.

rotates the case Fig. 3 Differential Operation—On Turns
pinion mate shaft in the case) rotate the side gears TRAC-LOKY OPERATION
• The side gears (splined to the axle shafts) rotate In a conventional differential, if one wheel spins,
the shafts the opposite wheel will generate only as much torque
During straight-ahead driving, the differential pin- as the spinning wheel.
ion gears do not rotate on the pinion mate shaft. This In the Trac-loky differential, part of the ring gear
occurs because input torque applied to the gears is torque is transmitted through clutch packs which
divided and distributed equally between the two side contain multiple discs. The clutches will have radial
gears. As a result, the pinion gears revolve with the grooves on the plates, and concentric grooves on the
pinion mate shaft but do not rotate around it (Fig. 2). discs or bonded fiber material that is smooth in
When turning corners, the outside wheel must appearance.
travel a greater distance than the inside wheel to In operation, the Trac-loky clutches are engaged
complete a turn. The difference must be compensated by two concurrent forces. The first being the preload
for to prevent the tires from scuffing and skidding force exerted through Belleville spring washers
through turns. To accomplish this, the differential within the clutch packs. The second is the separating
forces generated by the side gears as torque is Axle gear problem conditions are usually the result
applied through the ring gear (Fig. 4). of:
• Insufficient lubrication.
• Incorrect or contaminated lubricant.
• Overloading (excessive engine torque) or exceed-
ing vehicle weight capacity.
• Incorrect clearance or backlash adjustment.
Axle component breakage is most often the result
of:
• Severe overloading.
• Incorrect lubricant.
• Improperly tightened components.
GEAR NOISE
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubri-
cant, incorrect backlash, tooth contact, or worn/dam-
aged gears.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed
range. The range is 30 to 40 mph, or above 50 mph.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration,
deceleration, coast, or constant load.
When road testing, accelerate the vehicle to the
speed range where the noise is the greatest. Shift
out-of-gear and coast through the peak–noise range.
If the noise stops or changes greatly:
• Check for insufficient lubricant.
• Incorrect ring gear backlash.
• Gear damage.
Fig. 4 Trac-lokY Limited Slip Differential Operation Differential side and pinion gears can be checked
by turning the vehicle. They usually do not cause
The Trac-loky design provides the differential noise during straight–ahead driving when the gears
action needed for turning corners and for driving are unloaded. The side gears are loaded during vehi-
straight ahead during periods of unequal traction. cle turns. A worn pinion gear mate shaft can also
When one wheel looses traction, the clutch packs cause a snapping or a knocking noise.
transfer additional torque to the wheel having the
most traction. Trac-loky differentials resist wheel BEARING NOISE
spin on bumpy roads and provide more pulling power The axle shaft, differential and pinion gear bear-
when one wheel looses traction. Pulling power is pro- ings can all produce noise when worn or damaged.
vided continuously until both wheels loose traction. If Bearing noise can be either a whining, or a growling
both wheels slip due to unequal traction, Trac-loky sound.
operation is normal. In extreme cases of differences Pinion gear bearings have a constant–pitch noise.
of traction, the wheel with the least traction may This noise changes only with vehicle speed. Pinion
spin. bearing noise will be higher because it rotates at a
faster rate. Drive the vehicle and load the differen-
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING tial. If bearing noise occurs, the rear pinion bearing
is the source of the noise. If the bearing noise is
heard during a coast, the front pinion bearing is the
GENERAL INFORMATION source.
Axle bearing problem conditions are usually caused
Worn or damaged differential bearings usually pro-
by:
duce a low pitch noise. Differential bearing noise is
• Insufficient or incorrect lubricant.
similar to pinion bearing noise. The pitch of differen-
• Foreign matter/water contamination.
tial bearing noise is also constant and varies only
• Incorrect bearing preload torque adjustment.
with vehicle speed.
• Incorrect backlash.
Axle shaft bearings produce noise and vibration Refer to Group 22, Wheels and Tires, for additional
when worn or damaged. The noise generally changes vibration information.
when the bearings are loaded. Road test the vehicle.
Turn the vehicle sharply to the left and to the right. DRIVELINE SNAP
This will load the bearings and change the noise A snap or clunk noise when the vehicle is shifted
level. Where axle bearing damage is slight, the noise into gear (or the clutch engaged), can be caused by:
is usually not noticeable at speeds above 30 mph. • High engine idle speed
• Loose engine/transmission/transfer case mounts
LOW SPEED KNOCK • Worn U–joints
Low speed knock is generally caused by a worn • Loose spring mounts
U–joint or by worn side–gear thrust washers. A worn • Loose pinion gear nut and yoke
pinion gear shaft bore will also cause low speed • Excessive ring gear backlash
knock. • Excessive side gear/case clearance
The source of a snap or a clunk noise can be deter-
VIBRATION mined with the assistance of a helper. Raise the vehi-
Vibration at the rear of the vehicle is usually cle on a hoist with the wheels free to rotate. Instruct
caused by a: the helper to shift the transmission into gear. Listen
• Damaged drive shaft. for the noise, a mechanics stethoscope is helpful in
• Missing drive shaft balance weight(s). isolating the source of a noise.
• Worn or out–of–balance wheels.
• Loose wheel lug nuts. TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL NOISE
• Worn U–joint(s). The most common problem is a chatter noise when
• Loose/broken springs. turning corners. Before removing a Trac-loky unit
• Damaged axle shaft bearing(s). for repair, drain, flush and refill the axle with the
• Loose pinion gear nut. specified lubricant. Refer to Lubricant change in this
• Excessive pinion yoke run out. Group.
• Bent axle shaft(s). A container of Mopart Trac-loky Lubricant (fric-
Check for loose or damaged front–end components tion modifier) should be added after repair service or
or engine/transmission mounts. These components during a lubricant change.
can contribute to what appears to be a rear–end After changing the lubricant, drive the vehicle and
vibration. Do not overlook engine accessories, brack- make 10 to 12 slow, figure-eight turns. This maneu-
ets and drive belts. ver will pump lubricant through the clutches. This
All driveline components should be examined will correct the condition in most instances. If the
before starting any repair. chatter persists, clutch damage could have occurred.
DIAGNOSIS CHART
DIAGNOSIS CHART – CONTINUED

TRAC–LOKY TEST SERVICE PROCEDURES

WARNING: WHEN SERVICING VEHICLES WITH A LUBRICANT CHANGE
TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL DO NOT USE THE (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
ENGINE TO TURN THE AXLE AND WHEELS. BOTH (2) Remove the lubricant fill hole plug from the
REAR WHEELS MUST BE RAISED AND THE VEHI- differential housing cover.
CLE SUPPORTED. A TRAC–LOKY AXLE CAN (3) Remove the differential housing cover and
EXERT ENOUGH FORCE IF ONE WHEEL IS IN CON- drain the lubricant from the housing.
TACT WITH A SURFACE TO CAUSE THE VEHICLE (4) Clean the housing cavity with a flushing oil,
TO MOVE. light engine oil, or lint free cloth. Do not use water,
steam, kerosene, or gasoline for cleaning.
The differential can be tested without removing the
(5) Remove the original sealant from the housing
differential case by measuring rotating torque. Make and cover surfaces.
sure brakes are not dragging during this measure- (6) Apply a bead of Mopart Silicone Rubber Seal-
ment. ant, or equivalent, to the housing cover (Fig. 6).
(1) Place blocks in front and rear of both front
wheels.
(2) Raise one rear wheel until it is completely off
the ground.
(3) Engine off, transmission in neutral, and park-
ing brake off.
(4) Remove wheel and bolt Special Tool 6790 to
studs.
(5) Use torque wrench on special tool to rotate
wheel and read rotating torque (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 Apply Sealant

Install the housing cover within 5 minutes
after applying the sealant.
Tighten the cover bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) For Trac–loky differentials, a quantity of
Mopart Trac–loky lubricant (friction modifier), or
equivalent, must be added after repair service or a
lubricant change. Refer to the Lubricant Specifica-
Fig. 5 Trac-lokY Test —Typical tions section of this group for the quantity necessary.
(9) Fill differential with Mopart Hypoid Gear
(6) If rotating torque is less than 22 N·m (30 ft.
Lubricant, or equivalent, to bottom of the fill plug
lbs.) or more than 271 N·m (200 ft. lbs.) on either
hole. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications section of
wheel the unit should be serviced.
this group for the quantity necessary.

(10) Install the fill hole plug and lower the vehicle.
(11) Trac–loky differential equipped vehicles
should be road tested by making 10 to 12 slow figure-
eight turns. This maneuver will pump the lubricant
through the clutch discs to eliminate a possible chat-
ter noise complaint.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (8) Connect the brake hose to the axle junction
block. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for proper proce-
REAR AXLE dures.
(9) Install axle vent hose.
REMOVAL (10) Align propeller shaft and pinion yoke refer-
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. ence marks. Install U-joint straps and bolts. Tighten
(2) Position a suitable lifting device under the to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque.
axle. (11) Install the wheels and tires.
(3) Secure axle to device. (12) Add gear lubricant, if necessary. Refer to
(4) Remove the wheels and tires. Lubricant Specifications in this section for lubricant
(5) Remove the brake drums from the axle. Refer requirements.
to Group 5, Brakes, for proper procedures. (13) Remove lifting device from axle and lower the
(6) Disconnect parking brake cables from brackets vehicle.
and lever.
(7) Remove wheel speed sensors, if necessary. PINION SHAFT SEAL
(8) Disconnect the brake hose at the axle junction REMOVAL
block. Do not disconnect the brake hydraulic lines at (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
the wheel cylinders. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for (2) Remove wheel and tire assemblies.
proper procedures. (3) Remove the brake drums. Refer to Group 5,
(9) Disconnect the vent hose from the axle shaft Brakes, for proper procedures.
tube. (4) Mark the propeller shaft and pinion yoke for
(10) Mark the propeller shaft and yokes for instal- installation alignment reference.
lation alignment reference. (5) Remove the propeller shaft from the yoke.
(11) Remove propeller shaft. (6) Rotate the pinion gear three or four times.
(12) Disconnect stabilizer bar links. (7) Measure the amount of torque necessary to
(13) Disconnect shock absorbers from axle. rotate the pinion gear with a (in. lbs.) dial-type
(14) Remove the U-bolts which hold the axle to the torque wrench. Record the torque reading for instal-
spring brackets. lation reference.
(15) Separate the axle from the vehicle. (8) Using Holder 6958 to hold the pinion yoke,
INSTALLATION (9) Use Remover C-452 and Wrench C-3281 to
remove the pinion yoke (Fig. 7).
NOTE: The weight of the vehicle must be sup-
ported by the springs before suspension arms and
track bar fasteners can be tightened. If the springs
are not at their normal ride position, vehicle ride
height and handling could be affected.
(1) Raise the axle with lifting device and align the
spring centering bolts with the mating holes in the
axle spring perch.
(2) Install the U-bolts which hold the axle to the
spring brackets. Tighten nuts to 70 N·m (52 ft. lbs.).
(3) Install shock absorbers and tighten nuts to 60
(4) Install stabilizer bar links and tighten nuts to
74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque.
(5) Install the wheel speed sensors, if necessary.
(6) Connect parking brake cable to brackets and Fig. 7 Pinion Yoke Removal
lever. (10) Use a suitable pry tool or slide hammer
(7) Install the brake drums. Refer to Group 5, mounted screw to remove the pinion gear seal.
Brakes, for proper procedures.
INSTALLATION lapsible spacer must be installed. The torque
(1) Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the sequence will then have to be repeated.
lip of pinion seal. Install seal with Installer C-3972-A
and Handle C-4171 (Fig. 8). (5) Rotate the pinion shaft using a (in. lbs.) torque
wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to the read-
ing recorded during removal plus an additional 0.56
N·m (5 in. lbs.) (Fig. 10).

(2) Install yoke on the pinion gear with Screw
8112, Cup 8109, and Holder 6958 (Fig. 9).
CAUTION: Do not exceed the minimum tightening

torque when installing the pinion yoke at this point.
Damage to the collapsible spacer or bearings may
result.
(3) Install the yoke washer and a new nut on the

pinion gear and tighten the pinion nut until there is (6) If the rotating torque is low, use Holder 6958 to
zero bearing end-play. hold the pinion yoke (Fig. 11), and tighten the pinion
(4) Tighten the nut to 271 N·m (200 ft. lbs.). shaft nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.) increments until the
proper rotating torque is achieved.

CAUTION: Never loosen pinion gear nut to
Fig. 11 Tightening Pinion Shaft Nut–Typical
decrease pinion gear bearing rotating torque and CAUTION: If the maximum tightening torque is
never exceed specified preload torque. If preload reached prior to reaching the required rotating
torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new col- torque, the collapsible spacer may have been dam-
aged. Replace the collapsible spacer.
(7) Align the installation reference marks on the REMOVAL W/PINION REMOVED
propeller shaft and yoke and install the propeller (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
shaft. (2) Remove wheel and tire assemblies.
(8) Add gear lubricant to the differential housing, (3) Remove rear brake drums. Refer to Group 5,
if necessary. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications for Brakes, for proper procedures.
gear lubricant requirements. (4) Mark the propeller shaft and pinion yoke for
(9) Install the brake drums. Refer to Group 5, installation reference.
Brakes, for proper procedures. (5) Remove the propeller shaft from the yoke.
(10) Install wheel and tire assemblies. (6) Rotate the pinion gear three or four times.
(11) Lower the vehicle. (7) Measure the amount of torque necessary to
rotate the pinion gear with a (in. lbs.) dial-type
COLLAPSIBLE SPACER torque wrench. Record the torque reading for instal-
lation reference.
REMOVAL W/PINION INSTALLED (8) Remove differential assembly from axle hous-
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. ing.
(2) Remove wheel and tire assemblies. (9) Using Holder 6958 to hold yoke, remove the
(3) Remove rear brake drums. Refer to Group 5, pinion yoke nut and washer.
Brakes, for proper procedures. (10) Using Remover C–452 and Wrench C–3281,
(4) Mark the propeller shaft and pinion yoke for remove the pinion yoke from pinion shaft (Fig. 12).
installation reference. (11) Remove the pinion gear from housing (Fig.
(5) Remove the propeller shaft from the yoke. 13). Catch the pinion with your hand to prevent it
(6) Rotate the pinion gear three or four times. from falling and being damaged.
(7) Measure the amount of torque necessary to (12) Remove collapsible spacer from pinion shaft.
torque wrench. Record the torque reading for instal-
lation reference.
(8) Using Holder 6958 to hold the pinion yoke,
(9) Use Remover C-452 and Wrench C-3281 to
remove the pinion yoke (Fig. 12).
(10) Use a suitable pry tool or a slide hammer
mounted screw to remove the pinion shaft seal.
(11) Remove the front pinion bearing using a pair
of suitable pick tools to pull the bearing straight off
the pinion gear shaft. It may be necessary to lightly
tap the end of the pinion gear with a rawhide or rub-
ber mallet if the bearing becomes bound on the pin-
ion shaft.
(12) Remove the collapsible spacer.

INSTALLATION
(1) Install a new collapsible preload spacer on pin-
ion shaft (Fig. 14).
(2) If pinion gear was removed, install pinion gear
in housing.
(3) Install pinion front bearing, if necessary.
(4) Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the
and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 15).

decrease pinion gear bearing rotating torque and
never exceed specified preload torque. If preload
torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new col-
lapsible spacer must be installed. The torque
Fig. 14 Collapsible Preload Spacer sequence will then have to be repeated.
(9) Using yoke holder 6958 and a torque wrench

set at 474 N·m (350 ft. lbs.), crush collapsible spacer
until bearing end play is taken up (Fig. 17).
NOTE: If more than 474 N·m (350 ft. lbs.) of torque

is necessary to remove the bearing end play, the
collapsible spacer is defective and must be
replaced.
(10) Slowly tighten the nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.)

increments until the rotating torque is achieved.
Measure the rotating torque frequently to avoid over
crushing the collapsible spacer (Fig. 18).

(5) Install yoke with Screw 8112, Cup 8109, and
Holder 6958 (Fig. 16).
(6) If the original pinion bearings are being used,
install differential assembly and axle shafts, if neces-
sary.
NOTE: If new pinion bearings were installed, do not

install the differential assembly and axle shafts until
after the pinion bearing preload and rotating torque
are set.

pinion gear. Tighten the pinion nut until there is zero
bearing end-play. Fig. 17 Tightening Pinion Nut–Typical
(8) Tighten the nut to 271 N·m (200 ft. lbs.).
(11) Check rotating torque with a (in. lbs.) torque screw and pinion mate gear shaft from differential
wrench (Fig. 18). The torque necessary to rotate the case (Fig. 19).
pinion gear should be:
• Original Bearings — The reading recorded dur-
ing removal, plus an additional 0.56 N·m (5 in. lbs.).
• New Bearings — 2 to 5 N·m (15 to 35 in. lbs.).
Fig. 19 Mate Shaft Lock Screw

(7) Push axle shaft inward and remove axle shaft
C–clip lock from the axle shaft (Fig. 20).
Fig. 18 Check Pinion Gear Rotation Torque

(12) Install differential assembly and axle shafts,
if necessary.
(13) Align marks made previously on yoke and
propeller shaft and install propeller shaft.
(14) Install rear brake drums. Refer to Group 5,
(15) Add gear lubricant, if necessary. Refer to
Lubricant Specifications of this section for lubricant
requirements. Fig. 20 Axle Shaft C–Clip Lock
(16) Install wheel and tire assemblies. (8) Remove axle shaft. Use care to prevent damage
(17) Lower vehicle. to axle shaft bearing and seal, which will remain in
axle shaft tube. Also, exercise care not to damage the
AXLE SHAFT wheel speed sensor on vehicles equipped with ABS
brakes.
REMOVAL (9) Inspect axle shaft seal for leakage or damage.
(1) Raise and support vehicle. Ensure that the (10) Inspect roller bearing contact surface on axle
transmission is in neutral. shaft for signs of brinelling, galling and pitting. If
(2) Remove wheel and tire assembly. any of these conditions exist, the axle shaft and/or
(3) Remove brake drum. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, bearing and seal must be replaced.
for proper procedure.
(4) Clean all foreign material from housing cover INSTALLATION
area. (1) Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear
(5) Loosen housing cover bolts. Drain lubricant lubricant. Insert axle shaft through seal, bearing,
from the housing and axle shaft tubes. Remove hous- and engage it into side gear splines.
ing cover.
(6) Rotate differential case so that pinion mate
gear shaft lock screw is accessible. Remove lock
NOTE: Use care to prevent shaft splines from dam-
aging axle shaft seal lip. Also, exercise care not to
damage the wheel speed sensor on vehicles
equipped with ABS brakes.
(2) Insert C–clip lock in end of axle shaft. Push

axle shaft outward to seat C–clip lock in side gear.
(3) Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case
and through thrust washers and pinion gears.
(4) Align hole in shaft with hole in the differential
case and install lock screw with Loctitet on the
threads. Tighten lock screw to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.)
torque.
(5) Install cover and add fluid. Refer to Lubricant
Change procedure in this section for procedure and
lubricant requirements.
(6) Install brake drum. Refer to Group 5, Brakes,
(7) Install wheel and tire.
(8) Lower vehicle.
AXLE SHAFT SEAL AND BEARING

Fig. 21 Axle Shaft Bearing Removal
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the axle shaft.
(2) Remove the axle shaft seal from the end of the
axle shaft tube with a small pry bar.
NOTE: The seal and bearing can be removed at the

same time with the bearing removal tool.
(3) Remove the axle shaft bearing from the axle

tube with Bearing Removal Tool Set 6310 using
Adapter Foot 6310-5 (Fig. 21).
(4) Inspect the axle shaft tube bore for roughness
and burrs. Remove as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Do not install the original axle shaft seal.
Always install a new seal.
(1) Wipe the axle shaft tube bore clean. Fig. 22 Axle Shaft Seal Installation
(2) Install axle shaft bearing with Installer 6436
(5) Note the installation reference letters stamped
and Handle C–4171. Ensure that the part number on
on the bearing caps and housing machined sealing
the bearing is against the installer.
surface (Fig. 23).
(3) Install the new axle shaft seal with Installer
(6) Loosen the differential bearing cap bolts.
6437 and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 22).
(4) Install the axle shaft.
items from Adapter set 6987, with the tool dowel pins
seated in the locating holes (Fig. 24). Install the hold-
DIFFERENTIAL down clamps and tighten the tool turnbuckle finger–
tight.
REMOVAL (8) Install a Pilot Stud C-3288-B at the left side of
(1) Raise and support vehicle. the differential housing. Attach Dial Indicator C-3339
(2) Remove the lubricant fill hole plug from the to pilot stud. Load the indicator plunger against the
differential housing cover. opposite side of the housing (Fig. 25) and zero the
(3) Remove the differential housing cover and indicator.
allow fluid to drain.
(4) Remove axle shafts.
Fig. 23 Bearing Cap Identification Fig. 25 Install Dial Indicator
Fig. 24 Install Axle Housing Spreader Fig. 26 Spread Axle Housing

CAUTION: Do not spread over 0.38 mm (0.015 in). If (13) Mark or tag the differential bearing cups to
the housing is over–spread, it could be distorted or indicate which side of the differential they were
damaged. removed from.
(14) Retrieve differential case preload shims from
(9) Spread the housing enough to remove the dif- axle housing. Mark or tag the differential case pre-
ferential case from the housing. Measure the dis- load shims to indicate which side of the differential
tance with the dial indicator (Fig. 26). they were removed from.
(10) Remove the dial indicator. (15) Remove spreader from housing.
(11) While holding the differential case in position,
remove the differential bearing cap bolts and caps. INSTALLATION
(12) Remove the differential from the housing. If replacement differential bearings or differential
Ensure that the differential bearing cups remain in case are being installed, differential side bearing
position on the differential bearings (Fig. 27). shim requirements may change. Refer to the Differ-
ential Bearing Preload and Gear Backlash proce-
dures in this section to determine the proper shim
selection.
(3) Spread the housing enough to install the case
in the housing. Measure the distance with the dial
indicator (Fig. 26).
(5) Install differential case in the housing. Ensure
that the differential bearing cups remain in position
on the differential bearings and that the preload
shims remain between the face of the bearing cup
and the housing. Tap the differential case to ensure
the bearings cups and shims are fully seated in the
housing.
(6) Install the bearing caps at their original loca-
tions (Fig. 29).
Fig. 27 Differential Case Removal

items from Adapter set 6987, with the tool dowel pins
seated in the locating holes (Fig. 28). Install the hold-
down clamps and tighten the tool turnbuckle finger–
tight.
Fig. 29 Differential Bearing Cap Reference Letters

(7) Loosely install differential bearing cap bolts.
(8) Remove axle housing spreader.
(9) Tighten the bearing cap bolts to 77 N·m (57 ft.
lbs.) torque.
(10) Install the axle shafts.

REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential from axle housing.
with Puller/Press C-293-PA, C-293-39 Blocks, and
Plug SP-3289 (Fig. 30).
Fig. 28 Install Axle Housing Spreader INSTALLATION

(1) Using tool C-3716-A with handle C-4171,
(2) Install a Pilot Stud C-3288-B at the left side of install differential side bearings (Fig. 31).
the differential housing. Attach Dial Indicator C-3339 (2) Install differential in axle housing.
to pilot stud. Load the indicator plunger against the
RING GEAR
indicator.
NOTE: The ring and pinion gears are service in a
the housing is over–spread, it could be distorted or
damaged.
soft metal jaw protectors (Fig. 32).
case.
ferential case (Fig. 32).

INSTALLATION
Fig. 30 Differential Bearing Removal causing extensive damage.
(1) Invert the differential case and start two ring

gear bolts. This will provide case-to-ring gear bolt
hole alignment.
tighten to 95–122 N·m (70–90 ft. lbs.) torque (Fig. 33).
gear mesh and contact pattern.
PINION GEAR
The ring and pinion gears are serviced in a
REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential from the axle housing.
(2) Mark pinion yoke and propeller shaft for
installation alignment.
(3) Disconnect propeller shaft from pinion yoke.
Using suitable wire, tie propeller shaft to underbody.
(4) Using Holder 6958 to hold yoke, remove the
pinion yoke nut and washer.
Fig. 31 Install Differential Side Bearings (5) Using Remover C–452 and Wrench C–3281,
REMOVAL remove the pinion yoke from pinion shaft (Fig. 34).
(1) Remove differential from axle housing. (6) Remove the pinion gear from housing (Fig. 35).
Catch the pinion with your hand to prevent it from
falling and being damaged.
Fig. 33 Ring Gear Bolt Installation Fig. 35 Remove Pinion Gear

(7) Use a suitable pry tool or a slide hammer
mounted screw to remove the pinion shaft seal.
(8) Remove oil slinger, if equipped, and front pin-
ion bearing.
(9) Remove the front pinion bearing cup with Fig. 36 Front Bearing Cup Removal
Remover C-4345 and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 36).
(10) Remove the rear bearing cup from housing INSTALLATION
(Fig. 37). Use Remover D-149 and Handle C–4171. (1) Apply Mopart Door Ease, or equivalent, stick
(11) Remove the collapsible preload spacer (Fig. 38). lubricant to outside surface of bearing cup.
(12) Remove the rear bearing from the pinion with (2) Install the pinion rear bearing cup with
Puller/Press C-293-PA and Adapters C-293-40 (Fig. 39). Installer D-146 and Driver Handle C–4171 (Fig. 40).
Place 4 adapter blocks so they do not damage Ensure cup is correctly seated.
the bearing cage. (3) Apply Mopart Door Ease, or equivalent, stick
(13) Remove the depth shims from the pinion gear lubricant to outside surface of bearing cup.
shaft. Record the thickness of the depth shims. (4) Install the pinion front bearing cup with
Installer D–130 and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 41).
Fig. 37 Rear Bearing Cup Removal

Fig. 39 Rear Bearing Removal
Fig. 38 Collapsible Spacer

(5) Install pinion front bearing, and oil slinger, if Fig. 40 Pinion Rear Bearing Cup Installation
equipped. refer to Pinion Gear Depth to select the proper thick-
(6) Apply a light coating of gear lubricant on the ness shim before installing rear pinion bearing.
and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 42). (7) Place the proper thickness depth shim on the
pinion gear.
NOTE: Pinion depth shims are placed between the (8) Install the rear bearing and slinger, if
rear pinion bearing cone and pinion gear to achieve equipped, on the pinion gear with Installer W-262
proper ring and pinion gear mesh. If the factory (Fig. 43).
installed ring and pinion gears are reused, the pinion (9) Install a new collapsible preload spacer on pin-
depth shim should not require replacement. If required, ion shaft and install pinion gear in housing (Fig. 44).
Fig. 41 Pinion Front Bearing Cup Installation
Fig. 43 Shaft Rear Bearing Installation

(10) Install pinion gear in housing.
(11) Install yoke with Installer Screw 8112, Cup
8109, and holder 6958 (Fig. 45).
pinion gear and tighten the pinion nut until there is
zero bearing end-play.

torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new col- Fig. 44 Collapsible Preload Spacer
lapsible spacer must be installed. The torque (15) Slowly tighten the nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.)
sequence will then have to be repeated. increments until the rotating torque is achieved.
Measure the rotating torque frequently to avoid over
(14) Using yoke holder 6958 and a torque wrench
crushing the collapsible spacer (Fig. 47).
set at 474 N·m (350 ft. lbs.), crush collapsible spacer
(16) Check bearing rotating torque with a (in. lbs.)
until bearing end play is taken up (Fig. 46).
torque wrench (Fig. 47). The torque necessary to
NOTE: If the spacer requires more than 474 N·m rotate the pinion gear should be:
(350 ft. lbs.) torque to crush, the collapsible spacer • Original Bearings — 1 to 3 N·m (10 to 20 in. lbs.).
is defective and must be replaced. • New Bearings — 2 to 5 N·m (15 to 35 in. lbs.).
Fig. 47 Check Pinion Gear Rotating Torque
Fig. 46 Tightening Pinion Nut–Typical

(17) Install differential in housing.
FINAL ASSEMBLY
(1) Scrape the residual sealant from the housing
and cover mating surfaces. Clean the mating surfaces
with mineral spirits. Apply a bead of Mopart Silicone
Rubber Sealant, or equivalent, on the housing cover
(Fig. 48).
(2) Install the cover on the differential with the
attaching bolts. Install the identification tag. Tighten
the cover bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
lubricant foaming and overheating. STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL
(3) Refill the differential housing with gear lubri-
DISASSEMBLY
cant. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications section of
(1) Remove pinion gear mate shaft lock screw (Fig. 49).
this group for the gear lubricant requirements.
(2) Remove pinion gear mate shaft.
(4) Install the fill hole plug.
(3) Rotate the differential side gears and remove
the pinion mate gears and thrust washers (Fig. 50).
Fig. 49 Pinion Gear Mate Shaft Lock Screw

(4) Remove the differential side gears and thrust
washers.
ASSEMBLY
(1) Install the differential side gears and thrust Fig. 50 Pinion Mate Gear Removal
washers.
(2) Install the pinion mate gears and thrust washers. TRAC-LOKY DIFFERENTIAL
(3) Install the pinion gear mate shaft. The Trac–loky differential components are illus-
(4) Align the hole in the pinion gear mate shaft trated in (Fig. 51). Refer to this illustration during
with the hole in the differential case and install the repair service.
pinion gear mate shaft lock screw.
(5) Lubricate all differential components with DISASSEMBLY
hypoid gear lubricant. (1) Clamp Side Gear Holding Tool 6965 in a vise.
Fig. 51 Trac–lokY Differential Components

(2) Position the differential case on Side Gear
Holding Tool 6965 (Fig. 52).
Fig. 54 Mate Shaft Removal
Fig. 52 Differential Case Holding Tool

(3) Remove ring gear, if necessary. Ring gear
removal is necessary only if the ring gear is to be
replaced. The Trac-loky differential can be serviced
with the ring gear installed.
(4) Remove the pinion gear mate shaft lock screw
(Fig. 53).
Fig. 55 Step Plate Tool Installation

(8) Position a small screw driver in slot of
Threaded Adapter C-6960-1 (Fig. 56) to prevent
adapter from turning.
(9) Tighten forcing screw tool 122 N·m (90 ft. lbs.)
maximum to compress Belleville springs in clutch
packs (Fig. 57).
(10) Using an appropriate size feeler gauge,
remove thrust washers from behind the pinion gears
Fig. 53 Mate Shaft Lock Screw (Fig. 58).
(5) Remove the pinion gear mate shaft. If neces- (11) Insert Turning Bar C-6960-2 in case (Fig. 59).
sary, use a drift and hammer (Fig. 54). (12) Loosen the Forcing Screw C-6960-4 in small
(6) Install and lubricate Step Plate C-6960-3 (Fig. increments until the clutch pack tension is relieved
55). and the differential case can be turned using Turning
(7) Assemble Threaded Adapter C-6960-1 into top Bar C-6960-2.
side gear. Thread Forcing Screw C-6960-4 into (13) Rotate differential case until the pinion gears
adapter until it becomes centered in adapter plate. can be removed.
Fig. 56 Threaded Adapter Installation Fig. 58 Remove Pinion Gear Thrust Washer
Fig. 57 Tighten Belleville Spring Compressor Tool Fig. 59 Pinion Gear Removal
(14) Remove pinion gears from differential case. Lubricate each component with gear lubricant
(15) Remove Forcing Screw C-6960-4, Step Plate before assembly.
C-6960-3, and Threaded Adapter C-6960-1. (1) Assemble the clutch discs into packs and
(16) Remove top side gear, clutch pack retainer, secure disc packs with retaining clips (Fig. 61).
and clutch pack. Keep plates in correct order during (2) Position assembled clutch disc packs on the
removal (Fig. 60). side gear hubs.
(17) Remove differential case from Side Gear Hold- (3) Install clutch pack and side gear in the ring
ing Tool 6965. Remove side gear, clutch pack retainer, gear side of the differential case (Fig. 62). Be sure
and clutch pack. Keep plates in correct order during clutch pack retaining clips remain in position
removal. and are seated in the case pockets.
ASSEMBLY Holding Tool 6965.
(5) Install lubricated Step Plate C-6960-3 in lower
NOTE: The clutch discs are replaceable as com- side gear (Fig. 63).
plete sets only. If one clutch disc pack is damaged, (6) Install the upper side gear and clutch disc pack
both packs must be replaced. (Fig. 63).
Fig. 60 Side Gear & Clutch Disc Removal Fig. 62 Clutch Discs & Lower Side Gear Installation
Fig. 61 Clutch Disc Pack

Fig. 63 Upper Side Gear & Clutch Disc Pack
(7) Hold assembly in position. Insert Threaded Installation
Adapter C-6960-1 into top side gear.
(8) Insert Forcing Screw C-6960-4. tighten the forcing screw in order to install the pin-
(9) Tighten forcing screw tool to slightly compress ion gears.
clutch discs. (12) Tighten forcing screw to 122 N·m (90 ft. lbs.)
(10) Place pinion gears in position in side gears maximum to compress the Belleville springs.
and verify that the pinion mate shaft hole is aligned. (13) Lubricate and install thrust washers behind
(11) Rotate case with Turning Bar C-6960-2 until pinion gears and align washers with a small screw
the pinion mate shaft holes in pinion gears align driver. Insert mate shaft into each pinion gear to ver-
with holes in case. It may be necessary to slightly ify alignment.
(14) Remove Forcing Screw C-6960-4, Step Plate PRESOAK PLATES AND DISC
C-6960-3, and Threaded Adapter C-6960-1. Plates and discs with fiber coating (no grooves or
(15) Install pinion gear mate shaft and align holes lines) must be presoaked in Friction Modifier before
in shaft and case. assembly. Soak plates and discs for a minimum of 20
(16) Install the pinion mate shaft lock screw finger minutes.
tight to hold shaft during differential installation.
If replacement gears and thrust washers were
installed, it is not necessary to measure the ADJUSTMENTS
gear backlash. Correct fit is due to close
machining tolerances during manufacture. PINION GEAR DEPTH
(17) Lubricate all differential components with
hypoid gear lubricant. GENERAL INFORMATION
Ring and pinion gears are supplied as matched
sets only. The identifying numbers for the ring and
CLEANING AND INSPECTION pinion gear are etched into the face of each gear (Fig.
64). A plus (+) number, minus (–) number or zero (0)
AXLE COMPONENTS is etched into the face of the pinion gear. This num-
Wash differential components with cleaning solvent ber is the amount (in thousandths of an inch) the
and dry with compressed air. Do not steam clean depth varies from the standard depth setting of a
the differential components. pinion etched with a (0). The standard setting from
Wash bearings with solvent and towel dry, or dry the center line of the ring gear to the back face of the
with compressed air. DO NOT spin bearings with pinion is 96.850 mm (3.813 in.). The standard depth
compressed air. Cup and bearing must be provides the best teeth contact pattern. Refer to
replaced as matched sets only. Backlash and Contact Pattern Analysis Paragraph in
Clean axle shaft tubes and oil channels in housing. this section for additional information.
Inspect for;
• Smooth appearance with no broken/dented sur-
faces.
teeth.
a matched set only.
areas, and a rough/corroded seal contact surface. Fig. 64 Pinion Gear ID Numbers
Repair or replace as necessary. Compensation for pinion depth variance is
• Preload shims for damage and distortion. Install achieved with select shims. The shims are placed
new shims, if necessary. under the inner pinion bearing cone (Fig. 65).
If a new gear set is being installed, note the depth
TRAC-LOKY variance etched into both the original and replace-
Clean all components in cleaning solvent. Dry com- ment pinion gear. Add or subtract the thickness of
ponents with compressed air. Inspect clutch pack the original depth shims to compensate for the differ-
plates for wear, scoring or damage. Replace both ence in the depth variances. Refer to the Depth Vari-
clutch packs if any one component in either pack is ance charts.
damaged. Inspect side and pinion gears. Replace any Note where Old and New Pinion Marking columns
gear that is worn, cracked, chipped or damaged. intersect. Intersecting figure represents plus or
Inspect differential case and pinion shaft. Replace if minus amount needed.
worn or damaged.
Arbor Discs 6732, and Dial Indicator C-3339 (Fig.
66).
Fig. 65 Shim Locations

Note the etched number on the face of the drive
pinion gear (–1, –2, 0, +1, +2, etc.). The numbers rep-
resent thousands of an inch deviation from the stan-
dard. If the number is negative, add that value to the
required thickness of the depth shim(s). If the num-
ber is positive, subtract that value from the thickness
of the depth shim(s). If the number is 0 no change is
necessary. Refer to the Pinion Gear Depth Variance Fig. 66 Pinion Gear Depth Gauge Tools—Typical
Chart. (1) Assemble Pinion Height Block 6739, Pinion
Block 6735, and rear pinion bearing onto Screw 6741
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT (Fig. 66).
Measurements are taken with pinion cups and pin- (2) Insert assembled height gauge components,
ion bearings installed in housing. Take measure- rear bearing and screw into axle housing through
ments with a Pinion Gauge Set, Pinion Block 6735, pinion bearing cups (Fig. 67).

(3) Install front pinion bearing and Cone 6740 probe over the edge of the pinion height block.
hand tight (Fig. 66). Observe how many revolutions counterclockwise the
dial pointer travels (approximately 0.125 in.) to the
out-stop of the dial indicator.
(8) Slide the dial indicator probe across the gap
between the pinion height block and the arbor bar
with the scooter block against the pinion height block
(Fig. 69). When the dial probe contacts the arbor bar,
the dial pointer will turn clockwise. Bring dial
pointer back to zero against the arbor bar, do not
turn dial face. Continue moving the dial probe to the
crest of the arbor bar and record the highest reading.
If the dial indicator can not achieve the zero reading,
the rear bearing cup or the pinion depth gauge set is
not installed correctly.
(9) Select a shim equal to the dial indicator read-
ing plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
etched in the face of the pinion gear (Fig. 64) using
the opposite sign on the variance number. For exam-
Fig. 67 Pinion Height Block—Typical ple, if the depth variance is –2, add +0.002 in. to the
(4) Place Arbor Disc 6732 on Arbor D-115-3 in posi- dial indicator reading.
tion in axle housing side bearing cradles (Fig. 68).
Install differential bearing caps on Arbor Discs and
tighten cap bolts. Refer to the Torque Specifications
in this section.
NOTE: Arbor Discs 6732 have different step diame-

ters to fit other axle sizes. Pick correct size step for
axle being serviced.
Fig. 69 Pinion Gear Depth Measurement—Typical

(10) Remove the pinion depth gauge components
from the axle housing.
DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND GEAR

BACKLASH
Differential side bearing preload and gear backlash
Fig. 68 Gauge Tools In Housing—Typical is achieved by selective shims inserted between the
bearing cup and the axle housing. The proper shim
(5) Assemble Dial Indicator C-3339 into Scooter
thickness can be determined using slip-fit dummy
Block D-115-2 and secure set screw.
bearings D-348 in place of the differential side bear-
(6) Place Scooter Block/Dial Indicator in position
ings and a dial indicator C-3339. Before proceeding
in axle housing so dial probe and scooter block are
with the differential bearing preload and gear back-
flush against the surface of the pinion height block.
lash measurements, measure the pinion gear depth
Hold scooter block in place and zero the dial indica-
and prepare the pinion gear for installation. Estab-
tor face to the pointer. Tighten dial indicator face
lishing proper pinion gear depth is essential to estab-
lock screw.
lishing gear backlash and tooth contact patterns.
(7) With scooter block still in position against the
After the overall shim thickness to take up differen-
pinion height block, slowly slide the dial indicator
tial side play is measured, the pinion gear is
installed, and the gear backlash shim thickness is
measured. The overall shim thickness is the total of
the dial indicator reading, starting point shim thick-
ness, and the preload specification added together.
The gear backlash measurement determines the
thickness of the shim used on the ring gear side of
the differential case. Subtract the gear backlash shim
thickness from the total overall shim thickness and
select that amount for the pinion gear side of the dif-
ferential (Fig. 70).
Fig. 71 Insert Starting Point Shims
Fig. 70 Axle Adjustment Shim Locations

SHIM SELECTION
NOTE: It is difficult to salvage the differential side
bearings during the removal procedure. Install
replacement bearings if necessary.
(1) Remove side bearings from differential case.

(2) Install ring gear, if necessary, on differential
case and tighten bolts to specification.
(3) Install dummy side bearings D-348 on differen-
tial case.
(4) Install differential case in axle housing. Fig. 72 Seat Pinion Gear Dummy Side Bearing
(5) Insert Dummy Shims 8107 (0.118 in. (3.0 mm)) (12) Push firmly and hold differential case to ring
starting point shims between the dummy bearing gear side of the axle housing (Fig. 76).
and the axle housing (Fig. 71). (13) Record dial indicator reading.
(6) Install the marked bearing caps in their correct (14) Add the dial indicator reading to the starting
positions. Install and snug the bolts. point shim thickness to determine total shim thick-
(7) Using a dead-blow type mallet, seat the differ- ness to achieve zero differential end play.
ential dummy bearings to each side of the axle hous- (15) Add 0.008 in. (0.2 mm) to the zero end play
ing (Fig. 72) and (Fig. 73). total. This new total represents the thickness of
(8) Thread guide stud C-3288-B into rear cover shims to compress, or preload the new bearings when
bolt hole below ring gear (Fig. 74). the differential is installed.
(9) Attach dial indicator C-3339 to guide stud. (16) Rotate dial indicator out of the way on guide
Position the dial indicator plunger on a flat surface stud.
on a ring gear bolt head (Fig. 74). (17) Remove differential case, dummy bearings,
(10) Push firmly and hold differential case to pin- and starting point shims from axle housing.
ion gear side of axle housing (Fig. 75). (18) Install pinion gear in axle housing. Install the
(11) Zero dial indicator face to pointer. yoke and establish the correct pinion rotating torque.
Fig. 73 Seat Ring Gear Side Dummy Bearing Fig. 75 Hold Differential Case and Zero Dial
Indicator
Fig. 76 Hold Differential Case and Read Dial

Indicator
(26) Subtract the backlash shim thickness from
the total preload shim thickness. The remainder is
the shim thickness required on the pinion side of the
Fig. 74 Differential Side play Measurement axle housing.
(19) Install differential case and dummy bearings (27) Rotate dial indicator out of the way on guide
in axle housing (without shims) and tighten retaining stud.
cap bolts. (28) Remove differential case and dummy bearings
(20) Position the dial indicator plunger on a flat from axle housing.
surface between the ring gear bolt heads (Fig. 74). (29) Install new side bearing cones and cups on
(21) Push and hold differential case toward pinion differential case.
gear. (30) Install spreader W-129-B, utilizing some com-
(22) Zero dial indicator face to pointer. ponents of Adapter Set 6987, on axle housing and
(23) Push and hold differential case to ring gear spread axle opening enough to receive differential
side of the axle housing. case.
(24) Record dial indicator reading. (31) Place side bearing shims in axle housing
(25) Subtract 0.002 in. (0.05 mm) from the dial against axle tubes.
indicator reading to compensate for backlash between (32) Install differential case in axle housing.
ring and pinion gears. This total is the thickness of (33) Rotate the differential case several times to
shim required to achieve proper backlash. seat the side bearings.
(34) Position the indicator plunger against a ring
gear tooth (Fig. 77).
(35) Push and hold ring gear upward while not
allowing the pinion gear to rotate.
(36) Zero dial indicator face to pointer.
(37) Push and hold ring gear downward while not
allowing the pinion gear to rotate. Dial indicator
reading should be between 0.12 mm (0.005 in.) and
0.20 mm (0.008 in.). If backlash is not within specifi-
cations transfer the necessary amount of shim thick-
ness from one side of the differential housing to the
other (Fig. 78).
(38) Verify differential case and ring gear runout
by measuring ring to pinion gear backlash at several
locations around the ring gear. Readings should not
vary more than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.). If readings vary
more than specified, the ring gear or the differential
case is defective.
After the proper backlash is achieved, perform the
Gear Contact Pattern Analysis procedure.
Fig. 78 Backlash Shim Adjustment

lash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be
adjusted within specifications to achieve desired
tooth contact patterns.
(1) Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide, or
equivalent, to the drive and coast side of the ring
gear teeth.
(2) Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the
pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the
pinion gear. This will provide a more distinct contact
pattern.
shop towel.
Fig. 77 Ring Gear Backlash Measurement
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS degree of contact against the pinion gear teeth will
The ring and pinion gear teeth contact patterns squeegee the compound to the areas with the least
will show if the pinion gear depth is correct in the amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the
axle housing. It will also show if the ring gear back- ring gear teeth to Gear Tooth Contact Patterns chart
as necessary.

SPECIFICATIONS
194 RBI AXLE
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Axle Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Semi–Floating Hypoid
Lubricant . . . . . . . . SAE Thermally Stable 80W–90
Lubricant Trailer Tow . . . . . . . . Synthetic 75W–140
Lube Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.66 L (3.50 pts.)
Axle Ratios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.07, 3.55, 3.73
Differential Bearing Preload . . . . 0.1 mm (0.004 in.) Adapter—C-293-39
Differential Side Gear
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . 0–0.15 mm (0–0.006 in.)
Ring Gear Diameter . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 cm (7.562 in.)
Ring Gear Backlash . . . 0–0.15 mm (0.005–0.008 in.)
Pinion Std. Depth . . . . . . . . . . 92.08 mm (3.625 in.)
Pinion Bearing Preload-Original
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2 N·m (10–20 in. lbs.)
Pinion Bearing Preload-New
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5–4 N·m (15–35 in. lbs.)
TORQUE – 194 RBI AXLE
DESCRIPTION TORQUE Adapter—C-293-40
Bolt, Diff. Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Bolot, Bearing Cap . . . . . . . . . . . 77 N·m (57 ft. lbs.)
Nut, Pinion . . . . . . . 271–474 N·m (200–350 ft. lbs.)
Screw, Pinion Mate Shaft
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.25 N·m (12 ft. lbs.)
Bolt, Ring Gear . . . . . . . 95–122 N·m (70–90 ft. lbs.)
Bolt, RWAL/ABS Sensor . . . . . . . 8 N·m (70 in. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
194 RBI AXLE Plug—SP-3289
Puller—C-293-PA
Puller—C-452
Cup—8109
Wrench—C-3281
Installer—C-3972-A
Handle—C-4171
Spanner—6958
Driver—C-3716-A
Installer Screw—8112
Installer—D-130
Installer—6436
Installer—D-146
Remover—C-4345
Installer—6437
Remover—D-149
Disc, Axle Arbor—6732
Installer—W-262
Gauge Block—6735
Tool Set, Pinion Depth—6774 Starting Point Shim—8107
Trac-lok Tool Set—6960 Spreader—W-129-B
Holder—6965
Adapter Kit—6987
Puller—7794-A Guide Pin—C-3288-B

Bearing Remover Tool Set—6310 Hub Puller—6790
Dial Indicator—C-3339
8 1/4 REAR AXLE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DIFFERENTIAL SIDE BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

8 1/4 AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 PINION GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
AXLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 PINION SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION RING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
TRAC-LOKY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TRAC-LOK DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
BEARING NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
DRIVELINE SNAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 8 1/4 AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
GEAR NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 TRAC-LOKY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ADJUSTMENTS
LOW SPEED KNOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 8 1/4 AXLE PINION GEAR DEPTH . . . . . . . . . . 104
TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL NOISE . . . . . . . . . 86 DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND
TRAC–LOKY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 GEAR BACKLASH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
VIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS . . . . . . . 107
SERVICE PROCEDURES SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
LUBRICANT CHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION 8 1/4 INCH AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
AXLE SEAL AND BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 TORQUE – 8 1/4 INCH AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
AXLE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 SPECIAL TOOLS
DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 8 1/4 AXLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
GENERAL INFORMATION gear backlash are set and maintained by threaded

adjusters at the outside of the differential housing.
8 1/4 AXLES Pinion bearing preload is set and maintained by the
The 8 1/4 inch axle housings consist of a cast iron use of a collapsible spacer.
center section with axle shaft tubes extending from Axles equipped with a Trac-Loky differential are
either side. The tubes are pressed into and welded to optional. A Trac-Lok differential has a one-piece dif-
the differential housing to form a one-piece axle ferential case, and the same internal components as
housing (Fig. 1). a standard differential, plus two clutch disc packs.
The axles have a vent hose to relieve internal pres-
sure caused by lubricant vaporization and internal AXLE IDENTIFICATION
expansion. The axle differential cover can be used for identifi-
The axles are equipped with semi-floating axle cation of the axle (Fig. 2). A tag is also attached to
shafts, meaning vehicle loads are supported by the the cover.
axle shaft and bearings. The axle shafts are retained
by C-clips in the differential side gears. LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
The removable, stamped steel cover provides a Multi-purpose, hypoid gear lubricant should be
means for inspection and service without removing used for rear axles with a standard differential. The
the complete axle from the vehicle. lubricant should have a MIL-L-2105C and API GL 5
The 8 1/4 axle have the assembly part number and quality specifications.
gear ratio listed on tag. The tag is attached to the Trac-Lok differentials require the addition of 4 oz.
differential housing by a cover bolt. of friction modifier to the axle lubricant after service.
The differential case is a one-piece design. The dif- The 8 1/4 axle lubricant capacity is 2.08 L (4.4 pts.)
ferential pinion mate shaft is retained with a total, including the friction modifier, if necessary.
threaded pin. Differential bearing preload and ring
Fig. 1 8 1/4 Axle

rotates the case
pinion mate shaft in the case) rotate the side gears
• The side gears (splined to the axle shafts) rotate
the shafts
During straight-ahead driving, the differential pin-
ion gears do not rotate on the pinion mate shaft. This
Fig. 2 Differential Cover 8 1/4 Inch Axle occurs because input torque applied to the gears is
divided and distributed equally between the two side
NOTE: If the rear axle is submerged in water, the
gears. As a result, the pinion gears revolve with the
lubricant must be replaced immediately. Avoid the
pinion mate shaft but do not rotate around it (Fig. 3).
possibility of premature axle failure resulting from
When turning corners, the outside wheel must travel
water contamination of the lubricant.
a greater distance than the inside wheel to complete a
Fig. 3 Differential Operation—Straight Ahead Driving

turn. The difference must be compensated for to prevent
the tires from scuffing and skidding through turns. To
accomplish this, the differential allows the axle shafts
to turn at unequal speeds (Fig. 4). In this instance, the
input torque applied to the pinion gears is not divided
equally. The pinion gears now rotate around the pinion
mate shaft in opposite directions. This allows the side
gear and axle shaft attached to the outside wheel to
rotate at a faster speed.
Fig. 5 Trac-lokY Limited Slip Differential Operation

The Trac-loky design provides the differential action
needed for turning corners and for driving straight
ahead during periods of unequal traction. When one
wheel looses traction, the clutch packs transfer addi-
tional torque to the wheel having the most traction.
Trac-loky differentials resist wheel spin on bumpy
roads and provide more pulling power when one wheel
looses traction. Pulling power is provided continuously
until both wheels loose traction. If both wheels slip due
to unequal traction, Trac-loky operation is normal. In
extreme cases of differences of traction, the wheel with
the least traction may spin.
Fig. 4 Differential Operation—On Turns
TRAC-LOKY OPERATION
In a conventional differential, if one wheel spins,
the opposite wheel will generate only as much torque
as the spinning wheel. GENERAL INFORMATION
In the Trac-loky differential, part of the ring gear Axle bearing problem conditions are usually caused by:
torque is transmitted through clutch packs which con- • Insufficient or incorrect lubricant.
tain multiple discs. The clutches will have radial grooves • Foreign matter/water contamination.
on the plates, and concentric grooves on the discs or • Incorrect bearing preload torque adjustment.
bonded fiber material that is smooth in appearance. • Incorrect backlash.
In operation, the Trac-loky clutches are engaged Axle gear problem conditions are usually the result of:
by two concurrent forces. The first being the preload • Insufficient lubrication.
force exerted through Belleville spring washers • Incorrect or contaminated lubricant.
within the clutch packs. The second is the separating • Overloading (excessive engine torque) or exceed-
forces generated by the side gears as torque is ing vehicle weight capacity.
applied through the ring gear (Fig. 5). • Incorrect clearance or backlash adjustment.
Axle component breakage is most often the result of: pinion gear shaft bore will also cause low speed
• Severe overloading. knock.
• Incorrect lubricant. VIBRATION
• Improperly tightened components. Vibration at the rear of the vehicle is usually
caused by a:
GEAR NOISE • Damaged drive shaft.
Axle gear noise can be caused by insufficient lubri- • Missing drive shaft balance weight(s).
cant, incorrect backlash, tooth contact, or worn/dam- • Worn or out–of–balance wheels.
aged gears. • Loose wheel lug nuts.
Gear noise usually happens at a specific speed • Worn U–joint(s).
range. The range is 30 to 40 mph, or above 50 mph. • Loose/broken springs.
The noise can also occur during a specific type of • Damaged axle shaft bearing(s).
driving condition. These conditions are acceleration, • Loose pinion gear nut.
deceleration, coast, or constant load. • Excessive pinion yoke run out.
When road testing, accelerate the vehicle to the • Bent axle shaft(s).
speed range where the noise is the greatest. Shift Check for loose or damaged front–end components
out-of-gear and coast through the peak–noise range. or engine/transmission mounts. These components
If the noise stops or changes greatly: can contribute to what appears to be a rear–end
• Check for insufficient lubricant. vibration. Do not overlook engine accessories, brack-
• Incorrect ring gear backlash. ets and drive belts.
• Gear damage. All driveline components should be examined
Differential side and pinion gears can be checked before starting any repair.
by turning the vehicle. They usually do not cause Refer to Group 22, Wheels and Tires, for additional
noise during straight–ahead driving when the gears vibration information.
are unloaded. The side gears are loaded during vehi-
cle turns. A worn pinion gear mate shaft can also DRIVELINE SNAP
cause a snapping or a knocking noise. A snap or clunk noise when the vehicle is shifted
into gear (or the clutch engaged), can be caused by:
BEARING NOISE • High engine idle speed
The axle shaft, differential and pinion gear bearings • Loose engine/transmission/transfer case mounts
can all produce noise when worn or damaged. Bearing • Worn U–joints
noise can be either a whining, or a growling sound. • Loose spring mounts
Pinion gear bearings have a constant–pitch noise. • Loose pinion gear nut and yoke
This noise changes only with vehicle speed. Pinion bear- • Excessive ring gear backlash
ing noise will be higher because it rotates at a faster • Excessive side gear/case clearance
rate. Drive the vehicle and load the differential. If bear- The source of a snap or a clunk noise can be deter-
ing noise occurs, the rear pinion bearing is the source of mined with the assistance of a helper. Raise the vehi-
the noise. If the bearing noise is heard during a coast, cle on a hoist with the wheels free to rotate. Instruct
the front pinion bearing is the source. the helper to shift the transmission into gear. Listen
Worn or damaged differential bearings usually pro- for the noise, a mechanics stethoscope is helpful in
duce a low pitch noise. Differential bearing noise is isolating the source of a noise.
similar to pinion bearing noise. The pitch of differen-
tial bearing noise is also constant and varies only TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL NOISE
with vehicle speed. The most common problem is a chatter noise when
Axle shaft bearings produce noise and vibration turning corners. Before removing a Trac-loky unit for
when worn or damaged. The noise generally changes repair, drain, flush and refill the axle with the specified
when the bearings are loaded. Road test the vehicle. lubricant. Refer to Lubricant change in this Group.
Turn the vehicle sharply to the left and to the right. A container of Mopart Trac-loky Lubricant (fric-
This will load the bearings and change the noise tion modifier) should be added after repair service or
level. Where axle bearing damage is slight, the noise during a lubricant change.
is usually not noticeable at speeds above 30 mph. After changing the lubricant, drive the vehicle and
make 10 to 12 slow, figure-eight turns. This maneu-
LOW SPEED KNOCK ver will pump lubricant through the clutches. This
Low speed knock is generally caused by a worn will correct the condition in most instances. If the
U–joint or by worn side–gear thrust washers. A worn chatter persists, clutch damage could have occurred.
DIAGNOSIS CHART
DIAGNOSIS CHART – CONTINUED
TRAC–LOKY TEST (4) Clean the housing cavity with a flushing oil,
light engine oil, or lint free cloth. Do not use water,
WARNING: WHEN SERVICING VEHICLES WITH A steam, kerosene, or gasoline for cleaning.
TRAC–LOKY DIFFERENTIAL DO NOT USE THE (5) Remove the original sealant from the housing
ENGINE TO TURN THE AXLE AND WHEELS. BOTH and cover surfaces.
REAR WHEELS MUST BE RAISED AND THE VEHI- (6) Apply a bead of Mopart Silicone Rubber Seal-
CLE SUPPORTED. A TRAC–LOKY AXLE CAN ant, or equivalent, to the housing cover (Fig. 7).
EXERT ENOUGH FORCE IF ONE WHEEL IS IN CON-
TACT WITH A SURFACE TO CAUSE THE VEHICLE
TO MOVE.
The differential can be tested without removing the

differential case by measuring rotating torque. Make
sure brakes are not dragging during this measure-
ment.
(1) Place blocks in front and rear of both front
wheels.
(2) Raise one rear wheel until it is completely off
the ground.
(3) Engine off, transmission in neutral, and park-
ing brake off.
(4) Remove wheel and bolt Special Tool 6790 to
studs.
(5) Use torque wrench on special tool to rotate
Fig. 7 Apply Sealant
wheel and read rotating torque (Fig. 6).
Tighten the cover bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) For Trac–loky differentials, a quantity of
Mopart Trac–loky lubricant (friction modifier), or
equivalent, must be added after repair service or a
lubricant change. Refer to the Lubricant Specifica-
tions section of this group for the quantity necessary.
(9) Fill differential with Mopart Hypoid Gear
Lubricant, or equivalent, to bottom of the fill plug
hole. Refer to the Lubricant Specifications section of
this group for the quantity necessary.

Fig. 6 Trac-lokY Test —Typical (10) Install the fill hole plug and lower the vehicle.
(6) If rotating torque is less than 22 N·m (30 ft. (11) Trac–loky differential equipped vehicles
lbs.) or more than 271 N·m (200 ft. lbs.) on either should be road tested by making 10 to 12 slow figure-
wheel the unit should be serviced. eight turns. This maneuver will pump the lubricant
through the clutch discs to eliminate a possible chat-
ter noise complaint.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
LUBRICANT CHANGE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
(2) Remove the lubricant fill hole plug from the REAR AXLE
differential housing cover.
(3) Remove the differential housing cover and REMOVAL
drain the lubricant from the housing. (1) Raise and support the vehicle.
(2) Position a suitable lifting device under the (3) Remove brake drum. Refer to Group 5, Brakes,
axle. for proper procedure.
(3) Secure axle to device. (4) Clean all foreign material from housing cover
(4) Remove the wheels and tires. area.
(5) Secure brake drums to the axle shaft. (5) Loosen housing cover bolts. Drain lubricant
(6) Disconnect the brake hose at the axle junction from the housing and axle shaft tubes. Remove hous-
block. Do not disconnect the brake hydraulic lines at ing cover.
the wheel cylinders. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for (6) Rotate differential case so that pinion mate
proper procedures. gear shaft lock screw is accessible. Remove lock
(7) Disconnect the parking brake cables and cable screw and pinion mate gear shaft from differential
brackets. case (Fig. 8).
(8) Disconnect the vent hose from the axle shaft
tube.
(9) Mark the propeller shaft and yoke for installa-
tion alignment reference.
(10) Remove propeller shaft.
(11) Disconnect shock absorbers from axle.
(12) Remove the stabilizer links.
(13) Remove the spring clamps and spring brack-
ets. Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for proper proce-
dures.
(14) Separate the axle from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
(1) Raise the axle with lifting device and align to
the leaf spring centering bolts.
(2) Install the spring clamps and spring brackets.
Refer to Group 2, Suspension, for proper procedures.
(3) Install shock absorbers and tighten nuts to 60 Fig. 8 Mate Shaft Lock Screw
N·m (44 ft. lbs.) torque. (7) Push axle shaft inward and remove axle shaft
(4) Install the stabilizer links. Tighten sway bar C–clip lock from the axle shaft (Fig. 9).
links to 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.).
(5) Connect the parking brake cables and cable
brackets.
(6) Install the brake drums. Refer to Group 5,
(7) Connect the brake hose to the axle junction
block. Refer to Group 5, Brakes, for proper proce-
dures.
(8) Install axle vent hose.
(9) Align propeller shaft and pinion yoke reference
marks. Install universal joint straps and bolts.
Tighten to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque.
(10) Install the wheels and tires.
(11) Add gear lubricant, if necessary. Refer to
Lubricant Specifications in this section for lubricant
requirements.
(12) Remove lifting device from axle and lower the Fig. 9 Axle Shaft C–Clip Lock
vehicle. (8) Remove axle shaft. Use care to prevent damage
to axle shaft bearing and seal, which will remain in
AXLE SHAFT axle shaft tube.
(9) Inspect axle shaft seal for leakage or damage.
REMOVAL (10) Inspect roller bearing contact surface on axle
(1) Raise and support vehicle. Ensure that the shaft for signs of brinelling, galling and pitting. If
transmission is in neutral. any of these conditions exist, the axle shaft and/or
(2) Remove wheel and tire assembly. bearing and seal must be replaced.
INSTALLATION
(1) Lubricate bearing bore and seal lip with gear
lubricant. Insert axle shaft through seal, bearing,
and engage it into side gear splines.
NOTE: Use care to prevent shaft splines from dam-

aging axle shaft seal lip.
(2) Insert C–clip lock in end of axle shaft. Push

axle shaft outward to seat C–clip lock in side gear.
(3) Insert pinion mate shaft into differential case
and through thrust washers and pinion gears.
(4) Align hole in shaft with hole in the differential
case and install lock screw with Loctitet on the
threads. Tighten lock screw to 11 N·m (8 ft. lbs.)
torque.
(5) Install cover and add fluid. Refer to Lubricant
Change procedure in this section for procedure and
lubricant requirements.
(6) Install brake drum. Refer to Group 5, Brakes,
(7) Install wheel and tire.
(8) Lower vehicle. Fig. 11 Axle Shaft Bearing Removal Tool
AXLE SEAL AND BEARING INSTALLATION

NOTE: Do not install the original axle shaft seal.
REMOVAL
Always install a new seal.
(1) Remove axle shaft.
(2) Remove axle shaft seal from the end of the axle (1) Wipe the axle tube bore clean. Remove any old
tube with a small pry bar (Fig. 10). sealer or burrs from the tube.
(2) Install the axle shaft bearing with Installer
NOTE: The seal and bearing can be removed at the
C-4198 and Handle C-4171 (Fig. 12). Ensure that the
same time with the bearing removal tool.
bearing part number is against the installer. Verify
(3) Remove the axle shaft bearing from the axle that the bearing in installed straight and the tool
tube with Bearing Removal Tool Set 6310, using fully contacts the axle tube when seating the bearing.
Adapter Foot 6310-9 (Fig. 11). (3) Install a new axle seal with Installer C-4076-B
and Handle C-4735-1. When the tool contacts the
axle tube, the seal is installed to the correct depth.
(4) Coat the lip of the seal with axle lubricant for
protection prior to installing the axle shaft.
(5) Install the axle shaft.
PINION SEAL
REMOVAL
(2) Scribe a mark on the universal joint, pinion
yoke, and pinion shaft for reference.
(3) Disconnect the propeller shaft from the pinion
yoke. Secure the propeller shaft in an upright posi-
tion to prevent damage to the rear universal joint.
(4) Remove the wheel and tire assemblies.
(5) Remove the brake drums to prevent any drag.
Fig. 10 Axle Seal Removal
The drag may cause a false bearing preload torque
measurement.
(6) Rotate the pinion yoke three or four times.
NOTE: The outer perimeter of the seal is pre-coated
with a special sealant. An additional application of
sealant is not required.

lip of pinion seal.
(5) Install the new pinion shaft seal with Installer
C-4076-B and Handle C-4735-1 (Fig. 14).
Fig. 12 Axle Shaft Seal and Bearing Installation

(7) Measure the amount of torque necessary to
torque wrench. Record the torque reading for instal-
lation reference.
(8) Hold the yoke with Wrench 6719. Remove the
pinion shaft nut and washer.
(9) Remove the yoke with Remover C-452 (Fig. 13).
Fig. 14 8 1/4 Axle Pinion Seal Installation
NOTE: The seal is correctly installed when the seal
flange contacts the face of the differential housing
flange.
(6) Position the pinion yoke on the end of the shaft

with the reference marks aligned.
(7) Seat yoke on pinion shaft with Installer C-3718
and Wrench 6719.
(8) Remove the tools and install the pinion yoke
washer. The convex side of the washer must face out-
ward.
CAUTION: Do not exceed the minimum tightening

torque when installing the pinion yoke retaining nut
at this point. Damage to collapsible spacer or bear-
Fig. 13 Yoke Removal ings may result.
(10) Remove the pinion shaft seal with suitable (9) Hold pinion yoke with Yoke Holder 6719 and
pry tool or slide-hammer mounted screw. tighten shaft nut to 285 N·m (210 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 15).
Rotate pinion shaft several revolutions to ensure the
INSTALLATION bearing rollers are seated.
(1) Clean the seal contact surface in the housing (10) Rotate the pinion shaft using an (in. lbs.)
bore. torque wrench. Rotating torque should be equal to
(2) Examine the splines on the pinion shaft for the reading recorded during removal, plus an addi-
burrs or wear. Remove any burrs and clean the shaft. tional 0.56 N·m (5 in. lbs.) (Fig. 16).
(3) Inspect pinion yoke for cracks, worn splines
and worn seal contact surface. Replace yoke if neces-
sary.
pinion shaft nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.) increments
until proper rotating torque is achieved.
NOTE: The bearing rotating torque should be con-

stant during a complete revolution of the pinion. If
the rotating torque varies, this indicates a binding
condition.
(12) The seal replacement is unacceptable if the

final pinion nut torque is less than 285 N·m (210 ft.
lbs.).
(13) Install the propeller shaft with the installa-
tion reference marks aligned.
(14) Tighten the universal joint yoke clamp screws
to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.).
(15) Install the brake drums.
(16) Install wheel and tire assemblies and lower
the vehicle.
(17) Check the differential housing lubricant level.
DIFFERENTIAL
Fig. 15 Tightening Pinion Shaft Nut

REMOVAL
(1) Remove the axle shafts.
NOTE: Side play resulting from bearing races being

loose on case hubs requires replacement of the dif-
ferential case.
(2) Mark the differential housing and the differen-

tial bearing caps for installation reference (Fig. 17).

decrease pinion gear bearing rotating torque and Fig. 17 Mark For Installation Reference
never exceed specified preload torque. If preload (3) Remove bearing threaded adjuster lock from
torque is exceeded a new collapsible spacer must each bearing cap. Loosen the bolts, but do not
be installed. The torque sequence will then have to remove the bearing caps.
be repeated. (4) Loosen the threaded adjusters with Wrench
C-4164 (Fig. 18).
(11) If the rotating torque is low, use Yoke Holder (5) Hold the differential case while removing bear-
6719 to hold the pinion yoke (Fig. 15) and tighten the ing caps and adjusters.

REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential case from axle housing.
with Puller/Press C-293-PA and Adapters C-293-48
and Plug SP-3289 (Fig. 20).
Fig. 18 Threaded Adjuster Tool

(6) Remove the differential case.
NOTE: Each differential bearing cup and threaded

adjuster must be kept with their respective bearing.
INSTALLATION
(1) Apply a coating of hypoid gear lubricant to the
differential bearings, bearing cups, and threaded
adjusters. A dab of grease can be used to keep the
adjusters in position. Carefully position the assem-
bled differential case in the housing.
(2) Observe the reference marks and install the
differential bearing caps at their original locations
(Fig. 19).
Fig. 20 Differential Bearing Removal

INSTALLATION
(1) Install differential side bearings. Use Installer
C-4340 with handle C-4171 (Fig. 21).
(2) Install differential case in axle housing.
RING GEAR
REMOVAL
Fig. 19 Bearing Caps & Bolts (1) Remove differential from axle housing.
(3) Install bearing cap bolts and tighten the upper
soft metal jaw protectors (Fig. 22).
bolts to 14 N·m (10 ft. lbs.). Tighten the lower bolts
finger-tight until the bolt head is seated.
case.
(4) Perform the differential bearing preload and
adjustment procedure.
ferential case (Fig. 22).
(5) Install axle shafts and differential housing
cover.
Fig. 21 Install Differential Side Bearings Fig. 23 Ring Gear Bolt Installation
PINION GEAR
REMOVAL
(1) Remove differential from the axle housing.
(2) Mark pinion yoke and propeller shaft for
installation alignment.
(3) Disconnect propeller shaft from pinion yoke.
Using suitable wire, tie propeller shaft to underbody.
(4) Using Yoke Holder 6719 to hold yoke and
remove the pinion yoke nut and washer.
(5) Using Remover C–452, remove the pinion yoke
from pinion shaft (Fig. 24).

INSTALLATION
causing extensive damage.
(1) Invert the differential case.

(2) Position ring gear on the differential case and
start two ring gear bolts. This will provide case-to-
ring gear bolt hole alignment.
tighten to 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.) torque (Fig. 23).
gear mesh and contact pattern. Fig. 24 Pinion Yoke Removal
(6) Partially install pinion nut onto pinion to pro-
tect the threads.
(7) Remove the pinion gear from housing (Fig. 25).
Catch the pinion with your hand to prevent it from
falling and being damaged.
Fig. 26 Front Bearing Cup Removal

(8) Remove the pinion shaft seal with suitable pry
tool or slide-hammer mounted screw.
(9) Remove oil slinger, if equipped, and front pin-
ion bearing.
(10) Remove the front pinion bearing cup with
Remover C-4345 and Handle C–4171 (Fig. 26).
(11) Remove the rear bearing cup from housing
(Fig. 27). Use Remover C-4307 and Handle C–4171.
(12) Remove the collapsible preload spacer (Fig.
28).
(13) Remove the rear bearing from the pinion (Fig.
29) with Puller/Press C-293-PA and Adapters C-293-
47.
Place 4 adapter blocks so they do not damage
the bearing cage.
(14) Remove the depth shims from the pinion gear
shaft. Record the thickness of the depth shims. Fig. 27 Rear Bearing Cup Removal
Fig. 28 Collapsible Spacer Fig. 30 Pinion Rear Bearing Cup Installation

(4) Install the pinion front bearing cup (Fig. 31)
with Installer D–130 and Handle C–4171.
Fig. 31 Pinion Front Bearing Cup Installation

(5) Install pinion front bearing, and oil slinger, if
equipped.
Fig. 29 Rear Bearing Removal
lip of pinion seal. Install seal with Installer
INSTALLATION C-4076–B and Handle C-4735-1 (Fig. 32).
lubricant to outside surface of bearing cup.
(2) Install the pinion rear bearing cup (Fig. 30)
with Installer C-4308 and Driver Handle C–4171.
(2) Ensure cup is correctly seated.
lubricant to outside surface of bearing cup.
(9) Install a new collapsible preload spacer on pin-
ion shaft and install pinion gear in housing (Fig. 34).
(10) Install pinion gear in housing.

NOTE: Pinion depth shims are placed between the
rear pinion bearing cone and pinion gear to achieve
proper ring and pinion gear mesh. If the factory
installed ring and pinion gears are reused, the pin-
ion depth shim should not require replacement. If
required, refer to Pinion Gear Depth to select the
proper thickness shim before installing rear pinion
bearing.
Fig. 34 Collapsible Preload Spacer
(7) Place the proper thickness depth shim on the
(11) Install yoke with Installer C-3718 and Yoke
pinion gear.
Holder 6719.
(8) Install the rear bearing and slinger, if
equipped, on the pinion gear (Fig. 33) with Installer
pinion gear and tighten the pinion nut until there is
6448.
zero bearing end-play. It will not be possible at this
point to achieve zero bearing end-play if a new col-
lapsible spacer was installed.

torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new col-
lapsible spacer must be installed. The torque
sequence will then have to be repeated.
(14) Using Yoke Holder 6719, crush collapsible

spacer until bearing end play is taken up.
(15) Slowly tighten the nut in 6.8 N·m (5 ft. lbs.)
increments until the desired rotating torque is
achieved. Measure the rotating torque frequently to
avoid over crushing the collapsible spacer (Fig. 35).
(16) Check bearing rotating torque with an inch
pound torque wrench (Fig. 35). The torque necessary
to rotate the pinion gear should be:
• Original Bearings — 1 to 3 N·m (10 to 20 in.
lbs.).
Fig. 33 Shaft Rear Bearing Installation
• New Bearings — 2 to 5 N·m (15 to 35 in. lbs.).
Fig. 37 Pinion Mate Gear Removal

Fig. 35 Check Pinion Gear Rotating Torque (4) Remove the differential side gears and thrust
(17) Install propeller shaft. washers.
(18) Install differential in housing.
ASSEMBLY
(1) Install the differential side gears and thrust
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY washers.
(2) Install the pinion mate gears and thrust wash-
STANDARD DIFFERENTIAL ers.
(3) Install the pinion gear mate shaft.
DISASSEMBLY (4) Align the hole in the pinion gear mate shaft
(1) Remove pinion gear mate shaft lock screw (Fig. with the hole in the differential case and install the
36). pinion gear mate shaft lock screw.
(2) Remove pinion gear mate shaft. (5) Lubricate all differential components with
(3) Rotate the differential side gears and remove hypoid gear lubricant.
the pinion mate gears and thrust washers (Fig. 37).
TRAC-LOK DIFFERENTIAL
The Trac–lok differential components are illus-
trated in (Fig. 38). Refer to this illustration during
repair service.
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Clamp Side Gear Holding Tool 8138 in a vise.
Holding Tool 8138 (Fig. 39).
(3) Remove ring gear, if necessary. Ring gear
removal is necessary only if the ring gear is to be
replaced. The Trac-lok differential can be serviced
with the ring gear installed.
(4) Remove the pinion gear mate shaft lock screw
(Fig. 40).
Fig. 36 Pinion Gear Mate Shaft Lock Screw

Fig. 38 Trac–lok Differential Components
Fig. 40 Mate Shaft Lock Screw

(7) Assemble Threaded Adapter 8140-1 into top
side gear. Thread Forcing Screw 6960-4 into adapter
until it becomes centered in adapter plate.
(8) Position a small screw driver in slot of
Threaded Adapter 8140-1 (Fig. 43) to prevent adapter
Fig. 39 Differential Case Holding Tool
from turning.
(5) Remove the pinion gear mate shaft. If neces- (9) Tighten forcing screw tool 122 N·m (90 ft. lbs.)
sary, use a drift and hammer (Fig. 41). maximum to compress Belleville springs in clutch
(6) Install and lubricate Step Plate 8140–2 (Fig. packs (Fig. 44).
42).
Fig. 41 Mate Shaft Removal
Fig. 43 Threaded Adapter Installation
Fig. 42 Step Plate Tool Installation Fig. 44 Tighten Belleville Spring Compressor Tool
(10) Using an appropriate size feeler gauge, (14) Remove pinion gears from differential case.
remove thrust washers from behind the pinion gears (15) Remove Forcing Screw 6960-4, Step Plate
(Fig. 45). 8140–2, and Threaded Adapter 8140–1.
(11) Insert Turning Bar 6960-2 in case (Fig. 46). (16) Remove top side gear, clutch pack retainer,
(12) Loosen the Forcing Screw 6960-4 in small and clutch pack. Keep plates in correct order during
increments until the clutch pack tension is relieved removal (Fig. 47).
and the differential case can be turned using Turning (17) Remove differential case from Side Gear Hold-
Bar 6960-2. ing Tool 8138. Remove side gear, clutch pack retainer,
(13) Rotate differential case until the pinion gears and clutch pack. Keep plates in correct order during
can be removed. removal.
Fig. 45 Remove Pinion Gear Thrust Washer Fig. 47 Side Gear & Clutch Disc Removal
Fig. 46 Pinion Gear Removal

ASSEMBLY
NOTE: The clutch discs are replaceable as com-
plete sets only. If one clutch disc pack is damaged,
both packs must be replaced. Fig. 48 Clutch Disc Pack
Lubricate each component with gear lubricant (4) Position the differential case on Side Gear
before assembly. Holding Tool 8138.
(1) Assemble the clutch discs into packs and (5) Install lubricated Step Plate 8140–2 in lower
secure disc packs with retaining clips (Fig. 48). side gear (Fig. 50).
(2) Position assembled clutch disc packs on the (6) Install the upper side gear and clutch disc pack
side gear hubs. (Fig. 50).
(3) Install clutch pack and side gear in the ring (7) Hold assembly in position. Insert Threaded
gear side of the differential case (Fig. 49). Be sure Adapter 8140-1 into top side gear.
clutch pack retaining clips remain in position (8) Insert Forcing Screw 6960-4.
and are seated in the case pockets.
(12) Tighten forcing screw to 122 N·m (90 ft. lbs.)
maximum to compress the Belleville springs.
(13) Lubricate and install thrust washers behind
pinion gears and align washers with a small screw
driver. Insert mate shaft into each pinion gear to ver-
ify alignment.
(14) Remove Forcing Screw 6960-4, Step Plate
8140–2, and Threaded Adapter 8140-1.
(15) Install pinion gear mate shaft and align holes
in shaft and case.
(16) Install the pinion mate shaft lock screw finger
tight to hold shaft during differential installation.
(17) Lubricate all differential components with
hypoid gear lubricant.

8 1/4 AXLES
Wash differential components with cleaning solvent
and dry with compressed air. Do not steam clean
the differential components.
Fig. 49 Clutch Discs & Lower Side Gear Installation Wash bearings with solvent and towel dry, or dry
with compressed air. DO NOT spin bearings with
compressed air. Cup and bearing must be
replaced as matched sets only.
Clean axle shaft tubes and oil channels in housing.
Inspect for:
• Smooth appearance with no broken/dented sur-
faces.
teeth.
a matched set only.
areas, and a rough/corroded seal contact surface.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Fig. 50 Upper Side Gear & Clutch Disc Pack • Pinion depth shims for damage and distortion.
Installation Install new shims if necessary.
(9) Tighten forcing screw tool to slightly compress • The differential case. Replace the case if cracked
clutch discs. or damaged.
(10) Place pinion gears in position in side gears • The axle shaft C-clip locks for cracks and exces-
and verify that the pinion mate shaft holes are sive wear. Replace them if necessary.
aligned. • Each threaded adjuster to determine if it rotates
(11) Rotate case with Turning Bar 6960-2 until the freely. If an adjuster binds, repair the damaged
pinion mate shaft holes in pinion gears align with threads or replace the adjuster.
holes in case. It may be necessary to slightly tighten Polish each axle shaft sealing surface with No. 600
the forcing screw in order to install the pinion gears. crocus cloth. This can remove slight surface damage.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION (Continued)
Do not reduce the diameter of the axle shaft seal con- Compensation for pinion depth variance is
tact surface. When polishing, the crocus cloth should achieved with select shims. The shims are placed
be moved around the circumference of the shaft (not under the rear pinion bearing cone (Fig. 52).
in-line with the shaft).
TRAC-LOKY
Clean all components in cleaning solvent. Dry com-
ponents with compressed air. Inspect clutch pack
plates for wear, scoring or damage. Replace both
clutch packs if any one component in either pack is
damaged. Inspect side and pinion gears. Replace any
gear that is worn, cracked, chipped or damaged.
Inspect differential case and pinion shaft. Replace if
worn or damaged.
PRESOAK PLATES AND DISC

Plates and discs with fiber coating (no grooves or
lines) must be presoaked in Friction Modifier before
assembly. Soak plates and discs for a minimum of 20
minutes. Fig. 52 Shim Locations
If a new gear set is being installed, note the depth
ADJUSTMENTS variance marked on both the original and replace-
ment pinion gear. Add or subtract the thickness of
8 1/4 AXLE PINION GEAR DEPTH the original depth shims to compensate for the differ-
ence in the depth variances. Refer to the Depth Vari-
GENERAL INFORMATION ance charts.
Ring and pinion gears are supplied as matched Note where Old and New Pinion Marking columns
sets only. The identifying numbers for the ring and intersect. Intersecting figure represents plus or
pinion gear are marked on the face of each gear (Fig. minus amount needed.
51). A plus (+) number, minus (–) number or zero (0) Note the marked number on the face of the drive
is marked on the face of the pinion gear. This num- pinion gear (–1, –2, 0, +1, +2, etc.). The numbers rep-
ber is the amount (in thousandths of an inch) the resent thousands of an inch deviation from the stan-
depth varies from the standard depth setting of a dard. If the number is negative, add that value to the
pinion marked with a (0). The standard depth pro- required thickness of the depth shim(s). If the num-
vides the best teeth contact pattern. Refer to Back- ber is positive, subtract that value from the thickness
lash and Contact Pattern Analysis Paragraph in this of the depth shim(s). If the number is 0 no change is
section for additional information. necessary. Refer to the Pinion Gear Depth Variance
Chart.
PINION DEPTH MEASUREMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

(1) Install front pinion bearing cup. Use Installer
D-130 and Handle C-4171.
(2) Install rear pinion bearing cup. Use Installer
C-4308 and Handle C-4171.
(3) Use Pinion Gear Adjustment Gauge Set
C-3715-B (Fig. 53).
(4) Position Spacer SP-6030 over Shaft SP-5385.
(5) Position pinion rear bearing on shaft.
(6) Position tools (with bearing) in the housing.
(7) Install Sleeve SP-5382.
(8) Install pinion front bearing.
(9) Install Spacer SP-6022.
(10) Install Sleeve SP-3194-B, Washer SP-534, and
Nut SP-3193.
Fig. 51 Pinion Gear ID Numbers (11) Tighten the nut to seat the pinion bearings in
the housing. Allow the sleeve to turn several times
Fig. 53 8 1/4 Axle Pinion Adjustment Tools Fig. 54 Gauge Block

during tightening to prevent brinelling bearing cups (19) Position Crossbore Arbor SP-6029 in the dif-
or bearings. ferential housing (Fig. 55).
(12) Loosen the compression nut tool. (20) Center the arbor tool.
(13) Lubricate the pinion gear front and rear bear- (21) Position the bearing caps on the arbor tool.
ings with gear lubricant. (22) Install the attaching bolts.
(14) Re-tighten the compression nut tool to 1-3 (23) Tighten the cap bolts to 14 N·m (10 ft. lbs.).
N·m (15-25 in. lbs.) torque. (24) Trial fit depth shim(s) between the crossbore
(15) Rotate the pinion gear several complete revo- arbor and gauge block (Fig. 56). The depth shim(s)
lutions to align the bearing rollers. fit must be snug but not tight (drag friction of a
(16) Install Gauge Block (Fig. 54). feeler gauge blade).
(17) Install Gauge Block SP-5383 at the end of (25) Select a shim equal to the shim selected above
SP-5385. plus the drive pinion gear depth variance number
(18) Install Cap Screw SP-536 and tighten with marked on the face of the pinion gear (Fig. 51) using
Wrench SP-531. the opposite sign on the variance number. For exam-
Insufficient adjuster torque can result in excessive
differential case free-play and ring gear noise.
• Insufficient adjuster torque will not support the
ring gear correctly and can cause excessive differen-
tial case free-play and ring gear noise.
NOTE: The differential bearing cups will not always

immediately follow the threaded adjusters as they
are moved during adjustment. To ensure accurate
bearing cup responses to the adjustments:
• Maintain the gear teeth engaged (meshed) as
marked.
• The bearings must be seated by rapidly rotat-
ing the pinion gear a half turn back and forth.
• Do this five to ten times each time the threaded
adjusters are adjusted.
Fig. 55 Crossbore Arbor
(1) Use Wrench C-4164 to adjust each threaded
adjuster inward until the differential bearing free-
play is eliminated (Fig. 57). Allow some ring gear
backlash (approximately 0.01 inch/0.25 mm) between
the ring and pinion gear. Seat the bearing cups with
the procedure described above.
Fig. 56 Depth Shim(s) Selection

ple, if the depth variance is –2, add +0.002 in. to the
dial indicator reading.
NOTE: Depth shims are available in 0.001-inch

increments from 0.020 inch to 0.038 inch.
Fig. 57 Threaded Adjuster Tool
(26) Remove the tools from the differential hous- (2) Install dial indicator and position the plunger
ing. against the drive side of a ring gear tooth (Fig. 58).
Measure the backlash at 4 positions (90 degrees
DIFFERENTIAL BEARING PRELOAD AND GEAR apart) around the ring gear. Locate and mark the
BACKLASH area of minimum backlash.
The following must be considered when adjusting (3) Rotate the ring gear to the position of the least
bearing preload and gear backlash: backlash. Mark the gear so that all future backlash
• The maximum ring gear backlash variation is measurements will be taken with the same gear
0.003 inch (0.076 mm). teeth meshed.
• Mark the gears so the same teeth are meshed (4) Loosen the right-side, tighten the left-side
during all backlash measurements. threaded adjuster. Obtain backlash of 0.003 to 0.004
• Maintain the torque while adjusting the bearing inch (0.076 to 0.102 mm) with each adjuster tight-
preload and ring gear backlash. ened to 14 N·m (10 ft. lbs.). Seat the bearing cups
• Excessive adjuster torque will introduce a high with the procedure described above.
bearing load and cause premature bearing failure. (5) Tighten the differential bearing cap bolts 95
N·m (70 ft. lbs.).
shop towel.
degree of contact against the pinion gear teeth will
squeegee the compound to the areas with the least
amount of contact. Note and compare patterns on the
ring gear teeth to Gear Tooth Contact Patterns chart
as necessary.
SIDE GEAR CLEARANCE

When measuring side gear clearance, check each
gear independently. If it necessary to replace a side
gear, replace both gears as a matched set.
Fig. 58 Ring Gear Backlash Measurement (1) Install the axle shafts and C-clip locks and pin-
ion mate shaft.
(6) Tighten the right-side threaded adjuster to 102
(2) Measure each side gear clearance. Insert a
N·m (75 ft. lbs.). Seat the bearing cups with the pro-
matched pair of feeler gauge blades between the gear
cedure described above. Continue to tighten the
and differential housing on opposite sides of the hub
right-side adjuster and seat bearing cups until the
(Fig. 60).
torque remains constant at 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.).
(3) If side gear clearances is no more than 0.005
(7) Measure the ring gear backlash. The range of
inch. Determine if the shaft is contacting the pinion
backlash is 0.006 to 0.008 inch (0.15 to 0.203 mm).
gear mate shaft. Do not remove the feeler
(8) Continue increasing the torque at the right-
gauges, inspect the axle shaft with the feeler
side threaded adjuster until the specified backlash is
gauge inserted behind the side gear. If the end of
obtained.
the axle shaft is not contacting the pinion gear mate
NOTE: The left-side threaded adjuster torque shaft, the side gear clearance is acceptable.
should have approximately 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.). If (4) If clearance is more than 0.005 inch (axle shaft
the torque is considerably less, the complete not contacting mate shaft), record the side gear clear-
adjustment procedure must be repeated. ance. Remove the thrust washer and measure its
thickness with a micrometer. Add the washer thick-
(9) Tighten the left-side threaded adjuster until ness to the recorded side gear clearance. The sum of
102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.) torque is indicated. Seat the gear clearance and washer thickness will determine
bearing rollers with the procedure described above. required thickness of replacement thrust washer
Do this until the torque remains constant. (Fig. 61).
(10) Install the threaded adjuster locks and In some cases, the end of the axle shaft will move
tighten the lock screws to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.). and contact the mate shaft when the feeler gauge is
After the proper backlash is achieved, perform the inserted. The C-clip lock is preventing the side gear
Gear Contact Analysis procedure. from sliding on the axle shaft.
(5) If there is no side gear clearance, remove the
GEAR CONTACT PATTERN ANALYSIS C-clip lock from the axle shaft. Use a micrometer to
The ring and pinion gear teeth contact patterns measure the thrust washer thickness. Record the
will show if the pinion gear depth is correct in the thickness and re-install the thrust washer. Assemble
axle housing. It will also show if the ring gear back- the differential case without the C-clip lock installed
lash has been adjusted correctly. The backlash can be and re-measure the side gear clearance.
adjusted within specifications to achieve desired (6) Compare both clearance measurements. If the
tooth contact patterns. difference is less than 0.012 inch (0.305 mm), add
(1) Apply a thin coat of hydrated ferric oxide, or clearance recorded when the C-clip lock was installed
equivalent, to the drive and coast side of the ring to thrust washer thickness measured. The sum will
gear teeth. determine the required thickness of the replacement
(2) Wrap, twist, and hold a shop towel around the thrust washer.
pinion yoke to increase the turning resistance of the (7) If clearance is 0.012 inch (0.305 mm) or
pinion gear. This will provide a more distinct contact greater, both side gears must be replaced (matched
pattern. set) and the clearance measurements repeated.

DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Backing Plate Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 64 N·m (48 ft. lbs.)
RWAL/ABS Sensor Bolt . . . . . . . 24 N·m (18. ft. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
8 1/4 AXLES
Fig. 60 Side Gear Clearance Measurement
Puller, Hub—6790
Fig. 61 Side Gear Calculations

(8) If clearance (above) continues to be 0.012 inch
(0.305 mm) or greater, the case must be replaced.
SPECIFICATIONS
Remover, Bearing—6310
8 1/4 INCH AXLE
Axle Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Semi-floating, hypoid
Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAE 80W-90
Lube Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.08 L (4.4 pts.)
Trac-Lok Additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 ml (4 oz.)
Axle Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.07, 3.55, .4.10
Differential
Case Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
Case Flange Runout . . . . . . . . 0.076 mm (0.003 in.)
Ring Gear
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.95 cm (8.25 in.) Installer—C-4198
Backlash . . . . . . . . . . 0.12-0.20 mm (0.005-0.008 in.)
Runout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.127 mm (0.005 in.)
Pinion Bearing
Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 N·m (10-20 in.lbs.)
TORQUE – 8 1/4 INCH AXLE
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Diff. Cover Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Bearing Cap Bolt . . . . . . . . . . 136 N·m (100 ft. lbs.)
Pinion Nut–Minimum . . . . . . . 285 N·m (210 ft. lbs.)
Ring Gear Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.)
Puller—C-452
Handle—C-4171
Installer—C-3718
Installer—C-4076-B
Adjustment Rod—C-4164
Handle—C-4735-1
Puller/Press—C-293–PA
Holder—6719
Holder—8138
Adapters—C-293-48
Installer—C-4345
Plug—SP-3289
Remover—C-4307
Adapters—C-293-47
Installer—C-4308
Installer—C-4340
Trac-lok Tools—8140
Installer—D-130
Trac-lok Tools—6960
Installer—6448
Gauge Set—C-3715-B
XJ BRAKES 5-1
BRAKES
CONTENTS
page page
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ANTILOCK BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SERVICE WARNINGS & CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 2 BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION COMBINATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
BRAKE PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER BRAKE BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
RED BRAKE WARNING LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FRONT DISC BRAKE SHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
MASTER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DISC BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
COMBINATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 DRUM BRAKE SHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
FRONT DISC BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 WHEEL CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
REAR DRUM BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 BRAKE SUPPORT PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 REAR PARKING BRAKE CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . 21
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 PARKING BRAKE LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . 22
STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 DISC BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
RED BRAKE WARNING LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 WHEEL CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MASTER CYLINDER/POWER BOOSTER . . . . . . . 9 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
COMBINATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DISC BRAKE ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 REAR DRUM BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
BRAKE DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 WHEEL CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
BRAKE LINE AND HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ADJUSTMENTS
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
SERVICE PROCEDURES REAR DRUM BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 PARKING BRAKE CABLE TENSIONER . . . . . . . 28
MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SPECIFICATIONS
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 BRAKE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
DISC ROTOR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 BRAKE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
BRAKE DRUM MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
BRAKE TUBE FLARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SPECIAL TOOLS
BASE BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5-2 BRAKES XJ
GENERAL INFORMATION flush brake system components. These are the only
cleaning materials recommended. If system contam-
BRAKE SYSTEM ination is suspected, check the fluid for dirt, discol-
Power assist front disc and rear drum brakes are oration, or separation into distinct layers. Also
standard equipment. Disc brake components consist of check the reservoir cap seal for distortion. Drain
single piston calipers and ventilated rotors. Rear drum and flush the system with new brake fluid if con-
brakes are dual shoe units with cast brake drums. tamination is suspected.
The parking brake mechanism is lever and cable
operated. The cables are attached to levers on the CAUTION: Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent
rear drum brake secondary shoes. The parking quality fluid meeting SAE/DOT standards J1703 and
brakes are operated by a hand lever. DOT 3. Brake fluid must be clean and free of con-
A dual diaphragm vacuum power brake booster is taminants. Use fresh fluid from sealed containers
used for all applications. All models have an alumi- only to ensure proper antilock component opera-
num master cylinder with plastic reservoir. tion.
All models are equipped with a combination valve.
The valve contains a pressure differential valve and
switch and a fixed rate rear proportioning valve. CAUTION: Use Mopar multi-mileage or high temper-
Factory brake lining on all models consists of an ature grease to lubricate caliper slide surfaces,
organic base material combined with metallic parti- drum brake pivot pins, and shoe contact points on
cles. The original equipment linings do not contain the backing plates. Use multi-mileage grease or GE
asbestos. 661 or Dow 111 silicone grease on caliper slide pins
to ensure proper operation.
SERVICE WARNINGS & CAUTIONS
WARNING: DUST AND DIRT ACCUMULATING ON
BRAKE PARTS DURING NORMAL USE MAY CON- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
TAIN ASBESTOS FIBERS FROM AFTERMARKET
LININGS. BREATHING EXCESSIVE CONCENTRA- BRAKE PEDAL
TIONS OF ASBESTOS FIBERS CAN CAUSE SERI- A suspended-type brake pedal is used, the pedal
OUS BODILY HARM. EXERCISE CARE WHEN pivots on a shaft mounted in the pedal support
SERVICING BRAKE PARTS. DO NOT CLEAN bracket. The bracket is attached to the dash panel
BRAKE PARTS WITH COMPRESSED AIR OR BY and steering support bracket. The unit is serviced as
DRY BRUSHING. USE A VACUUM CLEANER SPE- an assembly, except for the pedal pad.
CIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE REMOVAL OF
ASBESTOS FIBERS FROM BRAKE COMPONENTS. STOP LAMP SWITCH
IF A SUITABLE VACUUM CLEANER IS NOT AVAIL- The plunger type stop lamp switch is mounted on a
ABLE, CLEANING SHOULD BE DONE WITH A bracket attached to the brake pedal support. The
WATER DAMPENED CLOTH. DO NOT SAND, OR switch can be adjusted when necessary.
GRIND BRAKE LINING UNLESS EQUIPMENT USED
IS DESIGNED TO CONTAIN THE DUST RESIDUE. RED BRAKE WARNING LAMP
DISPOSE OF ALL RESIDUE CONTAINING ASBES- A red warning lamp is used for the service brake
TOS FIBERS IN SEALED BAGS OR CONTAINERS portion of the hydraulic system. The lamp is located
TO MINIMIZE EXPOSURE TO YOURSELF AND OTH- in the instrument cluster. The red warning light
ERS. FOLLOW PRACTICES PRESCRIBED BY THE alerts the driver if a pressure differential exists
OCCUPATIONAL SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINIS- between the front and rear hydraulic systems or the
TRATION AND THE ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION parking brakes are applied.
AGENCY FOR THE HANDLING, PROCESSING, AND The lamp is turned on momentarily when the igni-
DISPOSITION OF DUST OR DEBRIS THAT MAY tion switch is turn to the on position. This is a self
CONTAIN ASBESTOS FIBERS. test to verify the lamp is operational.
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER

CAUTION: Never use gasoline, kerosene, alcohol, The booster assembly consists of a housing divided
motor oil, transmission fluid, or any fluid containing into separate chambers by two internal diaphragms.
mineral oil to clean the system components. These The outer edge of each diaphragm is attached to the
fluids damage rubber cups and seals. Use only booster housing. The diaphragms are connected to
fresh brake fluid or Mopar brake cleaner to clean or the booster primary push rod.
XJ BRAKES 5-3
Two push rods are used in the booster. The pri- The chamber areas forward of the booster dia-
mary push rod connects the booster to the brake phragms are exposed to vacuum from the intake
pedal. The secondary push rod connects the booster manifold. The chamber areas to the rear of the dia-
to the master cylinder to stroke the cylinder pistons. phragms, are exposed to normal atmospheric pres-
The atmospheric inlet valve is opened and closed sure of 101.3 kilopascals (14.7 pounds/square in.).
by the primary push rod. Booster vacuum supply is Brake pedal application causes the primary push
through a hose attached to an intake manifold fitting rod to open the atmospheric inlet valve. This exposes
at one end and to the booster check valve at the the area behind the diaphragms to atmospheric pres-
other. The vacuum check valve in the booster housing sure. The resulting pressure differential provides the
is a one-way device that prevents vacuum leak back. extra apply force for power assist.
Power assist is generated by utilizing the pressure
differential between normal atmospheric pressure MASTER CYLINDER
and a vacuum. The vacuum needed for booster oper- The master cylinder has a removable nylon reser-
ation is taken directly from the engine intake mani- voir. The cylinder body is made of aluminum and
fold. The entry point for atmospheric pressure is contains a primary and secondary piston assembly.
through a filter and inlet valve at the rear of the The cylinder body including the piston assemblies
housing (Fig. 1). are not serviceable. If diagnosis indicates an internal
problem with the cylinder body, it must be replaced
Fig. 1 Power Brake Booster–Typical

5-4 BRAKES XJ
as an assembly. The reservoir and grommets are the
only replaceable parts on the master cylinder.
COMBINATION VALVE
The combination valve contains a pressure differ-
ential valve and switch and a rear brake proportion-
ing valve. The valve is not repairable and must be
replaced as an assembly if diagnosis indicates this is
necessary.
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VALVE

The pressure differential switch is connected to the
brake warning light. The switch is actuated by move-
ment of the switch valve. The switch monitors fluid
pressure in the separate front/rear brake hydraulic
circuits.
A decrease or loss of fluid pressure in either
hydraulic circuit will cause the switch valve to shut-
tle to the low pressure side. Movement of the valve
pushes the switch plunger upward. This action closes
the switch internal contacts completing the electrical
circuit to the red warning light. The switch valve will
remain in an actuated position until repairs to the
brake system are made. Fig. 2 Brake Caliper Operation
piston. Upon release of the pedal, the caliper and pis-
PROPORTIONING VALVE ton return to a rest position. The brake shoes do not
The proportioning valve is used to balance front- retract an appreciable distance from the rotor. In
rear brake action at high decelerations. The valve fact, clearance is usually at, or close to zero. The rea-
allows normal fluid flow during moderate braking. sons for this are to keep road debris from getting
The valve only controls fluid flow during high decel- between the rotor and lining and in wiping the rotor
erations brake stops. surface clear each revolution.
The caliper piston seal controls the amount of pis-
FRONT DISC BRAKES ton extension needed to compensate for normal lining
The calipers are a single piston type. The calipers wear.
are free to slide laterally, this allows continuous com- During brake application, the seal is deflected out-
pensation for lining wear. ward by fluid pressure and piston movement (Fig. 3).
When the brakes are applied fluid pressure is When the brakes (and fluid pressure) are released,
exerted against the caliper piston. The fluid pressure the seal relaxes and retracts the piston.
is exerted equally and in all directions. This means The amount of piston retraction is determined by
pressure exerted against the caliper piston and the amount of seal deflection. Generally the amount
within the caliper bore will be equal (Fig. 2). is just enough to maintain contact between the pis-
Fluid pressure applied to the piston is transmitted ton and inboard brake shoe.
directly to the inboard brake shoe. This forces the
shoe lining against the inner surface of the disc
brake rotor. At the same time, fluid pressure within
the piston bore forces the caliper to slide inward on
the mounting bolts. This action brings the outboard
brake shoe lining into contact with the outer surface
of the disc brake rotor.
In summary, fluid pressure acting simultaneously
on both piston and caliper, produces a strong clamp-
ing action. When sufficient force is applied, friction
will stop the rotors from turning and bring the vehi-
cle to a stop.
Application and release of the brake pedal gener- Fig. 3 Lining Wear Compensation By Piston Seal
ates only a very slight movement of the caliper and
XJ BRAKES 5-5
Fig. 4 Brake Components

REAR DRUM BRAKE
The brake systems use a leading shoe (primary)
and trailing shoe (secondary) (Fig. 4). When the
brake pedal is depressed hydraulic pressure pushes
the rear brake wheel cylinder pistons outward. The
wheel cylinder push rods then push the brake shoes
outward against the brake drum. When the brake
pedal is released return springs attached to the
brake shoes pull the shoes back to there original
position.
PARKING BRAKE
Parking brake adjustment is controlled by a cable
tensioner mechanism. The cable tensioner, once
adjusted at the factory, should not need further
adjustment under normal circumstances. Adjustment
may be required if a new tensioner, or cables are Fig. 5 Parking Brake Components
installed, or disconnected. To apply the parking brakes, the hand lever is
pulled upward. This pulls the rear brake shoe actu-
PARKING BRAKE OPERATION ating levers forward, by means tensioner and cables.
A hand operated lever in the passenger compart- As the actuating lever is pulled forward, the parking
ment is the main application device. The front cable brake strut (which is connected to both shoes), exerts
is connected between the hand lever and the ten- a linear force against the primary brake shoe. This
sioner. The tensioner rod is attached to the equalizer action presses the primary shoe into contact with the
which is the connecting point for the rear cables (Fig. drum. Once the primary shoe contacts the drum,
5). force is exerted through the strut. This force is trans-
The rear cables are connected to the actuating ferred through the strut to the secondary brake shoe
lever on each secondary brake shoe. The levers are causing it to pivot into the drum as well.
attached to the brake shoes by a pin either pressed A gear type ratcheting mechanism is used to hold
into, or welded to the lever. A clip is used to secure the lever in an applied position. Parking brake
the pin in the brake shoe. The pin allows each lever release is accomplished by the hand lever release
to pivot independently of the brake shoe. button.
5-6 BRAKES XJ
A parking brake switch is mounted on the parking lacks free play, check pedal and power booster for
brake lever and is actuated by movement of the being loose or for bind condition. Do not road test
lever. The switch, which is in circuit with the red until condition is corrected.
warning light in the dash, will illuminate the warn- (6) Check booster vacuum check valve and hose.
ing light whenever the parking brakes are applied. (7) If components checked appear OK, road test
the vehicle.
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
Flexible rubber hose is used at both front brakes ROAD TESTING
and at the rear axle junction block. Double walled (1) If complaint involved low brake pedal, pump
steel tubing is used to connect the master cylinder to pedal and note if it comes back up to normal height.
the major hydraulic braking components and then to (2) Check brake pedal response with transmission
the flexible rubber hoses. in Neutral and engine running. Pedal should remain
firm under constant foot pressure.
(3) During road test, make normal and firm brake
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING stops in 25-40 mph range. Note faulty brake opera-
tion such as low pedal, hard pedal, fade, pedal pulsa-
BASE BRAKE SYSTEM tion, pull, grab, drag, noise, etc.
Base brake components consist of the brake shoes, (4) Attempt to stop the vehicle with the parking
calipers, wheel cylinders, brake drums, rotors, brake brake only and note grab, drag, noise, etc.
lines, master cylinder, booster, and parking brake com-
ponents. PEDAL FALLS AWAY
Brake diagnosis involves determining if the prob- A brake pedal that falls away under steady foot
lem is related to a mechanical, hydraulic, or vacuum pressure is generally the result of a system leak. The
operated component. leak point could be at a brake line, fitting, hose, or
The first diagnosis step is the preliminary check. caliper/wheel cylinder. If leakage is severe, fluid will
be evident at or around the leaking component.
PRELIMINARY BRAKE CHECK Internal leakage (seal by-pass) in the master cylin-
(1) Check condition of tires and wheels. Damaged der caused by worn or damaged piston cups, may
wheels and worn, damaged, or underinflated tires also be the problem cause.
can cause pull, shudder, vibration, and a condition An internal leak in the ABS or RWAL system may
similar to grab. also be the problem with no physically evident.
(2) If complaint was based on noise when braking,
check suspension components. Jounce front and rear LOW PEDAL
of vehicle and listen for noise that might be caused If a low pedal is experienced, pump the pedal sev-
by loose, worn or damaged suspension or steering eral times. If the pedal comes back up worn linings,
components. rotors, drums, or rear brakes out of adjustment are
(3) Inspect brake fluid level and condition. Note that the most likely causes. The proper course of action is
the brake reservoir fluid level will decrease in propor- to inspect and replace all worn component and make
tion to normal lining wear. Also note that brake fluid the proper adjustments.
tends to darken over time. This is normal and
should not be mistaken for contamination. SPONGY PEDAL
(a) If fluid level is abnormally low, look for evi- A spongy pedal is most often caused by air in the
dence of leaks at calipers, wheel cylinders, brake system. However, thin brake drums or substandard
lines, and master cylinder. brake lines and hoses can also cause a spongy pedal.
(b) If fluid appears contaminated, drain out a The proper course of action is to bleed the system,
sample to examine. System will have to be flushed and replace thin drums and substandard quality
if fluid is separated into layers, or contains a sub- brake hoses if suspected.
stance other than brake fluid. The system seals
and cups will also have to be replaced after flush- HARD PEDAL OR HIGH PEDAL EFFORT
ing. Use clean brake fluid to flush the system. A hard pedal or high pedal effort may be due to
(4) Check parking brake operation. Verify free lining that is water soaked, contaminated, glazed, or
movement and full release of cables and pedal. Also badly worn. The power booster or check valve could
note if vehicle was being operated with parking also be faulty.
brake partially applied.
(5) Check brake pedal operation. Verify that pedal PEDAL PULSATION
does not bind and has adequate free play. If pedal Pedal pulsation is caused by components that are
loose, or beyond tolerance limits.
XJ BRAKES 5-7
The primary cause of pulsation are disc brake • Binding caliper
rotors with excessive lateral runout or thickness vari- • Loose caliper
ation, or out of round brake drums. Other causes are • Rusty caliper slide surfaces
loose wheel bearings or calipers and worn, damaged • Improper brake shoes
tires. • Damaged rotor
A worn, damaged wheel bearing or suspension
NOTE: Some pedal pulsation may be felt during component are further causes of pull. A damaged
ABS activation. front tire (bruised, ply separation) can also cause
pull.
A common and frequently misdiagnosed pull condi-
BRAKE DRAG
tion is where direction of pull changes after a few
Brake drag occurs when the lining is in constant stops. The cause is a combination of brake drag fol-
contact with the rotor or drum. Drag can occur at one lowed by fade at one of the brake units.
wheel, all wheels, fronts only, or rears only. As the dragging brake overheats, efficiency is so
Drag is a product of incomplete brake shoe release. reduced that fade occurs. Since the opposite brake
Drag can be minor or severe enough to overheat the unit is still functioning normally, its braking effect is
linings, rotors and drums. magnified. This causes pull to switch direction in
Minor drag will usually cause slight surface char- favor of the normally functioning brake unit.
ring of the lining. It can also generate hard spots in An additional point when diagnosing a change in
rotors and drums from the overheat-cool down pro- pull condition concerns brake cool down. Remember
cess. In most cases, the rotors, drums, wheels and that pull will return to the original direction, if the
tires are quite warm to the touch after the vehicle is dragging brake unit is allowed to cool down (and is
stopped. not seriously damaged).
Severe drag can char the brake lining all the way
through. It can also distort and score rotors and REAR BRAKE GRAB OR PULL
drums to the point of replacement. The wheels, tires Rear grab or pull is usually caused by improperly
and brake components will be extremely hot. In adjusted or seized parking brake cables, contami-
severe cases, the lining may generate smoke as it nated lining, bent or binding shoes and support
chars from overheating. plates, or improperly assembled components. This is
Common causes of brake drag are: particularly true when only one rear wheel is
• Seized or improperly adjusted parking brake involved. However, when both rear wheels are
cables. affected, the master cylinder or proportioning valve
• Loose/worn wheel bearing. could be at fault.
• Seized caliper or wheel cylinder piston.
• Caliper binding on corroded bushings or rusted BRAKES DO NOT HOLD AFTER DRIVING THROUGH DEEP
slide surfaces. WATER PUDDLES
• Loose caliper mounting. This condition is generally caused by water soaked
• Drum brake shoes binding on worn/damaged lining. If the lining is only wet, it can be dried by
support plates. driving with the brakes very lightly applied for a
• Mis-assembled components. mile or two. However, if the lining is both soaked and
If brake drag occurs at all wheels, the problem dirt contaminated, cleaning and/or replacement will
may be related to a blocked master cylinder return be necessary.
port, or faulty power booster (binds-does not release).
BRAKE LINING CONTAMINATION
BRAKE FADE Brake lining contamination is mostly a product of
Brake fade is usually a product of overheating leaking calipers or wheel cylinders, worn seals, driv-
caused by brake drag. However, brake overheating ing through deep water puddles, or lining that has
and resulting fade can also be caused by riding the become covered with grease and grit during repair.
brake pedal, making repeated high deceleration stops Contaminated lining should be replaced to avoid fur-
in a short time span, or constant braking on steep ther brake problems.
mountain roads. Refer to the Brake Drag information
in this section for causes. WHEEL AND TIRE PROBLEMS
Some conditions attributed to brake components
BRAKE PULL may actually be caused by a wheel or tire problem.
Front brake pull condition could result from: A damaged wheel can cause shudder, vibration and
• Contaminated lining in one caliper pull. A worn or damaged tire can also cause pull.
• Seized caliper piston
5-8 BRAKES XJ
Severely worn tires with very little tread left can SWITCH CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION
produce a grab-like condition as the tire loses and • Terminals 1 and 2 are for brake sensor circuit.
recovers traction. Flat-spotted tires can cause vibra- • Terminals 5 and 6 are for the stop lamp circuit.
tion and generate shudder during brake operation. A • Terminals 3 and 4 are for the speed control cir-
tire with internal damage such as a severe bruise, cuit.
cut, or ply separation can cause pull and vibration.
BRAKE NOISES
Some brake noise is common with rear drum
brakes and on some disc brakes during the first few
stops after a vehicle has been parked overnight or
stored. This is primarily due to the formation of trace
corrosion (light rust) on metal surfaces. This light
corrosion is typically cleared from the metal surfaces
after a few brake applications causing the noise to
subside.
BRAKE SQUEAK/SQUEAL
Brake squeak or squeal may be due to linings that
are wet or contaminated with brake fluid, grease, or
oil. Glazed linings and rotors with hard spots can
also contribute to squeak. Dirt and foreign material Fig. 6 Stop Lamp Switch Terminal Identification
embedded in the brake lining will also cause squeak/
SWITCH CONTINUITY TEST
squeal.
(1) Check continuity between terminal pins 5 and
A very loud squeak or squeal is frequently a sign of
6 as follows:
severely worn brake lining. If the lining has worn
(a) Pull plunger all the way out to fully extended
through to the brake shoes in spots, metal-to-metal
position.
contact occurs. If the condition is allowed to continue,
(b) Attach test leads to pins 5 and 6 and note
rotors and drums can become so scored that replace-
ohmmeter reading.
ment is necessary.
(c) If continuity exists, proceed to next test.
BRAKE CHATTER Replace switch if meter indicates lack of continuity
(shorted or open).
Brake chatter is usually caused by loose or worn
(2) Check continuity between terminal pins 1 and
components, or glazed/burnt lining. Rotors with hard
2 and pins 3 and 4 as follows:
spots can also contribute to chatter. Additional causes
(a) Push switch plunger inward to fully
of chatter are out-of-tolerance rotors, brake lining not
retracted position.
securely attached to the shoes, loose wheel bearings
(b) Attach test leads to pins 1 and 2 and note
and contaminated brake lining.
ohmmeter reading.
THUMP/CLUNK NOISE (c) If continuity exists, switch is OK. Replace
switch if meter indicates lack of continuity (switch
Thumping or clunk noises during braking are fre-
is open).
quently not caused by brake components. In many
cases, such noises are caused by loose or damaged
steering, suspension, or engine components. However, RED BRAKE WARNING LAMP
calipers that bind on the slide surfaces can generate The red brake warning lamp will illuminate under
a thump or clunk noise. In addition, worn out, the following conditions:
improperly adjusted, or improperly assembled rear • Self test at start-up.
brake shoes can also produce a thump noise. • Parking brakes are applied.
• Leak in front/rear brake hydraulic circuit.
STOP LAMP SWITCH If the red light remains on after start-up, first ver-
ify that the parking brakes are fully released. Then
Stop lamp switch operation can be tested with an
check pedal action and fluid level. If the lamp on and
ohmmeter. The ohmmeter is used to check continuity
the brake pedal is low this indicates the pressure dif-
between the pin terminals at different plunger posi-
ferential switch and valve have been actuated due to
tions (Fig. 6).
a leak in the hydraulic system.
NOTE: The switch wire harness must be discon- On models with ABS brakes, the amber warning
nected before testing switch continuity. lamp only illuminates during the self test and when
XJ BRAKES 5-9
an ABS malfunction has occurred. The ABS lamp
operates independently of the red warning lamp.
For additional information refer to Group 8W.
MASTER CYLINDER/POWER BOOSTER

(1) Start engine and check booster vacuum hose
connections. A hissing noise indicates vacuum leak.
Correct any vacuum leak before proceeding.
(2) Stop engine and shift transmission into Neu-
tral.
(3) Pump brake pedal until all vacuum reserve in
booster is depleted.
(4) Press and hold brake pedal under light foot
pressure. The pedal should hold firm, if the pedal
falls away master cylinder is faulty (internal leak-
age).
(5) Start engine and note pedal action it should
fall away slightly under light foot pressure then hold
firm. If no pedal action is discernible, power booster,
vacuum supply, or vacuum check valve is faulty. Pro-
ceed to the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST.
(6) If the POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST
Fig. 7 Typical Booster Vacuum Test Connections
passes, rebuild booster vacuum reserve as follows:
Release brake pedal. Increase engine speed to 1500
rpm, close the throttle and immediately stop turn off
ignition to stop engine.
(7) Wait a minimum of 90 seconds and try brake
action again. Booster should provide two or more vac-
uum assisted pedal applications. If vacuum assist is
not provided, booster is faulty.
POWER BOOSTER VACUUM TEST

(1) Connect vacuum gauge to booster check valve
with short length of hose and T-fitting (Fig. 7).
(2) Start and run engine at curb idle speed for one
minute.
(3) Observe the vacuum supply. If vacuum supply
is not adequate, repair vacuum supply.
(4) Clamp hose shut between vacuum source and
check valve. Fig. 8 Vacuum Check Valve And Seal
(5) Stop engine and observe vacuum gauge. COMBINATION VALVE
(6) If vacuum drops more than one inch HG (33
millibars) within 15 seconds, booster diaphragm or PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
check valve is faulty.
(1) Have helper sit in drivers seat to apply brake
pedal and observe red brake warning light.
POWER BOOSTER CHECK VALVE TEST
(2) Raise vehicle on hoist.
(1) Disconnect vacuum hose from check valve.
(3) Connect bleed hose to a rear wheel cylinder
(2) Remove check valve and valve seal from
and immerse hose end in container partially filled
booster.
with brake fluid.
(3) Use a hand operated vacuum pump for test.
(4) Have helper press and hold brake pedal to floor
(4) Apply 15-20 inches vacuum at large end of
and observe warning light.
check valve (Fig. 8).
(a) If warning light illuminates, switch is operat-
(5) Vacuum should hold steady. If gauge on pump
ing correctly.
indicates vacuum loss, check valve is faulty and
(b) If light fails to illuminate, check circuit fuse,
should be replaced.
bulb, and wiring. The parking brake switch can be
used to aid in identifying whether or not the brake
5 - 10 BRAKES XJ
light bulb and fuse is functional. Repair or replace
parts as necessary and test differential pressure
switch operation again.
(5) If warning light still does not illuminate,
switch is faulty. Replace combination valve assembly,
bleed brake system and verify proper switch and
valve operation.
REAR PROPORTIONING VALVE

The valve controls fluid flow. If fluid enters the
valve and does not exit the valve the combination
valve must be replaced.
DISC BRAKE ROTOR

The rotor braking surfaces should not be refinished
unless necessary.
Light surface rust and scale can be removed with a
lathe equipped with dual sanding discs. The rotor
surfaces can be restored by machining in a disc brake Fig. 9 Checking Rotor Runout And Thickness
lathe if surface scoring and wear are light. Variation
Replace the rotor under the following conditions:
• severely scored
• tapered
• hard spots
• cracked
• below minimum thickness
ROTOR MINIMUM THICKNESS

Measure rotor thickness at the center of the brake
shoe contact surface. Replace the rotor if worn below
minimum thickness, or if machining would reduce
thickness below the allowable minimum.
Rotor minimum thickness is usually specified on
the rotor hub. The specification is either stamped or
cast into the hub surface.
ROTOR RUNOUT
Check rotor lateral runout with dial indicator
C-3339 (Fig. 9). Excessive lateral runout will cause Fig. 10 Measuring Rotor Thickness
brake pedal pulsation and rapid, uneven wear of the
brake shoes. Position the dial indicator plunger BRAKE DRUM
approximately 25.4 mm (1 in.) inward from the rotor The maximum allowable diameter of the drum
edge. Maximum allowable rotor runout is 0.102 mm braking surface is indicated on the drum outer edge.
(0.004 in.). Generally, a drum can be machined to a maximum of
1.52 mm (0.060 in.) oversize. Always replace the
ROTOR THICKNESS VARIATION drum if machining would cause drum diameter to
Variations in rotor thickness will cause pedal pul- exceed the size limit indicated on the drum.
sation, noise and shudder.
Measure rotor thickness at 6 to 12 points around BRAKE DRUM RUNOUT
the rotor face (Fig. 10). Measure drum diameter and runout with an accu-
Position the micrometer approximately 25.4 mm (1 rate gauge. The most accurate method of measure-
in.) from the rotor outer circumference for each mea- ment involves mounting the drum in a brake lathe
surement. and checking variation and runout with a dial indi-
Thickness should not vary by more than 0.013 mm cator.
(0.0005 in.) from point-to-point on the rotor. Machine Variations in drum diameter should not exceed
or replace the rotor if necessary. 0.076 mm (0.003 in.). Drum runout should not exceed
0.20 mm (0.008 in.) out of round. Machine the drum
XJ BRAKES 5 - 11
if runout or variation exceed these values. Replace ing in the reservoir and contaminating the brake
the drum if machining causes the drum to exceed the fluid.
maximum allowable diameter. The reservoir has a ADD and a FULL mark on the
side (Fig. 11) fill to the FULL mark.
BRAKE LINE AND HOSES
Flexible rubber hose is used at both front brakes
and at the rear axle junction block. Inspect the hoses
whenever the brake system is serviced, at every
engine oil change, or whenever the vehicle is in for
service.
Inspect the hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. Replace any brake hose immediately if
the fabric casing of the hose is exposed due to cracks
or abrasions.
Also check brake hose installation. Faulty installa-
tion can result in kinked, twisted hoses, or contact
with the wheels and tires or other chassis compo-
nents. All of these conditions can lead to scuffing,
cracking and eventual failure.
The steel brake lines should be inspected periodi-
cally for evidence of corrosion, twists, kinks, leaks, or Fig. 11 Master Cylinder Fluid Level
other damage. Heavily corroded lines will eventually
rust through causing leaks. In any case, corroded or MASTER CYLINDER BLEEDING
damaged brake lines should be replaced. A new master cylinder should be bled before instal-
Factory replacement brake lines and hoses are rec- lation on the vehicle. Required bleeding tools include
ommended to ensure quality, correct length and supe- bleed tubes and a wood dowel to stroke the pistons.
rior fatigue life. Care should be taken to make sure Bleed tubes can be fabricated from brake line.
that brake line and hose mating surfaces are clean
and free from nicks and burrs. Also remember that BLEEDING PROCEDURE
right and left brake hoses are not interchangeable. (1) Mount master cylinder in vise.
Use new copper seal washers at all caliper connec- (2) Attach bleed tubes to cylinder outlet ports.
tions. Be sure brake line connections are properly Then position each tube end into reservoir (Fig. 12).
made (not cross threaded) and tightened to recom- (3) Fill reservoir with fresh brake fluid.
mended torque. (4) Press cylinder pistons inward with wood dowel.
Then release pistons and allow them to return under
BRAKE FLUID CONTAMINATION spring pressure. Continue bleeding operations until
Indications of fluid contamination are swollen or air bubbles are no longer visible in fluid.
deteriorated rubber parts.
Swollen rubber parts indicate the presence of
petroleum in the brake fluid.
To test for contamination, put a small amount of
drained brake fluid in clear glass jar. If fluid sepa-
rates into layers, there is mineral oil or other fluid
contamination of the brake fluid.
If brake fluid is contaminated, drain and thor-
oughly flush system. Replace master cylinder, propor-
tioning valve, caliper seals, wheel cylinder seals,
Antilock Brakes hydraulic unit and all hydraulic
fluid hoses.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
BRAKE FLUID LEVEL Fig. 12 Master Cylinder Bleeding–Typical
Always clean the master cylinder reservoir and cap
before adding fluid. This will prevent dirt from fall-
5 - 12 BRAKES XJ
BASE BRAKE BLEEDING

Use Mopar brake fluid, or an equivalent quality
fluid meeting SAE J1703-F and DOT 3 standards
only. Use fresh, clean fluid from a sealed container at
all times.
Do not pump the brake pedal at any time while
bleeding. Air in the system will be compressed into
small bubbles that are distributed throughout the
hydraulic system. This will make additional bleeding
operations necessary.
Do not allow the master cylinder to run out of fluid
during bleed operations. An empty cylinder will allow
additional air to be drawn into the system. Check the
cylinder fluid level frequently and add fluid as
needed.
Bleed only one brake component at a time in the
following sequence:
• Master Cylinder
• Combination Valve
• Right Rear Wheel
• Left Rear Wheel Fig. 13 Bleed Hose Setup
• Right Front Wheel
• Left Front Wheel DISC ROTOR MACHINING
The disc brake rotor can be machined if scored or
MANUAL BLEEDING worn. The lathe must machine both sides of the rotor
(1) Remove reservoir filler caps and fill reservoir. simultaneously with dual cutter heads. Equipment
(2) If calipers, or wheel cylinders were overhauled, capable of machining only one side at a time may
open all caliper and wheel cylinder bleed screws. produce a tapered rotor. A hub mounted on-vehicle
Then close each bleed screw as fluid starts to drip lathe is recommended. This type of lathe trues the
from it. Top off master cylinder reservoir once more rotor to the vehicles hub/bearing.
before proceeding.
(3) Attach one end of bleed hose to bleed screw CAUTION: Brake rotors that do not meet minimum
and insert opposite end in glass container partially thickness specifications before or after machining
filled with brake fluid (Fig. 13). Be sure end of bleed must be replaced.
hose is immersed in fluid.
(4) Open up bleeder, then have a helper press
down the brake pedal. Once the pedal is down close
BRAKE DRUM MACHINING
the bleeder. Repeat bleeding until fluid stream is The brake drums can be machined on a drum lathe
clear and free of bubbles. Then move to the next when necessary. Initial machining cuts should be lim-
wheel. ited to 0.12 - 0.20 mm (0.005 - 0.008 in.) at a time as
heavier feed rates can produce taper and surface
PRESSURE BLEEDING variation. Final finish cuts of 0.025 to 0.038 mm
Follow the manufacturers instructions carefully (0.001 to 0.0015 in.) are recommended and will gen-
when using pressure equipment. Do not exceed the erally provide the best surface finish.
tank manufacturers pressure recommendations. Gen- Be sure the drum is securely mounted in the lathe
erally, a tank pressure of 15-20 psi is sufficient for before machining operations. A damper strap should
bleeding. always be used around the drum to reduce vibration
Fill the bleeder tank with recommended fluid and and avoid chatter marks.
purge air from the tank lines before bleeding. The maximum allowable diameter of the drum
Do not pressure bleed without a proper master cyl- braking surface is stamped or cast into the drum
inder adapter. The wrong adapter can lead to leak- outer edge.
age, or drawing air back into the system. Use
CAUTION: Replace the drum if machining will
adapter provided with the equipment or Adapter
cause the drum to exceed the maximum allowable
6921.
diameter.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 13
BRAKE TUBE FLARING

A preformed metal brake tube is recommended and
preferred for all repairs. However, double-wall steel
tube can be used for emergency repair when factory
replacement parts are not readily available.
Special bending tools are needed to avoid kinking
or twisting of metal brake tubes. Special flaring tools
are needed to make a double inverted flar or ISO
flare (Fig. 14).
Fig. 15 Inverted Flare Tools

(2) Remove any burrs from the inside of the tube.
(3) Install tube nut on the tube.
(4) Position the tube in the flaring tool flush with
the top of the tool bar (Fig. 16). Then tighten the tool
bar on the tube.
(5) Install the correct size adaptor on the flaring
tool yoke screw.
(6) Lubricate the adaptor.
(7) Align the adaptor and yoke screw over the tube
Fig. 14 Inverted Flare And ISO Flare (Fig. 16).
DOUBLE INVERTED FLARING (8) Turn the yoke screw in until the adaptor is
(1) Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. squarely seated on the tool bar.
(2) Ream cut edges of tubing to ensure proper
flare.
(3) Install replacement tube nut on the tube.
(4) Insert tube in flaring tool.
(5) Place gauge form over the end of the tube.
(6) Push tubing through flaring tool jaws until
tube contacts recessed notch in gauge that matches
tube diameter.
(7) Tighten the tool bar on the tube
(8) Insert plug on gauge in the tube. Then swing
compression disc over gauge and center tapered flar-
ing screw in recess of compression disc (Fig. 15).
(9) Tighten tool handle until plug gauge is
squarely seated on jaws of flaring tool. This will start
the inverted flare.
(10) Remove the plug gauge and complete the
inverted flare.
ISO FLARING
To make a ISO flare use Snap-Ont Flaring Tool
TFM-428 or equivalent.
(1) Cut off damaged tube with Tubing Cutter. Fig. 16 ISO Flaring
5 - 14 BRAKES XJ
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (5) Remove pedal and support bracket as an

assembly from the vehicle.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
REMOVAL
(1) Remove steering column cover and lower trim
panel for switch access (if necessary).
(2) Press brake pedal downward to fully applied
position.
(3) Rotate switch approximately 30° in counter-
clockwise direction to unlock switch retainer. Then
pull switch rearward and out of bracket.
(4) Disconnect switch wire harness and remove
switch from vehicle (Fig. 17).
Fig. 18 Booster Push Rod

INSTALLATION
(1) Install pedal and support bracket as an assem-
bly into the vehicle.
(2) Install nuts securing the booster to the pedal
support bracket and nuts to the column bracket.
(3) Tighten nuts to 39 N·m (29 ft. lbs.).
(4) Lubricate the brake pedal pin and bushings
with Mopar multi-mileage grease.
(5) Install booster push rod on pedal pin and
install new retainer clip.
(6) Install knee blocker.
Fig. 17 Stop Lamp Switch
INSTALLATION COMBINATION VALVE
(1) Pull switch plunger all the way out to fully
NOTE: The combination valve is not repairable. The
extended position.
valve is serviced as an assembly only.
(2) Connect harness wires to switch.
(3) Press and hold brake pedal in applied position.
(4) Install switch as follows: Align tab on switch REMOVAL
with notch in switch bracket. Then insert switch in (1) Remove air cleaner cover and hose for access to
bracket and turn it clockwise about 30° to lock it in valve.
place. (2) Unsnap connector lock tabs and disconnect dif-
(5) Release brake pedal. Then pull pedal fully rear- ferential pressure switch wire at combination valve
ward. Pedal will set plunger to correct position as (Fig. 19). Do not pull switch wire to disconnect.
pedal pushes plunger into switch body. Switch will (3) Disconnect brake lines at combination valve
make ratcheting sound as it self adjusts. (Fig. 20).
(4) Remove mounting nut and remove valve.
BRAKE PEDAL
INSTALLATION
REMOVAL (1) Install valve and tighten mounting nut to 17
(1) Remove knee blocker under the steering col- N·m (155 in. lbs.).
umn. (2) Connect brake lines to replacement valve. Start
(2) Remove retainer clip securing booster push rod line fittings by hand to avoid cross threading.
to pedal (Fig. 18). (3) Tighten brake line fittings to 19 N·m (170 in.
(3) Remove stop lamp switch. lbs.).
(4) Remove nuts securing the booster to the pedal (4) Connect wire to pressure differential switch.
support bracket and nuts to the column bracket. (5) Bleed base brakes.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 15
(8) If master cylinder reservoir requires service,
refer to reservoir replacement procedure in this sec-
tion.
Fig. 21 Master Cylinder

INSTALLATION
Fig. 19 Differential Pressure Switch
NOTE: If master cylinder is replaced, bleed cylinder
before installation.
(1) Remove protective sleeve from primary piston

shank on new master cylinder.
(2) Clean cylinder mounting surface of brake
booster.
(3) Install master cylinder onto brake booster
studs.
(4) Install mounting nuts and tighten to 17.5 N·m
(155 in. lbs.).
(5) Install combination valve and install mounting
nuts.
(6) Connect brake lines to master cylinder and
combination valve and tighten to 19 N·m (170 in.
lbs.).
(7) Connect differential pressure switch wire to the
Fig. 20 Combination Valve combination valve.
MASTER CYLINDER (8) On RHD vehicles install the coolant reserve/
overflow tank. Refer to Group 7 Cooling System.
REMOVAL (9) Fill and bleed base brake system.
(1) On RHD vehicles remove the coolant reserve/
POWER BRAKE BOOSTER
(2) Remove brake lines at master cylinder and
combination valve (Fig. 20).
REMOVAL
(3) Disconnect differential pressure switch wire (1) On RHD vehicles remove the coolant reserve/
from the combination valve. overflow tank. Refer to Group 7 Cooling System.
(4) Remove mounting nuts from the combination (2) Disconnect brake lines at master cylinder.
valve bracket and remove the valve (Fig. 20). (3) Disconnect wire at combination valve differen-
(5) Remove mounting nuts from the master cylin- tial pressure switch.
der (Fig. 21). (4) Remove nut mounting combination valve
(6) Remove master cylinder. bracket to booster studs and remove valve.
(7) Remove cylinder cover and drain fluid. (5) Remove nuts mounting master cylinder to
booster studs and remove cylinder.
5 - 16 BRAKES XJ
(6) Disconnect vacuum hose from booster check (4) Slide booster push rod onto the brake pedal.
valve. Then secure push rod to pedal pin with retaining
(7) Remove knee blocker under the steering col- clip.
umn.
(8) Remove retaining clip that secures booster NOTE: Lubricate the pedal pin and bushing with
push rod to brake pedal (Fig. 22). Mopar multi-mileage grease before installation.
(9) Remove nuts attaching booster to passenger
compartment side of dash panel (Fig. 23). (5) Tighten booster mounting nuts to 39 N·m (29
ft. lbs.).
(6) Install the knee blocker.
(7) If original master cylinder is being installed,
check condition of seal at rear of master cylinder.
Replace seal if cut, or torn.
(8) Clean cylinder mounting surface of brake
booster. Use shop towel wetted with brake cleaner for
this purpose. Dirt, grease, or similar materials will
prevent proper cylinder seating and could result in
vacuum leak.
(9) Align and install master cylinder on booster
studs. Install mounting nuts and tighten to 17.5 N·m
(155 in. lbs.).
(10) Connect vacuum hose to booster check valve.
(11) Connect and secure brake lines to combination
valve and master cylinder. Start all brake line fit-
tings by hand to avoid cross threading.
Fig. 22 Booster Push Rod (12) Install combination valve on booster studs.
Tighten bracket mounting nuts to 17.5 N·m (155 in.
lbs.).
(13) Connect wire to combination valve switch.
(14) On RHD vehicles install the coolant reserve/
(15) Fill and bleed base brake system.
(16) Verify proper brake operation before moving
vehicle.
FRONT DISC BRAKE CALIPER

REMOVAL
(2) Remove front wheel and tire assembly.
(3) Drain small amount of fluid from master cylin-
der brake reservoir with suction gun.
Fig. 23 Booster Mounting (4) Bottom caliper piston in bore with C-clamp.
Position clamp screw on outboard brake shoe and
(10) In engine compartment, slide booster studs clamp frame on rear of caliper (Fig. 24). Do not
out of dash panel, tilt booster upward, and remove allow clamp screw to bear directly on outboard
booster from engine compartment. shoe retainer spring. Use wood or metal spacer
(11) Remove dash seal from booster. between shoe and clamp screw.
(5) Remove brake hose mounting bolt and discard
INSTALLATION washers (Fig. 25).
(1) Install dash seal on booster. (6) Remove caliper mounting bolts (Fig. 26).
(2) Align and position booster on dash panel. (7) Tilt top of caliper outward with pry tool if nec-
(3) In passenger compartment, install booster essary (Fig. 27) and remove caliper.
mounting nuts. Tighten nuts just enough to hold (8) Remove caliper from vehicle.
booster in place.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 17
Fig. 24 Bottoming Caliper Piston With C-Clamp Fig. 26 Caliper Mounting Bolts
Fig. 27 Caliper Removal
Fig. 25 Brake Hose And Bolt

INSTALLATION
(1) Clean brake shoe mounting ledges with wire
brush and apply light coat of Mopar multi-mileage
grease to surfaces (Fig. 28).
(2) Install caliper by position notches at lower end
of brake shoes on bottom mounting ledge. Then
rotate caliper over rotor and seat notches at upper
end of shoes on top mounting ledge (Fig. 29).
(3) Coat caliper mounting bolts with silicone
grease. Then install and tighten bolts to 15 N·m (11
ft. lbs.). Fig. 28 Caliper Lubrication Points
5 - 18 BRAKES XJ
FRONT DISC BRAKE SHOES

REMOVAL
(2) Remove wheel and tire assembly.
(3) Remove caliper.
(4) Pressing one end of outboard shoe inward to
disengage shoe lug. Then rotate shoe upward until
retainer spring clears caliper. Press opposite end of
shoe inward to disengage shoe lug and rotate shoe up
and out of caliper (Fig. 31).
Fig. 29 Caliper Installation

CAUTION: If new caliper bolts are being installed,
or if the original reason for repair was a drag/pull
condition, check caliper bolt length before proceed-
ing. Bolts must not have a shank length greater
than 67.6 mm (2.66 in.) (Fig. 30). Fig. 31 Outboard Brake Shoe Removal
(5) Grasp ends of inboard shoe and tilt shoe out-
ward to release springs from caliper piston (Fig. 32)
and remove shoe from caliper.
NOTE: If original brake shoes will be used, keep

them in sets left and right. They are not inter-
changeable.
Fig. 30 Mounting Bolt Dimensions

(4) Install brake hose to caliper with new seal
washers and tighten fitting bolt to 31 N·m (23 ft.
lbs.).
CAUTION: Verify brake hose is not twisted or

kinked before tightening fitting bolt.
(5) Bleed base brake system. Fig. 32 Inboard Brake Shoe Removal
(6) Install wheel and tire assemblies. (6) Secure caliper to nearby suspension part with
(7) Remove supports and lower vehicle. wire. Do not allow brake hose to support caliper
(8) Verify firm pedal before moving vehicle. weight.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 19
(7) Wipe caliper off with shop rags or towels. DRUM BRAKE SHOES
CAUTION: Do not use compressed air, this can REMOVAL
unseat dust boot and force dirt into piston bore. (1) Raise vehicle and remove rear wheels.
(2) Remove and discard spring nuts securing
INSTALLATION drums to wheel studs.
(3) Remove brake drums. If drums prove difficult
(1) Install inboard shoe in caliper and verify shoe
to remove, retract brake shoes. Remove access plug
retaining is fully seated into the piston.
at the rear of backing plate and back off adjuster
(2) Starting one end of outboard shoe in caliper
screw with brake tool and screwdriver.
and rotating shoe downward into place. Verify shoe
(4) Remove U-clip and washer securing adjuster
locating lugs and shoe spring are seated.
cable to parking brake lever (Fig. 34).
(3) Install caliper.
(5) Remove primary and secondary return springs
(4) Install wheel and tire assembly.
from anchor pin with brake spring pliers.
(5) Remove support and lower vehicle.
(6) Remove hold-down springs, retainers and pins
(6) Pump brake pedal until caliper pistons and
with standard retaining spring tool.
brake shoes are seated.
(7) Install spring clamps on wheel cylinders to
(7) Top off brake fluid level if necessary.
hold pistons in place.
(8) Remove adjuster lever, adjuster screw and
DISC BRAKE ROTOR
spring.
(9) Remove adjuster cable and cable guide.
REMOVAL
(10) Remove brake shoes and parking brake strut.
(1) Remove wheel and tire assemble.
(11) Disconnect cable from parking brake lever and
(2) Remove caliper.
remove lever.
(3) Remove retainers securing rotor to hub studs
(Fig. 33).
INSTALLATION
(4) Remove rotor from hub.
(1) Clean support plate with brake cleaner.
(5) If rotor shield requires service, remove front
(2) If new drums are being installed, remove pro-
hub and bearing assembly.
tective coating with carburetor cleaner followed by
final rinse with brake cleaner.
(3) Clean and lubricate anchor pin with light coat
of Mopar multi-mileage grease.
(4) Apply Mopar multi-mileage grease to brake
shoe contact surfaces of support plate (Fig. 35).
(5) Lubricate adjuster screw threads and pivot
with spray lube.
(6) Attach parking brake lever to secondary brake
shoe. Use new washer and U-clip to secure lever.
(7) Remove wheel cylinder clamps.
(8) Attach parking brake cable to lever.
(9) Install brake shoes on support plate. Secure
shoes with new hold-down springs, pins and retain-
ers.
(10) Install parking brake strut and spring.
Fig. 33 Rotor & Hub (11) Install guide plate and adjuster cable on
anchor pin.
INSTALLATION (12) Install primary and secondary return springs.
(1) If new rotor is being installed, remove protec- (13) Install adjuster cable guide on secondary
tive coating from rotor surfaces with carburetor shoe.
cleaner. (14) Lubricate and assemble adjuster screw.
(2) Install rotor on hub. (15) Install adjuster screw, spring and lever and
(3) Install caliper. connect to adjuster cable.
(4) Install wheel and tire assembly. (16) Adjust shoes to drum.
(17) Install wheel/tire assemblies and lower vehi-
cle.
(18) Verify firm brake pedal before moving vehicle.
5 - 20 BRAKES XJ
Fig. 34 Drum Brake Components—Typical

(3) Connect brake line to cylinder.
(4) Install brake shoe return spring.
(5) Install brake drum.
(6) Install wheel and tire assembly.
(7) Bleed base brake system.
BRAKE SUPPORT PLATE

REMOVAL
(1) Remove wheel and tire assembly and brake
drum.
(2) Remove brake shoe assembly.
(3) Remove parking brake cable from parking
brake lever.
(4) Compress parking brake cable retainer tabs.
Then push retainer and cable through and out of
Fig. 35 Shoe Contact Surfaces support plate.
WHEEL CYLINDER (5) Disconnect brake line at wheel cylinder.
(6) Remove wheel cylinder from support plate.
REMOVAL (7) Remove axle shaft, refer to Group 3 for proce-
(1) Remove wheel and tire assembly. dures.
(2) Remove brake drum. (8) Remove bolts attaching support plate to axle
(3) Disconnect wheel cylinder brake line. and remove support plate.
(4) Remove brake shoe return springs and move
shoes out of engagement with cylinder push rods. INSTALLATION
(5) Remove cylinder attaching bolts and remove (1) Apply bead of silicone sealer around axle
cylinder from support plate. mounting surface of support plate.
(2) Install support plate on axle flange. Tighten
INSTALLATION attaching bolts to 115 N·m (85 ft. lbs.).
(1) Apply bead of silicone sealer around cylinder (3) Apply bead of silicone sealer around wheel cyl-
mounting surface of support plate. inder mounting surface and install wheel cylinder.
(2) Install cylinder mounting bolts and tighten to (4) Install brake line in wheel cylinder.
20 N·m (15 ft. lbs.). (5) Install parking brake cable in support plate.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 21
(6) Install axle shaft, refer to Group 3 for proce-
dure.
(7) Connect parking brake cable to lever on sec-
ondary shoe and install brake shoes on support plate.
(8) Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge.
(9) Install brake drum and wheel and tire assem-
bly.
(10) Bleed brake system.
REAR PARKING BRAKE CABLES

REMOVAL
(1) Raise vehicle and loosen equalizer nuts until
rear cables are slack.
(2) Disengage cables from equalizer and compress
cable retainers with a worm drive hose clamp.
(3) Remove cables from the cable bracket (Fig. 36).
(4) Remove rear wheel and brake drums.
(5) Remove secondary brake shoe and disconnect
cable from lever on brake shoe.
(6) Compress cables retainer with worm drive hose
clamp (Fig. 37) and remove cables from backing
plates.
Fig. 37 Cable Retainer
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
The center console must be removed to service the
parking brake lever. Refer to Group 23 Interior Com-
ponents for service procedures.
REMOVAL
(1) Release parking brakes.
(2) Raise vehicle.
(3) Remove adjusting nut from tensioner rod at the
equalizer (Fig. 38).
Fig. 36 Parking Brake Cables

INSTALLATION
(1) Install new cables in backing plates. Be sure
cable retainer is seated.
(2) Attach cable to lever on brake shoe and install
brake shoe on backing plate.
(3) Adjust brake shoes to drum with brake gauge.
(4) Install brake drums and wheels.
(5) Install cables into the cable bracket and insure
retainers are seated in the bracket.
(6) Engage the cable ends into the equalizer and
install equalizer nut. Fig. 38 Parking Brake Equalizer
(7) Adjust parking brakes.
(4) Lower vehicle.
(5) Disengage front cable from the cable lever.
5 - 22 BRAKES XJ
(6) Compress cable retainer with worm drive hose
clamp and remove the cable from the parking brake
lever base.
(7) Disconnect parking brake lamp switch wire
(Fig. 39).
Fig. 40 Reservoir Retaining Pins

(3) Clamp cylinder body in vise with brass protec-
tive jaws.
(4) Loosen reservoir from grommets with pry tool
(Fig. 41).
Fig. 39 Parking Brake Lever Assembly
(8) Remove parking brake lever assembly mount-
ing bolts (Fig. 39).
(9) Remove lever assembly.
(10) Remove parking brake lamp switch.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install parking brake lamp switch.
(2) Position lever assembly on floorpan and install
lever mounting bolts.
(3) Tighten lever mounting bolts to 10 to 14 N·m
(7 to 10 ft. lbs.).
(4) Insert front cable through the parking brake
lever base. Insure the cable retainer is seated into
the base.
(5) Attach the front cable to the cable lever (Fig. 39).
(6) Connect parking brake lamp switch wire. Fig. 41 Loosening Reservoir
(7) Raise vehicle. (5) Remove reservoir by rocking it to one side and
(8) Install adjusting nut to the tensioner rod and pulling free of grommets (Fig. 42).
adjust parking brakes.
(9) Lower vehicle.
(10) Verify correct parking brake operation.

MASTER CYLINDER RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
(1) Remove reservoir cap and empty fluid into
drain container.
(2) Remove pins that retain reservoir to master
Fig. 42 Reservoir Removal
cylinder. Use hammer and pin punch to remove pins
(Fig. 40).
XJ BRAKES 5 - 23
(6) Remove old grommets from cylinder body (Fig. 43). board shoe side of the caliper in front of the piston.
This will cushion and protect caliper piston during
removal (Fig. 45).
Fig. 43 Grommet Removal

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not use any type of tool to install the
grommets. Tools may cut, or tear the grommets cre-
ating a leak problem after installation. Install the
grommets using finger pressure only. Fig. 45 Padding Caliper Interior
(4) Remove caliper piston with short bursts of
(1) Lubricate new grommets with clean brake fluid low pressure compressed air. Direct air through fluid
and Install new grommets in cylinder body (Fig. 44). inlet port and ease piston out of bore (Fig. 46).
Use finger pressure to install and seat grommets.
CAUTION: Do not blow the piston out of the bore
with sustained air pressure. This could result in a
cracked piston. Use only enough air pressure to
ease the piston out.
WARNING: NEVER ATTEMPT TO CATCH THE PIS-

TON AS IT LEAVES THE BORE. THIS MAY RESULT
IN PERSONAL INJURY.
Fig. 44 Grommet Installation

(2) Start reservoir in grommets. Then rock reser-
voir back and forth while pressing downward to seat
it in grommets.
(3) Install pins that retain reservoir to cylinder body.
(4) Fill and bleed master cylinder on bench before
installation in vehicle.
DISC BRAKE CALIPER

DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove brake shoes from caliper.
(2) Drain brake fluid out of caliper.
(3) Take a piece of wood and pad it with one-inch
thickness of shop towels. Place this piece in the out-
Fig. 46 Caliper Piston Removal
5 - 24 BRAKES XJ
(5) Remove caliper piston dust boot with suitable ASSEMBLY
pry tool (Fig. 47).
CAUTION: Dirt, oil, and solvents can damage cali-
per seals. Insure assembly area is clean and dry.
(1) Lubricate caliper piston bore, new piston seal

and piston with clean brake fluid.
(2) Lubricate caliper bushings and interior of
bushing boots with silicone grease.
(3) Install bushing boots in caliper, then insert bush-
ing into boot and push bushing into place (Fig. 50).
Fig. 47 Caliper Piston Dust Boot Removal

(6) Remove caliper piston seal with wood or plastic
tool (Fig. 48). Do not use metal tools as they will
scratch piston bore.
Fig. 50 Bushings And Boots Installation

(4) Install new piston seal into seal groove with
finger (Fig. 51).
Fig. 48 Piston Seal Removal

(7) Remove caliper mounting bolt bushings and
boots (Fig. 49).
Fig. 51 Piston Seal Installation

(5) Install new dust boot on caliper piston and seat
boot in piston groove (Fig. 52).
(6) Press piston into caliper bore by hand, use a
turn and push motion to work piston into seal (Fig.
53).
Fig. 49 Mounting Bolt Bushing And Boot (7) Press caliper piston to bottom of bore.
(8) Seat dust boot in caliper with Installer Tool
C-4842 and Tool Handle C-4171 (Fig. 54) .
XJ BRAKES 5 - 25
WHEEL CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove push rods and boots (Fig. 55).
(2) Press pistons, cups and spring and expander
out of cylinder bore.
(3) Remove bleed screw.
Fig. 52 Dust Boot On Piston
Fig. 55 Wheel Cylinder Components–Typical

ASSEMBLY
(1) Lubricate wheel cylinder bore, pistons, piston
cups and spring and expander with clean brake fluid.
(2) Install first piston in cylinder bore. Then
install first cup in bore and against piston. Be sure
lip of piston cup is facing inward (toward
spring and expander) and flat side is against
Fig. 53 Caliper Piston Installation piston.
(3) Install spring and expander followed by
remaining piston cup and piston.
(4) Install boots on each end of cylinder and insert
push rods in boots.
(5) Install cylinder bleed screw.

CALIPER
CLEANING
Clean the caliper components with clean brake
fluid or brake clean only. Wipe the caliper and piston
dry with lint free towels or use low pressure com-
pressed air.
CAUTION: Do not use gasoline, kerosene, thinner,

or similar solvents. These products may leave a
residue that could damage the piston and seal.
INSPECTION
Fig. 54 Piston Dust Boot Installation The piston is made from a phenolic resin (plastic
material) and should be smooth and clean.
(9) Replace caliper bleed screw if removed. The piston must be replaced if cracked or scored.
Do not attempt to restore a scored piston surface by
sanding or polishing.
5 - 26 BRAKES XJ
CAUTION: If the caliper piston is replaced, install Inspect the brake shoe contact pads on the support
the same type of piston in the caliper. Never inter- plate, replace the support plate if any of the pads are
change phenolic resin and steel caliper pistons. worn or rusted through. Also replace the plate if it is
The pistons, seals, seal grooves, caliper bore and bent or distorted (Fig. 57).
piston tolerances are different.
The bore can be lightly polished with a brake

hone to remove very minor surface imperfections
(Fig. 56). The caliper should be replaced if the bore is
severely corroded, rusted, scored, or if polishing
would increase bore diameter more than 0.025 mm
(0.001 inch).
Fig. 57 Shoe Contact Surfaces

WHEEL CYLINDER
CLEANING
Clean the cylinder and pistons with clean brake
fluid or brake cleaner only. Do not use any other
Fig. 56 Polishing Piston Bore cleaning agents.
Dry the cylinder and pistons with compressed air.
REAR DRUM BRAKE Do not use rags or shop towels to dry the cylinder
components. Lint from cloth material will adhere to
CLEANING the cylinder bores and pistons.
Clean the individual brake components, including
the support plate and wheel cylinder exterior, with a INSPECTION
water dampened cloth or with brake cleaner. Do not Inspect the cylinder bore. Light discoloration and
use any other cleaning agents. Remove light rust and dark stains in the bore are normal and will not
scale from the brake shoe contact pads on the sup- impair cylinder operation.
port plate with fine sandpaper. The cylinder bore can be lightly polished but only
with crocus cloth. Replace the cylinder if the bore is
INSPECTION scored, pitted or heavily corroded. Honing the bore to
As a general rule, riveted brake shoes should be restore the surface is not recommended.
replaced when worn to within 0.78 mm (1/32 in.) of Inspect the cylinder pistons. The piston surfaces
the rivet heads. Bonded lining should be replaced should be smooth and free of scratches, scoring and
when worn to a thickness of 1.6 mm (1/16 in.). corrosion. Replace the pistons if worn, scored, or cor-
Examine the lining contact pattern to determine if roded. Do attempt to restore the surface by sanding
the shoes are bent or the drum is tapered. The lining or polishing.
should exhibit contact across its entire width. Shoes Discard the old piston cups and the spring and
exhibiting contact only on one side should be expander. These parts are not reusable. The original
replaced and the drum checked for runout or taper. dust boots may be reused but only if they are in good
Inspect the adjuster screw assembly. Replace the condition.
assembly if the star wheel or threads are damaged,
or the components are severely rusted or corroded.
Discard the brake springs and retainer components ADJUSTMENTS
if worn, distorted or collapsed. Also replace the
springs if a brake drag condition had occurred. Over- STOP LAMP SWITCH
heating will distort and weaken the springs. (1) Press and hold brake pedal in applied position.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 27
(2) Pull switch plunger all the way out to fully
extended position.
(3) Release brake pedal. Then pull pedal fully rear-
ward. Pedal will set plunger to correct position as
pedal pushes plunger into switch body. Switch will
make ratcheting sound as it self adjusts.
REAR DRUM BRAKE

The rear drum brakes are equipped with a self-ad-
justing mechanism. Under normal circumstances, the
only time adjustment is required is when the shoes
are replaced, removed for access to other parts, or
when one or both drums are replaced.
Adjustment can be made with a standard brake
gauge or with adjusting tool . Adjustment is per-
formed with the complete brake assembly installed Fig. 59 Adjusting Gauge On Brake Shoes
on the backing plate.
(9) Drive vehicle and make one forward stop fol-
ADJUSTMENT WITH BRAKE GAUGE lowed by one reverse stop. Repeat procedure 8-10
(1) Be sure parking brakes are fully released. times to operate automatic adjusters and equalize
(2) Raise rear of vehicle and remove wheels and adjustment.
brake drums.
NOTE: Bring vehicle to complete standstill at each
(3) Verify that left and right automatic adjuster
stop. Incomplete, rolling stops will not activate
levers and cables are properly connected.
automatic adjusters.
(4) Insert brake gauge in drum. Expand gauge
until gauge inner legs contact drum braking surface.
Then lock gauge in position (Fig. 58). ADJUSTMENT WITH ADJUSTING TOOL
(1) Be sure parking brake lever is fully released.
(2) Raise vehicle so rear wheels can be rotated
freely.
(3) Remove plug from each access hole in brake
support plates.
(4) Loosen parking brake cable adjustment nut
until there is slack in front cable.
(5) Insert adjusting tool through support plate
access hole and engage tool in teeth of adjusting
screw star wheel (Fig. 60).
(6) Rotate adjuster screw star wheel (move tool
handle upward) until slight drag can be felt when
wheel is rotated.
(7) Push and hold adjuster lever away from star
wheel with thin screwdriver.
(8) Back off adjuster screw star wheel until brake
drag is eliminated.
Fig. 58 Adjusting Gauge On Drum
(9) Repeat adjustment at opposite wheel. Be sure
(5) Reverse gauge and install it on brake shoes. adjustment is equal at both wheels.
Position gauge legs at shoe centers as shown (Fig. (10) Install support plate access hole plugs.
59). If gauge does not fit (too loose/too tight), adjust (11) Adjust parking brake cable and lower vehicle.
shoes. (12) Drive vehicle and make one forward stop fol-
(6) Pull shoe adjuster lever away from adjuster lowed by one reverse stop. Repeat procedure 8-10
screw star wheel. times to operate automatic adjusters and equalize
(7) Turn adjuster screw star wheel (by hand) to adjustment.
expand or retract brake shoes. Continue adjustment
until gauge outside legs are light drag-fit on shoes.
(8) Install brake drums and wheels and lower
vehicle.
5 - 28 BRAKES XJ
(9) Tighten adjusting nut at equalizer until mark
on tensioner rod moves into alignment with tensioner
bracket.
(10) Lower vehicle until rear wheels are 15-20 cm
(6-8 in.) off shop floor.
(11) Release parking brake lever and verify that
rear wheels rotate freely without drag.
(12) Lower vehicle.
NOTE: Do not loosen/tighten equalizer adjusting

nut for any reason after completing adjustment.
Fig. 60 Brake Adjustment

NOTE: Bring vehicle to complete standstill at each
stop. Incomplete, rolling stops will not activate
automatic adjusters.
PARKING BRAKE CABLE TENSIONER

NOTE: Parking brake adjustment is only necessary
when the tensioner, or a cable has been replaced or
disconnected. Fig. 61 Tensioner Rod Measurement
SPECIFICATIONS
ADJUSTMENT
(1) Raise vehicle.
BRAKE FLUID
(2) Back off tensioner adjusting nut to create slack The brake fluid used in this vehicle must conform
in cables. to DOT 3 specifications and SAE J1703 standards.
(3) Remove rear wheel/tire assemblies and remove No other type of brake fluid is recommended or
brake drums. approved for usage in the vehicle brake system. Use
(4) Check rear brake shoe adjustment with stan- only Mopar brake fluid or an equivalent from a
dard brake gauge. tightly sealed container.
CAUTION: Excessive shoe-to-drum clearance, or CAUTION: Never use reclaimed brake fluid or fluid
worn brake components will result in faulty parking from an container which has been left open. An
brake adjustment and operation. open container will absorb moisture from the air
and contaminate the fluid.
(5) Verify that parking brake cables operate freely
and are not binding, or seized. Replace faulty cables,
CAUTION: Never use any type of a petroleum-
before proceeding.
based fluid in the brake hydraulic system. Use of
(6) Reinstall brake drums and wheel/tire assem-
such type fluids will result in seal damage of the
blies after brake shoe adjustment is complete.
vehicle brake hydraulic system causing a failure of
(7) Lower vehicle enough for access to parking
the vehicle brake system. Petroleum based fluids
brake lever. Then fully apply parking brakes. Leave
would be items such as engine oil, transmission
brakes applied until adjustment is complete.
fluid, power steering fluid ect.
(8) Raise vehicle and mark tensioner rod 6.5 mm
(1/4 in.) from tensioner bracket (Fig. 61).
XJ BRAKES 5 - 29
BRAKE COMPONENTS SPECIAL TOOLS

Disc Brake Caliper BASE BRAKES
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sliding
Disc Brake Rotor
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ventilated
Max. Runout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.12 mm
(0.005 in.)
Max. Thickness Variation . . . . . . . . . . . 0.013 mm
(0.0005 in.)
Min. Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.7 mm
(0.8937 in.)
Brake Drum
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 in. or 10 in. Installer Caliper Dust Boot C-4842
Brake Booster
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Diaphragm
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Brake Pedal
Pivot Bolt/Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 N·m (26 ft. lbs.)
Brake Booster
Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 N·m (29 ft. lbs.)
Master Cylinder
Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . 17.5 N·m (155 in. lbs.)
Brake Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.)
Combination Valve
Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . 17.5 N·m (155 in. lbs.)
Brake Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.)
Handle C-4171
Caliper
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 N·m (11 ft. lbs.)
Brake Hose Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
Wheel Cylinder
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (7 ft. lbs.)
Brake Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 N·m (12 ft. lbs.)
Parking Brake
Lever Screws . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 N·m (7-10 ft. lbs.)
Lever Bracket Screws . . . 10-14 N·m (7-10 ft. lbs.)
Cable Retainer Nut . . . . . . . . 1.5 N·m (14 in. lbs.)
Adapter Pressure Bleeder 6921

5 - 30 BRAKES XJ
ANTILOCK BRAKES
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION SERVICE PROCEDURES

ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 BLEEDING ABS BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 33
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 HYDRAULIC CONTROL
CONTROLLER ANTILOCK BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . 31 UNIT/CONTROLLER ANTILOCK BRAKES . . . . 33
HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . 34
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AND TONE WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ACCELERATION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
COMBINATION VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
ACCELERATION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT/CONTROLLER
ABS WARNING LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ANTILOCK BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SPECIFICATIONS
ANTILOCK BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 T0RQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
GENERAL INFORMATION
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The antilock brake system (ABS) is an electroni-
cally operated, all wheel brake control system.
The system is designed to prevent wheel lockup
and maintain steering control during periods of high
wheel slip when braking. Preventing lockup is accom-
plished by modulating fluid pressure to the wheel
brake units.
The hydraulic system is a three channel design.
The front wheel brakes are controlled individually
and the rear wheel brakes in tandem (Fig. 1). The
ABS electrical system is separate from other electri-
cal circuits in the vehicle. A specially programmed
controller antilock brake unit operates the system
components.
ABS system major components include:
• Controller Antilock Brakes (CAB)
• Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Fig. 1 Antilock Brake System
• Wheel Speed Sensors (WSS) High wheel slip can be described as the point where
• Acceleration Switch wheel rotation begins approaching 20 to 30 percent of
• ABS Warning Light actual vehicle speed during braking. Periods of high
wheel slip occur when brake stops involve high pedal
pressure and rate of vehicle deceleration.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Battery voltage is supplied to the CAB ignition termi-
nal when the ignition switch is turned to Run position.
ANTILOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The CAB performs a system initialization procedure at
The purpose of the antilock system is to prevent this point. Initialization consists of a static and dynamic
wheel lockup during periods of high wheel slip. Pre- self check of system electrical components.
venting lockup helps maintain vehicle braking action The static check occurs after the ignition switch is
and steering control. turned to Run position. The dynamic check occurs
The antilock CAB activates the system whenever when vehicle road speed reaches approximately 30
sensor signals indicate periods of high wheel slip. kph (18 mph). During the dynamic check, the CAB
XJ BRAKES 5 - 31
briefly cycles the pump and solenoids to verify oper- ABS faults remain in memory until cleared, or
ation. until after the vehicle is started approximately 50
If an ABS component exhibits a fault during ini- times. Stored faults are not erased if the battery is
tialization, the CAB illuminates the amber warning disconnected.
light and registers a fault code in the microprocessor
memory.
NORMAL BRAKING
During normal braking, the master cylinder, power
booster and wheel brake units all function as they
would in a vehicle without ABS. The HCU compo-
nents are not activated.
ANTILOCK BRAKING
The antilock system prevents lockup during high
slip conditions by modulating fluid apply pressure to
the wheel brake units.
Brake fluid apply pressure is modulated according
to wheel speed, degree of slip and rate of decelera-
tion. A sensor at each wheel converts wheel speed
into electrical signals. These signals are transmitted Fig. 2 Controller Antilock Brakes
to the CAB for processing and determination of
wheel slip and deceleration rate. HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT
The ABS system has three fluid pressure control The HCU consists of a valve body, pump body,
channels. The front brakes are controlled separately accumulators, pump motor, and wire harnesses (Fig.
and the rear brakes in tandem. A speed sensor input 2).
signal indicating a high slip condition activates the The pump, motor, and accumulators are combined
CAB antilock program. into an assembly attached to the valve body. The
Two solenoid valves are used in each antilock con- accumulators store the extra fluid released to the
trol channel. The valves are all located within the system for ABS mode operation. The pump provides
HCU valve body and work in pairs to either increase, the fluid volume needed and is operated by a DC
hold, or decrease apply pressure as needed in the type motor. The motor is controlled by the CAB.
individual control channels. The valve body contains the solenoid valves. The
The solenoid valves are not static during antilock valves modulate brake pressure during antilock brak-
braking. They are cycled continuously to modulate ing and are controlled by the CAB.
pressure. Solenoid cycle time in antilock mode can be The HCU provides three channel pressure control
measured in milliseconds. to the front and rear brakes. One channel controls
the rear wheel brakes in tandem. The two remaining
CONTROLLER ANTILOCK BRAKES channels control the front wheel brakes individually.
The CAB monitors wheel speed sensor inputs con- During antilock braking, the solenoid valves are
tinuously while the vehicle is in motion. However, opened and closed as needed. The valves are not
the CAB will not activate any ABS components as static. They are cycled rapidly and continuously to
long as sensor inputs and the acceleration switch modulate pressure and control wheel slip and decel-
indicate normal braking. eration.
The CAB is mounted to the HCU and operates the During normal braking, the HCU solenoid valves
ABS system (Fig. 2) separate from other vehicle elec- and pump are not activated. The master cylinder and
trical circuits. CAB voltage source is through the power booster operate the same as a vehicle without
ignition switch in the RUN position. an ABS brake system.
The CAB contains dual microprocessors. A logic During antilock braking, solenoid valve pressure
block in each microprocessor receives identical sensor modulation occurs in three stages, pressure increase,
signals. These signals are processed and compared pressure hold, and pressure decrease. The valves are
simultaneously. all contained in the valve body portion of the HCU.
The CAB contains a self check program that illu- Pressure Decrease
minates the ABS warning light when a system fault The outlet valve is opened and the inlet valve is
is detected. Faults are stored in a diagnostic program closed during the pressure decrease cycle.
memory and are accessible with the DRB scan tool.
5 - 32 BRAKES XJ
A pressure decrease cycle is initiated when speed
sensor signals indicate high wheel slip at one or
more wheels. At this point, the CAB closes the inlet
then opens the outlet valve, which also opens the
return circuit to the accumulators. Fluid pressure is
allowed to bleed off (decrease) as needed to prevent
wheel lock.
Once the period of high wheel slip has ended, the
CAB closes the outlet valve and begins a pressure
increase or hold cycle as needed.
Pressure Hold
Both solenoid valves are closed in the pressure
hold cycle. Fluid apply pressure in the control chan-
nel is maintained at a constant rate. The CAB main-
tains the hold cycle until sensor inputs indicate a
pressure change is necessary.
Pressure Increase Fig. 3 Wheel Speed Sensors
The inlet valve is open and the outlet valve is Rear Sensor
closed during the pressure increase cycle. The pres-
A rear sensor air gap adjustment is only needed
sure increase cycle is used to counteract unequal
when reinstalling an original sensor. Replacement
wheel speeds. This cycle controls re-application of
sensors have an air gap spacer attached to the sensor
fluid apply pressure due to changing road surfaces or
pickup face. The spacer establishes correct air gap
wheel speed.
when pressed against the tone ring during installa-
tion. As the tone ring rotates, it peels the spacer off
WHEEL SPEED SENSORS AND TONE WHEEL the sensor to create the required air gap. Rear sensor
A speed sensor is used at each wheel. The front air gap is 0.92-1.275 mm (0.036-0.05 in.).
sensors are mounted to the steering knuckles. The Sensor air gap measurement, or adjustment proce-
rear sensors at the outboard end of the axle. dures are provided in this section. Refer to the front,
The sensors convert wheel speed into a small AC or rear sensor removal and installation procedures as
electrical signal. This signal is transmitted to the required.
CAB. The CAB converts the AC signal into a digital
signal for each wheel. This voltage is generated by
COMBINATION VALVE
magnetic induction when a tone wheel passes by the
The combination valve contains a pressure differ-
stationary magnet of the wheel speed sensor.
ential valve and switch and a rear brake proportion-
A gear type tone ring serves as the trigger mecha-
ing valve. The valve is not repairable and must be
nism for each sensor. The tone rings are mounted at
replaced as an assembly if diagnosis indicates this is
the outboard ends of the front and rear axle shafts.
necessary.
Different sensors are used at the front and rear
wheels (Fig. 3). The front/rear sensors have the same
PRESSURE DIFFERENTIAL VALVE
electrical values but are not interchangeable. The
The pressure differential switch is connected to the
sensors have a resistance between 900 and 1300
brake warning light. The switch is actuated by move-
ohms.
ment of the switch valve. The switch monitors fluid
pressure in the separate front/rear brake hydraulic
SPEED SENSOR AIR GAP
circuits.
Front Sensor A decrease or loss of fluid pressure in either
hydraulic circuit will cause the switch valve to shut-
Front sensor air gap is fixed and not adjustable.
tle to the low pressure side. Movement of the valve
Only rear sensor air gap is adjustable.
pushes the switch plunger upward. This action closes
Although front air gap is not adjustable, it can be
the switch internal contacts completing the electrical
checked if diagnosis indicates this is necessary. Front
circuit to the red warning light. The switch valve will
air gap should be 0.36 to 1.5 mm (0.014 to 0.059 in.).
remain in an actuated position until repairs to the
If gap is incorrect, the sensor is either loose, or dam-
brake system are made.
aged.
PROPORTIONING VALVE
The proportioning valve is used to balance front-
rear brake action at high decelerations. The valve
XJ BRAKES 5 - 33
allows normal fluid flow during moderate braking. NOTE: The MDS or DRB III scan tool is used to
The valve only controls fluid flow during high decel- diagnose the ABS system. For additional informa-
erations brake stops. tion refer to the Antilock Brake section in Group
8W. For test procedures refer to the Chassis Diag-
ACCELERATION SWITCH nostic Manual.
The acceleration switch is located under the rear
seat. The switch (Fig. 4), provides an additional vehi-
cle deceleration reference during 4WD operation. The
SERVICE PROCEDURES
switch is monitored by the CAB at all times. The
switch reference signal is utilized by the CAB when
all wheels are decelerating at the same speed.
BLEEDING ABS BRAKE SYSTEM
ABS system bleeding requires conventional bleed-
ing methods plus use of the DRB scan tool. The pro-
cedure involves performing a base brake bleeding,
followed by use of the scan tool to cycle and bleed the
HCU pump and solenoids. A second base brake bleed-
ing procedure is then required to remove any air
remaining in the system.
(1) Perform base brake bleeding. Refer to base
brake section for procedure.
(2) Connect scan tool to the Data Link Connector.
(3) Select ANTILOCK BRAKES, followed by MIS-
CELLANEOUS, then ABS BRAKES. Follow the
instructions displayed. When scan tool displays TEST
COMPLETE, disconnect scan tool and proceed.
(4) Perform base brake bleeding a second time.
Refer to base brake section for procedure.
(5) Top off master cylinder fluid level and verify
Fig. 4 Acceleration Switch
proper brake operation before moving vehicle.
ABS WARNING LAMP
The amber ABS warning lamp is located in the
instrument cluster. The lamp illuminates at start-up
to perform a self check. The lamp goes out when the
self check program determines the system is operat- HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT/CONTROLLER
ing normal. If an ABS component exhibits a fault the ANTILOCK BRAKES
CAB will illuminate the lamp and register a trouble
code in the microprocessor. REMOVAL
The lamp is controlled by the CAB. The lamp is (1) Remove negative battery cable from the battery.
illuminated when the CAB sends a ground signal to (2) Pull up on the CAB harness connector release
the ABS relay. The ABS relay then grounds the lamp (Fig. 5) and remove connector.
circuit and illuminates the lamp. (3) Remove brake lines from the HCU.
(4) Remove HCU/CAB mounting nuts and bolt
(Fig. 6) and remove HCU/CAB.
INSTALLATION
ANTILOCK BRAKES (1) Install HCU/CAB on the mounting studs.
The ABS brake system performs several self-tests (2) Install mounting nuts and bolt. Tighten to 11.5
every time the ignition switch is turned on and the N·m (102 in. lbs.).
vehicle is driven. The CAB monitors the systems (3) Install brake lines to the HCU and tighten to
input and output circuits to verify the system is oper- 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.).
ating correctly. If the on board diagnostic system (4) Install wiring harness connector to the CAB
senses that a circuit is malfunctioning the system and push down on the release to secure the connec-
will set a trouble code in its memory. tor.
(5) Install negative battery cable to the battery.
NOTE: An audible noise may be heard during the (6) Bleed ABS brake system.
self-test. This noise should be considered normal.
5 - 34 BRAKES XJ
Fig. 5 CAB Harness Connector Release
Fig. 7 Front Wheel Speed Sensor

(2) Apply Mopar Lock N’ Seal or Loctite t 242 to
bolt that secures sensor in steering knuckle. Use new
sensor bolt if original bolt is worn or damaged.
(3) Position sensor on steering knuckle. Seat sen-
sor locating tab in hole in knuckle and install sensor
attaching bolt finger tight.
(4) Tighten sensor attaching bolt to 4.7 N·m (42 in.
lbs.).
(5) If original sensor has been installed, check sen-
sor air gap. Air gap should be 0.36 to 1.5 mm (0.014
Fig. 6 HCU/CAB Mounting to 0.059 in.). If gap is incorrect, sensor is either loose,
or damaged.
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
(6) Secure sensor wire to steering knuckle and
body brackets.
REMOVAL
(7) Route sensor wire forward and behind shock
(1) Raise vehicle and turn wheel outward for eas-
absorber. Then attach sensor wire to spring seat
ier access to sensor.
bracket with grommets on sensor wire.
(2) Remove sensor wire from mounting brackets.
(8) Route sensor wire to outer sill bracket. Remove
(3) Clean sensor and surrounding area with shop
all twists or kinks from wire.
towel before removal.
(9) Attach sensor wire to sill bracket with grom-
(4) Remove bolt attaching sensor to steering
met. Be sure wire is free of twists and kinks.
knuckle and remove sensor (Fig. 7).
(10) Verify sensor wire routing. Wire should loop
(5) Remove sensor wire from brackets on body and
forward and above sill bracket. Loose end of wire
steering knuckle.
should be below sill bracket and towards brake hose.
(6) Unseat sensor wire grommet in wheel house
(11) Seat sensor wire grommet in body panel and
panel.
clip wire to brake line at grommet location.
(7) In engine compartment, disconnect sensor wire
(12) Connect sensor wire to harness in engine com-
connector at harness plug. Then remove sensor and
partment.
wire.
INSTALLATION REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

(1) If original sensor will be installed, wipe all
traces of old spacer material off sensor pickup face.
REMOVAL
(1) Raise and fold rear seat forward for access to
Use a dry shop towel for this purpose.
rear sensor connectors (Fig. 8).
XJ BRAKES 5 - 35
(2) Disconnect sensors at rear harness connectors. INSTALLATION
(3) Push sensor grommets and sensor wires (1) If original sensor is being installed, remove
through floorpan. any remaining pieces of cardboard spacer from sen-
sor pickup face. Use dry shop towel only to remove
old spacer material.
(2) Insert sensor wire through support plate hole.
Then seat sensor grommet in support plate.
(3) Apply Mopar Lock N’ Seal or Loctite t 242 to
original sensor bolt. Use new bolt if original is worn
or damaged.
(4) Install sensor bolt finger tight only at this time.
(5) If original rear sensor was installed, adjust
sensor air gap to 0.92-1.275 mm (0.036-0.05 in.). Use
feeler gauge to measure air gap (Fig. 10). Tighten
sensor bolt to 13 N·m (115 in. lbs.).
Fig. 8 Acceleration Switch And Rear Sensor

Connections
Fig. 10 Setting Air Gap On Original Rear Sensor
(4) Raise vehicle.
(5) Disconnect sensor wires at rear axle connectors. (6) If new sensor was installed, push cardboard
(6) Remove wheel and tire assembly. spacer on sensor face against tone ring (Fig. 11).
(7) Remove brake drum. Then tighten sensor bolt to 13 N·m (115 in. lbs.). Cor-
(8) Remove clips securing sensor wires to brake rect air gap will be established as tone ring rotates
lines, rear axle and, brake hose. and peels spacer off sensor face.
(9) Unseat sensor wire support plate grommet.
(10) Remove bolt attaching sensor to bracket and
remove sensor (Fig. 9).
Fig. 11 New Rear Sensor

(7) Route sensor wires to rear seat area.
(8) Feed sensor wires through floorpan access hole
Fig. 9 Rear Wheel Speed Sensor and seat sensor grommets in floorpan.
(9) Verify that rear sensor wires are secured to
rear brake hose and axle with clips. Verify that wire
is clear of rotating components.
5 - 36 BRAKES XJ
(10) Install brake drum and wheel and tire assembly.
(11) Lower vehicle.
(12) Connect sensor wire to harness connector.
Then reposition carpet and fold rear seat down.
ACCELERATION SWITCH
REMOVAL
(1) Raise and fold rear seat assembly forward for
access to sensor.
(2) Disconnect switch harness.
(3) Remove switch mounting screws (Fig. 12)
(4) Remove the acceleration switch.
Fig. 13 Acceleration Switch

HYDRAULIC CONTROL UNIT/CONTROLLER
ANTILOCK BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove pump motor connector from the CAB.
(2) Remove CAB mounting screws from the HCU
(Fig. 14).
(3) Remove CAB from the HCU.
Fig. 12 Acceleration Switch Mounting

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: The mercury switch (inside the accelera-
tion switch), will not function properly if the switch is
installed incorrectly. Verify that the switch locating
arrow is pointing to the front of the vehicle (Fig. 13).
(1) Position switch in mounting bracket.
(2) Install switch mounting bolts and tighten to 3
N·m (27.5 in. lbs.).
(3) Connect harness to switch. Be sure harness
connector is firmly seated.
(4) Move seat back to normal position.
Fig. 14 CAB Mounting Screws

ASSEMBLY
(1) Install the CAB onto the HCU.
(2) Install the CAB mounting screws and tighten
to 1.8 N·m (16 in. lbs.).
(3) Install pump motor connector to the CAB.
XJ BRAKES 5 - 37
SPECIFICATIONS
T0RQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Acceleration Sensor
Sensor Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m
(27.5 in. lbs.)
Bracket Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 N·m
(24 in. lbs.)
Hydraulic Control Unit/Controller Antilock
Brakes
Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 N·m
(102 in. lbs.)
Brake Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m
(170 in. lbs.)
Controller Antilock Brakes
Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 N·m
(16 in. lbs.)
Wheel Speed Sensors
Front Mounting Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 N·m
(42 in. lbs.)
Rear Mounting Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 N·m
(115 in. lbs.)
XJ CLUTCH 6-1
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION MISALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

CLUTCH COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE PROCEDURES
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CLUTCH COMPONENT LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . 8
CLUTCH LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
INSTALLATION METHODS AND PARTS CLUTCH LINKAGE FLUID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
USAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CLUTCH COVER AND DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CLUTCH OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 CLUTCH HOUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING CLUTCH HYDRAULIC LINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CLUTCH CONTAMINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PILOT BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CLUTCH RUNOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 RELEASE BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
IMPROPER CLUTCH RELEASE OR
ENGAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION The clutch disc has cushion springs in the disc
hub. The clutch disc facing is riveted to the hub. The
CLUTCH COMPONENTS facing is made from a non-asbestos material. The
The clutch mechanism consists of a single, dry-type clutch cover pressure plate is a diaphragm type with
disc and a diaphragm style clutch cover. A hydraulic a one-piece spring and multiple release fingers. The
linkage is used to operate the clutch release bearing pressure plate release fingers are preset during man-
and fork. ufacture and are not adjustable.
A needle-type pilot bearing in the crankshaft
flange supports the transmission input shaft. A HYDRAULIC LINKAGE COMPONENTS
sleeve type release bearing is used to engage and dis- The hydraulic linkage consists of a clutch master
engage the clutch cover pressure plate. cylinder with integral reservoir, a clutch slave cylin-
The release bearing is operated by a release fork in der and an interconnecting fluid line.
the clutch housing. The fork pivots on a ball stud The clutch master cylinder push rod is connected
mounted in the housing. The release fork is actuated to the clutch pedal. The slave cylinder push rod is
by a hydraulic slave cylinder mounted in the hous- connected to the clutch release fork. The master cyl-
ing. The slave cylinder is operated by a clutch master inder is mounted on the driver side of the dash panel
cylinder mounted on the dash panel. The cylinder adjacent to the brake master cylinder and booster
push rod is connected to the clutch pedal. assembly. This positioning is similar for both left and
right hand drive models.
6-2 CLUTCH XJ
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Use Mopart multi-mileage grease or a silicone

grease for the clutch pedal bushings and pivot shaft.
WARNING: EXERCISE CARE WHEN SERVICING Use Mopart high temperature bearing grease or
CLUTCH COMPONENTS. FACTORY INSTALLED equivalent for the pilot bearing, release bearing bore,
CLUTCH DISCS DO NOT CONTAIN ASBESTOS transmission input shaft and release fork compo-
FIBERS. DUST AND DIRT ON CLUTCH PARTS MAY nents. Apply recommended amounts only and do not
CONTAIN ASBESTOS FIBERS FROM AFTERMAR- overlubricate.
KET COMPONENTS. BREATHING EXCESSIVE CON-
CENTRATIONS OF THESE FIBERS CAN CAUSE INSTALLATION METHODS AND PARTS USAGE
SERIOUS BODILY HARM. WEAR A RESPIRATOR Distortion of clutch components during installation
DURING SERVICE AND NEVER CLEAN CLUTCH and the use of non-standard components are common
COMPONENTS WITH COMPRESSED AIR OR WITH causes of clutch malfunction.
A DRY BRUSH. EITHER CLEAN THE COMPONENTS Improper clutch cover bolt tightening can distort
WITH A WATER DAMPENED RAGS OR USE A VAC- the cover. The usual result is clutch grab, chatter
UUM CLEANER SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR and rapid wear.
REMOVING ASBESTOS FIBERS AND DUST. DO NOT An improperly seated flywheel and/or clutch hous-
CREATE DUST BY SANDING A CLUTCH DISC. ing are additional causes of clutch failure. Improper
REPLACE THE DISC IF THE FRICTION MATERIAL IS seating will produce misalignment and additional
DAMAGED OR CONTAMINATED. DISPOSE OF ALL clutch problems.
DUST AND DIRT CONTAINING ASBESTOS FIBERS The use of non-standard or low quality parts will
IN SEALED BAGS OR CONTAINERS. THIS WILL also lead to problems and wear. Only use recom-
HELP MINIMIZE EXPOSURE TO YOURSELF AND TO mended factory parts.
OTHERS. FOLLOW ALL RECOMMENDED SAFETY A cocked pilot bearing is another cause of clutch
PRACTICES PRESCRIBED BY THE OCCUPATIONAL noise, drag, hard shifting, and rapid bearing wear.
SAFETY AND HEALTH ADMINISTRATION (OSHA) Always use an alignment tool to install a new bear-
AND THE ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY AGENCY ing. This practice helps avoid cocking the bearing
(EPA), FOR THE HANDLING AND DISPOSAL OF during installation.
PRODUCTS CONTAINING ASBESTOS.

CLUTCH HYDRAULIC FLUID
If inspection or diagnosis indicates additional fluid CLUTCH OPERATION
may be needed, it will be necessary to replace the Leverage, clamping force, and friction are what
complete hydraulic linkage assembly. make the clutch work. The disc serves as the friction
element and a diaphragm spring and pressure plate
CLUTCH LUBRICATION provide the clamping force. The clutch pedal, hydrau-
Proper clutch component lubrication is important lic linkage, release lever and bearing provide the
to satisfactory operation. Using the correct lubricant leverage.
and avoiding over lubrication are also equally impor- The clutch cover assembly clamps the disc against
tant. the flywheel. The assembly consists of the cover, dia-
During service, apply recommended lubricant spar- phragm spring, pressure plate, and fulcrum compo-
ingly. Do not overlubricate as this could result in nents. The pressure plate clamps the clutch disc
clutch disc and pressure plate contamination. against the flywheel and the spring provides the
Clutch and transmission components requiring clamping force.
lubrication are: The clutch disc friction material is riveted to the
• pilot bearing. disc hub. The hub bore is splined for installation on
• release lever pivot ball stud. the transmission input shaft. The hub splines con-
• release lever pivot surfaces. nect the disc to the transmission.
• release bearing bore. The clutch linkage uses hydraulic pressure to oper-
• clutch pedal pivot bore and bushings. ate the clutch. The clutch master cylinder push rod is
• transmission input shaft splines and pilot hub. connected to the clutch pedal and the slave cylinder
• release bearing slide surface of front bearing push rod is connected to the release lever in the
retainer. clutch housing.
• master cylinder bushing at the clutch pedal. Depressing the clutch pedal develops fluid pressure
Do not apply grease to any part of the clutch in the clutch master cylinder. This pressure is trans-
cover or disc. mitted to the slave cylinder through a connecting
XJ CLUTCH 6-3
line. In turn, the slave cylinder operates the clutch the components. The glaze-like residue ranges in
release lever. color from amber to black.
The clutch release bearing is mounted on the Road splash contamination means dirt/water is
transmission front bearing retainer. The bearing is entering the clutch housing. This may be due to loose
attached to the release lever, which moves the bear- bolts, housing cracks, or through the slave cylinder
ing into contact with the clutch cover diaphragm opening. Driving through deep water puddles can
spring. force water/road splash into the housing through
Slave cylinder force causes the release lever to such openings.
move the release bearing into contact with the dia- Clutch fluid leaks are from loose or damaged
phragm spring. As additional force is applied, the clutch linkage fluid lines or connections. However,
bearing presses the diaphragm spring fingers inward most clutch fluid leaks will usually be noted and cor-
on the fulcrums. This action moves the pressure rected before severe contamination occurs.
plate rearward relieving clamp force on the disc. The Grease contamination is usually a product of exces-
clutch disc is disengaged and freewheeling at this sive lubrication during clutch service. Apply only a
point. small amount of grease to the input shaft splines,
The process of clutch re-engagement is simply the bearing retainer, pilot bearing, release fork and pivot
reverse of what occurs during disengagement. Releas- stud. Excess grease can be thrown off during opera-
ing pedal pressure removes clutch linkage pressure. tion and contaminate the disc.
The release bearing moves away from the diaphragm
spring which allows the pressure plate to exert IMPROPER CLUTCH RELEASE OR
clamping force on the clutch disc. ENGAGEMENT
Clutch release or engagement problems are caused
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING by wear, or damage to one or more clutch compo-
nents. A visual inspection of the release components
will usually reveal the problem part.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Release problems can result in hard shifting and
Problem diagnosis will generally require a road
noise. Items to look for are: leaks at the clutch cylin-
test to determine the type of fault. Component
ders and interconnecting line; loose slave cylinder
inspection will then determine the problem cause
bolts; worn/loose release fork and pivot stud; dam-
after road testing.
aged release bearing; and a worn clutch disc, or pres-
Drive the vehicle at normal speeds during the road
sure plate.
test. Shift the transmission through all gear ranges
Normal condensation in vehicles that are stored or
and observe clutch action.
out of service for long periods of time can generate
If chatter, grab, slip, or improper release is experi-
enough corrosion to make the disc stick to the fly-
enced, remove and inspect the clutch components.
wheel, or pressure plate. If this condition is experi-
However, if the problem is noise or hard shifting, fur-
enced, correction only requires that the disc be
ther diagnosis may be needed. The transmission or
loosened manually through the inspection plate open-
another driveline component may actually be at
ing.
fault. Careful observation during the test will help
Engagement problems usually result in slip, chat-
narrow the problem area.
ter/shudder, and noisy operation. The primary causes
are clutch disc contamination; clutch disc wear; mis-
CLUTCH CONTAMINATION alignment, or distortion; flywheel damage; or a com-
Fluid contamination is a frequent cause of clutch
bination of the foregoing. A visual inspection is
malfunctions. Oil, grease, water, or other fluids on
required to determine the part actually causing the
the clutch contact surfaces will cause faulty opera-
problem.
tion. The usual result is chatter, slip and grab.
During inspection, note if any components are con-
CLUTCH RUNOUT
taminated. Look for evidence of oil, grease, clutch
hydraulic fluid, or water/road splash on clutch com-
CLUTCH DISC
ponents.
Check the clutch disc before installation. Axial
Oil contamination indicates a leak at either the
(face) runout of a new disc should not exceed 0.5 mm
rear main seal or transmission input shaft. Oil leaks
(0.020 in.). Measure runout about 6 mm (1/4 in.) from
produce a residue of oil on the housing interior and
the outer edge of the disc facing. Obtain another disc
on the clutch cover and flywheel. Heat buildup
if runout is excessive.
caused by slippage between the clutch cover, disc,
and flywheel can sometimes bake the oil residue onto
6-4 CLUTCH XJ
Clutch Components
XJ CLUTCH 6-5
CLUTCH COVER cracking or warpage after installation; it can also
Check condition of the clutch cover before installa- weaken the flywheel and interfere with proper clutch
tion. A warped cover or diaphragm spring will cause release.
grab and incomplete release or engagement. Be care- Clean the crankshaft flange before mounting the
ful when handling the cover and disc. Impact can dis- flywheel. Dirt and grease on the flange surface may
tort the cover, diaphragm spring, release fingers and cock the flywheel causing excessive runout. Use new
the hub of the clutch disc. bolts when remounting a flywheel and secure the
Use an alignment tool when positioning the disc on bolts with Mopart Lock And Seal. Tighten flywheel
the flywheel. The tool prevents accidental misalign- bolts to specified torque only. Overtightening can dis-
ment which could result in cover distortion and disc tort the flywheel hub causing runout.
damage.
A frequent cause of clutch cover distortion is MISALIGNMENT
improper bolt tightening. To avoid warping the cover, Clutch housing alignment is important to proper
the bolts must be tightened in a diagonal pattern and clutch operation. The housing maintains alignment
only 2–3 threads at a time to the specified torque. between the crankshaft and transmission input
shaft. Misalignment can cause clutch noise, hard
FLYWHEEL shifting, incomplete release and chatter. It can also
Flywheel runout should not exceed 0.08 mm (0.003 result in premature wear of the pilot bearing, cover
in.). Measure runout at the outer edge of the fly- release fingers and clutch disc. In severe cases, mis-
wheel face with a dial indicator. Mount the indicator alignment can also cause premature wear of the
on a stud installed in place of one of the clutch hous- transmission input shaft and front bearing.
ing bolts. Housing misalignment is generally caused by
Common causes of runout are: incorrect seating on the engine or transmission, loose
• heat warpage. housing bolts, missing alignment dowels, or housing
• improper machining. damage. Tighten all the clutch housing bolts to
• incorrect bolt tightening. proper torque before installing any struts. Also be
• improper seating on crankshaft flange shoulder. sure alignment dowels are in place and seated in the
• foreign material on crankshaft flange. block and housing before bolt tightening. Infre-
Flywheel machining is not recommended. The fly- quently, misalignment may also be caused by housing
wheel clutch surface is machined to a unique contour mounting surfaces that are not completely parallel.
and machining will negate this feature. However, Misalignment can be corrected with shims.
minor flywheel scoring can be cleaned up by hand
with 180 grit emery, or with surface grinding equip- DIAGNOSTIC CHARTS
ment. Remove only enough material to reduce scor- The diagnosis charts describe common clutch prob-
ing (approximately 0.001 - 0.003 in.). Heavy stock lems, causes and correction. Fault conditions are
removal is not recommended. Replace the flywheel listed at the top of each chart. Conditions, causes and
if scoring is severe and deeper than 0.076 mm (0.003 corrective action are outlined in the indicated col-
in.). Excessive stock removal can result in flywheel umns.
6-6 CLUTCH XJ
DIAGNOSIS CHART
Disc facing worn out 1. Normal wear. 1. Replace cover and disc.
2. Driver frequently rides (slips) the 2. Replace cover and disc.

clutch. Results in rapid overheating
and wear.
3. Insufficient clutch cover 3. Replace cover and disc.
diaphragm spring tension.
Clutch disc facing contaminated with 1. Leak at rear main engine seal or 1. Replace appropriate seal.
oil, grease, or clutch fluid. transmission input shaft seal.
2. Excessive amount of grease 2. Remove grease and apply the

applied to the input shaft splines. correct amount of grease.
3. Road splash, water entering 3. Replace clutch disc. Clean clutch
housing. cover and reuse if in good condition.
4. Slave cylinder leaking. 4. Replace hydraulic clutch linkage.
Clutch is running partially 1. Release bearing sticking or 1. Verify failure. Replace the release
disengaged. binding and does not return to the bearing and transmission front
normal running position. bearing retainer as necessary.
Flywheel below minimum thickness 1. Improper flywheel machining. 1. Replace flywheel.

specification. Flywheel has excessive taper or
excessive material removal.
Clutch disc, cover and/or diaphragm 1. Rough handling. Impact bent 1. Replace disc or cover as
spring warped or distorted. cover, spring, or disc. necessary.
2. Improper bolt tightening 2. Tighten clutch cover using proper

procedure. procedure.
Facing on flywheel side of disc torn, 1. Flywheel surface scored or 2. Correct surface condition if
gouged, or worn. nicked. possible. Replace flywheel and disc
as necessary.
2. Clutch disc sticking or binding on 2. Inspect components and

transmission input shaft. correct/replace as necessary.
Clutch disc facing burnt. Flywheel 1. Frequent operation under high 1. Correct condition of flywheel and
and cover pressure plate surfaces loads or hard acceleration pressure plate surface. Replace
heavily glazed. conditions. clutch cover and disc. Alert driver to
problem cause.
2. Driver frequently rides (slips) 2. Correct condition of flywheel and

clutch. Results in rapid wear and pressure plate surface. Replace
overheating of disc and cover. clutch cover and disc. Alert driver to
problem cause.
Clutch disc binds on input shaft 1. Clutch disc hub splines damaged 1. Clean, smooth, and lubricate hub
splines. during installation. splines if possible. Replace disc if
necessary.
2. Input shaft splines rough, 2. Clean, smooth, and lubricate
damaged, or corroded. shaft splines if possible. Replace
input shaft if necessary.
XJ CLUTCH 6-7
Clutch disc rusted to flywheel and/or 1. Clutch not used for and extended 1. Sand rusted surfaces with 180
pressure plate. period of time (e.g. long term grit sanding paper. Replace clutch
vehicle storage). cover and flywheel if necessary.
Pilot bearing seized, loose, or rollers 1. Bearing cocked during 1. Install and lubricate a new
are worn. installation. bearing.
2. Bearing defective. 2. Install and lubricate a new

bearing.
3. Bearing not lubricated. 3. Install and lubricate a new
bearing.
4. Clutch misalignment. 4. Inspect clutch and correct as
necessary. Install and lubricate a
new bearing.
Clutch will not disengage properly. 1. Low clutch fluid level. 1. Replace hydraulic linkage
assembly.
2. Clutch cover loose. 2. Follow proper bolt tightening

procedure.
3. Clutch disc bent or distorted. 3. Replace clutch disc.
4. Clutch cover diaphragm spring 4. Replace clutch cover.
bent or warped.
5. Clutch disc installed backwards. 5. Remove and install clutch disc
correctly.
6. Release fork bent or fork pivot 6. Replace fork or pivot as
loose or damaged. necessary.
7. Clutch master or slave cylinder 7. Replace hydraulic linkage
failure. assembly.
Clutch pedal squeak. 1. Pivot pin loose. 1. Tighten pivot pin if possible.
Replace clutch pedal if necessary.
2. Master cylinder bushing not 2. Lubricate master cylinder
lubricated. bushing.
3. Pedal bushings worn out or 3. Replace and lubricate bushings.
cracked.
6-8 CLUTCH XJ
SERVICE PROCEDURES
CLUTCH COMPONENT LUBRICATION
Proper clutch component lubrication is important
to satisfactory operation. Using the correct lubricant
and not over lubricating are equally important. Apply
recommended lubricant sparingly to avoid disc and
pressure plate contamination.
Clutch and transmission components requiring
lubrication are:
• Pilot bearing.
• Release lever pivot ball stud.
• Release lever contact surfaces.
• Release bearing bore.
• Clutch disc hub splines.
• Clutch pedal pivot shaft bore.
• Clutch pedal bushings. Fig. 1 Clutch Master Cylinder Reservoir And Cap
• Input shaft splines. FLYWHEEL
• Input shaft pilot hub. Inspect the flywheel whenever the clutch disc,
• Transmission front bearing retainer slide sur- cover and housing are removed for service. Check
face. condition of the flywheel face, hub, ring gear teeth,
and flywheel bolts.
NOTE: Never apply grease to any part of the clutch
Minor scratches, burrs, or glazing on the flywheel
cover, or disc.
face can be reduced with 180 grit emery cloth. How-
ever, the flywheel should be replaced if the disc con-
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS tact surface is severely scored, heat checked, cracked,
Use Mopart multi-purpose grease for the clutch or obviously worn.
pedal bushings and pivot shaft. Use Mopart high Flywheel machining is not recommended. The fly-
temperature grease (or equivalent) for all other lubri- wheel surface is manufactured with a unique contour
cation requirements. Apply recommended amounts that would be negated by machining. However,
and do not over lubricate. cleanup of minor flywheel scoring can be performed
by hand with 180 grit emery, or with surface grind-
CLUTCH LINKAGE FLUID ing equipment. Replace the flywheel if scoring is
deeper than 0.0762 mm (0.003 in.).
If inspection or diagnosis indicates additional fluid
Heavy stock removal by grinding is not recom-
may be needed, use Mopart brake fluid, or an equiv-
mended. Excessive stock removal can result in fly-
alent meeting standards SAE J1703 and DOT 3. Do
wheel cracking or warpage after installation. It can
not use any other type of fluid.
also weaken the flywheel and interfere with proper
clutch release.
CLUTCH FLUID LEVEL
Check flywheel runout if misalignment is sus-
The clutch fluid reservoir, master cylinder, slave
pected. Runout should not exceed 0.08 mm (0.003
cylinder and fluid lines are pre-filled with fluid at
in.). Measure runout at the outer edge of the fly-
the factory during assembly operations.
wheel face with a dial indicator. Mount the dial indi-
The hydraulic system should not require additional
cator on a stud installed in place of one of the clutch
fluid under normal circumstances. In fact, the reser-
housing attaching bolts.
voir fluid level will actually increase as normal
Clean the crankshaft flange before mounting the
clutch wear occurs. For this reason, it is impor-
flywheel. Dirt and grease on the flange surface may
tant to avoid overfilling, or removing fluid from
cock the flywheel causing excessive runout.
the reservoir.
Check condition of the flywheel hub and attaching
Clutch fluid level is checked at the master cylinder
bolts. Replace the flywheel if the hub exhibits cracks
reservoir (Fig. 1). An indicator ring is provided on the
in the area of the attaching bolt holes.
outside rim of the reservoir.
Install new attaching bolts whenever the flywheel
Be sure to wipe the reservoir and cover clean
is replaced and use Mopart Lock N’ Seal, or Loctite
before removing the cover. This will avoid having dirt
242 on the replacement bolt threads.
or foreign material fall into the reservoir during a
Recommended flywheel bolt torques are:
fluid level check.
• 142 N·m (105 ft. lbs.) for 6-cylinder flywheels
XJ CLUTCH 6-9
• 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.) plus an additional turn of REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
60° for 4-cylinder flywheels
Inspect the teeth on the starter ring gear. If the CLUTCH COVER AND DISC
teeth are worn or damaged, the flywheel should
be replaced as an assembly. This is the recom- REMOVAL
mended and preferred method of repair. (1) Remove transmission. Refer to procedures in
In cases where a new flywheel is not readily avail- Group 21.
able, a replacement ring gear can be installed. How- (2) If original clutch cover will be reinstalled, mark
ever, the following precautions must be observed to position of cover on flywheel for assembly reference.
avoid damaging the flywheel and replacement gear. Use paint or a scriber for this purpose.
(1) Mark position of the old gear for alignment ref- (3) If clutch cover is to be replaced, cover bolts can
erence on the flywheel. Use a scriber for this pur- be removed in any sequence. However, if original
pose. cover will be reinstalled, loosen cover bolts evenly
(2) Wear protective goggles or approved safety and in rotation to relieve spring tension equally. This
glasses. Also wear heat resistent gloves when han- is necessary to avoid warping cover.
dling a heated ring gear. (4) Remove cover bolts and remove cover and disc
(3) Remove the old gear by cutting most of the way (Fig. 2).
through it (at one point) with an abrasive cut-off
wheel. Then complete removal with a cold chisel or INSTALLATION
punch. (1) Lightly scuff sand flywheel face with 180 grit
(4) The ring gear is a shrink fit on the flywheel. emery cloth. Then clean surface with a wax and
This means the gear must be expanded by heating in grease remover.
order to install it. The method of heating and (2) Lubricate pilot bearing with Mopar high tem-
expanding the gear is extremely important. perature bearing grease.
Every surface of the gear must be heated at the same (3) Check runout and free operation of new clutch
time to produce uniform expansion. An oven or simi- disc as follows:
lar enclosed heating device must be used. Tempera- (a) Slide disc onto transmission input shaft
ture required for uniform expansion is approximately splines. Disc should slide freely on splines.
375° F. (b) Leave disc on shaft and check face runout
with dial indicator. Check runout at disc hub and
CAUTION: Do not use an oxy/acetylene torch to
about 6 mm (1/4 in.) from outer edge of facing.
remove the old gear, or to heat and expand a new
(c) Face runout should not exceed 0.5 mm (0.020
gear. The high temperature of the torch flame can
in.). Obtain another clutch disc if runout exceeds
cause localized heating that will damage the fly-
this limit.
wheel. In addition, using the torch to heat a replace-
(4) Position clutch disc on flywheel. Be sure side of
ment gear will cause uneven heating and
disc marked flywheel side is positioned against fly-
expansion. The torch flame can also anneal the
wheel (Fig. 2). If disc is not marked, be sure flat side
gear teeth resulting in rapid wear and damage after
of disc hub is toward flywheel.
installation.
(5) Inspect condition of pressure plate surface of
(5) The heated gear must be installed evenly to clutch cover (Fig. 2). Replace cover if this surface is
avoid misalignment or distortion. A shop press and worn, heat checked, cracked, or scored.
suitable press plates should be used to install the (6) Insert clutch alignment tool in clutch disc (Fig.
gear if at all possible. 3).
(6) Be sure to wear eye and hand protection. Heat (7) Insert alignment tool in pilot bearing and posi-
resistent gloves and safety goggles are needed for tion disc on flywheel. Be sure disc hub is positioned
personal safety. Also use metal tongs, vise grips, or correctly. Side of hub marked Flywheel Side should
similar tools to position the gear as necessary for face flywheel (Fig. 2). If disc is not marked, place flat
installation. side of disc against flywheel.
(7) Allow the flywheel and ring gear to cool down (8) Position clutch cover over disc and on flywheel
before installation. Set the assembly on a workbench (Fig. 3).
and let it cool in normal shop air. (9) Install clutch cover bolts finger tight.
(10) Tighten cover bolts evenly and in rotation a
CAUTION: Do not use water, or compressed air to few threads at a time. Cover bolts must be tight-
cool the flywheel. The rapid cooling produced by ened evenly and to specified torque to avoid
water or compressed air can distort, or crack the distorting cover. Tightening torques are 31 N·m
gear and flywheel.
6 - 10 CLUTCH XJ
RELEASE BEARING
REMOVAL
(1) Remove transmission.
(2) Disconnect release bearing from release lever
and remove bearing (Fig. 4).
(3) Inspect bearing slide surface of transmission
front bearing retainer. Replace retainer if slide sur-
face is scored, worn, or cracked.
(4) Inspect release fork and fork pivot. Be sure
pivot is secure and in good condition. Be sure fork is
not distorted or worn. Replace release fork retainer
spring if bent or damaged.
INSTALLATION
(1) Lubricate crankshaft pilot bearing with Mopart
Fig. 2 Clutch Disc And Pressure Plate Inspection high temperature bearing grease. Apply grease to
end of long shank, small diameter flat blade screw-
driver. Then insert tool through clutch disc hub to
reach bearing.
(2) Lubricate input shaft splines, bearing retainer
slide surface, fork pivot and release fork pivot surface
with Mopart high temperature grease.
(3) Install new release bearing. Be sure bearing is
properly secured to release fork.
(4) Install transmission.
Fig. 3 Typical Method Of Aligning Clutch Disc

(23 ft. lbs.) on 2.5L engines and 52 N·m (38 ft.
lbs.) on 4.0 L engines.
(a) Start all 6 bolts by hand.
(b) Tighten 3 pilot hole bolts 3/4s of the way
(any sequence).
(c) Starting 180 degrees from the last pilot bolt,
tighten 3 large hole bolts 3/4s of the way (any
sequence).
(d) Tighten 3 pilot hole bolts all the way (any Fig. 4 Release Bearing Attachment
sequence).
PILOT BEARING
(e) Starting 180 degrees from last pilot bolt,
tighten 3 large bolts all the way (any sequence).
REMOVAL
(11) Apply light coat of Mopart high temperature
(1) Remove transmission. Refer to Group 21,
bearing grease to clutch disc hub and splines of
Transmission and Transfer Case, for proper proce-
transmission input shaft. Do not over lubricate
dures.
shaft splines. This will result in grease contam-
(2) Remove clutch cover and disc.
ination of disc.
(3) Use a suitable blind hole puller to remove pilot
(12) Install transmission.
bearing.
XJ CLUTCH 6 - 11
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean bearing bore with solvent and wipe dry
with shop towel.
(2) Lubricate new pilot bearing with Mopart high
temperature grease.
(3) Position and start new bearing in bearing bore
by hand. Note that pilot bearing has seal at one end.
Install bearing so seal is facing outward toward
transmission.
(4) Seat pilot bearing with clutch alignment tool
(Fig. 5). Keep bearing straight during installation. Do
not allow bearing to become cocked. Tap bearing into
place until flush with edge of bearing bore. Do not
recess bearing.
Fig. 6 Clutch Housing Attachment

CLUTCH HYDRAULIC LINKAGE
The clutch master cylinder, slave cylinder and con-
necting line are serviced as an assembly only. The
linkage components cannot be overhauled or serviced
separately. The cylinders and connecting line are
sealed units. Also note that removal/installation pro-
cedures for right and left hand drive models are basi-
Fig. 5 Typical Method Of Installing Pilot Bearing cally the same. Only master cylinder location is
different.
(5) Install transmission. Refer to Group 21, Trans-
mission and Transfer Case, for proper procedures. REMOVAL
(1) Raise vehicle.
CLUTCH HOUSING (2) Remove fasteners attaching slave cylinder to
The clutch housing is removable and can be clutch housing.
replaced when the transmission is out of the vehicle. (3) Remove slave cylinder from clutch housing
The bolts attaching the housing to the transmis- (Fig. 7).
sion case are located inside the housing (Fig. 6). Rec- (4) Disengage clutch fluid line from body clips.
ommended tightening torque for the clutch housing- (5) Lower vehicle.
to-transmission bolts is 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.). (6) Verify that cap on clutch master cylinder reser-
voir is tight. This is necessary to avoid spilling fluid
NOTE: Be sure the transmission and housing mat-
during removal.
ing surfaces are clean before installing an original,
(7) Remove clutch master cylinder attaching nuts
or replacement clutch housing. Dirt/foreign material
(Fig. 7) or (Fig. 8).
trapped between the housing and transmission will
(8) Disengage captured bushing on clutch master
cause misalignment. If misalignment is severe
cylinder actuator from pivot pin on pedal arm.
enough, the result will be clutch drag, incomplete
(9) Slide actuator off pivot pin.
release and hard shifting.
6 - 12 CLUTCH XJ
(10) Disconnect clutch interlock safety switch (2) Position clutch linkage components in vehicle.
wires. Work connecting line and slave cylinder downward
(11) Remove clutch hydraulic linkage through past engine and adjacent to clutch housing (Fig. 7) or
engine compartment. (Fig. 8).
(3) Position clutch master cylinder on dash panel
(Fig. 7) or (Fig. 8).
(4) Attach clutch master cylinder actuator to pivot
pin on clutch pedal.
(5) Install and tighten clutch master cylinder
attaching nuts to 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.) torque.
(6) Raise vehicle.
(7) Insert slave cylinder push rod through clutch
housing opening and into release lever. Be sure cap
on end of rod is securely engaged in lever. Check this
before installing cylinder attaching nuts.
(8) Install and tighten slave cylinder attaching
nuts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque.
(9) Secure clutch fluid line in body and transmis-
sion clips.
(10) Lower vehicle.
(11) Connect clutch interlock safety switch wires.
Fig. 7 Slave Cylinder and Left Hand Drive Clutch
Master Cylinder
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Bolts, clutch cover 2.5 L . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs)
Bolts, clutch cover 4.0 L . . . . . . . 52 N·m (38 ft. lbs)
Bolt/Nut, clutch cyl. mount . . . . 23 N·m (200 in. lbs)
Bolt, clutch housing M12 . . . . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs)
Bolt, clutch housing 3/8 . . . . . . . . 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs)
Bolt, clutch housing 7/16 . . . . . . . 58 N·m (43 ft. lbs)
Bolt, clutch housing/trans. . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs)
Bolt, dust shield M8 . . . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m (72 in. lbs)
Bolt, dust shield lower . . . . . . . . 50 N·m (37 ft. lbs)
Bolt, X-member/frame . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs)
Bolt, X-member/rear support . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
Fig. 8 Right Hand Drive Clutch Master Cylinder Bolts, flywheel 4.0 L . . . . . . . . 142 N·m (105 ft. lbs)
INSTALLATION Bolts, flywheel 2.5 L . . 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs) +1/4 turn
(1) Be sure reservoir cover on clutch master cylin- Bolt, starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs)
der is tight to avoid spills. Bolts, U-joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.)
XJ CLUTCH 6-1
CLUTCH
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION FLYWHEEL RING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

CLUTCH COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 PILOT BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CLUTCH COVER AND DISC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SPECIAL TOOLS
FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

CLUTCH COMPONENTS CLUTCH COVER AND DISC
The clutch mechanism consists of a single, dry-type
clutch disc and a diaphragm style clutch cover. A REMOVAL
hydraulic linkage is used to operate the clutch disc (1) Remove the transmission and transfer case, if
and cover. The clutch components are very similar to equipped. Refer to Group 21, Transmission and
those used in gas engine models. Transfer Case for procedure.
A pilot bearing is used to support the transmission (2) If the original clutch cover will be reinstalled,
input shaft. The bearing is seated in a separate, mark position of cover on flywheel for assembly ref-
removable housing bolted to the flywheel hub. erence. Use paint or scribe for this purpose.
(3) If the clutch cover is to be replaced, cover bolts
CLUTCH HYDRAULIC SYSTEM can be removed in any sequence. However, if original
The clutch hydraulic system should not require cover will be reinstalled, loosen cover bolts evenly in
additional fluid under normal circumstances. a star pattern to relieve spring tension equally. This
is necessary to avoid warping the cover.
NOTE: The reservoir fluid level will actually (4) Remove the clutch cover bolts and remove
increase as normal clutch wear occurs. For this rea- cover and disc (Fig. 1).
son, it is important to avoid over filling, or remov-
ing fluid from the reservoir.
If inspection indicates additional fluid is needed,

add fluid from a sealed container only. Use Mopart
brake fluid, or an equivalent meeting standards SAE
J1703 and DOT 3. Do not use any other type of fluid.
6-2 CLUTCH XJ
Fig. 1 Clutch Components (VM Diesel)

INSTALLATION
(1) Lightly scuff sand flywheel face with 180 grit
emery cloth. Then clean surface with brake cleaner.
(2) Lightly lubricate the pilot bearing with Mopart
high temperature bearing grease.
(3) Check free operation of clutch disc by sliding
disc onto transmission output shaft splines. Disc
should slide onto splines freely without binding.
(4) Position the clutch disc on flywheel. Be sure
side of disc marked “flywheel side” is positioned
against flywheel (Fig. 2). If disc is not marked, be
sure flat side of disc hub is placed toward the fly-
wheel.
(5) Insert the clutch alignment tool (Fig. 3) in
clutch disc and pilot bearing.
(6) Position the clutch cover over disc and on fly-
wheel.
(7) Install the clutch cover bolts finger tight.
(8) Starting with the bolts marked “P” on the cover
first, tighten clutch cover bolts in a star pattern to 50
N·m torque.
(9) Apply light coat of Mopart high temperature
bearing grease to pilot bearing and splines of trans- Fig. 2 Clutch Disc Position
mission input shaft. (10) Install the transmission and transfer case.
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case
CAUTION: Do not over-lubricate as this will result
for procedure.
in grease contamination of the disc.
XJ CLUTCH 6-3
Fig. 5 Pilot Bearing Removal

Fig. 3 Clutch Disc Alignment—Typical
PILOT BEARING
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the transmission and transfer case.
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case-
for procedures.
(2) Remove the clutch cover and disc. Refer to
clutch cover and disc removal and installation in this
group.
(3) Remove the four bolts that attach the pilot
bearing retainer to the flywheel (Fig. 4).
(4) Remove the pilot bearing retainer.
(5) Support the bearing retainer on two wood
blocks.
(6) Remove the pilot bearing with a suitable sized Fig. 6 Pilot Bearing Installation
socket and extension (Fig. 5). Use mallet to tap bear-
ing out of retainer.
Fig. 7 Pilot Bearing Seated In Retainer
Fig. 4 Pilot Bearing Retainer Bolt Removal/

Installation
6-4 CLUTCH XJ
INSTALLATION block or in one of the flywheel attaching bolt holes.
Face runout can be corrected by resurfacing if neces-
CAUTION: The bearing can be installed incorrectly sary. Surface grinding equipment is recommended for
if care is not exercised. Check bearing position this purpose. Stock removal should not exceed 0.25
before installing it Make sure the bearing seal and mm.
the letters on the bearing will both be facing out
(toward the clutch) after installation.
(1) Install the new pilot bearing with hammer and

tool handle C-4171. (Fig. 6). Seat the bearing flush
with lower edge of chamfer in retainer bore (Fig. 7).
Reposition the bearing if necessary.
(2) Install the bearing retainer. Torque bolts to 28
N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
(3) Lubricate the pilot bearing with Mopart high
temperature wheel bearing grease.
(4) Lightly scuff sand the flywheel surface with
180 grit emery cloth. Clean the surface with Mopart
brake or carburetor cleaner.
Fig. 8 Checking Flywheel Runout
(5) Install the clutch disc and cover. Refer to clutch
cover and disc removal and installation in this group. INSTALLATION
(6) Install the transmission and transfer case.
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case CAUTION: Use NEW flywheel bolts for the following
for procedures. procedure.
FLYWHEEL
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the transmission and clutch housing.
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case
for procedure.
(2) Remove the clutch cover and disc as described
in this section.
(3) Remove the bolts that attach pilot bearing
retainer to flywheel.
(4) Remove the pilot bearing and retainer.
(5) Remove the flywheel bolts.
(6) Grasp the flywheel firmly and work it off the
crankshaft flange.
(7) Remove the o-ring from the crankshaft flange,
or the mounting shoulder of the flywheel (Fig. 9).
(8) Clean the flywheel in solvent.
INSPECTION
Examine the flywheel mounting surfaces, clutch
contact surface, and ring gear. Check condition of fly-
wheel hub and attaching bolts. Replace flywheel if Fig. 9 Flywheel Mounting (VM Diesel)
hub exhibits cracks in the area of attaching bolt
holes. Replace ring gear if the teeth are damaged. (1) Clean the crankshaft flange before mounting
Resurface the flywheel if the clutch contact surface is the flywheel. Dirt or grease on flange surface may
scored or rough (refer to flywheel finishing and ring cock flywheel causing run-out.
gear replacement information in this section. (2) Install new o-ring in the flywheel mounting
Check flywheel runout if misalignment is sus- flange (Fig. 9). Use grease to hold the ring in place.
pected. Runout should not exceed 0.08 mm. Measure (3) Install the flywheel on the crankshaft and
flywheel face runout with a dial indicator (Fig. 8). align the bolt holes.
Mount the indicator on a stud installed in the engine (4) Install and tighten the new flywheel bolts as
follows:
XJ CLUTCH 6-5
NOTE: The method of heating and expanding the
new ring gear is extremely important. Every surface
of the gear must be heated at the same time to pro-
duce uniform expansion. An oven or similar
enclosed heating device must be used. Temperature
required for uniform expansion is approximately
350°-375°.
CAUTION: Do not use an oxy/acetylene torch to

remove the old gear, or to heat and expand a new
gear. The high temperature of the torch flame can
cause localized heating that will damage the fly-
wheel. In addition, using the torch to heat a replace-
ment gear will cause uneven heating and
expansion. The torch flame can also anneal the
Fig. 10 Cross Tightening Method gear teeth resulting in rapid wear and damage after
installation.
(a) Lubricate and install the 6 new flywheel
bolts.
(b) Torque the 6 flywheel bolts to 49 N·m (36 ft. INSTALLATION
lbs.) starting with one bolt and following with the (1) Position and install the heated ring gear on the
opposite one (cross tightening) until completion, in flywheel:
a clockwise direction (Fig. 10). (a) Wear heat resistant gloves to handle the hot
(c) Loosen one bolt at a time and tighten to 19.6 ring gear.
N·m (14 ft. lbs.) plus 75° using the cross tightening (b) Align the ring gear on the flywheel evenly.
method until completion. (c) Use hammer and brass drift to tap ring gear
(5) Install the clutch cover and disc. Refer to onto the flywheel.
clutch cover and disc removal and installation proce- (d) Seat the ring gear on flywheel
dure in this section. (2) Allow the ring gear to cool down before instal-
(6) Install the transmission and transfer case. lation on the engine. Place flywheel on work bench
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case and let it cool in normal shop air.
for removal and installation procedure. (3) Install the flywheel and torque bolts. Refer to
flywheel removal and installation in this group.
FLYWHEEL RING GEAR (4) Install the clutch cover and disc. Refer to
clutch cover and disc removal and installation in this
REMOVAL group.
(1) Remove the transmission and transfer case. (5) Install the transmission and transfer case.
Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case Refer to Group 21, Transmission and Transfer Case
for removal and installation procedures. for removal and installation procedures.
(2) Remove the clutch cover and disc. Refer to
clutch cover and disc removal and installation in this CAUTION: Do not use water or compressed air to
group. cool the flywheel. The rapid cooling produced by
(3) Remove the flywheel. Refer to flywheel removal water or compressed air will distort or crack the
and installation in this group. new gear.
(4) Mark position of the old gear for alignment ref-
erence. Use a carbide tipped scribe to mark gear loca-
tion on flywheel.
(5) Wear protective goggles or approved safety
glasses.
(6) Remove the old gear by cutting most of the way
through it at one point. Use an abrasive cut off wheel
for this purpose. Break the ring gear at cut with a
hammer and a cold chisel or punch
(7) Ring gear is shrink fit on flywheel. This means
the gear must be expanded by heating in order to
install it.
6-6 CLUTCH XJ
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL TOOLS

SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL TOOLS
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Clutch Cover to Flywheel
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 N·m (37 ft. lbs.)
Clutch Housing to Transmission
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m (34 ft. lbs.)
Flywheel to Crankshaft
Bolts . . . . . See removal and installation procedure.
Pilot Bearing Retainer to Flywheel/Crankshaft
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Clutch Housing to Engine
Top (2) Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.)
Middle (2) Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 58 N·m (43 ft. lbs.)
Bottom (2) Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Universal Handle—C-4171
XJ COOLING SYSTEM 7-1
COOLING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION RADIATOR CAP—PRESSURE TESTING . . . . . 20

ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . 2 RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW CHECK . . . . . . . . 17
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 VISCOUS FAN DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLANT—ADDING ADDITIONAL . . . . . . . . . . 21
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLANT—LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COOLING SYSTEM CIRCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLANT—ROUTINE LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . 20
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLING SYSTEM—DRAINING
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AND FILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLING SYSTEM—REVERSE FLUSHING . . . 21
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . 4 BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER . . . . 3 COOLANT RESERVE TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 COOLING SYSTEM FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
COOLANT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN—2.5L . . . . . . . . . . . 32
COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW SYSTEM . . . . 3 ELECTRIC COOLING FAN—4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . 32
COOLANT SELECTION-ADDITIVES . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS . . . . . . . . . 34
COOLING SYSTEM FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 RADIATOR—2.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RADIATOR—4.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TRANSMISSION OIL COOLERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 VISCOUS FAN DRIVE REMOVAL/
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING CLEANING AND INSPECTION
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . 8 COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
COOLANT—LOW LEVEL AERATION . . . . . . . . 20 COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART . . . . 11 FAN BLADE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
COOLING SYSTEM—TESTING FOR LEAKS . . . 17 RADIATOR CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DEAERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
DRB SCAN TOOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIFICATIONS
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD) . . . . . . . . . . . 8 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 SPECIAL TOOLS
RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL— COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
PRESSURE RELIEF CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
7-2 COOLING SYSTEM XJ
GENERAL INFORMATION
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS
CAUTION: When installing an accessory drive belt,
the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine
may overheat due to water pump rotating in wrong
direction. Refer to the appropriate Belt Schematic in
this group for the correct belt routing. Or, refer to
the Belt Routing Label located in the engine com-
partment.
COOLING SYSTEM
The cooling system regulates engine operating tem-
perature. It allows the engine to reach normal oper-
ating temperature as quickly as possible, maintains
normal operating temperature and prevents over-
heating.
The cooling system also provides a means of heat-
ing the passenger compartment and cooling the auto-
matic transmission fluid (if equipped). The cooling
system is pressurized and uses a centrifugal water
pump to circulate coolant throughout the system.
An optional factory installed heavy duty cooling
package is available on most models. The package
consists of a radiator that has an increased number
of cooling fins. Vehicles equipped with a 2.5L/4.0L
engine and heavy duty cooling and/or air condition- Fig. 1 Coolant Circulation—2.5L/4.0L Engines
ing also have an auxiliary electric cooling fan.
COOLANT
COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS The cooling system is designed around the coolant.
The cooling system consists of: Coolant flows through the engine water jackets
• A radiator absorbing heat produced during engine operation.
• Cooling fan (mechanical and/or electrical) The coolant carries heat to the radiator and heater
• Thermal viscous fan drive core. Here it is transferred to the ambient air pass-
• Fan shroud ing through the radiator and heater core fins. The
• Radiator pressure cap coolant also removes heat from the automatic trans-
• Thermostat mission fluid in vehicles equipped with an automatic
• Coolant reserve/overflow system transmission.
• Transmission oil cooler (if equipped with an
automatic transmission) RADIATOR
• Coolant Radiators for both engines are the cross flow type.
• Water pump Plastic tanks are used on all radiators.
• Hoses and hose clamps
CAUTION: Plastic tanks, while stronger than brass,
COOLING SYSTEM CIRCULATION are subject to damage by impact, such as
wrenches.
Cooling system circulation for 2.5L/4.0L models is
shown in (Fig. 1). If the plastic tank has been damaged, the plastic
tank and/or o-rings are available for service repair.
WATER PUMP Tank replacement should be done by a qualified per-
A quick test to determine if the pump is working is son with proper equipment.
to check if the heater warms properly. A defective
water pump will not be able to circulate heated cool- ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT TENSION
ant through the long heater hose to the heater core. Correct accessory drive belt tension is required to
ensure optimum performance of belt driven engine
accessories. If specified tension is not maintained, The auxiliary air-to-oil transmission oil cooler is
belt slippage may cause: engine overheating, lack of located in front of the radiator or A/C condenser (if
power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capac- equipped) and behind the grill . It is mounted to the
ity, reduced generator output rate, greatly reduced front frame crossmember.
belt life and objectionable under hood noise. The auxiliary oil coolers on all models operate in
conjunction with the internal radiator mounted main
DOMESTIC LEFT HAND DRIVE VEHICLES oil cooler. The transmission oil is routed through the
Belt tension is adjusted at the power steering main cooler first, then the auxiliary cooler, before
pump bracket and idler pulley assembly. returning to the transmission.
DOMESTIC RIGHT HAND DRIVE VEHICLES COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW SYSTEM

If equipped with a 4.0L 6-cylinder engine; the The system works along with the radiator pressure
accessory drive belt is adjusted at the generator cap. This is done by using thermal expansion and
mounting bracket. When equipped with a 2.5L 4-cyl- contraction of the coolant to keep the coolant free of
inder engine, the accessory drive belt is adjusted at trapped air. It provides:
the power steering pump bracket and idler pulley • A volume for coolant expansion and contraction.
assembly. • A convenient and safe method for checking/ad-
justing coolant level at atmospheric pressure. This is
BLOCK HEATER done without removing the radiator pressure cap.
An optional engine block heater is available for all • Some reserve coolant to the radiator to cover
models. The heater is equipped with a power cord. minor leaks and evaporation or boiling losses.
The cord is attached to an engine compartment com- As the engine cools, a vacuum is formed in the
ponent with tie-straps. The heater warms the engine cooling system of both the radiator and engine. Cool-
providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up ant will then be drawn from the coolant tank and
in low temperatures. The heater is mounted in a core returned to a proper level in the radiator.
hole of the engine cylinder block (in place of a freeze The coolant reserve/overflow system consists of a
plug) with the heating element immersed in engine radiator mounted pressurized cap, a plastic reserve/
coolant. Connect the power cord to a grounded 110- overflow tank (Fig. 2) (Fig. 3), a tube (hose) connect-
120 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three- ing the radiator and tank, and an overflow tube on
wire extension cord. the side of the tank.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER
WATER-TO-OIL COOLER
All models equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion are equipped with a transmission oil cooler
mounted internally within the radiator tank. This
internal cooler is supplied as standard equipment on
all models equipped with an automatic transmission.
Transmission oil is cooled when it passes through
this separate cooler. In case of a leak in the internal
radiator mounted transmission oil cooler, engine cool-
ant may become mixed with transmission fluid or
transmission fluid may enter engine cooling system.
Both cooling system and transmission should be
drained and inspected if the internal radiator
mounted transmission cooler is leaking.
AIR-TO-OIL COOLER
An auxiliary air-to-oil transmission oil cooler is
available with most engine packages. Fig. 2 Reserve/Overflow Tank—Except Right Hand
Drive
ponent with tie-straps. The heater warms the engine
providing easier engine starting and faster warm-up
in low temperatures. The heater is mounted in a core
hole of the engine cylinder block (in place of a freeze
plug) with the heating element immersed in engine
coolant. Connect the power cord to a grounded 110-
120 volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-
wire extension cord.
WARNING: DO NOT OPERATE ENGINE UNLESS

BLOCK HEATER CORD HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED
FROM POWER SOURCE AND SECURED IN PLACE.
BLOCK HEATER SPECIFICATIONS

• 2.5L 4-Cylinder Engine: 115 Volts 400 Watts
• 4.0L 6-Cylinder Engine: 120 Volts 600 Watts
THERMOSTAT
A pellet-type thermostat controls the operating
temperature of the engine by controlling the amount
of coolant flow to the radiator. On all engines the
thermostat is closed below 195°F (90°C). Above this
Fig. 3 Reserve/Overflow Tank—With Right Hand temperature, coolant is allowed to flow to the radia-
Drive tor. This provides quick engine warm-up and overall
COOLING SYSTEM FANS temperature control.
All models are equipped with a viscous fan. This An arrow plus the word UP is stamped on the
thermal viscous fan drive is a torque-and-tempera- front flange next to the air bleed. The words TO
ture-sensitive clutch unit. It automatically increases RAD are stamped on one arm of the thermostat.
or decreases fan speed to provide proper engine cool- They indicate the proper installed position.
ing. Vehicles with a 2.5L/4.0L engine with air condi- The same thermostat is used for winter and sum-
tioning, or 4.0L with “max” cooling also have an mer seasons. An engine should not be operated with-
auxiliary electrical cooling fan. out a thermostat, except for servicing or testing.
For individual descriptions or operation, refer to Operating without a thermostat causes other prob-
Viscous Fan Drive or Electric Cooling Fan in this lems. These are: longer engine warm-up time, unre-
group. liable warm-up performance, increased exhaust
emissions and crankcase condensation. This conden-
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT TENSION sation can result in sludge formation.
Both the 2.5L and 4.0L engines use one accessory
CAUTION: Do not operate an engine without a ther-
drive belt. Correct drive belt tension is required to
mostat, except for servicing or testing.
ensure optimum performance of the belt driven
engine accessories. There are different types of
adjustment gauges for checking either a Poly–V or a COOLANT PERFORMANCE
conventional V-type belt. Refer to the instructions
supplied with the gauge. Make sure to use a gauge ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES
designed specifically for serpentine style belts. Place The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water
gauge in the middle of the section of belt being tested mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle oper-
(between two pulleys) to check tension. Do not allow ating conditions. The recommended mixture of 50/50
the gauge (or gauge adapter) to contact anything but ethylene-glycol and water will provide protection
the belt. against freezing to -37° C (-35° F). The antifreeze
For belt tension specifications, refer to Specifica- concentration must always be a minimum of 44 per-
tions-Accessory Drive Belt in this group. cent, year-round in all climates. If percentage is
lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be
BLOCK HEATER eroded by cavitation, and cooling system com-
An optional engine block heater is available for all ponents may be severely damaged by corrosion.
models. The heater is equipped with a power cord. Maximum protection against freezing is provided
The cord is attached to an engine compartment com- with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which
prevents freezing down to -67.7° C (-90° F). A higher and low mineral content water. Only use an anti-
percentage will freeze at a warmer temperature. freeze containing ALUGARD 340-2 y.
Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can cause the
engine to overheat because the specific heat of anti- CAUTION: Do not use coolant additives that are
freeze is lower than that of water. claimed to improve engine cooling.
100 Percent Ethylene-Glycol—Should Not Be Used in

Chrysler Vehicles RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP
Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause for- All radiators are equipped with a pressure cap.
mation of additive deposits in the system, as the cor- This cap releases pressure at some point within a
rosion inhibitive additives in ethylene-glycol require range of 83-110 kPa (12-16 psi). The pressure relief
the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as point (in pounds) is engraved on top of the cap (Fig.
insulation, causing temperatures to rise to as high as 4).
149° C (300° F). This temperature is hot enough to The cooling system will operate at pressures
melt plastic and soften solder. The increased temper- slightly above atmospheric pressure. This results in a
ature can result in engine detonation. In addition, higher coolant boiling point allowing increased radi-
100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes at 22° C (-8° F ). ator cooling capacity. The cap contains a spring-
loaded pressure relief valve that opens when system
Propylene-glycol Formulations—Should Not Be Used in pressure reaches release range of 83-110 kPa (12-16
Chrysler Vehicles psi).
Propylene-glycol formulations do not meet
Chrysler coolant specifications. It’s overall effec-
tive temperature range is smaller than that of ethyl-
ene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propylene-glycol
and water is -32° C (-26° F). 5° C higher than ethyl-
ene-glycol’s freeze point. The boiling point (protection
against summer boil-over) of propylene-glycol is 125°
C (257° F ) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi), compared to 128° C
(263° F) for ethylene-glycol. Use of propylene-glycol
can result in boil-over or freeze-up in Chrysler vehi-
cles, which are designed for ethylene-glycol. Propy-
lene glycol also has poorer heat transfer
characteristics than ethylene glycol. This can
increase cylinder head temperatures under certain
conditions.
Propylene-glycol/Ethylene-glycol Mixtures—Should Not Be

Used in Chrysler Vehicles
Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can
cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibi-
tors, causing damage to the various cooling system
components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propy-
lene-glycol based coolants are mixed in the vehicle,
conventional methods of determining freeze point will
not be accurate. Both the refractive index and spe-
cific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propy-
lene glycol.
CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be

measured with normal field equipment and can Fig. 4 Radiator Pressure Cap and Filler Neck—
cause problems associated with 100 percent ethyl- Typical
ene-glycol. A vent valve in the center of cap allows a small
coolant flow through cap when coolant is below boil-
ing temperature. The valve is completely closed when
COOLANT SELECTION-ADDITIVES boiling point is reached. As the coolant cools, it con-
Coolant should be maintained at the specified level tracts and creates a vacuum in the cooling system.
with a mixture of ethylene glycol-based antifreeze This causes the vacuum valve to open and coolant in
the reserve/overflow tank to be drawn through its A quick test to determine if the pump is working is
connecting hose into radiator. If the vacuum valve is to check if the heater warms properly. A defective
stuck shut, the radiator hoses will collapse on cool- water pump will not be able to circulate heated cool-
down. ant through the long heater hose to the heater core.
A rubber gasket seals radiator filler neck. This is
done to maintain vacuum during coolant cool-down COOLING SYSTEM HOSES
and to prevent leakage when system is under pres- Rubber hoses route coolant to and from the radia-
sure. tor, intake manifold and heater core. Radiator lower
hoses are spring-reinforced to prevent collapse from
WATER PUMP water pump suction at moderate and high engine
A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant speeds.
through the water jackets, passages, intake manifold,
radiator core, cooling system hoses and heater core. WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS
The pump is driven from the engine crankshaft by a ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES.
drive belt on all engines. WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY
The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF
of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the CLAMP, SUCH AS SPECIAL CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER
housing. The housing has a small hole to allow seep- 6094) (Fig. 6). SNAP-ON CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER
age to escape. The water pump seals are lubricated HPC-20) MAY BE USED FOR LARGER CLAMPS.
by the antifreeze in the coolant mixture. No addi- ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVIC-
tional lubrication is necessary. ING CONSTANT TENSION CLAMPS.
CAUTION: All engines are equipped with a reverse

(counter-clockwise) rotating water pump and vis- CAUTION: A number or letter is stamped into the
cous fan drive assembly. REVERSE is stamped or tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 7). If
imprinted on the cover of the viscous fan drive and replacement is necessary, use only an original
inner side of the fan. The letter R is stamped into equipment clamp with matching number or letter.
the back of the water pump impeller (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 Hose Clamp Tool—Typical

Inspect the hoses at regular intervals. Replace
hoses that are cracked, feel brittle when squeezed, or
swell excessively when the system is pressurized.
For all vehicles: In areas where specific routing
clamps are not provided, be sure that hoses are posi-
Fig. 5 Reverse Rotating Water Pump—Typical tioned with sufficient clearance. Check clearance
from exhaust manifolds and pipe, fan blades, drive
Engines from previous model years, depending belts and sway bars. Improperly positioned hoses can
upon application, may have been equipped with a for- be damaged, resulting in coolant loss and engine
ward (clockwise) rotating water pump. Installation of overheating.
the wrong water pump will cause engine overheating.
Fig. 8 Typical Viscous Fan Drive

Only when sufficient heat is present, will the vis-
cous fan drive engage. This is when the air flowing
through the radiator core causes a reaction to the
bimetallic coil. It then increases fan speed to provide
the necessary additional engine cooling.
Fig. 7 Clamp Number/Letter Location
Once the engine has cooled, the radiator discharge
Ordinary worm gear type hose clamps (when temperature will drop. The bimetallic coil again
equipped) can be removed with a straight screw- reacts and the fan speed is reduced to the previous
driver or a hex socket. To prevent damage to disengaged speed.
hoses or clamps, the hose clamps should be Vehicles equipped with 2.5L engines have what is
tightened to 4 N·m (34 in. lbs.) torque. Do not know as an hybrid cooling fan system. This means
over tighten hose clamps. that not only do they have a viscous fan but they also
have an electric fan as well. The hybrid viscous fan
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE drive has a low speed characteristic. This causes the
mechanical fan speeds to be very low 200–400 rpm
NOTE: Also refer to Cooling System Fans. range when not engaged allowing the engine to have
additional performance and horsepower gaines.
The thermal viscous fan drive is a silicone-fluid-
filled coupling used to connect the fan blades to CAUTION: Engines equipped with poly–V drive
either the engine or the water pump shaft. The cou- belts have reverse rotating fans and viscous fan
pling allows the fan to be driven in a normal manner. drives. They are marked with the word REVERSE to
This is done at low engine speeds while limiting the designate their usage. Installation of the wrong fan
top speed of the fan to a predetermined maximum or viscous fan drive can result in engine overheat-
level at higher engine speeds. ing.
2.5L vehicles with A/C are equipped with a viscous
fan drive which is designed to “free wheel” during
most of the ambient conditions encountered by the CAUTION: If the viscous fan drive is replaced
vehicle and will only engage during high heat loads because of mechanical damage, the cooling fan
as seen in trailer towing or high ambient tempera- blades should also be inspected. Inspect for fatigue
tures. cracks, loose blades, or loose rivets that could
A thermostatic bimetallic spring coil is located on have resulted from excessive vibration. Replace fan
the front face of the viscous fan drive unit. A typical blade assembly if any of these conditions are
viscous unit is shown in (Fig. 8). This spring coil found. Also inspect water pump bearing and shaft
reacts to the temperature of the radiator discharge assembly for any related damage due to a viscous
air. It engages the viscous fan drive for higher fan fan drive malfunction.
speed if the air temperature from the radiator rises
above a certain point. Until additional engine cooling
is necessary, the fan will remain at a reduced rpm
regardless of engine speed.
NOISE vided to the cooling fan relay through pin C2 of PCM
It is normal for fan noise to be louder (roar- connector C3. Battery voltage is then applied to the
ing) when: fan through the relay. When coolant temperature
• The underhood temperature is above the engage- drops below approximately 98°C (209°F), the PCM
ment point for the viscous drive coupling. This may opens the ground path to the relay. This will prevent
occur when ambient (outside air temperature) is very the cooling fan from being energized.
high. The cooling fan motor is protected by a 40 amp
• Engine loads and temperatures are high such as maxi-fuse located in the PDC. The fan relay is pro-
when towing a trailer. tected by a 15 amp fuse located in the junction block.
• Cool silicone fluid within the fan drive unit is
being redistributed back to its normal disengaged
(warm) position. This can occur during the first 15
seconds to one minute after engine start-up on a cold
engine. ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS (OBD)
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN COOLING SYSTEM RELATED DIAGNOSTICS

Vehicles equipped with a 2.5L/4.0L engine and air The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) has been
conditioning and 4.0L vehicles equipped with the programmed to monitor the certain following cooling
“max” cooling package also have an electrical cooling system components:
fan. The fan is controlled by the cooling fan relay, • If the engine has remained cool for too long a
which is located in the power distribution center period, such as with a stuck open thermostat, a Diag-
(PDC) (Fig. 9). For the location of relay within the nostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
PDC , refer to the label on PDC cover. • If an open or shorted condition has developed in
The electric fan on the 2.5L equipped vehicles is the relay circuit controlling the electric radiator fan,
considered the primary fan (low to moderate ambient a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) can be set.
conditions) and is energized when the JTEC recieves If the problem is sensed in a monitored circuit
input from the coolant temperature sensor or the a/c often enough to indicate an actual problem, a DTC is
system and supplies ground to the cooling fan relay. stored. The DTC will be stored in the PCM memory
for eventual display to the service technician. (Refer
to Group 25, Emission Control Systems for proper
procedures).
ACCESSING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

To read DTC’s and to obtain cooling system data,
refer to Group 25, Emission Control Systems for
proper procedures.
DRB SCAN TOOL

For operation of the DRB scan tool, refer to the
appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures ser-
vice manual.
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS

VISUAL DIAGNOSIS
When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts,
small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib (Fig. 10), are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace the belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not nor-
mal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must
Fig. 9 Power Distribution Center (PDC) be replaced (Fig. 10). Also replace the belt if it has
When coolant temperature reaches approximately excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
103°C (218°F), or when air conditioning is requested, Refer to the Accessory Drive Belt Diagnosis charts
the powertrain control module (PCM) provides a for further belt diagnosis.
ground path for the fan relay. This ground is pro-
NOISE DIAGNOSIS
Noises generated by the accessory drive belt are
most noticeable at idle. Before replacing a belt to
resolve a noise condition, inspect all of the accessory
drive pulleys for alignment, glazing, or excessive end
play.
Fig. 10 Belt Wear Patterns
ACCESSORY DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS CHART
RIB CHUNKING (One or more ribs 1. Foreign objects imbedded in 1. Remove foreign objects from
has separated from belt body) pulley grooves. pulley grooves. Replace belt.
2. Installation damage 2. Replace belt
RIB OR BELT WEAR 1. Pulley misaligned 1. Align pulley(s)
2. Abrasive environment 2. Clean pulley(s). Replace belt if

necessary
3. Rusted pulley(s) 3. Clean rust from pulley(s)
4. Sharp or jagged pulley groove 4. Replace pulley. Inspect belt.
tips
5. Belt rubber deteriorated 5. Replace belt
BELT SLIPS 1. Belt slipping because of 1. Adjust tension

insufficient tension
2. Belt or pulley exposed to 2. Replace belt and clean pulleys

substance that has reduced friction
(belt dressing, oil, ethylene glycol)
3. Driven component bearing failure 3. Replace faulty component or
(seizure) bearing
4. Belt glazed or hardened from 4. Replace belt.
heat and excessive slippage
7 - 10 COOLING SYSTEM XJ
LONGITUDAL BELT CRACKING 1. Belt has mistracked from pulley 1. Replace belt
groove
2. Pulley groove tip has worn away 2. Replace belt

rubber to tensile member
9GROOVE JUMPING9 1. Belt tension either too low or too 1. Adjust belt tension
(Belt does not maintain correct high
position on pulley)
2. Pulley(s) not within design 2. Replace pulley(s)
tolerance
3. Foreign object(s) in grooves 3. Remove foreign objects from
grooves
4. Pulley misalignment 4. Align component
5. Belt cordline is broken 5. Replace belt
BELT BROKEN 1. Excessive tension 1. Replace belt and adjust tension

(Note: Identify and correct problem to specification
before new belt is installed)
2. Tensile member damaged during 2. Replace belt
belt installation
3. Severe misalignment 3. Align pulley(s)
4. Bracket, pulley, or bearing failure 4. Replace defective component
and belt
NOISE 1. Belt slippage 1. Adjust belt

(Objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive 2. Bearing noise 2. Locate and repair
belt is in operation) 3. Belt misalignment 3. Align belt/pulley(s)
4. Belt to pulley mismatch 4. Install correct belt
5. Driven component induced 5. Locate defective driven
vibration component and repair
6. System resonant frequency 6. Vary belt tension within
induced vibration specifications.
TENSION SHEETING FABRIC 1. Tension sheeting contacting 1. Correct rubbing condition

FAILURE stationary object
(Woven fabric on outside,
circumference of belt has cracked or 2. Excessive heat causing woven 2. Replace belt
separated from body of belt) fabric to age
3. Tension sheeting splice has 3. Replace belt
fractured
CORD EDGE FAILURE 1. Excessive tension 1. Adjust belt tension

(Tensile member exposed at edges 2. Belt contacting stationary object 2. Replace belt
of belt or separated from belt body)
3. Pulley(s) out of tolerance 3. Replace pulley
4. Insufficient adhesion between 4. Replace belt and adjust tension
tensile member and rubber matrix to specifications
XJ COOLING SYSTEM 7 - 11
PRELIMINARY CHECKS nents should be installed for model involved per

manufacturer’s specifications.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM OVERHEATING
RECENT SERVICE OR ACCIDENT REPAIR:
Establish what driving conditions caused the com-
plaint. Abnormal loads on the cooling system such as Determine if any recent service has been per-
the following may be the cause: formed on vehicle that may effect cooling system.
This may be:
PROLONGED IDLE, VERY HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE, • Engine adjustments (incorrect timing)
SLIGHT TAIL WIND AT IDLE, SLOW TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC • Slipping engine accessory drive belt(s)
JAMS, HIGH SPEED OR STEEP GRADES. • Brakes (possibly dragging)
Driving techniques that avoid overheating are: • Changed parts. Incorrect water pump or pump
• Idle with A/C off when temperature gauge is at rotating in wrong direction due to belt not correctly
end of normal range. routed.
• Increasing engine speed for more air flow is rec- • Reconditioned radiator or cooling system refill-
ommended. ing (possibly under filled or air trapped in system).
TRAILER TOWING: NOTE: If investigation reveals none of the previous

Consult Trailer Towing section of owners manual. items as a cause for an engine overheating com-
Do not exceed limits. plaint, refer to following Cooling System Diagnosis
charts.
AIR CONDITIONING; ADD-ON OR AFTER MARKET:
A maximum cooling package should have been These charts are to be used as a quick-reference
ordered with vehicle if add-on or after market A/C is only. Refer to the group text for information.
installed. If not, maximum cooling system compo-
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART
TEMPERATURE GAUGE 1. Has a Diagnostic Trouble Code 1. Refer to Group 25, Emission Systems
READS LOW (DTC) been set indicating a stuck open for On-Board Diagnostics and DTC
thermostat? information. Replace thermostat if
necessary.
2. Is the temperature sending unit 2. Check the temperature sensor

connected? connector. Refer to Group 8E. Repair
connector if necessary.
3. Is the temperature gauge operating 3. Check gauge operation. Refer to
OK? Group 8E. Repair as necessary.
4. Coolant level low in cold ambient 4. Check coolant level in the coolant
temperatures accompanied with poor reserve/overflow tank and the radiator.
heater performance. Inspect system for leaks. Repair leaks
as necessary. Refer to the Coolant
section of the manual text for
WARNINGS and CAUTIONS associated
with removing the radiator cap.
5. Improper operation of internal heater 5. Inspect heater and repair as
doors or heater controls. necessary. Refer to Group 24, Heating
and Air Conditioning for procedures.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE 1. Trailer is being towed, a steep hill is 1. This may be a temporary condition
READS HIGH OR THE being climbed, vehicle is operated in and repair is not necessary. Turn off the
COOLANT WARNING slow moving traffic, or engine is being air conditioning and attempt to drive the
LAMP ILLUMINATES. idled with very high ambient (outside) vehicle without any of the previous
COOLANT MAY OR MAY temperatures and the air conditioning is conditions. Observe the temperature
NOT BE LOST OR on. Higher altitudes could aggravate gauge. The gauge should return to the
LEAKING FROM THE these conditions. normal range. If the gauge does not
COOLING SYSTEM return to the normal range, determine
the cause for overheating and repair.
Refer to Possible Causes (2-20).
2. Is the temperature gauge reading 2. Check gauge. Refer to Group 8E.
correctly? Repair as necessary.
3. Is the temperature warning 3. Check warning lamp operation. Refer
illuminating unnecessarily? to Group 8E. Repair as necessary.
4. Coolant low in coolant reserve/ 4. Check for coolant leaks and repair as
overflow tank and radiator? necessary. Refer to Testing Cooling
System for Leaks in this Group.
5. Pressure cap not installed tightly. If 5. Tighten cap
cap is loose, boiling point of coolant will
be lowered. Also refer to the following
Step 6.
6. Poor seals at the radiator cap. 6. (a) Check condition of cap and cap
seals. Refer to Radiator Cap. Replace
cap if necessary.
(b) Check condition of radiator filler
neck. If neck is bent or damaged,
replace radiator.
7. Coolant level low in radiator but not 7. (a) Check condition of radiator cap
in coolant reserve/overflow tank. This and cap seals. Refer to Radiator Cap in
means the radiator is not drawing this Group. Replace cap if necessary.
coolant from the coolant reserve/ (b) Check condition of radiator filler
overflow tank as the engine cools neck. If neck is bent or damaged,
replace radiator.
(c) Check condition of the hose from the
radiator to the coolant tank. It should fit
tight at both ends without any kinks or
tears. Replace hose if necessary.
(d) Check coolant reserve/overflow tank
and tanks hoses for blockage. Repair as
necessary.
8. Incorrect coolant concentration 8. Check coolant. Refer to Coolant
section in this Group for correct
coolant/water mixture ratio.
9. Coolant not flowing through system 9. Check for coolant flow at radiator filler
neck with some coolant removed,
engine warm and thermostat open.
Coolant should be observed flowing
through radiator. If flow is not observed,
determine area of obstruction and repair
as necessary.
10. Radiator or A/C condenser fins are 10. Remove insects and debris. Refer to
dirty or clogged. Radiator Cleaning in this Group.
11. Radiator core is corroded or 11. Have radiator re-cored or replaced.
plugged.
12. Aftermarket A/C installed without 12. Install proper radiator.
proper radiator.
13. Fuel or ignition system problems. 13. Refer to Fuel and Ignition System
Groups for diagnosis.
14. Dragging brakes. 14. Check and correct as necessary.
Refer to Group 5, Brakes for correct
procedures.
15. Bug screen or cardboard is being 15. Remove bug screen or cardboard.
used, reducing airflow.
16. Thermostat partially or completely 16. Check thermostat operation and
shut. replace as necessary. Refer to
Thermostats in this Group.
17. Viscous fan drive not operating 17. Check fan drive operation and
properly. replace as necessary. Refer to Viscous
Fan Drive in this Group.
18. Electric cooling fan not operating 18. Check electric fan operation and
properly (vehicles equipped with repair as necessary. Refer to Electric
2.5L/4.0L and air conditioning Cooling Fan in this Group.
19. Cylinder head gasket leaking. 19. Check for cylinder head gasket
leaks. Refer to Cooling System-Testing
For Leaks in this Group. For repair, refer
to Group 9, Engines.
20. Heater core leaking. 20. Check heater core for leaks. Refer
to Group 24, Heating and Air
Conditioning. Repair as necessary.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE 1. On vehicles equipped with an electric 1. This is a normal condition. No

READING IS fan, the gauge may cycle up and down. correction is necessary unless the
INCONSISTENT This is due to the cycling of the electric gauge cycles into the red (overheat)
(FLUCTUATES, CYCLES radiator fan. zone. Refer to Electric Cooling Fan
OR IS ERRATIC) Diagnosis and Testing in this group.
2. During cold weather operation, with 2. A normal condition. No correction is
the heater blower in the high position, necessary.
the gauge reading may drop slightly.
3. Temperature gauge or engine 3. Check operation of gauge and repair
mounted gauge sensor defective or if necessary. Refer to Group 8E,
shorted. Also, corroded or loose wiring Instrument Panel and Gauges.
in this circuit.
4. Gauge reading rises when vehicle is 4. A normal condition. No correction is
brought to a stop after heavy use necessary. Gauge should return to
(engine still running) normal range after vehicle is driven.
5. Gauge reading high after re-starting a 5. A normal condition. No correction is

warmed up (hot) engine. necessary. The gauge should return to
normal range after a few minutes of
engine operation.
6. Coolant level low in radiator (air will 6. Check and correct coolant leaks.
build up in the cooling system causing Refer to Cooling System-Testing for
the thermostat to open late). leaks in this group.
7. Cylinder head gasket leaking allowing 7. (a) Check for cylinder head gasket
exhaust gas to enter cooling system leaks. Refer to Cooling System-Testing
causing a thermostat to open late. for Leaks in this group.
(b) Check for coolant in the engine oil.
Inspect for white steam emitting from the
exhaust system. Repair as necessary.
8. Water pump impeller loose on shaft. 8. Check water pump and replace as
necessary. Refer to water Pumps in this
group.
9. Loose accessory drive belt. (water 9. Refer to Accessory Drive Belts in this
pump slipping) group. Check and correct as necessary.
10. Air leak on the suction side of the 10. Locate leak and repair as necessary.
water pump allows air to build up in
cooling system causing thermostat to
open late.
PRESSURE CAP IS 1. Pressure relief valve in radiator cap 1. Check condition of radiator cap and
BLOWING OFF STEAM is defective. cap seals. Refer to Radiator Caps in this
AND/OR COOLANT TO group. Replace cap as necessary.
COOLANT TANK.
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
READING MAY BE ABOVE
NORMAL BUT NOT HIGH.
COOLANT LEVEL MAY BE
HIGH IN COOLANT
RESERVE/OVERFLOW
TANK
COOLANT LOSS TO THE 1. Coolant leaks in radiator, cooling 1. Pressure test and repair as
GROUND WITHOUT system hoses, water pump or engine. necessary. Refer to Cooling System-
PRESSURE CAP Testing For Leaks in this group.
BLOWOFF. GAUGE
READING HIGH OR HOT
DETONATION OR 1. engine overheating. 1. Check reason for overheating and

PRE-IGNITION (NOT repair as necessary.
CAUSED BY IGNITION
SYSTEM). GAUGE MAY 2. Freeze point of coolant not correct. 2. Check coolant concentration. Refer to
OR MAY NOT BE Mixture is too rich or too lean. the Coolant section of this group and
READING HIGH adjust ratio as required.
HOSE OR HOSES 1. Vacuum created in cooling system on 1. (a) Radiator cap relief valve stuck.
COLLAPSE WHILE engine cool-down is not being relieved Refer to Radiator Cap in this group.
ENGINE IS RUNNING through coolant reserve/overflow Replace if necessary
system.
(b) Hose between coolant reserve/

overflow tank and radiator is kinked.
Repair as necessary.
(c) Vent at coolant reserve/overflow tank
is plugged. Clean vent and repair as
necessary.
(d) Reserve/overflow tank is internally
blocked or plugged. Check for blockage
and repair as necessary.
ELECTRIC RADIATOR 1. Fan relay, powertrain control module 1. Refer to Electric Cooling Fan
FAN RUNS ALL OF THE (PCM) or coolant temperature sensor Diagnosis and Testing. Also refer to
TIME (2.5L/4.0L MODELS defective. Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams. Repair as
EQUIPPED WITH A/C AND necessary.
4.0L MODELS EQUIPPED
WITH MAX COOLING)
ELECTRIC RADIATOR 1. Blown Fuse in Power Distribution 1. Determine reason for blown fuse and
FAN WILL NOT RUN AT Center (PDC) repair as necessary.
ALL . GAUGE READING
HIGH OR HOT (2.5L/4.0L 2. Fan relay, powertrain control module 2. Refer to Electric Cooling Fan
MODELS EQUIPPED (PCM) or coolant temperature sensor Diagnosis and Testing. Also refer to
WITH A/C AND 4.0L defective. Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams. Repair as
MODELS EQUIPPED necessary.
WITH MAX COOLING) 3. Fan Motor Defective 3. Refer to Electric Cooling Fan
Diagnosis and Testing. Also refer to
Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams. Repair as
necessary.
NOISY VISCOUS 1. Fan blades loose. 1. Replace fan blade assembly. Refer to
FAN/DRIVE Cooling System Fans in this Group
2. Fan blades striking a surrounding 2. Locate point of fan blade contact and
object. repair as necessary.
3. Air obstructions at radiator or air 3. Remove obstructions and/or clean
conditioning condenser. debris or insects from radiator or A/C
condenser.
4. Thermal viscous fan drive has 4. Replace fan drive. Bearing is not
defective bearing. serviceable. Refer to Viscous Fan Drive
in this group.
5. A certain amount of fan noise may be 5. Refer to Viscous Fan Drive in this
evident on models equipped with a group for an explanation of normal fan
thermal viscous fan drive. Some of this noise.
noise is normal.
INADEQUATE HEATER 1. Has a Diagnostic trouble Code (DTC) 1. Refer to Group 25, Emissions for
PERFORMANCE. been set? correct procedures and replace
THERMOSTAT FAILED IN thermostat if necessary
OPEN POSITION
2. Coolant level low 2. Refer to Cooling System-Testing For
Leaks in this group.
3. Obstructions in heater hose/fittings 3. Remove heater hoses at both ends
and check for obstructions
4. Heater hose kinked 4. Locate kinked area and repair as
necessary
5. Water pump is not pumping water 5. Refer to Water Pump in this group. If
to/through the heater core. When the a slipping belt is detected, refer to
engine is fully warmed up, both heater Accessory Drive Belts in this group. If
hoses should be hot to the touch. If only heater core obstruction is detected, refer
one of the hoses is hot, the water pump to Group 24, Heating and Air
may not be operating correctly or the Conditioning.
heater core may be plugged. Accessory
drive belt may be slipping causing poor
water pump operation.
STEAM IS COMING FROM 1. During wet weather, moisture (snow, 1. Occasional steam emitting from this
THE FRONT OF VEHICLE ice or rain condensation) on the radiator area is normal. No repair is necessary.
NEAR THE GRILL AREA will evaporate when the thermostat
WHEN WEATHER IS WET, opens. This opening allows heated
ENGINE IS WARMED UP water into the radiator. When the
AND RUNNING, AND moisture contacts the hot radiator,
VEHICLE IS STATIONARY. steam may be emitted. This usually
TEMPERATURE GAUGE occurs in cold weather with no fan or
IS IN NORMAL RANGE airflow to blow it away.
COOLANT COLOR 1. Coolant color is not necessarily an 1. Refer to Coolant in this group for
indication of adequate corrosion or coolant concentration information. Adjust
temperature protection. Do not rely on coolant mixture as necessary.
coolant color for determining condition
of coolant.
COOLANT LEVEL 1. Level changes are to be expected as 1. A normal condition. No repair is

CHANGES IN COOLANT coolant volume fluctuates with engine necessary.
RESERVE/OVERFLOW temperature. If the level in the tank was
TANK. TEMPERATURE between the FULL and ADD marks at
GAUGE IS IN NORMAL normal operating temperature, the level
RANGE should return to within that range after
operation at elevated temperatures.
RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW CHECK WARNING: HOT, PRESSURIZED COOLANT CAN

The following procedure will determine if coolant is CAUSE INJURY BY SCALDING.
flowing through the cooling system.
Carefully remove the radiator pressure cap from
If engine is cold, idle engine until normal operating
the filler neck and check the coolant level. Push
temperature is reached. Then feel the upper radiator
down on the cap to disengage it from the stop tabs.
hose. If hose is hot, the thermostat is open and water
Wipe the inner part of the filler neck and examine
is circulating through cooling system.
the lower inside sealing seat for nicks, cracks, paint,
dirt and solder residue. Inspect the reserve/overflow
COOLING SYSTEM—TESTING FOR LEAKS
tank tube for internal obstructions. Insert a wire
through the tube to be sure it is not obstructed.
ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT METHOD
Inspect the cams on the outside part of the filler
All Jeep models have a leak detection additive
neck. If the cams are bent, seating of pressure cap
added to the cooling system before they leave the fac-
valve and tester seal will be affected. Replace cap if
tory. The additive is highly visible under ultraviolet
cams are bent.
light (black light). If the factory original coolant has
Attach pressure tester 7700 (or an equivalent) to
been drained, pour one ounce of additive into the
the radiator filler neck (Fig. 12).
cooling system. The additive is available through the
part’s department. Place the heater control unit in
HEAT position. Start and operate the engine until
the radiator upper hose is warm to the touch. Aim
the commercially available black light tool at the
components to be checked. If leaks are present, the
black light will cause the additive to glow a bright
green color.
The black light can be used along with a pressure
tester to determine if any external leaks exist (Fig.
11).
Fig. 12 Pressurizing System—Typical

Operate the tester pump to apply 124 kPa (18 psi)
pressure to the system. If the hoses enlarge exces-
sively or bulge while testing, replace as necessary.
Observe the gauge pointer and determine the condi-
tion of the cooling system according to the following
criteria:
• Holds Steady: If the pointer remains steady for
two minutes, there are no serious coolant leaks in
the system. However, there could be an internal leak
that does not appear with normal system test pres-
sure. Inspect for interior leakage or do the Internal
Leakage Test. Do this if it is certain that coolant is
being lost and no leaks can be detected.
• Drops Slowly: Shows a small leak or seepage is
occurring. Examine all connections for seepage or
Fig. 11 Leak Detection Using Black Light—Typical slight leakage with a flashlight. Inspect the radiator,
hoses, gasket edges and heater. Seal any small leak
PRESSURE TESTER METHOD holes with a Sealer Lubricant or equivalent. Repair
The engine should be at the normal operating tem- leak holes and reinspect the system with pressure
perature. Recheck the system cold if the cause of applied.
coolant loss is not located during warm engine exam-
ination.
• Drops Quickly: Shows that a serious leakage is WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER
occurring. Examine the system for serious external BLOCK DRAIN PLUGS OR LOOSEN THE RADIATOR
leakage. If no leaks are visible, inspect for internal DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND UNDER
leakage. Large radiator leak holes should be repaired PRESSURE. SERIOUS BURNS FROM COOLANT
by a reputable radiator repair shop. CAN OCCUR.
INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION Drain sufficient coolant to allow for thermostat

Remove the engine oil pan drain plug and drain a removal. Refer to Thermostat Replacement. Discon-
small amount of engine oil. Coolant, being heavier nect the water pump drive belt.
than engine oil, will drain first. Another way of test- Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the ther-
ing is to operate the engine and check for water glob- mostat housing. Remove the housing and thermostat.
ules on the engine oil dipstick. Also inspect the Install the thermostat housing.
automatic transmission oil dipstick for water glob- Add coolant to the radiator to bring the level to
ules. Inspect the automatic transmission fluid cooler within 6.3 mm (1/4 in) of the top of the thermostat
for leakage. Operate the engine without the pressure housing.
cap on the radiator until thermostat opens.
Attach a pressure tester to the filler neck. If pres- CAUTION: Avoid overheating. Do not operate the
sure builds up quickly, a leak exists as a result of a engine for an excessive period of time. Open the
faulty cylinder head gasket or crack in the engine. draincock immediately after the test to eliminate
Repair as necessary. boil over of coolant.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW PRESSURE TO Start the engine and accelerate rapidly three times
EXCEED 124 KPA (18 PSI). TURN THE ENGINE OFF. (to approximately 3000 rpm) while observing the
TO RELEASE THE PRESSURE, ROCK THE TESTER coolant. If internal engine combustion gases are leak-
FROM SIDE TO SIDE. WHEN REMOVING THE ing into the cooling system, bubbles will appear in
TESTER, DO NOT TURN THE TESTER MORE THAN the coolant. If bubbles do not appear, there is no
1/2 TURN IF THE SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE. internal combustion gas leakage.
If there is no immediate pressure increase, pump VISCOUS FAN DRIVE

the pressure tester until the indicated pressure is
within the system range. Vibration of the gauge LEAKS
pointer indicates compression or combustion leakage Viscous fan drive operation is not affected by small
into the cooling system. oil stains near the drive bearing. If leakage appears
excessive, replace the fan drive unit.
WARNING: DO NOT DISCONNECT THE SPARK
PLUG WIRES WHILE THE ENGINE IS OPERATING. TESTING
If the fan assembly free-wheels without drag (the
fan blades will revolve more than five turns when
CAUTION: Do not operate the engine with a spark spun by hand), replace the fan drive. This spin test
plug shorted for more than a minute. The catalytic must be performed when the engine is cool.
converter may be damaged. For the following test, the cooling system must be
in good condition. It also will ensure against exces-
Isolate the compression leak by shorting each
sively high coolant temperature.
spark plug to the cylinder block. The gauge pointer
should stop or decrease vibration when spark plug WARNING: BE SURE THAT THERE IS ADEQUATE
for leaking cylinder is shorted. This happens because FAN BLADE CLEARANCE BEFORE DRILLING.
of the absence of combustion pressure.
(1) Drill a 3.18-mm (1/8-in) diameter hole in the
COMBUSTION LEAKAGE TEST (WITHOUT top center of the fan shroud.
PRESSURE TESTER) (2) Obtain a dial thermometer with an 8 inch stem
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution (or equivalent). It should have a range of -18°-to-
is clean, drain the coolant into a clean container for 105°C (0°-to-220° F). Insert thermometer through the
reuse. hole in the shroud. Be sure that there is adequate
clearance from the fan blades.
(3) Connect a tachometer and an engine ignition
timing light (timing light is to be used as a strobe
light).
(4) Block the air flow through the radiator. Secure RADIATOR CAP-TO-FILLER NECK SEAL—
a sheet of plastic in front of the radiator (or air con-
PRESSURE RELIEF CHECK
ditioner condenser). Use tape at the top to secure the
With radiator cap installed on filler neck, remove
plastic and be sure that the air flow is blocked.
coolant reserve/ overflow tank hose from nipple on
(5) Be sure that the air conditioner (if equipped) is
filler neck. Connect a hand operated vacuum pump
turned off.
to nipple. Operate pump until a reading of 47-to-61
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE kPa (14- to-18 in. Hg) appears on gauge. If the read-
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A ing stays steady, or drops slightly and then remains
DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR steady, the pressure valve seal is good. Replace radi-
HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO ator cap if reading does not hold.
NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING.
WARNING: THE WARNING WORDS -DO NOT OPEN
(6) Start the engine and operate at 2400 rpm. HOT- ON THE RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP (Fig. 13)
Within ten minutes the air temperature (indicated on ARE A SAFETY PRECAUTION. WHEN HOT, PRES-
the dial thermometer) should be up to 88° C (190° F). SURE BUILDS UP IN COOLING SYSTEM. TO PRE-
Fan drive engagement should have started to occur VENT SCALDING OR INJURY, THE RADIATOR CAP
at between 74° to 82° C (165° to 180° F). Engage- SHOULD NOT BE REMOVED WHILE THE SYSTEM
ment is distinguishable by a definite increase in fan IS HOT AND/OR UNDER PRESSURE.
flow noise (roaring). The timing light also will indi-
cate an increase in the speed of the fan.
(7) When the air temperature reaches 88° C (190°
F), remove the plastic sheet. Fan drive disengage-
ment should have started to occur at between 57° to
79° C (135° to 175° F). A definite decrease of fan
flow noise (roaring) should be noticed. If not, replace
the defective viscous fan drive unit.
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN

ELECTRIC COOLING FAN AND RELAY DIAGNOSIS
NOTE: Refer to Electrical Group 8W for electric
cooling fan and relay circuit schematic.
The powertrain control module (PCM) will enter a

diagnostic trouble code (DTC) in memory if it detects
a problem in the auxiliary cooling fan relay or circuit.
Refer to Group 25, Emission Control Systems for cor-
rect DTC retrieval procedures.
If the electric cooling fan is inoperative, check the
15A fuse in the junction block and the 40A fuse in
the Power Distribution Center (PDC) with a 12 volt
test lamp or DVOM. Refer to the inside of the PDC
cover for the exact location of the fuse. If fuses are
o.k., refer to Group 8W for electric cooling fan and
relay circuit schematic.
Fig. 13 Radiator Pressure Cap
There is no need to remove the radiator cap
except for the following purposes:
(1) To check and adjust antifreeze freeze point.
(2) To refill system with new antifreeze.
(3) For conducting service procedures.
(4) When checking for vacuum leaks.
WARNING: IF VEHICLE HAS BEEN RUN RECENTLY, CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very
WAIT AT LEAST 15 MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause
RADIATOR CAP. WITH A RAG, SQUEEZE RADIATOR cooling system problems. A pressure cap that does
UPPER HOSE TO CHECK IF SYSTEM IS UNDER not have a history of coolant loss should not be
PRESSURE. PLACE A RAG OVER THE CAP AND replaced just because it leaks slowly when tested
WITHOUT PUSHING DOWN, ROTATE CAP with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool upside
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TO THE FIRST STOP. down and recheck pressure cap to confirm that cap
ALLOW FLUID TO ESCAPE THROUGH OVERFLOW needs replacement.
HOSE INTO COOLANT RESERVE/OVERFLOW
TANK. SQUEEZE RADIATOR UPPER HOSE TO CAP INSPECTION
DETERMINE WHEN PRESSURE HAS BEEN Visually inspect the pressure valve gasket on the
RELEASED. WHEN COOLANT AND STEAM STOP cap. Replace cap if the gasket is swollen, torn or
BEING PUSHED INTO TANK AND SYSTEM PRES- worn. Inspect the area around radiator filler neck for
SURE DROPS, REMOVE RADIATOR CAP COM- white deposits that indicate a leaking cap.
PLETELY.
COOLANT—LOW LEVEL AERATION
If the coolant level in radiator drops below top of
RADIATOR CAP—PRESSURE TESTING radiator core tubes, air will enter cooling system.
Remove cap from radiator. Be sure that sealing Low coolant level can cause thermostat pellet to be
surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gasket with water suspended in air instead of coolant. This will cause
and install the cap on pressure tester (tool 7700 or thermostat to open later, which in turn causes higher
an equivalent) (Fig. 14). coolant temperature. Air trapped in cooling system
also reduces amount of coolant circulating in heater
core resulting in low heat output.
DEAERATION
As the engine operates, any air trapped in cooling
system gathers under the radiator cap. The next time
the engine is operated, thermal expansion of coolant
will push any trapped air past radiator cap into the
coolant reserve/overflow tank. Here it escapes to the
atmosphere into the tank. When the engine cools
down the coolant, it will be drawn from the reserve/
overflow tank into the radiator to replace any
removed air.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
COOLANT—ROUTINE LEVEL CHECK
NOTE: Do not remove radiator cap for routine
coolant level inspections. The coolant level can be
checked at coolant reserve/overflow tank.
Fig. 14 Pressure Testing Radiator Pressure
The coolant reserve/overflow system provides a
Cap—Typical
quick visual method for determining coolant level
Operate the tester pump and observe the gauge without removing radiator pressure cap. With engine
pointer at its highest point. The cap release pressure cold and not running, observe coolant level in
should be 83-to-110 kPa (12-to-16 psi). The cap is sat- reserve/overflow tank. The coolant level should be
isfactory when the pressure holds steady. It is also between ADD and FULL marks.
good if it holds pressure within the 83-to-110 kPa
(12-to-16 psi) range for 30 seconds or more. If the
pointer drops quickly, replace the cap.
COOLANT—ADDING ADDITIONAL
Do not remove radiator cap to add coolant to
system. When adding coolant to maintain correct
level, do so at coolant reserve/overflow tank. Use a
50/50 mixture of ethylene-glycol antifreeze containing
Alugard 340-2 y and low mineral content water.
Remove radiator cap only for testing or when refill-
ing system after service. Removing cap unnecessarily
can cause loss of coolant and allow air to enter sys-
tem, which produces corrosion.
COOLANT—LEVEL CHECK
The cooling system is closed and designed to main-
tain coolant level to top of radiator.
WARNING: DO NOT OPEN RADIATOR DRAINCOCK

WITH ENGINE RUNNING OR WHILE ENGINE IS HOT
AND COOLING SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE.
When vehicle servicing requires a coolant level Fig. 15 Radiator Petcock—2.5L/4.0L (LHD/RHD)
check in radiator, drain several ounces of coolant (4) Drain coolant from engine by removing the
from radiator drain cock. Do this while observing drain plug and coolant temperature sensor on left
coolant reserve/overflow system tank. The coolant side of block.
level in reserve/overflow tank should drop slightly. If
not, inspect for a leak between radiator and coolant REFILLING
reserve/overflow system connection. Remove radiator (1) Tighten the radiator petcock and the cylinder
cap. The coolant level should be to top of radiator. If block drain plug(s).
not and if coolant level in reserve/overflow tank is at (2) Install grille.
ADD mark, check for: (3) Fill system using a 50/50 mixture of water and
• An air leak in coolant reserve/overflow tank or antifreeze as described in the Coolant section of this
its hose group. Fill radiator to top and install radiator cap.
• An air leak in radiator filler neck Add sufficient coolant to reserve/overflow tank to
• Leak in pressure cap seal to radiator filler neck raise level to FULL mark.
(4) With heater control unit in the HEAT position,
COOLING SYSTEM—DRAINING AND FILLING operate engine with radiator cap in place.
(5) After engine has reached normal operating
DRAINING temperature, shut engine off and allow it to cool.
(6) Add coolant to reserve/overflow tank as neces-
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER
sary. Only add coolant when the engine is cold.
BLOCK DRAIN PLUGS OR LOOSEN THE RADIATOR
Coolant level in a warm engine will be higher
DRAINCOCK WITH SYSTEM HOT AND UNDER
due to thermal expansion.
PRESSURE. SERIOUS BURNS FROM COOLANT
CAN OCCUR.
COOLING SYSTEM—REVERSE FLUSHING
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution
CAUTION: The cooling system normally operates at
is clean, drain the coolant into a clean container for
97-to-124 kPa (14- to-18 psi) pressure. Exceeding
reuse.
this pressure may damage the radiator or hoses.
(1) Remove radiator pressure cap.
(2) For access to radiator draincock (Fig. 15), Reverse flushing of the cooling system is the forc-
remove radiator grille mounting screws and remove ing of water through the cooling system. This is done
grill. Refer to Group 23, Body for correct procedure. using air pressure in the opposite direction of normal
(3) Attach one end of a 24 inch long X 1/4 inch ID coolant flow. It is usually only necessary with very
hose to the radiator draincock. Put the other end into dirty systems with evidence of partial plugging.
a clean container. Open draincock and drain coolant
from radiator.
CHEMICAL CLEANING REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
If visual inspection indicates the formation of
sludge or scaly deposits, use a radiator cleaner TRANSMISSION OIL COOLERS
(Mopar Radiator Kleen or equivalent) before flushing.
This will soften scale and other deposits and aid the WATER-TO-OIL COOLER
flushing operation. The internal transmission oil cooler located within
the radiator is not serviceable. If it requires service,
CAUTION: Be sure instructions on the container the radiator must be replaced.
are followed. Once the repaired or replacement radiator has
been installed, fill the cooling system and inspect for
REVERSE FLUSHING RADIATOR leaks. Refer to the Refilling Cooling System and Test-
Disconnect the radiator hoses from the radiator fit- ing Cooling System For Leaks sections in this group.
tings. Attach a section of radiator hose to the radia- If the transmission operates properly after repairing
tor bottom outlet fitting and insert the flushing gun. the leak, drain the transmission and remove the
Connect a water supply hose and air supply hose to transmission oil pan. Inspect for sludge and/or rust.
the flushing gun. Inspect for a dirty or plugged inlet filter. If none of
these conditions are found, the transmission and
CAUTION: The cooling system normally operates at torque convertor may not require reconditioning.
97-to-124 kPa (14- to-18 psi) pressure. Exceeding Refer to Group 21 for automatic transmission servic-
this pressure may damage the radiator or hoses. ing.
Allow the radiator to fill with water. When radiator AIR-TO-OIL COOLER
is filled, apply air in short blasts allowing radiator to
refill between blasts. Continue this reverse flushing REMOVAL
until clean water flows out through rear of radiator (1) Remove the grill mounting screws and remove
cooling tube passages. For more information, refer to the grill. Refer to Group 23, Body for procedures.
operating instructions supplied with flushing equip- (2) Place a drain pan below the transmission oil
ment. Have radiator cleaned more extensively by a cooler.
radiator repair shop. (3) Remove the two hose clamps at oil cooler inlet
and outlet tubes.
REVERSE FLUSHING ENGINE (4) Remove the two oil cooler mounting bolts (Fig.
Drain the cooling system. Remove the thermostat 16).
housing and thermostat. Install the thermostat housing. (5) Remove the oil cooler from vehicle.
Disconnect the radiator upper hose from the radiator
and attach the flushing gun to the hose. Disconnect the INSTALLATION
radiator lower hose from the water pump. Attach a lead (1) Position and secure oil cooler to vehicle.
away hose to the water pump inlet fitting. Tighten mounting bolts to 8 N·m (72 in. lbs.) torque.
(2) Secure inlet and outlet tubes with hose clamps.
CAUTION: Be sure that the heater control valve is
Tighten the two clamps to 2 N·m (15 in. lbs.) torque.
closed (heat off). This is done to prevent coolant
Install the grill.
flow with scale and other deposits from entering
(3) Start engine and check transmission fluid level.
the heater core.
Add fluid if necessary.
Connect the water supply hose and air supply hose
to the flushing gun. Allow the engine to fill with COOLANT RESERVE TANK
water. When the engine is filled, apply air in short
blasts, allowing the system to fill between air blasts. REMOVAL
Continue until clean water flows through the lead (1) Remove the tube clamp at the tank and remove
away hose. For more information, refer to operating tube.
instructions supplied with flushing equipment. (2) Remove the tank mounting bolts and remove
Remove the lead away hose, flushing gun, water tank (Fig. 17) (Fig. 18).
supply hose and air supply hose. Remove the thermo-
stat housing and install thermostat. Install the ther- INSTALLATION
mostat housing with a replacement gasket. Refer to (1) Position tank and tighten to 2 N·m (17 in. lbs.)
Thermostat Replacement. Connect the radiator torque.
hoses. Refill the cooling system with the correct anti- (2) Position tube and secure clamp.
freeze/water mixture.
Fig. 18 Reserve/Overflow Tank—With Right Hand

Fig. 16 Auxiliary Air-To-Oil Cooler Drive
The water pump can be removed without discharg-
ing the air conditioning system (if equipped).
CAUTION: All engines have a reverse (counter-

clockwise) rotating water pump. The letter R is
stamped into the back of the water pump impeller
(Fig. 19) to identify. Engines from previous model
years, depending upon application, may be
equipped with a forward (clockwise) rotating water
pump. Installation of the wrong water pump will
cause engine over heating.
The water pump impeller is pressed on the rear of

the pump shaft and bearing assembly. The water
pump is serviced only as a complete assembly.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE BLOCK DRAIN

PLUG(S) OR LOOSEN RADIATOR DRAINCOCK
WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND UNDER PRESSURE.
SERIOUS BURNS FROM COOLANT CAN OCCUR.

is clean, drain coolant into a clean container for
Fig. 17 Reserve/Overflow Tank—Except Right Hand reuse.
Drive
REMOVAL-2.5L ENGINE (LHD/RHD)
WATER PUMP (1) Disconnect battery negative cable.
(2) Drain cooling system. Refer to Cooling System-
CAUTION: If the water pump is replaced because of
Draining and Filling in this group.
mechanical damage, the fan blades and viscous fan
(3) Remove upper radiator hose.
drive should also be inspected. These components
(4) Loosen (but do not remove at this time) the
could have been damaged due to excessive vibra-
four fan hub-to-water pump pulley mounting nuts
tion.
(Fig. 20).
Fig. 19 Reverse Rotating Water Pump—Typical

Fig. 20 Fan Mounting Nuts
(5) Remove accessory drive belt. (Refer to Acces-
sory Drive Belt, Removal and Installation in this
group).
(6) Disconnect electric cooling fan connector (if
equipped).
(7) Unbolt fan shroud.
(8) Remove the four fan hub-to-water pump pulley
nuts and remove fan and shroud together.
CAUTION: After removing fan blade/viscous fan

drive assembly, do not place thermal viscous fan
drive in horizontal position. If stored horizontally,
silicone fluid in viscous fan drive could drain into
its bearing assembly and contaminate lubricant.
(9) Remove power steering pump and bracket (Fig.

21), refer to Group 19 Steering for correct procedure.
(10) Remove lower radiator hose from water pump. Fig. 21 Power Steering Pump Attachment-2.5L
Remove heater hose from water pump pipe.
(11) Remove the four pump mounting bolts (Fig. eign material. Inspect the cylinder block and water
22) and remove pump from vehicle. Discard old gas- pump mating surfaces for erosion or damage from
ket. Note that one of the four bolts is longer than the cavitation.
other bolts. (3) Install the gasket and water pump. The sili-
(12) If pump is to be replaced, the heater hose fit- cone bead on the gasket should be facing the water
ting must be removed. Note position of fitting before pump. Also, the gasket is installed dry. Tighten
removal. mounting bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque. Rotate
the shaft by hand to be sure it turns freely.
INSTALLATION-2.5L ENGINE (LHD/RHD) (4) Connect the radiator and heater hoses to the
(1) If pump is being replaced, install the heater water pump.
hose pipe to the pump. Use a sealant on the fitting (5) Install power steering pump and bracket. Refer
such as Mopart Thread Sealant With Teflon. Refer to to Group 19, Steering.
the directions on the package. (6) Position water pump pulley to water pump
(2) Clean the gasket mating surfaces. If the origi- hub.
nal pump is used, remove any deposits or other for-
REMOVAL-4.0L ENGINE (LHD/RHD)
(1) Disconnect battery negative cable.
(2) Drain the cooling system. (Refer to Cooling
System-Draining and Filling in this group.)
(3) Disconnect electric cooling fan connector.
(4) Remove electric cooling fan/shroud assembly (if
equipped).
(5) Remove viscous fan shroud bolts (2).
(6) Loosen (but do not remove at this time) the
four water pump pulley-to-water pump hub mounting
bolts (Fig. 23) and the four viscous fan to idler pulley
nuts.
Fig. 22 Water Pump Remove/Install—Typical Fig. 23 Water Pump Pulley Bolts

(7) Install shroud and fan together and install four NOTE: The accessory drive belt must be removed
nuts to water pump hub studs. Tighten nuts to 27 prior to removing the fan (if installed at pump) or
N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque. fan pulley.
(8) Install and tighten upper fan shroud nuts to 4
(7) Remove accessory drive belt (refer to Accessory
N·m (31 in. lbs.).
Drive Belt, Removal and Installation in this group)
(9) Connect electric fan connector (if equipped).
(8) Remove the four viscous fan to idler pulley
CAUTION: When installing the accessory drive belt, nuts and remove the fan and shroud together.
the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine
CAUTION: After removing fan blade/viscous fan
may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the
drive assembly, do not place thermal viscous fan
wrong direction. Refer to the Belt Removal and
drive in horizontal position. If stored horizontally,
Installation in this group for appropriate belt rout-
silicone fluid in viscous fan drive could drain into
ing. You may also refer to the Belt Routing Label in
its bearing assembly and contaminate lubricant.
the vehicle engine compartment.
(9) Remove the four water pump pulley bolts and
(10) Install and tension accessory drive belt, refer
remove the pulley.
to Accessory Drive Belt removal and installation in
(10) Remove power steering pump and bracket
this group.
(Fig. 24), refer to Group 19 Steering.
(11) Install upper radiator hose.
(11) Remove lower radiator hose from water pump.
(12) Fill cooling system with coolant and check for
Remove heater hose from water pump fitting.
leaks. Refer to Refilling Cooling System in this
(12) Remove the four pump mounting bolts (Fig.
group.
25) and remove pump from vehicle. Discard old gas-
(13) Connect battery negative cable.
ket. Note that one of the four bolts is longer than the
(14) Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks.
other bolts.
(13) If pump is to be replaced, the heater hose fit-
ting must be removed. Note position of fitting before
removal.
Fig. 24 Power Steering Pump Attachment-4.0L

INSTALLATION-4.0L ENGINE (LHD/RHD)
(1) If pump is being replaced, install the heater
hose fitting to the pump. Use a sealant on the fitting
such as Mopart Thread Sealant With Teflon. Refer to
the directions on the package.
(2) Clean the gasket mating surfaces. If the origi-
nal pump is used, remove any deposits or other for-
eign material. Inspect the cylinder block and water
pump mating surfaces for erosion or damage from
cavitation.
(3) Install the gasket and water pump. The sili-
cone bead on the gasket should be facing the water
pump. Also, the gasket is installed dry. Tighten
mounting bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque. Rotate
the shaft by hand to be sure it turns freely.
(4) Connect the radiator and heater hoses to the
water pump.
(5) Position water pump pulley to water pump
hub.
(6) Install four pump pulley bolts. Tighten bolts (or
nuts) to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
(7) Install power steering pump. Refer to Group
19, Steering for proper procedure and torque values.
(8) Install the viscous fan and shroud together.
Install the four fan to idler pulley nuts and tighten
to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
Fig. 25 Water Pump Remove/Install—Typical

CAUTION: When installing the accessory drive belt, (4) Remove thermostat housing mounting bolts,
the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not, the engine thermostat housing, gasket and thermostat (Fig. 26).
may overheat due to the water pump rotating in the Discard old gasket.
wrong direction. Refer to the Belt Removal and
Installation in this group for appropriate belt rout-
ing. You may also refer to the Belt Routing Label in
the vehicle engine compartment.
(9) Install and tighten viscous fan shroud bolts to

4 N·m (31 in. lbs.).
(10) Install and tension the accessory drive belt,
refer to Accessory Drive Belt removal and installa-
tion in this group.
(11) Install the electric cooling fan/shroud assy.
(12) Install and tighten electric fan shroud bolts to
4 N·m (31 in. lbs.). Connect fan connector.
(13) Fill cooling system with coolant and check for
leaks. Refer to Refilling Cooling System in this
group.
THERMOSTAT
REMOVAL
WARNING: DO NOT LOOSEN THE RADIATOR Fig. 26 Thermostat Removal/Installation
DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES- (5) Clean the gasket mating surfaces.
SURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM THE COOLANT
CAN OCCUR. INSTALLATION
(1) Install the replacement thermostat so that the
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution pellet, which is encircled by a coil spring, faces the
is clean, drain the coolant into a clean container for engine. All thermostats are marked on the outer
reuse. flange to indicate the proper installed position.
(1) Drain the coolant from the radiator until the (a) Observe the recess groove in the engine cyl-
level is below the thermostat housing. inder head (Fig. 27).
(b) Position thermostat into this groove with
WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS arrow and air bleed hole on outer flange pointing
ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES. up.
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY (2) Install replacement gasket and thermostat
TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF housing.
CLAMP, SUCH AS SPECIAL CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER
6094) (Fig. 6). SNAP-ON CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER CAUTION: Tightening the thermostat housing
HPC-20) MAY BE USED FOR LARGER CLAMPS. unevenly or with the thermostat out of its recess
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVIC- may result in a cracked housing.
ING CONSTANT TENSION CLAMPS.
(3) Tighten the housing bolts to 20 N·m (15 ft. lbs.)
torque.
CAUTION: A number or letter is stamped into the (4) Install hoses to thermostat housing.
tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 7). If (5) Install electrical connector to coolant tempera-
replacement is necessary, use only an original ture sensor.
equipment clamp with matching number or letter. (6) Be sure that the radiator draincock is tightly
closed. Fill the cooling system to the correct level
(2) Remove radiator upper hose and heater hose at
with the required coolant mixture. Refer to Refilling
thermostat housing.
Cooling System in this group.
(3) Disconnect wiring connector at engine coolant
temperature sensor.
(4) For access to radiator draincock, remove radia-
tor grill mounting screws and remove grill. Refer to
Group 23, Body for procedures.
(5) Attach one end of a 24 inch long X 1/4 inch ID
hose to the radiator petcock (Fig. 28). Put the other
end into a clean container. Open petcock and drain
radiator.
(6) Detach power steering fluid reservoir from fan
shroud and lay aside.
(7) Disconnect electric cooling fan electrical con-
nector, if equipped.
Fig. 27 Thermostat Recess

RADIATOR—2.5L
DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES-
CAN OCCUR.
Fig. 28 Radiator Petcock—Typical
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is
(8) Disconnect CRS hose from radiator filler neck
clean, drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
and remove from shroud retaining loops.
WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS (9) Remove the four (4) viscous fan/drive assembly
ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES. nuts from the water pump pulley and remove fan/
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY drive assy.
TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF (10) Remove the four (4) fan shroud to core sup-
CLAMP, SUCH AS SPECIAL CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER port mounting screws.
6094) (Fig. 6). SNAP-ON CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER (11) Remove the electric fan (if equipped) and
HPC-20) MAY BE USED FOR LARGER CLAMPS. shroud assembly from the vehicle (Fig. 30).
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVIC- (12) Remove radiator upper crossmember (Fig. 30).
ING CONSTANT TENSION CLAMPS. (13) If equipped with air conditioning, separate
radiator from condenser by removing condenser-to-ra-
diator mounting brackets (Fig. 29).
CAUTION: A number or letter is stamped into the (14) Disconnect upper and lower radiator hoses.
tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 7). If (15) If equipped, disconnect and plug automatic
replacement is necessary, use only an original transmission fluid cooler lines. Quick Connect Fitting
equipment clamp with matching number or letter. Release Tool 6935 may be needed. If equipped with
remote transmission cooler, remove line to cooler
from bracket at bottom of radiator.
REMOVAL (16) Lift radiator straight up and out of engine
(1) Disconnect battery negative cable. compartment taking care not to damage fins.
(2) Observe the previous WARNINGS. (17) If radiator is to be replaced, be sure to remove
(3) Remove radiator pressure cap. and transfer any components not included with
replacement radiator.
INSTALLATION
The radiator is supplied with two alignment dowels
(Fig. 35). They are located on the bottom tank and fit
into rubber grommets in the radiator lower cross-
member.
(1) Lower radiator into engine compartment. Posi-
tion alignment dowels into rubber grommets in radi-
ator lower crossmember (Fig. 35).
(2) If equipped with air conditioning, attach con-
denser to radiator with mounting brackets (Fig. 29).
(3) Install radiator upper crossmember and four
mounting bolts.
(4) Install radiator upper crossmember-to-isolator
nuts. Tighten nuts to 10 N·m (86 in. lbs.) torque. If
isolator-to-radiator nuts had been removed, tighten
them to 5 N·m (47 in. lbs.) torque.
(5) Connect radiator upper and lower hoses.
(6) If equipped, connect automatic transmission
fluid cooler lines. If equipped with remote cooler,
attach cooler line to bracket at bottom of radiator.
(7) Install electric fan (if equipped) and shroud
assembly. Insert alignment tabs at bottom of fan
Fig. 29 Condenser-to-Radiator Mounting Brackets
Fig. 30 Radiator Removal/Installation—2.5L Engines

CAUTION: A number or letter is stamped into the
tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 7). If
replacement is necessary, use only an original
equipment clamp with matching number or letter.
REMOVAL
(2) Observe the previous WARNINGS.
(3) Remove radiator pressure cap.
(4) For access to radiator draincock, remove radia-
tor grill mounting screws and remove grill. Refer to
Group 23, Body for procedures.
(5) Attach one end of a 24 inch long X 1/4 inch ID
hose to the radiator petcock (Fig. 32). Put the other
end into a clean container. Open petcock and drain
radiator.
(6) Disconnect electric cooling fan electrical con-
nector, if equipped.
Fig. 31 Radiator Alignment Dowels—Typical

shroud into slots in bracket at bottom of radiator.
Tighten mounting bolts to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.) torque.
(8) Connect electric cooling fan electrical connector.
(9) Install power steering reservoir to fan shroud.
(10) Install grill.
(12) Fill cooling system with correct coolant. Refer
to the Coolant section of this group.
(13) Install pressure cap.
(14) Check and adjust automatic transmission
fluid level (if equipped).
(15) Start engine and visually check for leaks.
RADIATOR—4.0L
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER Fig. 32 Radiator Petcock—Typical
BLOCK DRAIN PLUGS OR LOOSEN THE RADIATOR (7) If equipped, remove two electric cooling fan
DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES- mounting bolts. Lift cooling fan straight up until
SURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM THE COOLANT alignment tabs at the bottom are clear of slots in
CAN OCCUR. bracket at bottom of radiator (Fig. 33).
(8) Remove the two mechanical (non-electrical) fan
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If solution is shroud mounting bolts. Lift shroud straight up until
clean, drain coolant into a clean container for reuse. alignment tabs at the bottom are clear of slots in
bracket at bottom of radiator (Fig. 33). Place shroud
WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS
over mechanical fan.
ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES.
(9) If equipped, disconnect and plug automatic
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY
transmission fluid cooler lines. Quick Connect Fitting
TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF
Release Tool 6935 may be needed. If equipped with
CLAMP, SUCH AS SPECIAL CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER
remote transmission cooler, remove line to cooler
6094) (Fig. 6). SNAP-ON CLAMP TOOL (NUMBER
from bracket at bottom of radiator.
HPC-20) MAY BE USED FOR LARGER CLAMPS.
(10) Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses
ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES WHEN SERVIC-
clamps. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses.
ING CONSTANT TENSION CLAMPS.
Fig. 33 Radiator Removal/Installation—4.0L Engines

(11) Mark the position of the hood latch striker on
the radiator crossmember and remove hood latch
striker.
(12) Remove two radiator upper crossmember to
isolator nuts (Fig. 33).
(13) Remove four radiator upper crossmember
bolts and remove upper crossmember.
(14) If equipped with air conditioning, separate
radiator from condenser by removing condenser-to-ra-
diator mounting brackets (Fig. 34).
(15) Lift radiator straight up and out of engine
compartment taking care not to damage fins.
INSTALLATION
The radiator is supplied with two alignment dowels
(Fig. 35). They are located on the bottom tank and fit
into rubber grommets in the radiator lower cross-
member.
(1) Lower radiator into engine compartment. Posi-
tion alignment dowels into rubber grommets in radi-
ator lower crossmember (Fig. 35).
denser to radiator with mounting brackets (Fig. 34). Fig. 34 Condenser to Radiator Mounting Brackets—
4.0L Engine
ELECTRIC COOLING FAN—2.5L

The electric fan module is only to be serviced as an
assembly.
REMOVAL
(2) Disconnect CRS hose from radiator filler neck
and pull through (remove) the shroud retaining
loops.
(3) Detach power steering reservoir from fan
shroud and lay aside.
(4) Remove the four viscous fan/drive assembly
mounting nuts from the water pump studs and
remove viscous fan assembly.
(5) Disconnect cooling fan electrical connector.
(6) Remove the four upper fan shroud to radiator
crossmember mounting screws (Fig. 36).
(7) Lift fan and shroud assy. from vehicle.
(8) Detach fan harness from shroud.
(9) Remove four fan module to shroud phillips
head screws (Fig. 37) and remove module from
shroud.
(3) Install radiator upper crossmember and four INSTALLATION
mounting bolts. (1) Position fan module in shroud so that the har-
(4) Install radiator upper crossmember-to-isolator ness exits the motor at the 12 o’clock postion (Fig.
nuts. Tighten nuts to 10 N·m (86 in. lbs.) torque. If 37).
isolator-to-radiator nuts had been removed, tighten (2) Install and tighten fan module to shroud
them to 5 N·m (47 in. lbs.) torque. screws to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.).
(5) Install hood latch striker. Note previously (3) Route fan harness through the shroud and
marked position. attach to shroud at correct position.
(6) Connect radiator upper and lower hoses. (4) Lower fan and shroud assembly into place,
(7) If equipped, connect automatic transmission making sure the shroud alignment tabs rest in their
fluid cooler lines. Refer to Group 21, Transmissions corresponding lower radiator slots.
for procedures. If equipped with remote cooler, attach (5) Install upper fan shroud screws and tighten to
cooler line to bracket at bottom of radiator. 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.).
(8) Install electric cooling fan (if equipped). Insert (6) Connect fan electrical connector.
alignment tabs at bottom of fan shroud into slots in (7) Install power steering reservoir to shoud.
bracket at bottom of radiator. Tighten mounting bolts (8) Install viscous fan drive assy. to water pump
to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.) torque. hub and tighten nuts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(9) Connect electric cooling fan electrical connector. (9) Connect battery negative cable.
(10) Install mechanical cooling fan shroud. Insert
alignment tabs at bottom of shroud into slots in ELECTRIC COOLING FAN—4.0L
bracket at bottom of radiator. Tighten mounting bolts
to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.) torque. REMOVAL
(11) Close radiator draincock. The auxiliary cooling fan is attached to the radia-
(12) Install grill. tor upper crossmember behind the radiator.
(13) Connect negative battery cable. (1) Remove the two fan mounting bolts from radi-
(14) Fill cooling system with correct coolant. Refer ator upper crossmember (Fig. 38).
to the Coolant section of this group. (2) Disconnect the electric fan connector.
(15) Install pressure cap. (3) Lift fan straight up and out of vehicle.
(16) Check and adjust automatic transmission
fluid level (if equipped). INSTALLATION
(1) Align lower retaining tabs of fan shroud with
slots in bracket at bottom of radiator. Push fan down
into position.
Fig. 36 Fan Shroud Removal/Installation
Fig. 37 Fan Module Orientation and Mounting
Fig. 38 Auxiliary Cooling Fan—Remove/Install—

Typical
(2) Tighten the mounting bolts to 4 N·m (31 in. ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS
lbs.) torque.
(3) Connect auxiliary cooling fan electrical connec-
tor.
BLOCK HEATER
REMOVAL
Refer to correct illustration (Fig. 39) (Fig. 40) when
servicing block heater.

DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES-
CAN OCCUR.

clean, drain coolant into a clean container for reuse. Fig. 40 Heater and Cord—4.0L 6-Cylinder Engine
(1) Drain coolant from radiator and engine cylin- Correct drive belt tension is required to ensure
der block. optimum performance of the belt driven engine acces-
(2) Unplug power cord from block heater. sories. There are different types of adjustment
(3) Loosen screw in center of block heater (Fig. 39) gauges for checking either a serpentine or a V-type
(Fig. 40). belt. Refer to the instructions supplied with the
(4) Remove block heater from cylinder block. gauge. Use the correct gauge when checking belt ten-
sion. Place gauge in the middle of the section of belt
INSTALLATION being tested (between two pulleys) to check tension.
(1) Thoroughly clean the engine core hole and the Do not allow the gauge (or gauge adapter) to contact
block heater seat. anything but the belt.
(2) Insert block heater assembly into core hole
with element loop pointing Up. BELT SCHEMATICS
(3) Seat block heater flush against block face. The belt routing schematics are published from the
Tighten mounting screw to 3.6 N·m (32 in. lbs.) latest information available at the time of publica-
torque. tion. If anything differs between these schemat-
(4) Fill cooling system with coolant. Pressurize ics and the Belt Routing Label, use the
system and inspect for leaks. schematics on Belt Routing Label. This label is
(5) Plug power cord into block heater. Route cord located in the engine compartment.
away from moving parts, linkages and exhaust sys- Refer to (Fig. 41) (Fig. 42) (Fig. 43) (Fig. 44) for
tem components. Secure cord in place with tie-straps. proper belt routing on vehicles with conventional left
hand drive. Refer to (Fig. 45) (Fig. 46) for proper belt
routing on vehicles with right hand drive (RHD). Or,
refer to the Belt Routing Label located in the vehicle
engine compartment.
BELT REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT—LEFT

HAND DRIVE
Belt tension is adjusted at the power steering
pump bracket and idler pulley assembly.
(1) Disconnect negative battery cable from battery.
(2) Loosen idler pulley bolt at the power steering
bracket (Fig. 47).
(3) Loosen adjusting bolt until belt can be removed
from pulleys.
(4) Remove belt.
Fig. 39 Heater and Cord— 2.5L 4-Cylinder Engine

Fig. 41 Models with 2.5L Engine—With A/C Fig. 43 Models with 4.0L Engine—Without A/C—
Except RHD
Fig. 42 Models with 2.5L Engine—Without A/C Fig. 44 Models With 4.0L Engine—With A/C—Except
INSTALLATION RHD
(1) Check condition of all pulleys. (4) After belt is tensioned correctly, tighten idler
pulley bolt to 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: When installing the serpentine acces- (5) After idler pulley has been tightened into posi-
sory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If tion, recheck belt tension. Adjust if necessary.
not, the engine may overheat due to the water
pump rotating in the wrong direction. Refer to (Fig. BELT REPLACEMENT OR ADJUSTMENT—RIGHT
41) (Fig. 42) (Fig. 43) (Fig. 44) for correct belt rout- HAND DRIVE (4.0L)
ing. (1) Disconnect negative battery cable from battery.
(2) Loosen lower alternator mounting bolt and nut.
(2) Install new belt.
(3) Loosen upper alternator mounting nut.
(3) Using serpentine belt tension gauge, tighten
(4) Loosen adjusting bolt at upper alternator
adjusting bolt until belt reaches proper tension. Refer
bracket (Fig. 48) until belt can be removed from pul-
to Belt Tension at the rear of this section for proper
leys.
belt tension.
(5) Remove belt.
Fig. 45 Models With 4.0L Engine—With A/C—With Fig. 47 Power Steering Pump Bracket and Idler
RHD Pulley
Fig. 46 Models With 4.0L Engine—Without A/C— Fig. 48 Generator Belt Tension Adjust Bracket
With RHD (4) Tighten alternator upper and lower mounting
INSTALLATION bolts.
(1) Check condition of all pulleys. (5) After generator and adjust bracket have been
tightened into position, recheck belt tension. Adjust if
CAUTION: When installing the serpentine acces- necessary.
sory drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If
not, the engine may overheat due to the water COOLING SYSTEM FANS
pump rotating in the wrong direction. Refer to (Fig.
45) (Fig. 46) for correct belt routing. REMOVAL
Some engines have the mechanical fan/viscous fan
(2) Install new belt. drive assembly mounted directly to the water pump
(3) Using serpentine belt tension gauge, tighten hub (Fig. 49). It may also be mounted to a hub/bear-
adjusting bolt until belt reaches proper tension. Refer
to Belt Tension at the rear of this section for proper
belt tension.
ing attached to an aluminum bracket on the right (1) Loosen but do not remove at this time, the four
front side of engine (Fig. 50). fan hub mounting nuts (Fig. 49) (Fig. 50).
(2) Remove accessory serpentine drive belt. Refer
to Belt Service in the Engine Accessory Drive Belt
section of this group.
(3) Some models with certain engines may require
the removal of the fan shroud to remove the viscous
fan drive. The fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan
drive should be removed from the vehicle as one
assembly.
(4) Remove four fan hub mounting nuts (Fig. 49)
(Fig. 50) and remove fan/viscous fan drive assembly
from vehicle.
(5) After removing fan blade/viscous fan drive
assembly, do not place thermal viscous fan drive in
horizontal position. If stored horizontally, silicone
fluid in viscous fan drive could drain into its bearing
assembly and contaminate lubricant.
INSTALLATION
(1) Assemble fan blade to viscous fan drive.
Tighten mounting bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
(2) Position mounting flange of fan blade/viscous
fan drive assembly onto hub. Install four nuts and
Fig. 49 Water Pump Mounted Cooling Fan tighten to 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten the
first two nuts 180 degrees apart. Then tighten last
two nuts.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory

drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not,
the engine may overheat due to the water pump
rotating in the wrong direction. Refer to appropriate
Engine Accessory Drive Belt Schematic in this
group for correct belt routing.
(3) Install accessory drive belts. Tension belts to

specifications. Refer to the Specifications section at
the end of this group.
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

Refer to Cooling System Fan for removal and
installation procedures of the viscous drive unit.
Viscous Fan Drive Fluid Pump Out Requirement:

After installing a new viscous fan drive, bring the
engine speed up to approximately 2000 rpm and hold
for approximately two minutes. This will ensure
proper fluid distribution within the drive.
Fig. 50 Bracket Mounted Cooling Fan
CLEANING AND INSPECTION COOLING SYSTEM HOSES

RADIATOR PRESSURE CAP INSPECTION
Inspect the hoses at regular intervals. Replace
INSPECTION hoses that are cracked, feel brittle when squeezed or
Visually inspect the pressure valve gasket on the swell excessively when the system is pressurized.
cap. Replace cap if the gasket is swollen, torn or The use of molded replacement hoses is recom-
worn. Inspect the area around radiator filler neck for mended. When performing a hose inspection, inspect
white deposits that indicate a leaking cap. the radiator lower hose for proper position and con-
dition of the spring.
RADIATOR CLEANING
The radiator and air conditioning fins should be
cleaned when an accumulation of bugs, leaves etc.
SPECIFICATIONS
has occurred. Clean radiator fins are necessary for
good heat transfer. With the engine cold, apply cold BELT TENSION
water and compressed air to the back (engine side) of Belt tension must be adjusted . Refer to the follow-
the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C con- ing Belt Tension chart for specifications.
denser of debris.
COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING

Drain cooling system and refill with water. Run
engine with radiator cap installed until upper radia-
tor hose is hot. Stop engine and drain water from
system. If water is dirty, fill system with water, run
engine and drain system. Repeat until water drains
clean.
FAN BLADE INSPECTION

The fan blades cannot be repaired. If fan is dam-
aged, it must be replaced. Inspect fan as follows:
(1) Remove fan blade and viscous fan drive as an
assembly from the engine. Refer to preceding
Removal procedure.
(2) Remove fan blade assembly from viscous fan
drive unit (four bolts).
(3) Lay fan on a flat surface with leading edge fac-
ing down. With tip of blade touching flat surface,
replace fan if clearance between opposite blade and BELT TENSION
surface is greater than 2.0 mm (.090 inch). Rocking
motion of opposite blades should not exceed 2.0 mm
(.090 inch). Test all blades in this manner.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO BEND OR

STRAIGHTEN FAN BLADES IF NOT WITHIN SPECI-
FICATIONS.
(4) Inspect fan assembly for cracks, bends, loose

rivets or broken welds. Replace fan if any damage is
found.
CAUTION: If fan blade assembly is replaced

because of mechanical damage, water pump and
viscous fan drive should also be inspected. These
components could have been damaged due to
excessive vibration.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS SPECIAL TOOLS

DESCRIPTION TORQUE COOLING
Auto. Trans. Auxiliary Oil Cooler
Mtg. Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 N·m (18in. lbs.)
Block Heater
Mounting Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 N·m (20 in. lbs.)
Condenser-to-Radiator
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 N·m (55 in. lbs.)
Electric Cooling Fan
Mtg. Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.)
Fan Blade Assy to Viscous Fan Drive
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.)
Fan Shroud (2.5L Engine)
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.)
Fan Shroud (4.0L Engine)
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.) Hose Clamp Tool—6094
Generator Pivot
Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.)
Generator Rear Adj.
Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Isolator-to-Crossmember
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (86 in. lbs.)
Isolator-to-Radiator
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 N·m (47 in. lbs.)
Radiator (4.0L Engine)
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m (6 ft. lbs.)
Radiator (2.5L Engine)
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 N·m (55 in. lbs.) Cooling System Pressure Tester—7700A
Thermostat Housing
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 N·m (15 ft. lbs.)
Viscous Fan Drive Assy. to Water Pump or Hub
Bearing
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Water Pump
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
3/8” Quick Connect Release Tool—6935

COOLING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page

COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 COOLANT LEVEL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
COOLANT TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COOLANT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS . . . . . . . . . . 2 REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
LOW COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AUTOMATIC BELT TENSIONER . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION FAN BLADE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSIONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
BELT TENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COOLANT PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 VISCOUS FAN DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PRESSURE/VENT CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FLUSHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FAN BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
BELT DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 PRESSURE/VENT CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
LOW COOLANT LEVEL- AERATION . . . . . . . . . 15 RADIATOR CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PRESSURE/VENT CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 SPECIFICATIONS
RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW CHECK . . . . . . . . 13 COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TESTING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS . . . . 13 THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
THERMOSTAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
GENERAL INFORMATION COOLING SYSTEM COMPONENTS

The cooling system consists of:
COOLING SYSTEM • Charge Air Cooler
The cooling system regulates engine operating tem- • Electric Cooling Fan
perature. It allows the engine to reach normal oper- • A brass-core radiator with plastic side tanks
ating temperature as quickly as possible, maintains • A radiator mounted fill vent valve
normal operating temperature and prevents over- • A separate pressurized coolant tank
heating. • A threaded-on, pressure/vent cap mounted to the
The cooling system also provides a means of heat- coolant tank
ing the passenger compartment. The cooling system • Cooling fan (mechanical)
is pressurized and uses a centrifugal water pump to • Thermal viscous fan drive
circulate coolant throughout the system. A water • Fan shroud
manifold collects coolant from the cylinder heads. A • Thermostat
separate and remotely mounted, pressurized coolant • Coolant
tank using a pressure/vent cap is used. • Low coolant level sensor
• Low coolant warning lamp
• Coolant temperature gauge
• Water pump
• Hoses and hose clamps automatic belt tensioner is used to maintain correct
belt tension at all times.
COOLANT ROUTING
For cooling system flow routing, refer to (Fig. 1). CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory
drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. If not,
RADIATOR the engine may overheat due to water pump rotat-
The radiator used with the 2.5L diesel is con- ing in wrong direction. Refer to the engine Belt
structed of a horizontal down-flow brass core with Schematic in Specification section at the end of this
plastic side tanks. group for the correct belt routing.
CAUTION: Plastic tanks, while stronger than brass,

are subject to damage by impact, such as COOLANT TANK
wrenches. A pressurized, plastic coolant tank is used with the
cooling system. This separate tank should be consid-
ered part of the radiator. The tank is located at the
ENGINE ACCESSORY DRIVE BELTS right-rear side of the engine compartment and is
The accessory drive components are operated by a mounted as the highest point of the cooling system.
single, crankshaft driven, serpentine drive belt. An This will allow any air or vapor exceeding the pres-
Fig. 1 Coolant Flow—2.5L Diesel Engine—Typical

sure/vent cap rating to escape through the cap. Cool-
ant will flow through the tank at all times during
engine operation whether the engine is cold or at
normal operating temperature. The coolant tank is
equipped with a threaded pressure/vent cap. Refer to
Pressure/Vent Cap for additional information.
The low coolant level sensor is located on the bot-
tom of the tank.
WATER PUMP
A centrifugal water pump circulates coolant
through the water jackets, passages, water manifold,
radiator core, pressurized coolant tank, cooling sys-
tem hoses and heater core. The pump is driven from
the engine crankshaft by a drive belt. The water
pump is bolted to the water pump adapter (Fig. 2).
The water pump adapter is bolted to the engine.
The water pump impeller is pressed onto the rear
of a shaft that rotates in bearings pressed into the
housing. The bottom of the housing is equipped with
a small vent tube (Fig. 2) to allow seepage to escape.
A drain hose is attached to this tube. The water
pump seals are lubricated by the antifreeze in the
coolant mixture. No additional lubrication is neces-
sary.
A rubber o-ring (instead of a gasket) is used as a
seal between the water pump and the water pump
adapter (Fig. 2).
A quick test to determine if the pump is working is Fig. 2 Water Pump— Typical
to check if the heater warms properly. A defective
water pump will not be able to circulate heated cool-
ant through the long heater hose to the heater core.
COOLANT
Coolant flows through the engine water jackets
and water manifold absorbing heat produced during
engine operation. The coolant carries heat to the
radiator and heater core. Here it is transferred to the
ambient air passing through the radiator and heater
core fins.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL SENSOR

The low coolant level sensor checks for low coolant
level in the coolant tank. A signal will be sent from
this sensor to the powertrain control module (PCM).
When the PCM determines low coolant level, the Fig. 3 Low Coolant Level Sensor
instrument panel mounted low coolant level warning
lamp will be illuminated. The sensor is located on the DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
front side of the coolant tank (Fig. 3). For informa-
tion, refer to Group 8E, Instrument Panel and THERMOSTAT
Gauges. A pellet-type thermostat controls the operating
If this lamp is illuminated, it indicates the need for temperature of the engine by controlling the amount
service. of coolant flow to the radiator. The thermostat starts
to open at 80°C (176°F). Above this temperature,
coolant is allowed to flow to the radiator. This pro-
vides quick engine warmup and overall temperature
control.
The same thermostat is used for winter and sum-
mer seasons. An engine should not be operated with-
out a thermostat, except for servicing or testing.
Operating without a thermostat causes other prob-
lems. These are: longer engine warmup time, unreli-
able warmup performance, increased exhaust
emissions and crankcase condensation. This conden-
sation can result in sludge formation.
CAUTION: Do not operate an engine without a ther-

mostat, except for servicing or testing.
PRESSURE/VENT CAP
The pressure/vent cap is threaded-on to the coolant
tank. This cap releases excess pressure at some point
within a range of 90-117 kPa (13- 17 psi). The actual
pressure relief point (in pounds) is labeled on top of
the cap (Fig. 4).
The cooling system will operate at pressures
slightly above atmospheric pressure. This results in a
higher coolant boiling point allowing increased radi-
ator cooling capacity. The cap (Fig. 4) contains a
spring-loaded pressure relief valve. This valve opens
when system pressure reaches approximately 103
kPa (15 psi).
When the engine is cooling down, vacuum is
Fig. 4 Coolant Tank Pressure/Vent Cap
formed within the cooling system. To prevent collapse
of the radiator and coolant hoses from this vacuum, a with a 68 percent antifreeze concentration, which
vacuum valve is used within the cap. This valve pre- prevents freezing down to -67.7 deg. C (-90 deg. F). A
vents excessive pressure differences from occurring higher percentage will freeze at a warmer tempera-
between the closed cooling system and the atmo- ture. Also, a higher percentage of antifreeze can
sphere. If the vacuum valve is stuck shut, the radia- cause the engine to overheat because the specific
tor and/or cooling system hoses will collapse on cool- heat of antifreeze is lower than that of water.
down.
100 Percent Ethylene-Glycol—Should Not Be Used in
NOTE: Do not use any type of tool when tightening Chrysler Vehicles
the cap. Hand tighten only (approximately 5 N·m or Use of 100 percent ethylene-glycol will cause for-
44 in. lbs.) torque. mation of additive deposits in the system, as the cor-
rosion inhibitive additives in ethylene-glycol require
the presence of water to dissolve. The deposits act as
COOLANT PERFORMANCE insulation, causing temperatures to rise to as high as
149 deg. C (300) deg. F). This temperature is hot
ETHYLENE-GLYCOL MIXTURES enough to melt plastic and soften solder. The
The required ethylene-glycol (antifreeze) and water increased temperature can result in engine detona-
mixture depends upon the climate and vehicle oper- tion. In addition, 100 percent ethylene-glycol freezes
ating conditions. The recommended mixture of 50/50 at 22 deg. C (-8 deg. F).
ethylene-glycol and water will provide protection
against freezing to -37 deg. C (-35 deg. F). The anti- Propylene-glycol Formulations—Should Not Be Used in
Chrysler Vehicles
freeze concentration must always be a minimum of
44 percent, year-round in all climates. If percentage Propylene-glycol formulations do not meet
is lower than 44 percent, engine parts may be Chrysler coolant specifications. It’s overall effec-
eroded by cavitation, and cooling system com- tive temperature range is smaller than that of ethyl-
ponents may be severely damaged by corrosion. ene-glycol. The freeze point of 50/50 propylene-glycol
Maximum protection against freezing is provided and water is -32 deg. C (-26 deg. F). 5 deg. C higher
than ethylene-glycol’s freeze point. The boiling point
(protection against summer boil-over) of propylene-
glycol is 125 deg. C (257 deg. F ) at 96.5 kPa (14 psi),
compared to 128 deg. C (263 deg. F) for ethylene-gly-
col. Use of propylene-glycol can result in boil-over or
freeze-up in Chrysler vehicles, which are designed for
ethylene-glycol. Propylene glycol also has poorer heat
transfer characteristics than ethylene glycol. This
can increase cylinder head temperatures under cer-
tain conditions.
Propylene-glycol/Ethylene-glycol Mixtures—Should Not Be

Used in Chrysler Vehicles
Propylene-glycol/ethylene-glycol Mixtures can
cause the destabilization of various corrosion inhibi-
tors, causing damage to the various cooling system
components. Also, once ethylene-glycol and propy- Fig. 5 Hose Clamp Tool
lene-glycol based coolants are mixed in the vehicle,
conventional methods of determining freeze point will
not be accurate. Both the refractive index and spe-
cific gravity differ between ethylene glycol and propy-
lene glycol.
CAUTION: Richer antifreeze mixtures cannot be

measured with normal field equipment and can
cause problems associated with 100 percent ethyl-
ene-glycol.
COOLING SYSTEM HOSES

Rubber hoses route coolant to and from the radia-
tor, water manifold and heater core. Models equipped
with air conditioning have a heater water control
(shut-off) valve. This is located in-line with the
heater core inlet and outlet hoses. It controls coolant
flow to the heater core when the air conditioning sys-
tem is in operation.
Radiator lower hoses are spring-reinforced to pre-
vent collapse from water pump suction at moderate
and high engine speeds.
Fig. 6 Clamp Number/Letter Location
WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS For all vehicles: In areas where specific routing
ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES. clamps are not provided, be sure that hoses are posi-
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY tioned with sufficient clearance. Check clearance
TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF from exhaust manifolds and pipe, fan blades, drive
CLAMP (Fig. 5). ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES belts and sway bars. Improperly positioned hoses can
WHEN SERVICING CONSTANT TENSION CLAMPS. be damaged, resulting in coolant loss and engine
overheating.
Ordinary worm gear type hose clamps (when
equipped) can be removed with a straight screw-
driver or a hex socket. To prevent damage to
hoses or clamps, the hose clamps should be
tightened to 4 N·m (34 in. lbs.) torque. Do not
Inspect the hoses at regular intervals. Replace over tighten hose clamps.
hoses that are cracked, feel brittle when squeezed, or When performing a hose inspection, inspect the
swell excessively when the system is pressurized. radiator lower hose for proper position and condition
of the internal spring.
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE • Engine loads and temperatures are high such as
The thermal viscous fan drive (Fig. 7) is a silicone- when towing a trailer.
fluid-filled coupling. It connects the fan blade assem- • Cool silicone fluid within the fan drive unit is
bly to the fan pulley. The coupling allows the fan to being redistributed back to its normal disengaged
be driven in a normal manner. This is done at low (warm) position. This can occur during the first 15
engine speeds while limiting the top speed of the fan seconds to one minute after engine start-up on a cold
to a predetermined maximum level at higher engine engine.
speeds. A bimetallic spring coil is located on the front
face. This spring coil reacts to the temperature of the LEAKS
radiator discharge air. It engages the viscous fan Viscous fan drive operation is not affected by small
drive for higher fan speed if the air temperature from oil stains near the drive bearing. If leakage appears
the radiator rises above a certain point. Until addi- excessive, replace the fan drive unit.
tional engine cooling is necessary, the fan will remain
at a reduced rpm regardless of engine speed. BELT TENSION
Correct accessory drive belt tension is required to
be sure of optimum performance of belt driven engine
accessories. If specified tension is not maintained,
belt slippage may cause; engine overheating, lack of
power steering assist, loss of air conditioning capac-
ity, reduced generator output rate and greatly
reduced belt life.
An automatic belt tensioner is used to maintain
correct belt tension at all times. Do not attempt to
check belt tension with a belt tension gauge on vehi-
cles equipped with an automatic belt tensioner. Refer
to Automatic Belt Tensioner in this group.
Fig. 7 Viscous Fan Drive

AUTOMATIC BELT TENSIONER
Drive belt tension is controlled by a spring loaded
The viscous fan drive will only engage when suffi- automatic belt tensioner located below and to the
cient heat is present. This is when the air flowing front of the engine oil filter (Fig. 8).
through the radiator core causes a reaction from the
bimetallic coil. It then increases fan speed to provide
the necessary additional engine cooling.
Once the engine has cooled, the radiator discharge
temperature will drop. The bimetallic coil again
reacts and the fan speed is reduced to the previous
disengaged speed.
CAUTION: Some engines equipped with serpentine

drive belts have reverse rotating fans and viscous
fan drives. They are marked with the word
REVERSE to designate their usage. Installation of
the wrong fan or viscous fan drive can result in
engine overheating.
NOISE
NOTE: It is normal for fan noise to be louder (roar-
ing) when:
• The underhood temperature is above the engage-

ment point for the viscous drive coupling. This may
occur when ambient (outside air temperature) is very Fig. 8 Automatic Belt Tensioner Assembly
high.
WARNING: BECAUSE OF HIGH SPRING PRES- (2) TRAILER TOWING:
SURE, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISASSEMBLE THE Consult Trailer Towing section of owners manual.
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSIONER. UNIT IS SERVICED Do not exceed limits.
AS AN ASSEMBLY. (3) RECENT SERVICE OR ACCIDENT REPAIR:
Determine if any recent service has been per-
formed on vehicle that may effect cooling system.
This may be:
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING • Engine adjustments (incorrect timing)
• Slipping engine accessory drive belt
PRELIMINARY CHECKS • Brakes (possibly dragging)
• Changed parts (incorrect water pump)
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM OVERHEATING • Reconditioned radiator or cooling system refill-
Establish what driving conditions caused the coming (possibly under filled or air trapped in system).
plaint. Abnormal loads on the cooling system such as
the following may be the cause: NOTE: If investigation reveals none of the previous
(1) PROLONGED IDLE, VERY HIGH AMBIENT items as a cause for an engine overheating com-
TEMPERATURE, SLIGHT TAIL WIND AT IDLE, plaint, refer to following Cooling System Diagnosis
SLOW TRAFFIC, TRAFFIC JAMS, HIGH SPEED charts.
OR STEEP GRADES.
Driving techniques that avoid overheating are: These charts are to be used as a quick-reference
• Idle with A/C off when temperature gauge is at only. Refer to the group text for information.
end of normal range.
• Increasing engine speed for more air flow is rec-
ommended.
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS–DIESEL ENGINE
THERMOSTAT also will ensure against excessively high coolant tem-

perature.
DIAGNOSIS
WARNING: BE SURE OF ADEQUATE FAN BLADE
Diesel engines, due to their inherent efficiency are
CLEARANCE BEFORE DRILLING.
slower to warm up than gasoline powered engines,
and will operate at lower temperatures when the (1) Drill a 3.12-mm (1/8-in) diameter hole in the
vehicle is unloaded. Because of this, lower tempera- top center of the fan shroud.
ture gauge readings for diesel versus gasoline (2) Obtain a dial thermometer with an 8 inch stem
engines may, at times be normal. (or equivalent). It should have a range of -18°-to-
105°C (0°-to-220° F). Insert thermometer through the
TESTING hole in the shroud. Be sure that there is adequate
clearance from the fan blades.
NOTE: The DRB scan tool cannot be used to mon-
(3) Block the air flow through the radiator. Secure
itor engine coolant temperature on the diesel
a sheet of plastic in front of the radiator (or air con-
engine.
ditioner condenser). Use tape at the top to secure the
(1) To determine if the thermostat is defective, it plastic and be sure that the air flow is blocked.
must be removed from the vehicle. Refer to Thermo- (4) Be sure that the air conditioner (if equipped) is
stats for removal and installation procedures. turned off.
(2) After the thermostat has been removed, exam-
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE
ine the thermostat and inside of thermostat housing
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A
for contaminants. If contaminants are found, the
DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR
thermostat may already be in a “stuck open” position.
HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO
Flush the cooling system before replacing thermostat.
Refer to Cooling System Cleaning/Reverse Flushing
in this group for additional information. (5) Start the engine and operate at 2400 rpm.
(3) Place the thermostat into a container filled Within ten minutes the air temperature (indicated on
with water. the dial thermometer) should be up to 93° C (200° F).
(4) Place the container on a hot plate or other suit- Fan drive engagement should have started to occur
able heating device. at between 82° to 91° C (180° to 195° F). Engage-
(5) Place a commercially available radiator ther- ment is distinguishable by a definite increase in fan
mometer into the water. flow noise (roaring).
(6) Apply heat to the water while observing the (6) When the air temperature reaches 93° C (200°
thermostat and thermometer. F), remove the plastic sheet. Fan drive disengage-
(7) When the water temperature reaches 80°C ment should have started to occur at between 57° to
(176°F) the thermostat should start to open (valve 79° C (135° to 175° F). A definite decrease of fan
will start to move). If the valve starts to move before flow noise (roaring) should be noticed. If not, replace
this temperature is reached, it is opening too early. the defective viscous fan drive unit.
Replace thermostat. The thermostat should be fully
open (valve will stop moving) at approximately 89°C
RADIATOR COOLANT FLOW CHECK
(192°F). If the valve is still moving after the water
There is coolant flow through the coolant tank (bot-
temperature reaches this temperature, it is opening
tle) before and after the thermostat opens.
too late. Replace thermostat.
(8) If the valve refuses to move at any time, CAUTION: Do not remove the vent valve to insert a
replace thermostat. temperature gauge thought the opening, coolant
will spill out of the system and the engine will not
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE be filled with coolant up to the heads. Major dam-
age could happen if you run the engine in this con-
TESTING dition.
If the fan assembly free-wheels without drag (the
fan blades will revolve more than five turns when
spun by hand), replace the fan drive. This spin test TESTING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
must be performed when the engine is cool.
The cooling system must be in good condition. This ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT METHOD
is checked prior to performing the following test. It All Jeepy models have a leak detection additive
added to the cooling system before they leave the fac-
tory. The additive is highly visible under ultraviolet 11) when testing either the coolant tank or pressure
light (black light). If the factory original coolant has cap. Use Kent-Mooret adapter set number
been drained, pour one ounce of additive into the J-24460-92 or Snap-Ont numbers TA-32 and TA-33.
cooling system. The additive is available through the Attach one of the adapters to the coolant pressure
parts department. Place the heater control unit in tank neck. Adapter must first be threaded to tank.
HEAT position. Start and operate the engine until Attach pressure tester to adapter.
the radiator upper hose is warm to the touch. Aim
the commercially available black light tool at the
components to be checked. If leaks are present, the
black light will cause the additive to glow a bright
green color.
The black light can be used along with a radiator
pressure tester to determine if any external leaks
exist (Fig. 9).
Fig. 10 Typical Pressure Tester Adapters
Fig. 9 Leak Detection Using Black Light—Typical

PRESSURE TESTER METHOD
WARNING: HOT, PRESSURIZED COOLANT CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY BY SCALDING. NEVER
REMOVE THE PRESSURE/VENT CAP OR PRES-
SURE TESTER WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS
HOT OR UNDER PRESSURE!
Allow the engine to cool sufficiently so that the Fig. 11 Typical Cooling System Pressure Tester
system is not under pressure and carefully remove Operate the tester pump to apply 103 kPa (15 psi)
the pressure/vent cap from the filler neck. Warm the pressure to the system. If the hoses enlarge exces-
engine with the pressure/vent cap off to normal oper- sively or bulge while testing, replace as necessary.
ating temperature. With the engine turned off attach Observe the gauge pointer and determine the condi-
the cooling system pressure tester and test the sys- tion of the cooling system according to the following
tem as described below. criteria:
Recheck the system cold if the cause of coolant loss • Holds Steady: If the pointer remains steady for
is not located during warm engine examination. two minutes, there are no serious coolant leaks in
A two-piece, threaded adapter set (Fig. 10) must be the system. However, there could be an internal leak
used to adapt a standard pressure-type tester (Fig. that does not appear with normal system test pres-
sure. Inspect for interior leakage or do the Internal 11) when testing either the coolant tank or pressure
Leakage Test. Do this if it is certain that coolant is cap. Use Kent-Mooret adapter set number
being lost and no leaks can be detected. J-24460-92 or Snap-Ont numbers TA-32 and TA-33.
• Drops Slowly: Shows a small leak or seepage is Attach the adapter to the cap. Adapter must first be
occurring. Examine all connections for seepage or threaded to cap. Attach pressure tester to adapter.
slight leakage with a flashlight. Inspect the radiator, Operate the tester pump and observe the gauge
hoses, gasket edges and heater. Seal any small leak pointer at its highest point. The cap release pressure
holes with a Sealer Lubricant or equivalent. Repair should be 90-to-117 kPa (13-to-17 psi). The cap is sat-
leak holes and reinspect the system with pressure isfactory when the pressure holds steady. It is also
applied. good if it holds pressure within the 90-to-117 kPa
• Drops Quickly: Shows that a serious leakage is (13-to-17 psi) range for 30 seconds or more. If the
occurring. Examine the system for serious external pointer drops quickly, replace the cap.
leakage. If no leaks are visible, inspect for internal
leakage. Large radiator leak holes should be repaired CAUTION: Radiator pressure testing tools are very
by a reputable radiator repair shop. sensitive to small air leaks, which will not cause
cooling system problems. A pressure cap that does
INTERNAL LEAKAGE INSPECTION not have a history of coolant loss should not be
Remove the oil pan drain-plug and drain a small replaced just because it leaks slowly when tested
amount of engine oil. Coolant, being heavier will with this tool. Add water to tool. Turn tool upside
drain first, or operate engine to churn oil, then exam- down and recheck pressure/vent cap to confirm
ine dipstick for water globules. Operate the engine that cap needs replacement.
without the pressure/vent cap on the coolant tank
until thermostat opens.
Attach a radiator pressure tester to the tank filler LOW COOLANT LEVEL- AERATION
neck. If pressure builds up quickly, a leak exists as
CAUTION: Engine damage could occur if the cool-
result of a faulty cylinder head gasket or crack in the
ant level is allowed to get this low. Always ensure
engine. Repair as necessary.
that the coolant level is not below the add coolant
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW PRESSURE TO mark. The baffles in the pressurized coolant tank
EXCEED 117 KPA (17 PSI). TURN THE ENGINE OFF. (degasser bottle) will not allow you to see the fluid
TO RELEASE THE PRESSURE, ROCK THE TESTER level. Check the coolant level through the pressur-
FROM SIDE TO SIDE. WHEN REMOVING THE ized coolant tank. For better visibility of the coolant
TESTER, DO NOT TURN THE TESTER MORE THAN level use a shop lamp to light the pressurized cool-
1/2 TURN IF THE SYSTEM IS UNDER PRESSURE. ant tank and look through the pressurized coolant
tank.
If there is no immediate pressure increase, pump
the pressure tester until the indicated pressure is If the coolant level in the radiator drops below the
within the system range. Vibration of the gauge top of radiator core tubes, air will enter the cooling
pointer indicates compression or combustion leakage system.
into the cooling system. Low coolant level can cause the thermostat pellet
to be suspended in air instead of coolant. This will
PRESSURE/VENT CAP cause the thermostat to open later, which in turn
causes higher coolant temperature. Air trapped in
PRESSURE TESTING the cooling system also reduces the amount of coolant
Remove the cap from the coolant tank. Be sure circulating in the heater core resulting in low heat
that sealing surfaces are clean. Moisten rubber gas- output.
ket with water.
A two-piece, threaded adapter set (Fig. 10) must be
used to adapt a standard pressure-type tester (Fig.
BELT DIAGNOSIS
When diagnosing serpentine accessory drive belts,
small cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt from rib to rib (Fig. 12), are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace the belt. However,
cracks running along a rib (not across) are not nor-
mal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must
be replaced (Fig. 12). Also replace the belt if it has
excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.
Refer to the Serpentine Drive Belt Diagnosis chart
for further belt diagnosis.
Fig. 12 Serpentine Belt Wear Patterns

SERPENTINE DRIVE BELT DIAGNOSIS

SERVICE PROCEDURES UNDER PRESSURE. PLACE A RAG OVER THE CAP.

VERY SLOWLY ROTATE THE CAP COUNTER-
COOLANT LEVEL CHECK CLOCKWISE ALLOWING PRESSURE TO SLOWLY
The coolant level is checked and adjusted at the RELEASE. AFTER ALL PRESSURE HAS BEEN
pressurized coolant tank (Fig. 13). The tank is RELEASED, REMOVE THE COOLANT TANK CAP
located at the right-rear side of the engine compart- COMPLETELY.
ment and is mounted as the highest point of the cool-
ing system. This will allow any air or vapor
exceeding the pressure/vent cap rating to escape
reuse.
through the cap. The coolant tank is equipped with a
(1) Observe the previous WARNINGS and remove
threaded-on pressure/vent cap. Refer to Pressure/
the coolant tank pressure/vent cap.
Vent Cap for additional information.
(2) The plastic radiator draincock is located on the
A coolant reserve/overflow system with a separate
bottom of the left radiator tank . It can be accessed
tank is not used with the 2.5L diesel engine.
from the bottom of vehicle.
(a) Attach one end of a 24 inch long X 1/4 inch
ID drain-hose to the nipple below the radiator
draincock.
(b) Put the other end of drain-hose into a clean
container.
(c) Open the draincock (counterclockwise as
viewed from left side of vehicle) and drain coolant
from radiator.
(3) If the complete cooling system must be drained,
raise the vehicle and remove the cylinder block
drain-plug. This hex- headed plug is located on the
right/rear side of the engine above the starter motor.
REFILLING COOLING SYSTEM

The cooling system is equipped with a pressurized
coolant tank using a pressure/vent cap. Refilling of
Fig. 13 Coolant Tank and Pressure/Vent Cap the system is done through this tank.
(1) Add coolant into the coolant tank up to the
COLD mark. If possible, only add coolant when NOTE: The radiator draincock is equipped with a
the engine is cold. Coolant level in a warm rubber o-ring. Do not over tighten draincock.
engine will be higher in the tank due to ther-
mal expansion. (1) Tighten the radiator draincock and (if
(2) After the engine has been operated through a removed), the cylinder block drain-plug.
few heat-up and cool-down cycles, recheck the coolant (2) Remove the plastic radiator fill vent valve
level in the tank. (unscrews counterclockwise) from the radiator. The
fill vent valve is located on the top of the right radi-
DRAINING COOLING SYSTEM ator tank.
(3) With the fill vent valve removed, proceed to fill
The cooling system is equipped with a pressurized
the system using a 50/50 mixture of water and anti-
coolant tank using a pressure/vent cap.
freeze as described in the Coolant section of this
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER group.
BLOCK DRAIN-PLUG, THE COOLANT TANK CAP, (4) Continue to fill the cooling system until coolant
THE RADIATOR FILL VENT VALVE, OR LOOSEN is observed escaping from the fill vent opening. When
THE RADIATOR DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM this occurs, install the fill vent valve. The plastic
HOT AND PRESSURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM fill vent valve is equipped with a rubber o-
THE COOLANT CAN OCCUR. ring. Do not over tighten the fill vent valve.
(5) Continue to fill the system until the coolant
tank is full.
WARNING: IF VEHICLE HAS BEEN RUN RECENTLY, (6) Install and tighten the coolant tank pressure/
WAIT AT LEAST 15 MINUTES BEFORE REMOVING vent cap. Do not use any type of tool when tight-
COOLANT TANK CAP. WITH A RAG, SQUEEZE THE ening the cap. Hand tighten only.
UPPER RADIATOR HOSE TO CHECK IF SYSTEM IS
(7) With the heater control unit in the HEAT posi-
tion, operate engine with coolant tank cap tightened.
(8) After engine has reached normal operating
temperature, shut engine off and allow it to cool.
(9) Remove coolant tank cap.
(10) Add coolant into the coolant tank up to the
COLD mark. If possible, only add coolant when
the engine is cold. Coolant level in a warm
engine will be higher in the tank due to ther-
mal expansion.
(11) After the engine has been operated through a
few heat-up and cool-down cycles, recheck the coolant
level in the tank.
COOLANT REPLACEMENT
It is recommended that the cooling system be
drained and flushed at 84,000 kilometers (52,500 Fig. 14 Hose Clamp Tool
miles), or 3 years, whichever occurs first. Then every
two years, or 48,000 kilometers (30,000 miles),
whichever occurs first.

RADIATOR
BLOCK DRAIN-PLUG, THE COOLANT TANK CAP,
THE RADIATOR FILL VENT VALVE, OR LOOSEN
THE RADIATOR DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM
HOT AND PRESSURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM
THE COOLANT CAN OCCUR.

clean, drain coolant into a clean container for reuse.
WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS

ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES.
WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY
TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF
CLAMP (Fig. 14). ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY Fig. 15 Clamp Number/Letter Location
GLASSES WHEN SERVICING CONSTANT TENSION (4) Remove the upper fan shroud-to-upper cross-
CLAMPS. member mounting bolts. One of the bolts is mounted
vertically at the bottom of the fan shroud.
(5) Lift the fan shroud up until alignment tabs at
the bottom are clear of slots in bracket at bottom of
radiator. Slip the fan shroud rearward and position it
over the fan blades.
(6) Remove radiator hose clamps and remove radi-
ator hoses.
REMOVAL (7) Mark the position of the hood latch striker on
(1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery. the radiator crossmember and remove hood latch
(2) Observe the previous WARNINGS. striker.
(3) Drain cooling system. Refer to Draining Cool- (8) Remove radiator upper crossmember.
ing System in this group. (9) If equipped with air conditioning, separate the
radiator from the A/C condenser by removing the
condenser-to-radiator mounting brackets.
(10) Lift radiator straight up and out of engine (1) Disconnect negative battery cable from battery.
compartment taking care not to damage radiator or (2) The thermal viscous fan drive/fan blade assem-
A/C condenser fins. bly is attached (threaded) to the fan pulley shaft
(Fig. 17). Remove fan blade/viscous fan drive assem-
INSTALLATION bly from fan pulley by turning mounting nut counter-
The radiator is equipped with two alignment dow- clockwise as viewed from front. Threads on viscous
els (Fig. 16). They are located on the bottom of the fan drive are RIGHT HAND. Snap-Ont 36 MM Fan
plastic side tanks and fit into rubber grommets Wrenches (number SP346) can be used to turn the
located in the front lower crossmember. mounting nut and to hold the fan pulley from rotat-
(1) Carefully lower the radiator into engine coming.
partment. Position the alignment dowels on the bot- (3) Do not attempt to remove fan/viscous fan drive
tom of radiator into the rubber grommets in front assembly from vehicle at this time.
lower crossmember (Fig. 16). (4) Do not unbolt fan blade assembly from viscous
fan drive at this time.

denser to radiator with mounting brackets.
(3) Install radiator upper crossmember.
Fig. 17 Thermal Viscous Fan Drive and Blade
(4) Install hood latch striker.
Assembly
(5) Connect radiator upper and lower hoses.
(6) Insert alignment tabs at bottom of fan shroud (5) Remove the fan shroud mounting bolts. One of
into slots in bracket at bottom of radiator. Install and the bolts is mounted vertically at the bottom of
tighten fan shroud bolts to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.) torque. shroud.
(7) Connect negative battery cable. (6) Remove fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan
(8) Fill cooling system with correct coolant. Refer drive assembly as a complete unit from vehicle.
to Refilling Cooling System in this group. (7) After removing fan blade/viscous fan drive
(9) Start and warm the engine. Check for coolant assembly, do not place viscous fan drive in horizon-
leaks. tal position. If stored horizontally, silicone fluid in
the viscous fan drive could drain into its bearing
FAN BLADE REMOVAL assembly and contaminate lubricant.
FAN BLADE REMOVAL CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove the fan pulley
Accessory drive belt removal is not necessary for bolts. The fan pulley is under tension from the drive
fan blade or viscous fan drive removal. belt.
(9) Remove four bolts securing fan blade assembly REVERSE to designate their usage. Installation of
to viscous fan drive (Fig. 17). the wrong fan or viscous fan drive can result in
engine overheating.
FAN BLADE INSTALLATION
(1) Install fan blade assembly to viscous fan drive.
Tighten bolts (Fig. 17) to 23 N·m (200 in. lbs.) torque. NOISE
(2) Position fan shroud and fan blade/viscous fan
drive assembly to vehicle as a complete unit. NOTE: It is normal for fan noise to be louder (roar-
(3) Install and tighten fan shroud bolts to 3 N·m ing) when:
(31 in. lbs.) torque.
• The underhood temperature is above the engage-
(4) Install fan blade/viscous fan drive assembly to
ment point for the viscous drive coupling. This may
fan pulley shaft (Fig. 17).
occur when ambient (outside air temperature) is very
(5) Connect negative battery cable.
high.
• Engine loads and temperatures are high such as
VISCOUS FAN DRIVE when towing a trailer.
The thermal viscous fan drive (Fig. 18) is a sili-
• Cool silicone fluid within the fan drive unit is
cone-fluid-filled coupling. It connects the fan blade
being redistributed back to its normal disengaged
assembly to the fan pulley. The coupling allows the
(warm) position. This can occur during the first 15
fan to be driven in a normal manner. This is done at
seconds to one minute after engine start-up on a cold
low engine speeds while limiting the top speed of the
engine.
fan to a predetermined maximum level at higher
engine speeds. A bimetallic spring coil is located on LEAKS
the front face. This spring coil reacts to the temper- Viscous fan drive operation is not affected by small
ature of the radiator discharge air. It engages the oil stains near the drive bearing. If leakage appears
viscous fan drive for higher fan speed if the air tem- excessive, replace the fan drive unit.
perature from the radiator rises above a certain
point. Until additional engine cooling is necessary,
THERMOSTAT
the fan will remain at a reduced rpm regardless of
engine speed.
REMOVAL
BLOCK DRAIN-PLUG, THE COOLANT TANK CAP,
THE RADIATOR FILL VENT VALVE, OR LOOSEN
THE RADIATOR DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM
HOT AND PRESSURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM
THE COOLANT CAN OCCUR.

reuse.
(1) Drain the coolant from the radiator until the
level is below the thermostat housing. Refer to
Fig. 18 Viscous Fan Drive Draining Cooling System for procedures.
The viscous fan drive will only engage when suffi- WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS
cient heat is present. This is when the air flowing ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES.
through the radiator core causes a reaction from the WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY
bimetallic coil. It then increases fan speed to provide TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF
the necessary additional engine cooling. CLAMP (Fig. 14). ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY
Once the engine has cooled, the radiator discharge GLASSES WHEN SERVICING CONSTANT TENSION
temperature will drop. The bimetallic coil again CLAMPS.
reacts and the fan speed is reduced to the previous
disengaged speed.
CAUTION: Some engines equipped with serpentine tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 15). If
drive belts have reverse rotating fans and viscous replacement is necessary, use only an original
fan drives. They are marked with the word equipment clamp with matching number or letter.
(2) Remove the upper radiator hose at the thermo- (6) Be sure that the radiator drain is tightly
stat housing. closed. Fill the cooling system to the correct level
(3) Remove the four thermostat housing bolts (Fig. with the required coolant mixture. Refer to Refilling
19) Cooling System in this group for procedures.
(7) Start and warm the engine. Check thermostat
and hose for leaks.
DRIVE BELT
CAUTION: The drive belt on the 2.5L diesel engine
is equipped with a spring loaded automatic belt ten-
sioner. After belt installation, do not attempt to
check belt tension with a belt tension gauge.
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSIONER
Fig. 19 Thermostat Removal/Installation

(4) Remove the thermostat housing from the water
manifold.
(5) Remove the thermostat and rubber seal from
the water manifold.
(6) Thoroughly clean the rubber seal mating sur-
faces.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install a new rubber seal around the outer lip
of the thermostat (a notch is provided in the rubber
seal). Do not apply any adhesive to this seal.
(2) Install the replacement thermostat and rubber Fig. 20 Automatic Belt Tensioner Assembly
seal as one assembly into the water manifold adapter
(the pointed end of the thermostat should be facing
WATER PUMP
towards the front of engine (Fig. 19). Observe the
recess groove in the water manifold adapter. Be sure
REMOVAL
The water pump can be removed without discharg-
the thermostat vent is in the 12 o’clock position (Fig.
ing the air conditioning system (if equipped).
19).
The water pump is serviced by replacing the pump
(3) Position the thermostat housing and four bolts
and its impeller only. The water pump adapter (Fig.
to the water manifold.
21) does not have to be removed. The pump impeller
CAUTION: Tightening the thermostat housing is pressed on the rear of the pump shaft and bearing
unevenly or with the thermostat out of its recess assembly. The pump is serviced only as a complete
groove, may result in a cracked housing. assembly with the impeller, housing, hub and bear-
ing.
(4) Tighten the four housing bolts to 11 N·m (98 A rubber o-ring seal (instead of a gasket) is used as
in. lbs.) torque. a seal between the water pump and the water pump
(5) Install radiator hose to thermostat housing. adapter.

Assembly
(5) Remove the upper fan shroud-to-upper cross-
Fig. 21 WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALL— member mounting bolts. One of the bolts is mounted
TYPICAL vertically at the bottom of the fan shroud.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER (6) Slip the fan shroud rearward. Remove the fan
BLOCK DRAIN-PLUG, THE COOLANT TANK CAP, shroud and viscous drive/fan blade together as one
THE RADIATOR FILL VENT VALVE, OR LOOSEN assembly from the engine compartment.
THE RADIATOR DRAINCOCK WITH THE SYSTEM (7) Loosen but do not remove the 3 water pump
HOT AND PRESSURIZED. SERIOUS BURNS FROM pulley bolts (Fig. 21).
THE COOLANT CAN OCCUR. (8) Remove the drive belt by relieving the tension
on the belt tensioner. For procedures, refer to Belt
DO NOT WASTE reusable coolant. If the solution Removal/Installation in the Engine Accessory Drive
is clean, drain coolant into a clean container for Belt section of this group.
reuse.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. WARNING: CONSTANT TENSION HOSE CLAMPS
(2) Drain the cooling system. Refer to Draining ARE USED ON MOST COOLING SYSTEM HOSES.
Cooling System in this group. WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING, USE ONLY
(3) The thermal viscous fan drive and the fan TOOLS DESIGNED FOR SERVICING THIS TYPE OF
blade assembly are attached (threaded) to the fan CLAMP (Fig. 23). ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY
pulley shaft (Fig. 22). Remove the fan/fan drive GLASSES WHEN SERVICING CONSTANT TENSION
assembly from the fan pulley by turning the mount- CLAMPS.
ing nut counterclockwise (as viewed from front).
Threads on the fan drive are RIGHT HAND. Snap-
Ont 36 MM Fan Wrenches (number SP346) can be CAUTION: A number or letter is stamped into the
used to turn the mounting nut and to hold the fan tongue of constant tension clamps (Fig. 24). If
pulley from rotating. replacement is necessary, use only an original
(4) If the water pump is being replaced, do not equipment clamp with matching number or letter.
unbolt the fan blade assembly (Fig. 22) from the
(9) A metal coolant tube (used to connect rubber
thermal viscous fan drive.
coolant hoses), and its mounting bracket are attached
to the front of the water pump (Fig. 25). A rubber
Fig. 23 Hose Clamp Tool Fig. 25 Coolant Tube at Water Pump

other foreign material. Inspect the water pump,
water pump adapter and water pump mating sur-
faces for erosion or damage from cavitation.
(2) Position a new rubber o-ring seal (Fig. 21)
between the pump and pump adapter. Hold the seal
with petroleum jelly.
(3) Position the pump on the engine.
(4) Position the metal coolant tube and its mount-
ing bracket on the pump.
(5) Install the four water pump mounting bolts.
Torque bolts to 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.).
(6) Install drain hose to vent tube at bottom of
pump.
(7) Position the water pump pulley to the water
pump.
(8) Install the water pump pulley bolts finger
tight.
(9) Install the rubber coolant hose near the ther-
mostat.
(10) Install the accessory drive belt. For proce-
dures, refer to Belt Removal/Installation in the
Engine Accessory Drive Belt section of this group.
Fig. 24 Clamp Number/Letter Location (11) Torque the water pump pulley bolts to 24 N·m
hose connects this tube to the engine. Disconnect the (18 ft. lbs.).
hose clamp and rubber hose at the back of the ther- (12) Position the viscous drive/fan blade and fan
mostat. Position the hose to the side. shroud to the engine compartment as one assembly.
(10) Remove the 3 water pump pulley bolts (Fig. (13) Install the thermal viscous fan drive and fan
21). blade to fan pulley. Torque to 56 N·m (41 ft. lbs.).
(11) Remove the water pump pulley from the (14) Install the fan shroud mounting bolts. Torque
water pump. bolts to 3 N·m (31 in. lbs.).
(12) Disconnect the drain hose from the vent tube (15) Fill the cooling system with coolant and check
at the bottom of water pump (Fig. 21). for leaks. Refer to Refilling Cooling System in this
(13) Remove the 4 water pump mounting bolts group.
(Fig. 21). (16) Connect the negative battery cable.
(14) Remove water pump from engine. (17) Start and warm the engine. Check for leaks.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the o-ring mating surfaces. If the origi-
nal pump is to be reinstalled, remove any deposits or

WATER PUMP
INSPECTION
Replace the water pump assembly if it has any of
the following conditions:
• The body is cracked or damaged
• Water leaks from the shaft seal. This is evident
by traces of coolant below the vent tube drain hose
• Loose or rough turning bearing.
• Impeller rubs either the water pump body or
water pump adapter.
RADIATOR CLEANING
The radiator and air conditioning fins should be
cleaned when an accumulation of bugs, leaves etc.
has occurred. Clean radiator fins are necessary for
good heat transfer. With the engine cold, apply cold
water and compressed air to the back (engine side) of
the radiator to flush the radiator and/or A/C con-
denser of debris.
FAN BLADE
INSPECTION
Assembly
The fan cannot be repaired. If fan is damaged, it
must be replaced. Inspect fan as follows: REVERSE to designate their usage. Installation of
(1) Remove fan blade and viscous fan drive as an the wrong fan or viscous fan drive can result in
assembly from the engine. engine overheating.
(2) Remove fan blade assembly from viscous fan
drive unit (four bolts) (Fig. 26).
(3) Lay fan on a flat surface with leading edge fac- PRESSURE/VENT CAP
ing down. With tip of blade touching flat surface,
replace fan if clearance between opposite blade and INSPECTION
surface is greater than 2.0 mm (.090 inch). Rocking Visually inspect the gasket on the cap. Replace cap
motion of opposite blades should not exceed 2.0 mm if the gasket is swollen, torn or worn. Inspect the
(.090 inch). Test all blades in this manner. area around the coolant tank filler neck for white
deposits that indicate a leaking cap.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO BEND OR The cap must be replaced by a similar threaded-on
STRAIGHTEN FAN BLADES IF NOT WITHIN SPECI- unit with the correct operating pressures if replace-
FICATIONS. ment is necessary.
(4) Inspect fan assembly for cracks, bends, loose COOLING SYSTEM CLEANING/REVERSE
rivets or broken welds. Replace fan if any damage is FLUSHING
found.
CAUTION: If fan blade assembly is replaced
because of mechanical damage, the fan pulley bear-
this pressure may damage the radiator or hoses.
ing and viscous fan drive should also be inspected.
These components could have been damaged due
to excessive vibration. CLEANING
Drain cooling system and refill with water. Run
CAUTION: Some engines equipped with serpentine engine with coolant tank pressure/vent cap installed
drive belts have reverse rotating fans and viscous until upper radiator hose is hot. Stop engine and
fan drives. They are marked with the word drain water from system. If water is dirty, fill system
with water, run engine and drain system. Repeat stat housing and install thermostat. Install the ther-
until water drains clean. mostat housing with a new replacement rubber seal.
Refer to Thermostat Installation. Connect the radia-
REVERSE FLUSHING tor hoses. Refill the cooling system with the correct
Reverse flushing of the cooling system is the forc- antifreeze/water mixture.
ing of water through the cooling system. This is done
using air pressure in the opposite direction of normal CHEMICAL CLEANING
coolant flow. It is usually only necessary with very In some instances, use a radiator cleaner (Mopar
dirty systems with evidence of partial plugging. Radiator Kleen or equivalent) before flushing. This
will soften scale and other deposits and aid the flush-
REVERSE FLUSHING RADIATOR ing operation.
Disconnect the radiator hoses from the radiator fit-
tings. Attach a section of radiator hose to the radia- CAUTION: Be sure instructions on the container
tor bottom outlet fitting and insert the flushing gun. are followed.
Connect a water supply hose and air supply hose to
the flushing gun.

SPECIFICATIONS
this pressure may damage the radiator or hoses. COOLING SYSTEM CAPACITY
2.5L Diesel Engine: 9.8 Liters (10.4 qts.)
Allow the coolant tank and radiator to fill with
water. When radiator is filled, apply air in short THERMOSTAT
blasts allowing radiator to refill between blasts. Con- Starts to open at 80°C (176°F).
tinue this reverse flushing until clean water flows
out through rear of radiator cooling tube passages. TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
For more information, refer to operating instructions
supplied with flushing equipment. Have radiator DESCRIPTION TORQUE
cleaned more extensively by a radiator repair shop. Automatic Belt Tensioner-to-Mounting Bracket
Bolt (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m
REVERSE FLUSHING ENGINE Automatic Belt Tensioner to Block
Drain the cooling system. Remove the thermostat Bolts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 N·m
housing and thermostat. Install the thermostat hous- Coolant Tank
ing. Disconnect the radiator upper hose from the Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 N·m
radiator and attach the flushing gun to the hose. Dis- Fan Shroud-to-Radiator Mounting
connect the radiator lower hose from the water Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m
pump. Attach a lead away hose to the water pump Fan Blade-to-Thermal Viscous Fan Drive
inlet fitting. Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m
CAUTION: Be sure that the heater water control Hose
valve is closed (heat off). This is done to prevent Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 N·m
coolant flow with scale and other deposits from Radiator-to-A/C Condenser Isolator
entering the heater core. Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 N·m
Thermal Viscous Fan Drive-to-Fan Hub
Connect the water supply hose and air supply hose Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 N·m
to the flushing gun. Allow the engine to fill with Thermostat Housing
water. When the engine is filled, apply air in short Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m
blasts, allowing the system to fill between air blasts. Water Pump Mounting
Continue until clean water flows through the lead Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m
away hose. For more information, refer to operating Water Pump Pulley
instructions supplied with flushing equipment. Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m
Remove the lead away hose, flushing gun, water
supply hose and air supply hose. Remove the thermo-
XJ BATTERY 8A - 1
BATTERY
CONTENTS
page page

BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SERVICE PROCEDURES
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Rapid loss of electrolyte can be caused by an over-

charging condition. Be certain to diagnose the charg-
BATTERY ing system before returning the vehicle to service.
Refer to Charging System in the Diagnosis and
DESCRIPTION Testing section of Group 8C - Charging System for
A large capacity, low-maintenance storage battery more information.
is standard factory-installed equipment on this The factory-installed battery also has a built-in
model. This battery is designed to provide a safe, effi- test indicator (hydrometer). The color visible in the
cient and reliable means of storing electrical energy sight glass of the indicator will reveal the battery
in a chemical form. This means of energy storage condition. Refer to Built-In Test Indicator in the
allows the battery to produce the electrical energy Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for more
required to operate the engine starting system, as information.
well as to operate many of the other vehicle acces- This group covers only the battery diagnostic and
sory systems for limited durations while the engine service procedures. For battery maintenance sched-
and/or the charging system are not operating. ules and jump starting procedures, see the owner’s
The factory-installed low-maintenance bat- manual in the vehicle glove box, or refer to Mainte-
tery has removable battery cell caps. Water can nance Schedules and Jump Starting, Towing
be added to this battery. The battery is not sealed and Hoisting in Group 0 - Lubrication and Mainte-
and has vent holes in the cell caps (Fig. 1). The nance. While battery charging can be considered a
chemical composition within the low-maintenance maintenance procedure, battery charging information
battery reduces battery gassing and water loss, at is located in this group. This was done because the
normal charge and discharge rates. battery must be fully-charged before any diagnosis
can be performed.
Group 8A covers the Battery, Group 8B covers the
Starting Systems, and Group 8C covers the Charging
System. We have separated these systems to make it
easier to locate the information you are seeking
within this Service Manual. However, when attempt-
ing to diagnose any of these systems, it is important
that you keep their interdependency in mind.
The battery, starting, and charging systems in the
vehicle operate with one another, and must be tested
as a complete system. In order for the vehicle to start
and charge properly, all of the components that are
used in these systems must perform within specifica-
tions. It is important that the battery, starting, and
charging systems be thoroughly tested and inspected
any time a battery needs to be charged or replaced.
The cause of abnormal discharge, overcharging, or
Fig. 1 Low-Maintenance Battery - Typical early battery failure must be diagnosed and corrected
before a battery is replaced or returned to service.
8A - 2 BATTERY XJ
The diagnostic procedures used in each of these age potential of each cell is reduced. However, by
groups include the most basic conventional diagnostic charging the battery with a voltage higher than that
methods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diag- of the battery, the battery discharging process is
nostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Mod- reversed.
ule (PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere Charging the battery gradually changes the sul-
ammeter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile fated lead plates back into sponge lead and lead
rheostat (load tester), and 12-volt test lamp may be oxide, and the water back into sulfuric acid. This
required. action restores the difference in the electron charges
All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the deposited on the plates, and the voltage potential of
PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnos- the battery cells.
tic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in For a battery to remain useful, it must be able to
electronic memory for any failure it detects. Refer to produce high-amperage current over an extended
On-Board Diagnostic Test For Charging System period. A battery must also be able to accept a
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C - charge, so that its voltage potential may be restored.
Charging System for more information. In addition to producing and storing electrical
energy, the battery serves as a capacitor, or voltage
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive stabilizer, for the electrical system of the vehicle. It
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this absorbs most abnormal or transient voltages caused
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD by the switching of any of the electrical components
versions of affected vehicle components have been in the vehicle.
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. The battery is vented to release excess hydrogen
While most of the illustrations used in this group gas that is created when the battery is being charged
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and or discharged. However, even with these vents, the
service procedures outlined can generally be hydrogen gas can collect in or around the battery. If
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule hydrogen gas is exposed to flame or sparks, it may
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a ignite.
special illustration or procedure is required. If the electrolyte level is low, the battery may arc
internally and explode. If the battery is equipped
with removable cell caps, add distilled water when-
OPERATION ever the electrolyte level is below the top of the
The storage battery is a device used to store elec- plates. If the battery cell caps cannot be removed, the
trical energy potential in a chemical form. When an battery must be replaced if the electrolyte level
electrical load is applied to the battery terminals, an becomes low.
electrochemical reaction occurs within the battery.
This reaction causes the battery to discharge electri- BATTERY SIZE AND RATINGS
cal current. The battery Group Size number, the Cold Cranking
The battery is made up of six individual cells that Amperage (CCA) rating, and the Reserve Capacity
are connected in series. Each cell contains positively (RC) rating or Ampere-Hours (AH) rating can be
charged plate groups made of lead oxide, and nega- found on the original equipment battery label. Be
tively charged plate groups made of sponge lead. certain that a replacement battery has the correct
These dissimilar metal plates are submerged in a Group Size number, as well as CCA, and RC or AH
sulfuric acid and water solution called an electrolyte. ratings that equal or exceed the original equipment
As the battery discharges, a gradual chemical specification for the vehicle being serviced.
change takes place within each cell. The sulfuric acid Refer to Battery Classifications and Ratings in
in the electrolyte combines with the plate materials, the Specifications section of this group for more infor-
causing both plates to slowly change to lead sulfate. mation. Battery sizes and ratings are discussed in
At the same time, oxygen from the positive plate more detail below.
material combines with hydrogen from the sulfuric
acid, causing the electrolyte to become mainly water. GROUP SIZE
The chemical changes within the battery are The outside dimensions and terminal placement of
caused by the movement of excess or free electrons the battery conform to standards established by the
between the positive and negative plate groups. This Battery Council International (BCI). Each battery is
movement of electrons produces a flow of electrical assigned a BCI Group Size number to help identify a
current through the load device attached to the bat- correctly-sized replacement.
tery terminals.
As the plate materials become more similar chem-
ically, and the electrolyte becomes less acid, the volt-
XJ BATTERY 8A - 3
COLD CRANKING AMPERAGE When installing a battery, be certain that the hold
The Cold Cranking Amperage (CCA) rating specifies down fasteners are tightened to the proper specifica-
how much current (in amperes) the battery can deliver tions. Improper hold down fastener tightness,
for thirty seconds at -18° C (0° F). Terminal voltage whether too loose or too tight, can result in damage
must not fall below 7.2 volts during or after the thirty to the battery. Refer to Battery in the Removal and
second discharge period. The CCA required is generally Installation section of this group for the correct bat-
higher as engine displacement increases, depending also tery hold down fastener tightness specifications.
upon the starter current draw requirements.
RESERVE CAPACITY DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

The Reserve Capacity (RC) rating specifies the
time (in minutes) it takes for battery terminal volt- BATTERY
age to fall below 10.5 volts, at a discharge rate of 25
amperes. RC is determined with the battery fully- DIAGNOSIS
charged at 26.7° C (80° F). This rating estimates how The battery, starting, and charging systems oper-
long the battery might last after a charging system ate with one another, and must be tested as a com-
failure, under minimum electrical load. plete system. In order for the vehicle to start and
charge properly, all of the components involved in
AMPERE-HOURS these systems must perform within specifications.
The Ampere-Hours (AH) rating specifies the cur- Group 8A covers the Battery, Group 8B covers the
rent (in amperes) that a battery can deliver steadily Starting Systems, and Group 8C covers the Charging
for twenty hours, with the voltage in the battery not System. We have separated these systems to make it
falling below 10.5 volts. This rating is also sometimes easier to locate the information you are seeking
identified as the twenty-hour discharge rating. within this Service Manual. However, when attempt-
ing to diagnose any of these systems, it is important
MOUNTING that you keep their interdependency in mind.
The battery is mounted in a molded plastic tray The diagnostic procedures used in these groups
located in the right front corner of the engine compart- include the most basic conventional diagnostic meth-
ment. Two T-bolts are held in formations on each side of ods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics
the tray by push-on retainers, and extend upward on (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module
each side of the battery. A hold down strap fits across (PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere amme-
the top of the battery case. The ends of the T-bolts pass ter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile rheo-
through the hold down strap on each side of the battery, stat (load tester), and 12-volt test lamp may be
and a nut secures the hold down strap to the T-bolts. required.
One end of a support strap is located under the forward- All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the
most hold down strap nut, and the other end is secured PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnos-
to the upper radiator crossmember by a bolt. tic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in
A plastic bubble-wrap style thermoguard slides electronic memory for any failure it detects. Refer to
over the battery case to enclose the sides of the bat- On-Board Diagnostic Test For Charging System
tery. The thermoguard protects the battery from in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
engine compartment temperature extremes. Charging System for more information.
The battery tray is secured with three nuts to The battery must be completely charged and the
three studs that protrude from the wheelhouse inner top, posts, and terminal clamps should be properly
panel, forward of the right front wheel. cleaned and inspected before diagnostic procedures
A hole in the bottom of the battery tray is fitted are performed. Refer to Battery in the Removal and
with a battery temperature sensor. Refer to Battery Installation section of this group for the proper bat-
Temperature Sensor in the Description and Opera- tery cleaning and inspection procedures. Refer to
tion section of Group 8C - Charging System for more Battery Charging in the Service Procedures section
information on this component. of this group for the proper charging procedures.
8A - 4 BATTERY XJ
WARNING: built-in test indicator, view the test indicator to
• IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZ- determine the state-of-charge. If the battery has no
ING, LEAKING, LOOSE POSTS, OR LOW ELECTRO- test indicator, but has removable cell caps, perform
LYTE LEVEL, DO NOT TEST, ASSIST-BOOST, OR the hydrometer test to determine the state-of-charge.
CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY If the cell caps are not removable, or a hydrometer is
AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHI- not available, perform the open-circuit voltage test to
CLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT. determine the state-of-charge.
• EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND The battery must be charged before proceeding
AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE with a load test if:
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. • The battery built-in test indicator has a black or
PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE dark color visible.
MAY RESULT. • The temperature corrected specific gravity of the
• THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, battery electrolyte is less than 1.235.
WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CON- • The battery open-circuit voltage is less than 12.4
TACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN volts.
THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER A battery that will not accept a charge is faulty,
AND CALL A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT and must be replaced. Further testing is not
OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. required. A fully-charged battery must be load tested
• IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOV- to determine its cranking capacity. A battery that is
ABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF fully-charged, but does not pass the load test, is
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE faulty and must be replaced.
THE BATTERY IS RETURNED TO SERVICE. PER-
SONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY NOTE: Completely discharged batteries may take
RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS. several hours to accept a charge. Refer to Battery
Charging - Charging A Completely Discharged Bat-
The condition of a battery is determined by two cri- tery in the Service Procedures section of this group
teria: for more information.
1. State-Of-Charge - This can be determined by
checking the specific gravity of the battery electrolyte A battery is fully-charged when:
(built-in test indicator or hydrometer test), or by • All cells are gassing freely during charging.
checking the battery voltage (open-circuit voltage • A green color is visible in the sight glass of the
test). built-in test indicator.
2. Cranking Capacity - This can be determined • Three corrected specific gravity tests, taken at
by performing a battery load test, which measures one-hour intervals, indicate no increase in the spe-
the ability of the battery to supply high-amperage cific gravity.
current. • Open-circuit voltage is 12.4 volts or greater.
First, determine the battery state-of-charge. This
can be done in one of three ways. If the battery has a
XJ BATTERY 8A - 5
Battery Diagnosis
Condition Possible Causes Correction
The battery seems weak or 1. The battery has an 1. Refer to Battery in the Specifications section of
dead when attempting to start incorrect size or rating for this group. Replace an incorrect battery with the
the engine. this vehicle. correct battery.
2. The battery is physically 2. Inspect the battery for loose terminal posts or a
damaged. cracked and leaking case. Replace the battery, if
3. The battery terminal damaged.
connections are loose or 3. Refer to Voltage Drop Test in the Diagnosis
corroded. and Testing section of this group. Clean and
4. The battery is discharged. tighten the battery terminal connections, if
5. The electrical system required.
ignition-off draw is excessive. 4. Determine the battery state-of-charge. Refer to
6. The battery is faulty. Built-In Test Indicator, Hydrometer Test, or
7. The starting system is Open-Circuit Voltage Test in the Diagnosis and
faulty. Testing section of this group. Charge the battery,
8. The charging system is if required.
faulty. 5. Refer to Ignition-Off Draw Test in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of this group. Repair the
electrical system, if required.
6. Determine the battery cranking capacity. Refer
to Load Test in the Diagnosis and Testing section
of this group. Replace the battery, if required.
7. Determine if the starting system is performing
to specifications. Refer to Starting System in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8B -
Starting Systems for more information. Repair the
starting system, if required.
8. Determine if the charging system is performing
to specifications. Refer to Charging System in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
Charging System for more information. Repair the
charging system, if required.
8A - 6 BATTERY XJ
Battery Diagnosis
Condition Possible Causes Correction
The battery state-of-charge 1. The battery has an 1. Refer to Battery in the Specifications section of
cannot be maintained. incorrect size or rating for this group. Replace an incorrect battery with the
this vehicle. correct battery.
2. The battery terminal 2. Refer to Voltage Drop Test in the Diagnosis
connections are loose or and Testing section of this group. Clean and
corroded. tighten the battery terminal connections, if
3. The generator drive belt is required.
slipping. 3. Refer to Accessory Drive Belt Diagnosis in the
4. The electrical system Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 7 -
ignition-off draw is excessive. Cooling System for more information. Replace or
5. The battery is faulty. adjust the generator drive belt, if required.
6. The starting system is 4. Refer to Ignition-Off Draw Test in the Diagnosis
faulty. and Testing section of this group. Repair the
7. The charging system is electrical system, if required.
faulty. 5. Determine the battery cranking capacity. Refer
8. Electrical loads exceed the to Load Test in the Diagnosis and Testing section
output of the charging of this group. Replace the battery, if required.
system. 6. Determine if the starting system is performing
9. Slow driving or prolonged to specifications. Refer to Starting System in the
idling with high-amperage Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8B -
draw systems in use. Starting Systems for more information. Repair the
starting system, if required.
7. Determine if the charging system is performing
to specifications. Refer to Charging System in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
Charging System for more information. Repair the
charging system, if required.
8. Inspect the vehicle for aftermarket electrical
equipment which might cause excessive electrical
loads.
9. Advise the vehicle operator, as required.
The battery will not accept a 1. The battery is faulty. 1. Refer to Battery Charging in the Service
charge. Procedures section of this group. Replace the
faulty battery, if required.
ABNORMAL BATTERY DISCHARGING 6. A faulty or incorrect charging system compo-

Any of the following conditions can result in abnor- nent. Refer to Charging System in the Diagnosis
mal battery discharging: and Testing section of Group 8C - Charging System
1. Corroded or loose battery posts and terminal for more information.
clamps. 7. A faulty or incorrect battery.
2. A loose or worn generator drive belt.
3. Electrical loads that exceed the output of the TESTING
charging system. This can be due to equipment
installed after manufacture, or repeated short trip BUILT-IN TEST INDICATOR
use. A test indicator (hydrometer) built into the top of
4. Slow driving speeds (heavy traffic conditions) or the battery case provides visual information for bat-
prolonged idling, with high-amperage draw systems tery testing (Fig. 2). Like a hydrometer, the built-in
in use. test indicator measures the specific gravity of the
5. A faulty circuit or component causing excessive electrolyte. The test indicator reveals the battery
ignition-off draw. Refer to Ignition-Off Draw Test state-of-charge; however, it will not reveal the crank-
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for ing capacity of the battery. A load test must be per-
more information. formed to determine the battery cranking capacity.
XJ BATTERY 8A - 7
Refer to Load Test in the Diagnosis and Testing sec- tery, the battery must be load tested. Refer to Load
tion of this group for more information. Test in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group for more information.
• Black or Dark - indicates 0% to 75% state-of-
charge. The battery is inadequately charged and
must be charged until a green indication is visible in
the sight glass (12.4 volts or more), before the bat-
tery is tested further or returned to service. Refer to
Battery Charging in the Service Procedures section
of this group for more information. Also refer to
Abnormal Battery Discharging in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of this group for possible causes
of the discharged condition.
• Clear or Bright - indicates a low electrolyte
Fig. 2 Built-In Test Indicator level. The electrolyte level in the battery is below the
test indicator. A maintenance-free battery with non-
WARNING:
removable cell caps must be replaced if the electro-
• IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZ-
lyte level is low. Water must be added to a low-
ING, LEAKING, LOOSE POSTS, OR LOW ELECTRO-
maintenance battery with removable cell caps before
LYTE LEVEL, DO NOT TEST, ASSIST-BOOST, OR
it is charged. Refer to Battery Charging in the Ser-
CHARGE. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY
vice Procedures section of this group for more infor-
AND EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHI-
mation. A low electrolyte level may be caused by an
CLE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
overcharging condition. Refer to Charging System
• EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
AROUND THE BATTERY. DO NOT SMOKE, USE
Charging System to diagnose an overcharging condi-
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY.
tion.
PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE
MAY RESULT.
• THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID,
WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CON-
TACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN
THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER
AND CALL A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT
OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN.
• IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOV-
ABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE
SONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS.
Fig. 3 Built-In Test Indicator Sight Glass
Before testing, visually inspect the battery for any HYDROMETER TEST
damage (a cracked case or cover, loose posts, etc.)
The hydrometer test reveals the battery state-of-
that would cause the battery to be faulty. In order to
charge by measuring the specific gravity of the elec-
obtain correct indications from the built-in test indi-
trolyte. This test cannot be performed on
cator, it is important that the battery be level and
maintenance-free batteries with non-removable
have a clean sight glass. Additional light may be
cell caps. If the battery has non-removable cell caps,
required to view the indicator. Do not use open
refer to Built-In Test Indicator or Open-Circuit
flame as a source of additional light.
Voltage Test in the Diagnosis and Testing section of
To read the built-in test indicator, look into the
this group.
sight glass and note the color of the indicator (Fig. 3).
Specific gravity is a comparison of the density of
The battery condition that each color indicates is
the electrolyte to the density of pure water. Pure
described in the following list:
water has a specific gravity of 1.000, and sulfuric
• Green - indicates 75% to 100% state-of-charge.
acid has a specific gravity of 1.835. Sulfuric acid
The battery is adequately charged for further testing
makes up approximately 35% of the electrolyte by
or return to use. If the starter will not crank for a
weight, or 24% by volume.
minimum of fifteen seconds with a fully-charged bat-
8A - 8 BATTERY XJ
In a fully-charged battery the electrolyte will have
a temperature-corrected specific gravity of 1.260 to
1.290. However, a specific gravity of 1.235 or above is
satisfactory for battery load testing and/or return to
service.
WARNING:
MAY RESULT.
AND CALL A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT Fig. 4 Hydrometer - Typical
as four points of specific gravity. For each 5.5° C
above 26.7° C (10° F above 80° F), add four points.
For each 5.5° C below 26.7° C (10° F below 80° F),
subtract four points. Always correct the specific grav-
ity for temperature variation. Test the specific grav-
ity of the electrolyte in each battery cell.
EXAMPLE: A battery is tested at -12.2° C (10° F)
Before testing, visually inspect the battery for any and has a specific gravity of 1.240. Determine the
damage (a cracked case or cover, loose posts, etc.) actual specific gravity as follows:
that would cause the battery to be faulty. Then (1) Determine the number of degrees above or
remove the cell caps and check the electrolyte level. below 26.7° C (80° F):26.6° C - -12.2° C = 38.8° C (80°
Add distilled water if the electrolyte level is below F - 10° F = 70° F)
the top of the battery plates. (2) Divide the result from Step 1 by 5.5 (10):38.8°
See the instructions provided by the manufacturer C 4 5.5 = 7 (70° F 4 10 = 7)
of the hydrometer for recommendations on the cor- (3) Multiply the result from Step 2 by the temper-
rect use of the hydrometer that you are using. ature correction factor (0.004):7 X 0.004 = 0.028
Remove only enough electrolyte from the battery cell (4) The temperature at testing was below 26.7° C
so that the float is off the bottom of the hydrometer (80° F); therefore, the temperature correction factor
barrel with pressure on the bulb released. is subtracted:1.240 - 0.028 = 1.212
The corrected specific gravity of the battery cell in
CAUTION: Exercise care when inserting the tip of this example is 1.212.
the hydrometer into a cell to avoid damaging the If the specific gravity of all cells is above 1.235, but
plate separators. Damaged plate separators can the variation between cells is more than fifty points
cause early battery failure. (0.050), the battery should be replaced. If the specific
gravity of one or more cells is less than 1.235, charge
To read the hydrometer correctly, hold it with the the battery at a rate of approximately five amperes.
top surface of the electrolyte at eye level (Fig. 4). Continue charging the battery until three consecu-
Hydrometer floats are generally calibrated to indi- tive specific gravity tests, taken at one-hour inter-
cate the specific gravity correctly only at 26.7° C (80° vals, are constant. If the cell specific gravity
F). When testing the specific gravity at any other variation is more than fifty points (0.050) at the end
temperature, a correction factor is required. of the charge period, replace the battery.
The correction factor is approximately a specific When the specific gravity of all cells is above 1.235,
gravity value of 0.004, which may also be identified and the cell variation is less than fifty points (0.050),
XJ BATTERY 8A - 9
the battery may be load tested to determine its (3) Using a voltmeter connected to the battery
cranking capacity. Refer to Load Test in the Diagno- posts (see the instructions provided by the manufac-
sis and Testing section of this group for more infor- turer of the voltmeter), measure the open-circuit volt-
mation. age (Fig. 5).
OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE TEST

A battery open-circuit voltage (no load) test will
show the state-of-charge of a battery. This test can be
used in place of the hydrometer test when a hydrom-
eter is not available, or for maintenance-free batter-
ies with non-removable cell caps.
WARNING:
• EXPLOSIVE HYDROGEN GAS FORMS IN AND Fig. 5 Testing Open-Circuit Voltage - Typical
FLAME, OR CREATE SPARKS NEAR THE BATTERY. See the Open-Circuit Voltage chart. This voltage
PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE reading will indicate the battery state-of-charge, but
MAY RESULT. will not reveal its cranking capacity. If a battery has
• THE BATTERY CONTAINS SULFURIC ACID, an open-circuit voltage reading of 12.4 volts or
WHICH IS POISONOUS AND CAUSTIC. AVOID CON- greater, it may be load tested to reveal its cranking
TACT WITH THE SKIN, EYES, OR CLOTHING. IN capacity. Refer to Load Test in the Diagnosis and
THE EVENT OF CONTACT, FLUSH WITH WATER Testing section of this group for more information.
AND CALL A PHYSICIAN IMMEDIATELY. KEEP OUT Open Circuit Voltage
• IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOV- Open Circuit Volts Charge Percentage
ABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF 11.7 volts or less 0%
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE 12.0 volts 25%
12.2 volts 50%
RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS. 12.4 volts 75%
12.6 volts or more 100%
Before proceeding with this test, completely charge
the battery. Refer to Battery Charging in the Ser-
vice Procedures section of this group for the proper LOAD TEST
battery charging procedures. A battery load test will verify the battery cranking
(1) Before measuring the open-circuit voltage, the capacity. The test is based on the Cold Cranking
surface charge must be removed from the battery. Amperage (CCA) rating of the battery. See the label
Turn on the head lamps for fifteen seconds, then affixed to the battery case, or refer to Battery Clas-
allow up to five minutes for the battery voltage to sifications and Ratings in the Specifications sec-
stabilize. tion of this group for the CCA rating of the factory-
(2) Disconnect and isolate both battery cables, neg- installed battery.
ative cable first.
8A - 10 BATTERY XJ
WARNING:
MAY RESULT.
Fig. 7 Volt-Ammeter-Load Tester Connections -
Typical
OF THE REACH OF CHILDREN. (3) Rotate the load control knob (carbon pile rheo-
• IF THE BATTERY IS EQUIPPED WITH REMOV- stat) to apply a 300 ampere load to the battery for
ABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF fifteen seconds, then return the control knob to the
THE CELL CAPS IS IN PLACE AND TIGHT BEFORE Off position (Fig. 8). This will remove the surface
THE BATTERY IS RETURNED TO SERVICE. PER- charge from the battery.
Before proceeding with this test, completely charge

the battery. Refer to Battery Charging in the Ser-
vice Procedures section of this group for the proper
battery charging procedures.
(1) Disconnect and isolate both battery cables, neg-
ative cable first. The battery top and posts should be
clean.
(2) Connect a suitable volt-ammeter-load tester
(Fig. 6) to the battery posts (Fig. 7). See the instruc-
tions provided by the manufacturer of the tester you
are using. Check the open-circuit voltage (no load) of
the battery. Refer to Open-Circuit Voltage Test in
the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for Fig. 8 Remove Surface Charge from Battery -
the test procedures. The battery open-circuit voltage Typical
must be 12.4 volts or greater.
(4) Allow the battery to stabilize to open-circuit
voltage. It may take up to five minutes for the bat-
tery voltage to stabilize.
(5) Rotate the load control knob to maintain a load
equal to 50% of the CCA rating of the battery (Fig.
9). After fifteen seconds, record the loaded voltage
reading, then return the load control knob to the Off
position.
(6) The voltage drop will vary with the battery
temperature at the time of the load test. The battery
temperature can be estimated by using the ambient
temperature during the past several hours. If the
battery has been charged, boosted, or loaded a few
minutes prior to the test, the battery will be some-
what warmer. See the Load Test Temperature chart
for the proper loaded voltage reading.
Fig. 6 Volt-Ammeter-Load Tester - Typical
XJ BATTERY 8A - 11
MAY RESULT.
Fig. 9 Load 50% CCA Rating - Note Voltage - Typical ABLE CELL CAPS, BE CERTAIN THAT EACH OF
Load Test Temperature
Temperature SONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE DAMAGE MAY
Minimum Voltage
°F °C RESULT FROM LOOSE OR MISSING CELL CAPS.
9.6 volts 70° and above 21° and above
The following operation will require a voltmeter
9.5 volts 60° 16° accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing the
9.4 volts 50° 10° tests, be certain the following procedures are accom-
9.3 volts 40° 4° plished:
• The battery is fully-charged. Refer to Battery
9.1 volts 30° -1° Charging in the Service Procedures section of this
8.9 volts 20° -7° group for more information.
8.7 volts 10° -12° • Fully engage the parking brake.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic
8.5 volts 0° -18°
transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in the
Park position. If the vehicle is equipped with a man-
(7) If the voltmeter reading falls below 9.6 volts, at ual transmission, place the gearshift selector lever in
a minimum battery temperature of 21° C (70° F), the the Neutral position and fully depress the clutch
battery is faulty and must be replaced. pedal.
• Unplug the Automatic ShutDown (ASD) relay to
VOLTAGE DROP TEST prevent the engine from starting. The ASD relay is
The voltage drop test will determine if there is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). See
excessive resistance in the battery terminal connec- the label on the PDC for ASD relay identification and
tions or the battery cables. When performing these location.
tests, it is important to remember that the voltage (1) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
drop is giving an indication of the resistance between the battery negative terminal post. Connect the neg-
the two points at which the voltmeter probes are ative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative
attached. cable clamp (Fig. 10). Rotate and hold the ignition
Example: When testing the resistance of the bat- switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If
tery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the voltage is detected, correct the poor contact between
battery positive cable clamp and the cable connector the cable clamp and the terminal post.
at the starter solenoid. If you probe the battery pos- (2) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
itive terminal post and the cable connector at the the battery positive terminal post. Connect the nega-
starter solenoid, you are reading the combined volt- tive lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable
age drop in the battery positive cable clamp-to-termi- clamp (Fig. 11). Rotate and hold the ignition switch
nal post connection and the battery positive cable. in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If volt-
age is detected, correct the poor contact between the
WARNING: cable clamp and the terminal post.
• IF THE BATTERY SHOWS SIGNS OF FREEZ- (3) Connect the voltmeter to measure between the
ING, LEAKING, LOOSE POSTS, OR LOW ELECTRO- battery positive terminal post and the starter sole-
LYTE LEVEL, DO NOT TEST, ASSIST-BOOST, OR noid battery terminal stud (Fig. 12). Rotate and hold
8A - 12 BATTERY XJ
Fig. 12 Test Battery Positive Cable Resistance -

Typical
Fig. 10 Test Battery Negative Connection
Resistance - Typical
Fig. 13 Test Ground Circuit Resistance - Typical

to twenty-five milliamperes (0.005 to 0.025 ampere)
with the ignition switch in the Off position, and all
Fig. 11 Test Battery Positive Connection Resistance
non-ignition controlled circuits in proper working
- Typical
order. The twenty-five milliamperes are needed to
the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the enable the memory functions for the Powertrain Con-
voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and trol Module (PCM), digital clock, electronically tuned
tighten the battery cable connection at the solenoid. radio, and other modules which may vary with the
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, vehicle equipment.
replace the faulty battery positive cable. A vehicle that has not been operated for approxi-
(4) Connect the voltmeter to measure between the mately twenty days, may discharge the battery to an
battery negative terminal post and a good clean inadequate level. When a vehicle will not be used for
ground on the engine block (Fig. 13). Rotate and hold twenty days or more (stored), remove the IOD fuse
the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the from the Power Distribution Center (PDC). This will
voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and reduce battery discharging.
tighten the battery negative cable attachment on the Excessive IOD can be caused by:
engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still • Electrical items left on
above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative • Faulty or improperly adjusted switches
cable. • Faulty or shorted electronic modules and compo-
nents
IGNITION-OFF DRAW TEST • An internally shorted generator
The term Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) identifies a nor- • Intermittent shorts in the wiring.
mal condition where power is being drained from the If the IOD is over twenty-five milliamperes, the
battery with the ignition switch in the Off position. A problem must be found and corrected before replac-
normal vehicle electrical system will draw from five
XJ BATTERY 8A - 13
ing a battery. In most cases, the battery can be lowest milliampere scale of the multi-meter to check
charged and returned to service after the excessive the low-amperage IOD.
IOD condition has been corrected.
(1) Verify that all electrical accessories are off. CAUTION: Do not open any doors, or turn on any
Turn off all lamps, remove the ignition key, and close electrical accessories with the lowest milliampere
all doors. If the vehicle is equipped with an illumi- scale selected, or the multi-meter may be damaged.
nated entry system or an electronically tuned radio, (6) Observe the multi-meter reading. The low-am-
allow the electronic timer function of these systems perage IOD should not exceed twenty-five milliam-
to automatically shut off (time out). This may take peres (0.025 ampere). If the draw exceeds twenty-five
up to three minutes. milliamperes, isolate each circuit using the fuse and
(2) Determine that the under-hood lamp is operat- circuit breaker remove-and-replace process. The
ing properly, then disconnect the lamp wire harness multi-meter reading will drop to within the accept-
connector or remove the lamp bulb. able limit when the source of the excessive draw is
(3) Disconnect the battery negative cable. disconnected. Repair this circuit as required; whether
(4) Set an electronic digital multi-meter to its a wiring short, incorrect switch adjustment, or a
highest amperage scale. Connect the multi-meter component failure is at fault.
between the disconnected battery negative cable
clamp and the battery negative terminal post. Make
sure that the doors remain closed so that the illumi-
SERVICE PROCEDURES
nated entry system is not activated. The multi-meter
amperage reading may remain high for up to three BATTERY CHARGING
minutes, or may not give any reading at all while set A battery is fully-charged when:
in the highest amperage scale, depending upon the • All cells are gassing freely during battery charg-
electrical equipment on the vehicle. The multi-meter ing.
leads must be securely clamped to the battery nega- • A green color is visible in the sight glass of the
tive cable clamp and the battery negative terminal built-in test indicator.
post. If continuity between the battery negative ter- • Three hydrometer tests, taken at one-hour inter-
minal post and the negative cable clamp is lost dur- vals, indicate no increase in the temperature-cor-
ing any part of the IOD test, the electronic timer rected specific gravity.
function will be activated and all of the tests will • Open-circuit voltage is 12.4 volts or above.
have to be repeated.
WARNING:
(5) After about three minutes, the high-amperage
IOD reading on the multi-meter should become very
low or nonexistent, depending upon the electrical
equipment on the vehicle. If the amperage reading
remains high, remove and replace each fuse or circuit
breaker in the Power Distribution Center (PDC) and
then in the junction block (refer to Power Distribu-
tion Center and Junction Block in the Component
Index of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for fuse and
circuit breaker identification) one at a time until the
amperage reading becomes very low, or nonexistent.
MAY RESULT.
This will isolate each circuit and identify the source
of the high-amperage IOD. If the amperage reading
remains high after removing and replacing each fuse
and circuit breaker, disconnect the wire harness from
the generator. If the amperage reading now becomes
very low or nonexistent, refer to Charging System
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
Charging System to diagnose the condition. After the
high-amperage IOD has been corrected, switch the
multi-meter to progressively lower amperage scales
and, if necessary, repeat the fuse and circuit breaker
remove-and-replace process to identify and correct all
sources of excessive IOD. It is now safe to select the
8A - 14 BATTERY XJ
CAUTION:
• Always disconnect and isolate the battery neg-
ative cable before charging a battery. Do not exceed
sixteen volts while charging a battery. Damage to
the vehicle electrical system components may
result.
• Battery electrolyte will bubble inside the bat-
tery case during normal battery charging. Electro-
lyte boiling or being discharged from the battery
vents indicates a battery overcharging condition.
Immediately reduce the charging rate or turn off the
charger to evaluate the battery condition. Damage
to the battery may result from overcharging.
• The battery should not be hot to the touch. If
the battery feels hot to the touch, turn off the
charger and let the battery cool before continuing Fig. 14 Voltmeter Accurate to 1/10 Volt Connected -
the charging operation. Damage to the battery may Typical
result. (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable. Connect the battery charger leads. Some bat-
Some battery chargers are equipped with polarity- tery chargers are equipped with polarity-sensing cir-
sensing circuitry. This circuitry protects the charger cuitry. This circuitry protects the charger and/or the
and/or the battery from being damaged if they are battery from being damaged if they are improperly
improperly connected. If the battery state-of-charge connected. If the battery state-of-charge is too low for
is too low for the polarity-sensing circuitry to detect, the polarity-sensing circuitry to detect, the charger
the charger will not operate. This makes it appear will not operate. This makes it appear that the bat-
that the battery will not accept charging current. See tery will not accept charging current. See the instruc-
the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the tions provided by the manufacturer of the battery
battery charger for details on how to bypass the charger for details on how to bypass the polarity-
polarity-sensing circuitry. sensing circuitry.
After the battery has been charged to 12.4 volts or (3) Battery chargers vary in the amount of voltage
greater, perform a load test to determine the battery and current they provide. The amount of time
cranking capacity. Refer to Load Test in the Diagno- required for a battery to accept measurable charger
sis and Testing section of this group for the proce- current at various voltages is shown in the Charge
dures. If the battery will endure a load test, return Rate chart. If the charge current is still not measur-
the battery to use. If the battery will not endure a able at the end of the charging time, the battery is
load test, it is faulty and must be replaced. faulty and must be replaced. If the charge current is
Clean and inspect the battery hold downs, tray, measurable during the charging time, the battery
terminals, posts, and top before completing service. may be good and the charging should be completed in
Refer to Battery in the Removal and Installation the normal manner.
section of this group for the proper cleaning and
inspection procedures. Charge Rate
Voltage Hours
CHARGING A COMPLETELY DISCHARGED
16.0 volts maximum up to 4 hours
BATTERY
The following procedure should be used to recharge 14.0 to 15.9 volts up to 8 hours
a completely discharged battery. Unless this proce- 13.9 volts or less up to 16 hours
dure is properly followed, a good battery may be
needlessly replaced.
(1) Measure the voltage at the battery posts with a CHARGING TIME REQUIRED
voltmeter, accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt (Fig. 14). If the The time required to charge a battery will vary,
reading is below ten volts, the charge current will be depending upon the following factors:
low. It could take some time before the battery • Battery Capacity - A completely discharged
accepts a current greater than a few milliamperes. heavy-duty battery requires twice the charging time
Such low current may not be detectable on the of a small capacity battery.
ammeters built into many battery chargers. • Temperature - A longer time will be needed to
charge a battery at -18° C (0° F) than at 27° C (80°
F). When a fast charger is connected to a cold bat-
XJ BATTERY 8A - 15
tery, the current accepted by the battery will be very
low at first. As the battery warms, it will accept a
higher charging current rate (amperage).
• Charger Capacity - A battery charger that
supplies only five amperes will require a longer
charging time. A battery charger that supplies
twenty amperes or more will require a shorter charg-
ing time.
• State-Of-Charge - A completely discharged
battery requires more charging time than a partially
discharged battery. Electrolyte is nearly pure water
in a completely discharged battery. At first, the
charging current (amperage) will be low. As the bat- Fig. 15 Remove Battery Cable Terminal Clamp -
tery charges, the specific gravity of the electrolyte Typical
will gradually rise. cleaning solution (Fig. 16). Replace any battery cable
that has damaged or deformed terminal clamps.
WARNING: NEVER EXCEED TWENTY AMPERES
WHEN CHARGING A COLD (-1° C or 30° F) BAT-
TERY. THE BATTERY MAY ARC INTERNALLY AND
EXPLODE. PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR VEHICLE
DAMAGE MAY RESULT.
Battery Charging Timetable

Charging 5 10 20
Amperage Amperes Amperes Amperes
Open
Circuit Hours Charging at 21° C (70° F)
Voltage
12.25 to 6 hours 3 hours 1.5 hours
12.49
12.24
11.99
*Below 18 hours 9 hours 4.5 hours
10.00
*Refer to Charging A Completely Discharged Battery
Fig. 16 Clean Battery Cable Terminal Clamp -
Typical
WARNING: WEAR A SUITABLE PAIR OF RUBBER
BATTERY GLOVES (NOT THE HOUSEHOLD TYPE) WHEN
REMOVING A BATTERY BY HAND. SAFETY
REMOVAL GLASSES SHOULD ALSO BE WORN. IF THE BAT-
TERY IS CRACKED OR LEAKING, THE ELECTRO-
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Be
LYTE CAN BURN THE SKIN AND EYES.
certain that all electrical accessories are turned off.
(2) Loosen the battery cable terminal clamps and (4) Remove the battery hold downs and remove the
disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first. If battery from the battery tray (Fig. 17).
necessary, use a puller to remove the terminal (5) Inspect the battery tray and hold downs for
clamps from the battery posts (Fig. 15). corrosion or damage. Remove any corrosion using a
(3) Inspect the battery cable terminal clamps for wire brush and a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda)
corrosion and damage. Remove any corrosion using a and warm water cleaning solution. Paint any exposed
wire brush or a post and terminal cleaning tool, and bare metal and replace any damaged parts.
a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water (6) Slide the thermoguard off of the battery case.
Inspect the battery case for cracks or other damage
8A - 16 BATTERY XJ
Fig. 18 Removing Cell Caps - Typical

tions in the Specifications section of this group. Con-
firm that the replacement battery is the correct size
and has the correct ratings for the vehicle.
Fig. 17 Battery Hold Downs

that could result in electrolyte leaks. Also, check the
battery terminal posts for looseness. Batteries with
damaged cases or loose posts must be replaced.
(7) Check the electrolyte level in the battery. Use a
putty knife or another suitable wide flat-bladed tool
to pry the cell caps off (Fig. 18). Do not use a screw-
driver. Add distilled water to each cell until the liq-
uid reaches the bottom of the vent well. DO NOT
OVERFILL.
(8) Inspect the battery built-in test indicator sight
glass for an indication of the battery condition. If the
battery is discharged, charge as required. Refer to Fig. 19 Clean Battery - Typical
Built-In Test Indicator in the Diagnosis and Test- (10) Clean any corrosion from the battery terminal
ing section of this group for more information. Also posts with a wire brush or a post and terminal
refer to Battery Charging in the Service Procedures cleaner, and a sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and
section of this group for more information. warm water cleaning solution (Fig. 20).
(9) If the battery is to be reinstalled, clean the out-
side of the battery case and the top cover with a INSTALLATION
sodium bicarbonate (baking soda) and warm water (1) Reinstall the battery thermoguard by sliding it
cleaning solution to remove any acid film (Fig. 19). over the battery case.
Rinse the battery with clean water. Ensure that the (2) Position the battery in the tray. Ensure that
cleaning solution does not enter the battery cells the positive and negative terminal posts are correctly
through the vent holes. If the battery is being positioned. The cable terminal clamps must reach the
replaced, refer to Battery Ratings and Classifica-
XJ BATTERY 8A - 17
Fig. 21 Battery Cables

(4) Connect and tighten the battery positive cable
terminal clamp. Then connect and tighten the bat-
tery negative cable terminal clamp. Tighten both bat-
tery cable terminal clamp bolts to 8.5 N·m (75 in.
lbs.).
Fig. 20 Clean Battery Terminal Post - Typical (5) Apply a thin coating of petroleum jelly or chas-
correct battery terminal post without stretching the sis grease to the exposed surfaces of the battery cable
cables (Fig. 21). terminal clamps and battery terminal posts.
(3) Loosely install the battery hold down hard-
ware. Ensure that the battery base is correctly posi-
tioned in the tray, then tighten the hold down nuts to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.). Tighten the hold down support
strap bolt to 9 N·m (77 in. lbs.).
CAUTION: Be certain that the battery cables are
connected to the correct battery terminals. Reverse
polarity may damage electrical components.
SPECIFICATIONS
BATTERY
Battery Classifications and Ratings

Cold
BCI Group Size Reserve Load Test
Part Number Cranking Ampere-Hours
Classification Capacity Amperage
Amperage
56041105AB 34 500 110 Minutes 60 250
XJ STARTING SYSTEMS 8B - 1
STARTING SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION STARTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STARTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING STARTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
STARTER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SPECIFICATIONS
STARTER MOTOR NOISE - 2.5L ENGINE . . . . . 8 STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION • Park/neutral position switch (automatic trans-

mission)
STARTING SYSTEM • Wire harnesses and connections (including the
battery cables).
DESCRIPTION This group provides complete service information
An electrically operated engine starting system is for the starter motor and the starter relay. Complete
standard factory-installed equipment on this model. service information for the other starting system
The starting system is designed to provide the vehi- components can be located as follows:
cle operator with a convenient, efficient and reliable • Refer to Battery in the proper section of Group
means of cranking and starting the internal combus- 8A - Battery for complete service information for the
tion engine used to power the vehicle and all of its battery.
accessory systems from within the safe and secure • Refer to Ignition Switch and Key Lock Cyl-
confines of the passenger compartment. See the own- inder in the proper section of Group 8D - Ignition
er’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more infor- System for complete service information for the igni-
mation and instructions on the recommended use tion switch.
and operation of the factory-installed starting sys- • Refer to Clutch Pedal Position Switch in the
tem. proper section of Group 6 - Clutch for complete ser-
vice information for the clutch pedal position switch.
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive • Refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch in the
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this proper section of Group 21 - Transmission for com-
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD plete service information for the park/neutral posi-
versions of affected vehicle components have been tion switch.
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. • Refer to the proper section of Group 8W - Wir-
While most of the illustrations used in this group ing Diagrams for complete service information and
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and circuit diagrams for the starting system wiring com-
service procedures outlined can generally be ponents.
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule Group 8A covers the Battery, Group 8B covers the
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a Starting Systems, and Group 8C covers the Charging
special illustration or procedure is required. System. We have separated these systems to make it
easier to locate the information you are seeking
The starting system consists of the following com- within this Service Manual. However, when attempt-
ponents: ing to diagnose any of these systems, it is important
• Battery that you keep their interdependency in mind.
• Starter relay The battery, starting, and charging systems in the
• Starter motor (including an integral starter sole- vehicle operate with one another, and must be tested
noid) as a complete system. In order for the vehicle to start
• Ignition switch and charge properly, all of the components that are
• Clutch pedal position switch (manual transmis- used in these systems must perform within specifica-
sion) tions.
8B - 2 STARTING SYSTEMS XJ
The diagnostic procedures used in each of these connect the relay common feed terminal to the relay
groups include the most basic conventional diagnostic normally open terminal. The closed relay contacts
methods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diag- energize the starter solenoid coil windings.
nostics (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Mod- The energized solenoid pull-in coil pulls in the sole-
ule (PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere noid plunger. The solenoid plunger pulls the shift
ammeter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile lever in the starter motor. This engages the starter
rheostat (load tester), and 12-volt test lamp may be overrunning clutch and pinion gear with the starter
required. ring gear on the manual transmission flywheel or on
All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the the automatic transmission torque converter drive
PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnos- plate.
tic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in As the solenoid plunger reaches the end of its
electronic memory for any failure it detects. Refer to travel, the solenoid contact disc completes the high-
On-Board Diagnostic Test For Charging System amperage starter feed circuit and energizes the sole-
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C - noid plunger hold-in coil. Current now flows between
Charging System for more information. the solenoid battery terminal and the starter motor,
energizing the starter.
OPERATION Once the engine starts, the overrunning clutch pro-
The starting system components form two separate tects the starter motor from damage by allowing the
circuits. A high-amperage feed circuit that feeds the starter pinion gear to spin faster than the pinion
starter motor between 150 and 350 amperes, and a shaft. When the driver releases the ignition switch to
low-amperage control circuit that operates on less the On position, the starter relay coil is de-energized.
than 20 amperes. The high-amperage feed circuit This causes the relay contacts to open. When the
components include the battery, the battery cables, relay contacts open, the starter solenoid plunger
the contact disc portion of the starter solenoid, and hold-in coil is de-energized.
the starter motor. The low-amperage control circuit When the solenoid plunger hold-in coil is de-ener-
components include the ignition switch, the clutch gized, the solenoid plunger return spring returns the
pedal position switch (manual transmission), the plunger to its relaxed position. This causes the con-
park/neutral position switch (automatic transmis- tact disc to open the starter feed circuit, and the shift
sion), the starter relay, the electromagnetic windings lever to disengage the overrunning clutch and pinion
of the starter solenoid, and the connecting wire har- gear from the starter ring gear.
ness components. Following are general descriptions of the major
If the vehicle is equipped with a manual transmis- components in the starting system.
sion, it has a clutch pedal position switch installed in
series between the ignition switch and the coil bat- STARTER MOTOR
tery terminal of the starter relay. This normally open
switch prevents the starter relay from being ener- DESCRIPTION
gized when the ignition switch is turned to the The starter motors used for both the 2.5L and the
momentary Start position, unless the clutch pedal is 4.0L engines available in this model are not inter-
depressed. This feature prevents starter motor oper- changeable. Both starter motors are mounted with
ation while the clutch disc and the flywheel are two screws, but the 2.5L starter motor is mounted to
engaged. The starter relay coil ground terminal is the right rear corner of the engine block, while the
always grounded on vehicles with a manual trans- 4.0L starter motor is mounted to the manual trans-
mission. mission clutch housing or automatic transmission
If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic trans- torque converter housing on the right side of the
mission, battery voltage is supplied through the low- engine.
amperage control circuit to the coil battery terminal Each of these starter motors incorporates several
of the starter relay when the ignition switch is of the same features to create a reliable, efficient,
turned to the momentary Start position. The park/ compact, lightweight and powerful unit. The electric
neutral position switch is installed in series between motors of both starters have four brushes contacting
the starter relay coil ground terminal and ground. the motor commutator. The 2.5L starter motor uses
This normally open switch prevents the starter relay four permanent magnets for the field poles, while the
from being energized and the starter motor from 4.0L starter motor features four electromagnetic field
operating unless the automatic transmission gear coils wound around four pole shoes. The 2.5L starter
selector is in the Neutral or Park positions. motor is rated at 1.2 kilowatts (about 1.6 horse-
When the starter relay coil is energized, the nor- power) output at 12 volts, while the 4.0L starter
mally open relay contacts close. The relay contacts
motor is rated at 1.4 kilowatts (about 1.9 horse- The starter relay cannot be repaired or adjusted
power) output at 12 volts. and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
Both of these starter motors are serviced only as a
unit with their starter solenoids, and cannot be OPERATION
repaired. If either component is faulty or damaged, The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a
the entire starter motor and starter solenoid unit resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one mov-
must be replaced. able) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed)
relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts
OPERATION (normally closed) by spring pressure. When the elec-
These starter motors are equipped with a plane- tromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable
tary gear reduction (intermediate transmission) sys- contact away from the normally closed fixed contact,
tem. The planetary gear reduction system consists of and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed
a gear that is integral to the output end of the elec- contact.
tric motor armature shaft that is in continual When the electromagnetic coil is de-energized,
engagement with a larger gear that is splined to the spring pressure returns the movable contact to the
input end of the starter pinion gear shaft. This fea- normally closed position. The resistor or diode is con-
ture makes it possible to reduce the dimensions of nected in parallel with the electromagnetic coil in the
the starter. At the same time, it allows higher arma- relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes that are
ture rotational speed and delivers increased torque produced when the coil is de-energized.
through the starter pinion gear to the starter ring
gear.
The starter motors for both engines are activated DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
by an integral heavy duty starter solenoid switch
mounted to the overrunning clutch housing. This STARTING SYSTEM
electromechanical switch connects and disconnects
the feed of battery voltage to the starter motor and DIAGNOSIS
actuates a shift fork that engages and disengages the The battery, starting, and charging systems oper-
starter pinion gear with the starter ring gear. ate with one another, and must be tested as a com-
Both starter motors use an overrunning clutch and plete system. In order for the vehicle to start and
starter pinion gear unit to engage and drive a starter charge properly, all of the components involved in
ring gear that is integral to the flywheel (manual these systems must perform within specifications.
transmission) or torque converter drive plate (auto- Group 8A covers the Battery, Group 8B covers the
matic transmission) mounted on the rear crankshaft Starting Systems, and Group 8C covers the Charging
flange. Shims are available and can be used to adjust System. We have separated these systems to make it
the 2.5L starter motor mounting position to correct easier to locate the information you are seeking
for improper starter pinion gear to starter ring gear within this Service Manual. However, when attempt-
engagement. ing to diagnose any of these systems, it is important
that you keep their interdependency in mind.
STARTER RELAY The diagnostic procedures used in these groups
include the most basic conventional diagnostic meth-
DESCRIPTION ods, to the more sophisticated On-Board Diagnostics
The starter relay is an electromechanical device (OBD) built into the Powertrain Control Module
that switches battery current to the pull-in coil of the (PCM). Use of an induction-type milliampere amme-
starter solenoid when the ignition switch is turned to ter, volt/ohmmeter, battery charger, carbon pile rheo-
the Start position. The starter relay is located in the stat (load tester), and 12-volt test lamp may be
Power Distribution Center (PDC), in the engine com- required.
partment. See the fuse and relay layout label affixed All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the
to the inside surface of the PDC cover for starter PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnos-
relay identification and location. tic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in
The starter relay is a International Standards electronic memory for any failure it detects. Refer to
Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the On-Board Diagnostic Test For Charging System
ISO specifications have common physical dimensions, in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8C -
current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal Charging System for more information.
functions.
Starting System Diagnosis

CONDITION POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
STARTER FAILS TO 1. Battery discharged or 1. Refer to Battery in the Diagnosis and Testing section of
OPERATE. faulty. Group 8A - Battery. Charge or replace the battery, if
2. Starting circuit wiring required.
faulty. 2. Refer to Starting System in Group 8W - Wiring
3. Starter relay faulty. Diagrams. Test and repair the starter feed and/or control
4. Ignition switch faulty. circuits, if required.
5. Clutch pedal position 3. Refer to Starter Relay in the Diagnosis and Testing
switch faulty. section of this group. Replace the starter relay, if
6. Park/Neutral position required.
switch faulty or 4. Refer to Ignition Switch and Key Lock Cylinder in the
misadjusted. Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8D - Ignition
7. Starter solenoid faulty. System. Replace the ignition switch, if required.
8. Starter motor faulty. 5. Refer to Clutch Pedal Position Switch in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of Group 6 - Clutch.
6. Refer to Park/Neutral Position Switch in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of Group 21 - Transmission. Replace
the park/neutral position switch, if required.
7. Refer to Starter Motor in the Diagnosis and Testing
section of this group. Replace the starter motor assembly,
if required.
8. If all other starting system components and circuits test
OK, replace the starter motor assembly.
STARTER ENGAGES, 1. Battery discharged or 1. Refer to Battery in the Diagnosis and Testing section of
FAILS TO TURN faulty. Group 8A - Battery. Charge or replace the battery, if
ENGINE. 2. Starting circuit wiring required.
faulty. 2. Refer to Starting System in Group 8W - Wiring
3. Starter motor faulty. Diagrams. Test and repair the starter feed and/or control
4. Engine seized. circuits, if required.
4. Refer to Engine Diagnosis in the Diagnosis and Testing
section of Group 9 - Engine.
STARTER ENGAGES, 1. Starter ring gear faulty. 1. Refer to Starter Motor in the Removal and Installation
SPINS OUT BEFORE 2. Starter motor faulty. section of this group. Remove the starter motor to inspect
ENGINE STARTS. the starter ring gear. Replace the starter ring gear, if
required.
STARTER DOES NOT 1. Starter motor 1. Refer to Starter Motor in the Removal and Installation
DISENGAGE. improperly installed. section of this group. Tighten the starter mounting
2. Starter relay faulty. hardware to the correct tightness specifications.
3. Ignition switch faulty. 2. Refer to Starter Relay in the Diagnosis and Testing
4. Starter motor faulty. section of this group. Replace the starter relay, if
required.
3. Refer to Ignition Switch and Key Lock Cylinder in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8D - Ignition
System. Replace the ignition switch, if required.
INSPECTION required. Refer to the proper section of Group 8W -
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Starting Wiring Diagrams for complete service information
System in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia- and circuit diagrams for the starting system wiring
grams. Before removing any unit from the starting components.
system for repair or diagnosis, perform the following
inspections: TESTING
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- COLD CRANKING TEST

BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Starting
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY System in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR grams. The battery must be fully-charged and load-
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR tested before proceeding. Refer to Battery in the
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8A - Battery
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- for the procedures.
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL (1) Connect a suitable volt-ampere tester to the
INJURY. battery terminals (Fig. 1). See the instructions pro-
vided by the manufacturer of the volt-ampere tester
• Battery - Visually inspect the battery for indi- being used.
cations of physical damage and loose or corroded
cable connections. Determine the state-of-charge and
cranking capacity of the battery. Charge or replace
the battery, if required. Refer to Battery in the
proper section of Group 8A - Battery for complete ser-
vice information for the battery.
• Ignition Switch - Visually inspect the ignition
switch for indications of physical damage and loose
or corroded wire harness connections. Refer to Igni-
tion Switch and Key Lock Cylinder in the proper
section of Group 8D - Ignition System for complete
service information for the ignition switch.
• Clutch Pedal Position Switch - If the vehicle
is equipped with a manual transmission, visually
inspect the clutch pedal position switch for indica-
tions of physical damage and loose or corroded wire Fig. 1 Volts-Amps Tester Connections - Typical
harness connections. Refer to Clutch Pedal Posi-
tion Switch in the proper section of Group 6 - (2) Fully engage the parking brake.
Clutch for complete service information for the clutch (3) If the vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
pedal position switch. mission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neu-
• Park/Neutral Position Switch - If the vehicle tral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully
is equipped with an automatic transmission, visually depressed position. If the vehicle is equipped with an
inspect the park/neutral position switch for indica- automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector
tions of physical damage and loose or corroded wire lever in the Park position.
harness connections. Refer to Park/Neutral Posi- (4) Verify that all lamps and accessories are
tion Switch in the proper section of Group 21 - turned off.
Transmission for complete service information for the (5) To prevent the engine from starting, remove
park/neutral position switch. the Automatic ShutDown (ASD) relay. The ASD relay
• Starter Relay - Visually inspect the starter is located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC), in
relay for indications of physical damage and loose or the engine compartment. Refer to the fuse and relay
corroded wire harness connections. layout label affixed to the underside of the PDC cover
• Starter Motor - Visually inspect the starter for ASD relay identification and location.
motor for indications of physical damage and loose or (6) Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start
corroded wire harness connections. position. Note the cranking voltage and current
• Starter Solenoid - Visually inspect the starter (amperage) draw readings shown on the volt-ampere
solenoid for indications of physical damage and loose tester.
or corroded wire harness connections. (a) If the voltage reads below 9.6 volts, refer to
• Wiring - Visually inspect the wire harnesses for Starter Motor in the Diagnosis and Testing sec-
damage. Repair or replace any faulty wiring, as tion of this group. If the starter motor is OK, refer
to Engine Diagnosis in the Diagnosis and Testing layout label affixed to the underside of the PDC cover
section of Group 9 - Engine for further testing of for ASD relay identification and location.
the engine. If the starter motor is not OK, replace (1) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
the faulty starter motor. the battery negative terminal post. Connect the neg-
(b) If the voltage reads above 9.6 volts and the ative lead of the voltmeter to the battery negative
current (amperage) draw reads below specifica- cable clamp (Fig. 2). Rotate and hold the ignition
tions, refer to Feed Circuit Test in this section. switch in the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If
(c) If the voltage reads 12.5 volts or greater and voltage is detected, correct the poor contact between
the starter motor does not turn, refer to Control the cable clamp and the terminal post.
Circuit Testing in this section.
(d) If the voltage reads 12.5 volts or greater and
the starter motor turns very slowly, refer to Feed
Circuit Test in this section.
NOTE: A cold engine will increase the starter cur-

rent (amperage) draw reading, and reduce the bat-
tery voltage reading.
FEED CIRCUIT TEST

The starter feed circuit test (voltage drop method)
will determine if there is excessive resistance in the
high-amperage feed circuit. For complete circuit dia-
grams, refer to Starting System in the Contents of
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
When performing these tests, it is important to
remember that the voltage drop is giving an indica- Fig. 2 Test Battery Negative Connection Resistance -
tion of the resistance between the two points at Typical
which the voltmeter probes are attached. (2) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
Example: When testing the resistance of the bat- the battery positive terminal post. Connect the nega-
tery positive cable, touch the voltmeter leads to the tive lead of the voltmeter to the battery positive cable
battery positive cable clamp and the cable connector clamp (Fig. 3). Rotate and hold the ignition switch in
at the starter solenoid. If you probe the battery pos- the Start position. Observe the voltmeter. If voltage
itive terminal post and the cable connector at the is detected, correct the poor contact between the
starter solenoid, you are reading the combined volt- cable clamp and the terminal post.
age drop in the battery positive cable clamp-to-termi-
nal post connection and the battery positive cable.
The following operation will require a voltmeter
accurate to 1/10 (0.10) volt. Before performing the
tests, be certain that the following procedures are
accomplished:
• Battery is fully-charged and load-tested. Refer to
Battery in the Diagnosis and Testing section of
Group 8A - Battery for the procedures.
• Fully engage the parking brake.
• If the vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, place the gearshift selector lever in the Neu-
tral position and block the clutch pedal in the fully
depressed position. If the vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transmission, place the gearshift selector
lever in the Park position.
• Verify that all lamps and accessories are turned
Fig. 3 Test Battery Positive Connection Resistance -
off.
Typical
• To prevent the engine from starting, remove the
Automatic ShutDown (ASD) relay. The ASD relay is (3) Connect the voltmeter to measure between the
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC), in battery positive terminal post and the starter sole-
the engine compartment. Refer to the fuse and relay noid battery terminal stud (Fig. 4). Rotate and hold
the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the (5) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and the starter housing. Connect the negative lead of the
tighten the battery cable connection at the solenoid. voltmeter to the battery negative terminal post (Fig.
Repeat the test. If the reading is still above 0.2 volt, 6). Rotate and hold the ignition switch in the Start
replace the faulty battery positive cable. position. Observe the voltmeter. If the reading is
above 0.2 volt, correct the poor starter to engine
block ground contact.
Fig. 4 Test Battery Positive Cable Resistance -

Typical
(4) Connect the voltmeter to measure between the Fig. 6 Test Starter Ground - Typical
battery negative terminal post and a good clean If the resistance tests detect no feed circuit prob-
ground on the engine block (Fig. 5). Rotate and hold lems, refer to Starter Motor in the Diagnosis and
the ignition switch in the Start position. Observe the Testing section of this group.
voltmeter. If the reading is above 0.2 volt, clean and
tighten the battery negative cable attachment on the CONTROL CIRCUIT TESTING
engine block. Repeat the test. If the reading is still The starter control circuit components should be
above 0.2 volt, replace the faulty battery negative tested in the order in which they are listed, as fol-
cable. lows:
• Starter Relay - Refer to Starter Relay in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for the
procedures.
• Starter Solenoid - Refer to Starter Motor in
the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for
the procedures.
• Ignition Switch - Refer to Ignition Switch
and Key Lock Cylinder in the Diagnosis and Test-
ing section of Group 8D - Ignition System for the pro-
cedures.
• Clutch Pedal Position Switch - If the vehicle
is equipped with a manual transmission, refer to
Clutch Pedal Position Switch in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of Group 6 - Clutch for the pro-
cedures.
Fig. 5 Test Ground Circuit Resistance - Typical • Park/Neutral Position Switch - If the vehicle
is equipped with an automatic transmission, refer to
Park/Neutral Position Switch in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of Group 21 - Transmission for
the procedures.
• Wire harnesses and connections - Refer to
Starting System in the Contents of Group 8W -
Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit diagrams.
STARTER MOTOR NOISE - 2.5L ENGINE

See the Starter Motor Noise Diagnosis chart (Fig.
7). If the complaint is similar to Conditions 1 and 2
in the chart, correction can be made by placing shims
between the starter motor and the engine block using
the following procedures:
(1) If the complaint is similar to Condition 1, the
starter motor must be moved toward the starter ring
gear by removing shims from both starter mounting
pads on the engine block (Fig. 8). Refer to Starter
Motor in the Removal and Installation section of
this group for the procedures.
NOTE: The shim thickness is 0.381 mm (0.015 in.).

These shims may be stacked if additional thickness
is required.
Fig. 8 Starter Motor Shim
(2) If the complaint is similar to Condition 2, the
starter motor must be moved away from the starter STARTER MOTOR
ring gear. This is done by installing shim(s) across Correct starter motor operation can be confirmed
both starter mounting pads on the engine block. by performing the following free running bench test.
More than one shim may be required. Refer to This test can only be performed with the starter
Starter Motor in the Removal and Installation sec- motor removed from the vehicle. Refer to Starting
tion of this group for the procedures. System in the Specifications section of this group for
the starter motor specifications.
NOTE: This is a condition that will generally cause
broken starter (flywheel/torque converter drive
plate) ring gear teeth or broken starter motor hous-
ings.
Fig. 7 Starter Motor Noise Diagnosis

CAUTION: The 2.5L engine uses a permanent mag- (3) Check for continuity between the solenoid ter-
net starter. Permanent magnet starters are highly minal and the solenoid field coil terminal with a con-
sensitive to hammering, shocks, external pressure tinuity tester (Fig. 9). There should be continuity. If
and reverse polarity. This starter motor must never OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, replace the faulty starter
be clamped in a vise by the starter field frame. The motor assembly.
starter should only be clamped by the mounting
flange. Do not reverse the battery cable connec-
tions to this starter motor when testing. The perma-
nent magnets may be damaged and the starter
rendered unserviceable if it is subjected to any of
these conditions.
(1) Remove the starter motor from the vehicle.

Refer to Starter Motor in the Removal and Instal-
lation section of this group for the procedures. Fig. 9 Continuity Test Between Solenoid Terminal
(2) Mount the starter motor securely in a soft- and Field Coil Terminal - Typical
jawed bench vise. The vise jaws should be clamped (4) Check for continuity between the solenoid ter-
on the mounting flange of the starter motor. Never minal and the solenoid case (Fig. 10). There should
clamp on the starter motor by the field frame. be continuity. If not OK, replace the faulty starter
(3) Connect a suitable volt-ampere tester and a motor assembly.
12-volt battery to the starter motor in series, and set
the ammeter to the 100 ampere scale. See the
instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
volt-ampere tester being used.
(4) Install a jumper wire from the solenoid termi-
nal to the solenoid battery terminal. The starter
motor should operate. If the starter motor fails to
operate, replace the faulty starter motor assembly.
(5) Adjust the carbon pile load of the tester to
obtain the free running test voltage. Refer to Start- Fig. 10 Continuity Test Between Solenoid Terminal
ing System in the Specifications section of this and Solenoid Case - Typical
group for the starter motor free running test voltage
specifications. STARTER RELAY
(6) Note the reading on the ammeter and compare The starter relay (Fig. 11) is located in the Power
this reading to the free running test maximum Distribution Center (PDC), in the engine compart-
amperage draw. Refer to Starting System in the ment. Refer to the fuse and relay layout label affixed
Specifications section of this group for the starter to the underside of the PDC cover for starter relay
motor free running test maximum amperage draw identification and location. For complete circuit dia-
specifications. grams, refer to Starting System in the Contents of
(7) If the ammeter reading exceeds the maximum Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
amperage draw specification, replace the faulty (1) Remove the starter relay from the PDC. Refer
starter motor assembly. to Starter Relay in the Removal and Installation
section of this group for the procedures.
STARTER SOLENOID (2) A relay in the de-energized position should
This test can only be performed with the starter have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and
motor removed from the vehicle. no continuity between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go
(1) Remove the starter motor from the vehicle. to Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
Refer to Starter Motor in the Removal and Instal- (3) Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (elec-
lation section of this group for the procedures. tromagnet) should be 75 6 5 ohms. If OK, go to Step
(2) Disconnect the wire from the solenoid field coil 4. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
terminal.
(4) Connect a battery to terminals 85 and 86. switch for an open or a short. If the circuit is OK,
There should now be continuity between terminals refer to Clutch Pedal Position Switch in the Diag-
30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A nosis and Testing section of Group 6 - Clutch for test-
and 30. If OK, perform the Relay Circuit Test that ing of the switch.
follows. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. (5) The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to
the electromagnet in the relay. On vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is grounded at all times. On
vehicles with an automatic transmission, it is
grounded through the park/neutral position switch
only when the gearshift selector lever is in the Park
or Neutral positions. Check for continuity to ground
at the cavity for relay terminal 85. If not OK with a
manual transmission, repair the circuit to ground as
required. If not OK with an automatic transmission,
check for an open or short circuit to the park/neutral
position switch and repair, if required. If the circuit
to the park/neutral position switch is OK, refer to
Park/Neutral Position Switch in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of Group 21 - Transmission for
testing of the park/neutral position switch.
Fig. 11 Starter Relay REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

RELAY CIRCUIT TEST
(1) The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) is STARTER MOTOR
connected to battery voltage and should be hot at all
times. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the open REMOVAL
circuit to the fuse in the PDC as required.
(2) The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is 2.5L ENGINE
connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position, (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
but is not used for this application. Go to Step 3. cable.
(3) The relay normally open terminal (87) is con- (2) Raise and support the vehicle.
nected to the common feed terminal (30) in the ener- (3) While supporting the starter motor with one
gized position. This terminal supplies battery voltage hand, use the other hand to remove the two screws that
to the starter solenoid field coils. There should be secure the starter motor to the engine block (Fig. 12).
continuity between the cavity for relay terminal 87 (4) Lower the starter motor from the engine block
and the starter solenoid terminal at all times. If OK, far enough to access and remove the nut that secures
go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the the battery cable eyelet to the solenoid battery termi-
starter solenoid as required. nal (Fig. 13). Always support the starter motor dur-
(4) The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to ing this process, do not let the starter motor hang
the electromagnet in the relay. It is energized when from the wire harness.
the ignition switch is held in the Start position. On (5) Remove the battery cable eyelet from the sole-
vehicles with a manual transmission, the clutch noid battery terminal. Always support the starter
pedal must be fully depressed for this test. Check for motor during this process, do not let the starter
battery voltage at the cavity for relay terminal 86 motor hang from the wire harness.
with the ignition switch in the Start position, and no (6) Disconnect the solenoid terminal wire harness
voltage when the ignition switch is released to the connector from the connector receptacle on the
On position. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK with an starter solenoid. Always support the starter motor
automatic transmission, check for an open or short during this process, do not let the starter motor hang
circuit to the ignition switch and repair, if required. from the wire harness.
If the circuit to the ignition switch is OK, refer to (7) Remove the starter motor from the engine com-
Ignition Switch and Key Lock Cylinder in the partment.
Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8D - Ignition
System for testing of the ignition switch. If not OK 4.0L ENGINE
with a manual transmission, check the circuit (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
between the relay and the clutch pedal position cable.
Fig. 12 Starter Motor Remove/Install - 2.5L Engine Fig. 14 Starter Motor Remove/Install - 4.0L Engine
(7) Disconnect the solenoid terminal wire harness
connector from the connector receptacle on the
starter solenoid. Always support the starter motor
during this process, do not let the starter motor hang
from the wire harness.
(8) Remove the starter motor from the engine com-
partment.
INSTALLATION
2.5L ENGINE
(1) Position the starter motor in the engine com-
partment.
(2) Reconnect the solenoid terminal wire harness
connector to the connector receptacle on the starter
solenoid. Always support the starter motor during
Fig. 13 Starter Wire Harness Remove/Install this process, do not let the starter motor hang from
the wire harness.
(3) Remove the lower (forward facing) mounting
(3) Install the battery cable eyelet onto the sole-
screw from the starter motor (Fig. 14).
noid battery terminal. Always support the starter
(4) While supporting the starter motor with one
motor during this process, do not let the starter
hand, use the other hand to remove the upper (rear
motor hang from the wire harness.
facing) mounting screw from the starter motor.
(4) Install and tighten the nut that secures the
(5) Lower the starter motor from the front of the
battery cable eyelet to the solenoid battery terminal.
transmission clutch housing or torque converter
Tighten the nut to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.). Always sup-
housing far enough to access and remove the nut
port the starter motor during this process, do not let
that secures the battery cable eyelet to the solenoid
the starter motor hang from the wire harness.
battery terminal (Fig. 13). Always support the starter
(5) Position the starter motor and any starter
motor shims that were removed to the engine block
and loosely install both of the mounting screws.
(6) Remove the battery cable eyelet from the sole-
NOTE: Shim thickness available is 0.381 mm (0.015 STARTER RELAY
in.). Refer to Starter Motor Noise - 2.5L Engine in
the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for REMOVAL
more information. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable.
(6) Tighten both of the starter motor mounting (2) Remove the cover from the Power Distribution
screws. Tighten the screws to 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.). Center (PDC) (Fig. 15).
(8) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
4.0L ENGINE
(1) Position the starter motor in the engine com-
partment.
(2) Reconnect the solenoid terminal wire harness
connector to the connector receptacle on the starter
solenoid. Always support the starter motor during
this process, do not let the starter motor hang from
the wire harness.
(3) Install the battery cable eyelet onto the sole-
battery cable eyelet to the solenoid battery terminal.
Tighten the nut to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.). Always sup-
port the starter motor during this process, do not let
the starter motor hang from the wire harness.
(5) Position the starter motor to the front of the
transmission clutch housing or torque converter
housing and loosely install both the upper and lower
mounting screws. Fig. 15 Power Distribution Center
(6) Tighten the lower (forward facing) starter (3) Refer to the fuse and relay layout label affixed
motor mounting screw. Tighten the screw to 47 N·m to the underside of the PDC cover for starter relay
(35 ft. lbs.). identification and location.
(7) Tighten the upper (rearward facing) starter (4) Remove the starter relay from the PDC.
motor mounting screw. Tighten the screw to 41 N·m
(30 ft. lbs.). INSTALLATION
(8) Lower the vehicle. (1) Refer to the fuse and relay layout label affixed
(9) Reconnect the battery negative cable. to the underside of the PDC cover for the proper
starter relay location.
(2) Position the starter relay in the proper recep-
tacle in the PDC.
(3) Align the starter relay terminals with the ter-
minal cavities in the PDC receptacle.
(4) Push down firmly on the starter relay until the
terminals are fully seated in the terminal cavities in
the PDC receptacle.
(5) Install the cover onto the PDC.
(6) Connect the battery negative cable.
SPECIFICATIONS
STARTING SYSTEM
Starter Motor and Solenoid

Manufacturer Mitsubishi
Engine Application 2.5L, 4.0L
2.5L - 1.2 Kilowatt (1.6 Horsepower)
Power Rating
4.0L - 1.4 Kilowatt (1.9 Horsepower)
Voltage 12 Volts
Number of Fields 4
Number of Poles 4
Number of Brushes 4
Drive Type Planetary Gear Reduction
Free Running Test Voltage 11.2 Volts
Free Running Test Maximum Amperage Draw 90 Amperes
2.5L - 2600 rpm
Free Running Test Minimum Speed
4.0L - 2500 rpm
Solenoid Closing Maximum Voltage Required 7.8 Volts
2.5L - 130 Amperes
*Cranking Amperage Draw Test
4.0L - 160 Amperes
*Test at operating temperature. Cold engine, tight (new) engine, or heavy oil will increase starter amperage draw.
STARTING SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
page page

STARTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
STARTER — LHD (DIESEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
STARTER — RHD (DIESEL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

STARTER — LHD (DIESEL)
Removal
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
(2) Remove the innercooler inlet hose from turbo-
charger and position it out of the way (Fig. 1).
Fig. 2 Turbocharger Oil Return Hose — Position &

Orientation
(7) Position a jack stand and raise the weight off
the right engine mount.
(8) Remove the (2) right engine mount lower sill
plate bolts.
(9) Remove the (4) right engine mount bracket to
engine block retaining bolts.
Fig. 1 LHD Engine Compartment — Diesel (10) Remove the engine mount throughbolt.
(11) Remove the engine mount and the engine
(3) Remove the (2) right engine mount upper sill mount bracket from the vehicle.
plate nuts. (12) Remove the starter motor support bracket.
(4) Raise the vehicle on a hoist. (13) Disconnect the starter motor electrical connec-
(5) Remove the turbocharger oil return hose from tors.
engine block and plug (Fig. 2).
(6) Remove the right engine mount through bolt CAUTION: Heatshields are very sharp. Wear gloves
nut only (Fig. 2). Do not remove the bolt at this time. to prevent injury.
(14) Remove the starter heatshield.
(15) Remove the (3) starter motor retaining bolts.
(16) Remove the starter motor from the vehicle.
Installation
(1) Position the starter motor and install retaining
bolts. Torque bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(2) Connect the starter motor electrical. Torque
(B+) nut to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
CAUTION: Heatshields are very sharp. Wear gloves

to prevent injury.
(3) Install the starter heatshield.

(4) Install the starter motor support bracket.
Torque nuts to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.).
(5) Install the engine mount and engine mount
bracket in the vehicle, making sure sill plate studs
are through engine mount.
(6) Install the engine mount throughbolt and nut
leaving them loose at this time.
(7) Install the (4) engine mount bracket to engine
block bolts. Torque bolts to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.). Fig. 3 Turbocharger Oil Return Line
(8) Tighten, but do not torque (2) right engine
mount lower bolts. (6) Remove the right engine mount through bolt
(9) Remove the jack stand. nut only (Fig. 3). Do not remove the bolt at this time.
(10) Torque the (2) lower engine mount bolts to 54 (7) Remove the engine mount upper sill plate nuts.
N·m (40 ft. lbs.). (8) Position a jack stand and raise weight off right
(11) Torque throughbolt nut to 65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.). engine mount.
(12) Install the oil return line on the engine block (9) Remove the track bar support bracket retain-
nipple. ing bolts and remove bracket.
(13) Lower the vehicle from the hoist. (10) Remove the remaining lower engine mount
(14) Install the (2) engine mount upper sill plate bolt from the sill plate.
nuts. Torque nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.). (11) Remove the (4) engine mount bracket bolts.
(15) Install the innercooler inlet hose on turbo- (12) Remove the engine mount throughbolt.
charger. (13) Remove the engine mount and engine mount
(16) Connect the negative battery cable. bracket from the vehicle.
(14) Remove the starter motor support bracket.
STARTER — RHD (DIESEL)
CAUTION: Heatshield is very sharp. Wear gloves to
prevent injury.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (15) Remove the starter heat shield.
(2) Make sure steering wheel is in the unlocked (16) Disconnect the starter motor electrical connec-
position. tors.
(3) Raise the vehicle on a hoist. (17) Remove the (3) stater motor retaining bolts.
(4) Rotate the front wheels to access and remove (18) Remove the starter motor from the vehicle.
the steering shaft pinch bolt, slide shaft straight off
gearbox input shaft and position steering shaft aside. Installation
(5) Remove the turbocharger oil return line from (1) Position the starter motor. Torque retaining
engine block and plug (Fig. 3). bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(2) Reconnect the starter motor electrical. Torque
(B+) nut to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
prevent injury.
(3) Install the starter heat shield.

(4) Install the starter motor support bracket.
Torque bolt to 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.). Torque nuts to 10
N·m (90 in. lbs.).
bracket in the vehicle.
(6) Install the engine mount throughbolt and nut
leaving them loose at this time.
(7) Install, but do not torque the engine mount
and track bar support bracket bolts
block bolts. Torque bolts to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.).
(9) Remove the jack stand.
(10) Install and torque the upper engine mount sill
plate nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
(11) Torque the lower engine mount retaining bolts
to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.).
(12) Torque the larger track bar support bracket
bolts to 125 N·m (92 ft. lbs.).
(13) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to Fig. 4
65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.).
(14) Install the oil return line on the engine block
nipple.
(15) Install steering shaft pinch bolt. Torque to 49
N·m (36 ft. lbs.).
(16) Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
(17) Connect the negative battery cable.
STARTER RELAY
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable.
(2) Remove the cover from the Power Distribution
Center (PDC).
(3) Refer to the label on the PDC for starter relay
identification and location.
(4) Unplug the starter relay from the PDC.
(5) Install the starter relay by aligning the relay
terminals with the cavities in the PDC and pushing
the relay firmly into place.
(6) Install the PDC cover.
(8) Test the relay operation.
SPECIFICATIONS
STARTING SYSTEM
Starter and Solenoid

Engine Application 2.5L Diesel
Power Rating 2.2 Kilowatt
Voltage 12 Volts
Number of Fields 4
Number of Poles 4
Number of Brushes 4
Drive Type Planetary Gear Reduction
Free Running Test Voltage 11.5 Volts
Free Running Test Maximum
160 Amperes
Amperage Draw
Free Running Test Minimum
5500 rpm
Speed
Solenoid Closing Maximum
7.8 Volts
Voltage
*Cranking Amperage Draw
350 Amperes
test
*Test at operating temperature. Cold engine, tight (new) engine, or heavy oil will
increase starter amperage draw.
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Engine Mount Throughbolt . . . . 65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.)
Engine Mount Upper Sill
Plate Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Engine Mount to Engine Mounting
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.)
Lower Engine Mount Bolts . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
Stater Motor (B+) Terminal . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Starter Motor Retaining Bolts . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Starter Motor Support Bracket
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.)
Steering Shaft Pinch Bolt . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
Track Bar Support Bracket
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 N·m (92 ft. lbs.)
XJ CHARGING SYSTEM 8C - 1
CHARGING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST FOR

BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . 2 CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
ELECTRONIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR . . . . . . . . . 2 BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . 4
GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . 3 GENERATOR RATINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM to vary
the battery charging rate. This is done by cycling the
CHARGING SYSTEM ground path to control the strength of the rotor mag-
netic field. The PCM then compensates and regulates
DESCRIPTION generator current output accordingly.
The charging system consists of: All vehicles are equipped with On-Board Diagnos-
• Generator tics (OBD). All OBD-sensed systems, including EVR
• Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) circuitry (field control) circuitry, are monitored by the PCM.
within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnostic Trou-
• Ignition switch (refer to Group 8D, Ignition Sys- ble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in elec-
tem for information) tronic memory for certain failures it detects. Refer to
• Battery (refer to Group 8A, Battery for informa- On-Board Diagnostics in Group 25, Emission Control
tion) System for more DTC information.
• Battery temperature sensor The Check Gauges Lamp (if equipped) monitors:
• Generator Lamp (if equipped) charging system voltage, engine coolant tempera-
• Check Gauges Lamp (if equipped) ture and engine oil pressure. If an extreme condition
• Voltmeter (refer to Group 8E, Instrument Panel is indicated, the lamp will be illuminated. This is
and Gauges for information) done as reminder to check the three gauges. The sig-
• Wiring harness and connections (refer to Group nal to activate the lamp is sent via the CCD bus cir-
8W, Wiring for information) cuits. The lamp is located on the instrument panel.
Refer to Group 8E, Instrument Panel and Gauges for
OPERATION additional information.
The charging system is turned on and off with the
ignition switch. The system is on when the engine is GENERATOR
running and the ASD relay is energized. When the
ASD relay is on, voltage is supplied to the ASD relay DESCRIPTION
sense circuit at the PCM. This voltage is connected The generator is belt-driven by the engine using a
through the PCM and supplied to one of the genera- serpentine type drive belt. It is serviced only as a
tor field terminals (Gen. Source +) at the back of the complete assembly. If the generator fails for any rea-
generator. son, the entire assembly must be replaced.
The amount of DC current produced by the gener-
ator is controlled by the EVR (field control) circuitry OPERATION
contained within the PCM. This circuitry is con- As the energized rotor begins to rotate within the
nected in series with the second rotor field terminal generator, the spinning magnetic field induces a cur-
and ground. rent into the windings of the stator coil. Once the
A battery temperature sensor, located in the bat- generator begins producing sufficient current, it also
tery tray housing, is used to sense battery tempera- provides the current needed to energize the rotor.
ture. This temperature data, along with data from
8C - 2 CHARGING SYSTEM XJ
The Y type stator winding connections deliver the refer to Charging System Operation for additional
induced AC current to 3 positive and 3 negative information.
diodes for rectification. From the diodes, rectified DC
current is delivered to the vehicle electrical system
through the generator battery terminal. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
Although the generators appear the same exter-
nally, different generators with different output rat- CHARGING SYSTEM
ings are used on this vehicle. Be certain that the The following procedures may be used to diagnose
replacement generator has the same output rating the charging system if:
and part number as the original unit. Refer to Gen- • the generator lamp (if equipped) is illuminated
erator Ratings in the Specifications section at the with the engine running
back of this group for amperage ratings and part • the voltmeter (if equipped) does not register
numbers. properly
Noise emitting from the generator may be caused • an undercharged or overcharged battery condi-
by: worn, loose or defective bearings; a loose or defec- tion occurs.
tive drive pulley; incorrect, worn, damaged or misad- Remember that an undercharged battery is often
justed fan drive belt; loose mounting bolts; a caused by:
misaligned drive pulley or a defective stator or diode. • accessories being left on with the engine not
running
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR • a faulty or improperly adjusted switch that
allows a lamp to stay on. See Ignition-Off Draw Test
DESCRIPTION in Group 8A, Battery for more information.
The battery temperature sensor is attached to the
battery tray located under the battery. INSPECTION
To perform a complete test of the charging system,
OPERATION refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostic Proce-
The battery temperature sensor is used to deter- dures service manual and the DRB scan tool. Per-
mine the battery temperature and control battery form the following inspections before attaching the
charging rate. This temperature data, along with scan tool.
data from monitored line voltage, is used by the PCM (1) Inspect the battery condition. Refer to Group
to vary the battery charging rate. System voltage will 8A, Battery for procedures.
be higher at colder temperatures and is gradually (2) Inspect condition of battery cable terminals,
reduced at warmer temperatures. battery posts, connections at engine block, starter
solenoid and relay. They should be clean and tight.
ELECTRONIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR Repair as required.
(3) Inspect all fuses in both the fuseblock and
DESCRIPTION Power Distribution Center (PDC) for tightness in
The Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) is not a receptacles. They should be properly installed and
separate component. It is actually a voltage regulat- tight. Repair or replace as required.
ing circuit located within the Powertrain Control (4) Inspect generator mounting bolts for tightness.
Module (PCM). The EVR is not serviced separately. If Replace or tighten bolts if required. Refer to the Gen-
replacement is necessary, the PCM must be replaced. erator Removal/Installation section of this group for
torque specifications.
OPERATION (5) Inspect generator drive belt condition and ten-
The amount of DC current produced by the gener- sion. Tighten or replace belt as required. Refer to
ator is controlled by EVR circuitry contained within Belt Tension Specifications in Group 7, Cooling Sys-
the PCM. This circuitry is connected in series with tem.
the generators second rotor field terminal and its (6) Inspect automatic belt tensioner (if equipped).
ground. Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for information.
Voltage is regulated by cycling the ground path to (7) Inspect generator electrical connections at gen-
control the strength of the rotor magnetic field. The erator field, battery output, and ground terminal (if
EVR circuitry monitors system line voltage and bat- equipped). Also check generator ground wire connec-
tery temperature (refer to Battery Temperature Sen- tion at engine (if equipped). They should all be clean
sor for more information). It then compensates and and tight. Repair as required.
regulates generator current output accordingly. Also
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR For DTC information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble

To perform a complete test of this sensor and its Codes in Group 25, Emission Control System. This
circuitry, refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diag- will include a complete list of DTC’s including DTC’s
nostic Procedures manual. To test the sensor only, for the charging system.
refer to the following:
(1) The sensor is located under the battery and is
attached to the battery tray (Fig. 1). A two-wire pig-
tail harness is attached directly to the sensor. The
opposite end of this harness connects the sensor to
GENERATOR
the engine wiring harness.
REMOVAL
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM
BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT
WIRE (B+ WIRE) FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO
DO SO CAN RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE TO
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
(1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.

(2) Remove generator drive belt. Refer to Group 7,
Cooling System for procedures.
(3) Left Hand Drive (LHD) Vehicles Only: Remove
generator pivot and mounting bolts/nut (Fig. 2) or
(Fig. 3). Position generator for access to wire connec-
tors.
(4) Right Hand Drive (RHD) Vehicles Only:
Remove upper nut (generator adjustment nut) and
both belt adjustment bolts (Fig. 4). Remove generator
lower nut/bolt. Position generator for access to wire
connectors.
(5) If equipped, unsnap plastic cover from B+ ter-
minal.
(6) Remove B+ terminal mounting nut at rear of
Fig. 1 Battery Temperature Sensor generator (Fig. 5). Disconnect terminal from genera-
tor.
(2) Disconnect the two-wire pigtail harness from
(7) Disconnect field wire connector at rear of gen-
the engine harness.
erator by pushing on connector tab.
(3) Attach ohmmeter leads to the wire terminals of
(8) Remove generator from vehicle.
the pigtail harness.
(4) At room temperature of 25° C (75–80° F), an
INSTALLATION
ohmmeter reading of 9,000 (9K) to 11,000 (11K) ohms
(1) Position generator to engine and snap field
should be observed.
wire connector into rear of generator.
(5) If reading is above or below the specification,
(2) Install B+ terminal to generator mounting
replace the sensor.
stud. Tighten mounting nut to 8.5 N·m (75 in. lbs.)
(6) Refer to the Removal and Installation section
torque.
for procedures.
(3) If equipped, snap plastic cover to B+ terminal.
(4) LHD Vehicles: Install generator fasteners and
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST FOR CHARGING tighten as follows:
SYSTEM • Generator upper mounting bolt-55 N·m (41 ft.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors lbs.) torque.
critical input and output circuits of the charging sys- • Generator lower pivot bolt/nut-55 N·m (41 ft.
tem, making sure they are operational. A Diagnostic lbs.) torque.
Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and
output circuit monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim
(OBD) system. Some circuits are checked continu- using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt
ously and some are checked only under certain con- can be damaged.
ditions.
Fig. 4 Remove/Install Generator—4.0L Engine—RHD
Fig. 2 Remove/Install Generator—2.5L Engine
Fig. 5 Generator Connectors—Typical Bosch

(6) RHD Vehicles: Install upper nut (generator
adjustment nut) and both belt adjustment bolts.
Install generator lower nut/bolt.
(7) RHD Vehicles: On vehicles equipped with RHD,
the generator is used to adjust the serpentine belt.
Fig. 3 Remove/Install Generator—4.0L Engine—LHD Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for belt routing,
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory belt adjustment and bolt tightening procedures.
drive belt, the belt MUST be routed correctly. The (8) Install negative battery cable to battery.
water pump will be rotating in the wrong direction if
the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR
to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in engine The battery temperature sensor is located under
compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics in Group vehicle battery (Fig. 6) and is attached to a mounting
7, Cooling System. hole on battery tray.
(5) LHD Vehicles: Install generator drive belt.

Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for procedures.
(2) Disconnect sensor pigtail harness from engine
wire harness.
(3) Pry sensor straight up from battery tray
mounting hole.
INSTALLATION
(1) Feed pigtail harness through hole in top of bat-
tery tray and press sensor into top of battery tray.
(2) Connect pigtail harness.
(3) Install battery. Refer to Group 8A, Battery for
procedures.
SPECIFICATIONS
Fig. 6 Battery Temperature Sensor

REMOVAL
(1) Remove battery. Refer to Group 8A, Battery for
procedures.
GENERATOR RATINGS
TYPE PART NUMBER RATED SAE AMPS ENGINES MINIMUM TEST AMPS
DENSO 56041822AA 124 2.5L/4.0L 90
TORQUE CHART Description Torque

Right Hand Drive= RHD, Left Hand Drive= LHD. Ground Terminal Nut—LHD or RHD . . . . . 8.5 N·m
(75 in. lbs.)
Description Torque Harness Hold-down Nut—LHD or RHD . . . 8.5 N·m
Generator Mounting Bolt—LHD— (75 in. lbs.)
2.5L/4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m (41 ft. lbs.) Field Terminal Nuts—LHD or RHD . . . . . . 2.8 N·m
Generator Pivot Bolt/Nut—LHD— (25 in. lbs.)
2.5L/4.0L Engine . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m (41 ft. lbs.)
Battery Terminal Nut—LHD or RHD . . . . . 8.5 N·m
(75 in. lbs.)
CHARGING SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION REMOVAL

INTRODUCTION (2) Remove the accessory drive belt. Refer to
The generator assembly is serviced as a complete Group 7, Cooling System for procedure.
assembly. If the generator should be faulty, replace (3) Remove the nut securing battery output cable
the entire assembly. The only serviceable part is the to B+ terminal (Fig. 1) at rear of generator.
drive pulley.

GENERATOR
WARNING: DISCONNECT NEGATIVE CABLE FROM
BATTERY BEFORE REMOVING BATTERY OUTPUT
WIRE FROM GENERATOR. FAILURE TO DO SO
CAN RESULT IN INJURY.
CAUTION: Never force a belt over a pulley rim

using a screwdriver. The synthetic fiber of the belt
can be damaged.
CAUTION: When installing a serpentine accessory

drive belt, the belt must be routed correctly. The
water pump will be rotating in the wrong direction if
the belt is installed incorrectly, causing the engine
to overheat. Refer to belt routing label in engine
compartment, or refer to Belt Schematics in Group Fig. 1 Generator Terminals
7, Cooling System.
(4) Unplug the field terminal connector (Fig. 1) at
rear of generator.
(5) Remove the upper generator mounting bolt
(Fig. 2).
Fig. 3 Generator Mounting
Fig. 2 Generator Mounting

(6) Remove the lower generator mounting bolt
(Fig. 2) and remove generator from the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install the generator into the generator
bracket.
(2) Install the lower generator mounting bolt (Fig.
3).
(3) Install the upper generator mounting bolt (Fig.
3).
(4) Tighten the mounting bolts to proper torque.
• Upper mounting bolt — 27.5 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
• Lower mounting bolt — 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.)
(5) Connect the field terminal connector at rear of
generator (Fig. 4).
(6) Connect the battery output cable to the B+ ter-
minal at rear of the generator (Fig. 4).
(7) Install the accessory drive belt. Refer to Group
7, Cooling System for procedure. Fig. 4 Generator Terminals
XJ IGNITION SYSTEM 8D - 1
IGNITION SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . 10

AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY . . . . . . 2 DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY CYLINDER . . . . . 14
DISTRIBUTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SHIFTER/IGNITION INTERLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
IGNITION COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPARK PLUG CABLE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY LOCK SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPECIFICATIONS
IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ENGINE FIRING ORDER—2.5L 4-CYLINDER
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 1 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SPARK PLUG CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ENGINE FIRING ORDER—4.0L 6-CYLINDER
SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DISTRIBUTOR CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 IGNITION TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SPARK PLUG CABLE RESISTANCE . . . . . . . . . 16
IGNITION COIL TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SPARK PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SPARK PLUG CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SPARK PLUG CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

IGNITION SYSTEM
The ignition systems used on the 2.5L 4–cylinder
and the 4.0L 6–cylinder engine are basically identi-
cal. Similarities and differences between the systems
will be discussed.
The ignition system is controlled by the powertrain
control module (PCM) on all engines.
The ignition system consists of:
• Spark Plugs
• Ignition Coil
• Secondary Ignition Cables
• Distributor (contains rotor and camshaft position
sensor)
• Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
• Crankshaft Position, Camshaft Position, Throt- Fig. 1 Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Location
tle Position and MAP Sensors NOTE: Base ignition timing by rotation of distribu-
tor is not adjustable.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located The PCM opens and closes the ignition coil ground
in the engine compartment (Fig. 1). circuit to operate the ignition coil. This is done to
The ignition system is controlled by the PCM. adjust ignition timing, both initial (base) and
8D - 2 IGNITION SYSTEM XJ
advance, and for changing engine operating condi- SPARK PLUGS
tions. All engines use resistor type spark plugs. Remove
The amount of electronic spark advance provided the spark plugs and examine them for burned elec-
by the PCM is determined by five input factors: trodes and fouled, cracked or broken porcelain insu-
engine coolant temperature, engine rpm, intake man- lators. Keep plugs arranged in the order in which
ifold temperature, manifold absolute pressure and they were removed from the engine. A single plug
throttle position. displaying an abnormal condition indicates that a
problem exists in the corresponding cylinder. Replace
DISTRIBUTOR spark plugs at the intervals recommended in Group
All engines are equipped with a camshaft driven O, Lubrication and Maintenance.
mechanical distributor containing a shaft driven dis- Spark plugs that have low milage may be cleaned
tributor rotor. All distributors are equipped with an and reused if not otherwise defective, carbon or oil
internal camshaft position (fuel sync) sensor (Fig. 2). fouled. Refer to the Spark Plug Condition section of
This sensor provides fuel injection synchronization this group.
and cylinder identification.
SPARK PLUG CABLES
Spark plug cables are sometimes referred to as sec-
ondary ignition wires. These cables transfer electrical
current from the ignition coil(s) and/or distributor, to
individual spark plugs at each cylinder. The resistive
spark plug cables are of nonmetallic construction.
The cables provide suppression of radio frequency
emissions from the ignition system.
IGNITION COIL
Battery voltage is supplied to the ignition coil pos-
itive terminal from the ASD relay.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) opens and
closes the ignition coil ground circuit for ignition coil
operation.
Base ignition timing is not adjustable on any
Fig. 2 Distributor and Camshaft Position Sensor- engine. By controlling the coil ground circuit, the
Typical PCM is able to set the base timing and adjust the
ignition timing advance. This is done to meet chang-
The distributors on both the 2.5L 4-cylinder and
ing engine operating conditions.
the 4.0L-6 cylinder engines do not have built in cen-
The ignition coil is not oil filled. The windings are
trifugal or vacuum assisted advance. Base ignition
embedded in an epoxy compound. This provides heat
timing and all timing advance is controlled by the
and vibration resistance that allows the ignition coil
powertrain control module (PCM). Because ignition
to be mounted on the engine.
timing is controlled by the PCM, base ignition tim-
ing is not adjustable on any of these engines.
The distributor is locked in place by a fork with a
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY
slot located on the distributor housing base. The dis- As one of its functions, the ASD relay will supply
tributor holddown clamp bolt passes through this slot battery voltage to the ignition coil. The ground cir-
when installed. Because the distributor position is cuit for the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain
locked when installed, its rotational position can not Control Module (PCM). The PCM regulates ASD
be changed. Do not attempt to modify the dis- relay operation by switching the ground circuit
tributor housing to get distributor rotation. on-and-off.
Distributor position will have no effect on igni-
tion timing. The position of the distributor will CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
determine fuel synchronization only. The crankshaft position sensor is mounted to the
All distributors contain an internal oil seal that transmission bellhousing at the left/rear side of
prevents oil from entering the distributor housing. engine block (Fig. 3).
The seal is not serviceable. Engine speed and crankshaft position are provided
through the crankshaft position sensor. The sensor
generates pulses that are the input sent to the pow-
ertrain control module (PCM). The PCM interprets
Fig. 3 Crankshaft Position Sensor—Typical Fig. 4 Sensor Operation—2.5L 4-Cyl. Engine

the sensor input to determine the crankshaft posi-
tion. The PCM then uses this position, along with
other inputs, to determine injector sequence and igni-
tion timing.
The sensor is a hall effect device combined with an
internal magnet. It is also sensitive to steel within a
certain distance from it.
SENSOR OPERATION
The flywheel/drive plate has groups of four notches
at its outer edge. On 4.0L 6-cylinder engines there
are three sets of notches (Fig. 5). On 2.5L 4-cylinder
engines there are two sets of notches (Fig. 4).
The notches cause a pulse to be generated when
they pass under the sensor. The pulses are the input
to the PCM. For each engine revolution there are two
groups of four pulses generated on 2.5L 4-cylinder
engines. There are 3 groups of four pulses generated
on 4.0L 6-cylinder engines.
The trailing edge of the fourth notch, which causes
the pulse, is four degrees before top dead center
(TDC) of the corresponding piston.
The engine will not operate if the PCM does not Fig. 5 Sensor Operation—4.0L 6-Cyl. Engine
receive a crankshaft position sensor input. tor. Its signal is used in conjunction with the crank-
shaft position sensor to differentiate between fuel
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR injection and spark events. It is also used to synchro-
The camshaft position sensor is located in the dis- nize the fuel injectors with their respective cylinders.
tributor on all engines. When the leading edge of the pulse ring (shutter)
The sensor contains a hall effect device called a enters the sync signal generator, the following occurs:
sync signal generator to generate a fuel sync signal. The interruption of magnetic field causes the voltage
This sync signal generator detects a rotating pulse to switch high resulting in a sync signal of approxi-
ring (shutter) on the distributor shaft. The pulse ring mately 5 volts.
rotates 180 degrees through the sync signal genera-
When the trailing edge of the pulse ring (shutter)
leaves the sync signal generator, the following occurs:
The change of the magnetic field causes the sync sig-
nal voltage to switch low to 0 volts.
IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY LOCK CYLINDER

The ignition switch is located on the steering col-
umn. The Key-In-Switch is located in the ignition
switch module. For electrical diagnosis of the Key-In-
Switch, refer to Group 8U, Chime/Buzzer Warning
Systems. For removal/installation of either the key
lock cylinder or ignition switch, refer to Ignition
Switch and Key Cylinder in this group.
On vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion, a cable connects an interlock device within the
steering column assembly to the transmission floor
shift lever. This interlock device is used to lock the
transmission shifter in the PARK position when the
key is in the LOCKED or ACCESSORY position. The
interlock device is not serviceable. If repair is neces- Fig. 6 Ignition Coil—2.5L Engine
sary, the steering column assembly must be replaced.
Refer to Group 19, Steering for procedures. The
shifter interlock cable can be adjusted or replaced.
Refer to Group 21, Transmissions for procedures.
On vehicles equipped with a manual transmission,
a lever is located on the steering column behind the
ignition key lock cylinder. The lever must be operated
to allow rotation of the ignition key lock cylinder. The
lever mechanism is not serviced separately. If repair
is necessary, the steering column assembly must be
replaced. Refer to Group 19, Steering for procedures.

IGNITION COIL TEST
To perform a complete test of the ignition coil and
its circuitry, refer to the DRB scan tool. Also refer to
the appropriate Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures
manual. To test the coil only, refer to the following:
Fig. 7 Ignition Coil—4.0L Engine
The ignition coil (Fig. 6) or (Fig. 7) is designed to
operate without an external ballast resistor. Replace any coil that does not meet specifications.
Inspect the ignition coil for arcing. Test the coil Refer to the IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE chart.
according to coil tester manufacturer’s instructions.
Test the coil primary and secondary resistance.
IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE
PRIMARY RESISTANCE SECONDARY RESISTANCE

COIL MANUFACTURER
21-27°C (70-80°F) 21-27°C (70-80°F)
Diamond 0.97 - 1.18 Ohms 11,300 - 15,300 Ohms
Toyodenso 0.95 - 1.20 Ohms 11,300 - 13,300 Ohms
If the ignition coil is being replaced, the secondary
spark plug cable must also be checked. Replace cable
if it has been burned or damaged.
Arcing at the tower will carbonize the cable boot,
which if it is connected to a new ignition coil, will
cause the coil to fail.
If the secondary coil cable shows any signs of dam-
age, it should be replaced with a new cable and new
terminal. Carbon tracking on the old cable can cause
arcing and the failure of a new ignition coil.
DISTRIBUTOR CAP
Remove the distributor cap and wipe it clean with
a dry lint free cloth. Visually inspect the cap for
cracks, carbon paths, broken towers or damaged
rotor button (Fig. 8) or (Fig. 9). Also check for white
deposits on the inside (caused by condensation enter- Fig. 9 Cap Inspection—Internal—Typical
ing the cap through cracks). Replace any cap that
displays charred or eroded terminals. The machined
surface of a terminal end (faces toward rotor) will
indicate some evidence of erosion from normal oper-
ation. Examine the terminal ends for evidence of
mechanical interference with the rotor tip.
Fig. 10 Rotor Inspection—Typical

SPARK PLUG CABLES
Fig. 8 Cap Inspection—External—Typical Check the spark plug cable connections for good
contact at the coil(s), distributor cap towers, and
DISTRIBUTOR ROTOR
spark plugs. Terminals should be fully seated. The
Visually inspect the rotor (Fig. 10) for cracks, evi-
insulators should be in good condition and should fit
dence of corrosion or the effects of arcing on the
tightly on the coil, distributor and spark plugs. Spark
metal tip. Also check for evidence of mechanical
plug cables with insulators that are cracked or torn
interference with the cap. Some charring is normal
must be replaced.
on the end of the metal tip. The silicone-dielectric-
Clean high voltage ignition cables with a cloth
varnish-compound applied to the rotor tip for radio
moistened with a non-flammable solvent. Wipe the
interference noise suppression, will appear charred.
cables dry. Check for brittle or cracked insulation.
This is normal. Do not remove the charred com-
pound. Test the spring for insufficient tension.
TESTING
Replace a rotor that displays any of these adverse
When testing secondary cables for damage with an
conditions.
oscilloscope, follow the instructions of the equipment
manufacturer.
If an oscilloscope is not available, spark plug cables Cable Resistance chart, remove the cable from the
may be tested as follows: distributor cap. Connect the ohmmeter to the termi-
nal ends of the cable. If resistance is not within spec-
CAUTION: Do not leave any one spark plug cable ifications as found in the Spark Plug Cable
disconnected for longer than necessary during test- Resistance chart, replace the cable. Inspect the igni-
ing. This may cause possible heat damage to the tion coil tower for cracks, burns or corrosion.
catalytic converter. Total test time must not exceed
ten minutes. SPARK PLUG CONDITIONS
With the engine running, remove spark plug cable NORMAL OPERATING
from spark plug (one at a time) and hold next to a
The few deposits present on the spark plug will
good engine ground. If the cable and spark plug are
probably be light tan or slightly gray in color. This is
in good condition, the engine rpm should drop and
evident with most grades of commercial gasoline
the engine will run poorly. If engine rpm does not
(Fig. 11). There will not be evidence of electrode
drop, the cable and/or spark plug may not be operat-
burning. Gap growth will not average more than
ing properly and should be replaced. Also check
approximately 0.025 mm (.001 in) per 3200 km (2000
engine cylinder compression.
miles) of operation. Spark plugs that have normal
With the engine not running, connect one end of a
wear can usually be cleaned, have the electrodes
test probe to a good ground. Start the engine and run
filed, have the gap set and then be installed.
the other end of the test probe along the entire
length of all spark plug cables. If cables are cracked
or punctured, there will be a noticeable spark jump
from the damaged area to the test probe. The cable
running from the ignition coil to the distributor cap
can be checked in the same manner. Cracked, dam-
aged or faulty cables should be replaced with resis-
tance type cable. This can be identified by the words
ELECTRONIC SUPPRESSION printed on the cable
jacket.
Use an ohmmeter to test for open circuits, exces-
sive resistance or loose terminals. Remove the dis-
tributor cap from the distributor. Do not remove
cables from cap. Remove cable from spark plug.
Connect ohmmeter to spark plug terminal end of
cable and to corresponding electrode in distributor
cap. Resistance should be 250 to 1000 Ohms per inch
of cable. If not, remove cable from distributor cap Fig. 11 Normal Operation and Cold (Carbon) Fouling
tower and connect ohmmeter to the terminal ends of
Some fuel refiners in several areas of the United
cable. If resistance is not within specifications as
States have introduced a manganese additive (MMT)
found in the SPARK PLUG CABLE RESISTANCE
for unleaded fuel. During combustion, fuel with MMT
chart, replace the cable. Test all spark plug cables in
causes the entire tip of the spark plug to be coated
this manner.
with a rust colored deposit. This rust color can be
SPARK PLUG CABLE RESISTANCE misdiagnosed as being caused by coolant in the com-
bustion chamber. Spark plug performance may be
MINIMUM MAXIMUM affected by MMT deposits.
250 Ohms Per Inch 1000 Ohms Per Inch
COLD FOULING/CARBON FOULING
3000 Ohms Per Foot 12,000 Ohms Per Foot Cold fouling is sometimes referred to as carbon
fouling. The deposits that cause cold fouling are basi-
cally carbon (Fig. 11). A dry, black deposit on one or
two plugs in a set may be caused by sticking valves
To test ignition coil-to-distributor cap cable, do not or defective spark plug cables. Cold (carbon) fouling
remove the cable from the cap. Connect ohmmeter to of the entire set of spark plugs may be caused by a
rotor button (center contact) of distributor cap and clogged air cleaner element or repeated short operat-
terminal at ignition coil end of cable. If resistance is ing times (short trips).
not within specifications as found in the Spark Plug
WET FOULING OR GAS FOULING
A spark plug coated with excessive wet fuel or oil
is wet fouled. In older engines, worn piston rings,
leaking valve guide seals or excessive cylinder wear
can cause wet fouling. In new or recently overhauled
engines, wet fouling may occur before break-in (nor-
mal oil control) is achieved. This condition can usu-
ally be resolved by cleaning and reinstalling the
fouled plugs.
OIL OR ASH ENCRUSTED

If one or more spark plugs are oil or oil ash
encrusted (Fig. 12), evaluate engine condition for the
cause of oil entry into that particular combustion
chamber.
Fig. 13 Electrode Gap Bridging

spark plug misfire tendencies. Notice that accumula-
tion on the ground electrode and shell area may be
heavy, but the deposits are easily removed. Spark
plugs with scavenger deposits can be considered nor-
mal in condition and can be cleaned using standard
procedures.
Fig. 12 Oil or Ash Encrusted

ELECTRODE GAP BRIDGING
Electrode gap bridging may be traced to loose Fig. 14 Scavenger Deposits
deposits in the combustion chamber. These deposits CHIPPED ELECTRODE INSULATOR
accumulate on the spark plugs during continuous A chipped electrode insulator usually results from
stop-and-go driving. When the engine is suddenly bending the center electrode while adjusting the
subjected to a high torque load, deposits partially liq- spark plug electrode gap. Under certain conditions,
uefy and bridge the gap between electrodes (Fig. 13). severe detonation can also separate the insulator
This short circuits the electrodes. Spark plugs with from the center electrode (Fig. 15). Spark plugs with
electrode gap bridging can be cleaned using standard this condition must be replaced.
procedures.
PREIGNITION DAMAGE
SCAVENGER DEPOSITS Preignition damage is usually caused by excessive
Fuel scavenger deposits may be either white or yel- combustion chamber temperature. The center elec-
low (Fig. 14). They may appear to be harmful, but trode dissolves first and the ground electrode dis-
this is a normal condition caused by chemical addi- solves somewhat latter (Fig. 16). Insulators appear
tives in certain fuels. These additives are designed to relatively deposit free. Determine if the spark plug
change the chemical nature of deposits and decrease has the correct heat range rating for the engine.
Fig. 15 Chipped Electrode Insulator Fig. 17 Spark Plug Overheating

Determine if ignition timing is over advanced or if REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
other operating conditions are causing engine over-
heating. (The heat range rating refers to the operat- SPARK PLUG CABLE REMOVAL
ing temperature of a particular type spark plug.
Spark plugs are designed to operate within specific CAUTION: When disconnecting a high voltage
temperature ranges. This depends upon the thick- cable from a spark plug or from the distributor cap,
ness and length of the center electrodes porcelain twist the rubber boot slightly (1/2 turn) to break it
insulator.) loose (Fig. 18). Grasp the boot (not the cable) and
pull it off with a steady, even force.
Fig. 16 Preignition Damage

SPARK PLUG OVERHEATING Fig. 18 Cable Removal
Overheating is indicated by a white or gray center
electrode insulator that also appears blistered (Fig. SPARK PLUGS
17). The increase in electrode gap will be consider-
ably in excess of 0.001 inch per 2000 miles of opera- PLUG REMOVAL
tion. This suggests that a plug with a cooler heat (1) Always remove spark plug or ignition coil
range rating should be used. Over advanced ignition cables by grasping at the cable boot (Fig. 18). Turn
timing, detonation and cooling system malfunctions the cable boot 1/2 turn and pull straight back in a
can also cause spark plug overheating. steady motion. Never pull directly on the cable.
Internal damage to cable will result.
(2) Prior to removing the spark plug, spray com-
pressed air around the spark plug hole and the area
around the spark plug. This will help prevent foreign PLUG INSTALLATION
material from entering the combustion chamber. Always tighten spark plugs to the specified torque.
(3) Remove the spark plug using a quality socket Over tightening can cause distortion. This may result
with a rubber or foam insert. in a change in the spark plug gap, or a cracked por-
(4) Inspect the spark plug condition. Refer to celain insulator.
Spark Plugs in the Diagnostics/Service Procedures When replacing the spark plug and ignition coil
section of this group. cables, route the cables correctly and secure them in
the appropriate retainers. Failure to route the cables
PLUG CLEANING properly can cause the radio to reproduce ignition
The plugs may be cleaned using commercially noise. It could cause cross ignition of the spark plugs,
available spark plug cleaning equipment. After clean- or short circuit the cables to ground.
ing, file the center electrode flat with a small point (1) Start the spark plug into the cylinder head by
file or jewelers file before adjusting gap. hand to avoid cross threading.
(2) Tighten the spark plugs to 35-41 N·m (26-30 ft.
CAUTION: Never use a motorized wire wheel brush lbs.) torque.
to clean the spark plugs. Metallic deposits will (3) Install spark plug cables over spark plugs.
remain on the spark plug insulator and will cause
plug misfire. IGNITION COIL
The ignition coil is an epoxy filled type. If the coil
PLUG GAP ADJUSTMENT is replaced, it must be replaced with the same type.
Check the spark plug gap with a gap gauge tool. If
the gap is not correct, adjust it by bending the
REMOVAL
On the 2.5L 4-cylinder engine, the ignition coil is
ground electrode (Fig. 19). Never attempt to adjust
mounted to a bracket on side of engine (to rear of
the gap by bending the center electrode.
distributor) (Fig. 20).
On the 4.0L 6-cylinder engine, the ignition coil is
mounted to a bracket on side of engine (to front of
distributor) (Fig. 21).
Fig. 19 Setting Spark Plug Gap—Typical

SPARK PLUG GAP (1) Disconnect ignition coil secondary cable from
• 2.5L 4-Cylinder Engine Spark Plug Gap: .89 mm
ignition coil.
(.035 in).
(2) Disconnect engine harness connector from igni-
• 4.0L 6-Cylinder Engine Spark Plug Gap: .89 mm
tion coil.
(.035 in).
(3) Remove ignition coil mounting bolts (nuts are
used on back side of bracket on some coils).
(4) Remove coil from vehicle.

INSTALLATION
(1) Install ignition coil to bracket on cylinder block
Fig. 22 Crankshaft Position Sensor—2.5L 4-Cyl.
with mounting bolts (and nuts if equipped). If
Engine With Auto. Trans.
equipped with nuts and bolts, tighten to 11 N·m (100
in. lbs.) torque. If equipped with bolts only, tighten to
5 N·m (50 in. lbs.) torque.
(2) Connect engine harness connector to coil.
(3) Connect ignition coil cable to ignition coil.
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

The crankshaft position sensor is mounted to the
transmission bellhousing at the left/rear side of
engine block (Fig. 22) or (Fig. 23).
On 2.5L 4-cylinder equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the sensor is attached with two bolts. On
2.5L engines equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion, the sensor is attached with two nuts. All 4.0L
6-cylinder engines have the sensor attached with two
bolts.
REMOVAL
Some model/engine combinations may require
removal of air cleaner tubes for access to sensor.
(1) Remove air cleaner tube(s) at throttle body (if
necessary).
(2) Near rear of intake manifold, disconnect pigtail
harness (electrical connector) from main electrical Fig. 23 Crankshaft Position Sensor—Except 2.5L
harness. 4-Cyl. Engine With Auto. Trans.
(3) Depending upon application, remove either sen- (2) 2.5L engines equipped with automatic trans-
sor mounting bolts or nuts. mission: Install and tighten two sensor mounting
(4) Remove sensor. nuts to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque.
(3) 2.5L engines equipped with manual transmis-
INSTALLATION sion or any 4.0L engines: Install and tighten two sen-
(1) Install sensor flush against opening in trans- sor mounting bolts to 19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque. The
mission housing. two sensor mounting bolts are specially
machined to correctly space unit to flywheel. utor housing (Fig. 25). It is used to temporarily lock
Do not attempt to install any other bolts. the rotor to the cylinder number 1 position during
(4) Connect sensor pigtail harness electrical con- installation. The pin must be removed after install-
nector to main wiring harness. ing the distributor.
(5) Install air cleaner tube to throttle body (if nec-
essary).
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

The camshaft position sensor is located in the dis-
tributor (Fig. 24).
REMOVAL
Distributor removal is not necessary to remove
camshaft position sensor.
(2) Remove distributor cap from distributor (two
screws).
(3) Disconnect camshaft position sensor wiring
harness from main engine wiring harness.
Fig. 25 Plastic Alignment Pin

The camshaft position sensor is located in the dis-
tributor on all engines (Fig. 26). For removal/instal-
lation procedures, refer to Camshaft Position Sensor.
Distributor removal is not necessary for sensor
removal.
Refer to (Fig. 26) for an exploded view of the dis-
tributor.
A fork with a slot is supplied on the bottom of the
distributor housing where the housing base seats
against the engine block (Fig. 26). The centerline of
the slot aligns with the distributor holddown bolt
Fig. 24 Camshaft Position Sensor hole in the engine block. Because of the fork, the dis-
(4) Remove distributor rotor from distributor shaft. tributor cannot be rotated. Distributor rotation is not
(5) Lift camshaft position sensor assembly from necessary as all ignition timing requirements are
distributor housing (Fig. 24). handled by the powertrain control module (PCM).
The position of the distributor determines fuel syn-
INSTALLATION chronization only. It does not determine ignition tim-
(1) Install camshaft position sensor to distributor. ing.
Align sensor into notch on distributor housing.
(2) Connect wiring harness. NOTE: Do not attempt to modify this fork to attain
(3) Install rotor. ignition timing.
(4) Install distributor cap. Tighten mounting
screws.
REMOVAL—2.5L OR 4.0L ENGINE
DISTRIBUTOR
(2) Disconnect coil secondary cable at coil.
All distributors contain an internal oil seal that
(3) Remove distributor cap from distributor (2
prevents oil from entering the distributor housing.
screws). Do not remove cables from cap. Do not
The seal is not serviceable.
remove rotor.
Factory replacement distributors are equipped with
(4) Disconnect distributor wiring harness from
a plastic alignment pin already installed. The pin is
main engine harness.
located in an access hole on the bottom of the distrib-
(5) Remove cylinder number 1 spark plug.
Fig. 27 Align Timing Marks

be slightly before (counterclockwise of) 10 o’clock
position (Fig. 28).
Fig. 26 Distributor—2.5L Or 4.0L Engines—Typical (15) 4.0L 6-Cylinder Engine: Observe slot in oil
pump gear through hole on side of engine. It should
(6) Hold a finger over open spark plug hole. Rotate
be slightly before (counterclockwise of) 11 o’clock
engine at vibration dampener bolt until compression
position (Fig. 29).
(pressure) is felt.
(7) Slowly continue to rotate engine. Do this until
timing index mark on vibration damper pulley aligns
with top dead center (TDC) mark (0 degree) on tim-
ing degree scale (Fig. 27). Always rotate engine in
direction of normal rotation. Do not rotate engine
backward to align timing marks.
(8) On models equipped with A/C, remove electri-
cal cooling fan and shroud assembly from radiator.
Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for procedures.
(9) This will provide room to turn engine crank-
shaft with a socket and ratchet using vibration
damper bolt.
(10) Remove distributor holddown bolt and clamp.
(11) Remove distributor from engine by slowly lift-
ing straight up.
(12) Note that rotor will rotate slightly in a coun-
terclockwise direction while lifting up distributor. Fig. 28 Slot At 10 O’clock Position—2.5L Engine
The oil pump gear will also rotate slightly in a coun- (16) Remove and discard the old distributor-to-en-
terclockwise direction while lifting up distributor. gine block gasket.
This is due to the helical cut gears on distributor and
camshaft. INSTALLATION
(13) Note removed position of rotor during distrib- (1) If engine crankshaft has been rotated after dis-
utor removal. During installation, this will be tributor removal, cylinder number 1 must be
referred to as the Pre-position. returned to its proper firing stroke. Refer to previous
(14) 2.5L 4-Cylinder Engine: Observe slot in oil REMOVAL Step 5 and Step 6. These steps must be
pump gear through hole on side of engine. It should done before installing distributor.
Fig. 29 Slot At 11 O’clock Position—4.0L Engine

(2) Check position of slot on oil pump gear. On the
2.5L engine, it should be just slightly before (counter-
clockwise of) 10 o’clock position (Fig. 28). On the 4.0L
engine, it should be just slightly before (counterclock-
wise of) 11 o’clock position (Fig. 29). If not, place a
Fig. 30 Pin Alignment Holes
flat blade screwdriver into oil pump gear and rotate
it into proper position. When distributor is fully seated to engine block, the
(3) Factory replacement distributors are equipped centerline of base slot should be aligned to clamp bolt
with a plastic alignment pin already installed (Fig. mounting hole on engine (Fig. 32). The rotor should
25). This pin is used to temporarily hold rotor to cyl- also be pointed slightly past (clockwise of) 3 o’clock
inder number 1 firing position during distributor position.
installation. If pin is in place, proceed to Step 8. If 4.0L 6-Cylinder Engine: Pre-position distributor
not, proceed to next step. into engine while holding centerline of base slot in 1
(4) If original distributor is to be reinstalled, such o’clock position (Fig. 31). Continue to engage distrib-
as during engine overhaul, the plastic pin will not be utor into engine. The rotor and distributor will rotate
available. A 3/16 inch drift pin punch tool may be clockwise during installation. This is due to the heli-
substituted for plastic pin. cal cut gears on distributor and camshaft. When dis-
(5) Remove camshaft position sensor from distrib- tributor is fully seated to engine block, the centerline
utor housing. Lift straight up. of base slot should be aligned to clamp bolt mounting
(6) Four different alignment holes are provided on hole on engine (Fig. 33). The rotor should also be
plastic ring (Fig. 30). Note that 2.5L and 4.0L pointed at 5 o’clock position.
engines have different alignment holes (Fig. It may be necessary to rotate rotor and distributor
30). shaft (very slightly) to engage distributor shaft with
(7) Rotate distributor shaft and install pin punch slot in oil pump gear. The same may have to be done
tool through proper alignment hole in plastic ring to engage distributor gear with camshaft gear.
(Fig. 30) and into mating access hole in distributor The distributor is correctly installed when:
housing. This will prevent distributor shaft and rotor • rotor is pointed at 3 o’clock position (2.5L
from rotating. engine), or at 5 o’clock position (4.0L engine).
(8) Clean distributor mounting hole area of engine • plastic alignment pin (or pin punch tool) is still
block. installed to distributor.
(9) Install new distributor-to-engine block gasket • number 1 cylinder piston is set at top dead cen-
(Fig. 26). ter (TDC) (compression stroke).
(10) Install rotor to distributor shaft. • centerline of slot at base of distributor is aligned
(11) 2.5L 4-Cylinder Engine: Pre-position distrib- to centerline of distributor holddown bolt hole on
utor into engine while holding centerline of base slot engine. In this position, the holddown bolt should
in 1 o’clock position (Fig. 31). Continue to engage dis- easily pass through slot and into engine.
tributor into engine. The rotor and distributor will No adjustments are necessary. Proceed to next
rotate clockwise during installation. This is due to step.
the helical cut gears on distributor and camshaft.
Fig. 31 Distributor Pre-position—All Engines Fig. 33 Distributor Engaged Position—4.0L

6-Cylinder Engine
CAUTION: If the distributor cap is incorrectly posi-
tioned on distributor housing, cap or rotor may be
damaged when engine is started.
(16) Install distributor cap. Tighten distributor cap

holddown screws to 3 N·m (26 in. lbs.) torque.
(17) If removed, install spark plug cables to dis-
tributor cap. For proper firing order, refer to Specifi-
cations section at the end of this group. See Engine
Firing Order.
(18) Connect distributor wiring harness to main
engine harness.
(19) Connect battery cable to battery.
IGNITION SWITCH AND KEY CYLINDER

The ignition key must be in the key cylinder for
cylinder removal. The key cylinder must be removed
first before removing ignition switch.
KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL

Fig. 32 Distributor Engaged Position—2.5L (2) If equipped with an automatic transmission,
4-Cylinder Engine place shifter in PARK position.
(3) Rotate key to ON position.
(12) Install distributor holddown clamp and bolt.
(4) A release tang is located on bottom of key cyl-
Tighten bolt to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.) torque.
inder (Fig. 34).
(13) Remove pin punch tool from distributor. Or, if
(5) Position a small screwdriver or pin punch into
plastic alignment pin was used, remove it straight
tang access hole on bottom of steering column lower
down from bottom of distributor. Discard plastic pin.
cover (Fig. 35).
(14) If removed, install camshaft position sensor to
(6) Push the pin punch up while pulling key cylin-
distributor. Align wiring harness grommet to notch in
der from steering column.
distributor housing.
(15) Install rotor.
Fig. 34 Key Cylinder Release Tang
Fig. 36 Ignition Switch Lock Tab
Fig. 35 Key Cylinder and Cover Removal Fig. 37 Switch In ON Position

IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL (2) Connect two electrical connectors to rear of
(1) Remove key cylinder. Refer to previous steps. ignition switch. Make sure that locking tabs are fully
(2) Remove lower steering column cover screws seated into wiring connectors.
and remove cover (Fig. 35). (3) Position switch to column and install tamper
(3) Remove ignition switch mounting screw (Fig. proof screw. Tighten screw to 3 N·m (26 in. lbs.).
38). Use tamper proof torx bit (Snap-Ont SDMTR10 (4) Install steering column lower cover.
or equivalent) to remove the screw.
(4) Using a small screwdriver, push on locking tab KEY CYLINDER INSTALLATION
(Fig. 36) and remove switch from steering column. (1) If equipped with an automatic transmission,
(5) Disconnect two electrical connectors at rear of place shifter in PARK position.
ignition switch (Fig. 38). (2) Position key cylinder into steering column as it
would normally be in the ON position.
IGNITION SWITCH INSTALLATION (3) Press key cylinder into column until it snaps
(1) Before installing ignition switch, rotate the slot into position.
in the switch to the ON position (Fig. 37). (4) Check mechanical operation of switch. Auto-
matic Transmission: Be sure transmission lever is
Procedures section of this group for more informa-
tion.
ENGINE FIRING ORDER—2.5L 4-CYLINDER

ENGINE
Fig. 38 Ignition Switch Removal/Installation

ENGINE FIRING ORDER—4.0L 6-CYLINDER
locked in PARK position after key removal. If key is
ENGINE
difficult to rotate or is difficult to remove, the shift
lever-to-steering column cable may be out of adjust-
ment or defective. Refer to Group 21, Transmission
for procedures. Manual Transmission: Be sure key
cannot be removed until release lever is operated. If
key can be removed, release lever mechanism may be
defective. Release lever mechanism is not serviced
separately. If repair is necessary, the steering column
must be replaced. Refer to Group 19, Steering for
procedures.
(5) Connect negative cable to battery.
(6) Check electrical operation of switch.
SHIFTER/IGNITION INTERLOCK
On models equipped with an automatic transmis-
sion, a cable connects the ignition switch with the
floor shift lever. The shifter will be locked in the
PARK position when the ignition key is in the LOCK SPARK PLUGS
or ACCESSORY positions. The cable can be adjusted
or replaced. Refer to Group 21, Transmissions for ENGINE PLUG TYPE ELECTRODE GAP
procedures. The ignition interlock device within the 2.5L/4.0L RC12ECC 0.89 mm (0.035 in.)
steering column is not serviceable. If service is nec-
essary, the steering column must be replaced. Refer
to Group 19, Steering for procedures. SPARK PLUG CABLE RESISTANCE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
SPECIFICATIONS 250 Ohms Per Inch 1000 Ohms Per Inch
IGNITION TIMING 3000 Ohms Per Foot 12,000 Ohms Per Foot
Ignition timing is not adjustable on any engine.
Refer to Ignition Timing in the Diagnostics/Service
IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE
PRIMARY RESISTANCE SECONDARY RESISTANCE

COIL MANUFACTURER
21-27°C (70-80°F) 21-27°C (70-80°F)
Diamond 0.97 - 1.18 Ohms 11,300 - 15,300 Ohms
Toyodenso 0.95 - 1.20 Ohms 11,300 - 13,300 Ohms
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Distributor Hold Down Bolt . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
Ignition Coil Mounting
(if tapped bolts are used) . . . . . 5 N·m (50 in. lbs.)
Ignition Coil Mounting (if nuts/
bolts are used) . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m (100 in. lbs.)
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 N·m (9 in. lbs.)
Spark Plugs (all engines) . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
XJ INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEMS 8E - 1
INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION GLOVE BOX COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 GLOVE BOX LATCH STRIKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 HEADLAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INSTRUMENT PANEL CIGAR LIGHTER . . . . . . . 3 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER COMPONENTS . . . . . 18
INSTRUMENT PANEL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . . 4 INSTRUMENT PANEL ACCESSORY SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 BEZEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . 26
CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL . . . . . . . 14
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SUPPORT
INSTRUMENT PANEL CIGAR LIGHTER . . . . . . 11 BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
INSTRUMENT PANEL POWER OUTLET . . . . . . 12 INSTRUMENT PANEL END CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION INSTRUMENT PANEL TOP COVER . . . . . . . . . . 21
CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 KNEE BLOCKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
CLUSTER BEZEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 STEERING COLUMN OPENING COVER . . . . . . 13
GLOVE BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION mounted on or in the instrument panel. If you cannot

locate a listing for the component or system you are
INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEM servicing in the table of contents for this group, or if
you are uncertain as to which vehicle system a com-
DESCRIPTION ponent belongs to, it is suggested that you refer to
The instrument panel serves as the command cen- the alphabetical Component and System Index
ter of the vehicle, which necessarily makes it a very found at the back of this service manual.
complex unit. The instrument panel is designed to
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive
house the controls and monitors for standard and
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this
optional powertrains, climate control systems, audio
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD
systems, lighting systems, safety systems and many
versions of affected vehicle components have been
other comfort or convenience items. The instrument
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions.
panel is also designed so that all of the various con-
While most of the illustrations used in this group
trols can be safely reached and the monitors can be
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and
easily viewed by the vehicle operator when driving,
service procedures outlined can generally be
while still allowing relative ease of access to each of
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule
these items for service. See the owner’s manual in
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a
the vehicle glove box for more information on the fea-
special illustration or procedure is required.
tures, use and operation of all of the instrument
panel components and systems.
This group is responsible for covering service infor- INSTRUMENT PANEL
mation for the vehicle instrument panel systems.
However, complete service information coverage for DESCRIPTION
all of the systems and components housed in the This instrument panel uses a full-width structural
instrument panel in a single section of the service plastic foundation as its primary support. When the
manual would not be practical. Therefore, the service two primary molded plastic components of this struc-
information for any component will be found in the ture are vibration welded together they provide supe-
group designated to cover the vehicle system that the rior instrument panel stiffness and integrity to help
component belongs to, even though the component is
8E - 2 INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEMS XJ
reduce buzzes, squeaks, and rattles even on the The low-line cluster includes the following analog
bumpiest roads. gauges:
This type of construction also provides improved • Fuel gauge
energy absorption which, in conjunction with the • Speedometer.
dual airbag modules and seat belts, helps to improve This cluster also includes provisions for the follow-
occupant protection. This foundation structure also ing indicator lamps:
serves as the air duct for the heating and air condi- • Airbag indicator lamp
tioning system panel outlets, which greatly reduces • Anti-lock brake system lamp
the number of components used over conventional • Brake warning lamp
instrument panel construction. • Coolant temperature warning lamp
Modular instrument panel construction allows all • Cruise-on indicator lamp
of the gauges and controls to be serviced from the • Four-wheel drive (Part Time and/or Full Time)
front of the panel. In addition, most of the instru- indicator lamps
ment panel electrical components can be accessed • Headlamp high beam indicator lamp
without complete instrument panel removal. If neces- • Low oil pressure warning lamp
sary, the instrument panel can be removed from the • Low washer fluid warning lamp
vehicle as an assembly. • Malfunction indicator (Check Engine) lamp
Removal of the steering column opening cover and • Seat belt reminder lamp
knee blocker provides access to the steering column • Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) indicator
mounts, the steering column wiring, the headlamp lamp
switch, the electronic combination flasher, and much • Turn signal indicator lamps
of the instrument panel wiring. Removal of the glove • Upshift indicator lamp (manual transmission)
box provides access to the heating and air condition- • Voltage warning lamp.
ing electrical and vacuum harnesses, the blower The high-line cluster replaces some of the indicator
motor relay, the radio antenna coaxial cable, the lamps found in the low-line cluster with analog
lower passenger side airbag mounts, and additional gauges. The high-line cluster includes the following
instrument panel wiring. analog gauges:
Removal of the instrument panel center bezel • Coolant temperature gauge
allows access to the radio, the heating and air condi- • Fuel gauge
tioning controls, the accessory switches, the cigar • Oil pressure gauge
lighter, and the accessory power outlet. Removal of • Speedometer
the instrument cluster bezel allows access to the • Tachometer
instrument cluster. Removal of the cluster assembly • Voltmeter.
allows access to the cluster illumination and indica- The high-line cluster also adds a check gauges
tor lamp bulbs, and more of the instrument panel lamp and a low fuel warning lamp to the remaining
wiring. indicator lamps found in the low-line cluster.
Removal of the instrument panel top cover allows Both instrument clusters feature circuitry that has
access to the upper passenger side airbag mounts. a self-diagnostic actuator test capability, which will
Instrument panel removal is required for service of test each of the CCD bus message-controlled func-
most internal components of the heating and air con- tions of the cluster by lighting the appropriate indi-
ditioning system housing. cator lamps and positioning the gauge needles at
several predetermined locations on the gauge faces in
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER a prescribed sequence. For more information on this
function, refer to Instrument Cluster in the Diag-
DESCRIPTION nosis and Testing section of this group.
Two basic instrument clusters are offered on this The instrument cluster circuitry also integrates a
model: low-line, or high-line. Both clusters are elec- chime tone generator and a timer circuit. These
tromechanical units that utilize integrated circuitry items replace the chime or buzzer module, and the
and information carried on the Chrysler Collision separate timer circuit for the rear window defogger
Detection (CCD) data bus network for control of all system. Refer to Chime Warning System in the
gauges and many of the indicator lamps. These clus- Description and Operation section of Group 8U -
ters also incorporate a digital Vacuum Fluorescent Chime/Buzzer Warning Systems for more information
Display (VFD) for the odometer/trip odometer display on the chime functions of the instrument cluster.
functions. Some variations of each cluster exist due Refer to Rear Window Defogger System in the
to optional equipment and regulatory requirements. Description and Operation section of Group 8N -
Electrically Heated Systems for more information on The seat belt reminder lamp is controlled by the
the timer function of the instrument cluster. instrument cluster programming. The instrument
The instrument clusters for this model are serviced cluster circuitry uses CCD data bus messages from
only as complete units. If a cluster gauge or the clus- the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), Airbag Con-
ter circuit board are faulty, the entire cluster must be trol Module (ACM), and the Sentry Key Immobilizer
replaced. The cluster lens, the cluster hood and Module (SKIM) to control all of the remaining indi-
mask, the rear cluster housing cover, the odometer cator lamps.
reset knob boot and the incandescent lamp bulbs and Each of the indicator lamps in the instrument clus-
holders are available for service replacement. ter uses incandescent bulbs and holders, which are
available for service replacement.
OPERATION
CLUSTER ILLUMINATION LAMP
GAUGE The cluster illumination lamps are hard wired in
With the ignition switch in the On or Start posi- the instrument cluster. When the park or head lamps
tions, voltage is supplied to all gauges through the are turned on, the cluster illumination lamps light.
instrument cluster electronic circuit board. With the Illumination brightness is adjusted by rotating the
ignition switch in the Off position, voltage is not sup- headlamp switch knob (clockwise to dim, counter-
plied to the gauges. The gauges do not accurately clockwise to brighten). The instrument cluster illumi-
indicate any vehicle condition unless the ignition nation lamps receive battery feed from the panel
switch is in the On or Start positions. dimmer rheostat in the headlamp switch through a
All of the instrument cluster gauges, except the fuse in the fuseblock module.
odometer, are air core magnetic units. Two fixed elec- The instrument cluster electronic circuitry also
tromagnetic coils are located within the gauge. These monitors the cluster illumination lamp dimming level
coils are wrapped at right angles to each other whenever the park or head lamps are turned on. The
around a movable permanent magnet. The movable instrument cluster electronic circuitry responds by
magnet is suspended within the coils on one end of a adjusting the dimming level of the odometer Vacuum
shaft. The gauge needle is attached to the other end Fluorescent Display (VFD), and sending dimming
of the shaft. level messages over the Chrysler Collision Detection
One of the coils has a fixed current flowing (CCD) data bus network. When the park lamps or
through it to maintain a constant magnetic field headlamps are turned off, the VFD is illuminated at
strength. Current flow through the second coil full brightness for improved daylight visibility.
changes, which causes changes in its magnetic field Each of the cluster illumination lamps is located on
strength. The current flowing through the second coil the instrument cluster circuit board. Each cluster
is changed by the instrument cluster electronic cir- illumination lamp has a replaceable bulb and bulb
cuitry in response to messages received on the holder.
Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus network.
The gauge needle moves as the movable permanent INSTRUMENT PANEL CIGAR LIGHTER
magnet aligns itself to the changing magnetic fields
created around it by the electromagnets. The instru- DESCRIPTION
ment cluster circuitry is programmed to move all of A cigar lighter is standard equipment on this
the gauge needles back to the low end of their respec- model. The cigar lighter is installed in the instru-
tive scales after the ignition switch is turned to the ment panel accessory switch bezel, which is located
Off position. near the bottom of the instrument panel center bezel
area, below the heater and air conditioner controls.
INDICATOR LAMP The cigar lighter base is secured by a snap fit within
Indicator lamps are located in the instrument clus- the accessory switch bezel.
ter and are served by the cluster circuit board and The cigar lighter receptacle is serviced only as a
connectors. Many of the indicator lamps in the part of the accessory switch bezel unit. If the cigar
instrument cluster are controlled by the instrument lighter base is faulty or damaged, the accessory
cluster circuitry in response to messages received switch bezel unit must be replaced. The cigar lighter
over the Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus knob and heating element unit is available for ser-
network. vice. This component cannot be repaired and, if
The anti-lock brake system lamp, brake warning faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
lamp, four-wheel drive indicator lamps, headlamp
high beam indicator lamp, low washer fluid warning
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps are hard wired.
OPERATION current capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal
The cigar lighter consists of two major components: functions.
a knob and heating element unit, and the cigar The cigar lighter relay cannot be repaired or
lighter base or receptacle shell. The receptacle shell adjusted and, if faulty or damaged, it must be
is connected to ground, and an insulated contact in replaced.
the bottom of the shell is connected to battery cur-
rent. The cigar lighter receives battery voltage from a OPERATION
fuse in the junction block through the cigar lighter The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a
relay only when the ignition switch is in the Acces- resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one mov-
sory or On positions. Refer to Cigar Lighter Relay able) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed)
in the Description and Operation section of this relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts
group for more information on this component. (normally closed) by spring pressure. When the elec-
The cigar lighter knob and heating element are tromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable
encased within a spring-loaded housing, which also contact away from the normally closed fixed contact,
features a sliding protective heat shield. When the and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed
knob and heating element are inserted in the recep- contact.
tacle shell, the heating element resistor coil is When the electromagnetic coil is de-energized,
grounded through its housing to the receptacle shell. spring pressure returns the movable contact to the
If the cigar lighter knob is pushed inward, the heat normally closed position. The resistor or diode is con-
shield slides up toward the knob exposing the heat- nected in parallel with the electromagnetic coil in the
ing element, and the heating element extends from relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes that are
the housing toward the insulated contact in the bot- produced when the coil is de-energized.
tom of the receptacle shell.
Two small spring-clip retainers are located on INSTRUMENT PANEL POWER OUTLET
either side of the insulated contact inside the bottom
of the receptacle shell. These clips engage and hold DESCRIPTION
the heating element against the insulated contact An accessory power outlet is standard equipment
long enough for the resistor coil to heat up. When the on this model. The power outlet is installed in the
heating element is engaged with the contact, battery instrument panel accessory switch bezel, which is
current can flow through the resistor coil to ground, located near the bottom of the instrument panel cen-
causing the resistor coil to heat. ter bezel area, below the heater and air conditioner
When the resistor coil becomes sufficiently heated, controls. The power outlet base is secured by a snap
excess heat radiates from the heating element caus- fit within the accessory switch bezel. A plastic protec-
ing the spring-clips to expand. Once the spring-clips tive cap snaps into the power outlet base when the
expand far enough to release the heating element, power outlet is not being used, and hangs from the
the spring-loaded housing forces the knob and heat- power outlet base mount by an integral bail strap
ing element to pop back outward to their relaxed while the power outlet is in use.
position. When the cigar lighter knob and element The power outlet receptacle unit and the accessory
are pulled out of the receptacle shell, the protective power outlet protective cap are serviced only as a
heat shield slides downward on the housing so that part of the accessory switch bezel unit. If the power
the heating element is recessed and shielded around outlet base is faulty or damaged, the entire accessory
its circumference for safety. switch bezel unit must be replaced.
CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY OPERATION

The power outlet base or receptacle shell is con-
DESCRIPTION nected to ground, and an insulated contact in the
The cigar lighter relay is an electromechanical bottom of the shell is connected to battery current.
device that switches fused battery current to the The power outlet receives battery voltage from a fuse
cigar lighter when the ignition switch is turned to in the junction block at all times.
the Accessory or On positions. The cigar lighter relay While the power outlet is very similar to a cigar
is located in the junction block, on the right cowl side lighter base unit, it does not include the two small
panel below the instrument panel in the passenger spring-clip retainers inside the bottom of the recepta-
compartment. cle shell that are used to secure the cigar lighter
The cigar lighter relay is a International Standards heating element to the insulated contact.
Organization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the
ISO specifications have common physical dimensions,
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch
as required.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (7) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
If all of the gauges and/or indicator lamps are inop- Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
erative, perform the Preliminary Diagnosis. If an Install the instrument cluster. Connect the battery
individual gauge or Chrysler Collision Detection negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On
(CCD) data bus message-controlled indicator lamp is position. Set the park brake. The red brake warning
inoperative, go directly to the Actuator Test. If an lamp should light. If OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, go
individual hard wired indicator lamp is inoperative, to Step 9.
refer to Instrument Cluster - Hard Wired Lamp (8) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
Diagnosis in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Turn on the park lamps and adjust the panel lamps
this group for the procedures to diagnosis that lamp. dimmer rheostat in the headlamp switch to the full
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Instrument bright position. The cluster illumination lamps
Cluster in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia- should light. If OK, refer to Instrument Cluster -
grams. Actuator Test in the Diagnosis and Testing section
of this group. If not OK, go to Step 10.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (9) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY Remove the instrument cluster. Connect the battery
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR position. Check for battery voltage at the fused igni-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- tion switch output (run/start) circuit cavity of the
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- instrument cluster wire harness connector A. If OK,
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL refer to Instrument Cluster - Actuator Test in the
INJURY. Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If not
OK, repair the open fused ignition switch output
(run/start) circuit to the fuse in the junction block as
PRELIMINARY DIAGNOSIS required.
(1) If the indicator lamps operate, but none of the (10) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
gauges operate, go to Step 2. If all of the gauges and cable. Remove the instrument cluster. Check for con-
the data bus message-controlled indicator lamps are tinuity between the ground circuit cavity of the
inoperative, go to Step 5. instrument cluster wire harness connector A and a
(2) Check the fused B(+) fuse in the Power Distri- good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, refer
bution Center (PDC). If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, to Instrument Cluster - Actuator Test in the
repair the shorted circuit or component as required Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If not
and replace the faulty fuse. OK, repair the open ground circuit to ground as
(3) Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse required.
in the PDC. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the
open fused B(+) circuit to the battery as required. ACTUATOR TEST
(4) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative The instrument cluster actuator test will put the
cable. Remove the instrument cluster. Connect the instrument cluster into its self-diagnostic mode. In
battery negative cable. Check for battery voltage at this mode the instrument cluster can perform a self-
the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the instrument cluster diagnostic test that will confirm that the instrument
wire harness connector A. If OK, refer to Instru- cluster circuitry, the gauges, and the CCD data bus
ment Cluster - Actuator Test in the Diagnosis and message controlled indicator lamps are capable of
Testing section of this group. If not OK, repair the operating as designed. During the actuator test the
open fused B(+) circuit to the fuse in the PDC as instrument cluster circuitry will position each of the
required. gauge needles at various specified calibration points,
(5) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/ and turn all of the CCD data bus message-controlled
start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 6. lamps on and off at specified time intervals (Fig. 1)
If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as or (Fig. 2).
required and replace the faulty fuse. Successful completion of the actuator test will con-
(6) Turn the ignition switch to the On position and firm that the instrument cluster is operational. How-
check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch ever, there may still be a problem with the CCD data
output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, bus, the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), the Air-
go to Step 7. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition bag Control Module (ACM), the Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer Module (SKIM) or the inputs to one of these ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM LAMP
electronic control modules. Use a DRB scan tool and The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual for testing Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) lamp condition. If the
of these components. ABS lamp stays on with the ignition switch in the
If an individual gauge does not respond properly, On position, or comes on and stays on while driving,
or does not respond at all during the actuator test, refer to Antilock Brakes in the Diagnosis and Test-
the instrument cluster should be removed. However, ing section of Group 5 - Brakes for diagnosis. If no
check that the gauge mounting screws on the instru- ABS problem is found, the following procedure will
ment cluster electronic circuit board for proper tight- help locate a short or open in the ABS lamp circuit.
ness before considering instrument cluster For complete circuit descriptions, refer to Instru-
replacement. If the gauge mounting screws check ment Cluster in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring
OK, replace the faulty cluster. Diagrams.
If an individual indicator lamp does not illuminate (1) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/
during the actuator test, the instrument cluster start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2.
should be removed. However, check that the incan- If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
descent lamp bulb is not faulty and that the bulb required and replace the faulty fuse.
holder is properly installed on the instrument cluster (2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
electronic circuit board before considering instrument Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
cluster replacement. If the bulb and bulb holder output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK,
check OK, replace the faulty instrument cluster. go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition
(1) Begin the test with the ignition switch in the switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch
Off position. as required.
(2) Depress the trip odometer reset button. (3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
(3) While holding the trip odometer reset button Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
depressed, turn the ignition switch to the On posi- Remove the instrument cluster. Connect the battery
tion, but do not start the engine. negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On
(4) Release the trip odometer reset button. position and within five seconds check for continuity
(5) Compare the operation of the suspect gauge(s) between the ABS warning indicator driver circuit
and/or indicator lamp(s) with the Instrument Cluster cavity of the instrument cluster wire harness connec-
Actuator Test chart (Fig. 1) or (Fig. 2). tor A and a good ground. There should be continuity
(6) The instrument cluster will automatically exit for five seconds after ignition On, and then an open
the self-diagnostic mode and return to normal opera- circuit. If OK, replace the faulty bulb. If not OK, go
tion at the completion of the test, if the ignition to Step 4.
switch is turned to the Off position during the test, (4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
or if a vehicle speed message indicating that the Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
vehicle is moving is received from the PCM on the Disconnect the Controller Anti-lock Brake (CAB) wire
CCD data bus during the test. harness connector. Check for continuity between the
(7) Go back to Step 1 to repeat the test, if ABS warning indicator driver circuit cavity of the
required. instrument cluster wire harness connector A and a
good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go
HARD WIRED LAMP DIAGNOSIS to Step 5. If not OK, repair the shorted ABS warning
Each of the lamps found in this section depends indicator driver circuit as required.
upon a hard wired circuit input to the instrument (5) Check for continuity between the ABS warning
cluster for proper operation. The following procedures indicator driver circuit cavities of the instrument
will help to diagnose conditions that may cause an cluster wire harness connector A and the CAB wire
inoperative hard wired lamp circuit condition. harness connector. There should be continuity. If OK,
refer to Antilock Brakes in the Diagnosis and Test-
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- ing section of Group 5 - Brakes for diagnosis of the
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE CAB. If not OK, repair the open ABS warning indi-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY cator driver circuit as required.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR BRAKE WARNING LAMP
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- brake warning lamp condition. If the brake warning
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL lamp stays on with the ignition switch in the On
INJURY. position and the park brake released, or comes on
Fig. 1 Low-Line Instrument Cluster Actuator Test

Fig. 2 High-Line Instrument Cluster Actuator Test

while driving, refer Base Brake System for vehicles between the red brake warning indicator driver cir-
not equipped with the four wheel anti-lock brake sys- cuit cavity of the instrument cluster wire harness
tem, or refer to Antilock Brakes for vehicles connector A and a good ground. There should be no
equipped with the four wheel anti-lock brake system continuity. If OK, go to Step 9. If not OK, repair the
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 5 - shorted red brake warning indicator driver circuit as
Brakes for further diagnosis. If no brake system required.
problem is found, the following procedure will help (9) Check for continuity between the red brake
locate a short or open circuit, or a faulty switch. For warning indicator driver circuit cavities of the instru-
complete circuit diagrams, refer to Instrument ment cluster wire harness connector A and the brake
Cluster in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia- warning switch wire harness connector. There should
grams. be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty bulb. If not
(1) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/ OK, repair the open red brake warning indicator
start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. driver circuit as required.
If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
required and replace the faulty fuse. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE INDICATOR LAMP - FULL TIME
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch four-wheel drive indicator lamp condition. If the
output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, problem being diagnosed is related to lamp accuracy,
go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition be certain to confirm that the problem is with the
switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch lamp or switch and not with a damaged or inopera-
as required. tive transfer case or transfer case linkage. Refer to
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. NV242 Diagnosis in the Diagnosis and Testing sec-
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. tion of Group 21 - Transmission for more informa-
Disconnect the wire harness connector at the park tion. If no transfer case problem is found, the
brake switch. With the park brake released, check for following procedure will help locate a short or open
continuity between the park brake switch terminal in the indicator lamp circuit. For complete circuit
and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If diagrams, refer to Instrument Cluster in the Con-
OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, adjust or replace the tents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
faulty park brake switch. (1) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/
(4) Disconnect the wire harness connector at the start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2.
brake warning switch. Check for continuity between If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as
the two terminals of the brake warning switch. There required and replace the faulty fuse.
should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, (2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
replace the faulty brake warning switch. Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
(5) Check for continuity between each of the two output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK,
brake warning switch terminals and a good ground. go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition
In each case, there should be no continuity. If OK, go switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch
to Step 6. If not OK, replace the faulty brake warn- as required.
ing switch. (3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
(6) With both the park brake switch and the brake Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
warning switch wire harness connectors still discon- Disconnect the transfer case switch wire harness con-
nected, check for continuity between the red brake nector. Check for continuity between the ground cir-
warning indicator driver circuit cavity of the park cuit cavity of the transfer case switch wire harness
brake switch wire harness connector and a good connector and a good ground. There should be conti-
ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to nuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
Step 7. If not OK, repair the shorted red brake warn- ground circuit to ground as required.
ing indicator driver circuit as required. (4) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
(7) With the ignition switch held in the Start posi- ignition switch to the On position. Install a jumper
tion, check for continuity between the red brake wire between the full time four wheel drive indicator
warning indicator driver circuit cavity of the park lamp driver circuit cavity of the transfer case switch
brake switch wire harness connector and a good wire harness connector and a good ground. The full
ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step time four-wheel drive indicator lamp should light. If
8. If not OK, repair the open red brake warning indi- OK, replace the faulty transfer case switch. If not
cator driver circuit to the ignition switch as required. OK, go to Step 5.
(8) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. (5) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
Remove the instrument cluster. Check for continuity Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
Remove the instrument cluster. With the transfer (5) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
case switch wire harness connector still disconnected, Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
check for continuity between the full time four wheel Remove the instrument cluster. With the transfer
drive indicator lamp driver circuit cavity of the case switch wire harness connector still disconnected,
instrument cluster wire harness connector B and a check for continuity between the part time four
good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go wheel drive indicator lamp driver circuit cavity of the
to Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted full time four instrument cluster wire harness connector B and a
wheel drive indicator lamp driver circuit as required. good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go
(6) Check for continuity between the full time four to Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted part time
wheel drive indicator lamp driver circuit cavities of four wheel drive indicator lamp driver circuit as
the instrument cluster wire harness connector B and required.
the transfer case switch wire harness connector. (6) Check for continuity between the part time
There should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty four wheel drive indicator lamp driver circuit cavities
bulb. If not OK, repair the open full time four wheel of the instrument cluster wire harness connector B
drive indicator lamp driver circuit as required. and the transfer case switch wire harness connector.
There should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE INDICATOR LAMP - PART TIME bulb. If not OK, repair the open part time four wheel
The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative drive indicator lamp driver circuit as required.
four-wheel drive indicator lamp condition. If the
problem being diagnosed is related to lamp accuracy, HEADLAMP HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LAMP
be certain to confirm that the problem is with the The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
lamp or switch and not with a damaged or inopera- headlamp high beam indicator lamp condition. If the
tive transfer case or transfer case linkage. Refer to problem being diagnosed is related to inoperative
NV231 Diagnosis or NV242 Diagnosis in the Diag- headlamp high beams, refer to Headlamp Diagno-
nosis and Testing section of Group 21 - Transmission sis in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group 8L
for more information. If no transfer case problem is - Lamps for diagnosis of the headlamp system. If no
found, the following procedure will help locate a headlamp system problems are found, the following
short or open in the indicator lamp circuit. For com- procedure will help locate an open in the high beam
plete circuit diagrams, refer to Instrument Cluster indicator lamp circuit. For complete circuit diagrams,
in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. refer to Instrument Cluster in the Contents of
(1) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/ Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as cable. Remove the instrument cluster.
required and replace the faulty fuse. (2) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. headlamps on and select the high beams with the
Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch multi-function switch stalk. Check for battery voltage
output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, at the high beam indicator driver circuit cavity of the
go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition instrument cluster wire harness connector A. If OK,
switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch replace the faulty bulb. If not OK, repair the open
as required. high beam indicator driver circuit to the headlamp
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. dimmer (multi-function) switch as required.
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
Disconnect the transfer case switch wire harness con- LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING LAMP
nector. Check for continuity between the ground cir- The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
cuit cavity of the transfer case switch wire harness low washer fluid warning lamp condition. If the prob-
connector and a good ground. There should be conti- lem being diagnosed is related to lamp accuracy, be
nuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open certain to confirm that the problem is with the lamp
ground circuit to ground as required. or washer fluid level sensor and not with a damaged
(4) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the or empty washer fluid reservoir. Inspect the reservoir
ignition switch to the On position. Install a jumper for proper fluid level and signs of damage or distor-
wire between the part time four wheel drive indicator tion that could affect sensor performance before you
lamp driver circuit cavity of the transfer case switch proceed with lamp diagnosis. Refer to Washer Sys-
wire harness connector and a good ground. The part tem in the Diagnosis and Testing section of Group
time four-wheel drive indicator lamp should light. If 8K - Wiper and Washer Systems for more informa-
OK, replace the faulty transfer case switch. If not tion. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Instru-
OK, go to Step 5.
ment Cluster in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Diagrams. cable. Remove the instrument cluster.
(1) Check the fused ignition switch output (run/ (2) Connect the battery negative cable. Activate
start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. the hazard warning system by moving the hazard
If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as warning switch button to the On position. Check for
required and replace the faulty fuse. battery voltage at the inoperative (right or left) turn
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. signal circuit cavity of the instrument cluster wire
Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch harness connector (connector A - left, or connector B -
output (run/start) fuse in the junction block. If OK, right). There should be a switching (on and off) bat-
go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open fused ignition tery voltage signal. If OK, replace the faulty (right or
switch output (run/start) circuit to the ignition switch left) indicator lamp bulb. If not OK, repair the open
as required. (right or left) turn signal circuit to the turn signal/
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. hazard warning (multi-function) switch as required.
Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
washer fluid level sensor. Install a jumper wire INSTRUMENT PANEL CIGAR LIGHTER
between the two cavities of the washer fluid level For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Horn/Ci-
sensor wire harness connector. Turn the ignition gar Lighter in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring
switch to the On position. The low washer fluid Diagrams.
warning lamp should light. Remove the jumper wire
and the lamp should go off. If OK, replace the faulty WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
washer fluid level sensor. If not OK, go to Step 4. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav- STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
ity of the washer fluid level sensor wire harness con- INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
nector and a good ground. There should be SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
open ground circuit to ground as required. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
(5) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative INJURY.
cable. Remove the instrument cluster. The washer
fluid level sensor wire harness connector is still dis- (1) Remove the cigar lighter knob and element
connected. Check for continuity between the low from the cigar lighter receptacle shell. Check for con-
washer fluid level sense circuit cavity of the instru- tinuity between the inside circumference of the cigar
ment cluster wire harness connector B and a good lighter receptacle shell and a good ground. there
ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK,
Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted low washer go to Step 3.
fluid level sense circuit as required. (2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
(6) Check for continuity between the low washer Check for battery voltage at the insulated contact
fluid level sense circuit cavities of the instrument located at the back of the cigar lighter receptacle
cluster wire harness connector B and the washer shell. If OK, replace the faulty cigar lighter knob and
fluid level sensor wire harness connector. There element. If not OK, go to Step 3.
should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty bulb. (3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
If not OK, repair the open low washer fluid level Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
sense circuit as required. Remove the instrument panel accessory switch bezel.
Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav-
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LAMP ity of the cigar lighter wire harness connector and a
The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to
turn signal indicator lamp condition. For any other Step 4. If not OK, repair the open ground circuit to
turn signal problem, refer to Turn Signal and Haz- ground as required.
ard Warning Systems in the Diagnosis and Testing (4) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
section of Group 8J - Turn Signal and Hazard Warn- ignition switch to the Accessory or On positions.
ing Systems for further diagnosis. If no turn signal or Check for battery voltage at the cigar lighter relay
hazard warning system problem is found, the follow- output circuit cavity of the cigar lighter wire harness
ing procedure will help locate a short or open in the connector. If OK, replace the faulty cigar lighter
indicator lamp circuit. For complete circuit diagrams, receptacle (instrument panel accessory switch bezel
refer to Instrument Cluster in the Contents of unit). If not OK, refer to Cigar Lighter Relay in
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for
further diagnosis.
CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the accessory relay
The cigar lighter relay (Fig. 3) is located in the wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 2. If not
junction block, on the right cowl side inner panel OK, repair the fused B(+) circuit to the fuse in the
below the instrument panel in the passenger com- junction block as required.
partment. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to (2) The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is
Horn/Cigar Lighter in the Contents of Group 8W - connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position,
Wiring Diagrams. but is not used for this application. Go to Step 3.
(3) The relay normally open terminal (87) is con-
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- nected to the common feed terminal (30) in the ener-
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE gized position. This terminal supplies battery voltage
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY to the cigar lighter when the relay is energized by
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR the ignition switch. There should be continuity
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR between the junction block cavity for relay terminal
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- 87 and the cigar lighter relay output circuit cavity of
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- the cigar lighter wire harness connector at all times.
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open cigar
INJURY. lighter relay output circuit to the cigar lighter wire
harness connector as required.
(1) Remove the cigar lighter relay from the junc- (4) The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to
tion block. Refer to Cigar Lighter Relay in the the electromagnet in the relay. It receives battery
Removal and Installation section of this group for the feed to energize the cigar lighter relay when the igni-
procedures. tion switch is in the Accessory or On positions. Turn
(2) A relay in the de-energized position should the ignition switch to the On position. Check for bat-
have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and tery voltage at the fused ignition switch output (acc/
no continuity between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go run) circuit cavity for relay terminal 86 in the
to Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. junction block. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair
(3) Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (elec- the open fused ignition switch output (acc/run) circuit
tromagnet) should be 75 6 5 ohms. If OK, go to Step to the ignition switch as required.
4. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. (5) The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to
(4) Connect a battery to terminals 85 and 86. the electromagnet in the relay. The junction block
There should now be continuity between terminals cavity for this terminal should have continuity to
30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A ground at all times. If not OK, repair the open
and 30. If OK, perform the Relay Circuit Test that ground circuit to ground as required.
follows. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
INSTRUMENT PANEL POWER OUTLET
For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Horn/Ci-
gar Lighter in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring
Diagrams.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-

BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
(1) Check the fused B(+) fuse in the junction block.

If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted cir-
Fig. 3 Cigar Lighter Relay cuit or component as required and replace the faulty
RELAY CIRCUIT TEST fuse.
(1) The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) of (2) Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) fuse
the junction block is connected to battery voltage and in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
should be hot at all times. Check for battery voltage repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the Power Dis-
tribution Center (PDC) as required.
(3) Remove the plastic protective cap from the
power outlet receptacle. Check for continuity between
the inside circumference of the power outlet recepta-
cle and a good ground. There should be continuity. If
OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, go to Step 5.
(4) Check for battery voltage at the insulated con-
tact located at the back of the power outlet recepta-
cle. If not OK, go to Step 5.
cable. Remove the instrument panel accessory switch
bezel. Check for continuity between the ground cir-
cuit cavity of the power outlet wire harness connector
and a good ground. There should be continuity. If
OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the open ground
circuit to ground as required.
(6) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the Fig. 4 Steering Column Opening Cover Remove/
power outlet wire harness connector. If OK, replace Install
the faulty power outlet receptacle (instrument panel
accessory switch bezel unit). If not OK, repair the
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the steering column opening cover to
open fused B(+) circuit to the junction block fuse as
the instrument panel.
required.
(2) Align the snap clip retainers on the steering
column opening cover with the receptacles in the
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION instrument panel.
(3) Press firmly on the steering column opening
STEERING COLUMN OPENING COVER cover over the snap clip locations until each of the
snap clips is fully engaged in its receptacle.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (4) Install and tighten the three screws that secure
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE the lower edge of the steering column opening cover
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY to the lower instrument panel reinforcement. Tighten
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (5) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- KNEE BLOCKER
INJURY. WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
REMOVAL STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
cable. SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
(2) If the vehicle is so equipped, move the tilt CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
steering column to the fully raised position. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
(3) Remove the three screws that secure the lower INJURY.
edge of the steering column opening cover to the
lower instrument panel reinforcement (Fig. 4).
(4) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide INSTALLATION
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the upper edge of the (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
steering column opening cover just below the cluster cable.
bezel on each side of the steering column away from (2) Remove the steering column opening cover
the instrument panel far enough to disengage the from the instrument panel. Refer to Steering Col-
two snap clip retainers from the receptacles in the umn Opening Cover in the Removal and Installa-
instrument panel. tion section of this group for the procedures.
(5) Remove the steering column opening cover (3) Remove the two screws that secure the knee
from the instrument panel. blocker to the instrument panel (Fig. 5).
INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER BEZEL

INJURY.
REMOVAL
cable.
Fig. 5 Knee Blocker Remove/Install (2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the instrument panel cen-
(4) Pull the upper edge of the knee blocker away ter bezel away from the instrument panel far enough
from the instrument panel far enough to disengage to disengage the six snap clip retainers that secure it
the two lower mounting tabs from the mounting slots from the receptacles in the instrument panel (Fig. 7).
in the lower instrument panel reinforcement.
(5) Remove the knee blocker from the instrument
panel.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the knee blocker to the instrument
panel.
(2) Install and tighten the four screws that secure
the knee blocker to the instrument panel. Tighten
the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.). Be certain that
the mounting screws are located in the screw hole on
each side of the steering column that is closest to the
driver side front door of the vehicle (Fig. 6).
Fig. 7 Instrument Panel Center Bezel Remove/Install

(3) Remove the center bezel from the instrument
panel.
Fig. 6 Knee Blocker Mounting Screw Location INSTALLATION

(1) Position the center bezel to the instrument
(3) Install the steering column opening cover onto
panel.
the instrument panel. Refer to Steering Column
(2) Align the snap clips on the center bezel with
Opening Cover in the Removal and Installation sec-
the receptacles in the instrument panel.
tion of this group for the procedures.
(3) Press firmly on the center bezel over each of
the snap clip locations until each of the six snap clips
is fully engaged in its receptacle on the instrument
panel.
INSTRUMENT PANEL ACCESSORY SWITCH switches, the cigar lighter and the accessory power
outlet on the back of the accessory switch bezel.
BEZEL
(3) Position the accessory switch bezel onto the
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- instrument panel.
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE (4) Install and tighten the three screws that secure
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY the accessory switch bezel to the instrument panel.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR Tighten the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (5) Install the center bezel onto the instrument
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- the Removal and Installation section of this group for
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL the procedures.
INJURY. (6) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY

REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
cable. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
(2) Remove the center bezel from the instrument RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
the Removal and Installation section of this group for INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
the procedures. SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
(3) Remove the three screws that secure the acces- CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
sory switch bezel to the instrument panel (Fig. 8). BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
(2) Remove the fuse access panel by unsnapping it
from the right cowl side trim panel.
(3) Remove the stamped nut that secures the right
cowl side trim to the junction block stud (Fig. 9).
(4) Remove the screw located above the fuse access
opening that secures the right cowl side trim to the
right cowl side inner panel.
(5) Remove the screw that secures the right door
sill trim and the right cowl side trim to the right
door opening sill.
(6) Remove the right cowl side trim panel from the
Fig. 8 Instrument Panel Accessory Switch Bezel vehicle.
Remove/Install (7) Refer to Junction Block in the Contents of
(4) Pull the accessory switch bezel away from the Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for cigar lighter relay
instrument panel far enough to access the instru- identification and location.
ment panel wire harness connectors. (8) Remove the cigar lighter relay from the recep-
(5) Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness tacle in the junction block.
connectors from the connector receptacles, the acces-
sory switches, the cigar lighter and the accessory INSTALLATION
power outlet on the back of the accessory switch (1) Refer to Junction Block in the Contents of
bezel. Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for the proper cigar
(6) Remove the accessory switch bezel from the lighter relay location.
instrument panel. (2) Position the cigar lighter relay to the receptacle
in the junction block.
INSTALLATION (3) Align the terminals of the cigar lighter relay
(1) Position the accessory switch bezel to the with the cavities in the junction block receptacle.
instrument panel. (4) Push on the cigar lighter relay case firmly and
(2) Reconnect the instrument panel wire harness evenly until all of the relay terminals are fully seated
connectors to the connector receptacles, the accessory within the cavities of the junction block receptacle.
REMOVAL
cable.
panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and
Installation section of this group for the procedures.
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in
the Removal and Installation section of this group for
the procedures.
(4) Remove the four screws exposed by the center
bezel removal that secure the cluster bezel to the
instrument panel.
(5) Remove the headlamp switch knob and shaft
from the headlamp switch. Refer to Headlamp
Switch in the Removal and Installation section of
(6) Disengage the two ends of the steering column
sight shield from each other at the connector located
below the lower steering column shroud (Fig. 10).
Fig. 9 Right Cowl Side Trim Remove/Install

(5) Position the right cowl side trim to the right
door sill trim.
(6) Install and tighten the screw that secures the
right cowl side trim to the right door sill trim.
Tighten the screw to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(7) Position the right cowl side trim to the right
cowl side inner panel.
right cowl side trim to the right cowl side inner
panel. Tighten the screw to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(9) Install the stamped nut that secures the right Fig. 10 Cluster Bezel Remove/Install
cowl side trim to the junction block stud.
(7) If the vehicle is so equipped, set the tilt steer-
(10) Install the fuse access panel by snapping it
ing column in its lowest position.
onto the right cowl side trim panel.
(8) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
flat-bladed tool, gently pry around the perimeter of
the cluster bezel to disengage the five snap clips from
CLUSTER BEZEL their receptacles in the instrument panel.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (9) Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE panel.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (1) Position the cluster bezel to the instrument
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- panel.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (2) Align the snap clips on the cluster bezel with
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL the receptacles in the instrument panel.
INJURY.
(3) Press firmly on the cluster bezel over each of and shaft release button on the inboard side of the
the snap clip locations until each of the snap clips is switch body.
fully engaged in its receptacle. (5) While holding the release button depressed,
(4) Engage the two ends of the steering column pull the headlamp switch control knob and shaft out
sight shield with each other at the connector located of the headlamp switch.
below the lower steering column shroud. (6) Remove the spanner nut that secures the head-
(5) Install the headlamp switch knob and shaft lamp switch to the instrument panel (Fig. 11).
onto the headlamp switch. Refer to Headlamp
Switch in the Removal and Installation section of
(6) Install and tighten the four screws that secure
the cluster bezel to the instrument panel beneath the
instrument panel center bezel. Tighten the screws to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(7) Install the center bezel onto the instrument
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in
the Removal and Installation section of this group for
the procedures.
(8) Install the knee blocker onto the instrument
Be certain that the two ends of the steering column
sight shield connector are engaged with each other
before installing the knee blocker.
HEADLAMP SWITCH Fig. 11 Headlamp Switch Remove/Install

WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (7) Pull the headlamp switch into the steering col-
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE umn opening area of the instrument panel far
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY enough to access the instrument panel wire harness
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR connectors.
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (8) Disconnect the two instrument panel wire har-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- ness connectors from the headlamp switch.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (9) Remove the headlamp switch from the instru-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL ment panel.
INJURY.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the headlamp switch to the instru-
WARNING: IF THE HEADLAMP SWITCH WAS ON, ment panel steering column opening.
WAIT FIVE MINUTES TO ALLOW THE CERAMIC (2) Reconnect the two instrument panel wire har-
DIMMER RESISTOR TO COOL. IF THE CERAMIC ness connectors to the headlamp switch.
DIMMER RESISTOR IS NOT ALLOWED TO COOL, IT (3) Position the headlamp switch behind its
CAN BURN YOUR FINGERS. mounting hole on the instrument panel.
(4) Install and tighten the spanner nut that
secures the headlamp switch to the instrument
REMOVAL panel. Tighten the nut to 2.7 N·m (24 in. lbs.).
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (5) Insert the shaft of the headlamp switch control
cable. knob and shaft unit through the opening in the span-
(2) Remove the knee blocker from the instrument ner nut and into the headlamp switch.
panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and (6) Push the headlamp switch control knob and
Installation section of this group for the procedures. shaft unit all the way into the headlamp switch body.
(3) Pull the headlamp switch control knob out to (7) Install the knee blocker onto the instrument
the On position stop. panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and
(4) Reach up under the instrument panel through Installation section of this group for the procedures.
the outboard side of the steering column opening to (8) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
access and depress the headlamp switch control knob
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER the cluster connector receptacles when the cluster is

installed in the instrument panel.
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (3) Install and tighten the four screws that secure
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE the instrument cluster to the instrument panel.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY Tighten the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR (4) Install the cluster bezel onto the instrument
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR panel. Refer to Cluster Bezel in the Removal and
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- Installation section of this group for the procedures.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (5) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
INJURY. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER COMPONENTS
Some of the components for the instrument cluster
used in this vehicle are serviced individually. The
REMOVAL serviced components include: the incandescent
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative instrument cluster indicator lamp and illumination
cable. lamp bulbs (including the integral bulb holders), the
(2) Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument odometer reset knob boot, the cluster lens, the clus-
panel. Refer to Cluster Bezel in the Removal and ter hood and mask unit, the instrument cluster hous-
Installation section of this group for the procedures. ing rear cover, and the instrument cluster housing
(3) Remove the four screws that secure the instru- (including the odometer reset knob, the gauge mask,
ment cluster to the instrument panel (Fig. 12). the gauges and the instrument cluster electronic cir-
cuit board). Following are the service procedures for
the instrument cluster components.

INJURY.
REMOVAL
CLUSTER BULB
Fig. 12 Instrument Cluster Remove/Install This procedure applies to each of the incandescent
(4) Pull the instrument cluster rearward far cluster illumination lamp or indicator lamp bulb and
enough to disengage the two self-docking instrument bulb holder units. However, the illumination lamps
panel wire harness connectors from the connector and the indicator lamps use different bulb and bulb
receptacles on the back of the cluster housing. Do holder unit sizes. They must never be interchanged.
not pull on the instrument cluster by the lens Be certain that any bulb and bulb holder unit
or mask sections, or the cluster components removed from the cluster electronic circuit board is
may become separated. reinstalled in the correct position. Always use the
(5) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru- correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incor-
ment panel. rect bulb size or type may overheat and cause dam-
age to the instrument cluster, the electronic circuit
INSTALLATION board and/or the gauges.
(1) Position the instrument cluster to the instru- (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
ment panel. cable.
(2) Align the instrument cluster with the cluster (2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru-
opening in the instrument panel and push the cluster ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
firmly and evenly into place. The instrument panel Removal and Installation section of this group for the
has two self-docking wire harness connectors that procedures.
will be automatically aligned with, and connected to
(3) Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise about (4) Gently pull the cluster lens away from the clus-
sixty degrees on the cluster electronic circuit board. ter housing.
(4) Pull the bulb and bulb holder unit straight
back to remove it from the bulb mounting hole in the ODOMETER RESET KNOB BOOT
cluster electronic circuit board (Fig. 13). (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable.
(2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru-
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
Removal and Installation section of this group for the
procedures.
(3) Remove the cluster lens from the cluster hous-
ing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Components -
Cluster Lens in the Removal and Installation sec-
tion of this group for the procedures.
(4) Remove the odometer reset knob boot by pull-
ing it out of the cluster lens.
CLUSTER HOOD AND MASK

Fig. 13 Cluster Bulb Locations
cable.
CLUSTER LENS (2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru-
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
cable. Removal and Installation section of this group for the
(2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru- procedures.
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the (3) Remove the cluster lens from the cluster hous-
Removal and Installation section of this group for the ing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Components -
procedures. Cluster Lens in the Removal and Installation sec-
(3) Work around the perimeter of the cluster hous- tion of this group for the procedures.
ing to disengage each of the latches that secure the
cluster lens to the cluster housing (Fig. 14).
Fig. 14 Instrument Cluster Components

(4) Work around the perimeter of the cluster hous- CAUTION: Always use the correct bulb size and
ing to disengage each of the latches that secure the type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type
cluster hood and mask unit to the cluster housing may overheat and cause damage to the instrument
(Fig. 14). cluster, the electronic circuit board and/or the
(5) Gently pull the cluster hood and mask unit gauges.
away from the cluster housing.
(1) Insert the bulb and bulb holder unit straight
CLUSTER HOUSING REAR COVER into the correct bulb mounting hole in the cluster
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative electronic circuit board.
cable. (2) With the bulb holder fully seated against the
(2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru- cluster electronic circuit board, turn the bulb holder
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the clockwise about sixty degrees to lock it into place.
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (3) Install the instrument cluster onto the instru-
procedures. ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
(3) Work around the perimeter of the cluster hous- Removal and Installation section of this group for the
ing to disengage each of the latches that secure the procedures.
rear cover to the cluster housing (Fig. 14). (4) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
(4) Gently pull the rear cover away from the back
of the cluster housing. CLUSTER LENS
(1) Align the cluster lens with the cluster hood and
CLUSTER HOUSING mask unit.
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (2) Press firmly and evenly on the cluster lens to
cable. install it onto the cluster housing.
(2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru- (3) Work around the perimeter of the cluster hous-
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the ing to be certain that each of the latches that secure
Removal and Installation section of this group for the the cluster lens to the cluster housing is fully
procedures. engaged.
(3) Remove all of the cluster illumination lamp (4) Install the instrument cluster onto the instru-
and indicator lamp bulb and bulb holder units from ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
the electronic circuit board. Refer to Instrument Removal and Installation section of this group for the
Cluster Components - Cluster Bulbs in the procedures.
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (5) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
procedures.
(4) Remove the cluster hood and mask unit from ODOMETER RESET KNOB BOOT
the cluster housing. Refer to Instrument Cluster (1) Position the odometer reset knob to the mount-
Components - Cluster Hood and Mask in the ing hole from the back of the cluster lens.
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (2) Pull the odometer reset knob into the mounting
procedures. hole from the face of the cluster lens.
(5) Remove the rear cover from the cluster hous- (3) Install the cluster lens onto the cluster hous-
ing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Components - ing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Components -
Cluster Housing Rear Cover in the Removal and Cluster Lens in the Removal and Installation sec-
Installation section of this group for the procedures. tion of this group for the procedures.
(4) Install the instrument cluster onto the instru-
INSTALLATION ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
CLUSTER BULB procedures.
This procedure applies to each of the incandescent (5) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
cluster illumination lamp or indicator lamp bulb and
bulb holder units. However, the illumination lamps CLUSTER HOOD AND MASK
and the indicator lamps use different bulb and bulb (1) Align the hood and mask unit with the cluster
holder unit sizes. They must never be interchanged. housing.
Be certain that any bulb and bulb holder unit (2) Press firmly and evenly on the hood and mask
removed from the cluster electronic circuit board is unit to install it onto the cluster housing.
reinstalled in the correct position. (3) Work around the perimeter of the cluster hous-
ing to be certain that each of the latches that secure
the hood and mask unit to the cluster housing is
fully engaged.
(4) Install the cluster lens onto the cluster hous- REMOVAL
ing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Components - (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Cluster Lens in the Removal and Installation sec- cable.
tion of this group for the procedures. (2) Remove the cluster bezel from the instrument
(5) Install the instrument cluster onto the instru- panel. Refer to Cluster Bezel in the Removal and
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the Installation section of this group for the procedures.
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (3) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
procedures. flat-bladed tool, gently pry the rear edge (farthest
(6) Reconnect the battery negative cable. from the windshield) of the instrument panel top
cover up and away from the instrument panel far
CLUSTER HOUSING REAR COVER enough to disengage the seven snap clip retainers
(1) Position the rear cover to the back of the clus- from their receptacles in the instrument panel (Fig.
ter housing. 15).
(2) Press firmly and evenly on the rear cover until
each of the latches that secure the rear cover to the
cluster housing is fully engaged.
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
procedures.
CLUSTER HOUSING
(1) Install the rear cover onto the cluster housing.
Refer to Instrument Cluster Components - Clus-
ter Housing Rear Cover in the Removal and
(2) Install the cluster hood and mask unit onto the
cluster housing. Refer to Instrument Cluster Com-
ponents - Cluster Hood and Mask in the Removal
and Installation section of this group for the proce- Fig. 15 Instrument Panel Top Cover Remove/Install
dures. (4) Pull the top cover sharply rearwards (away
(3) Install all of the cluster illumination lamp and from the windshield) to disengage the four snap clip
indicator lamp bulb and bulb holder units into the retainers that secure the forward edge of the top
electronic circuit board. Refer to Instrument Clus- cover from their receptacles in the instrument panel
ter Components - Cluster Bulbs in the Removal near the base of the windshield.
and Installation section of this group for the proce- (5) Remove the top cover from the instrument
dures. panel.
ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (1) Position the top cover onto the instrument
procedures. panel.
(5) Reconnect the battery negative cable. (2) Align the four snap clips on the forward edge
(nearest the windshield) of the top cover with the
INSTRUMENT PANEL TOP COVER snap clip receptacles in the instrument panel.
(3) Press firmly downward on the top cover over
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- each of the four forward snap clip locations until
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE each of the snap clips is fully seated in their recep-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY tacles in the instrument panel.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR (4) Align the seven snap clips on the rear edge
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (farthest from the windshield) of the top cover with
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- the snap clip receptacles in the instrument panel.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (5) Press firmly downward on the top cover over
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL each of the seven rearward snap clip locations until
INJURY. each of the snap clips is fully seated in their recep-
tacles in the instrument panel.
(6) Install the cluster bezel onto the instrument REMOVAL
panel. Refer to Cluster Bezel in the Removal and (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Installation section of this group for the procedures. cable.
(7) Reconnect the battery negative cable. (2) Remove the three screws that secure the glove
box hinge to the instrument panel lower glove box
GLOVE BOX opening reinforcement (Fig. 17).

INJURY.
ROLL DOWN
cable. Fig. 17 Glove Box Remove/Install
(2) Open the glove box. (3) Release the glove box latch.
(3) Locate the two rubber stop bumpers on the (4) Remove the glove box from the instrument
upper edge of the instrument panel glove box open- panel.
ing (Fig. 16).
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the glove box to the instrument panel
with the bin inserted in the glove box opening far
enough so that the stops on each side of the glove
box bin are located behind the rubber stop bumpers
located on the instrument panel upper glove box
opening reinforcement.
(2) Align the screw holes in the glove box hinge
with the mounting holes in the instrument panel
lower glove box opening reinforcement.
(3) Install and tighten the three screws that secure
the glove box hinge to the instrument panel lower
glove box opening reinforcement. Tighten the screws
to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
Fig. 16 Glove Box Stop Bumpers Remove/Install GLOVE BOX COMPONENTS

The glove box hinge, bin, inner door and latch are
(4) Remove the two glove box stop bumpers by
serviced only as a complete unit. The glove box outer
sliding them downward and out of the slots in the
door and lock cylinder are serviced separately.
instrument panel upper glove box opening reinforce-
ment. WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
(5) Roll the glove box downward so that the stops BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
molded into the glove box bin pass through the stop RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
bumper slots in the instrument panel upper glove STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
box opening reinforcement. INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
(6) Reverse the roll down procedure to roll the SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
glove box back up into the instrument panel. CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
INJURY.
REMOVAL
GLOVE BOX HINGE, BIN, INNER DOOR AND LATCH
cable.
(2) Remove the glove box from the instrument
panel. Refer to Glove Box - Removal in the
procedures.
(3) Remove the seven screws that secure the inner
glove box door to the outer glove box door (Fig. 18).
Fig. 19 Glove Box Lock Cylinder Remove/Install

press outward on the back of the lock cylinder from
the inside of the glove box door until the lock cylin-
der comes out of the glove box latch lock cylinder
bore.
INSTALLATION
GLOVE BOX HINGE, BIN, INNER DOOR AND LATCH
(1) Position the inner glove box door unit onto the
outer glove box door.
(2) Install and tighten the seven screws that
secure the inner glove box door to the outer glove box
door. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(3) Install the glove box onto the instrument panel.
Refer to Glove Box - Installation in the Removal
and Installation section of this group for the proce-
Fig. 18 Glove Box Components Remove/Install dures.
(4) Remove the inner glove box door unit from the
outer glove box door. GLOVE BOX OUTER DOOR
(1) Position the outer glove box door onto the inner
GLOVE BOX OUTER DOOR
glove box door unit.
(2) Install and tighten the seven screws that
cable.
secure the inner glove box door to the outer glove box
(2) Remove the glove box from the instrument
door. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
panel. Refer to Glove Box - Removal in the
(3) Install the glove box onto the instrument panel.
Refer to Glove Box - Installation in the Removal
procedures.
(3) Remove the seven screws that secure the inner
dures.
glove box door to the outer glove box door (Fig. 18).
(4) Remove the outer glove box door from the inner
glove box door unit. GLOVE BOX LOCK CYLINDER
(1) To install the lock cylinder, insert the key into
GLOVE BOX LOCK CYLINDER
the cylinder and align the lock cylinder tumblers
(1) Insert the key into the glove box lock cylinder
with the ramp in the glove box latch lock cylinder
and turn the lock cylinder to the unlocked position.
bore. The ramp is located at about the 7 o’clock posi-
(2) Open the glove box.
tion.
(3) With the key still in the lock cylinder, insert a
(2) Push the glove box lock cylinder firmly into the
small pin punch or a stiff wire into the lock cylinder
lock cylinder bore while rotating the key and cylinder
release hole (Fig. 19) and depress the lock cylinder
counterclockwise to the 6 o’clock position, where the
retaining tumbler.
lock cylinder retaining tumbler will snap back into
(4) While holding the retaining tumbler depressed,
place.
rotate the key in the lock cylinder clockwise and
GLOVE BOX LATCH STRIKER INSTRUMENT PANEL END CAP

WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY. INJURY.
REMOVAL REMOVAL
cable. DRIVER SIDE
(2) Open the glove box. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(3) Remove the passenger side airbag module from cable.
the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air- (2) Remove the knee blocker from the instrument
bag Module in the Removal and Installation section panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and
of Group 8M - Passive Restraint Systems for the pro- Installation section of this group for the procedures.
cedures. (3) Remove the top cover from the instrument
(4) Remove the two screws that secure the latch panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
striker to the instrument panel glove box opening Removal and Installation section of this group for the
upper reinforcement (Fig. 20). procedures.
(4) Remove the five screws that secure the end cap
to the instrument panel (Fig. 21).
Fig. 20 Glove Box Latch Striker Remove/Install

(5) Remove the latch striker from the instrument
panel glove box opening upper reinforcement.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the latch striker onto the instrument Fig. 21 Instrument Panel End Cap Remove/Install
panel glove box opening upper reinforcement. (5) Remove the end cap from the instrument
(2) Install and tighten the two screws that secure panel.
the latch striker to the instrument panel glove box
opening upper reinforcement. Tighten the screws to PASSENGER SIDE
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.). (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(3) Install the passenger side airbag module onto cable.
the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air- (2) Roll down the glove box from the instrument
bag Module in the Removal and Installation section panel. Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the
of Group 8M - Passive Restraint Systems for the pro- Removal and Installation section of this group for the
cedures. procedures.
(4) Close the glove box. (3) Remove the top cover from the instrument
(5) Reconnect the battery negative cable. panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
Removal and Installation section of this group for the INSTRUMENT PANEL CENTER SUPPORT
procedures.
BRACKET
(4) Remove the passenger side airbag module from
the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air- WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
bag Module in the Removal and Installation section BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
of Group 8M - Passive Restraint Systems for the pro- RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
cedures. STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
(5) Remove the six screws that secure the end cap INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
to the instrument panel (Fig. 21). SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
(6) Remove the end cap from the instrument CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
panel. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
INSTALLATION
DRIVER SIDE REMOVAL
(1) Position the end cap to the instrument panel. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(2) Install and tighten the five screws that secure cable.
the end cap to the instrument panel. Tighten the (2) Remove the center bezel from the instrument
screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.). panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in
(3) Install the top cover onto the instrument panel. the Removal and Installation section of this group for
Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the the procedures.
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (3) Remove the floor console from the floor panel
procedures. transmission tunnel. Refer to Floor Console in the
(4) Install the knee blocker onto the instrument Removal and Installation section of Group 23 - Body
panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and for the procedures.
Installation section of this group for the procedures. (4) Pull the floor carpet back from the front of the
(5) Reconnect the battery negative cable. floor panel transmission tunnel far enough to access
the instrument panel center support bracket mount-
PASSENGER SIDE ing nuts.
(1) Position the end cap to the instrument panel. (5) Remove the two nuts that secure the center
(2) Install and tighten the six screws that secure support bracket to the studs on the instrument panel
the end cap to the instrument panel. Tighten the (Fig. 22).
screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(3) Install the passenger side airbag module onto
the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air-
bag Module in the Removal and Installation section
of Group 8M - Passive Restraint Systems for the pro-
cedures.
(4) Install the top cover onto the instrument panel.
Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
procedures.
(5) Roll up the glove box into the instrument
panel. Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the
procedures.
Fig. 22 Instrument Panel Center Support Bracket

Remove/Install
(6) Remove the two nuts that secure the instru-
ment panel center support bracket to the studs on
the floor panel transmission tunnel.
(7) Remove the center support bracket from the
instrument panel.
INSTALLATION ter Support Bracket in the Removal and Installa-
(1) Position the center support bracket to the tion section of this group for the procedures.
instrument panel. (6) Remove the steering column from the vehicle.
(2) Install and tighten the two nuts that secure Refer to Steering Column in the Removal and
the instrument panel center support bracket to the Installation section of Group 19 - Steering for the
studs on the floor panel transmission tunnel. Tighten procedures.
the nuts to 28 N·m (250 in. lbs.). (7) Remove the screws from the centers of the
(3) Install and tighten the two nuts that secure instrument panel-to-body and the instrument panel-
the center support bracket to the studs on the instru- to-headlamp and dash wire harness connectors near
ment panel. Tighten the nuts to 28 N·m (250 in. lbs.). the left cowl side inner panel and disconnect both
(4) Position the floor carpet back onto the front of connectors.
the floor panel transmission tunnel. (8) Remove the screw from the center of the
(5) Install the floor console onto the floor panel instrument panel-to-floor wire harness connector
transmission tunnel. Refer to Floor Console in the near the floor panel transmission tunnel under the
Removal and Installation section of Group 23 - Body instrument panel and disconnect the connector.
for the procedures. (9) Disconnect the two wire harness connectors
(6) Install the center bezel onto the instrument located near the instrument panel-to-floor wire har-
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Center Bezel in ness connector at the floor panel transmission tunnel
the Removal and Installation section of this group for under the instrument panel.
the procedures. (10) Roll down the glove box from the instrument
(7) Reconnect the battery negative cable. panel. Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the
INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY procedures.
(11) Reach through the inboard side of the instru-
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- ment panel glove box opening to disconnect the two
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE halves of the heater-A/C system vacuum harness con-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY nector.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR (12) Reach under the right end of the instrument
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR panel to access and disconnect the two halves of the
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- radio antenna coaxial cable connector. On Left-Hand
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- Drive models only, also disengage the retainer on the
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL radio half of the coaxial cable from the heater-A/C
INJURY. housing kick cover.
(13) Remove the temperature control cable and
blend-air door crank arm from the heater-A/C hous-
REMOVAL ing as a unit. Refer to Temperature Control Cable
in the Removal and Installation section of Group 24 -
NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to Heating and Air Conditioning for the procedures.
turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in (14) Loosen the right and left instrument panel
the straight-ahead position. cowl side roll down screws about 6 mm (0.25 inch)
(Fig. 23).
(15) Remove the four screws and two nuts that
cable.
secure the top of the instrument panel to the top of
(2) Remove the trim from the left and right cowl
the dash panel near the base of the windshield.
side inner panels. Refer to Lower A-Pillar Cowl
(16) With the aid of an assistant, lift the top of the
Trim in the Removal and Installation section of
instrument panel assembly off of the two dash panel
Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
studs. Then pull the lower instrument panel rear-
ward to clear the cowl side roll down screws.
(17) Remove the instrument panel assembly from
the vehicle.
(4) Remove the top cover from the instrument
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the INSTALLATION
Removal and Installation section of this group for the (1) With the aid of an assistant, position the
procedures. instrument panel assembly onto the cowl side roll
(5) Remove the center support bracket from the down screws and the dash panel studs in the vehicle.
instrument panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Cen-
Fig. 23 Instrument Panel Assembly Remove/Install

(2) Install and tighten the four screws and two (8) Reconnect the two wire harness connectors
nuts that secure the top of the instrument panel to located near the instrument panel-to-floor wire har-
the top of the dash panel near the base of the wind- ness connector at the floor panel transmission tunnel
shield. Tighten the screws and nuts to 7 N·m (60 in. under the instrument panel.
lbs.). (9) Reconnect the instrument panel-to-floor wire
(3) Tighten the right and left instrument panel harness connector near the floor panel transmission
cowl side roll down screws. Tighten the screws to 28 tunnel under the instrument panel and tighten the
N·m (250 in. lbs.). connector screw. Tighten the screw to 4 N·m (35 in.
(4) Install the temperature control cable and lbs.).
blend-air door crank arm onto the heater-A/C hous- (10) Reconnect the instrument panel-to-body and
ing as a unit. Refer to Temperature Control Cable the instrument panel-to-headlamp and dash wire
in the Removal and Installation section of Group 24 - harness connectors near the left cowl side inner
Heating and Air Conditioning for the procedures. panel and tighten the connector screws. Tighten the
(5) Reach under the right end of the instrument screws to 4 N·m (35 in. lbs.).
panel to access and reconnect the two halves of the (11) Install the steering column into the vehicle.
radio antenna coaxial cable connector. On Left-Hand Refer to Steering Column in the Removal and
Drive models only, also engage the retainer on the Installation section of Group 19 - Steering for the
radio half of the coaxial cable onto the heater-A/C procedures.
housing kick cover. (12) Install the center support bracket onto the
(6) Reach through the inboard side of the instru- instrument panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Cen-
ment panel glove box opening to reconnect the two ter Support Bracket in the Removal and Installa-
halves of the heater-A/C system vacuum harness con- tion section of this group for the procedures.
nector. (13) Install the top cover onto the instrument
(7) Roll up the glove box into the instrument panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
panel. Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the Removal and Installation section of this group for the
Removal and Installation section of this group for the procedures.
procedures.
(14) Install the knee blocker onto the instrument Trim in the Removal and Installation section of
panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
Installation section of this group for the procedures. (16) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
(15) Install the trim onto the left and right cowl
side inner panels. Refer to Lower A-Pillar Cowl
INSTRUMENT PANEL SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HEADLAMP LEVELING SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (5) Depress switch mounting tabs to remove switch
from bezel.
HEADLAMP LEVELING SWITCH
REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
INJURY. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
cable. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide cable.
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the instrument panel cen- (2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
ter bezel away from the instrument panel to release flat-bladed tool, gently pry the instrument panel cen-
the six snap clip retainers (Fig. 1). ter bezel away from the instrument panel to release
the six snap clip retainers (Fig. 1).
(3) Remove the center bezel from the vehicle.
(4) Remove the three screws that secure the acces-
sory switch bezel to the instrument panel
(5) Pull the accessory switch bezel out from the
instrument panel far enough to unplug the wire har-
ness connectors (Fig. 2).
Fig. 1 Center Bezel Remove/Install

Fig. 2 Accessory Switch Bezel Remove/Install
(3) Disconnect the wiring harness from the switch.
(4) Remove the center bezel from the vehicle.
(6) Remove the accessory switch bezel from the (8) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Be
instrument panel. certain that both of the switch snap retainers in the
(7) Carefully pry the snap retainers at the top and receptacle on the back of the accessory switch bezel
bottom of the rear fog lamp switch receptacle on the are fully engaged. Tighten the mounting screws to
back of the accessory switch bezel with a small thin- 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
bladed screwdriver and pull the switch out of the
receptacle.
XJ AUDIO SYSTEMS 8F - 1
AUDIO SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE . . . . . . . . . 6
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
IGNITION-OFF DRAW FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
RADIO NOISE SUPPRESSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 RADIO NOISE SUPPRESSION
SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SPECIAL TOOLS
AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 AUDIO SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
GENERAL INFORMATION DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

INTRODUCTION RADIO
An audio system is standard factory-installed Available factory-installed radio receivers for this
equipment on this model, unless the vehicle is model include an AM/FM (RAL sales code), an
ordered with an available radio delete option. Refer AM/FM/cassette (RAS sales code), and an AM/FM/
to 8W-47 Audio System in Group 8W - Wiring Dia- CD/cassette/3-band graphic equalizer (RAZ sales
grams for complete circuit descriptions and diagrams. code). All factory-installed radio receivers are stereo
Electronically Tuned Radios (ETR), and include an
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive electronic digital clock function.
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this The radio can only be serviced by an authorized
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD radio repair station. Refer to the latest Warranty Pol-
versions of affected vehicle components have been icies and Procedures manual for a current listing of
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. authorized radio repair stations.
While most of the illustrations used in this group For more information on radio features, setting
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and procedures, and control functions refer to the owner’s
service procedures outlined can generally be manual in the vehicle glove box.
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a IGNITION-OFF DRAW FUSE
special illustration or procedure is required. All vehicles are equipped with an Ignition-Off
Draw (IOD) fuse that is removed when the vehicle is
shipped from the factory. This fuse feeds various
AUDIO SYSTEM accessories that require battery current when the
Several combinations of radio receivers and ignition switch is in the Off position, including the
speaker systems are offered on this model. The stan- clock and radio station preset memory functions. The
dard equipment audio system includes an AM/FM fuse is removed to prevent battery discharge during
(RAL sales code) receiver, and speakers in two loca- vehicle storage.
tions. When removing or installing the IOD fuse, it is
Following are general descriptions of the major important that the ignition switch be in the Off posi-
components in the standard and optional factory-in- tion. Failure to place the ignition switch in the Off
stalled audio systems. Refer to the owner’s manual in position can cause the radio display to become scram-
the vehicle glove box for more information on the fea- bled when the IOD fuse is removed and replaced.
tures, use and operation of each of the available Removing and replacing the IOD fuse again, with the
audio systems.
8F - 2 AUDIO SYSTEMS XJ
ignition switch in the Off position, will correct the nect allows the instrument panel assembly to be
scrambled display condition. removed and installed without removing the radio.
The IOD fuse should be checked if the radio is The factory-installed Electronically Tuned Radios
inoperative. The IOD fuse is located in the Power (ETRs) automatically compensate for radio antenna
Distribution Center (PDC). Refer to the PDC label for trim. Therefore, no antenna trimmer adjustment is
IOD fuse identification and location. required or possible when replacing the receiver or
the antenna.
SPEAKER
The standard equipment speaker system includes RADIO NOISE SUPPRESSION
two 13.3 centimeter (5.25 inch) diameter full-range
speakers. Each speaker is mounted to the lower front DESCRIPTION
corner of the front door inner panel behind the door Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) and Electro-
trim panel. Magnetic Interference (EMI) noise suppression is
The four speaker option adds two 13.3 centimeter accomplished primarily through circuitry internal to
(5.25 inch) diameter full-range speakers to the stan- the radio receivers. These internal suppression
dard speaker system, for a total of four speakers. devices are only serviced as part of the radio receiver.
Each of the additional speakers is mounted behind a External suppression devices that are used on this
grille installed on the outboard ends of a speaker vehicle to control RFI or EMI noise include the fol-
support structure, which is integral to the headliner lowing:
and located just forward of the upper liftgate opening • Radio antenna base ground
reinforcement near the rear of the vehicle cargo area. • Radio receiver chassis ground wire or strap
The premium speaker option upgrades all of the • Engine-to-body ground strap
speakers to Infinity models, and includes a 100 watt • Resistor-type spark plugs
Infinity amplifier. Each front door has two separate • Radio suppression-type secondary ignition wir-
Infinity speakers: a woofer mounted low in the door, ing.
and a tweeter mounted behind the door flag trim For more information on the spark plugs and sec-
panel. Infinity coaxial speakers are mounted in the ondary ignition components, refer to Ignition Sys-
headliner speaker support structure. The Infinity tem in the Description and Operation section of
amplifier is mounted to the floor panel under the left Group 8D - Ignition System.
rear seat cushion.
ANTENNA DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

All models use a fixed-length stainless steel rod-
type antenna mast, installed at the right front fender AUDIO SYSTEM
of the vehicle. The antenna mast is connected to the
center wire of the coaxial antenna cable, and is not WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
grounded to any part of the vehicle. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
To eliminate static, the antenna base must have a RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
good ground. The coaxial antenna cable shield (the STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
outer wire mesh of the cable) is grounded to the INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
antenna base and the radio chassis. SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
The antenna coaxial cable has an additional dis- CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
connect, located near the right cowl side inner panel BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
behind the instrument panel. This additional discon- INJURY.
Audio System Diagnosis

NO AUDIO. 1. Fuse faulty. 1. Check radio fuses in junction block. Replace fuses, if
2. Radio connector faulty. required.
3. Wiring faulty. 2. Check for loose or corroded radio connector. Repair, if
4. Ground faulty. required.
5. Radio faulty. 3. Check for battery voltage at radio connector. Repair
6. Speakers faulty. wiring, if required.
7. Amplifier faulty (if 4. Check for continuity between radio chassis and a known
equipped). good ground. There should be continuity. Repair ground, if
required.
5. See Radio in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group.
6. See Speaker in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group.
7. See Speaker in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group.
NO DISPLAY. 1. Fuse faulty. 1. Check radio fuses in junction block. Replace fuses, if
2. Radio connector faulty. required.
3. Wiring faulty. 2. Check for loose or corroded radio connector. Repair, if
4. Ground faulty. required.
5. Radio faulty. 3. Check for battery voltage at radio connector. Repair
wiring, if required.
4. Check for continuity between radio chassis and a known
good ground. There should be continuity. Repair ground, if
required.
group.
CLOCK WILL NOT 1. Fuse faulty. 1. Check ignition-off draw fuse. Replace fuse, if required.
KEEP SET TIME. 2. Radio connector faulty. 2. Check for loose or corroded radio connector. Repair, if
3. Wiring faulty. required.
4. Ground faulty. 3. Check for battery voltage at radio connector. Repair
5. Radio faulty. wiring, if required.
4. Check for continuity between radio chassis and a known
required.
group.
POOR RADIO 1. Antenna faulty. 1. See Antenna in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
RECEPTION. 2. Ground faulty. group.
3. Radio faulty. 2. Check for continuity between radio chassis and a known
required.
group.
NO/POOR TAPE 1. Faulty tape. 1. Insert known good tape and test operation.
OPERATION. 2. Foreign objects behind 2. Remove foreign objects and test operation.
tape door. 3. Clean head with Mopar Cassette Head Cleaner.
3. Dirty cassette tape 4. Exchange or replace radio, if required.
head.
4. Faulty tape deck.
Audio System Diagnosis

NO COMPACT DISC 1. Faulty CD. 1. Insert known good CD and test operation.
OPERATION 2. Foreign material on 2. Clean CD and test operation.
CD. 3. Allow temperature of vehicle interior to stabilize and test
3. Condensation on CD operation.
or optics. 4. Exchange or replace radio, if required.
4. Faulty CD player.
RADIO (6) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.

For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit
8W-47 - Audio System in Group 8W - Wiring Dia- cavity of the left (gray) radio wire harness connector.
grams. If OK, replace the faulty radio. If not OK, repair the
open circuit to the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse as
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- required.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY SPEAKER
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR 8W-47 - Audio System in Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- grams.
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
INJURY. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
“floating ground” system. Do not allow any speaker SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
lead to short to ground, as damage to the radio CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
may result. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
(1) Check the fuse(s) in the junction block and the
Power Distribution Center (PDC). If OK, go to Step
2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component CAUTION: The speaker output of the radio is a
as required and replace the faulty fuse(s). “floating ground” system. Do not allow any speaker
(2) Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the lead to short to ground, as damage to the radio
PDC. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open may result.
circuit to the battery as required.
(3) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction Turn the radio on. Adjust the balance and fader con-
block. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open trols to check the performance of each individual
circuit to the ignition switch as required. speaker. Note the speaker locations that are not per-
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. forming correctly. Go to Step 2.
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. (2) Turn the radio off. Turn the ignition switch to
Remove the radio, but do not unplug the radio wire the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery
harness connectors. Check for continuity between the negative cable. Remove the radio from the instru-
radio chassis and a good ground. There should be ment panel. If the vehicle is equipped with the Infin-
continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the ity speaker package, also unplug the wire harness
open radio chassis ground circuit as required. connectors at the amplifier. Check both the speaker
(5) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the feed (+) circuit and return (–) circuit cavities for the
ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery inoperative speaker location(s) at the radio wire har-
voltage at the fused ignition switch output (accesso- ness connectors for continuity to ground. In each
ry/run) circuit cavity of the left (gray) radio wire har- case, there should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step
ness connector. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair 3. If not OK, repair the shorted speaker circuit(s) as
the open circuit as required. required.
(3) If the vehicle is equipped with the Infinity radio 12 volt output circuit cavity of the amplifier
speaker package, go to Step 6. If the vehicle is wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 12. If not
equipped with the standard speaker system, check OK, repair the open circuit to the radio as required.
the resistance between the speaker feed (+) circuit (12) Turn the radio off. Turn the ignition switch to
and return (–) circuit cavities of the radio wire har- the Off position. Disconnect and isolate the battery
ness connectors for the inoperative speaker loca- negative cable. For each inoperative speaker location,
tion(s). The meter should read between 2 and 12 check both the amplified feed (+) circuit and the
ohms (speaker resistance). If OK, go to Step 4. If not amplified return (–) circuit cavities of the amplifier
OK, go to Step 5. wire harness connectors for continuity to ground. In
(4) Install a known good radio. Connect the bat- each case there should be no continuity. If OK, go to
tery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the Step 13. If not OK, repair the short circuit as
On position. Turn on the radio and test the speaker required.
operation. If OK, replace the faulty radio. If not OK, (13) For each inoperative speaker location, check
turn the radio off, turn the ignition switch to the Off the resistance between the amplified feed (+) circuit
position, disconnect and isolate the battery negative and the amplified return (–) circuit cavities of the
cable, remove the test radio, and go to Step 5. amplifier wire harness connectors. The meter should
(5) Unplug the speaker wire harness connector at read between 2 and 12 ohms (speaker resistance). If
the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity OK, replace the faulty amplifier. If not OK, go to
between the speaker feed (+) circuit cavities of the Step 14.
radio wire harness connector and the speaker wire (14) Unplug the speaker wire harness connector at
harness connector. Repeat the check between the the inoperative speaker. Check for continuity
speaker return (–) circuit cavities of the radio wire between the amplified feed (+) circuit cavities of the
harness connector and the speaker wire harness con- speaker wire harness connector and the amplifier
nector. In each case, there should be continuity. If wire harness connector. Repeat the check between
OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK, repair the the amplified return (–) circuit cavities of the speaker
open circuit(s) as required. wire harness connector and the amplifier wire har-
(6) For each inoperative speaker location, check for ness connector. In each case there should be continu-
continuity between the speaker feed (+) circuit cavi- ity. If OK, replace the faulty speaker. If not OK,
ties of the radio wire harness connectors and the repair the open circuit as required.
amplifier wire harness connectors. Repeat the check
for each inoperative speaker location between the ANTENNA
speaker return (–) circuit cavities of the radio wire
harness connectors and the amplifier wire harness WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
connectors. In each case, there should be continuity. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
If OK, go to Step 7. If not OK, repair the open circuit RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
as required. STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
(7) Check for continuity between the two ground INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
circuit cavities of the amplifier wire harness connec- SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
tor and a good ground. There should be continuity. If CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, repair the open circuit(s) BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
as required. INJURY.
(8) Check the amplifier fuse in the junction block.
If OK, go to Step 9. If not OK, repair the shorted cir- The following four tests are used to diagnose the
cuit or component as required and replace the faulty antenna with an ohmmeter:
fuse. • Test 1 - Mast to ground test
(9) Install the radio. Connect the battery negative • Test 2 - Tip-of-mast to tip-of-conductor test
cable. Check for battery voltage at the amplifier fuse • Test 3 - Body ground to battery ground test
in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 10. If not OK, • Test 4 - Body ground to coaxial shield test.
repair the open circuit to the PDC as required. The ohmmeter test lead connections for each test
(10) Check for battery voltage at the two fused are shown in Antenna Tests (Fig. 1).
B(+) circuit cavities of the amplifier wire harness
connector. If OK, go to Step 11. If not OK, repair the
open circuit to the fuse in the junction block as
required.
(11) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
Turn the radio on. Check for battery voltage at the
NOTE: This model has a two-piece antenna coaxial TEST 3
cable. Tests 2 and 4 must be conducted in two Test 3 checks the condition of the vehicle body
steps to isolate a coaxial cable problem; from the ground connection. This test should be performed
coaxial cable connection under the right end of the with the battery positive cable removed from the bat-
instrument panel near the right cowl side inner tery. Disconnect both battery cables, the negative
panel to the antenna base, and then from the coax- cable first. Reconnect the battery negative cable and
ial cable connection to the radio chassis connec- perform the test as follows:
tion. (1) Connect one ohmmeter test lead to the vehicle
fender. Connect the other test lead to the battery
negative post.
(2) The resistance should be less than one ohm.
(3) If the resistance is more than one ohm, check
the braided ground strap connected to the engine and
the vehicle body for being loose, corroded, or dam-
aged. Repair the ground strap connection, if required.
TEST 4
Test 4 checks the condition of the ground between
the antenna base and the vehicle body as follows:
(1) Connect one ohmmeter test lead to the vehicle
fender. Connect the other test lead to the outer crimp
on the antenna coaxial cable connector.
(2) The resistance should be less then one ohm.
(3) If the resistance is more then one ohm, clean
and/or tighten the antenna base to fender mounting
hardware.
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE

Fig. 1 Antenna Tests WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
TEST 1
Test 1 determines if the antenna mast is insulated
from the base. Proceed as follows:
(1) Unplug the antenna coaxial cable connector
from the radio chassis and isolate.
(2) Connect one ohmmeter test lead to the tip of
the antenna mast. Connect the other test lead to the
INJURY.
antenna base. Check for continuity.
(3) There should be no continuity. If continuity is For complete circuit diagrams, see Group 8W -
found, replace the faulty or damaged antenna base Wiring Diagrams. Inspect the ground paths and con-
and cable assembly. nections at the following locations:
• Blower motor
TEST 2 • Electric fuel pump
Test 2 checks the antenna for an open circuit as • Engine-to-body ground strap
follows: • Generator
(1) Unplug the antenna coaxial cable connector • Ignition module
from the radio chassis. • Radio antenna base ground
(2) Connect one ohmmeter test lead to the tip of • Radio receiver chassis ground wire or strap
the antenna mast. Connect the other test lead to the • Wiper motor.
center pin of the antenna coaxial cable connector. If the source of RFI or EMI noise is identified as a
(3) Continuity should exist (the ohmmeter should component on the vehicle (i.e., generator, blower
only register a fraction of an ohm). High or infinite motor, etc.), the ground path for that component
resistance indicates damage to the base and cable should be checked. If excessive resistance is found in
assembly. Replace the faulty base and cable, if any ground circuit, clean, tighten, or repair the
required.
ground circuits or connections to ground as required ter bezel away from the instrument panel to release
before considering any component replacement. the six snap clip retainers (Fig. 2).
For service and inspection of secondary ignition
components, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing sec-
tion of Group 8D - Ignition Systems. Inspect the fol-
lowing secondary ignition system components:
• Distributor cap and rotor
• Ignition coil
• Spark plugs
• Spark plug wire routing and condition.
Reroute the spark plug wires or replace the faulty
components as required.
If the source of the RFI or EMI noise is identified
as two-way mobile radio or telephone equipment,
check the equipment installation for the following:
• Power connections should be made directly to
the battery, and fused as closely to the battery as
possible.
• The antenna should be mounted on the roof or
toward the rear of the vehicle. Remember that mag-
netic antenna mounts on the roof panel can adversely
affect the operation of an overhead console compass,
if the vehicle is so equipped.
• The antenna cable should be fully shielded coax-
ial cable, should be as short as is practical, and
Fig. 2 Center Bezel Remove/Install
should be routed away from the factory-installed
vehicle wire harnesses whenever possible. (3) Remove the center bezel from the instrument
• The antenna and cable must be carefully panel.
matched to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (4) Remove the two screws that secure the radio to
(SWR). the instrument panel (Fig. 3).
Fleet vehicles are available with an extra-cost RFI-
suppressed Powertrain Control Module (PCM). This
unit reduces interference generated by the PCM on
some radio frequencies used in two-way radio com-
munications. However, this unit will not resolve com-
plaints of RFI in the commercial AM or FM radio
frequency ranges.

RADIO
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR Fig. 3 Radio Remove/Install
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- (5) Pull the radio out from the instrument panel
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- far enough to access the wire harness connectors and
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL the antenna coaxial cable connector (Fig. 4).
INJURY. (6) Unplug the wire harness connectors and the
antenna coaxial cable connector from the rear of the
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative radio.
cable. (7) Remove the radio from the instrument panel.
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the instrument panel cen-
SPEAKER
FRONT DOOR
LOWER
cable.
(2) If the vehicle is so equipped, remove the man-
ual window regulator crank handle with a removal
tool (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Radio Connections - Typical

(8) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
Tighten the radio mounting screws to 3.9 N·m (35 in.
lbs.).
AMPLIFIER
cable.
(2) Disengage the rear seat cushion latch by pull-
ing upward on the release strap. Tilt the seat cush-
ion forward. Fig. 6 Window Regulator Crank Handle Remove -
(3) Lift the carpeting in the left under-seat area as Typical
required to access the amplifier. (3) Remove the screws that secure the front door
(4) Unplug the two wire harness connectors from trim panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 7) or (Fig. 8).
the amplifier (Fig. 5).
Fig. 7 Front Door Trim Panel Remove/Install -

Fig. 5 Amplifier Remove/Install Manual Window
(5) Remove the three screws that secure the ampli- (4) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
fier to the floor panel. flat-bladed tool, gently pry the front door trim panel
(6) Remove the amplifier from the floor panel. away from the door around the perimeter to release
(7) Reverse the removal procedures to install. the trim panel retainers.
Tighten the amplifier mounting screws to 2.8 N·m
(25 in. lbs.). NOTE: To aid in the removal of the trim panel, start
at the bottom of the panel.
(11) Pull the speaker away from the inner door
panel far enough to access and unplug the speaker
wire harness connector.
(12) Remove the speaker from the door.
Tighten the speaker mounting screws to 1.1 N·m (10
in. lbs.). Tighten the trim panel mounting screws to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
UPPER
(1) Remove the front door trim panel from the
front door. See Speaker, Front Door, Lower in this
group for the procedures.
(2) Remove the one screw that secures the front
door flag trim to the inner door panel (Fig. 10).
Fig. 8 Front Door Trim Panel Remove/Install - Power

Window
(5) Lift the front door trim panel upwards and
away from the inner door panel far enough to disen-
gage the top of the panel from the inner belt weath-
erstrip.
(6) Pull the front door trim panel away from the
inner door panel far enough to access the inside door
latch release and lock linkage rods near the back of
the inside door remote controls.
(7) Unsnap the plastic retainer clips from the
inside door remote control ends of the latch release
and lock linkage rods, and remove the rod ends from
(8) If the vehicle is so equipped, unplug the wire
harness connectors from the door power switch mod-
ule and, on the driver side only, the power mirror
switch.
(9) Set the front door trim panel aside. Fig. 10 Front Door Flag Trim Panel Remove/Install
(10) Remove the two screws that secure the (3) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
speaker to the lower front corner of the inner door flat-bladed tool, gently pry the door flag trim away
panel (Fig. 9). from the inner door to release the trim panel
retainer.
(4) Pull the front door flag trim away from the
inner door panel far enough to access and unplug the
upper speaker wire harness connector.
(5) Unsnap the speaker from the retainers molded
into the back side of the front door flag trim panel.
Tighten the mounting screw to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
REAR HEADLINER
The rear headliner speakers can be serviced with-
out removing the headliner using the procedures that
follow. The headliner speaker support structure is
integral to the headliner assembly. Refer to Group 23
- Body for the headliner service procedures.
cable.
Fig. 9 Front Door Lower Speaker Remove/Install
(2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide (Fig. 12). Unplug the connector by pulling it apart
flat-bladed tool, gently pry around the perimeter while twisting the metal connector halves. Do not
edge of the rear headliner speaker grille to release pull on the cable.
the five snap retainers that secure the grille to the
headliner speaker support structure (Fig. 11).
Fig. 11 Rear Headliner Speaker Remove/Install

(3) Remove the speaker grille from the headliner.
(4) Remove the two screws that secure the speaker
to the headliner speaker support structure. Fig. 12 Antenna Cable Routing
(5) Lower the speaker from the headliner far
(4) Unscrew the antenna mast from the antenna
enough to access and unplug the speaker wire har-
body (Fig. 13).
ness connector.
(6) Remove the speaker from the headliner.
Tighten the mounting screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
ANTENNA
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL Fig. 13 Antenna Mast Remove/Install - Typical
INJURY.
(5) Remove the antenna cap nut and adapter using
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative an antenna nut wrench (Special Tool C-4816) (Fig.
cable. 14).
(2) Remove the right front fender inner splash (6) Lower the antenna body and cable assembly
shield. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the procedures. through the top of the fender far enough to access
(3) Reach under the right end of the instrument the antenna body by reaching up into the rear of the
panel to unplug the antenna coaxial cable connector right front fender wheel housing (Fig. 15).
RADIO NOISE SUPPRESSION COMPONENTS

INJURY.
REMOVAL
ENGINE-TO-BODY GROUND STRAP
(1) Remove the screw that secures the engine-to-
body ground strap eyelet to the dash panel (Fig. 16).
Fig. 14 Antenna Cap Nut and Adapter Remove/
Install - Typical
Fig. 16 Engine-To-Body Ground Strap Remove/

Install
(2) Remove the nut that secures the engine-to-body
ground strap eyelet to the stud on the left upper rear
corner of the engine cylinder head.
(3) Remove the engine-to-body ground strap eyelet
from the stud on the left upper rear corner of the
Fig. 15 Antenna Mounting engine cylinder head.
(4) Remove the engine-to-body ground strap from
(7) Disengage the coaxial cable grommet from the the engine compartment.
hole in the right cowl side outer panel.
(8) Pull the coaxial cable out through the right INSTALLATION
cowl side outer panel.
(9) Remove the antenna body and cable from the ENGINE-TO-BODY GROUND STRAP
vehicle. (1) Position the engine-to-body ground strap in the
(10) Reverse the removal procedures to install. engine compartment.
Tighten the antenna cap nut to 6.2 N·m (55 in. lbs.). (2) Position the engine-to-body ground strap eyelet
Tighten the antenna mast to 3.3 N·m (30 in. lbs.). over the stud on the left upper rear corner of the
engine cylinder head.
(3) Install and tighten the nut that secures the SPECIAL TOOLS
engine-to-body ground strap eyelet to the stud on the
left upper rear corner of the engine cylinder head. AUDIO SYSTEMS
Tighten the nut to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
engine-to-body ground strap eyelet to the dash panel.
Tighten the screw to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
Antenna Nut Wrench C-4816

XJ HORN SYSTEMS 8G - 1
HORN SYSTEMS
CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HORN RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HORN SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HORN RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HORN SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HORN SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HORN RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Refer to the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove
box for more information on the features, use and
HORN SYSTEM operation of the horn system.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER

DESCRIPTION
A dual-note electric horn system is standard facto- The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) receiver can also
ry-installed equipment on this model. The standard operate the horn system. An RKE receiver is used on
equipment horn system features one low-note horn this vehicle when it is equipped with the optional
unit and one high-note horn unit. The horn system RKE system. The RKE receiver controls and inte-
uses a non-switched source of battery current so that grates the additional electronic functions and fea-
the system will remain functional, regardless of the tures included on models with this option. A
ignition switch position. The horn system includes customer programmable feature of the RKE system
the following components: enables the RKE receiver to momentarily energize
• Clockspring the horn relay through a hard wired circuit as an
• Horns audible verification that the receiver has received a
• Horn relay valid lock request from the RKE transmitter.
• Horn switch Refer to Remote Keyless Entry System in the
• Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) receiver (only with Description and Operation section of Group 8P -
the RKE system) Power Lock Systems for more information on this
Refer to Clockspring in the Description and Oper- feature.
ation section of Group 8M - Passive Restraint Sys-
tems for more information on this component. Refer HORN
to Remote Keyless Entry System in the Descrip-
tion and Operation section of Group 8P - Power Lock DESCRIPTION
Systems for more information on this component. The dual electromagnetic diaphragm-type horns
Refer to Horn/Cigar Lighter in the Contents of are standard equipment on this model. The low-note
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit horn is secured with a bracket to the left radiator
diagrams. Following are general descriptions of the closure panel brace, behind the front bumper. The
remaining major components in the horn system. high-note horn is secured with a bracket to the right
radiator closure panel brace, behind the front
OPERATION bumper. Both horns are grounded through their
The horn system is activated by a horn switch con- mounting brackets and receives battery feed through
cealed beneath the driver side airbag module trim its wire harness connector and circuit from the closed
cover in the center of the steering wheel. Depressing contacts of the horn relay.
the center of the driver side airbag module trim cover The horns cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if
closes the horn switch. Closing the horn switch acti- faulty or damaged, they must be individually
vates the horn relay. The activated horn relay then replaced.
switches the battery current needed to energize the
horns.
8G - 2 HORN SYSTEMS XJ
OPERATION When the electromagnetic coil is de-energized,
Within the two halves of the molded plastic horn spring pressure returns the movable contact to the
housing are a flexible diaphragm, a plunger, an elec- normally closed position. The resistor or diode is con-
tromagnetic coil and a set of contact points. The dia- nected in parallel with the electromagnetic coil in the
phragm is secured in suspension around its relay, and helps to dissipate voltage spikes that are
perimeter by the mating surfaces of the horn hous- produced when the coil is de-energized.
ing. The plunger is secured to the center of the dia-
phragm and extends into the center of the HORN SWITCH
electromagnet. The contact points control the current
flow through the electromagnet. DESCRIPTION
When the horn is energized, electrical current A center-blow, normally open, resistive membrane-
flows through the closed contact points to the electro- type horn switch is secured with heat stakes to the
magnet. The resulting electromagnetic field draws back side of the driver side airbag module trim cover
the plunger and diaphragm toward it until that in the center of the steering wheel (Fig. 1). The
movement mechanically opens the contact points. switch consists of two plastic membranes, one that is
When the contact points open, the electromagnetic flat and one that is slightly convex. These two mem-
field collapses allowing the plunger and diaphragm to branes are secured to each other around the perime-
return to their relaxed positions and closing the con- ter. Inside the switch, the centers of the facing
tact points again. This cycle continues repeating at a surfaces of these membranes each has a grid made
very rapid rate producing the vibration and move- with an electrically conductive material applied to it.
ment of air that creates the sound that is directed One of the grids is connected to a circuit that pro-
through the horn outlet. vides it with continuity to ground at all times. The
grid of the other membrane is connected to the horn
HORN RELAY relay control circuit.
DESCRIPTION
The horn relay is a electromechanical device that
switches battery current to the horn when the horn
switch grounds the relay coil. The horn relay is
located in the junction block on the right cowl side
inner panel below the instrument panel in the pas-
senger compartment. If a problem is encountered
with a continuously sounding horn, it can usually be
quickly resolved by removing the horn relay from the
junction block until further diagnosis is completed.
Refer to Junction Block in the Contents of Group
8W - Wiring Diagrams for horn relay identification
and location.
The horn relay is a International Standards Orga-
nization (ISO) relay. Relays conforming to the ISO
specifications have common physical dimensions, cur- Fig. 1 Driver Side Airbag Module Trim Cover and
rent capacities, terminal patterns, and terminal func- Horn Switch
tions.
The horn relay cannot be repaired or adjusted and, The steering wheel and steering column must be
if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. properly grounded in order for the horn switch to
function properly. The horn switch is only serviced as
OPERATION a part of the driver side airbag module trim cover. If
The ISO relay consists of an electromagnetic coil, a the horn switch is damaged or faulty, or if the driver
resistor or diode, and three (two fixed and one mov- side airbag is deployed, the driver side airbag module
able) electrical contacts. The movable (common feed) trim cover and horn switch must be replaced as a
relay contact is held against one of the fixed contacts unit.
(normally closed) by spring pressure. When the elec-
tromagnetic coil is energized, it draws the movable
OPERATION
contact away from the normally closed fixed contact, When the center area of the driver side airbag trim
and holds it against the other (normally open) fixed cover is depressed, the electrically conductive grids
contact. on the facing surfaces of the horn switch membranes
contact each other, closing the switch circuit. The
completed horn switch circuit provides a ground for
the control coil side of the horn relay, which activates
the relay. When the horn switch is released, the
resistive tension of the convex membrane separates
the two electrically conductive grids and opens the
switch circuit.

HORN RELAY
The horn relay (Fig. 2) is located in the junction
block on the right cowl side inner panel below the
instrument panel in the passenger compartment. If a
problem is encountered with a continuously sounding
horn, it can usually be quickly resolved by removing
the horn relay from the junction block until further Fig. 2 Horn Relay
diagnosis is completed. Refer to Junction Block in
the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for (3) The relay normally open terminal (87) is con-
horn relay identification and location. For complete nected to the common feed terminal (30) in the ener-
circuit diagrams, refer to Horn/Cigar Lighter in the gized position. This terminal supplies battery voltage
Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. to the horn(s). There should be continuity between
the cavity for relay terminal 87 and the horn relay
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- output circuit cavity of each horn wire harness con-
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE nector at all times. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK,
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY repair the open circuit to the horn(s) as required.
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR (4) The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR the electromagnet in the relay. It is connected to bat-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- tery voltage and should be hot at all times. Check for
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- battery voltage at the cavity for relay terminal 86. If
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
INJURY. the fuse in the junction block as required.
(5) The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to
(1) Remove the horn relay from the junction block. the electromagnet in the relay. It is grounded
Refer to Horn Relay in the Removal and Installa- through the horn switch when the horn switch is
tion section of this group for the procedures. depressed. On vehicles equipped with the Remote
(2) A relay in the de-energized position should Keyless Entry (RKE) system, the horn relay coil
have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and ground terminal can also be grounded by the RKE
no continuity between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go receiver in response to certain inputs related to the
to Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. RKE system. Check for continuity to ground at the
(3) Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (elec- cavity for relay terminal 85. There should be conti-
tromagnet) should be 75 6 5 ohms. If OK, go to Step nuity with the horn switch depressed, and no conti-
4. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. nuity with the horn switch released. If not OK, refer
(4) Connect a battery to terminals 85 and 86. to Horn Switch in the Diagnosis and Testing section
There should now be continuity between terminals of this group.
30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A
and 30. If OK, perform the Relay Circuit Test that HORN SWITCH
follows. If not OK, replace the faulty relay. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to Horn/Ci-
RELAY CIRCUIT TEST Diagrams.
(1) The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) is
connected to battery voltage and should be hot at all
times. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the fuse in the junction block as required.
(2) The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is
connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position,
but is not used for this application. Go to Step 3.
8G - 4 HORN SYSTEMS XJ
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- not OK, clean and tighten the horn mounting hard-
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE ware as required.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY (2) Disconnect the wire harness connector(s) from
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR the horn connector receptacle(s). Check for battery
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR voltage at the horn relay output circuit cavity of the
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- horn(s) wire harness connector(s). There should be
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- zero volts. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL shorted horn relay output circuit or replace the
INJURY. faulty horn relay as required.
(3) Depress the horn switch. There should now be
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative battery voltage at the horn relay output circuit cavity
cable. Remove the knee blocker from the instrument of the horn(s) wire harness connector(s). If OK,
panel. replace the faulty horn(s). If not OK, repair the open
(2) Check for continuity between the metal steer- horn relay output circuit to the horn relay as
ing column jacket and a good ground. There should required.
be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, refer to
Steering Column in the Removal and Installation
section of Group 19 - Steering for proper installation REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
of the steering column.
(3) Remove the driver side airbag module from the HORN RELAY
steering wheel. Disconnect the horn switch wire har-
ness connectors from the driver side airbag module. REMOVAL
(4) Remove the horn relay from the junction block. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Check for continuity between the steering column cable.
half of the horn switch feed wire harness connector (2) Remove the fuse access panel by unsnapping it
and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If from the right cowl side inner trim panel (Fig. 3).
OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the shorted horn
relay control circuit to the horn relay in the junction
block as required.
(5) Check for continuity between the steering col-
umn half of the horn switch feed wire harness con-
nector and the horn relay control circuit cavity for
the horn relay in the junction block. There should be
continuity. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the
open horn relay control circuit to the horn relay in
the junction block as required.
(6) Check for continuity between the horn switch
feed wire and the horn switch ground wire on the
driver side airbag module. There should be no conti-
nuity. If OK, go to Step 7. If not OK, replace the
faulty horn switch.
(7) Depress the center of the driver side airbag
module trim cover and check for continuity between
the horn switch feed wire and the horn switch
ground wire on the driver side airbag module. There
should now be continuity. If not OK, replace the
faulty horn switch.
HORN
For complete circuit descriptions, refer to Horn/Ci-
Diagrams.
(1) Measure the resistance between the horn(s)
mounting bracket(s) and a good ground. There should
be no measurable resistance. If OK, go to Step 2. If Fig. 3 Right Cowl Side Inner Trim Remove/Install
(3) Remove the push nut that secures the right (4) Remove the screw that secures the horn and
cowl side inner trim panel to the junction block stud. mounting bracket unit to the radiator closure panel
(4) Remove the screw located above the fuse access brace (Fig. 4).
opening that secures the trim panel to the right cowl
side inner panel.
(5) Remove the screw that secures the right cowl
side inner trim panel and right front door sill trim to
the door opening sill.
(6) Remove the trim from the right cowl side inner
panel.
(7) Refer to Junction Block in the Contents of
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for horn relay identifi-
cation and location.
(8) Remove the horn relay from the junction block.
INSTALLATION
(1) Refer to Junction Block in the Contents of
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for proper horn relay
location.
(2) Position the horn relay in the proper receptacle
in the junction block.
(3) Align the horn relay terminals with the termi-
nal cavities in the junction block receptacle.
(4) Push down firmly on the horn relay until the
terminals are fully seated in the terminal cavities in
the junction block receptacle.
(5) Position the trim onto the right cowl side inner
panel.
right cowl side inner trim panel and right front door
sill trim to the door opening sill. Tighten the screw to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(7) Install and tighten the screw located above the Fig. 4 Horns Remove/Install
fuse access opening that secures the trim panel to (5) Lower the horn and mounting bracket unit far
the right cowl side inner panel. Tighten the screw to enough to access and disconnect the wire harness
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.). connector from the horn connector receptacle.
(8) Install the push nut that secures the right cowl (6) Remove the horn and mounting bracket unit
side inner trim panel onto the junction block stud. from behind the front bumper.
onto the right cowl side inner trim panel. INSTALLATION
(10) Reconnect the battery negative cable. (1) Position the horn and mounting bracket unit
behind the front bumper.
HORN (2) Reconnect the wire harness connector to the
horn connector receptacle.
REMOVAL (3) Position the horn and mounting bracket unit to
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative the radiator closure panel brace.
cable. (4) Install and tighten the screw that secures the
(2) Raise and support the vehicle. horn and mounting bracket unit to the radiator clo-
(3) Remove the front underbody splash shield. sure panel brace. Tighten the screw to 28.5 N·m (21
ft. lbs.).
NOTE: Remove the horn and its mounting bracket (5) Install the front underbody splash shield.
from the vehicle as a unit. Do not remove the horn (6) Lower the vehicle.
from its mounting bracket. (7) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
XJ SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 8H - 1
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION ROAD TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPEED CONTROL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SERVO CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPEED CONTROL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPEED CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUITS . . . . . . 2 VACUUM SUPPLY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SERVO CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
VACUUM RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPEED CONTROL SERVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPEED CONTROL SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING STOP LAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST FOR SPEED VACUUM RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SPECIFICATIONS
OVERSHOOT/UNDERSHOOT FOLLOWING TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SPEED CONTROL SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION applied, nor can the gear selector be indicating the
transmission is in Park or Neutral.
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM The speed control can be disengaged manually by:
• Stepping on the brake pedal
DESCRIPTION • Depressing the OFF switch
The speed control system is electronically con- • Depressing the CANCEL switch.
trolled and vacuum operated. Electronic control of • Depressing the clutch pedal (if equipped)
the speed control system is integrated into the Pow-
NOTE: Depressing the OFF switch or turning off
ertrain Control Module (PCM). The controls consist
the ignition switch will erase the set speed stored
of two steering wheel mounted switches. The
in the PCM.
switches are labeled: ON, OFF, RESUME, ACCEL,
SET, COAST, and CANCEL. For added safety, the speed control system is pro-
The system is designed to operate at speeds above grammed to disengaged for any of the following con-
30 mph (50 km/h). ditions:
• An indication of Park or Neutral
WARNING: THE USE OF SPEED CONTROL IS NOT
• An rapid increase rpm (indicates that the clutch
RECOMMENDED WHEN DRIVING CONDITIONS DO
has been disengaged)
NOT PERMIT MAINTAINING A CONSTANT SPEED,
• Excessive engine rpm (indicates that the trans-
SUCH AS IN HEAVY TRAFFIC OR ON ROADS THAT
mission may be in a low gear)
ARE WINDING, ICY, SNOW COVERED, OR SLIP-
• The speed signal increases at a rate of 10 mph
PERY.
per second (indicates that the coefficient of friction
between the road surface and tires is extremely low)
OPERATION • The speed signal decreases at a rate of 10 mph
When speed control is selected by depressing the per second (indicates that the vehicle may have
ON switch, the PCM allows a set speed to be stored decelerated at an extremely high rate)
in PCM RAM for speed control. To store a set speed, Once the speed control has been disengaged,
depress the SET switch while the vehicle is moving depressing the RESUME switch (when speed is
at a speed between 35 and 85 mph. In order for the greater than 30 mph) restores the vehicle to the tar-
speed control to engage, the brakes cannot be get speed that was stored in the PCM.
8H - 2 SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM XJ
While the speed control is engaged, the driver can OPERATION
increase the vehicle speed by depressing the ACCEL Within the two switch modules, five momentary
switch. The new target speed is stored in the PCM contact switches, supporting seven different speed
when the ACCEL is released. The PCM also has a control functions are used. The outputs from these
9tap-up9 feature in which vehicle speed increases at a switches are filtered into one input. The Powertrain
rate of approximately 2 mph for each momentary Control Module (PCM) determines which output has
switch activation of the ACCEL switch. been applied through resistive multiplexing. The
A “tap down” feature is used to decelerate without input circuit voltage is measured by the PCM to
disengaging the speed control system. To decelerate determine which switch function has been selected.
from an existing recorded target speed, momentarily A speed control indicator lamp, located on the
depress the COAST switch. For each switch activa- instrument panel cluster is energized by the PCM via
tion, speed will be lowered approximately 1 mph. the J1850 PCI Bus circuits. This occurs when speed
control system power has been turned ON, and the
SPEED CONTROL SERVO engine is running.
DESCRIPTION STOP LAMP SWITCH

The servo unit consists of a solenoid valve body, a
vacuum servo and the mounting bracket. DESCRIPTION
The switch is mounted on the brake pedal mount-
OPERATION ing bracket under the instrument panel.
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the
solenoid valve body. The solenoid valve body controls OPERATION
the application and release of vacuum to the dia- Vehicles equipped with the speed control option use
phragm of the vacuum servo. A cable connects the a dual function stop lamp switch. The PCM monitors
servo with the throttle linkage. The servo unit cannot the state of the dual function stop lamp switch. Refer
be repaired and is serviced only as a complete assem- to the Brake section for more information on stop
bly. lamp switch service and adjustment procedures.
SPEED CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUITS SERVO CABLE

OPERATION DESCRIPTION
When all of the speed control parameters are met, The speed control servo cable is connected between
and the SET button is pressed, the PCM actuates the the speed control vacuum servo diaphragm and the
vent solenoid and “duty-cycles” the vacuum solenoid throttle body control linkage.
to open the throttle and bring the vehicle up to tar-
get speed. When the vehicle is at target speed, it will OPERATION
actuate the vent solenoid with the vacuum solenoid This cable causes the throttle control linkage to
de-activated to maintain the vehicle at target speed. open or close the throttle valve in response to move-
When the vehicle is above target speed, the PCM will ment of the vacuum servo diaphragm.
“duty-cycle” the vent solenoid with the vacuum sole-
noid still de-activated to close the throttle to return POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
to target speed.
DESCRIPTION
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located
in the engine compartment.
DESCRIPTION
Two separate speed control switch modules are OPERATION
mounted on the steering wheel to the left and right The speed control electronic control circuitry is
side of the driver’s airbag module. The two switch integrated into the PCM. The PCM speed control
modules are labeled: ON/OFF, SET, RESUME/AC- functions are monitored by the On-Board Diagnostics
CEL, CANCEL and COAST. Refer to the owner’s (OBD). All OBD-sensed systems are monitored by the
manual for more information on speed control switch PCM. Each monitored circuit is assigned a Diagnos-
functions and setting procedures. The individual tic Trouble Code (DTC). The PCM will store a DTC in
switches cannot be repaired. If one individual switch electronic memory for certain failures it detects. See
fails, the switch module must be replaced. On-Board Diagnostic Test For Speed Control System
in this group for more information. The PCM cannot • Leaking vacuum reservoir.
be repaired and must be replaced if faulty. • Loose or leaking vacuum hoses or connections.
• Defective one-way vacuum check valve.
VACUUM RESERVOIR • Secure attachment of both ends of the speed con-
trol servo cable.
DESCRIPTION • Smooth operation of throttle linkage and throttle
The vacuum reservoir is a plastic storage tank con- body air valve.
nected to an engine vacuum source by vacuum lines. • Failed speed control servo. Do the servo vacuum
test.
OPERATION
The vacuum reservoir is used to supply the vac- CAUTION: When test probing for voltage or conti-
uum needed to maintain proper speed control opera- nuity at electrical connectors, care must be taken
tion when engine vacuum drops, such as in climbing not to damage connector, terminals or seals. If
a grade while driving. A one-way check valve is used these components are damaged, intermittent or
in the vacuum line between the reservoir and the complete system failure may occur.
vacuum source. This check valve is used to trap
engine vacuum in the reservoir. On certain vehicle
applications, this reservoir is shared with the heat- ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST FOR SPEED
ing/air-conditioning system. The vacuum reservoir CONTROL SYSTEM
cannot be repaired and must be replaced if faulty. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors
critical input and output circuits of the speed control
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR system, making sure they are operational. A Diagnos-
The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) is a pulse genera- tic Trouble Code (DTC) is assigned to each input and
tor mounted to an adapter near the transmission out- output circuit monitored by the On-Board Diagnostic
put shaft. The sensor is driven through the adapter (OBD) system. Some circuits are checked continu-
by a speedometer pinion gear. The VSS pulse signal ously and some are checked only under certain con-
to the speedometer/odometer is monitored by the ditions.
PCM speed control circuitry to determine vehicle For DTC information, refer to Diagnostic Trouble
speed and to maintain speed control set speed. Codes in Group 25, Emission Control System. This
will include a complete list of DTC’s including DTC’s
for the speed control system.
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
ROAD TEST For diagnosis and testing of the Vehicle Speed Sig-
Perform a vehicle road test to verify reports of nal (VSS), refer to the appropriate Powertrain Diag-
speed control system malfunction. The road test nostic Procedures service manual. Also refer to the
should include attention to the speedometer. Speed- DRB scan tool.
ometer operation should be smooth and without flut-
ter at all speeds. SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES
Flutter in the speedometer indicates a problem To perform a complete test of the speed control
which might cause surging in the speed control sys- switch circuits, refer to the appropriate Powertrain
tem. The cause of any speedometer problems should Diagnostic Procedures manual.
be corrected before proceeding. Refer to Group 8E,
Instrument Panel and Gauges for speedometer diag- STOP LAMP SWITCH
nosis. For continuity checks and switch adjustment, refer
If a road test verifies a system problem and the to Group 5, Brakes.
speedometer operates properly, check for:
• A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). If a DTC VACUUM SUPPLY TEST
exists, conduct tests per the Powertrain Diagnostic (1) Disconnect vacuum hose at speed control servo
Procedures service manual. and install a vacuum gauge into the disconnected
• A misadjusted brake (stop) lamp switch. This hose.
could also cause an intermittent problem. (2) Start engine and observe gauge at idle. Vac-
• Loose, damaged or corroded electrical connec- uum gauge should read at least ten inches of mer-
tions at the servo. Corrosion should be removed from cury.
electrical terminals and a light coating of Mopar (3) If vacuum is less than ten inches of mercury,
MultiPurpose Grease, or equivalent, applied. determine source of leak. Check vacuum line to
engine for leaks. Also check actual engine intake ing), and then turn the cruise control switch to the
manifold vacuum. If manifold vacuum does not meet OFF position (or press the CANCEL button if
this requirement, check for poor engine performance equipped) after waiting 10 seconds. This procedure
and repair as necessary. must be performed approximately 10–15 times to
(4) If vacuum line to engine is not leaking, check completely unlearn the overshoot/undershoot condi-
for leak at vacuum reservoir. To locate and gain tion.
access to reservoir, refer to Vacuum Reservoir Remov-
al/Installation in this group. Disconnect vacuum line
at reservoir and connect a hand-operated vacuum REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
pump to reservoir fitting. Apply vacuum. Reservoir
vacuum should not bleed off. If vacuum is being lost, SPEED CONTROL SERVO
replace reservoir.
(5) Verify operation of one-way check valve and REMOVAL
check it for leaks. (1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
(a) Locate one-way check valve. The valve is (2) Disconnect vacuum line at servo (Fig. 1).
located in vacuum line between vacuum reservoir (3) Disconnect electrical connector at servo.
and engine vacuum source. Disconnect vacuum (4) Disconnect servo cable at throttle body. Refer to
hoses (lines) at each end of valve. Servo Cable Removal/Installation in this group.
(b) Connect a hand-operated vacuum pump to (5) Remove 2 mounting nuts holding servo cable
reservoir end of check valve. Apply vacuum. Vac- sleeve to bracket (Fig. 2).
uum should not bleed off. If vacuum is being lost, (6) Pull speed control cable sleeve and servo away
replace one-way check valve. from servo mounting bracket to expose cable retain-
(c) Connect a hand-operated vacuum pump to ing clip (Fig. 2) and remove clip. Note: The servo
vacuum source end of check valve. Apply vacuum. mounting bracket displayed in (Fig. 2) is a typical
Vacuum should flow through valve. If vacuum is bracket and may/may not be applicable to this model
not flowing, replace one-way check valve. Seal the vehicle.
fitting at opposite end of valve with a finger and
apply vacuum. If vacuum will not hold, diaphragm
within check valve has ruptured. Replace valve.
SPEED CONTROL SERVO

For complete speed control system diagnosis,
including the speed control servo, refer to the appro-
priate Powertrain Diagnostic Procedures manual.
OVERSHOOT/UNDERSHOOT FOLLOWING
SPEED CONTROL SET
If the operator repeatedly presses and releases the
set button with their foot off of the accelerator (a “lift
foot set” to begin speed control operation), the vehicle
may accelerate and exceed the desired set speed by
up to 5 MPH (8 km/h) and then decelerate to less
than the desired set speed before finally achieving
the desired set speed.
The Speed Control has an adaptive strategy that
compensates for vehicle-to-vehicle variations in speed Fig. 1 Speed Control Servo Location
control cable lengths. When the speed control is set (7) Remove servo from mounting bracket. While
with the vehicle operators foot off of the accelerator removing, note orientation of servo to bracket.
pedal, the speed control thinks there is excessive
speed control cable slack and adapts. If the lift foot INSTALLATION
sets are continually used, the speed control over- (1) Position servo to mounting bracket.
shoot/undershoot condition will develop. (2) Align hole in cable connector with hole in servo
To “unlearn” the overshoot/undershoot condition, pin. Install cable-to-servo retaining clip.
the vehicle operator has to press and release the set (3) Insert servo mounting studs through holes in
button while maintaining the desired set speed with servo mounting bracket.
the accelerator pedal (not decelerating or accelerat-
Fig. 2 Servo Cable Clip Remove/Install—Typical

(4) Install servo mounting nuts and tighten to 8.5
N·m (75 in. lbs.). Fig. 3 Speed Control Switch Remove/Install
(5) Connect vacuum line at servo.
(6) Connect electrical connector at servo. (4) Install airbag module. Refer to Group 8M, Pas-
(7) Connect servo cable to throttle body. Refer to sive Restraint Systems for procedures.
Servo Cable Removal/Installation in this group. (5) Connect negative battery cable to battery.
(8) Connect negative battery cable to battery.
(9) Before starting engine, operate accelerator STOP LAMP SWITCH
pedal to check for any binding. Refer to Stop Lamp Switch in Group 5, Brakes for
removal/installation and adjustment procedures.
SPEED CONTROL SWITCH
SERVO CABLE
WARNING: BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE,
REMOVE OR INSTALL ANY AIRBAG SYSTEM OR REMOVAL
RELATED STEERING WHEEL AND STEERING COL- (1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
UMN COMPONENTS YOU MUST FIRST DISCON- (2) Using finger pressure only, remove cable con-
NECT AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE nector by pushing connector off the throttle body
(GROUND) CABLE. WAIT 2 MINUTES FOR SYSTEM bellcrank pin (Fig. 4). DO NOT try to pull cable
CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE FURTHER connector off perpendicular to the bellcrank
SYSTEM SERVICE. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD pin. Connector will be broken.
RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT AND POS- (3) Two squeeze tabs are located on sides of speed
SIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. control cable at cable locking plate (Fig. 5). Squeeze
the tabs together and push cable out of cable locking
plate.
REMOVAL (4) Unclip cable from cable guide at valve cover
(1) Disconnect and isolate negative battery cable (Fig. 5).
from battery. (5) Disconnect servo cable at servo. Refer to Speed
(2) Remove airbag module. Refer to Group 8M, Control Servo—Removal/Installation.
Passive Restraint Systems for procedures.
(3) From underside of steering wheel, remove INSTALLATION
speed control switch mounting screw (Fig. 3). (1) Attach end of cable to speed control servo.
(4) Remove switch from steering wheel and unplug Refer to Speed Control Servo Removal/Installation.
electrical connector. (2) Install cable into cable locking plate (snaps in).
(3) Install cable connector at throttle body
INSTALLATION bellcrank pin (snaps on).
(1) Plug electrical connector into switch. (4) Clip cable to cable guide at valve cover.
(2) Position switch to steering wheel. (5) Connect negative battery cable to battery.
(3) Install switch mounting screw and tighten to (6) Before starting engine, operate accelerator
1.5 N·m (14 in. lbs.) torque. pedal to check for any binding.
VACUUM RESERVOIR
REMOVAL
The vacuum reservoir is located behind right front
bumper end cap on vehicles equipped with LHD (Left
Hand Drive) (Fig. 6). It is located behind left front
bumper end cap on vehicles equipped with RHD
(Right Hand Drive).
(1) Remove front bumper end cap. Refer to Front
Bumper End Cap in Group 23, Body for procedures.
(2) Remove vacuum line at reservoir (Fig. 7).
(3) Remove 2 reservoir mounting screws.
(4) Remove reservoir from bumper bar.
Fig. 4 Servo Cable to Bellcrank—Remove/Install
Fig. 6 Vacuum Reservoir Location
Fig. 5 Squeeze Tabs at Cable Locking Plate

Fig. 7 Vacuum Reservoir Removal/Installation
INSTALLATION SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Position reservoir to bumper bar and install
mounting screws. Tighten screws to 8 N·m (72 in. TORQUE CHART
lbs.) torque.
(2) Install vacuum line to reservoir Description Torque
(3) Install front bumper end cap. Refer to Group Servo Mounting Bracket-to-Servo Nuts . . . . 8.5 N·m
23, Body for procedures. (75 in. lbs.)
Servo Mounting Bracket-to-Body Bolts . . . . . 2 N·m
(20 in. lbs.)
Speed Control Switch Mounting Screws . . . 1.5 N·m
(14 in. lbs.)
Vacuum Reservoir Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m
(72 in. lbs.)
XJ VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 8H - 1
VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTENTS
page
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION • Two separate speed control switch modules are

mounted on the steering wheel to the left and right
INTRODUCTION side of the driver’s airbag module. Switch features
This group covers both Left-Hand Drive (LHD) and are:
Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this model. • Within the two switch modules, five momen-
Whenever feasible, the RHD versions of affected tary contact switches, supporting seven different
vehicle components have been constructed as mirror- speed control functions are used. The outputs from
image of the LHD versions. While most of the illus- these switches are filtered into one input. The MSA
trations used in this group represent only the LHD determines which output has been applied through
version, the diagnostic and service procedures out- resistive multiplexing. The input circuit voltage is
lined can generally be applied to either version. measured by the MSA to determine which switch
Exceptions to this rule have been clearly identified as function has been selected.
LHD or RHD, if a special illustration or procedure • A speed control indicator lamp, located on the
was/is required. instrument panel cluster is energized by the MSA via
Features unique to the diesel engine will be cov- the CCD Bus. This occurs when speed control system
ered in this section. power has been turned ON, and the engine is run-
• Models equipped with the 2.5L diesel engine do ning.
not use a vacuum reservoir to retain engine vacuum • The two switch modules are labeled: ON/OFF,
for speed control operation. There are no vaccum-op- SET, RESUME/ACCEL, CANCEL and COAST. Refer
erated speed control servos used in vehicles with the to the owner’s manual for more information on speed
2.5L diesel engine. control switch functions and setting procedures. The
• The range of the speed control system operation individual switches cannot be repaired. If one indi-
is restricted to speeds between 56 km/h (35 MPH) to vidual switch fails, the switch module must be
145 km/h (90 MPH). replaced.
• Inputs to the MSA that allow speed control oper-
ation are from the vehicle speed sensor and the
Speed Control Switch.
XJ TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMS 8J - 1
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD

COMBINATION FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 WARNING SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
TURN SIGNAL CANCELLING CAM . . . . . . . . . . . 3 COMBINATION FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD
WARNING SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WARNING SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TURN SIGNAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION lamp and rear tail/stop/turn signal lamp to flash on
and off. If the exterior lamps are turned off, the front
TURN SIGNAL SYSTEM park/turn signal lamp and the front side marker
lamp will flash in unison. If the exterior lamps are
DESCRIPTION turned on, the front park/turn signal lamp and the
A turn signal system is standard factory-installed front side marker lamp will flash alternately.
safety equipment on this model. The turn signal sys- See the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for
tem uses ignition switched battery current, and will more information on the features, use and operation
operate only when the ignition switch is in the On or of the turn signal system.
Accessory positions. The turn signal system includes
the following components: HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
• Combination flasher
• Front side marker lamps DESCRIPTION
• Turn signal cancelling cam A hazard warning system is standard factory-in-
• Turn signal indicator lamps stalled safety equipment on this model. Unlike the
• Turn signal lamps turn signal system, the hazard warning system uses
• Turn signal switch. a non-switched source of battery current so that the
Refer to Lamp in the proper section of Group 8L - system will operate regardless of the ignition switch
Lamps for more information on the exterior turn sig- position. The hazard warning system includes the fol-
nal lamps. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the lowing components:
proper section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys- • Combination flasher
tems for more information on the turn signal indica- • Front side marker lamps
tor lamps. Following are general descriptions of the • Hazard warning switch
major components in the turn signal system. For • Turn signal indicator lamps
complete circuit diagrams, refer to Turn Signals in • Turn signal lamps.
the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. Refer to Lamp in the proper section of Group 8L -
Lamps for more information on the exterior turn sig-
OPERATION nal lamps. Refer to Instrument Cluster in the
With the ignition switch in the On or Accessory proper section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys-
position, and the turn signal (multi-function) switch tems for more information on the turn signal indica-
control stalk moved up (right turn) or down (left tor lamps. Following are general descriptions of the
turn), the turn signal system is activated. When the major components in the hazard warning system. For
turn signal system is activated, the circuitry of the complete circuit diagrams, refer to Turn Signals in
turn signal switch and the combination flasher will the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
cause the selected (right or left) turn signal indicator
lamp, front park/turn signal lamp, front side marker
8J - 2 TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING SYSTEMS XJ
OPERATION
With the hazard warning switch in the On posi-
tion, the hazard warning system is activated. When
the hazard warning system is activated, the circuitry
of the hazard warning switch and the combination
flasher will cause both the right side and the left side
turn signal indicator lamps, front park/turn signal
lamps, front side marker lamps and rear tail/stop/
turn signal lamps to flash on and off. If the exterior
lamps are turned off, the front park/turn signal
lamps and the front side marker lamps will flash in
unison. If the exterior lamps are turned on, the front
park/turn signal lamps and the front side marker
lamps will flash alternately.
See the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for
more information on the features, use and operation
of the hazard warning system. Fig. 1 Multi-Function Switch
OPERATION
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD
WARNING SWITCH TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
The multi-function switch control stalk that
DESCRIPTION extends from the left side of the steering column just
The turn signal and hazard warning switches are below the steering wheel is moved up or down to
integral to the multi-function switch unit, which is activate the turn signal switch. When the control
secured to the left side of the steering column (Fig. stalk is moved in the upward direction, the right
1). The only visible parts of the multi-function switch turn signal switch circuitry is activated; and, when
are the control stalk that extends from the left side the control stalk is moved in the downward direction,
of the steering column, and the hazard warning the left turn signal switch circuitry is activated. The
switch button that protrudes from the top of the turn signal switch has a detent position in each
steering column. The multi-function switch control direction that provides turn signals with automatic
stalk has international control symbols on it, which cancellation, and an intermediate momentary posi-
identify its functions. The hazard warning switch tion in each direction that provides turn signals only
button is identified with a double triangle, which is until the multi-function switch control stalk is
the international control symbol for hazard warning. released.
The remainder of the multi-function switch is con- When the turn signal switch is in a detent posi-
cealed beneath the steering column shrouds. tion, it is turned off by one of two turn signal cancel-
The multi-function switch also contains circuitry ling cam lobes that are integral to the rotor of the
for the following functions: clockspring mechanism. Turning the steering wheel
• Headlamp beam selection causes the turn signal cancelling cam lobes to contact
• Headlamp optical horn a cancel actuator in the multi-function switch, and
The information contained in this group addresses the turn signal switch automatically returns to the
only the multi-function switch turn signal and haz- off position.
ard warning functions. For information relative to
the other systems that are controlled by and circuits HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
that are integral to the multi-function switch, see the The hazard warning switch is controlled by the
group in this service manual that covers that system. hazard warning switch button. Slide the switch but-
However, the turn signal and hazard warning ton to the left to turn the switch on and activate the
switches cannot be repaired. If these switches or any hazard warning system, and slide the button to the
other circuit or component of the multi-function right again to turn the switch and the hazard warn-
switch unit is faulty or damaged, the entire multi- ing system off.
function switch unit must be replaced.
TURN SIGNAL CANCELLING CAM outputs or functions. The combination flasher should
never be substituted for an ISO-relay or replaced
DESCRIPTION with an ISO-relay, or else component and vehicle
The turn signal cancelling cam is concealed within damage may occur.
the steering column below the steering wheel. The Because of the active electronic elements within
turn signal cancelling cam consists of two lobes that the combination flasher, it cannot be tested with con-
are integral to the lower surface of the clockspring ventional automotive electrical test equipment. If the
rotor. The clockspring mechanism provides turn sig- combination flasher is believed to be faulty, test the
nal cancellation as well as a constant electrical con- turn signal system and hazard warning system cir-
nection between the horn switch, driver side airbag cuits as described in this group. Then replace the
module and speed control switches on the steering combination flasher with a known good unit to con-
wheel and the instrument panel wire harness on the firm system operation.
steering column. The housing of the clockspring is The combination flasher has five blade-type termi-
secured to the steering column and remains station- nals intended for the following inputs and outputs:
ary. The rotor of the clockspring, including the turn fused B(+), fused ignition switch output, ground, turn
signal cancelling cam lobes rotate with the steering signal circuit, and hazard warning circuit. Constant
wheel. battery voltage and ground are supplied to the
The turn signal cancelling cam is integral to the flasher so that it can perform the hazard warning
clockspring and cannot be repaired. If faulty or dam- function, and ignition switched battery voltage is
aged, the entire clockspring assembly must be supplied for the turn signal function. Refer to Turn
replaced. Refer to Clockspring in the Removal and Signals in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
Installation section of Group 8M - Passive Restraint grams for complete circuit diagrams.
Systems for the clockspring service procedures. The combination flasher is located in a wire har-
ness connector which is secured to the diagnostics
OPERATION splice block bracket outboard of the steering column
The turn signal cancelling cam has two lobes opening underneath the instrument panel. The com-
molded into the lower surface of the clockspring bination flasher cannot be repaired or adjusted and,
rotor. When the turn signals are activated by moving if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
the multi-function switch control stalk to a detent
position, a turn signal cancel actuator is extended OPERATION
from the inside surface of the multi-function switch The IC within the combination flasher (Fig. 2) con-
housing toward the clockspring rotor. When the tains the logic that controls the flasher operation and
steering wheel is rotated during the turn, one of the the flash rate. Pin 6 of the IC receives a sense volt-
two turn signal cancelling cam lobes will contact the age from the hazard warning circuit of the multi-
turn signal cancel actuator, releasing the multi-func- function switch. When the hazard warning switch is
tion switch control stalk from its detent and cancel- turned on, the 9hazard on sense9 voltage will become
ling the turn signal event. low due to the circuit being grounded through the
turn signal bulbs. This low voltage sense signals the
COMBINATION FLASHER IC to energize the flash control Positive-Negative-
Positive (PNP) transistor at a pre-calibrated flash
DESCRIPTION rate or frequency. Each time the PNP transistor ener-
The combination flasher is a smart relay that func- gizes the hazard warning circuit, the pin 6 9hazard
tions as both the turn signal system and the hazard on sense9 voltage will become high and the IC signals
warning system flasher. The combination flasher con- the PNP transistor to de-energize the circuit. This
tains active electronic Integrated Circuitry (IC) ele- cycling will continue until the hazard warning switch
ments. This flasher is designed to handle the current is turned off.
flow requirements of the factory-installed lighting. If Likewise, pin 8 of the IC receives a sense voltage
supplemental lighting is added to the turn signal from the turn signal circuits of the multi-function
lamp circuits, such as when towing a trailer with switch. When the left or right turn signal switch is
lights, the combination flasher will automatically try turned on, the 9turn signal on sense9 voltage will
to compensate to keep the flash rate the same. become low due to the circuit being grounded
While the combination flasher has a International through the turn signal bulbs. This low voltage sense
Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay terminal signals the IC to energize the flash control PNP tran-
configuration or footprint, the internal circuitry is sistor at a pre-calibrated flash rate or frequency.
much different. The combination flasher does not use Each time the PNP transistor energizes the turn sig-
standard ISO-relay inputs or provide ISO-relay type nal circuit, the pin 8 9turn signal on sense9 voltage
If the problem being diagnosed is related to a fail-
ure of the turn signals to automatically cancel follow-
ing completion of a turn, inspect the multi-function
switch for a faulty or damaged cancel actuator and
inspect the turn signal cancelling cam lobes on the
clockspring mechanism for damage or improper
installation. For complete circuit diagrams, refer to
Turn Signals in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring
Diagrams.

INJURY.
Fig. 2 Combination Flasher - Typical
will become high and the IC signals the PNP transis- Actuate the turn signal switch or the hazard warning
tor to de-energize the circuit. This cycling will con- switch. Observe the turn signal indicator lamp(s) in
tinue until the right or left turn signal switch is the instrument cluster. If the flash rate is very high,
turned off. check for a turn signal bulb that is not lit or is very
A special design feature of the combination flasher dimly lit. Repair the circuits to that lamp or replace
allows it to 9sense9 that a turn signal circuit or bulb the faulty bulb, as required. If the turn signal indi-
is not operating, and provide the driver an indication cator(s) fail to light, go to Step 2.
of the condition by flashing the remaining bulbs in (2) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
the affected circuit at a higher rate (120 flashes-per- Check the turn signal fuse in the junction block
minute or higher). Conventional flashers either con- and/or the hazard warning fuse in the Power Distri-
tinue flashing at their typical rate (heavy-duty type), bution Center (PDC). If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
or discontinue flashing the affected circuit entirely repair the shorted circuit or component as required
(standard-duty type). During turn signal operation, and replace the faulty fuse(s).
the combination flasher IC compares normal battery (3) Check for battery voltage at the hazard warn-
voltage input on pin 2 with the shunt resistor voltage ing fuse in the PDC. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK,
input on pin 7. If the IC 9senses9 that the voltage dif- repair the open fused B(+) circuit to the battery as
ference between pin 2 and pin 7 is different than the required.
pre-calibrated value of the IC, it will increase the (4) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
rate at which it signals the PNP transistor to ener- Check for battery voltage at the turn signal fuse in
gize the pin 1 output. Thus, the inoperative half (left the fuseblock module. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK,
or right side) of the turn signal circuit will flash repair the open fused ignition switch output (accesso-
faster. ry/run) circuit to the ignition switch as required.
(5) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
Remove the combination flasher from its wire har-
ness connector and replace it with a known good
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD WARNING unit. Connect the battery negative cable. Test the
SYSTEMS operation of the turn signal and hazard warning sys-
When diagnosing the turn signal or hazard warn- tems. If OK, discard the faulty combination flasher.
ing circuits, remember that high generator output If not OK, remove the test flasher and go to Step 6.
can burn out bulbs rapidly and repeatedly. If this is a (6) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
problem on the vehicle being diagnosed, refer to Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
Charging System in the Diagnosis and Testing sec- output (accessory/run) circuit cavity in the combina-
tion of Group 8C - Charging System for further diag- tion flasher wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step
nosis of a possible generator overcharging condition. 7. If not OK, go to Step 9.
(7) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. (2) Using an ohmmeter, perform the switch conti-
Place the hazard warning switch in the On position. nuity checks at the connector receptacle terminals as
Check for battery voltage again at the fused B+ cir- shown in the Multi-Function Switch Continuity chart
cuit cavity in the combination flasher wire harness (Fig. 3).
connector. If OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, go to Step
9.
cable. Check for continuity between the ground cir-
cuit cavity of the combination flasher wire harness
connector and a good ground. There should be conti-
nuity. If OK, go to Step 9. If not OK, repair the open
ground circuit to ground as required.
(9) Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness
connector from the multi-function switch connector
receptacle. Check for continuity between the turn sig-
nal output circuit cavities in the combination flasher
wire harness connector and in the instrument panel
wire harness connector for the multi-function switch.
There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 10. If
not OK, repair the open turn signal output circuit as
required.
(10) Check for continuity between the hazard
warning output circuit cavities in the combination
flasher wire harness connector and in the instrument
panel wire harness connector for the multi-function
switch. There should be continuity. If OK, refer to
Turn Signal Switch and Hazard Warning Switch Fig. 3 Multi-Function Switch Continuity
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If
not OK, repair the open hazard warning output cir- (3) If the turn signal switch or hazard warning
cuit as required. switch fails any of the continuity checks, replace the
faulty multi-function switch assembly as required. If
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD the switch circuits are OK, repair the lighting cir-
cuits as required.
WARNING SWITCH
The turn signal switch and the hazard warning
switch are integral to the multi-function switch. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Refer to Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Sys-
tems in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this COMBINATION FLASHER
group before testing the multi-function switch. For
complete circuit diagrams, refer to Turn Signals in WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- INJURY.
INJURY. REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
cable. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness (2) Remove the knee blocker from the instrument
connector from the multi-function switch connector panel. Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and
receptacle. Installation section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel
Systems for the procedures.
(3) Reach through the outboard side of the steer- TURN SIGNAL SWITCH AND HAZARD
ing column opening to access and disengage the com-
WARNING SWITCH
bination flasher wire harness connector retainer from
the instrument panel diagnostics mounting bracket WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
(Fig. 4). BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
INJURY.
REMOVAL
cable.
Installation section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel
(3) Remove the three screws that secure the lower
steering column shroud to the upper shroud (Fig. 5).
Fig. 4 Combination Flasher Remove/Install

(4) Pull the combination flasher into the instru-
ment panel steering column opening far enough to
access the wire harness connector.
(5) Remove the combination flasher from the wire
harness connector.
(6) Remove the combination flasher from under
the instrument panel.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the combination flasher under the
instrument panel.
(2) Align the combination flasher terminals with
the terminal cavities in the wire harness connector.
(3) Push in firmly on the combination flasher until
the terminals are fully seated in the terminal cavities
in the wire harness connector.
(4) Install the combination flasher wire harness
connector retainer into the mounting hole of the
instrument panel diagnostics mounting bracket.
(6) Reconnect the battery negative cable. Fig. 5 Steering Column Shrouds Remove/Install
(4) If the vehicle is equipped with a standard non-
tilt steering column, loosen the two upper steering
column mounting nuts. If the vehicle is equipped
with the optional tilt steering column, move the tilt
steering column to the fully lowered position.
(5) Remove both the upper and lower shrouds from vide additional clearance to ease multi-function
the steering column. switch removal.
(6) Remove the two screws that secure the multi- (10) Disconnect the two instrument panel wire
function switch water shield and bracket to the top of harness connectors from the multi-function switch
the steering column (Fig. 6). connector receptacles.
(11) Remove the multi-function switch and water
shield from the steering column as a unit.
(12) Gently and carefully remove the water shield
from the switch by pulling it over the hazard warn-
ing switch button and the multi-function switch con-
trol stalk.
INSTALLATION
(1) Gently and carefully install the water shield
onto the switch by pulling it over the hazard warning
switch button and the multi-function switch control
stalk.
(2) Position the multi-function switch and water
shield near its mounts on the steering column as a unit.
(3) Reconnect the two instrument panel wire har-
ness connectors to the multi-function switch connec-
Fig. 6 Water Shield Upper Screws Remove/Install tor receptacles.
(4) Position the multi-function switch onto its
(7) Remove the one screw located below the multi- mounts on the left side of the steering column. If the
function switch control stalk that secures the multi- vehicle is equipped with the optional tilt steering col-
function switch water shield and bracket to the umn, lifting gently upward on the tilt release lever
steering column (Fig. 7). will provide additional clearance to ease multi-func-
tion switch installation.
(5) Position the lower mounting tab of the multi-
function switch water shield bracket to the steering
column screw boss below the multi-function switch
control stalk.
(6) Install and tighten the one screw located below
the multi-function switch control stalk that secures
the multi-function switch water shield and bracket to
the steering column. Tighten the screw to 1.1 N·m
(10 in. lbs.).
(7) Install and tighten the two screws that secure
the multi-function switch water shield and bracket to
the top of the steering column. Tighten the screws to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(8) Position both the upper and lower shrouds onto
the steering column.
Fig. 7 Water Shield Lower Screw Remove/Install (9) Install and tighten the three screws that secure
the lower steering column shroud to the upper
(8) Gently pull the lower mounting tab of the
shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 N·m (18 in. lbs.).
multi-function switch water shield bracket away from
(10) If the vehicle is so equipped, tighten the two
the steering column far enough to clear the screw
nuts that secure the non-tilt steering column upper
boss below the multi-function switch control stalk.
mounting bracket to the dash panel steering column
(9) Lift the water shield and bracket with the
support bracket studs. Tighten the nuts to 22 N·m
multi-function switch off of the left side of the steer-
(200 in. lbs.).
ing column far enough to access the two multi-func-
tion switch wire harness connectors. If the vehicle is
equipped with the optional tilt steering column, lift-
ing gently upward on the tilt release lever will pro-
XJ WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS 8K - 1
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH . . . . . . 3

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM . . . . . . . 2 WASHER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
WINDSHIELD WASHER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH . . . . . . 7
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 WIPER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 WASHER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
WASHER NOZZLE AND PLUMBING . . . . . . . . . . 4 WIPER ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
WASHER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 WIPER BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
WASHER RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 WIPER LINKAGE AND PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
WIPER ARM AND BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WIPER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
WIPER LINKAGE AND PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH . . . . . 10
WIPER MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION The intermittent wipe mode delay times are driver
adjustable from about one second to about fifteen sec-
INTRODUCTION onds. The intermittent wipe mode is provided by
Windshield wiper and washer systems are stan- delay logic and relay control circuitry contained
dard factory-installed equipment on this model. A within the intermittent wiper/washer switch. The
rear wiper and washer system is optional factory-in- intermittent wipe relay is also contained within the
stalled equipment. Following is general information switch.
about the available wiper and washer systems for The windshield wipers will operate only when the
this vehicle. Refer to 8W-53 - Wipers in Group 8W - ignition switch is in the Accessory or On positions. A
Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit descriptions circuit breaker located in the junction block protects
and diagrams. the circuitry of the windshield wiper system. Refer to
the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive information on the features, use and operation of the
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this windshield wiper system.
versions of affected vehicle components have been WINDSHIELD WASHER SYSTEM
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. An electrically operated windshield washer system
While most of the illustrations used in this group is standard equipment. The washer reservoir is
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and located between the inner and outer front fenders,
service procedures outlined can generally be above and forward of the left front wheel housing.
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule The reservoir filler neck is located in the engine com-
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a partment on the left inner fender shield.
special illustration or procedure is required. The washer reservoir holds the washer fluid, which
is pressurized by a pump when the windshield
washer switch lever is actuated. The windshield
WINDSHIELD WIPER SYSTEM washer pump feeds the pressurized washer fluid
An intermittent windshield wiper system is stan- through the washer system plumbing to the wind-
dard equipment on this model. The intermittent shield washer nozzles.
wiper system lets the driver select from either of two A low washer fluid warning lamp is standard
wiper speeds, low or high, or the intermittent wipe equipment on all models equipped with the optional
delay mode. rear wiper and washer system. The low washer fluid
warning lamp in the instrument cluster will warn
8K - 2 WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEMS XJ
the driver when the washer fluid level needs to be The blades are mounted to spring-loaded wiper
checked. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys- arms. The spring tension of the wiper arms controls
tems for more information on this feature. the pressure applied to the blades on the glass. The
The washers will operate only when the ignition windshield wiper arms are secured by an integral
switch is in the Accessory or On positions. If the wip- latch to the two wiper pivots on the cowl plenum cov-
ers are not already turned on when the washers are er/grille panel at the base of the windshield. The rear
activated, the wipers will be automatically cycled for wiper arm is secured by a nut directly to the rear
one or two wipes, then be turned off. A fuse located wiper motor output shaft on the liftgate below the
in the junction block protects the circuitry of the liftgate glass.
washer system. Refer to the owner’s manual in the The wiper arms and blades cannot be adjusted or
vehicle glove box for more information on the fea- repaired. If faulty or damaged, they must be
tures, use and operation of the windshield washer replaced.
system.
WIPER LINKAGE AND PIVOT
REAR WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM The wiper linkage and pivot module is secured
A rear wiper and washer system is an available with screws to the cowl top panel beneath the cowl
option on this model. The rear wiper system is a plenum cover/grille panel. The wiper motor is
fixed-cycle wiper system. A single switch in the secured with screws to the center of the linkage and
instrument panel accessory switch bezel controls both pivot module bracket. The wiper pivots are secured
the rear wiper and washer functions. The rear to the ends of the module bracket.
washer system shares the reservoir of the windshield The two wiper pivot crank arms and the wiper
washer system, but has its own dedicated washer motor crank arm each have ball studs on their ends.
pump and plumbing. The left pivot ball stud is the longer of the three. A
The rear wiper and washer systems will operate connecting link with a plastic socket-type bushing in
only when the ignition switch is in the Accessory or the right end, and a plastic sleeve-type bushing in
On positions. A fuse in the junction block protects the the left end, is fit over the pivot ball studs to join the
circuitry of both the rear wiper and washer systems. two pivots.
Refer to the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove The wiper drive link has a plastic socket-type
box for more information on the features, use and bushing on each end. One end of the drive link is
operation of the rear wiper and washer system. snap-fit over the exposed end of the longer left pivot
ball stud, while the other end is snap-fit over the ball
stud on the wiper motor crank arm.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION The wiper linkage, pivots, bushings, motor, crank
arm, and mounting bracket are only serviced as a
WIPER ARM AND BLADE complete unit. If any part of this assembly is faulty
All Cherokee models have two 45.72-centimeter or damaged, the entire unit must be replaced.
(18-inch) windshield wiper blades with non-replace-
able rubber elements (squeegees). The optional rear WIPER MOTOR
wiper uses a single 33.0-centimeter (13-inch) wiper
blade with a non-replaceable rubber element (squee- FRONT
gee). The two-speed permanent magnet wiper motor has
Caution should be exercised to protect the rubber an integral transmission and park switch. The motor
squeegees from any petroleum-based cleaners or con- also contains an internal automatic resetting circuit
taminants, which will rapidly deteriorate the rubber. breaker to protect the motor from overloads.
If the squeegees are damaged, worn, or contami- The motor is secured to the wiper linkage and
nated, the entire wiper blade assembly must be pivot module bracket with three screws and is pro-
replaced. tected by a rubber boot. The wiper motor output
Wiper squeegees exposed to the elements for a long shaft passes through a hole in the module bracket,
time tend to lose their wiping effectiveness. Periodic where a nut secures the wiper motor crank arm to
cleaning of the squeegees is suggested to remove the motor output shaft. A reinforcement and stud
deposits of salt and road film. The wiper blades, plate with a rubber-isolated mounting bracket
arms, and windshield or rear glass should be cleaned extends from the cowl plenum side of the dash panel
with a sponge or cloth and windshield washer fluid, a to the motor mounting bracket to provide additional
mild detergent, or a non-abrasive cleaner. If the support.
squeegees continue to streak or smear, the wiper Wiper speed is controlled by current flow to the
blades should be replaced. proper set of brushes. The wiper motor completes its
wipe cycle when the windshield wiper switch stalk is
moved to the Off position, and parks the blades in
the lowest portion of the wipe pattern.
The windshield wiper motor cannot be repaired. If
faulty or damaged, the entire wiper linkage and pivot
module unit must be replaced. The reinforcement
bracket and stud plate are available for service.
REAR
The rear wiper motor is secured to a bracket that
is fastened to the liftgate inner panel, below the lift-
gate glass and behind the liftgate trim panel. The
motor output shaft passes through the liftgate outer
panel where a rubber gasket and plastic bezel unit,
and a nut seal and secure the unit to the liftgate
outer panel. The rear wiper arm is secured directly
to the motor output shaft with a nut. Fig. 1 Windshield Wiper Switch and Washer Switch
The rear wiper motor unit provides three operating instrument panel center bezel area, below the heater
modes: and air conditioner controls. The rear wiper and
• Constant wipe that operates when the rear washer switch controls the rear wiper and washer
wiper switch is turned to the On position. functions.
• Constant wipe that operates when the rear The toggle-type switch features a detent in the On
washer switch is depressed. position, and a momentary Wash position. The rear
• A park mode that operates the wiper motor until wiper and washer switch also has an integral illumi-
the blade reaches its park position when either the nation lamp with a serviceable bulb. The switch knob
rear wiper switch or the ignition switch is placed in is pushed down to its detent to activate the rear
the Off position. wiper system, and down again to the momentary
The rear wiper motor cannot be repaired. If faulty position to activate the rear washer system. Both the
or damaged, the entire rear wiper motor assembly rear wiper and rear washer motors will operate con-
must be replaced. tinuously for as long as the switch is held in the
momentary Wash position.
WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH The rear wiper and washer switch cannot be
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the entire switch
FRONT unit must be replaced.
The windshield wiper and washer switches are
mounted on the right side of the steering column WASHER RESERVOIR
(Fig. 1). The switch stalk is moved up or down to A single washer fluid reservoir is used for both the
select the wiper switch mode, and pulled towards the standard front and optional rear washer systems.
steering wheel to activate the washer system. An The washer fluid reservoir is secured between the
intermittent wipe system control knob on the end of left front inner and outer fender panels, above and in
the switch stalk is rotated to select the desired delay front of the left front wheel house.
interval. The windshield wiper and washer switch Each washer pump and motor unit has a barbed
contains circuitry for the following functions: nipple, which is installed through a rubber grommet
• Windshield wipers seal inserted in a hole near the bottom of the reser-
• Intermittent wiper delay relay control and logic voir. The washer pumps are retained by an interfer-
• Intermittent wipe relay ence fit between the barbed nipple and the grommet
• Windshield washers. seal, which is a light press fit.
The windshield wiper and washer switch cannot be The washer reservoir has a separate filler neck
repaired. If any function of the switch is faulty, or if and grommet seal. The filler neck snaps into the res-
the switch is damaged, the entire switch unit must ervoir from the engine compartment side of the left
be replaced. inner fender shield. A snap-fit filler cap with an inte-
gral bail strap is fit to the reservoir filler neck. On
REAR models so equipped, the reservoir also has a hole pro-
The single two-function rear wiper and washer vided for a washer fluid level sensor.
switch is installed in the instrument panel accessory The washer reservoir, filler neck, grommet seal,
switch bezel, which is located near the bottom of the and filler cap are each available for service.
WASHER PUMP Located at the highest point of the supply hose

The washer pumps and motors are mounted near routing, beneath the liftgate opening upper header
the bottom of the washer reservoir. A barbed nipple garnish moulding, the hose connects to a check valve.
on the pump housing passes through a rubber grom- The check valve prevents washer fluid drain-back or
met seal installed in a hole near the bottom of the siphoning from occurring. From the check valve,
reservoir. The washer pump is retained by an inter- another single hose is routed through a grommet to
ference fit between the barbed pump nipple and the the liftgate, where it is connected to a nipple that
grommet seal, which is a light press fit. protrudes from the inside of the rear wiper motor
A permanently lubricated and sealed motor is cou- output shaft bezel.
pled to a rotor-type pump. Washer fluid is gravity-fed The washer fluid passes through the bezel nipple
from the reservoir to the pump. When the motor is to the outside of the liftgate. There a single hose is
energized, the pump pressurizes the washer fluid connected to a nipple on the outside of the rear wiper
and forces it through the plumbing to the nozzles. motor output shaft bezel. The hose is routed through
On vehicles with the optional rear wiper/washer a plastic trough-like guard snapped to the underside
system, the front washer pump and motor is always of the rear wiper arm. The hose is then attached to
mounted in the lower hole of the reservoir. The the single rear washer nozzle. The nozzle snaps into
washer pump and motor unit cannot be repaired. If place on the rear wiper arm.
faulty, the entire washer pump and motor unit must The rear washer nozzle cannot be adjusted. The
be replaced. nozzle, bezel, check valve, and hose fittings cannot be
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, they must be
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR replaced.
The washer fluid level sensor is mounted near the
front of the washer reservoir, above the two washer DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
pumps. A barbed nipple on the sensor is press-fit into
a rubber grommet seal installed in a hole in the front
WIPER SYSTEM
of the reservoir.
When the fluid level in the reservoir falls below
FRONT
the pivoting float on the sensor, the float changes
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
position and closes the internal switch contacts of the
8W-53 - Wipers in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
sensor. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys-
tems for diagnosis of the low washer fluid warning WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
lamp and circuit, including the sensor. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
The washer fluid level sensor cannot be repaired. If RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
faulty or damaged, the sensor unit must be replaced. STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
WASHER NOZZLE AND PLUMBING SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
FRONT BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
Pressurized washer fluid is fed through a single INJURY.
hose, attached to a barbed nipple on the front washer
pump. The hose is routed to a tee fitting located in (1) Check the circuit breaker in the junction block.
the cowl plenum area, beneath the cowl plenum cov- If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the faulty cir-
er/grille panel. Hoses from the tee fitting are routed cuit breaker.
to the two nozzles, which are riveted into openings in (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
the cowl plenum cover/grille panel below the wind- cable. Unplug the windshield wiper switch wire har-
shield. ness connector. Connect the battery negative cable.
The two fluidic washer nozzles are not adjustable. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check
The nozzles and hose fittings cannot be repaired and, for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch out-
if faulty or damaged, they must be replaced. put (run/acc) circuit cavity of the wiper switch wire
harness connector. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
REAR repair the open circuit to the junction block as
Pressurized washer fluid is fed through a single required.
hose, attached to a barbed nipple on the rear washer (3) If the problem being diagnosed involves only
pump. The hose is routed from the front of the vehi- the pulse wipe, wipe-after-wash, or intermittent wipe
cle to the liftgate with the body wire harness. modes, go to Step 4. If not, go to Step 5.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav- RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
ity of the wiper switch wire harness connector and a STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
replace the faulty switch. If not OK, repair the open SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
circuit to ground as required. CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
(5) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. INJURY.
Remove the windshield wiper and washer switch and
check the switch continuity. See Wiper Switch and (1) Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go
Washer Switch in the Diagnosis and Testing section to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or
of this group for the procedures. If OK, go to Step 6. component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
If not OK, replace the faulty switch. (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(6) Unplug the windshield wiper motor wire har- cable. Remove the accessory switch bezel and unplug
ness connector. Check for continuity between the the wire harness connector from the rear wiper and
ground circuit cavity in the body half of the wiper washer switch. Connect the battery negative cable.
motor wire harness connector and a good ground. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Check
There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 7. If not for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch out-
OK, repair the open circuit to ground as required. put circuit cavity of the rear wiper and washer
(7) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the switch wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 3. If
ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery not OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block
voltage at the fused ignition switch output (run/acc) as required.
circuit cavity in the body half of the wiper motor wire (3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
harness connector. If OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
repair the open circuit to the junction block as Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav-
required. ity of the rear wiper and washer switch wire harness
(8) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. connector and a good ground. There should be conti-
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. nuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
With the windshield wiper and washer switch wire circuit to ground as required.
harness connector still unplugged, check the cavities (4) Test the rear wiper and washer switch continu-
for each of the following circuits in the body half of ity. See Wiper Switch and Washer Switch in the
the wiper motor wire harness connector for continu- Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for the
ity to ground. In each case, there should be no conti- procedures. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, replace
nuity. If OK, go to Step 9. If not OK, repair the short the faulty switch.
circuit as required. (5) Remove the liftgate trim panel and unplug the
• Wiper park switch sense rear wiper motor wire harness connector. Connect
• Wiper switch low speed output the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch
• Wiper switch high speed output. to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the
(9) Check for continuity between the cavities in fused ignition switch output (run) circuit cavity of
the body half of the wiper motor wire harness con- the rear wiper motor wire harness connector. If OK,
nector and the cavities in the windshield wiper and go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the
washer switch wire harness connector for each of the junction block as required.
following circuits. In each case, there should be con- (6) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
tinuity. If OK, replace the faulty wiper motor. If not Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
OK, repair the open circuit as required. Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav-
• Wiper park switch sense ity of the rear wiper motor wire harness connector
• Wiper switch low speed output and a good ground. There should be continuity. If
• Wiper switch high speed output. OK, go to Step 7. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
ground as required.
REAR (7) Check for continuity between the rear wiper
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to motor control circuit cavity of the rear wiper motor
8W-53 - Wipers in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. wire harness connector and a good ground. There
should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 8. If not
OK, repair the short circuit as required.
(8) Check for continuity between the rear wiper (5) Check for continuity between the front washer
motor control circuit cavities of the rear wiper motor switch output circuit cavities of the front washer
wire harness connector and the rear wiper and pump wire harness connector and the wiper/washer
washer switch wire harness connector. There should switch wire harness connector. There should be con-
be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty rear wiper tinuity. If OK, replace the faulty switch. If not OK,
motor. If not OK, repair the open circuit as required. repair the open circuit as required.
WASHER SYSTEM REAR

The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative
FRONT rear washer pump. If the washer pump operates, but
The diagnosis found here addresses an inoperative no washer fluid is emitted from the washer nozzle, be
front washer pump. If the washer pump operates, certain to check the fluid level in the reservoir. Check
but no washer fluid is emitted from the washer noz- for ice or other foreign material in the reservoir, and
zles, be certain to check the fluid level in the reser- for pinched, disconnected, broken, or incorrectly
voir. Check for ice or other foreign material in the routed washer system plumbing. For circuit descrip-
reservoir, and for pinched, disconnected, broken, or tions and diagrams, refer to 8W-53 - Wipers in Group
incorrectly routed washer system plumbing. For cir- 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
cuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W-53 - Wip-
ers in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- INJURY.
INJURY. (1) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
Place the rear wiper/washer switch in the Wipe posi-
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. tion. Check whether the rear wiper is operating. If
Turn the wiper switch to the Low or High speed posi- OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, see the Wiper System
tion. Check whether the wipers operate. If OK, go to diagnosis in this group.
Step 2. If not OK, see the Wiper System diagnosis in (2) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
this group. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Unplug the rear washer pump wire harness connec-
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. tor. Check for continuity between the ground circuit
Unplug the front washer pump wire harness connec- cavity of the rear washer pump wire harness connec-
tor. Check for continuity between the ground circuit tor and a good ground. There should be continuity. If
cavity of the front washer pump wire harness connec- OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
tor and a good ground. There should be continuity. If ground as required.
OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to (3) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
ground as required. ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery
(3) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the voltage at the rear washer motor control circuit cav-
ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery ity of the rear washer pump wire harness connector
voltage at the front washer switch output circuit cav- while the rear washer switch is actuated. If OK,
ity of the front washer pump wire harness connector replace the faulty pump. If not OK, go to Step 4.
while actuating the washer switch. If OK, replace the (4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
faulty washer pump. If not OK, go to Step 4. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position. Unplug the rear wiper/washer switch wire harness
Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable. connector. Check for continuity between the rear
Unplug the windshield wiper/washer switch wire washer motor control circuit cavity of the rear
harness connector. Check for continuity between the washer pump wire harness connector and a good
front washer switch output circuit cavity of the front ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to
washer pump wire harness connector and a good Step 5. If not OK, repair the short circuit as
ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to required.
Step 5 If not OK, repair the short circuit as required.
(5) Check for continuity between the rear washer
motor control circuit cavities of the rear washer
pump wire harness connector and the rear wiper/
washer switch wire harness connector. There should
be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty switch. If not
OK, repair the open circuit as required.
WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH

FRONT
Perform the diagnosis for the front wiper system
and/or washer system as described in this group
before testing the front wiper and washer switch. For
circuit descriptions and diagrams, see 8W-53 - Wip-
ers in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.

INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR Fig. 2 Windshield Wiper Switch and Washer Switch
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- Continuity
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL (1) Remove the accessory switch bezel from the
INJURY. instrument panel and unplug the rear wiper and
washer switch wire harness connector.
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (2) Using an ohmmeter, check the rear wiper and
cable. washer switch continuity at the switch terminals as
(2) Remove the front wiper and washer switch shown in the Rear Wiper Switch and Washer Switch
from the steering column and unplug the wire har- Continuity chart (Fig. 3).
ness connector from the switch.
(3) Using an ohmmeter, perform the switch conti-
nuity checks at the switch terminals as shown in the
Windshield Wiper Switch and Washer Switch Conti-
nuity chart (Fig. 2).
(4) If the switch fails any of the continuity checks,
replace the faulty switch. If the switch is OK, repair
the wiper system and/or washer system wire harness
circuits as required.
REAR
Perform the diagnosis for the rear wiper system
and/or washer system as described in this group
before testing the rear wiper and washer switch. For
circuit descriptions and diagrams, see 8W-53 - Wip-
ers in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.

SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- Fig. 3 Rear Wiper Switch and Washer Switch Continuity
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (3) If the switch fails any of the continuity checks,
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL replace the faulty switch. If the switch is OK, repair
INJURY. the rear wiper system and/or washer system wire
harness circuits as required.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION WIPER ARM

WIPER BLADE CAUTION: The use of a screwdriver or other prying
tool to remove a wiper arm may distort it. This dis-
FRONT tortion could allow the arm to come off of the pivot
shaft, regardless of how carefully it is installed.
NOTE: The notched retainer end of the wiper ele-
ment should always be oriented towards the end of
the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot. FRONT
(1) Lift the wiper arm to permit the latch to be
(1) Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade and pulled out to its holding position, then release the
element off of the windshield glass. arm (Fig. 5). The arm will remain off the windshield
(2) To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, with the latch in this position.
push the release tab under the arm tip and slide the
blade away from the tip towards the pivot end of the
arm (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4 Wiper Blade Remove/Install - Typical

(3) To install the wiper blade on the wiper arm, Fig. 5 Wiper Arm Remove/Install
slide the blade retainer into the U-shaped formation
(2) Remove the arm from the pivot using a rocking
on the tip of the wiper arm until the release tab
motion.
snaps into its locked position. Be certain that the
(3) Install the arm and blade with the wiper motor
notched retainer for the wiper element is oriented
in the Park position. See the Front Wiper Arm
towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to
Installation illustration (Fig. 6).
the wiper pivot.
REAR
NOTE: The notched retainer end of the wiper ele-
ment should always be oriented towards the end of
the wiper blade that is nearest to the wiper pivot.
(1) Lift the rear wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
and element off of the rear liftglass.
(2) To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm,
push the release tab under the arm tip and slide the
blade away from the tip towards the rear wiper
motor output shaft end of the arm (Fig. 4).
(3) To install the wiper blade on the wiper arm,
slide the blade retainer into the U-shaped formation
on the tip of the wiper arm until the release tab
snaps into its locked position. Be certain that the
notched retainer for the wiper element is oriented
towards the end of the wiper blade that is nearest to
the rear wiper motor output shaft. Fig. 6 Front Wiper Arm Installation
(4) Mount the arms on the pivot shafts so that the
distance from the lower edge of the wiper arm tip to
the upper edge of the lower windshield moulding is:
• 23 to 52 mm (0.90 to 2.04 inch) on the driver
side
• 33 to 62 mm (1.29 to 2.44 inch) on the passenger
side.
(5) Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield
slightly to relieve the spring tension on the latch.
Push the latch into the locked position and slowly
release the arm until the wiper blade rests on the
windshield.
(6) Operate the wipers with the windshield glass
wet, then turn the wiper switch to the Off position. Fig. 8 Rear Wiper Arm Installation
Check for the correct wiper arm positioning and (7) Tighten the wiper arm retaining nut to 18 N·m
readjust if required. (160 in. lbs.) and close the pivot cover.
REAR WIPER LINKAGE AND PIVOT
(1) Disconnect the washer nozzle hose and clip
The wiper linkage and pivots can only be removed
from the external nipple of the rear wiper motor out-
from or installed in the vehicle as a unit with the
put shaft bezel.
wiper motor. See Wiper Motor in this group for the
(2) Lift the wiper arm pivot cover and remove the
service procedures.
retaining nut (Fig. 7).
WIPER MOTOR
FRONT
cable.
(2) Remove the wiper arms from the wiper pivots.
See Wiper Arm in this group for the procedures.
(3) Remove the eight screws that secure the cowl
plenum cover/grille panel and screen to the cowl top
panel (Fig. 9).
Fig. 7 Rear Wiper Arm Remove/Install

(3) Remove the wiper arm from the motor output
shaft using a rocking motion.
(4) Install the rear wiper arm with the wiper
motor in the Park position. Place the rear wiper
blade on the glass so that it is parallel to the liftgate
glass opening, and install the wiper arm retaining
nut.
(5) Operate the rear wiper with the liftgate glass
wet, then turn the rear wiper switch to the Off posi-
tion so that the blade moves to the Park position. Fig. 9 Cowl Plenum Cover/Grille Panel Remove/
(6) The measurement from the tip of the blade Install
should now be from 27 to 35 mm (1.06 to 1.38 inch)
(4) Carefully lift the cowl plenum cover/grille panel
above the upper edge of the lower liftgate glass seal
and screen from the vehicle far enough to access the
(Fig. 8). Check for the correct wiper arm positioning
windshield washer plumbing. Use care so as not to
and readjust if required.
damage the paint around the pivot openings of the
panel.
(5) Disconnect the windshield washer supply hose
and the passenger side washer nozzle hose from the
washer nozzle supply hose tee fitting.
(6) Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel and
screen from the vehicle.
(7) Reach into the cowl plenum and unplug the
wiper motor wire harness connector.
(8) Open and support the hood
(9) Remove the two nuts that secure the studs of
the wiper module mounting bracket and reinforce-
ment to the dash panel (Fig. 10).
Fig. 11 Rear Wiper Motor Remove/Install

(6) Remove the bezel and rubber gasket from the
motor output shaft.
(7) Remove the liftgate trim panel from the lift-
gate. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
(8) Unplug the rear wiper motor wire harness con-
nector.
Fig. 10 Wiper Linkage Module Remove/Install (9) Remove the two screws that secure the rear
(10) Remove the four screws near the wiper pivots wiper motor mounting bracket to the liftgate inner
that secure the wiper module to the cowl plenum panel.
panel. (10) Remove the rear wiper motor and mounting
(11) Remove the wiper module from the cowl ple- bracket from the liftgate as a unit.
num as a unit. (11) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
(12) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Tighten the mounting hardware as follows:
Tighten the mounting hardware as follows: • Rear wiper motor mounting bracket screws - 5
• Wiper module mounting screws - 6 N·m (50 in. N·m (45 in. lbs.)
lbs.) • Rear wiper motor output shaft retaining nut - 3
• Wiper module mounting bracket and reinforce- N·m (27 in. lbs.).
ment nuts - 6 N·m (50 in. lbs.).
WIPER SWITCH AND WASHER SWITCH
REAR
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative FRONT
cable.
(2) From the outside of the liftgate glass, remove
the rear wiper arm from the rear wiper motor output
shaft. See Wiper Arm in this group for the proce-
dures.
(3) From the outside of the liftgate, remove the
rear wiper motor output shaft nut (Fig. 11).
(4) Pull the rear wiper motor output shaft bezel
and rubber gasket away from the liftgate far enough
INJURY.
to access the washer supply hose.
(5) Disconnect the washer supply hose from the
internal nipple on the bezel.
cable.
panel. See Knee Blocker in Group 8E - Instrument
Panel Systems for the procedures.
(3) If the vehicle is so equipped, move the tilt
steering column to the fully raised position.
(4) Insert the key in the ignition lock cylinder and
turn the ignition switch to the On position.
(5) Insert a small screwdriver or pin punch
through the access hole in the lower steering column
shroud and depress the ignition lock cylinder retain-
ing tumbler (Fig. 12).
Fig. 13 Water Shield Upper Screws Remove/Install

(12) Remove the one screw located below the
multi-function switch lever that secures the multi-
function switch water shield and bracket to the steer-
ing column (Fig. 14).
Fig. 12 Steering Column Shrouds Remove/Install

pull the ignition lock cylinder and key out of the igni- Fig. 14 Water Shield Lower Screw Remove/Install
tion lock housing.
(7) Remove the three screws that secure the lower (13) Gently pull the lower mounting tab of the
steering column shroud to the upper shroud. multi-function switch water shield bracket away from
(8) If the vehicle is so equipped, move the tilt the steering column far enough to clear the screw
steering column to the fully lowered position. boss below the multi-function switch lever.
(9) If the vehicle is so equipped, loosen the two (14) Lift the water shield and bracket with the
nuts that secure the non-tilt steering column upper multi-function switch off of the left side of the steer-
mounting bracket to the dash panel steering column ing column as a unit and move it out of the way. If
support bracket studs. Lower the column far enough the vehicle is equipped with the optional tilt steering
to remove the upper steering column shroud. column, lifting gently upward on the tilt release lever
(10) Remove both the upper and lower shrouds will provide additional clearance to ease multi-func-
from the steering column. tion switch removal.
(11) Remove the two screws that secure the multi- (15) Gently pull the windshield wiper and washer
function switch water shield and bracket to the top of switch up and away from the right side of the steer-
the steering column (Fig. 13). ing column far enough to access the wire harness
connector.
(16) Unplug the wire harness connector from the
windshield wiper and washer switch.
(17) Remove the windshield wiper and washer wiper and washer switch receptacle on the back of
switch from the steering column. the accessory switch bezel and pull the switch out of
(18) Reverse the removal procedures to install. the bezel.
Tighten the upper switch mounting screws to 2.2 (8) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Be
N·m (20 in. lbs.). Tighten the lower switch water certain that both of the switch snap clip retainers in
shield and bracket screw to 1.1 N·m (10 in. lbs.). the receptacle on the back of the accessory switch
Tighten the non-tilt steering column mounting nuts bezel are fully engaged. Tighten the mounting screws
to 22 N·m (200 in. lbs.) and the steering column to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
shroud mounting screws to 2 N·m (18 in. lbs.).
WASHER SYSTEM
REAR
WASHER RESERVOIR
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE cable.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY (2) The washer reservoir filler neck is held in the
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR reservoir by an interference fit. Remove the filler
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR neck from the reservoir using a combination of pull-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- ing, rocking and twisting actions (Fig. 16).
INJURY.

cable.
panel. See Instrument Panel Center Bezel in Group
8E - Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures.
(3) Remove the three screws that secure the acces-
sory switch bezel to the instrument panel (Fig. 15).
Fig. 16 Washer Reservoir Filler Neck Remove/Install

(3) Remove the engine air filter housing. Refer to
Group 14 - Fuel System for the procedures.
(4) Remove the two screws that secure the washer
reservoir to the inner fender shield (Fig. 17).
(6) Remove the left front inner wheelhouse splash
shield. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
(7) Remove the washer supply hose(s) from the
washer pump(s) and drain the washer fluid from the
Fig. 15 Accessory Switch Bezel Remove/Install reservoir into a clean container for reuse.
(8) Unplug the wire harness connectors from the
(4) Pull the accessory switch bezel out from the
washer pump(s) and the washer fluid level sensor.
instrument panel far enough to access the wire har-
(9) Slide the reservoir slightly towards the rear of
ness connectors.
the vehicle to release the two hooks from the inner
fender ledge slots.
rear of the accessory switches, the cigar lighter and
(10) Lower the front of the washer reservoir and
the power outlet.
slide the unit forward to remove it from the vehicle.
(6) Remove the accessory switch bezel from the
instrument panel.
Tighten the reservoir mounting screws to 3 N·m (26
(7) With a small thin-bladed screwdriver, gently
in. lbs.).
pry the snap clips at the top and bottom of the rear
ent itself to the horizontal position when the sensor
connector is pointed straight downwards.

flat-bladed tool, gently pry the washer fluid level sen-
sor out of the rubber grommet seal. Care must be
taken not to damage the reservoir.
(3) Remove the rubber grommet seal from the res-
ervoir and discard.
Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reser-
voir.
WASHER NOZZLE
FRONT
(1) Remove the wiper arms from the wiper pivots.
See Wiper Arm in this group for the procedures.
(2) Remove the eight screws that secure the cowl
plenum cover/grille panel and screen to the cowl top
panel (Fig. 18).
Fig. 17 Washer Reservoir Remove/Install

WASHER PUMP
cable.
(3) Remove the left front inner wheelhouse splash
shield. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
(4) Remove the washer supply hose(s) from the
barbed outlet nipple of the washer pump(s) and drain
the washer fluid from the reservoir into a clean con-
tainer for reuse.
washer pump(s). Fig. 18 Front Washer Nozzles Remove/Install
(6) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide (3) Carefully lift the cowl plenum cover/grille panel
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the barbed inlet nipple of and screen from the vehicle far enough to access the
the washer pump out of the rubber grommet seal in windshield washer plumbing. Use care so as not to
the reservoir. Care must be taken not to damage the damage the paint around the pivot openings of the
reservoir. panel.
(7) Remove the rubber grommet seal from the res- (4) Disconnect the windshield washer supply hose
ervoir and discard. and the passenger side washer nozzle hose from the
(8) Reverse the removal procedures to install. washer nozzle supply hose tee fitting.
Always use a new rubber grommet seal on the reser- (5) Remove the cowl plenum cover/grille panel and
voir. screen from the vehicle.
(6) From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SENSOR grille panel, disconnect the washer hose from the
(1) Remove the washer reservoir from the vehicle. nozzle fitting.
See Washer Reservoir in this group for the proce- (7) From the underside of the cowl plenum cover/
dures. grille panel, remove the rivet that secures the nozzle
to the opening in the cowl plenum cover/grille panel.
NOTE: The pivoting float of the washer fluid sensor (8) Remove the washer nozzle from the cowl ple-
must be in a horizontal position within the reservoir num cover/grille panel.
in order to be removed. With the reservoir empty (9) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
and in an upright position, the pivoting float will ori-
REAR CHECK VALVE
(1) Unsnap the rear washer nozzle from the rear (1) Remove the four screws that secure the liftgate
wiper arm (Fig. 19). opening upper garnish moulding to the upper liftgate
opening reinforcement.
(2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide-
bladed flat tool, gently pry the liftgate opening upper
garnish moulding away from the upper liftgate open-
ing reinforcement to release the snap clip retainers.
(3) Remove the garnish moulding from the upper
liftgate opening.
(4) Disconnect the liftgate half of the washer sup-
ply hose from the barbed nipple of the rear washer
system check valve.
(5) Disconnect the body half of the washer supply
hose from the other barbed nipple of the rear washer
system check valve.
(6) Remove the check valve from the vehicle.
(7) When reinstalling the check valve, be certain
the valve is properly oriented within the system flow
(Fig. 20).
Fig. 19 Rear Washer Nozzle Remove/Install

(2) Disconnect the washer supply hose from the
barbed rear washer nozzle nipple.
Fig. 20 Rear Washer System Check Valve
(8) Reverse the remaining removal procedures to
complete the installation.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 1
LAMPS
CONTENTS
page page
BULB APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 LAMP DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 LAMP SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LAMP BULB SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 LAMP SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
LAMP DIAGNOSIS
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION When it is necessary to remove components to ser-

vice another, it should not be necessary to apply
GENERAL INFORMATION excessive force or bend a component to remove it.
Each vehicle is equipped with various lamp assem- Before damaging a trim component, verify hidden
blies. A good ground is necessary for proper lighting fasteners or captured edges are not holding the com-
operation. Grounding is provided by the lamp socket ponent in place.
when it comes in contact with the metal body, or
through a separate ground wire. DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
When changing lamp bulbs check the socket for
corrosion. If corrosion is present, clean it with a wire
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES
brush and coat the inside of the socket lightly with
When a vehicle experiences problems with the
Mopar Multi-Purpose Grease or equivalent.
headlamp system, verify the condition of the battery
connections, fuses, charging system, headlamp bulbs,
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS wire connectors, relay, high beam switch, dimmer
WARNING: EYE PROTECTION SHOULD BE USED switch, and headlamp switch. Refer to Group 8W,
WHEN SERVICING GLASS COMPONENTS. PER- Wiring Diagrams for component locations and circuit
SONAL INJURY CAN RESULT. information.
SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS
CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of halogen bulbs
with fingers or other possibly oily surface, reduced HEADLAMP
bulb life will result. Always begin any diagnosis by testing all of the
Do not use bulbs with higher candle power than fuses and circuit breakers in the system. Refer to
indicated in the Bulb Application table at the end of Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams.
this group. Damage to lamp and/or Daytime Run- Conventional and halogen headlamps are inter-
ning Lamp Module can result. changeable. It is recommended that they not be
Do not use fuses, circuit breakers or relays hav- intermixed on a given vehicle.
ing greater amperage value than indicated on the
fuse panel or in the Owners Manual.
8L - 2 LAMPS XJ
HEADLAMPS ARE DIM 1. Loose or corroded battery cables. 1. Clean and secure battery cable clamps
WITH ENGINE IDLING and posts.
OR IGNITION TURNED 2. Loose or worn generator drive 2. Adjust or replace generator drive belt.
OFF belt.
3. Charging system output too low. 3. Test and repair charging system, refer to
Group 8A,
4. Battery has insufficient charge. 4. Test battery state-of-charge, refer to
Group 8A.
5. Battery is sulfated or shorted. 5. Load test battery, refer to Group 8A.
6. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 6. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
locations, refer to Group 8W.
7. Both headlamp bulbs defective. 7. Replace both headlamp bulbs.
HEADLAMP BULBS BURN 1. Charging system output too high. 1. Test and repair charging system, refer to
OUT Group 8A.
FREQUENTLY 2. Loose or corroded terminals or 2. Inspect and repair all connectors and
splices in circuit. splices, refer to Group 8W.
HEADLAMPS ARE DIM 1. Charging system output too low. 1. Test and repair charging system, refer to
WITH ENGINE RUNNING Group 8A.
ABOVE IDLE* 2. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 2. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
locations, refer to Group 8W.
3. High resistance in headlamp 3. Test amperage draw of headlamp circuit.
circuit.
4. Both headlamp bulbs defective. 4. Replace both headlamp bulbs.
HEADLAMPS FLASH 1. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 1. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
RANDOMLY locations, refer to Group 8W.
2. High resistance in headlamp 2. Test amperage draw of headlamp circuit.
circuit. Should not exceed 30 amps.
3. Faulty headlamp switch. 3. Replace headlamp switch.
4. Loose or corroded terminals or 4. Inspect and repair all connectors and
splices in circuit. splices, refer to Group 8W.
HEADLAMPS DO NOT 1. No voltage to headlamps. 1. Repair open headlamp circuit, refer to

ILLUMINATE Group 8W.
2. No Z1-ground at headlamps. 2. Repair circuit ground, refer to Group 8W.
3. Faulty headlamp switch. 3. Replace headlamp switch.
4. Faulty headlamp dimmer 4. Replace multi-function switch.
(multi-function) switch.
5. Broken connector terminal or wire 5. Repair connector terminal or wire splice.
splice in headlamp circuit.
*Canada vehicles must have lamps ON.

XJ LAMPS 8L - 3
FOG LAMP
FOG LAMPS ARE DIM 1. Loose or corroded battery cables. 1. Clean and secure battery cable clamps
WITH ENGINE IDLING OR and posts.
IGNITION TURNED OFF. 2. Loose or worn generator drive 2. Adjust or replace generator drive belt.
belt.
3. Charging system output too low. 3. Test and repair charging system. Refer to
Group 8A,
4. Battery has insufficient charge. 4. Test battery state-of -charge. Refer to
Group 8A.
5. Battery is sulfated or shorted. 5. Load test battery. Refer to Group 8A.
6. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 6. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
locations. Refer to Group 8W.
FOG LAMP BULBS BURN 1. Charging system output too high. 1. Test and repair charging system. Refer to
OUT FREQUENTLY Group 8A.

splices in circuit. splices. Refer to Group 8W.
FOG LAMPS ARE DIM 1. Charging system output too low. 1. Test and repair charging system. Refer to
WITH ENGINE RUNNING Group 8A.
ABOVE IDLE 2. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 2. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
locations. Refer to Group 8W.
3. High resistance in fog lamp circuit. 3. Test amperage draw of fog lamp circuit.
FOG LAMPS FLASH 1. Poor lighting circuit Z1-ground. 1. Test for voltage drop across Z1-ground
RANDOMLY locations. Refer to Group 8W.
2. High resistance in fog lamp circuit. 2. Test amperage draw of fog lamp circuit.
3. Faulty fog lamp switch. 3. Replace fog lamp switch.
splices in circuit. splices. Refer to Group 8W.
FOG LAMPS DO NOT 1. Blown fuse for fog lamp. 1. Replace fuse. Refer to Group 8W.
ILLUMINATE 2. No Z1-ground at fog lamps. 2. Repair circuit ground. Refer to Group
8W.
3. Faulty fog lamp switch. 3. Replace fog lamp switch.
4. Broken connector terminal or wire 4. Repair connector terminal or wire splice.
splice in fog lamp circuit.
5. Defective or burned out bulb. 5. Replace bulb.
8L - 4 LAMPS XJ
HEADLAMP DELAY MODULE body ground. The voltmeter should indicate battery
voltage. If not, repair the open circuit in the wire
DELAY FUNCTION INOPERATIVE harness from ignition switch to HDLP delay module.
(1) Ensure headlamps operate before proceeding. (5) Turn headlamps on and measure voltage at
(2) Remove, inspect and test the HDLP delay 10 delay module connector, terminal 6. The voltmeter
amp fuse in junction box. Replace if defective. should indicate battery voltage. If not repair open cir-
(3) With the key off and the connector discon- cuit between L2 and HDLP delay module.
nected, measure the resistance from the delay mod- (6) Measure the voltage between the delay module
ule connector, terminal 4 to vehicle body ground. The connector, terminal 2 and vehicle body ground. The
ohmmeter should indicate zero ohms. If not, repair voltmeter should indicate battery voltage. If not,
the open circuit in the wire harness to vehicle body repair the open circuit in the wire harness to the
ground. HDLP fuse in the PDC.
(4) With the key on measure the voltage between (7) If steps 1 through 6 prove out good, replace
the delay module connector, terminal 8 and vehicle headlamp delay module.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 5
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION LAMP ALIGNMENT SCREEN PREPARATION . . . . 5

HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 VEHICLE PREPARATION FOR HEADLAMP
SERVICE PROCEDURES ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FOG LAMP ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SPECIAL TOOLS
HEADLAMP ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
GENERAL INFORMATION (2) If necessary, tape a line on the floor 7.62

meters (25 ft) away from and parallel to the wall.
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT (3) Measure from the floor up 1.27 meters (5 ft)
Headlamps can be aligned using the screen method and tape a line on the wall at the centerline of the
provided in this section. Alignment Tool C-4466-A or vehicle. Sight along the centerline of the vehicle
equivalent can also be used. Refer to instructions (from rear of vehicle forward) to verify accuracy of
provided with the tool for proper procedures. the line placement.
(4) Rock vehicle side-to-side three times to allow
suspension to stabilize.
SERVICE PROCEDURES (5) Jounce front suspension three times by pushing
downward on front bumper and releasing.
LAMP ALIGNMENT SCREEN PREPARATION (6) Measure the distance from the center of head-
(1) Position vehicle on a level surface perpendicu- lamp lens to the floor. Transfer measurement to the
lar to a flat wall 7.62 meters (25 ft) away from front alignment screen (with tape). Use this line for
of headlamp lens (Fig. 1). up/down adjustment reference.
Fig. 1 Headlamp Alignment Screen—Typical

8L - 6 LAMPS XJ
(7) Measure distance from the centerline of the within the headlamp the alignment screen target
vehicle to the center of each headlamp being aligned. (Fig. 2).
Transfer measurements to screen (with tape) to each (8) Cover front of headlamp that has been adjusted
side of vehicle centerline. Use these lines for left/ and adjust the other headlamp beam as instructed
right adjustment reference. above.
(9) Install headlamp bezels. Tighten the screws
VEHICLE PREPARATION FOR HEADLAMP securely.
ALIGNMENT
(1) Verify headlamp dimmer switch and high beam
indicator operation.
(2) Correct defective components that could hinder
proper headlamp alignment.
(3) Verify proper tire inflation.
(4) Clean headlamp lenses.
(5) Verify that luggage area is not heavily loaded.
(6) Fuel tank should be FULL. Add 2.94 kg (6.5
lbs.) of weight over the fuel tank for each estimated
gallon of missing fuel.
HEADLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Headlamps can be aligned using the screen
method. The Headlamp Alignment Tool C-4466-A or
equivalent can also be used. Refer to instructions
provided with the tool for proper procedures. Fig. 2 Headlamp Alignment Screen Target
A properly aimed low beam will project the top
edge of the beam intensity pattern on the screen
from 25 mm (1 in.) above to 75 mm (3 in.) below
headlamp centerline. The side-to-side left edge of the
beam intensity pattern should be from 50 mm (2 in.)
left to 50 mm (2 in.) right of headlamp centerline
(Fig. 2).
(1) Remove screws and both headlamp bezels.
(2) Clean front of the headlamps.
(3) Place headlamps on LOW beam.
(4) Cover front of the headlamp that is not being
adjusted.
(5) Turn vertical adjustment screw (Fig. 3) until
the headlamp beam pattern on screen/wall is similar
to the pattern depicted in the alignment screen fig-
ure.
NOTE: When using a headlamp aiming screen, Fig. 3 Headlamp Beam Adjustment Screws
adjust the headlamps so that:
FOG LAMP ADJUSTMENT
• The left edge of the beam intensity pattern is Prepare an alignment screen. A properly aligned
positioned within 50 mm (2 in.) left to 50 mm (2 in.) fog lamp will project a pattern on the alignment
right of the vertical centerline (Fig. 2). screen 100 mm (4 in.) below the fog lamp centerline
• The top edge of the beam intensity pattern is and straight ahead (Fig. 4).
positioned within 25 mm (1 in.) above or 75 mm (3 Rotate the adjustment screw to adjust beam height
in.) below the headlamp horizontal centerline (Fig. (Fig. 5).
2).
(6) Cover front of the headlamp and adjust the
other headlamp beam as instructed below.
(7) Rotate the adjustment screws until the beam
intensity pattern on the aiming screen/wall is aligned
XJ LAMPS 8L - 7
Fig. 4 Fog Lamp Alignment —Typical

SPECIAL TOOLS
HEADLAMP ALIGNMENT
Headlamp Aiming Kit C-4466–A
Fig. 5 Fog Lamp Adjustment

8L - 8 LAMPS XJ
LAMP BULB SERVICE
INDEX
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB . . . . . . 8

BACK-UP/REAR TURN SIGNAL/TAIL LAMP HEADLAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CARGO LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 MAP READING LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
(CHMSL) BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 UNDERHOOD LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FOG LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 VISOR VANITY LAMP BULB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FOG LAMP BULB

HEADLAMP BULB REMOVAL
(1) Remove the screws attaching the access cover
REMOVAL to the bottom of the fog lamp (Fig. 2).
(1) Remove the screws attaching the bezel to the (2) Remove spring clip securing bulb to fog lamp.
grille opening panel (Fig. 1). (3) Disconnect wire connectors at bulb.
(2) Remove screws attaching the retaining ring to (4) Remove bulb element from fog lamp.
the headlamp canister.
(3) Disconnect the headlamp bulb wire harness
connector.
(4) Separate the sealed beam from the vehicle.
Fig. 2 Fog Lamp Components

INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Do not touch the bulb glass with fingers
Fig. 1 Headlamp Bezel or other oily surfaces. Reduced bulb life will result.
INSTALLATION (1) Position bulb element in fog lamp.
(1) Connect wire harness connector. (2) Connect wire connectors at bulb.
(2) Position bulb in canister. (3) Install spring clip securing bulb to fog lamp.
(3) Position retaining ring on sealed beam and (4) Install screws attaching the access cover to the
install screws. bottom of the fog lamp.
(4) Install headlamp bezel.
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
(1) Remove headlamp bezel.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 9
(2) Remove screws attaching park/turn signal INSTALLATION
lamp housing to grille opening panel. (1) Install bulb in socket.
(3) Rotate bulb socket one-third turn counter-clock- (2) Install bulb and socket in back of side marker
wise and remove it from lamp housing (Fig. 3). lamp housing.
(4) Pull bulb from socket. (3) Install side marker lamp housing.
BACK-UP/REAR TURN SIGNAL/TAIL LAMP

BULB
REMOVAL
(1) Remove tail lamp housing.
(2) Rotate bulb socket one-third turn counter-clock-
wise and remove bulb socket from lamp housing (Fig.
5).
(3) Pull bulb from socket.
Fig. 3 Park/Turn Signal Lamp Bulb

INSTALLATION
(1) Install bulb in socket.
(2) Install socket in lamp housing.
(3) Install park/turn signal lamp housing.
(4) Install headlamp bezel.
SIDE MARKER LAMP BULB

REMOVAL
(1) Remove screws attaching side marker lamp Fig. 5 Bulb Socket Removal
housing. INSTALLATION
(2) Rotate bulb socket counter-clockwise and pull (1) Install bulb in socket.
from back side of lamp housing (Fig. 4). (2) Install bulb and socket in lamp housing.
(3) Pull bulb from socket. (3) Install lamp housing.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP BULB

REMOVAL
(1) Remove screws attaching license plate lamp
housing to liftgate.
(2) Rotate bulb socket counter-clockwise and
remove bulb socket from lamp housing.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install bulb in lamp socket.
(2) Install bulb socket in lamp housing.
(3) Install screws attaching license plate lamp to
liftgate.
Fig. 4 Side Marker Lamp

8L - 10 LAMPS XJ
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP

(CHMSL) BULB
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the screws attaching the lamp housing
to the liftgate.
(2) Rotate bulb socket 1/4 turn counter-clockwise
and pull from housing (Fig. 6).
Fig. 7 Underhood Lamp Lens
Fig. 6 CHMSL Bulb

INSTALLATION
(1) Push bulb into socket.
(2) Position socket in lamp and rotate 1/4 turn
clockwise.
(3) Install screws attaching lamp housing to the
liftgate.
Fig. 8 Underhood Lamp Bulb
UNDERHOOD LAMP BULB CARGO LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
REMOVAL
(1) Insert a small flat blade in the access slot
(1) Insert a small flat blade into the access slots
between the lamp base and lamp lens.
(Fig. 9).
(2) Pry the lamp lens upward and remove the
(2) Carefully pry the lens from the lamp.
lamp lens (Fig. 7).
(3) Grasp bulb and pull from lamp.
(3) Depress the bulb terminal inward (Fig. 8) to
release the bulb.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position bulb in lamp and snap into place.
INSTALLATION
(2) Position the lens at the lamp housing and force
(1) Engage the replacement bulb wire loop to the
it upward into the housing until the mounting tabs
terminal closest to the lamp base wire connector.
are seated on the lamp mounting pins.
(2) Depress the opposite terminal inward and
engage the remaining bulb wire loop.
(3) Position the lamp lens on the lamp base and
MAP READING LAMP BULB
press into place.
REMOVAL
(1) Insert a flat blade screwdriver in slot at front
of lens (Fig. 10).
(2) Rotate the screwdriver until lens snaps out of
the housing.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 11
Fig. 9 Cargo Lamp Lens Fig. 10 Reading Lamp Bulb

(3) Remove lens from housing. (2) Separate lens from lamp.
(4) Remove bulb from terminals. (3) Grasp bulb and pull outward.
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
(1) Insert bulb into reading lamp terminals. (1) Position bulb in socket and push into place.
(2) Replace lens by holding lens level and pushing (2) Position lens on lamp and snap into place.
rearward into housing.
(3) Push lens up to snap into housing.
VISOR VANITY LAMP BULB
REMOVAL
(1) Using a small flat blade, carefully pry each cor-
ner of lens outward from lamp.
8L - 12 LAMPS XJ
LAMP SERVICE
INDEX
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION HEADLAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

BACK-UP/REAR TURN SIGNAL/TAIL LAMP . . . . 13 LICENSE PLATE LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CARGO LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 MAP/READING LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP SIDE MARKER LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 UNDERHOOD LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
FOG LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 VISOR VANITY LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP . . . . . . . . . . 13

HEADLAMP
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the screws attaching the bezel to the
grille opening panel
(2) Remove the screws attaching the retaining ring
to the headlamp bucket.
(3) Disconnect the headlamp bulb wire harness
connector (Fig. 1).
(4) Separate the bulb from the vehicle.
(5) Remove the spring attaching the headlamp
bucket to the grille opening panel (Fig. 2).
(6) Slide the headlamp bucket downward to disen-
gage it from the headlamp adjusting screws.
Fig. 2 Headlamp
(2) Install the spring attaching the headlamp
bucket to the grille opening panel.
(3) Connect the wire harness connector.
(4) Position the bulb in the bucket.
(5) Position retaining ring on the headlamp bulb
and install screws.
(6) Install the headlamp bezel.
FOG LAMP
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the fog lamp wire harness connec-
tor.
(2) Remove the screws attaching the fog lamp to
the support (Fig. 3).
Fig. 1 Headlamp Connector (3) Separate the fog lamp from the vehicle.
(1) Position the headlamp bucket in the grille (1) Position the fog lamp in the support bracket
opening panel and slide the headlamp bucket upward and install the screws.
to engage it with the headlamp adjusting screws. (2) Connect the fog lamp wire harness connector.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 13
Fig. 3 Fog Lamp Fig. 5 Side Marker Lamp

FRONT PARK/TURN SIGNAL LAMP INSTALLATION
(1) Install bulb and socket in back of side marker
REMOVAL lamp.
(1) Remove the headlamp bezel. (2) Install side marker lamp in grille opening
(2) Remove the screws attaching the park/turn sig- panel.
nal lamp housing to the grille opening panel (Fig. 4).
(3) Remove the bulb sockets and separate from the BACK-UP/REAR TURN SIGNAL/TAIL LAMP
vehicle.
REMOVAL
(1) Open the liftgate.
(2) Remove the bolts attaching the tail lamp hous-
ing to the quarter panel (Fig. 6).
(3) Grasp the lamp and pull to disengage it from
the grommet at the base of the lamp.
(4) Rotate the bulb sockets one-third turn and
remove the bulb sockets from the lamp housing.
Fig. 4 Park/Turn Signal Lamp

INSTALLATION
(1) Install bulbs and sockets in the lamp housing.
(2) Position the park/turn signal lamp housing on
the grille opening panel and install the screws.
(3) Install the headlamp bezel.
SIDE MARKER LAMP Fig. 6 Tail Lamp

REMOVAL INSTALLATION
(1) Remove screws attaching side marker lamp (1) Install the bulb and sockets in the lamp hous-
lens to grille opening panel (Fig. 5). ing.
(2) Remove bulb and socket from back side of (2) Position the lamp housing in the quarter panel
lamp. and push to engage the grommet.
8L - 14 LAMPS XJ
(3) Install the lamp housing screws. Tighten the ON/OFF functions each time the hood is opened and
screws securely. closed.
(4) Install the bolts attaching the tail lamp hous-
ing to the quarter panel. REMOVAL
(5) Close the liftgate. (1) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
lamp.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOP LAMP (2) Remove lamp lens.
(CHMSL) (3) Remove bulb.
(4) Remove screw attaching underhood lamp to the
REMOVAL inner hood panel.
(1) Remove the screws attaching the CHMSL to (5) Separate underhood lamp from vehicle.
the liftgate (Fig. 7).
(2) Disconnect the wire harness connector.
(3) Separate the CHMSL from the vehicle.
Fig. 8 Underhood Lamp

INSTALLATION
(1) Position underhood lamp on hood inner panel.
Fig. 7 Center High Mounted Stop lamp
Ensure anti-rotation tab is positioned in slot on hood
INSTALLATION inner panel.
(1) Connect the wire harness connector. (2) Install the attaching screw through the lamp
(2) Position the CHMSL on the liftgate. and into the hood panel (Fig. 8). Tighten the screw
(3) Install the screws attaching the CHMSL to the securely.
liftgate. (3) Fold lamp housing over and firmly press onto
base to snap into place.
LICENSE PLATE LAMP (4) Connect the wire harness connector to the
lamp.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove screws attaching the license plate CARGO LAMP
lamp to the liftgate.
(2) Remove the bulb from the lamp socket. REMOVAL
(1) Insert a small flat blade into the access slots
INSTALLATION (Fig. 9).
(1) Install bulb in the lamp socket. (2) Carefully pry the lens from the lamp.
(2) Position the license plate lamp on the liftgate (3) Disengage the lens mounting tabs from the
and install screws. lamp mounting pins (Fig. 10).
(4) Remove the fasteners attaching the lamp to the
UNDERHOOD LAMP roof.
The underhood lamp is installed on the hood inner (5) Remove the lamp housing from the headliner
panel. The lamp illuminates when the hood is cavity.
opened. A switch that is integral with the lamp base (6) Disconnect the wire harness connector.
controls the operation. The switch provides automatic
XJ LAMPS 8L - 15
(2) Connect the wire harness connector.
(3) Install the fasteners attaching the lamp to the
roof.
(4) Position the lens at the lamp housing and force
it upward into the housing until the mounting tabs
are seated on the lamp mounting pins.
MAP/READING LAMP
The map/reading lamp can be serviced by removing
the overhead console. Refer to Group 8C, Overhead
Console for removal/installation procedures.
VISOR VANITY LAMP

REMOVAL
(1) Fold down sunvisor.
Fig. 9 Cargo Lamp (2) Starting at the base of the lamp assembly and
working right-to-left, use a small flat blade, carefully
pry lamp from visor.
(3) Disconnect visor lamp wire connector and
remove from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position visor lamp at visor and connect visor
lamp wire connector.
(2) Position visor lamp in visor and press into
place.
Fig. 10 Cargo Lamp Lens

INSTALLATION
(1) Position the dome lamp housing at the head-
liner cavity.
8L - 16 LAMPS XJ
LAMP SYSTEMS
INDEX
page page

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP MODULE . . . . . . . . . 16 DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP MODULE . . . . . . . . . 17
SENTINEL HEADLAMP DELAY MODULE . . . . . . 16 SENTINEL HEADLAMP DELAY MODULE . . . . . . 16

SENTINEL HEADLAMP DELAY MODULE SENTINEL HEADLAMP DELAY MODULE
The Headlamp Module delays the de-activation of
the headlamps for 45 6 15 seconds after the ignition REMOVAL
switch is turned OFF. The driver engages the module (1) Remove the knee blocker.
by turning the ignition switch OFF, then turning the (2) Remove the screw that attaches the module to
headlamps OFF. the inside of the instrument panel (Fig. 1).
(3) Disconnect the wire harness connector and
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP MODULE remove the module from the instrument panel.
The Daytime Running Lights (Headlamps) System
is installed on vehicles manufactured for sale in Can-
ada only. The headlamps are illuminated when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position and the
vehicle is put into motion. The DRL module receives
a vehicle-moving signal from the vehicle speed sen-
sor. This provides a constant headlamps-on condi-
tion as long as the vehicle is moving. The lamps are
illuminated at approximately 30 percent of normal
intensity.
Fig. 1 Headlamp Delay Module

INSTALLATION
(1) Position the module inside the I/P and connect
the wire harness connector to the module.
(2) Install the screw that attaches the module to
the inside of the instrument panel.
(3) Install the knee blocker.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 17
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMP MODULE (1) Disconnect the wire harness connector from the
module.
REMOVAL (2) Remove the screws that attach the module to
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) module is the fender inner panel.
located on the right fender inner panel adjacent to (3) Remove the module from the fender inner
the dash panel (Fig. 2). panel.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position the module on the right fender inner
panel.
(2) Install the attaching screws. Tighten the
screws securely.
(3) Connect the wire harness connector to the mod-
ule.
Fig. 2 Daytime Running Lamp Module

8L - 18 LAMPS XJ
BULB APPLICATION
INDEX
page page
SPECIFICATIONS INTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

EXTERIOR LAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SPECIFICATIONS LAMP BULB

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
EXTERIOR LAMPS Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Dome/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
CAUTION: Do not use bulbs that have a higher can- Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
dle power than the bulb listed in the Bulb Applica- Under Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
tion Table. Damage to lamp can result. Do not touch Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
halogen bulbs with fingers or other oily surfaces. Underpanel Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Bulb life will be reduced.
INDICATOR LAMPS
The following Bulb Application Table lists the lamp
title on the left side of the column and trade number LAMP BULB
or part number on the right. A/C Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
LAMP BULB Anti-lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Center High Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 Check Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fog lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3 Check Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Headlamp/Sealed Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H6054 Coolant Temp High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Fasten Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
INTERIOR LAMPS High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CAUTION: Do not use bulbs that have a higher can-
dle power than the bulb listed in the Bulb Applica- Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
tion Table. Damage to lamp can result. Low Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Low Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Service procedures for most of the lamps in the Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ASC
instrument panel, Instrument cluster and switches Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
are located in Group 8E, Instrument Panel and Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Gauges. Some components have lamps that can only Transmission Floor Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
be serviced by an Authorized Service Center (ASC) Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
after the component is removed from the vehicle. Upshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
The following Bulb Application Tables lists the
lamp title on the left side of the column and trade
number or part number on the right.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 1
LAMPS
CONTENTS
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT TURN SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

BACKUP, REAR TURN SIGNAL, TAILLIGHT HEADLIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AND REAR FOG LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SIDE REPEATER LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOPLIGHT . . . . . . . 2 SPECIFICATIONS
FRONT FOG LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
FRONT POSITION LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. Reverse the removal procedures to install.
HEADLIGHTS
SIDE REPEATER LIGHT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the 2 screws holding the bezel in place REMOVAL
and remove bezel (Fig. 1). 1. Grip the side repeater lamp assembly with your
2. Remove the 4 screws holding the headlight and hand and pull from the body to remove.
replace the bulb from the front of the housing (Fig. 2. Rotate and pull the socket from the housing
2). (Fig. 3).
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
Fig. 1 Headlight Bezel

Fig. 3 Side Repeater Light
INSTALLATION
1. Align the side repeater lamp bulb to the socket
(Fig. 3).
2. Push the bulb into the socket.
3. Push and rotate the socket into the housing.
4. Press the lamp assembly into the body mount-
ing hole.
5. Verify lamp operation.
FRONT POSITION LIGHT

REMOVAL
Fig. 2 Headlight Housing 1. Remove the 2 screws holding the headlight
bezel in place and remove the bezel (Fig. 1).
8L - 2 LAMPS XJ
2. Remove the 4 screws holding the headlight
housing (Fig. 2).
3. Pull the front position light socket from the rub-
ber grommet and replace the bulb (Fig. 4).
Fig. 6 Front Turn Signal Lamp
Fig. 4 Front Position Light

INSTALLATION
1. Reverse the removal procedure for installation.
FRONT TURN SIGNAL

REMOVAL
1. Remove the 2 screws holding the bezel in place
and remove the bezel (Fig. 5).
2. Remove the screws holding the turn signal Fig. 7 Front Turn Signal Bulb
housing in place (Fig. 6).
3. Remove the turn signal housing. 3. Remove the lamp element from the housing.
4. Twist the socket from the back of the turn sig-
nal housing and then pull from the housing (Fig. 7). INSTALLATION
1. Install the new lamp element in the housing
and reinstall the lower housing.
BACKUP, REAR TURN SIGNAL, TAILLIGHT AND

REAR FOG LIGHT
REMOVAL
1. There are 3 mounting bolts attaching the tail-
light assembly. When removing, unfasten the 3 bolts
located on the top and side. Lift up and out to
remove the assembly.
2. Turn the socket assembly 1/3 turn and pull the
socket from the housing to replace the bulb (Fig. 8).
Fig. 5 Headlight Bezel
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION 1. Reverse the removal procedure to install.
1. Reverse the removal procedure to install.
CENTER HIGH MOUNTED STOPLIGHT
FRONT FOG LAMP
REMOVAL
REMOVAL 1. Remove the 2 screws (Fig. 9).
1. Remove the 2 screws from the bottom cover of 2. Remove the Center High Mount Stoplight
the lamp body. Assembly.
2. Disconnect the 2 wires from the lamp element.
XJ LAMPS 8L - 3
SPECIFICATIONS
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Exterior Lamps Bulb Type
Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H4
Front Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T4W
Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
Side Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W3W
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Position and Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
Rear Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
Fig. 8 Rear Lamp Replacement Reversing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
Rear Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P27/7W
3. Twist and pull the socket from the back of the Underhood Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
housing. Underhood Retractable Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H3
CHMSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W
Interior Lamps Bulb Type
Ashtray Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1891
Cigarette Lighter Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Auto. Trans. Floor Shift Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Climate Control Lamp (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Dome/Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . (1) 561 and (2) 906
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Lighted Vanity Mirror (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 9 Center High Mounted Stoplight Map Reading Light in Overhead Console (4) . . . 912
Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
INSTALLATION
Transfer Case Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
1. Reverse the removal procedure for installation.
Underpanel Courtesy lamps (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types
that can be purchased from your local Jeep dealer.
XJ PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 8M - 1
PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION CLOCKSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE
CLOCKSPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TRIM COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DOOR . . . . . . . . . . 10
PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . 3 PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE . . . . . . . . . 8
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ADJUSTMENTS
AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 CLOCKSPRING CENTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
SERVICE PROCEDURES SPECIAL TOOLS
AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . 15
AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION • Airbag indicator lamp

• Clockspring
AIRBAG SYSTEM • Driver and passenger side airbag modules
(including the airbag inflators)
DESCRIPTION • Driver and passenger side knee blockers
A dual front airbag system is standard factory-in- • Wire harness and connections.
stalled safety equipment on this model. The primary This group provides complete service information
passenger restraints in this vehicle are the standard for the ACM, both airbag modules, and the clock-
equipment factory-installed seat belts, which require spring. Complete service information for the other
active use by the vehicle occupants. The airbag sys- airbag system components can be located as follows:
tem is a supplemental passive restraint that was • Refer to Instrument Cluster in the proper sec-
designed and is intended to enhance the protection tion of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for
for the front seat occupants of the vehicle only when complete service information for the airbag indicator
used in conjunction with the seat belts. See the own- lamp.
er’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more infor- • Refer to Knee Blocker in the Removal and
mation on the features, use and operation of all of Installation section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel
the factory-installed passenger restraints, including Systems for complete service information on the
the airbag system. driver side knee blocker.
• Refer to Glove Box in the Removal and Instal-
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive lation section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys-
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this tems for complete service information on the
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD passenger side knee blocker.
versions of affected vehicle components have been • Refer to Airbag System in the Contents of
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete service
While most of the illustrations used in this group information and circuit diagrams for the airbag sys-
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and tem wiring components.
service procedures outlined can generally be See the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule test or diagnose a problem with any component of
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a the airbag system.
OPERATION
The dual front airbag system consists of the follow- The airbag system electrical circuits are continu-
ing components: ously monitored and controlled by a microprocessor
• Airbag Control Module (ACM) and software contained within the Airbag Control
8M - 2 PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS XJ
Module (ACM). The ACM also contains an impact WITH ACID, WATER, OR HEAVY METALS MAY PRO-
sensor and a safing sensor, which are monitored by DUCE HARMFUL AND IRRITATING GASES (SODIUM
the ACM to determine when an impact occurs that is HYDROXIDE IS FORMED IN THE PRESENCE OF
severe enough to require airbag system protection. MOISTURE) OR COMBUSTIBLE COMPOUNDS. THE
When a frontal impact is severe enough, the ACM PASSENGER AIRBAG MODULE CONTAINS ARGON
signals the inflator units of both airbag modules to GAS PRESSURIZED TO OVER 2500 PSI. DO NOT
deploy the airbags. ATTEMPT TO DISMANTLE AN AIRBAG MODULE OR
An airbag indicator lamp in the instrument cluster TAMPER WITH ITS INFLATOR. DO NOT PUNCTURE,
lights for about seven seconds as a bulb test, each INCINERATE, OR BRING INTO CONTACT WITH
time the ignition switch is turned to the On or Start ELECTRICITY. DO NOT STORE AT TEMPERATURES
positions. Following the bulb test, the airbag indica- EXCEEDING 93° C (200° F).
tor lamp is turned on or off by the ACM to indicate • REPLACE AIRBAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS
the status of the airbag system. If the airbag indica- ONLY WITH PARTS SPECIFIED IN THE CHRYSLER
tor lamp comes on at any time other than during the MOPAR PARTS CATALOG. SUBSTITUTE PARTS
bulb test, it indicates that there is a problem in the MAY APPEAR INTERCHANGEABLE, BUT INTERNAL
airbag system circuits. Such a problem may cause DIFFERENCES MAY RESULT IN INFERIOR OCCU-
the airbags not to deploy when required, or to deploy PANT PROTECTION.
when not required. • THE FASTENERS, SCREWS, AND BOLTS ORIG-
The driver side airbag module includes an inflat- INALLY USED FOR THE AIRBAG SYSTEM COMPO-
able airbag and an inflator unit behind a trim cover NENTS HAVE SPECIAL COATINGS AND ARE
in the hub area of the steering wheel. The passenger SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE AIRBAG SYS-
side airbag module includes a second inflatable air- TEM. THEY MUST NEVER BE REPLACED WITH ANY
bag and an inflator unit behind an airbag door in the SUBSTITUTES. ANY TIME A NEW FASTENER IS
instrument panel above the glove box. NEEDED, REPLACE IT WITH THE CORRECT FAS-
During a frontal vehicle impact, the knee blockers TENERS PROVIDED IN THE SERVICE PACKAGE OR
work in concert with properly adjusted seat belts to SPECIFIED IN THE CHRYSLER MOPAR PARTS CAT-
restrain the driver and front seat passenger in the ALOG.
proper position for an airbag deployment. The knee • WHEN A STEERING COLUMN HAS AN AIRBAG
blockers also work to absorb and distribute the crash MODULE ATTACHED, NEVER PLACE THE COLUMN
energy from the driver and front seat passenger to ON THE FLOOR OR ANY OTHER SURFACE WITH
the structure of the instrument panel. The driver THE STEERING WHEEL OR AIRBAG MODULE FACE
side knee blocker is a stamped metal reinforcement DOWN.
located behind the instrument panel steering column
opening cover. The passenger side knee blocker is
integral to the glove box door. DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE
Following are general descriptions of the major
components in the airbag system. DESCRIPTION
The driver side airbag module protective trim cover
WARNING: is the most visible part of the driver side airbag sys-
• THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE, COM- tem. The driver side airbag module is mounted
PLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE directly to the steering wheel. Located under the air-
ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIR- bag module trim cover are the horn switch, the
BAG SYSTEM OR RELATED STEERING WHEEL, folded airbag cushion, and the airbag cushion sup-
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL porting components. The resistive membrane-type
COMPONENTS YOU MUST FIRST DISCONNECT horn switch is secured with heat stakes to the inside
AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND) surface of the airbag module trim cover, between the
CABLE. THEN WAIT TWO MINUTES FOR THE SYS- trim cover and the folded airbag cushion.
TEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE FUR- The driver side airbag module cannot be repaired,
THER SYSTEM SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE and must be replaced if deployed or in any way dam-
WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE aged. The driver side airbag module trim cover and
TO DO THIS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- the horn switch are available as a unit for service
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL replacement.
INJURY.
• THE DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE INFLATOR OPERATION
ASSEMBLY CONTAINS SODIUM AZIDE AND POTAS- The driver side airbag module includes a stamped
SIUM NITRATE. THESE MATERIALS ARE POISON- metal housing to which the cushion and an inflator
OUS AND EXTREMELY FLAMMABLE. CONTACT
unit are attached and sealed. The conventional pyro- charge the gas it produces directly into the cushion
technic-type inflator assembly is mounted to studs on when supplied with the proper electrical signal. Fol-
the back of the airbag module housing. The inflator lowing an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion
seals the hole in the airbag cushion so it can dis- quickly deflates by venting this gas through the
charge the gas it produces directly into the cushion porous fabric material used on each end panel of the
when supplied with the proper electrical signal. Fol- airbag cushion.
lowing an airbag deployment, the airbag cushion The molded plastic passenger side airbag door is
quickly deflates by venting this gas towards the secured to extruded tabs at the top and bottom rear
instrument panel through the porous fabric material of the airbag module housing by keyed openings in
used on the steering wheel side of the airbag cushion. the upper and lower mounting flange returns of the
The protective trim cover is fitted to the front of airbag door. The upper and lower airbag door mount-
the airbag module and forms a decorative cover in ing flanges are then secured to the instrument panel
the center of the steering wheel. The inside of the structural support and the upper glove box opening
trim cover has locking blocks molded into it that reinforcement with screws. The airbag door has pre-
engage a lip on the airbag module metal housing. determined breakout lines concealed beneath its dec-
Two stamped metal retainers then fit over the infla- orative cover. Upon airbag deployment, the airbag
tor mounting studs on the back of the airbag module door will split at the breakout lines and the door will
housing and are engaged in slots on the inside of the fold back over the top of the instrument panel, out of
cover, securely locking the trim cover into place. The the way.
trim cover will split at predetermined breakout lines,
then fold back out of the way along with the horn AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE
switch upon airbag deployment.
DESCRIPTION
PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE The Airbag Control Module (ACM) is secured with
screws to a mount that is welded onto the floor panel
DESCRIPTION underneath the left front seat in the passenger com-
The passenger side airbag door on the instrument partment of the vehicle. A stamped metal protective
panel above the glove box is the most visible part of cover shields the ACM and its wire harness connector
the passenger side airbag system. Located under the from the feet of rear seat passengers or other objects
airbag door are the passenger side airbag cushion that might become lodged under the driver side front
and the airbag cushion supporting components. seat. The ACM contains an electronic microprocessor,
The passenger side airbag module includes an an electronic impact sensor, an electromechanical saf-
extruded aluminum housing within which the cush- ing sensor, and an energy storage capacitor.
ion and inflator are mounted and sealed. Two The ACM cannot be repaired or adjusted and, if
stamped metal brackets, one on each end of the hous- damaged or faulty, it must be replaced.
ing, enclose the cushion and inflator and also serve
as the mounting brackets for the module. The two OPERATION
mounting brackets at the top front of the airbag mod- The microprocessor in the ACM contains the airbag
ule are secured with screws to the top of the instru- system logic. The airbag system logic includes
ment panel structural support beneath the On-Board Diagnostics (OBD), and the ability to com-
instrument panel top cover. The two mounting brack- municate with the instrument cluster circuitry over
ets at the bottom front of the airbag module are the Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus to
secured with screws to the instrument panel struc- control the airbag indicator lamp. The microprocessor
tural support over the glove box. continuously monitors all of the airbag system elec-
Following a passenger side airbag deployment, the trical circuits to determine the system readiness. If
passenger side airbag module and the passenger side the ACM detects a monitored system fault, it sends
airbag door must be replaced. The passenger side air- messages to the instrument cluster over the CCD
bag module cannot be repaired, and must be replaced data bus to turn on the airbag indicator lamp. Refer
if deployed or in any way damaged. The passenger to Instrument Cluster in the proper section of
side airbag door is available as a separate service Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for more infor-
item. mation on the airbag indicator lamp.
One electronic impact sensor is used in this airbag
OPERATION system. The impact sensor is an accelerometer that
The hybrid-type inflator assembly includes a small senses the rate of vehicle deceleration, which pro-
canister of highly compressed argon gas. The inflator vides verification of the direction and severity of an
seals the hole in the airbag cushion so it can dis- impact. The impact sensor is calibrated for the spe-
cific vehicle, and is only serviced as a unit with the that it can operate within its designed travel limits.
ACM. A pre-programmed decision algorithm in the However, if the clockspring is removed for service or
ACM microprocessor determines when the decelera- if the steering column is disconnected from the steer-
tion rate as signaled by the impact sensor indicates ing gear allowing the clockspring tape to change posi-
an impact that is severe enough to require airbag tion relative to the other steering components, it
system protection. When the programmed conditions must be re-centered following completion of the ser-
are met, the ACM sends an electrical signal to deploy vice or it may be damaged. Refer to Clockspring
the airbags. Centering in the Adjustments section of this group
In addition to the electronic impact sensor, there is for the proper centering procedures.
an electromechanical sensor within the ACM called a Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-
safing sensor. The safing sensor is a normally open centered and with a locking pin installed. This lock-
series switch located in the airbag deployment circuit ing pin should not be removed until the clockspring
of the ACM. This sensor detects impact energy of a has been installed on the steering column. If the
lesser magnitude than the electronic impact sensor, locking pin is removed before the clockspring is
and must be closed in order for the airbags to deploy. installed on a steering column, the clockspring cen-
The ACM also contains an energy-storage capaci- tering procedure must be performed.
tor. This capacitor stores enough electrical energy to
deploy the airbags for up to one second following a
battery disconnect or failure during an impact. The DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
purpose of the capacitor is to provide airbag system
protection in a severe secondary impact, if the initial AIRBAG SYSTEM
impact has damaged or disconnected the battery, but A DRB scan tool is required for diagnosis of the
was not severe enough to deploy the airbags. airbag system. See the proper Diagnostic Procedures
manual for more information.
CLOCKSPRING (1) Connect the DRB scan tool to the 16-way data
link wire harness connector. The connector is located
DESCRIPTION on the driver side lower edge of the instrument
The clockspring assembly is secured with two inte- panel, outboard of the steering column (Fig. 1).
gral plastic latches onto the steering column lock
housing near the top of the steering column behind
the steering wheel. The clockspring is used to main-
tain a continuous electrical circuit between the fixed
clockspring wire harness on the steering column and
several electrical components that rotate with the
steering wheel. The rotating components include the
driver side airbag module, the horn switch and, if the
vehicle is so equipped, the vehicle speed control
switches.
The clockspring cannot be repaired. If the clock-
spring is faulty, damaged, or if the driver side airbag
has been deployed, the clockspring must be replaced.
OPERATION
The clockspring assembly consists of a plastic case
which contains a flat, ribbon-like, electrically conduc-
tive tape that winds and unwinds like a clockspring
with the steering wheel rotation. The electrically con-
ductive tape consists of several fine gauge copper
wire leads sandwiched between two narrow strips of
plastic film.
Like the clockspring in a timepiece, the clockspring Fig. 1 16-Way Data Link Connector - Typical
tape has travel limits and can be damaged by being
wound too tightly. To prevent this from occurring, the
Exit the vehicle with the DRB. Be certain that the
clockspring is centered when it is installed on the
DRB contains the latest version of the proper DRB
steering column. Centering the clockspring indexes
software.
the clockspring tape to other steering components so
(3) Using the DRB, read and record the active on vehicles are to be returned. If an airbag module
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) data. assembly is faulty or damaged and non-deployed,
(4) Read and record any stored DTC data. refer to the parts return list in the current Chrysler
(5) See the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual if Corporation Warranty Policies and Procedures man-
any DTC is found in Step 3 or Step 4. ual for the proper handling and disposal procedures.
(6) After completing the necessary repairs, try to
erase the stored DTC data. If any problems remain, DEPLOYED
the stored DTC data will not erase. See the proper Any vehicle which is to be returned to use after an
Diagnostic Procedures manual for the procedures to airbag deployment, must have both airbag modules,
diagnose any stored DTC that will not erase. the passenger side airbag module door and the clock-
(7) With the ignition switch still in the On posi- spring replaced. These components will be damaged
tion, check to be certain that nobody is in the vehicle. or weakened as a result of an airbag deployment,
(8) From outside of the vehicle (away from the air- which may or may not be obvious during a visual
bags in case of an accidental deployment) turn the inspection, and are not intended for reuse.
ignition switch to the Off position for about ten sec- Other vehicle components should be closely
onds, and then back to the On position. Observe the inspected, but are to be replaced only as required by
airbag indicator lamp in the instrument cluster. It the extent of the visible damage incurred.
should light for six to eight seconds, and then go out.
This indicates that the airbag system is functioning STORAGE
normally. An airbag module must be stored in its original,
special container until used for service. Also, it must
NOTE: If the airbag indicator lamp fails to light, or be stored in a clean, dry environment; away from
lights and stays on, there is an airbag system mal- sources of extreme heat, sparks, and high electrical
function. See the proper Diagnostic Procedures energy. Always place or store an airbag module on a
manual to diagnose the problem. surface with its trim cover or airbag side facing up,
to minimize movement in case of an accidental
deployment.
SERVICE PROCEDURES
CLEANUP PROCEDURE
Following an airbag system deployment, the vehi-
AIRBAG SYSTEM
cle interior will contain a powdery residue. This res-
idue consists primarily of harmless particulate
NON-DEPLOYED
by-products of the small pyrotechnic charge used to
At no time should any source of electricity be per-
initiate the airbag deployment propellant. However,
mitted near the inflator on the back of an airbag
this residue will also contain traces of sodium
module. When carrying a non-deployed airbag mod-
hydroxide powder, a chemical by-product of the pro-
ule, the trim cover or airbag side of the module
pellant material that is used to generate the nitrogen
should be pointed away from the body to minimize
gas that inflates the airbag. Since sodium hydroxide
injury in the event of an accidental deployment. If
powder can irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat, be
the module is placed on a bench or any other surface,
sure to wear safety glasses, rubber gloves, and a
the trim cover or airbag side of the module should be
long-sleeved shirt during cleanup (Fig. 2).
face up to minimize movement in the event of an
accidental deployment. WARNING: IF YOU EXPERIENCE SKIN IRRITATION
In addition, the airbag system should be disarmed DURING CLEANUP, RUN COOL WATER OVER THE
whenever any steering wheel, steering column, or AFFECTED AREA. ALSO, IF YOU EXPERIENCE
instrument panel components require diagnosis or IRRITATION OF THE NOSE OR THROAT, EXIT THE
service. Failure to observe this warning could result VEHICLE FOR FRESH AIR UNTIL THE IRRITATION
in accidental airbag deployment and possible per- CEASES. IF IRRITATION CONTINUES, SEE A PHYSI-
sonal injury. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument CIAN.
Panel Systems for additional service procedures on
the instrument panel components. Refer to Group Begin the cleanup by removing the airbag modules
19 - Steering for additional service procedures on from the vehicle. Refer to Driver Side Airbag Mod-
the steering wheel and steering column components. ule and Passenger Side Airbag Module in the
DISPOSAL OF NON-DEPLOYED AIRBAG MODULES procedures.
All damaged or faulty and non-deployed driver side Use a vacuum cleaner to remove any residual pow-
or passenger side airbag modules which are replaced der from the vehicle interior. Clean from outside the
additional service procedures for the clockspring.
WARNING:
• THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE, COM-
PLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIR-
BAG SYSTEM OR RELATED STEERING WHEEL,
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL
COMPONENTS YOU MUST FIRST DISCONNECT
AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND)
CABLE. THEN WAIT TWO MINUTES FOR THE SYS-
TEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE FUR-
THER SYSTEM SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE
WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE
TO DO THIS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
Fig. 2 Wear Safety Glasses and Rubber Gloves - BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
Typical INJURY.
• WHEN REMOVING A DEPLOYED AIRBAG MOD-
vehicle and work your way inside, so that you avoid
ULE, RUBBER GLOVES, EYE PROTECTION, AND A
kneeling or sitting on a non-cleaned area.
LONG-SLEEVED SHIRT SHOULD BE WORN. THERE
Be sure to vacuum the heater and air conditioning
MAY BE DEPOSITS ON THE AIRBAG MODULE AND
outlets as well (Fig. 3). Run the heater and air con-
OTHER INTERIOR SURFACES. IN LARGE DOSES,
ditioner blower on the lowest speed setting and vac-
THESE DEPOSITS MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE
uum any powder expelled from the outlets. You may
SKIN AND EYES.
need to vacuum the interior of the vehicle a second
time to recover all of the powder.
REMOVAL
cable. If either of the airbags has not been deployed,
wait two minutes for the system capacitor to dis-
charge before further service.
(2) From the underside of the steering wheel,
remove the two screws that secure the driver side
airbag module to the steering wheel (Fig. 4).
Fig. 3 Vacuum Heater and A/C Outlets - Typical

Place the deployed airbag modules in your vehicu-
lar scrap pile.

DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE
The following procedure is for replacement of a Fig. 4 Driver Side Airbag Module Remove/Install
faulty or damaged driver side airbag module. If the (3) Pull the airbag module away from the steering
driver side airbag has been deployed, the clockspring wheel far enough to access the two wire harness con-
must also be replaced. Refer to Clockspring in the nectors on the back of the airbag module.
(4) Disconnect the clockspring horn switch wire (4) From the underside of the steering wheel,
harness connector from the horn switch feed wire install and tighten the two driver side airbag module
connector, which is located on the back of the airbag mounting screws. Tighten the screws to 10.2 N·m (90
module. in. lbs.).
(5) The clockspring airbag wire harness connector (5) Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at
is a tight snap-fit into the airbag module connector this time. Refer to Airbag System in the Diagnosis
receptacle, which is located on the airbag inflator on and Testing section of this group for the proper pro-
the back of the airbag module. Firmly grasp and pull cedures.
or gently pry on the clockspring airbag wire harness
connector to disconnect it from the airbag module. DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE TRIM COVER
Do not pull on the clockspring wire harness to The horn switch is integral to the driver side air-
disengage the connector from the airbag mod- bag module trim cover. If either component is faulty
ule connector receptacle. or damaged, the entire driver side airbag module
(6) Remove the driver side airbag module from the trim cover and horn switch unit must be replaced.
steering wheel.
(7) If the driver side airbag has been deployed, the WARNING:
clockspring must be replaced. Refer to Clockspring • THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE, COM-
in the Removal and Installation section of this group PLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
for the clockspring service procedures. ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIR-
INSTALLATION STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING: AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND)
• USE EXTREME CARE TO PREVENT ANY FOR- CABLE. THEN WAIT TWO MINUTES FOR THE SYS-
EIGN MATERIAL FROM ENTERING THE DRIVER TEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE FUR-
SIDE AIRBAG MODULE, OR BECOMING THER SYSTEM SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE
ENTRAPPED BETWEEN THE AIRBAG CUSHION WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE
AND THE DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG TRIM COVER. TO DO THIS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
RESULT IN OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG INJURY.
DEPLOYMENT. • THE HORN SWITCH IS INTEGRAL TO THE AIR-
• THE DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE TRIM BAG MODULE TRIM COVER. SERVICE OF THIS
COVER MUST NEVER BE PAINTED. REPLACEMENT COMPONENT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY
TRIM COVERS ARE SERVICED IN THE ORIGINAL CHRYSLER-TRAINED AND AUTHORIZED DEALER
COLORS. PAINT MAY CHANGE THE WAY IN WHICH SERVICE TECHNICIANS. FAILURE TO TAKE THE
THE MATERIAL OF THE TRIM COVER RESPONDS PROPER PRECAUTIONS OR TO FOLLOW THE
TO AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO PROPER PROCEDURES COULD RESULT IN ACCI-
OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN DENTAL, INCOMPLETE, OR IMPROPER AIRBAG
OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG DEPLOY- DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE OCCUPANT INJU-
MENT. RIES.
(1) When installing the driver side airbag module,

reconnect the clockspring airbag wire harness con- REMOVAL
nector to the airbag module connector receptacle by (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
pressing straight in on the connector. You can be cer- cable. If either of the airbags has not been deployed,
tain that the connector is fully engaged by listening wait two minutes for the system capacitor to dis-
carefully for a distinct audible click as the connector charge before further service.
snaps into place. (2) Remove the driver side airbag module from the
(2) Reconnect the clockspring horn switch wire steering wheel. Refer to Driver Side Airbag Mod-
harness connector to the horn switch feed wire con- ule in the Removal and Installation section of this
nector, which is located on the back of the airbag group for the procedures.
module. (3) Remove the plastic horn switch feed wire
(3) Carefully position the driver side airbag mod- retainer from the stud on the back of the driver side
ule in the steering wheel. Be certain that the clock- airbag housing (Fig. 5).
spring wire harnesses in the steering wheel hub area (4) Remove the four nuts that secure the upper
are not pinched between the airbag module and the and lower trim cover retainers to the studs on the
steering wheel. back of the driver side airbag housing (Fig. 6).
Fig. 5 Horn Switch Feed Wire Remove/Install Fig. 7 Driver Side Airbag Trim Cover Remove/Install
• THE DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE TRIM
COVER MUST NEVER BE PAINTED. REPLACEMENT
TRIM COVERS ARE SERVICED IN THE ORIGINAL
COLORS. PAINT MAY CHANGE THE WAY IN WHICH
THE MATERIAL OF THE TRIM COVER RESPONDS
TO AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO
OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN
OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG DEPLOY-
MENT.
(1) Carefully position the driver side airbag mod-

ule in the trim cover. Be certain that the horn switch
feed and ground wires are not pinched between the
airbag housing and the trim cover locking blocks.
(2) Engage the upper and lower trim cover locking
blocks with the lip of the driver side airbag housing,
Fig. 6 Driver Side Airbag Trim Cover Retainers then engage the locking blocks on each side of the
Remove/Install trim cover with the lip of the housing. Be certain
that each of the locking blocks is fully engaged on
(5) Remove the upper and lower trim cover retain-
the lip of the airbag housing (Fig. 8).
ers from the airbag housing studs.
(3) Install the horn switch ground wire eyelet over
(6) Remove the horn switch ground wire eyelet
the upper airbag housing stud.
from the upper airbag housing stud.
(4) Install the upper and lower airbag trim cover
(7) Disengage the four trim cover locking blocks
retainers over the airbag housing studs. Be certain
from the lip around the outside edge of the driver
that the tabs on each retainer are engaged in the
side airbag housing and remove the housing from the
retainer slots of the upper and lower trim cover lock-
cover (Fig. 7).
ing blocks (Fig. 7).
(5) Install and tighten the trim cover retainer
INSTALLATION mounting nuts on the airbag housing studs. Tighten
WARNING: the nuts to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.).
• USE EXTREME CARE TO PREVENT ANY FOR- (6) Install the driver side airbag module onto the
EIGN MATERIAL FROM ENTERING THE DRIVER steering wheel. Refer to Driver Side Airbag Mod-
SIDE AIRBAG MODULE, OR BECOMING ule in the Removal and Installation section of this
ENTRAPPED BETWEEN THE AIRBAG CUSHION group for the procedures.
AND THE DRIVER SIDE AIRBAG TRIM COVER.
FAILURE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE
RESULT IN OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG The following procedure is for replacement of a
DEPLOYMENT. faulty or damaged passenger side airbag module. If
the passenger side airbag module has been deployed,
REMOVAL
cable. If either of the airbags has not been deployed,
wait two minutes for the system capacitor to dis-
charge before further service.
(2) Remove the top cover from the instrument
panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
Removal and Installation section of Group 8E -
Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures.
(3) Disconnect the passenger side airbag module
wire harness connector from the instrument panel
wire harness. This connector is located on the top of
the instrument panel structural support between the
airbag module and the windshield (Fig. 9).
Fig. 8 Driver Side Airbag Trim Cover Locking

Blocks Engaged
the passenger side airbag door must also be replaced.
Refer to Passenger Side Airbag Door in the
additional service procedures for the passenger side Fig. 9 Passenger Side Airbag Module Connector
airbag door.
(4) Disengage the passenger side airbag module
WARNING: wire harness connector retainer from the mounting
• THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE, COM- hole on the top of the instrument panel structural
PLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE support.
ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIR- (5) Remove the four screws that secure the upper
BAG SYSTEM OR RELATED STEERING WHEEL, flange of the passenger side airbag door to the
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL instrument panel structural support (Fig. 10).
INJURY.
• WHEN REMOVING A DEPLOYED AIRBAG MOD-
ULE, RUBBER GLOVES, EYE PROTECTION, AND A
LONG-SLEEVED SHIRT SHOULD BE WORN. THERE
MAY BE DEPOSITS ON THE AIRBAG MODULE AND
OTHER INTERIOR SURFACES. IN LARGE DOSES,
THESE DEPOSITS MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE
SKIN AND EYES.
Fig. 10 Passenger Side Airbag Module Remove/
Install
(6) Remove the two screws that secure the passen- (6) Install and tighten the two screws that secure
ger side airbag module upper mounting brackets to the passenger side airbag module upper mounting
the top of the instrument panel structural support. brackets to the top of the instrument panel struc-
(7) Roll down the glove box from the instrument tural support. Tighten the screws to 11.8 N·m (105
panel. Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the in. lbs.).
Removal and Installation section of Group 8E - (7) Install and tighten the four screws that secure
Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures. the upper flange of the passenger side airbag door to
(8) Remove the four screws that secure the lower the instrument panel structural support. Tighten the
flange of the passenger side airbag door to the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
instrument panel upper glove box opening reinforce- (8) Engage the passenger side airbag module wire
ment. harness connector retainer in the mounting hole on
(9) Reach through and above the instrument panel the top of the instrument panel structural support.
glove box opening to access and remove the two (9) Reconnect the passenger side airbag module
screws that secure the passenger side airbag module wire harness connector to the instrument panel wire
lower mounting brackets to the instrument panel harness. Be certain that the connector is fully
structural support. engaged and latched.
(10) Remove the passenger side airbag module and (10) Install the top cover onto the instrument
airbag door from the instrument panel as a unit. panel. Refer to Instrument Panel Top Cover in the
(11) Remove the passenger side airbag door from Removal and Installation section of Group 8E -
the airbag module. Refer to Passenger Side Airbag Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures.
Door in the Removal and Installation section of this (11) Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at
group for the procedures. this time. Refer to Airbag System in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of this group for the proper pro-
INSTALLATION cedures.
WARNING: USE EXTREME CARE TO PREVENT PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DOOR

ANY FOREIGN MATERIAL FROM ENTERING THE
PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE, OR BECOM- WARNING:
ING ENTRAPPED BETWEEN THE AIRBAG CUSHION • THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE, COM-
AND THE PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DOOR. FAIL- PLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
URE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD RESULT ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIR-
IN OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG DEPLOY- BAG SYSTEM OR RELATED STEERING WHEEL,
MENT. STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(1) Install the passenger side airbag door onto the AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND)
airbag module. Refer to Passenger Side Airbag CABLE. THEN WAIT TWO MINUTES FOR THE SYS-
Door in the Removal and Installation section of this TEM CAPACITOR TO DISCHARGE BEFORE FUR-
group for the procedures. THER SYSTEM SERVICE. THIS IS THE ONLY SURE
(2) Carefully position the passenger side airbag WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE
module and airbag door in the instrument panel as a TO DO THIS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
unit. BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
(3) Reach through and above the instrument panel INJURY.
glove box opening to install and tighten the two • WHEN REMOVING A DEPLOYED AIRBAG MOD-
screws that secure the passenger side airbag module ULE, RUBBER GLOVES, EYE PROTECTION, AND A
lower mounting brackets to the instrument panel LONG-SLEEVED SHIRT SHOULD BE WORN. THERE
structural support. Tighten the screws to 11.8 N·m MAY BE DEPOSITS ON THE AIRBAG MODULE AND
(105 in. lbs.). OTHER INTERIOR SURFACES. IN LARGE DOSES,
(4) Install and tighten the four screws that secure THESE DEPOSITS MAY CAUSE IRRITATION TO THE
the lower flange of the passenger side airbag door to SKIN AND EYES.
the instrument panel upper glove box opening rein-
forcement. Tighten the screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in.
lbs.). REMOVAL
(5) Install the glove box into the instrument panel. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Refer to Glove Box - Roll Down in the Removal cable. If either of the airbags has not been deployed,
and Installation section of Group 8E - Instrument wait two minutes for the system capacitor to dis-
Panel Systems for the procedures. charge before further service.
(2) Remove the passenger side airbag module from the three tabs on the top and the bottom of the pas-
the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air- senger side airbag module housing.
bag Module in the Removal and Installation section (3) Slide the passenger side airbag door sideways
of this group for the procedures. until the keyed holes in the returns of the upper and
(3) Place the passenger side airbag module on a lower airbag door mounting flanges are locked onto
suitable work surface. Slide the passenger side air- the three tabs on the top and the bottom of the air-
bag door sideways on the airbag module until the bag module housing.
keyed holes in the returns of the upper and lower (4) Install the passenger side airbag module onto
airbag door mounting flanges clear the three tabs on the instrument panel. Refer to Passenger Side Air-
the top and the bottom of the airbag module housing bag Module in the Removal and Installation section
(Fig. 11). of this group for the procedures.
AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE

WARNING:
• THE AIRBAG CONTROL MODULE CONTAINS
THE IMPACT SENSOR, WHICH ENABLES THE SYS-
TEM TO DEPLOY THE AIRBAG. BEFORE ATTEMPT-
ING TO DIAGNOSE OR SERVICE ANY AIRBAG
SYSTEM OR RELATED STEERING WHEEL, STEER-
ING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPO-
NENTS YOU MUST FIRST DISCONNECT AND
ISOLATE THE BATTERY NEGATIVE (GROUND)
Fig. 11 Passenger Side Airbag Door Remove/Install
(4) Disengage the keyed holes in the returns of the WAY TO DISABLE THE AIRBAG SYSTEM. FAILURE
upper and lower airbag door mounting flange returns TO DO THIS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
from the three tabs on the top and the bottom of the BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
passenger side airbag module housing. INJURY.
(5) Remove the passenger side airbag door from • NEVER STRIKE OR KICK THE AIRBAG CON-
the airbag module. TROL MODULE, AS IT CAN DAMAGE THE IMPACT
SENSOR OR AFFECT ITS CALIBRATION. IF AN AIR-
INSTALLATION BAG CONTROL MODULE IS ACCIDENTALLY
DROPPED DURING SERVICE, THE MODULE MUST
WARNING: BE SCRAPPED AND REPLACED WITH A NEW UNIT.
• USE EXTREME CARE TO PREVENT ANY FOR- ALWAYS REINSTALL THE AIRBAG CONTROL MOD-
EIGN MATERIAL FROM ENTERING THE PASSEN- ULE PROTECTIVE COVER. FAILURE TO OBSERVE
GER SIDE AIRBAG MODULE, OR BECOMING THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL,
ENTRAPPED BETWEEN THE AIRBAG CUSHION INCOMPLETE, OR IMPROPER AIRBAG DEPLOY-
AND THE PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DOOR. FAIL- MENT AND POSSIBLE OCCUPANT INJURIES.
URE TO OBSERVE THIS WARNING COULD RESULT
IN OCCUPANT INJURIES UPON AIRBAG DEPLOY-
MENT. REMOVAL
• THE PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAG DOOR MUST (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
NEVER BE PAINTED. REPLACEMENT AIRBAG cable. If either of the airbags has not been deployed,
DOORS ARE SERVICED IN THE ORIGINAL COL- wait two minutes for the system capacitor to dis-
ORS. PAINT MAY CHANGE THE WAY IN WHICH THE charge before further service.
MATERIAL OF THE AIRBAG DOOR RESPONDS TO (2) Remove the left front bucket seat assembly
AN AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT. FAILURE TO OBSERVE from the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Refer
THIS WARNING COULD RESULT IN OCCUPANT to Seats in the Removal and Installation section of
INJURIES UPON AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT. Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
(3) Remove the three screws that secure the Air-
(1) Position the passenger side airbag door over bag Control Module (ACM) protective cover to the
the airbag module. floor panel and the ACM mounting bracket (Fig. 12).
(2) Engage the keyed holes in the returns of the (4) Lift the ACM protective cover away from the
upper and lower airbag door mounting flanges with ACM far enough to access and disengage the instru-
the ACM protective cover to the floor panel and the
ACM mounting bracket. Tighten the screws to 4 N·m
(35 in. lbs.).
(7) Install the left front bucket seat assembly into
the passenger compartment of the vehicle. Refer to
Seats in the Removal and Installation section of
Group 23 - Body for the procedures.
(8) Do not reconnect the battery negative cable at
this time. Refer to Airbag System in the Diagnosis
and Testing section of this group for the proper pro-
cedures.
CLOCKSPRING
The clockspring cannot be repaired. It must be
replaced if faulty or damaged, or if the driver side
airbag has been deployed.
WARNING: THE AIRBAG SYSTEM IS A SENSITIVE,

COMPLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
Fig. 12 Airbag Control Module Remove/Install STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ment panel floor wire harness retainer from the slot-
ted mounting hole near the rear of the cover.
(5) Reach under the front of the driver side front
seat to access and disconnect the instrument panel
floor wire harness connector from the Airbag Control
Module (ACM). To disconnect the instrument panel
floor wire harness connector from the ACM:
(a) Squeeze the two connector latch tabs
INJURY.
between the thumb and forefinger.
(b) Pull the connector straight away from the
ACM connector receptacle. REMOVAL
(6) Remove the three nuts that secure the ACM
mounting bracket to the mount that is welded onto NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to
the floor panel. turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in
(7) Remove the ACM from the mount on the floor the straight-ahead position.
panel.
(1) Place the front wheels in the straight-ahead
INSTALLATION position.
(1) Carefully position the ACM to the mount that (2) Remove the driver side airbag module from the
is welded onto the floor panel. When the ACM is cor- steering wheel. Refer to Driver Side Airbag Mod-
rectly positioned the arrow on the ACM label will be ule in the Removal and Installation section of this
pointed forward in the vehicle. group for the procedures.
(2) Install and tighten the three nuts that secure (3) If the vehicle is so equipped, disconnect the
the ACM to the mount. Tighten the nuts to 7.3 N·m upper clockspring wire harness connector from the
(65 in. lbs.). steering wheel wire harness for the vehicle speed
(3) Reconnect the instrument panel floor wire har- control switches located within the hub cavity of the
ness connector to the ACM connector receptacle. Be steering wheel.
certain that the connector latches are fully engaged. (4) Remove the nut that secures the steering wheel
(4) Position the protective cover over the ACM. armature to the steering column upper shaft, which
(5) Engage the instrument panel floor wire har- is located within the hub cavity of the steering wheel.
ness retainer in the slotted mounting hole near the (5) Pull the steering wheel off of the steering col-
rear of the ACM protective cover. umn upper shaft spline using a steering wheel puller
(Special Tool C-3428-B).
(6) Remove the steering column opening cover
from the instrument panel. Refer to Steering Col-
umn Opening Cover in the Removal and Installa-
tion section of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems
for the procedures.
steering column to the fully raised position.
steering column shroud to the upper shroud (Fig. 13).
Fig. 14 Clockspring Remove/Install
Fig. 15 Upper Clockspring Latch Access Window

(13) Remove the clockspring from the steering col-
Fig. 13 Steering Column Shrouds Remove/Install umn. The clockspring cannot be repaired. It must be
(9) If the vehicle is equipped with a standard non- replaced if faulty or damaged, or if the driver side
tilt steering column, loosen the two upper steering airbag has been deployed.
column mounting nuts. If the vehicle is equipped (14) If the removed clockspring is to be reused,
with the optional tilt steering column, move the tilt lock the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to
steering column to the fully lowered position. maintain clockspring centering until it is reinstalled
(10) Remove both the upper and lower shrouds on the steering column. This can be done by inserting
from the steering column. a stiff wire through the small index hole located at
(11) Disconnect the two instrument panel wire about the 11 o’clock position in the centered clock-
harness connectors from the lower clockspring con- spring rotor and case. Refer to Clockspring Center-
nector receptacles (Fig. 14). ing in the Adjustments section of this group for an
(12) The multi-function switch water shield illustration of the clockspring index hole. Bend the
bracket on the top of the steering column has a small wire over after it has been inserted through the
access window which allows access to the upper index hole to prevent it from falling out.
clockspring latch with a small screwdriver (Fig. 15).
Gently pry both plastic latches of the clockspring INSTALLATION
assembly to release them from the steering column If the clockspring is not properly centered in rela-
upper housing. tion to the steering wheel, steering shaft and steer-
ing gear, it may be damaged. Refer to Clockspring
NOTE: If the clockspring plastic latches are broken, Centering in the Adjustments section of this group
be certain to remove the broken pieces from the before installing or reinstalling a clockspring.
steering column upper housing.
Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre- ADJUSTMENTS
centered and with a locking pin installed. This lock-
ing pin should not be removed until the clockspring CLOCKSPRING CENTERING
has been installed on the steering column. If the The clockspring is designed to wind and unwind
locking pin is removed before the clockspring is when the steering wheel is rotated, but is only
installed on a steering column, the clockspring cen- designed to rotate the same number of turns (about
tering procedure must be performed. five complete rotations) as the steering wheel can be
turned from stop to stop. Centering the clockspring
NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain
indexes the clockspring tape to other steering compo-
that the front wheels are still in the straight-ahead
nents so that it can operate within its designed
position.
travel limits. The rotor of a centered clockspring can
(1) If the removed clockspring is being reused, be rotated two and one-half turns in either direction
remove the wire from the index hole that is locking from the centered position, without damaging the
the clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to main- clockspring tape.
tain clockspring centering. However, if the clockspring is removed for service
(2) Be certain that the turn signal switch stalk is or if the steering column is disconnected from the
in the neutral position, then carefully slide the cen- steering gear, the clockspring tape can change posi-
tered clockspring down over the steering column tion relative to the other steering components. The
upper shaft until the clockspring latches engage the clockspring must then be re-centered following com-
steering column upper housing. pletion of the service or the clockspring tape may be
(3) If a new clockspring has been installed, remove damaged.
the locking pin that is securing the clockspring rotor Service replacement clocksprings are shipped pre-
to the clockspring case and maintaining clockspring centered and with a locking pin installed. This lock-
centering. ing pin should not be removed until the clockspring
(4) Reconnect the two instrument panel wire har- has been installed on the steering column. If the
ness connectors to the lower clockspring connector locking pin is removed before the clockspring is
receptacles. Be certain that the connector latches are installed on a steering column, the clockspring cen-
fully engaged. tering procedure must be performed.
(5) Position the steering column shrouds on the
steering column.
COMPLEX ELECTROMECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
the lower steering column shroud to the upper
shroud. Tighten the screws to 2 N·m (18 in. lbs.).
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(7) Install the steering column opening cover onto
the instrument panel. Refer to Steering Column
Opening Cover in the Removal and Installation sec-
tion of Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for the
procedures.
(8) Install the steering wheel onto the steering col-
umn upper shaft. Be certain to index the flats on the
hub of the steering wheel with the formations on the
inside of the clockspring rotor. Pull the upper clock-
INJURY.
spring wire harnesses through the lower hole in the
steering wheel armature.
(9) Install and tighten the steering wheel mount- NOTE: Before starting this procedure, be certain to
ing nut. Tighten the nut to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.). Be turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in
certain not to pinch the wire harnesses between the the straight-ahead position.
steering wheel and the nut.
(10) If the vehicle is so equipped, reconnect the (1) Place the front wheels in the straight-ahead
upper clockspring wire harness connector to the position.
steering wheel wire harness for the vehicle speed (2) Remove the clockspring from the steering col-
control switches. umn. Refer to Clockspring in the Removal and
(11) Install the driver side airbag module onto the Installation section of this group for the procedures.
steering wheel. Refer to Driver Side Airbag Mod- (3) Hold the clockspring case in one hand so that it
ule in the Removal and Installation section of this is oriented as it would be when it is installed on the
group for the procedures. steering column (Fig. 16).
(6) The clockspring is now centered. Lock the
clockspring rotor to the clockspring case to maintain
clockspring centering until it is reinstalled on the
steering column. This can be done by inserting a stiff
wire through the small index hole located at about
the 11 o’clock position in the centered clockspring
rotor and case. Bend the wire over after it has been
inserted through the index hole to prevent it from
falling out.
(7) The front wheels should still be in the straight-
ahead position. Install the clockspring onto the steer-
ing column. Refer to Clockspring in the Removal
dures.
SPECIAL TOOLS
PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Fig. 16 Clockspring
(4) Use your other hand to rotate the clockspring
rotor clockwise to the end of its travel. Do not apply
excessive torque.
(5) From the end of the clockwise travel, rotate the
rotor about two and one-half turns counterclockwise,
until the rotor flats are horizontal. If the upper clock-
spring wire harnesses are not oriented towards the Puller C-3428-B
bottom of the clockspring, rotate the rotor another
one-half turn in the counterclockwise direction.
XJ ELECTRICALLY HEATED SYSTEMS 8N - 1
ELECTRICALLY HEATED SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
HEATED SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 1
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DEFOGGER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 1 DEFOGGER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM ........ 1 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION REAR GLASS HEATING GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DEFOGGER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SERVICE PROCEDURES
DEFOGGER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REAR GLASS HEATING GRID REPAIR ........ 6
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
OUTSIDE MIRROR HEATING GRID . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DEFOGGER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 7
REAR GLASS HEATING GRID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DEFOGGER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 6
DEFOGGER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ 4
GENERAL INFORMATION REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SYSTEM

The rear window defogger system will only operate
INTRODUCTION when the ignition switch is in the On position. When
An electrically heated rear window defogger and the defogger switch is in the On position, an electric
electrically heated outside rear view mirrors are heater grid on the rear window glass is energized.
available factory-installed options on this model. Vehicles with the heated mirror options also have
Refer to 8W-48 - Rear Window Defogger and 8W-62 - heater grids located behind the outside rear view
Power Mirrors in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for mirror glass. Each of these grids produce heat to help
complete circuit descriptions and diagrams. clear the rear window glass and outside rear view
mirrors of ice, snow, or fog.
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive The defogger system is controlled by a switch
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this installed in the instrument panel accessory switch
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD bezel, which is located near the bottom of the instru-
versions of affected vehicle components have been ment panel center bezel area, below the heater and
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. air conditioner controls. An amber indicator lamp in
While most of the illustrations used in this group the switch button will light to indicate when the
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and defogger system is turned on. The instrument cluster
service procedures outlined can generally be circuitry, which contains the defogger system timer
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule logic, monitors the state of the defogger switch
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a through a hard-wired input. The instrument cluster
special illustration or procedure is required. circuitry controls the defogger system through a
hard-wired control output to the defogger relay.
The defogger system will be automatically turned
off after a programmed time interval of about ten
minutes. After the initial time interval has expired, if
8N - 2 ELECTRICALLY HEATED SYSTEMS XJ
the defogger switch is turned on again during the window heating grid is operating as designed, refer
same ignition cycle, the defogger system will auto- to Power Mirror in the Diagnosis and Testing section
matically turn off after about five minutes. of Group 8T - Power Mirror Systems for diagnosis of
The defogger system will automatically shut off if the mirror heating grids.
the ignition switch is turned to the Off position, or it The heating grid behind each outside mirror glass
can be turned off manually by depressing the instru- cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the
ment panel switch. Following are general descrip- entire power mirror unit must be replaced. Refer to
tions of the major components in the defogger Power Mirror in the Removal and Installation section
system. Refer to the owner’s manual in the vehicle of Group 8T - Power Mirror Systems for the service
glove box for more information on the features, use procedures.
and operation of the defogger system.
DEFOGGER SWITCH
The rear window defogger switch is installed in the
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION instrument panel accessory switch bezel, which is
located near the bottom of the instrument panel cen-
REAR GLASS HEATING GRID ter bezel area, below the heater and air conditioner
The heated rear window glass has two electrically controls. The momentary-type switch provides a
conductive vertical bus bars and a series of horizon- hard-wired ground signal to the instrument cluster
tal grid lines made of a silver-ceramic material, each time it is depressed. The instrument cluster
which is baked on and bonded to the inside surface of rear window defogger timer and logic circuitry
the glass. The grid lines and bus bars comprise a responds by energizing or de-energizing the rear win-
parallel electrical circuit. dow defogger relay.
When the rear window defogger switch is placed in Energizing the rear window defogger relay pro-
the On position, electrical current is directed to the vides electrical current to the rear window defogger
rear window grid lines through the bus bars. The grid and, if the vehicle is so equipped, the outside
grid lines heat the rear window to clear the surface rear view mirror heating grids. An amber indicator
of fog or snow. Protection for the heated grid circuit lamp in the defogger switch, which lights to indicate
is provided by a fuse in the Power Distribution Cen- when the defogger system is turned On, is also pow-
ter (PDC). ered by the defogger relay output.
The grid lines and bus bars are highly resistant to The defogger switch illumination lamp and indica-
abrasion. However, it is possible for an open circuit tor lamp bulbs are serviceable. The defogger switch
to occur in an individual grid line, resulting in no cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must
current flow through the line. be replaced.
The grid lines can be damaged or scraped off with
sharp instruments. Care should be taken when clean- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
ing the glass or removing foreign materials, decals, The instrument cluster is an electromechanical
or stickers from the glass. Normal glass cleaning sol- unit that contains integrated circuitry and internal
vents or hot water used with rags or toweling is rec- programming to perform a variety of functions. The
ommended. instrument cluster circuitry monitors hard-wired
A repair kit is available to repair the grid lines and switch inputs, as well as message inputs received
bus bars, or to reinstall the heated glass pigtail from other vehicle electronic control modules on the
wires. Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus network.
The instrument cluster uses these many inputs
OUTSIDE MIRROR HEATING GRID along with its internal programming and integral
Vehicles equipped with the optional heated mirror timer and logic circuitry to perform the functions of
package have an electric heating grid located behind the rear window defogger timer on this model. The
the mirror glass of each outside rear view mirror. instrument cluster circuitry also has a self-diagnostic
The heated mirrors are controlled by the rear win- capability. Refer to Instrument Cluster in Group 8E -
dow defogger switch. Electrical current is directed to Instrument Panel Systems for more information on
the heating grid inside the mirror only when the rear this feature.
window defogger switch is in the On position. However, there are no diagnostics available for the
If the outside mirror heating grids and the rear rear window defogger timer and logic circuitry.
window heating grid are all inoperative, diagnosis of Therefore, the diagnosis for this system consists of
the rear window defogger system should be per- confirming the presence of a rear window defogger
formed as described in this group. If the outside mir- switch input signal at the instrument cluster connec-
ror heating grids are inoperative, but the rear tor, and the resulting rear window defogger relay
control output signal at the defogger relay. For diag-
nosis of the CCD data bus and the data bus message
inputs, a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic
Procedures manual are recommended.
Refer to Instrument Cluster in Group 8E - Instru-
ment Panel Systems for the service procedures for
the instrument cluster. The rear window defogger
timer and logic circuitry cannot be adjusted or
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the instrument
cluster assembly must be replaced.
DEFOGGER RELAY
The rear window defogger relay is a International
Standards Organization (ISO)-type relay. The rear
window defogger relay is a electromechanical device
that switches fused battery current to the rear glass Fig. 1 Rear Window Glass Grid Test
and outside mirror heating grids, and the indicator The above checks will confirm system operation.
lamp of the defogger switch, when the instrument Illumination of the defogger switch indicator lamp
cluster rear window defogger timer and logic cir- means that there is electrical current available at the
cuitry grounds the relay coil. See Defogger Relay in output of the defogger relay, but does not confirm
the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group for that the electrical current is reaching the rear glass
more information. heating grid lines.
The rear window defogger relay is located in the If the defogger system does not operate, the prob-
junction block, on the right cowl side inner panel lem should be isolated in the following manner:
below the instrument panel in the passenger com- (1) Confirm that the ignition switch is in the On
partment. The rear window defogger relay cannot be position.
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be (2) Ensure that the rear glass heating grid feed
replaced. and ground wires are connected to the glass. Confirm
that the ground wire has continuity to ground.
(3) Check the fuses in the Power Distribution Cen-
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ter (PDC) and in the junction block. The fuses must
be tight in their receptacles and all electrical connec-
DEFOGGER SYSTEM tions must be secure.
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to When the above steps have been completed and the
8W-48 - Rear Window Defogger or 8W-62 Power Mir- rear glass or outside rear view mirror heating grid is
rors in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. The operation still inoperative, one or more of the following is
of the electrically heated rear window defogger sys- faulty:
tem can be confirmed in one of the following man- • Defogger switch
ners: • Defogger relay
1. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. • Instrument cluster circuitry
While monitoring the instrument panel voltmeter, set • Rear window grid lines (all grid lines would
the defogger switch in the On position. When the have to be broken or one of the feed wires discon-
defogger switch is turned On, a distinct voltmeter nected for the entire system to be inoperative)
needle deflection should be noted. • Outside rear view mirror heating grid.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Set If setting the defogger switch to the On position
the defogger switch in the On position. The rear win- produces a severe voltmeter deflection, check for a
dow defogger operation can be checked by feeling the short circuit between the defogger relay output and
rear window or outside rear view mirror glass. A dis- the rear glass or outside rear view mirror heating
tinct difference in temperature between the grid lines grids.
and the adjacent clear glass or the mirror glass can
be detected within three to four minutes of operation. REAR GLASS HEATING GRID
3. Using a 12-volt DC voltmeter, contact the rear For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
glass heating grid terminal A (right side) with the 8W-48 - Rear Window Defogger in Group 8W - Wir-
negative lead, and terminal B (left side) with the pos- ing Diagrams. To detect breaks in the grid lines, the
itive lead (Fig. 1). The voltmeter should read battery following procedure is required:
voltage.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. Set the Instrument Cluster in this group. If not OK,
the defogger switch in the On position. The indicator replace the faulty switch.
lamp should light. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, see
the Defogger Relay diagnosis in this group.
(2) Using a 12-volt DC voltmeter, contact the ver-
tical bus bar on the right side of the vehicle with the
negative lead. With the positive lead, contact the ver-
tical bus bar on the left side of the vehicle. The volt-
meter should read battery voltage. If OK, go to Step
3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the defogger
relay as required.
(3) With the negative lead of the voltmeter, contact
a good body ground point. The voltage reading should
not change. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the
circuit to ground as required.
(4) Connect the negative lead of the voltmeter to
the right side bus bar and touch each grid line at
midpoint C with the positive lead. A reading of
approximately six volts indicates a line is good. A
reading of zero volts indicates a break in the grid
line between midpoint C and the left side bus bar. A
reading of ten to fourteen volts indicates a break
between midpoint C and the right side bus bar. Move
the positive lead on the grid line towards the break
and the voltage reading will change as soon as the
Fig. 2 Defogger Switch Continuity
break is crossed.
DEFOGGER RELAY
DEFOGGER SWITCH
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
8W-48 - Rear Window Defogger in Group 8W - Wir- BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
ing Diagrams. RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR INJURY.
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL RELAY TEST
INJURY. The defogger relay (Fig. 3) is located in the junc-
tion block, on the right cowl side inner panel below
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative the instrument panel in the passenger compartment.
cable. Remove the accessory switch bezel from the Remove the defogger relay from the junction block to
instrument panel and unplug the defogger switch perform the following tests:
wire harness connector. (1) A relay in the de-energized position should
(2) Check for continuity between the ground cir- have continuity between terminals 87A and 30, and
cuit cavity of the defogger switch wire harness con- no continuity between terminals 87 and 30. If OK, go
nector and a good ground. There should be to Step 2. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the (2) Resistance between terminals 85 and 86 (elec-
open circuit as required. tromagnet) should be 75 6 10 ohms. If OK, go to
(3) Check for continuity between the ground cir- Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
cuit terminal and the rear window defogger switch (3) Connect a battery to terminals 85 and 86.
sense circuit terminal on the back of the defogger There should now be continuity between terminals
switch housing (Fig. 2). There should be momentary 30 and 87, and no continuity between terminals 87A
continuity as the defogger switch button is depressed, and 30. If OK, see the Relay Circuit Test in this
and then no continuity. If OK, see the diagnosis for group. If not OK, replace the faulty relay.
minal 86 with the ignition switch in the On position.
If OK, see the diagnosis for Instrument Cluster in
this group. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the
fuse in the junction block as required.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Before performing this test, complete the Defogger
Switch and the Defogger Relay tests as described in
this group. For circuit descriptions and diagrams,
refer to 8W-48 - Rear Window Defogger in Group 8W
- Wiring Diagrams.

Fig. 3 Defogger Relay INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
RELAY CIRCUIT TEST CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
(1) The relay common feed terminal cavity (30) is BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
connected to battery voltage and should be hot at all INJURY.
times. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the PDC fuse as required. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(2) The relay normally closed terminal (87A) is cable. Remove the defogger relay from the junction
connected to terminal 30 in the de-energized position, block and unplug the defogger switch wire harness
but is not used for this application. Go to Step 3. connector.
(3) The relay normally open terminal (87) is con- (2) Remove the instrument cluster from the instru-
nected to the common feed terminal (30) in the ener- ment panel. Refer to Instrument Cluster in Group 8E
gized position. This terminal supplies battery voltage - Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures.
to the rear glass and outside rear view mirror heat- (3) Check for continuity between the rear window
ing grids and the defogger switch indicator lamp. defogger switch sense circuit cavity of the right
There should be continuity between the cavity for instrument cluster wire harness connector (connector
relay terminal 87 and the rear window defogger relay B) and a good ground. There should be no continuity.
output circuit cavities of the rear glass heating grid If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the short circuit
connector, both outside rear view mirror heating grid as required.
connectors, and the defogger switch connector at all (4) Check for continuity between the rear window
times. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open defogger switch sense circuit cavities of the right
circuit(s) as required. instrument cluster wire harness connector (connector
(4) The coil ground terminal (85) is connected to B) and the defogger switch wire harness connector.
the electromagnet in the relay. This terminal is pro- There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not
vided with ground by the instrument cluster rear OK, repair the open circuit as required.
window defogger timer and logic circuitry to energize (5) Check for continuity between the rear window
the defogger relay. There should be continuity to defogger relay control circuit cavity of the right
ground at the cavity for relay terminal 85 when the instrument cluster wire harness connector (connector
defogger switch is turned On. However, with the B) and a good ground. There should be no continuity.
defogger relay removed, the defogger switch indicator If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the short circuit
lamp will not light to show that the defogger system as required.
is turned On. Be certain that you depress the defog- (6) Check for continuity between the rear window
ger switch at least twice to confirm that the system defogger relay control circuit cavities of the right
is turned on during this test. If OK, go to Step 5. If instrument cluster wire harness connector (connector
not OK, repair the open circuit to the instrument B) and the defogger relay receptacle (the cavity for
cluster as required. ISO relay terminal 85) in the junction block. There
(5) The coil battery terminal (86) is connected to should be continuity. If OK, replace the faulty instru-
the electromagnet in the relay. It is connected to ment cluster. If not OK, repair the open circuit as
fused ignition switch output voltage and should be required.
hot when the ignition switch is in the On position.
Check for battery voltage at the cavity for relay ter-
SERVICE PROCEDURES bus bar. Apply a thin layer of epoxy to the area
where the terminal or pigtail wire was fastened and
REAR GLASS HEATING GRID REPAIR onto the adjacent grid line.
Repair of the rear glass heating grid lines, bus (7) Apply a thin layer of conductive epoxy to the
bars, terminals or pigtail wires can be accomplished terminal or bare wire end of the pigtail and place it
using a Mopar Rear Window Defogger Repair Kit in the proper location on the bus bar. To prevent the
(Part Number 4267922) or equivalent. terminal or pigtail wire from moving while the epoxy
is curing, it must be wedged or clamped.
WARNING: MATERIALS CONTAINED IN THE (8) Carefully remove the masking tape or tem-
REPAIR KIT MAY CAUSE SKIN OR EYE IRRITATION. plate.
THE KIT CONTAINS EPOXY RESIN AND AMINE
TYPE HARDENER, WHICH ARE HARMFUL IF SWAL- CAUTION: Do not allow the glass surface to exceed
LOWED. AVOID CONTACT WITH THE SKIN AND 204° C (400° F) or the glass may fracture.
EYES. FOR SKIN CONTACT, WASH THE AFFECTED
(9) Allow the epoxy to cure 24 hours at room tem-
AREAS WITH SOAP AND WATER. FOR CONTACT
perature, or use a heat gun with a 260° to 371° C
WITH THE EYES, FLUSH WITH PLENTY OF WATER.
(500° to 700° F) range for fifteen minutes. Hold the
DO NOT TAKE INTERNALLY. IF TAKEN INTER-
heat gun approximately 25.4 centimeters (10 inches)
NALLY, INDUCE VOMITING AND CALL A PHYSICIAN
from the repair.
IMMEDIATELY. USE WITH ADEQUATE VENTILA-
(10) After the conductive epoxy is properly cured,
TION. DO NOT USE NEAR FIRE OR FLAME. CON-
remove the wedge or clamp from the terminal or pig-
TAINS FLAMMABLE SOLVENTS. KEEP OUT OF THE
tail wire. Do not attach the wire harness connectors
REACH OF CHILDREN.
until the curing process is complete.
(1) Mask the repair area so that the conductive (11) Check the operation of the rear window defog-
epoxy can be applied neatly. Extend the epoxy appli- ger glass heating grid.
cation onto the grid line or the bus bar on each side
of the break (Fig. 4). REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DEFOGGER SWITCH
INJURY.

Fig. 4 Grid Line Repair - Typical
cable.
(2) Follow the instructions in the repair kit for (2) Remove the center bezel from the instrument
preparing the damaged area. panel. See Instrument Panel Center Bezel in Group
(3) Remove the package separator clamp and mix 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for the procedures.
the two conductive epoxy components thoroughly (3) Remove the three screws that secure the acces-
within the packaging. Fold the package in half and sory switch bezel to the instrument panel (Fig. 5).
cut the center corner to dispense the epoxy. (4) Pull the accessory switch bezel out from the
(4) For grid line repairs, mask the area to be instrument panel far enough to access the wire har-
repaired with masking tape or a template. ness connectors.
(5) Apply the epoxy through the slit in the mask- (5) Unplug the wire harness connectors from the
ing tape or template. Overlap both ends of the break rear of the accessory switches and the cigar lighter/
by at least 19 millimeters (0.75 inch). power outlet.
(6) For a terminal or pigtail wire replacement, (6) Remove the accessory switch bezel from the
mask the adjacent areas so the epoxy can be instrument panel.
extended onto the adjacent grid line as well as the
Fig. 5 Accessory Switch Bezel Remove/Install

pry the snap clips at the top and bottom of the rear
window defogger switch receptacle on the back of the
accessory switch bezel and pull the switch out of the
bezel.
(8) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Be
certain that both of the switch snap retainers in the
receptacle on the back of the accessory switch bezel
are fully engaged. Tighten the mounting screws to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
DEFOGGER RELAY Fig. 6 Right Cowl Side Trim Remove/Install

(5) Remove the screw that secures the right door
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- sill trim and the right cowl side trim to the right
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE door opening sill.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY (6) Remove the right cowl side trim panel from the
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR vehicle.
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (7) Unplug the rear window defogger relay from
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- the junction block.
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- (8) Install the defogger relay by aligning the relay
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL terminals with the cavities in the junction block and
INJURY. pushing the relay firmly into place.
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (10) Test the relay operation.
cable. (11) Reinstall the right cowl side trim and the fuse
(2) Remove the fuse access panel by unsnapping it access panel. Tighten the mounting screws to 2.2
from the right cowl side trim panel. N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(3) Remove the stamped nut that secures the right
cowl side trim to the junction block stud (Fig. 6).
opening that secures the right cowl side trim to the
right cowl side inner panel.
HEATED SEAT SYSTEM
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION HEATED SEAT RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 HEATED SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HEATED SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HEATED SEAT ELEMENT and SENSOR . . . . . . . . 9 SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 11
HEATED SEAT RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
HEATED SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 HEATED SEAT RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 HEATED SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . 12
HEATED SEAT ELEMENT and SENSOR . . . . . . . 10
GENERAL INFORMATION N-FET Transistor within the SHIM energizes the

heating elements in the seat cushion and back. When
INTRODUCTION the sensor input indicates the correct temperature
Individually controlled electrically heated front set point has been achieved, the SHIM de-energizes
seats are available factory-installed optional equip- the N-FET. The SHIM will continue to cycle the
ment on this model. The seat heaters will only oper- N-FET as needed to maintain the temperature set
ate when the ignition switch is in the ON position, point.
and the surface temperature at the front seat heating The SHIM will automatically turn off the heating
element sensors is below the designed temperature elements if it detects a short in the heating element
set points of the system. The heated seat system will or a sensor out of range. These conditions will also
not operate in ambient temperatures greater than cause the SHIM to notify the occupant of the failure
about 32° C (90° F). via flashing the heated seat switch LED’s as dis-
There are separate momentary, tactile, two-direc- cussed later.
tional rocker switches located in the center console Switched battery power to the SHIM is supplied by
with center NEUTRAL, HI and LO positions for each the heated seat relay mounted to the seat cushion
front seat. Depressing the rocker switch to its frame with the SHIM under the right front seat. The
momentary HI or LO position signals the Seat Heat battery feed is protected by a circuit breaker located
Interface Module (SHIM) to power the selected in the junction block.
heated seat and maintain the requested temperature Following are general descriptions of the major
setting (HI or LO). Each switch has a HI and LO components in the heated seat system. Refer to
Light-Emitting Diode (LED) which, via the SHIM, 8W-63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W
illuminates to give a visual indication that the sys- - Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit descriptions
tem is in the HI or LO mode. The LO heat set point and diagrams.
is about 32° C (90° F), and the HI heat set point is
about 38° C (100° F). The system shall be deactivated DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
whenever the same set position is depressed a second
time and shall change states directly when switching
HEATED SEAT SWITCH
from HI to LO or vice versa. The system shall be
The heated seat switch assembly is located on the
deactivated whenever the ignition switch is placed in
center console where the ashtray is normally located
the off position. When the ignition switch is placed
(Fig. 1). The two momentary, two-directional rocker
back in the run position, the heated seat system
switches, one switch for each front seat, provide a
shall remain deactivated until a momentary switch is
resistor-multiplexed signal to the Seat Heat Interface
depressed. When a seat heater is turned on, a sensor
Module (SHIM). Each switch has center NEUTRAL,
located near the seat cushion electric heater element
and momentary LO and HI positions so that both the
provides the SHIM with input indicating the surface
driver and the front seat passenger can select a pre-
temperature of the seat cushion. If the surface tem-
ferred seat heating mode.
perature input is below the temperature set point of
Each switch has two telltales (LED’s) which indi-
the SHIM for the selected temperature setting, an
cate the mode of the heater of the respective seat.
HEATED SEAT ELEMENT and SENSOR

Two heated seat heating elements are used in each
front seat, one for the seat cushion and the other for
the seat back. The two elements for each seat are
connected in series with the SHIM.
The temperature sensor is a Negative Temperature
Coefficient (NTC) thermistor. One temperature sen-
sor is used for each seat, and it is integral to the seat
cushion heating element.
The heating elements are sewn into the seat cushion
cover and seat back cover assemblies, which are ser-
viced individually. The heating elements and tempera-
ture sensor cannot be repaired and, if faulty or
damaged, the affected seat cover assembly must be
replaced. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the seat cushion
cover and seat back cover Removal and Installation.

Fig. 1 Heated Seat Switch Location
The switches also have LED’s which provide back- HEATED SEAT SYSTEM
lighting when the ignition switch is in the ON posi- For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W -
tion. The LED’s cannot be repaired. If the LED is 63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W -
faulty, the individual switch must be replaced. Wiring Diagrams.

SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
The Seat Heat Interface Module (SHIM) is an elec-
tronic microprocessor controlled device designed to
operate the electric seat heater elements. The SHIM
is located under the right front seat cushion. Inputs
to the module include the console mounted resistor
multiplexed switch signals, seat cushion temperature
sensors, a relay-switched battery feed, and a ground.
INJURY.
The SHIM outputs are the feed for the seat heating
elements and sensors, and the switch telltale circuits. The heated seat system is capable of performing
The SHIM cannot be repaired and, if faulty or dam- some self-diagnostics. The following table depicts the
aged, it must be replaced. various failure modes which will be reported to the
occupant via flashing the momentary switch telltales.
HEATED SEAT RELAY The switch telltales will flash on the driver’s switch if
The heated seat relay is located under the right the failure exists in the driver’s seat portion of the sys-
front seat cushion near the SHIM. Ignition and bat- tem, similarly with the passenger’s switch. The telltale
tery power is fed to the relay, which then provides a will illuminate for approximately a 1⁄2 second on, 1⁄2
switched battery feed to the SHIM. The heated seat second off pulse for a duration of one minute. This pro-
relay cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it cess will repeat every time the system is initiated via
must be replaced. the switches until the problem has been corrected.
SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES
FAILURE MODE SWITCH 9HI9 TELLTALE SWITCH 9LO9 TELLTALE

Shorted Heating Element Flashing Flashing
NTC Value Out of Range Off Flashing
Before testing the individual components in the connector. If OK, turn the ignition switch to the OFF
heated seat system, check the following: position, disconnect and isolate the battery negative
• If the heated seat switch backlighting does not cable, and replace the heated seat switch. If not OK,
illuminate with the ignition switch in the ON posi- repair the open circuit as required.
tion, check the fuse in the junction block. If the fuse
is OK, see Heated Seat Switch Backlighting in the TELLTALES
Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If not (1) Replace the heated seat switch with a known
OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as good unit and test the operation of the switch tell-
required and replace the faulty fuse. tales. If OK, discard the faulty heated seat switch. If
• If the heated seat switch telltales do not illumi- not OK, see Seat Heat Interface Module in the Diag-
nate with the ignition switch in the ON position, but nosis and Testing section of this group.
the heating elements do heat, see Heated Seat
Switch Telltales in the Diagnosis and Testing section MULTIPLEXED RESISTANCES
of this group. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
• If the heated seat switch backlighting illumi- cable.
nates with the ignition switch in the ON position, (2) Remove the heated seat switch assembly from
but the heating elements do not heat and the tell- the center console. Remove the connector from the
tales do not illuminate, check the circuit breaker in suspect switch.
the junction block. If the circuit breaker is OK, see (3) With the suspect heated seat switch in the
Heated Seat Switch Multiplexed Resistances in the NEUTRAL position, using an ohmmeter, measure the
Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If not resistance between the fused ignition switch output
OK, replace the faulty circuit breaker. circuit terminal and the heated seat switch output
• If the heated seat switch backlighting illumi- circuit terminal in the 6-way connector receptacle on
nates and the telltales illuminate, but the heating the back of the switch. The resistance reading should
elements do not heat; see Heated Seat Element in be about 2.2. Kohms. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK,
the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. replace the faulty switch.
(4) Hold the suspect heated seat switch in the LO
HEATED SEAT SWITCH position. Using an ohmmeter, check the resistance
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W - between the fused ignition switch output circuit ter-
63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W - minal and the heated seat switch output circuit ter-
Wiring Diagrams. minal in the 6-way connector receptacle on the back
of the switch. The resistance reading should be about
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- 414 Ohms. If OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, replace the
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE faulty switch.
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY (5) Hold the suspect heated seat switch in the HI
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR position. Using an ohmmeter, check the resistance
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR between the fused ignition switch output circuit ter-
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- minal and the heated seat switch output circuit ter-
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- minal in the 6-way connector receptacle on the back
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL of the switch. The resistance reading should be about
INJURY. 32.5 Ohms. If OK, see Heated Seat Relay in the
Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If not
OK, replace the faulty switch.
BACKLIGHTING
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative HEATED SEAT ELEMENT and SENSOR
cable The wire harness connectors for the seat cushion
(2) Remove the heated seat switch assembly from and seat back heating elements are located under the
the center console. Remove the connector from the seat, near the rear edge of the seat cushion frame.
suspect switch. Check for continuity between the For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W -
ground circuit cavity of the 6-way heated seat switch 63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W -
wire harness connector and a good ground. There Wiring Diagrams.
should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
repair the open circuit as required. SEAT CUSHION
(3) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery cable. Unplug the 4-way heated seat cushion wire
voltage at the fused ignition switch output circuit harness connector.
cavity of the 6-way heated seat switch wire harness
(2) Check for continuity between the two heated (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
seat element circuit cavities of the seat cushion cover cable. Unplug the 8-way heated seat relay connector.
half of the heated seat cushion wire harness connec- (2) Check for continuity between the ground cir-
tor. There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If cuit cavity of the 8-way heated seat relay wire har-
not OK, replace the faulty seat cushion cover. ness connector and a good ground. There should be
(3) Check for continuity between one of the heated continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the
seat element circuit cavities of the seat cushion cover open circuit as required.
half of the heated seat cushion wire harness connec- (3) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
tor and the seat cushion frame. There should be no battery voltage at the battery feed circuit cavity (pin
continuity. If OK, see Seat Back in the Diagnosis and 8) of the 8-way heated seat relay wire harness con-
Testing section of this group. If not OK, replace the nector. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open
faulty seat cushion cover. circuit as required.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
SEAT BACK Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative output circuit cavity of the 8-way heated seat relay
cable. Unplug the 2-way heated seat back wire har- wire harness connector. If OK, turn the ignition
ness connector. switch to the OFF position, disconnect and isolate
(2) Check for continuity between the heated seat the battery negative cable, and go to Step 5. If not
element circuit cavity and the ground circuit cavity of OK, repair the open circuit as required.
the seat back cover half of the heated seat back wire (5) Unplug the 14-way seat heat interface module
harness connector. There should be continuity. If OK, (SHIM) connector. Check for continuity between the
go to Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty seat back two switched battery feed cavities of the 14-way
cover. SHIM wire harness connector and the switched bat-
(3) Check for continuity between the heated seat tery feed cavity of the 8-way heated seat relay wire
element circuit cavity of the seat back cover half of harness connector. If OK, reconnect the heated seat
the heated seat back wire harness connector and the relay wire harness connector, and go to Step 6. If not
seat back frame. There should be no continuity. If OK, repair the open circuit as required.
OK, see Heated Seat Sensor in the Diagnosis and (6) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
Testing section of this group. If not OK, replace the ignition switch to the ON position. Check for battery
faulty seat back cover. voltage at the switched battery feed cavities of the
14-way SHIM wire harness connector. If OK, turn
HEATED SEAT SENSOR the ignition switch to the OFF position, disconnect
The wire harness connector for the seat cushion and isolate the battery negative cable, and see Seat
heating element and sensor are located under the Heat Interface Module in the diagnosis and testing
seat, near the rear edge of the seat cushion frame. section of this group. If not OK, replace the heated
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W - seat relay.
63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W -
Wiring Diagrams. SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative Before testing the seat heat interface module, test
cable. Unplug the 4-way heated seat cushion wire the heated seat switch, the heated seat elements, and
harness connector. the heated seat sensor as described in the Diagnosis
(2) Using an ohmmeter, check the resistance and Testing section of this group. If testing of the
between the heated seat sensor input circuit cavity heated seat switch, elements, and sensor reveals no
and the heated seat sensor feed circuit cavity of the problems, proceed as follows. For circuit descriptions
seat cushion cover half of the heated seat cushion and diagrams, refer to 8W - 63 - Power Seat With
wire harness connector. The sensor resistance should Heated Seats in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
be between 1 Kohm and 200 Kohms. If OK, see (1) Replace the seat heat interface module with a
Heated Seat Relay in the Diagnosis and Testing sec- known good unit and test the operation of the heated
tion of this group. If not OK, replace the faulty seat seats. If OK, discard the faulty seat heat interface
cushion cover. module. If not OK, go to Step 2.
(2) Test each of the circuits from the heated seat
HEATED SEAT RELAY switch, heated seat relay, heated seat elements, and
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W - heated seat sensor to the seat heat interface module.
63 - Power Seat With Heated Seats in Group 8W - Repair any short or open circuits as required.
Wiring Diagrams.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (5) Pull the SHIM upward to release the two
mounting fasteners from either the module or the
HEATED SEAT SWITCH mounting bracket. Unplug the wire harness connec-
tor from the module.
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE WARNING: THERE ARE MANY SHARP METAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY EDGES ON THE SEAT CUSHION FRAME AND SEAT
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR ADJUSTER RAILS UNDER THE SEAT. WHEN PER-
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR FORMING THIS SERVICE, A LONG-SLEEVED SHIRT
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- AND GLOVES SHOULD BE WORN IN ORDER TO
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- AVOID UNNECESSARY CUTS AND ABRASIONS TO
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL EXPOSED SKIN.
INJURY.
(6) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Be
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative certain that the SHIM terminals are aligned with the
cable. cavities in the wire harness connector before pushing
(2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide the module firmly into place.
flat-bladed tool, gently pry around the perimeter
edges of the heated switch assembly bezel to release HEATED SEAT RELAY
the assembly from the console. Remove the assembly (1) Move the right power seat adjuster to its full
from the console. up and full rear stop positions.
(3) Pull the switch assembly out from the console (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
far enough to access and unplug the wire harness cable.
connectors. (3) Unhook the seat cushion cover retainer from
(4) Remove the heated seat switch assembly from the seat cushion frame and pull back the seat cush-
the console. ion cover.
(5) Remove the heated seat switch(es) from the (4) Pull back the seat cushion to allow access to
heated seat switch assembly. the Heated Seat Relay.
(6) Reverse the removal procedures to install. (5) Cut the Christmas tree fastener to remove the
Heated Seat Relay fastener from the mounting
SEAT HEAT INTERFACE MODULE bracket. Unplug the wire harness connector from the
(1) Move the right power seat adjuster to its full relay.
up and full rear stop positions. (6) Reverse the removal procedures to install. A
(2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative new Christmas tree fastener must be used to mount
cable. the relay. Be certain that the relay terminals are
(3) Unhook the seat cushion cover retainer from aligned with the cavities in the wire harness connec-
the seat cushion frame and pull back the seat cush- tor before pushing the relay firmly into place.
ion cover.
(4) Pull back the seat cushion to allow access to
the Seat Heat Interface Module (SHIM).
XJ POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 8O - 1
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page

JUNCTION BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 JUNCTION BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and
POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a
DESCRIPTION special illustration or procedure is required.
This group covers the various standard and
optional power distribution components used on this
model. Refer to Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for
POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
complete circuit diagrams of the various power distri-
bution components.
DESCRIPTION
All of the electrical current distributed throughout
The power distribution system for this vehicle is
this vehicle is directed through the standard equip-
designed to provide safe, reliable, and centralized dis-
ment Power Distribution Center (PDC) (Fig. 1). The
tribution of the electrical current required to operate
molded plastic PDC housing is located on the right
all of the many standard and optional factory-in-
side of the engine compartment, just behind the bat-
stalled electrical and electronic powertrain, chassis,
tery. The PDC housing has a molded plastic cover
safety, comfort and convenience systems. At the same
that includes two integral pivot hooks on the inboard
time, these systems were designed to provide conve-
side, and an integral latch on the outboard side. The
nient to access centralized locations for conducting
PDC cover is easily removed for service access and
diagnosis of faulty circuits, and for sourcing the addi-
has a convenient fuse and relay layout map integral
tional current requirements of many aftermarket
to the inside surface of the cover to ensure proper
vehicle accessory and convenience items.
component identification.
These power distribution systems also incorporate
various types of circuit control and protection fea-
tures, including:
• Fuses
• Maxi fuse-type fusible links
• Relays.
The power distribution system for this vehicle con-
sists of the following components:
• Power Distribution Center (PDC)
• Junction Block (JB).
components in the power distribution system. Refer
to the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for
more information on the features, use and operation
of all of the power distribution system components.

constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. Fig. 1 Power Distribution Center
8O - 2 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS XJ
The PDC housing is secured to a stamped sheet
metal bracket in the engine compartment by mount-
ing slots and tabs that are integral to the PDC hous-
ing. The PDC mounting bracket is secured with two
screws to the right front inner fender shield above
the right front wheel house. A separate cover that is
secured by integral tabs and a latch to the front of
the PDC housing is unlatched and removed to access
the battery/generator cable connection stud. The PDC
is integral to the headlamp and dash wire harness,
which exits from the rearward end of the PDC hous-
ing.
The PDC houses up to fourteen blade-type maxi
fuses, which replace all in-line fusible links. The PDC
also houses up to twelve blade-type mini fuses, and
up to eight International Standards Organization
(ISO) relays (four standard-type and four micro-type).
Internal connection of all of the PDC circuits is
accomplished by an intricate combination of hard
wiring and bus bars. Refer to Power Distribution Fig. 2 Junction Block
in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for All of the circuits entering and leaving the JB do
complete circuit diagrams. so through up to ten wire harness connectors, which
The maxi fuses, mini fuses and relays are available are connected to the JB through integral connector
for service replacement. The PDC unit cannot be receptacles molded into the JB housing. The JB
repaired and is only serviced as a unit with the head- houses up to twenty-seven blade-type fuses (three
lamp and dash wire harness. If any of the internal standard-type and twenty-four mini-type), up to
circuits or if the PDC housing are faulty or damaged, three blade-type automatic resetting circuit breakers,
the PDC and the headlamp and dash wire harness and four International Standards Organization (ISO)
unit must be replaced. relays (three standard-type and one micro-type).
Internal connection of all of the JB circuits is accom-
JUNCTION BLOCK plished by an intricate combination of hard wiring
and bus bars. Refer to Junction Block in the Con-
DESCRIPTION tents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete
An electrical Junction Block (JB) is concealed circuit diagrams.
behind the right cowl side inner trim panel in the The fuses, circuit breakers, and relays are avail-
passenger compartment of the vehicle. The molded able for service replacement. The JB unit cannot be
plastic JB housing has integral mounting brackets repaired and is only serviced as a unit. If any inter-
that are secured with three nuts to studs on the nal circuit or if the JB housing is faulty or damaged,
right cowl side inner panel below the instrument the entire JB unit must be replaced.
panel. The right cowl side inner trim panel is secured
to a stud on the junction block with a push nut, and
a snap-fit fuse access panel that can be removed for REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
service of the junction block fuses conceals the push
nut (Fig. 2). A finger recess is molded into the front POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTER
of the fuse access panel for easy removal, and a fuse The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is serviced
puller and spare fuse holders are located on the back as a unit with the headlamp and dash wire harness.
of the fuse access panel. If any internal circuit of the PDC or if the PDC hous-
The JB combines the functions previously provided ing is faulty or damaged, the entire PDC and the
by a separate fuseblock module and relay center, headlamp and dash wire harness unit must be
serves to simplify and centralize numerous electrical replaced.
components, as well as to distribute electrical current
to many of the accessory systems in the vehicle. It REMOVAL
also eliminates the need for numerous splice connec- (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
tions and serves in place of a bulkhead connector cable.
between many of the engine compartment, instru- (2) Disconnect each of the headlamp and dash wire
ment panel, and body wire harnesses. harness connectors. Refer to Connector Locations
in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for
more information on the locations of the affected con-
nectors.
(3) Remove all of the fasteners that secure each of
the headlamp and dash wire harness ground eyelets
to the vehicle body and chassis components. Refer to
Connector Locations in the Contents of Group 8W
- Wiring Diagrams for more information on the
ground eyelet locations.
(4) Disengage each of the retainers that secure the
headlamp and dash wire harness to the vehicle body
and chassis components. Refer to Connector Loca-
tions in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
grams for more information on the retainer locations.
(5) Unlatch and remove the terminal stud cover
from the front end of the PDC (Fig. 3).
Fig. 4 Power Distribution Center Remove/Install
Fig. 3 Power Distribution Center Connections

(6) Remove the nut that secures the eyelets of the
battery wire harness PDC take outs to the stud on
the PDC.
(7) Remove the battery wire harness PDC take out Fig. 5 PDC Mounting Bracket Remove/Install
eyelets from the PDC stud. INSTALLATION
(8) Disengage the latches on the PDC mounting
bracket from the tabs on the PDC housing, and pull NOTE: If the PDC is being replaced with a new unit,
the PDC housing upward to disengage the mounting be certain to transfer each of the fuses and relays
slots from the stanchions of the mounting bracket from the old PDC to the proper cavities of the new
(Fig. 4). PDC. Refer to Power Distribution in the Contents of
(9) Remove the PDC and the headlamp and dash Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for the proper PDC
wire harness from the engine compartment as a unit. cavity assignments.
(10) Remove the two screws that secure the PDC
mounting bracket to the right front inner fender (Fig. (1) Position the PDC mounting bracket onto the
5). right front inner fender.
(11) Remove the PDC mounting bracket from the (2) Install and tighten the two screws that secure
right front inner fender. the PDC mounting bracket to the right front inner
fender. Tighten the screws to 8.1 N·m (72 in. lbs.).
(3) Position the PDC and the headlamp and dash
wire harness unit in the engine compartment.
8O - 4 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS XJ
(4) Engage the mounting slots on the PDC housing
with the stanchions of the PDC mounting bracket
and push the unit downward until the mounting
bracket latches engage the mounting tabs on the
PDC housing.
(5) Install the eyelets of the battery wire harness
PDC take outs onto the PDC stud.
eyelet of the battery wire harness PDC take outs
onto the PDC stud. Tighten the nut to 7.9 N·m (70
in. lbs.).
(7) Engage the tabs on the lower edge of the ter-
minal stud cover in the slots on the front of the PDC
housing, then engage the latch on the top of the
cover with the latch tabs on the PDC housing.
(8) Engage each of the retainers that secure the
headlamp and dash wire harness to the vehicle body
and chassis components. Refer to Connector Loca-
tions in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
grams for more information on the retainer locations.
(9) Install all of the fasteners that secure each of
the headlamp and dash wire harness ground eyelets
to the vehicle body and chassis components. Refer to
Connector Locations in the Contents of Group 8W
- Wiring Diagrams for more information on the
ground eyelet locations.
(10) Reconnect each of the headlamp and dash
wire harness connectors. Refer to Connector Loca-
tions in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia- Fig. 6 Right Cowl Side Inner Trim Remove/Install
grams for more information on the locations of the (5) Remove the screw that secures the right cowl
affected connectors. side inner trim panel and right front door sill trim to
(11) Reconnect the battery negative cable. the door opening sill.
(6) Remove the trim from the right cowl side inner
JUNCTION BLOCK panel.
(7) Remove the screw that secures the lower
instrument panel wire harness connector to the junc-
tion block.
(8) Disconnect all of the wire harness connectors
from the connector receptacles on the junction block.
(9) Remove the three nuts that secure the junction
block to the studs on the right cowl side inner panel
(Fig. 7).
(10) Remove the junction block from the right cowl
INJURY.
side inner panel.
NOTE: If the Junction Block (JB) is being replaced
cable.
with a new unit, be certain to transfer each of the
(2) Remove the fuse access panel by unsnapping it
fuses, circuit breakers and relays from the old JB to
from the right cowl side inner trim panel (Fig. 6).
the proper cavities of the new JB. Refer to Junction
(3) Remove the push nut that secures the right
Block in the Contents of Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
cowl side inner trim panel to the junction block stud.
grams for the proper JB cavity assignments.
opening that secures the trim panel to the right cowl (1) Position the junction block onto the right cowl
side inner panel. side inner panel.
(3) Reconnect all of the wire harness connectors to
the connector receptacles on the junction block.
lower instrument panel wire harness connector to the
junction block. Tighten the screw to 3.5 N·m (31 in.
lbs.).
(5) Position the trim onto the right cowl side inner
panel.
right cowl side inner trim panel and right front door
sill trim to the door opening sill. Tighten the screw to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(7) Install and tighten the screw located above the
fuse access opening that secures the trim panel to
the right cowl side inner panel. Tighten the screw to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
(8) Install the push nut that secures the right cowl
side inner trim panel onto the junction block stud.
Fig. 7 Junction Block Remove/Install onto the right cowl side inner trim panel.
(2) Install and tighten the three nuts that secure (10) Reconnect the battery negative cable.
the junction block to the studs on the right cowl side
inner panel. Tighten the nuts to 2.7 N·m (24 in. lbs.).
XJ POWER LOCK SYSTEMS 8P - 1
POWER LOCK SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER . . . . . . . . 5

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . . 5
POWER LOCK SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE PROCEDURES
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
POWER LOCK MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 BATTERY REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
POWER LOCK SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER . . . . . . . . 3 PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 POWER LOCK MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
POWER LOCK MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER . . . . . . . . 8
POWER LOCK SYSTEM AND REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION POWER LOCK SYSTEM

The power lock system allows all of the doors and
INTRODUCTION the liftgate to be locked or unlocked electrically by
Power locks are optional factory-installed equip- operating the switch on either front door trim panel.
ment on this model. The power window system and This system operates with battery power supplied
the power mirror system are included on vehicles through a fuse in the junction block, independent of
equipped with the power lock option. The Remote the ignition switch.
Keyless Entry (RKE) system is an additional option The power lock system includes a lock inhibit fea-
available on vehicles equipped with the power lock ture, which prevents the doors from being locked by
option. Refer to 8W-61 - Power Door Locks in Group the power lock system if the driver door is open with
8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit descrip- the key in the ignition switch or with the headlamp
tions and diagrams. switch in the On position. However, the lock inhibit
feature will not prevent manual locking of the vehicle
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive using the manual lock buttons or the key cylinders.
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this The power lock system includes the front door
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD power lock switches integral to the driver and pas-
versions of affected vehicle components have been senger door modules, and the power lock motors
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. mounted in each door and the liftgate. The power
While most of the illustrations used in this group lock control circuitry and the power lock and unlock
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and relays are integral to the Passenger Door Module
service procedures outlined can generally be (PDM).
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule Following are general descriptions of the major
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a components in the power lock system. Refer to the
special illustration or procedure is required. owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
information on the features, use and operation of the
power lock system.
8P - 2 POWER LOCK SYSTEMS XJ
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM DOOR MODULE

The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system is a radio A Driver Door Module (DDM) and a Passenger
frequency system that allows the use of a remote bat- Door Module (PDM) are used on all models equipped
tery-powered radio transmitter to control the power with power locks and power windows. Each door
lock system. On vehicles with the RKE option, the module houses both the front door power lock and
power locks can be operated by depressing the Lock power window switches. In addition to the switches
or Unlock buttons of the RKE transmitter. The RKE for its own door, the DDM houses individual switches
system includes an illuminated entry feature, which for each passenger door power window, a power win-
turns on the courtesy lamps for a timed interval dow lockout switch and the power mirror switch. The
(about thirty seconds), when the power locks are PDM contains the control circuitry and the power
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. lock and unlock relays for the entire power lock sys-
The RKE system for this vehicle also features a tem.
customer programmable horn chirp feature. This fea- In its role as the power lock control module, the
ture allows the customer the option of enabling or PDM receives inputs from the battery, the ignition
disabling the horn chirp request that the RKE switch, the DDM, the driver door ajar switch, the
receiver issues as an audible indication that a valid key-in ignition switch, and the headlamp switch. It
Lock signal has been received from the RKE trans- also receives a hard-wired input from the remote
mitter. See Remote Keyless Entry Receiver Program- Keyless Entry (RKE) receiver, if the vehicle is so
ming in this group for more information on this equipped. In response to these inputs, the PDM
feature. sends the proper outputs to control the power lock
The RKE system can retain the vehicle access motors through its integral power lock and unlock
codes of up to four transmitters. The transmitter relays.
codes are retained in memory, even if the battery is The DDM and the PDM are mounted to their
disconnected. If a transmitter is faulty or lost, new respective front door trim panels. The DDM and
transmitter vehicle access codes can be programmed PDM are serviced individually and cannot be
into the system using a DRB scan tool and the repaired. If the DDM or PDM, or any of the switches
proper Diagnostic Procedures manual. and circuitry that they contain are faulty or dam-
The RKE system consists of the remote key fob aged, the complete DDM or PDM unit must be
transmitter and a radio receiver with program logic. replaced.
The RKE receiver is installed in an RKE housing on
the headliner of the vehicle, or in the housing of the POWER LOCK MOTOR
optional overhead console, depending upon how the In the power lock and Remote Keyless Entry
vehicle is equipped. (RKE) systems, the locks are actuated by a reversible
Following are general descriptions of the major electric motor mounted within each door and the lift-
components in the RKE system. Refer to the owner’s gate. The power lock motor direction is controlled by
manual in the vehicle glove box for more information the battery and ground feeds from the power lock
on the features, use and operation of the RKE sys- and unlock relays integral to the Passenger Door
tem. Module (PDM).
The power lock motors cannot be repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, the entire motor must be
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION replaced.
POWER LOCK SWITCH REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER

The power locks are controlled by a two-way switch The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system transmit-
that is integral to the Driver Door Module (DDM) ter is equipped with two buttons, labeled Lock and
and the Passenger Door Module (PDM) mounted in Unlock. It is also equipped with a key ring and is
the trim panel of its respective front door. Each designed to serve as a key fob. The operating range
switch is illuminated by a light-emitting diode when of the transmitter radio signal is up to 7 meters (23
the ignition switch is turned to the On position. The feet) from the RKE receiver.
power lock switches provide a hard-wired lock or Each transmitter has a different vehicle access
unlock signal to the power lock system control cir- code, which must be programmed into the memory of
cuitry, which is located in the PDM. the RKE receiver in the vehicle in order to operate
The power lock switches and their lamps cannot be the RKE system. See Remote Keyless Entry Trans-
repaired. If the switches are damaged or faulty, the mitter Programming in this group for more informa-
entire PDM or DDM unit must be replaced. tion.
The transmitter operates on two Panasonic Keyless Entry Receiver diagnosis in this group. If the
CR2016 (or equivalent) batteries. Typical battery life power lock system still fails to operate, see the Door
is from one to two years. The transmitter cannot be Module diagnosis in this group.
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be • If the power lock system functions with both
replaced. power lock switches, but not with the RKE transmit-
ter, see the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter diag-
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER nosis in this group.
On models with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) • If one power lock motor fails to operate with
option, an RKE receiver is mounted in an RKE hous- both of the power lock switches and/or the RKE
ing, or in the overhead console housing on the vehicle transmitter, see the Power Lock Motor diagnosis in
headliner. The RKE receiver is a radio frequency unit this group.
that also contains the RKE system program logic. • If the RKE and power lock systems are function-
The RKE receiver also performs as a smart relay for ing, but the illuminated entry system fails to operate,
the illuminated entry feature. see the Remote Keyless Entry Receiver diagnosis in
The RKE receiver has a memory function to retain this group.
the vehicle access codes of at least one, but no more
than four RKE transmitters. The receiver is designed DOOR MODULE
to retain the transmitter codes in memory, even if If the power lock system is inoperative with either
the battery is disconnected. front door power lock switch, test the Passenger Door
The RKE receiver receives inputs from the battery, Module (PDM). If the power lock system is inopera-
the driver door ajar switch, and the Chrysler Colli- tive with only the driver side front door power lock
sion Detection (CCD) data bus. It also receives the switch, test the Driver Door Module (DDM). For cir-
radio signal input from the RKE transmitter. In cuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to 8W-61 -
response to those inputs, it is programmed to control Power Door Locks in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
outputs to the power lock motors, the courtesy lamp
circuits, and the vehicle horn. DRIVER DOOR MODULE
The RKE system for this vehicle also features a The only function of the Driver Door Module
customer programmable horn chirp feature. This fea- (DDM) in the power lock system is to provide a Lock
ture allows the customer the option of enabling or or Unlock signal to the power lock system control cir-
disabling the horn chirp request that the RKE cuitry contained within the Passenger Door Module
receiver issues as an audible indication that a valid (PDM). The DDM signals the PDM by providing a
Lock signal has been received from the RKE trans- hard-wired ground path through the DDM ground
mitter. See Remote Keyless Entry Receiver Program- circuit and the driver side power lock switch contacts
ming in this group for more information on this to the lock request or unlock request terminals of the
feature. PDM. The DDM power lock switch function can be
The RKE receiver cannot be repaired and, if faulty tested as follows:
or damaged, it must be replaced. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable. Remove the driver side front door trim panel
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING and unplug the 12-way DDM wire harness connector
(C-2) from the DDM. Check for continuity between
POWER LOCK SYSTEM AND REMOTE the ground circuit cavity of the 12-way DDM wire
harness connector and a good ground. There should
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM be continuity. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK, repair
On models without the Remote Keyless Entry
the open circuit to ground as required.
(RKE) option, proceed directly to the Door Module
(2) If the problem being diagnosed is inoperative
diagnosis. As a preliminary diagnosis for models with
power lock switch illumination, proceed as follows. If
the RKE system, note the power lock system and
the problem is not power lock switch illumination, go
illuminated entry system operation while you actuate
to Step 4. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn
both the Lock and Unlock functions with the power
the ignition switch to the Accessory or On positions.
lock switches and the RKE transmitter. Then, pro-
Check for battery voltage at both sides of the power
ceed as follows:
window circuit breaker in the junction block. If OK,
• If the entire power lock system fails to function
go to Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty circuit
with either the power lock switches or the RKE
breaker.
transmitter, unplug the wire harness connector from
(3) With the ignition switch still in the On or
the RKE receiver and test the power lock system
Accessory position, check for battery voltage at the
operation again using the power lock switches. If the
fused ignition switch output circuit cavity of the
power lock system now operates, see the Remote
12-way DDM wire harness connector. If OK, replace (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
the faulty DDM. If not OK, repair the open circuit to cable. Remove the passenger side front door trim
the junction block as required. panel and unplug the 8-way PDM wire harness con-
(4) Test the power lock switch continuity through nector (C-1) from the PDM. Check for continuity
the DDM 12-way wire harness connector receptacle. between the ground circuit cavity of the 8-way PDM
See the DDM Power Lock Switch Continuity chart wire harness connector and a good ground. There
(Fig. 1) to determine if the continuity is correct in should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
both the Lock and Unlock switch positions. If OK, repair the open circuit to ground as required.
repair the lock request circuit and/or the unlock (3) If the problem being diagnosed is inoperative
request circuit between the DDM and the PDM as power lock switch illumination, proceed as follows. If
required. If not OK, replace the faulty DDM. the problem is not power lock switch illumination, go
to Step 5. Connect the battery negative cable. Turn
the ignition switch to the Accessory or On positions.
Check for battery voltage at both sides of the power
window circuit breaker in the junction block. If OK,
go to Step 4. If not OK, replace the faulty circuit
breaker.
(4) With the ignition switch still in the Accessory
or On positions, check for battery voltage at the
fused ignition switch output circuit cavity of the
8-way PDM wire harness connector. If OK, replace
the faulty PDM. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
the junction block as required.
(5) If the problem being diagnosed is an inopera-
tive door lock inhibit feature or a power lock system
that responds to an Unlock command, but not a Lock
command, proceed as follows. Otherwise, go to Step
Fig. 1 DDM Power Lock Switch Continuity 7. With the driver side front door closed, check for
continuity between the door ajar/key-in circuit cavity
PASSENGER DOOR MODULE of the 8-way PDM wire harness connector and a good
The Passenger Door Module (PDM) contains the ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go to
passenger side front door power lock switch and the Step 6. If not OK, repair the shorted door ajar and/or
power lock system control circuitry. In its role as a key-in ignition circuits as required. Refer to Group
power lock switch, it provides the power lock system 8U - Chime/Buzzer Warning Systems for more infor-
control circuitry with a ground path through the mation.
PDM ground circuit and the driver side power lock (6) Open the driver side front door with the key in
switch contacts to indicate a lock request or unlock the ignition switch or with the headlamp switch in
request. the On position. Check for continuity between the
In its role as the power lock control module, the door ajar/key-in circuit cavity of the 8-way PDM wire
PDM receives inputs from the battery, the ignition harness connector and a good ground. There should
switch, the DDM, the driver door ajar switch, the be continuity. If OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, repair
key-in ignition switch, and the headlamp switch. It the open door ajar and/or key-in ignition circuits as
also receives a hard-wired input from the RKE required. Refer to Group 8U - Chime/Buzzer Warning
receiver, if the vehicle is so equipped. In response to Systems for more information.
these inputs, the PDM sends the proper outputs to (7) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
control the power lock motors through its integral battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the
power lock and unlock relays. The PDM power lock 8-way PDM wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step
system functions can be tested as outlined below. If 8. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the fuse in the
the power lock system operates, but the RKE system junction block as required.
lock and/or unlock functions are inoperative, see the (8) Test the PDM power lock switch continuity
diagnosis for the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter through the two PDM wire harness connector recep-
in this group. tacles. See the PDM Power Lock Switch Continuity
(1) Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go chart (Fig. 2) to determine if the continuity is correct
to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or in both the Lock and Unlock switch positions. If OK,
component as required and replace the faulty fuse. see the diagnosis for Power Lock Motors in this
group. If not OK, replace the faulty PDM.
motor to operate. Unplug each power lock motor wire
harness connector, one at a time, and recheck both
the lock and unlock functions by operating the power
lock switch. If all of the power lock motors are still
inoperative after the above test, check for a short or
open circuit between the power lock motors and the
PDM. If unplugging one power lock motor causes the
other motors to become functional, go to Step 3 to
test the unplugged motor.
(3) Once it is determined which power lock motor
is inoperative, that motor can be tested as follows.
Unplug the wire harness connector at the inoperative
power lock motor. Apply 12 volts to the motor termi-
nals to check its operation in one direction. Reverse
the polarity to check the operation in the other direc-
tion. If OK, repair the short or open circuits between
the power lock motor and the PDM as required. If
not OK, replace the faulty power lock motor.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER

(1) Replace the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter batteries. See Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter Battery Replacement in this group for
the procedures. Test each of the transmitter func-
tions. If OK, discard the faulty batteries. If not OK,
go to Step 2.
(2) Perform the Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Programming procedure with the suspect transmitter
and another known good transmitter. Use a DRB
scan tool, as described in the proper Diagnostic Pro-
cedures manual.
(3) Test the RKE system operation with both
transmitters. If both transmitters fail to operate the
power lock system, see the diagnosis for the Remote
Keyless Entry Receiver in this group. If the known
good transmitter operates the power locks and the
suspect transmitter does not, replace the faulty
Fig. 2 PDM Power Lock Switch Continuity transmitter.
POWER LOCK MOTOR NOTE: Be certain to perform the Remote Keyless
Before you proceed with this diagnosis, confirm Entry Transmitter Programming procedure again
proper power door lock switch operation. See Door following this test. This procedure will erase the
Module in this group for the diagnostic procedures. access code of the test transmitter from the RKE
Remember, the Passenger Door Module (PDM) cir- receiver.
cuitry controls the output to each of the power lock
motors. For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer
to 8W-61 - Power Door Locks in Group 8W - Wiring REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Diagrams. If the problem being diagnosed is an inoperative
(1) Check each power lock motor for correct opera- Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) horn chirp feature, be
tion while moving the power lock switch to both the certain that the horn chirp feature has not been dis-
Lock and Unlock positions. If all of the power lock abled. See Remote Keyless Entry Receiver Program-
motors are inoperative, go to Step 2. If one power ming in this group for the procedures. Also be certain
lock motor is inoperative, go to Step 3. that the vehicle horn system is operational. Refer to
(2) If all of the power lock motors are inoperative, Group 8G - Horn Systems for more information.
the problem may be caused by one shorted motor. If the problem being diagnosed is an inoperative
Unplugging a shorted power lock motor from the RKE illuminated entry system, be certain that the
power lock circuit will allow the good power lock
interior courtesy lamp system is operational. Refer to tor and a good ground with the driver door closed.
Group 8L - Lamps for more information. There should be no continuity until the driver door is
Before you proceed with diagnosis of the RKE opened. If OK, replace the faulty RKE receiver. If not
receiver, see the diagnosis for Remote Keyless Entry OK, repair the circuit or replace the faulty driver
Transmitter in this group. For circuit descriptions door ajar switch as required.
and diagrams, refer to 8W-61 - Power Door Locks in (10) Unplug the horn relay from the junction
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. block. Check for continuity between the horn relay
(1) Check the fuses in the Power Distribution Cen- output circuit cavity of the RKE receiver wire har-
ter (PDC) and the junction block. If OK, go to Step 2. ness connector and a good ground. There should be
If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component as no continuity. If OK, go to Step 11. If not OK, repair
required and replace the faulty fuse. the short circuit to the horn relay as required.
(2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative (11) Check for continuity between the horn relay
cable. Remove the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) output circuit cavity of the RKE receiver wire har-
receiver from the headliner. Unplug the wire harness ness connector and the junction block cavity for the
connector from the RKE receiver. horn relay coil ground terminal (85). There should be
(3) Check the wire harness connector and the continuity. If OK, replace the faulty RKE receiver. If
receptacle in the RKE receiver for loose, corroded, or not OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block
damaged terminals and pins. If OK, go to Step 4. If as required.
not OK, repair as required.
(4) Check for continuity between each of the two
ground circuit cavities of the RKE receiver wire har- SERVICE PROCEDURES
ness connector and a good ground. In each case,
there should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 5. If not REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
OK, repair the circuit to ground as required. BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(5) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter case
battery voltage at each of the two fused B(+) circuit snaps open and shut for battery access. To replace
cavities of the RKE receiver wire harness connector. the RKE transmitter batteries:
If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the open circuit (1) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide
to the PDC or the junction block as required. flat-bladed tool, gently pry at the center seam of the
(6) If the problem being diagnosed involves only transmitter case halves near the key ring until the
the RKE horn chirp feature, go to Step 10. If the two halves unsnap.
problem being diagnosed involves only the RKE illu- (2) Lift the back half of the transmitter case off of
minated entry feature, go to Step 9. If the problem the transmitter.
being diagnosed involves only the RKE power lock (3) Remove the two batteries from the transmitter.
feature, go to Step 7. (4) Replace the two batteries with new Panasonic
(7) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative CR2016, or their equivalent. Be certain that the bat-
cable. Unplug the 8-way Passenger Door Module teries are installed with their polarity correctly ori-
(PDM) wire harness connector. Check for continuity ented.
between the lock request circuit cavity of the RKE (5) Align the two transmitter case halves with
receiver wire harness connector and a good ground. each other, and squeeze them firmly together until
Repeat the test between the unlock request circuit they snap back into place.
cavity of the RKE receiver wire harness connector
and a good ground. In each case, there should be no REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
continuity. If OK, go to Step 8. If not OK, repair the PROGRAMMING
shorted circuit as required. To program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
(8) Check for continuity between the lock request transmitter access codes into the RKE receiver
circuit cavities of the RKE receiver wire harness con- requires the use of a DRB scan tool. Refer to the
nector and the 8-way PDM wire harness connector. proper Diagnostic Procedures manual for more infor-
Repeat the test between the unlock request circuit mation.
cavities of the RKE receiver wire harness connector
and the 8-way PDM wire harness connector. In each
case, there should be continuity. If OK, replace the
faulty RKE receiver. If not OK, repair the open cir- PROGRAMMING
cuit as required. The optional Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
(9) Check for continuity between the door ajar cir- for this vehicle has a customer programmable horn
cuit cavity of the RKE receiver wire harness connec- chirp feature. The horn chirp is requested by the
RKE receiver through a hard-wired circuit to the
horn relay, whenever a valid Lock message is (4) Lift the front door trim panel upwards and
received from a programmed RKE radio transmitter. away from the inner door panel far enough to disen-
The purpose of the horn chirp is to provide the gage the top of the panel from the inner belt weath-
vehicle operator with an audible verification that the erstrip.
Lock request has been received by the RKE receiver. (5) Pull the front door trim panel away from the
However, for any number of reasons, some customers inner door panel far enough to access the inside door
may prefer that this feature be disabled. This RKE latch release and lock linkage rods near the back of
system allows them that option. the inside door remote controls.
To program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) (6) Unsnap the plastic retainer clips from the
receiver so that the horn chirp feature is disabled, inside door remote control ends of the latch release
proceed as follows: and lock linkage rods, and remove the rod ends from
(1) While within the reception range of the RKE the inside door remote controls.
receiver, press and hold the Lock button of a pro- (7) Unplug the wire harness connectors from the
grammed RKE transmitter depressed for five to ten door module.
seconds. (8) Remove the trim panel from the front door.
(2) While holding the RKE transmitter Lock but- (9) Remove the three screws that secure the door
ton depressed, press and release the RKE transmit- module to the front door trim panel (Fig. 4).
ter Unlock button.
(3) The RKE horn chirp feature is now disabled.
Repeating the preceding steps will again enable
the RKE horn chirp feature.

DOOR MODULE
cable.
(2) Remove the screws that secure the front door
trim panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 3).
Fig. 4 Door Module Remove/Install
(10) Remove the door module from the front door
trim panel.
POWER LOCK MOTOR

FRONT DOOR
The front door power lock motor is integral to the
front door latch unit. If the front door power lock
motor is faulty or damaged, the entire latch unit
must be replaced. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the
front door latch service procedures.
Fig. 3 Front Door Trim Panel Remove/Install

REAR DOOR
The rear door power lock motor is integral to the
(3) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide rear door latch unit. If the rear door power lock
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the front door trim panel motor is faulty or damaged, the entire latch unit
away from the door around the perimeter to release must be replaced. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the
the trim panel retainers. rear door latch service procedures.
NOTE: To aid in the removal of the trim panel, start LIFTGATE
at the bottom of the panel. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
cable.
(2) Open the liftgate.
(3) Remove the liftgate trim panel from the lift- MINI-DOME MOUNTED TYPE
gate. Refer to Group 23 - Body for the procedures. (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
(4) Reach through the liftgate inner panel access cable.
hole and disconnect the link from the clip on the (2) Remove the two screws that secure the Remote
power lock motor (Fig. 5). Keyless Entry (RKE) mini-dome housing to the roof
panel reinforcement (Fig. 6).
Fig. 5 Liftgate Power Lock Motor Remove/Install

(5) Remove the two screws that secure the power Fig. 6 Mini-Dome Housing Remove/Install
lock motor to the liftgate inner panel. (3) Lower the front of the mini-dome housing and
(6) Pull the power lock motor out through the lift- slide the unit forward to disengage the rear mount-
gate inner panel access hole far enough to access the ing tab from the headliner.
wire harness connector. (4) Lower the mini-dome housing far enough to
(7) Unplug the wire harness connector from the access the RKE receiver wire harness connector.
power lock motor. (5) Unplug the wire harness connector from the
(8) Remove the power lock motor from the liftgate. RKE receiver.
(9) Reverse the removal procedures to install. (6) Remove the RKE mini-dome unit from the
Tighten the power lock motor mounting screws to 3 headliner.
N·m (28 in. lbs.). (7) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE MOUNTED TYPE
CAUTION: A discharge of static electricity may (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
damage this unit. At no time should any source of cable.
static electricity be permitted near this unit. Techni- (2) Remove the overhead console from the head-
cians handling or servicing the unit should wear liner. Refer to Overhead Console in Group 8V - Over-
cotton clothing, not synthetic fabric clothing; and, head Console Systems for the procedures.
should ground themselves before and during all (3) Remove the six screws that secure the rear
handling and service procedures. Electrically con- overhead console housing to the overhead console
ductive wrist or heel straps are recommended, or bezel (Fig. 7).
static dissipating shoes are also acceptable. Work (4) Gently flex the sides of the overhead console
and storage areas should be free of static genera- bezel far enough to clear the tabs on the rear console
tive materials such as: dry air, glass, nylon, wool, housing and remove the housing from the bezel.
fur, silk, rayon, acrylic, polystyrene foam, polyester, (5) Remove the two screws that secure the RKE
saran, polyethylene, polypropylene, PVC, and receiver circuit board to the rear overhead console
teflon. housing.
(6) Remove the RKE circuit board from the rear
overhead console housing.
Fig. 7 RKE Receiver Remove/Install

XJ VEHICLE THEFT/SECURITY SYSTEMS 8Q - 1
VEHICLE THEFT/SECURITY SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 3
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE PROCEDURES
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE . . . . . . . . 1 TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . 4
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INDICATOR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE . . . . . . . . 4
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER TRANSPONDER . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a DRB
scan tool as described in the proper Diagnostic Pro-
INTRODUCTION cedures manual.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) is
available factory-installed optional equipment for this DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
model. Following are some general descriptions of the
features and components of the SKIS. Refer to the
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE
vehicle owner’s manual for more information on the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) con-
use and operation of the SKIS. Refer to 8W-30 - Fuel/
tains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a cen-
Ignition System in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for
tral processing unit, which includes the Sentry Key
complete circuit descriptions and diagrams.
Immobilizer System (SKIS) program logic. The SKIS
programming enables the SKIM to program and
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM retain in memory the codes of at least two, but no
more than eight electronically coded Sentry Key
designed to provide passive protection against unau-
transponders. The SKIS programming also enables
thorized vehicle use by preventing the engine from
the SKIM to communicate over the Chrysler Collision
operating while the system is armed. The primary
Detection (CCD) data bus network with the Power-
components of this system are the Sentry Key Immo-
train Control Module (PCM), the instrument cluster
bilizer Module (SKIM), the Sentry Key transponder,
and/or the DRB scan tool.
the SKIS indicator lamp, and the Powertrain Control
The SKIM transmits and receives RF signals
Module (PCM).
through a tuned antenna enclosed within a molded
The SKIM is installed on the steering column near
plastic ring formation that is integral to the SKIM
the ignition lock cylinder. The transponder is located
housing. When the SKIM is properly installed on the
under the molded rubber cap on the head of the igni-
steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around
tion key. The SKIS indicator lamp is located in the
the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder hous-
instrument cluster.
ing. This antenna ring must be located within eight
The SKIS includes two valid Sentry Key transpon-
millimeters (0.31 inches) of the Sentry Key in order
ders from the factory. If the customer wishes, addi-
to ensure proper RF communication between the
tional non-coded blank Sentry Keys are available.
SKIM and the Sentry Key transponder.
These blank keys can be cut to match a valid ignition
For added system security, each SKIM is pro-
key, but the engine will not start unless the key tran-
grammed with a unique “Secret Key” code and a
sponder is also programmed to the vehicle. The SKIS
security code. The SKIM keeps the “Secret Key” code
will recognize no more than eight valid Sentry Key
in memory and sends the code over the CCD data
transponders at any one time.
bus to the PCM, which also keeps this code in its
The SKIS performs a self-test each time the igni-
memory. The SKIM also sends the “Secret Key” code
tion switch is turned to the On position, and will
to each of the programmed Sentry Key transponders.
store Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) if a system
The security code is used by the assembly plant to
malfunction is detected. The SKIS can be diagnosed,
access the SKIS for initialization, or by the dealer
8Q - 2 VEHICLE THEFT/SECURITY SYSTEMS XJ
technician to access the system for service. The Procedures manual are required. The SKIM cannot
SKIM also stores in its memory the Vehicle Identifi- be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the unit must
cation Number (VIN), which it learns through a CCD be replaced.
data bus message from the PCM during initializa-
tion. SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER TRANSPONDER
The SKIM and the PCM both use software that The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) uses a
includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which transponder that is integral to each of the two igni-
helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized SKIS tion keys that are supplied with the vehicle when it
disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures secu- is shipped from the factory. The transponder chip is
rity by preventing an override of the SKIS through insulated within a nylon mount inserted in the head
the unauthorized substitution of the SKIM or the of the key, and invisible beneath a molded rubber cap
PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means (Fig. 1).
that replacement of either the SKIM or the PCM
units will require a system initialization procedure to
restore system operation.
When the ignition switch is turned to the On or
Start positions, the SKIM transmits an RF signal to
excite the Sentry Key transponder. The SKIM then
listens for a return RF signal from the transponder
of the Sentry Key that is inserted in the ignition lock
cylinder. If the SKIM receives an RF signal with
valid “Secret Key” and transponder identification
codes, the SKIM sends a “valid key” message to the
PCM over the CCD data bus. If the SKIM receives
an invalid RF signal or no response, it sends “invalid
key” messages to the PCM. The PCM will enable or
disable engine operation based upon the status of the
SKIM messages.
The SKIM also sends messages to the instrument
cluster over the CCD data bus network to control the
SKIS indicator lamp. The SKIM sends messages to
the instrument cluster to turn the lamp on for about
Fig. 1 Sentry Key Immobilizer Transponder
three seconds when the ignition switch is turned to
the On position as a bulb test. After completion of Each Sentry Key transponder has a unique tran-
the bulb test, the SKIM sends bus messages to keep sponder identification code programmed into it by the
the lamp off for a duration of about one second. Then manufacturer. The Sentry Key Immobilizer Module
the SKIM sends messages to turn the lamp on or off (SKIM) has a unique “Secret Key” code programmed
based upon the results of the SKIS self-tests. If the into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key
SKIS indicator lamp comes on and stays on after the transponder is programmed into the memory of the
bulb test, it indicates that the SKIM has detected a SKIM, the SKIM learns the transponder identifica-
system malfunction and/or that the SKIS has become tion code from the transponder, and the transponder
inoperative. learns the “Secret Key” code from the SKIM. Each of
If the SKIM detects an invalid key when the igni- these codes is stored within the transponder and in
tion switch is turned to the On position, it sends the nonvolatile memory of the SKIM. Therefore,
messages to the instrument cluster to flash the SKIS blank keys for the SKIS must be programmed by and
indicator lamp. The SKIM can also send messages to into the SKIM, in addition to being cut to match the
the instrument cluster to flash the lamp and to gen- mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder. See
erate a single audible chime tone. These functions Sentry Key Immobilizer System Transponder Pro-
serve as an indication to the customer that the SKIS gramming in this group for more information.
has been placed in its “Customer Learn” program- The Sentry Key transponder is within the range of
ming mode. See Sentry Key Immobilizer System the SKIM transceiver antenna ring when it is
Transponder Programming in this group for more inserted in the ignition lock cylinder. When the igni-
information on the “Customer Learn” programming tion switch is turned to the Start or On positions, the
mode. SKIM transceiver issues a Radio Frequency (RF) sig-
For diagnosis or initialization of the SKIM and the nal that excites the transponder chip. The transpon-
PCM, a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic der chip responds by issuing an RF signal containing
its transponder identification code and the “Secret
Key” code. The SKIM transceiver compares the tran- DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
sponder codes with the codes stored in its memory to
determine whether a valid key is in the ignition lock SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
cylinder.
The Sentry Key transponder cannot be repaired WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
INDICATOR LAMP INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) indica- SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
tor lamp gives an indication when the SKIS is faulty CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
or when the vehicle has been immobilized due to the BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
use of an invalid ignition key. The lamp is controlled INJURY.
by the instrument cluster circuitry based upon mes-
sages received from the Sentry Key Immobilizer
NOTE: The following tests may not prove conclu-
Module (SKIM) on the Chrysler Collision Detection
sive in the diagnosis of this system. The most reli-
(CCD) data bus.
able, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the
The SKIM sends messages to the instrument clus-
Sentry Key Immobilizer System involves the use of
ter to turn the lamp on for about three seconds when
a DRB scan tool. Refer to the proper Diagnostic
the ignition switch is turned to the On position as a
Procedures manual for the procedures.
bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKIM
sends bus messages to keep the lamp off for a dura- The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) and
tion of about one second. Then the SKIM sends mes- the Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus net-
sages to the instrument cluster circuitry to turn the work should be diagnosed using a DRB scan tool.
lamp on or off based upon the results of the SKIS The DRB will allow confirmation that the CCD data
self-tests. If the SKIS indicator lamp comes on and bus is functional, that the Sentry Key Immobilizer
stays on after the bulb test, it indicates that the Module (SKIM) is placing the proper messages on the
SKIM has detected a system malfunction and/or that CCD data bus, and that the Powertrain Control Mod-
the SKIS has become inoperative. ule (PCM) and the instrument cluster are receiving
If the SKIM detects an invalid key when the igni- the CCD data bus messages. Refer to the proper
tion switch is turned to the On position, it sends Diagnostic Procedures manual for the procedures.
messages to the instrument cluster to flash the SKIS Refer to 8W-39 - Vehicle Theft Security System in
indicator lamp. The SKIM can also send messages to Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit
the instrument cluster to flash the lamp and to gen- descriptions and diagrams.
erate a single audible chime tone. These functions (1) Check the fuses in the fuseblock module. If OK,
serve as an indication to the customer that the SKIS go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or
has been placed in its “Customer Learn” program- component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
ming mode. See Sentry Key Immobilizer System (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
Transponder Programming in this group for more cable. Unplug the wire harness connector at the
information on the “Customer Learn” programming SKIM. Check for continuity between the ground cir-
mode. cuit cavity of the SKIM wire harness connector and a
The SKIS indicator lamp uses a replaceable incan- good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to
descent bulb and bulb holder on the instrument clus- Step 3. If not OK, repair the open circuit to ground
ter electronic circuit board. Refer to Group 8E - as required.
Instrument Panel Systems for diagnosis and service (3) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
of a faulty SKIS indicator lamp. If the SKIS indicator battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the
lamp comes on and stays on after the bulb test func- SKIM wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If
tion, diagnosis of the SKIS should be performed with not OK, repair the open circuit to the fuse in the
a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Proce- fuseblock module as required.
dures manual.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. SKIS indicator lamp will stop flashing and stay on
Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch solid for about three seconds to indicate that the
output (run/start) circuit cavity of the SKIM wire blank Sentry Key transponder has been successfully
harness connector. If OK, use a DRB scan tool and programmed. The SKIS will immediately return to
the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to complete normal system operation following exit from the
the diagnosis of the SKIS. If not OK, repair the open “Customer Learn” programming mode.
circuit to the fuse in the fuseblock module as (7) Go back to Step 2 and repeat this process for
required. each additional Sentry Key transponder blank to be
programmed.
If any of the above steps is not completed in the
SERVICE PROCEDURES proper sequence, or within the allotted time, the
SKIS will automatically exit the “Customer Learn”
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM programming mode. The SKIS will also automatically
TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING exit the “Customer Learn” programming mode if it
Two programmed Sentry Key transponders are sees a non-blank Sentry Key transponder when it
included with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System should see a blank, if it has already programmed
(SKIS) when it is shipped from the factory. The Sen- eight valid Sentry Keys, or if the ignition switch is
try Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) can be pro- turned to the Off position for more than about fifty
grammed to recognize up to six additional seconds.
transponders, for a total of eight Sentry Keys. The
following “Customer Learn” programming procedure
for the programming of additional transponders REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
requires access to at least two of the valid Sentry
Keys. If two valid Sentry Keys are not available, Sen- SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE
try Key programming will require the use of a DRB
scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures man-
ual.
CUSTOMER LEARN STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
(1) Obtain the additional Sentry Key transponder INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
blank(s) that are to be programmed for the vehicle. SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
Cut the additional Sentry Key transponder blanks to CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
match the ignition lock cylinder mechanical key BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
codes. INJURY.
(2) Insert one of the two valid Sentry Key tran-
sponders into the ignition switch and turn the igni-
cable.
tion switch to the On position.
(3) After the ignition switch has been in the On
position for about three seconds, but no more than
fifteen seconds later, cycle the ignition switch back to
the Off position. Replace the first valid Sentry Key in
the ignition lock cylinder with the second valid Sen-
try Key and turn the ignition switch back to the On
position.
shroud and depress the ignition lock cylinder retain-
(4) About ten seconds after the completion of Step
3, the SKIS indicator lamp will start to flash and a
single audible chime tone will sound to indicate that
pull the ignition lock cylinder and key out of the igni-
the system has entered the “Customer Learn” pro-
tion lock housing.
gramming mode.
(5) Within about fifty seconds of entering the “Cus-
steering column shroud to the upper shroud.
tomer Learn” programming mode, turn the ignition
switch to the Off position, replace the valid Sentry
Key with a blank Sentry Key transponder, and turn
(8) If the vehicle is so equipped, loosen the two
the ignition switch back to the On position.
(6) About ten seconds after the completion of Step
5, a single audible chime tone will sound and the
(10) Disengage the steering column wire harness
retainer from the tab on the top of the Sentry Key
Immobilizer Module (SKIM) mounting bracket (Fig.
3).
SKIM receptacle.
(12) The SKIM mounting bracket features a clip
formation that secures the SKIM to the inboard
lower flange of the steering column jacket. Pull
downward on the connector end of the SKIM mount-
ing bracket to release this clip from the steering col-
umn jacket.
(13) Rotate the SKIM and its mounting bracket
downwards and then to the side away from the steer-
ing column to slide the SKIM antenna ring from
around the ignition switch lock cylinder housing.
(14) Remove the SKIM from the vehicle.
Tighten the non-tilt steering column mounting nuts
to 22 N·m (200 in. lbs.) and the steering column
(16) If the SKIM is replaced with a new unit, a
Fig. 2 Steering Column Shrouds Remove/Install DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures
support bracket studs. Lower the column far enough manual MUST be used to initialize the new SKIM
to remove the upper steering column shroud. and to program at least two Sentry Key
(9) Remove both the upper and lower shrouds from transponders.
Fig. 3 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module Remove/Install

VEHICLE THEFT/SECURITY SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 3
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE PROCEDURES
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE . . . . . . . . 1 TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . 3
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INDICATOR LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER MODULE . . . . . . . . 4
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER TRANSPONDER . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION scan tool as described in the proper Diagnostic Pro-

cedures manual.
INTRODUCTION
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) is DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
available factory-installed optional equipment for this
model. Following are some general descriptions of the
features and components of the SKIS. Refer to the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) con-
vehicle owner’s manual for more information on the
tains a Radio Frequency (RF) transceiver and a cen-
use and operation of the SKIS. Refer to 8W-30 - Fuel/
tral processing unit, which includes the Sentry Key
Ignition System in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for
Immobilizer System (SKIS) program logic. The SKIS
programming enables the SKIM to program and
retain in memory the codes of at least two, but no
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM more than eight electronically coded Sentry Key
transponders. The SKIS programming also enables
designed to provide passive protection against unau-
the SKIM to communicate over the Chrysler Collision
thorized vehicle use by preventing the engine from
Detection (CCD) data bus network with the Power-
operating. The primary components of this system
train Control Module (PCM), the instrument cluster
are the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM), the
and/or the DRB scan tool.
Sentry Key transponder, the SKIS indicator lamp,
The SKIM transmits and receives RF signals
and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
through a tuned antenna enclosed within a molded
The SKIM is installed on the steering column near
plastic ring formation that is integral to the SKIM
the ignition lock cylinder. The transponder is located
housing. When the SKIM is properly installed on the
under the molded rubber cap on the head of the igni-
steering column, the antenna ring is oriented around
tion key. The SKIS indicator lamp is located in the
the circumference of the ignition lock cylinder hous-
instrument cluster.
ing. This antenna ring must be located within eight
The SKIS includes two valid Sentry Key transpon-
millimeters (0.31 inches) of the Sentry Key in order
ders from the factory. If the customer wishes, addi-
to ensure proper RF communication between the
tional non-coded blank Sentry Keys are available.
SKIM and the Sentry Key transponder.
These blank keys can be cut to match a valid ignition
For added system security, each SKIM is pro-
key, but the engine will not start unless the key tran-
grammed with a unique “Secret Key” code and a
sponder is also programmed to the vehicle. The SKIS
security code. The SKIM keeps the “Secret Key” code
will recognize no more than eight valid Sentry Key
in memory and sends the code over the CCD data
transponders at any one time.
bus to the PCM, which also keeps this code in its
The SKIS performs a self-test each time the igni-
memory. The SKIM also sends the “Secret Key” code
tion switch is turned to the On position, and will
to each of the programmed Sentry Key transponders.
store Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) if a system
The security code is used by the assembly plant to
malfunction is detected. The SKIS can be diagnosed,
access the SKIS for initialization, or by the dealer
and any stored DTC can be retrieved using a DRB
technician to access the system for service. The
SKIM also stores in its memory the Vehicle Identifi- insulated within a nylon mount inserted in the head
cation Number (VIN), which it learns through a CCD of the key, and invisible beneath a molded rubber cap
data bus message from the PCM during initializa- (Fig. 1).
tion.
The SKIM and the PCM both use software that
includes a rolling code algorithm strategy, which
helps to reduce the possibility of unauthorized SKIS
disarming. The rolling code algorithm ensures secu-
rity by preventing an override of the SKIS through
the unauthorized substitution of the SKIM or the
PCM. However, the use of this strategy also means
that replacement of either the SKIM or the PCM
units will require a system initialization procedure to
restore system operation.
When the ignition switch is turned to the On or
Start positions, the SKIM transmits an RF signal to
excite the Sentry Key transponder. The SKIM then
listens for a return RF signal from the transponder
of the Sentry Key that is inserted in the ignition lock
cylinder. If the SKIM receives an RF signal with
valid “Secret Key” and transponder identification
codes, the SKIM sends a “valid key” message to the
PCM over the CCD data bus. If the SKIM receives Fig. 1 Sentry Key Immobilizer Transponder
an invalid RF signal or no response, it sends “invalid
key” messages to the PCM. The PCM will enable or Each Sentry Key transponder has a unique tran-
disable engine operation based upon the status of the sponder identification code programmed into it by the
SKIM messages. manufacturer. The Sentry Key Immobilizer Module
The SKIM also sends messages to the instrument (SKIM) has a unique “Secret Key” code programmed
cluster over the CCD data bus network to control the into it by the manufacturer. When a Sentry Key
SKIS indicator lamp. The SKIM sends messages to transponder is programmed into the memory of the
the instrument cluster to turn the lamp on for about SKIM, the SKIM learns the transponder identifica-
three seconds when the ignition switch is turned to tion code from the transponder, and the transponder
the On position as a bulb test. After completion of learns the “Secret Key” code from the SKIM. Each of
the bulb test, the SKIM sends bus messages to keep these codes is stored within the transponder and in
the lamp off for a duration of about one second. Then the nonvolatile memory of the SKIM. Therefore,
the SKIM sends messages to turn the lamp on blank keys for the SKIS must be programmed by and
(steady or flashing) or off based upon the results of into the SKIM, in addition to being cut to match the
the SKIS self-tests. If the SKIS indicator lamp comes mechanical coding of the ignition lock cylinder. See
on and stays on after the bulb test, it indicates that Sentry Key Immobilizer System Transponder Pro-
the SKIM has detected a system malfunction and/or gramming in this group for more information.
that the SKIS has become inoperative. The Sentry Key transponder is within the range of
If the SKIM detects an invalid key when the igni- the SKIM transceiver antenna ring when it is
tion switch is turned to the On position, it sends inserted in the ignition lock cylinder. When the igni-
messages to the instrument cluster to flash the SKIS tion switch is turned to the Start or On positions, the
indicator lamp. SKIM transceiver issues a Radio Frequency (RF) sig-
For diagnosis or initialization of the SKIM and the nal that excites the transponder chip. The transpon-
PCM, a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic der chip responds by issuing an RF signal containing
Procedures manual are required. The SKIM cannot its transponder identification code and the “Secret
be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, the unit must Key” code. The SKIM transceiver compares the tran-
be replaced. sponder codes with the codes stored in its memory to
determine whether a valid key is in the ignition lock
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER TRANSPONDER cylinder.
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) uses a The Sentry Key transponder cannot be repaired
transponder that is integral to each of the two igni- and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced.
tion keys that are supplied with the vehicle when it
is shipped from the factory. The transponder chip is
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM NOTE: The following tests may not prove conclu-
sive in the diagnosis of this system. The most reli-
INDICATOR LAMP
able, efficient, and accurate means to diagnose the
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) indica-
Sentry Key Immobilizer System involves the use of
tor lamp gives an indication when the SKIS is faulty
a DRB scan tool. Refer to the proper Diagnostic
or when the vehicle has been immobilized due to the
Procedures manual for the procedures.
use of an invalid ignition key. The lamp is controlled
by the instrument cluster circuitry based upon mes- The Sentry Key Immobilizer System (SKIS) and the
sages received from the Sentry Key Immobilizer Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus network
Module (SKIM) on the Chrysler Collision Detection should be diagnosed using a DRB scan tool. The DRB
(CCD) data bus. will allow confirmation that the CCD data bus is func-
The SKIM sends messages to the instrument clus- tional, that the Sentry Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM)
ter to turn the lamp on for about three seconds when is placing the proper messages on the CCD data bus,
the ignition switch is turned to the On position as a and that the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the
bulb test. After completion of the bulb test, the SKIM instrument cluster are receiving the CCD data bus mes-
sends bus messages to keep the lamp off for a dura- sages. Refer to the proper Diagnostic Procedures man-
tion of about one second. Then the SKIM sends mes- ual for the procedures. Refer to 8W-30 - Fuel/Ignition
sages to the instrument cluster circuitry to turn the System in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete
lamp on or off based upon the results of the SKIS circuit descriptions and diagrams.
self-tests. If the SKIS indicator lamp comes on and (1) Check the fuses in the fuseblock module. If OK,
stays on after the bulb test, it indicates that the go to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or
SKIM has detected a system malfunction and/or that component as required and replace the faulty fuse.
the SKIS has become inoperative. If the SKIM (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
detects an invalid key when the ignition switch is Unplug the wire harness connector at the SKIM. Check
turned to the On position, it sends messages to the for continuity between the ground circuit cavity of the
instrument cluster to flash the SKIS indicator lamp. SKIM wire harness connector and a good ground. There
The SKIM can also send messages to the instru- should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK,
ment cluster to flash the lamp and to generate a sin- repair the open circuit to ground as required.
gle audible chime tone. These functions serve as an (3) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
indication to the customer that the SKIS has been battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the
placed in its “Customer Learn” programming mode. SKIM wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 4. If
See Sentry Key Immobilizer System Transponder not OK, repair the open circuit to the fuse in the
Programming in this group for more information on fuseblock module as required.
the “Customer Learn” programming mode. (4) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
The SKIS indicator lamp uses a replaceable incan- Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
descent bulb and bulb holder on the instrument clus- output (run/start) circuit cavity of the SKIM wire har-
ter electronic circuit board. Refer to Group 8E - ness connector. If OK, use a DRB scan tool and the
Instrument Panel Systems for diagnosis and service proper Diagnostic Procedures manual to complete the
of a faulty SKIS indicator lamp. If the SKIS indicator diagnosis of the SKIS. If not OK, repair the open circuit
lamp comes on and stays on after the bulb test func- to the fuse in the fuseblock module as required.
tion, diagnosis of the SKIS should be performed with
a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Proce-
dures manual. SERVICE PROCEDURES
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
TRANSPONDER PROGRAMMING
SENTRY KEY IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM Two programmed Sentry Key transponders are
included with the Sentry Key Immobilizer System
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS, (SKIS) when it is shipped from the factory. The Sen-
REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYS- try Key Immobilizer Module (SKIM) can be pro-
TEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL, grammed to recognize up to six additional
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COM- transponders, for a total of eight Sentry Keys. Sentry
PONENT DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE Key programming will require the use of a DRB scan
THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual.
ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.

WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIRBAGS,
REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE RESTRAINT SYS-
TEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY STEERING WHEEL,
STEERING COLUMN, OR INSTRUMENT PANEL COM-
PONENT DIAGNOSIS OR SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE
THE PROPER PRECAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN
ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE
PERSONAL INJURY.

shroud and depress the ignition lock cylinder retain- Fig. 2 Steering Column Shrouds Remove/Install
lower flange of the steering column jacket. Pull
downward on the connector end of the SKIM mount-
pull the ignition lock cylinder and key out of the igni-
ing bracket to release this clip from the steering col-
tion lock housing.
umn jacket.
(13) Rotate the SKIM and its mounting bracket
steering column shroud to the upper shroud.
downwards and then to the side away from the steer-
ing column to slide the SKIM antenna ring from
around the ignition switch lock cylinder housing.
(8) If the vehicle is so equipped, loosen the two
(14) Remove the SKIM from the vehicle.
Tighten the non-tilt steering column mounting nuts
support bracket studs. Lower the column far enough
to 22 N·m (200 in. lbs.) and the steering column
to remove the upper steering column shroud.
(9) Remove both the upper and lower shrouds from
(16) If the SKIM is replaced with a new unit, a
DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic Procedures
(10) Disengage the steering column wire harness
manual MUST be used to initialize the new SKIM
retainer from the tab on the top of the Sentry Key
and to program at least two Sentry Key
Immobilizer Module (SKIM) mounting bracket (Fig.
transponders.
3).
SKIM receptacle.
(12) The SKIM mounting bracket features a clip
formation that secures the SKIM to the inboard
Fig. 3 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module Remove/Install

XJ POWER SEAT SYSTEMS 8R - 1
POWER SEAT SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS . . . . . 2

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
POWER SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER SEAT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS . . . . . 4
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS . . . . . 1 POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
POWER SEAT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION tions of the major components in the power seat sys-
tem. Refer to the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove
INTRODUCTION box for more information on the features, use and
Six-way power seats are an available factory-in- operation of the power seat system.
stalled option for Left-Hand Drive (LHD) versions of
this model. Refer to 8W-63 - Power Seat in Group DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete circuit descrip-
tions and diagrams.
POWER SEAT SWITCH
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive The power seat can be adjusted in six different
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this ways using the power seat switch. The switch is
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD located on the lower outboard side of the seat cushion
versions of affected vehicle components have been on the seat cushion side shield. Refer to the owner’s
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. manual for more information on the power seat
While most of the illustrations used in this group switch functions and the seat adjusting procedures.
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and The individual switches in the power seat switch
service procedures outlined can generally be unit cannot be repaired. If one switch is damaged or
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule faulty, the entire power seat switch unit must be
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a replaced.
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS
There are three reversible motors that operate the
POWER SEAT SYSTEM power seat adjuster. The motors are connected to
The power seat system option allows the front worm-drive gearboxes that move the seat adjuster
seating positions to be electrically adjusted for opti- through a combination of screw-type drive units.
mum control and comfort using the power seat The front and rear of a seat are operated by differ-
switches located on the outboard seat cushion side ent motors. They can be raised or lowered indepen-
shield. The power seat system allows the seating dently of each other. When the center seat switch is
position to be adjusted forward, rearward, front up, pushed to the Up or Down position, both the front
front down, rear up, or rear down. The power seat and rear motors operate in unison, moving the entire
system receives battery current through a fuse in the seat up or down. The forward-rearward motor is
Power Distribution Center and a circuit breaker in operated by pushing the center seat switch to the
the junction block, regardless of the ignition switch Forward or Rearward position.
position. When a switch is actuated, a battery feed and a
The power seat system includes the power seat ground path are applied through the switch contacts
adjuster and motors unit, the power seat switch, and to the motor(s). The motor(s) and drives operate to
the circuit breaker. Following are general descrip- move the seat in the selected direction until the
8R - 2 POWER SEAT SYSTEMS XJ
switch is released, or until the travel limit of the minal has battery voltage, repair the open circuit
power seat adjuster is reached. When the switch is from the Power Distribution Center (PDC) as
moved in the opposite direction, the battery feed and required.
ground path to the motor(s) are reversed through the
switch contacts. This causes the motor to run in the POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS
opposite direction. For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
Each motor contains a self-resetting circuit breaker 8W-63 - Power Seat in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
to protect it from overload. Consecutive or frequent Operate the power seat switch to move all three
resetting of the circuit breakers must not be allowed seat motors in each direction. The seat should move
to continue, or the motors may be damaged. Make in each of the selected directions. If the power seat
the necessary repairs. adjuster fails to operate in only one direction, move
The power seat adjuster and motors cannot be the adjuster a short distance in the opposite direction
repaired, and are serviced only as a complete unit. If and test again to be certain that the adjuster is not
any component in this unit is faulty or damaged, the at its travel limit. If the power seat adjuster still
entire power seat adjuster and motors assembly must fails to operate in only one direction, see Power Seat
be replaced. Switch in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group. If the power seat adjuster fails to operate in
CIRCUIT BREAKER more than one direction, proceed as follows:
An automatic resetting circuit breaker in the junc- (1) Test the circuit breaker in the junction block as
tion block is used to protect the power seat system described in this group. If OK, go to Step 2. If not
circuit. The circuit breaker can protect the system OK, replace the faulty circuit breaker.
from a short circuit, or from an overload condition (2) Remove the power seat switch from the seat.
caused by an obstructed or stuck seat adjuster. Check for battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit
The circuit breaker cannot be repaired and, if cavity of the power seat switch wire harness connec-
faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. tor. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open
circuit to the junction block as required.
(3) Check for continuity between the ground cir-
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING cuit cavity of the power seat switch wire harness con-
nector and a good ground. There should be
POWER SEAT SYSTEM continuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the
Before any testing of the power seat system is open circuit to ground as required.
attempted, the battery should be fully-charged and (4) Test the power seat switch as described in this
all wire harness connections and pins cleaned and group. If the switch tests OK, check the wire harness
tightened to ensure proper continuity and grounds. for the inoperative power seat motor(s) between the
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to power seat switch and the motor for shorts or opens.
8W-63 - Power Seat in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. If the circuits check OK, replace the faulty power
With the dome lamp on, apply the power seat seat adjuster and motors assembly. If the circuits are
switch in the direction of the failure. If the dome not OK, repair the wire harness as required.
lamp dims, the seat may be jamming. Check under
and behind the seat for binding or obstructions. If POWER SEAT SWITCH
the dome lamp does not dim, proceed with testing of For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
the individual components and circuits. 8W-63 - Power Seat in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
CIRCUIT BREAKER cable.
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to (2) Remove the power seat switch from the power
8W-63 - Power Seat in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. seat.
(1) Locate the correct circuit breaker in the junc- (3) Use an ohmmeter to test the continuity of the
tion block. Pull out the circuit breaker slightly, but power seat switches in each position. See the Power
be certain that the circuit breaker terminals still con- Seat Switch Continuity chart (Fig. 1). If OK, see the
tact the terminals in the junction block cavities. diagnosis for the Power Seat Adjuster and Motors in
(2) Connect the negative lead of a 12-volt DC volt- this group. If not OK, replace the faulty power seat
meter to a good ground. switch module.
(3) With the voltmeter positive lead, check both
terminals of the circuit breaker for battery voltage.
If only one terminal has battery voltage, the circuit
breaker is faulty and must be replaced. If neither ter-
XJ POWER SEAT SYSTEMS 8R - 3

POWER SEAT SWITCH
cable.
(2) Remove the three screws that secure the seat
cushion side shield to the outboard seat cushion
frame.
(3) Pull the seat cushion side shield away from the
seat cushion frame far enough to access the power
seat switch wire harness connector.
power seat switch.
(5) Remove the seat cushion side shield from the
seat.
(6) Remove the two screws that secure the power
seat switch to the inside of the seat cushion side
shield (Fig. 2).
Fig. 2 Power Seat Switch Remove/Install
Fig. 1 Power Seat Switch Continuity

8R - 4 POWER SEAT SYSTEMS XJ
(7) Remove the power seat switch from the seat
cushion side shield.
POWER SEAT ADJUSTER AND MOTORS

(1) Move the seat to its fully raised and fully for-
ward position, if possible.
cable.
(3) Unplug the seat belt switch wire harness con-
nector from the driver side seat belt buckle half on
the inboard side of the seat (Fig. 3).
Fig. 4 Power Seat Remove/Install
Fig. 3 Driver Seat Belt Switch Connector

(4) Remove the two screws that secure the front of
the seat adjuster frame to the floor panel seat
mounting reinforcement (Fig. 4).
(5) Remove the screw that secures the outboard
rear of the seat adjuster frame to the floor panel.
(6) Remove the nut that secures the inboard rear
of the seat adjuster frame to the stud on the floor
panel.
(7) Unplug the power seat wire harness connector
from the body wire harness connector.
(8) Remove the driver side power seat and adjuster
assembly from the vehicle.
(9) Unplug the power seat wire harness connectors
at each of the three power seat motors.
(10) Remove the four nuts that secure the seat
adjuster and motors assembly to the seat cushion Fig. 5 Power Seat Adjuster and Motors Remove/
frame (Fig. 5). Install
(11) Remove the adjuster and motors assembly • Seat adjuster to seat cushion frame nuts - 25
from the seat cushion frame. N·m (18 ft. lbs.)
(12) Reverse the removal procedures to install. • Seat adjuster to floor panel screws - 27 N·m (20
Tighten the seat mounting hardware as follows: ft. lbs.)
• Seat adjuster to floor panel nut - 40 N·m (30 ft.
lbs.).
XJ POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS 8S - 1
POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER WINDOW MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER WINDOW SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION POWER WINDOW SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
POWER WINDOW MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER WINDOW MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
POWER WINDOW SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER WINDOW SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CIRCUIT BREAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION the junction block, only when the ignition switch is
in the On or Accessory positions.
INTRODUCTION The power window system includes the power win-
Power windows are available as factory-installed dow switches on each door trim panel, the circuit
optional equipment on this model. The power lock breaker in the junction block, and the power window
system and power mirror system are included on motors inside each door. This group covers diagnosis
vehicles equipped with the power window option. and service of only the electrical components in the
Refer to 8W-60 - Power Windows in Group 8W - Wir- power window system. For service of mechanical
ing Diagrams for complete circuit descriptions and components, such as the regulator, lift plate, window
diagrams. tracks, or glass refer to Group 23 - Body.
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive components in the power window system. Refer to
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD information on the features, use and operation of the
versions of affected vehicle components have been power window system.
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule POWER WINDOW SWITCH
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a The individual power windows are controlled by a
special illustration or procedure is required. two-way momentary switch mounted on the trim
panel of the passenger side front door trim panel
and, on four-door models, on each of the rear door
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM trim panels. Two-way momentary master switches on
The power window system allows all of the door the driver side front door trim panel control all of the
windows to be raised and lowered electrically by power windows in the vehicle. The driver side front
actuating a switch on the trim panel of each respec- door trim panel also has a two-position power win-
tive door. Additionally, a set of master switches on dow lockout switch.
the driver side front door trim panel allows the The front door power window switches and the
driver to raise or lower each of the passenger door power window lockout switch are integral to the
windows. A power window lockout switch on the Driver Door Module (DDM) or Passenger Door Mod-
driver side front door trim panel can prevent the pas- ule (PDM), respectively. The rear door power window
senger door windows from being operated, except switches are stand-alone units.
from the master switches. The power window system Each power window switch controls its power win-
receives battery current through a circuit breaker in dow motor by switching battery current and ground
8S - 2 POWER WINDOW SYSTEMS XJ
between the terminals of the power window motor. In addition, each power window motor is equipped
The passenger side front door and, on four-door mod- with an integral self-resetting circuit breaker to pro-
els, both rear door power window switches receive tect the motor from overloads. The power window
their battery feed through the power window lockout motor and gearbox assembly cannot be repaired and,
switch or through the master switches in the DDM. if faulty or damaged, the entire power window regu-
Also, each of the individual power window switches lator assembly must be replaced.
receives its ground through the DDM. When the lock-
out switch is placed in the Lock position, the individ- CIRCUIT BREAKER
ual power window switches become inoperative An automatic resetting circuit breaker in the junc-
because they have no battery current available to tion block is used to protect the power window sys-
them. However, the master switches are unaffected tem circuit. The circuit breaker can protect the
by the lockout switch position. system from a short circuit, or from an overload con-
Each power window switch, except the lockout dition caused by an obstructed or stuck window glass
switch, is illuminated by a Light-Emitting Diode or regulator.
(LED) when the ignition switch is turned to the On The circuit breaker cannot be repaired and, if
position. However, when the power window lockout faulty, it must be replaced.
switch is placed in the Lock position, the LED for the
locked-out passenger side front and, on four-door
models, the rear passenger door power window DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
switches is turned off.
The front door power window switches and their POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
lamps cannot be repaired and, if faulty or damaged, For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
the entire door module must be replaced. The rear 8W-60 - Power Windows in Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
door power window switches and their lamps cannot grams.
be repaired but, if faulty or damaged, only the
affected switch unit must be replaced. ALL WINDOWS INOPERATIVE
(1) Check the circuit breaker in the junction block,
DOOR MODULE as described in this group. If OK, go to Step 2. If not
A Driver Door Module (DDM) and a Passenger OK, replace the faulty circuit breaker.
Door Module (PDM) are used on all models equipped (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
with power locks and power windows. Each door cable. Remove the driver side front door trim panel
module houses both the front door power lock and and unplug the Driver Door Module (DDM) wire har-
power window switches. In addition to the switches ness connectors from the DDM. Check for continuity
for its own door, the DDM houses individual switches between the ground circuit cavity of the 8-way DDM
for each passenger door power window, a power win- wire harness connector and a good ground. If OK, go
dow lockout switch, the power mirror switch, and cir- to Step 3. If not OK, repair the circuit to ground as
cuitry to support the one-touch down feature of the required.
driver side front door power window. The PDM also (3) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
houses the control circuitry and the power lock and ignition switch to the On position. Check for battery
unlock relays for the power lock system. voltage at the master switch power feed (run/acc) cir-
The DDM and the PDM are mounted to their cuit cavity of the 12-way DDM wire harness connec-
respective front door trim panels. The DDM and tor. If OK, see the diagnosis for the Door Module in
PDM are serviced individually and cannot be this group. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the
repaired. If the DDM or PDM, or any of the switches circuit breaker in the junction block as required.
and circuitry that they contain are faulty or dam-
aged, the complete DDM or PDM unit must be ONE WINDOW INOPERATIVE
replaced. The window glass must be free to slide up and
down for the power window motor to function prop-
POWER WINDOW MOTOR erly. If the glass is not free to move up and down, the
A permanent magnet reversible motor moves the motor will overload and trip the integral circuit
window regulator through an integral gearbox mech- breaker. To determine if the glass is free, disconnect
anism. A positive and negative battery connection to the regulator plate from the glass. Then slide the
the two motor terminals will cause the motor to window up and down by hand.
rotate in one direction. Reversing the current There is an alternate method to check if the glass
through these same two connections will cause the is free. Position the glass between the up and down
motor to rotate in the opposite direction. stops. Then, shake the glass in the door. Check that
the glass can be moved slightly from side to side, the passenger side front door power window switch
front to rear, and up and down. Then check that the and, on four-door models, the rear door power win-
glass is not bound tight in the tracks. If the glass is dow switches get their battery current through the
free, proceed with the diagnosis that follows. If the power window lockout switch in the Driver Door
glass is not free, refer to Group 23 - Body for the Module (DDM). In addition, each individual power
door window glass and hardware service and adjust- window switch gets its ground through the master
ment procedures. switch in the DDM.
(1) Check the power window switch continuity as The one-touch down feature circuitry within the
described in the diagnosis for the Door Module (front DDM will not operate the power window motor if the
doors) or Power Window Switch (rear doors) in this door glass, window regulator, or gearbox mechanism
group. If OK and the driver side front window is are stuck, obstructed, or binding. If the driver side
inoperative, see the Power Window Motor diagnosis front door power window operates as designed, but
in this group. If OK and the inoperative window is the one-touch down feature is inoperative, replace
other than the driver side front, go to Step 2. If not the faulty DDM.
OK, replace the faulty door module or switch. If the problem being diagnosed is an inoperative
(2) Refer to the circuit diagrams in 8W-60 - Power power window switch illumination lamp, but the
Windows in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. Check the power window switch operates as designed, replace
continuity in each circuit between the inoperative the faulty door module. For circuit descriptions and
Passenger Door Module (PDM) or power window diagrams, refer to 8W-60 - Power Windows in Group
switch wire harness connector cavities and the corre- 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
sponding Driver Door Module (DDM) wire harness (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
connector cavities. If OK, see the diagnosis for the cable. Remove the front door trim panel and unplug
Power Window Motor in this group. If not OK, repair the door module wire harness connectors from the
the open circuit(s) as required. door module.
(2) Check the door module power window switch
NOTE: All individual power window switches and/or power window lockout switch continuity in
receive their battery and ground feeds through the each position, as shown in the proper chart (Fig. 1)
Driver Door Module (DDM) and wire harness con- or (Fig. 2). If OK, see the Power Window Motor diag-
nectors. nosis in this group. If not OK, replace the faulty door
module.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
8W-60 - Power Windows in Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
grams.
(1) Locate the circuit breaker in the junction block.
Pull out the circuit breaker slightly, but be certain
that the circuit breaker terminals still contact the
terminals in the junction block cavities.
(2) Connect the negative lead of a 12-volt DC volt-
meter to a good ground.
(3) With the voltmeter positive lead, check both
terminals of the circuit breaker for battery voltage.
If only one terminal has battery voltage, the circuit
breaker is faulty and must be replaced. If neither ter-
minal has battery voltage, repair the open circuit
from the Power Distribution Center (PDC) as
required. If the circuit breaker checks OK, but no
power windows operate, see Power Window System
in the Diagnosis and Testing section of this group.
DOOR MODULE
The Driver Door Module (DDM) contains the mas-
ter switches and the lockout switch in the power win-
dow system. The DDM also contains an integrated
circuit to support the one-touch down feature of the
driver side front door power window. Remember that Fig. 1 DDM Power Window Switch Continuity
POWER WINDOW MOTOR

8W-60 - Power Windows in Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
grams. Before you proceed with this diagnosis, con-
firm proper switch operation. See the Door Module
and/or Power Window Switch diagnosis in this group.
cable. Remove the trim panel from the door with the
inoperative power window.
(2) Unplug the power window motor wire harness
connector. Apply 12 volts across the motor terminals
to check its operation in one direction. Reverse the
connections across the motor terminals to check the
operation in the other direction. Remember, if the
window is in the full up or full down position, the
Fig. 2 PDM Power Window Switch Continuity motor will not operate in that direction by design. If
OK, repair the circuits from the power window motor
POWER WINDOW SWITCH to the door module or the power window switch as
The diagnosis found here applies only to the rear required. If not OK, replace the faulty motor.
door power window switches. For diagnosis of the (3) If the motor operates in both directions, check
front door power window switches, see Door Module the operation of the window glass and lift mechanism
in this group. If the problem being diagnosed is an through its complete up and down travel. There
inoperative power window switch illumination lamp, should be no binding or sticking of the window glass
but the power window switch operates as designed, or lift mechanism through the entire travel range. If
replace the faulty switch. For circuit descriptions and not OK, refer to Group 23 - Body to check the win-
diagrams, refer to 8W-60 - Power Windows in Group dow glass, tracks, and regulator for sticking, binding,
8W - Wiring Diagrams. or improper adjustment.
cable.
(2) Remove the power window switch from the REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
rear door trim panel.
(3) Check the power window switch continuity in DOOR MODULE
each position as shown in the Rear Door Power Win- (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
dow Switch Continuity chart (Fig. 3). If OK, see the cable.
Power Window Motor diagnosis in this group. If not (2) Remove the screws that secure the front door
OK, replace the faulty switch. trim panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 4).

flat-bladed tool, gently pry the front door trim panel
Fig. 3 Rear Door Power Window Switch Continuity
away from the door around the perimeter to release
the trim panel retainers.
NOTE: To aid in the removal of the trim panel, start


erstrip.
and lock linkage rods, and remove the rod ends from Fig. 6 Rear Door Trim Panel Remove/Install
the inside door remote controls. gage the top of the panel from the inner belt weath-
(7) Unplug the wire harness connectors from the erstrip.
door module. (5) Pull the rear door trim panel away from the
(8) Remove the trim panel from the front door. inner door panel far enough to access the inside door
(9) Remove the three screws that secure the door latch release and lock linkage rods near the back of
module to the front door trim panel (Fig. 5). the inside door remote controls.
rear door power window switch.
(8) Remove the trim panel from the rear door.
pry the snap clips at the sides of the power window
switch receptacle on the back of the rear door trim
panel and pull the switch out of the receptacle
(Fig. 7).
(10) Remove the door module from the front door
trim panel.
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

cable.
(2) Remove the screws that secure the door trim
panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 6).
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the rear door trim panel

Fig. 7 Rear Door Power Window Switch Remove/
(4) Lift the rear door trim panel upwards and Install
(10) Reverse the removal procedures to install. Be Group 23 - Body for the front door window regulator
certain that both of the switch snap retainers in the service procedures.
receptacle on the back of the trim panel are fully
engaged. REAR DOOR
The rear door power window motor and mechanism
POWER WINDOW MOTOR is integral to the rear door power window regulator
unit. If the rear door power window motor or mech-
FRONT DOOR anism is faulty or damaged, the entire power window
The front door power window motor and mecha- regulator unit must be replaced. Refer to Group 23 -
nism is integral to the front door power window reg- Body for the rear door window regulator service
ulator unit. If the front door power window motor or procedures.
mechanism is faulty or damaged, the entire power
window regulator unit must be replaced. Refer to
XJ POWER MIRROR SYSTEMS 8T - 1
POWER MIRROR SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER MIRROR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
POWER MIRROR SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
DOOR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
POWER MIRROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER MIRROR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
POWER MIRROR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION Following are general descriptions of the major

components in the power mirror system. Refer to the
INTRODUCTION owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
Power operated or power operated and heated out- information on the features, use and operation of the
side rear view mirrors are available factory-installed power mirror system.
options on this model. Refer to 8W-62 - Power Mir-
rors in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for complete cir- DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
cuit descriptions and diagrams.
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive POWER MIRROR

(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this Each power mirror head contains two electric
model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD motors, two drive mechanisms, and the mirror glass.
versions of affected vehicle components have been One motor and drive controls mirror up-and-down
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. movement, and the other controls right-and-left
While most of the illustrations used in this group movement.
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and The power mirrors in vehicles equipped with the
service procedures outlined can generally be available heated mirror option also include an elec-
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule tric heating grid located behind the mirror glass.
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a This heating grid is energized by the rear window
special illustration or procedure is required. defogger relay whenever the rear window defogger
system is turned on. Refer to Group 8N - Electrically
Heated Systems for more information on the opera-
POWER MIRROR SYSTEM tion of the rear window defogger system.
The power operated or power operated and heated The power mirror assembly cannot be repaired.
outside rear view mirrors allow the driver to adjust Only the mirror glass is serviced separately. If any
both outside mirrors electrically from the driver seat other component of the power mirror unit is faulty or
position by operating a switch on the driver side damaged, the entire assembly must be replaced.
front door trim panel. The power mirrors receive bat-
tery current through a fuse in the junction block, and POWER MIRROR SWITCH
will only operate when the ignition switch is in the Both the right and left power outside mirrors are
On or Accessory positions. controlled by a single multi-function switch unit
The heated mirror option includes an electric heat- located on the driver side front door trim panel. Two
ing grid behind the mirror glass in each outside mir- versions of this switch are offered. Models without
ror, which can clear the mirror glass of ice, snow, or power windows or power locks have a stand-alone
fog. The heating grid receives fused battery current switch mounted in the driver side front door trim
through the rear window defogger relay only when panel. Models equipped with power windows and
the rear window defogger system is turned on. Refer power locks have a power mirror switch that is inte-
to Group 8N - Electrically Heated Systems for more gral to the Driver Door Module (DDM).
information on the rear window defogger system. Both versions of the switch are operated in the
same manner. A three position rocker-type mirror
8T - 2 POWER MIRROR SYSTEMS XJ
selector switch is moved right (right mirror control), (4) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
left (left mirror control), or center to turn the power Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
mirrors off. Then one of four directional control but- Remove the driver side front door trim panel and
tons is depressed to control movement of the selected unplug the DDM wire harness connectors. Connect
mirror up, down, right, or left. The directional control the battery negative cable. Turn the ignition switch
buttons of the DDM-mounted switch are illuminated to the On position. Check for battery voltage at the
when the ignition switch is in the On or Accessory fused ignition switch output circuit cavity of the
positions. The stand-alone switch is not illuminated. 12-way DDM wire harness connector. If OK, replace
The stand-alone power mirror switch cannot be the faulty DDM. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
repaired and, if faulty or damaged, it must be the power window circuit breaker in the junction
replaced as a complete unit. If the DDM power mir- block as required.
ror switch is faulty or damaged, the entire DDM unit (5) If the problem being diagnosed is an inopera-
must be replaced. tive power mirror electric heating grid, proceed as
follows. If not, go to Step 8. Disconnect and isolate
DOOR MODULE the battery negative cable. Remove the front door
A Driver Door Module (DDM) and a Passenger trim panel on the side of the vehicle with the inoper-
Door Module (PDM) are used on all models equipped ative mirror heating grid. Unplug the wire harness
with power locks and power windows. Each door connector at the mirror. Check for continuity between
module houses both the front door power lock and the ground circuit cavity in the body half of the
power window switches. In addition to the switches power mirror wire harness connector and a good
for its own door, the DDM houses individual switches ground. If OK, go to Step 6. If not OK, repair the
for each passenger door power window, a power win- open circuit to ground as required.
dow lockout switch, the power mirror switch, and cir- (6) Connect the battery negative cable. Turn the
cuitry to support the one-touch down feature of the ignition switch to the On position. Turn on the rear
driver side front door power window. The PDM also window defogger system. Check for battery voltage at
houses the control circuitry and the power lock and the rear window defogger relay output circuit cavity
unlock relays for the power lock system. in the body half of the power mirror wire harness
The DDM and the PDM are mounted to their connector. If OK, go to Step 7. If not OK, repair the
respective front door trim panels. The DDM and open circuit to the rear window defogger relay as
PDM are serviced individually and cannot be required.
repaired. If the DDM or PDM, or any of the switches (7) Check for continuity between the ground cir-
and circuitry that they contain are faulty or dam- cuit and the rear window defogger relay output cir-
aged, the complete DDM or PDM unit must be cuit cavities in the mirror half of the power mirror
replaced. wire harness connector. There should be continuity. If
not OK, replace the faulty power mirror. If OK, check
the resistance through the electric heating grid cir-
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING cuit. Correct resistance through the electric heating
grid should be from 10 to 16 ohms when measured at
POWER MIRROR SYSTEM an ambient temperature of 21° C (70° F). If not OK,
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to replace the faulty power mirror.
8W-62 - Power Mirrors in Group 8W - Wiring Dia- (8) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
grams. cable. Remove the stand-alone power mirror switch
(1) Check the fuse in the junction block. If OK, go from the driver side front door trim panel or, with a
to Step 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or DDM-mounted switch, remove the driver side front
component as required and replace the faulty fuse. door trim panel. Unplug the wire harness connector
(2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. from the stand-alone switch or the 8-way wire har-
Check for battery voltage at the fuse in the junction ness connector from the DDM. Connect the battery
block. If OK, go to Step 3. If not OK, repair the open negative cable. Turn the ignition switch to the On
circuit to the ignition switch as required. position. Check for battery voltage at the fused igni-
(3) If the problem being diagnosed is inoperative tion switch output circuit cavity of the stand-alone
illumination of the power mirror switch directional switch wire harness connector or the 8-way DDM
buttons for the Driver Door Module (DDM)-type wire harness connector. If OK, go to Step 9. If not
switch, proceed as follows. If not, go to Step 5. Check OK, repair the open circuit to the junction block as
the power window circuit breaker in the junction required.
block. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, replace the (9) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
faulty circuit breaker. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav-
ity of the stand-alone switch wire harness connector
or the 8-way DDM wire harness connector and a
good ground. There should be continuity. If OK, go to
Step 10. If not OK, repair the circuit to ground as
required.
(10) Check the stand-alone power mirror switch or
DDM-mounted power mirror switch continuity as
shown in (Fig. 1) or (Fig. 2). If OK, go to Step 11. If
not OK, replace the faulty stand-alone power mirror
switch or the faulty DDM.
Fig. 2 Driver Door Module Power Mirror Switch

Continuity
Fig. 1 Stand-Alone Power Mirror Switch Continuity

(11) Connect the battery negative cable. Use two
jumper wires, one connected to a 12-volt battery feed,
and the other connected to a good body ground. See
the Power Mirror Test chart for the correct jumper
wire connections at the mirror half of the power mir-
ror wire harness connector (Fig. 3). If the mirror
reactions are OK, repair the wire harness between
the mirror and the stand-alone power mirror switch
or the DDM as required. If the mirror reactions are
not OK, replace the faulty power outside mirror
assembly.
Fig. 3 Power Mirror Test


POWER MIRROR SWITCH
This procedure covers removal of the stand-alone
type power mirror switch. Vehicles with power win-
dows and power locks have a power mirror switch
which is integral to the Driver Door Module (DDM).
See Door Module in this group for the DDM-type
power mirror switch service procedures.
cable.
flat-bladed tool, gently pry around the perimeter
edge of the switch to release the snap clips that
secure the switch to the trim panel (Fig. 4).


erstrip.
door module.
(8) Remove the trim panel from the front door.
(9) Remove the three screws that secure the door
module to the front door trim panel (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Stand-Alone Power Mirror Switch Remove/
Install
(3) Pull the power mirror switch away from the
trim panel far enough to access the wire harness con-
nector.
(4) Unplug the power mirror switch from the wire
harness connector.
DOOR MODULE
cable.
(2) Remove the screws that secure the front door
trim panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 5).
(3) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide (10) Remove the door module from the front door
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the front door trim panel trim panel.
away from the door around the perimeter to release (11) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
the trim panel retainers. Tighten the mounting screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
POWER MIRROR
cable.
(2) If the vehicle is so equipped, remove the man-
ual window regulator crank handle with a removal
tool (Fig. 7).
Fig. 9 Front Door Trim Panel Remove/Install - Power

Window
erstrip.
inner door far enough to access the inside door latch
Fig. 7 Window Regulator Crank Handle Remove - release and lock linkage rods near the back of the
Typical inside door remote controls.
(3) Remove the screws that secure the front door inside door remote control ends of the latch release
trim panel to the inner door panel (Fig. 8) or (Fig. 9). and lock linkage rods, and remove the rod ends from
door power switch module or, on the driver side only,
the stand-alone power mirror switch.
(9) Set the front door trim panel aside.
(10) Remove the one screw that secures the front
door flag trim to the inner door panel (Fig. 10).
Fig. 8 Front Door Trim Panel Remove/Install -

Manual Window
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the front door trim panel

(5) Lift the front door trim panel upwards and Fig. 10 Front Door Flag Trim Panel Remove/Install
flat-bladed tool, gently pry the door flag trim away
from the inner door to release the trim panel
retainer.
(12) Unplug the power mirror wire harness con-
nector.
(13) Remove the three screws that secure the
power mirror to the inner door panel (Fig. 11).
(14) Unseat the power mirror wire harness grom-
met by pushing it out through the hole in the door
flag from the inside.
(15) Pull the mirror and seal from the outside of
the door while feeding the wire harness, grommet,
and connector out through the hole from the inside of
the door.
Tighten the mirror mounting screws to 4.3 N·m (38 Fig. 11 Power Mirror Remove/Install
in. lbs.). Tighten the door trim mounting screws to
2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
XJ CHIME/BUZZER WARNING SYSTEMS 8U - 1
CHIME/BUZZER WARNING SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page

CHIME WARNING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DRIVER DOOR JAMB SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HEADLAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DRIVER DOOR JAMB SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 KEY-IN IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HEADLAMP SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 CHIME WARNING SYSTEM SWITCHES . . . . . . . 4
KEY-IN IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION • The optional Sentry Key Immobilizer System

(SKIS) is in the “customer programming” mode.
INTRODUCTION Following are general descriptions of the major
This group covers the chime warning system, components in the chime warning system. Refer to
which is standard factory-installed equipment on this the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
model. Refer to 8W-40 Instrument Cluster or 8W-44 - information on the features, use and operation of the
Interior Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for chime warning system.

model. Whenever required and feasible, the RHD INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
versions of affected vehicle components have been The instrument cluster is an electromechanical
constructed as mirror-image of the LHD versions. unit that contains integrated circuitry and internal
While most of the illustrations used in this group programming to perform a variety of functions. The
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and instrument cluster circuitry monitors hard-wired
service procedures outlined can generally be switch inputs, as well as message inputs received
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule from other vehicle electronic modules on the Chrysler
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a Collision Detection (CCD) data bus network.
special illustration or procedure is required. The instrument cluster uses these many inputs
along with its internal programming and an integral
CHIME WARNING SYSTEM chime tone generator to perform the functions of the
The chime warning system provides an audible chime warning module on this model. The instru-
warning to the driver under the following conditions: ment cluster circuitry also has a self-diagnostic capa-
• Driver side seat belt is not fastened (chimes will bility. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems
sound after the ignition switch is turned to the On for more information on this feature.
position for the duration of the seat belt reminder Hard-wired chime warning system inputs to the
lamp illumination or until the driver side seat belt is instrument cluster include the following:
buckled, whichever occurs first) • Driver door jamb switch
• Engine coolant temperature is high • Driver seat belt switch
• Head or park lamps are turned on with the igni- • Headlamp switch
tion switch Off and the driver side front door open • Key-in ignition switch.
• Key is in the ignition switch with the ignition The only instrument cluster diagnosis found in this
switch Off and the driver side front door open group consists of confirming the viability of the hard-
• Low fuel warning lamp illumination - less than wired chime request inputs to the instrument cluster
about one-eighth tank of fuel remaining circuitry. For diagnosis of the CCD data bus and the
• Overhead console trip computer is reset. data bus message inputs, a DRB scan tool and the
8U - 2 CHIME/BUZZER WARNING SYSTEMS XJ
proper Diagnostic Procedures manual are recom- The headlamp switch cannot be repaired and, if
mended. faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Refer to
Refer to Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for Group 8E - Instrument Panel Systems for the service
the instrument cluster service procedures. The procedures.
instrument cluster chime warning circuitry and
chime tone generator cannot be repaired and, if
faulty or damaged, the instrument cluster assembly DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
must be replaced.
DRIVER DOOR JAMB SWITCH
DRIVER DOOR JAMB SWITCH For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
The driver door jamb switch is mounted to the 8W-40 - Instrument Cluster or 8W-44 - Interior
driver side front door hinge pillar. The switch closes Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
a path to ground for the instrument cluster chime
warning circuitry through the key-in ignition switch
and/or the headlamp switch when the driver door is
opened, and opens the ground path when the driver
door is closed.
The driver door jamb switch cannot be repaired
and, if faulty or damaged, it must be replaced. Refer
to Group 8L - Lamps for the service procedures.
INJURY.
DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH
The driver seat belt switch is integral to the driver (1) Rotate the headlamp switch knob counterclock-
seat belt buckle-half assembly. The switch is nor- wise to ensure that the dome lamps are not switched
mally closed, providing a ground path to the instru- off. Open the driver door and note whether the inte-
ment panel chime warning circuitry. When the tip- rior lamps light. They should light. If OK, see the
half of the seat belt is inserted into the seat belt diagnosis for the Key-In Ignition Switch or the Head-
buckle, the switch opens the ground path. lamp Switch in this group. If not OK, go to Step 2.
The driver seat belt switch cannot be repaired and, (2) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
if faulty or damaged, the entire driver seat belt buck- cable. Unplug the driver door jamb switch from its
le-half unit must be replaced. Refer to Group 23 - wire harness connector. Check for continuity between
Body for the service procedures. the ground circuit cavity of the driver door jamb
switch wire harness connector and a good ground.
KEY-IN IGNITION SWITCH There should be continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not
The key-in ignition switch is integral to the igni- OK, repair the circuit to ground as required.
tion switch, which is mounted on the left side of the (3) Check for continuity between the door jamb
steering column, opposite the ignition lock cylinder. switch ground circuit terminal and the left front door
It closes a path to ground for the instrument cluster jamb switch sense terminal of the door jamb switch.
chime warning circuitry when the ignition key is There should be continuity with the switch plunger
inserted in the ignition lock cylinder and the driver released, and no continuity with the switch plunger
door jamb switch is closed (driver door is open). The depressed. If not OK, replace the faulty switch.
key-in ignition switch opens the ground path when
the key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. DRIVER SEAT BELT SWITCH
The key-in ignition switch cannot be repaired and, For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
if faulty or damaged, the entire ignition switch must 8W-40 - Instrument Cluster or 8W-44 - Interior
be replaced. Refer to Group 8D - Ignition Systems for Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
the service procedures.
HEADLAMP SWITCH BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
The headlamp switch is located in the instrument RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
panel, outboard of the steering column. It closes a STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
path to ground for the instrument cluster chime INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
warning circuitry when the park or head lamps are SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
on and the driver door jamb switch is closed (driver CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
door is open). The headlamp switch opens the ground BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
path when the headlamp switch is turned off. INJURY.
XJ CHIME/BUZZER WARNING SYSTEMS 8U - 3
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative HEADLAMP SWITCH
cable. Unplug the driver seat belt switch wire har- For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to
ness connector on the floor under the driver seat 8W-40 - Instrument Cluster or 8W-44 - Interior
near the seat belt buckle-half anchor. Check for con- Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
tinuity between the seat belt switch sense circuit and
the ground circuit cavities of the seat belt half of the WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
driver seat belt switch wire harness connector. There BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
should be continuity with the seat belt unbuckled, RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
and no continuity with the seat belt buckled. If OK, STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
go to Step 2. If not OK, replace the faulty seat belt INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
buckle-half assembly. SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
(2) Check for continuity between the ground cir- CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
cuit cavity in the body half of the driver seat belt BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
switch wire harness connector and a good ground. INJURY.
There should be continuity. If OK, see the Instru-
ment Cluster diagnosis in this group. If not OK, (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
repair the circuit to ground as required. cable. Remove the headlamp switch from the instru-
ment panel. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument Panel
KEY-IN IGNITION SWITCH Systems for the procedures. Unplug the headlamp
For circuit descriptions and diagrams, refer to switch wire harness connectors. Check for continuity
8W-40 - Instrument Cluster or 8W-44 - Interior between the left front door jamb switch sense circuit
Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams. cavity of the headlamp switch wire harness connector
and a good ground. There should be continuity with
WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR- the driver door closed, and no continuity with the
BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE driver door open. If OK, go to Step 2. If not OK,
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY repair the circuit to the driver door jamb switch as
STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR required.
INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR (2) Check for continuity between the key-in switch
SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE- sense circuit terminal and the left front door jamb
CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR- switch sense terminal of the headlamp switch. There
BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL should be no continuity with the switch in the Off
INJURY. position, and continuity with the switch in the park
or head lamps On position. If OK, see the diagnosis
(1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative for the Instrument Cluster in this group. If not OK,
cable. Remove the steering column shrouds. Refer to replace the faulty headlamp switch.
Group 8D - Ignition Systems for the procedures.
Unplug the key-in ignition switch wire harness con- INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
nector from the ignition switch. Before performing this test, complete the testing of
(2) Check for continuity between the key-in switch the hard-wired chime warning system switches as
sense circuit and the left front door jamb switch described in this group. For circuit descriptions and
sense circuit terminals of the key-in ignition switch. diagrams, refer to 8W-40 - Instrument Cluster or
There should be continuity with the key in the igni- 8W-44 - Interior Lighting in Group 8W - Wiring Dia-
tion lock cylinder, and no continuity with the key grams.
removed from the ignition lock cylinder. If OK, go to
Step 3. If not OK, replace the faulty ignition switch WARNING: ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-
assembly. BAGS, REFER TO GROUP 8M - PASSIVE
(3) Check for continuity between the left front door RESTRAINT SYSTEMS BEFORE ATTEMPTING ANY
jamb switch sense circuit cavity of the key-in ignition STEERING WHEEL, STEERING COLUMN, OR
switch wire harness connector and a good ground. INSTRUMENT PANEL COMPONENT DIAGNOSIS OR
There should be continuity with the driver door open, SERVICE. FAILURE TO TAKE THE PROPER PRE-
and no continuity with the driver door closed. If OK, CAUTIONS COULD RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL AIR-
see the diagnosis for Instrument Cluster in this BAG DEPLOYMENT AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
group. If not OK, repair the circuit to the driver door INJURY.
jamb switch as required.
cable. Remove the instrument cluster from the
8U - 4 CHIME/BUZZER WARNING SYSTEMS XJ
instrument panel. Refer to Group 8E - Instrument cluster wire harness connector (connector B) and the
Panel Systems for the procedures. driver seat belt switch wire harness connector. There
(2) Unplug the headlamp switch and the key-in should be continuity. If OK, test the instrument clus-
ignition switch wire harness connectors. Check for ter as described in Group 8E - Instrument Panel Sys-
continuity between the key-in switch sense circuit tems. If not OK, repair the open circuit as required.
cavity of the right instrument cluster wire harness
connector (connector B) and a good ground. There
should be no continuity. If OK, go to Step 3. If not REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
OK, repair the short circuit as required.
(3) Check for continuity between the key-in switch CHIME WARNING SYSTEM SWITCHES
sense circuit cavities of the right instrument cluster Service procedures for the various hard-wired
wire harness connector (connector B) and the head- switches used in the chime warning system can be
lamp switch wire harness connector. There should be found in the proper group as follows:
continuity. If OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the • Driver door jamb switch - refer to Group 8L -
open circuit as required. Lamps
(4) Unplug the driver seat belt switch wire har- • Driver seat belt switch - refer to Group 23 -
ness connector. Check for continuity between the seat Body
belt switch sense circuit cavity of the right instru- • Headlamp switch - refer to Group 8E - Instru-
ment cluster wire harness connector (connector B) ment Panel Systems
and a good ground. There should be no continuity. If • Key-in ignition switch - refer to Group 8D - Igni-
OK, go to Step 5. If not OK, repair the short circuit tion Systems.
as required.
(5) Check for continuity between the seat belt
switch sense circuit cavities of the right instrument
XJ OVERHEAD CONSOLE SYSTEMS 8V - 1
OVERHEAD CONSOLE SYSTEMS

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 4
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . 8
COMPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 GARAGE DOOR OPENER STORAGE BIN
GARAGE DOOR OPENER STORAGE BIN . . . . . . 3 DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
READING AND COURTESY LAMP . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SUNGLASSES STORAGE BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PUSH BUTTON MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
THERMOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 READING AND COURTESY LAMP BULB . . . . . . 8
TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SUNGLASSES STORAGE BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TRIP COMPUTER, COMPASS, AND
THERMOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 THERMOMETER DISPLAY MODULE . . . . . . . . 7
TRIP COMPUTER, COMPASS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS
THERMOMETER DISPLAY MODULE . . . . . . . . 3 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SERVICE PROCEDURES
COMPASS CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL INFORMATION door opener storage bin, and a sunglasses storage

bin.
INTRODUCTION On models equipped with the Remote Keyless
An overhead console featuring a mini trip com- Entry (RKE) option, the RKE receiver is also located
puter, an electronic compass, and an outside ambient within the overhead console housing. Refer to Group
temperature thermometer is an available factory-in- 8P - Power Lock Systems for more information on
stalled option on this model. Refer to 8W-49 - Over- this feature.
head Console in Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams for Following are general descriptions of the major
complete circuit descriptions and diagrams. components used in the overhead console. Refer to
the owner’s manual in the vehicle glove box for more
NOTE: This group covers both Left-Hand Drive information on the features, use and operation of the
(LHD) and Right-Hand Drive (RHD) versions of this various overhead console components.
represent only the LHD version, the diagnostic and TRIP COMPUTER
service procedures outlined can generally be A mini trip computer is available on this model to
applied to either version. Exceptions to this rule provide several electronic functions and features. The
have been clearly identified as LHD or RHD, if a trip computer contains a central processing unit and
special illustration or procedure is required. interfaces with other modules in the vehicle on the
Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD) data bus network.
The CCD data bus network allows the sharing of
OVERHEAD CONSOLE sensor information. This helps to reduce wire har-
The overhead console for this model includes a ness complexity, reduce internal controller hardware,
mini trip computer, an electronic compass, and an and reduce component sensor current loads. At the
outside ambient temperature thermometer. The over- same time, this system provides increased reliability,
head console also houses two front-mounted and two enhanced diagnostics, and allows the addition of
rear-mounted reading and courtesy lamps, a garage many new feature capabilities.
8V - 2 OVERHEAD CONSOLE SYSTEMS XJ
Some of the functions and features that the trip cession flag can exceed the compensating ability of
computer supports and/or controls, include the fol- the compass unit if placed on the roof panel. Mag-
lowing display options: netic bit drivers used on the fasteners that hold the
• Compass and temperature assembly to the roof header can also affect compass
• Trip odometer (ODO) operation. If the vehicle roof should become magne-
• Average fuel economy (AVG ECO) tized, demagnetizing and calibration may be required
• Instant fuel economy (ECO) to restore proper compass operation. See Compass
• Distance to empty (DTE) Calibration or Compass Demagnetizing in the Service
• Elapsed time (ET) Procedures section of this group for these procedures.
• Blank display. The compass, trip computer, and thermometer dis-
Momentarily depressing and releasing the Step play module cannot be repaired, and is only available
button when the ignition switch is in the On position for service as a unit. If faulty or damaged, the com-
will cause the overhead console display to step plete module must be replaced. The push button
sequentially through the listed display options. (Step and U.S./Metric) switch module is serviced sep-
Momentarily depressing and releasing the U.S./Met- arately.
ric button toggles the display between U.S. and Met-
ric measurements. THERMOMETER
The push button (Step and U.S./Metric) switch The thermometer displays the outside ambient
module in the overhead console is hard wired to the temperature. The temperature display can be
trip computer. The compass flux-gate unit is integral changed from Fahrenheit to Celsius using the U.S./
to the trip computer, compass, and thermometer dis- Metric button, located just rearward of the display
play module unit. Data input for all other trip com- module. The displayed temperature is not an instant
puter functions is received through CCD data bus reading of conditions, but an average temperature. It
messages. The trip computer uses its internal pro- may take the thermometer display several minutes
gramming and all of these inputs to calculate and to respond to a major temperature change, such as
display the requested data. If the data displayed is driving out of a heated garage into winter tempera-
incorrect, see Trip Computer, Compass, and Ther- tures.
mometer Display Module - Self-Diagnostic Test in the When the ignition switch is turned to the Off posi-
Diagnosis and Testing section of this group. If these tion, the last displayed temperature reading stays in
tests prove inconclusive, the use of a DRB scan tool the thermometer unit memory. When the ignition
and the proper Diagnostic Procedures manual are switch is turned to the On position again, the ther-
recommended for further testing of the trip computer mometer will display the memory temperature if the
and the CCD data bus. engine coolant temperature is above about 52° C
The trip computer, compass, and thermometer dis- (125° F). If the engine coolant temperature is below
play module cannot be repaired, and is only available about 52° C (125° F), the thermometer will display
for service as a unit. If faulty or damaged, the com- the actual temperature sensed by the ambient tem-
plete module must be replaced. The push button perature sensor. The thermometer temperature dis-
(Step and U.S./Metric) switch module is serviced sep- play update interval varies with the vehicle speed.
arately. The thermometer function is supported by an
ambient temperature sensor. The sensor is mounted
COMPASS outside the passenger compartment near the front
The compass will display the direction in which the and center of the vehicle and is hard-wired to the
vehicle is pointed using the eight major compass module. The ambient temperature sensor is available
headings (Examples: north is N, northeast is NE). It as a separate service item.
does not display the headings in actual degrees. The thermometer, compass, and trip computer dis-
The self-calibrating compass unit requires no play module cannot be repaired, and are only avail-
adjusting in normal use. The only calibration that able for service as a unit. If faulty or damaged, the
may prove necessary is to drive the vehicle in three complete module must be replaced. The push button
complete circles, on level ground, in not less than 48 (Step and U.S./Metric) switch module and ambient
seconds. This will reorient the compass unit to its temperature sensor are serviced separately.
vehicle.
The compass unit also will compensate for magne- READING AND COURTESY LAMP
tism the body of the vehicle may acquire during nor- All reading and courtesy lamps located in the over-
mal use. However, avoid placing anything magnetic head console are activated by the door ajar switches.
directly on the roof of the vehicle. Magnetic mounts When the doors are closed, the lamps can be individ-
for an antenna, a repair order hat, or a funeral pro- ually activated by depressing the corresponding lens.
When a door is open, depressing the lamp lens message inputs being received from the instrument
switches will not turn the lamps off. Refer to Group cluster over the Chrysler Collision Detection (CCD)
8L - Lamps, for diagnosis of the reading and courtesy data bus. If the problem is a no-display condition,
lamps. use the following procedures. For circuit descriptions
The reading and courtesy lamp lens, and bulbs are and diagrams, refer to 8W-49 - Overhead Console in
available for service replacement. The reading and Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
courtesy lamp holders and switches are only avail- (1) Check the fuses in the junction block and the
able as part of the overhead console wire harness. If Power Distribution Center (PDC). If OK, go to Step
any reading lamp switch is faulty or damaged, the 2. If not OK, repair the shorted circuit or component
wire harness and all four switches must be replaced. as required and replace the faulty fuse(s).
GARAGE DOOR OPENER STORAGE BIN Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
A compartment in the overhead console is designed output fuse in the junction block. If OK, go to Step 3.
to hold most garage door opener remote control If not OK, repair the open circuit to the ignition
transmitters. The transmitter is mounted within the switch as required.
compartment with an adhesive-backed hook and loop (3) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
fastener patch. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
With the transmitter mounted in the storage bin, Remove the overhead console from the headliner.
adapter pegs located on the front of the storage bin Check for continuity between the ground circuit cav-
door are selected and mounted on a post near the ities of the overhead console wire harness connector
center of the storage bin door. The peg(s) selected and a good ground. There should be continuity. If
and/or the post must be long enough to depress the OK, go to Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit to
button of the transmitter, when the garage door ground as required.
opener storage bin door is depressed. The pegs may (4) Connect the battery negative cable. Check for
be stacked, if necessary. Refer to the owner’s manual battery voltage at the fused B(+) circuit cavity of the
in the vehicle glove box for more information. overhead console wire harness connector. If OK, go to
A transmitter mounting kit including the adhesive- Step 5. If not OK, repair the open circuit to the junc-
backed hook and loop fastener material and a selection block as required.
tion of pegs is available for service. The garage door (5) Turn the ignition switch to the On position.
opener storage bin door assembly is also available for Check for battery voltage at the fused ignition switch
service replacement. output circuit cavity of the overhead console wire
harness connector. If OK, proceed to the Self-Diag-
SUNGLASSES STORAGE BIN nostic Test in this group for further diagnosis of the
A sunglasses storage bin is included in the over- module and the CCD data bus. If not OK, repair the
head console. The interior of the bin is lined with a open circuit to the junction block as required.
foam rubber padding material to protect the sun-
glasses from being scratched. This bin features a SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST
push/push-type latching mechanism, and a viscous A self-diagnostic test is used to determine that the
dampening system for a fluid opening action. trip computer, compass, thermometer, and all of the
The sunglasses storage bin door, latch, viscous display module segments are operating properly elec-
damper, hinge spring and housing are available for trically. Initiate the self-diagnostic test as follows:
service only as a complete module. If any part of this (1) With the ignition switch in the Off position,
unit is faulty or damaged, the entire module must be simultaneously press and hold the Step button and
replaced. the U.S./Metric button.
(3) Continue to hold both buttons until the display
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING module performs a display segment test. In this test,
all of the vacuum fluorescent display segments are
TRIP COMPUTER, COMPASS, AND lighted. This test will:
THERMOMETER DISPLAY MODULE a. Verify that all display segments are functional
If the problem with the trip computer, compass, b. Check the internal circuitry of the module
and thermometer display module is an inaccurate or c. Check that all of the CCD data bus messages
scrambled display, use the Self-Diagnostic Test proce- needed are being received.
dures. If the problem is incorrect display lighting lev- (4) Respond to the respective test results as fol-
els, use a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic lows. If all tests are passed, the module will automat-
Procedures manual to test for the correct dimming ically return to normal operation.
d. In the display segment test, if any segment SENSOR TEST
should fail to light the unit is faulty and must be (1) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
replaced. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
e. If the internal circuitry test is failed, the module Unplug the temperature sensor wire harness connec-
will display “FAIL”. If “FAIL” is displayed, the unit is tor.
faulty and must be replaced. (2) Measure the resistance of the temperature sen-
f. If the CCD data bus message test is failed, the sor. At -40° C (-40° F), the sensor resistance is 336
module will display “CCD”. If “CCD” is displayed, the kilohms. At 55° C (131° F), the sensor resistance is
use of a DRB scan tool and the proper Diagnostic 2.986 kilohms. The sensor resistance should read
Procedures manual are required for further diagno- between these two values. If OK, go to the Sensor
sis. Circuit Test. If not OK, replace the faulty sensor.
(5) Momentarily depress and release either button
one time to exit the self-diagnostic test mode and SENSOR CIRCUIT TEST
return the trip computer, compass, and thermometer (1) Turn the ignition switch to the Off position.
display module to normal operation. Disconnect and isolate the battery negative cable.
Unplug the ambient temperature sensor wire har-
NOTE: If the compass functions, but accuracy is ness connector and the overhead console wire har-
suspect, it may be necessary to perform a variation ness connector.
adjustment. This procedure allows the compass (2) Connect a jumper wire between the two termi-
unit to accommodate variations in the earth’s mag- nals in the body half of the sensor wire harness con-
netic field strength, based on geographic location. nector.
See the Compass Variation Adjustment procedures, (3) Check for continuity between the sensor return
in this group. circuit and the ambient temperature sensor signal
circuit cavities of the overhead console wire harness
NOTE: If the compass reading has blanked out, and connector. There should be continuity. If OK, go to
only “CAL” appears in the display module, demag- Step 4. If not OK, repair the open circuit as required.
netizing may be necessary to remove excessive (4) Remove the jumper wire from the ambient tem-
residual magnetic fields from the vehicle. See the perature sensor wire harness connector. Check for
Compass Demagnetizing procedure, in this group. continuity between the sensor return circuit cavity of
the overhead console wire harness connector and a
good ground. There should be no continuity. If OK, go
THERMOMETER to Step 5. If not OK, repair the short circuit as
The thermometer function is supported by a ambi- required.
ent temperature sensor, a wiring circuit, and a por- (5) Check for continuity between the ambient tem-
tion of the overhead console trip computer, compass, perature sensor signal circuit cavity of the overhead
and thermometer display module display. The sensor console wire harness connector and a good ground.
is mounted outside the passenger compartment near There should be no continuity. If OK, see the Trip
the front and center of the vehicle. Computer, Compass, and Thermometer Display Mod-
If any portion of the ambient temperature sensor ule diagnosis in this group. If not OK, repair the
circuit fails, the thermometer display will self-diag- short circuit as required.
nose the circuit. An “SC” (short circuit) will appear in
the display in place of the temperature, when the
SERVICE PROCEDURES
sensor is exposed to temperatures above 55° C (131°
F), or if the sensor circuit is shorted. An “OC” (open
circuit) will appear in the display in place of the tem-
COMPASS VARIATION ADJUSTMENT
Variance is the difference between magnetic north
perature, when the sensor is exposed to temperatures
and geographic north. In some geographic locations,
below -40° C (-40° F), or if the sensor circuit is open.
the difference between magnetic and geographic
The ambient temperature sensor circuit can also be
north is great enough to cause the compass to give
diagnosed using the following Sensor Test, and Sen-
false readings. If this problem occurs, the compass
sor Circuit Test. If the temperature sensor and cir-
variance must be set.
cuit are confirmed to be OK, but the temperature
To set the compass variance:
display is inoperative or incorrect, see the Trip Com-
(1) Using the Variance Settings map, find your
puter, Compass, and Thermometer Display Module
geographic location and note the zone number (Fig.
diagnosis in this group. For circuit descriptions and
1).
diagrams, refer to 8W-49 - Overhead Console in
Group 8W - Wiring Diagrams.
Fig. 1 Variance Settings

(2) Turn the ignition switch to the On position. If This allows the compass unit to compensate for small
the compass/temperature data is not currently being changes in the residual magnetism that the vehicle
displayed, momentarily depress and release the Step may acquire during normal use. Do not attempt to
button to step through the display options until you calibrate the compass near large metal objects such
have reached the compass/temperature display. as other vehicles, large buildings, or bridges.
(3) Depress both the U.S./Metric, and the Step but-
tons. Hold the buttons down until “VAR” appears in NOTE: Whenever the compass is calibrated manu-
the display. This takes about five seconds. ally, the variation number must also be reset. See
(4) Release both of the buttons. The current vari- Compass Variation Adjustment in the Service Pro-
ance zone number setting will appear in the display. cedures section of this group.
(5) Press and release the U.S./Metric button to
step through the zone numbers, until the zone num- Calibrate the compass manually as follows:
ber for your geographic location appears in the dis- (1) Start the engine. If the compass/temperature
play. data is not currently being displayed, momentarily
(6) Press the Step button to enter this zone num- depress and release the Step button to step through
ber into the compass unit memory. the display options until you have reached the com-
(7) Confirm that the correct directions are now pass/temperature display.
indicated by the compass. (2) Depress both the U.S./Metric and the Step but-
tons. Hold the buttons down until “CAL” appears in
COMPASS CALIBRATION the display. This takes about ten seconds, and
appears about five seconds after “VAR” is displayed.
CAUTION: Do not place any external magnets, such (3) Release both of the buttons.
as magnetic roof mount antennas, in the vicinity of (4) Drive the vehicle on a level surface, away from
the compass. Do not use magnetic tools when ser- large metal objects, through three or more complete
vicing the overhead console. circles in not less than 48 seconds. The “CAL” mes-
sage will disappear from the display to indicate that
The electronic compass unit features a self-cali- the compass is now calibrated.
brating design, which simplifies the calibration pro-
cedure. This feature automatically updates the
compass calibration while the vehicle is being driven.
NOTE: If the “CAL” message remains in the dis-
play, either there is excessive magnetism near the
compass, or the unit is faulty. Repeat the demagne-
tizing and calibration procedures at least one more
time.
NOTE: If the wrong direction is still indicated in the

compass display, the area selected for calibration
may be too close to a strong magnetic field. Repeat
the calibration procedure in another location.
COMPASS DEMAGNETIZING
A degaussing tool (Special Tool 6029) is used to
demagnetize, or degauss, the overhead console for-
ward mounting screw(s) and the roof panel. Equiva-
lent units must be rated as continuous duty for 110/
115 volts and 60 Hz. They must also have a field
strength of over 350 gauss at 7 millimeters (0.25
inch) beyond the tip of the probe.
To demagnetize the roof panel and the overhead
console forward mounting screw(s), proceed as fol-
lows:
(1) Be certain that the ignition switch is in the Off
position, before you begin the demagnetizing proce-
dure.
(2) Plug in the degaussing tool, while keeping the
tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the
compass unit. Fig. 2 Roof Demagnetizing Pattern
(3) Slowly approach the head of the overhead con-
sole forward mounting screw with the degaussing tool at least 11 centimeters (4 inches) to each side of
tool plugged in. the roof center line, and 28 centimeters (11 inches)
(4) Contact the head of each screw with the plastic back from the windshield header.
coated tip of the degaussing tool for about two sec- (10) With the degaussing tool still energized,
onds. slowly back it away from the roof panel. When the
(5) With the degaussing tool still energized, slowly tip of the tool is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from
back it away from the screw. When the tip of the tool the roof panel, unplug the tool.
is at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) from the screw (11) Calibrate the compass and adjust the compass
head, unplug the tool. variance as described in the Service Procedures sec-
(6) Place a piece of paper approximately 22 by 28 tion of this group.
centimeters (8.5 by 11 inches), oriented on the vehicle
lengthwise from front to rear, on the center line of REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
the roof at the windshield header (Fig. 2). The pur-
pose of the paper is to protect the roof panel from
scratches, and to define the area to be demagnetized.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
(7) Plug in the degaussing tool, while keeping the
cable.
tool at least 61 centimeters (2 feet) away from the
(2) Remove the two screws located forward of the
compass unit.
display module that secure the overhead console to
(8) Slowly approach the center line of the roof
the upper windshield opening reinforcement (Fig. 3).
panel at the windshield header, with the degaussing
(3) To release the overhead console from the rear
tool plugged in.
mounting bracket, use your fingertips to gently pull
(9) Contact the roof panel with the plastic coated
the sides of the overhead console housing outward
tip of the degaussing tool. Be sure that the template
near the rear mounting bracket.
is in place to avoid scratching the roof panel. Using a
(4) Move the overhead console forward to disen-
slow, back-and-forth sweeping motion, and allowing
gage the rear mounting tab from the headliner.
13 millimeters (0.50 inch) between passes, move the
Fig. 3 Overhead Console Remove/Install Fig. 4 Trip Computer, Compass, and Thermometer
(5) Lower the overhead console far enough to Display Module Remove/Install
access the two wire harness connectors. (6) Remove the trip computer, compass, and ther-
(6) Unplug one wire harness connector near the mometer display module from the overhead console
push button module towards the front of the over- housing.
head console. (7) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
(7) Unplug one wire harness connector from the Tighten the mounting screws to 2.2 N·m (20 in. lbs.).
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) receiver near the center
of the overhead console, if the vehicle is so equipped. PUSH BUTTON MODULE
(8) Remove the overhead console from the head- (1) Remove the overhead console from the vehicle.
liner. See Overhead Console in this group for the proce-
(9) Reverse the removal procedures to install. dures.
Tighten the overhead console mounting screws to 2.7 (2) Unplug the push button module wire harness
N·m (24 in. lbs.). connector from the trip computer, compass, and ther-
mometer display module.
TRIP COMPUTER, COMPASS, AND (3) Remove the four screws that secure the push
THERMOMETER DISPLAY MODULE button module to the overhead console housing (Fig.
(1) Remove the overhead console from the vehicle. 5).
See Overhead Console in this group for the proce-
dures.
(2) Remove the two screws that secure the forward
end of the trip computer, compass, and thermometer
display module to the overhead console housing (Fig.
4).
(3) Gently flex the sides of the overhead console
housing as required to release the trip computer,
compass, and thermometer display module mounting
pins.
(4) Pull the trip computer, compass, and thermom-
eter display module away from the overhead console
housing far enough to access the two wire harness
connectors. Fig. 5 Push Button Module Remove/Install
(5) Unplug the overhead console and push button
(4) Remove the push button module from the over-
module wire harness connectors from the trip com-
head console.
puter, compass, and thermometer display module.
READING AND COURTESY LAMP BULB

cable.
(2) Insert a long, narrow, flat-bladed tool in the
notch on the edge of the reading and courtesy lamp
lens.
(3) Gently pry the lens downward from the over-
head console housing and pivot the lens down. It may
be necessary to move the tool along the edge of the
lens to free the lens from the console housing.
(4) Unsnap the bulb from the bulb holders by pull-
ing the bulb gently downwards.
(5) Install a new bulb by aligning its base with the
bulb holders and pushing the bulb firmly into place.
(6) Pivot the lens back up into position and press
upward firmly until it snaps into place.
(7) Connect the battery negative cable. Fig. 6 Sunglasses Storage Bin Module Remove/
(8) Test the lamp by depressing the lens to check Install
for proper lamp switching and lighting. (5) Reverse the removal procedures to install.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER STORAGE BIN DOOR
(1) Open the garage door opener storage bin door. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
(2) Using a trim stick or another suitable wide (1) Disconnect and isolate the battery negative
flat-bladed tool, gently pry between the door pivot cable.
pin and the pivot hole on one side of the overhead (2) Locate the ambient temperature sensor, below
console housing until the pivot pin clears the pivot the grille and behind the front bumper on the radia-
hole. tor support crossmember (Fig. 7).
(3) Use a gentle twisting action to remove the
garage door opener storage bin door from the over-
head console housing.
(4) To install, insert the pivot pin on one side of
the door into the pivot hole in the overhead console
housing. Gently depress the pivot pin on the other
side of the door until it clears the side of the garage
door opener storage bin opening of the overhead con-
sole housing, and push the door into the opening.
Guide the door into the opening so that the second
pivot pin snaps into its pivot hole.
SUNGLASSES STORAGE BIN

The sunglasses storage bin door and bin, housing,
damper, spring and latch are serviced only as a unit.
Remove the sunglasses storage bin module from the
overhead console as follows:
(1) Remove the overhead console from the vehicle.
See Overhead Console in this group for the proce-
dures.
(2) Disengage the overhead console courtesy lamp
wire harness from the retainers molded into the sun-
glasses storage bin housing.
(3) Remove the six screws that secure the sun-
glasses storage bin module to the overhead console
housing (Fig. 6).
(4) Remove the sunglasses storage bin module
from the overhead console.
Fig. 7 Ambient Temperature Sensor Remove/Install
(3) Unplug the ambient temperature sensor wire SPECIAL TOOLS
harness connector.
(4) Remove the screw that secures the ambient OVERHEAD CONSOLE
temperature sensor to the radiator support cross-
member.
(5) Remove the ambient temperature sensor from
the vehicle.
Tighten the ambient temperature sensor mounting
screw to 3.4 N·m (30 in. lbs.).
Degaussing Tool 6029

XJ WIRING DIAGRAMS 8W - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
page page
AIR CONDITIONING-HEATER . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-1 POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-1

AIRBAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-1 POWER DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-1
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-1 POWER MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-1
AUDIO SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-1 POWER SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-1
CHARGING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-1 POWER WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-1
COMPONENT INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-02-1 REAR LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-1
CONNECTOR LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-90-1 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-1
CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-1 SPLICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-1
FRONT LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-1 SPLICE LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-95-1
FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-1 STARTING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-1
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-01-1 TRAILER TOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-1
GROUND DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-1 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . 8W-31-1
HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET . 8W-41-1 TURN SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-1
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-1 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-1
INTERIOR LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-1 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM . . . . 8W-39-1
JUNCTION BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-1 WIPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-1
OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-1
XJ 8W - 01 GENERAL INFORMATION 8W - 01 - 1
8W-01 GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 4 TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CIRCUIT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 4 TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS . . . . 10
CONNECTOR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . .... 7 SERVICE PROCEDURES
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL REPLACEMENT . 12
SENSITIVE DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DIODE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
NOTES, CAUTIONS, and WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . 7 TERMINAL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SECTION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TERMINAL/CONNECTOR REPAIR-MOLEX
SPLICE LOCATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 TERMINAL/CONNECTOR REPAIR—THOMAS
TAKE OUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 AND BETTS CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 WIRING REPAIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SPECIAL TOOLS
INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS .... 9 WIRING/TERMINAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION Components are shown two ways. A solid line
around a component indicates that the component is
INTRODUCTION complete. A dashed line around a component indi-
Chrysler wiring diagrams are designed to provide cates that the component being shown is not com-
information regarding the vehicles wiring content. In plete. Incomplete components have a reference
order to effectively use Chrysler wiring diagrams to number to indicate the page where the component is
diagnose and repair a Chrysler vehicle, it is impor- shown complete.
tant to understand all of their features and charac- It is important to realize that no attempt is made
teristics. on the diagrams to represent components and wiring
Diagrams are arranged such that the power (B+) as they appear on the vehicle. For example, a short
side of the circuit is placed near the top of the page, piece of wire is treated the same as a long one. In
and the ground (B-) side of the circuit is placed near addition, switches and other components are shown
the bottom of the page. as simply as possible, with regard to function only.
All switches, components, and modules are shown
in the at rest position with the doors closed and the
key removed from the ignition.
8W - 01 - 2 8W - 01 GENERAL INFORMATION XJ
The System shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It does not represent the actual circuit shown in the WIRING
DIAGRAM SECTION.
The System shown here is an EXAMPLE ONLY. It does not represent the actual circuit shown in the WIRING
DIAGRAM SECTION.
CIRCUIT INFORMATION CIRCUIT FUNCTIONS

Each wire shown in the diagrams contains a code All circuits in the diagrams use an alpha/numeric
which identifies the main circuit, part of the main code to identify the wire and its function. To identify
circuit, gage of wire, and color (Fig. 1). which circuit code applies to a system, refer to the
Circuit Identification Code Chart. This chart shows
the main circuits only and does not show the second-
ary codes that may apply to some models.
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION CODE CHART
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
A BATTERY FEED
B BRAKE CONTROLS
C CLIMATE CONTROLS
D DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUITS
E DIMMING ILLUMINATION CIRCUITS
F FUSED CIRCUITS
G MONITORING CIRCUITS (GAUGES)
Fig. 1 Wire Code Identification H OPEN

I NOT USED
WIRE COLOR CODE CHART
J OPEN
STANDARD K POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
COLOR CODE COLOR TRACER L EXTERIOR LIGHTING
COLOR M INTERIOR LIGHTING
BL BLUE WT N NOT USED
BK BLACK WT O NOT USED
BR BROWN WT P POWER OPTION (BATTERY FEED)
DB DARK BLUE WT Q POWER OPTIONS (IGNITION FEED)
DG DARK GREEN WT R PASSIVE RESTRAINT
GY GRAY BK S SUSPENSION/STEERING
LB LIGHT BLUE BK T TRANSMISSION/TRANSAXLE/
LG LIGHT GREEN BK TRANSFER CASE
OR ORANGE BK U OPEN
PK PINK BK or WT V SPEED CONTROL, WIPER/WASHER
RD RED WT W OPEN
TN TAN WT X AUDIO SYSTEMS
VT VIOLET WT Y OPEN
WT WHITE BK Z GROUNDS
YL YELLOW BK
* WITH TRACER
SECTION IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS

The wiring diagrams are grouped into individual International symbols are used throughout the wir-
sections. If a component is most likely found in a par- ing diagrams. These symbols are consistent with
ticular group, it will be shown complete (all wires, those being used around the world
connectors, and pins) within that group. For exam-
ple, the Auto Shutdown Relay is most likely to be
found in Group 30, so it is shown there complete. It
can, however, be shown partially in another group if
it contains some associated wiring.
GROUP TOPIC
8W-01 thru 8W-09 General Information and
Diagram Overview
8W-10 thru 8W-19 Main Sources of Power and
Vehicle Grounding
8W-20 thru 8W-29 Starting and Charging
8W-30 thru 8W-39 Powertrain/Drivetrain
Systems
8W-40 thru 8W-49 Body Electrical items and A/C
8W-50 thru 8W-59 Exterior Lighting, Wipers, and
Trailer Tow
8W-60 thru 8W-69 Power Accessories
8W-70 Splice Information
8W-80 Connector Pin Outs
8W-90 Connector Locations
(including grounds)
8W-95 Splice Locations
Wiring Diagram Symbols

TERMINOLOGY
This a list of terms with there definitions used in
the wiring diagrams.
Built-Up-Export . . . . . . . . Vehicles Built For Sale In

Markets Other Than North America
Except-Built-Up-Export . . Vehicles Built For Sale In
North America
LHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Left Hand Drive Vehicles
RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right Hand Drive Vehicles
ATX . . . Automatic Transmission-Front Wheel Drive Fig. 3 Connector Identification
MTX . . . . Manual Transmission-Front Wheel Drive LOCATIONS
AT . . . . . Automatic Transmission-Rear Wheel Drive Section 8W-90 contains connector/ground location
MT . . . . . . Manual Transmission-Rear Wheel Drive illustrations. The illustrations contain the connector
SOHC . . . . . . . . . . . Single Over Head Cam Engine name (or number)/ground number and component
DOHC . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Over Head Cam Engine identification. Connector/ground location charts in
Section 8W-90 reference the illustration number for
CONNECTOR INFORMATION components and connectors.
Section 8W-80 shows each connector and the cir-
CAUTION: Not all connectors are serviced. Some
cuits involved with that connector. The connectors
connectors are serviced only with a harness. A typ-
are identified using the name/number on the Dia-
ical example might be the Supplemental Restraint
gram pages.
System connectors. Always check parts availability
before attempting a repair.
SPLICE LOCATIONS
Splice Location charts in Section 8W-70 show the
IDENTIFICATION entire splice, and provide references to other sections
In-line connectors are identified by a number, as the splice serves.
follows: Section 8W-95 contains illustrations that show the
• In-line connectors located on the engine com- general location of the splices in each harness. The
partment harness are C100 series numbers. illustrations show the splice by number, and provide
• Connectors located on the instrument panel a written location.
harness are C200 series numbers.
• Connectors located on the body harness are NOTES, CAUTIONS, and WARNINGS
C300 series numbers. Throughout this group additional important infor-
• Jumper harness connectors are C400 series mation is presented in three ways; Notes, Cautions,
numbers. and Warnings.
• Grounds and ground connectors are identi- NOTES are used to help describe how switches or
fied with a “G” and follow the same series number- components operate to complete a particular circuit.
ing as the in-line connector. They are also used to indicate different conditions
Component connectors are identified by the compo- that may appear on the vehicle. For example, an
nent name instead of a number (Fig. 2). Multiple up-to and after condition.
connectors on a component use a C1, C2, etc. identi- CAUTIONS are used to indicate information that
fier (Fig. 3). could prevent making an error that may damage the
vehicle.
WARNINGS provide information to prevent per-
sonal injury and vehicle damage. Below is a list of
general warnings that should be followed any time a
vehicle is being serviced.
WARNING: ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY GLASSES FOR

EYE PROTECTION.
WARNING: USE SAFETY STANDS ANYTIME A PRO-

Fig. 2 Component Identification CEDURE REQUIRES BEING UNDER A VEHICLE.
WARNING: BE SURE THAT THE IGNITION SWITCH (3) When using a voltmeter, be sure to connect the
ALWAYS IS IN THE OFF POSITION, UNLESS THE ground lead first.
PROCEDURE REQUIRES IT TO BE ON. (4) Do not remove the part from its protective
packing until it is time to install the part.
(5) Before removing the part from its package,
WARNING: SET THE PARKING BRAKE WHEN ground the package to a known good ground on the
WORKING ON ANY VEHICLE. AN AUTOMATIC vehicle.
TRANSMISSION SHOULD BE IN PARK. A MANUAL
TRANSMISSION SHOULD BE IN NEUTRAL.
WARNING: OPERATE THE ENGINE ONLY IN A

WELL-VENTILATED AREA.
WARNING: KEEP AWAY FROM MOVING PARTS

WHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING, ESPECIALLY THE
FAN AND BELTS.
WARNING: TO PREVENT SERIOUS BURNS, AVOID Fig. 4 Electrostatic Discharge Symbol

CONTACT WITH HOT PARTS SUCH AS THE RADIA-
TOR, EXHAUST MANIFOLD(S), TAIL PIPE, CATA- DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
LYTIC CONVERTER, AND MUFFLER.
TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS
When diagnosing a problem in an electrical circuit
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW FLAME OR SPARKS there are several common tools necessary. These tools
NEAR THE BATTERY. GASES ARE ALWAYS are listed and explained below.
PRESENT IN AND AROUND THE BATTERY. • Jumper Wire - This is a test wire used to con-
nect two points of a circuit. It can be used to bypass
an open in a circuit.
WARNING: ALWAYS REMOVE RINGS, WATCHES,
LOOSE HANGING JEWELRY, AND LOOSE CLOTH- WARNING: NEVER USE A JUMPER WIRE ACROSS
ING. A LOAD, SUCH AS A MOTOR, CONNECTED
BETWEEN A BATTERY FEED AND GROUND.
TAKE OUTS • Voltmeter - Used to check for voltage on a cir-
The abbreviation T/O is used in the component cuit. Always connect the black lead to a known good
location section to indicate a point in which the wir- ground and the red lead to the positive side of the
ing harness branches out to a component. circuit.
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) SENSITIVE CAUTION: Most of the electrical components used
DEVICES in today’s vehicle are solid state. When checking
All ESD sensitive components are solid state and a voltages in these circuits use a meter with a 10-me-
symbol (Fig. 4) is used to indicate this. When han- gohm or greater impedance rating.
dling any component with this symbol comply with
the following procedures to reduce the possibility of • Ohmmeter - Used to check the resistance
electrostatic charge build up on the body and inad- between two points of a circuit. Low or no resistance
vertent discharge into the component. If it is not in a circuit means good continuity.
known whether the part is ESD sensitive, assume
CAUTION: - Most of the electrical components used
that it is.
in today’s vehicle are Solid State. When checking
(1) Always touch a known good ground before han-
resistance in these circuits use a meter with a
dling the part. This should be repeated while han-
10-megohm or greater impedance rating. In addi-
dling the part and more frequently after sliding
tion, make sure the power is disconnected from the
across a seat, sitting down from a standing position,
circuit. Circuits that are powered up by the vehicle
or walking a distance.
electrical system can cause damage to the equip-
(2) Avoid touching electrical terminals of the part,
ment and provide false readings.
unless instructed to do so by a written procedure.
• Probing Tools - These tools are used for probing
terminals in connectors (Fig. 5). Select the proper
size tool from Special Tool Package 6807, and insert
it into the terminal being tested. Use the other end
of the tool to insert the meter probe.
Fig. 5 Probing Tool

INTERMITTENT AND POOR CONNECTIONS
Most intermittent electrical problems are caused
by faulty electrical connections or wiring. It is also
possible for a sticking component or relay to cause a
Fig. 6 Testing for Voltage Potential
problem. Before condemning a component or wiring
assembly check the following items. TESTING FOR CONTINUITY
• Connectors are fully seated (1) Remove the fuse for the circuit being checked
• Spread terminals, or terminal push out or, disconnect the battery.
• Terminals in the wiring assembly are fully (2) Connect one lead of the ohmmeter to one side
seated into the connector/component and locked in of the circuit being tested (Fig. 7).
position (3) Connect the other lead to the other end of the
• Dirt or corrosion on the terminals. Any amount circuit being tested. Low or no resistance means good
of corrosion or dirt could cause an intermittent prob- continuity.
lem
• Damaged connector/component casing exposing
the item to dirt and moisture
• Wire insulation that has rubbed through causing
a short to ground
• Some or all of the wiring strands broken inside
of the insulation covering.
• Wiring broken inside of the insulation
TROUBLESHOOTING TESTS
Before beginning any tests on a vehicles electrical
system use the Wiring Diagrams and study the cir-
cuit. Also refer to the Troubleshooting Wiring Prob-
lems in this section.
TESTING FOR VOLTAGE POTENTIAL

(1) Connect the ground lead of a voltmeter to a
known good ground (Fig. 6).
(2) Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the
selected test point. The vehicle ignition may need to
be turned ON to check voltage. Refer to the appropri-
ate test procedure.
Fig. 7 Testing for Continuity
TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND TROUBLESHOOTING WIRING PROBLEMS
(1) Remove the fuse and disconnect all items When troubleshooting wiring problems there are
involved with the fuse. six steps which can aid in the procedure. The steps
(2) Connect a test light or a voltmeter across the are listed and explained below. Always check for non-
terminals of the fuse. factory items added to the vehicle before doing any
(3) Starting at the fuse block, wiggle the wiring diagnosis. If the vehicle is equipped with these items,
harness about six to eight inches apart and watch disconnect them to verify these add-on items are not
the voltmeter/test lamp. the cause of the problem.
(4) If the voltmeter registers voltage or the test (1) Verify the problem.
lamp glows, there is a short to ground in that gen- (2) Verify any related symptoms. Do this by per-
eral area of the wiring harness. forming operational checks on components that are
in the same circuit. Refer to the wiring diagrams.
TESTING FOR A SHORT TO GROUND ON FUSES (3) Analyze the symptoms. Use the wiring dia-
POWERING SEVERAL LOADS grams to determine what the circuit is doing, where
(1) Refer to the wiring diagrams and disconnect or the problem most likely is occurring and where the
isolate all items on the suspected fused circuits. diagnosis will continue.
(2) Replace the blown fuse. (4) Isolate the problem area.
(3) Supply power to the fuse by turning ON the (5) Repair the problem.
ignition switch or re-connecting the battery. (6) Verify proper operation. For this step check for
(4) Start connecting the items in the fuse circuit proper operation of all items on the repaired circuit.
one at a time. When the fuse blows the circuit with Refer to the wiring diagrams.
the short to ground has been isolated.
TESTING FOR A VOLTAGE DROP SERVICE PROCEDURES

(1) Connect the positive lead of the voltmeter to
the side of the circuit closest to the battery (Fig. 8). WIRING REPAIR
(2) Connect the other lead of the voltmeter to the When replacing or repairing a wire, it is important
other side of the switch or component. that the correct gage be used as shown in the wiring
(3) Operate the item. diagrams. The wires must also be held securely in
(4) The voltmeter will show the difference in volt- place to prevent damage to the insulation.
age between the two points. (1) Disconnect battery negative cable
(2) Remove 1 inch of insulation from each end of
the wire.
(3) Place a piece of heat shrink tubing over one
side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long
enough to cover and seal the entire repair area.
(4) Spread the strands of the wire apart on each
part of the exposed wire (example 1). (Fig. 9)
(5) Push the two ends of wire together until the
strands of wire are close to the insulation (example
2) (Fig. 9)
(6) Twist the wires together (example 3) (Fig. 9)
(7) Solder the connection together using rosin core
type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
(8) Center the heat shrink tubing over the joint,
and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the
tubing is tightly sealed and sealant comes out of both
ends of the tubing.
(9) Secure the wire to the existing ones to prevent
chafing or damage to the insulation
(10) Connect battery and test all affected systems.
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR REPAIR-MOLEX
Fig. 8 Testing for Voltage Drop CONNECTORS
(1) Disconnect battery.
Fig. 11 Using Special Tool 6742

(2) Disconnect the connector from its mating half/
component.
(3) Push in the two lock tabs on the side of the
connector (Fig. 12).
Fig. 9 Wire Repair

(2) Disconnect the connector from its mating half/
component.
(3) Insert the terminal releasing special tool 6742
into the terminal end of the connector (Fig. 10).
Fig. 12 Thomas and Betts Connector Lock Release

Tabs
(4) Insert the probe end of special tool 6934 into
the back of the connector cavity (Fig. 13).
(5) Grasp the wire and tool 6934 and slowly
remove the wire and terminal from the connector.
Fig. 10 Molex Connector Repair (6) Repair or replace the terminal.
(4) Using special tool 6742 release the locking fin- (7) Install the wire and terminal in the connector.
gers on the terminal (Fig. 11). Fully seat the terminal in the connector.
(5) Pull on the wire to remove it from the connec- (8) Push in the single lock tab on the side of the
tor. connector (Fig. 14).
(6) Repair or replace the connector or terminal, as
necessary. CONNECTOR REPLACEMENT
TERMINAL/CONNECTOR REPAIR—THOMAS (2) Disconnect the connector that is to be repaired
AND BETTS CONNECTORS from its mating half/component
(1) Disconnect battery. (3) Remove the connector locking wedge, if
required (Fig. 15)
(4) Position the connector locking finger away from
the terminal using the proper pick from special tool
kit 6680. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal
from the connector (Fig. 16) (Fig. 17).
(5) Reset the terminal locking tang, if it has one.
(6) Insert the removed wire in the same cavity on
the repair connector.
(7) Repeat steps four through six for each wire in
the connector, being sure that all wires are inserted
into the proper cavities. For additional connector pin-
out identification, refer to the wiring diagrams.
(8) Insert the connector locking wedge into the
repaired connector, if required.
(9) Connect connector to its mating half/compo-
nent.
(10) Connect battery and test all affected systems.
Fig. 13 Removing Wire Terminal
Fig. 16 Terminal Removal

CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL REPLACEMENT
Fig. 14 Single Lock Tab
Fig. 17 Terminal Removal Using Special Tool

Fig. 15 Connector Locking Wedge (2) Disconnect the connector (that is to be
repaired) from its mating half/component.
(3) Cut off the existing wire connector directly (3) Remove connector locking wedge, if required
behind the insulator. Remove six inches of tape from (Fig. 19).
the harness.
(4) Stagger cut all wires on the harness side at 1/2
inch intervals (Fig. 18).
(5) Remove 1 inch of insulation from each wire on
the harness side.
(6) Stagger cut the matching wires on the repair
connector assembly in the opposite order as was done
on the harness side of the repair. Allow extra length
for soldered connections. Check that the overall
length is the same as the original (Fig. 18).
Fig. 19 Connector Locking Wedge Tab (Typical)

(4) Position the connector locking finger away from
the terminal using the proper pick from special tool
kit 6680. Pull on the wire to remove the terminal
from the connector (Fig. 20) (Fig. 21).
Fig. 18 Stagger Cutting Wires

(7) Remove 1 inch of insulation from each wire.
(8) Place a piece of heat shrink tubing over one
side of the wire. Be sure the tubing will be long
enough to cover and seal the entire repair area.
(9) Spread the strands of the wire apart on each
part of the exposed wires.
(10) Push the two ends of wire together until the
strands of wire are close to the insulation.
(11) Twist the wires together.
(12) Solder the connection together using rosin
core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
(13) Center the heat shrink tubing over the joint Fig. 20 Terminal Removal
and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the (5) Cut the wire 6 inches from the back of the con-
tubing is tightly sealed and sealant comes out of both nector.
ends of the tubing (6) Remove 1 inch of insulation from the wire on
(14) Repeat steps 8 through 13 for each wire. the harness side.
(15) Re-tape the wire harness starting 1-1/2 inches (7) Select a wire from the terminal repair assem-
behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. bly that best matches the color wire being repaired.
(16) Re-connect the repaired connector. (8) Cut the repair wire to the proper length and
(17) Connect the battery, and test all affected sys- remove 1 inch of insulation.
tems. (9) Place a piece of heat shrink tubing over one
side of the wire. Make sure the tubing will be long
TERMINAL REPLACEMENT enough to cover and seal the entire repair area.
(1) Disconnect battery. (10) Spread the strands of the wire apart on each
(2) Disconnect the connector being repaired from part of the exposed wires.
its mating half. Remove connector locking wedge, if (11) Push the two ends of wire together until the
required (Fig. 19). strands of wire are close to the insulation.
(2) Locate the diode in the harness, and remove
the protective covering.
(3) Remove the diode from the harness, pay atten-
tion to the current flow direction (Fig. 22).
Fig. 21 Terminal Removal Using Special Tool

(12) Twist the wires together.
(13) Solder the connection together using rosin
core type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
(14) Center the heat shrink tubing over the joint Fig. 22 Diode Identification
and heat using a heat gun. Heat the joint until the (4) Remove the insulation from the wires in the
tubing is tightly sealed and sealant comes out of both harness. Only remove enough insulation to solder in
ends of the tubing. the new diode.
(15) Insert the repaired wire into the connector. (5) Install the new diode in the harness, making
(16) Install the connector locking wedge, if sure current flow is correct. If necessary refer to the
required, and reconnect the connector to its mating appropriate wiring diagram for current flow.
half/component. (6) Solder the connection together using rosin core
(17) Re-tape the wire harness starting 1-1/2 inches type solder only. Do not use acid core solder.
behind the connector and 2 inches past the repair. (7) Tape the diode to the harness using electrical
(18) Connect battery, and test all affected systems. tape making, sure the diode is completely sealed
from the elements.
DIODE REPLACEMENT (8) Re-connect the battery, and test affected sys-
(1) Disconnect the battery. tems.
SPECIAL TOOLS
WIRING/TERMINAL
Probing Tool Package 6807

Terminal Removing Tool 6932
Terminal Removing Tool 6934
Terminal Pick 6680

XJ 8W - 02 COMPONENT INDEX 8W - 02 - 1
8W-02 COMPONENT INDEX

Component Page Component Page
1-2 And 3-4 Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Engine Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21
2-3 Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Evap Leak Detection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
A/C Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
A/C Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Fog Lamp Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
A/C- Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 51
A/C Pressure Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Forward/Rearward Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43 Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44, 50
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43 Front Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-49 Front Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Fuel Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Automatic Shut Down Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Back-Up Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Back-Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Battery Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20 Fuel Quantity Actuator Ground . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Blend Door Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Fuel Temperature Sensor Signal . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Blower Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Fuses (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12
Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Fuses (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33 Fusible Link A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Brake Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20
Brake Warning Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 G Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Camshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Glow Plug Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Cigar Lighter Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Glow Plug Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Circuit Breakers (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12 Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15
City Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50 Headlamp Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30, 33, 41, 43 Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Cluster Illumination Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Headlamp Leveling Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Clutch Interlock Switch Jumper . . . . . . . 8W-12, 21 Headlamp Leveling Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Clutch Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12, 21 Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49 Heated Seat Backs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-35 Heated Seat Cushions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35 Heated Seat Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Heated Seat Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50 Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Diode Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42
Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Idle Air Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Door Jamb Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39, 44 Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Door Lock Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10
Duty Cycle Evap/Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Electronic Vacuum Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Input Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensors . . . . . . 8W-30 Intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
8W - 02 - 2 8W - 02 COMPONENT INDEX XJ

Liftgate Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61 Repeater Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 52
Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Seat Belt Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Lock-Up Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Seat Heat Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63
Low Coolant Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Shift Lock Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Needle Movement Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Side Marker Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 52
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47
Output Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Speed Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33
Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Oxygen Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Splice Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70
Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31 Tail/Stop Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51
Park/Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 52 Tell Tale Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Pedal Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid . . . 8W-30, 31, 51
Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54
Power Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Trailer Tow Electric Brake Provision . . . . . . . 8W-54
Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10 Trailer Tow Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54
Power Lock/Window Switches . . . . . . 8W-60, 61, 62 Transfer Case Switch Illumination . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Power Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62 Transfer Case Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48, 62 Transmission Control Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Power Seat Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31
Power Seat Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Trip Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Turbo Boost Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Power Window Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60 Turn Signal Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50, 52
Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52
PRNDL Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Radiator Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Vehicle Speed Control Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33
Radiator Fan Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42 Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47 Visor/Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44
Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Washer Fluid Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40
Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51 Water In Fuel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30
Rear Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63 Wheel Speed Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35
Rear Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Window Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60
Rear Window Defogger Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48 Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60
Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48 Windshield Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48 Wipe/Wash Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Rear Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53 Wiper Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53
XJ 8W - 10 POWER DISTRIBUTION 8W - 10 - 1
8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION

A/C Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21, 32 Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 25, 28
A/C Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21, 32 Fuse 17 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15
Automatic Shut Down Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 29, 34 Fuse 17 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 26, 27
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12 Fuse 18 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33 Fuse 19 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Brake Warning Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15 Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 29, 32
Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28 Fuse 20 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33 Fuse 20 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 31, 32
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24 Fuse 21 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24
Cigar Lighter Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15, 19, 24 Fuse 21 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 29, 34
Circuit Breaker 28 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15 Fuse 22 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Circuit Breaker 29 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24 Fuse 22 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 31, 34
Circuit Breaker 30 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15 Fuse 23 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 33, 35
Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-31, 35 Fuse 24 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28 Fuse 24 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 29
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . 8W-10-23, 24, 32, 33 Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 36 Fuse 25 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 32, 33, 35
Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21 Fuse 26 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17
Diode Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-35 Fuse 26 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 33, 36
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28 Fuse 27 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28 Fuse 27 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21, 32
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Fusible Link A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12
Electronic Vacuum Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-34 G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 32 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12
Engine Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 22, 23 Glow Plug Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22, 23 Glow Plug Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 34
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33, 35 Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21, 22
Fog Lamp Relay No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-33 Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16, 21, 22, 26, 27, 36
Fog Lamp Relay No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-33 High Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33, 35 Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24
Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20, 24
Fuel Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22 Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-29
Fuel Injector No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15, 16, 17
Fuel Injector No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16, 25, 28
Fuel Injector No. 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15, 16, 17, 19,
Fuel Injector No. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 22, 23, 24, 25, 28
Fuel Injector No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 Left Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28
Fuel Injector No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 Left Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-35
Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 31, 34 Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33
Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-31 Left Visor/Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28
Fuse 1 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24 Low Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24
Fuse 2 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28
Fuse 2 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 14, 18 Oxygen Sensor 1/1 Upstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-29
Fuse 3 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 14, 18 Oxygen Sensor 1/2 Downstream . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-29
Fuse 4 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 18, 19 Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15
Fuse 5 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 15, 20 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . . . . . . 8W-10-16
Fuse 6 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 20, 22 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-33, 34
Fuse 7 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 21, 22 Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-27, 36
Fuse 8 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Power Distribution Center . . . . 8W-10-2, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13,
Fuse 8 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-12, 22 14, 15, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26,
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 27, 28, 29, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36
Fuse 9 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 21, 24 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 29, 31
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Radiator Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20, 24
Fuse 10 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 15, 23 Radiator Fan Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-20, 24
Fuse 11 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28
Fuse 11 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-10, 12, 23, 24 Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22, 23
Fuse 12 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17 Rear Window Defogger Relay . . . . . . . . 8W-10-17, 22, 23
Fuse 12 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 12, 23, 24 Right Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28
Fuse 13 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22, 23 Right Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-35
Fuse 13 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-11, 13, 23, 24 Right Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33
Fuse 14 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-22, 23 Right Visor/Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28
Fuse 14 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 24 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-21, 32
Fuse 15 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-19, 24 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25
Fuse 15 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-13, 22 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28
8W - 10 - 2 8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION XJ
GAS
ENGINE
STARTER 13 6
MOTOR FUEL
RELAY D 14 12 10 8 5 2 PUMP
RELAY
11 4
RADIATOR
FAN 13 6
RELAY AUTOMATIC
C 14 12 10 8 5 2 SHUT
DOWN
FOG 11 4 RELAY
LAMP
RELAY
NO. 1 CONTROLLER
FOG 10 9 8 20 19 18 ANTI-LOCK
LAMP 1 11
BRAKE
7 17 RELAY
RELAY B 2 12
6 16
A/C
3 4 5 13 14 15 FOG
COMPRESSOR LAMP
CLUTCH RELAY
RELAY F27 10A F24 15A F21 20A F18 NO. 2
1 2 7 8 13 14 19 20 (DRL)
A F26 20A F23 15A F20 15A F17 20A
3 4 9 10 15 16 21 22
F25 15A F22 15A F19 25A F16 15A
5 6 11 12 17 18 23 24
FUSES
7 8 14 21 15 28
6 7 13 20 14 27
30A
5 6 12 19 13 26
40A 20A
4 5 11 18 12 25
40A 40A
3 4 10 17 11 24
50A 30A
2 3 9 16 10 23
40A 20A
1 2 8 15 9 22
40A 20A
M2 M1
GENERATOR BATTERY
J998W-7 EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT BUILT-UP-EXPORT XJI01002

XJ 8W-10 POWER DISTRIBUTION 8W - 10 - 3
GAS
FUSES
FUSE NO. AMPS FUSED CIRCUIT FEED CIRCUIT

1 - - -
2 40A A1 12RD A0 6RD
3 40A A2 12PK/BK A0 6RD
4 50A A7 10RD/BK A0 6RD
5 40A F141 12LG/RD A0 6RD
6 40A A111 12RD/LG A0 6RD
A3 14RD/WT
7 30A A0 6RD
A3 14RD/WT
8 - - -
A17 16RD/BK
9 20A A0 6RD
A17 16RD/BK
10 20A A41 16YL A0 6RD
11 30A A4 12BK/PK A0 6RD
12 40A A10 12RD/DG A0 6RD
13 20A A20 12RD/DB A0 6RD
14 - - -
15 - - -
16 15A M1 20PK A0 6RD
17 20A F34 18TN/BK A0 6RD
18 - - -
19 25A A16 16RD/LG A0 6RD
20 15A L9 20BK/PK A0 6RD
21 20A A142 18DG/OR A999 16RD
22 15A A61 14DG/BK A0 6RD
23 15A F32 20PK/DB A0 6RD
24 15A F142 20DG/WT A999 16RD
25 15A F61 20WT/OR A0 6RD
26 20A F75 16VT A0 6RD
27 10A F1 20DB/GY A17 16RD/BK
ABS
DRL
XJI01003 J998W-7
GAS
CAVITY CIRCUIT FUNCTION

B1 A17 16RD/BK FUSED B(+)
A/C B2 C3 16DB/BK A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT

COMPRESSOR
B3 C13 18DB/OR A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
CLUTCH
RELAY B4 - -
B5 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)

C2 A16 16RD/LG FUSED B(+)
AUTOMATIC C4 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)

SHUT - -
C5
DOWN
RELAY C6 K51 18DB/YL AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY CONTROL
A999 16RD
C8 AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
A999 16RD

B16 G19 20LG/OR ABS WARNING INDICATOR DRIVER
CONTROLLER B17 - -
ANTI-LOCK
B18 G83 18GY/BK ABS RELAY CONTROL
BRAKE
RELAY B19 Z1 20BK GROUND
B20 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)

D10 A41 16YL FUSED B(+)
T41 20BK/WT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SENSE

ENGINE D11
T41 20BK/WT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SENSE
STARTER
MOTOR D11 Z1 20BK GROUND
RELAY
D12 - -
D13 F45 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
D13 T141 20YL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
D14 T40 16BR STARTER RELAY OUTPUT
2.5L, 4.0L M/T, RHD 4.0L A/T

LHD 4.0L A/T
4.0L M/T
J998W-7 XJI01004
GAS

B6 F61 20WT/OR FUSED B(+)
FOG B7 L92 20PK FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT

LAMP
B7 L139 20VT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY
NO. 1 Z1 20BK GROUND
B8
Z1 20BK GROUND
B8 L35 20BR/WT FOG LAMP RELAY CONTROL
B9 - -
L77 20BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP

B10
L77 20BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP

B11 L92 20PK FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
FOG B12 - -
LAMP
B13 Z1 20BK GROUND
RELAY
NO. 2 B14 L139 20VT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
(DRL)
G34 16RD/GY HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
B15
G34 16RD/GY HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER

A61 14DG/BK FUSED B(+)
FUEL D2
PUMP A61 16DG/BK FUSED B(+)
RELAY F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
D4
D6 K31 18BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
D8 A141 14DG/WT FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT

RADIATOR C10 F141 12LG/RD FUSED B(+)
FAN F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
C11
RELAY
C12 - -
C13 C27 18DB/PK RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL
C14 C25 12LB RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT
DRL
XJI01005 J998W-7
DIESEL
13 6
FUEL
ENGINE D 14 12 10 8 5 2 HEATER
STARTER RELAY
MOTOR 11 4
RELAY
13 6
RADIATOR C AUTOMATIC
FAN 14 12 10 8 5 2 SHUT
RELAY DOWN
11 4 RELAY
FOG CONTROLLER
LAMP 10 9 8 20 19 18 ANTI-LOCK
RELAY BRAKE
1 7 11 17
B RELAY
2 6 12 16
A/C 3 4 5 13 14 15 NOT
COMPRESSOR USED
CLUTCH
RELAY
F27 10A F24 10A F21 20A F18
1 2 7 8 13 14 19 20
A F26 20A F23 15A F20 20A F17
3 4 9 10 15 16 21 22
F25 15A F22 20A F19 15A F16 15A
5 6 11 12 17 18 23 24
FUSES
7 8 14 21 15 28
30A 30A
6 7 13 20 14 27
20A 20A
5 6 12 19 13 26
30A 40A
4 5 11 18 12 25
40A 40A
3 4 10 17 11 24
30A 40A
2 3 9 16 10 23
50A 40A
1 2 8 15 9 22
50A 50A
M2 M1
GENERATOR BATTERY
J998W-7 XJI01006
DIESEL
FUSES

1 - - -
2 50A A54 12RD/GY A0 6RD
3 50A A54 12RD/GY A0 6RD
4 30A A16 12RD/LG A0 6RD
5 40A A1 12RD A0 6RD
6 30A A61 14LG/RD A0 6RD
7 20A A41 16YL A0 6RD
8 30A A3 14RD/WT A0 6RD
9 50A A7 10RD/BK A0 6RD
10 40A A2 12PK/BK A0 6RD
11 40A A111 12RD/LG A0 6RD
12 40A A10 12RD/DG A0 6RD
13 40A F141 12LG/RD A0 6RD
14 20A A20 12RD/DB A0 6RD
15 30A A4 12BK/PK A0 6RD
M1 20PK
16 15A A0 6RD
M1 20PK
17 - - -
18 - - -
19 15A F32 20PK/DB A0 6RD
A17 18RD/BK
20 20A A0 6RD
A17 16RD/BK
21 20A F142 16DG/OR A142 16DG/OR
22 20A F75 16VT A0 6RD
23 15A L9 20BK/PK A0 6RD
24 10A F16 16RD/LG A16 12RD/LG
25 15A F61 20WT/OR A0 6RD
26 20A F34 18TN/BK A0 6RD
27 10A F1 20DB/GY A17 18RD/BK
ABS
XJI01007 J998W-7
DIESEL

B1 A17 16RD/BK FUSED B(+)
A/C B2 C3 16DB/BK A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT

COMPRESSOR
B3 C13 20DB/OR A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
CLUTCH
RELAY B4 - -
B5 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)

C2 A16 12RD/LG FUSED B(+)
AUTOMATIC C4 A16 12RD/LG FUSED B(+)

SHUT
C5 - -
DOWN
RELAY C6 K51 20DB/YL AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY CONTROL
C8 A142 16DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT

B16 G19 20LG/OR ABS WARNING INDICATOR DRIVER
CONTROLLER B17 - -
ANTI-LOCK
F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
BRAKE B18
RELAY F15 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
B19 Z1 20BK/YL GROUND
B20 G83 18GY/BK ABS RELAY CONTROL
J998W-7 XJI01008
DIESEL

D10 A41 16YL FUSED B(+)
ENGINE
D11 T141 20YL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
STARTER
MOTOR D12 - -
RELAY
D13 Z1 20BK GROUND
D14 T40 16BR STARTER RELAY OUTPUT

B6 F61 20WT/OR FUSED B(+)
B7 L139 20VT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT

FOG
LAMP L77 18BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
B8
RELAY L77 20BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
B9 - -
Z1 20BK/YL GROUND
B10
Z1 20BK/YL GROUND

D2 A61 14LG/RD FUSED B(+)
FUEL D4 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)

HEATER
D5 - -
RELAY
D6 Z1 18BK GROUND
D8 A93 14RD/BK FUEL HEATER RELAY OUTPUT

C10 F141 12LG/RD FUSED B(+)
RADIATOR C11 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)

FAN
C12 - -
RELAY
C14 C25 12LB RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT
XJI01009 J998W-7
GAS
S118
A0 A0 A11
BATTERY 6 6 FUSIBLE 6
(8W-20-2) RD RD LINK BK/WT
A11
10
ENGINE DG
GENERATOR
STARTER (8W-20-2)
MOTOR
(8W-21-2)
(8W-21-3)
(8W-21-4)
(8W-21-5)
(8W-21-6)
POWER
8 9 10 11 12
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
2 3 4 5 6
40A 40A 50A 40A 40A
1 (8W-10-14) 2 (8W-10-14) 3 (8W-10-19) 4 (8W-10-20) 5 (8W-10-20)
A1 A2 A7 F141 A111
12 12 10 12 12
RD PK/BK RD/BK LG/RD RD/LG
C2 C6
C100 TO TO TO
JUNCTION RADIATOR C100
TO TO BLOCK FAN
IGNITION IGNITION RELAY
SWITCH SWITCH (IN PDC)
13 22 16 17
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
7 9 10 11 A
30A 20A 20A 30A
6 (8W-10-21) 15 (8W-10-21) 23 (8W-10-23) 24 (8W-10-23) TO
FUSE 12
(PDC)
(8W-10-11)
A3 A3 A17 A17 A41 A4

14 14 16 16 16 12
RD/WT RD/WT RD/BK RD/BK YL BK/PK
TO D1 C100 TO TO TO TO
DAYTIME A/C FUSE ENGINE JUNCTION
RUNNING COMPRESSOR 27 STARTER BLOCK
LAMP TO CLUTCH (IN PDC) MOTOR
MODULE HEADLAMP RELAY RELAY
SWITCH (IN PDC) (IN PDC)
J998W-7 XJI01010
GAS
POWER
FROM
FUSE 11
DISTRIBUTION
(PDC) CENTER
(8W-10-10) (8W-10-2)
A
18 A23 A18
FUSE FUSE FUSE
12 16 19
40A 15A 25A
(ABS) (8W-10-25) (8W-10-29)
25 A24 A17
(8W-10-23)
19 A21
FUSE FUSE
13 17
20A 20A
(ABS) (8W-10-26)
26 A22
(8W-10-23) (8W-10-27)
A10 A20 M1 F34 A16

12 12 20 18 16
RD/DG RD/DB PK TN/BK RD/LG
TO TO TO TO TO
CONTROLLER CONTROLLER S135 C100 AUTOMATIC
ANTI-LOCK ANTI-LOCK SHUT DOWN
BRAKE BRAKE RELAY
(IN PDC)
A16 A11 A9 A6 A4
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
20 22 23 25 26
15A 15A 15A 15A 20A
(8W-10-31) (8W-10-31) (8W-10-33) (8W-10-33) (8W-10-33)
A15 A12 A10 A5 A3
L9 A61 F32 F61 F75

20 14 20 20 16
BK/PK DG/BK PK/DB WT/OR VT
A61 F8 C100
TO TO 16 TO TO
C100 FUEL DG/BK FOG C100
TO
PUMP LAMP
BRAKE
RELAY RELAY
LAMP
(IN PDC) TO
NO. 1
SWITCH (IN PDC)
C107
XJI01011 J998W-7
DIESEL
S118
A0 A0 A11
BATTERY 2/0 6 FUSIBLE 6
(8W-20-3) RD RD LINK BK/GY
A11
10
ENGINE DG
GENERATOR
STARTER (8W-20-3)
MOTOR
(8W-21-6)
POWER
8 10 12
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
2 4 6
50A 30A 30A
1 (8W-10-18) 3 (8W-10-18) 5 (8W-10-22)
9 11
FUSE FUSE
3 5
50A 40A
2 (8W-10-18) 4 (8W-10-15)
A61
A54 A54 A16 A1 14
12 12 12 12 LG/RD
RD/GY RD/GY RD/LG RD
C2 C100 TO
TO TO TO FUEL
S153 S153 S151 TO HEATER
IGNITION RELAY
SWITCH (IN PDC)
13 14 16 18
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
7 8 10 12
20A 30A 40A 40A
6 (8W-10-22) 7 (8W-10-22) 23 (8W-10-15) 25 (ABS)
(8W-10-24) B
22 17
FUSE FUSE TO
9 11 FUSE 13
50A 40A (PDC)
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-24) (8W-10-13)
15 24
A41
16 A3 A7 A2 A111 A10
YL 14 10 12 12 12
RD/WT RD/BK PK/BK RD/LG RD/DG
TO
ENGINE D1 C100 TO C6 C100 TO TO
STARTER JUNCTION C100 CONTROLLER
MOTOR BLOCK ANTI-LOCK
TO TO
RELAY IGNITION BRAKE
(IN PDC) HEADLAMP
SWITCH SWITCH
J998W-7 XJI01012
DIESEL
POWER
FROM
FUSE 12
DISTRIBUTION
(PDC) CENTER
(8W-10-12) (8W-10-6)
B
19 21 A18
FUSE FUSE FUSE
13 15 19
40A 30A 15A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-22) (8W-10-32)
26 28 A17
20 A23
FUSE FUSE
14 16
20A 15A
(ABS) (8W-10-28)
27 A24
(8W-10-24)
F32
20
F141 A20 A4 M1 M1 PK/DB
12 12 12 20 20
LG/RD RD/DB BK/PK PK PK
F8 C100
TO TO TO TO TO TO
RADIATOR CONTROLLER JUNCTION JUNCTION UNDERHOOD BRAKE
FAN ANTI-LOCK BLOCK BLOCK LAMP/ LAMP
RELAY BRAKE MERCURY SWITCH
(IN PDC) SWITCH
A16 A11 A9 A6 A4
20 22 23 25 26
20A 20A 15A 15A 20A
(8W-10-32) (8W-10-34) (8W-10-35) (8W-10-35) (8W-10-36)
A15 A12 A10 A5 A3
A17 A17 F75 L9 F61 F34

18 16 16 20 20 18
RD/BK RD/BK VT BK/PK WT/OR TN/BK
TO TO TO TO TO TO
FUSE 27 A/C C100 C100 FOG C100
(IN PDC) COMPRESSOR LAMP
CLUTCH RELAY
RELAY (IN PDC)
(IN PDC)
XJI01013 J998W-7
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER BRAKE
8 9
DISTRIBUTION WARNING
CENTER PRESSURE
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2) SWITCH
2 3
1 (8W-40-9)
40A 40A
1 2 G9
20
GY/BK
A14
C100
E2
A1 A2
12 12 S211
RD PK/BK
G9
20
GY/BK
LHD RHD
C2 C6
C100 66 C201 10 C203
FROM
G9
S210 20
(8W-10-16) GY/BK
A1 A2 G9 G26 PARK
12 12 20 20 BRAKE
RD PK/BK GY/BK LB
SWITCH
(8W-40-9)
7 C1 3 C1 2 C1 1 C2
IGNITION
KEY-IN
SWITCH
SWITCH 1 START
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 RUN
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 0 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 3 LOCK
4 ACC
8 C1 9 C1 4 C1 10 C1 1 C1 2 C2
A31 A21 A22 A41 Z1 G16
12 12 12 14 20 20
BK/WT DB BK/OR YL BK BK/LB
RHD LHD
S207
(8W-15-16)
10 C201 RUN A22 TO
Z1 S200
(8W-10-17) 14 (8W-10-16)
BK
A31
12
ST-RUN A21 ST A41
BK/WT G108
(8W-10-16) (8W-10-17) (8W-15-16)
L1 C4
JUNCTION
86 BLOCK
CIGAR (8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT LIGHTER
17 18 BREAKER BREAKER RELAY
15A 10A 28 30 (8W-41-2)
(8W-12-18) (8W-12-18) 25A 20A (8W-41-3)
(8W-12-19) (8W-12-19) (8W-12-24) (8W-12-26)
(8W-12-25) (8W-12-27) 85
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI01014
DIESEL
BATT A0 BRAKE
(8W-10-12)
WARNING
POWER PRESSURE
11 16
DISTRIBUTION SWITCH
CENTER 1 (8W-40-9)
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
5 10 G9
40A 40A 20
4 23 GY/BK
A14
C100
E2
S211
A1 A2
12 12 G9
RD PK/BK 20
GY/BK
LHD RHD FROM
S210
C2 C6
C100 66 C201 10 C203 (8W-10-16)
G9
20
G9 GY/BK G26
20 20
A1 A2 GY/BK LB
12 12
RD PK/BK
PARK
BRAKE
SWITCH
(8W-40-10)
7 C1 3 C1 2 C1 1 C2
IGNITION
KEY-IN
SWITCH
SWITCH 1 START
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 1 4 2 RUN
2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 0 OFF
0 0 0 0 0 3 LOCK
4 ACC
8 C1 9 C1 4 C1 10 C1 1 C1 2 C2
A31 A21 A22 A41 Z1 G16
12 12 12 14 20 20
BK/WT DB BK/OR YL BK BK/LB
LHD RHD
S207
10 C201 RUN A22 (8W-15-16)
(8W-10-17) Z1 TO
14 S200
BK (8W-10-16)
A31
12 ST-RUN A21 ST A41
BK/WT G108
(8W-10-16) (8W-10-17)
L1 C4 (8W-15-16)
JUNCTION
86 BLOCK
CIGAR (8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE CIRCUIT CIRCUIT LIGHTER
17 18 BREAKER BREAKER RELAY
15A 10A 28 30 (8W-41-2)
(8W-12-18) (8W-12-18) 25A 20A (8W-41-3)
(8W-12-19) (8W-12-19) (8W-12-24) (8W-12-26)
(8W-12-25) (8W-12-27) 85
RHD
XJI01015 LHD J998W-7
INSTRUMENT PASSENGER PASSENGER

CLUSTER POWER POWER
(8W-40-11) LOCK/ LOCK/
WINDOW WINDOW
BATT A1 8 C2 8 C2 SWITCH 8 C2 SWITCH
G26 G26 (FULL G26 (FULL
(8W-10-14) 20 20 OPTIONS) 20 OPTIONS)
(8W-10-15) LB LB (8W-61-2) LB (8W-61-3)
5 C300 2 C306
G26 G26
20 20
A1
LB LB
12
RD 29 C201 20 C203
LHD RHD
S210
G26 G26
20 20
LB LB
7 C1 1 C2 5 C1
IGNITION HEADLAMP
KEY-IN
SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH 1 START 0 OFF
1 4 1 4 2 RUN 1 PARK
0 1 2
2 3 2 3 0 OFF 2 HEAD
0 0 3 LOCK (8W-50-2)
4 ACC (8W-50-3)
(8W-10-14) 6 C1 (8W-50-4)
9 C1 8 C1 2 C2 (8W-10-15)
A21 A31 G16 G16
12 12 20 20
DB BK/WT BK/LB BK/LB
S200
LHD RHD
RHD LHD 17 C200 19 C203

G16 G16
20 20
64 C201 BK/LB BK/LB
2 C317 2 C318
G16 G16
18 18
BK/LB BK/LB
RUN-ACC A31 2
2 DRIVER
(8W-10-14) DRIVER DOOR
A21 (8W-10-15) DOOR JAMB
12 JAMB
DB SWITCH
SWITCH (8W-39-7)
(8W-39-6)
L2 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
8 9 10 11 27
SPARE 10A 15A 20A 10A
(8W-12-12) (8W-12-12) (8W-12-12) (8W-12-14) (8W-12-24)
(8W-12-13) (8W-12-13) (8W-12-13) (8W-12-15) (8W-12-25)
J998W-7 XJI01016
BATT A2
(8W-10-14)
(8W-10-15)
A2
12
PK/BK
3 C1
IGNITION
SWITCH
1 START
1 4 1 4 2 RUN
2 3 2 3 0 OFF
0 0 3 LOCK
4 ACC
(8W-10-14)
4 C1 10 C1 (8W-10-15)
A22 A41
12 14
BK/OR YL
RHD LHD LHD RHD
62 63 C201
A22 A41
12 14
BK/OR YL
M2 C4 M1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
12 22 25 19
10A 20A 15A 10A
(8W-12-16) (8W-12-21) (8W-12-21) (8W-12-18)
(8W-12-17) (8W-12-22) (8W-12-22) (8W-12-19)
86
REAR FUSE FUSE
WINDOW 24 26
DEFOGGER SPARE 10A
RELAY (8W-12-21) (8W-12-24)
(8W-48-2) (8W-12-22) (8W-12-25)
(8W-48-3)
85
XJI01017 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
8 9 10
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
2 3 4
50A 50A 30A
1 2 3
A54 A54 A16

12 12 12
RD/GY RD/GY RD/LG
S153 S151
A54 A16 A16 A16
10 12 12 12
RD/GY RD/LG RD/LG RD/LG
POWER
A14
C4 C2
A8
DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMATIC CENTER
FUSE SHUT FUSE (8W-10-6)
21 DOWN 24
20A RELAY 10A
(8W-10-34) (8W-30-19)
A13 A7
C6 C8
A142 A142
16 16
DG/OR DG/OR
S137
A142
16
1 DG/OR A142
GLOW 16
PLUG DG/OR
RELAY A142
(8W-30-22) 16
9
DG/OR
4 FUEL
A142 A142 F16
16 16
PUMP 16
DG/OR DG/OR MODULE RD/LG
K154
(8W-30-23)
10
GY
GLOW
PLUG
ASSEMBLY
(8W-30-22)
K2 C2 K28 C2 C12 C3 A2 C1 A22 C1

ENGINE POWERTRAIN
CONTROL CONTROL
MODULE MODULE
(8W-30-19) (8W-30-20)
J998W-7 XJI01018
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
10
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
4
50A
3
A7
10
RD/BK
2 C2
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)

1 2 15 20 21
25A 25A 25A 15A 15A
(8W-12-5) (8W-12-5) (8W-12-18) (8W-12-20) (8W-12-20)
(8W-12-19)
30 86 30
CIGAR HORN
CIRCUIT LIGHTER RELAY
BREAKER RELAY (8W-41-2)
29 (8W-41-2) (8W-41-3)
25A (8W-41-3)
(8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27) 87 87
M6 C4 4 C2
F30 X2
16 20
RD DG/RD
LHD RHD
50 C201 S131
F30
16
RD X2 X2
20 20
DG/RD DG/RD
1
CIGAR LOW HIGH
LIGHTER NOTE NOTE
(8W-41-2) HORN HORN
(8W-41-3) (8W-41-2) (8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3) (8W-41-3)
XJI01019 J998W-7
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
11 12
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
5 6
40A 40A
4 5
F141 A111
12 12
LG/RD RD/LG
C10
RADIATOR D5 C100
FAN
RELAY A111
(IN PDC) 12
(8W-42-8) RD/LG
C14
C25 LHD RHD

12
LB
11 C201 7 C202
1
RADIATOR A111
FAN 12
MOTOR RD/LG
(8W-42-8)
8
HVAC
UNIT
(8W-42-2)
(8W-42-3)
(8W-42-4)
(8W-42-5)
J998W-7 XJI01020
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
13 22 A1
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
7 9 27
30A 20A 10A
6 15 A2
A3 A3 A17 A17 F1
14 14 16 16 20
RD/WT RD/WT RD/BK RD/BK DB/GY
B1
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
RELAY
B2 (IN PDC)
(8W-42-6)
C3
16
DB/BK
4.0L
RHD OTHER E10 C100
D1 C100 4 C108
C3 F1
16 20
DB/BK DB/GY
A/C
COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
A3 (8W-42-6)
14
RD/WT
8 C1
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
A3
(8W-50-4)
14
RD/WT 1
SENTRY
6 2 KEY
DAYTIME HEADLAMP IMMOBILIZER
RUNNING DELAY MODULE
LAMP MODULE (EXCEPT
MODULE (8W-50-9) POLICE/
(8W-50-19) (8W-50-10) POSTAL)
(8W-39-4)
XJI01021 (8W-39-5) J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
12 21 13 14
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
6 15 7 8
30A 30A 20A 30A
5 28 6 7
A61 A4 A41 A3
14 12 16 14
LG/RD BK/PK YL RD/WT
1 C2
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2) D1 C100
30
REAR D10
WINDOW ENGINE
DEFOGGER STARTER
RELAY MOTOR
(8W-48-2)
(8W-48-3) RELAY
87
D14 (IN PDC)
(8W-21-6)
T40
16
FUSE FUSE BR
13 14
SPARE 10A
(8W-12-16) (8W-12-16)
(8W-12-17) (8W-12-17)
10 C111
A3
1 C6 T40 14
14 RD/WT
C15
BR
12
BK/WT
4 C326 ENGINE
STARTER
MOTOR
C15 (8W-21-6)
D2 12
FUEL BK/WT
HEATER 8 C1
RELAY HEADLAMP
2 C312 A3
(IN PDC) 3 C310 SWITCH
(8W-30-21) 14
D8 RD/WT (8W-50-4)
C15
A93 12
14 BK/WT
RD/BK
1 2
FUEL REAR HEADLAMP
HEATER WINDOW DELAY
(8W-30-21) DEFOGGER MODULE
(8W-48-2) (8W-50-10)
(8W-48-3)
J998W-7 XJI01022
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
16 17 18 19
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
10 11 12 13
20A 30A 40A 20A
23 24 25 (ABS) 26 (ABS)
A41 A4 A10 A20

16 12 12 12
YL BK/PK RD/DG RD/DB
D10 25 9
ENGINE CONTROLLER
STARTER ANTI-LOCK
MOTOR BRAKE
RELAY (4.0L)
D14 (IN PDC) 1 C2 (8W-35-2)
(8W-21-2)
(8W-21-3)
JUNCTION
(8W-21-4) BLOCK
30
(8W-21-5) (8W-12-2)
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
T40
RELAY
16
(8W-48-2)
BR
87 (8W-48-3)
FUSE FUSE
13 14
SPARE 10A
(8W-12-16) (8W-12-16)
1 C108 (8W-12-17) (8W-12-17)
1 C6
C15
12
BK/WT
T40
4 C326
16
C15
BR
12
BK/WT
2 C312
3 C310
C15
ENGINE 12
STARTER BK/WT
MOTOR
(8W-21-2) REAR
(8W-21-3)
(8W-21-4)
WINDOW
(8W-21-5) DEFOGGER
(8W-48-2)
(8W-48-3)
XJI01023 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
22 17 18 20 19
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
9 11 12 14 13
50A 40A 40A 20A 40A
15 24 25 (ABS) 27 (ABS) 26
A7 A111 F141
10 12 12
RD/BK RD/LG LG/RD
D5 C100 C10
A10 A20 RADIATOR
LHD RHD 12 12
RD/DG RD/DB FAN
RELAY
11 C201 7 C202
(IN PDC)
C14 (8W-42-8)
C25
12
8 25 9
LB
HVAC CONTROLLER
1
UNIT ANTI-LOCK
RADIATOR
(8W-42-2) BRAKE
(8W-35-3) FAN
MOTOR
(8W-42-8)
2 C2
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT FUSE FUSE FUSE
BREAKER 2 15 21
29 25A 25A 15A
25A (8W-12-5) (8W-12-18) (8W-12-20)
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-19)
30 86 30
CIGAR HORN
LIGHTER RELAY
RELAY (8W-41-2)
(8W-41-2) (8W-41-3)
(8W-41-3)
87 87
FUSE FUSE
1 20
25A 15A
(8W-12-5) (8W-12-20)
M6 C4 4 C2
F30 X2
16 20
RD DG/RD
LHD RHD
S131
50 C201 X2 X2
20 20
DG/RD DG/RD
1
CIGAR LOW HIGH
LIGHTER NOTE NOTE
(8W-41-2) HORN HORN
(8W-41-3) (8W-41-2) (8W-41-2)
J998W-7 (8W-41-3) (8W-41-3) XJI01024
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A23
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
16
15A
A24
M1
20
PK
S135
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
12 C1
JUNCTION 1
BLOCK UNDERHOOD
(8W-12-2) LAMP/
MERCURY
4 C7 S18 C4 3 C3 SWITCH
(8W-44-6)
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
5 C314 RHD LHD 25
TRANSMISSION
6 C201 C
CONTROL
TO MODULE
LHD RHD M1 S347 (4.0L)
20 S361 (8W-31-4)
PK (8W-10-26)
(8W-10-27)
M1 M1
20 18 S214
PK PK
M1 M1 M1 M1
20 20 20 20
PK PK PK PK
A 7 C2
CARGO RADIO
LAMP/ A C208 A C207 (8W-47-2)
SWITCH (8W-47-3)
(8W-47-9)
(8W-44-8)
(8W-47-10)
(8W-44-9)
9 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
(8W-40-2)
M1 M1
18 18
PK PK
1 1
LEFT RIGHT
SKIM
COURTESY COURTESY EXCEPT SKIM
LAMP LAMP
(8W-44-6) (8W-44-6)
XJI01025 J998W-7
EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
(8W-10-25) A21
CENTER
C FUSE (8W-10-10)
17
20A
A22
M1 F34
20 18
PK TN/BK
LHD RHD
E6 C100 A18 C100
F34
18
F34
TN/BK
18
TN/BK
4 C1
HEADLAMP S218
SWITCH
(8W-50-2) F34 F34 F34
18 18 18
TN/BK TN/BK TN/BK
SKIM OTHERS
16 4 C1 16
DATA HEADLAMP DATA
S361 LINK SWITCH LINK
CONNECTOR (8W-50-3) CONNECTOR
(8W-30-16) (8W-30-16)
S347
FULL
M1 M1 OTHERS OPTIONS M1 M1
20 20 20 20
PK PK PK PK
MIDLINE BASE/POLICE M1
20
PK 2
OVERHEAD
2 MODULE
M1 M1 COMPASS (8W-49-2)
20 20 (8W-49-3)
(8W-49-2)
PK PK
(8W-49-3)
RIGHT
VISOR/ C 2 LEFT
VANITY DOME DOME VISOR/
LAMP LAMPS LAMP VANITY
(8W-44-5) SWITCH (8W-44-5) LAMP
(8W-44-5) (8W-44-5)
J998W-7 XJI01026
BUILT-UP-EXPORT GAS
FROM BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
(8W-10-25) A21
CENTER
C FUSE (8W-10-2)
17
20A
M1 A22
20
PK
F34
18
TN/BK
LHD RHD
E6 C100 A18 C100
F34
18
TN/BK
S218
F34 F34 F34

18 18 18
TN/BK TN/BK TN/BK
B C1 4 C1 16
SKIM OTHERS POWER HEADLAMP DATA
ANTENNA SWITCH LINK
RELAY (8W-50-4) CONNECTOR
(8W-47-4) (8W-30-16)
S361
S347
FULL
OTHERS OPTIONS
M1 M1
20 20
PK PK
M1 M1 MIDLINE BASE/POLICE M1
20 20 20
2
PK PK PK
OVERHEAD
M1 M1
20 20
2 MODULE
PK PK
COMPASS (8W-49-2)
(8W-49-2) (8W-49-3)
(8W-49-3)
RIGHT LEFT
2
VISOR/ VISOR/
C DOME
VANITY VANITY
DOME LAMP
LAMP LAMP
LAMPS (8W-44-5)
(8W-44-5) (8W-44-5)
SWITCH
(8W-44-5)
XJI01027 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A23
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-6)
16
15A
A24
M1 M1
20 20
PK PK
12 C1 1
JUNCTION UNDERHOOD
BLOCK LAMP/
(8W-12-2) MERCURY
SWITCH
4 C7 S18 C4 3 C3 (8W-44-7)
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
S347
5 C314
OTHERS FULL OPTIONS
M1
LHD RHD RHD LHD M1 M1 20
20 20 PK M1 M1
PK PK
M1 M1 6 C201 20 20
20 18 PK PK
PK PK
RIGHT
VISOR/
VANITY 2
LAMP COMPASS
M1 (8W-44-5)
A (8W-49-2)
20 (8W-49-3)
CARGO PK
LEFT
LAMP/ VISOR/
SWITCH VANITY
(8W-44-8) LAMP
(8W-44-9) 2 (8W-44-5)
OVERHEAD MIDLINE BASE/POLICE
MODULE
(8W-49-2)
(8W-49-3) M1 M1
20 20
S214 PK PK
M1 M1 M1 M1
20 20 20 20 C 2
PK PK PK PK DOME DOME
7 C2 LAMPS LAMP
A C208 A C207
RADIO SWITCH (8W-44-5)
(8W-47-2) M1 (8W-44-5)
M1
(8W-47-3) 18 18
(8W-47-9) PK PK
9 C1 (8W-47-10)
INSTRUMENT 1 1
CLUSTER LEFT RIGHT
(8W-40-2)
COURTESY COURTESY
LAMP LAMP
(8W-44-7) (8W-44-7)
J998W-7 XJI01028
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A18
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
19
25A
A17
A16
16
RD/LG
C2
AUTOMATIC
SHUT
DOWN
RELAY
C8 (IN PDC)
(8W-30-2)
A999 A999
16 16
RD RD
POWER
A14 A7
DISTRIBUTION
FUSE FUSE CENTER
21 24 (8W-10-2)
20A 15A
A13 A8
A142 F142
18 20
DG/OR DG/WT
S137
A142 A142
18 18
DG/OR DG/OR
1 7
C107
A142 F142
18 20
DG/OR DG/WT
S109 S110
A142 A142 F142 F142

18 18 20 20
DG/OR DG/OR DG/WT DG/WT
1 1
C12 C3 1
POWERTRAIN IGNITION D OXYGEN OXYGEN
CONTROL COIL SENSOR SENSOR
MODULE (8W-30-5) TO 1/1 1/2
(8W-30-2) S113 UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM
(8W-10-30) (8W-30-8) (8W-30-8)
XJI01029 J998W-7
GAS
FROM
S109
(8W-10-29)
D
A142
18
DG/OR
S113
A142 A142 A142

18 18 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR
1 1 1
FUEL FUEL FUEL
INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR
NO. 2 NO. 4 NO. 6
(8W-30-6) (8W-30-6) (4.0L)
(8W-30-6)
A142 A142 A142

18 18 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR
1 1 1
FUEL FUEL FUEL
NO. 1 NO. 3 NO. 5
(8W-30-6) (8W-30-6) (4.0L)
(8W-30-6)
J998W-7 XJI01030
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A16 A11
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
20 22
15A 15A
A15 A12
A61
14
DG/BK
D2
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
(IN PDC)
D8 (8W-30-3)
(8W-30-4)
L9 A141 A61
20 14 16
BK/PK DG/WT DG/BK
B11 D2
C100 14 C107
F5
A141
16
DG/WT
LHD RHD
13 C200 4 C204
L9 A141 A61
20 16 14
BK/PK DG/WT DG/BK
2 1 A22 C1
COMBINATION FUEL POWERTRAIN
FLASHER PUMP CONTROL
(8W-52-2) MODULE MODULE
(8W-52-3) (8W-30-3) (8W-30-3)
(8W-30-4) (8W-30-4)
LHD
XJI01031 RHD J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A18 A6 A16 A1 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE CENTER
19 25 20 27 (8W-10-6)
15A 15A 20A 10A
A17 A5 A15 A2
F32 F61 A17 A17

20 20 16 18 F1
PK/DB WT/OR RD/BK RD/BK 20
DB/GY
F8 C100 B6 B1
FOG A/C E10 C100
F32
20
LAMP COMPRESSOR
F1
PK/DB RELAY CLUTCH 20
(IN PDC) RELAY DB/GY
6 B7 B2 (IN PDC)
(8W-42-7)
BRAKE L139 C3
LAMP 20 16
SWITCH VT DB/BK
(8W-33-5) 1
A5 C100 6 C120 SENTRY
5
L139 C3 KEY
20 14 IMMOBILIZER
VT DB/BK MODULE
L50
20 3 1 (EXCEPT
WT/TN FRONT A/C POLICE/
FOG COMPRESSOR POSTAL)
LAMP CLUTCH (8W-39-4)
SWITCH (8W-42-7) (8W-39-5)
(8W-50-18)
S203
LHD RHD
24 C200 L50
6 C204 20
WT/TN
RHD LHD
S302
L50
B4 C100 E1 C100
20
L50 L50
WT/TN
18 20
5 C326 L50 L50 WT/TN WT/TN
20 20
L50
WT/TN WT/TN
18
WT/TN
6 C322 6 C321 S147
1 C325
L50 L50 L50 L50 L50
18 18 18 18 20
DG/WT WT/TN WT/TN WT/TN WT/TN
2 3 3 12 K20 C2
CENTER LEFT RIGHT CONTROLLER ENGINE
HIGH TAIL/ TAIL/ ANTI-LOCK CONTROL
MOUNTED STOP STOP BRAKE MODULE
STOP LAMP LAMP (8W-35-3) (8W-30-29)
LAMP (8W-51-3) (8W-51-3)
(8W-51-3)
J998W-7 XJI01032
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A9 A6 A4 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE FUSE FUSE CENTER
23 25 26 (8W-10-2)
15A 15A 20A
A10 A5 A3
BUILT-UP -EXPORT EXCEPT BUILT-UP -EXPORT

F32
20
PK/DB F61 F61 F75
20 20 16
F8 C100 WT/OR WT/OR VT
F32 B6 B6
20
PK/DB
FOG FOG
LAMP LAMP
6
RELAY RELAY
BRAKE
(IN PDC) NO. 1
LAMP
B7 (8W-50-17) B7 (IN PDC)
SWITCH (8W-50-15)
(8W-33-5) (8W-50-16)
5
L50 DRL OTHERS C4 C100
20 RHD LHD
WT/TN L92
L50 L50 20
S203 20 18 PK
WT/TN WT/TN F75
B11 L139 16
LHD RHD
B4 C100 E1 C100 FOG 20 VT
VT
LAMP
24 C200 RELAY
6 C204 L50
18 NO. 2
WT/TN B14 (IN PDC)
12 (8W-50-16)
L50 CONTROLLER
20
WT/TN ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE LHD RHD
L139
(4.0L) 20
(8W-35-2) VT 14 C200
S302 3 C204
A5 C100
L50
20
WT/TN L139
L50 L50 20 F75
5 C326 20 20 VT 16
WT/TN WT/TN VT
L50 3
18 6 C322 6 C321 FRONT
WT/TN S301
L50 L50 FOG
1 C325 F75 F75
18 18 LAMP
L50 WT/TN WT/TN SWITCH 16 16
18 VT VT
(8W-50-15)
DG/WT 3 3
(8W-50-16) 1 C2 2 C2
2 LEFT RIGHT (8W-50-17)
TAIL/ TAIL/ POWER
CENTER AMPLIFIER
HIGH STOP STOP
(8W-47-2)
MOUNTED LAMP LAMP (8W-47-3)
(8W-51-3) (8W-51-3)
STOP
LAMP
XJI01033 (8W-51-3) J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A16 (8W-10-18)
POWER
C2
AUTOMATIC
DISTRIBUTION
SHUT CENTER
DOWN (8W-10-6)
RELAY
(8W-30-19)
C8
A142
16
DG/OR
S137
(8W-10-18)
A142
16
DG/OR
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A14 A11 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE FUSE CENTER
21 22 (8W-10-6)
20A 20A
A13 A12
F142 F75
16 16
DG/OR VT
S156 C4 C100
F142 F142 F142 F75

18 16 18 16
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR VT
LHD RHD
14 C200 3 C204
10
FUEL F75
PUMP 16
MODULE VT
(8W-30-23)
S301
A
ELECTRONIC
F75 F75
VACUUM 16 16
MODULATOR VT VT
(8W-30-21)
2 1 C2 2 C2
GLOW POWER
PLUG AMPLIFIER
RELAY (8W-47-2)
(8W-30-22) (8W-47-3)
J998W-7 XJI01034
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A9 A6
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
23 25
15A 15A
A10 A5
L9 F61
20 20
BK/PK WT/OR
B6
FOG
LAMP
RELAY
(IN PDC)
B7 (8W-50-18)
LHD RHD L139

20
VT
F5 C100 B11 C100 A5 C100
L139
20
VT
3
FRONT
L9
20
FOG
BK/PK LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-18)
2
L39
20
LB
S230
L39 L39
20 18
LB LB
A4 C100
2 L39 3
COMBINATION 20 DIODE
FLASHER LB MODULE
(8W-52-4) 8 C106 (8W-51-8)
(8W-51-9)
L39
20
LB
S106
L39 L39
20 20
LB LB
2 2
LEFT RIGHT
FOG FOG
LAMP LAMP
(8W-50-18) (8W-50-18)
XJI01035 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A4
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-6)
26
20A
A3
F34
18
TN/BK
RHD LHD
A18 C100 E6 C100
F34
18
TN/BK
S218
F34 F34 F34

18 18 18
TN/BK TN/BK TN/BK
B C1 4 C1 16
POWER HEADLAMP DATA
ANTENNA SWITCH LINK
RELAY (8W-50-4)
CONNECTOR
(8W-47-4) (8W-30-31)
J998W-7 XJI01036
XJ 8W - 12 JUNCTION BLOCK 8W - 12 - 1
8W-12 JUNCTION BLOCK

A/C Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9, 10, 11, 23, 30
A/C Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9 Heated Seat Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-24, 25 Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9
Automatic Shut Down Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14, 15 High Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Back-Up Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Blend Door Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29, 30 HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-5 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9, 12, 13, 16, 17, 28, 29
Cigar Lighter Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-5, 36 Junction Block . . 8W-12-2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
Circuit Breaker 28 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-24, 25 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30, 31,
Circuit Breaker 29 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27 32, 33, 34, 35, 36
Circuit Breaker 30 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27 Left City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-11
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20 Left Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29, 30
Clutch Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . . . 8W-12-10
Clutch Interlock Switch Jumper . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . . . 8W-12-10
Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17 Left Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6, 7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13, 30, 36 Left Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Left Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19
Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Left Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27
Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7, 12, 13 Left Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30 Left Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30, 36 Left Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30 Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11
Driver Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11
Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . 8W-12-18, 19, 24, 25, 34, Liftgate Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
35 Low Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Driver Power Mirror . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17, 33, 34, 35, 36 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20, 30, 36
Duty Cycle Evap/Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Passenger Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14 Passenger Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . 8W-12-18, 19, 24, 25,
Evap Leak Detection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 31, 32, 36
Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 21 Passenger Power Mirror . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17, 33, 34, 35, 36
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-11 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29
Fog Lamp Relay No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6, 10 Power Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19, 33, 36
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-5
Front Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14, 15
Fuel Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14 PRNDL Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9
Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14, 15 Radiator Fan Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13
Fuse 1 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-5 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9, 10, 11, 18, 19, 28, 29
Fuse 2 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-5 Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19
Fuse 3 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6 Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9
Fuse 4 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7 Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17
Fuse 5 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7 Rear Window Defogger Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9, 16, 17
Fuse 7 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11 Rear Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22
Fuse 8 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9, 21, 22
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Right City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-23
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Right Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29, 30
Fuse 11 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14, 15 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . . 8W-12-23
Fuse 12 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . . 8W-12-23
Fuse 13 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17 Right Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6, 7
Fuse 14 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16, 17 Right Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7
Fuse 15 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Right Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19
Fuse 16 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6 Right Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29 Right Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30
Fuse 17 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Right Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
Fuse 18 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Right Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-23
Fuse 19 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18, 19 Right Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-23
Fuse 20 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13
Fuse 21 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20 Shift Lock Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22
Fuse 22 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Tell Tale Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13
Fuse 23 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-23 Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11, 20
Fuse 24 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
Fuse 26 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-24, 25 Transfer Case Switch Illumination . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9
Fuse 27 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-24, 25 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-15, 28
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-36 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13
Headlamp Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-6, 7 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-28, 29
Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 Wipe/Wash Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27
Headlamp Leveling Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7
8W - 12 - 2 8W-12 JUNCTION BLOCK XJ
C9
C3
28 29
25A 25A
30
1 25A
20A
C1
2 25A 25A 15
SPARE
3 10A 10A 16
RELAY
4 10A 15A 17
CIGAR
LIGHTER
C2 RELAY 5 10A 10A 18
6 5A 10A 19
7 10A 15A 20
C8
8 15A 21
HORN 9 10A 20A 22

RELAY
10 15A 10A 23
11 20A 24
12 10A 15A 25
C4 REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER 13 10A 26
RELAY
14 10A 10A 27
C5
C7 C6
FRONT OF
JUNCTION BLOCK
J998W-7 XJI01202
XJ 8W-12 JUNCTION BLOCK 8W - 12 - 3
FUSES

1 25A F38 16RD/LB A7 10RD/BK
2 25A INTERNAL A7 10RD/BK
3 10A L33 20RD L3 16RD/OR
4 10A L43 20VT L4 16VT/WT
5 10A L44 20VT/RD L4 16VT/WT
6 5A E2 20OR E1 20TN
7 10A INTERNAL L7 18BK/YL
8 - - A21 12DB
9 10A F87 20WT/BK A21 12DB
10 15A F20 18WT A21 12DB
11 20A F12 18DB/WT A21 12DB
L5 20BK
12 10A A22 12BK/OR
INTERNAL
13 - - A4 12BK/PK
14 10A INTERNAL INTERNAL
15 25A F35 16RD A7 10RD/BK
16 10A L34 20RD/OR L3 16RD/OR
17 15A X12 16RD/WT A31 12BK/WT
18 10A F83 18YL/DG A31 12BK/WT
19 10A F45 20YL/RD A41 14YL
20 15A A6 20RD/OR A7 10RD/BK
21 15A INTERNAL A7 10RD/BK
22 20A V23 18BR/PK A22 12BK/OR
23 10A INTERNAL L7 18BK/YL
24 - - A22 12BK/OR
25 15A F15 20DB/WT A22 12BK/OR
26 10A F14 18LG/YL A22 12BK/OR
27 10A F23 18DB/YL A21 12DB
XJI01203 J998W-7
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
CB NO. AMPS FUSED CIRCUIT FEED CIRCUIT

28 25A INTERNAL A31 12BK/WT
29 25A F37 14RD/LB A7 10RD/BK
30 20A V6 16DB A31 12BK/WT

30 INTERNAL FUSED B (+)
CIGAR 85 Z1 14BK GROUND
LIGHTER
RELAY 86 A31 12BK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
87 F30 16RD CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY OUTPUT
87A - -

30 INTERNAL FUSED B (+)
HORN 85 X3 20BK/RD HORN RELAY CONTROL

RELAY
86 A7 10RD/BK FUSED B (+)
87 X2 20DG/RD HORN RELAY OUTPUT
87A - -

30 A4 12BK/PK FUSED B (+)
REAR
85 C81 20LB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
WINDOW
DEFOGGER 86 INTERNAL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
RELAY
87 C15 12BK/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
87A - -
J998W-7 XJI01204
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
1 2
25A 25A
30
CIGAR
LIGHTER
RELAY
(8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3)
87
M5 C4 M6 C4
F38 F30
16 16
RD/LB RD
LHD RHD LHD RHD
65 C201 50 C201
F38 F30
16 16
RD/LB RD
1 1
POWER CIGAR
OUTLET LIGHTER
(8W-41-2) (8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3) (8W-41-3)
XJI01205 J998W-7
HEADLAMP
BEAM
SELECT
SWITCH
3 (8W-50-5)
(8W-50-6)
(8W-50-7)
L3
(8W-50-8)
16
RD/OR
S213
(8W-50-5)
(8W-50-6)
(8W-50-7)
(8W-50-8)
L3
16
RD/OR
LHD RHD
16 C201
L3
16
RD/OR
S7 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FOG (8W-12-2)
LAMP FUSE FUSE
RELAY 3 16
NO. 1 10A 10A
B8 (IN PDC)
(EXCEPT BUILT-
UP-EXPORT) 9 C1 11 C1
(8W-50-15)
L35 L33 L34
20 20 20
BR/WT RD RD/OR
12 2 6 C106
L33
20 L33 L34
RD 18 18
RD RD/OR
A A
LEFT RIGHT
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
(8W-50-5) (8W-50-5)
(8W-50-6) (8W-50-6)
(8W-50-7) (8W-50-7)
(8W-50-8) (8W-50-8)
J998W-7 XJI01206
HEADLAMP
BEAM
SELECT
SWITCH
1 (8W-50-5)
(8W-50-6)
(8W-50-7)
L4
(8W-50-8)
16
VT/WT
LHD RHD
22 C201
L4
16
VT/WT
S3 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
4 5
10A 10A
10 C1 1 C1
L43 L44
20 20
VT VT/RD
S133
9 13 C106
EXCEPT EXCEPT EXCEPT
BUILT- BUILT-UP BUILT-UP BUILT- BUILT- BUILT-UP
UP-EXPORT -EXPORT -EXPORT UP-EXPORT UP-EXPORT -EXPORT
L43 OTHER DRL

18
VT
S233 S236 L44 L44

20 18
F6 VT/RD VT/RD
L43 L43 L43 L44 L44 L44 C100
B12
18 18 18 18 18 18
VT VT VT VT/RD VT/RD VT/RD L44 F6 C100
20
B12 10
VT/RD
DAYTIME
4
B B RUNNING
LEFT RIGHT HEADLAMP
LAMP
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP LEVELING
MODULE
(8W-50-5) (8W-50-5) SWITCH (8W-50-19)
1 (8W-50-6) (8W-50-6) (8W-50-20)
LEFT (8W-50-7) (8W-50-7)
1
HEADLAMP (8W-50-8) (8W-50-8)
RIGHT
LEVELING
HEADLAMP
MOTOR
(8W-50-20) LEVELING RHD
MOTOR LHD
XJI01207 (8W-50-20) J998W-7
LHD
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-4)
1 C1
E1
20
TN
42 C201
E1
20
TN
S1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
6
5A
S2 C4
E2
20
OR
S315
E2 E2
20 20
OR OR
1 C206
43 C201
E2 E2
20 20
OR OR
1 1
E2 PRNDL TRANSFER
20 ILLUMINATION CASE
OR
(A/T) SWITCH
(8W-44-2) ILLUMINATION
(8W-44-3) (8W-44-2)
(8W-44-3)
S215
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR OR OR OR
A/C- POLICE
HEATER PACKAGE OTHERS
5 C2 4
RADIO 7 CONTROL 4 REAR
(8W-47-2) (8W-42-4) EXTENDED FOG
(8W-47-9) IDLE LAMP
HEATER
CONTROL SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-42-2) (8W-30-14) 1 (BUILT-UP
3 C1 3 4 FRONT -EXPORT)
INSTRUMENT REAR REAR FOG (8W-51-10)
CLUSTER WIPER/ WINDOW LAMP
(8W-40-15) WASHER DEFOGGER SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH (8W-44-2)
(8W-53-4) (8W-48-2) A/C (8W-44-3)
J998W-7 (8W-53-5) HEATER ONLY XJI01208
RHD
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
1 C1
E1
20
TN
S1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
6
5A
S2 C4
E2
20
OR
S215
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
20 20 20 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR OR OR
5 C2 4
11 C203 RADIO REAR
(8W-47-3) WINDOW
(8W-47-10) DEFOGGER
SWITCH
E2 (8W-48-3)
20
OR/BK 3 C1 1 4
INSTRUMENT FRONT REAR
CLUSTER FOG FOG
(8W-40-15) LAMP LAMP
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-44-4) (BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
(8W-51-11)
1 C206
E2 E2 E2 E2
20 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR
1 1
PRNDL TRANSFER 7 A/C- 3
ILLUMINATION CASE HEATER REAR
(A/T) SWITCH CONTROL WIPER/
(8W-44-4) ILLUMINATION (8W-42-5) WASHER
(8W-44-4) SWITCH
HEATER (8W-53-6)
CONTROL (8W-53-7)
A/C (8W-42-3)
HEATER ONLY
XJI01209 J998W-7
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
9 C1
L7
18
BK/YL
S206
LHD RHD
45 C201 L7
18
BK/YL
M3 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK 4 C2
FUSE (8W-12-2) RADIO
7 (8W-47-2)
10A (8W-47-3)
(8W-47-9)
(8W-47-10)
6 C2 2 C7
L77 L77
20 18
BR/YL BR/YL
S311
L77 TRAILER L77
18 TOW 18
BR/YL BR/YL
CONNECTOR
L77 B10 (8W-54-2)
FOG 2 C327
20 5
TRAILER
BR/YL LAMP L77 L77 TOW OTHERS
RELAY 18 20
7 C106 BR/YL BR/YL
NO. 1 7 C323
L77 (IN PDC) 4 C311 L77
(8W-50-15)
20 11 C310 20
L77
BR BR/YL
L77 18
18 BR/YL
S104 BR/YL
S340
1 C330 L77
18
L77 L77 L77 L78 BR/YL
18 18 20 18
BR BR BR BK/YL
1
LICENSE 7 C322
2 2
LAMP L77
LEFT LEFT (8W-51-3) 18
FRONT FRONT BR
PARK/ PARK/ 1 2
TURN TURN LEFT LEFT
SIGNAL SIGNAL SIDE TAIL/
LAMP LAMP MARKER STOP
NO. 1 NO. 2 LAMP LAMP
(8W-50-11) (8W-50-11) (8W-50-11) (8W-51-3)
J998W-7 XJI01210
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
(8W-50-4)
9 C1
L7
18
BK/YL
S206
LHD RHD
45 C201 L7
18
BK/YL
M3 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2) 4 C2
7 RADIO
10A (8W-47-2)
(8W-47-3)
(8W-47-9)
(8W-47-10)
6 C2 2 C7
L77
18
BR/YL
GAS DIESEL
S311
L77 L77 L77 TRAILER L77
20 18 18 18
BR/YL BR BR/YL TOW BR/YL
CONNECTOR
(8W-54-2) TRAILER
5 TOW OTHERS
B10 B8 2 C327
FOG FOG 7 C323
LAMP LAMP L77 L77 L77 L77
RELAY RELAY 18 20 20 18
(IN PDC) (IN PDC) BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
(8W-50-17) (8W-50-18)
L77 L77 S340
4 C311
20 20
BR/YL BR
11 C310 L77
18
L77
BR/YL
18
BR/YL
7 C106
1 C330 7 C322
L77 L78 L77
20 18 18
BR BK/YL BR
1 1 2
LEFT LICENSE LEFT
CITY LAMP TAIL/
LAMP (8W-51-3)
STOP
(8W-50-12)
LAMP
(8W-51-3)
XJI01211 J998W-7
LHD
ST-RUN A21 A/C
(8W-10-16)
COMPRESSOR
JUNCTION CLUTCH
BLOCK RELAY
(8W-12-2) (IN PDC)
B5
9 8 10 (8W-42-7)
10A SPARE 15A
DAYTIME
RUNNING
LAMP
S13 C4 S12 C4
MODULE
F20 5 (EXCEPT
18 BUILT-UP
WT TRANSMISSION
F87 -EXPORT)
20 RANGE (8W-50-19)
WT/BK 1 C201 SENSOR
(4.0L) RADIATOR
F20 (8W-31-6)
FULL 18 3 FAN
OPTIONS BASE WT RELAY
F20 F20 F20 (IN PDC)
18 18 18 (8W-42-8)
S225 E9 C100 WT WT WT
C11
F20
F87 F87 18
20 20 WT
WT/BK WT/BK
S159
F20
F20 F20 18
5 C201 18 18 WT
WT WT EXCEPT
F87 4.0L A/T DIESEL
20 2 2
WT/BK EVAP DUTY
LEAK CYCLE 11 C107
DETECTION EVAP/ F20 F20
6 C301 PUMP PURGE 18 18
(EXCEPT SOLENOID WT WT
F87
20 BUILT-UP (GAS)
WT/BK -EXPORT) (8W-30-12) M/T A/T
(8W-30-12)
S216 F20 7 C111
18
F87 WT
F20 F20
F87 20 F87 F87 F87 18
20 WT/BK 20 20 20 18
WT WT
WT/BK WT/BK WT/BK WT/BK TO
3 S161
(8W-51-5)
SENTRY 8
KEY HEADLAMP
IMMOBILIZER DELAY
MODULE MODULE F20
(8W-50-9) 18
(EXCEPT WT
(8W-50-10)
POLICE/POSTAL) B
(8W-39-4)
1 8 C1 A
6 TELL INSTRUMENT BACK-UP
COMPASS TALE CLUSTER LAMP
(8W-49-2) MODULE (8W-40-2) SWITCH
(DIESEL) (8W-51-5)
(8W-30-30)
DIESEL GAS
J998W-7 XJI01212
RHD
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2) DAYTIME
RUNNING
FUSE FUSE FUSE A/C LAMP
8 9 10 COMPRESSOR MODULE
SPARE 10A 15A CLUTCH (EXCEPT
5
RELAY BUILT-UP
B5 (IN PDC) -EXPORT)
(8W-42-6) (8W-50-19)
S13 C4 S12 C4 (8W-42-7) TRANSMISSION
RANGE
F20
18 SENSOR
WT (4.0L)
3 (8W-31-6)
A9 C100
F20 F20 F20 F20
18 18 18 18
WT WT WT WT
S159
F20 F20 F20 F20

18 18 18 18
WT WT WT WT
EXCEPT
2 4.0L A/T DIESEL
2 EVAP C11
DUTY LEAK RADIATOR
CYCLE FAN 11 C107
DETECTION
EVAP/ PUMP RELAY F20 F20
F87 PURGE (EXCEPT (IN PDC) 18 18
20 SOLENOID (8W-42-8) WT WT
WT/BK BUILT-UP
(GAS) -EXPORT)
(8W-30-12) M/T A/T
(8W-30-12)
S216
F20
18
F87 F87 F87
WT
20 20 20
WT/BK WT/BK WT/BK
7 C111
1 3 F20 TO F20
18
TELL SENTRY WT
S161 18
TALE KEY (8W-51-5) WT
MODULE IMMOBILIZER
6 C301 (DIESEL) MODULE
(8W-30-30) (EXCEPT
POLICE/
F87 F87 POSTAL) F87 F20
20 20 (8W-39-5) 20 18
WT/BK WT/BK WT/BK B WT
A
6 8 8 C1 BACK-UP
COMPASS HEADLAMP INSTRUMENT LAMP
(8W-49-3) DELAY CLUSTER SWITCH
MODULE (8W-40-2) (8W-51-5)
(8W-50-9)
(8W-50-10)
XJI01213 DIESEL GAS J998W-7
2.5L
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
11
20A
5 C2
F12
18
DB/WT
S130
F12 F12 F12 F12 F12

18 18 18 18 18
DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT
K47 C2
ENGINE
CONTROL
MODULE
(DIESEL)
(8W-30-19)
D4
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
(IN PDC)
D4 (GAS)
(8W-30-3)
FUEL (8W-30-4)
HEATER
RELAY
10 C107 (IN PDC)
(DIESEL)
C4 (8W-30-21)
AUTOMATIC
F12
18
SHUT
DB/WT DOWN
RELAY
(IN PDC)
(GAS)
A2 C1 (8W-30-2)
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE
(GAS)
(8W-30-2)
J998W-7 XJI01214
4.0L
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
11
20A
5 C2
F12
18
DB/WT
S130
F12 F12 F12 F12

18 18 18 18
DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT
RHD LHD
26
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL
F12 F12 MODULE
18 18 (RHD)
DB/WT DB/WT
(8W-31-4)
C4 D4
S136 AUTOMATIC FUEL
SHUT PUMP
DOWN RELAY
F12 F12
18 18 RELAY (IN PDC)
DB/WT DB/WT (IN PDC) (8W-30-3)
(8W-30-2) (8W-30-4)
26
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL
MODULE
10 C107
(LHD)
(8W-31-4)
F12
18
DB/WT
A2 C1
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE
(8W-30-2)
XJI01215 J998W-7
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A4 (8W-10-22)
(8W-10-23)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
12
10A
86 30
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
(8W-48-2)
85 87
FUSE FUSE
14 13
10A SPARE
S20 C4 S26 C4 S19 C4 3 C9 1 C6

L5 C81 C16 C16 C15
20 20 20 20 12
BK LB/WT LB/YL BK/WT BK/WT
5
3 17 2 C201
PASSENGER
C16 POWER
4 C326
L5 C81 20 MIRROR
20 20 LB/YL (8W-48-2)
BK LB/WT C15
S202 12
BK/WT
C16 C16
3 C2 20 20
INSTRUMENT LB/YL LB/YL 2 C312
CLUSTER 3 C310
(8W-40-12)
37 C200
C16
20
C15
LB/YL
12
11 C305 BK/WT
3
FULL POWER
OPTIONS MIRRORS REAR
WINDOW
C16 C16 DEFOGGER
20 20 SWITCH
1
LB/YL BK/WT
COMBINATION (8W-48-2)
FLASHER
(8W-52-2) 5 REAR
(8W-52-3) DRIVER WINDOW
POWER DEFOGGER
MIRROR (8W-48-2)
(8W-48-2)
J998W-7 XJI01216
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A4 (8W-10-22)
(8W-10-23)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
12
10A
86 30
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
RELAY
(8W-48-3)
85 87
FUSE FUSE
14 13
10A SPARE
S20 C4 S26 C4 S19 C4 5 C5 3 C9 1 C6
L5 C81 C16 C16 C16 C15

20 20 20 20 20 12
BK LB/WT BK/WT LB/YL BK/WT BK/WT
5
22 C204 DRIVER 4 C326
POWER
MIRROR
C16
(8W-48-3)
20
LB/YL
3
3 C2 REAR
C15
INSTRUMENT WINDOW 12
CLUSTER DEFOGGER BK/WT
(8W-40-13) SWITCH
(8W-48-3)
11 C305
FULL POWER
OPTIONS MIRRORS 2 C312
3 C310
C16 C16
20 20 C15
LB/YL BK/WT 12
BK/WT
1 5
COMBINATION PASSENGER REAR
FLASHER POWER WINDOW
(8W-52-2) MIRROR DEFOGGER
(8W-52-3) (8W-48-3) (8W-48-3)
XJI01217 J998W-7
LHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14) ST A41 (8W-10-17)
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE

15 17 18 19
25A 15A 10A 10A
9 C9 S9 C4 S4 C4 3 C1
X12 F83 2.5L A/T 4.0L A/T M/T
F35 16 18
16 RD/WT YL/DG
RD F45 F45 F45
54 44 20 20 20
C201 YL/RD YL/RD YL/RD
X12 2
16 2 1
RD/WT CLUTCH CLUTCH
C2 F45
6
18
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
RADIO YL SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-47-2) JUMPER
(8W-47-9)
1 2
F83 1
18 T141
YL/DG 20 T141
BUILT- YL 20
YL
UP-EXPORT OTHER
D11
39 C200 39 C200 D13
ENGINE
HEATED STARTER
F83 OTHER SEATS
18 MOTOR
YL/DG RELAY
F83 (IN PDC)
1 18 (8W-21-2)
F83
REAR YL/DG (8W-21-3)
18
(8W-21-4)
FOG YL/DG
S351 (8W-21-5)
LAMP (8W-21-6)
RELAY
(8W-51-8) 1 C316
5 C2
PASSENGER S353
(8W-63-4)
POWER 3 C305 F83 F83
LOCK/ FULL OPTIONS POWER MIRRORS 18 18
WINDOW YL/DG YL/DG
SWITCH F83 F83 4
(FULL 18 18 LEFT
OPTIONS) YL/DG YL/DG HEATED
(8W-61-2) SEAT
3 C2 2 SWITCH
DRIVER POWER 4 (8W-63-4)
DIESEL POWER MIRROR RIGHT
GAS LOCK/ SWITCH HEATED
WINDOW (8W-68-2) SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-60-2) (8W-63-4)
J998W-7 XJI01218
(8W-60-3)
RHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14) ST A41 (8W-10-17)
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
15 17 18 19
25A 15A 10A 10A
7 C5 S9 C4 S4 C4 3 C1
F83
18
F35 X12 YL/DG F45
16 16 20
RD RD/WT OTHER BUILT-UP-EXPORT YL/RD
S232
E7 C100
F83
12 C204 18
YL/DG F45
6 C2 1 20
F35 RADIO REAR YL/RD
F83
16 (8W-47-3) 18 FOG
RD (8W-47-10) YL/DG LAMP
RELAY
3 C300 (8W-51-9)
1 C306 POWER
MIRRORS FULL OPTIONS M/T A/T
S352
F35 F83 F45 F45
F83 20 20
16 18 18
RD YL/DG YL/RD YL/RD
YL/DG
1 C324 2 1
2 CLUTCH CLUTCH
POWER INTERLOCK F45
INTERLOCK
MIRROR 18
1 C316 SWITCH YL SWITCH
SWITCH JUMPER
(8W-62-9)
1 2
S353
(8W-63-4) F83 T141 T141
F83 18 20 20
18 F83 YL/DG YL YL
YL/DG 18
4 YL/DG
LEFT
HEATED 3 C2 E8 C100
SEAT DRIVER T141
SWITCH POWER 20
5 C2 (8W-63-4) LOCK/ D11 YL
PASSENGER WINDOW D13
POWER SWITCH ENGINE
4
LOCK/ (8W-62-5) STARTER
RIGHT
WINDOW (8W-62-6) MOTOR
HEATED
SWITCH RELAY
SEAT
(FULL (IN PDC)
SWITCH (8W-21-2)
OPTIONS) (8W-63-4) (8W-21-3)
(8W-61-3) (8W-21-4)
GAS (8W-21-5)
DIESEL (8W-21-6)
XJI01219 J998W-7
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
20 21
15A 15A
86 30
HORN
RELAY
(8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3)
85 87
RHD LHD RHD LHD
8 C7 S22 C4 1 C5 1 C5 S22 C4 4 C2
X3 X3
20 20
BK/RD BK/RD
A6 X3 X2
20 20 20
RD/OR BK/RD
26 C201 DG/RD
7 C301
3 C323 X3
20 S131
BK/RD
A6 X3 1 C1 X2 X2
20 20 20 20
RD/OR BK/RD DG/RD DG/RD
CLOCKSPRING
(8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3)
10
OVERHEAD HORN
MODULE SWITCH
(8W-49-4) (8W-41-2)
(8W-49-5) (8W-41-3)
LOW HIGH
NOTE NOTE
S338
HORN HORN
(8W-41-2) (8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3) (8W-41-3)
A6 A6 A6
20 20 20
RD/OR RD/OR RD/OR
3 3
4 TRAILER TRAILER
TOW TOW
TRAILER
LEFT RIGHT
TOW
TURN TURN
CONNECTOR
(8W-54-3)
RELAY RELAY
(8W-54-3) (8W-54-3)
J998W-7 XJI01220
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE

22 24 25
20A SPARE 15A
S11 C4 S8 C4 6 C1
V23 F15 F15
18 20 20
BR/PK DB/WT DB/WT
GAS DIESEL
39 C201 F15
20
V23 S134 DB/WT
18
BR/PK
S219 B18
F15 F15
18 20 CONTROLLER
5 DB/WT DB/WT ANTI-LOCK
REAR F15 F15 BRAKE
20 20 F15 RELAY
WIPER/ DB/WT DB/WT 18
WASHER DB/WT
(IN PDC)
SWITCH (8W-35-5)
23
(8W-53-4)
6
(8W-53-5)
CONTROLLER
ANTI-LOCK
V23 9 5 BRAKE
18 HVAC (8W-35-5)
BR/PK UNIT B20
(8W-42-2) CONTROLLER
29 C200 (8W-42-4)
ANTI-LOCK
V23 F15 BRAKE
18 20 RELAY
BR/PK DB/WT
(IN PDC)
4 C327 40 C201 (4.0L)
23 (8W-35-4)
V23 F15 CONTROLLER
18 20
BR/PK DB/WT ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE
2 C313 (4.0L)
7 C310 (8W-35-4)
V23 S217
18
BR/PK F15 F15 F15
20 20 20
4 DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT
REAR
WIPER 2 3 4
MOTOR SHIFT EXTENDED BLEND
(8W-53-4) LOCK IDLE DOOR
(8W-53-5) SOLENOID SWITCH ACTUATOR
(8W-31-3) (POLICE (8W-42-6)
(8W-31-7) PACKAGE)
(8W-30-14)
XJI01221 J998W-7
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE

22 24 25
20A SPARE 15A
S11 C4 S8 C4 6 C1
V23 F15 F15
18 20 20
BR/PK DB/WT DB/WT
GAS DIESEL
6
REAR F15
20
WIPER/ S134 DB/WT
WASHER
SWITCH F15 F15 B18
5 (8W-53-6) 18 20 CONTROLLER
(8W-53-7) DB/WT DB/WT ANTI-LOCK
V23 BRAKE
18 B20 RELAY
BR/PK CONTROLLER (IN PDC)
ANTI-LOCK F15 (8W-35-5)
BRAKE 18
17 C203 DB/WT
RELAY
(IN PDC)
V23 (4.0L)
18 23 (8W-35-4) 23
BR/PK CONTROLLER CONTROLLER
ANTI-LOCK ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE BRAKE
4 C327 (4.0L) (8W-35-5)
(8W-35-4)
S219
V23 F15 F15 F15
18 20 20 20
BR/PK DB/WT DB/WT DB/WT
4
2 C313 BLEND 21 C204
7 C310 DOOR F15
ACTUATOR 20
(8W-42-6) DB/WT
V23
18 S349
BR/PK
F15 F15
20 20
4 2
DB/WT DB/WT
REAR SHIFT
WIPER LOCK 5 9
MOTOR SOLENOID HVAC
(8W-53-6) (8W-31-3) UNIT
(8W-53-7) (8W-31-7) (8W-42-3)
(8W-42-5)
J998W-7 XJI01222
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
HEADLAMP
(8W-50-2)
SWITCH
(8W-50-3)
OUTPUT
(8W-50-4)
9 C1
L7
18
BK/YL
S206
(8W-12-10)
(8W-12-11)
LHD RHD
45 C201
L7
18
BK/YL
M3 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
23
10A
5 C1 6 C7
GAS DIESEL
L78 L78 L78

20 18 18
DG/YL DG/YL DG/YL
7 C321
14 C106
BUILT-UP-EXPORT OTHER L78
18
L78 DG/YL
L78
20 20
DG/YL 2
DG/YL
RIGHT
1 S101 TAIL/
RIGHT STOP
L78 L78 L78
CITY 18 18 20 LAMP
LAMP DG/YL DG/YL DG/YL (8W-51-3)
(8W-50-14) 2 2 1
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT SIDE
PARK/ PARK/ MARKER
TURN TURN LAMP
SIGNAL SIGNAL (8W-50-13)
LAMP LAMP
NO. 1 NO. 2
XJI01223 (8W-50-13) (8W-50-13) J998W-7
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)

(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE CIRCUIT

26 27 BREAKER
10A 10A 28
25A
S21 C4 S23 C4 8 C5 1 C8
F14 F23 F81 F81

18 18 12 14
LG/YL DB/YL TN TN
13 C201
F81
12
TN
33 C200
F81
12
TN
1 C307
F81
14
TN
20 17 9 C1 4 C2
AIRBAG DRIVER PASSENGER
CONTROL POWER POWER
MODULE LOCK/ LOCK/
(8W-43-2) WINDOW WINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-60-2) (8W-61-2)
J998W-7 XJI01224
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)

(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE CIRCUIT

26 27 BREAKER
10A 10A 28
25A
S21 C4 S23 C4 8 C5 1 C8
F14 F23 F81 F81

18 18 12 14
LG/YL DB/YL TN TN
11 10 C204 3 C202
F81
12
TN
F14 F23
18 18 1 C307
LG/YL DB/YL
F81
14
TN
20 17 4 C2 9 C1
AIRBAG PASSENGER DRIVER
CONTROL POWER POWER
MODULE LOCK/ LOCK/
(8W-43-3) WINDOW WINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-61-3) (8W-60-5)
XJI01225 J998W-7
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)

JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BREAKER BREAKER
29 30
25A 20A
2 C6 M4 C4 8 C1
F37 V6
14 16
RD/LB DB
V6
LHD RHD 16
DB
8 C201
1
FRONT
HEATED V6 WIPER
OTHER SEATS 16 MOTOR
DB (8W-53-2)
5
2 C316 2 C316 WIPE/
WASH
F37 SWITCH
14 (8W-53-2)
RD/LB
S356
F37 F37 F37 F37 F37

14 14 14 14 14
RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB
1 C362 1 C363 1 C362 10 C329 1 C363
F37 F37 F37 F37 F37

14 14 14 14 14
RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB
A B A 8 B
LEFT RIGHT LEFT HEATED RIGHT
POWER POWER POWER SEAT POWER
SEAT SEAT SEAT RELAY SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH (8W-63-6) SWITCH
(8W-63-2) (8W-63-3) (8W-63-2) (8W-63-3)
POWER SEATS
J998W-7 XJI01226
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)

(8W-10-24) (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
BREAKER BREAKER
29 30
25A 20A
2 C6 M4 C4 8 C1
F37 V6 V6
14 16 16
RD/LB DB DB
LHD RHD
HEATED
OTHER SEATS 8 C201
2 C316 2 C316
V6
16
S356 DB
F37 F37 F37 F37 F37 5

14 14 14 14 14 WIPE/
RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB WASH
SWITCH
10 C329 (8W-53-2) 1
F37 FRONT
14 WIPER
1 C363 1 C363 RD/LB MOTOR
(8W-53-2)
1 C362 8 (8W-53-3)
1 C362 F37 F37 HEATED
14 14
RD/LB SEAT
RD/LB
RELAY
F37 (8W-63-6)
14 F37
B 14 B
RD/LB
RIGHT RD/LB RIGHT
POWER POWER
SEAT SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-63-3) (8W-63-3)
A A
LEFT LEFT
POWER POWER
SEAT SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH POWER SEATS
(8W-63-2) (8W-63-2)
XJI01227 J998W-7
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A23
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
16
15A
A24 (8W-10-25)
M1
20
PK
S135
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
12 C1
JUNCTION 1
BLOCK UNDERHOOD
(8W-12-2) LAMP/
MERCURY
4 C7 S18 C4 3 C3 SWITCH
(8W-44-6)
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
5 C314 RHD LHD OTHERS SKIM 25
TRANSMISSION
6 C201 CONTROL
MODULE
TO TO (4.0L)
LHD RHD M1 S347 S361
20 (8W-31-4)
(8W-10-26) (8W-10-26)
PK (8W-10-27) (8W-10-27)
M1 M1
20 18 S214
PK PK
M1 M1 M1 M1
20 20 20 20
PK PK PK PK
A 7 C2
CARGO RADIO
LAMP/ A C208 A C207 (8W-47-2)
SWITCH (8W-47-3)
(8W-47-9)
(8W-44-8)
(8W-47-10)
(8W-44-9)
9 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
(8W-40-2)
M1 M1
18 18
PK PK
1 1
LEFT RIGHT
COURTESY COURTESY
LAMP LAMP
(8W-44-6) (8W-44-6)
J998W-7 XJI01228
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A23
DISTRIBUTION
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-6)
16
15A
A24 (8W-10-28)
M1 M1
20 20
PK PK
12 C1 1
JUNCTION UNDERHOOD
BLOCK LAMP/
(8W-12-2) MERCURY
SWITCH
(8W-44-7)
4 C7 S18 C4 3 C3
M1 M1 M1
20 20 20
PK PK PK
5 C314 RHD LHD
6 C201
TO
LHD RHD M1 S347
20 (8W-10-28)
PK
M1 M1
20 18 S214
PK PK
M1 M1 M1 M1
20 20 20 20
PK PK PK PK
A 7 C2
CARGO RADIO
LAMP/ A C208 A C207 (8W-47-2)
SWITCH (8W-47-3)
(8W-44-8)
(8W-44-9)
9 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
(8W-40-2)
M1 M1
18 18
PK PK
1 1
LEFT RIGHT
COURTESY COURTESY
LAMP LAMP
(8W-44-7) (8W-44-7)
XJI01229 J998W-7
HEADLAMP LEFT RIGHT

SWITCH COURTESY COURTESY
(8W-50-2) LAMP LAMP
(8W-50-3) (8W-44-6) (8W-44-6)
(8W-50-4) (8W-44-7) (8W-44-7)
3 C1 2 2
M2 M2 M2
20 18 18
YL BK/WT BK/WT
B C208 B C207
M2 M2
20 20
YL YL
S201
LHD RHD
46 C201
M2
20
YL
S25 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
7 C7 1 C3
M2
20
YL
M2
20 OVERHEAD MODULE BASE/POLICE
YL
M2
S345 20
YL
M2
20 FULL OPTIONS MIDLINE 3
YL DOME
1
M2 M2 LAMP
OVERHEAD (8W-44-5)
20 20
MODULE YL YL
(8W-49-4) 7 B
COMPASS DOME
(8W-49-4) LAMPS
SWITCH
(8W-44-5)
S304
M2 M2 M2 M2 M2
20 20 20 20 20
YL YL YL YL YL
1 C317 A C320 1 C318 A C319 6 C314
M2 M2 M2 M2 M2
18 18 18 18 20
YL YL YL YL YL
1 3 1 3 B
DRIVER LEFT PASSENGER RIGHT CARGO
DOOR REAR DOOR REAR LAMP/
JAMB DOOR JAMB DOOR SWITCH
SWITCH JAMB SWITCH JAMB (8W-44-8)
(8W-39-6) SWITCH (8W-39-6) SWITCH (8W-44-9)
(8W-39-7) (8W-39-6) (8W-39-7) (8W-39-6)
J998W-7 (8W-39-7) (8W-39-7) XJI01230
LHD
PASSENGER PASSENGER
POWER DOOR
LOCK/ LOCK
WINDOW MOTOR
C1 SWITCH
(8W-61-4)
1 C1 5 2 1
(8W-61-4)
P34 P33 P33 P34
16 16 16 16
PK/BK OR/BK OR/BK PK/BK
S317
S316
P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
12 C9 1 C9
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
5 C7 1 C7
P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
S307
S306
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
PK/BK OR/BK PK/BK OR/BK PK/BK OR/BK PK/BK OR/BK
5 4 C305 5 4 C309 5 4 C304 2 1 C326

P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
2 1 C311
5 4 C310
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 2 1 2 B A
LEFT RIGHT LIFTGATE
1 2
REAR REAR LOCK
DRIVER
DOOR DOOR MOTOR
DOOR
LOCK LOCK (8W-61-4)
LOCK
MOTOR MOTOR
MOTOR (8W-61-4) (8W-61-4)
(8W-61-4)
FULL OPTIONS
XJI01231 J998W-7
RHD
PASSENGER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
1 C1 5 C1 SWITCH
(8W-61-5)
P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
S323
S322
P34 P33
P34 P33 16
16 16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
PK/BK OR/BK
1 2
PASSENGER
DOOR
5 4
C305 LOCK
MOTOR
(8W-61-5)
P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
S307
S306
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
5 C7 1 C7
5 4 C309 5 4 C304 2 1 C326 JUNCTION
P34 P33 BLOCK
16 16 (8W-12-2)
PK/BK OR/BK
2 1 C311 12 C9 1 C9
5 4 C310
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 2 1 2 B A 1 2
LEFT RIGHT LIFTGATE DRIVER
REAR REAR LOCK DOOR
DOOR DOOR MOTOR LOCK
LOCK LOCK (8W-61-5) MOTOR
MOTOR MOTOR (8W-61-5)
(8W-61-5) (8W-61-5)
J998W-7 XJI01232
POWER DRIVER
MIRROR POWER
SWITCH MIRROR
(LHD) (LHD)
6 (8W-62-8) 3 (8W-62-8)
P91 P91 20BK/WT

20
WT/BK
13 C305
PASSENGER P91
POWER 20
WT/BK
MIRROR
(LHD) 3 C200
3 (8W-62-8)
P91
20
WT/BK
P91 67 C201
20
WT/BK P91
20
WT/BK
7 C9 3 C5
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
3 C7 3 C5 7 C9
P91 P91 P91

20 20 20
WT/BK WT/BK WT/BK
13 C203
P91
20
WT/BK
S359
(RHD)
P91 6
20 POWER P91
WT/BK MIRROR 20
WT/BK
SWITCH
(RHD)
13 C305 (8W-62-9)
3
DRIVER
P91
20
POWER
WT/BK MIRROR
(RHD)
3 (8W-62-9)
PASSENGER
POWER
MIRROR POWER MIRRORS
(8W-62-9)
FULL OPTIONS
XJI01233 J998W-7
LHD
DRIVER DRIVER
POWER POWER
LOCK/ MIRROR
WINDOW (FULL
4 C2 7 C2 2 C2 SWITCH 2 4 OPTIONS)
(FULL (8W-62-2)
P76 OPTIONS) P76 P76 (8W-62-3)
20 (8W-62-4) 20 20
OR/YL OR/YL OR/YL
P74 P72
20 20 S328
DB YL/BK
P76
20
OR/YL
9 8 10
C305
P74 P72 P76

20 20 20
DB YL/BK OR/YL
35 34 36
C200
P74 P72 P76

20 20 20
DB YL/BK OR/YL
24 20 28 C201
P74 P72 P76

20 20 20
DB YL/BK OR/YL
9 C5 10 C5 2 C5
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
2 C9 6 C9 10 C9
P74 P72 P76
20 20 20
DB YL/BK OR/YL
S318
P76 P76
20 20
OR/YL OR/YL
3 1 2 4
PASSENGER
POWER
MIRROR
(FULL
OPTIONS)
(8W-62-4)
J998W-7 XJI01234
RHD
PASSENGER
POWER
MIRROR
(FULL
3 1 2 4 OPTIONS)
(8W-62-7)
P75 P71 P76 P76
20 20 20 20
DB/WT YL OR/YL OR/YL
S328
P76
20
OR/YL
9 8 10
C305
P74 P71 P76

20 20 20
DB YL OR/YL
19 18 20 C204
P74 P72 P76

20 20 20
DB YL/BK OR/YL
9 C5 10 C5 2 C5
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
2 C9 6 C9 10 C9
P75 P71 P76

20 20 20
DB/WT YL/LB OR/YL
S318
P76 P76 P76

20 20 20
OR/YL OR/YL OR/YL
6 C2 1 C2 2 C2 2 4
DRIVER DRIVER
POWER POWER
LOCK/ MIRROR
WINDOW (FULL
SWITCH OPTIONS)
(FULL (8W-62-5)
OPTIONS) (8W-62-6)
(8W-62-7)
XJI01235 J998W-7
PASSENGER POWER DRIVER

POWER MIRROR POWER
MIRROR SWITCH MIRROR
(LHD) (8W-62-9) (8W-48-3)
6 (8W-48-2) 1 6
PASSENGER Z1 Z1
Z1 POWER 20 18
18 LOCK/ BK BK
BK
WINDOW
S360
6 C2 SWITCH (8W-15-13)
(LHD)
Z1 (8W-61-2) PASSENGER
14
BK POWER
MIRROR
S319 Z1 (8W-48-2)
16 6
(8W-15-13)
BK Z1
Z1 18
16 BK
BK
FULL OPTIONS POWER POWER

MIRRORS MIRRORS
RHD LHD
11 C9
JUNCTION
CIGAR BLOCK
LIGHTER (8W-12-2)
RELAY
(8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3)
85
2 C3 S5 C4
Z1
OVERHEAD 14
MODULE BK
(8W-49-2) LHD RHD
(8W-49-3)
3 9
S314
(8W-15-13)
Z1 Z1 Z1
20 20 20 Z1 Z1
BK BK BK 14 14
BK BK
S342
(OVERHEAD 14 C201
CONSOLE) Z1
(8W-15-13) 14
BK
OTHER COMPASS
Z1 Z1
20 20 S208
BK BK (8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
A 1 Z1
14
DOME COMPASS BK
LAMPS (8W-49-2)
SWITCH (8W-49-3)
(8W-44-5)
G107
(8W-15-14)
J998W-7 (8W-15-15) XJI01236
XJ 8W - 15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION 8W - 15 - 1
8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION

A/C Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Left Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
A/C Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Left Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
A/C- Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Left Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18 Left Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3 Left Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Blend Door Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 Left Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Left Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21 Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 Left Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Cigar Lighter Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 16 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3 Oxygen Sensor 1/1 Upstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . . 8W-15-5, 6, 8, 12 Oxygen Sensor 1/2 Downstream . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, Passenger Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18, 19
Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . . . 8W-15-13, 18
Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13 Passenger Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 18
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 20 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 20 Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Driver Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 17, 20 Power Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 17
Electronic Vacuum Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 5, 9, 11 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3
Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14 PRNDL Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 18
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12 Radiator Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12
Fog Lamp Relay No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Fog Lamp Relay No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5 Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15
Front Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Rear Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11
Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
Fuel Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15
Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18 Rear Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 Right Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 3 Right City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Right Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12
G105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . 8W-15-7
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . 8W-15-7
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17 Right Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12
G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18 Right Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18 Right Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18 Right Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20 Right Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21 Right Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
G305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22 Right Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
G306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22 Right Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Right Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
Headlamp Leveling Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-15 Right Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Seat Belt Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 18
Heated Seat Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22 Seat Heat Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15, 16 Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Transfer Case Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2, 11
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 Transfer Case Switch Illumination . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 18
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 14, 15 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2
Left Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5, 6, 8
Left City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11
Left Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12 Vehicle Speed Control Servo . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . . 8W-15-7 Washer Fluid Level Switch . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . . 8W-15-7 Windshield Washer Pump . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12 Wipe/Wash Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
Left Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12
8W - 15 - 2 8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION XJ
GAS
TRANSFER TRANSFER OXYGEN ENGINE
CASE CASE SENSOR STARTER
SWITCH SWITCH 1/2 MOTOR
(8W-40-9) (8W-40-9) DOWNSTREAM RELAY
A B 2 (8W-30-8) D11 (2.5L M/T)
Z1 Z1 (IN PDC)
18 18 T41 (8W-21-4)
BK BK 20
POWERTRAIN BK/WT
CONTROL
242 4WD 231 4WD MODULE
(M/T 231)
POWER OXYGEN (8W-30-11)
A6 C1
STEERING SENSOR
PRESSURE 1/1 5 C107
SWITCH UPSTREAM
1 (2.5L) 2 (8W-30-8)
Z1 Z1 Z1
(8W-30-14) 20 18 20
Z1 Z1
BK BK BK
20 18
BK BK
S107
POWERTRAIN CONTROLLER DATA
CONTROL ANTI-LOCK LINK
MODULE BRAKE CONNECTOR
(8W-30-2) (8W-35-2) (8W-30-16)
A31 C1 A32 C1 8 24 4 5
TRANSMISSION
CONTROL Z1 Z12
MODULE 18 18
Z1 Z1 BK BK/TN
(4.0L)
(8W-31-4) 12 12 C100
24 BK BK A1 A7
E7
BATTERY
(8W-20-2) Z1 Z12
18 18
BK BK/TN
Z1 Z12 Z12 Z12 G102

16 14 14 18
BK BK/TN BK/TN BK/TN
4.0L 2.5L
Z0
4
9 C107 BK
Z12 Z0 Z0
16 8 6
BK/TN BK BK
LHD
RHD
G100
G101
J998W-7 XJI01502
XJ 8W-15 GROUND DISTRIBUTION 8W - 15 - 3
DIESEL
CONTROLLER POWERTRAIN
ANTI-LOCK CONTROL
BRAKE MODULE
(8W-35-5) (8W-30-20)
8 24 A31 C1 A32 C1
DATA
LINK
CONNECTOR
(8W-30-31) ENGINE
4 5 CONTROL
Z12
18 MODULE
BK/TN (8W-30-19)
Z1
18 LHD RHD K1 C2 K27 C2
BK
E7 C100 A7 C100
Z12 Z12
20 18
BK/TN BK/TN
Z12 Z12 Z12 Z12

14 14 14 16
BK/TN BK/TN BK/TN BK/TN
A1 C100
S146
Z12
12
BK/TN
S150
BATTERY
(8W-20-3)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z12 Z0 Z0
12 12 18 12 6 2/0
BK BK BK BK/TN BK BK
G102 G104 G105

XJI01503 J998W-7
LHD 2.5L GAS
REAR WINDSHIELD FOG FOG
WASHER WASHER LAMP LAMP
PUMP PUMP RELAY RELAY
(8W-53-4) (8W-53-2) NO. 2 NO. 1
2 B B13 (IN PDC) B8 (IN PDC)
(DRL) (DRL)
Z1 Z1 (8W-50-16) (8W-50-16)
18 20
BK BK
UNDERHOOD
LAMP/
MERCURY
SWITCH
2 (8W-44-6)
VEHICLE
SPEED
CONTROL
SERVO
4 (8W-33-4)
WASHER FRONT
FLUID WIPER
LEVEL MOTOR
SWITCH (8W-53-2)
A (8W-40-6) 4
Z1 Z1
18 20 Z1 Z1 Z1
BK BK 20 18 20
BK BK BK
S132
Z1 Z1
14 16
BK BK
A B
TO TO
G106 G106
(8W-15-7) (8W-15-7)
J998W-7 XJI01504
LHD 4.0L EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
REAR WINDSHIELD
WASHER WASHER
PUMP PUMP
(8W-53-4) (8W-53-2)
(8W-53-5)
2 B
(8W-53-6)
(8W-53-7) Z1
Z1 18
18 BK
BK
WASHER FRONT TRANSMISSION

FLUID WIPER RANGE
LEVEL MOTOR SENSOR
SWITCH (8W-53-2) (A/T)
A/T M/T (8W-40-6) (8W-31-6)
A 4 8
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 16 18
BK BK BK BK
S141
UNDERHOOD FOG VEHICLE
Z1
LAMP/ LAMP SPEED 16
MERCURY RELAY CONTROL BK
SWITCH NO. 2 SERVO
2 (8W-44-6) B13 (IN PDC) 4 (8W-33-4)
D
(DRL)
Z1 Z1 Z1 (8W-50-16) Z1 TO
18 20 20 18
BK BK BK BK
G106
(8W-15-7)
ENGINE FOG CONTROLLER

STARTER LAMP ANTI-LOCK
MOTOR RELAY BRAKE
RELAY NO. 1 RELAY
D11 (M/T) B8 (IN PDC) B19 (IN PDC)
(IN PDC) (DRL) (8W-35-4)
(8W-21-5) (8W-50-16)
Z1 Z1 Z1
20 20 20
BK BK BK
S132
Z1
14
BK
TO
G106
(8W-15-7)
XJI01505 J998W-7
RHD GAS
REAR WINDSHIELD VEHICLE

WASHER WASHER SPEED
PUMP PUMP CONTROL
(8W-53-6) (8W-53-2) SERVO
2 B 4 (8W-33-4)
Z1
18
BK Z1
18
BK
UNDERHOOD CONTROLLER
LAMP/ ANTI-LOCK
MERCURY BRAKE
SWITCH RELAY
2 (8W-44-6) B19 (IN PDC)
Z1 (8W-35-4)
18
BK
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S132
Z1
14
BK
TO
G106
(8W-15-7)
WASHER FRONT TRANSMISSION

FLUID WIPER RANGE
LEVEL MOTOR SENSOR
SWITCH (8W-53-2) (4.0L A/T)
A (8W-40-8) 4 8 (8W-31-6)
Z1 Z1 Z1
20 16 18
BK BK BK
S141
Z1
14
BK
TO
G106
(8W-15-7)
J998W-7 XJI01506
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT

HEADLAMP FOG FRONT FRONT
(8W-50-5) LAMP PARK/ PARK/
(8W-50-6) (8W-50-15) TURN TURN
C 1 1 SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL
LAMP LAMP
NO. 1 NO. 2
(8W-50-11) (8W-50-11)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 18 18
BK BK BK BK
S103
Z1
18
BK
S158
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT

FRONT FRONT HEADLAMP FOG
PARK/ PARK/ (8W-50-5) LAMP
TURN TURN (8W-50-6) (8W-50-15)
1 SIGNAL 1 SIGNAL C 1
LAMP LAMP
NO. 1 NO. 2
(8W-50-13) (8W-50-13)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 18 20
BK BK BK BK BK
S102
RADIATOR
FAN
MOTOR
Z1 (8W-42-8) FROM
18 S132
BK 2 (8W-15-4)
A
DAYTIME
RUNNING
FROM
LAMP
FRONT
C106 MODULE FROM FROM
WIPER
11 4 8 (8W-50-19) S132 S141
MOTOR (8W-15-5) (8W-15-5)
(8W-15-4) (8W-15-6) (8W-15-6)
B C D
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z12 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
20 20 12 16 14 16 14 14
BK/WT BK BK BK/TN BK BK BK BK
G106
XJI01507 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT LHD 4.0L A/T
REAR WINDSHIELD VEHICLE CONTROLLER
WASHER WASHER SPEED ANTI-LOCK
PUMP PUMP CONTROL BRAKE
(8W-53-4) (8W-53-2) SERVO RELAY
2 B 4 (8W-33-4) B19 (IN PDC)
(8W-35-4)
Z1
18
BK
UNDERHOOD
LAMP/
MERCURY
SWITCH
2 (8W-44-6)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 18 20
BK BK BK BK
S132
Z1
14
WASHER FRONT TRANSMISSION BK
FLUID WIPER RANGE
LEVEL MOTOR SENSOR E
SWITCH (8W-53-2) (8W-31-6)
(8W-40-6) TO
A 4 8
G106
(8W-15-10)
Z1 Z1 Z1
20 16 18
BK BK BK
S141
Z1
16
BK
TO
G106
(8W-15-10)
J998W-7 XJI01508
BUILT-UP-EXPORT LHD 4.0L M/T
REAR WINDSHIELD ENGINE
WASHER WASHER STARTER
PUMP PUMP MOTOR
(8W-53-4) (8W-53-2) RELAY
2 B D11 (IN PDC)
(8W-21-5)
Z1
18
BK
UNDERHOOD VEHICLE
LAMP/ SPEED
MERCURY CONTROL
SWITCH SERVO
2 (8W-44-6) 4 (8W-33-4)
WASHER FRONT
FLUID WIPER
LEVEL MOTOR
SWITCH (8W-53-2)
A (8W-40-6) 4
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 20 20 18 16
BK BK BK BK BK BK
S132
Z1
14
BK
E G
TO TO
G106 G106
(8W-15-10) (8W-15-10)
XJI01509 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT GAS
LEFT LEFT FOG
REPEATER FOG LAMP
LAMP LAMP RELAY LEFT
(8W-50-12) (8W-50-17) (IN PDC) FRONT
2 1 B8 (8W-50-17) TURN
L35
SIGNAL
Z1 LEFT LEFT 20 1 LAMP
18 HEADLAMP BR/WT
LEFT NO. 2
BK CITY FRONT
(8W-50-7) (8W-50-12)
LAMP (8W-50-8) TURN
(8W-50-12)
2 C114 SIGNAL
2 C 12 C106 LAMP
Z1 1
Z1 Z1 20 Z1 Z1 NO. 1
18 20 BK 18 20 (8W-50-12)
Z1
BK BK BK BK 18
BK
S103
Z1 Z1
18 18
RIGHT BK BK
FRONT RIGHT
TURN REPEATER S158
SIGNAL LAMP
LAMP (8W-50-14)
RIGHT
1
NO. 1 HEADLAMP
2 (8W-50-7)
Z1 (8W-50-14)
Z1 (8W-50-8)
18
BK
RIGHT 18
RIGHT RIGHT
BK C
FRONT CITY FOG
TURN LAMP LAMP
SIGNAL 2 C115 (8W-50-14) (8W-50-17)
1 LAMP
2 1
NO. 2
Z1 Z1 (8W-50-14) Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 20 18 20
BK BK BK BK BK BK
S102
RADIATOR LEFT RIGHT

FAN HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
MOTOR LEVELING LEVELING
(8W-42-8) MOTOR MOTOR
2 3 (8W-50-20) 3 (8W-50-20)
Z1 Z15 Z15
18 18 18
FROM BK/GY BK/GY
BK
FROM
FRONT
WIPER S235
S132 FROM
(8W-15-8) S141 MOTOR
C106 (8W-15-9)
11 4 (8W-15-8) (8W-15-9)
Z15
E F G 18
BK/GY
5 C106
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z15
20 20 12 14 16 16 16
BK/WT BK BK BK BK BK BK/GY
G106
J998W-7 XJI01510
DIESEL
TRANSFER WINDSHIELD FUEL
CASE WASHER HEATER
SWITCH PUMP RELAY
(231 4WD) (8W-53-3) (IN PDC)
B (8W-40-10) B D6 (8W-30-21)
Z1 WASHER REAR ENGINE

20
BK FLUID WASHER STARTER
LEVEL PUMP MOTOR
SWITCH (8W-53-5) RELAY
4 C111 (8W-40-7) (8W-53-7) (IN PDC)
A 2 D13
(8W-40-8) (8W-21-6)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 18 18 18 20
BK BK BK BK BK BK
S141
UNDERHOOD A/C ELECTRONIC

LAMP/ COMPRESSOR VACUUM
MERCURY CLUTCH MODULATOR
SWITCH (8W-42-7) (8W-30-21)
2 (8W-44-7) 2 D
Z1
16
FUEL BK
FRONT
HEATER WIPER
(8W-30-21) MOTOR
(8W-53-3)
2 11 C120 4
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
20 14 16 16 18 12
BK BK BK BK BK BK
S157
Z1 Z1
20 12
BK BK
1 S132
A/C
LOW
PRESSURE Z1
SWITCH 12
BK
(8W-42-7)
TO
G106
(8W-15-12)
XJI01511 J998W-7
DIESEL
LEFT LEFT LEFT CONTROLLER
FRONT REPEATER FOG ANTI-LOCK
TURN LAMP LAMP BRAKE
SIGNAL (8W-50-12) (8W-50-18) RELAY
1 LAMP 2 1 B19 (IN PDC)
NO. 1 (8W-35-5)
Z1 (8W-50-12) Z1 Z1
18 18 20 FOG
BK LEFT BK BK/YL LAMP
FRONT RELAY
2 C114
TURN (IN PDC)
SIGNAL LEFT LEFT B10 (8W-50-18)
1 LAMP CITY HEADLAMP
NO. 2 Z1
Z1 (8W-50-12)
LAMP (8W-50-7)
20
18 (8W-50-12) (8W-50-8)
BK/YL
BK
2 C 12 C106
S158 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 20 20 18 20
BK BK BK BK BK
S103
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT
FRONT REPEATER HEADLAMP
TURN LAMP (8W-50-7)
SIGNAL (8W-50-14) (8W-50-8)
1 LAMP 2 C
NO. 1
(8W-50-14)
Z1
RIGHT 18 RIGHT RIGHT
FRONT BK CITY FOG
TURN LAMP LAMP
SIGNAL (8W-50-14) (8W-50-18)
LAMP 2 C115
1 2 1
NO. 2
(8W-50-14) Z1
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 20 18 20
Z1 BK BK BK BK BK BK
18
BK S102
RADIATOR LEFT RIGHT
FAN HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
MOTOR LEVELING LEVELING
(8W-42-8) MOTOR MOTOR
Z1 (8W-50-20) (8W-50-20)
18 2 3 3
FROM
BK S132 Z15 Z15
(8W-15-11) 18 18
BK/GY BK/GY
H
C106 S235
11 4
Z15
18
BK/GY
5 C106
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z15
20 20 12 12 16
BK/WT BK BK BK BK/GY
G106
J998W-7 XJI01512
OVERHEAD PASSENGER POWER DRIVER

MODULE POWER MIRROR POWER
(8W-49-2) MIRROR SWITCH MIRROR
(8W-49-3) (LHD) (8W-62-9) (8W-48-2)
3 9 6 (8W-48-2) 1 6
COMPASS PASSENGER Z1 Z1
Z1 Z1
20 20 (8W-49-2) Z1 POWER 20 18
(8W-49-3) 18 LOCK/ BK BK
BK BK BK
WINDOW
S360
1 DOME 6 C2 SWITCH
LAMPS (LHD)
Z1 (8W-61-2) PASSENGER
SWITCH 14
(8W-44-5) BK POWER
A MIRROR
Z1 S319 Z1 (8W-48-2)
16 6
Z1 20
20 BK Z1
BK Z1
BK 18
16 BK
BK
OVERHEAD OTHERS
CONSOLE
S342 FULL OPTIONS POWER POWER
(OVERHEAD MIRRORS MIRRORS
CONSOLE) RHD LHD
2 C3 11 C9
JUNCTION
CIGAR BLOCK
LIGHTER (8W-12-2)
RELAY
(8W-41-2)
(8W-41-3)
85
S5 C4
TRANSFER PRNDL
CASE ILLUMINATION
SEAT
SWITCH (A/T)
BELT
ILLUMINATION (8W-44-2)
(8W-44-2) (8W-44-3) SWITCH
2 2 Z1
(8W-44-3) (8W-40-6)
Z1 14
20 (8W-44-4) Z1 B BK
BK 20
BK Z1
20 LHD RHD
BK
2 C206
S314
Z1 Z1
14 14
BK BK
14 C201
Z1
14
BK
I J
TO TO
S208 S208
(8W-15-14) (8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15) (8W-15-15)
XJI01513 J998W-7
FROM
FROM JUNCTION EXTENDED FRONT
C201 BLOCK IDLE FOG
(8W-15-13) (8W-15-13) SWITCH LAMP
I J (8W-30-14) SWITCH
1 4 (8W-44-2)
(8W-44-4)
Z1 Z1
14 14
BK BK POLICE OTHERS
PACKAGE
LHD RHD
REAR COMBINATION REAR

WINDOW FLASHER WIPER/
DEFOGGER (8W-52-2) WASHER
SWITCH SWITCH
1 (8W-48-2) 5 1 (8W-53-4)
(8W-48-3)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
14 20 20 20 20
BK BK BK BK BK
S208
BLEND
DOOR
ACTUATOR
(8W-42-6)
CIGAR
2
LIGHTER
(8W-41-2) HVAC
(8W-41-3) UNIT
(8W-42-6)
3
POWER
OUTLET
(8W-41-2) Z1 Z1 Z1
(8W-41-3) 20 20 20
Z1 Z1
BK BK BK
16 14
BK 3 BK
13 C204 7 C201
Z1 RHD LHD
16
BK
G107
J998W-7 XJI01514
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HVAC REAR POWER
UNIT WINDOW ANTENNA
(8W-42-6) FROM DEFOGGER
FROM RELAY
JUNCTION SWITCH
C201 (RHD)
1
BLOCK 1 (8W-48-2) (8W-47-4)
(8W-15-13) (8W-15-13) (8W-48-3) A C1
Z1 I J
20 Z1
BK 18 COMBINATION
BK FLASHER
Z1 Z1 (8W-52-3)
LHD RHD 14 14 (8W-52-4)
BK BK
FRONT REAR
7 C201 13 C204 FOG
5
WIPER/
LHD RHD LAMP WASHER
SWITCH SWITCH
Z1 Z1 4 (8W-44-3) Z1 (8W-53-4)
14 20 (8W-44-4) 20 1
(8W-53-5)
BK BK Z1 BK Z1 (8W-53-6)
Z1 20 20 (8W-53-7)
20 BK BK
BK
S208
POWER
CIGAR OUTLET
LIGHTER (8W-41-2)
(8W-41-2) (8W-41-3) BLEND REAR
(8W-41-3) DOOR FOG
3 ACTUATOR LAMP
3
(8W-42-6) SWITCH
2 1 (8W-51-10)
POWER
ANTENNA
RELAY
(LHD) HEADLAMP
(8W-47-4) LEVELING
A C1 Z1
SWITCH 20
(8W-50-20) BK
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
16 18 16 2 14
BK BK BK BK
LHD RHD
Z15 Z15
20 18
BK/GY BK/GY
Z15
20 REAR
BK/GY FOG
LAMP
RELAY
3 (8W-51-9)
Z1
18
BK
G107
XJI01515 J998W-7
WIPE/ BRAKE HEADLAMP IGNITION

WASH LAMP DELAY SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH MODULE (8W-10-14)
(8W-53-2) (8W-33-4) (8W-50-9) (8W-10-15)
(8W-53-3) (8W-33-5) (8W-50-10)
1 2 4 1 C1
Z1 Z1 Z1 HEADLAMP Z1
16 18 18 20
BK BK BK SWITCH BK
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
(8W-50-4)
1 C2
Z1
18
BK
S207
SENTRY HVAC COMPASS

KEY UNIT (8W-49-2)
IMMOBILIZER (8W-42-2) (8W-49-3)
MODULE (8W-42-3)
(8W-42-4)
2 4 (EXCEPT 10 (8W-42-5)
POLICE/POSTAL) 12
(8W-39-4) LHD RHD
Z2 Z2
(8W-39-5)
20 20
BK/LG POWER BK/LG
Z8 AMP OTHER
20
INSTRUMENT BK/VT
5 C301
CLUSTER Z8 Z8
(8W-40-2) 12 12 Z2
BK/VT BK/PK 20
BK/LG
6 C1 9 C2 LHD RHD
A/C-
HEATER 58 C201
CONTROL
(8W-42-4)
(8W-42-5) 25 C201 6 C202
1
Z2 HEATER Z2
20 20
BK/LG CONTROL
POLICE/ (8W-42-2) BK/LG
OTHER POSTAL (8W-42-3)
Z8
1 RADIO
12 Z8 (8W-47-2)
BK/VT 12 (8W-47-3)
S227 BK/VT (8W-47-9)
(8W-47-10)
A/C OTHER
Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 Z8 Z8 Z9
14 20 20 18 12 16 14
BK BK/LG BK/LG BK/LG BK/VT BK/VT BK
G108
J998W-7 XJI01516
LHD
LEFT
TAIL/ LEFT LEFT DRIVER
STOP TURN BACK-UP POWER
LAMP SIGNAL LAMP MIRROR
(8W-51-7) (8W-48-2)
1 (8W-51-3) LAMP
1 (8W-52-5) 1 6
LEFT (8W-52-6)
Z1 Z1 Z1 DRIVER
REAR 18 POWER POWER
18 18
BK FOG BK BK
LOCK/ MIRROR
LAMP WINDOW SWITCH
(BUILT-UP (8W-62-8)
1
Z1 -EXPORT) 5 C2 8 C1 SWITCH
(8W-60-4) 1
18 (8W-51-10) (8W-61-2)
BK
S341 DRIVER
POWER
BUILT- EXCEPT BUILT- MIRROR
UP-EXPORT UP-EXPORT (8W-48-2)
TRAILER 6
Z1 Z1
TOW 16 18
Z1 Z1
Z1 Z1 Z1 18 14
CONNECTOR BK BK 14 14 16
(8W-54-2) BK BK
BK BK BK
8
FUEL S329 S329
PUMP Z1 TRAILER
2 C322
14 TOW OTHERS
MODULE Z1 Z1
BK
(GAS) 12 12
(8W-30-3) Z1 BK BK
6 18
BK FULL POWER
LEFT OPTIONS MIRRORS
S337 Z1
REAR 14 DRIVER
DOOR BK DOOR
JAMB Z1
14 JAMB
2 SWITCH BK SWITCH Z1
(8W-39-6) (8W-39-6) 12
Z1 3 BK
18 2 C323 Z1
BK
18
B C320 BK
3 C317 3 C307
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
16 20 14 20 12
BK BK BK BK BK
S309
AIRBAG POWER
CONTROL AMPLIFIER
MODULE (8W-47-2)
(8W-43-2)
10 7 C2 8 C2
FULL
BASE OPTIONS Z1
12
Z6 Z6 BK
Z5 Z5
18 18 16 16
BK/YL BK/PK BK/LB BK/LB
G302
G301
XJI01517 G200 J998W-7
RHD
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
TAIL/ TURN BACK-UP REAR
STOP SIGNAL LAMP FOG
LAMP LAMP (8W-51-7) LAMP
1 (8W-51-3) 1 (8W-51-4) 1 1 (BUILT-UP
-EXPORT)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 (8W-51-10)
18 18 18 18
BK BK BK BK
S341
PRNDL TRAILER
ILLUMINATION TOW EXCEPT
CONNECTOR BUILT-UP BUILT-UP
(A/T)
TRANSFER (8W-44-4)
(8W-54-2) -EXPORT -EXPORT
CASE 8
SWITCH 2 Z1 Z1
PASSENGER
ILLUMINATION Z1 18 16
PASSENGER POWER BK BK
(8W-44-4) 20
2 BK POWER MIRROR
Z1 LOCK/ (8W-48-3)
20 WINDOW 6
BK
6 C2 SWITCH Z1 2 C322
(8W-61-3) 16
Z1 BK
14 FULL POWER
2 C206 BK OPTIONS MIRRORS
SEAT Z1 Z1 Z1
BELT 14 18 14
SWITCH S325 BK BK BK
Z1
(8W-40-8)
Z1 16
BK
S337
B 12
BK
Z1
Z1 Z1 14
20 20 BK
BK BK
LEFT PASSENGER
REAR DOOR 2 C323
DOOR JAMB
S313
JAMB SWITCH
FUEL 2 SWITCH (8W-39-7)
3
PUMP (8W-39-7)
Z1 Z1
MODULE 18
(GAS) 18
BK BK
(8W-30-4)
6
B C320 3 C307 3 C317
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
16 20 20 12 20 14
BK BK BK BK BK BK
S309
AIRBAG POWER
CONTROL AMPLIFIER
MODULE (8W-47-3)
(8W-43-3) Z1
12
10 7 C2 8 C2 BK
Z6 Z5 Z5
18 16 16
BK/PK BK/LB BK/LB
G300 G301 G302

J998W-7 XJI01518
LHD
REAR TAIL/ TURN BACK-UP
FOG STOP SIGNAL LAMP
LAMP LAMP LAMP (8W-51-7)
1 (BUILT-UP- 1 (8W-51-3) 1 (8W-51-4) 1
EXPORT)
(8W-51-10)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 18
BK BK BK BK
S348
RIGHT PASSENGER
REAR DOOR
DOOR JAMB
JAMB SWITCH
2 SWITCH 3 (8W-39-6)
(8W-39-6)
Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18
BK BK BK
B C319 3 C318 2 C321
Z1 Z1
20 20 Z1
BK BK 18
BK
S310
Z1
16
BK
G303
XJI01519 J998W-7
RHD
REAR TAIL/ TURN BACK-UP
FOG STOP SIGNAL LAMP
LAMP LAMP LAMP (8W-51-7)
1 (BUILT-UP 1 (8W-51-3) 1 (8W-51-4) 1
-EXPORT)
(8W-51-10)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 18
BK BK BK BK
S348
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER

DOOR POWER POWER
JAMB LOCK/ MIRROR
SWITCH WINDOW (FULL
3 (8W-39-7) 8 C1 5 C2 SWITCH 6 OPTIONS)
(FULL (8W-48-3)
OPTIONS)
(8W-60-5)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
(8W-61-3)
18 14 16 18 18
BK BK BK BK BK
S319
RIGHT Z1
REAR 14
BK
DOOR
JAMB
2 SWITCH
(8W-39-7)
Z1
18
BK
5 C303
3 C318 B C319 2 C321

Z1
Z1 Z1 14 Z1
20 20 BK 18
BK BK BK
S310
Z1
12
BK
G303
J998W-7 XJI01520
LICENSE LIFTGATE REAR

LAMP SWITCH WIPER
(8W-51-3) (8W-44-8) MOTOR
(8W-44-9) (8W-53-4)
(8W-53-5)
2 1 1 (8W-53-6)
(8W-53-7)
Z1
18
BK
Z1 Z1
20 18
2 C330 BK BK
Z1
18
BK
S334
CENTER
HIGH
MOUNTED Z1
STOP 18
LAMP BK
(8W-51-3)
1 9 C310
6 C311
Z1
18
BK
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
2 C325
(8W-48-2)
(8W-48-3)
Z1 Z1 Z1
18 12 18
BK BK BK
2 C310
1 C312
Z1
12
BK
G304
XJI01521 J998W-7
LEFT RIGHT
POWER POWER
SEAT SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-63-2) (8W-63-3)
B C2 A C2
Z1 Z1
14 14
BK BK
2 C362 2 C363
Z1 Z1
14 14
BK BK
S350
LEFT RIGHT HEATED Z1

HEATED HEATED SEAT 14
SEAT SEAT RELAY BK
BACK BACK (8W-63-6)
(8W-63-5) (8W-63-5)
B B 6 G305
Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18
BK BK BK
LEFT RIGHT
S354 HEATED HEATED
Z1 SEAT SEAT
18 SWITCH SWITCH
BK (8W-63-4) (8W-63-4)
3 3
4 C332 12 C329
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
18 18 18 18
BK BK BK BK
S355
LEFT RIGHT SEAT

POWER POWER HEAT
SEAT SEAT INTERFACE
SWITCH SWITCH MODULE
(8W-63-2) (8W-63-3) (8W-63-5)
B C2 A C2 13
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2
18 14 14 18
BK BK BK BK/LG
2 C362 2 C363 13 C329
Z1 Z1 Z2
14 14 18
BK BK BK/LG
G306
(HEATED SEATS)
J998W-7 XJI01522
XJ 8W - 20 CHARGING SYSTEM 8W - 20 - 1
8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM

Automatic Shut Down Relay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 Fusible Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 G100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3 G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2
Engine Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 G104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Fuse 4 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3 G105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-3
Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Fuse 21 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
Fuse 24 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3
8W - 20 - 2 8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM XJ
GAS
POWER FUSIBLE
A18 DISTRIBUTION LINK
CENTER A11
FUSE 10
19 (8W-10-2)
DG
25A
(8W-10-29)
A17
A0 S118
6
A16
RD
16
A11
RD/LG
6
BK/WT
C2
AUTOMATIC
BATTERY SHUT
DOWN
GENERATOR
RELAY
C8 (IN PDC)
A0 (8W-30-2)
6
RD
A999 A999
16 16
RD RD
B(+) ENGINE
Z0 STARTER
8 MOTOR
BK (8W-21-2)
(8W-21-3) TO
(8W-21-4) 1 2
(8W-21-5) FUSE
24 (PDC)
(8W-10-29)
K72 K20
16 18
POWER DG/OR DG
A14 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CENTER
21 (8W-10-2)
20A
(8W-10-29)
A13
2 3 C108
2.5L 4.0L A142
18 K20
DG/OR 18
DG
Z0 Z0
4 6 S137
BK BK (8W-10-29)
2 C107
A142 K72 K20

18 18 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG
C12 C3 C25 C3 B10 C2

G101 POWERTRAIN
AUTOMATIC GENERATOR GENERATOR
(8W-15-2)
SHUT DRIVER FIELD CONTROL
DOWN DRIVER MODULE
RELAY (+) (8W-30-2)
G100 OUTPUT (8W-30-15)
(8W-15-2)
J998W-7 XJI02002
XJ 8W-20 CHARGING SYSTEM 8W - 20 - 3
DIESEL
POWER FUSIBLE
10 DISTRIBUTION LINK
CENTER A11
A0 FUSE 10
4 (8W-10-6)
6 DG
RD 30A
(8W-10-18)
3
S118
A0 A16 A11
2/0 12 6
RD RD/LG BK/GY
ENGINE GENERATOR
STARTER
MOTOR
(8W-21-6)
S151
BATTERY (8W-10-18)
A16 1 2
12
RD/LG
C2
AUTOMATIC
SHUT
DOWN K72 K20
RELAY 18 18
(IN PDC) DG/OR DG
C8
(8W-30-19)
A142 7 5 C120
16
DG/OR K72
Z0 Z0 18
6 2/0 DG/OR
BK BK
S137
(8W-10-18)
G105 A142 A142 K20

(8W-15-3) 16 16 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG
G104
(8W-15-3) K2 C2 K28 C2 C25 C3 B10 C2
AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC ENGINE GENERATOR GENERATOR POWERTRAIN
SHUT SHUT CONTROL DRIVER FIELD CONTROL
DOWN DOWN MODULE DRIVER MODULE
RELAY RELAY (8W-30-19) (+) (8W-30-20)
OUTPUT OUTPUT
XJI02003 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 21 STARTING SYSTEM 8W - 21 - 1
8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-4
Clutch Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-4, 5, 6 G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-3, 5, 6
Clutch Interlock Switch Jumper . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Engine Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Fuse 7 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-6 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3
Fuse 10 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-3
Fuse 19 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
8W - 21 - 2 8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM XJ
2.5L GAS A/T
ST A41 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION
BLOCK POWER
FUSE
19 (8W-12-2) DISTRIBUTION
16
10A CENTER
(8W-12-18) FUSE (8W-10-2)
(8W-12-19) 10
20A
3 C1 (8W-10-23)
23
F45
20
YL/RD
LHD RHD
E7 C100
F45
20 F45
YL/RD 20
YL/RD
2 1
CLUTCH CLUTCH A41 A0
F45 F45 16 6
18
INTERLOCK 18
INTERLOCK YL RD
YL SWITCH YL SWITCH
JUMPER JUMPER
1 2
T141
T141 20
20 YL
YL
E8 C100
D13 D10
ENGINE
STARTER
BATTERY
MOTOR (8W-20-2)
RELAY
D11 D14 (IN PDC)
T41 T40
20 16
BK/WT BR
5 C107
RHD LHD
T41 T41
18 20
BK/WT BK/WT 1 C108
T40 A0
16 6
BR RD
S120
T41 T41
18 18 ENGINE
BK/WT BK/WT STARTER
2 A6 C1 2 1 MOTOR
PARK/ POWERTRAIN 1 PULL-IN
PARK/
P/N 2 HOLD-IN
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL CONTROL
POSITION POSITION MODULE M
SWITCH
SWITCH SENSE
(8W-30-11)
(8W-31-2)
J998W-7 XJI02102
XJ 8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM 8W - 21 - 3
4.0L A/T
ST A41 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION
BLOCK POWER
FUSE DISTRIBUTION
19 (8W-12-2) 16
10A
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
(8W-12-18) 10
(8W-12-19) 20A
3 C1 (8W-10-23)
23
F45
20
YL/RD
LHD RHD
E7 C100
1 A41 A0
CLUTCH 16 6
F45 YL RD
18
INTERLOCK
YL SWITCH
JUMPER
2
T141
20
YL
E8 C100
D13 D10
ENGINE
STARTER
MOTOR
RELAY
(IN PDC) BATTERY
D11 D14
(8W-20-2)
T41 T41 T40
20 20 16
BK/WT BK/WT BR
7
TRANSMISSION 5 C107 1 C108
P/N RANGE T41
SENSOR 18 T40
(8W-31-6) BK/WT 16
BR
8
Z1
18
BK
S141 A0
6
(8W-15-5)
RD
(8W-15-6)
EXCEPT (8W-15-8)
BUILT-UP BUILT-UP
-EXPORT -EXPORT ENGINE
STARTER
Z1 Z1 A6 C1 MOTOR
2 1
14 16 TRANSMISSION POWERTRAIN 1 PULL-IN
BK BK RANGE CONTROL 2 HOLD-IN
SWITCH MODULE M
G106 SENSE (8W-30-11)
(8W-15-7) G106
(8W-15-10)
XJI02103 J998W-7
2.5L GAS M/T
ST A41 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
16
(8W-12-2) CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
19 10
10A 20A
(8W-12-18) (8W-10-23)
23
(8W-12-19)
3 C1
F45
20
YL/RD
LHD RHD
E7 C100
A0
2 2 6
CLUTCH CLUTCH RD
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
SWITCH SWITCH
1 1
BATTERY
(8W-20-2)
E8 C100
A41
T141 16
20 YL
YL
D13 D10
ENGINE
STARTER
MOTOR
RELAY
D11 D14 (IN PDC)
T41 T40
20 16
BK/WT BR
5 C107 1 C108
Z1
20 T40 A0
BK 16 6
BR RD
S107
(8W-15-2)
Z1 ENGINE
16 STARTER
BK
2 1 MOTOR
1 PULL-IN
G101 2 HOLD-IN
(8W-15-2)
M
J998W-7 XJI02104
XJ 8W-21 STARTING SYSTEM 8W - 21 - 5
4.0L M/T
ST A41 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
16
(8W-12-2) CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
19 10
10A 20A
(8W-12-18) (8W-10-23)
23
(8W-12-19)
3 C1
F45
20
YL/RD
LHD RHD
E7 C100
A0
2 2 6
CLUTCH CLUTCH RD
INTERLOCK INTERLOCK
SWITCH SWITCH
1 1
BATTERY
(8W-20-2)
E8 C100
A41
T141 16
20 YL
YL
D13 D10
ENGINE
STARTER
MOTOR
RELAY
D11 D14 (IN PDC)
Z1 T40
20 16
BK BR
1 C108
S132
(8W-15-5) A0
T40
(8W-15-9) 6
16
BR RD
Z1
14 ENGINE
BK STARTER
2 1 MOTOR
1 PULL-IN
2 HOLD-IN
M
G106
(8W-15-7)
(8W-15-10)
XJI02105 J998W-7
DIESEL
ST A41 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
FUSE (8W-12-2) 13
CENTER
19 FUSE (8W-10-6)
10A 7
(8W-12-18) 20A
(8W-12-19) (8W-10-22)
6
3 C1
F45
20
YL/RD
LHD RHD
E7 C100
A0
2
6
1
RD
CLUTCH
INTERLOCK
SWITCH
2 BATTERY
1 (8W-20-3)
T141
20
A41
YL
16
LHD RHD YL
E8 C100
D11 D10
ENGINE
STARTER
MOTOR
RELAY
D13 D14 (IN PDC)
Z1 T40
20 16
BK BR
S141 10 C111
(8W-15-11)
Z1
12 T40 A0
BK 16 2/0
BR RD
S132
(8W-15-11) ENGINE
Z1
STARTER
12 2 1 MOTOR
BK 1 PULL-IN
2 HOLD-IN
G106 M
(8W-15-12)
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI02106
XJ 8W - 30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM 8W - 30 - 1
8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM

A/C Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 24 G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 8, 11, 14
A/C Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 27 G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16, 19, 20, 31
A/C High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 27 G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11, 21
A/C Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15 G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18 G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13, 29
Automatic Shut Down Relay . 8W-30-2, 5, 6, 8, 19, 20, 21, G123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
22, 23 G154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-30
Battery Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 28 G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 4
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11, 13, 29 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 20
Camshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-5 Glow Plug Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 29 Glow Plug No.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18 Glow Plug No.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16, 31 Glow Plug No.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-5, 27 Glow Plug No.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16, 17, 18, 31 Glow Plug Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22
Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-9 Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14, 16, 31
Duty Cycle Evap/Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12 HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Electronic Vacuum Modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21 Idle Air Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-13
Engine Control Module . . 8W-30-19, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-5
27, 29, 30, 31
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-7
Intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-7
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor No. 1 . . . . 8W-30-26
Junction Block . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 12, 14, 19, 21, 30
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor No. 2 . . . . 8W-30-26
Left Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 29
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 26
Low Coolant Level Warning Indicator . . . . . . . 8W-30-30
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Low Coolant Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Evap Leak Detection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-9
Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Needle Movement Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-25
Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21
Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
Fuel Heater Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21
Oxygen Sensor 1/1 Upstream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-8
Fuel Injector No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-6
Oxygen Sensor 1/2 Downstream . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-8
Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Pedal Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-25
Power Distribution Center . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 11, 15,
Fuel Injector No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-6 16, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 29, 30, 31
Fuel Injector No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-6 Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28 Powertrain Control Module . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-3, 4, 23, 24 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 26, 27, 28, 30, 31
Fuel Pump Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4 Radiator Fan Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15, 30
Fuel Quantity Actuator Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23 Right Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-10, 29
Fuel Temperature Sensor Signal . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
Fuse 2 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Tell Tale Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-30
Fuse 3 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-22 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-7
Fuse 4 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-19 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . 8W-30-7, 16, 17, 18
Fuse 6 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-21 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-30 Turbo Boost Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-24
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-12 Vehicle Speed Control Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-11
Fuse 11 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4, 12, 19, 21 Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-9, 26
Fuse 17 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16 Wait To Start Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-30
Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 29 Water In Fuel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-28
Fuse 21 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 5, 6, 8, 21, 22, 23 Water In Fuel Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-30
Fuse 22 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 3, 4
Fuse 24 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-2, 5, 6, 8, 20
Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-14
Fuse 26 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-31
8W - 30 - 2 8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM XJ
GAS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK A18 A11 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE CENTER
11 19 22 (8W-10-2)
20A 25A 15A
(8W-12-14) (8W-10-29) (8W-10-31)
A17 A12
(8W-12-15)
A16 A61
5 C2 16 14
F12 RD/LG DG/BK
18
DB/WT
S130 D2
(8W-12-14)
FUSED FUEL
(8W-12-15)
B(+) PUMP
F12 F12
18 18 RELAY
DB/WT DB/WT (IN PDC)
(8W-30-3)
C4 C2
(8W-30-4)
AUTOMATIC
SHUT
DOWN
RELAY
C6 C8 (IN PDC)
A999 A61
4.0L 16 16
OTHER LHD A/T RD DG/BK
POWER
A14 DISTRIBUTION
F12 F12 FUSE CENTER
18 18 21 (8W-10-2)
DB/WT DB/WT 20A A999
(8W-10-29) 16
A13
S136 RD
(8W-12-15) 14 C107
A142
18
DG/OR
TO
10 C107 S137 FUSE
(8W-10-29) 24 (PDC)
F12 K51 A142 (8W-10-29) A61
18 18 18 16
DB/WT DB/YL DG/OR DG/BK
A2 C1 C3 C3 C12 C3 A22 C1
FUSED AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC FUSED POWERTRAIN
IGNITION SHUT SHUT B(+) CONTROL
SWITCH DOWN DOWN MODULE
OUTPUT RELAY RELAY
(ST-RUN) CONTROL OUTPUT
GROUND GROUND
A32 C1 A31 C1
Z12 Z12
14 14
BK/TN BK/TN
G101
(8W-15-2)
J998W-7 XJI03002
XJ 8W-30 FUEL/IGNITION SYSTEM 8W - 30 - 3
LHD GAS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
BLOCK A11 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2)
FUSE CENTER
11 22 (8W-10-2)
20A 15A
(8W-12-14) (8W-10-31)
A12
(8W-12-15)
5 C2
F12 A61
18 14
DB/WT DB/BK
S130
(8W-12-14)
D4 (8W-12-15) D2
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
(IN PDC)
D6 D8
A141
14
DG/WT
D2 C100
K226 A141
20 16
DB/LG DG/WT
13 C200
3 1
FUEL
PUMP
M MODULE
4 6
K167 Z1
20 16
A61
BR/YL BK
16
15 30 DG/BK
C200
K226
F12 C100
20
DB/LG
S138
(8W-70-2)
F11 C100 3 C107
K167 S309
20 (8W-15-17)
BR/YL
Z1
S111 12 14 C107
(8W-70-2) BK
K31 K226 K167 A61
18 18 16
BR DB/LG
18 G302 DG/BK
BR/YL (8W-15-17)
C19 C3 C26 C3 A4 C1 A22 C1
FUEL FUEL SENSOR FUSED POWERTRAIN
PUMP LEVEL GROUND B(+) CONTROL
RELAY SENSOR MODULE
CONTROL SIGNAL
XJI03003 J998W-7
RHD GAS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
FUSE
(8W-12-2)
FUSE CENTER
11 22 (8W-10-2)
20A 15A
(8W-12-14) (8W-10-31)
A12
(8W-12-15)
5 C2
F12 A61
18 14
DB/WT DB/BK
S130
(8W-12-14)
D4 (8W-12-15) D2
FUEL
PUMP
RELAY
(IN PDC)
D6 D8
A141
14
DG/WT
D2 C100
K226 A141
20 16
DB/LG DG/WT
4 C204
3 1
FUEL
PUMP
M MODULE
4 6
K167 Z1
20 16
A61
BR/YL BK
16
C204 DG/BK
16 17
B3 C100
S138
K226 (8W-70-2)
20 3 C107
DB/LG K167 S309
20 (8W-15-18)
BR/YL
Z1
B2 C100 S111 12
14 C107
BK
(8W-70-2)
K31 K226 K167 A61
18 18 16
BR DB/LG
18 G302 DG/BK
BR/YL (8W-15-18)
C19 C3 C26 C3 A4 C1 A22 C1
FUEL FUEL SENSOR FUSED POWERTRAIN
PUMP LEVEL GROUND B(+) CONTROL
RELAY SENSOR MODULE
CONTROL SIGNAL
J998W-7 XJI03004
GAS
BATT A16 (8W-10-29)
C2 POWER
AUTOMATIC DISTRIBUTION
SHUT CENTER
DOWN (8W-10-2)
RELAY
(8W-30-2)
C8
A999 A999
16 16
RD RD
A14 POWER
FUSE
DISTRIBUTION
21 CENTER TO
20A (8W-10-2) FUSE
(8W-10-29) 24 (PDC)
A13
(8W-10-29)
A142 S115
18 (8W-70-4)
DG/OR K7 K7
20 18
S137 OR OR
(8W-10-29)
3
A142 CRANKSHAFT
18 5V
DG/OR SUPPLY POSITION
CRANKSHAFT SENSOR
1 C107 POSITION
SENSOR SENSOR
A142 SIGNAL GROUND
18 3
1 2
DG/OR 5V CAMSHAFT
SUPPLY POSITION
S109 K167 CAMSHAFT SENSOR
(8W-10-29) 20 POSITION
BR/YL SENSOR SENSOR
A142
GROUND SIGNAL
18
DG/OR S114 2 1
(8W-70-2)
2 K167
1 K167 18
IGNITION 20 BR/YL
COIL BR/YL
S111
(8W-70-2)
2
1 K7 K24 K167 K44
18 18 18 18
K19
OR GY/BK BR/YL TN/YL
18
GY
A7 C1 A17 C1 A8 C1 A4 C1 A18 C1
IGNITION 5V CRANKSHAFT SENSOR CAMSHAFT POWERTRAIN
COIL NO. 1 SUPPLY POSITION GROUND POSITION CONTROL
DRIVER SENSOR SENSOR MODULE
SIGNAL SIGNAL
2WD
4WD
XJI03005 J998W-7
GAS
BATT A16 (8W-10-29)
C2 POWER
AUTOMATIC A14 DISTRIBUTION
SHUT
FUSE CENTER
DOWN (8W-10-2)
21
RELAY
(8W-30-2) 20A
(8W-10-29)
C8 A13
A999 A999 A142

16 16 18
RD RD DG/OR
S137
(8W-10-29)
TO 1 C107
FUSE
24 (PDC) S109
(8W-10-29) (8W-10-29)
A142
18
DG/OR
S113
(8W-10-30)
A142 A142 A142 A142 A142 A142

18 18 18 18 18 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR
1 1
FUEL 1 FUEL
INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR
NO. 1 INJECTOR NO. 5
NO. 3 (4.0L)
2 2
2
1 1 1
FUEL FUEL FUEL
NO. 2 NO. 4 NO. 6
(4.0L)
2 2 2
K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16

18 18 18 18 18 18
WT/DB TN YL/WT LB/BR PK/BK LG/BK
B4 C2 B15 C2 B5 C2 B16 C2 B6 C2 B12 C2

FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL POWERTRAIN
INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR INJECTOR CONTROL
NO. 1 NO. 2 NO. 3 NO. 4 NO. 5 NO. 6 MODULE
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER
J998W-7 XJI03006
GAS
3
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
2 1
K7 2.5L 4.0L K167

20 20
OR K22 BR/YL
20
OR/DB
K22
18 S112
OR/DB
K22
20
OR/DB
4.0L A/T OTHER
6 C107
NOT
USED
K22
20
OR/DB
17
TRANSMISSION
THROTTLE
POSITION CONTROL
S115
(8W-70-4) SENSOR MODULE
SIGNAL (8W-31-5)
S114
(8W-70-2)
K167 K167 K167

20 20 20
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
1 1
INTAKE ENGINE
AIR COOLANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE S111
SENSOR SENSOR (8W-70-2)
2 2
K7 K22 K21 K2 K167

18 18 18 18 18
OR OR/DB BK/RD TN/BK BR/YL
A17 C1 A23 C1 A15 C1 A16 C1 A4 C1

5V THROTTLE INTAKE ENGINE SENSOR POWERTRAIN
SUPPLY POSITION AIR COOLANT GROUND CONTROL
SENSOR TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE MODULE
SIGNAL SENSOR SENSOR
SIGNAL SIGNAL
XJI03007 J998W-7
GAS
BATT A16 (8W-10-29)
C2 POWER
AUTOMATIC A7 DISTRIBUTION
SHUT
FUSE CENTER
DOWN (8W-10-2)
24
RELAY
(8W-30-2) 15A
(8W-10-29)
C8 A8
A999 A999 F142

16 16 20
RD RD DG/WT
7 C107
TO
FUSE F142
20
21 (PDC) DG/WT
(8W-10-29)
S110
(8W-10-29)
F142 F142
20 20
DG/WT DG/WT
4 1 1 4
OXYGEN OXYGEN
SENSOR SENSOR
1/1 1/2
UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM
3 2 2 3
K167 Z1 Z1 K167
20 18 20 18
BR/YL BK BK BR/YL
S107
S114 (8W-15-2)
(8W-70-2)
Z1
16
BK
K167
20
BR/YL G101
(8W-15-2)
S111
(8W-70-2)
K41 K167 K141
18 18 18
BK/DG BR/YL TN/WT
A24 C1 A4 C1 A25 C1
OXYGEN SENSOR OXYGEN POWERTRAIN
SENSOR GROUND SENSOR CONTROL
1/1 1/2 MODULE
SIGNAL SIGNAL
J998W-7 XJI03008
GAS
3
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2 1
K7 K167
20 20
OR BR/YL
S114
(8W-70-2)
K167
20
BR/YL
S115 S111
(8W-70-4) (8W-70-2)
K167
18
BR/YL
2
5V VEHICLE
SUPPLY VEHICLE SPEED
SPEED
5V SENSOR
SENSOR
SUPPLY SIGNAL
1 3
G7
18
WT/OR
S108
G7
20
WT/OR
DRL OTHER
4 C107
NOT
USED
G7
20
WT/OR
K7 K1 K167 K6 G7 7
18 18 18 18 18
OR DG/RD BR/YL VT/OR WT/OR VEHICLE DAYTIME
SPEED RUNNING
SENSOR LAMP
SIGNAL
MODULE
(8W-50-19)
A17 C1 A27 C1 A4 C1 B31 C2 B27 C2
5V MANIFOLD SENSOR 5V VEHICLE POWERTRAIN
SUPPLY ABSOLUTE GROUND SUPPLY SPEED CONTROL
PRESSURE SENSOR MODULE
SENSOR SIGNAL
SIGNAL
XJI03009 J998W-7
GAS
LEFT RIGHT
SPEED SPEED
CONTROL CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH
1 SET 1 RESUME/ACCEL
2 ON/OFF 2 CANCEL
(8W-33-2) 3 COAST
1 2 1 2 3 (8W-33-2)
2 1 2 1
V37 K167 V37 K167
20 20 20 20
RD/LG BR/YL RD/LG BR/YL
S221
S222
B C2 A C2
CLOCKSPRING
2 C1 3 C1
RHD LHD
K4 K4
V37 20 20
20 BK/LB BK/RD
RD/LG
B6
B5
C100 C100
F17 F18
S138
(8W-70-2)
3 C107
K167
20
BR/YL
K167
20
BR/YL S111
2 (8W-70-2)
K167
BATTERY 18
TEMPERATURE BR/YL
SENSOR 3
(4.0L) SENSOR ENGINE ENGINE
1 GROUND OIL OIL
PRESSURE
5V
SENSOR
PRESSURE
SUPPLY SIGNAL SENSOR
1 2
K7
K118 18 G60
18 OR 18
V37 K167
PK/YL GY/YL
18 S115 18
RD/LG (8W-70-4) BR/YL
C32 C3 C15 C3 A17 C1 B23 C2 A4 C1

SPEED BATTERY 5V ENGINE SENSOR POWERTRAIN
CONTROL TEMPERATURE SUPPLY OIL GROUND CONTROL
SWITCH SENSOR PRESSURE MODULE
SIGNAL SIGNAL SENSOR
SIGNAL
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI03010
GAS
ST T141 (8W-12-18) ST F45 (8W-12-18)
(8W-12-19)
POWER
OTHER 4.0L A/T
DISTRIBUTION
RHD LHD CENTER
D13 (8W-10-2)
ENGINE
STARTER
V32 V32 MOTOR
20 18 RELAY
YL/RD YL/RD (8W-21-2)
D11 (8W-21-3)
(8W-21-4)
(8W-21-5)
3
BRAKE T41
2.5L A/T 20
LAMP EXCEPT BUILT- BK/WT
SWITCH OTHER UP-EXPORT
(8W-33-4) 7
TRANSMISSION
4
T41 T41 P/N RANGE
20 20 SENSOR
BK/WT BK/WT (4.0L A/T)
V30 8 (8W-31-6)
20 5 C107 5 C107 Z1 18BK
DB/RD S141
RHD LHD
(8W-15-5)
(8W-15-6)
T41 T41 (8W-15-8)
F9 F7 C100 T41
18 18 20
BK/WT BK/WT BK/WT EXCEPT BUILT- BUILT-
UP-EXPORT UP-EXPORT
V30
20
Z1 Z1
DB/RD
S120 14 16
(8W-21-2) BK BK
3 T41
VEHICLE 18
SPEED BK/WT
G106
CONTROL 2 (8W-15-7)
SERVO PARK/ (8W-15-10)
T41
(8W-33-4) 18 P/N NEUTRAL
BK/WT POSITION
1 2 SWITCH
(8W-31-2)
S107
(8W-15-2)
Z1
V32 V36 V35 18
18 18 18 BK
YL/RD TN/RD LG/RD
A/T M/T
C11 C3 C4 C3 C5 C3 A6 C1
SPEED SPEED SPEED A/T M/T POWERTRAIN Z1
CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL 16
ENGINE GROUND BK
POWER VACUUM VENT MODULE
STARTER
SUPPLY SOLENOID SOLENOID
RELAY
CONTROL CONTROL
CONTROL
G101
(8W-15-2)
XJI03011 J998W-7
GAS EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
11 10
20A 15A
(8W-12-14) (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-15) (8W-12-13)
5 C2 S12 C4
F12 F20
18 18
DB/WT WT
S130 RHD LHD
(8W-12-14)
(8W-12-15)
1 C201
OTHER 4.0L LHD A/T A9 C100 F20
18
F12 WT
18
DB/WT E9 C100
S136
(8W-12-15)
F20
18
F12 WT
18
DB/WT S159
10 11 (8W-12-12)
C107
(8W-12-13)
F20 F20 F20
18 18 18
WT WT WT
S161
(8W-51-5) 2 2
F20 DUTY EVAP
18
WT CYCLE LEAK
A
EVAP/ DETECTION
TORQUE PURGE PUMP
CONVERTER 1 SOLENOID
3 4
CLUTCH
SOLENOID
B (2.5L A/T)
F12 K54 K52 K106 K105

18 18 18 18 18
DB/WT OR/BK PK/BK WT/DG OR
A2 C1 B11 C2 C20 C3 C10 C3 C14 C3

FUSED TORQUE DUTY LEAK LEAK POWERTRAIN
IGNITION CONVERTER CYCLE DETECTION DETECTION CONTROL
SWITCH CLUTCH EVAP/ PUMP PUMP MODULE
OUTPUT SOLENOID PURGE SOLENOID SWITCH
(ST-RUN) CONTROL SOLENOID CONTROL SENSE
CONTROL
J998W-7 XJI03012
GAS
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
IAC IAC IAC IAC BRAKE MODULE
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR LAMP
NO. 3 NO. 2 NO. 1 NO. 4 SWITCH
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER SENSE
A11 C1 A10 C1 A19 C1 A20 C1 C24 C3
K29
18
WT/PK
4.0L A/T OTHER
S140
(8W-31-7)
K29 K29
20 18
WT/PK WT/PK
K40 K60 K39 K59

18 18 18 18
B1
BR/WT YL/BK GY/RD VT/BK F10 C100
LHD RHD
K29 K29
20 18
WT/PK WT/PK
S204
(8W-31-3)
(8W-31-7)
2 3 4 1 K29
18
IAC IAC IAC IAC IDLE WT/PK
MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR AIR
NO. 3 NO. 2 NO. 1 NO. 4 CONTROL 1
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER BRAKE
MOTOR
LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-33-4)
2
Z1
18
BK
S207
(8W-15-16)
Z1
14
BK
G108
(8W-15-16)
RHD
LHD
XJI03013 J998W-7
GAS EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
POWERTRAIN
PANEL HEADLAMP
LAMPS SWITCH POWER CONTROL
DIMMER (8W-50-2) STEERING MODULE
SWITCH (8W-50-3) PRESSURE
SIGNAL IDLE SWITCH
ACTUATOR SIGNAL
1 C1
A12 C1 A12 C1
42 C201 4.0L A/T 2.5L
E1 4.0L A/T 2.5L

20
TN RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
S1 C4 K78 K10
JUNCTION 18 18
BLOCK GY DB/BR
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
6 25
5A 15A
(8W-12-8) (8W-12-21)
POLICE
S2 C4 S8 C4 PACKAGE OTHERS
E2 F15
20 20
OR DB/WT 11 C107
NOT
S315 USED
(8W-12-8) S219
(8W-12-21) 11 C107
5 9 2
E2 FUSED FUSED HVAC K78 POWER
20 IGNITION IGNITION UNIT 18 STEERING
OR SWITCH SWITCH (8W-42-2) GY PRESSURE
OUTPUT OUTPUT (8W-42-4)
(RUN) (RUN)
SWITCH
1
43 40
C201 F16 C100
S215 S217
(8W-12-8) (8W-12-21)
E2 F15 K78 Z1
20 20 20 20
OR DB/WT GY BK
4 3 2
FUSED FUSED IDLE EXTENDED
PANEL IGNITION ACTUATOR IDLE S107
LAMPS SWITCH SWITCH (8W-15-2)
DIMMER OUTPUT
SWITCH (RUN)
(POLICE
SIGNAL GROUND PACKAGE)
1
Z1
Z1 16
20 BK
BK
S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1
14 G101
BK (8W-15-2)
G107
(8W-15-14)
J998W-7 XJI03014
GAS
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
POWER
B5 C11 DISTRIBUTION
A/C RADIATOR CENTER
COMPRESSOR FAN (8W-10-2)
CLUTCH RELAY
RELAY (8W-42-8)
(8W-42-6)
B3 C13
GENERATOR
GENERATOR (8W-20-2)
FIELD
GENERATOR DRIVER
DRIVER (+)
1 2
K72 K20
16 18
DG/OR DG
2 3 C108
2 C107
C13 C27 K72 K20
18 18 18 18
DB/OR DB/PK DG/OR DG
C1 C3 C2 C3 C25 C3 B10 C2
A/C RADIATOR GENERATOR GENERATOR POWERTRAIN
COMPRESSOR FAN DRIVER FIELD CONTROL
CLUTCH RELAY DRIVER MODULE
RELAY A/C CONTROL A/C (+)
CONTROL SWITCH SELECT
SENSE INPUT
C22 C3 C23 C3
C90
18
C22
LG
18
DB/WT
S143
C90
18
LG
A6 C100
C90 C90
20 20
LG LG
1 6 2
A/C A/C A/C A/C- A/C A/C
SWITCH HIGH SWITCH HEATER SWITCH LOW
SENSE PRESSURE SENSE CONTROL SENSE PRESSURE
SWITCH (8W-42-4) SWITCH
(8W-42-4) (8W-42-5) (8W-42-4)
XJI03015 (8W-42-5) (8W-42-5) J998W-7
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A21 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CENTER
17 (8W-10-2)
20A
(8W-10-26)
A22
(8W-10-27)
F34
18
TN/BK
E6
A18 C100
LHD EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT OTHER
4 C1
FUSED HEADLAMP S218
B(+) SWITCH (8W-10-26)
(8W-50-2) (8W-10-27)
F34
18
TN/BK
16
DATA
LINK
5 4 6 7 CONNECTOR
Z12 Z1 D20 D21
18 18 20 20
BK/TN BK LG/BK PK
A7 A1 B7 B8 C100
E7 F1 F2
2.5L 4.0L
D21
20
PK
S139
D21 D21
18 20
Z12 Z1
PK PK
18 18
BK/TN BK 20
D20 SCI CONTROLLER
18 D21 TRANSMIT/ ANTI-LOCK
LG/BK 18 ISO 9141K BRAKE
PK (8W-35-2)
C29 C3 C27 C3 14
SCI SCI POWERTRAIN SCI TRANSMISSION
RECEIVE TRANSMIT/ CONTROL TRANSMIT/ CONTROL
ISO 9141K MODULE ISO 9141K MODULE
(8W-31-7)
G102 RHD
(8W-15-2) LHD
J998W-7 XJI03016
LHD
3 11 DATA SENTRY
LINK CCD CCD KEY
D1 D2
18 TWISTED 18 CONNECTOR BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
VT/BR PAIR WT/BK (+) (-) MODULE
6 5 (EXCEPT
D1 TWISTED D2 POLICE/
20 PAIR 20 POSTAL)
VT/BR WT/BK (8W-39-8)
S238
S239
D1 TWISTED D2
TWISTED 20 PAIR 20
PAIR VT/BR WT/BK
D1 D2 D1 D2
20 20 20 20
VT/BR WT/BK VT/BR WT/BK
D1 D2 C201
20 20 51 52
VT/BR WT/BK D1 D2
2 C2 1 C2 18 18
INSTRUMENT VT/BR WT/BK
CCD CCD
BUS BUS CLUSTER 19 18
(+) (-) (8W-40-3) CCD CCD AIRBAG
BUS BUS CONTROL
(+) (-) MODULE
C201 (8W-43-2)
55 56
D1 D2 E11 4.0L E12 C100
20 20 OTHER A/T
VT/BR WT/BK
4.0L A/T OTHER
D1
20 D2
1 2 C301 VT/BR 20
WT/BK
OTHER COMPASS COMPASS OTHER
S145 D2
D1 S144 18
18 WT/BK
S344 S346 D1 D2 D2
VT/BR TWISTED
20 20 18
D1 TWISTED D2 VT/BR PAIR WT/BK WT/BK
20 PAIR 20
7 6
VT/BR WT/BK
CCD CCD TRANSMISSION
BUS BUS CONTROL
5 11 (+) (-) MODULE
CCD CCD COMPASS D1
(8W-31-7)
D2
BUS BUS (8W-49-6) 18 18
(+) (-) VT/BR TWISTED WT/BK
PAIR
D1 D2 C30 C3 C28 C3
20 TWISTED 20 CCD CCD POWERTRAIN
VT/BR PAIR WT/BK BUS BUS CONTROL
(+) (-) MODULE
6 12
CCD CCD OVERHEAD
BUS BUS MODULE
(+) (-) (8W-49-6)
XJI03017 J998W-7
RHD
3 11 DATA SENTRY
LINK CCD CCD
KEY
D1 D2
18 TWISTED 18 CONNECTOR BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
VT/BR PAIR WT/BK (+) (-) MODULE
6 5 (EXCEPT
D1 TWISTED D2 POLICE/
20 PAIR 20 POSTAL)
VT/BR WT/BK (8W-39-9)
S238
S239
D1 TWISTED D2
TWISTED 20 PAIR 20
PAIR VT/BR WT/BK
D1 D2 D1 D2
20 20 20 20
D1 D2
20 20 1 2 C204
VT/BR WT/BK D1 D2
2 C2 1 C2 18 18
INSTRUMENT VT/BR WT/BK
CCD CCD
BUS BUS CLUSTER 19 18
(+) (-) (8W-40-3) CCD CCD AIRBAG
BUS BUS CONTROL
(+) (-) MODULE
C301 (8W-43-3)
1 2
D1 D2 A11 4.0L A12 C100
20 20 OTHER A/T 4.0L A/T OTHER
VT/BR WT/BK
D1 D2
20 20
COMPASS VT/BR WT/BK
OTHER COMPASS D2
18
OTHER S145 S144 WT/BK
S344 S346 D1 D1 D2
18 20 D2 18
D1 TWISTED D2 VT/BR VT/BR
TWISTED 20 WT/BK
20 PAIR 20 PAIR WT/BK
VT/BR WT/BK 7 6
5 11 BUS BUS CONTROL
(+) (-) MODULE
CCD CCD COMPASS D1 D2
BUS BUS (8W-49-6) (8W-31-7)
18 18
(+) (-) VT/BR TWISTED WT/BK
PAIR
D1 D2 C30 C3 C28 C3
20 TWISTED 20 POWERTRAIN
CCD CCD
VT/BR PAIR WT/BK BUS BUS CONTROL
(+) (-) MODULE
6 12
CCD CCD OVERHEAD
BUS BUS MODULE
(+) (-) (8W-49-6)
J998W-7 XJI03018
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
POWER JUNCTION
10 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
FUSE CENTER FUSE
(8W-12-2)
4 (8W-10-6) 11
30A 20A
3 (8W-10-8) (8W-12-14)
A16
5 C2
12
RD/LG
S151
(8W-10-18)
A16 A16
12 12
RD/LG RD/LG
C4 C2 F12
18
AUTOMATIC DB/WT
SHUT
DOWN
RELAY
C6 C8 (IN PDC)
A142 S130
16 (8W-12-14)
DG/OR
S137
(8W-10-18)
K51 A142 A142 F12

20 16 16 18
DB/YL DG/OR DG/OR DB/WT
K33 C2 K2 C2 K28 C2 K47 C2

AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC FUSED ENGINE
SHUT DOWN SHUT DOWN SHUT DOWN IGNITION CONTROL
RELAY RELAY RELAY SWITCH MODULE
CONTROL OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT
(ST-RUN)
GROUND GROUND
K27 C2 K1 C2
Z12 Z12
16 14
BK/TN BK/TN
S150
(8W-15-3)
Z12
12
BK/TN
G102
(8W-15-3)
XJI03019 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A16 (8W-10-18) BATT A16 (8W-10-18)
POWER
A8 C2 DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMATIC CENTER
FUSE SHUT
24 (8W-10-6)
DOWN
10A RELAY
A7 (8W-10-18) (8W-30-19)
C8
GENERATOR
F16 A142 GENERATOR (8W-20-3)
16 16 FIELD
RD/LG DG/OR GENERATOR DRIVER
DRIVER (+)
1 2
K72 K20
18 18
S137 DG/OR DG
(8W-10-18)
7 5 C120
A142 A142 K72 K20

16 16 18 18
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR DG
A22 C1 C12 C3 A2 C1 C25 C3 B10 C2

FUSED AUTOMATIC AUTOMATIC GENERATOR GENERATOR POWERTRAIN
B(+) SHUT DOWN SHUT DOWN DRIVER FIELD CONTROL
RELAY RELAY DRIVER MODULE
OUTPUT OUTPUT (+)
GROUND GROUND
A31 C1 A32 C1
Z12 Z12
14 14
BK/TN BK/TN
S146
(8W-15-3)
Z12
12
BK/TN
S150
(8W-15-3)
Z12
12
BK/TN
G102
(8W-15-3)
J998W-7 XJI03020
DIESEL
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A0 (8W-10-12) BATT A16 (8W-10-18)
JUNCTION C2 POWER
BLOCK 12 AUTOMATIC DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
SHUT CENTER
DOWN (8W-10-6)
11 6
RELAY
20A 30A (8W-30-19)
(8W-12-14) 5 (8W-10-22)
C8
5 C2
F12 A142
18 16
DB/WT DG/OR
A61
S130 14 S137
(8W-12-14) LG/RD (8W-10-18)
F12 A142
18 16
DB/WT DG/OR
POWER
D4 D2
FUEL A14 DISTRIBUTION
HEATER FUSE CENTER
RELAY 21 (8W-10-6)
20A
A13 (8W-10-34)
D6 D8
F142
16
DG/OR
Z1 A93
14 S156
18
RD/BK (8W-10-34)
BK
F142
18
DG/OR
1 A
FUEL FUSED ELECTRONIC
HEATER AUTOMATIC VACUUM
SHUT DOWN MODULATOR
RELAY OUTPUT EGR
SOLENOID
2 GROUND CONTROL
D B
Z1 Z1 K35
14 18 18
BK BK GY/YL
S141 S157
(8W-15-11) (8W-15-11)
Z1 Z1
12 12
BK BK
S132 K29 C2
(8W-15-11) EGR ENGINE
Z1 SOLENOID CONTROL
12 CONTROL MODULE
BK
G106
(8W-15-12)
XJI03021 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A16 (8W-10-18) BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
C2 DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMATIC A14 8 9
CENTER
SHUT FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
FUSE
DOWN 2 3
21
RELAY 50A 50A
(8W-30-19) 20A
(8W-10-34) (8W-10-18) (8W-10-18)
A13 1 2
C8
A142 F142 A54 A54

16 16 12 12
DG/OR DG/OR RD/GY RD/GY
S156 S153
(8W-10-34) (8W-10-18)
F142 A54
18 10
DG/OR RD/GY
2 1
GLOW
PLUG
RELAY
3 4
K152 K154
18 10
WT GY
K42 C2
GLOW ENGINE
PLUG CONTROL
RELAY MODULE
CONTROL
SENSE
GLOW
GLOW GLOW GLOW GLOW PLUG
PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG ASSEMBLY
NO.1 NO.2 NO.3 NO.4
J998W-7 XJI03022
DIESEL
BATT A16 (8W-10-18)
POWER
C2 A14 DISTRIBUTION
AUTOMATIC CENTER
SHUT FUSE
21 (8W-10-6)
DOWN
RELAY 20A
(8W-30-19) (8W-10-34)
A13
C8
A142 A142 F142

16 16 16
DG/OR DG/OR DG/OR
S137 S156
(8W-10-18) (8W-10-34)
A142 F142
16 16
DG/OR DG/OR
9 10
FUEL
FUEL FUEL
QUANTITY SHUT-OFF TEMPERATURE SENSOR
PUMP
ACTUATOR FEED SENSOR GROUND MODULE
GROUND SIGNAL
8 6 5 7 4
K140 K4
16 20
TN/WT BK/LB
S148 S149
(8W-70-3)
K140 K140 K140 K153 K126 K156 K4

16 16 16 16 16 20 20
TN/WT TN/WT TN/WT OR LG GY BK/LB
A59 C1A66 C1 A80 C1 A77 C1 A79 C1 A53 C1 A61 C1

FUEL QUANTITY ACTUATOR SHUT-OFF SOLENOID FUEL SENSOR ENGINE
GROUND FEED CONTROL TEMP. GROUND CONTROL
SENSOR MODULE
SIGNAL
XJI03023 J998W-7
DIESEL
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12)

(8W-12-13)
FUEL POWER
B5
PUMP A/C
DISTRIBUTION
MODULE COMPRESSOR CENTER
CONTROL MEASURE (8W-10-6)
CLUTCH
SLEEVE COIL
RELAY
(8W-42-7)
B3
2 1 3
K57 K134 K135 C13

20 20 20 20
LG/OR LB/BK WT/BK DB/OR
A57 C1 A56 C1 A58 C1 K5 C2

CONTROL SLEEVE SLEEVE A/C ENGINE
SLEEVE POSITION POSITION COMPRESSOR CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR SENSOR CLUTCH MODULE
SENSOR RELAY
INTAKE CONTROL
AIR BOOST
SENSOR TEMPERATURE PRESSURE 5V
GROUND SIGNAL SIGNAL SUPPLY
A61 C1 K13 C2 K40 C2 K39 C2
K4 K21 K1 K9
20 20 20 20
BK/LB BK/RD DG/RD LB
2 4 3
INTAKE BOOST 5V TURBO
AIR PRESSURE SUPPLY BOOST
TEMPERATURE SIGNAL PRESSURE
SIGNAL SENSOR
SENSOR
GROUND
1
K4
20
BK/LB
S149
(8W-70-3)
J998W-7 XJI03024
DIESEL
PEDAL
LOW PEDAL PEDAL POSITION
IDLE POSITION POSITION
5V POSITION SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
SUPPLY SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND GROUND
10 5 7 8 3
K4
20
BK/LB
NEEDLE
NEEDLE NEEDLE MOVEMENT
MOVEMENT MOVEMENT
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
B(+) B(-)
1 2
S149
(8W-70-3)
K6 K151 K22 K255 K4 K67 K68

20 20 20 20 20 18 18
VT/WT WT OR/DB WT/DG BK/LB BR/BK LG/YL
TWISTED
PAIR
K11 C2 K12 C2 K24 C2 K23 C2 A61 C1 A62 C1 A55 C1

5V LOW PEDAL PEDAL SENSOR NEEDLE NEEDLE ENGINE
SUPPLY IDLE POSITION POSITION GROUND MOVEMENT MOVEMENT CONTROL
POSITION SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR MODULE
SWITCH SIGNAL GROUND B(+) B(-)
SIGNAL
XJI03025 J998W-7
DIESEL
ENGINE
ENGINE CONTROL
COOLANT MODULE
VEHICLE TEMP.
SPEED SENSOR SENSOR
SIGNAL SIGNAL GROUND
K51 C2 A54 C1 A61 C1
G7 K2 K4
20 20 20
WT/OR TN/BK BK/LB
VEHICLE
VEHICLE SPEED S149
SPEED (8W-70-3)
5V SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
SUPPLY GROUND SIGNAL K4
1 2 3 20
BK/LB
K7 K167 G7
18 18 18
OR BR/YL WT/OR 8 9
C120
6 8 1 C111
K2 K4
18 18
K7 K167 G7 TN/BK BK/LB
20 20 20
OR BR/YL WT/OR
1 2
S115D ENGINE
COOLANT
S138
(8W-70-3)
TEMPERATURE
K7 K167
SENSOR
20 20 NO. 1
OR BR/YL
1 3 C116 S152
K7 K167 ENGINE
18 18 COOLANT
OR BR/YL TEMPERATURE
1 3 SENSOR
ENGINE 2 1 NO. 2
OIL
PRESSURE
SENSOR K167 K222
18 18
BR/YL TN/RD
2
G60 12 C120
18 10
GY/YL S138
(8W-70-3)
2 C116
K7 G60 K167 G7 K167 K222
18 18 18 18 18 18
OR GY/YL BR/YL WT/OR BR/YL TN/RD
A17 C1 B23 C2 A4 C1 B27 C2 A4 C1 A16 C1
5V ENGINE SENSOR VEHICLE SENSOR SECONDARY POWERTRAIN
SUPPLY OIL GROUND SPEED GROUND ENGINE CONTROL
PRESSURE SIGNAL COOLANT MODULE
SENSOR TEMPERATURE
SIGNAL SENSOR
J998W-7 XJI03026
DIESEL
PRESSURE A/C
CRANKSHAFT SWITCH HIGH
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
POSITION OUTPUT PRESSURE
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SWITCH
GROUND SIGNAL
2 (8W-42-7)
1 3
K3 K24 C22
20 20 20
LG/BK GY/BK DB/WT
1 4 3 C120
AC A/C
SELECT HEATER
INPUT CONTROL
(8W-42-4)
(8W-42-5)
6
K3 K24 C22 C90

20 20 20 20
LG/BK GY/BK DB/WT LG
A69 C1 A67 C1 K10 C2

SENSOR CRANKSHAFT A/C ENGINE
GROUND POSITION SWITCH CONTROL
SENSOR SENSE MODULE
SIGNAL
ENGINE A6 C100
A/C ENGINE CRUISE SPEED
SWITCH DISABLE INDICATOR FAULT SENSOR
SIGNAL SIGNAL REQUEST SIGNAL SIGNAL
K8 C2 K38 C2 K30 C2 K34 C2 K6 C2
C103 G55 V66 K48 K159 C90

18 18 18 18 18 18
DG OR/BK RD/LG OR/RD VT/RD LG
C1 C3 C16 C3 B18 C2 C22 C3 A8 C1 C23 C3

A/C ENGINE CRUISE FAULT ENGINE A/C POWERTRAIN
SWITCH DISABLE INDICATOR SIGNAL SPEED SELECT CONTROL
SIGNAL SIGNAL REQUEST SENSOR SENSE MODULE
SIGNAL
XJI03027 J998W-7
DIESEL
S138
(8W-70-3)
K167 K167 K167 K167

20 20 20 20
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
B3
C100
F12
LHD RHD
30 C200 17 C204
K167 K167
20 20
BR/YL BR/YL
K167 2
20 BATTERY
2 BR/YL TEMPERATURE
LOW 4 SENSOR
COOLANT FUEL
SWITCH LEVEL 1
SENSOR
1
3
K226
20
DB/LG
2
WATER LHD RHD
IN
FUEL 15 C200 16 C204
SENSOR
1 K226 K226
20 20
DB/LG DB/LG
B2
F11 C100
G123 G18 K226 K118 K167

18 18 18 18 18
DG/WT PK/BK DB/LG PK/YL BR/YL
A27 C1 A12 C1 C26 C3 C15 C3 A4 C1

WATER COOLANT FUEL BATTERY SENSOR POWERTRAIN
IN FUEL LEVEL PUMP TEMPERATURE GROUND CONTROL
SENSOR SWITCH RELAY SENSOR MODULE
SIGNAL CONTROL SIGNAL
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI03028
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A18 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CENTER
19 (8W-10-6)
15A
A17 (8W-10-32)
ENGINE
CONTROL
BRAKE SPEED MODULE
LAMP BRAKE CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH SENSOR SWITCH
OUTPUT SENSE GROUND SENSE
K20 C2 K9 C2 A61 C1 A60 C1
F32 L50 K29 K4 V37
20 20 20 20 20
PK/DB WT/TN WT/PK BK/LB RD/LG
S147
(8W-10-32) S149
(8W-70-3)
L50
20 K4
WT/TN 20
BK/LB
E1 F10 F18 F17
F8 B4 B1 C100 B6 B5 C100
LHD RHD LHD RHD
F32 L50 K29 K29 V37

20 20 20 18 K4 K4 20
PK/DB WT/TN WT/PK WT/PK 20 20 RD/LG
BK/RD BK/LB
S203 S204
(8W-10-32) 3 C1 2 C1
CLOCKSPRING
L50 K29 (8W-33-3)
20 18
WT/TN WT/PK
6 5 1
BRAKE A C2 B C2
LAMP
K167 V37
SWITCH 20 20
(8W-33-5)
BR/YL RD/LG
2
S221
Z1 S222
18
BK V37 K167 V37 K167
20 20 20 20
S207 RD/LG BR/YL RD/LG BR/YL
(8W-15-16) 2 1 2 1
Z1 SPEED SENSOR LEFT SPEED SENSOR RIGHT
14 CONTROL GROUND SPEED CONTROL GROUND SPEED
BK SWITCH CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL
SIGNAL SIGNAL
SWITCH SWITCH
G108 (8W-33-3) (8W-33-3)
(8W-15-16) RHD
DIESEL
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-12-13)
POWER JUNCTION
C11 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
RADIATOR CENTER (8W-12-2)
FAN FUSE
(8W-10-6) 9
RELAY
(8W-42-8) 10A
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
C13
S13 C4
F87
20
WT/BK
RHD LHD
FULL
BASE OPTIONS
S225
C27 (8W-12-12)
20
DB/PK
5 C201
F87
20
WT/BK
S216
(8W-12-12)
1 (8W-12-13)
TELL
WAIT WATER LOW
TALE
TO IN COOLANT MODULE
START FUEL LEVEL
WARNING WARNING WARNING
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
4 7 8
K185 K86 G154
20 20 20
OR/LB TN/OR VT/LG
E15 E16 E17 C100
K185 G86 G154

20 18 18
OR/LB TN/OR VT/LG
K17 C2 K32 C2 C9 C3 C8 C3
RADIATOR WAIT ENGINE WATER LOW POWERTRAIN
FAN TO CONTROL IN COOLANT CONTROL
RELAY START MODULE FUEL INDICATOR MODULE
CONTROL INDICATOR INDICATOR DRIVER
DRIVER DRIVER
J998W-7 XJI03030
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
A4 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE CENTER
26 (8W-10-6)
20A
(8W-10-36)
A3
F34
18
TN/BK
A18
C100
E6
S218
(8W-10-36)
F34
18 F34
TN/BK 18
TN/BK
16
DATA 4 C1
LINK HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
CONNECTOR SWITCH SWITCH
5 4 6 7 OUPUT (8W-50-4)
Z12 Z1 D20 D21
18 18 20 20
BK/TN BK LG/BK PK
A7 A1 B7 B8 C100
E7 F1 F2
Z12 D21
20 20
BK/TN PK
S146 S139
(8W-15-3)
D21 D21 D21
18 20 18
PK PK PK
Z12 Z1 D20 K45 C2

12 18 18 SCI ENGINE
BK/TN BK/TN LG/BK TRANSMIT/ CONTROL
ISO 9141K MODULE
S150
(8W-15-3)
C29 C3 C27 C3
POWERTRAIN 20
Z12 SCI SCI
RECEIVE TRANSMIT/ CONTROL SCI CONTROLLER
12
BK/TN ISO 9141K MODULE TRANSMIT/ ANTI-LOCK
ISO 9141K BRAKE
(8W-35-3)
RHD
G102 LHD
(8W-15-3)
XJI03031 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 8W - 31 - 1
8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3, 7 Lock-Up Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7 Output Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-5
Engine Starter Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 6 Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 6 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 4
Fuse 11 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 4 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 5, 7
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4 Shift Lock Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3, 7
Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3, 7 Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-5
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-4 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid . . . . . . . 8W-31-2
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6 Transmission Control Assembly . . . . . . . 8W-31-4, 5
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-3, 7 Transmission Control Module . . . . . 8W-31-4, 5, 6, 7
Input Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-5 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-6
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-2, 3, 4, 6, 7
8W - 31 - 2 8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM XJ
2.5L GAS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) ST T141 (8W-21-2)
JUNCTION POWER
D13
BLOCK ENGINE
DISTRIBUTION
(8W-12-2) STARTER CENTER
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-2)
MOTOR
11 10
RELAY
20A 15A (8W-21-2)
(8W-12-14) (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13) D11
5 C2 S12 C4
F20 T41
18 20
WT BK/WT
LHD RHD
F12
18 1 C201
DB/WT
F20 F20
18 18 5 C107
WT WT
RHD LHD
E9 C100 A9 C100
S130
(8W-12-14) T41 T41
S159 18 20
F12 (8W-12-12) BK/WT BK/WT
18 F20 (8W-12-13)
DB/WT 18
WT
11 C107
S161 S120
(8W-51-5) (8W-21-2)
F20 F20 T41
18 18 18
WT WT BK/WT
10 C107 1 2
PARK/
R P/N NEUTRAL
POSITION
SWITCH
A 3
TORQUE L10
CONVERTER 18
BR/LG
F12 CLUTCH
18 SOLENOID 12 C107
DB/WT T41
B E3 C100
18
K54
16 C200 BK/WT
18
OR/BK
TO
S303
A2 C1 B11 C2 (8W-51-7) A6 C1
FUSED TORQUE PARK/NEUTRAL POWERTRAIN
IGNITION CONVERTER POSITION CONTROL
SWITCH CLUTCH SWITCH MODULE
OUTPUT SOLENOID SENSE (8W-30-11)
(ST-RUN) CONTROL (8W-30-12)
J998W-7 XJI03102
XJ 8W-31 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM 8W - 31 - 3
2.5L GAS
RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
25
15A
(8W-12-21)
S8 C4
F15
20
DB/WT
S219
(8W-12-21)
40 C201
F15
20
DB/WT
S217
(8W-12-21)
2
SHIFT
LOCK
SOLENOID
1
S204
LHD RHD
K29 K29 K29

20 18 18
WT/PK WT/PK WT/PK
1
B1
C100 BRAKE
F10 LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-33-4)
2
Z1
K29 18
18 BK
WT/PK
S207
(8W-15-16)
Z1
C24 C3 14
BRAKE POWERTRAIN BK
LAMP CONTROL RHD
SWITCH G108 LHD
MODULE
SENSE (8W-30-13) (8W-15-16)
XJI03103 J998W-7
4.0L
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
FUSE
(8W-12-2)
FUSE CENTER
11 16 (8W-10-2)
20A 15A
(8W-12-15) (8W-10-25)
A24
5 C2 M1
F12 20
18 PK
DB/WT
S130
(8W-12-15)
LHD RHD
F12
18
DB/WT
S135
(8W-10-25)
S136
(8W-12-15)
F12 M1
18 20
DB/WT PK
26 25
FUSED FUSED TRANSMISSION
IGNITION B(+) CONTROL
SWITCH 1-2 MODULE
OUTPUT AND
(ST-RUN) 3-4 2-3 LOCK-UP
SOLENOID SOLENOID SOLENOID
GROUND CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
24 12 13 11
Z12 T19 T60 T22
18 20 20 20
BK/TN WT OR/WT DB/WT
3 2 4
9 C107 TRANSMISSION
1-2 CONTROL
AND 2-3 LOCK-UP ASSEMBLY
3-4 SOLENOID SOLENOID
SOLENOID
Z12
16
BK/TN
G101
(8W-15-2)
J998W-7 XJI03104
4.0L
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
5V SENSOR MODULE
SUPPLY GROUND (8W-30-5)
A17 C1 A4 C1
K7 K167
18 18
OR BR/YL
S115 S111
(8W-70-4) (8W-70-2)
K167
20
BR/YL
K7
20 S114 K167
OR (8W-70-2) 20
K167 BR/YL
20
BR/YL
3 1 3 C107
THROTTLE
POSITION
SENSOR
(8W-30-7)
2
K22 K167
20 20
OR/DB BR/YL
S112
(8W-30-7)
K22 S138
20 (8W-70-2)
OR/DB
6 C107
K22 K167
20 20
OR/DB BR/YL
17 16
THROTTLE SENSOR TRANSMISSION
POSITION GROUND CONTROL
INPUT SENSOR INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT MODULE
SPEED SIGNAL SPEED SPEED SPEED
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
SIGNAL GROUND SIGNAL GROUND
2 1 4 3
T52 T31 T14 T13
20 20 20 20
RD/BK VT/LG LG/WT DB/BK
1 5 7 6
TRANSMISSION
INPUT OUTPUT CONTROL
SPEED SPEED ASSEMBLY
SENSOR SENSOR
XJI03105 J998W-7
4.0L
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2) FROM
10 ENGINE
15A
(8W-12-12)
STARTER
(8W-12-13) MOTOR
S12 C4 RELAY
(8W-21-3)
F20
18
WT
LHD RHD
1 C201 T41
F20
F20 18 20
18 WT BK/WT
WT
A9
E9 C100
F20
18
WT
S159
(8W-12-12)
F20
(8W-12-13)
18
WT
3 7
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
R D D3 1-2 P/N SENSOR
6 4 2 1 8
L10 T1 T3 T42 Z1
18 18 18 18 18
BR/LG LG/BK VT VT/WT BK
S141
(8W-15-5)
(8W-15-6)
(8W-15-8)
BUILT-UP EXCEPT BUILT
S142 -EXPORT -UP-EXPORT
(8W-51-5)
Z1 Z1
16 14
L10 BK BK
18
BR/LG
G106 G106
(8W-15-10) (8W-15-7)
18 22 9 21
TRS TRS TRS TRS TRANSMISSION
REVERSE T1 T3 T42 CONTROL
SENSE SENSE SENSE SENSE MODULE
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI03106
4.0L
RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
7 3 11 DATA
TWISTED LINK JUNCTION
PAIR CONNECTOR BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
(8W-30-16) 25
(8W-30-17) 15A
(8W-30-18) (8W-12-21)
D1 D2
S8 C4
F15
18 18 20
VT/BR WT/BK DB/WT
S219
(8W-12-21)
LHD RHD
S239 S238
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) 40 C201
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
F15 F15
20 20
DB/WT DB/WT
LHD RHD S217
(8W-12-21)
D21 D1 D2 K29 K29
20 20 20 20 18
F15
PK VT/BR WT/BK WT/PK WT/PK
20
DB/WT
2
SHIFT
B8 A11 A12 B1 C100 LOCK
F2 E11 E12 F10 SOLENOID
A/T M/T
1
D21 D1 D2 K29 K29 K29

20 20 20 20 18 20
PK VT/BR WT/BK WT/PK WT/PK WT/PK
S204
K29
S140 18
WT/PK
S139 S145 S144 K29
(8W-30-16) (8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) 1
18
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18) WT/PK
BRAKE
LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-33-4)
C24 C3
D21 D1 D2 K29 POWERTRAIN 2
20 BRAKE
20 20 TWISTED 20
LAMP CONTROL Z1
PK VT/BR PAIR WT/BK WT/PK
SWITCH MODULE 18
SENSE (8W-30-13) BK
14 7 6 23 S207
(8W-15-16)
SCI CCD CCD BRAKE TRANSMISSION
Z1
TRANSMIT/ BUS BUS LAMP CONTROL 14
ISO9141K (+) (-) SWITCH MODULE BK
SENSE
G108
RHD (8W-15-16)
LHD
XJI03107 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL 8W - 33 - 1
8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL

Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4, 5 Left Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3 Pedal Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-5
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-3, 5 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4, 5
Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-5 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 4, 5
Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-5 Right Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
Fuse 23 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4 Vehicle Speed Control Servo . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-4, 5
8W - 33 - 2 8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL XJ
GAS
LEFT RIGHT
SPEED SPEED
CONTROL CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH
2 ON/OFF 2 CANCEL
3 COAST
1 2 1 2 3
2 1 2 1
V37 K167 V37 K167
20 20 20 20
S221
S222
B C2 A C2
CLOCKSPRING
2 C1 3 C1
RHD LHD
V37 K4 K4
20 20 20
RD/LG BK/LB BK/RD
B5 B6 C100
F17 F18
K167
20
BR/YL
S138
(8W-70-2)
K167
20
BR/YL
3 C107
K167
20
BR/YL
S111
(8W-70-2)
V37 K167
18 18
RD/LG BR/YL
C32 C3 A4 C1
SPEED SENSOR POWERTRAIN
CONTROL GROUND CONTROL
SWITCH MODULE
SIGNAL (8W-30-10)
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI03302
XJ 8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL 8W - 33 - 3
DIESEL
LEFT RIGHT
SPEED SPEED
CONTROL CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH
2 ON/OFF 2 CANCEL
3 COAST
1 2 1 2 3
2 1 2 1
V37 K167 V37 K167
20 20 20 20
S221
S222
V37 K167
20 20
RD/LG BR/YL
B C2 A C2
CLOCKSPRING
2 C1 3 C1
RHD LHD
V37
20 K4 K4
RD/LG 20 20
BK/LB BK/RD
B5 B6 C100
F17 F18
K4
20
BK/LB
S149
(8W-70-3)
V37 K4
20 20
RD/LG BK/LB
A60 C1 A61 C1
SPEED SENSOR ENGINE
CONTROL GROUND CONTROL
SWITCH MODULE
SENSE (8W-30-29)
RHD
LHD
XJI03303 J998W-7
8W - 33 - 4 8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL XJ
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
A9
LHD RHD CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
23
15A
V32 V32 K29 (8W-10-33)
18 20 18 A10
YL/RD YL/RD WT/PK
F8 C100
F32
20
S204 PK/DB
(8W-31-3) 1 3 6
F9 C100 BRAKE
LAMP
SWITCH
LHD RHD 2 4 5
K29 K29 Z1 V30 L50

20 18 18 20 20
WT/PK WT/PK BK DB/RD WT/TN
S207 F7 C100
(8W-15-16)
Z1 V30
14 20 TO
B1 BK DB/RD S203
F10 C100 (8W-10-33)
G108
(8W-15-16)
OTHER 4.0L A/T 3
VEHICLE
SPEED
K29
20 CONTROL
WT/PK SERVO
S140 1 2 4
(8W-31-7)
Z1
18
BK
S132
(8W-15-5)
Z1 (8W-15-6)
V32 K29 V36 V35 14 (8W-15-8)
18 18 18 18 BK (8W-15-9)
YL/RD WT/PK TN/RD LG/RD
G106
(8W-15-7)
(8W-15-10)
C11 C3 C24 C3 C4 C3 C5 C3
SPEED BRAKE SPEED SPEED POWERTRAIN
CONTROL SWITCH CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
POWER SENSE VACUUM VENT MODULE
SUPPLY SOLENOID SOLENOID (8W-30-11) RHD
CONTROL CONTROL (8W-30-13) LHD
J998W-7 XJI03304
XJ 8W-33 VEHICLE SPEED CONTROL 8W - 33 - 5
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12) PEDAL
POWER POSITION
DISTRIBUTION THROTTLE SENSOR
A18 POSITION PEDAL (8W-30-25)
FUSE CENTER SENSOR POSITION 5V
19 (8W-10-6) SIGNAL SENSOR SUPPLY
15A 7 8 10
A17 (8W-10-32)
K22 K255 K6
20 20 20
OR/DB WT/DG VT/WT
F32
20
PK/DB
K24 C2 K23 C2 K11 C2
THROTTLE PEDAL 5V ENGINE
POSITION POSITION SUPPLY CONTROL
SENSOR SENSOR MODULE
BRAKE
BRAKE SIGNAL FUEL QUANTITY (8W-30-23)
LAMP CRUISE
SWITCH SWITCH INDICATOR ACTUATOR (8W-30-25)
SENSE SENSE REQUEST CONTROL (8W-30-27)
(8W-30-29)
K20 C2 K9 C2 K30 C2 A66 C1 A59 C1 A80 C1
L50 K29 V66 K140 K140 K140
20 20 18 16 16 16
WT/TN WT/PK RD/LG TN/WT TN/WT TN/WT
S147
(8W-10-32)
B4 B1
F8 E1 F10
C100
LHD RHD
K29 K29
20 18 S148
L50 WT/PK WT/PK (8W-30-23)
20
WT/TN
F32
20 S203 S204
PK/DB (8W-10-32) (8W-30-29)
L50 K29 K140
20 18 16
WT/TN WT/PK TN/WT
6 5 1 8
BRAKE FUEL
FUEL
LAMP QUANTITY PUMP
SWITCH ACTUATOR MODULE
(8W-30-23)
2
Z1 B18 C2
18
BK CRUISE POWERTRAIN
INDICATOR CONTROL
REQUEST MODULE
S207
(8W-15-16) (8W-30-27)
Z1
14
BK RHD
LHD
G108
(8W-15-16)
XJI03305 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 35 ANTI-LOCK BRAKES 8W - 35 - 1
8W-35 ANTI-LOCK BRAKES

ABS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5 Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3 G Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3
Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 G102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3
Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5 G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-5 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-4, 5 Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-6
Fuse 12 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3 Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-6
Fuse 13 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2, 3
Fuse 14 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . 8W-35-6
Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-3 Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-6
Fuse 23 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-35-2
8W - 35 - 2 8W-35 ANTI-LOCK BRAKES XJ
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
18 19 A9 DISTRIBUTION
12 13 23 (8W-10-2)
40A 20A 15A
(8W-10-23) (8W-10-23) (8W-10-33)
25 26 A10
(8W-10-35)
DATA
F32
LINK 20
CONNECTOR PK/DB
(8W-30-16)
7 F8 C100
D21 F32
20 20
PK PK/DB
6
B8
F2 C100 BRAKE
LAMP
4.0L 2.5L SWITCH
(8W-33-4)
D21 D21 5
20 18
PK PK
G
L50
20
SWITCH
WT/TN
S139
(8W-30-16)
S203
(8W-10-33)
L50
20 3 2 1
WT/TN B43 B41 B42
20 20 20
PK/OR YL/VT TN/WT
B4
E1 C100 C109
C A B
A10 A20 D21 L50 B43 B41 B42

12 12 18 18 18 18 18
RD/DG RD/DB PK WT/TN PK/OR YL/VT TN/WT
25 9 20 12 13 6 7
FUSED FUSED SCI BRAKE G SWITCH G SWITCH G SWITCH CONTROLLER
B(+) B(+) TRANSMIT/ LAMP TEST NO. 1 NO. 2 ANTI-LOCK
ISO 9141K SWITCH SIGNAL SENSE SENSE BRAKE
OUTPUT
GROUND GROUND
8 24
Z1 Z1
12 12
BK BK
G102
RHD (8W-15-2)
LHD
J998W-7 XJI03502
XJ 8W-35 ANTI-LOCK BRAKES 8W - 35 - 3
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12)
POWER
18 20 A18 DISTRIBUTION
12 14 19 (8W-10-6)
40A 20A 15A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-24) (8W-10-32)
25 27 A17
F32
20
PK/DB
F8 C100
F32
20
PK/DB
6
BRAKE
LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-33-5)
5
DATA L50 G
LINK 20
WT/TN SWITCH
CONNECTOR
(8W-30-31)
S203
7 (8W-10-32)
A10 A20
12 12 D21 L50
RD/DG RD/DB 20 20
PK WT/TN
B8 3 2 1
F2 B4 C100
E1 B43 B41 B42
D21 L50 20 20 20
20 20 PK/OR YL/VT TN/WT
PK WT/TN
C A B C109
S139 S147
(8W-30-31) (8W-10-32)
D21 L50 B43 B41 B42

20 18 18 18 18
PK WT/TN PK/OR YL/VT TN/WT
25 9 20 12 13 6 7
FUSED FUSED SCI BRAKE G SWITCH G SWITCH G SWITCH CONTROLLER
B(+) B(+) TRANSMIT/ LAMP TEST NO. 1 NO. 2 ANTI-LOCK
ISO 9141K SWITCH SIGNAL SENSE SENSE BRAKE
OUTPUT
GROUND GROUND
8 24
Z1 Z1
12 12
BK BK
RHD
G102 LHD
(8W-15-3)
XJI03503 J998W-7
GAS
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE FUSE (8W-12-2)
25 9
15A 10A
(8W-12-21) (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-22) (8W-12-13)
6 C1 S13 C4
F15 F87
20 20
DB/WT WT/BK
RHD LHD
FULL
BASE OPTIONS
S225
(8W-12-12)
5 C201
S216
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
F87
20
WT/BK
8 C1
INSTRUMENT
S134 CLUSTER
(8W-12-21) ABS (8W-40-2)
(8W-12-22) INDICATOR (8W-40-6)
(8W-40-8)
4 C1
F15 G19
20 20
DB/WT LG/OR
F13 C100
B20 B16
CONTROLLER
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE
RELAY
B18 B19 (IN PDC)
F15 G83 Z1
18 18 20
DB/WT GY/BK BK
S132
23 16 (8W-15-5)
FUSED ABS CONTROLLER (8W-15-6)
Z1 (8W-15-8)
IGNITION RELAY ANTI-LOCK 14
SWITCH CONTROL BRAKE BK
OUTPUT
(RUN)
G106
(8W-15-7)
J998W-7 (8W-15-10) XJI03504
XJ 8W-35 ANTI-LOCK BRAKES 8W - 35 - 5
DIESEL
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE FUSE (8W-12-2)
25 9
15A 10A
(8W-12-21) (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-22) (8W-12-13)
6 C1 S13 C4
F87
20
F15 WT/BK
20
RHD LHD
DB/WT
FULL
BASE OPTIONS
S225
(8W-12-12)
5 C201
S216
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
8 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
ABS (8W-40-3)
INDICATOR (8W-40-7)
(8W-40-8)
4 C1 FOG
LAMP
G19
20 RELAY
LG/OR GROUND (IN PDC)
(8W-50-18)
F13 C100 B10
B18 B16
CONTROLLER Z1
20
ANTI-LOCK BK/YL
BRAKE
RELAY 12 C106
B20 B19 (IN PDC)
Z1
20
Z1
BK
20
F15 G83
BK/YL
18 18 S103
DB/WT GY/BK (8W-15-12)
Z1
23 16 18
CONTROLLER BK
FUSED ABS
IGNITION RELAY ANTI-LOCK
SWITCH CONTROL 11 C106
BRAKE
OUTPUT
(RUN) Z1
20
BK
G106
(8W-15-12)
XJI03505 J998W-7
LEFT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT
WHEEL WHEEL
SPEED SPEED
SENSOR SENSOR
2 1 2 1
LEFT RIGHT
REAR REAR
WHEEL WHEEL
SPEED SPEED
SENSOR SENSOR
B A B A
B4 B3 B2 B1
20 20 20 20
LG LG/DB YL YL/DB
TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED TWISTED

PAIR PAIR PAIR PAIR
G F C109 E D C109
B9 B8 B4 B3 B7 B6 B2 B1
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
RD RD/DB LG LG/DB WT WT/DB YL YL/DB
4 11 10 2 3 18 17 1
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT CONTROLLER
FRONT FRONT REAR REAR FRONT FRONT REAR REAR ANTI-LOCK
WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL WHEEL BRAKE
SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED SPEED
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
(+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-) (+) (-)
J998W-7 XJI03506
XJ 8W - 39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM 8W - 39 - 1
8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM

Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8, 9 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8, 9
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8, 9 Left Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4, 5 Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3, 6, 7, 8, 9
Fuse 27 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4, 5 Passenger Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . 8W-39-2, 3
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-4, 5 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3, 4, 5
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8, 9
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Right Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . 8W-39-4, 5, 8, 9
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-6, 7 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . 8W-39-2, 3
Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-39-8, 9
8W - 39 - 2 8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM XJ
LHD
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
A23
CENTER
FUSE (8W-10-2)
16 (8W-10-6)
15A
(8W-10-25) PASSENGER
A24 DOOR
(8W-10-28) POWER
DOOR UNLOCK
LOCK RELAY
LOCK/
M1 M1 CONTROL CONTROL WINDOW
20 20 1 C2 2 C2 SWITCH
PK PK (8W-61-2)
P59 P55
DIESEL GAS 1 20 20
FUSED UNDERHOOD LB/RD DB/PK
S135 B (+) LAMP/
(8W-10-25)
MERCURY 4 3
12 C1 C300
SWITCH
JUNCTION (DIESEL) P59 P55
BLOCK (8W-44-7) 20 20
(8W-12-2) LB/RD DB/PK
3 C3
S347 9 8 C302
(8W-10-26)
M1 (8W-10-27) P59 P55
20 (8W-10-28) 20 20
PK LB/RD DB
2 11 5
FUSED DOOR DOOR OVERHEAD
B(+) LOCK UNLOCK MODULE
CONTROL RELAY (8W-49-2)
CONTROL (8W-49-4)
LOGIC
GROUND GROUND
3 9
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S342
(8W-15-13)
2 C3
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
S5 C4
S314
(8W-15-13)
Z1
14
BK
14 C201
S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1 (8W-15-15)
14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
J998W-7 XJI03902
(8W-15-15)
XJ 8W-39 VEHICLE THEFT SECURITY SYSTEM 8W - 39 - 3
RHD
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
POWER PASSENGER
DOOR
DISTRIBUTION DOOR UNLOCK
POWER
A23 LOCK/
CENTER LOCK RELAY
FUSE (8W-10-2) CONTROL CONTROL WINDOW
16 (8W-10-6) SWITCH
15A
1 C2 2 C2
(8W-61-3)
(8W-10-25)
A24
(8W-10-28) P59 P55
20 20
M1 M1 LB/RD DB
20 20
PK PK 3 12
C305
DIESEL GAS
1 P59 P55
S135 UNDERHOOD 20 20
FUSED
(8W-10-25) LB/RD DB/PK
B (+) LAMP/
12 C1 MERCURY
JUNCTION SWITCH 21 22 C203
BLOCK (DIESEL)
(8W-12-2) (8W-44-7) P59 P55
20 20
3 C3 LB/RD DB/PK
S347 9 8 C301
(8W-10-26)
M1 (8W-10-27) P59 P55
20 (8W-10-28) 20 20
PK LB/RD DB
2 11 5
FUSED DOOR DOOR OVERHEAD
B(+) LOCK UNLOCK MODULE
CONTROL RELAY (8W-49-3)
CONTROL (8W-49-5)
LOGIC
GROUND GROUND
3 9
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S342
(8W-15-13)
2 C3
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
S5 C4
Z1
14
BK
S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1 (8W-15-15)
14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
XJI03903 J998W-7
(8W-15-15)
LHD
BATT A17 (8W-10-21) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-32)
POWER JUNCTION
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
A1
CENTER (8W-12-2)
FUSE (8W-10-2) FUSE
27 (8W-10-6) 9
10A 10A
(8W-10-21) (8W-12-12)
A2
(8W-10-32)
S13 C4
F1 F87
20 20
DB/GY WT/BK
BASE FULL OPTIONS
S225
(8W-12-12)
F87
20
WT/BK
E10 C100
5 C201
F87
20
WT/BK
S216
(8W-12-12)
F1 F87
20 20
DB/GY WT/BK
1 3
FUSED FUSED SENTRY
B(+) IGNITION KEY
SWITCH IMMOBILIZER
OUTPUT MODULE
(ST-RUN)
(EXCEPT
GROUND GROUND POLICE/
2 4 POSTAL)
Z2 Z2
20 20
BK/LG BK/LG
S227
(8W-15-16)
Z2
20
BK/LG
G108
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI03904
RHD
BATT A17 (8W-10-21) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-32)
POWER JUNCTION
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
A1
CENTER (8W-12-2)
FUSE (8W-10-2) FUSE
27 (8W-10-6) 9
10A 10A
(8W-10-21) (8W-12-13)
A2
(8W-10-32)
S13 C4
F1 F87
20 20
DB/GY WT/BK
E10 C100
S216
(8W-12-13)
F1 F87
20 20
DB/GY WT/BK
1 3
FUSED FUSED SENTRY
B(+) IGNITION KEY
SWITCH IMMOBILIZER
OUTPUT MODULE
(ST-RUN)
(EXCEPT
POLICE/
GROUND GROUND
POSTAL)
2 4
Z2 Z2
20 20
BK/LG BK/LG
S227
(8W-15-16)
Z2
20
BK/LG
G108
(8W-15-16)
XJI03905 J998W-7
LHD
HEADLAMP OVERHEAD B
DOOR SWITCH MODULE CARGO
JAMB (8W-50-2) COURTESY (8W-49-4) LAMP/
SWITCH (8W-50-4) LAMP
SENSE SWITCH
CONTROL
(8W-44-8)
6 C1 1
IGNITION M2 M2
SWITCH 20 20
DOOR (8W-10-14) YL YL
JAMB (8W-10-15)
SWITCH S345
SENSE (8W-12-30) 6 C314
2 C2 1 C3
G16 G16 JUNCTION C
20 20 BLOCK M4
BK/LB BK/LB (8W-12-2) 20
VT
S200 7 C7 7 C314
(8W-10-16)
M2 M2 M4
20 20 20
17 C200 YL YL GY/BK
3 C326
S304
(8W-12-30) M4
G16 20
20 M2 M2 M2 M2
GY/BK
BK/LB 20 20 20 20
YL YL YL YL 5 C311
NOT
A C320 USED
A C319 10 C310
M2 M2 M4
2 1 C317 1 2 C318 20
18 18
YL YL VT/YL
3 3 3
LEFT RIGHT LIFTGATE
REAR REAR SWITCH
G16 M2 M2 G16 (8W-44-8)
18 18 DOOR 18 18 DOOR
BK/LB YL JAMB YL BK/LB JAMB
2 SWITCH 2 SWITCH 1
2 1 1 2
DRIVER PASSENGER Z1
Z1 20
DOOR 18 DOOR Z1 BK
JAMB BK JAMB 18
BK
SWITCH SWITCH S334
(8W-15-21)
3 3
Z1
Z1 Z1 18
18 18 BK
BK BK 9 C310
6 C311
3 C317 B C320 3 C318 B C319 Z1
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 18
20 20 20 20 BK
BK BK BK BK
S309 S310
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
Z1 Z1
12 16
BK BK
G304
G302 G303 (8W-15-21)
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
J998W-7 XJI03906
RHD
B OVERHEAD DOOR HEADLAMP
CARGO MODULE JAMB SWITCH
COURTESY (8W-49-5) SWITCH (8W-50-3)
LAMP/ LAMP SENSE
DOOR IGNITION (8W-50-4)
SWITCH CONTROL
(8W-44-8) JAMB SWITCH
1 SWITCH (8W-10-14) 6 C1
M2 SENSE (8W-10-15)
M2
18 20 G16
YL YL 2 C2 20
BK/LB
S345 G16
6 C314 (8W-12-30) 20
BK/LB
C 1 C3
M4 JUNCTION S200
20 BLOCK (8W-10-16)
VT (8W-12-2)
7 C314 19 C203
M4
7 C7
20 M2 M2
GY/BK 20 20 G16
YL YL 20
3 C326 BK/LB
M4 S304
20 (8W-44-9)
GY/BK M2 M2 M2 M2
20 20 20 20
5 C311 NOT YL YL YL YL
10 C310 USED
2 C317 A C320 A C319 1 2 C318
M4 1
20 M2 M2 M2 G16
VT/YL 18 18 18 18
YL YL YL BK/LB
3 3 1 2
LIFTGATE LEFT DRIVER
SWITCH G16 M2 REAR DOOR
(8W-44-9) 18 18 DOOR JAMB
BK/LB YL JAMB SWITCH
1 2 SWITCH
3
2 1 3
PASSENGER RIGHT
Z1 DOOR REAR
20 JAMB DOOR
BK
SWITCH JAMB
2 SWITCH
S334 3
(8W-15-21) Z1 Z1
Z1 18 18 Z1
Z1
18 BK BK 18
18
BK BK BK
9 C310 B C319 3 C318
6 C311 3 C317 B C320 Z1
Z1 Z1
Z1 Z1 20 20
18 20 20 BK
BK BK
BK BK
S310
S309 (8W-15-20)
(8W-15-18) Z1
Z1 12
12 BK
BK
G304 G303
(8W-15-21) G302 (8W-15-20)
(8W-15-18)
XJI03907 J998W-7
LHD
DATA LINK INSTRUMENT SENTRY

CONNECTOR CCD CCD
CLUSTER CCD CCD
KEY
(8W-30-17) BUS BUS (8W-40-3) BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
3 11 (-) (+) (-) (+) MODULE
1 C2 2 C2 5 6 (EXCEPT
POLICE/
D1 D2 D2 D1 D2 D1
18 18 20 20 20 20
POSTAL)
VT/BR WT/BK WT/BK VT/BR WT/BK VT/BR
TWISTED TWISTED
TWISTED PAIR PAIR
PAIR
S238
(8W-30-17)
S239
(8W-30-17)
TWISTED
PAIR
TWISTED
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
PAIR (8W-10-24)
D1 D2
20 20 JUNCTION
VT/BR WT/BK D2 D1 86 BLOCK
20 20 HORN (8W-12-2)
E11 E12 C100 WT/BK VT/BR RELAY
(8W-41-2)
4.0L
56 55 C201
OTHER A/T
D2 D1 85
20 20
D1 D2 WT/BK VT/BR
4.0L 18 20
OTHER A/T VT/BR WT/BK 2 1 C301
D1 1 C5
D1 D2 S144 20
(8W-30-17) VT/BR X3
18 20 20
VT/BR WT/BK D2
20 BK/RD
WT/BK OTHER COMPASS ENGINE
OTHER COMPASS CONTROL
S145 S344 ENGINE
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) DISABLE MODULE
S346 SIGNAL (8W-30-27)
(8W-30-17) 7 C301
TWISTED K38 C2
PAIR TWISTED
PAIR
D1 D2 D2 D1 X3 G55
18 18 20 20 20 18
VT/BR WT/BK WT/BK VT/BR BK/RD OR/BK
12 6 10
CCD CCD HORN OVERHEAD
BUS BUS RELAY MODULE
(-) (+) CONTROL (8W-49-4)
(8W-49-6)
C30 C3 C28 C3 C16 C3
CCD CCD ENGINE POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS DISABLE CONTROL
(+) (-) SIGNAL MODULE
(8W-30-17)
(8W-30-27)
J998W-7 XJI03908
RHD
DATA LINK INSTRUMENT SENTRY

CONNECTOR CCD CCD
CLUSTER CCD CCD
KEY
(8W-30-18) BUS BUS (8W-40-3) BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
(8W-30-31) (-) (+) (-) (+) MODULE
3 11 1 C2 2 C2 5 6 (EXCEPT
POLICE/
D2 D1 D2 D1
20 20 20 20
POSTAL)
D1 D2
18 18 WT/BK VT/BR WT/BK VT/BR
VT/BR WT/BK TWISTED TWISTED
TWISTED PAIR PAIR
PAIR
S238
(8W-30-18)
S239
TWISTED TWISTED (8W-30-18)
PAIR PAIR
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
D2 D1
D1 D2 20 20 JUNCTION
20 20 WT/BK VT/BR 86 BLOCK
VT/BR WT/BK HORN (8W-12-2)
RELAY
A11 A12 C100 (8W-41-3)
OTHER 4.0L A/T

85
4.0L 2 1 C301
D1 D2
OTHER A/T 18 20
VT/BR WT/BK
S22 C4
D1 D2 S144
18 20 OTHER COMPASS
(8W-30-18)
VT/BR WT/BK X3
S344
20
(8W-30-18)
OTHER COMPASS BK/RD
ENGINE
S346 CONTROL
S145 (8W-30-18) ENGINE
(8W-30-18) 7 C301 DISABLE MODULE
SIGNAL (8W-30-27)
TWISTED
PAIR
K38 C2
D2 D1 X3
20 20 20
WT/BK VT/BR G55
BK/RD
TWISTED 18
12 6 10 OR/BK
PAIR
CCD CCD HORN OVERHEAD
BUS BUS RELAY MODULE
D1 D2 (-) (+) CONTROL (8W-49-5)
18 18 (8W-49-6)
VT/BR WT/BK
C30 C3 C28 C3 C16 C3

CCD CCD ENGINE POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS DISABLE CONTROL
(+) (-) SIGNAL MODULE
(8W-30-18)
(8W-30-27)
XJI03909 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8W - 40 - 1
8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

ABS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10, 11
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8 Instrument Cluster . . 8W-40-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
Airbag Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16
Brake Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-10 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 12, 13, 15, 17
Brake Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10 Left Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14
Brake Warning Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9 Liftgate Ajar Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15
Check Engine Warning Indicator . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 5 Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15
Check Gauges Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3 Low Coolant Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-17
Cluster Illumination Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15 Low Fuel Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8 Low Washer Fluid Indicator . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8
Cruise Engaged Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-16 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11 Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 5
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-16, 17 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . 8W-40-4, 5 Park Brake Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . . 8W-40-4 Part Time 4WD Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor No. 2 . 8W-40-5 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
Engine Oil Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-4, 5 Powertrain Control Module . . . 8W-40-3, 4, 5, 16, 17
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-7, 8 Rear Window Defogger Relay . . . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13
Fog Lamp Relay No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3 Right Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14
Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3 Seat Belt Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8
Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3 Seat Belt Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8
Full Time 4WD Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10 Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 17 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
Fuse 12 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13 Tell Tale Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-17
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2 Transfer Case Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9, 10
G101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-9 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8, 10 Trip Reset Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-15
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 12, 13 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-2, 9, 10, 14 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . . 8W-40-2
G123 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-17 Upshift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
G154 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-17 Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-8, 11 Volt Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-3
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11 VTSS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-12, 13
Headlamp Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14 Washer Fluid Level Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-6, 7, 8
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-11, 15 Water In Fuel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-17
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-40-14
8W - 40 - 2 8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER XJ
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)

(8W-10-12)
POWER JUNCTION
A23
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
CENTER (8W-12-2)
FUSE (8W-10-2) FUSE
16 (8W-10-6) 9
15A 10A
A24 (8W-10-25) (8W-12-12)
(8W-10-28) (8W-12-13)
S13 C4
GAS DIESEL M1
20 F87
PK 20
M1 M1 WT/BK
20 20 1
PK PK UNDERHOOD LHD RHD
S135 LAMP/
(8W-10-25) MERCURY
SWITCH
FULL
(DIESEL) OPTIONS BASE
12 C1 (8W-44-7) F87
20
JUNCTION WT/BK
BLOCK S225
(8W-12-2) (8W-12-12)
S18 C4
M1
20 5 C201
PK
LHD RHD
F87
6 C201 20
WT/BK
S214 S216
(8W-10-25) (8W-12-12)
(8W-10-28) (8W-12-13)
9 C1 8 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
FUSED FUSED
B(+) IGNITION
SWITCH
OUTPUT
GROUND (ST-RUN)
9 C2 6 C1
Z2 Z2
18 20
BK/LG BK/LG
POLICE/
POSTAL OTHER
S227
(8W-15-16)
G108
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI04002
XJ 8W-40 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 8W - 40 - 3
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)

(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
LOW CHECK UPSHIFT
FUEL GAUGES INDICATOR
WARNING WARNING (M/T)
INDICATOR INDICATOR
FUSED LOW FUEL CHECK GAUGES UPSHIFT

IGN. WARNING WARNING INDICATOR
(ST-RUN) INDICATOR INDICATOR CONTROL
CONTROL CONTROL
CCD CCD FUEL
BUS BUS GAUGE TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER VOLT METER
(+) (-) CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL
FUEL TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER VOLT METER

GAUGE
2 C2 1 C2
D1 D2 FUEL FUEL
20 TWISTED 20 FUEL LEVEL FUEL PUMP
PAIR LEVEL LEVEL
VT/BR WT/BK
SENSOR
SENSOR SENSOR
MODULE
SIGNAL (8W-30-28) SIGNAL (8W-30-3)
(8W-30-4)
3 3
S239 S238
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
A11 C100 DIESEL GAS VEHICLE
A12 VEHICLE SPEED
E11 E12 4.0L
K226 SPEED
OTHER A/T SENSOR
SENSOR
20
DB/LG SIGNAL (8W-30-9)
4.0L 3
OTHER A/T D2 D2
18 20 G7
LHD RHD
WT/BK WT/BK 18
D1 WT/OR
20 S144 15 C200 16 C204
D1 VT/BR (8W-30-17)
GAS DIESEL
18 (8W-30-18)
VT/BR
S145 1 C111
K226 S108
(8W-30-17) 20 G7
D1 (8W-30-18) D2 (8W-30-9) 20
DB/LG
20 20 WT/OR
G7
VT/BR WT/BK
18
TWISTED B2 WT/OR
S152
TWISTED PAIR F11 C100 (8W-30-26)
PAIR
7 6
D1 D2 BUS BUS CONTROL K226 G7
18 18 (+) (-) MODULE 18 18
VT/BR WT/BK (8W-31-7) DB/LG WT/OR
C30 C3 C28 C3 C26 C3 B27 C2

CCD CCD FUEL VEHICLE POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS LEVEL SPEED CONTROL
(+) (-) SENSOR SENSOR MODULE
(8W-30-4)
LHD (8W-30-9)
RHD (8W-30-17)
XJI04003 (8W-30-18) J998W-7
GAS
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CHECK
ENGINE
WARNING
INDICATOR
FUSED CHECK ENGINE

IGNITION ENGINE WARNING
SWITCH COOLANT INDICATOR OIL
CCD CCD OUTPUT TEMPERATURE CONTROL PRESSURE
BUS BUS (ST-RUN) GAUGE GAUGE
(+) (-) CONTROL CONTROL
ENGINE OIL
COOLANT PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
GAUGE
2 C2 1 C2
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
ENGINE
TWISTED ENGINE
COOLANT
PAIR COOLANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SENSOR
SIGNAL (8W-30-7)
S239 S238
2
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
A11
ENGINE ENGINE
E11 A12 C100 OIL OIL
4.0L
E12 4.0L PRESSURE
OTHER A/T
SENSOR
PRESSURE
OTHER A/T SENSOR
SIGNAL
2 (8W-30-10)
D1 D2 D1 D2
18 20 18 20
S145 S144
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
TWISTED
PAIR
D1 D2 K2 G60
18 18 18 18
VT/BR WT/BK TN/BK GY/YL
C30 C3 C28 C3 A16 C1 B23 C2
CCD CCD ENGINE ENGINE POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS COOLANT OIL CONTROL
(+) (-) TEMPERATURE PRESSURE MODULE
SENSOR SENSOR (8W-30-7)
(8W-30-17)
LHD (8W-30-18)
RHD
J998W-7 XJI04004
DIESEL
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CHECK
ENGINE
WARNING
INDICATOR
FUSED CHECK ENGINE

IGNITION ENGINE WARNING
SWITCH COOLANT INDICATOR OIL
CCD OUTPUT CCD TEMPERATURE CONTROL PRESSURE
BUS (ST-RUN) BUS GAUGE GAUGE
(+) (-) CONTROL CONTROL
ENGINE OIL
COOLANT PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
GAUGE
2 C2 1 C2
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
TWISTED
PAIR
S239 S238 ENGINE

ENGINE ENGINE
OIL
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) OIL
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
COOLANT PRESSURE
PRESSURE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR SENSOR
D1 D2 SENSOR SIGNAL (8W-30-26)
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK 1 2 NO. 2 2
(8W-30-26)
K167 K222 G60

A11 A12 C100 18 18 18
E11 E12 BR/YL TN/RD GY/YL
12 10 C120
2 C116
K167
18
TWISTED BR/YL
PAIR
S138
(8W-70-3)
D1 D2 K167 K222 G60
18 18 18 18 18
VT/BR WT/BK BR/YL TN/RD GY/YL
C30 C3 C28 C3 A4 C1 A16 C1 B23 C2

CCD CCD SENSOR SECONDARY ENGINE POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS RETURN ENGINE OIL CONTROL
(+) (-) COOLANT PRESSURE MODULE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (8W-30-17)
SENSOR SIGNAL (8W-30-18)
SIGNAL (8W-30-26)
LHD
RHD
XJI04005 J998W-7
LHD GAS
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
AIRBAG SEAT LOW
ABS
WARNING BELT WASHER
INDICATOR
INDICATOR WARNING FLUID
INDICATOR INDICATOR
FUSED AIRBAG SEAT LOW

IGNITION WARNING BELT WASHER
SWITCH INDICATOR WARNING FLUID
OUTPUT CONTROL INDICATOR INDICATOR
(ST-RUN) CONTROL CONTROL
LOW
SEAT WASHER
CCD CCD BELT FLUID
BUS BUS SWITCH SWITCH
(+) (-) SENSE SENSE
2 C2 1 C2 10 C2 7 C1 4 C1
D1 D2 G10 G29 G19
20 20 20 20 20
VT/BR WT/BK LG/RD BK/LB LG/OR
A8
TWISTED 69 C201 E8 F13 C100
PAIR G10 G29 G19
20 20 20
LG/RD BK/LB LG/OR
S239 S238 A B
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) SEAT WASHER
BELT FLUID
SWITCH LEVEL
SWITCH
B A
Z1 Z1
D1 D2 20 20
20 20 B16
BK BK
VT/BR WT/BK CONTROLLER
ANTI-LOCK
TWISTED S314
(8W-15-13)
BRAKE
PAIR RELAY
Z1
14 4.0L A/T OTHER B19 (IN PDC)
BK (8W-35-4)
51 52 C201
TWISTED 14 C201 Z1
20
PAIR Z1 S141 S132 BK
14 (8W-15-8) (8W-15-4)
BK S132
D1 D2 Z1 Z1
18 18 (8W-15-8)
VT/BR WT/BK
S208 16 14
(8W-15-14) BK BK
Z1
19 18 (8W-15-15)
Z1 14
CCD CCD AIRBAG 14 BK
BUS BUS CONTROL BK
(+) (-) MODULE G106
(8W-43-2) G107 (8W-15-10)
LHD
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15) RHD
J998W-7 XJI04006
LHD DIESEL
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
AIRBAG SEAT LOW
ABS
WARNING BELT WASHER
INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR

LOW
SEAT WASHER
CCD CCD BELT FLUID
(+) (-) SENSE SENSE
2 C2 1 C2 10 C2 7 C1 4 C1
D1 D2 G10 G29 G19
20 20 20 20 20
TWISTED A8
PAIR 69 C201 E8 F13 C100
G10 G29 G19
20 20 20
LG/RD BK/LB LG/OR
S239 S238 B16

(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) CONTROLLER
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE
A RELAY
SEAT (IN PDC)
B19
BELT (8W-35-5)
SWITCH Z1
20 FOG
B BK/YL
D1 D2 B LAMP
WASHER
20 20 RELAY
VT/BR WT/BK
Z1 FLUID
20 (IN PDC)
LEVEL (8W-50-18)
BK B10
TWISTED SWITCH
PAIR S314 A Z1
20
(8W-15-13)
Z1 BK/YL
Z1 20
51 C201 14 BK
12 C106
52
BK Z1
TWISTED S141 20
PAIR 14 C201 (8W-15-11) BK
Z1
Z1 12 S103
14 BK (8W-15-12)
D1 D2 Z1
BK
18 18 18
VT/BR WT/BK S208 S132 BK
(8W-15-15) (8W-15-11)
19 18 11 C106
CCD CCD AIRBAG Z1 Z1 Z1
BUS BUS CONTROL 14 12 20
(+) (-) MODULE BK BK BK LHD
(8W-43-2) RHD
G107 G106
(8W-15-15) (8W-15-12)
XJI04007 J998W-7
RHD
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
AIRBAG SEAT LOW
ABS
WARNING BELT WASHER
INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR

LOW
SEAT WASHER
CCD CCD BELT FLUID
(+) (-) SENSE SENSE
2 C2 1 C2 10 C2 7 C1 4 C1
D1 D2 G10 G29 G19
20 20 20 20 20
TWISTED A8
PAIR 12 C203 E8 F13 C100
G10 G29 DIESEL GAS
20 20
LG/RD BK/LB
G19
B16 20
S239 S238 A CONTROLLER LG/OR
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18) SEAT ANTI-LOCK B16
BELT BRAKE CONTROLLER
SWITCH RELAY ANTI-LOCK
B19 (IN PDC) BRAKE
B (8W-35-4) RELAY
Z1 (IN PDC)
Z1 B19
20 FOG (8W-35-4)
20 B BK/YL
D1 D2 BK LAMP
WASHER
20 20 RELAY
VT/BR WT/BK FLUID
S313 (IN PDC)
(8W-15-18)
LEVEL (8W-50-18)
SWITCH B10
TWISTED Z1 Z1
PAIR 20 A Z1 20
BK 20 BK
Z1 BK/YL
20
1 2 BK
12 C106
C204 S309
(8W-15-18) Z1 S132
TWISTED S141 20 (8W-15-6)
(8W-15-6) BK
PAIR Z1
(8W-15-11)
12 Z1
BK
S103
GAS DIESEL 14
(8W-15-12)
D1 D2 Z1 BK
18 18 18
G302 Z1 Z1
VT/BR WT/BK BK
16 12
(8W-15-18)
19 18 BK BK 11 C106
CCD CCD AIRBAG S132 Z1 G106
BUS BUS CONTROL (8W-15-11) 20 (8W-15-7)
(+) (-) MODULE BK
(8W-43-3) LHD
G106 RHD
(8W-15-10)
J998W-7 XJI04008
(8W-15-12)
GAS
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
FULL PART BRAKE
TIME TIME WARNING
4WD 4WD INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR
7 C2 5 C2 2 C1
G106 G107 G99
20 20 20
BK/WT BK/RD GY/WT
A2 A3 A10 C100
E14
G106 G107 G99
20 20 20
BK/WT BK/RD GY/WT
8 2
13 C107
BRAKE
WARNING
G106 G107
20 20 PRESSURE
BK/WT BK/RD SWITCH
242 4WD 231 4WD G9

20
GY/BK
A14
C100
E2
B D A S211
(8W-10-14)
TRANSFER TRANSFER
G9 G9
FULL PART CASE CASE 20 20
TIME TIME SWITCH SWITCH GY/BK GY/BK
A B
2 C1 LHD RHD
IGNITION
SWITCH 66 C201
Z1 Z1 1 START
2 RUN 10 C203
18 18
BK BK 1 4 0 OFF
2 3 3 LOCK
0 4 ACC
(8W-10-14)
1 C1
Z1 G9
20 20
BK GY/BK
S107 S207
(8W-15-2) (8W-15-16)
Z1 Z1 PARK
16 14 BRAKE
BK BK
LHD SWITCH
RHD
G101 G108
(8W-15-2) (8W-15-16)
XJI04009 J998W-7
DIESEL
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
FULL PART BRAKE
TIME TIME WARNING
4WD 4WD INDICATOR
INDICATOR INDICATOR
7 C2 5 C2 2 C1
G106 G107 G99
20 20 20
BK/WT BK/RD GY/WT
A2 A3 A10 C100
NOT
E14
USED
G107 G99
20 20
BK/RD GY/WT
3 C111 2
BRAKE
PRESSURE
G107
18 SWITCH
BK/RD
1
A
TRANSFER G9
CASE 20
GY/BK
SWITCH
(231 4WD) A14
C100
B E2
S211
(8W-10-15)
Z1 G9 G9
20 20 20
BK GY/BK GY/BK
4 C111 2 C1
IGNITION LHD RHD
SWITCH
Z1 1 START
18 66 C201
2 RUN
BK 0 OFF 10 C203
1 4
2 3 3 LOCK
S141 0 4 ACC
(8W-15-11) (8W-10-15)
1 C1
Z1
12 Z1
BK 20 G9
BK 20
GY/BK
S132 S207
(8W-15-11) (8W-15-16)
Z1 Z1
14 PARK
12
BK BK BRAKE
LHD SWITCH
G106 G108
(8W-15-16) RHD
(8W-15-12)
J998W-7 XJI04010
BATT M1 (8W-10-25)
(8W-10-28)
INSTRUMENT
FUSED
CLUSTER
B(+)
CHIME
CONTROL
8 C2
G26
20
LB
S210
(8W-10-16)
1 C2 5 C1
IGNITION HEADLAMP
KEY-IN
SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH (8W-10-14) 0 OFF
(8W-10-15) 1 PARK
0 1 2
2 HEAD
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
2 C2 6 C1 (8W-50-4)
G16 G16
20 20
BK/LB BK/LB
S200
(8W-10-16)
LHD RHD
17 C200 19 C203
G16 G16
20 20
BK/LB BK/LB
2 C317 2 C318
G16 G16
18 18
BK/LB BK/LB
2 2
DRIVER DRIVER
DOOR DOOR
JAMB JAMB
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-39-6) (8W-39-7)
3 3
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
3 C317 3 C318
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S309 S310
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-20)
Z1 Z1
12 12
BK BK
G302 G303
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-20)
XJI04011 J998W-7
LHD
RUN A22 OVERHEAD
(8W-10-17)
MODULE
CCD CCD
JUNCTION BUS BUS
(8W-49-6)
BLOCK (+) (-)
(8W-12-2)
FUSE 6 12 SENTRY
12 D1 TWISTED D2 KEY
20 20 CCD CCD
10A PAIR BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
(8W-12-16) VT/BR WT/BK
(+) (-) MODULE
COMPASS OTHER COMPASS OTHER 6 5 (EXCEPT
86 POLICE/
REAR S344 S346 POSTAL)
WINDOW (8W-30-17) (8W-30-17) TWISTED (8W-39-8)
DEFOGGER PAIR
RELAY
1 2
(8W-48-2) C301
85 D1 D2
20 20
S26 C4 D1 D2
VT/BR WT/BK
20 20
55 56 VT/BR WT/BK
C201
C81
20 D1 TWISTED D2
LB/WT 20 PAIR 20
VT/BR WT/BK
17 C201
S239
(8W-30-17)
S238
C81 (8W-30-17)
20
D1 TWISTED D2
LB/WT PAIR
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
3 C2 2 C2 1 C2
INSTRUMENT
REAR CCD CCD
CLUSTER
WINDOW REAR BUS BUS
DEFOGGER WINDOW (+) (-) VTSS
RELAY DEFOGGER INDICATOR
CONTROL SWITCH
SENSE
4 C2
C80
20
DB/WT
2
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SWITCH
(8W-48-2)
1
Z1
20
BK
S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1 (8W-15-15)
14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
J998W-7 XJI04012
(8W-15-15)
RHD
RUN A22 OVERHEAD
(8W-10-17)
MODULE
CCD CCD
JUNCTION BUS BUS
(8W-49-6)
BLOCK (+) (-)
(8W-12-2)
FUSE 6 12 SENTRY
12 D1 TWISTED D2 KEY
20 20 CCD CCD
10A PAIR BUS BUS IMMOBILIZER
(8W-12-17) VT/BR WT/BK
(+) (-) MODULE
COMPASS OTHER COMPASS OTHER 6 5 (EXCEPT
86 POLICE/
REAR S344 S346 POSTAL)
WINDOW (8W-30-18) (8W-30-18) TWISTED (8W-39-9)
DEFOGGER PAIR
RELAY
(8W-48-3) D1 D2
85 20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
S26 C4 D1 D2
1 2
C301 20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
C81
20
D1 TWISTED D2
LB/WT PAIR
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
S239
(8W-30-18)
S238
(8W-30-18)
D1 TWISTED D2
20 PAIR 20
VT/BR WT/BK
3 C2 2 C2 1 C2
INSTRUMENT
REAR CCD CCD
CLUSTER
WINDOW REAR BUS BUS
DEFOGGER WINDOW (+) (-) VTSS
RELAY DEFOGGER INDICATOR
CONTROL SWITCH
SENSE
4 C2
C80
20
DB/WT
2
REAR
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
SWITCH
(8W-48-3)
1
Z1
20
BK
S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1 (8W-15-15)
14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
XJI04013 J998W-7
(8W-15-15)
DIMMER HEADLAMP
SWITCH BEAM
HIGH TURN
BEAM
SELECT
OUTPUT SWITCH SIGNAL/
3 (8W-50-5) LEFT RIGHT HAZARD
(8W-50-6) TURN TURN SWITCH
L3 (8W-50-7) SIGNAL SIGNAL
(8W-52-2)
16 (8W-50-8) 10 1 (8W-52-3)
RD/OR (8W-52-4)
L61 L60
20 20
LG/WT TN
S213
(8W-50-5)
(8W-50-6)
FROM (8W-50-7)
FOG (8W-50-8)
LAMP L3 S209 S212
RELAY 16 (8W-52-5) (8W-52-7)
NO. 2 RD/OR (8W-52-6) (8W-52-8)
(8W-50-16)
LHD RHD
D3 C100
G34 L61 L60
16 G34 L3 20 20
RD/GY 16 16 LG/WT TN
RD/GY RD/OR
DRL OTHER
D4 C100
G34
16
RD/GY
5 C1 10 C1 6 C2
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
HIGH LEFT RIGHT
BEAM TURN TURN
INDICATOR SIGNAL SIGNAL
INDICATOR INDICATOR
9 C2 6 C1
POLICE/POSTAL OTHER
Z2
20
BK/LG
Z2
20 S227
Z2 (8W-15-16)
BK/LG
18
Z2
BK/LG
20
BK/LG
G108
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI04014
BATT F34 (8W-10-26)

(8W-10-27)
(8W-10-36)
4 C1
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
0 OFF
1 PARK
3 4 0 1 2
2 HEAD
3 DIM
4 BRIGHT LIFTGATE
(8W-50-2) LIFTGATE SWITCH
(8W-50-3) AJAR
1 C1 (8W-44-8)
(8W-50-4) SWITCH
E1 SENSE
20 2
TN
LHD RHD
G78
42 C201 20
TN/BK
S1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK 6 C310
FUSE (8W-12-2) 3 C311
6
5A G78
(8W-12-8) 20
(8W-12-9) TN/BK
S2 C4 1 C327
E2
20 G78
OR 20
TN/BK
LHD RHD
LHD RHD
S315
(8W-12-8)
43 C201
40 C200 15 C204
S215
(8W-12-8)
(8W-12-9)
E2 G78
20 20
OR TN/BK
3 C1 1 C1
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER CLUSTER
ILLUMINATION
LAMPS
TRIP LIFTGATE
RESET AJAR
SWITCH ODOMETER INDICATOR
SENSE CONTROL CONTROL
TRIP ODOMETER
RESET LIFTGATE
SWITCH AJAR
INDICATOR
XJI04015 J998W-7
ST-RUN F87 (8W-12-12)

(8W-12-13)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
CRUISE
ENGAGED
INDICATOR
FUSED CRUISE
IGNITION ENGAGED
SWITCH INDICATOR
OUTPUT CONTROL
(ST-RUN)
CCD CCD
BUS BUS
(+) (-)
2 C2 1 C2
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
TWISTED
PAIR
S239 S238
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
A11 A12 C100

E11 E12
4.0L A/T OTHER OTHER 4.0L A/T
S145 S144
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
ENGINE
CONTROL
SPEED MODULE
TWISTED CONTROL (DIESEL)
PAIR ON (8W-30-27)
SIGNAL
K30 C2
D1 D2 V66
18 18 18
VT/BR WT/BK RD/LG
C30 C3 C28 C3 B18 C2

CCD CCD SPEED POWERTRAIN
BUS BUS CONTROL CONTROL
(+) (-) ON MODULE
SIGNAL (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18)
(8W-30-27)
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI04016
DIESEL
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
9
10A
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
S13 C4
F87
20
WT/BK
RHD LHD
FULL
BASE OPTIONS
S225 WATER
(8W-12-12) WATER
IN IN
FUEL FUEL
5 C201
SENSE SENSOR
1 (8W-30-28)
F87
20
WT/BK LOW
COOLANT
LEVEL COOLANT
S216 SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-12-12) SENSE (8W-30-28)
(8W-12-13)
1 1
TELL
WAIT WATER LOW
TALE
TO IN COOLANT MODULE
START FUEL LEVEL (8W-30-30)
WARNING WARNING WARNING
INDICATOR INDICATOR INDICATOR
4 7 8
K185 G86 G154

20 20 20
OR/LB TN/OR VT/LG
E15 E16 E17 C100
K185
20
OR/LB
G86 G154 G123 G18

18 18 18 18
TN/OR VT/LG DG/WT PK/BK
K32 C2
ENGINE C9 C3 C8 C3 A27 C1 A12 C1
WAIT
TO CONTROL WATER LOW WATER COOLANT POWERTRAIN
START MODULE IN COOLANT IN LEVEL CONTROL
INDICATOR FUEL INDICATOR FUEL SWITCH MODULE
(8W-30-30) INDICATOR DRIVER SENSE SENSE (8W-30-28)
DRIVER (8W-30-30)
XJI04017 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET 8W - 41 - 1
8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET

Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 High Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
Cigar Lighter Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
Fuse 1 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
Fuse 2 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Low Note Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
Fuse 21 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-41-2, 3
8W - 41 - 2 8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET XJ
LHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14) BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-15) (8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE

2 1 21
25A 25A 15A
(8W-12-5) (8W-12-5) (8W-12-20)
86 30 86 30
CIGAR HORN
LIGHTER RELAY
RELAY
85 87 85 87
S5 C4 M6 C4 M5 C4 S22 C4 1 C5 4 C2
Z1 F30 F38 X3 X3 X2
14 16 16 20 20 20
BK RD RD/LB BK/RD BK/RD DG/RD
S314 S131
(8W-15-13) 7 C301 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
X2 X2 (8W-12-20)
Z1 20 20
14 DG/RD DG/RD
BK
14 50 65 26
C201 HIGH LOW
NOTE NOTE
Z1 F30 F38 X3 X3 HORN HORN
14 16 16 20 20
BK RD RD/LB BK/RD BK/RD
1 1 10
CIGAR POWER HORN OVERHEAD
LIGHTER OUTLET RELAY MODULE
CONTROL (8W-49-4)
SENSE
3
1 C1
CLOCKSPRING
3
S208
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
Z1 Z1 Z1
14 16 16 HORN
BK BK BK SWITCH
G107
(8W-15-14)
J998W-7 (8W-15-15) XJI04102
XJ 8W-41 HORN/CIGAR LIGHTER/POWER OUTLET 8W - 41 - 3
RHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14) BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-15) (8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE

2 1 21
25A 25A 15A
(8W-12-5) (8W-12-5) (8W-12-20)
86 30 86 30
CIGAR HORN
LIGHTER RELAY
RELAY
85 87 85 87
S5 C4 M6 C4 M5 C4 1 C5 S22 C4 4 C2
Z1 F30 F38 X3 X3 X2
14 16 16 20 20 20
BK RD RD/LB BK/RD BK/RD DG/RD
7 C301
S131
S208 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
(8W-15-14) X2 X2
(8W-12-20)
(8W-15-15) 20 20
DG/RD DG/RD
1 1
CIGAR POWER
LIGHTER OUTLET HIGH LOW
NOTE NOTE
X3
20 HORN HORN
BK/RD
3
10
HORN OVERHEAD
3
RELAY MODULE
CONTROL (8W-49-5)
SENSE
1 C1
CLOCKSPRING
Z1 Z1 Z1
14 16 16
BK BK BK
HORN
G107 SWITCH
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
XJI04103 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 42 AIR CONDITIONING-HEATER 8W - 42 - 1
8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING-HEATER

A/C Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-6, 7 Fuse 25 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
A/C Compressor Clutch Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-6, 7 G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-7, 8
A/C High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 5, 7 G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-6
A/C Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 5, 7 G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5
A/C- Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 5 Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3
Blend Door Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 4, 6 HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Blower Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Blower Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5 Power Distribution Center . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-7, 8 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . 8W-42-4, 5, 6, 8
Fuse 6 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5 Radiator Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-8
Fuse 11 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-2, 3, 4, 5 Radiator Fan Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-42-8
8W - 42 - 2 8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING-HEATER XJ
LHD HEATER ONLY
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
JUNCTION DIESEL GAS POWER
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2) 17 12 CENTER
25 (8W-10-2)
FUSE FUSE
15A (8W-10-6)
11 6
(8W-12-21) 40A 40A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-20)
24 5
S8 C4
F15 A111
20 12
DB/WT RD/LG
D5 C100
7
HEATER
CONTROL
0 1 HIGH
5 2 MEDIUM 2
FAN MODE 3 MEDIUM 1
1 4 6 8 4 LOW
2 3 7 5 HEAT/DEFROST
6 HEAT
7 VENT
8 BI-LEVEL
2 3 4 5 1 0 OFF
11 12 61 60 59 C201
C7 C6 C5 C4
A111 12 14 14 14
12 BK/TN LB LG TN
RD/LG Z8
12
BK/VT
S219
(8W-12-21)
5 9 8 7 4 3 2 G108
(8W-15-16)
F15 FUSED HVAC
20 IGNITION UNIT
DB/WT SWITCH
OUTPUT 86 30
(RUN) BLOWER BLOWER
40 C201 MOTOR MOTOR
RELAY M
F15
20
85 87
DB/WT
S217 10
(8W-12-21)
F15 Z8
20 20
DB/WT BK/VT
4
25 C201
FUSED BLEND
Z8
IGNITION DOOR 16
SWITCH ACTUATOR BK/VT
OUTPUT (8W-42-6)
(RUN)
G108
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI04202
XJ 8W-42 AIR CONDITIONING-HEATER 8W - 42 - 3
RHD HEATER ONLY
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2) 17 12 CENTER
25 (8W-10-2)
FUSE FUSE
15A (8W-10-6)
11 6
(8W-12-22) 40A 40A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-20)
24 5
S8 C4
A111
12
F15
RD/LG
20
DB/WT D5 C100
7
HEATER
CONTROL
0 1 HIGH
5 2 MEDIUM 2
S219 FAN MODE 3 MEDIUM 1
1 4 6 8 4 LOW
(8W-12-22)
2 3 7 5 HEAT/DEFROST
6 HEAT
7 VENT
F15 8 BI-LEVEL
20 2 3 4 5 1
A111 0 OFF
DB/WT C7 C6 C5 C4
12 12 14 14 14
RD/LG BK/TN LB LG TN
21 C204
1 8 9 10
7 C202
F15 Z8
20 A111 C7 C6 C5 C4
12 12 14 14 14 12
DB/WT BK/VT
S349 G108
(8W-12-22) (8W-15-16)
9 5 8 7 4 3 2
FUSED HVAC
IGNITION UNIT
SWITCH
OUTPUT
86 (RUN) 30 BLOWER
BLOWER MOTOR
MOTOR M
RELAY
85 87
POWER 10
AMP OTHER
Z8 Z8
12 12
BK/VT BK/PK
6 C202 6 C202
Z8 Z8
16 16
BK/VT BK/VT
G108 G108
(8W-15-16) (8W-15-16)
XJI04203 J998W-7
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2) 17 12 CENTER
25 (8W-10-2)
FUSE FUSE
15A (8W-10-6)
11 6
(8W-12-21) 40A 40A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-20)
24 5
S8 C4
F15 A111
20 12
DB/WT RD/LG
D5 C100
7
A/C-
0 0
HEATER
5 11 5 CONTROL
11 1 HIGH
FAN 6 MODE 6
1 4 10 10 2 MEDIUM 2
7 9 7 9 3 MEDIUM 1
2 3 8 8 4 LOW
A111 5 DEFROST
12 A/C
SELECT 6 HEAT/DEF(MIX)
RD/LG 7 HEAT
2 3 4 5 6 1 8 VENT(PANEL)
C90 9 BI-LEVEL
20 10 A/C
C201 LG Z8 11 MAX
11 12 61 60 59 12
A6 C100 0 OFF
A111 C7 C6 C5 C4 BK/VT
12 12 14 14 14 DIESEL GAS
C90 G108
18
S219 LG
(8W-15-16)
(8W-12-21)
S143
F15
20 5 9 8 7 4 3 2 C90
DB/WT FUSED HVAC 20
IGNITION UNIT LG
SWITCH 2
OUTPUT A/C
(RUN)
86 30 BLOWER LOW
BLOWER MOTOR PRESSURE
MOTOR M SWITCH
RELAY
1
2
C90 C90 A/C
85 87 18 18 HIGH
C21
LG LG
20 PRESSURE
10 DB/PK SWITCH
40 C201
1
S217
(8W-12-21) Z8 C22
20 18
4 DB/WT
BK/VT
FUSED BLEND C23 C3 C22 C3
IGNITION DOOR
25 C201
Z8 A/C A/C POWERTRAIN
SWITCH ACTUATOR
OUTPUT (8W-42-6) 16 SELECT SWITCH CONTROL
BK/VT INPUT SENSE MODULE
(RUN)
(8W-30-15)
G108 (8W-30-27)
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI04204
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)

BLOCK DISTRIBUTION
FUSE
(8W-12-2) 17 12 CENTER
25 (8W-10-2)
FUSE FUSE
15A (8W-10-6)
11 6
(8W-12-22) 40A 40A
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-20)
24 5
S8 C4
F15
20 A111
DB/WT 12
RD/LG
S219
(8W-12-22) D5 C100
7
A/C-
0 0
HEATER
5 11 5 CONTROL
11 1 HIGH
FAN 6 6 2 MEDIUM 2
1 4 10 10
7 7 3 MEDIUM 1
2 3 8 9 8 9
4 LOW
MODE 5 DEFROST
A/C 6 HEAT/DEF(MIX)
SELECT 7 HEAT
8 VENT(PANEL)
2 3 4 5 6 1 9 BI-LEVEL
A111 C7 C6 C5 C4 C90 10 A/C
12 12 14 14 14 20 11 MAX
RD/LG BK/TN LB LG TN LG 0 OFF
7 1 8 9 10
C202 A6 C100
A111 C7 C6 C5 C4 DIESEL GAS Z8
12 12 14 14 14 12
RD/LG BK/TN LB LG TN C90 BK/VT
18
21 C204 LG
G108
S349 S143 (8W-15-16)
(8W-12-22)
9 5 8 7 4 3 2 C90
20
FUSED HVAC LG
IGNITION UNIT 2
SWITCH
OUTPUT
A/C
86 (RUN) 30 BLOWER
LOW
BLOWER MOTOR PRESSURE
MOTOR SWITCH
RELAY M
1 2
C21 A/C
85 87 C90 C90 20 HIGH
18 18 DB/PK PRESSURE
POWER 10 LG LG
SWITCH
AMP OTHER
1
Z8 Z8 C22
12 12 18
BK/VT BK/PK DB/WT
6 C202 6 C202 C23 C3 C22 C3
Z8 Z8 A/C A/C POWERTRAIN
16 16 SELECT SWITCH CONTROL
BK/VT BK/VT INPUT SENSE MODULE
(8W-30-15)
G108 G108 (8W-30-27)
(8W-15-16) (8W-15-16)
XJI04205 J998W-7
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12) BATT A17 (8W-10-21) RUN A22 (8W-10-17)

(8W-12-13) (8W-10-32)
POWER JUNCTION
B5 B1 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
A/C CENTER FUSE (8W-12-2)
COMPRESSOR (8W-10-2) 25
CLUTCH 15A
RELAY (8W-12-21)
(8W-12-22)
B3 B2
S8 C4
HVAC F15
BLEND UNIT 20
DOOR DB/WT
FEEDBACK
GROUND SIGNAL
C13 C3
18 16 1 6 S219
DB/OR DB/BK (8W-12-21)
(8W-12-22)
Z1 C36 RHD LHD
20 20
BK RD/WT
F15
20
RHD LHD DB/WT
F15
13 C204 7 C201 20 40 C201
OTHER 4.0L RHD DB/WT
F15
20
DB/WT
RHD LHD
S217
14 C204 4 C201 (8W-12-21)
4 C108
Z1 C36
20 20 F15
BK RD/WT 20
DB/WT
3 4
C3 BLEND FUSED BLEND
16 DOOR IGNITION DOOR
DB/BK FEEDBACK SWITCH ACTUATOR
SIGNAL OUTPUT
(RUN)
GROUND
2
Z1
20
A/C BK
COMPRESSOR
G107
CLUTCH (8W-15-14)
(GAS) (8W-15-15)
C1 C3
A/C POWERTRAIN
COMPRESSOR CONTROL
CLUTCH MODULE
RELAY (GAS)
CONTROL
(8W-30-15)
J998W-7 XJI04206
DIESEL
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12) BATT A17 (8W-10-32)

(8W-12-13)
POWER
B5 B1
A/C
DISTRIBUTION
COMPRESSOR CENTER
CLUTCH (8W-10-6)
RELAY
B3 B2
C13
20
DB/OR
K5 C2
ENGINE C3
A/C 16
COMPRESSOR CONTROL DB/BK
CLUTCH MODULE
RELAY (8W-30-24)
CONTROL (8W-30-27)
A/C
SWITCH
SENSE 6 C120
K10 C2
C22
20
DB/WT C3
14
3 C120 DB/BK
1
C22 A/C
20
DB/WT COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
2
A/C 2
HIGH Z1
PRESSURE 16
BK
SWITCH
1 11 C120
C21
20 Z1
DB/PK 16
BK
2 C120
2 S157
(8W-15-11)
A/C
Z1
LOW 12
PRESSURE BK
SWITCH
1 S132
Z1 (8W-15-11)
20
Z1
BK
12
BK
G106
(8W-15-12)
XJI04207 J998W-7
ST-RUN F20 (8W-12-12) BATT F141 (8W-10-20)

(8W-12-13)
POWER
C11 C10
RADIATOR
DISTRIBUTION
FAN CENTER
RELAY (8W-10-2)
(8W-10-6)
C13 C14
C25
12
LB
GAS DIESEL
C27 C27
18 20
DB/PK DB/PK
K17 C2
RADIATOR ENGINE
FAN CONTROL
RELAY MODULE
CONTROL (8W-30-30)
1
RADIATOR
FAN
M MOTOR
C2 C3
RADIATOR POWERTRAIN 2
FAN CONTROL Z1
RELAY MODULE 12
CONTROL (8W-30-15) BK
G106
(8W-15-7)
(8W-15-10)
(8W-15-12)
J998W-7 XJI04208
XJ 8W - 43 AIRBAG SYSTEM 8W - 43 - 1
8W-43 AIRBAG SYSTEM

Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3, 4 Fuse 27 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3
Clockspring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-4 G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3 G300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-3
Driver Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-4 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3
Fuse 26 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-2, 3 Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-43-4
8W - 43 - 2 8W-43 AIRBAG SYSTEM XJ
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
26 27
10A 10A
(8W-12-24) (8W-12-24)
S21 C4 S23 C4
F14 F23
18 18
LG/YL DB/YL
20 17
FUSED FUSED AIRBAG
IGNITION IGNITION CONTROL
OUTPUT OUTPUT
(RUN) CCD CCD (ST-RUN)
BUS BUS
(-) (+) GROUND
18 19 10
D2 D1
18 18
WT/BK VT/BR
TWISTED BASE FULL OPTIONS
PAIR
52 51 Z6 Z6
C201 18 18
BK/YL BK/PK
TWISTED
PAIR
D2 D1
20 20
WT/BK VT/BR
S238 S239
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
D2 D1
18 18
WT/BK VT/BR
TWISTED
PAIR
11 3
DATA G200
LINK (8W-15-17)
CONNECTOR
(8W-30-17)
J998W-7 XJI04302
XJ 8W-43 AIRBAG SYSTEM 8W - 43 - 3
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
26 27
10A 10A
(8W-12-25) (8W-12-25)
S21 C4 S23 C4
F14 F23
18 18
LG/YL DB/YL
11 10
C204
F14 F23
18 18
LG/YL DB/YL
20 17
FUSED FUSED AIRBAG
IGNITION IGNITION CONTROL
OUTPUT OUTPUT
(RUN) CCD CCD (ST-RUN)
BUS BUS
(-) (+) GROUND
18 19 10
D2 D1
18 18
WT/BK TWISTED VT/BR
PAIR
2 1 C204
D2 D1 Z6
20 20 18
WT/BK VT/BR BK/PK
TWISTED
PAIR
S238 S239
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
D2 D1
18 18
WT/BK VT/BR
TWISTED
PAIR
11 3
DATA
LINK
CONNECTOR
(8W-30-18)
G300
(8W-15-18)
XJI04303 J998W-7
8W - 43 - 4 8W-43 AIRBAG SYSTEM XJ
AIRBAG
CONTROL
MODULE
DRIVER DRIVER PASSENGER PASSENGER
AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 2 LINE 1
1 2 5 6
R45 R43 R42 R44

18 18 18 18
DG/LB BK/LB BK/YL DG/YL
TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
4 3 1 2
C205
R45 R43 R42 R44

18 18 18 18
DG/LB BK/LB BK/YL DG/YL
TWISTED TWISTED
PAIR PAIR
1 C3 2 C3
CLOCKSPRING
3 4
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER PASSENGER PASSENGER PASSENGER
AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG AIRBAG
LINE 1 LINE 2 LINE 2 LINE 1
J998W-7 XJI04304
XJ 8W - 44 INTERIOR LIGHTING 8W - 44 - 1
8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING

A/C- Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 8, 9
Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 6, 7 Left Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7
Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5 Left Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5, 6, 7 Left Visor/Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9 Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2 Passenger Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4 PRNDL Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7 Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-3, 4
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 5 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 6, 7 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-4, 8, 9 Right Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9 Right Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-8, 9 Right Visor/Vanity Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-5
Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7 Transfer Case Switch Illumination . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-44-2, 3, 4, 6, 7 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . 8W-44-6, 7
8W - 44 - 2 8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING XJ
LHD EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HEADLAMP 1 C206
PANEL
LAMPS SWITCH
DIMMER (8W-50-2) 1
SWITCH PRNDL
S1 C4 SIGNAL ILLUMINATION
JUNCTION 1 C1 (A/T) 1
BLOCK TRANSFER
FUSE (8W-12-2) E1
6 20 CASE
TN 2 SWITCH
5A
(8W-12-8)
42 C201 ILLUMINATION
E1 2
S2 C4 20
E2 E2 Z1 Z1
TN
20 20 20 20
OR OR BK BK
S315 2 C206
(8W-12-8)
Z1
43 C201 20
BK
E2 S314
20
(8W-15-13)
OR
Z1
14
S215 BK
(8W-12-8)
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 14 C201
20 20 20 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR OR OR Z1
POLICE
14
5 C2 PACKAGE OTHERS
BK
FUSED RADIO
PANEL (8W-47-2) S208
4
LAMPS (8W-47-9) 4 (8W-15-14)
DIMMER EXTENDED REAR Z1
SWITCH IDLE WINDOW 14
SIGNAL SWITCH DEFOGGER BK
(8W-30-14)
SWITCH G107
(8W-48-2)
1 (8W-15-14)
3 1
1
REAR FRONT 7
WIPER/ FOG A/C-
WASHER LAMP HEATER
SWITCH SWITCH CONTROL
(8W-53-4) (8W-42-4)
1 4
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 1
20 20 20 20
BK BK BK BK
S208
3 C1 (8W-15-14)
INSTRUMENT Z8
Z1
CLUSTER 14 12
(8W-40-15) BK BK/VT
G107 G108
(8W-15-14) (8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI04402
XJ 8W-44 INTERIOR LIGHTING 8W - 44 - 3
LHD BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HEADLAMP 1 C206
PANEL
LAMPS SWITCH 1
DIMMER (8W-50-4)
SWITCH
PRNDL
S1 C4 SIGNAL ILLUMINATION
JUNCTION (A/T) 1
BLOCK 1 C1 TRANSFER
FUSE (8W-12-2)
6
E1 CASE
20 2 SWITCH
5A
TN
(8W-12-8) ILLUMINATION
42 C201
2
S2 C4 E1
E2 20 E2 Z1 Z1
20 TN 20 20 20
OR OR BK BK
S315 2 C206
(8W-12-8)
43 C201 Z1
20
E2 BK
20
OR S314
(8W-15-13)
S215 Z1
(8W-12-8) 14
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 BK
20 20 20 20 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR OR OR OR 14 C201
Z1
5 C2 4 14
FUSED RADIO REAR BK
PANEL (8W-47-2) WINDOW
LAMPS (8W-47-9) S208
DEFOGGER (8W-15-15)
DIMMER
SWITCH
SWITCH
(8W-48-2) Z1
SIGNAL 14
1 BK
3 1 7 G107
REAR FRONT A/C- (8W-15-15)
WIPER/ FOG HEATER
WASHER LAMP CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH (8W-42-4)
(8W-53-4)
(8W-53-5) 4
1 4 1
REAR
Z8
12
FOG
Z1 Z1 LAMP
Z1 BK/VT
20 20 SWITCH
BK BK 20
BK
G108 (8W-51-10)
(8W-15-16)
1
S208
3 C1 (8W-15-15)
INSTRUMENT Z15
Z1 20
CLUSTER 14
(8W-40-15) BK/GY
BK
G107
(8W-15-15)
XJI04403 J998W-7
RHD
HEADLAMP
PANEL
LAMPS SWITCH
1 C206
DIMMER (8W-50-3)
SWITCH (8W-50-4)
SIGNAL E2 E2
20 20
1 C1 OR OR
E1 1 1
20 PRNDL TRANSFER
TN ILLUMINATION CASE
(A/T) SWITCH
S1 C4 E2
20 ILLUMINATION
JUNCTION OR/BK
BLOCK 2 2
FUSE (8W-12-2) Z1
Z1
6 20
20
5A BK
BK
(8W-12-9) 11 C203
2 C206
S2 C4
S313
E2 E2 (8W-15-18)
20 20 Z1
OR OR 20
BK
S215 S309
(8W-12-9) (8W-15-18)
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 Z1
20 20 20 20 20 20 12
OR OR OR OR OR OR BK
G302
7 5 C2 4 (8W-15-18)
A/C- FUSED RADIO REAR
HEATER PANEL (8W-47-3) WINDOW
CONTROL LAMPS (8W-47-10) DEFOGGER
DIMMER
E2 SWITCH
SWITCH
20 SIGNAL (8W-48-3)
OR
1 1
3 1 4
Z8 REAR FRONT REAR
12
BK/VT WIPER/ FOG FOG
WASHER LAMP LAMP
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-53-6) (BUILT-UP
(8W-53-7) EXPORT)
G108 1 4 1
(8W-51-11)
(8W-15-16)
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z15
20 20 20 18
BK BK BK BK/GY
3 C1 S208
(8W-15-14)
INSTRUMENT
(8W-15-15)
CLUSTER Z1
(8W-40-15) 14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
J998W-7 XJI04404
BATT M1 (8W-10-25)
(8W-10-28)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
3 C3
M1
20
PK
OTHERS SKIM
S361
(8W-10-26)
(8W-10-27)
S347
(8W-10-26)
FULL OPTIONS OTHERS (8W-10-27)
(8W-10-28)
2 M1 M1 M1
COMPASS MIDLINE BASE/POLICE
20 20 20
(8W-49-2) C PK PK PK
(8W-49-3)
(8W-49-4) DOME
(8W-49-5) LAMPS
SWITCH
RIGHT
2
VISOR/
DOME
VANITY
LAMP
LAMP
1 7
Z1 M2
20 20 B A
BK YL 3
M2 Z1 M2
S342 S345 20 20 20
(8W-15-13) (8W-12-30) YL BK YL
2 C3 2 C3
JUNCTION JUNCTION
BLOCK A BLOCK
(8W-12-2) (8W-12-2)
S5 C4 S5 C4
TO
Z1 JUNCTION Z1 LEFT
14 BLOCK 14
VISOR/
BK (8W-44-6) BK
(8W-44-7) VANITY
LAMP
LHD RHD
S314
(8W-15-13)
14 C201 S208
(8W-15-14)
Z1 (8W-15-15)
14 Z1
BK 14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14)
XJI04405 J998W-7
(8W-15-15)
GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A23
DISTRIBUTION FROM
CENTER DOME
FUSE (8W-10-2) LAMPS
FROM
16
15A COMPASS SWITCH
A24 (8W-10-25) FULL (8W-44-5) BASE
OPTIONS
A
M1
20
M2
PK
20
S135 YL
(8W-10-25)
12 C1 1 C3
M1 JUNCTION
20 BLOCK
PK (8W-12-2)
4 C7 S18 C4 7 C7 S25 C4
M1 RHD LHD M2
20 20 M2
PK 6 C201 YL 20
YL
5 C314
C
LHD RHD S214
(8W-10-25) TO
M1 M1 S304
M1 M1 20 20
20 18 PK PK (8W-44-7)
PK PK (8W-44-8)
A C208 A C207 (8W-44-9)
M1 M1 LHD RHD
B 18 18
PK PK 46 C201
TO 1 1
CARGO LEFT RIGHT
LAMP/ COURTESY COURTESY M2
SWITCH LAMP LAMP 20
(8W-44-7) 2 2 YL
M2 18BK/WT M2 18BK/WT
(8W-44-8) B C208 B C207
1 (8W-44-9)
M2 M2
UNDERHOOD 20 20
LAMP/ YL YL
MERCURY S201
SWITCH (8W-12-30)
3 C1
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
DOME
DELAY LAMP SWITCH
2 MODULE SWITCH (8W-50-2)
GROUND (8W-50-9) (8W-50-3)
Z1 (8W-50-10) (8W-50-4)
20 4 1 C2
BK Z1 Z1
18 18
S132 BK BK
(8W-15-4)
Z1 (8W-15-5) S207
14 (8W-15-6) (8W-15-16)
Z1
BK (8W-15-8)
14
(8W-15-9) BK
G106
(8W-15-7) G108
J998W-7 (8W-15-10) (8W-15-16) XJI04406
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12) FROM
POWER DOME
DISTRIBUTION FROM LAMPS
A23 SWITCH
CENTER COMPASS
FUSE (8W-10-6) FULL BASE
16 (8W-44-5)
OPTIONS
15A A
A24 (8W-10-28)
M2
20
M1 M1
YL
20 20
PK PK
12 C1 1 C3
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
4 C7 S18 C4 7 C7 S25 C4
M1 RHD LHD M2
20 20 M2
PK 6 C201 YL 20
YL
5 C314
C
LHD RHD S214
(8W-10-28) TO
M1 M1 M1 M1 S304
20 18 20 20 (8W-44-6)
PK PK PK PK (8W-44-8)
A C208 A C207 (8W-44-9)
M1 M1 LHD RHD
18 18
B
PK PK 46 C201
TO 1 1
CARGO LEFT RIGHT
LAMP/ COURTESY COURTESY
SWITCH LAMP LAMP
2 2
(8W-44-6) M2 18BK/WT M2 18BK/WT
(8W-44-8) B C208 B C207
1 (8W-44-9)
UNDERHOOD M2 M2 M2
LAMP/ 20 20 20
YL YL YL
MERCURY
SWITCH
S201
3 C1 (8W-12-30)
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
2 DOME
DELAY LAMP SWITCH
Z1 MODULE SWITCH (8W-50-4)
20 GROUND (8W-50-10)
BK
4 1 C2
S157 Z1 Z1
(8W-15-11) 18 18
Z1 BK BK
12
BK
S207
(8W-15-16)
Z1
S132 14
(8W-15-11) BK
G106 G108
(8W-15-12) (8W-15-16)
XJI04407 J998W-7
LHD
FROM FROM
JUNCTION JUNCTION
BLOCK BLOCK
(8W-44-6) (8W-44-6)
(8W-44-7) (8W-44-7)
(8W-44-9) (8W-44-9)
C B
S304
M2 M2 M2 M2 M2
20 20 20 20 20
YL YL YL YL YL
6 C314
1 C317 A C320 1 C318 A C319 B A

CARGO
M2 M2 M2 M2 LAMP/
18 18 18 18 SWITCH
YL YL YL YL
3 3
C
LEFT RIGHT
M4
REAR REAR 20
DOOR DOOR GY/BK
JAMB JAMB
SWITCH SWITCH 7 C314
2 2
3 C326
M4
20
GY/BK
1 1 5 C311
DRIVER PASSENGER 10 C310
Z1 Z1 M4
DOOR 18
DOOR 18 20
JAMB BK JAMB BK VT/YL
SWITCH SWITCH 3 1
(8W-39-6) (8W-39-6) LIFTGATE
3 3 SWITCH
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK 2
3 C317 B C320 2 C318 B C319 G78 Z1
20 20
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1 TN/BK BK
20 20 20 20
BK BK BK BK
S334
(8W-15-21)
TO Z1
S309 S310 INSTRUMENT 18
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19) BK
CLUSTER
(8W-40-15)
9 C310
6 C311
Z1 Z1
12 16 Z1
BK BK 18
BK
G302 G303 G304

(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19) (8W-15-21)
J998W-7 XJI04408
RHD
FROM FROM
JUNCTION JUNCTION
BLOCK BLOCK
(8W-44-6) (8W-44-6)
(8W-44-7) (8W-44-7)
(8W-44-8) (8W-44-8)
C B
S304
M2 M2 M2 M2 M2
20 20 20 20 20
YL YL YL YL YL
6 C314
1 C317 A C320 1 C318 A C319 B A

CARGO
M2 M2 M2 M2 LAMP/
18 18 18 18 SWITCH
YL YL YL YL
3 3
C
LEFT RIGHT
M4
REAR REAR 20
DOOR DOOR GY/BK
JAMB JAMB
SWITCH SWITCH 7 C314
2 2
3 C326
M4
20
1 1 GY/BK
Z1
PASSENGER 18 DRIVER 5 C311
DOOR BK DOOR
M4 C310
10
JAMB JAMB Z1 20
SWITCH SWITCH 18 VT/YL
(8W-39-7) (8W-39-7) BK 3 1
3 3 LIFTGATE
SWITCH
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
2
3 C317 B C320 2 C318 B C319 G78 Z1
20 20
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z1
TN/BK BK
20 20 20 20
BK BK BK BK S334
(8W-15-21)
S309 S310 TO Z1
(8W-15-18) (8W-15-20) 18
INSTRUMENT BK
CLUSTER
(8W-40-15)
9 C310
Z1
6 C311
12
Z1
Z1 BK
18
12 BK
BK
G302 G304
(8W-15-18) G303
(8W-15-20) (8W-15-21)
XJI04409 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 47 AUDIO SYSTEM 8W - 47 - 1
8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM

Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10 Left Front Door Speaker . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 6, 9, 10
Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4 Left Front Door Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 6
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10 Left Soundbar Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5, 6, 11
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Fuse 17 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10 Power Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4
Fuse 17 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4 Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4
Fuse 22 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4
Fuse 26 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4 Radio . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4 Right Front Door Speaker . . . . . . . 8W-47-7, 8, 9, 10
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10 Right Front Door Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-7, 8
G301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3 Right Soundbar Speaker . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-7, 8, 11
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-2, 3, 9, 10
8W - 47 - 2 8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM XJ
LHD 6 SPEAKER SYSTEM
BATT F34 (8W-10-26) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-27) (8W-10-12)
HEADLAMP POWER
SWITCH DIESEL GAS DISTRIBUTION
0 OFF A23
A11 A4
CENTER
1 PARK FUSE (8W-10-2)
0 2 3 4 2 HEAD 16 FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
1
3 DIM 15A 22 26
4 BRIGHT (8W-10-25) 20A 20A
(8W-50-2) A24
(8W-10-28) (8W-10-34) (8W-10-33)
(8W-50-4) A12 A3
9 C1 1 C1
E1
20 M1 M1 F75
TN 20 20 16
PK PK VT
42 C201 1
GAS DIESEL FUSED UNDERHOOD
L7 E1 B(+) LAMP/
18 20 S135 MERCURY
BK/YL TN (8W-10-25) SWITCH
(DIESEL)
(8W-44-7)
M2
20
PK
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
S1 C4 12 C1 (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
6 17 C4 C100
5A 15A
(8W-12-8) (8W-12-18)
F75
16
S2 C4 S18 C4 S9 C4 VT
E2 M1 X12
20 20 16
OR PK RD/WT
14 C200
S315 F75
43 (8W-12-8) 6 54 14
C201 VT
S206 M1
(8W-12-10) 20 S301
S215 PK
(8W-12-11)
(8W-12-8)
S214 F75 F75
16 16
ANTENNA (8W-10-25)
VT VT
L7 E2 M1 (8W-10-28) X12
18 20
(EXCEPT 20 16
BK/YL OR BUILT-UP PK RD/WT
1 C2 2 C2
EXPORT) FUSED FUSED POWER
4 C2 5 C2 7 C2 6 C2 B(+) B(+) AMPLIFIER
HEADLAMP PANEL FUSED FUSED RADIO
SWITCH LAMPS B(+) IGNITION
OUTPUT FEED SWITCH
OUTPUT GROUND GROUND
(RUN-ACC) 7 C2 8 C2
GROUND
Z5 Z5
16 16
Z9 BK/LB BK/LB
14
BK G301
(8W-15-17)
G108
J998W-7 (8W-15-16) XJI04702
XJ 8W-47 AUDIO SYSTEM 8W - 47 - 3
RHD 6 SPEAKER SYSTEM
BATT F34 (8W-10-26) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-27) (8W-10-12)
HEADLAMP POWER
SWITCH DIESEL GAS DISTRIBUTION
0 OFF A23
A11 A4
CENTER
1 PARK FUSE (8W-10-2)
0 2 3 4 2 HEAD 16 FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
1
3 DIM 15A 22 26
4 BRIGHT (8W-10-25) 20A 20A
(8W-50-3) A24
(8W-10-28) (8W-10-34) (8W-10-33)
(8W-50-4) A12 A3
9 C1 1 C1
L7 E1
18 20
BK/YL TN
M1 M1 F75
20 20 16
PK PK VT
1
GAS DIESEL FUSED UNDERHOOD
B(+) LAMP/
S135 MERCURY
(8W-10-25) SWITCH
(DIESEL)
M2 (8W-44-7)
20
PK RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
S1 C4 12 C1 (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK C4 C100
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
6 17
5A 15A F75
(8W-12-9) (8W-12-19) 16
VT
S2 C4 S18 C4 S9 C4 3 C204
E2 M1 X12 F75
20 20 16 16
OR PK RD/WT VT
S215 S301
S206 (8W-12-9) S214
(8W-12-10) (8W-10-25) F75 F75
(8W-12-11) (8W-10-28) 16 16
ANTENNA VT VT
L7 E2 M1
18 20
(EXCEPT 20
BK/YL OR BUILT-UP PK
1 C2 2 C2
EXPORT) FUSED FUSED POWER
4 C2 5 C2 7 C2 6 C2 B(+) B(+) AMPLIFIER
HEADLAMP PANEL FUSED FUSED RADIO
SWITCH LAMPS B(+) IGNITION
OUTPUT FEED SWITCH
OUTPUT GROUND GROUND
(RUN-ACC) 7 C2 8 C2
GROUND
Z5 Z5
16 16
Z9 BK/LB BK/LB
14
BK G301
(8W-15-18)
G108
XJI04703 (8W-15-16) J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
POWER
DIESEL GAS DISTRIBUTION
RADIO A4 A21
CENTER
(8W-10-2)
FUSE FUSE (8W-10-6)
26 17
RADIO
20A 20A
12V
(8W-10-36) (8W-10-27)
OUTPUT A3 A22
1 C1
X60
16
DG/RD
F34
18
TN/BK
S229
A18
E6 C100
X60 X60 F34
16 18 18
DG/RD DG/RD TN/BK
LHD RHD
S218
11 C200 9 C203 (8W-10-27)
X60 X60 (8W-10-36)
18 18 F34
DG/RD DG/RD 18
TN/BK
4 C1 C C1 B C1
POWER POWER
RADIO
12V AMPLIFIER ANTENNA
OUTPUT RELAY
1 UP
1 2 1 2 2 DOWN
A C1 C C2 B C2 A C2
Z1 X17 X14 X13

COMBINATION 18 18 18 18
FLASHER BK GY DG WT
(8W-52-3)
GROUND (8W-52-4) B C A
5 RHD LHD POWER
ANTENNA
M
Z1
20
BK ANTENNA
COAX
S208
(8W-15-15)
Z1
14 ANTENNA RADIO
BK COAX
RHD
G107 LHD
(8W-15-15)
J998W-7 XJI04704
RADIO
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT RADIO
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER 12V
(+) (-) (+) (-) OUTPUT
2 C1 6 C1 4 C1 2 C2 1 C1
EXCEPT
BUILT-UP-EXPORT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
X51 X57 X53 X55
16 16 16 16
BR/YL BR/LB DG BR/RD S229
(8W-47-4)
X60
16
DG/RD
6 7 1 2 11 C200
X51 X57 X53 X55 X60
18 18 18 18 18
BR/YL BR/LB DG BR/RD DG/RD
7 C1 8 C1 5 C1 1 C1 4 C1
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT RADIO POWER
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT 12V AMPLIFIER
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER OUTPUT
(+) (-) (+) (-)
AMPLIFIED AMPLIFIED
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
REAR REAR DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER
(+) (-) (+) (-)
6 C2 14 C2 4 C2 12 C2
X93 X91 X87 X85
18 18 18 18
WT/RD WT/BK LG/VT BR/RD
4 3 C314 2 1 C305
X93 X91 X87 X85

16 16 18 18
BR/YL BR/DB DG BR/RD
S330
X85 X85
18 18
BK/RD LG/RD
A 1 1
LEFT LEFT LEFT
SOUNDBAR FRONT FRONT
SPEAKER DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER TWEETER
B 2 2
X87 X87
18 18
DG LG/BK
S331
XJI04705 J998W-7
RADIO
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT RADIO
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER 12V
(+) (-) (+) (-) OUTPUT
2 C1 6 C1 4 C1 2 C2 1 C1
EXCEPT
BUILT-UP-EXPORT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
X51 X57 X53 X55

16 16 16 16
BR/YL BR/LB DG BR/RD
S229
(8W-47-4)
X60
16
DG/RD
7 3 5 9
1 C203
X51 X57 X53 X55 X60
18 18 18 18 18
BR/YL BR/LB DG BR/RD DG/RD
7 C1 8 C1 5 C1 1 C1 4 C1
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT RADIO POWER
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT 12V AMPLIFIER
SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER SPEAKER OUTPUT
(+) (-) (+) (-)
AMPLIFIED AMPLIFIED
LEFT LEFT LEFT LEFT
REAR REAR DOOR DOOR
(+) (-) (+) (-)
6 C2 14 C2 4 C2 12 C2
X93 X91 X87 X85

18 18 18 18
WT/RD WT/BK LG/VT BR/RD
4 3 C314 2 1 C305
X93 X91 X87 X85

16 16 18 18
BR/YL BR/DB DG BR/RD
S326
X85 X85
18 18
LG/RD LG/RD
A 1 1
LEFT LEFT LEFT
SPEAKER DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER TWEETER
B 2 2
X87 X87
18 18
LG/BK LG/BK
S327
J998W-7 XJI04706
RADIO
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT
(+) (-) (+) (-)
3 C1 7 C1 5 C1 3 C2
X52 X58 X54 X56
16 16 16 16
DB/WT DB/OR VT DB/RD
9 10 4 5 C200
X52 X58 X54 X56

18 18 18 18
9 C1 3 C1 6 C1 2 C1
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT POWER
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT AMPLIFIER
(+) (-) (+) (-)
AMPLIFIED AMPLIFIED
REAR REAR DOOR DOOR
(+) (-) (+) (-)
5 C2 13 C2 11 C2 10 C2
X94 X92 X82 X80

18 18 18 18
TN/RD TN/BK LB/RD LB/BK
2 1 5 4
C314 C303
X94 X92 X82 X80

16 16 18 18
S320
X80 X80
18 18
LB/BR LB/BR
A 1 1
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT
SPEAKER DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER TWEETER
B 2 2
X82 X82
18 18
LB/RD LB/RD
S321
XJI04707 J998W-7
RADIO
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT
(+) (-) (+) (-)
3 C1 7 C1 5 C1 3 C2
X52 X58 X54 X56
16 16 16 16
8 4 6
2 C203
X52 X58 X54 X56

18 18 18 18
9 C1 3 C1 6 C1 2 C1
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT POWER
REAR REAR FRONT FRONT AMPLIFIER
(+) (-) (+) (-)
AMPLIFIED AMPLIFIED
REAR REAR DOOR DOOR
(+) (-) (+) (-)
5 C2 13 C2 11 C2 10 C2
X94 X92 X82 X80

18 18 18 18
2 1 C314 3 2
C324
X94 X92 X82 X80

16 16 18 18
S320
X80 X80
18 18
LB/BR LB/BR
A 1 1
RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT
SPEAKER DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER TWEETER
B 2 2
X82 X82
18 18
LB/RD LB/RD
S321
J998W-7 XJI04708
BATT F34 (8W-10-26)
(8W-10-27) E1
HEADLAMP 20
SWITCH TN
0 OFF
1 PARK 42 C201
0 2 3 4 2 HEAD
1 E1
3 DIM
20
4 BRIGHT
TN
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-4)
9 C1 1 C1
BATT M1 (8W-10-25) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)

(8W-10-28) (8W-10-15) S1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
L7 17 6
18 15A 5A
BK/YL (8W-12-18) (8W-12-8)
S18 C4 S9 C4 S2 C4
M1 X12 E2
S206 20 16 20
(8W-12-10) PK RD/WT OR
(8W-12-11)
S315
(8W-12-8)
6 54 43
C201
L7 M1 E2
18 20 20
BK/YL PK OR
S214 ANTENNA S215

(8W-10-25) (8W-12-8)
M1 (8W-10-28) X12 (EXCEPT E2
20 16 BUILT-UP 20
PK RD/WT EXPORT) OR
4 C2 7 C2 6 C2 5 C2
HEADLAMP FUSED FUSED PANEL RADIO
SWITCH B(+) IGNITION LAMPS
OUTPUT SWITCH FEED
LEFT LEFT OUTPUT RIGHT RIGHT
FRONT FRONT (RUN-ACC) FRONT FRONT
(+) (-) (+) (-) GROUND
4 C1 2 C2 5 C1 3 C2
X53 X55 X54 X56
16 16 16 16 Z9
DG BR/RD VT DB/RD 14
BK
1 2 4 5 C200
X53 X55 X54 X56 G108
18 18 18 18
(8W-15-16)
DG BR/RD VT DB/RD
1 2 C305 4 5 C303
X53 1 X54 1
18 18
DG
LEFT VT
RIGHT
FRONT FRONT
DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER SPEAKER
2 2
XJI04709 J998W-7
BATT F34 (8W-10-26)
(8W-10-27)
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
0 OFF
1 PARK
0 1 2 3 4 2 HEAD
3 DIM
4 BRIGHT
(8W-50-3)
(8W-50-4)
9 C1 1 C1
L7
18
BK/YL
S206 E1
(8W-12-10) 20
(8W-12-11) TN
BATT M1 (8W-10-25) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-28) (8W-10-15) S1 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE
17 6
15A 5A
(8W-12-19) (8W-12-9)
S18 C4 S9 C4 S2 C4
L7 M1 X12 E2
18 20 16 20
BK/YL PK RD/WT OR
S214 S215 ANTENNA

(8W-10-25) (8W-12-9)
M1 (8W-10-28) E2 (EXCEPT
20 20 BUILT-UP
PK OR EXPORT)
4 C2 7 C2 6 C2 5 C2
HEADLAMP FUSED FUSED PANEL RADIO
SWITCH B(+) IGNITION LAMPS
OUTPUT SWITCH FEED
RIGHT RIGHT OUTPUT LEFT LEFT
FRONT FRONT (RUN-ACC) FRONT FRONT
(+) (-) (+) (-) GROUND
5 C1 3 C2 4 C1 2 C2
X54 X56 X53 X55
16 16 16 16 Z9
VT DB/RD DG BR/RD 14
6 3 5 BK
4 C203
X54 X56 X53 X55
18 18 18 18
VT DB/RD DG BR/RD G108
(8W-15-16)
2 3 C324 1 2 C305
X54 X53
18 1 18 1
VT RIGHT DG LEFT
FRONT FRONT
DOOR DOOR
SPEAKER SPEAKER
2 2
J998W-7 XJI04710
4 SPEAKER SYSTEM
RADIO
LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT

REAR REAR REAR REAR
SPEAKER(+) SPEAKER(-) SPEAKER(+) SPEAKER(-)
2 C1 6 C1 3 C1 7 C1
X51 X57 X52 X58

16 16 16 16
BR/YL BR/LB DB/WT DB/OR
LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD
6 C200 1 C203 7 C200 7 C203 9 C200 2 C203 10 C200 8 C203
X51 X57 X52 X58

18 18 18 18
3 4 1 2 C314
X51 X57 X52 X58

18 18 18 18
A A
LEFT RIGHT
SOUNDBAR SOUNDBAR
SPEAKER SPEAKER
B B
XJI04711 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 8W - 48 - 1
8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER

Driver Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
Fuse 12 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
Fuse 14 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3 Passenger Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3 Rear Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3 Rear Window Defogger Relay . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-3 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-48-2, 3
8W - 48 - 2 8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER XJ
LHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A4 (8W-10-22)
(8W-10-23)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
12
10A
(8W-12-16)
86 30
REAR
WINDOW FUSE
DEFOGGER 14
RELAY 10A
(8W-12-16)
85 87
S26 C4 S19 C4 3 C9 1 C6
C81 2 C201 C16 C15
20 20 12
C16
LB/WT BK/WT BK/WT
20
17 C201 LB/YL 5 4 C326
3 C2 PASSENGER
S202 POWER 2 C312
REAR WINDOW INSTRUMENT (8W-12-16) 3 C310
DEFOGGER CLUSTER MIRROR
37 C200 C15
RELAY CONTROL (8W-40-12)
11 C305 12
REAR WINDOW FULL POWER 6 BK/WT
DEFOGGER OPTIONS MIRRORS POWER FULL
SWITCH SENSE MIRRORS OPTIONS
4 C2 C16 C16 C16 REAR
20 20 20 Z1
C80 LB/YL BK/WT 18
WINDOW
LB/YL Z1
20 BK DEFOGGER
DB/WT 18
5
BK S319
4 2 3 DRIVER
(8W-15-13)
REAR POWER Z1
WINDOW MIRROR 16
DEFOGGER BK
SWITCH 6
DEFOGGER
SWITCH ON
FULL POWER 11 C9
ILLUM. OPTIONS MIRRORS JUNCTION
INDICATOR
BLOCK Z1
Z1 Z1 (8W-12-2) 12
16 18 S5 C4 BK
1 BK BK Z1 2 C310
Z1 14
20 BK
1 C312
BK
S314 Z1
S208 S329 12
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-13)
(8W-15-14) BK
Z1 Z1 14 C201
(8W-15-15)
14 12
BK BK S208
(8W-15-14) G304
G107 3 C307 Z1 (8W-15-15) (8W-15-21)
(8W-15-14) 14
S309 BK
(8W-15-15)
(8W-15-17)
G302 G107
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-14)
J998W-7 XJI04802
(8W-15-15)
XJ 8W-48 REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER 8W - 48 - 3
RHD
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A4 (8W-10-22)
(8W-10-23)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
12
10A
(8W-12-17)
FUSE
86 30
14
REAR
10A
WINDOW
(8W-12-17)
DEFOGGER
RELAY
85 87
S26 C4 5 C5 S19 C4 3 C9 1 C6
C16 20BK/WT
22 C204
C81 C16 C15
20 C16 20 12
LB/WT 20 BK/WT BK/WT
LB/YL
11 C305 5 4 C326
3 C2 FULL POWER DRIVER 2 C312
REAR WINDOW INSTRUMENT OPTIONS MIRRORS POWER 3 C310
DEFOGGER CLUSTER MIRROR
TIMER (8W-40-12) C16 C16
20 20 REAR
REAR WINDOW LB/YL BK/WT
6
WINDOW
C16
DEFOGGER
20 DEFOGGER
SWITCH SENSE 5 Z1
LB/YL
4 C2 PASSENGER 18
POWER BK
POWER FULL
C80 MIRROR MIRRORS OPTIONS
20
DB/WT 6
Z1 S360 S319 Z1
16 (8W-15-13) (8W-15-20) 12
FULL BK POWER Z1 Z1 BK
OPTIONS MIRRORS 16 14
BK BK
S325 Z1
(8W-15-18) 11 C9 2 C310
16
Z1
BK
JUNCTION 1 C312
12 BLOCK 5 C303
BK (8W-12-2) Z1
2 4 3 14
REAR S5 C4 BK Z1
WINDOW 12
Z1
DEFOGGER S310 BK
SWITCH DEFOGGER 14
ON BK (8W-15-20)
ILLUM. INDICATOR SWITCH Z1
12
BK
3 C307 G304
1
Z1 20BK
S208 G303 (8W-15-21)
S208 S309 (8W-15-20)
(8W-15-18) (8W-15-14)
(8W-15-14) Z1 (8W-15-15)
Z1 Z1
(8W-15-15) 14
14 12
BK BK BK
G107 G107
G302 (8W-15-14)
(8W-15-14) (8W-15-18)
XJI04803 (8W-15-15) (8W-15-15) J998W-7
XJ 8W - 49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE 8W - 49 - 1
8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE

Ambient Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . 8W-49-4, 5 G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Horn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4, 5
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-6 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4, 5
Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-4, 5 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . 8W-49-4, 5
Fuse 16 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . 8W-49-2, 3
8W - 49 - 2 8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE XJ
LHD
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-12)
POWER JUNCTION
A23 DISTRIBUTION FUSE
BLOCK
FUSE CENTER 9 (8W-12-2)
16 (8W-10-2) 10A
15A (8W-10-6) (8W-12-12)
(8W-10-25)
A24
(8W-10-28) S13 C4
DIESEL GAS
F87
M1 M1 20
20 S135 20 WT/BK
PK (8W-10-25) PK
S225
1 (8W-12-12)
12 C1 FUSED UNDERHOOD
JUNCTION (B+) LAMP/ F87
BLOCK MERCURY 20
(8W-12-2) WT/BK
SWITCH
3 C3 (DIESEL)
(8W-44-7) 6 C301
OTHERS SKIM
F87
20
S361 WT/BK
(8W-10-26) M1
(8W-10-27) 20
PK
S347 2 6
(8W-10-26)
M1 FUSED FUSED COMPASS
(8W-10-27)
20 (8W-10-28) B(+) IGNITION (FULL
PK SWITCH OPTIONS)
OUTPUT
2 (ST-RUN)
FUSED OVERHEAD GROUND GROUND
B(+) MODULE
1 12
Z1 Z2
20 20
GROUND GROUND BK BK/LG
9 3 S342
Z1 Z1 (8W-15-13) 5 C301
20 20
BK BK
2 C3
JUNCTION Z2
BLOCK 20
(8W-12-2) BK/LG
S5 C4
Z1 58 C201
14
BK
S314 Z2
20
(8W-15-13)
BK/LG
14 C201
S208
(8W-15-14) G108
(8W-15-15) (8W-15-16)
G107
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
J998W-7 XJI04902
XJ 8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE 8W - 49 - 3
RHD
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-12)
POWER JUNCTION
A23 DISTRIBUTION FUSE
BLOCK
FUSE CENTER 9 (8W-12-2)
16 (8W-10-2) 10A
15A (8W-10-6) (8W-12-13)
(8W-10-25)
A24
(8W-10-28) S13 C4
DIESEL GAS
F87
20
M1 M1
S135 WT/BK
20 20
PK (8W-10-25) PK
S216
(8W-12-13)
12 C1 1
JUNCTION UNDERHOOD F87
FUSED 20
BLOCK B(+) LAMP/
(8W-12-2) WT/BK
MERCURY
3 C3 SWITCH
OTHERS SKIM (DIESEL)
(8W-44-7)
S361
(8W-10-26) 6 C301
(8W-10-27)
M1 F87
20 20
PK WT/BK
S347
(8W-10-26) 2 6
M1 (8W-10-27) COURTESY FUSED COMPASS
20 (8W-10-28) LAMPS IGNITION
PK FEED SWITCH
OUTPUT
2 (ST-RUN)
COURTESY OVERHEAD GROUND GROUND
LAMPS MODULE
FEED 1 12
Z1
20
GROUND GROUND BK
Z2
9 3 S342 20
Z1 Z1 (8W-15-13) BK/LG
20 20
BK BK
2 C3
JUNCTION
BLOCK 5 C301
(8W-12-2)
S5 C4
Z1
14
BK
S208 Z2
(8W-15-14) 20
Z1 (8W-15-15) BK/LG
14
BK
G107
(8W-15-14) G108
(8W-15-15) (8W-15-16)
XJI04903 J998W-7
LHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION AMBIENT
86 AMBIENT
HORN
BLOCK TEMPERATURE AIR
RELAY (8W-12-2) SENSOR SENSOR TEMPERATURE
(8W-41-2) SIGNAL GROUND SENSOR
1 2
85 G31 G32
20 20
VT/LG BK/LB
1 C5 F14 F15
X3 PASSENGER C100
DOOR
20 DOOR UNLOCK
POWER
G31 G32
BK/RD LOCK RELAY LOCK/ 20 20
CONTROL CONTROL WINDOW VT/LG BK/LB
1 C2 2 C2 SWITCH
(8W-61-2)
P59 P55
20 20
LB/RD DB/PK 32 35 C201
4 3 C300
P59 P55 G31 G32
20 20 20 20
LB/RD DB/PK VT/LG BK/LB
C301
7 9 8 C301 4 3
X3 P59 P55 G31 G32
20 20 20 20 20
BK/RD LB/RD DB VT/LG BK/LB
10 11 5 4 10
HORN DOOR DOOR OVERHEAD AMBIENT SENSOR COMPASS
RELAY LOCK UNLOCK MODULE TEMPERATURE GROUND
CONTROL CONTROL RELAY SENSOR
SENSE COURTESY CONTROL SIGNAL COURTESY
LAMP LAMP
CONTROL CONTROL
1 7
M2 M2
20 20
YL YL
S345
(8W-12-30)
1 C3
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
7 C7
M2
20
YL
S304
M2 20YL (8W-12-30)
1 C317
M2
18
YL
1
COURTESY DRIVER
LAMPS DOOR
DRIVER JAMB
SWITCH
(8W-39-6)
J998W-7 XJI04904
XJ 8W-49 OVERHEAD CONSOLE 8W - 49 - 5
RHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION AMBIENT
86 AMBIENT AMBIENT
HORN
BLOCK TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE AIR
RELAY (8W-12-2) SENSOR SENSOR TEMPERATURE
(8W-41-3) SIGNAL GROUND SENSOR
1 2
85 G31 G32
20 20
VT/LG BK/LB
S22 C4
X3 PASSENGER
DOOR
20 DOOR UNLOCK
POWER
F14 F15
BK/RD LOCK RELAY LOCK/ C100
CONTROL CONTROL WINDOW
1 C2 2 C2 SWITCH
(8W-61-3) G31 G32
P59 P55
20 20 20 20
LB/RD DB VT/LG BK/LB
3 12 C305
P59 P55 C301

20 20 4 3
LB/RD DB/PK
21 22 C203
P59 P55 G31 G32
20 20 20 20
LB/RD DB/PK VT/LG BK/LB
7 9 8 C301
X3 P59 P55
20 20 20
BK/RD LB/RD DB
10 11 5 4 10
HORN DOOR DOOR OVERHEAD AMBIENT AMBIENT COMPASS
RELAY LOCK UNLOCK MODULE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL CONTROL RELAY SENSOR SENSOR
SENSE COURTESY CONTROL SIGNAL COURTESY RETURN
LAMP LAMP
CONTROL CONTROL
1 7
M2 M2
20 20
YL YL
S345
(8W-12-30)
M2
20
YL
1 C3 1 C318
JUNCTION
M2
BLOCK 18
(8W-12-2) YL
7 C7 1
M2 M2 COURTESY DRIVER
20 20 LAMPS DOOR
YL YL DRIVER JAMB
S304 SWITCH
(8W-39-7)
(8W-12-30)
XJI04905 J998W-7
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18)
3 11
D1 D2
18 18
VT/BR TWISTED WT/BK
PAIR
S239 S238
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
(8W-30-18) (8W-30-18)
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
LHD RHD LHD RHD
55 C201 56 C201
D1 TWISTED D2
20 PAIR 20
VT/BR WT/BK
1 2 C301
D1 D2
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
OTHER COMPASS COMPASS OTHER
S344 S346
(8W-30-17) (8W-30-17)
D1 (8W-30-18) D2 (8W-30-18)
20 20
VT/BR WT/BK
5 11
CCD CCD COMPASS
BUS BUS
(+) (-)
D1 D2
20 TWISTED 20
VT/BR PAIR WT/BK
6 12
CCD CCD OVERHEAD
BUS BUS MODULE
(+) (-)
J998W-7 XJI04906
XJ 8W - 50 FRONT LIGHTING 8W - 50 - 1
8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING

Controller Anti-Lock Brake Relay . . . . . . . 8W-50-18 Headlamp Switch . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2 14, 15, 16, 17, 18
Daytime Running Lamp Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 16, 19
Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 5, 9, 16, 19 Junction Block . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13,
Diode Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 17 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20
Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-12, 17, 18 Left City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-12, 17, 18
Fog Lamp Relay No. 1 . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 11, 15, 16 Left Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-15, 16, 17, 18
Fog Lamp Relay No. 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-16, 19 Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . 8W-50-11
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . 8W-50-15, 16, 17, 18 Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . 8W-50-11
Fuse 3 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 19 Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . 8W-50-12
Fuse 4 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 20 Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . 8W-50-12
Fuse 5 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 20 Left Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 20
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4 Left Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-20
Fuse 7 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11, 12, 15, 16, 17, 18 Left Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-12
Fuse 7 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 19 Left Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11
Fuse 8 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4, 10 Power Distribution Center . 8W-50-2, 3, 4, 9, 10, 15,
Fuse 9 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-9, 10 16, 17, 18, 19
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-19 Right City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-14
Fuse 16 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 19 Right Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-15, 16, 17, 18
Fuse 17 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1. 8W-50-13
Fuse 23 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-13, 14 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2. 8W-50-13
Fuse 26 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . 8W-50-14
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, 14, Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . 8W-50-14
15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20 Right Headlamp . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 19, 20
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-16, 20 Right Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . 8W-50-20
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4, 9, 10 Right Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-14
Headlamp Beam Select Switch . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8, 9, Right Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-13
10, 20 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . 8W-50-11, 12, 13, 14
Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . 8W-50-2, 3, 4, 9, 10 Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-19
Headlamp Leveling Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-50-7, 8, 20
8W - 50 - 2 8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING XJ
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A21 13 DISTRIBUTION A3
FUSE FUSE CENTER 14
17 7 (8W-10-2) RD/WT
20A 30A 6
HEADLAMP A22 (8W-10-26) 6 (8W-10-21) FUSED DAYTIME
DELAY B(+) RUNNING
MODULE LAMP
GROUND (8W-50-9) F34 A3
MODULE
4 18 14 (8W-50-19)
TN/BK RD/WT
Z1
TO E6 D1
18 C100
BK FUSE
FROM 6 (JB) DATA A3 FROM
S201 (8W-12-8) LINK 14 S210
(8W-12-30) CONNECTOR RD/WT (8W-10-16)
(8W-30-16) 2
42 C201 16 FUSED HEADLAMP
F34 F34 A3 B(+) DELAY
M2 E1 18 18 14 MODULE G26
20 20 TN/BK TN/BK RD/WT (8W-50-9) 20
YL TN LB
3 C1 1 C1 4 C1 8 C1 5 C1
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
0 OFF
1 PARK
2 HEAD
3 DOME
4 DIM
0 3 4 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
5 BRIGHT
1 C2 9 C1 2 C1 7 C1 6 C1
L7 L2 G16
18 L2 14 L20 20
BK/YL 14 LG 14 BK/LB
LG LG/WT
6
HEAD HEADLAMP
TO LAMP DELAY TO
Z1 SWITCH MODULE
18 S206 S200
OUTPUT (8W-50-9)
BK (8W-12-10) (8W-10-16)
S207
(8W-15-16)
A B
TO TO
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
Z1 BEAM BEAM
14 SELECT SELECT
BK SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-50-5) (8W-50-5)
G108
(8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI05002
XJ 8W-50 FRONT LIGHTING 8W - 50 - 3
RHD EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
POWER
A21 13 DISTRIBUTION
FUSE FUSE CENTER
17 7 (8W-10-2)
20A 30A
HEADLAMP A22 (8W-10-26) 6 (8W-10-21)
DELAY
MODULE
GROUND (8W-50-9) F34 A3
4 18 14
TN/BK RD/WT
A18 D1
C100
Z1 F34
18 TO 18
BK TN/BK A3
FROM FUSE FROM
S201 14 S210
6 (JB) RD/WT
(8W-12-30) (8W-12-9) S218 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-26) 2
FUSED HEADLAMP
F34 A3 B(+) DELAY
M2 E1 18 14 MODULE G26
20 20 TN/BK RD/WT (8W-50-9) 20
YL TN LB
3 C1 1 C1 4 C1 8 C1 5 C1
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
0 OFF
1 PARK
2 HEAD
3 DOME
4 DIM
0 3 4 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
5 BRIGHT
1 C2 9 C1 2 C1 7 C1 6 C1
L7 L2 G16
18 L2 14 L20 20
BK/YL 14 LG 14 BK/LB
Z1 LG LG/WT
18 6
BK HEAD- HEADLAMP
TO LAMP DELAY TO
S206 SWITCH MODULE S200
OUTPUT (8W-50-9)
(8W-12-10) (8W-10-16)
S207
(8W-15-16)
C D
Z1
14
TO TO
BK
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
BEAM BEAM
G108 SELECT SELECT
(8W-15-16) SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-50-6) (8W-50-6)
XJI05003 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
(8W-10-12)
POWER
DIESEL GAS DIESEL GAS DISTRIBUTION
A4 A21 14 13
CENTER
(8W-10-2)
26 17 8 7
HEADLAMP 20A 20A 30A 30A
DELAY A3 (8W-10-36) A22 (8W-10-27) 7 (8W-10-22) 6 (8W-10-21)
MODULE
GROUND (8W-50-10)
4
F34 A3
18 14
TN/BK RD/WT
Z1 TO
18 FUSE A18 D1
BK FROM 6 (JB) E6 C100 A3
S201 14
(8W-12-8)
(8W-12-30) S218 RD/WT FROM
(8W-12-9)
(8W-10-27) 2 S210
(8W-10-36) HEADLAMP (8W-10-16)
FUSED
F34 A3 B(+) DELAY
M2 E1 18 14 MODULE G26
20 20 TN/BK RD/WT (8W-50-10) 20
YL TN LB
3 C1 1 C1 4 C1 8 C1 5 C1
HEADLAMP
SWITCH
0 OFF
1 PARK
2 HEAD
3 DOME
4 DIM
0 3 4 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 0 1 2
5 BRIGHT
1 C2 9 C1 2 C1 7 C1 6 C1
Z1 L7 L2 G16
18 18 14 20
BK BK/YL LG BK/LB
S207 S226
(8W-15-16)
L2 L2 L2 L20
16 14 14 14
LG LG LG LG/WT
6
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
TO TO
SWITCH DELAY
S206 OUTPUT S200
(8W-12-11)
MODULE (8W-10-16)
(8W-50-10)
Z1 E F
14 1
BK DIODE TO TO
MODULE HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
(8W-51-8) BEAM BEAM
G108 (8W-51-9) SELECT SELECT
(8W-15-16) SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-50-7) (8W-50-7) RHD
(8W-50-8) (8W-50-8) LHD
J998W-7 XJI05004
FROM INSTRUMENT DAYTIME
DIMMER
HEADLAMP FROM HIGH CLUSTER SWITCH RUNNING
DELAY HEADLAMP BEAM (8W-40-14) HIGH LAMP
MODULE SWITCH INDICATOR BEAM MODULE
DRIVER OUTPUT
(8W-50-2) (8W-50-2) (8W-50-19)
A B
5 C1 1
G34
16
2 4
RD/GY L3
HEADLAMP D4 C100 16
BEAM RD
SELECT G34
SWITCH 16
1 2 3 1 2 3 RD/GY
1 FLASH
2 LOW
3 HIGH OTHER DRL
1 3
D3 C100
L4 L3 L3
16 16 16
VT/WT RD/OR RD/OR
S213
22 16 C201
L4 L3
16 16
VT/WT RD/OR
S3 C4 S7 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
4 3 5 16
10A 10A 10A 10A
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-6) (8W-12-7) (8W-12-6)
10 C1 9 C1 FROM 1 C1 11 C1
L43 L33 FOG L44 L34
20 20 20 20
VT RD LAMP VT/RD RD/OR
9 2 RELAY
C106 S133
NO. 1
L33 (8W-12-7)
(IN PDC) L44
18 20
L43 (8W-50-15)
RD VT/RD
18
VT 13 6
L35 C106
20 L44 L44 L34
BR/WT 18 18 18
L33 20RD VT/RD VT/RD RD/OR
B A 12 C106 B A
LEFT RIGHT
10
HEADLAMP HEADLAMP
FUSED DAYTIME
C C
RIGHT RUNNING
S103 LOW LAMP S102
(8W-15-7) BEAM (8W-15-7)
Z1 OUTPUT
MODULE Z1
18 (8W-50-19) 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-7)
XJI05005 J998W-7
RHD EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM
HEADLAMP FROM
DELAY HEADLAMP
MODULE SWITCH
(8W-50-3) (8W-50-3)
C D
2 4
HEADLAMP
BEAM INSTRUMENT
DIMMER
SELECT SWITCH CLUSTER
HIGH (8W-40-14)
1 3 1 3
SWITCH
2 2 1 FLASH BEAM
2 LOW OUTPUT
1 3 3 HIGH 5 C1
L4 L3 L3
16 16 16
VT/WT RD/OR RD/OR
S213
L3
16
RD/OR
S3 C4 S7 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
4 3 5 16
10A 10A 10A 10A
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-6) (8W-12-7) (8W-12-6)
10 C1 9 C1 FROM 1 C1 11 C1
L43 L33 FOG L44 L34
20 20 20 20
VT RD LAMP VT/RD RD/OR
9 2 RELAY
C106 S133
NO. 1
13 (8W-12-7) 6
(IN PDC) C106
L43 L33 (8W-50-15) L44 L44 L34
18 18 20 18 18
VT RD VT/RD VT/RD RD/OR
L35 B12 C100 B A
20 NOT
BR/WT USED
RIGHT
L33 20RD HEADLAMP
B A C
12 C106
LEFT Z1
HEADLAMP 18
BK
C
S103 S102
(8W-15-7) (8W-15-7)
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-7)
J998W-7 XJI05006
LHD BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM INSTRUMENT
FROM HEADLAMP HIGH CLUSTER
S226 SWITCH BEAM (8W-40-14)
(8W-50-4) (8W-50-4) INDICATOR
DRIVER
E F 5 C1
2 4 G34
16
HEADLAMP RD/GY
BEAM
D4 C100
SELECT
SWITCH G34
1 2 3 1 2 3 16
1 FLASH
2 LOW RD/GY
1 3 3 HIGH D3 C100
L4 L3 L3
16 16 16
VT/WT RD/OR RD/OR
S213
22 16 C201
L4 L3
16 16
VT/WT RD/OR
S3 C4 S7 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
4 3 5 16
10A 10A 10A 10A
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-6) (8W-12-7) (8W-12-6)
10 C1 9 C1 1 C1 11 C1
L43 L33 S133 L34
20 20 20
(8W-12-7)
VT RD L44 RD/OR
20
9 2 VT/RD
C106
13 6
L43 C106
18 L44
VT 18
VT/RD
L33 L44 L34
S233 18 20 S236 18
(8W-12-7) RD VT/RD (8W-12-7) RD/OR
B A B A
F6 C100
LEFT RIGHT
HEADLAMP L44 HEADLAMP
C 20 C
VT/RD
Z1 Z1
18 18
4
BK BK
FUSED HEADLAMP
S103 RIGHT LEVELING S102
(8W-15-10) LOW SWITCH (8W-15-10)
Z1 (8W-15-12) BEAM (8W-50-20) Z1 (8W-15-12)
18 OUTPUT 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-10)
XJI05007 J998W-7
(8W-15-12)
RHD BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM
FROM HEADLAMP
S226 SWITCH
(8W-50-4) (8W-50-4)
E F DIMMER INSTRUMENT
SWITCH CLUSTER
2 4 HIGH (8W-40-14)
HEADLAMP BEAM
BEAM OUTPUT
SELECT 5 C1
1 3 1 3
SWITCH
2 2 1 FLASH L3
2 LOW 16
3 HIGH RD/OR
1 3
L4 L3
16 16
VT/WT RD/OR
S213
L3
16
RD/OR
S3 C4 S7 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
4 3 5 16
10A 10A 10A 10A
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-6) (8W-12-7) (8W-12-6)
10 C1 9 C1 1 C1 11 C1
L43 L33 S133 L34
20 20 20
(8W-12-7)
VT RD L44 RD/OR
20
9 2 VT/RD
C106
13 6
C106
L43 L44
18 18
VT VT/RD
L33 L44 L34
S233 18 20 S236 18
(8W-12-7) RD VT/RD (8W-12-7) RD/OR
B A B A
B12 C100
LEFT RIGHT
HEADLAMP L44 HEADLAMP
C 20 C
VT/RD
Z1 Z1
18 18
4
BK BK
FUSED HEADLAMP
S103 RIGHT LEVELING S102
(8W-15-10) LOW SWITCH (8W-15-10)
Z1 (8W-15-12) BEAM (8W-50-20) Z1 (8W-15-12)
18 OUTPUT 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 18
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-10)
J998W-7 XJI05008
(8W-15-12)
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
POWER JUNCTION
13 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
FUSE CENTER FUSE (8W-12-2)
7 (8W-10-2) 9
30A 10A
(8W-10-21) (8W-12-12)
6
(8W-12-13)
S13 C4
F87
A3 A3 20
14 14 WT/BK
RD/WT RD/WT
LHD RHD
D1 C100 6
FUSED DAYTIME BASE FULL OPTIONS
B(+) RUNNING
A3 LAMP
F87
14 MODULE 20 S225
RD/WT (8W-50-19) WT/BK (8W-12-12)
5 C201
F87
8 C1 20
HEADLAMP WT/BK
FUSED
B(+) SWITCH
(8W-50-2) A3 S216
(8W-50-3) 14 (8W-12-12)
HEADLAMP RD/WT (8W-12-13)
SWITCH
OUTPUT 2 8
2 C1 HEADLAMP
DELAY
L2 MODULE
14 FUSED FUSED
LG B(+) IGNITION
SWITCH
OUTPUT
(ST-RUN)
HEADLAMP
TIMER GROUND
HEADLAMP
6 4
SWITCH
(8W-50-2)
L2 Z1 (8W-50-3)
14 18 GROUND
LG BK 1 C2
2 Z1
18
HEAD- HEADLAMP BK
LAMP BEAM
SWITCH SELECT
OUTPUT
S207
SWITCH (8W-15-16)
(8W-50-5) Z1
(8W-50-6) 14
BK
G108
(8W-15-16)
XJI05009 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
(8W-10-12)
POWER JUNCTION
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
GAS DIESEL
CENTER FUSE (8W-12-2)
(8W-10-2) 9
13 14 (8W-10-6) 10A
FUSE FUSE (8W-12-12)
7 8 (8W-12-13)
30A 30A S13 C4
6 (8W-10-21) (8W-10-22)
7 F87
20
WT/BK
LHD RHD
A3 BASE FULL OPTIONS

14
RD/WT
S225
D1 C100 F87 (8W-12-12)
20 F87
WT/BK 20
A3 WT/BK F87
14 20
RD/WT WT/BK
5 C201
8 C1
FUSED HEADLAMP S216
B(+) SWITCH (8W-12-12)
(8W-50-4) A3 F87 (8W-12-13)
14 20
HEADLAMP RD/WT WT/BK
SWITCH
OUTPUT 2 8
2 C1 HEADLAMP
DELAY
L2 MODULE
14 FUSED FUSED
LG B(+) IGNITION
SWITCH
OUTPUT
(ST-RUN)
HEADLAMP
TIMER GROUND
HEADLAMP
6 4
SWITCH
L2 (8W-50-4)
Z1
14 18 GROUND
LG BK 1 C2
S226 Z1
18
(8W-50-4)
L2 BK
14
LG S207
(8W-15-16)
2 Z1
HEAD- HEADLAMP 14
LAMP BEAM BK
SWITCH SELECT
OUTPUT G108
SWITCH
(8W-50-7) (8W-15-16)
J998W-7 XJI05010
(8W-50-8)
BATT F34 (8W-10-26)
TURN
HEADLAMP LEFT SIGNAL/
SWITCH TURN HAZARD
1 PARK SIGNAL SWITCH
2 HEAD (PART OF
0 2 0 OFF 10
1 MULTI-
(8W-50-2) L61 FUNCTION
(8W-50-3) 20 SWITCH)
9 C1 LG/WT
(8W-52-2)
L7
18 S209
BK/YL (8W-52-5)
L61
S206 20
(8W-12-10) LG/WT
L7 B10 C100
18 F4
BK/YL L61
20
LHD RHD
LG/WT
45 C201 3 C106
L61
20
LG
L7
18
BK/YL
S105
M3 C4 L61
20
JUNCTION LG
BLOCK
2 LEFT
(8W-12-2)
FUSE SIDE
7
10A
MARKER
(8W-12-10) 1 LAMP
L61
L77 18
20 LG
6 C2 BR
S104
(8W-12-10)
L77 L61 L77
L77 L77 18 18
20 BR LG
LEFT 18
20 BR
BR/YL BR FRONT LEFT
2 3
PARK/ 2 3 FRONT
7 C106 TURN PARK/
SIGNAL TURN
1 LAMP 1 SIGNAL
Z1 NO. 1 Z1 LAMP
18 18 NO. 2
L77
BK BK
20
BR/YL S158
(8W-15-7)
B10 S103
(8W-15-7)
FOG Z1
LAMP 18
RELAY BK
NO. 1 11 C106
(IN PDC)
(8W-50-15) Z1
20
RHD BK/WT
LHD
XJI05011 G106 J998W-7
(8W-15-7)
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT F34 (8W-10-27)
(8W-10-36) TURN
LEFT SIGNAL/
HEADLAMP
TURN HAZARD
SWITCH SIGNAL SWITCH
1 PARK
10 (8W-52-3)
2 2 HEAD
0 1 (8W-52-4)
0 OFF L61
(8W-50-4) 20
9 C1 LG/WT
L7
18
BK/YL S209
(8W-52-6)
S206 L61
(8W-12-11) 20
L7 LG/WT
18
B10
BK/YL C100
F4
LHD RHD L61
20
45 C201 LG/WT
3 C106
L7 L61
18 20
BK/YL LG
M3 C4
JUNCTION S105
BLOCK
(8W-12-2) L61
FUSE 18
7 LG
10A 1 C114
(8W-12-11)
L61 L61 L61
18 18 18
6 C2 LG LG LG
2 LEFT 2 LEFT 1
GAS DIESEL
FRONT FRONT LEFT
TURN TURN REPEATER
L77 L77 SIGNAL SIGNAL LAMP
20 18 1 1 2
BR/YL BR/YL
LAMP LAMP
Z1 Z1 Z1
NO. 1 NO. 2
18 18 18
BK BK BK
2 C114
B8 S158
B10 (8W-15-10)
FOG Z1 (8W-15-12) Z1
18 18
L77 LAMP BK BK
20 RELAY
BR/YL S103
(IN PDC)
(8W-50-17) (8W-15-10)
7 C106 (8W-50-18) (8W-15-12)
Z1 Z1
L77 20 18
20 BK BK
BR
11 C106
1
LEFT Z1
CITY 20
LAMP LHD BK/WT
2 DIESEL
RHD G106
GAS (8W-15-10)
J998W-7 XJI05012
(8W-15-12)
BATT F34 (8W-10-26) TURN
HEADLAMP RIGHT SIGNAL/
SWITCH TURN HAZARD
1 PARK SIGNAL SWITCH
2 HEAD 1 (8W-52-2)
0 1 2
0 OFF
(8W-50-2) L60
(8W-50-3) 20
9 C1 TN
L7
18 S212
BK/YL (8W-52-7)
S206 L60
(8W-12-10) 20
L7 TN
18 B9
BK/YL
C100
F3
LHD RHD L60
20
45 C201 TN
10 C106
L7
18 L60
BK/YL 20
TN
M3 C4
JUNCTION S100
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE L60
23 20
10A TN
(8W-12-23) 2 RIGHT
SIDE
MARKER
5 C1
L78
1 LAMP
20 L78
DG/YL 20
DG/YL
14 C106
L78
20
DG/YL
S101
L78 L60 L78 L60
18 18 18 18
DG/YL TN DG/YL TN
2 3 RIGHT 2 3 RIGHT
FRONT FRONT
PARK/ PARK/
TURN TURN
1 1
SIGNAL SIGNAL
Z1 Z1
LAMP LAMP
18 18
BK NO. 1 BK NO. 2
S102
Z1 18BK (8W-15-7)
4 C106
Z1
20
BK
LHD
G106
RHD
XJI05013 (8W-15-7) J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
BATT F34 (8W-10-27)
(8W-10-36) TURN
SIGNAL/
HEADLAMP RIGHT
TURN HAZARD
SWITCH
SIGNAL SWITCH
1 PARK
1 (8W-52-3)
2 2 HEAD
0 1 (8W-52-4)
0 OFF L60
(8W-50-4) 20
9 C1 TN
L7
18
BK/YL
S206 S212
(8W-12-11) (8W-52-8)
L7 L60
18 20
BK/YL TN
B9
LHD RHD F3 C100
45 C201 L60
20
TN
L7 10 C106
18
BK/YL L60
20
M3 C4 TN
JUNCTION
BLOCK S116
(8W-12-2)
FUSE L60
23 18
10A TN
(8W-12-23) 1 C115
L60 L60 L60

18 18
5 C1 18
TN GY
TN
2 RIGHT 2 RIGHT 1
GAS DIESEL
FRONT FRONT RIGHT
TURN TURN REPEATER
SIGNAL SIGNAL LAMP
L78 L78 2
1 1
20 18 LAMP LAMP
DG/YL DG/YL Z1 NO. 1 Z1 NO. 2 Z1
18 18 18
BK BK BK
2 C115
14 C106 Z1
18
BK
L78
20
DG/YL
S102
(8W-15-10)
1 (8W-15-12)
RIGHT Z1 Z1
20 18
CITY BK
BK
LAMP
2 4 C106
Z1
20
BK
LHD G106
RHD (8W-15-10)
J998W-7 (8W-15-12) XJI05014
M3 C4 BATT F34 (8W-10-26)
L7
JUNCTION 18 HEADLAMP
BLOCK BK/YL SWITCH
(8W-12-2) 1 PARK
FUSE LHD RHD
7 2 HEAD
0 2 0 OFF
10A 45 C201 1
(8W-12-10) (8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
L77 9 C1
20 L7 L7
6 C2 7 C106 BR 18 18
L77 BK/YL BK/YL
L77 20
20 BR/YL TO S206
BR/YL S104 (8W-12-10)
(8W-12-10) BATT F61 (8W-10-33)
POWER
B10 B6 DISTRIBUTION
FOG CENTER
LAMP (8W-10-2)
RELAY
NO. 1
B8 B7
FROM
L35 L139
20 FUSE 20
BR/WT 3 (JB) VT
(8W-12-6)
12 C106 A5 C100
L33 L33 L139
20 20 20
RD RD VT
L33 18RD A4 C100
2 C106
B A 8 C106
LEFT
HEADLAMP S106
(8W-50-5)
C (8W-50-6) 1 3 L39 L39
FRONT 20 20
FOG LB LB
SWITCH FOG LAMP
ILLUM. LAMPS SWITCH
ON 2 2
Z1 LEFT RIGHT
18 FOG FOG
BK
4 2 1 LAMP 1 LAMP
L39 Z1 Z1
20 20 20
LB BK BK
S103 S102
(8W-15-7) (8W-15-7)
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-7)
XJI05015 J998W-7
DRL
BATT F34 DAYTIME
M3 C4 (8W-10-26)
HIGH
RUNNING
JUNCTION HEADLAMP BEAM LAMP
BLOCK SWITCH
(8W-12-2)
INDICATOR MODULE
1 PARK DRIVER (8W-50-19)
FUSE L7 2 HEAD
7 18 4
0 2 0 OFF
10A BK/YL 1 INSTRUMENT
(8W-50-2)
(8W-12-10) CLUSTER
45 C201 HIGH
9 C1 BEAM (8W-40-14)
L7 L7
6 C2 18 18 INDICATOR
L77 20BR DRIVER
BK/YL BK/YL
5 C1
TO S206
7 C106 (8W-12-10) D4 C100
S104
L77 L77 (8W-12-10) G34 G34
20 20 16 16
BR/YL BR/YL BATT F61 (8W-10-33) RD/GY RD/GY
POWER
DISTRIBUTION
B10 B6
CENTER
(8W-10-2)
FOG B15 B11
LAMP FOG
RELAY LAMP
NO. 1 RELAY
NO. 2
B8 B7
B13 B14
Z1 L92 Z1 L139
20 20 20 20
BK PK BK VT
A5 C100
L139 S106
20
S132 VT L39 L39
(8W-15-4) 1 3 20 20
(8W-15-5) LB LB
FRONT
FOG 2 2
LAMP LEFT RIGHT
SWITCH ON SWITCH FOG FOG
ILLUM. INDICATOR
1 LAMP 1 LAMP
L39 Z1 Z1
20 20 20
LB BK BK
4 2
Z1 S103 S102
Z1 L39 (8W-15-7) (8W-15-7)
14 20
BK 20 Z1 Z1
BK LB 18 18
BK BK
S208 A4 C100
(8W-15-14) 11 4 C106
Z1 L39 Z1 Z1
14 20 20 20
BK LB BK/WT BK
G106 G107 8 C106 G106

(8W-15-7) (8W-15-14) (8W-15-7)
J998W-7 XJI05016
BUILT-UP-EXPORT GAS
L7 BATT F34 (8W-10-27)
M3 C4 18
JUNCTION BK/YL
HEADLAMP
BLOCK SWITCH
FUSE 1 PARK
(8W-12-2) LHD RHD 2 HEAD
7
0 2 0 OFF
10A 45 C201 1
(8W-12-11) (8W-50-4)
L77 9 C1
20 L7 L7
6 C2 BR
TO
18 18
L77 LEFT BK/YL BK/YL
20 CITY
BR/YL S206
7 C106 LAMP
(8W-50-12) (8W-12-11)
L77 20BR/YL BATT F61 (8W-10-33)
POWER DIODE
FOG
B10 B6 DISTRIBUTION LAMP MODULE
FOG CENTER SWITCH (8W-51-8)
LAMP (8W-10-2) OUTPUT (8W-51-9)
RELAY
3
L39
B8 B7 18
LB
L35 L139 S230

20 20
BR/WT VT L39
20
12 C106 A5 C100 LB
L139
20 A4 C100
VT
1 3 8 C106
FRONT
FOG S106
SWITCH FOG LAMP
L39 L39
ILLUM. LAMPS SWITCH 20 20
ON
LB LB
4 2 2 2
Z1 LEFT RIGHT
20 L39
20
FOG FOG
BK
LB 1 LAMP 1 LAMP
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S103 S102
(8W-15-10) (8W-15-10)
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-10)
XJI05017 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT F34 (8W-10-36)
M3 C4 L7
JUNCTION 18 HEADLAMP
BLOCK BK/YL SWITCH
FUSE 1 PARK
(8W-12-2) LHD RHD 2 HEAD
7
0 2 0 OFF
10A 45 C201 1
(8W-12-11) (8W-50-4)
L77 9 C1
20 L7 L7
6 C2 BR/YL
TO
18 18
L77 LEFT BK/YL BK/YL
18 CITY
BR/YL S206
LAMP
(8W-50-12) (8W-12-11)
BATT F61 (8W-10-35)
POWER
B8 B6 DISTRIBUTION
FOG CENTER
LAMP (8W-10-6)
RELAY
B10 B7
Z1 Z1 S230
20 20 L139 (8W-10-35)
L39
BK/YL BK/YL 20 20
B19 VT LB
GROUND CONTROLLER A4 C100
12 C106 ANTI-LOCK A5 C100
L39
BRAKE L139 20
RELAY 20 LB
(IN PDC) VT
8 C106
1 (8W-35-5) 3 L39
FRONT 20
FOG LB
SWITCH FOG LAMP
ILLUM. LAMPS
S106
SWITCH (8W-10-35)
ON L39 L39
20 20
LB LB
4 2 2 2
Z1 LEFT RIGHT
20 L39
20
FOG FOG
BK
LB 1 LAMP 1 LAMP
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK BK
S103 S102
(8W-15-12) (8W-15-12)
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
11 4 C106
Z1 Z1
20 20
BK/WT BK
G106
(8W-15-12)
J998W-7 XJI05018
DRL
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
POWER JUNCTION
DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
13 CENTER (8W-12-2)
FUSE (8W-10-2) FUSE
7 10 RIGHT
15A FUSED VEHICLE
RIGHT HEADLAMP
30A
(8W-10-21) (8W-12-12) VEHICLE SPEED
6 LOW (8W-50-5) SPEED
BEAM (8W-50-6) SENSOR
SENSOR
S12 C4 OUTPUT SIGNAL (8W-30-9)
B 3
F20
18 L44 G7
WT 18 18
VT/RD WT/OR
RHD LHD
13 C106 S108
1 C201 (8W-30-9)
L44 G7
20 20
A9
E9 C100 VT/RD WT/OR
F20 S133 4 C107

18 (8W-12-7)
WT
A3 L44 G7
14 S159 18 20
RD/WT (8W-12-12) VT/RD WT/OR
6 5 10 7
FUSED FUSED FUSED VEHICLE DAYTIME
B(+)
DIMMER
IGNITION RIGHT SPEED RUNNING
SWITCH LOW SENSOR LAMP
SWITCH HIGH
OUTPUT BEAM SIGNAL
HIGH
(ST-RUN) OUTPUT
BEAM MODULE
BEAM INDICATOR
OUTPUT GROUND DRIVER
1 8 4
L3 G34
16 16
RD RD/GY
Z12
D3 C100 16
BK/TN
L3 B15
16 FOG
RD/OR LAMP
G34
S213 16 RELAY
(8W-50-5) G106 RD/GY NO. 2
(8W-15-7) (IN PDC)
B13
RHD LHD (8W-50-16)
D4 C100
16 C201
G34
16
RD/GY
S7 C4
JUNCTION 5 C1
BLOCK HIGH INSTRUMENT
(8W-12-2) BEAM CLUSTER
FUSE FUSE INDICATOR (8W-40-14)
3 16 DRIVER
10A 10A
(8W-12-6) (8W-12-6) RHD
LHD
XJI05019 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HEADLAMP
LHD RHD LOW BEAM
BEAM
SELECT
22 C201 RELAY
OUTPUT SWITCH
1 (8W-50-7)
S3 C4 (8W-50-8)
JUNCTION L4
BLOCK 16
(8W-12-2) VT/WT
FUSE FUSE
4 5
10A 10A
(8W-12-7) (8W-12-7)
10 C1 1 C1
L43 L44
20 20
VT VT/RD
S133
9 C106 (8W-12-7)
5
HEADLAMP
L44
LEVELING 20
L43 L13
18 SWITCH VT/RD
20
VT BR/YL
E18 C100
L13
13 C106
4 2
20
L44 L44 Z15
BR/YL
20 20 20 L44
VT/RD VT/RD BK/GY 1 C106 18
B12 VT/RD
C100 G107 L13
F6 (8W-15-15) 18
BR/YL
S233 S234 S236

(8W-12-7)
L43 L13 L13 L44
18 18 18 18
VT BR/YL BK VT/RD
1 2 2 1
LEFT RIGHT
LOGIC HEADLAMP LOGIC HEADLAMP
LEVELING LEVELING
M MOTOR M MOTOR
3 3
L43 Z15 Z15 L44
18 18 18 18
VT BK/GY BK/GY VT/RD
S235
(8W-15-10)
Z15
(8W-15-12)
B 18 B
LEFT BK/GY RIGHT
HEADLAMP 5 C106 HEADLAMP
(8W-50-7) Z15 (8W-50-7)
(8W-50-8) 16 (8W-50-8)
BK/GY
LHD G106
RHD (8W-15-10)
J998W-7 (8W-15-12) XJI05020
XJ 8W - 51 REAR LIGHTING 8W - 51 - 1
8W-51 REAR LIGHTING

Back-Up Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5 Left Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10, 11
Back-Up Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-6 Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2 Left Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3 License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
Diode Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9 Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5
Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2
Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9 Powertrain Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5
Fuse 7 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2 Rear Fog Lamp Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10, 11
Fuse 10 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5, 6 Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9
Fuse 18 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9 Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10, 11
Fuse 19 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2 Right Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
Fuse 23 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2 Right Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10, 11
Fuse 23 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2 Right Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-8, 9, 10, 11 Right Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3, 4, 7, 10, 11 Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid . . . . . . . 8W-51-5
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3, 4, 7, 10, 11 Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3, 4, 7
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-3 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 8, 9 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-2, 5, 6, 8, 9 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-4
Left Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-7
8W - 51 - 2 8W-51 REAR LIGHTING XJ
(8W-10-26) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)

BATT F34 (8W-10-12)
(8W-10-27)
(8W-10-36) POWER
4 C1 DIESEL GAS
DISTRIBUTION
HEADLAMP A18 A9 CENTER
SWITCH FUSE FUSE
(8W-10-2)
1 PARK (8W-10-6)
19 23
2 2 HEAD 15A 15A
0 1 0 OFF (8W-10-32) (8W-10-33)
(8W-50-2) A17 A10
(8W-50-3)
9 C1 (8W-50-4)
L7 F32
18 20
BK/YL PK/DB
S206 F8 C100
(8W-12-10)
(8W-12-11) F32
20
L7 PK/DB
18 6
BK/YL BRAKE
LHD RHD LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-33-4)
45 C201 (8W-33-5)
5
L50
20
L7
WT/TN
18
BK/YL
S203
M3 C4 (8W-10-32)
(8W-10-33)
JUNCTION L50
BLOCK 20
(8W-12-2) WT/TN
FUSE FUSE
7 23
10A 10A LHD RHD
(8W-12-10) (8W-12-23)
(8W-12-11)
24 C200 6 C204
2 C7 6 C7
L77 L78
18 18
L50
BR/YL DG/YL
20
WT/TN
7 C321
L78
18
DG/YL
A B C
TO TO TO
S311 RIGHT S302
(8W-51-3) TAIL/ (8W-51-3)
STOP
LAMP
(8W-51-3)
J998W-7 XJI05102
XJ 8W-51 REAR LIGHTING 8W - 51 - 3
FROM FROM
FUSE S203
(8W-51-2)
7 (JB)
(8W-51-2) C
A
L50
20
L77 WT/TN
18
BR/YL S302
(8W-10-32)
S311
(8W-12-10) L50 FROM L50 (8W-10-33)
L77 L77 (8W-12-11) 20 FUSE 20
TRAILER TOW OTHER WT/TN WT/TN
18 18
BR/YL BR/YL
23 (JB)
6 C323 (8W-51-2)
TRAILER TOW OTHERS 2 C327 5 C326 6 C321
S336 B
(8W-54-3)
7 C323
L77 L50 L78 L50
L77 L77 18 18 18 18
20 18 L50 BR/YL WT/TN DG/YL WT/TN
BR/YL BR/YL 20
WT/TN
S340 6 C322 4 C311
(8W-12-10) 1 C325 2 3 RIGHT
L50
11 C310 TAIL/
(8W-12-11)
L77 L77 L77 18 L77
20 20 18 L50 STOP
18 WT/TN
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL 18 1 LAMP
BR DG/WT
2 3 LEFT 1 C330 Z1
TAIL/ 18
7 C322 L78
STOP 18
BK
1 LAMP BK/YL
Z1 1 S348
5 (8W-15-19)
18 LICENSE Z1 (8W-15-20)
TRAILER BK LAMP 18
TOW BK
S341 2
CONNECTOR (8W-15-17) 2
(8W-54-2) Z1
8 BUILT- EXCEPT BUILT- (8W-15-18) 18 CENTER
UP-EXPORT UP-EXPORT BK HIGH
2 C330 MOUNTED
Z1 Z1
16 18 Z1
STOP 2 C321
BK BK 18 LAMP
BK Z1
1 18
2 C322 BK
TRAILER TOW OTHER S334
(8W-15-21)
Z1 S310
Z1 Z1 18 (8W-15-19)
14 18 BK (8W-15-20)
Z1 Z1
BK BK
14 18
S337 BK BK RHD LHD
2 C325
(8W-15-17)
Z1 (8W-15-18) 9 C310 Z1 Z1
14 6 C311 12 16
BK S309 BK BK
(8W-15-17) Z1
2 C323 Z1 Z1
(8W-15-18) 18
12 18
BK BK BK
G302
(8W-15-17) G303
Z1 14BK (8W-15-18) (8W-15-19)
G304 (8W-15-20)
(8W-15-21)
XJI05103 J998W-7
TURN
SIGNAL/
LEFT RIGHT
TURN TURN
HAZARD
SIGNAL SIGNAL SWITCH
9 3 (8W-52-2)
L62 (8W-52-3)
L63 20
20 BR/RD
DG/RD LHD RHD
LHD RHD
25 C200 7 C204
26 C200 8 C204
TRAILER
S312
(8W-70-4)
TOW OTHERS L62
20
1 C323 BR/RD
S335 1 C321
(8W-54-3)
L62
1 C322 18
BR/RD
L63
18 2
DG/RD
RIGHT
TURN
2 LEFT SIGNAL
TURN 1 LAMP
SIGNAL
Z1
1 LAMP 18
Z1 BK
18
BK
S348
S341 (8W-15-19)
EXCEPT BUILT- (8W-15-17) (8W-15-20)
(8W-15-18)
UP-EXPORT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
TRAILER
Z1
TOW Z1 Z1
18
CONNECTOR 18 16
BK BK BK
(8W-54-2)
8
2 C321
TRAILER 2 C322
TOW OTHERS
Z1
Z1 18
14 Z1
BK
BK 18
Z1
BK
14
BK
S310
S337 (8W-15-19)
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-20)
Z1 (8W-15-18)
14 LHD RHD
BK
2 C323
Z1 Z1
16 12
BK BK
S309
(8W-15-17)
Z1
(8W-15-18)
12
BK
G302 G303
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
(8W-15-18) (8W-15-20)
J998W-7 XJI05104
GAS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
10
15A
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
S12 C4
F20
18
WT
LHD RHD
1 C201
F20
18
WT
A9
C100
E9
S159
(8W-12-12)
F20 (8W-12-13)
18
WT
4.0L A/T OTHER
3 11 C107
TRANSMISSION
M/T 2.5L A/T
RANGE
R SENSOR
(8W-31-6) S161
A 1
6
BACK-UP PARK/ F20
L10 LAMP NEUTRAL 18
18 R R WT
SWITCH POSITION
BR/LG
SWITCH
(8W-31-2)
B 3
S142
A
L10 L10 L10 TORQUE
18 18 18 CONVERTER
BR/LG BR/LG BR/LG
CLUTCH
12 C107 SOLENOID
B
4.0L A/T OTHER
E3 K54
18 C100 18
A15
TRS TRANSMISSION OR/BK
REVERSE CONTROL LHD RHD
SENSE B11 C2
MODULE 16 C200 5 C204 TORQUE POWERTRAIN
(4.0L)
L10 L10 CONVERTER CONTROL
(8W-31-6)
18 18 CLUTCH MODULE
BR/LG BR/LG SOLENOID (8W-30-12)
CONTROL
D E
TO TO
S303 S303 RHD
(8W-51-7) (8W-51-7) LHD
XJI05105 J998W-7
DIESEL
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
10
15A
(8W-12-12)
(8W-12-13)
S12 C4
F20
18
WT
LHD RHD
1 C201
A9
C100
E9
S159
(8W-12-12)
F20 (8W-12-13)
18
WT
7 C111
F20
18
WT
B
BACK-UP
SWITCH
R
A
L10
18
BR/LG
5 C111
L10
18
BR/LG
A15
C100
E3
L10
18
BR/LG
LHD RHD
16 C200 5 C204
L10 L10
18 18
BR/LG BR/LG
D E
TO TO
S303 S303 RHD
(8W-51-7) (8W-51-7) LHD
J998W-7 XJI05106
FROM FROM
C200 C204
(8W-51-5) (8W-51-5)
(8W-51-6) (8W-51-6)
D E
LHD RHD
S303
L10 L10
18 18
BR/LG BR/LG
TRAILER
TOW OTHERS 5 C321
5 C323
S339
(8W-54-2)
L10
18
5 C322 BR/LG
L10
18
BR/LG
2 2
LEFT RIGHT
BACK-UP BACK-UP
1 LAMP LAMP
1
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
S341
(8W-15-17) S348
EXCEPT BUILT- (8W-15-18) (8W-15-19)
UP EXPORT BUILT-UP-EXPORT (8W-15-20)
Z1 Z1
18 16 Z1
TRAILER BK BK 18
TOW BK
CONNECTOR
(8W-54-2) TRAILER 2 C322
8 TOW OTHER
2 C321
Z1 Z1 Z1
14 18 18
BK BK BK
S337 Z1
(8W-15-17) 14 S310
Z1 (8W-15-19)
(8W-15-18) BK
14 (8W-15-20)
BK
2 C323 LHD RHD
Z1 14BK Z1 Z1
16 12
S309 BK BK
(8W-15-17)
Z1 (8W-15-18)
12
BK
G303
G302 (8W-15-19)
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-20)
XJI05107 (8W-15-18) J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT LHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
FRONT HEADLAMP (8W-10-15)
FOG FOG HEAD SWITCH JUNCTION
LAMP LAMP LAMP (8W-50-4) BLOCK
RELAY SWITCH (8W-12-2)
OUTPUT
SWITCH OUTPUT FUSE
(8W-50-17) 18
2 (8W-50-18)
2 C1 10A
(8W-12-18)
L39 L2
20 14
LB LG S4 C4
F83
18
S230 S226 YL/DG
(8W-10-35) (8W-50-4)
(8W-50-17) 44 C201
L39 L39 L2
20 18 16 F83
LB LB LG 18
YL/DG
A4 C100 3 1
DIODE
MODULE 39 C200
L39
20 F83
LB 18
YL/DG
2
8 C106
3 C305
L39
20 F83
LB 18
YL/DG
3 C2
TO L25 F83 DRIVER
FUSED
S106 18 18 IGNITION POWER
(8W-10-35) BR YL/DG SWITCH
(8W-50-17) LOCK/
OUTPUT
(RUN-ACC)
WINDOW
SWITCH
(8W-62-3)
5 1
REAR
FOG
86 30
LAMP
RELAY
LOGIC
85 87
2 3 4
L36 Z1
18 18 L38 L38
LG/BK BK 18 18
BR/WT BR/WT
F
G107 G H
TO (8W-15-15)
REAR TO TO
FOG REAR C200
LAMP FOG (8W-51-10)
SWITCH LAMP
(8W-51-10) SWITCH
(8W-51-10)
J998W-7 XJI05108
BUILT-UP-EXPORT RHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
FRONT HEADLAMP (8W-10-15)
FOG FOG HEAD SWITCH JUNCTION
LAMP LAMP LAMP (8W-50-4) BLOCK
RELAY SWITCH (8W-12-2)
OUTPUT
SWITCH OUTPUT FUSE
(8W-50-17) 18
2 (8W-50-18)
2 C1 10A
(8W-12-19)
L39 L2
20 14
LB LG S4 C4
S230 S226
(8W-10-35) (8W-50-4) F83
(8W-50-17) 18
L39 L39 L2 YL/DG
20 18 16
LB LB LG
A4 C100 3 1 S232
DIODE
L39 MODULE F83
20 18
F83
LB YL/DG
18
2 YL/DG
8 C106 3 C300
L39
20 F83
LB 18
YL/DG
TO L25
S106 18 S352
(8W-10-35) BR (8W-12-19)
(8W-50-17)
5 1 F83
18
REAR YL/DG
FOG
86 30
LAMP
RELAY 3 C2
LOGIC FUSED DRIVER
IGNITION POWER
SWITCH LOCK/
OUTPUT
85 87
(RUN-ACC)
WINDOW
SWITCH
(8W-62-5)
(8W-62-6)
2 3 4
L36 Z1 L38
18 18 18
LG/BK BK BR/WT
I J
G107
TO (8W-15-15) TO
REAR S220
FOG (8W-51-11)
LAMP
SWITCH
(8W-51-11)
XJI05109 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT LHD
FROM
FROM S215 FROM FROM
REAR (8W-12-8) REAR REAR
FOG FOG FOG
LAMP LAMP LAMP
RELAY RELAY RELAY
(8W-51-8) (8W-51-8) (8W-51-8)
F G H
E2
20
L36 OR L38 L38
18 18 18
LG/BK BR/WT BR/WT
23 C200
2 4 3
REAR L38
FOG 18
REAR BR/WT
LAMP
SWITCH FOG
ILLUMINATION LAMP SWITCH
INDICATOR
S308
L38 L38
18 18
BR/WT BR/WT
1
4 C322 4 C321
L38 L38
18 18
OR/WT OR/WT
2 LEFT 2 RIGHT
REAR REAR
FOG FOG
1 LAMP 1 LAMP
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
S341 S348
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
Z15
20 Z1 Z1
BK/GY 16 18
BK BK
2 C322 2 C321
Z1 Z1
14 18
BK BK
S309 S310
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
Z1 Z1
12 16
BK BK
G107 G302 G303

(8W-15-15) (8W-15-17) (8W-15-19)
J998W-7 XJI05110
BUILT-UP-EXPORT RHD
FROM FROM
S215 REAR
FROM
(8W-12-9) FOG
REAR
LAMP
FOG RELAY
LAMP
(8W-51-9)
RELAY
(8W-51-9) J
I
E2 S220
20
OR L38
L36 L38
18 18 18
LG/BK BR/WT BR/WT
2 4 3 15 C203
REAR L38
FOG 18
REAR LAMP BR/WT
SWITCH FOG
ILLUMINATION LAMP SWITCH
INDICATOR
S308
L38 L38
18 18
BR/WT BR/WT
1
4 C322 4 C321
L38 L38
18 18
OR/WT OR/WT
2 LEFT 2 RIGHT
REAR REAR
FOG FOG
1 LAMP 1 LAMP
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
S341 S348
(8W-15-18) (8W-15-20)
Z15
20 Z1 Z1
BK/GY 16 18
BK BK
2 C322 2 C321
Z1 Z1
14 18
BK BK
S309 S310
(8W-15-18) (8W-15-20)
Z1 Z1
12 12
BK BK
G107 G302 G303

(8W-15-15) (8W-15-18) (8W-15-20)
XJI05111 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 52 TURN SIGNALS 8W - 52 - 1
8W-52 TURN SIGNALS

Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4 Left Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-6
Fuse 12 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4 Left Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5
Fuse 20 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3 Left Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5, 6
Fuse 23 (PDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-4 Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-3, 4
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5, 6, 7, 8 Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . 8W-52-7
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5, 6 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . 8W-52-7
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-7, 8 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . 8W-52-8
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5, 6, 7, 8 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . 8W-52-8
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4 Right Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-8
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . 8W-52-5 Right Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-7
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . 8W-52-5 Right Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-7, 8
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . . 8W-52-6 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-2, 3, 4
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . . 8W-52-6
8W - 52 - 2 8W-52 TURN SIGNALS XJ
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) BATT A0 (8W-10-10)
JUNCTION POWER
FUSE (8W-12-2)
FUSE CENTER
12 20 (8W-10-2)
10A 15A
(8W-12-16) (8W-10-31)
(8W-12-17) A15
S20 C4
L5 L9
20 20
BK BK/PK
LHD RHD
B11
3 C201 C100
F5
L9
20
L5
BK/PK
20
BK
1 2
FUSED FUSED COMBINATION
IGNITION B(+) FLASHER
SWITCH HAZARD
OUTPUT FLASHER
FLASHER (RUN) SELECT
OUTPUT SIGNAL GROUND
4 3 5
L6 Z1
20 L55 L12
20 20 20
RD/WT BK
RD/WT VT/TN
5 4 11 6
TURN S208
(8W-15-14)
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
SWITCH
(PART OF
MULTI-
FUNCTION
SWITCH)
L R L R L R L R
3 10 1 9
L62 L61 L60 L63
20 20 20 20
BR/RD LG/WT TN DG/RD
A B C D
TO TO TO TO Z1
14
C200 S209 S212 C200 BK
C204 (8W-52-5) (8W-52-7) C204
(8W-52-7) (8W-52-5)
G107
(8W-15-14)
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI05202
XJ 8W-52 TURN SIGNALS 8W - 52 - 3
BUILT-UP-EXPORT GAS
BATT A0 (8W-10-10) RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
POWER JUNCTION
A16 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
20 (8W-10-2) 12
15A 10A
(8W-10-31) (8W-12-16)
A15 (8W-12-17)
S20 C4
L9 L5
20 20
BK/PK BK
LHD RHD
B11
C100 3 C201
POWER F5
ANTENNA L9
RELAY 20
L5
GROUND (RHD) BK/PK
20
(8W-47-4) BK
A C1
Z1 2 1
18 FUSED FUSED COMBINATION
BK B(+) IGNITION FLASHER
SWITCH HAZARD
OUTPUT FLASHER
GROUND OUTPUT SIGNAL
5 4 3
Z1 L6 L55 L12
20 20 20 20
BK RD/WT RD/WT VT/TN
5 4 11 6
TURN
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
SWITCH
(PART OF
MULTI-
FUNCTION
SWITCH)
L R L R L R L R
3 10 1 9
S208 L62 L61 L60 L63
(8W-15-15) 20 20 20 20
E F G H
Z1 TO TO TO TO
14
BK
C200 S209 S212 C200
C204 (8W-52-6) (8W-52-8) C204
(8W-52-8) (8W-52-6)
G107
(8W-15-15)
LHD
RHD
XJI05203 J998W-7
DIESEL
BATT A0 (8W-10-12) RUN A22 (8W-10-17)
POWER JUNCTION
A9 DISTRIBUTION BLOCK
23 (8W-10-6) 12
15A 10A
(8W-10-35) (8W-12-16)
A10 (8W-12-17)
S20 C4
L9 L5
20 20
BK/PK BK
LHD RHD
B11
C100 3 C201
POWER F5
ANTENNA L9
RELAY 20
L5
GROUND (RHD) BK/PK
20
(8W-47-4) BK
A C1
Z1 2 1
18 FUSED FUSED COMBINATION
BK B(+) IGNITION FLASHER
SWITCH HAZARD
OUTPUT FLASHER
GROUND OUTPUT SIGNAL
5 4 3
Z1 L6 L55 L12
20 20 20 20
BK RD/WT RD/WT VT/TN
5 4 11 6
TURN
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
SWITCH
(PART OF
MULTI-
FUNCTION
SWITCH)
L R L R L R L R
3 10 1 9
S208 L62 L61 L60 L63
(8W-15-15) 20 20 20 20
E F G H
Z1 TO TO TO TO
14
BK
C200 S209 S212 C200
C204 (8W-52-6) (8W-52-8) C204
(8W-52-8) (8W-52-6)
G107
(8W-15-15)
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI05204
FROM FROM
TURN TURN
SIGNAL/ SIGNAL/
HAZARD HAZARD TRAILER
LHD RHD
SWITCH SWITCH TOW OTHER
(8W-52-2) (8W-52-2)
B D 1 C323
L63 L63
20 20
L61 L63
DG/RD DG/RD
S335
20 20 (8W-54-3)
LG/WT DG/RD
S209 26 C200 8 C204

L63
20
L61 L63 L63
DG/RD
20 20 20
L61 DG/RD DG/RD 1 C322
LG/WT
20
B10 LG/WT
F4 C100 L63
18
10 C1 DG/RD
L61 LEFT INSTRUMENT
20 TURN CLUSTER 2 LEFT
LG/WT SIGNAL (8W-40-14) TURN
SIGNAL
3 C106 1 LAMP
L61 Z1
20 18
LG BK
S341
S105 (8W-15-17)
(8W-50-11)
S104
(8W-12-10) Z1
L61 18
20 BK
LG
2 LEFT 2 C322
L77 L61 L77 L61
SIDE 18 18 18 18 TRAILER TOW OTHERS
MARKER BR LG BR LG
1 LAMP 2 3 LEFT 2 3 LEFT Z1
FRONT FRONT 18
L77 BK
20
PARK/ PARK/
BR TURN TURN S337
1 1
SIGNAL SIGNAL (8W-15-17) Z1
Z1 LAMP Z1 LAMP Z1 (8W-15-18) 14
18 NO. 1 18 NO. 2 14 BK
BK BK BK
S158 2 C323
(8W-15-7)
Z1
S103 14
(8W-15-7) BK
Z1
18
BK
S309
11 C106 (8W-15-17)
Z1 (8W-15-18)
Z1 12
20 BK
BK/WT
G302
G106 LHD
(8W-15-17)
(8W-15-7) RHD (8W-15-18)
XJI05205 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM FROM
TURN TURN
SIGNAL/ SIGNAL/
HAZARD HAZARD
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-52-3) (8W-52-3)
(8W-52-4) (8W-52-4)
TRAILER
F H LHD RHD
TOW OTHER
L61 1 C323
20
L63 L63
LG/WT S335
20 20
DG/RD DG/RD (8W-54-3)
S209 L63
20
L61
DG/RD 26 C200 8 C204
20
L61 L63
LG/WT
20 20
B10 L63 L63
C100 LG/WT DG/RD
20 20
F4
DG/RD DG/RD 1 C322
L61 10 C1
20 LEFT INSTRUMENT
LG/WT L63
TURN CLUSTER 18
SIGNAL (8W-40-14)
3 C106 DG/RD
L61 2 LEFT
20 TURN
LG
SIGNAL
S105 1 LAMP
(8W-50-12) Z1
L61 18
18 BK
LG
1 C114 S341
(8W-15-17)
L61 (8W-15-18)
L61 L61 Z1
18 18 18 16
LG LG LG BK
2 LEFT 2 LEFT 1
FRONT FRONT LEFT 2 C322
TURN TURN REPEATER TRAILER TOW OTHERS
SIGNAL SIGNAL LAMP
1 1 2
LAMP LAMP Z1 Z1
Z1 Z1 Z1 18 14
18
NO. 1 18
NO. 2 18 BK BK
BK BK BK
S337
2 C114 (8W-15-17)
S158 Z1 (8W-15-18)
(8W-15-10) Z1
18 14
(8W-15-12) BK
BK
S103 2 C323
(8W-15-10)
(8W-15-12) Z1
Z1
18 14
BK BK
11 C106 S309
(8W-15-17)
Z1 Z1 (8W-15-18)
20 12
BK/WT BK
LHD
G106 RHD G302
(8W-15-10) (8W-15-17)
J998W-7 XJI05206
(8W-15-12) (8W-15-18)
FROM FROM
TURN TURN
SIGNAL/ SIGNAL/
HAZARD HAZARD
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-52-2) (8W-52-2)
A C
L62 L60
20 20
BR/RD TN
LHD RHD S212
25 C200 7 C204 L60

20
L60
TN
20
B9 TN
C100
F3
L62
20 L60 6 C2
BR/RD 20 RIGHT INSTRUMENT
TN TURN CLUSTER
S312 10 C106 SIGNAL (8W-40-14)
(8W-70-4)
L60
L62 20
20 TN
BR/RD
S100
1 C321 (8W-50-13)
L62 L60
18 20
BR/RD TN
2 2 RIGHT
RIGHT
TURN SIDE
SIGNAL MARKER
1 LAMP 1 LAMP
Z1 L78
18 20
BK DG/YL
S348 S101
(8W-15-19) (8W-12-23)
Z1 (8W-15-20)
18 L78 L60 L78 L60
BK 18 18 18 18
DG/YL TN DG/YL TN
2 C321 2 3 RIGHT 2 3 RIGHT
Z1 FRONT FRONT
18 PARK/ PARK/
BK TURN TURN
1 1
SIGNAL SIGNAL
S310 Z1 LAMP Z1 LAMP
(8W-15-19) 18 18
(8W-15-20) NO. 1 NO. 2
BK BK
LHD RHD
S102
Z1 18BK (8W-15-7)
Z1 Z1
16 12 4 C106
BK BK
Z1
20
BK
LHD
G303
(8W-15-19)
RHD G106
(8W-15-20) (8W-15-7)
XJI05207 J998W-7
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FROM FROM
TURN TURN
SIGNAL/ SIGNAL/
HAZARD HAZARD
SWITCH SWITCH
(8W-52-3) (8W-52-3)
(8W-52-4) (8W-52-4)
E G
L62 L60
20 20
BR/RD TN
LHD RHD S212
25 C200 7 C204 L60

20 L60
TN 20
B9 TN
C100
F3 6 C2
L62 L60
20 20 RIGHT INSTRUMENT
BR/RD TN TURN CLUSTER
SIGNAL (8W-40-14)
S312 10 C106
(8W-70-4)
L60
L62 20
20 TN
BR/RD
S116
1 C321 (8W-50-14)
L62 L60
18 18
BR/RD TN
2 RIGHT 1 C115
TURN L60 L60 L60
SIGNAL 18 18 18
TN TN GY
1 LAMP RIGHT RIGHT
2 2 1
S348 FRONT FRONT RIGHT
(8W-15-19) TURN TURN REPEATER
(8W-15-20) LAMP
Z1 SIGNAL SIGNAL
1 1 2
18 LAMP LAMP
BK Z1
Z1 NO. 1 18
NO. 2 Z1
2 C321 18
BK
18
BK BK
Z1
18 2 C115
BK
Z1
S310 18
(8W-15-19) BK
(8W-15-20)
S102
LHD RHD (8W-15-10)
(8W-15-12)
Z1
18
Z1 Z1
BK
16 12
BK BK 4 C106
Z1
20
BK
G303 LHD
(8W-15-19) RHD G106
(8W-15-20) (8W-15-10)
J998W-7 XJI05208
(8W-15-12)
XJ 8W - 53 WIPERS 8W - 53 - 1
8W-53 WIPERS
A/C- Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-6, 7 Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7
Circuit Breaker 30 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Front Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3 Rear Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 4, 5, 6, 7
Fuse 6 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7 Rear Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7
Fuse 22 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7
G106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Windshield Washer Pump . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3, 4, 6
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7 Wipe/Wash Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3
G108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3 Wiper Motor Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-2, 3
G304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7
8W - 53 - 2 8W-53 WIPERS XJ
GAS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
CIRCUIT (8W-12-2)
BREAKER
30
20A
(8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27)
M4 C4 8 C1
V6 V6
16 16
DB DB
LHD RHD
8 C201
5
WIPE/
WASH
SWITCH
3 3 3 0 OFF
0 0 0 1 DELAY
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 LOW
4 3 HIGH
INTERMITTENT WIPER 4 WASH
LOGIC 5 INTERMITTENT
WIPER
MOTOR
RELAY
5
MIN MAX
3 1 2 6 4
V10 V5 V4 V3
18 Z1 16 16 16
BR 16 DG/YL BR/VT BR/WT
E4 BK C5 C100
C3 C1
A16 C100 V5 V4 V3
A S207
16 16 16
(8W-15-16)
WINDSHIELD Z1 DG/YL BR/VT BR/WT
WASHER 14 2 6 5 1
M PUMP BK FRONT
REAR WIPER
G108 M
B WASHER (8W-15-16) PARK MOTOR
RUN
Z1 PUMP
18 GROUND (8W-53-4)
BK (8W-53-6) 4
2
LHD M/T 4.0L
OTHER Z1 18BK EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT OTHER
S132
(8W-15-4) S141
(8W-15-5)
(8W-15-5) Z1 Z1
Z1 (8W-15-6) 16 16
14 (8W-15-8) BK BK RHD
BK (8W-15-9) LHD
G106
J998W-7 (8W-15-7) XJI05302
(8W-15-10)
XJ 8W-53 WIPERS 8W - 53 - 3
DIESEL
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
30
20A
(8W-12-27)
M4 C4 8 C1
V6 V6
16 16
DB DB
LHD RHD
8 C201
5
WIPE/
WASH
SWITCH
3 3 3 0 OFF
0 0 0 1 DELAY
2 1 2 1 2 1 2 LOW
4 3 HIGH
INTERMITTENT WIPER LOGIC 4 WASH
5 INTERMITTENT
WIPER
MOTOR
RELAY
5
MIN MAX
3 1 2 6 4
V10 Z1 V5 V4 V3
18 16 16 16 16
BR BK DG/YL BR/VT BR/WT
E4 S207 C5 C3 C1 C100
A16 C100 V5 V4 V3
(8W-15-16)
16 16 16
A Z1 DG/YL BR/VT BR/WT
WINDSHIELD 14 2 6 5 1
WASHER BK FRONT
M PUMP
G108 WIPER
M
(8W-15-16) PARK MOTOR
RUN
B
Z1
18 4
BK Z1
16
BK
S141
(8W-15-11) S157
Z1 (8W-15-11)
12 Z1
BK 12
BK
S132
Z1 (8W-15-11)
12 LHD
BK
RHD
G106
(8W-15-12)
XJI05303 J998W-7
8W - 53 - 4 8W-53 WIPERS XJ
LHD GAS
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) HEADLAMP S1 C4
PANEL SWITCH JUNCTION
JUNCTION LAMPS (8W-50-2) BLOCK
BLOCK DIMMER (8W-50-4) FUSE (8W-12-2)
(8W-12-2) SWITCH 6
FUSE SIGNAL 5A
22 1 C1 (8W-12-8)
20A E1
(8W-12-21) E1 20
20 TN
S2 C4
TN
S11 C4 E2 20OR
V23
18 S315
BR/PK (8W-12-8)
43
39 C201 42 C201
V23 S215
18
(8W-12-8)
BR/PK
5 3
REAR
WIPER/
WASHER
SWITCH
1 2 0 1 0 0 OFF
2
1 WASH
2 WIPE
6 4 2 1
V23 V13 V20 Z1
18 18 18 20
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT BK
29 27 C200 S205
V23 V13 28 C200 S208
18 18 V20 (8W-15-14)
BR/PK BR 18 Z1 (8W-15-15)
BK/WT 14
4 3 5 C327 BK
E5 C100
V23 V13 V20 G107
18 18 18 (8W-15-14)
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT V20 (8W-15-15)
18
2 1 3 C313 BK/WT WINDSHIELD
7 C310 WASHER
8 1 1
4 3 2 PUMP
REAR (8W-53-2)
REAR WASHER GROUND
REAR WIPER MODULE WIPER M PUMP B
MOTOR Z1
1 PARK 18
2 RUN 2 BK
M OTHER M/T 4.0L EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
1 2
Z1 Z1
1 18 18
BK BK
S334
(8W-15-21) S132 S141
9 C310 (8W-15-4) (8W-15-5)
6 C311 (8W-15-8)
Z1 Z1 Z1
18 14 16
BK BK BK
G106 G106
G304 (8W-15-7) (8W-15-7)
J998W-7 (8W-15-21) (8W-15-10) XJI05304
XJ 8W-53 WIPERS 8W - 53 - 5
LHD DIESEL
S1 C4
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) JUNCTION
JUNCTION BLOCK
FUSE (8W-12-2)
BLOCK HEADLAMP 6
(8W-12-2) PANEL SWITCH 5A
FUSE LAMPS (8W-50-4) (8W-12-8)
22 DIMMER
E1
20A SWITCH
20
(8W-12-21) SIGNAL
TN
S2 C4
1 C1 E2 20OR
S11 C4
V23 E1 S315
18 20 (8W-12-8)
BR/PK TN 43
39 C201 42 C201
V23 S215
18
(8W-15-8)
BR/PK
5 3
REAR
WIPER/
WASHER
SWITCH
1 0 1 0 0 OFF
2 2
1 WASH
2 WIPE
6 4 2 1
V23 V13 V20 Z1
18 18 18 20
29 27 C200
S205
V23 V13 S208
18 18
BR/PK BR
28 C200 E5 C100 (8W-15-15)
Z1
14
V20 BK
4 3 5 C327
18
V23 V13 V20 BK/WT G107
18 18 18 (8W-15-15)
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT 1
2 1 3 REAR
C313 WASHER
7 8 1 C310 M
V23 V13 V20 PUMP
18 18 18
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT
2
4 3 2 Z1
REAR 18
REAR WIPER MODULE WIPER BK
MOTOR
1 PARK
2 RUN
M S141
1 2 (8W-15-11)
Z1
1 12
S334 BK
(8W-15-21)
9 C310 S132
6 C311 (8W-15-11)
Z1 Z1
18 12
BK BK
G304 G106
(8W-15-21) (8W-15-12)
XJI05305 J998W-7
8W - 53 - 6 8W-53 WIPERS XJ
RHD GAS
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) HEADLAMP S1 C4
PANEL SWITCH JUNCTION
JUNCTION LAMPS (8W-50-3) BLOCK
BLOCK DIMMER (8W-50-4) FUSE (8W-12-2)
(8W-12-2) SWITCH 6
FUSE SIGNAL 5A
22 1 C1 (8W-12-9)
20A E1
(8W-12-22) E1 20
20 TN
S2 C4
TN
S11 C4 S215
(8W-12-9)
7
V23
18 FUSED A/C- E2
BR/PK PANEL HEATER 20
LAMPS CONTROL OR
DIMMER (8W-44-4)
SWITCH
SIGNAL
6 3
REAR
WIPER/
WASHER
SWITCH
1 2 0 1 2 0 0 OFF
1 WASH
5 4 2 1 2 WIPE
V23 V13 V20 Z1
18 18 18 20
17 16 18 C203 S205 S208

(8W-15-14)
V23 V13 V20 Z1 (8W-15-15)
18 18 18 E5 C100
14
BR/PK BR BK/WT BK
4 3 5 C327 V20
18 G107
V23 V13 V20 BK/WT (8W-15-14)
18 18 18 (8W-15-15)
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT
2 1 3 C313 WINDSHIELD
7 C310 WASHER
8 1 1
4 3 2 PUMP
REAR (8W-53-2)
REAR WASHER GROUND
WIPER M PUMP B
REAR WIPER MODULE Z1
MOTOR
1 PARK 18
2 RUN 2 BK
M
1 2
Z1
18
1 BK
S334 S132
(8W-15-21) (8W-15-6)
9 C310
6 C311 Z1
Z1 14
18 BK
BK
G304 G106
(8W-15-21) (8W-15-7)
J998W-7 XJI05306
(8W-15-10)
XJ 8W-53 WIPERS 8W - 53 - 7
RHD DIESEL
S1 C4
RUN A22 (8W-10-17) JUNCTION
BLOCK
JUNCTION FUSE (8W-12-2)
BLOCK 6
(8W-12-2) HEADLAMP 5A
FUSE PANEL SWITCH (8W-12-9)
22 LAMPS (8W-50-4)
20A DIMMER
SWITCH S2 C4
(8W-12-22)
SIGNAL S215
S11 C4 1 C1 E1 (8W-12-9)
20
V23 E1 7
TN
18 20 FUSED A/C- E2
BR/PK TN PANEL HEATER 20
LAMPS CONTROL OR
DIMMER (8W-44-4)
SWITCH
SIGNAL
6 3
REAR
WIPER/
WASHER
SWITCH
1 0 1 0 0 OFF
2 2
1 WASH
2 WIPE
5 4 2 1
V23 V13 V20 Z1
18 18 18 20
S205
17 16 18 C203
E5 C100
V23 V13 V20 S208
18 18 18 (8W-15-15)
BR/PK BR BK/WT V20 Z1
14
4 3 5 C327 18
BK
BK/WT
V23 V13 V20
18 18 18 1 G107
BR/PK BR/LG BK/WT (8W-15-15)
REAR
1 3 C313 WASHER
2
7 8 1 C310 M PUMP
4 3 2
REAR 2
WIPER
REAR WIPER MODULE Z1
MOTOR 18
1 PARK BK
2 RUN
S141
M (8W-15-11)
1 2
Z1
12
1 BK
S334
(8W-15-21)
S132
9 C310 (8W-15-11)
6 C311
Z1 Z1
18 12
BK BK
G304 G106
(8W-15-21) (8W-15-12)
XJI05307 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 54 TRAILER TOW 8W - 54 - 1
8W-54 TRAILER TOW

Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3 Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
Fuse 7 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2 Left Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
Fuse 20 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3 Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2, 3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2 Trailer Tow Electric Brake Provision . . . . . 8W-54-2
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2 Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2, 3 Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
Left Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
8W - 54 - 2 8W-54 TRAILER TOW XJ
BATT F34 (8W-10-26)

(8W-10-27)
(8W-10-36)
4 C1
S206 HEADLAMP
LHD RHD
(8W-12-10) SWITCH
L7 (8W-12-11) 1 PARK
18 2 HEAD
45 C201 BK/YL
0 1 2
0 OFF
(8W-50-2)
(8W-50-3)
9 C1 (8W-50-4)
L7
18
BK/YL
M3 C4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
7
10A FROM
(8W-12-10) S303
(8W-12-11) (8W-51-7)
2 C7
L77
18 L10
BR/YL 18
BR/LG
S311 5 C323
(8W-12-10)
L77 (8W-12-11) L10
18 18
BR/YL BR/LG
7 C323
S339
L77
20 5 C322
BR/YL L10
18 L10
S340 BR/LG 18
(8W-12-10) BR/LG
(8W-12-11) 2
5 3 LEFT
BACK-UP
7 8 TRAILER LAMP BACK-UP
B40 Z1 TOW FEED LAMP
14 14 CONNECTOR (8W-51-7)
LB BK
S337
(8W-15-17)
TRAILER
(8W-15-18)
TOW
ELECTRIC 2 C323
BRAKE Z1
PROVISION 14
BK
S309
(8W-15-17)
Z1
(8W-15-18)
12
BK
G302
(8W-15-17)
(8W-15-18)
J998W-7 XJI05402
XJ 8W-54 TRAILER TOW 8W - 54 - 3
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
20
15A
(8W-12-20)
8 C7
A6
20
RD/OR
3 C323
S338
TURN BRAKE TURN (8W-12-20)
SIGNAL/ BRAKE LAMP SIGNAL/
LEFT LAMP RIGHT
TURN HAZARD SWITCH
SWITCH TURN HAZARD
SIGNAL SWITCH OUTPUT (8W-33-4) SIGNAL SWITCH
(8W-52-2) (8W-33-5) (8W-52-2)
9 5 3
(8W-52-3) (8W-52-3)
L63 (8W-52-4) L50 L62 (8W-52-4)
20 20 20
DG/RD WT/TN BR/RD
S203
LHD RHD LHD RHD
(8W-10-32)
(8W-10-33)
26 C200 8 C204 25 C200 7 C204
LHD RHD
24 C200 6 C204
1 C323 S312
(8W-70-4)
S335 8 C323
S302
L63 L63 A6 (8W-10-32) L62 A6
20 20 20 (8W-10-33) 20 20
DG/RD DG/RD RD/OR BK/RD RD/OR
L50
1 3 20 1 3
TRAILER WT/TN TRAILER
TOW TOW
LEFT 6 C323 RIGHT
TURN TURN
2 5 RELAY L50 2 5 RELAY
L50 20 L50
20 WT/TN 20
WT/TN WT/TN
S336
1 C322
6 C322
L63 L73 L50 L74 A6
18 20 18 20 20
DG/RD YL WT/TN LG RD/OR
2 3
LEFT LEFT BRAKE LEFT
TURN TURN LAMP TAIL/
SIGNAL SIGNAL SWITCH STOP
OUTPUT
LAMP LAMP
(8W-52-5) (8W-51-3)
(8W-52-6) 10 2 4
XJI05403 TRAILER TOW CONNECTOR J998W-7

XJ 8W - 60 POWER WINDOWS 8W - 60 - 1
8W-60 POWER WINDOWS

Circuit Breaker 28 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3 Left Rear Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5
Driver Power Lock/Window Left Rear Window Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3, 4, 5
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3, 4, 5 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . 8W-60-2, 3
Driver Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3 Passenger Power Window Motor . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 4 Right Rear Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-4, 5
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-3, 5 Right Rear Window Switch . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3, 4, 5
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3
8W - 60 - 2 8W-60 POWER WINDOWS XJ
LHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
28
25A
(8W-12-24)
8 C5
F81
12
TN
13 C201
33 C200
1 C307
F81 14TN
9 C1
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 UP
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 DOWN
3 LOCK
4 4 UNLOCK
3
5 C1 12 C1 3 C1 6 C1 8 C2 8 C1
Q16 Q26 Q1 Z1
14 14 14 14
BR/WT VT/WT YL BK
4
3 C306 S329
1 2 3 C303 (8W-15-17)
Q1 Z1
4 C1 3 C1 10 C1 14 12
PASSENGER YL BK
POWER 3
2 C307
LOCK/
Q11 Q21 WINDOW Q1 Z1
14 14 SWITCH 14 12
LB WT 1 UP YL BK
2 DOWN
3 LOCK S305 S309
4 UNLOCK (8W-15-17)
Q1 Q1 Z1
1 2 14 14 12
YL YL BK
3 C309 3 C304
9 C1 2 C1
Q12 Q22 Q1 Q1
14 14 14 14 G302
1 2 BR VT YL YL (8W-15-17)
DRIVER 1 2 6 6
POWER PASSENGER POWER LEFT POWER RIGHT
WINDOW POWER WINDOW REAR WINDOW REAR
MOTOR WINDOW SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH WINDOW
M FEED FEED
MOTOR SWITCH SWITCH
M (8W-60-4) (8W-60-4)
J998W-7 XJI06002
XJ 8W-60 POWER WINDOWS 8W - 60 - 3
RHD
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
28
25A
(8W-12-25)
1 C8
F81
14
TN
9 C1
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 UP
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 DOWN
3 LOCK
4 4 UNLOCK
3
3 C1 6 C1 5 C1 12 C1 8 C2 8 C1
Q1 Z1
Q11 Q21 Q16 Q26 14
14 14 14 14 14
YL BK
BR VT BR/WT VT/WT
7 8
C303 S319
(8W-15-20)
Q16 Q26 4 5
C303
14 14
BR/WT VT/WT Q14
14
C306 2 C307 YL
3 4
4 C1 3 C1 10 C1 S305
PASSENGER Z1
POWER 14
BK
LOCK/ Q1
Q1
WINDOW 14 14
S310
SWITCH YL YL
(8W-15-20)
1 UP Z1
2 DOWN 3 C309 3 C304 12
3 LOCK BK
4 UNLOCK Q1
1 2
14 G303
YL (8W-15-20)
6
9 C1 2 C1 POWER RIGHT
Q12 Q22 Q1 WINDOW REAR
14 14 14 SWITCH WINDOW
BR VT YL FEED
1 2 SWITCH
DRIVER 1 2 6 (8W-60-5)
POWER PASSENGER POWER LEFT
WINDOW POWER WINDOW REAR
MOTOR WINDOW SWITCH WINDOW
M FEED
MOTOR SWITCH
M (8W-60-5)
XJI06003 J998W-7
8W - 60 - 4 8W-60 POWER WINDOWS XJ
LHD
RUN-ACC F81 (8W-12-24)
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 UP
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 DOWN
3 LOCK
4 4 UNLOCK
3
4 C1 10 C1 2 C1 1 C1 8 C2 8 C1
Q1 Z1
14 14
YL BK
Q17 Q27 Q18 Q28 S329

14 14 14 14 (8W-15-17)
Z1
DB/WT RD/BK GY/BK DG/WT
12
BK
2 3
6 1 2 C307
5 C306
S309
Q17 Q27 Q18 Q28 Q1 (8W-15-17)
14 14 14 14 14 Z1
DB/WT RD/BK GY/BK DG/WT YL 12
BK
S305 G302
(8W-60-2) (8W-15-17)
Q1 Q1
14 14
YL YL
2 3 2 3
1 C309 1 C304
4 2 6 4 2 6
LEFT RIGHT
REAR REAR
WINDOW WINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH
1 UP 1 UP
2 DOWN 2 DOWN
1 2 1 2
1 5 1 5
Q13 Q23 Q14 Q24
14 14 14 14
DB RD/WT GY DG
1 2 1 2
LEFT RIGHT
REAR REAR
WINDOW WINDOW
MOTOR MOTOR
M M
J998W-7 XJI06004
XJ 8W-60 POWER WINDOWS 8W - 60 - 5
RHD
RUN-ACC F81 (8W-12-25)
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 UP
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 DOWN
3 LOCK
4 4 UNLOCK
3
4 C1 10 C1 2 C1 1 C1 8 C2 8 C1
Q1 Z1
14 14
YL BK
S319
(8W-15-20)
Q17 Q27 Q18 Q28
14 14 14 14 Z1
DB/WT RD/BK GY/BK DG/WT 14
BK
6 1 2 4 5
3 C303
Q17 Q27 Q18 Q28 Q1
14 14 14 14 14
DB/WT RD/BK GY/BK DG/WT YL
S305
(8W-60-3)
Q1 Q1 Z1
14 14 14
YL YL BK
2 3 2 3
1 C309 1 C304
4 2 6 4 2 6
LEFT RIGHT
REAR REAR
WINDOW WINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH
1 UP 1 UP S310
2 DOWN 2 DOWN (8W-15-20)
1 2 1 2
1 5 1 5
Q13 Q23 Q14 Q24 Z1
14 14 14 14 12
DB RD/WT GY DG BK
1 2 1 2
LEFT RIGHT
REAR REAR
WINDOW WINDOW
MOTOR MOTOR G303
M M (8W-15-20)
XJI06005 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 61 POWER DOOR LOCKS 8W - 61 - 1
8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS

Circuit Breaker 28 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3 Left Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-4, 5
Driver Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-4, 5 Liftgate Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-4, 5
Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3 Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3
Fuse 15 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3 Passenger Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-4, 5
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2 Passenger Power Lock/Window
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3, 4, 5
G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-3 Right Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-4, 5
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-61-2, 3, 4, 5
8W - 61 - 2 8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS XJ
LHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14) OVERHEAD
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-15) DOOR MODULE
JUNCTION UNLOCK DOOR (8W-49-4)
BLOCK RELAY LOCK
(8W-12-2) CONTROL CONTROL
FUSE CIRCUIT
15 BREAKER 5 11
25A 28
P55 P59
(8W-12-18) 25A
20 20
(8W-12-24)
DB LB/RD
9
8 C301
P55 P59
9 C9 1 C8 20 20
DB/PK LB/RD
F35 F81
16 14 3 4 C300
RD TN
P55 P59
20 20
DB/PK LB/RD
5 C2 4 C2 2 C2 1 C2
FUSED FUSED DOOR DOOR
PASSENGER
B(+) IGNITION UNLOCK LOCK POWER
DOOR DOOR SWITCH RELAY CONTROL LOCK/
LOCK LOCK OUTPUT KEY-IN CONTROL
(RUN-ACC)
WINDOW
SWITCH SWITCH IGNITION SWITCH
OUTPUT OUTPUT SWITCH
(LOCK) (UNLOCK) SENSE GROUND
3 C2 7 C2 8 C2 6 C2
P35 P36 G26 Z1
20 20 20 14
OR/VT PK/VT LB BK
2
1 C300 S319
9 5 C300 (8W-15-13)
23 C201 Z1
32
31 C200 G26 16
20 BK
P35 P36
LB 11 C9
20 20
OR/VT PK/VT JUNCTION
7 BLOCK
6 C305 29 C201 (8W-12-2)
P35 P36
18 18 G26
OR/VT PK/VT 20 S5 C4
7 C1 11 C1 LB
DRIVER Z1
POWER S210 14
LOCK/ (8W-10-16) BK
WINDOW G26
20
SWITCH LB
S314
(8W-15-13)
5 C2
Z1 14 C201
14
BK
1 C2
IGNITION Z1
KEY-IN 14
S329 IGNITION SWITCH BK
(8W-15-17) SWITCH (8W-10-14)
Z1
SENSE (8W-10-15)
12 S208
BK (8W-15-14)
3 C307 Z1 (8W-15-15)
14
S309 BK
(8W-15-17)
G302 G107
(8W-15-17) (8W-15-14)
J998W-7 XJI06102
(8W-15-15)
XJ 8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS 8W - 61 - 3
RHD
BATT A7 (8W-10-19) RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-24) (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION OVERHEAD
BLOCK DOOR MODULE
(8W-12-2) UNLOCK DOOR (8W-49-5)
FUSE CIRCUIT
RELAY LOCK
15 BREAKER
CONTROL CONTROL
25A 28
(8W-12-19) 25A 5 11
(8W-12-25) P55 P59
20 20
DB LB/RD
9
7 C5 8 C5 8 C301
F35 F81 P55 P59
16 12 20 20
RD TN DB/PK LB/RD
12 C204 3 C202 22 21
C203
F35 F81 P55 P59
16 12 20 20
RD TN DB/PK LB/RD
1 C306 1 C307 12 3 C305

F35 F81 P55 P59
16 14 20 20
RD TN DB LB/RD
5 C2 4 C2 2 C2 1 C2
FUSED FUSED DOOR DOOR
PASSENGER
B(+) IGNITION UNLOCK LOCK POWER
SWITCH RELAY CONTROL LOCK/
OUTPUT CONTROL
DOOR DOOR
(RUN-ACC)
WINDOW
LOCK LOCK KEY-IN SWITCH
SWITCH SWITCH IGNITION
OUTPUT OUTPUT SWITCH
(LOCK) (UNLOCK) SENSE GROUND
7 C2 3 C2 8 C2 6 C2
P35 P36 G26
18 18 20
OR/VT PK/VT LB
6 7 C305 2 C306
P35 P36 20 C203 Z1
20 20
OR/VT PK/VT
S210 14
(8W-10-16) BK
23 24 C204 G26
P35 P36 20
20 20 LB S325
OR/VT PK/VT 1 C2 (8W-15-18)
1 C300 KEY-IN
IGNITION Z1
2
P35 P36 IGNITION SWITCH 12
18 18 SWITCH (8W-10-14) BK
OR/VT PK/VT SENSE (8W-10-15)
7 C1 11 C1 3 C307
DRIVER
POWER 5 C303 Z1
LOCK/ 12
Z1
WINDOW BK
14
SWITCH BK
5 C2 S309
Z1 S310 (8W-15-18)
16 (8W-15-20) Z1
BK Z1 Z1 12
14 12 BK
S319 BK BK
(8W-15-20)
G303 G302
(8W-15-20) (8W-15-18)
XJI06103 J998W-7
8W - 61 - 4 8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS XJ
LHD
PASSENGER
POWER
DOOR DOOR
LOCK UNLOCK LOCK/
DRIVER DRIVER WINDOW
5 C1 1 C1 SWITCH
P33 P34
16 16
OR/BK PK/BK
S317 S316
(8W-12-31) (8W-12-31)
P33 P33 P34 P34
16 16 16 16
OR/BK OR/BK PK/BK PK/BK
2 1
PASSENGER
DOOR
LOCK
MOTOR
M
1 C9 12 C9
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
1 C7 5 C7
P33 P34
16 16
OR/BK PK/BK
S307
(8W-12-31)
S306
(8W-12-31)
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
2 1 C326
5 4 C305 5 4 C309 5 4 C304
2 1 C311
5 4 C310
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 2 1 2 1 2 B A
DRIVER LEFT RIGHT LIFTGATE
DOOR REAR REAR LOCK
LOCK DOOR DOOR MOTOR
MOTOR LOCK LOCK
M M M M
MOTOR MOTOR
J998W-7 XJI06104
XJ 8W-61 POWER DOOR LOCKS 8W - 61 - 5
RHD
PASSENGER
POWER
DOOR DOOR
LOCK UNLOCK LOCK/
DRIVER DRIVER WINDOW
5 C1 1 C1 SWITCH
P33 P34
16 16
OR/BK PK/BK
S323 S322
(8W-12-32) (8W-12-32)
P33 P33 P34 P34
16 16 16 16
OR/BK OR/BK PK/BK PK/BK
2 1
PASSENGER
DOOR
LOCK
MOTOR
M
5
4 C305
P33 P34
16 16
OR/BK PK/BK
S306
(8W-12-32)
S307
(8W-12-32)
P34 P33
16 16
PK/BK OR/BK
5 C7 1 C7
JUNCTION
P34 P33 BLOCK
16 16 (8W-12-2)
PK/BK OR/BK
2 1 C326 12 C9 1 C9
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33

16 16 16 16 16 16
PK/BK OR/BK PK/BK OR/BK PK/BK OR/BK
5 4 C304 2 1 C311
5 4 C309 5 4 C310
P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33 P34 P33

16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
1 2 1 2 B A 1 2
LEFT RIGHT LIFTGATE DRIVER
REAR REAR LOCK DOOR
DOOR DOOR MOTOR LOCK
LOCK LOCK MOTOR
M M M M
MOTOR MOTOR
XJI06105 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 62 POWER MIRRORS 8W - 62 - 1
8W-62 POWER MIRRORS

Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, G303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-5, 6, 7
5, 6, 7 Junction Block . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
Driver Power Mirror . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Passenger Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-4, 7, 8, 9
Fuse 18 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 5, 6 Power Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-8, 9
G107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-9 Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-3
G302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-62-2, 3, 4, 8
8W - 62 - 2 8W-62 POWER MIRRORS XJ
LHD EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
18
10A
(8W-12-18)
S4 C4
F83
18
YL/DG
44 C201
F83
18
YL/DG
39 C200
F83
18
YL/DG
3 C305
F83
18
YL/DG
3 C2
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 4 1 4 1 4 0 REST
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 3 1 LEFT
2 RIGHT
3 UP
4 DOWN
5 6 5 6 5 DRIVER MIRROR
6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 6 C2 1 C2
Z1
14 P76 P75 P71
BK 20 20 20
OR/YL DB/WT YL
S329
(8W-15-17)
Z1
12
3 5 1
BK
DRIVER
3 C307 POWER
Z1 M M
12 MIRROR
BK
S309 2 6 4
(8W-15-17)
Z1 P76 P76
12 20 20
BK OR/YL OR/YL
G302 S328
J998W-7 (8W-15-17) (8W-12-34) XJI06202
XJ 8W-62 POWER MIRRORS 8W - 62 - 3
BUILT-UP-EXPORT LHD FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
18
10A
(8W-12-18)
S4 C4
F83
18
YL/DG
44 C201
F83
18
YL/DG
39 C200
F83 F83
18 18
YL/DG YL/DG
1
3 C305 REAR
FUSED
F83 IGNITION FOG
18 SWITCH LAMP
YL/DG OUTPUT
(RUN-ACC)
RELAY
3 C2 (8W-51-8)
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 4 1 4 1 4 0 REST
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 3 1 LEFT
2 RIGHT
3 UP
4 DOWN
6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 6 C2 1 C2
Z1
14 P76 P75 P71
BK 20 20 20
OR/YL DB/WT YL
S329
(8W-15-17)
Z1
12
3 5 1
BK
DRIVER
3 C307 POWER
Z1 M M
12 MIRROR
BK
S309 2 6 4
(8W-15-17)
Z1 P76 P76
12 20 20
BK OR/YL OR/YL
G302 S328
XJI06203 (8W-15-17) (8W-12-34) J998W-7
LHD FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC F83 (8W-12-18)
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
0 REST
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 LEFT
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 3 2 RIGHT
0 3 UP
4 DOWN
5 DRIVER MIRROR
5 6 5 6 6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 4 C2 7 C2
Z1 P76 P74 P72
14 20 20 20
BK OR/YL DB YL/BK
S329 S328
(8W-15-17) (8W-12-34)
10 9 8
C305
Z1 P76 P74 P72

12 20 20 20
BK OR/YL DB YL/BK
3 C307 36 35 34
C200
Z1 P76 P74 P72
12 20 20 20
BK OR/YL DB YL/BK
S309 28 24 20 C201
(8W-15-17)
P76 P74 P72
Z1 20 20 20
12 OR/YL DB YL/BK
BK
2 C5 9 C5 10 C5
G302 JUNCTION
(8W-15-17) BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
10 C9 2 C9 6 C9
P76 P76 P74 P72
20 20 20 20
OR/YL OR/YL DB YL/BK
2 4 3 5 1
COMMON COMMON DRIVER PASSENGER
POWER POWER
MIRROR M M MIRROR
(8W-62-2)
(8W-62-3)
2 6 4
P76 P76 P76
20 20 20
OR/YL OR/YL OR/YL
S318
(8W-12-34)
J998W-7 XJI06204
RHD GAS FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
18
10A
(8W-12-19)
S4 C4
F83
18
YL/DG
BUILT-
UP-EXPORT EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
S232
(8W-12-19)
F83
18
YL/DG
3 C300
S352
(8W-12-19)
3 C2
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 4 1 4 1 4 0 REST
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 3 1 LEFT
2 RIGHT
3 UP
4 DOWN
6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 4 C2 7 C2
Z1
16 P76 P74 P72
BK 20 20 20
OR/YL DB YL/BK
S319
(8W-15-20)
Z1
14
BK
5 C303 3 5 1
DRIVER
Z1
14
POWER
M M MIRROR
BK
S310
2 6 4
(8W-15-20)
Z1 P76 P76
12 20 20
BK OR/YL OR/YL
G303 S318
(8W-15-20) (8W-12-35)
XJI06205 J998W-7
RHD DIESEL FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
18
10A
(8W-12-19)
S4 C4
F83
18
YL/DG
S232
(8W-12-19)
3 C300
F83
18
YL/DG
S352
(8W-12-19)
3 C2
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
1 4 1 4 1 4 0 REST
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 0 3 1 LEFT
2 RIGHT
3 UP
4 DOWN
6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 4 C2 7 C2
Z1
16 P76 P74 P72
BK 20 20 20
OR/YL DB YL/BK
S319
(8W-15-20)
Z1
14 3 5 1
BK DRIVER
5 C303 POWER
M M MIRROR
Z1
14 2 6 4
BK
S310
(8W-15-20)
Z1 P76 P76
12 20 20
BK OR/YL OR/YL
G303 S318
(8W-15-20) (8W-12-35)
J998W-7 XJI06206
RHD FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC F83 (8W-12-19)
DRIVER
POWER
LOCK/
WINDOW
SWITCH
0 REST
1 4 1 4 1 4 1 LEFT
2 0 3 2 0 3 2 3 2 RIGHT
0 3 UP
4 DOWN
5 DRIVER MIRROR
5 6 5 6 6 PASSENGER MIRROR
5 C2 2 C2 6 C2 1 C2
Z1 P76 P75 P71
16 20 20 20
BK OR/YL DB/WT YL/LB
S319
(8W-15-20) S318
(8W-12-35)
P76
20
Z1 OR/YL
14
BK
10 C9 2 C9 6 C9
JUNCTION
BLOCK
5 C303 (8W-12-2)
Z1
14 2 C5 9 C5 10 C5
BK
P76 P74 P72
20 20 20
S310 OR/YL DB YL/BK
(8W-15-20)
19 18
Z1 20 C204
12
BK P76 P75 P71
20 20 20
G303 OR/YL DB/RD YL
(8W-15-20)
10 9 8 C305
P76 P75 P71

20 20 20
OR/YL DB/RD YL
P76 P76 3 5 1
20 20 PASSENGER
OR/YL OR/YL POWER
2 4 M M MIRROR
COMMON COMMON DRIVER
POWER 2 6 4
MIRROR
(8W-62-5) P76 P76
(8W-62-6) 20 20
OR/YL OR/YL
S328
(8W-12-35)
XJI06207 J998W-7
LHD EXCEPT FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC F83 (8W-12-18)

POWER
4 MIRROR
1
SWITCH
1 RIGHT
2 UP
3 LEFT
4 DOWN
2 3
1 3 4 7 8 5 6
Z1 P74 P72 P75 P71 P76 P91

20 20 20 20 20 20 20
BK DB YL/BK DB/WT YL OR/YL WT/BK
S329 2 5 1
(8W-15-17) DRIVER
POWER
M M MIRROR
Z1
12 2 C9 6 C9
BK 3 6 4
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2) P91 P76
20 20
WT/BK OR/YL
9 C5 10 C5
P74 P72 10 C9 7 C9
3 C307 JUNCTION
20 20
DB YL/BK BLOCK
Z1 (8W-12-2)
12 24 20 C201
BK
C200 2 C5 3 C5
35 34
P76 P91
P74 P72 20 20
20 20 OR/YL WT/BK
DB YL/BK
S309
(8W-15-17) 28 67 C201
9 8 C305
Z1 36 3 C200
P74 P72
12 20 20 P76 P91
BK DB YL/BK 20 20
2 5 1 OR/YL WT/BK
PASSENGER
POWER 10 13 C305
M M MIRROR
P76 P91
20 20
OR/YL WT/BK
3 6 4
G302
(8W-15-17)
J998W-7 XJI06208
RHD EXCEPT FULL OPTIONS
RUN-ACC F83 (8W-12-19)
POWER
4 MIRROR
1
SWITCH
1 RIGHT
2 UP
3 LEFT
4 DOWN
2 3
1 7 8 4 3 5 6
Z1 P75 P71
20 20 20 P72 P74
BK DB/WT YL/LB 20 20
S360 YL/BK DB
(8W-15-13) P76 P91
20 20
1 5 2
Z1 OR/YL WT/BK
DRIVER
16
BK POWER
M M MIRROR
11 C9 2 C9 6 C9
JUNCTION
4 6 3
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
S5 C4 9 C5 10 C5
Z1 P74 P72
14 20 20
BK DB YL/BK P76 P91 10 C9 7 C9
19 18 20 20
C204 OR/YL WT/BK
JUNCTION
BLOCK
P74 P72 (8W-12-2)
20 20
DB YL/BK
2 C5 3 C5
P76 P91
9 8 C305 20 20
S208 OR/YL WT/BK
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
P75 P71
20 C204 13 C203
20 20 P76 P91
DB/WT YL 20 20
OR/YL WT/BK
2 5 1
Z1 PASSENGER S359
14 POWER (8W-12-33)
BK M M MIRROR
10 13 C305
3 6 4 P76 P91
20 20
G107 OR/YL WT/BK
(8W-15-14)
(8W-15-15)
XJI06209 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 63 POWER SEAT 8W - 63 - 1
8W-63 POWER SEAT

Circuit Breaker 29 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 6 Left Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4
Forward/Rearward Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3 Left Power Seat Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2
Front Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3 Left Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 6
Fuse 18 (JB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4, 6 Rear Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3
G305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3 Right Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
G306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 4, 5, 6 Right Heated Seat Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
Heated Seat Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4, 6 Right Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-2, 3, 4, 6 Right Power Seat Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3
Left Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5 Right Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-3, 6
Left Heated Seat Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5 Seat Heat Interface Module . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4, 5, 6
8W - 63 - 2 8W-63 POWER SEAT XJ
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
29
25A
(8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27)
2 C6
F37
14
RD/LB
2 C316
HEATED
OTHER SEATS
F37 F37
14 14
RD/LB RD/LB
S356
(8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27)
1 C362
A
LEFT
POWER
SEAT
SWITCH
1 FRONT DOWN
2 FRONT UP
3 REAR DOWN
4 REAR UP
5 FORWARD
6 REARWARD
1 2 3 4 5 6
N M E J L K B
2 C362
HEATED
SEATS OTHER
P21 P19 P13 P11 P15 P17
14 14 14 14 14 14
Z1 Z1
RD/LG YL/LG RD/WT YL/WT YL/LB RD/LB
14 14
BK BK
G306
(8W-15-22) S350
(8W-15-22)
LEFT Z1
FRONT REAR FORWARD/ POWER 14
M MOTOR M MOTOR M REARWARD SEAT BK
MOTOR MOTORS
G305
(8W-15-22)
J998W-7 XJI06302
XJ 8W-63 POWER SEAT 8W - 63 - 3
BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
29
25A
(8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27)
2 C6
F37
14
RD/LB
2 C316
HEATED
OTHER SEATS
S356
(8W-12-26)
F37 F37 F37 (8W-12-27)
14 14 14
RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB
1 C362
F37
14
RD/LB
1 C363 A
FUSED LEFT
F37
14
HEADLAMP POWER
SWITCH SEAT
RD/LB
OUTPUT
SWITCH
(8W-63-2)
B
RIGHT
POWER
SEAT
SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 FRONT UP
2 FRONT DOWN
3 REAR UP
4 REAR DOWN
N M J E K L A 5 FORWARD
6 REARWARD
2 C363
P20 P18 P12 P10 P14 P16
HEATED
14 14 14 14 14 14
SEATS OTHER
RD/LG YL/LG RD/WT YL/WT YL/LB RD/LB
Z1 Z1
14 14
BK BK
G306 S350
(8W-15-22) (8W-15-22)
Z1
14
RIGHT BK
FRONT REAR FORWARD/ POWER
M MOTOR M MOTOR M REARWARD SEAT G305
MOTOR MOTORS (8W-15-22)
XJI06303 J998W-7
HEATED SEATS
RUN-ACC A31 (8W-10-14)
(8W-10-15)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE
18
10A
(8W-12-18)
(8W-12-19)
S4 C4
RHD LHD
F83 F83
18 18
YL/DG YL/DG
3 C300 44 C201 FUSED HEATED

IGNITION SEAT
F83 F83 SWITCH RELAY
18 18 OUTPUT (8W-63-6)
YL/DG YL/DG (RUN-ACC)
4
S352 39 C200
(8W-12-19) F83
18
1 C324 S351 YL/DG
(8W-12-18)
1 C316 11 C329
F83 F83
18 18
YL/DG YL/DG
S353
4 4
LEFT RIGHT
HEATED HEATED
2 1 SEAT 1 2 SEAT
SWITCH SWITCH
1 HIGH 1 HIGH
2 LOW 2 LOW
3 1 5 6 6 5 1 3
Z1 P137 P139 P133 P134 P140 P138 Z1
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
BK VT VT/WT TN/DG TN/RD VT/BK VT/LG BK
3 5 1 2 6 4
S355 C329 S355
(8W-15-22) P137 P139 P133 P134 P140 P138 (8W-15-22)
Z1 18 18 18 18 18 18
18 VT VT/WT TN/DG TN/RD VT/BK VT/LG
BK
G306
12 14 1 9 11 10 (8W-15-22)
LEFT LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT RIGHT SEAT
G306 SEAT SEAT SEAT SEAT SEAT SEAT HEAT
(8W-15-22) LOW HIGH HEATER HEATER HIGH LOW INTERFACE
HEAT HEAT SWITCH SWITCH HEAT HEAT
LED LED MUX MUX LED LED
MODULE
DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER DRIVER
J998W-7 XJI06304
XJ 8W-63 POWER SEAT 8W - 63 - 5
HEATED SEATS
SEAT
HEAT
LEFT LEFT RIGHT RIGHT INTERFACE
HEAT HEAT HEAT HEAT MODULE
ELEMENT SENSE SENSOR SENSE ELEMENT
OUTPUT INPUT FEED INPUT OUTPUT GROUND
5 8 2 7 3 13
P87 P143 P144 P86 Z2

18 18 18 18 18
BK/OR BK/DG BK/YL PK/BK BK/LG
7 9 C329 13 C329
P87 P143 P141
18 18 18 Z2
BK/OR BK/DG TN/LB 18
BK/LG
3 2
C332
P87 P143
18 18 G306
BK/OR BK/DG (8W-15-22)
A D D A
LEFT RIGHT
HEATED HEATED
SEAT SEAT
CUSHION CUSHION
B C C B
P88 P141 P141 P89

18 18 18 18
BR/PK TN/LB TN/LB BR
1 C332
A P141 A
18
LEFT TN/LB
RIGHT
HEATED HEATED
SEAT SEAT
8 C329
BACK BACK
B P141 B
18
Z1 TN/LB Z1
18 18
BK BK
S357
4 C332 S354
(8W-15-22)
12 C329
Z1 Z1
18 18
BK BK
S355
(8W-15-22)
Z1
18
BK
G306
(8W-15-22)
XJI06305 J998W-7
HEATED SEATS
ST-RUN A21 (8W-10-16) BATT A7 (8W-10-19)
(8W-10-24)
JUNCTION
BLOCK
(8W-12-2)
FUSE CIRCUIT
18 BREAKER
10A 29
(8W-12-18) 25A
(8W-12-19) (8W-12-26)
(8W-12-27)
S4 C4 2 C6
RHD LHD
F83 F83 F37

18 18 14
YL/DG YL/DG RD/LB
3 C300 44 C201
S352 F83
18
(8W-12-19)
F83 YL/DG
18
YL/DG
39 C200
F83
1 C324 18
F83 YL/DG
18
YL/DG S351
(8W-12-18)
F83
18
YL/DG
1 2 C316
F83 F37
18 14
YL/DG RD/LB
S353 S356
(8W-63-4) (8W-12-26)
F83 F37 F37 F37 (8W-12-27)
18 14 14 14
YL/DG RD/LB RD/LB RD/LB
10
11 C329 1 C363
F83 F37
1 C362
18 14 F37 B
YL/DG RD/LB 14 FUSED RIGHT
4 8 RD/LB B(+) POWER
HEATED SEAT
A
SEAT GROUND SWITCH
FUSED LEFT
RELAY A (8W-63-3)
B(+) POWER
Z1 SEAT
18 6 2 GROUND SWITCH 2 C363
BK
Z1 F235 F235 B (8W-63-2)
S354 18 16 16
(8W-15-22) BK RD RD
2 C362
12 C329 4 6 Z1 Z1
S355 FUSED FUSED SEAT 14 14
(8W-15-22) B(+) B(+) HEAT BK BK
INTERFACE
G306 G306
(8W-15-22) MODULE (8W-15-22)
J998W-7 XJI06306
XJ 8W - 70 SPLICE INFORMATION 8W - 70 - 1
8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION

S100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-13 S221 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
S101 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-23 S222 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-33-2, 3
S102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12 S225 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12
S103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12 S226 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-4
S104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10 S227 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16
S105 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-11, 12 S229 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-4
S106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-35 S230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-35
S107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-2 S232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-19
S108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-9 S233 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7
S109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-29 S234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-20
S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-29 S235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-10, 12
S111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-2 S236 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7
S112 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-7 S238 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
S113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-30 S239 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
S114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-2 S301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-33, 34
S115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4 S302 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33
S116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-14 S304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30
S118 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-20-2, 3 S305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-60-2, 3
S120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-21-2 S306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
S130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-14, 15 S307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31, 32
S131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20 S308 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-10, 11
S132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 11 S309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
S133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-7 S310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
S134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 S311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11
S135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25 S312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-4
S136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-15 S313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18
S137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18, 29 S314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
S138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-2, 3 S315 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8
S139 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-16, 31 S316 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31
S140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-31-7 S317 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-31
S141 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-5, 6, 8, 11 S318 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-34, 35
S142 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5 S319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13, 20
S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-15 S320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-7, 8
S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18 S321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-7, 8
S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18 S322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-32
S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 S323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-32
S147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32 S325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-18
S148 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-23 S326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6
S149 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-70-3 S327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-6
S150 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-3 S328 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-34, 35
S151 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18 S329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17
S152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-26 S330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S153 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-18 S331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-47-5
S156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-34 S334 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-21
S157 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-11 S335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
S158 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-7, 10, 12 S336 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-3
S159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 S337 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
S161 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-5 S338 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-20
S200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 S339 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-54-2
S201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30 S340 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11
S202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-16 S341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-17, 18
S203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-32, 33 S342 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
S204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-29 S344 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
S205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-53-4, 5, 6, 7 S345 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-30
S206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-10, 11 S346 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-30-17, 18
S207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-16 S347 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 28
S208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-14, 15 S348 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-19, 20
S209 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-5, 6 S349 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-22
S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-16 S350 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
S211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-14, 15 S351 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-18
S212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-52-7, 8 S352 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-19
S213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-50-5, 6, 7, 8 S353 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-4
S214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-25, 28 S354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
S215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-8, 9 S355 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-22
S216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-12, 13 S356 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-26, 27
S217 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21 S357 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-63-5
S218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27, 36 S359 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-33
S219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-12-21, 22 S360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-15-13
S220 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-51-11 S361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-10-26, 27
8W - 70 - 2 8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION XJ
GAS
FUEL CLOCKSPRING
PUMP (8W-30-10)
MODULE
(8W-30-3)
(8W-30-4)
4
3 C1
K167 BATTERY
20 RHD LHD TEMPERATURE
BR/YL
SENSOR
K4 K4
20 20 (4.0L)
LHD RHD (8W-30-10)
BK/LB BK/RD 2
30 C200 17 C204 TRANSMISSION

K167
CONTROL 20
MODULE BR/YL
K167
(4.0L) B6
C100
(8W-31-5) F18
20 16
BR/YL K167
K167
B3 20
C100 20
BR/YL
F12 BR/YL
S138
INTAKE MANIFOLD ENGINE
AIR ABSOLUTE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SENSOR SENSOR
1 (8W-30-7) 1 (8W-30-9) 1 (8W-30-7)
CRANKSHAFT THROTTLE OXYGEN

POSITION POSITION SENSOR
SENSOR SENSOR 1/1
(8W-30-5) (8W-30-7) UPSTREAM
2 1 (8W-30-8)
3
K167 K167 K167 K167 K167 K167

20 20 20 20 20 20
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
S114
POWERTRAIN OXYGEN ENGINE
CONTROL SENSOR OIL
MODULE 1/2 PRESSURE K167
(8W-30-3) DOWNSTREAM SENSOR 20
(8W-30-4) (8W-30-8) (8W-30-10) BR/YL
A4 C1 3
3
K167
18
BR/YL
3 C107
CAMSHAFT VEHICLE K167
POSITION SPEED 20
K167
SENSOR SENSOR BR/YL
20
(8W-30-5) (8W-30-9) BR/YL RHD
2 2 LHD
K167
18 K167 K167 K167
BR/YL 18 18 18
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
S111
J998W-7 XJI07002
XJ 8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION 8W - 70 - 3
DIESEL
LEFT RIGHT
SPEED SPEED
CONTROL CONTROL
SWITCH SWITCH
1 (8W-33-3) 1 (8W-33-3)
S222
K167 FUEL ENGINE
20 PUMP COOLANT
BR/YL MODULE TEMPERATURE
A C2
(8W-30-23) SENSOR
4 2 NO. 1
CLOCKSPRING (8W-30-26)
(8W-33-3)
PEDAL ENGINE
POSITION CONTROL
K4
SENSOR 18 MODULE
3 C1 (8W-30-25) BK/LB (8W-30-23)
RHD LHD TURBO
3
BOOST
A61 C1
K167 K4 PRESSURE
20 20 SENSOR
BR/YL BK/RD
1 (8W-30-24)
B6
C100 9 C120
F18 K4
20
K4 K4 K4 BK/LB K4 K4
20 20 20 20 20
BK/LB BK/LB BK/LB BK/LB BK/LB
S149
FUEL ENGINE
LEVEL COOLANT
SENSOR TEMPERATURE
BATTERY
(8W-30-28) SENSOR
TEMPERATURE
4 2 NO. 2
(8W-30-26)
SENSOR
(8W-30-28)
K167 12 C120
20 2
BR/YL ENGINE
OIL
LHD RHD PRESSURE VEHICLE
SENSOR SPEED
(8W-30-26) SENSOR
30 C200 17 C204 3 (8W-30-26)
LOW
K167 2
COOLANT
18
BR/YL SWITCH K167
K167 K167 (8W-30-28) 18
20 WATER 18 BR/YL
POWERTRAIN
BR/YL IN BR/YL 2 CONTROL
FUEL 8 C111 MODULE
B3 SENSOR (8W-30-26)
C100 K167
F12 (8W-30-28) 3 C116 20
2
BR/YL
A4 C1
K167 K167 K167 K167 K167 K167

20 20 20 20 20 18
BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL BR/YL
S138
RHD
8W - 70 - 4 8W-70 SPLICE INFORMATION XJ
POWERTRAIN ENGINE CRANKSHAFT THROTTLE

CONTROL OIL POSITION POSITION
MODULE PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR
(8W-30-5) SENSOR (8W-30-5) (8W-30-7)
1 (8W-30-10)
A17 C1 3 3
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
CAMSHAFT SENSOR
POSITION 3 (8W-30-9)
K7
SENSOR 18
K7 (8W-30-5) OR K7 K7 K7
18 3 20 20 20
OR OR OR OR
K7
18
OR
S115
(GAS)
TURN
SIGNAL/
HAZARD
SWITCH
3 (8W-52-2)
(8W-52-3)
L62 (8W-52-4)
20
BR/RD
LHD RHD
25 C200 7 C204
L62 L62
20 20
BR/RD BR/RD
S312
L62 L62
20 20
BR/RD BR/RD
1 C321 8 C323
L62 L62
18 20
BR/RD BK/RD
2 1
RIGHT TRAILER
TURN TOW
SIGNAL RIGHT
LAMP TURN
(8W-52-7) RELAY
(8W-52-8) (8W-54-3)
J998W-7 XJI07004
XJ 8W - 80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS 8W - 80 - 1
8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS

A/C Compressor Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-4 C325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-29
A/C Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-4 C326 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-29
A/C High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-4 C327 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-29
A/C Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-4, 5 C329 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-30
Airbag Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-5 C330 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-30
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . 8W-80-5 C331 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-30
Back-Up Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-5, 6 C332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Battery Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-5 C362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Blend Door Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-6 C363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Brake Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-6 Camshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
Brake Warning Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-6 Cargo Lamp/Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-31
C100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-7, 8, 9, 10 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
C106 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-11 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
C107 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-12, 13 Clockspring-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
C108 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 Clockspring-C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
C109 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 Clockspring-C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-32
C111 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 Clutch Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-33
C114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-14 Clutch Interlock Switch Jumper . . . . . . . . 8W-80-33
C115 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 Combination Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-33
C116 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-34
C120 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-15 Controller Anti-Lock Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-34
C200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-16 Crankshaft Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-35
C201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-17, 18 Data Link Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-35
C202 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-19 Daytime Running Lamp Module . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
C203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-19 Diode Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
C204 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-20 Dome Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
C205 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-20 Dome Lamps Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-36
C206 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-20, 21 Driver Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-21 Driver Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-37
C208 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-21 Driver Power Lock/Window Switch . . . 8W-80-37, 38
C300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-21 Driver Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-38
C301 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-22 Driver Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39
C303 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-22 Duty Cycle Evap/Purge Solenoid . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39
C304 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-23 Electronic Vacuum Modulator . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-39
C305 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-23, 24 Engine Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-40, 41
C306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-24 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . 8W-80-42
C307 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Engine Oil Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-42
C309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Evap Leak Detection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43
C310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Extended Idle Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43
C311 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Front Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43
C312 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Front Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-43
C313 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-25 Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-44
C314 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-26 Fuel Injector No. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-44, 45
C319 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-27 Fuel Injector No. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45
C320 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-27 Fuel Injector No. 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-45
C321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-27 Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46
C322 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-27, 28 Fuel Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46
C323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-28 G Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46
C324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-28 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-46
8W - 80 - 2 8W - 80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS XJ

Glow Plug Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Passenger Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64
Headlamp Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Passenger Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64
Headlamp Delay Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-47 Passenger Power Lock/Window Switch . . . 8W-80-65
Headlamp Leveling Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-48 Passenger Power Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-66
Headlamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-48 Passenger Power Window Motor . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67
Heated Seat Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-49 Pedal Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67
Heater Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-4 Power Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-67, 68
HVAC Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-49 Power Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68
Idle Air Control Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-49 Power Antenna Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-68, 69
Ignition Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-50 Power Mirror Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-50 Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-51 Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . 8W-80-69
Intake Air Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-52 Powertrain Control
Junction Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-52, 53, 54, 55 Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 75
Left Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-55 PRNDL Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Left City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56 Radiator Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Left Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-76
Left Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56 Rear Fog Lamp Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Left Front Door Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56 Rear Fog Lamp Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Left Front Door Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-56 Rear Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . 8W-80-57 Rear Window Defogger Switch . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Left Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . 8W-80-57 Rear Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-77
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . . 8W-80-57 Rear Wiper/Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Left Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . . 8W-80-57 Right Back-Up Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Left Front Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58 Right City Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Left Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58 Right Courtesy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Left Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58 Right Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-78
Left Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58 Right Front Door Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-79
Left Heated Seat Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-58 Right Front Door Tweeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-79
Left Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 1. 8W-80-79
Left Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59 Right Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp No. 2. 8W-80-79
Left Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 1 . . . . 8W-80-79
Left Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59 Right Front Turn Signal Lamp No. 2 . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-59 Right Front Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Rear Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60 Right Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Rear Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60 Right Headlamp Leveling Motor . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Rear Window Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60 Right Heated Seat Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-60 Right Heated Seat Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-80
Left Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61 Right Heated Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Left Soundbar Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61 Right Power Seat Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Left Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61 Right Rear Door Jamb Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Left Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-61 Right Rear Door Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Left Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62 Right Rear Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62 Right Rear Wheel Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Liftgate Lock Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62 Right Rear Window Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Liftgate Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-62 Right Rear Window Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-81
Low Coolant Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63 Right Repeater Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor . . . . . . 8W-80-63 Right Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Needle Movement Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63 Right Soundbar Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-82
Overhead Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63 Right Speed Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Oxygen Sensor 1/1 Upstream . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-63 Right Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Oxygen Sensor 1/2 Downstream . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Right Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Park/Neutral Position Switch . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Seat Belt Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-83
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-64 Seat Heat Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84
XJ 8W - 80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS 8W - 80 - 3

Sentry Key Immobilizer Module . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84 Transmission Control Module . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Shift Lock Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84 Transmission Range Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Tell Tale Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-84 Turbo Boost Pressure Sensor . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-87
Throttle Position Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85 Turn Signal/Hazard Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-88
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid . . . . . . . 8W-80-85 Underhood Lamp/Mercury Switch . . . . . . . 8W-80-88
Trailer Tow Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85 Vehicle Speed Control Servo . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-88
Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85 Vehicle Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-88, 89
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-85 Washer Fluid Level Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Transfer Case Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86 Water In Fuel Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Transfer Case Switch Illumination . . . . . . 8W-80-86 Windshield Washer Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
Transmission Control Assembly . . . . . . . . 8W-80-86 Wipe/Wash Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8W-80-89
8W - 80 - 4 8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS XJ
BLACK
1 2
CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION
1 C3 14DB/BK A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z1 16BK GROUND
A/C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH
(DIESEL)

BLACK 1 Z8 12BK/VT GROUND
2 C7 12BK/TN HIGH SPEED BLOWER MOTOR
3 C6 14LB M2 BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER
7 1 4 C5 14LG M1 BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER
5 C4 14TN LOW SPEED BLOWER MOTOR DRIVER
A/C-HEATER 6 C90 20LG A/C SWITCH SENSE
CONTROL E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
7
OR E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
HEATER
CONTROL
GRAY
2 1
1 C21 20DB/PK A/C SWITCH SENSE
2 C22 20DB/WT PRESSURE SWITCH OUTPUT
A/C HIGH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(DIESEL)

1 2
1 C22 18DB/WT A/C SWITCH SENSE
A/C HIGH
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(GAS)
1 2 CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
A/C LOW
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(DIESEL)
A/C ONLY
RHD
J998W-7 XJI08004
XJ 8W-80 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS 8W - 80 - 5

1 2 1 C21 20DB/PK A/C SWITCH SENSE
2 C90 20LG A/C SWITCH SENSE
A/C LOW
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(GAS)

1 R45 18DG/LB DRIVER AIRBAG LINE 1
2 R43 18BK/LB DRIVER AIRBAG LINE 2
3 - -
YELLOW - -
4
5 R42 18BK/YL PASSENGER AIRBAG LINE 2
1 12 6 R44 18DG/YL PASSENGER AIRBAG LINE 1
7 - -
8 - -
9 - -
10 Z6 18BK/PK GROUND
11 22
10 Z6 18BK/YL GROUND
11 - -
AIRBAG 12 - -
CONTROL 13 - -
MODULE 14 - -
15 - -
16 - -
17 F23 18DB/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
18 D2 18WT/BK CCD BUS(-)
19 D1 18VT/BR CCD BUS(+)
20 F14 18LG/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
BLACK

1 G31 20VT/LG AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
AMBIENT AIR 2 G32 20BK/LB SENSOR GROUND
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
BLACK
A B CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

A L10 18BR/LG BACK UP LAMP FEED
BACK-UP LAMP B F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
SWITCH
(DIESEL)
FULL OPTIONS
BASE
XJI08005 J998W-7
BLACK

A F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
BACK-UP LAMP B L10 18BR/LG BACK-UP LAMP FEED
SWITCH
(GAS)
BLACK

1 2 1 K118 18PK/YL BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
BATTERY 2 K167 20BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(4.0L, GAS
DIESEL)
NATURAL
1 - -
5 1 2 Z1 20BK GROUND
3 C36 20RD/WT BLEND DOOR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
BLEND DOOR 3 C36 18RD/WT BLEND DOOR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
ACTUATOR 4 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
5 - -

GRAY
1 K29 18WT/PK BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
2 Z1 18BK GROUND
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 V32 20YL/RD SPEED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
3 V32 18YL/RD SPEED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
4 V30 20DB/RD SPEED CONTROL BRAKE SWITCH OUTPUT
BRAKE LAMP 5 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
SWITCH 6 F32 20PK/DB FUSED B(+)
BLACK
1 2

1 G9 20GY/BK RED BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR DRIVER
2 G99 20GY/WT RED BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR DRIVER
BRAKE WARNING
PRESSURE SWITCH
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI08006
CAV CIRCUIT CAV CIRCUIT

A1 Z1 18BK A1 Z1 18BK
A2 G106 20BK/WT A2 G106 20BK/WT
A3 G107 20BK/RD A3 G107 20BK/RD
A4 L39 20LB A4 L39 20LB
A5 L139 20VT A5 L139 20VT
A6 C90 20LG A6 C90 20LG
A6 C90 18LG A6 C90 18LG
A7 - A7 -
A8 - A8 -
A9 - A9 -
A10 - A10 -
A11 - A11 -
BLACK A12 BLACK A12
- -
A13 - A13 -
E1 F6
F6 E1 A14 - A14 -
F12 E7 E7 F12
A15 - A15 -
F18 E13 E13 F18
A16 - A16 -
C1 D2
D2 C1 A17 - A17 -
C3 D4
D4 C3
A18 - C5 D6 A18 -
D6 C5
B1 - B1 -
A1 B6
B6 A1 B2 - B2 -
A7 B12
B12 A7 B3 - B18 B3 -
A13
B18 A13 B4 - B4 -
B5 - B5 -
B6 - B6 -
C100 B7 - C100 B7 -
(LHD) B8 - (LHD) B8 -
B9 - B9 -
B10 - B10 -
B11 - B11 -
B12 - B12 -
B13 - B13 -
B14 - B14 -
B15 - B15 -
B16 - B16 -
B17 - B17 -
B18 - B18 -
C1 V3 16BR/WT C1 V3 16BR/WT
C2 A1 12RD C2 A1 12RD
C3 V4 16BR/VT C3 V4 16BR/VT
C4 F75 16VT C4 F75 16VT
C5 V5 16DG/YL C5 V5 16DG/YL
C6 A2 12PK/BK C6 A2 12PK/BK
D1 A3 14RD/WT D1 A3 14RD/WT
D2 A141 14DG/WT D2 A141 16DG/WT
D3 L3 16RD
D3 L3 16RD/OR
D3 G34 16RD/GY
D4 G34 16RD/GY D4 G34 16RD/GY
D5 A111 12RD/LG D5 A111 12RD/LG
D6 - D6 -
(CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)
4.0L A/T
FUEL PUMP (GAS)
POWER AMPLIFIER
FOG LAMPS
DRL
DIESEL 2.5L
XJI08007 J998W-7
(CONTINUED)

E1 L50 20WT/TN E1 L50 20WT/TN
E1 L50 18WT/TN E1 L50 18WT/TN
E2 G9 20GY/BK E2 G9 20GY/BK
E3 L10 18BR/LG E3 L10 18BR/LG
E4 V10 18BR E4 V10 18BR
E5 V20 18BK/WT E5 V20 18BK/WT
E6 F34 18TN/BK E6 F34 18TN/BK
E7 Z12 20BK/TN E7 Z12 20BK/TN
E7 Z12 18BK/TN E7 Z12 18BK/TN
E8 G29 20BK/LB E8 G29 20BK/LB
E9 F20 18WT E9 F20 18WT
E10 F1 20DB/GY E10 F1 20DB/GY
E11 D1 20VT/BR
E11 D1 20VT/BR
E11 D1 18VT/BR
E12 D2 20WT/BK
E12 D2 20WT/BK
E12 D2 18WT/BK
E13 - E13 -
E14 G99 20GY/WT E14 G99 20GY/WT
E15 K185 20OR/LB E15 K185 20OR/LB
E16 G86 18TN/OR E16 G86 20TN/OR
E17 G154 18VT/LG E17 G154 20VT/LG
E18 L13 20BR/YL E18 L13 20BR/YL
F1 D20 18LG/BK F1 D20 20LG/BK
F2 D21 20PK
F2 D21 20PK
F2 D21 18PK
F3 L60 20TN F3 L60 20TN
F4 L61 20LG/WT F4 L61 20LG/WT
F5 L9 20BK/PK F5 L9 20BK/PK
F6 L44 20VT/RD F6 L44 20VT/RD
F7 V30 20DB/RD F7 V30 20DB/RD
F8 F32 20PK/DB F8 F32 20PK/DB
F9 V32 18YL/RD F9 V32 18YL/RD
F10 K29 18WT/PK
F10 K29 20WT/PK
F10 K29 20WT/PK
F11 K226 18DB/LG F11 K226 20DB/LG
F12 K167 20BR/YL F12 K167 20BR/YL
F13 G19 20LG/OR F13 G19 20LG/OR
F14 G31 20VT/LG F14 G31 20VT/LG
F15 G32 20BK/LB F15 G32 20BK/LB
F16 K78 20GY F16 K78 18GY
F17 V37 20RD/LG
F17 V37 20RD/LG
F17 V37 18RD/LG
F18 K4 20BK/LB
F18 K4 20BK/RD
F18 K167 20BR/YL ABS
4.0L A/T
DIESEL
EXCEPT 4.0L A/T
SPEED CONTROL (GAS)
GAS
2.5L GAS
HEADLAMP LEVELING
J998W-7 XJI08008

A1 Z1 18BK A1 Z1 18BK
A2 G106 20BK/WT A2 G106 20BK/WT
A3 G107 20BK/RD A3 G107 20BK/RD
A4 L39 20LB A4 L39 20LB
A5 L139 20VT A5 L139 20VT
A6 C90 18LG A6 C90 20LG
A7 Z12 18BK/TN A7 Z12 18BK/TN
A8 G29 20BK/LB A8 G29 20BK/LB
A9 F20 18WT A9 F20 18WT
A10 G99 20GY/WT A10 G99 20GY/WT
A11 D1 18VT/BR
A11 D1 20VT/BR
A11 D1 20VT/BR
A12 D2 18WT/BK
A12 D2 20WT/BK
BLACK A12 D2 20WT/BK BLACK
A13 - A13 -
A14 G9 20GY/BK E1 F6 A14 G9 20GY/BK
F6 E1
F12 E7 A15 L10 18BR/LG E7 F12 A15 L10 18BR/LG
F18 E13 A16 V10 18BR E13 F18 A16 V10 18BR
A17 V20 18BK/WT C1 D2 A17 V20 18BK/WT
D2 C1
C3 D4
D4 C3 A18 F34 18TN/BK A18 F34 18TN/BK
C5 D6
D6 C5 B1 K29 20WT/PK
B1 K29 18WT/PK
B1 K29 18WT/PK A1 B6
B6 A1 A7 B12
A7 B2 K226 18DB/LG B2 K226 20DB/LG
B12 A13 B18
B18 A13 B3 K167 20BR/YL B3 K167 20BR/YL
B4 L50 18WT/TN B4 L50 20WT/TN
B5 V37 18RD/LG B5 V37 20RD/LG
C100 B6 K167 20BR/YL C100 B6 K4 20BK/LB
(RHD) B6 K4 20BK/LB (RHD) B6 K167 20BR/YL
B7 D20 18LG/BK B7 D20 20LG/BK
B8 D21 18PK
B8 D21 20PK
B8 D21 20PK
B9 L60 20TN B9 L60 20TN
B10 L61 20LG/WT B10 L61 20LG/WT
B11 L9 20BK/PK B11 L9 20BK/PK
B12 L44 20VT/RD B12 L44 20VT/RD
B13 - B13 -
B14 - B14 -
B15 - B15 -
B16 - B16 -
B17 - B17 -
B18 - B18 -
C1 V3 16BR/WT C1 V3 16BR/WT
C2 A1 12RD C2 A1 12RD
C3 V4 16BR/VT C3 V4 16BR/VT
C4 F75 16VT C4 F75 16VT
C5 V5 16DG/YL C5 V5 16DG/YL
C6 A2 12PK/BK C6 A2 12PK/BK
D1 A3 14RD/WT D1 A3 14RD/WT
D2 A141 14DG/WT D2 A141 16DG/WT
(CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)
D3 - D3 -
D4 - D4 -
D5 A111 12RD/LG D5 A111 12RD/LG
D6 - GAS DRL D6 -
DIESEL 4.0L A/T
ABS FOG LAMPS
2.5L HEADLAMP LEVELING
POWER AMP EXCEPT 4.0L A/T
XJI08009 J998W-7
(CONTINUED)

E1 - E1 -
E2 - E2 -
E3 - E3 -
E4 - E4 -
E5 - E5 -
E6 - E6 -
E7 F45 20YL/RD E7 F45 20YL/RD
E8 T141 20YL E8 T141 20YL
E9 - E9 -
E10 F1 20DB/GY E10 F1 20DB/GY
E11 - E11 -
E12 - E12 -
E13 - E13 -
E14 - E14 -
E15 K185 20OR/LB E15 K185 20OR/LB
E16 G86 18TN/OR E16 G86 20TN/OR
E17 G154 18VT/LG E17 G154 20VT/LG
E18 L13 20BR/YL E18 L13 20BR/YL
F1 D20 18LG/BK F1 -
F2 - F2 -
F3 - F3 -
F4 - F4 -
F5 - F5 -
F6 - F6 -
F7 V30 20DB/RD F7 V30 20DB/RD
F8 F32 20PK/DB F8 F32 20PK/DB
F9 V32 18YL/RD F9 V32 20YL/RD
F10 - F10 -
F11 - F11 -
F12 - F12 -
F13 G19 20LG/OR F13 G19 20LG/OR
F14 G31 20VT/LG F14 G31 20VT/LG
F15 G32 20BK/LB F15 G32 20BK/LB
F16 - F16 -
F17 - F17 -
F18 - F18 -
ABS
TELL TALE MODULE
HEADLAMP LEVELING
J998W-7 XJI08010

1 L13 18BR/YL 1 L13 18BR/YL
BLACK 2 L33 20RD BLACK 2 L33 18RD
3 L61 20LG 3 L61 20LG
4 Z1 20BK 4 Z1 18BK
5 Z15 16BK/GY 5 Z15 18BK/GY
1 7
7 1 6 L34 20RD/OR 6 L34 18RD/OR
14 8 8 14
7 L77 20BR 7 L77 20BR
8 L39 20LB 8 L39 20LB
9 L43 20VT 9 L43 18VT
C106 C106
10 L60 20TN 10 L60 20TN
(DIESEL) 11 Z1 20BK/WT (DIESEL) 11 Z1 18BK
12 L33 20BK 12 L33 20BK
12 Z1 20BK/YL 12 Z1 20BK
13 L44 20VT/RD 13 L44 18VT/RD
14 L78 18DG/YL 14 L78 20DG/YL

1 L13 20BR/YL 1 L13 18BR/YL
2 L33 20RD 2 L33 18RD
BLACK 3 L61 20LG/WT BLACK 3 L61 20LG
4 Z1 20BK 4 Z1 18BK
5 Z15 16BK/GY 5 Z15 18BK/GY
6 L34 20RD/OR 1 7 6 L34 18RD/OR
7 1 7 L77 20BR/YL 7 L77 20BR
14 8 8 14
8 L39 20LB 8 L39 20LB
9 L43 20VT 9 L43 18VT
C106 10 L60 20TN C106 10 L60 20TN
(GAS) 11 Z1 20BK/WT (GAS) 11 Z1 18BK
12 L33 20RD
12 L35 20BR/WT
12 Z1 20BK
13 L44 20VT/RD 13 L44 18VT/RD
14 L78 20DG/YL 14 L78 20DG/YL
FOG LAMPS
FOG LAMPS EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FOG LAMPS BUILT-UP-EXPORT
HEADLAMP LEVELING
XJI08011 J998W-7

1 A142 18DG/OR 1 A142 18DG/OR
2 K20 18DG 2 K20 18DG
BLACK 3 K167 20BR/YL BLACK 3 K167 20BR/YL
4 G7 20WT/OR 4 G7 20WT/OR
5 Z1 20 BK
5 T41 20BK/WT
1 7 5 T41 20BK/WT
7 1 6 - 6 -
14 8 8 14
7 F142 20DG/WT 7 F142 20DG/WT
8 G107 20BK/RD 8 G107 20BK/RD
C107 9 - C107 9 -
(LHD 2.5L GAS) 10 F12 18DB/WT (LHD 2.5L GAS) 10 F12 18DB/WT
11 F20 18WT 11 F20 18WT
12 L10 18BR/LG 12 L10 18BR/LG
13 - 13 -
14 A61 16DG/BK 14 A61 16DG/BK

1 A142 18DG/OR 1 A142 18DG/OR
2 K20 18DG 2 K20 18DG
BLACK BLACK
3 K167 20BR/YL 3 K167 20BR/YL
5 T41 20BK/WT 5 T41 18BK/WT
6 K22 20OR/DB 1 7 6 K22 20OR/DB
7 1
14 8 7 F142 20DG/WT 8 14 7 F142 20DG/WT
8 G107 20BK/RD 8 G107 20BK/RD
9 Z12 18BK/TN 9 Z12 16BK/TN
C107 10 F12 18DB/WT C107 10 F12 18DB/WT
(LHD 4.0L GAS) 11 K78 18GY (LHD 4.0L GAS) 11 K78 18GY
11 F20 18WT 11 F20 18WT
12 L10 18BR/LG 12 L10 18BR/LG
13 G106 20BK/WT 13 G106 20BK/WT
14 A61 16DG/BK 14 A61 16DG/BK
4.0L A/T
4WD
A/T
M/T
EXTENDED IDLE
EXCEPT 4.0L M/T 2WD
DRL
J998W-7 XJI08012

1 A142 18DG/OR 1 A142 18DG/OR
2 K20 18DG 2 K20 18DG
BLACK BLACK
3 K167 20BR/YL 3 K167 20BR/YL
5 Z1 20 BK
5 T41 20BK/WT
1 7 5 T41 18BK/WT
7 1
14 8 6 - 6 -
8 14
7 F142 20DG/WT 7 F142 20DG/WT
8 G107 20BK/RD 8 G107 20BK/RD
C107 9 - C107 9 -
(RHD 2.5L GAS) 10 F12 18DB/WT (RHD 2.5L GAS) 10 F12 18DB/WT
11 F20 18WT 11 F20 18WT
12 L10 18BR/LG 12 L10 18BR/LG
13 - 13 -
14 A61 16DG/BK 14 A61 16DG/BK

1 A142 18DG/OR 1 A142 18DG/OR
2 K20 18DG 2 K20 18DG
BLACK BLACK
3 K167 20BR/YL 3 K167 20BR/YL
5 T41 18BK/WT 5 T41 20BK/WT
6 K22 20OR/DB 1 7 6 K22 20OR/DB
7 1
14 8 7 F142 20DG/WT 7 F142 20DG/WT
8 14
8 G107 20BK/RD 8 G107 20BK/RD
9 Z12 18BK/TN 9 Z12 16BK/TN
C107 10 F12 18DB/WT C107 10 F12 18DB/WT
(RHD 4.0L GAS) 11 K78 18GY (RHD 4.0L GAS) 11 K78 18GY
11 F20 18WT 11 F20 18WT
12 L10 18BR/LG 12 L10 18BR/LG
13 G106 20BK/WT 13 G106 20BK/WT
14 A61 16DG/BK 14 A61 16DG/BK
A/T
M/T
4WD
4.0L GAS (EXCEPT M/T 2WD)
XJI08013 J998W-7
BLACK BLACK
4 1
4 1 CAV CIRCUIT CAV CIRCUIT
1 T40 16BR 1 T40 16BR
2 K72 18DG/OR 2 K72 16DG/OR
3 K20 18DG 3 K20 18DG
4 C3 16DB/BK C108 4 C3 16DB/BK
C108
BLACK CAV CIRCUIT CAV CIRCUIT

A B41 18YL/VT BLACK A B41 20YL/VT
B B42 18TN/WT B B42 20TN/WT
D A C B43 18PK/OR A D C B43 20PK/OR
E H D B1 18YL/DB H E D B1 18YL/DB
E B2 18YL E B2 18YL
C109 F B3 18LG/DB C109 F B3 18LG/DB
G B4 18LG G B4 18LG

LT GRAY 1 G7 20WT/OR 1 G7 18WT/OR
LT GRAY
2 - 2 -
3 G107 20BK/RD 3 G107 20BK/RD
5 4 Z1 18BK 4 Z1 20BK
1 1 5
5 L10 18BR/LG 5 L10 18BR/LG
10 6
6 K7 20OR 6 10 6 K7 18OR
7 F20 18WT 7 F20 18WT
C111 8 K167 20BR/YL C111 8 K167 18BR/YL
(DIESEL) 9 - (DIESEL) 9 -
10 T40 16BR 10 T40 14BR
BLACK
BLACK

1 2 2 1
1 L61 18LG 1 L61 18LG
2 Z1 18BK 2 Z1 18BK
C114 C114
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT) (BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
J998W-7 XJI08014
BLACK
BLACK

1 2 1 L60 18TN 2 1 1 L60 18GY
2 Z1 18BK 2 Z1 18BK
C115 C115
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT) (BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
BLACK BLACK

1 K7 20OR 1 K7 18OR
3 1 1 3
2 G60 18GY/YL 2 G60 18GY/YL
3 K167 20BR/YL 3 K167 18BR/YL
C116
(DIESEL) C116
(DIESEL)

1 K3 20LG/BK BLACK 1 K3 20LG/BK
BLACK 2 C21 20DB/PK 2 C21 20DB/PK
3 C22 20DB/WT 3 C22 20DB/WT
4 K24 20GY/BK 4 K24 20GY/BK
7 1 1 7
5 K20 18DG 5 K20 18DG
14 8 6 C3 16DB/BK 8 14 6 C3 14DB/BK
7 K72 18DG/OR 7 K72 18DG/OR
C120 8 K2 20TN/BK C120 8 K2 18TN/BK
(DIESEL) 9 K4 20BK/LB (DIESEL) 9 K4 18BK/LB
10 K222 18TN/RD 10 K222 18TN/RD
11 Z1 16BK 11 Z1 16BK
12 K167 18BR/YL 12 K167 18BR/YL
13 - 13 -
14 - 14 -
XJI08015 J998W-7

1 X53 18DG 1 X53 16DG
2 X55 18BR/RD 2 X55 16BR/RD
3 P91 20WT/BK 3 P91 20WT/BK
4 X54 18VT 4 X54 16VT
5 X56 18DB/RD 5 X56 16DB/RD
6 X51 18BR/YL 6 X51 16BR/YL
7 X57 18BR/LB 7 X57 16BR/LB
8 - 8 -
GRAY 9 X52 18DB/WT GRAY 9 X52 16DB/WT
10 X58 18DB/OR 10 X58 16DB/OR
1 36 11 X60 18DG/RD 36 1 11 X60 16DG/RD
12 - 12 -
13 A141 16DG/WT 13 A141 16DG/WT
5 40 14 F75 14VT 40 5 14 F75 16VT
15 K226 20DB/LG 15 K226 20DB/LG
16 L10 18BR/LG 16 L10 18BR/LG
C200 C200
17 G16 20BK/LB 17 G16 20BK/LB
(LHD) (LHD)
18 - 18 -
19 - 19 -
20 - 20 -
21 - 21 -
22 - 22 -
23 L38 18BR/WT 23 L38 18BR/WT
24 L50 20WT/TN 24 L50 20WT/TN
25 L62 20BR/RD 25 L62 20BR/RD
26 L63 20DG/RD 26 L63 20DG/RD
27 V13 18BR 27 V13 18BR/LG
28 V20 18BK/WT 28 V20 18BK/WT
29 V23 18BR/PK 29 V23 18BR/PK
30 K167 20BR/YL 30 K167 20BR/YL
31 P35 20OR/VT 31 P35 20OR/VT
32 P36 20PK/VT 32 P36 20PK/VT
33 F81 12TN 33 F81 12TN
34 P72 20YL/BK 34 P72 20YL/BK
35 P74 20DB 35 P74 20DB
36 P76 20OR/YL 36 P76 20OR/YL
37 C16 20LB/YL 37 C16 20LB/YL
38 - 38 -
F83 18YL/DG
39 F83 18YL/DG 39
F83 18YL/DG
40 G78 20TN/BK 40 G78 20TN/BK
FULL OPTIONS (WITH POWER AMPLIFIER)

FULL OPTIONS
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
J998W-7 XJI08016

1 F20 18WT 1 F20 18WT
2 C16 20LB/YL 2 C16 20LB/YL
3 L5 20BK 3 L5 20BK
4 C36 20RD/WT 4 C36 20RD/WT
5 F87 20WT/BK 5 F87 20WT/BK
6 M1 20PK 6 M1 20PK
7 Z1 20BK 7 Z1 20BK
8 V6 16DB 8 V6 16DB
9 P36 20PK/VT 9 P36 20PK/VT
10 A31 12BK/WT 10 A31 12BK/WT
11 A111 12RD/LG 11 A111 12RD/LG
NATURAL 12 C7 12BK/TN 12 C7 12BK/TN
68 37 F81 12TN F81 12TN
13 NATURAL 13
31 37 68
14 Z1 14BK 14 Z1 14BK
29
72 15 - 74 15 -
65 20 16 L3 16RD/OR 29 72 16 L3 16RD/OR
63 17 C81 20LB/WT 17 C81 20LB/WT
17 20
64 65
18 - 18 -
62 17 64
16 19 - 19 -
61 16 61
14 20 P72 20YL/BK 15 20 P72 20YL/BK
59 60
21 - 14 21 -
58 13 59
50 11 22 L4 16VT/WT 11 58 22 L4 16VT/WT
55 12 23 P35 20OR/VT 10 23 P35 20OR/VT
47 10 55
24 P74 20DB 24 P74 20DB
46 3 25 Z8 20BK/VT 46 25 Z8 16BK/VT
1
26 X3 20BK/RD 26 X3 20BK/RD
38 27 - 1 7 38 44 27 -
28 P76 20OR/YL 28 P76 20OR/YL
C201 29 G26 20LB C201 29 G26 20LB
(LHD) 30 -
(LHD) 30 -
31 - 31 -
32 G31 20VT/LG 32 G31 20VT/LG
33 - 33 -
34 - 34 -
35 G32 20BK/LB 35 G32 20BK/LB
36 - 36 -
37 - 37 -
38 - 38 -
39 V23 18BR/PK 39 V23 18BR/PK
40 F15 20DB/WT 40 F15 20DB/WT
41 - 41 -
42 E1 20TN 42 E1 20TN
43 E2 20OR 43 E2 20OR
(CONTINUED)
XJI08017 J998W-7
CAV CIRCUIT (CONTINUED) CAV CIRCUIT

44 F83 18YL/DG 44 F83 18YL/DG
45 L7 18BK/YL 45 L7 18BK/YL
46 M2 20YL 46 M2 20YL
47 - 47 -
48 - 48 -
49 - 49 -
50 F30 16RD 50 F30 16RD
51 D1 18VT/BR 51 D1 20VT/BR
52 D2 18WT/BK 52 D2 20WT/BK
53 - 53 -
54 X12 16RD/WT 54 X12 16RD/WT
55 D1 20VT/BR 55 D1 20VT/BR
56 D2 20WT/BK 56 D2 20WT/BK
57 - 57 -
58 Z2 20BK/LG 58 Z2 20BK/LG
59 C4 14TN 59 C4 14TN
60 C5 14LG 60 C5 14LG
61 C6 14LB 61 C6 14LB
62 A22 12BK/OR 62 A22 12BK/OR
63 A41 14YL 63 A41 14YL
64 A21 12DB 64 A21 12DB
65 F38 16RD/LB 65 F38 16RD/LB
66 G9 20GY/BK 66 G9 20GY/BK
67 P91 20WT/BK 67 P91 20WT/BK
68 - 68 -
69 G10 20LG/RD 69 G10 20LG/RD
70 - 70 -
71 - 71 -
72 - 72 -
73 - 73 -
74 - 74 -
J998W-7 XJI08018

1 C7 12BK/TN 1 C7 12BK/TN
2 - 2 -
3 F81 12TN 3 F81 12TN
BLACK 4 - BLACK 4 -
5 - 5 -
6 Z8 12BK/VT
6 Z8 16BK/VT
6 Z8 12BK/PK
7 A111 12RD/LG 7 A111 12RD/LG
8 C6 14LB 8 C6 14LB
9 C5 14LG 9 C5 14LG
C202 10 C4 14TN C202 10 C4 14TN
(RHD) (RHD)

1 X51 16BR/YL 1 X51 18BR/YL
2 X52 16DB/WT 2 X52 18DB/WT
3 X53 16DG 3 X53 18DG
4 X54 16VT 4 X54 18VT
5 X55 16BR/RD 5 X55 18BR/RD
6 X56 16DB/RD 6 X56 18DB/RD
BLUE BLACK
7 X57 16BR/LB 7 X57 18BR/LB
8 X58 16DB/OR 8 X58 18DB/OR
6 1 9 X60 16DG/RD 1 8 9 X60 18DG/RD
14 9 10 G9 20GY/BK 9 14
18 15 15 18 10 G9 20GY/BK
22 19 11 E2 20OR 19 22 11 E2 20OR/BK
12 G10 20LG/RD 12 G10 20LG/RD
13 P91 20WT/BK 13 P91 20WT/BK
C203 14 - C203 14 -
(RHD) 15 (RHD)
L38 18BR/WT 15 L38 18BR/WT
16 V13 18BR/LG 16 V13 18BR
17 V23 18BR/PK 17 V23 18BR/PK
18 V20 18BK/WT 18 V20 18BK/WT
19 G16 20BK/LB 19 G16 20BK/LB
20 G26 20LB 20 G26 20LB
21 P59 20LB/RD 21 P59 20LB/RD
22 P55 20DB/PK 22 P55 20DB/PK
BUILT UP EXPORT
BASE AND FULL OPTIONS W/O POWER AMPLIFIER
FULL OPTIONS
XJI08019 J998W-7

1 D1 20VT/BR 1 D1 18VT/BR
WHITE 2 D2 20WT/BK 2 D2 18WT/BK
BLACK
3 F75 16VT 3 F75 16VT
6 1 4 A141 16DG/WT 1 6 4 A141 16DG/WT
14 7 7 14
5 L10 18BR/LG 5 L10 18BR/LG
20 15 15 20
24 21 6 L50 20WT/TN 24 6 L50 20WT/TN
21
7 L62 20BR/RD 7 L62 20BR/RD
8 L63 20DG/RD C204 8 L63 20DG/RD
C204
(RHD) 9 - (RHD) 9 -
10 F23 18DB/YL 10 F23 18DB/YL
11 F14 18LG/YL 11 F14 18LG/YL
12 F35 16RD 12 F35 16RD
13 Z1 20BK 13 Z1 20BK
14 C6 20RD/WT 14 C36 20RD/WT
15 G78 20TN/BK 15 G78 20TN/BK
16 K226 20DB/LG 16 K226 20DB/LG
17 K167 20BR/YL 17 K167 20BR/YL
18 P72 20YL/BK 18 P71 20YL
19 P74 20DB 19 P74 20DB
20 P76 20OR/YL 20 P76 20OR/YL
21 F15 20DB/WT 21 F15 20DB/WT
22 C16 20BK/WT 22 C16 20LB/YL
23 P35 20OR/VT 23 P35 20OR/VT
24 P36 20PK/VT 24 P36 20PK/VT
YELLOW
YELLOW CAV CIRCUIT CAV CIRCUIT
1 R42 18BK/YL 1 R42 18BK/YL
2 R44 18DG/YL 2 R44 18DG/YL
1 4
3 R43 18BK/LB 3 R43 18BK/LB
4 1 4 R45 18DG/LB 4 R45 18DG/LB
C205 C205
BLACK BLACK
1 E2 20OR E2 20OR
1 2 1 1
2 1 E2 20OR/BK E2 20OR
Z1 20BK
2 Z1 20BK 2
C206 Z1 20BK
C206
(A/T)
(A/T)
FULL OPTIONS
RHD
LHD
J998W-7 XJI08020
BLACK
BLACK
2 1 CAV CIRCUIT 1 2 CAV CIRCUIT

1 E2 20OR 1 E2 20OR
2 Z1 20BK 2 Z1 20BK
C206 C206
(M/T) (M/T)
BLACK BLACK
A M1 20PK B A A M1 18PK
A B
B M2 20YL B M2 18BK/WT
C207 C207
BLACK BLACK
A M1 20PK B A A M1 18PK
A B
B M2 20YL B M2 18BK/WT
C208 C208
NATURAL
NATURAL
1 P35 20OR/VT 1 P35 20OR/VT
1 3 2 P36 20PK/VT 3 1 2 P36 20PK/VT
3 P55 20DB/PK 3 P55 20DB/PK
4 6 6 4
4 P59 20LB/RD 4 P59 20LB/RD
5 G26 20LB 5 G26 20LB
C300 6 - C300 6 -
(LHD) (LHD)
NATURAL
NATURAL
1 P35 18OR/VT 1 P35 20OR/VT
1 3 2 P36 18PK/VT 3 1 2 P36 20PK/VT
3 F83 18YL/DG 3 F83 18YL/DG
4 6 - 6 4
4 4 -
5 - 5 -
C300 6 - C300 6 -
(RHD) (RHD)
FULL OPTIONS AND POWER MIRRORS
XJI08021 J998W-7

WHITE
1 D1 20VT/BR 1 D1 20VT/BR
2 D2 20WT/BK 2 D2 20WT/BK
3 G32 20BK/LB 3 G32 20BK/LB
1 4 4 G31 20VT/LG 4 1 4 G31 20VT/LG
5 11
5 Z2 20BK/LG 11 5 5 Z2 20BK/LG
6 F87 20WT/BK 6 F87 20WT/BK
C301 7 X3 20BK/RD C301 7 X3 20BK/RD
8 P55 20DB 8 P55 20DB/PK
9 P59 20LB/RD 9 P59 20LB/RD
10 - 10 -
11 - 11 -
BLACK CAV CIRCUIT BLACK CAV CIRCUIT

3 1 1 Q16 14BR/WT 1 Q16 14BR/WT
1 V23 18BR/PK 1 V23 18BR/PK
1 3
2 Q26 14VT/WT 2 Q26 14VT/WT
4 6 3 Q1 14YL
3 Q1 14YL
6 4
4 X80 18LB/BK 4 X80 18LB/BK
C303 4 X54 18VT C303 4 X54 18VT
(LHD) 5 X82 18LB/RD (LHD) 5 X82 18LB/RD
5 X56 18DB/RD 5 X56 18DB/RD
6 - 6 -
WHITE
WHITE
1 4 1 Q18 14GY/BK 1 Q18 14GY/BK
1 2 3 4
2 Q28 14DG/WT 4 1 2 Q28 14DG/WT
5 5 6 7 8 8
3 Q17 14DB/WT 8 5 3 Q17 14DB/WT
4 Q1 14YL 4 Q1 14YL
C303 5 Z1 14BK C303 5 Z1 14BK
(RHD) 6 Q27 14RD/BK (RHD) 6 Q27 14RD/BK
(FULL OPTIONS) 7 Q16 14BR/WT (FULL OPTIONS) 7 Q16 14BR/WT
8 Q26 14VT/WT 8 Q26 14VT/WT
BASE W/O POWER AMPLIFIER

4 SPEAKER SYSTEM
6 SPEAKER SYSTEM
J998W-7 XJI08022
BLACK BLACK
3 1 1 Q18 14GY/BK 1 Q18 14GY/BK
2 Q28 14DG/WT 1 3 2 Q28 14DG/WT
3 Q1 14YL 3 Q1 14YL
4 6
6 4 4 P33 16OR/BK 4 P33 16OR/BK
5 P34 16PK/BK 5 P34 16PK/BK
C304 6 - C304 6 -
(LHD) (LHD)
BLACK BLACK
3 1 1 Q18 14GY/BK 1 Q18 14GY/BK
2 Q28 14DG/WT 1 3 2 Q28 14DG/WT
3 Q1 14YL 3 Q1 14YL
4 6
6 4 4 P33 16OR/BK 4 P33 16OR/BK
5 P34 16PK/BK 5 P34 16PK/BK
C304 6 - C304 6 -
(RHD) (RHD)

1 X85 18BR/RD 1 X85 18BR/RD
1 X53 18DG 1 X53 18DG
2 X87 18DG WHITE 2 X87 18LG/VT
WHITE 2 X55 18BR/RD 2 X55 18BR/RD
3 F83 18YL/DG 3 F83 18YL/DG
1 3 4 P33 16OR/BK 3 1 4 P33 16OR/BK
4 8 5 P34 16PK/BK 8 4 5 P34 16PK/BK
9 13 6 P35 20OR/VT 13 9 6 P35 18OR/VT
7 P36 20PK/VT 7 P36 18PK/VT
C305 8 P72 20YL/BK C305 8 P72 20YL/BK
(LHD) 9 P74 20DB (LHD) 9 P74 20DB
10 P76 20OR/YL 10 P76 20OR/YL
11 C16 20LB/YL
11 C16 20LB/YL
11 C16 20BK/WT
12 - 12 -
13 P91 20WT/BK 13 P91 20WT/BK
POWER LOCK/WINDOWS
POWER MIRRORS 4 SPEAKERS
FULL OPTIONS 6 SPEAKERS
XJI08023 J998W-7

1 X85 18BR/RD 1 X85 18BR/RD
1 X54 18VT 1 X54 18VT
2 X87 18DG 2 X87 18LG/VT
2 X56 18DB/RD 2 X56 18DB/RD
3 P59 20LB/RD 3 P59 20LB/RD
4 P33 16OR/BK WHITE 4 P33 16OR/BK
WHITE 5 P34 16PK/BK 5 P34 16PK/BK
6 P35 20OR/VT 6 P35 18OR/VT
1 3 3 1
7 P36 20PK/VT 7 P36 18PK/VT
4 8 8 P71 20YL 8 4 8 P71 20YL
9 13 9 P75 20DB/RD 13 9 9 P75 20DB/RD
9 P75 20DB/WT 9 P75 20DB/WT
C305 C305
10 P76 20OR/YL 10 P76 20OR/YL
(RHD) (RHD)
11 C16 20LB/YL
11 C16 20LB/YL
11 C16 20BK/WT
12 P55 20DB 12 P55 20DB/PK
13 P91 20WT/BK 13 P91 20WT/BK
WHITE
CAV CIRCUIT WHITE CAV CIRCUIT
1 1 Q18 14GY/BK 1 Q18 14GY/BK
2
2 Q28 14DG/WT 2 Q28 14DG/WT
3 Q16 14BR/WT 2 1 3 Q16 14BR/WT
3 6 4 Q26 14VT/WT 6 3 4 Q26 14VT/WT
5 Q17 14DB/WT 5 Q17 14DB/WT
C306 6 Q27 14RD/BK C306 6 Q27 14RD/BK
(LHD) (LHD)
(FULL OPTIONS) (FULL OPTIONS)
WHITE
CAV CIRCUIT WHITE CAV CIRCUIT
1 2 1 F35 16RD 1 F35 16RD
2 G26 20LB 2 G26 20LB
3 Q16 14BR/WT 2 1 3 Q16 14BR/WT
3 6 4 Q26 14VT/WT 6 3 4 Q26 14VT/WT
5 - 5 -
C306 6 - C306 6 -
(RHD) (RHD)
(FULL OPTIONS) (FULL OPTIONS)
POWER MIRRORS
FULL OPTIONS
POWER LOCK/WINDOW SWITCHES
4 SPEAKERS
6 SPEAKERS
J998W-7 XJI08024
WHITE WHITE
1 F81 14TN 1 F81 12TN
1 3 2 Q1 14YL 2 Q1 14YL
3 1
3 Z1 12BK
3 Z1 12BK
3 Z1 16BK
C307 C307
BLACK BLACK
3 1 CAV CIRCUIT CAV CIRCUIT
1 Q17 14DB/WT 1 3 1 Q17 14DB/WT
2 Q27 14RD/BK 2 Q27 14RD/BK
4 6
6 4 3 Q1 14YL 3 Q1 14YL
4 P33 16OR/BK 4 P33 16OR/BK
C309 5 P34 16PK/BK
C309 5 P34 16PK/BK
(FULL OPTIONS) -
(FULL OPTIONS) -
6 6
CAV CIRCUIT
BLACK
1 P33 16OR/BK
2 P34 16PK/BK
3 4 3 G78 20TN/BK
4 L77 18BR/YL BLACK
1 6 5 M4 20GY/BK
6 Z1 18BK
C311
GRAY CAV CIRCUIT

1 V20 18BK/WT
2 11 6 2 Z1 12 BK
CAV CIRCUIT 10 5
3 C15 12BK/WT
1 Z1 12 BK 9 4
4 P33 16OR/BK
2 C15 12BK/WT 3
1 5 P34 16PK/BK
2 6 G78 20TN/BK
C312 8 7 V23 18BR/PK
8 V13 18BR/LG
7 1
9 Z1 18BK
10 M4 20VT/YL
11 L77 18BR/YL
GREEN
1
CAV CIRCUIT
1 V13 18BR/LG
2 V23 18BR/PK C310
3 2 3 V20 18BK/WT
C313
POWER MIRRORS
FULL OPTIONS
XJI08025 J998W-7

2 1 1 X92 18TN/BK 1 2 1 X92 16TN/BK
6 3 1 X52 18DB/WT 3 6 1 X52 18DB/WT
8 7 7 8
2 X94 18TN/RD 2 X94 16TN/RD
2 X58 18DB/OR 2 X58 18DB/OR
C314 3 X91 16BR/DB C314 3 X91 18WT/BK
3 X51 18BR/YL 3 X51 18BR/YL
4 X93 16BR/YL 4 X93 18WT/RD
4 X57 18BR/LB 4 X57 18BR/LB
5 M1 18PK
5 M1 20PK
5 M1 20PK
6 M2 20YL 6 M2 20YL
7 M4 20GY/BK 7 M4 20GY/BK
8 - 8 -
BLACK
BLACK
CAV CIRCUIT 2 1 CAV CIRCUIT

1 2
1 F83 18YL/DG 1 F83 18YL/DG
2 F37 14RD/LB 2 F37 14RD/LB
C316 C316
(HEATED SEATS) (HEATED SEATS)
BLACK
BLACK
1 - 2 1 1 -
1 2
F37 14RD/LB
2 2 F37 14RD/LB
F37 14RD/LB
C316 C316
(WITHOUT (WITHOUT
HEATED SEATS) HEATED SEATS)
GRAY GRAY
1 M2 18YL 1 M2 20YL
1 3 2 G16 18BK/LB 2 G16 20BK/LB
3 Z1 18BK 3 2 1 3 Z1 20BK
C317 C317
6 SPEAKER
4 SPEAKER
LHD
J998W-7 RHD XJI08026
GRAY GRAY
1 M2 18YL 1 M2 20YL
1 3 2 G16 18BK/LB 2 G16 20BK/LB
3 Z1 18BK 3 2 1 3 Z1 20BK
C318 C318
BLACK BLACK
A M2 18YL A M2 20YL
B A A B
B Z1 18BK B Z1 20BK
C319 C319
BLACK BLACK
A M2 18YL A M2 20YL
B A A B
B Z1 18BK B Z1 20BK
C320 C320
CAV CIRCUIT BLACK CAV CIRCUIT

BLACK
1 L62 18BR/RD 1 L62 20BR/RD
1 3
2 Z1 18BK 2 Z1 18BK
3 1
3 - 3 -
8 4
4 8 4 L38 18OR/WT 4 L38 18BR/WT
5 L10 18BR/LG 5 L10 18BR/LG
C321 C321
6 L50 18WT/TN 6 L50 20WT/TN
7 L78 18DG/YL 7 L78 18DG/YL
8 - 8 -

BLACK
1 L63 18DG/RD 1 L63 20DG/RD
1 3 2 Z1 16BK
3 1 2 Z1 14BK
2 Z1 18BK
3 - 8 4 3 A6 20RD/OR
4 8
4 L38 18OR/WT 4 L38 18BR/WT
C322 5 L10 18BR/LG C322 5 L10 18BR/LG
(W/O TRAILER TOW) 6 L50 18WT/TN (W/O TRAILER TOW) 6 L50 20WT/TN
7 L77 18BR 7 L77 18BR/YL
8 - 8 L62 20BR/RD
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
RHD
XJI08027 J998W-7

BLACK
1 L63 18DG/RD 1 L63 20DG/RD
1 3 2 Z1 16BK
2 Z1 18BK
2 Z1 18BK 3 1
3 - 8 4 3 -
4 8 4 L38 18OR/WT 4 L38 18BR/WT
5 L10 18BR/LG 5 L10 18BR/LG
C322 C322
6 L50 18WT/TN 6 L50 20WT/TN
(TRAILER TOW) (TRAILER TOW)
7 L77 18BR 7 L77 18BR/YL
8 - 8 -

BLACK
1 L63 20DG/RD 1 L63 20DG/RD
1 3 2 Z1 14BK 2 Z1 14BK
3 A6 20RD/OR 3 1 3 A6 20RD/OR
4 L38 20OR/WT 8 4 4 L38 18BR/WT
4 8 5 L10 18BR/LG 5 L10 18BR/LG
6 L50 20WT/TN 6 L50 20WT/TN
C323 C323
7 L77 20BR/YL 7 L77 18BR/YL
(TRAILER TOW) (TRAILER TOW)
8 L62 20BK/RD 8 L62 20BR/RD

1 3
3 2 1 1 F83 18YL/DG 1 F83 18YL/DG
2 X54 18VT 2 X54 18VT
C324 2 X80 18LB/BK C324 2 X80 18LB/BK
(RHD) 3 X56 18DB/RD (RHD) 3 X56 18DB/RD
3 X82 18LB/RD 3 X82 18LB/RD
BUILT-UP-EXPORT
FULL OPTIONS W/O POWER AMPLIFIER
J998W-7 XJI08028
BLACK BLACK
CAV CIRCUIT 2 1 CAV CIRCUIT
1 2 1 L50 18WT/TN 1 L50 18DG/WT
2 Z1 18BK 2 Z1 18BK
C325 C325
BLACK BLACK
1 P33 16OR/BK 1 P33 16OR/BK
1 2 2 P34 16PK/BK 2 1 2 P34 16PK/BK
3 5 3 M4 20GY/BK 5 3 3 M4 20GY/BK
4 C15 12BK/WT 4 C15 12BK/WT
5 L50 18WT/TN 5 L50 20WT/TN
C326 C326
BLACK CAV CIRCUIT BLACK CAV CIRCUIT

1 G78 20TN/BK 1 G78 20TN/BK
2 L77 18BR/YL 2 L77 18BR/YL
1 2 2 1
3 V13 18BR/LG 3 V13 18BR
3 6 6 3
4 V23 18BR/PK 4 V23 18BR/PK
5 V20 18BK/WT 5 V20 18BK/WT
C327 6 - C327 6 -
FULL OPTIONS
XJI08029 J998W-7

1 P133 18TN/DG 1 P133 18TN/DG
2 P134 18TN/RD 2 P134 18TN/RD
BLACK BLACK 3 P137 18VT
3 P137 18VT
4 P138 18VT/LG 4 P138 18VT/LG
5 P139 18VT/WT 5 P139 18VT/WT
P140 18VT/BK 1 7 6 P140 18VT/BK
7 1 6
14 8 7 P87 18BK/OR 7 P87 18BK/OR
8 14
8 P141 18TN/LB 8 P141 18TN/LB
9 P143 18BK/DG 9 P143 18BK/DG
C329 10 F37 14RD/LB C329 10 F37 14RD/LB
11 F83 18YL/DG 11 F83 18YL/DG
12 Z1 18BK 12 Z1 18BK
13 Z2 18BK/LG 13 Z2 18BK/LG
14 - 14 -
BLACK
BLACK

1 L77 18BR/YL 1 L78 18BK/YL
2 1 1 2
2 Z1 18BK 2 Z1 18BK
C330 C330

1 G31 20VT/LG 1 G31 20VT/LG
2 G32 20BK/LG 2 G32 20BK/LG
C331 C331
J998W-7 XJI08030
BLACK BLACK
1 P141 18TN/LB 1 P141 18TN/LB
2 P143 18BK/DG 2 P143 18BK/DG
3 P87 18BK/OR 3 P87 18BK/OR
4 Z1 18BK 4 Z1 18BK
C332 C332
BLACK

1 F37 14RD/LB 1 F37 14RD/LB
2 1
2 Z1 14BK 2 Z1 14BK
C362 C362
BLACK

1 F37 14RD/LB 1 F37 14RD/LB
2 1
2 Z1 14BK 2 Z1 14BK
C363 C363
BLACK

1 3 1 K44 18TN/YL CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
2 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
3 K7 18OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR
(GAS)
BLACK
A M1 18PK FUSED B(+)
A C A M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
B M2 20YL COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
CARGO C M4 20GY/BK GATE GROUND
LAMP/SWITCH
RHD
LHD
XJI08031 J998W-7
BLACK
1

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2
2 L50 18DG/WT BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
CENTER HIGH
MOUNTED STOP
LAMP
BLACK
1 CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

2
1 F30 16RD CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY OUTPUT
2 - -
3 3 Z1 16BK GROUND
CIGAR
LIGHTER

NATURAL 1 X3 20BK/RD HORN RELAY CONTROL
2 V37 20RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
1 4 3 K4 20BK/RD SENSOR GROUND
3 K4 20BK/LB SENSOR GROUND
CLOCKSPRING - C1 4 - -

A B A K167 20BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
B V37 20RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
CLOCKSPRING - C2
YELLOW
2 1 1 R45 18DG/LB DRIVER AIRBAG LINE 1
2 R43 18BK/LB DRIVER AIRBAG LINE 2
CLOCKSPRING - C3
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI08032
GREEN
2 1

1 F45 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
1 T141 20YL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
CLUTCH INTERLOCK 2 T141 20YL IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
SWITCH 2 F45 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
BLACK

1 F45 18YL FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
2 F45 18YL FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
CLUTCH INTERLOCK
SWITCH JUMPER
BLACK
5 1 2 CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

3 1 L5 20BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
2 L9 20BK/PK FUSED FLASHER FEED
4 3 L12 20VT/TN HAZARD FLASHER SELECT SIGNAL
4 L6 20RD/WT FLASHER OUTPUT
Z1 18BK GROUND
5
COMBINATION Z1 20BK GROUND
FLASHER
RHD BUILT-UP-EXPORT
LHD DIESEL
EXCEPT LHD DIESEL
XJI08033 J998W-7

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
BLACK 2 M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
3 - -
6 1
4 G31 20VT/LG AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
5 D1 20VT/BR CCD BUS (+)
6 F87 20WT/BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
7 M2 20YL COURTESY LAMP DRIVER
12 7 - -
8
COMPASS 9 - -
10 G32 20BK/LB AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR GROUND
11 D2 20WT/BK CCD BUS (-)
12 Z2 20BK/LG GROUND

1 B1 18YL/DB RIGHT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
2 B3 18LG/DB LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
3 B7 18WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
4 B9 18RD LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
BLACK
5 - -
6 B41 18YL/VT G SWITCH NO. 1 SENSE
7 B42 18TN/WT G SWITCH NO. 2 SENSE
8 Z1 12BK GROUND
1 10 17 9 A20 12RD/DB FUSED B(+)
10 B4 18LG LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
11 B8 18RD/DB LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
12 L50 18WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
13 B43 18PK/OR G SWITCH TEST SIGNAL
14 - -
16 15 - -
16 G83 18GY/BK ABS RELAY CONTROL
9 25 17 B2 18YL RIGHT
18 B6 18WT/DB RIGHT
19 - -
CONTROLLER 20 D21 18PK SCI TRANSMIT/ ISO 9141K
ANTI-LOCK 21 - -
BRAKE 22 - -
23 F15 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
24 Z1 12BK GROUND
25 A10 12RD/DG FUSED B(+)
J998W-7 XJI08034
BLACK

1 3 1 K3 20LG/BK SENSOR GROUND
2 - -
3 K24 20GY/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
(DIESEL)
BLACK

1 3 1 K24 18GY/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
(GAS)

1 - -
2 - -
BLACK 4 Z1 18BK GROUND
16 9 5 Z12 18BK/TN GROUND
6 D20 20LG/BK SCI RECEIVE
7 D21 20PK SCI TRANSMIT/ ISO 9141K
8 - -
8 1 9 - -
10 - -
DATA LINK 11 D2 18WT/BK CCD BUS (-)
CONNECTOR 12 - -
13 - -
14 - -
15 - -
16 F34 18TN/BK FUSED B(+)
XJI08035 J998W-7

1 L3 16RD DIMMER SWITCH HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
BLACK 2 - -
3 - -
4 G34 16RD/GY HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
5 1
5 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
10 6 6 A3 14RD/WT FUSED B(+)
7 G7 20WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
DAYTIME RUNNING 8 Z12 16BK/TN GROUND
LAMP MODULE
9 - -
(EXCEPT BUILT-
10 L44 18VT/RD FUSED RIGHT LOW BEAM OUTPUT
UP-EXPORT)
BLACK

1 L2 16LG HEADLAMP RELAY OUTPUT
2 L25 18BR REAR FOG LAMP FEED
3 3 L39 18LB FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
DIODE MODULE
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

3 1 1 - -
2 M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
DOME LAMP 3 M2 20YL COURTESY LAMPS SWITCH OUTPUT
(BASE/POLICE)
BLACK
C A CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

A Z1 20BK GROUND
B M2 20YL COURTESY LAMPS SWITCH OUTPUT
DOME LAMPS C M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
SWITCH
(MIDLINE)
J998W-7 XJI08036
1 BLACK
1 M2 18YL COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
2 3 2 G16 18BK/LB DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 Z1 18BK GROUND
DRIVER DOOR
JAMB SWITCH
2 1

1 P34 16PK/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
2 P33 16OR/BK DOOR LOCK DRIVER
DRIVER DOOR
LOCK MOTOR

1 Q28 14DG/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR DOWN
BLUE 2 Q18 14GY/BK RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER UP
3 Q16 14BR/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT UP
5 1 4 Q17 14DB/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER UP
12 6 5 Q11 14LB LEFT WINDOW DRIVER UP
6 Q26 14VT/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT DOOR
DRIVER POWER 7 P35 18OR/VT DOOR LOCK SWITCH OUTPUT (LOCK)
LOCK/WINDOW 8 Z1 14BK GROUND
SWITCH-C1 9 F81 14TN FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
(LHD) 10 Q27 14RD/BK LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
(FULL OPTIONS) 11 P36 18PK/VT DOOR LOCK SWITCH OUPUT (UNLOOK
12 Q21 14WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)

BLUE 1 Q28 14DG/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR DOWN
2 Q18 14GY/BK RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER UP
5 1 3 Q11 14BR LEFT WINDOW DRIVER UP
12 6 4 Q17 14DB/WT LEFT REAR DRIVER DOWN
5 Q16 14BR/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT UP
6 Q21 14VT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER UP
DRIVER POWER
7 P35 18OR/VT DOOR LOCK SWITCH OUTPUT (LOCK)
LOCK/WINDOW
8 Z1 14BK GROUND
SWITCH-C1
(RHD) 9 F81 14TN FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
(FULL OPTIONS) 10 Q27 14RD/BK LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
11 P36 18PK/VT DOOR LOCK SWITCH OUTPUT (UNLOCK)
12 Q26 14VT/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT DOOR
XJI08037 J998W-7
WHITE CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 P71 20YL LEFT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
4 1 1 P71 20YL/LB LEFT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
2 P76 20OR/YL COMMON
3 F83 18YL/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
8 5 4 P74 20DB RIGHT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
5 Z1 14BK GROUND
DRIVER POWER
5 Z1 16BK GROUND
LOCK/WINDOW
6 P75 20DB/WT LEFT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
SWITCH-C2
(FULL OPTIONS) 7 P72 20YL/BK RIGHT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
8 Q1 14YL POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED

RED 1 P71 20YL LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER
6 4 2 P75 20DB/WT LEFT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
3 P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
3 3 P75 20DB/WT LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER
1
DRIVER POWER 5 C16 20BK/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
MIRROR 5 C16 20LB/YL FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
(LHD) 6 Z1 18BK GROUND
6 Z1 16BK GROUND
RED CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

6 4 1 P72 20YL/BK RIGHT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
2 P74 20DB RIGHT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
3 3 P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
1
DRIVER POWER 4 P76 20OR/YL COMMON
MIRROR 5 C16 20BK/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
(RHD) 6 Z1 18BK GROUND
POWER MIRRORS
FULL OPTIONS
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI08038
BLACK

1 2
1 Q11 14LB LEFT WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
2 Q21 14WT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER DOWN
DRIVER POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
(LHD)
BLACK

1 Q11 14BR LEFT WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
2 Q21 14VT LEFT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER DOWN
DRIVER POWER
WINDOW MOTOR
(RHD)
BLACK
2 1

1 K52 18PK/BK DUTY CYCLE EVAP PURGE/SOLENOID CONTROL
DUTY CYCLE
EVAP/PURGE
SOLENOID
(GAS)
A D CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

A F142 18DG/OR FUSED AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
B K35 18GY/YL EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
ELECTRONIC C - -
VACUUM D Z1 18BK GROUND
MODULATOR
(DIESEL)
XJI08039 J998W-7

A50 - -
A51 - -
A52 - -
A53 K156 20GY FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
A54 K2 20TN/BK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
A55 K68 18LG/YL NEEDLE MOVEMENT SENSOR (-)
A56 K134 20LB/BK SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR (-)
A57 K57 20LG/OR CONTROL SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR
BLACK A58 K135 20WT/BK SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR(+)
A59 K140 16TN/WT FUEL QUANTITY ACTUATOR GROUND
A60 V37 20RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
A61 K4 20BK/LB SENSOR GROUND
59 80 A62 K67 18BR/BK NEEDLE MOVEMENT SENSOR (+)
A63 -
A64 -
A65 -
53 72 A67 K24 20GY/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
A68 -
A69 K3 20LG/BK SENSOR GROUND
ENGINE CONTROL A70 -
MODULE - C1 A71 -
(DIESEL) A72 -
A73 -
A74 -
A75 -
A76 -
A77 K153 16OR SHUT-OFF FEED
A78 -
A79 K126 16LG SOLENOID CONTROL
J998W-7 XJI08040

K1 Z12 14BK/TN GROUND
K2 A142 16DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
K3 - -
K4 - -
K5 C13 20DB/OR A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
K6 K159 18VT/RD ENGINE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
K7
K8 C103 18DG A/C SWITCH SIGNAL
K9 K29 20WT/PK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
K10 C22 20DB/WT A/C SWITCH SENSE
K11 K6 20VT/WT 5 VOLT SUPPLY
K12 K151 20WT LOW IDLE POSITION SWITCH
K13 K21 20BK/RD INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
K14 - -
K15 - -
K16 - -
K17 C27 20DB/PK RADIATOR FAN RELAY CONTROL
BLACK
K18 G8 18LB/BK FUEL MONITOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
K19 - -
K20 L50 20WT/TN BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
K21 - -
K41 K1
K22 - -
K23 K255 20WT/DG PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
K24 K22 20OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
K25 - -
K26 - -
K27 Z12 16BK/TN GROUND
K28 A142 16DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
K29 K35 18GY/YL EGR SOLENOID CONTROL
K51 K14 K30 V66 18RD/LG WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
K31 - -
K32 K185 20OR/LB WAIT TO START INDICATOR
K33 K51 20DB/YL AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY CONTROL
ENGINE CONTROL
MODULE - C2 K34 K48 18OR/RD FAULT SIGNAL
(DIESEL) K35 - -
K36 - -
K37 - -
K38 G55 18OR/BK ENGINE DISABLE SIGNAL
K39 K9 20LB 5V SUPPLY
K40 K1 20DG/RD BOOST PRESSURE SIGNAL
K41 - -
K42 K152 18WT GLOW PLUG RELAY CONTROL SENSE
K43 - -
K44 - -
K45 D21 20PK SCI TRANSMIT/ ISO 9141K
K46 - -
K47 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
K48 - -
K49 - -
K50 - -
K51 G7 20WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
XJI08041 J998W-7
BLACK
1 2
ENGINE COOLANT 2 K2 18TN/BK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
(GAS)
BLACK

2 1 1 K2 18TN/BK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR NO. 1
(DIESEL)
BLACK

2 1 K222 18TN/RD SECONDARY ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1
2 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR RETURN
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR NO. 2
(DIESEL)
BLACK
3 1
2 G60 18GY/YL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
ENGINE OIL 3 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
PRESSURE SENSOR
J998W-7 XJI08042

1 - -
EVAP LEAK 3 K106 18WT/DG LEAK DETECTION PUMP SOLENOID CONTROL
DETECTION 4 K105 18OR LEAK DETECTION PUMP SWITCH SENSE
PUMP
(EXCEPT BUILT-UP
-EXPORT)
WHITE

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
1 4 2 K78 20GY IDLE ACTUATOR
EXTENDED IDLE 3 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
SWITCH 4 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
(POLICE PACKAGE)
BLACK

1 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
1 4 2 L39 20LB FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
FRONT FOG 3 L139 20VT FOG LAMP RELAY OUTPUT
LAMP SWITCH 4 Z1 20BK GROUND
BLACK
1 V6 16DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
3 1 2 V5 16DG/YL WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
3 - -
6 4
4 Z1 16BK GROUND
5 V3 16BR/WT LOW SPEED WIPER SWITCH OUTPUT
FRONT WIPER 6 V4 16BR/VT WIPER HIGH SPEED OUTPUT
MOTOR
XJI08043 J998W-7
2 1

1 A93 14RD/BK FUEL HEATER RELAY OUTPUT
FUEL HEATER 2 Z1 14BK GROUND
(DIESEL)

1 2
1 A142 18DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
2 K11 18WT/DB FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1

(2.5L GAS)

1 2 1 A142 18DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
2 K12 18TN FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2

(2.5L GAS)

1 2 1 A142 18DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
2 K13 18YL/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3

(2.5L GAS)

1 2
2 K14 18LB/BR FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4

(2.5L GAS)
J998W-7 XJI08044
BLACK
2 1

2 K11 18WT/DB FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 1

(4.0L GAS)
BLACK
2 1

2 K12 18TN FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2

(4.0L GAS)
BLACK
2 1

2 K13 18YL/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 3

(4.0L GAS)
BLACK
2 1
2 K14 18LB/BR FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4

(4.0L GAS)
BLACK
2 1

2 K15 18PK/BK FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 5

(4.0L GAS)
BLACK
2 1

2 K16 18LG/BK FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6 DRIVER
FUEL INJECTOR NO. 6
(4.0L GAS)
XJI08045 J998W-7
BLACK
6 5 4
1 - -
2 - -
3 K226 20DB/LG FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
3 2 1 5 - -
FUEL LEVEL 6 - -
SENSOR
(DIESEL)
BLACK
6 5 4
1 A141 16DG/WT FUEL PUMP RELAY OUTPUT
2 - -
3 K226 20DB/LG FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
3 2 1 5 - -
FUEL PUMP 6 Z1 16BK GROUND
MODULE
(GAS)
BLACK CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 K134 20LB/BK SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR (-)
2 K57 20LG/OR CONTROL SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR
5 1 3 K135 20WT/BK SLEEVE POSITION SENSOR (-)
10 6 4 K4 20BK/LB SENSOR GROUND
5 K126 16LG SOLENOID CONTROL
6 K153 16OR SHUTOFF FEED
FUEL PUMP 7 K156 20GY FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
MODULE 8 K140 16TN/WT FUEL QUANITY ACTUATOR GROUND
(DIESEL) 9 A142 16DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
10 F142 16DG/OR FUSED AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
BLACK

3 1 1 B42 20TN/WT G SWITCH NO. 2 SENSE
2 B41 20YL/VT G SWITCH NO.1 SENSE
3 B43 20PK/OR G SWITCH TEST SIGNAL
G SWITCH
BLACK

1 2 1 K72 18DG/OR GENERATOR DRIVER
1 K72 16DG/OR GENERATOR DRIVER
2 K20 18DG GENERATOR FIELD DRIVER (+)
GENERATOR
J998W-7 XJI08046
1
3 2 1 A54 10RD/GY FUSED B (+)
4 2 F142 18DG/OR FUSED AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
3 K152 18WT -
GLOW PLUG 4 K154 10GY GLOW PLUG RELAY OUTPUT
RELAY
(DIESEL)
BLACK
1 L4 16VT/WT LOW BEAM RELAY OUTPUT
4 1
2 L2 14LG HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
3 L3 16RD/OR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
HEADLAMP BEAM 4 L20 14LG/WT FUSED B (+) OPTICAL HORN FEED
SELECT SWITCH

BLACK 1 - -
8 6 4 2
2 A3 14RD/WT FUSED B(+)
3 - -
4 Z1 18BK GROUND
5 - -
7 5 3 1 L2 14LG HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
6
L2 14LG HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
HEADLAMP 7 - -
DELAY MODULE 8 F87 20WT/BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
XJI08047 J998W-7

BLACK 1 - -
2 Z15 20BK/GY GROUND
1 6 3 - -
5 L13 20BR/YL HEADLAMP ADJUST SIGNAL
HEADLAMP 6 - -
LEVELING SWITCH
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

1 E1 20TN PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
1
3 2 L2 14LG HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
2
F34 18TN/BK FUSED B(+)
4
9 4 F34 18TN/BK FUSED B(+)
7 5 G26 20LB DOOR LOCK INHIBIT SENSE
8 5 6 G16 20BK/LB DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
7 L20 14LG/WT FUSED B (+)
6
A3 14RD/WT FUSED B (+)
8
HEADLAMP A3 14RD/WT FUSED B (+)
SWITCH - C1 9 L7 18BK/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
BLACK

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
1
Z1 18BK GROUND
HEADLAMP 2 - -
SWITCH - C2
J998W-7 XJI08048
3 2 1 1 - -
2 F235 16RD B(+) TO HEATED SEAT MODULE
6 5 4 2 F235 16RD B(+) TO HEATED SEAT MODULE
3 - -
9 8 7 4 F83 18YL/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
5 - -
6 Z1 18BK GROUND
HEATED SEAT 7 - -
RELAY 8 F37 14RD/LB FUSED B(+)

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
BLACK
2 C4 14TN LOW MOTOR BLOWER DRIVER
3 C5 14LG M1 MOTOR BLOWER DRIVER
4 C6 14LB M2 MOTOR BLOWER DRIVER
5 1 5 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
10 6 6 C36 20RD/WT BLEND DOOR FEEDBACK SIGNAL
7 C7 12BK/TN HIGH MOTOR BLOWER DRIVER
8 A111 12RD/LG FUSED B (+)
HVAC UNIT
10 Z8 12BK/VT GROUND
10 Z8 12BK/PK GROUND
10 Z8 20BK/VT GROUND
BLACK
1 K59 18VT/BK IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 4 DRIVER
1 4 2 K40 18BR/WT IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 3 DRIVER
3 K60 18YL/BK IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 2 DRIVER
IDLE AIR 4 K39 18GY/RD IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 1 DRIVER
CONTROL MOTOR
LHD
RHD W/O POWER AMPLIFER
RHD WITH POWER AMPLIFER
XJI08049 J998W-7
BLACK

2 1 1 K19 18GY IGNITION COIL NO. 1 DRIVER
2 K19 18GY IGNITION COIL NO. 1 DRIVER
IGNITION COIL

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
BLACK 2 G9 20GY/BK RED BRAKE INDICATOR WARNING DRIVER
3 A2 12PK/BK FUSED B(+)
5 1 4 A22 12BK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
5 - -
6 - -
10 6 7 A1 12RD FUSED B(+)
8 A31 12BK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
IGNITION
SWITCH - C1 9 A21 12DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
10 A41 14YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START)
GREEN

2 1 1 G26 20LB KEY-IN IGNITION SWITCH SENSE
2 G16 20BK/LB DRIVER DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
IGNITION
SWITCH - C2
2WD
J998W-7 XJI08050

BLACK 1 G78 20TN/BK LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
5 1 4 G19 20LG/OR ABS INDICATOR DRIVER
5 G34 16RD/GY HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
10 6 6 Z2 20BK/LG GROUND
7 G29 20BK/LB LOW WASHER FLUID SENSE
8 F87 20WT/BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START-RUN)
INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER - C1 9 M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
(LHD) 10 L61 20LG/WT LEFT TURN SIGNAL

BLACK
1 G78 20TN/BK LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS SWITCH SIGNAL
5 1
4 G19 20LG/OR ABS INDICATOR DRIVER
5 L3 16RD/OR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
10 6 6 Z2 20BK/LG GROUND
7 G29 20BK/LB LOW WASHER FLUID SENSE
8 F87 20WT/BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START-RUN)
INSTRUMENT 9 M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
CLUSTER - C1 10 L61 20LG/WT LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(RHD)

5 1 3 C81 20LB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
4 C80 20DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH SENSE
10 6 5 G107 20BK/RD 4WD SWITCH SENSE
6 L60 20TN RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
7 G106 20BK/WT PART TIME 4WD INDICATOR LAMP
8 G26 20LB DOOR LOCK INHIBIT SENSE
INSTRUMENT
9 Z2 18BK/LG GROUND
CLUSTER - C2
10 G10 20LG/RD SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
XJI08051 J998W-7
GRAY

2 K21 18BK/RD INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR

NATURAL 2 - -
3 F45 20YL/RD FUSED B(+) ENGINE STARTER MOTOR RELAY
4 - -
1 2
5 L78 18DG/YL FUSED HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
3 7 5 L78 20DG/YL FUSED HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
8 12 6 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
7 - -
JUNCTION 8 V6 16DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
BLOCK - C1 9 L33 20RD FUSED LEFT HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
10 L43 20VT FUSED LEFT LOW BEAM OUTPUT
11 L34 20RD/OR FUSED RIGHT HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
WHITE CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 A4 12BK/PK FUSED B(+)
2 A7 10RD/BK FUSED B(+)
1 2
3 - -
3 6 4 X2 20DG/RD HORN RELAY OUTPUT
5 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
6 L77 20BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
JUNCTION
BLOCK - C2
GAS
DIESEL
4.0L AND DIESEL
J998W-7 XJI08052
NATURAL
1 3
2 Z1 20BK GROUND
JUNCTION
BLOCK - C3

L1 A31 12BK/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
L2 A21 12DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
M1 A41 14YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST)
M2 A22 12BK/OR FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
M3 L7 18BK/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
M4 V6 16DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
M5 F38 16RD/LB FUSED B(+)
M6 F30 16RD CIGAR LIGHTER RELAY OUTPUT
S1 E1 20TN PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
S2 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
S3 L4 16VT/WT DIMMER SWITCH LOW BEAM OUTPUT
NATURAL S4 F83 18YL/DG FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
S7 L1 S14 S5 Z1 14BK GROUND
S1 S6 - -
M4
S2 S7 L3 16RD/OR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR DRIVER
M5
S3 M6 S8 F15 20DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
S9 X12 16RD/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
M1
S24 S10 - -
M2
S25 S11 V23 18BR/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
M3
S26
S12 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
S13 L2 S20 S13 F87 20WT/BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
S14 - -
JUNCTION S15 - -
BLOCK - C4 S16 - -
S17 - -
S18 M1 20PK FUSED B(+)
S19 C16 20LB/YL FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
S19 C16 20BK/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
S20 L5 20BK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
S21 F14 18LG/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
S22 X3 20BK/RD HORN RELAY CONTROL
S23 F23 18DB/YL FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
S24 -
S25 M2 20YL COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
S26 C81 20LB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
LHD
RHD
XJI08053 J998W-7

NATURAL 1 X3 20BK/RD HORN RELAY CONTROL
1 4 3 P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
4 - -
5 C16 20LB/YL FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
6 - -
5 7 8 10 7 F35 16RD FUSED B(+)
8 F81 12TN FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
JUNCTION 9 P74 20DB RIGHT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
BLOCK - C5
10 P72 20YL/BK RIGHT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
2 1 NATURAL

1 C15 12BK/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
2 F37 14RD/LB FUSED B(+)
JUNCTION
BLOCK - C6

NATURAL 2 L77 18BR/YL FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
1 3
4 8 5 P34 16PK/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
JUNCTION
8 A6 20RD/OR FUSED B(+)
BLOCK - C7
FULL OPTIONS
RHD FULL OPTIONS
BASE
RHD
POWER SEATS
J998W-7 XJI08054
NATURAL

2 - -
JUNCTION
BLOCK - C8

3 C16 20BK/WT FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
NATURAL
4 - -
5 - -
12 6
5 1 7 P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
8 - -
9 F35 16RD FUSED B(+)
JUNCTION
BLOCK - C9 11 Z1 18BK GROUND

2 P75 20DB/WT LEFT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
NATURAL
4 - -
12 6
5 - -
5 1 6 P71 20YL/LB LEFT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
8 - -
JUNCTION 9 - -
BLOCK - C9 10 P76 20OR/YL COMMON
GRAY
1 2
1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2 L10 18BR/LG BACK-UP LAMP FEED
LEFT BACK-UP
LAMP
POWER MIRROR
XJI08055 FULL OPTIONS J998W-7
2
1 1 L77 20BR FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
2 Z1 20BK GROUND
LEFT CITY
LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
BLACK

2 M2 18BK/WT COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
LEFT
COURTESY LAMP
GRAY

2 L39 20LB FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
LEFT FOG
LAMP
BLACK
1 2 1 X85 18BK/RD AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
1 X55 18BR/RD LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-)
1 X85 18LG/RD AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
LEFT FRONT
2 X87 18DG AMPLIFIED LEFT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
DOOR SPEAKER
2 X53 18DG LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+)
2 X87 18LG/BK AMPLIFIED LEFT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
BLACK
1
2
1 X85 18LG/RD AMPLIFIED LEFT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
2 X87 18LG/BK AMPLIFIED LEFT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
LEFT FRONT
DOOR TWEETER
6 SPEAKER LHD
6 SPEAKER RHD
4 SPEAKER
J998W-7 XJI08056
GRAY

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
3 1 2 L77 18BR FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
3 L61 18LG LEFT TURN SIGNAL
LEFT FRONT
PARK/TURN
SIGNAL LAMP NO.1
(EXCEPT BUILT-UP-
EXPORT)
GRAY

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
3 1 2 L77 18BR FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
LEFT FRONT
PARK/TURN
SIGNAL LAMP NO.2
(EXCEPT BUILT-UP-
EXPORT)
GRAY

LEFT FRONT
TURN SIGNAL
LAMP NO.1
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
GRAY

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2 1 2 L61 18LG LEFT TURN SIGNAL
LEFT FRONT
TURN SIGNAL
LAMP NO.2
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
XJI08057 J998W-7
GRAY

2 1
1 B8 18RD/DB LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
2 B9 18RD LEFT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
LEFT FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
B CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

L33 18RD FUSED LEFT HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
A
A C L33 20RD FUSED LEFT HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
B L43 18VT FUSED LEFT LOW BEAM OUTPUT
C Z1 18BK GROUND
LEFT HEADLAMP
BLACK

3 2 1
1 L43 18VT FUSED LEFT LOW BEAM OUTPUT
2 L13 18BR/YL HEADLAMP ADJUST SIGNAL
LEFT HEADLAMP 3 Z15 18BK/GY GROUND
LEVELING MOTOR
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

A P88 18BR/BK HEATED SEAT DRIVER
B Z1 18BK GROUND
LEFT HEATED
SEAT BACK
A B
C D A P87 18BK/OR HEATED SEAT DRIVER
B P88 18BR/BK HEATED SEAT DRIVER
C P141 18TN/LB LEFT SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
LEFT HEATED D P143 18BK/DG LEFT SEAT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INPUT
SEAT CUSHION
FOG LAMP
J998W-7 XJI08058

4 6 1 P137 18VT LEFT SEAT LOW HEAT LED DRIVER
3 1 2 - -
3 Z1 18BK GROUND
LEFT HEATED
5 P139 18VT/WT LEFT SEAT HIGH HEAT LED DRIVER
SEAT SWITCH
6 P133 18TN/DG LEFT SEAT HEATER SWITCH MUX
BLACK
A F37 14RD FUSED B(+)
M N Z1 14BK GROUND
B B
L C - -
K E P13 14RD/WT RIGHT POWER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD
F - -
A J
G - -
E F H - -
J P11 14YL/WT LEFT POWER SEAT REAR UP
C H G K P17 14RD/LB LEFT POWER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD
L P15 14YL/LB LEFT POWER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD
LEFT POWER M P19 14YL/LG SEAT FRONT UP SWITCH SENSE
SEAT SWITCH N P21 14RD/LG LEFT POWER SEAT FRONT DOWN
BLACK
1
1 - -
LEFT REAR
DOOR JAMB
SWITCH
BLACK

LEFT REAR
DOOR LOCK
MOTOR

2 L38 18OR/WT REAR FOG LAMP FEED
LEFT REAR
FOG LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
XJI08059 J998W-7
BLACK

B A
A B3 20LG/DB LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
B B4 20LG LEFT REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
LEFT REAR
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
BLACK

1 Q13 14DB POWER WINDOW LEFT REAR B(+) UP
1 2
2 Q23 14RD/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER DOWN
LEFT REAR
WINDOW MOTOR
BLUE CAV CIRCUIT

1 Q13 14DB POWER WINDOW LEFT REAR B(+) UP
2 Q27 14RD/BK LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
3 -
3 1
4 Q17 14DB/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
6 4 5 Q23 14RD/WT LEFT REAR WINDOW DRIVER DOWN
LEFT REAR
WINDOW SWITCH
2
1
LEFT 2 Z1 18BK GROUND
REPEATER
LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
J998W-7 XJI08060
NATURAL

1 L77 20BR FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
LEFT SIDE
MARKER LAMP
(EXCEPT BUILT
-UP-EXPORT)

A X57 18BR/LB LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
LEFT A X91 16BR/DB AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
SOUNDBAR B X51 18BR/YL LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
SPEAKER B X93 16BR/YL AMPLIFIED LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
1 2
LEFT SPEED 2 V37 20RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLACK
1 2 3
1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2 L77 18BR FUSED LEFT INBOARD TAIL LAMP
LEFT TAIL/
STOP LAMP
4 SPEAKER SYSTEM
6 SPEAKER SYSTEM
XJI08061 J998W-7

LEFT TURN 2 L63 18DG/RD LEFT TURN SIGNAL
SIGNAL LAMP

1 L78 18BK/YL FUSED B(+)
2 Z1 18BK GROUND
LICENSE LAMP
BLACK
A P33 16OR/BK DOOR LOCK DRIVER
B P34 16PK/BK DOOR UNLOCK DRIVER
A B
LIFTGATE
LOCK MOTOR
BLACK
1 Z1 20BK GROUND
3 1 2 G78 20TN/BK LIFTGATE AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 M4 20VT/YL LIFTGATE COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
LIFTGATE
SWITCH
J998W-7 XJI08062
2 1
1 G18 18PK/BK COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
LOW COOLANT
SWITCH
(DIESEL)
BLACK

2 K1 18DG/RD MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
MANIFOLD
3 K7 20OR 5V SUPPLY
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
1 2
1 K67 18BR/BK NEEDLE MOVEMENT SENSOR B(+)
NEEDLE
2 K68 18LG/YL NEEDLE MOVEMENT SENSOR B(-)
MOVEMENT
SENSOR
(DIESEL)

3 Z1 20BK GROUND
6 1
4 - -
5 P55 20DB DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL
6 D1 20VT/BR CCD BUS(+)
12 7 7 - -
8 - -
OVERHEAD 9 Z1 20BK GROUND
MODULE 10 X3 20BK/RD HORN RELAY CONTROL
11 P59 20LB/RD DOOR LOCK CONTROL
12 D2 20WT/BK CCD BUS(-)
GRAY
1 F142 20DG/WT FUSED AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z1 18BK GROUND
3 4
4 K41 18BK/DG OXYGEN SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL
OXYGEN
SENSOR 1/1
UPSTREAM
XJI08063 J998W-7
1 2 BLACK

3 4 1 F142 20DG/WT FUSED AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z1 20BK GROUND
OXYGEN 3 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
SENSOR 1/2 4 K141 18TN/WT OXYGEN SENSOR 1/2 SIGNAL
DOWNSTREAM
BLACK

1 3
2 T41 18BK/WT PARK NETURAL POSITION SWITCH SENSE
3 L10 18BR/LG TRS REVERSE SENSE
PARK/NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
(2.5L GAS A/T)
YELLOW CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 - -
2 - -
4 1 3 R42 18BK/YL PASSENGER AIRBAG LINE 2
4 R44 18DG/YL PASSENGER AIRBAG LINE 1
PASSENGER
AIRBAG
BLACK
1

2 3
2 G16 18BK/LB LEFT DOOR AJAR SWITCH SENSE
3 Z1 18BK GROUND
PASSENGER
DOOR JAMB
SWITCH
BLACK
2 1
PASSENGER
DOOR LOCK
MOTOR
J998W-7 XJI08064

2 Q22 14VT RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (DOWN)
3 Q26 14VT/WT MASTER SWITCH RIGHT FRONT WINDOW MOTOR (DOWN)
BLUE
4 Q16 14BR/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT FRONT DOWN
5 1
6 - -
12 6
7 - -
8 - -
PASSENGER 9 Q12 14BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
POWER 10 Q1 14YL POWER WINDOW SWITCH FEED
LOCK/WINDOW
11 - -
SWITCH - C1
12 - -
(FULL OPTIONS)
WHITE
1 P59 20LB/RD DOOR LOCK CONTROL
4 1 2 P55 20DB/PK DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL
2 P55 20DB DOOR UNLOCK RELAY CONTROL
3 P35 20OR/VT LOCK REQUEST
3 P36 18PK/VT DOOR UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE
8 5
PASSENGER 5 F35 16RD FUSED B(+)
POWER LOCK/WINDOW 6 Z1 14BK GROUND
SWITCH - C2 7 P36 20PK/VT DOOR UNLOCK SWITCH SENSE
(FULL OPTIONS) 7 P35 18OR/VT LOCK REQUEST
8 G26 20LB DOOR LOCK INHIBIT SENSE
LHD
RHD
XJI08065 J998W-7

RED
6 5 4 1 P72 20YL/BK RIGHT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
1 2 3
PASSENGER
POWER MIRROR

1 P71 20YL LEFT POWER MIRROR LEFT MOVEMENT
RED
6 5 4 2 P75 20DB/WT LEFT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
3 P75 20DB/RD LEFT POWER MIRROR UP MOVEMENT
1 2 3
PASSENGER
5 C16 20LB/YL FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
POWER MIRROR
POWER MIRRORS
FULL OPTIONS
J998W-7 XJI08066
BLACK

1 Q12 14BR RIGHT FRONT WINDOW DRIVER (UP)
2 Q22 14VT RIGHT FRONT DRIVER (DOWN)
PASSENGER POWER
WINDOW MOTOR

BLACK 1 - -
2 - -
4 - -
5 1
5 K151 20WT LOW IDLE POSITION SENSE
10 6
6 - -
7 K22 20OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSE SIGNAL
8 K255 20WT/DG PEDAL POSITION SENSOR
PEDAL POSITION 9 - -
SENSOR 10 K6 20VT/WT 5V OUTPUT
(DIESEL)

NATURAL 1 X55 18BR/RD LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-)
2 X56 18DB/RD RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-)
3 X58 18DB/OR RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
1 4
4 X60 18DG/RD RADIO 12V OUTPUT
5 10 5 X53 18DG LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+)
6 X54 18VT RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+)
7 X51 18BR/YL LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
POWER 8 X57 18BR/LB LEFT SOUND SPEAKER (-)
AMPLIFIER - C1 9 X52 18DB/WT RIGHT SOUND SPEAKER (+)
10 -
XJI08067 J998W-7

1 F75 16VT FUSED B(+)
NATURAL 2 F75 16VT FUSED B(+)
3 - -
1 6 4 X87 18LG/VT AMPLIFIED LEFT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
5 X94 18TN/RD RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
7 14 6 X93 18WT/RD LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
7 Z5 16BK/LB GROUND
8 Z5 16BK/LB GROUND
POWER 9 - -
AMPLIFIER - C2 10 X80 18LB/BK AMPLIFIED RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
11 X82 18LB/RD AMPLIFIED RIGHT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
12 X85 18BR/RD AMPLIFIED LEFT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
13 X92 18TN/BK AMPLIFIED RIGHT SOUND BAR SPEAKER (-)
14 X91 18WT/BK AMPLIFIED LEFT SOUND BAR SPEAKER (-)
BLACK
A C
A X13 18WT RADIO CHOKE OUTPUT
POWER ANTENNA B X17 18GY POWER ANTENNA UP (-)
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT) C X14 18DG POWER ANTENNA B(+) DOWN
C
A Z1 18BK GROUND
POWER ANTENNA B F34 18TN/BK FUSED B(+)
RELAY - C1 C X60 18DG/RD RADIO 12V OUTPUT
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
J998W-7 XJI08068
C
A X13 18WT RADIO CHOKE OUTPUT
POWER ANTENNA B X14 18DG POWER ANTENNA B(+) DOWN
C X17 18GY POWER ANTENNA UP (-)
RELAY - C2
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

1 Z1 20BK GROUND
5 1
1 Z1 14BK GROUND
8 4
P76 20OR/YL COMMON
5
P76 20OR/YL COMMON
POWER
MIRROR P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
6
SWITCH P91 20WT/BK LEFT/RIGHT POWER MIRROR HORIZONTAL SUPPLY
7 P75 20 DB/WT LEFT MIRROR LEFT DRIVER
8 P71 20YL/LB LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER
8 P71 20YL LEFT MIRROR UP DRIVER
BLACK

1 F38 16RD/LB FUSED B(+)
2 - -
3
3 Z1 16BK GROUND
POWER OUTLET
WHITE

1 2
1 Z1 20BK GROUND
2 K10 18DB/BR POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH (PSPS) SIGNAL
POWER STEERING
PRESSURE SWITCH
(2.5L GAS)
RHD
LHD
XJI08069 J998W-7

A1 - -
A2 A142 16DG/DR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
A3 - -
A4 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR RETURN
A5 - -
A6 - -
A6 - -
A6 - -
A7 - -
A8 K159 18VT/RD ENGINE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
A9 - -
A10 - -
A11 - -
A12 G18 18PK/BK COOLANT LEVEL SWITCH SENSE
A22 A32 A13 - -
A14 - -
A15 - -
A12 A21
A16 K222 18TN/RD SECONDARY ENGINE COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
A17 K7 18OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
A1 A11 A18 G8 18LB/BK FUEL MONITOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
A19 - -
A20 - -
POWERTRAIN
A21 - -
CONTROL MODULE - C1
A22 F16 16RD/LG FUSED B(+)
(DIESEL)
A23 - -
A24 - -
A25 - -
A26 - -
A27 G123 18DG/WT WATER IN FUEL SENSE
A28 - -
A29 - -
A30 - -
A31 Z12 14BK/TN GROUND
J998W-7 XJI08070

A1 - -
A2 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
A3 - -
A4 K167 18BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
A5 - -
A6 T41 18BK/WT PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH SENSE
A6 Z1 18BK GROUND
A6 T41 18BK/WT TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH SENSE
A7 K19 18GY IGNITION COIL NO. 1 DRIVER
A8 K24 18GY/BK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
A9 - -
A10 K60 18YL/BK IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 2 DRIVER
BLACK A11 K40 18BR/WT IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 3 DRIVER
A12 K10 18DB/BR POWER STEERING PRESURE SENSE
A22 A32 A12 K78 18GY IDLE ACTUATOR
A13 - -
A14 - -
A12 A21
A15 K21 18BK/RD INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
A16 K2 18TN/BK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
A1 A11 A17 K7 18OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
A18 K44 18TN/YL CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
A19 K39 18GY/RD IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 1 DRIVER
POWERTRAIN
A20 K59 18VT/BK IDLE AIR CONTROL NO. 4 DRIVER
CONTROL MODULE - C1
A21 - -
(GAS)
A22 A61 16DG/BK FUSED B(+)
A23 K22 18OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
A24 K41 18BK/DG OXYGEN SENSOR 1/1 SIGNAL
A25 K141 18TN/WT OXYGEN SENSOR 1/2 SIGNAL
A26 - -
A27 K1 18DG/RD MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
A28 - -
A29 - -
A30 - -
M/T
2.5L
2.5L A/T
4.0L A/T
XJI08071 J998W-7

B1 - -
B2 - -
B3 - -
B4 - -
B5 - -
B6 - -
B7 - -
B8 - -
B9 - -
B10 K20 18DG GENERATOR FIELD DRIVER (+)
B11 - -
B12 - -
B22 B32
B13 - -
B14 - -
B12 B21 B15 - -
B16 - -
B1 B11 B17 - -
B18 V66 18RD/LG WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
B19 - -
POWERTRAIN
B20 - -
CONTROL MODULE - C2
B21 - -
(DIESEL)
B22 - -
B23 G60 18GY/YL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
B24 - -
B25 - -
B26 - -
B27 G7 18WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
B28 - -
B29 - -
B30 - -
B31 - -
B32 - -
J998W-7 XJI08072

B1 - -
B2 - -
B3 - -
B4 K11 18WT/DB FUEL INJECTOR NO.1 DRIVER
B5 K13 18YL/WT FUEL INJECTOR NO.3 DRIVER
B6 K15 18PK/BK FUEL INJECTOR NO.5 DRIVER
B7 - -
B8 - -
B9 - -
B10 K20 18DG GENERATOR FIELD DRIVER (+)
B11 K54 18OR/BK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL
B12 K16 18LG/BK FUEL INJECTOR NO.6 DRIVER
B22 B32
B13 - -
B14 - -
B12 B21 B15 K12 18TN FUEL INJECTOR NO. 2 DRIVER
B16 K14 18LB/BR FUEL INJECTOR NO. 4 DRIVER
B1 B11 B17 - -
B18 - -
B19 - -
POWERTRAIN
B20 - -
CONTROL MODULE - C2
B21 - -
(GAS)
B22 - -
B23 G60 18GY/YL ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
B24 - -
B25 - -
B26 - -
B27 G7 18WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
B28 - -
B29 - -
B30 - -
B31 K6 18VT/OR 5V SUPPLY
B32 - -
4.0L
2.5L A/T
XJI08073 J998W-7

C1 C103 18DG A/C SWITCH SIGNAL
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
GRAY C8 G154 18VT/LG LOW COOLANT INDICATOR DRIVER
C9 G86 18TN/OR WATER-IN-FUEL INDICATOR DRIVER
C22 C32 C10
C11
C12 C21 C12 A142 16DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
C13
C14
C1 C11
C15 K118 18PK/YL BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
C16 G55 18OR/BK ENGINE DISABLE SIGNAL
POWERTRAIN C17
CONTROL MODULE - C3 C18
(DIESEL) C19
C20
C21
C22 K48 18OR/RD FAULT SIGNAL
C23 C90 18LG A/C SWITCH SENSE
C24
C25 K72 18DG/OR GENERATOR DRIVER
C26 K226 18DB/LG FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
C27 D21 18PK SCI TRANSMIT/ ISO 9141K
C28 D2 18WT/BK CCD BUS(-)
C29 D20 18LG/BK SCI RECIEVE
C30 D1 18VT/BR CCD BUS(+)
C31
C32
J998W-7 XJI08074

C1 C13 18DB/OR A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY CONTROL
C3 K51 18DB/YL AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY CONTROL
C4 V36 18TN/RD SPEED CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID CONTROL
C5 V35 18LG/RD SPEED CONTROL VENT SOLENOID CONTROL
C6 - -
C7 - -
GRAY C8 - -
C9 - -
C22 C32 C10 K106 18WT/DG LEAK DETECTION PUMP SOLENOID CONTROL
C11 V32 18YL/RD SPEED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
C12 C21 C12 A142 18DG/OR AUTOMATIC SHUT DOWN RELAY OUTPUT
C13 - -
C14 K105 18OR LEAK DETECTION PUMP SWITCH SENSE
C1 C11
C15 K118 18PK/YL BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR SIGNAL
C16 - -
POWERTRAIN C17 - -
CONTROL C18 - -
MODULE - C3 C19 K31 18BR FUEL PUMP RELAY CONTROL
(GAS) C20 K52 18PK/BK DUTY CYCLE EVAP/PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL
C21 - -
C22 C22 18DB/WT A/C SWITCH SENSE
C23 C90 18LG A/C SELECT INPUT
C24 K29 18WT/PK BRAKE LAMP SWITCH SENSE
C25 K72 18DG/OR GENERATOR DRIVER
C26 K226 18DB/LG FUEL LEVEL SENSOR SIGNAL
C27 D21 18PK SCI TRANSMIT/ ISO 9141K
C28 D2 18WT/BK CCD BUS (-)
C29 D20 18LG/BK SCI RECEIVE
C30 D1 18VT/BR CCD BUS (+)
C31 - -
C32 V37 18RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
4.0L EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT
XJI08075 J998W-7

1 2
2 Z1 20BK GROUND
PRNDL
ILLUMINATION
(A/T)
LT.GRAY
1 2

1 C25 12LB RADIATOR FAN RELAY OUTPUT
2 Z1 12BK GROUND
RADIATOR
FAN MOTOR

BLACK
1 X60 16DG/RD RADIO 12V OUTPUT
2 X51 16BR/YL LEFT REAR SPEAKER (+)
7 1 3 X52 16DB/WT RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
4 X53 16DG LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (+)
RADIO - C1 5 X54 16VT RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (+)
6 X57 16BR/LB LEFT REAR SPEAKER (-)
7 X58 16DB/OR RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)

1 - -
2 X55 16BR/RD LEFT FRONT SPEAKER (-)
7 1
3 X56 16DB/RD RIGHT FRONT SPEAKER (-)
4 L7 18BK/YL HEADLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
RADIO - C2 5 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
6 X12 16RD/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
J998W-7 XJI08076

5 1 2
3 2 L36 18LG/BK REAR FOG LAMP
4 3 Z1 18BK GROUND
L38 18BR/WT REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
4
L38 18BR/WT REAR FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
REAR FOG 5 L25 18BR FUSED B(+)
LAMP RELAY
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
WHITE

1 4
2 L36 18LG/BK REAR FOG LAMP
REAR FOG 3 L38 18BR/WT REAR FOG LAMP FEED
LAMP SWITCH 4 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
BLACK

2 1 V20 18BK/WT REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL
Z1 18BK GROUND
2
REAR Z1 18BK GROUND
WASHER
PUMP
GRAY
1 Z1 20BK GROUND
2 C80 20DB/WT REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY CONTROL
1 4 3 C16 20LB/YL FUSED REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY OUTPUT
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER SWITCH

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2 V20 18BK/WT REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROL
1 4 3 V13 18BR/LG REAR REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
REAR WIPER 4 V23 18BR/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
MOTOR
GAS LHD
RHD
XJI08077 J998W-7
BLACK
1 Z1 20BK GROUND
1 2 2 V20 18BK/WT REAR WASHER MOTOR CONTROLLER
3 6 3 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
4 V13 18BR/LG REAR WIPER MOTOR CONTROL
5 V23 18BR/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
REAR WIPER/
6 V23 18BR/PK FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN)
WASHER SWITCH
GRAY
1 Z1 18BK GROUND
1 2
RIGHT BACK-UP
LAMP

RIGHT CITY 2 Z1 20BK GROUND
LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
BLACK

2 M2 18BK/WT COURTESY LAMPS DRIVER
RIGHT COURTESY
LAMP
GRAY

2 L39 20LB FOG LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
RIGHT
FOG LAMP
J998W-7 XJI08078
BLACK
1 2 1 X80 18LB/BR RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)

1 X56 18DB/RD RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (-)
2 X82 18LB/RD RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
RIGHT FRONT
DOOR SPEAKER 2 X54 18VT RIGHT FRONT DOOR SPEAKER (+)
BLACK

2 1 X80 18LB/BR RIGHT DOOR TWEETER (-)
2 X82 18LB/RD RIGHT DOOR TWEETER (+)
RIGHT FRONT
DOOR TWEETER
BLACK

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
3 1 3 L60 18TN RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
RIGHT FRONT
PARK/TURN
SIGNAL LAMP NO.1
(EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
BLACK
1 Z1 18BK GROUND
3 1
RIGHT FRONT
PARK/TURN
SIGNAL LAMP NO.2
(EXCEPT BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
GRAY

RIGHT FRONT
TURN SIGNAL
LAMP NO.1
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
6 SPEAKER
4 SPEAKER
XJI08079 J998W-7
GRAY

RIGHT FRONT
TURN SIGNAL
LAMP NO.2
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

2 1 1 B6 18WT/DB RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (-)
2 B7 18WT RIGHT FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (+)
RIGHT FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
B

A C A L34 18RD/OR FUSED RIGHT HIGH BEAM OUTPUT
B L44 18VT/RD FUSED RIGHT LOW BEAM OUTPUT
C Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT
HEADLAMP
BLACK

3 2 1
2 L13 18BK HEADLAMP ADJUST SIGNAL
RIGHT HEADLAMP 3 Z15 18BK/GY GROUND
LEVELING MOTOR
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)

A B A P89 18BR HEATED SEAT BACK TO CUSHION
B Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT HEATED
SEAT BACK

A P86 18PK/BK RIGHT HEAT ELEMENT OUTPUT
C D
B P89 18BR HEATED SEAT BACK TO CUSHION
C P141 18TN/LB SENSOR FEED
RIGHT HEATED D P144 18BK/YL RIGHT SENSE INPUT
SEAT CUSHION
J998W-7 XJI08080

4 6
1 P138 18VT/LG RIGHT SEAT LOW HEAT LED DRIVER
3 1
2 - -
3 Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT HEATED
5 P140 18VT/BK RIGHT SEAT HIGH HEAT LED DRIVER
SEAT SWITCH
6 P134 18TN/RD RIGHT SEAT HEATER SWITCH MUX

A Z1 14BK GROUND
N
B M B F37 14RD FUSED B(+)
L C - -
K E P10 14YL/WT RIGHT POWER SEAT REAR UP
F - -
A J
G - -
E F H - -
J P12 14RD/WT RIGHT POWER SEAT REAR DOWN
C H G K P14 14YL/LB RIGHT POWER SEAT HORIZONTAL FORWARD
L P16 14RD/LB RIGHT POWER SEAT HORIZONTAL REARWARD
RIGHT POWER M P18 14YL/LG RIGHT POWER SEAT FRONT UP
SEAT SWITCH N P20 14RD/LG RIGHT POWER SEAT FRONT DOWN
BLACK
1

2 3 1 - -
2 Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT REAR
DOOR JAMB
SWITCH
BLACK

RIGHT REAR
DOOR LOCK
MOTOR
BLACK

1 Z1 18BK GROUND
2 L38 18OR/WT REAR FOG LAMP FEED
RIGHT REAR
FOG LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
XJI08081 J998W-7
RED

B A
A B1 20YL/DB REAR WHEEL SENSOR (-)
B B2 20YL REAR WHEEL SENSOR (+)
RIGHT REAR
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR
BLACK

1 Q14 14GY POWER WINDOW RIGHT REAR B(+) UP
2 Q24 14DG POWER WINDOW RIGHT REAR B(+) DOWN
RIGHT REAR
WINDOW MOTOR
BLUE

1 Q14 14GY POWER WINDOW RIGHT REAR B(+) UP
3 1 2 Q28 14DG/WT MASTER WINDOW SWITCH RIGHT REAR DOWN
6 4 3 - -
4 Q18 14GY/BK RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER UP
5 Q24 14DG RIGHT REAR WINDOW DRIVER DOWN
RIGHT REAR
WINDOW SWITCH
2
1 L60 18GY RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
2 Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT
REPEATER
LAMP
(BUILT-UP-EXPORT)
NATURAL

RIGHT SIDE
MARKER LAMP
(EXCEPT BUILT
-UP-EXPORT)
A X58 18DB/OR RIGHT REAR AMPLIFIED SPEAKER (-)
RIGHT A X92 16TN/BK AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (-)
SOUNDBAR B X52 18DB/WT RIGHT REAR AMPLIFIED SPEAKER (+)
SPEAKER B X94 16TN/RD AMPLIFIED RIGHT REAR SPEAKER (+)
J998W-7 XJI08082
1 2
RIGHT SPEED 2 V37 20RD/LG SPEED CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL
CONTROL SWITCH
1 3
1 Z1 18BK GROUND
RIGHT TAIL/
STOP LAMP

RIGHT TURN 2 L62 18BR/RD RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
SIGNAL LAMP
BLACK

B A
A G10 20LG/RD SEAT BELT SWITCH SENSE
B Z1 20BK GROUND
SEAT BELT
SWITCH
XJI08083 J998W-7

1 P133 18TN/DG LEFT SEAT HEATER SWITCH MUX
BLACK 2 P141 18TN/LB SENSOR FEED
3 P86 18PK/BK RIGHT HEAT ELEMENT OUTPUT
4 F235 16RD B(+) TO HEATED SEAT MODULE FROM RELAY
1 6 5 P87 18BK/OR LEFT HEAT ELEMENT OUTPUT
6 F235 16RD B(+) TO HEATED SEAT MODULE FROM RELAY
7 14
7 P144 18BK/YL RIGHT HEAT SENSE INPUT
8 P143 18BK/DG LEFT HEAT SENSE INPUT
SEAT 9 P134 18TN/RD RIGHT SEAT HEATER SWITCH MUX
HEAT 10 P138 18VT/LG RIGHT SEAT LOW HEAT LED DRIVER
INTERFACE 11 P140 18VT/BK RIGHT SEAT HIGH HEAT LED DRIVER
MODULE 12 P137 18VT LEFT SEAT LOW HEAT LED DRIVER
13 Z2 18BK/LG GROUND
14 P139 18VT/WT LEFT SEAT HIGH HEAT LED DRIVER
BLACK
1 F1 20DB/GY FUSED B(+)
1 6
2 Z2 20BK/LG GROUND
SENTRY KEY
4 Z2 20BK/LG GROUND
IMMOBILIZER
MODULE 5 D2 20WT/BK CCD BUS (-)
(EXCEPT 6 D1 20VT/BR CCD BUS (+)
POLICE/POSTAL)
BLACK

1 K29 20WT/PK BRAKE SWITCH SENSE
2 1
SHIFT
LOCK
SOLENOID

2 - -
4 1 3 - -
8 5 4 K185 20OR/LB WAIT TO START INDICATOR
5 - -
6 - -
TELL TALE 7 G86 20TN/OR WATER IN FUEL INDICATOR DRIVER
MODULE 8 G154 20VT/LG LOW COOLANT INDICATOR DRIVER
(DIESEL)
LHD
RHD
J998W-7 XJI08084
NATURAL

1 2 3 2 K22 18OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
2 K22 20OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
THROTTLE 3 K7 20OR 5 VOLT SUPPLY
POSITION
SENSOR
A B
A F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
TORQUE CONVERTER B K54 18OR/BK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID CONTROL
CLUTCH SOLENOID
(2.5L GAS A/T)
Lt GRAY CAV CIRCUIT FUNCTION

1 - -
2 L74 20LG BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
5 1
10 6
6 - -
7 B40 14LB TRAILER TOW BRAKE B(+)
TRAILER TOW 8 Z1 14BK GROUND
CONNECTOR 9 - -
10 L73 20YL BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
BLACK
1 L63 20DG/RD LEFT TURN SIGNAL
4 3 A6 20RD/OR FUSED B(+)
4 - -
1
5 L73 20YL BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
TRAILER TOW
LEFT TURN RELAY
BLACK
1 L62 20BK/RD RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
4
4 - -
1
TRAILER TOW 5 L74 20LG BRAKE LAMP SWITCH OUTPUT
RIGHT TURN RELAY
2.5L
4.0L
XJI08085 J998W-7
BLACK

A B A G107 20BK/RD 4WD SWITCH SENSE (PART-TIME)
B Z1 18BK GROUND
B Z1 20BK GROUND
TRANSFER
CASE SWITCH
(231 4WD)
BLACK

A A Z1 18BK GROUND
D C
B G106 20BK/WT 4WD SWITCH SENSE (FULL-TIME)
B
C - -
D G107 20BK/RD 4WD SWITCH SENSE (PART-TIME)
TRANSFER
CASE SWITCH
(242 4WD)
BLACK

1 2 1 E2 20OR FUSED PANEL LAMPS DIMMER SWITCH SIGNAL
2 Z1 20BK GROUND
TRANSFER
SWITCH
ILLUMINATION
BLACK
1 4
1 T52 20RD/BK INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
2 T60 20OR/WT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID A
3 T19 20WT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID B
4 T22 20DB/WT TRANSMISSION SOLENOID C (LOCK-UP)
4 8 5 T31 20VT/LG INPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND
6 T13 20DB/BK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND
TRANSMISSION 7 T14 20LG/WT OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
CONTROL 8 - -
ASSEMBLY
DIESEL
GAS
J998W-7 XJI08086

1 T31 20VT/LG INPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND
2 T52 20RD/BK INPUT SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
3 T13 20DB/BK OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR GROUND
4 T14 20LG/WT OUTPUT SPEED SIGNAL
5 - -
BLACK CCD BUS (+)
7 D1 20VT/BR
8 - -
9 T3 18VT TRS T3 SENSE
10 - -
1 13
11 T22 20DB/WT SOLENOID CONTROL
14 26 12 T19 20WT SOLENOID A CONTROL
13 T60 20OR/WT SOLENOID B CONTROL
14 D21 20PK SCI TRANSMIT/ISO 9141K
15 - -
TRANSMISSION 16 K167 20BR/YL SENSOR GROUND
CONTROL
17 K22 20OR/DB THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR SIGNAL
MODULE
(4.0L)
19 - -
20 - -
21 T42 18VT/WT TRS T42 SENSE
22 T1 18LG/BK TRS T1 SENSE
24 Z12 18BK/TN GROUND
26 F12 18DB/WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (ST-RUN)
BLACK
1 T42 18VT/WT TRS T42 SENSE
2 2 T3 18VT TRS T3 SENSE
1
3 3 F20 18WT FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (START-RUN)
4 5
4 T1 18LG/BK TRS T1 SENSE
6
7 5 - -
8
7 T41 20BK/WT TRS T41 SENSE
TRANSMISSION 8 Z1 18BK GROUND
RANGE
SENSOR
(4.0L A/T)

BLACK
2 K21 20BK/RD INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SIGNAL
1 4 3 K9 20LB 5V SUPPLY
4 K1 20DG/RD BOOST PRESSURE SIGNAL
TURBO BOOST
PRESSURE
SENSOR
(DIESEL)
XJI08087 J998W-7

BLACK 1 L60 20TN RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
2 - -
3 L62 20BR/RD RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
6 1
4 L55 20RD/WT COMBINATION FLASHER INPUT
5 L6 20RD/WT FLASHER OUTPUT
6 L12 20VT/TN HAZARD FLASHER SELECT SIGNAL
7 - -
8 - -
11 7
9 L63 20DG/RD LEFT TURN SIGNAL
TURN SIGNAL/ 10 L61 20LG/WT LEFT TURN SIGNAL
HAZARD SWITCH 11 L55 20RD/WT COMBINATION FLASHER INPUT
BLACK

1
2 2 Z1 20BK GROUND
UNDERHOOD
LAMP/
MERCURY
SWITCH
BLACK

1 V36 18TN/RD SPEED CONTROL VACUUM SOLENOID CONTROL
4 1 2 V35 18LG/RD SPEED CONTROL VENT SOLENOID CONTROL
3 V30 20DB/RD SPEED CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
4 Z1 18BK GROUND
VEHICLE SPEED
CONTROL SERVO

3 1 1 K7 18OR 5V SUPPLY
3 G7 18WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
VEHICLE SPEED
SENSOR
(DIESEL)
J998W-7 XJI08088

3 1 1 K6 18VT/OR 5V SUPPLY
VEHICLE SPEED 3 G7 18WT/OR VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
SENSOR
(GAS)
BLACK

B A A Z1 20BK GROUND
B G29 20BK/LB WASHER FLUID SWITCH SENSE
WASHER
FLUID LEVEL
SWITCH
BLACK

2 1 1 G123 18DG/WT WATER IN FUEL SENSOR
WATER IN FUEL
SENSOR (DIESEL)
BLACK

A B A V10 18BR WASHER PUMP CONTROL SWITCH OUTPUT
B Z1 18BK GROUND
WINDSHIELD
WASHER PUMP
NATURAL
1 Z1 16BK GROUND
2 V5 16DG/YL WIPER PARK SWITCH SENSE
6 1 3 V10 18BR WASHER PUMP CONTROL
4 V3 16BR/WT LOW SPEED WIPER SWITCH OUTPUT
WIPE/WASH 5 V6 16DB FUSED IGNITION SWITCH OUTPUT (RUN-ACC)
SWITCH 6 V4 16BR/VT WIPER SPEED SWITCH OUTPUT
XJI08089 J998W-7
XJ 8W - 90 CONNECTOR LOCATIONS 8W - 90 - 1
8W-90 CONNECTOR LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION each section for connector number identification.
Refer to the index for the proper figure number.
INTRODUCTION
This section provides illustrations identifying com- CONNECTOR/GROUND LOCATIONS
ponent and connector locations in the vehicle. A con- For items that are not shown in this section N/S is
nector index is provided. Use the wiring diagrams in placed in the Fig. column.
Connector Color Location Fig. Connector Color Location Fig.

Name/Number Name/Number
A/C BK Top of 13, 14, Brake Warning BK At Master 2, 5, 8,
Compressor Compressor 15, 37 Pressure Switch Cylinder 11, 32,
Clutch (Diesel) 35
A/C-Heater BK At Control Unit 19, 20 C100 BK Near Junction 17, 18,
Control or Block 23
Heater Control C106 BK Front End 32, 33
A/C High GY At Drier Bottle 6, 37 Lighting
Pressure Switch C107 (2.5L) BK Rear of Engine 13, 14
(Diesel) Compartment
A/C High At Drier Bottle 3, 6, 9 C107 (4.0L) BK Rear of Engine 11, 15
Pressure Switch Compartment
(Gas)
C108 BK Near Battery N/S
A/C Low At Switch 33, 34
C109 BK ABS Connector N/S
Pressure Switch
(Diesel) C111 (Diesel) LT GY Near Battery N/S
A/C Low At Switch N/S C114 (Built-Up- BK Left Rear Lamp N/S
Pressure Switch Export) to Front End
(Gas) Lighting Jumper
Airbag Control YL Under Left Seat 21, 22 C115 (Built-Up- BK Right Repeater N/S
Module Export) lamp to Front
Lighting Jumper
Ambient Air BK Lower Radiator 4, 5,
Temperature Support 10 ,11, C116 (Diesel) BK Right Rear of N/S
Sensor 34 Engine
Back-Up Lamp BK On 31, 39 C120 (Diesel) BK Near Engine N/S
Switch (Diesel) Transmission C200 (LHD) GY Left Kick Panel 17, 23
Back-Up Lamp BK On N/S C201 (LHD) NAT At Center 17, 23
Switch (Gas) Transmission Console
Battery BK At Battery 16 C202 (RHD) BK Lower 18
Temperature (4.0L, 2.5L Instrument
Sensor (4.0L, Diesel) Panel
Gas, Diesel)
C203 (RHD) BL/BK Lower 18
Blend Door NAT T/O at N/S Instrument
Actuator A/C-Heater Panel
Control T/O
C204 (RHD) WT/ Lower 18
Brake Lamp GY Near Brake 12 BK Instrument
Switch Pedal Panel
8W - 90 - 2 8W - 90 CONNECTOR LOCATIONS XJ

C205 YL At Center 17, 18, C325 BK T/O Near N/S
Console 23 Liftgate
C206 BK At Center 17, 21, Grommet
Console 22 C326 BK In Liftgate N/S
C207 BK Near Right N/S Harness
Courtesy Lamp C327 BK In Liftgate N/S
C208 BK Near Left N/S Harness
Courtesy Lamp C329 BK At Passengers N/S
C300 NAT At Right Kick 18, 21 Seat
Panel C330 BK Near License N/S
C301 WT At Right Kick 21 Lamp
Panel C331 Lower Radiator N/S
C303 BK Right Kick N/S Support Pigtail
(LHD) Panel to Ambient Air
WT Temperature
(RHD) Sensor
C304 BK Right Rear N/S C332 BK At Drivers Seat N/S
Door C362 BK Near Left N/S
C305 WT Left Kick Panel N/S Power Seat
Switch
C306 WT Left Kick Panel N/S
C363 BK Near Right N/S
C307 WT Left Kick Panel N/S
Power Seat
C309 BK Left Rear Door N/S Switch
C310 BK Top of Liftgate 30 Camshaft BK Near Distributor 13, 14,
C311 BK Top of Liftgate 30 Position Sensor 15
(GAS)
C312 GY Top of Liftgate 30
Cargo BK At Lamp N/S
C313 GN Top of Liftgate 30
Lamp/Switch
C314 At Soundbar N/S
Center High BK Liftgate N/S
C316 BK At Power Seat N/S Mounted Stop
C317 GY Near Left Front 25 Lamp
Door Sill Cigar Lighter BK Instrument 19, 20
C318 GY Near Right N/S Panel
Front Door Sill Clockspring - NAT Steering 24
C319 BK Base of Right N/S C1 Column
B-Pillar Clockspring - Steering N/S
C320 BK Base of Left 25 C2 Column
B-Pillar Clockspring - YL Steering N/S
C321 BK Near Right Tail N/S C3 Column
Lamp Clutch Interlock GN Lower Steering 12
C322 BK Near left Tail N/S Switch Column
Lamp Clutch Interlock BK Lower Steering 18
C323 (Trailer BK Left Side at N/S Switch Jumper Column
Tow) Trailer Tow Combination BK Near Headlamp 17, 18
Harness Flasher Delay Module
C324 (RHD) Right Kick N/S Compass BK Overhead 29
Panel Console

Controller BK At Controller 8, 9, Engine Control BK Rear of Engine N/S
Anti-Lock Brake Anti-Lock Brake 32, 33 Module - C2 Compartment
Crankshaft BK Rear of Engine N/S (Diesel)
Position Sensor Engine Coolant BK Front of Engine 13, 14,
(Diesel) Temperature (GAS) 15
Crankshaft BK Near Fuel Rail 16 Sensor (GAS)
Position Sensor Engine Coolant BK Near N/S
(Gas) Temperature Crankshaft
Data Link BK Lower 17, 18 Sensor NO.1 Position Sensor
Connector Instrument (Diesel) T/O
Panel Engine Coolant BK Near Generator 36, 37
Daytime BK Near Blower 6 Temperature T/O
Running Lamp Motor Sensor NO.2
Module (Except (Diesel)
Built-Up-Export) Engine Oil BK Right Rear of 13, 15,
Diode Module BK Instrument N/S Pressure Engine 38
(Built-Up- Panel Sensor
Export) Engine Starter BK At Starter 13, 14,
Dome Lamp At Lamp N/S Motor 15, 38
(Base/Police) EVAP Leak Rear of Engine N/S
Dome Lamps BK At Switch N/S Detection Pump Compartment
Switch (Midline) (Except
Built-Up-Export)
Driver Door BK At Switch N/S
Jamb Switch Extended Idle WT Instrument N/S
Switch (Police Panel Harness
Driver Door In Driver Door 28
Package) Near T/O to
Lock Motor
Power Outlet
Driver Power BL In Driver Door 28
Front Fog Lamp BK Instrument 19, 20
Lock/Window
Switch Panel
Switch-C1
Front Wiper BK At Wiper Motor 6, 7
Driver Power WT In Driver Door 28
Motor
Door Lock/
Window Fuel Heater Left Rear 32, 33
Switch-C2 (Diesel) Engine
Compartment
Driver Power RD At Mirror 28
Mirror Fuel Injector BK At Injector 13, 14,
No. 1 15
Driver Power BK In Driver Door 28
Window Motor Fuel Injector BK At Injector 13, 14,
No. 2 15
Duty Cycle BK Rear of Engine 3, 4, 9,
EVAP/Purge Compartment 10 Fuel Injector BK At Injector 13, 14,
Solenoid (GAS) No. 3 15
Electronic At Modulator N/S Fuel Injector BK At Injector 13, 14,
Vacuum No. 4 15
Modulator Fuel Injector BK At Injector 15
(Diesel) No. 5
Engine Control BK Rear of Engine N/S Fuel Injector BK At Injector 15
Module - C1 Compartment No. 6
(Diesel) Fuel Level BK At Sensor N/S
Sensor (Diesel)

Fuel Pump BK Left Side of 36, 37 Generator BK At Generator 13, 14,
Module (Diesel) Engine 16, 36,
Fuel Pump BK At Fuel Pump N/S 37
Module (GAS) Module Glow Plug Left Rear 32, 33
G100 Near Battery 16 Relay (Diesel) Engine
Compartment
G101 Near Starter 13, 14,
15, 16 Headlamp BK On Steering 24
Beam Select Column
G102 Near Engine 34, 35
Switch
Connector
C107 HeadLamp BK Near Headlamp 17, 18
Delay Module Switch
G103 (4.0L) Near Ignition 16
Coil Headlamp BK At Switch N/S
Leveling Switch
G104 Body Ground N/S
(Built-Up-
(VM Diesel)
Export)
From Negative
Battery Cable Headlamp BK At Headlamp 17, 18,
Switch - C1 Switch 19, 20
G105 Engine Ground N/S
(VM Diesel) Headlamp BK At Headlamp 17, 18,
From Negative Switch - C2 Switch 19, 20
Battery Cable Heated Seat At Passengers N/S
G106 Near 2, 3, 8, Relay Seat
Powertrain 9, 32, HVAC Unit BK On HVAC Tub 21
Control Module 33 Idle Air Control BK At Throttle 13,
G107 Near Glove Box 17, 18 Motor Body 14,16
Lamp Switch Ignition Coil BK Front of Engine 13, 14,
G108 Near Headlamp 17, 18 16
Switch Ignition BK Steering 24
G200 Near Air Bag 21, 22 Switch-C1 Column
Control Module Ignition GN Steering 24
G300 Near Air Bag N/S Switch-C2 Column
Control Module Instrument BK At Instrument 17, 18
G301 Near Power 25 Cluster - C1 Cluster
Amplifier Instrument BK At Instrument 17, 18
G302 Near Left Tail 27 Cluster - C2 Cluster
Lamp Intake Air GY At Intake 13,
G303 Between Right N/S Temperature Manifold 15,16
Tail Lamp and Sensor
Power Amplifier Junction Block - NAT At Junction 12, 29
G304 Near Rear N/S C1 Block
Window Junction Block - WT At Junction 12, 29
Defogger Grid C2 Block
G305 In Power Seat N/S Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29
Harness C3 Block
G306 (Heated In Power Seat N/S Junction Block - NAT At Junction 18, 22,
Seats) Harness C4 Block 29
G Switch BK Under Rear 26 Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29
Seat C5 Block

Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29 Left Heated At Seat N/S
C6 Block Seat Cushion
Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29 Left Heated At Seat N/S
C7 Block Seat Switch
Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29 Left Power Seat BK At Switch N/S
C8 Block Switch
Junction Block - NAT At Junction 29 Left Rear Door BK At Switch N/S
C9 Block Jamb Switch
Left Back-Up GY At Back-Up N/S Left Rear Door BK In Left Rear 28
Lamp Lamp Lock Motor Door
Left City Lamp At Lamp N/S Left Rear Fog At Lamp N/S
(Built-Up- Lamp
Export) (Built-Up-
Left Courtesy BK At Courtesy N/S Export)
Lamp Lamp Left Rear Wheel BK Under Rear 26
Left Fog Lamp GY At Fog Lamp 1 Speed Sensor Seat
Left Front Door BK At Speaker 28 Left Rear BK In Left Rear 28
Speaker Window Motor Door
Left Front Door BK Left Front Door 28 Left Rear BL In Left Rear 28
Tweeter Window Switch Door
Left Front GY At Lamp 1 Left Repeater At Lamp N/S
Park/Turn Lamp
Signal Lamp (Built-Up-
NO.1 (Except Export)
Built-Up-Export) Left Side NAT At Lamp 1
Left Front GY At Lamp 1 Marker Lamp
Park/Turn (Except
Signal Lamp Built-Up-Export)
NO.2 (Except Left Soundbar BK At Soundbar N/S
Built-Up-Export) Speaker
Left Front Turn GY At Lamp N/S Left Speed On Steering N/S
Signal Lamp Control Switch Wheel
NO.1 (Built-Up- Left Tail/Stop BK At Lamp N/S
Export) Lamp
Left Front Turn GY At Lamp N/S Left Turn Signal At Rear Lamp N/S
Signal Lamp Lamp
NO.2 (Built-Up-
License Lamp WT At Lamp 30
Export)
Liftgate Lock BK Liftgate 30
Left Front GY Left Engine 8, 9,
Motor
Wheel Speed Compartment 32, 33
Sensor Liftgate Switch BK Liftgate 30
Left Headlamp At Headlamp 1 Left Vanity BK At Lamp 29
Lamp
Left Headlamp BK At Headlamp 32, 33
Leveling Motor Low Coolant Right Rear 33, 34
(Built-Up- Switch (Diesel) Engine
Export) Compartment
Left Heated At Seat N/S
Seat Back

Manifold BK At Throttle 13, 14, Power Antenna BK Rear of Engine N/S
Absolute Body 15 (Built-Up- Compartment
Pressure Export)
Sensor Power Antenna Rear of Engine N/S
Needle Left Front of 36 Relay - C1 Compartment
Movement Engine (Built-Up-
sensor (Diesel) Export)
Overhead At Overhead 29 Power Antenna Rear of Engine N/S
Module Console Relay - C2 Compartment
Oxygen Sensor GY Left Side of 13, 14, (Built-Up-
1/1 Upstream Engine at 15 Export)
Exhaust Power Mirror In Drivers Door N/S
Oxygen Sensor BK T/O Near 31 Switch
1/2 Downstream Vehicle Speed Power Outlet BK Instrument 19, 20
Sensor Panel
Park Brake BK At Park Brake 21, 22 Power Steering WT Front of Engine 13, 14
Switch Lever Pressure Switch
Park/Neutral BK On N/S (2.5L)
Position Switch Transmission Powertrain Right Fender N/S
(2.5L Gas A/T) Control Module Side Shield
Passenger YL Behind 17, 18, - C1 (Diesel)
Airbag Instrument 19, 20 Powertrain BK Left Fender 2, 6, 7
Panel Control Module Side Shield
Passenger Door BK At Switch N/S - C1 (GAS)
Jamb Switch Powertrain Right Fender N/S
Passenger Door BK In Front 28 Control Module Side Shield
Lock Motor Passenger - C2 (Diesel)
Door Powertrain Left Fender 2, 6, 7
Passenger BL In Front 28 Control Module Side Shield
Power Passenger - C2 (GAS)
Lock/Window Door Powertrain GY Right Fender N/S
Switch - C1 Control Module Side Shield
Passenger WT In Front 28 - C3 (Diesel)
Power Passenger Powertrain GY Left Fender 2, 6, 7
Lock/Window Door Control Module Side Shield
Switch - C2 C3 (GAS)
Passenger RD At Mirror 28 PRNDL BK Steering N/S
Power Mirror Illumination Co;umn
Passenger BK In Passenger 28 Radiator Fan LT GY At Radiator 8, 9
Power Window Door Motor
Motor Radio - C1 BK Behind Radio 19, 20
Pedal Position BK At Acclerator N/S Radio - C2 BK Behind Radio 19, 20
Sensor (Diesel) Pedal
Rear Fog Lamp Instrument 18
Power Amplifier NAT Under Rear N/S Relay Panel
- C1 Seat Left Side (Built-Up-
Power Amplifier NAT Under Rear N/S Export)
- C2 Seat Left Side

Rear Fog Lamp WT Instrument N/S Right Headlamp BK At Headlamp N/S
Switch Panel Leveling Motor
(Built-Up- (Built-Up-
Export) Export)
Rear Washer BK At Washer 6, 7, Right Heated At Seat N/S
Pump Reservoir 32, 33 Seat Back
Rear Window GY Instrument 19, 20 Right Heated At Seat N/S
Defogger Switch Panel Seat Cushion
Rear Wiper Liftgate 30 Right Heated At Seat N/S
Motor Seat Switch
Rear Wiper/ BK Instrument 19, 20 Right Power BK At Power Seat N/S
Washer Switch Panel Seat Switch
Right Back-Up GY At Lamp N/S Right Rear Door BK At Switch N/S
Lamp Jamb Switch
Right City Lamp At Lamp N/S Right Rear Door BK In Right Rear 28
(Built-Up- Lock Motor Door
Export) Right Rear Fog BK At Lamp N/S
Right Courtesy BK At Lamp N/S Lamp
Lamp (Built-Up-
Right Fog Lamp GY At Lamp 1 Export)
Right Front BK At Speaker 28 Right Rear RD Under Rear 26
Door Speaker Wheel Speed Seat
Sensor
Right Front BK At Right Front 28
Door Tweeter Door Right Rear BK In Right Rear 28
Window Motor Door
Right Front BK At Lamp 1
Park/Turn Right Rear BL In Right Rear 28
Signal Lamp Window Switch Door
NO.1 (Except Right Repeater At Lamp N/S
Built-Up-Export) Lamp
Right Front BK At Lamp 1 (Built-Up-
Park/Turn Export)
Signal lamp Right Side NAT At Lamp 1
NO.2 (Except Marker Lamp
Built-Up-Export) (Except
Right Front Turn GY At Lamp N/S Built-Up-Export)
Signal Lamp Right Sound At Soundbar N/S
NO.1 (Built-Up- Bar Speaker
Export) Right Speed On Steering N/S
Right Front Turn GY At Lamp N/S Control Switch Wheel
Signal Lamp Right Tail/Stop At Lamp 27
NO.2 (Built-Up- Lamp
Export)
Right Turn At Rear Lamp N/S
Right Front Right Engine 10, 11, Signal Lamp
Wheel Speed Compartment 34, 35
Rear Window BK Liftgate 30
Sensor
Defogger Grid
Right Headlamp At Headlamp 1
Right Vanity BK At Lamp 28
Lamp

Seat Belt Switch BK Near Center 21, 22 Transmission BK On N/S
Console Control Transmission
Seat Heat BK At Passengers N/S Assembly
Interface Seat Transmission BK Under Center 12
Module Control Module Instrument
Sentry Key BK Instrument N/S (4.0L) Panel
Immobilizer Panel Transmission BK On N/S
Module (Except Range Sensor Transmission
Police/Postal) (4.0L A/T)
Shift Lock BK Lower Steering 24 Turbo Boost BK Left Side of N/S
Solenoid Column Pressure Engine
Tell Tale Module BK Near N/S Sensor (Diesel)
(Diesel) Instrument Turn Signal/ BK Steering 24
Panel Hazard Switch Column
Connections Underhood BK At Lamp 4, 5,
Throttle Position NAT On Throttle 13, 14, Lamp/Mercury 10, 11,
Sensor Body 15, 16, Switch 34, 35
36 Vehicle Speed BK At Speed 4,7
Torque Engine Harness N/S Control Servo Control Servo
Converter Near T/O for Vehicle Speed On 31, 39
Clutch Solenoid Park Neutral Sensor Transmission
(2.5L Gas A/T) Switch (2WD)
Trailer Tow LT GY Trailer Tow N/S On Transfer
Connector Wiring Harness Case (4WD)
Trailer Tow Left BK Trailer Tow N/S Washer Fluid BK At Washer 6, 7,
Turn Relay Wiring Harness Level Switch Reservoir 32, 33
Trailer Tow BK Trailer Tow N/S Water In Fuel BK At Fuel Heater N/S
Right Turn Wiring Harness Sensor (Diesel)
Relay Windshield BK At Washer 6, 7,
Transfer Case BK On Transfer 31, 39 Washer Pump Reservoir 32, 33
Switch (231) Case Wiper/Wash NAT Steering 24
Transfer Case BK On Transfer 31 Switch Column
Switch (242) Case (4.0L A/T
Only)
Transfer Switch BK Near Center N/S
Illumination Console
Fig. 1 Front End Lighting (Right Side Shown, Left Side Similar)
Fig. 2 Left Engine Compartment 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 3 Left Engine Compartment 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 4 Right Engine Compartment 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 5 Right Engine Compartment 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 6 Engine Compartment Components LHD

Fig. 7 Engine Compartment Components RHD

Fig. 8 Left Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine LHD

Fig. 9 Left Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine RHD

Fig. 10 Right Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine LHD

Fig. 11 Right Engine Compartment 4.0L Engine RHD

Fig. 12 Under Dash Components

Fig. 13 Engine Connectors 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 14 Engine Connectors 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 15 Engine Connectors 4.0L Engine

Fig. 16 Engine and Battery 4.0L Engine

Fig. 17 Instrument Panel Connectors LHD

Fig. 18 Instrument Panel Connectors RHD

Fig. 19 Instrument Panel Components LHD

Fig. 20 Instrument Panel Components RHD

Fig. 21 Center Console LHD

Fig. 22 Center Console RHD

Fig. 23 Instrument Panel to Body Connectors LHD

Fig. 24 Steering Column

Fig. 25 Left Side Body

Fig. 26 ABS G-Sensor

Fig. 27 Rear Lamps

Fig. 28 Front and Rear Doors (Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar)
Fig. 29 Overhead and Junction Block

Fig. 30 Liftgate
Fig. 31 Transmission Wiring Connectors

Fig. 32 Left Engine Compartment Diesel Engine LHD

Fig. 33 Left Engine Compartment Diesel Engine RHD

Fig. 34 Right Engine Compartment Diesel Engine LHD

Fig. 35 Right Engine Compartment Diesel Engine RHD

Fig. 36 Engine Connectors Diesel Engine

Fig. 37 Engine and Battery Diesel Engine

Fig. 38 Starter and Battery Diesel Engine

Fig. 39 Transmission Connectors Diesel Engine

XJ 8W - 95 SPLICE LOCATIONS 8W - 95 - 1
8W-95 SPLICE LOCATIONS

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION section for splice number identification. Refer to the
index for proper splice number.
INTRODUCTION
This section provides illustrations identifying the SPLICE LOCATIONS
general location of the splices in this vehicle. A splice For splices that are not shown in the figures in
index is provided. Use the wiring diagrams in each this section a N/S is placed in the Fig. column.
Splice Number Location Fig. Splice Number Location Fig.

S100 Near Right Headlamp 9 S131 Near Purge Solenoid 3, 4, 7,
S101 (Except Near Right Headlamp 9 8, 18,
Built-Up-Export) 19, 20
S102 Between Headlamps 9 S132 Near Purge Solenoid 2, 3, 4,
7, 8, 17,
S103 Near Left Headlamp 9
18
S104 (Except Near Left Headlamp 9
S133 Left Rear of Engine 1, 2, 3,
Built-Up-Export)
Compartment 5, 6, 7,
S105 Near Left Headlamp 9 17, 18,
S106 (W/Fog Near Left Headlamp 9 20
Lamps) S134 Left Rear of Engine 2, 3
S107 Rear of Engine 10, 11, Compartment
12 S135 Rear of Engine 2, 3, 4,
S108 Rear of Engine 10, 11, Compartment 7, 8
12 S136 Rear of Engine 2, 3, 7
S109 Near Fuel Injector 10, 11, Compartment
Harness 12 S137 Rear of Engine 1, 2, 5,
S110 Near Fuel Injector 10, 11, Compartment 6, 7, 18
Harness 12 S138 Rear of Engine 1, 2, 5,
S111 Near Fuel Injector 10, 11, Compartment 6, 7, 17,
Harness 12 18
S112 Near Fuel Injector 10 S139 Left Rear of Engine 1, 2, 17,
Harness Compartment 18
S113 Near Fuel Injector 10, 11, S140 Left Rear of Engine 1, 2
Harness 12 Compartment
S114 Near Fuel Injector 10, 11, S141 Left Rear of Engine 1,2, 6,
Harness 12 Compartment 17
S115 Near MAP Sensor 11, 12, S142 Left Rear of Engine 1, 4
19, 20 Compartment
S116 (Built-Up- Near Back-Up Switch 11, 12 S143 Left Rear of Engine 1, 4, 5,
Export) Compartment 8
S118 Near Generator 10 S144 Left Rear of Engine 1, 2
Compartment
S120 (2.5L) Rear of Engine 11, 12
S145 Left Rear of Engine 1, 2
S130 Near Power Distribution 3, 4, 7,
Compartment
Center 8, 17,
18 S146 (4.0L) Near Cooling Fan N/S
Relay #2
S146 (Diesel) Near MSA Controller 19,20
8W - 95 - 2 8W - 95 SPLICE LOCATIONS XJ

S147 (Diesel) Left Rear of Engine 17,18 S212 (RHD) In Lower Instrument 14
Compartment Panel Trough
S148 (Diesel) Left Rear of Engine 17,18 S213 Near Brake Shift 13, 14
Compartment Interlock
S149 (Diesel) Left rear of Engine 17,18 S214 Between Glove Box 13, 14
Compartment Lamp and Trough
S150 (Diesel) Left Rear of Engine 17,18 S215 Near Center Console 13, 14
Compartment S216 Near Instrument Cluster 13, 14
S151 (Diesel) Near Power Distribution 17, 18 S217 In Lower Instrument 13
Center Panel Trough
S152 (Diesel) Left Fender Side Shield 17, 18 S218 Lower Instrument Panel 14
S153 In T/O to PDC 17, 18 S219 Lower Instrument Panel 14
S156 (Diesel) Rear of Engine 17 S220 Near T/O for Rear Fog N/S
Compartment Lamp Relay
S157 (Diesel) Left Rear of Engine 17, 18 S221 Near Clock Spring N/S
Compartment
S222 Near Clock Spring N/S
S158 Near T/O for Left 9
S225 Near Junction Block N/S
Headlamp
S226 (Built-Up- Near Headlamp Switch N/S
S159 Near T/O for PDC 3, 4, 7,
Export)
8, 17,
18 S227 (Built-Up- Near Headlamp Switch N/S
Export)
S161 Near Vehicle Speed N/S
Sensor T/O S229 (Built-Up- Lower Instrument Panel 13, 14
Export)
S200 Near Headlamp Switch 13, 14
S230 (Built-Up- Near Center Console 13, 14
S201 Near Data Link 13, 14
Export)
Connector
S232 Lower Instrument Panel 14
S202 Lower Left Instrument 13
Panel S233 (Built-up- Near Left headlamp 9
Export) (W/Headlamp Leveling)
S203 Near Brake Switch 13, 14
S234 (Built-Up- Near Left Headlamp 9
S204 (LHD) Near Brake Switch 13
Export) (W/Headlamp Leveling)
S204 (RHD) Lower Steering Column 14
S235 (Built-Up- Between Headlamps 9
S205 Lower Instrument Panel 13, 14 Export) (W/Headlamp Leveling)
S206 In Lower Instrument 13, 14 S236 (Built-Up- Near right Headlamp 9
Panel Trough Export) (w/Headlamp Leveling)
S207 In Lower Instrument 13, 14 S237 (Built-Up- Near Diode Module 13
Panel Trough Export)
S208 In Lower Instrument 13, 14 S238 In T/O for Combination N/S
Panel Trough Flasher
S209 In Lower Instrument 13, 14 S239 In T/O for Combination N/S
Panel Trough Flasher
S210 In Lower Instrument 13, 14 S301 Near Power Amplifier 16
Panel Trough
S302 Near Power Amplifier 16
S211 In Lower Instrument 13, 14
S303 Near Power Amplifier 16
Panel Trough
S304 Near Right Front Door N/S
S212 (LHD) Near Brake Shift 13
Jamb Switch
Interlock

S305 Between Right Tail N/S S334 Liftgate N/S
Lamp and Power Seat S335 Trailer Tow Harness N/S
S306 Between Right Tail N/S S336 Trailer Tow Harness N/S
Lamp and Power Seat
S337 Trailer Tow Harness N/S
S307 Between Right Tail N/S
Lamp and Power Seat
S308 Between Left Tail Lamp N/S
and Left Rear Door S340 Trailer Tow Harness N/S
S309 Between Left Tail Lamp N/S S341 Left Rear Lighting N/S
and Left Rear Door Harness
S310 Near Right Rear Door N/S S342 Overhead Console N/S
Jamb Switch S344 Overhead Console N/S
S311 Near Left Tail Lamp N/S S345 Overhead Console N/S
S312 Near Power Seat N/S S346 Overhead Console N/S
S313 Near Console N/S S347 Dome and Vanity N/S
Illumination Harness
S314 Instrument Panel to 15 S348 Right Rear Lighting N/S
Body Harness Harness
S315 Instrument Panel to 15 S349 In T/O for HVAC Unit N/S
Body Harness
S350 In the Power Seat N/S
S316 (LHD) Near Right Power N/S Harness
Window Motor
S351 Near T/O for Left Door N/S
S317 (LHD) Near Right Power N/S Connectors
Window Motor
S352 Left Kick Panel N/S
S318 Right Front Door Near N/S
S353 Near Right Heated Seat N/S
Tweeter
Switch
S319 Right Front Door Near N/S
S354 In the Right Heated N/S
Tweeter
Seat Harness
S320 Right Front Door N/S
S355 In Left and Right N/S
S321 Right Front Door N/S Heated Seat Switch
S322 (RHD) Near Left Power N/S Harness
Window Motor S356 Near the Left and Right N/S
S323 (RHD) Near Left Power N/S Heated Seat Harness
Window Motor Ground
S325 (RHD) Near Left Door Tweeter N/S S357 Near the Heated Seat N/S
Relay
S326 (RHD) Near Left Front Door N/S
Speaker S359 Near T/O for HVAC Unit N/S
S327 (RHD) Near Left Front Door N/S S360 Near Power Mirror N/S
Speaker Switch
S328 Near Left Door Tweeter N/S S361 Near Junction Block in N/S
the Dome Harness
S329 (LHD) Near Left Door Tweeter N/S
S330 (LHD) Near Left Front Door N/S
Speaker
S331 (LHD) Near Left Front Door N/S
Speaker
Fig. 1 Left Engine Compartment Splices 4.0L Engine LHD

Fig. 2 Left Engine Compartment Splices 4.0L Engine RHD

Fig. 3 Right Engine Compartment Splices 4.0L Engine LHD

Fig. 4 Right Engine Compartment Splices 4.0L Engine RHD

Fig. 5 Left Engine Compartment Splices 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 6 Left Engine Compartment Splices 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 7 Right Engine Compartment Splices 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 8 Right Engine Compartment Splices 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 9 Front End Lighting Splices

Fig. 10 Engine Wiring Splices 4.0L Engine

Fig. 11 Engine Wiring Splices 2.5L Engine LHD

Fig. 12 Engine Wiring Splices 2.5L Engine RHD

Fig. 13 Instrument Panel Wiring Splices LHD

Fig. 14 Instrument Panel Wiring Splices RHD

Fig. 15 Instrument Panel to Body Harness Splices

Fig. 16 Left Side Body Harness Splices

Fig. 17 Left Engine Compartment Splices Diesel LHD

Fig. 18 Left Engine Compartment Splices Diesel RHD

Fig. 19 Right Engine Compartment Splices Diesel LHD

Fig. 20 Right Engine Compartment Splices Diesel RHD

XJ ENGINE 9-1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
page page
2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 ENGINE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 STANDARD SERVICE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . 1
STANDARD SERVICE INFORMATION
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION HYDROSTATIC LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 4

ENGINE OIL SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 MEASURING WITH PLASTIGAGE . . . . . . ...... 3
ENGINE PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 REPAIR DAMAGED OR WORN THREADS ...... 4
FORM-IN-PLACE GASKETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SERVICE ENGINE ASSEMBLY
HONING CYLINDER BORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (SHORT BLOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 4
GENERAL INFORMATION MOPAR GASKET MAKER

Mopar Gasket Maker, normally red in color, is
FORM-IN-PLACE GASKETS available in 6 cc tubes. This anaerobic type gasket
There are several places where form-in-place gas- material cures in the absence of air when squeezed
kets are used on the engine. DO NOT use form-in- between smooth machined metallic surfaces. It will
place gasket material unless specified. Care not cure if left in the uncovered tube. DO NOT use
must be taken when applying form-in-place gaskets. on flexible metal flanges.
Bead size, continuity and location are of great impor-
tance. Too thin a bead can result in leakage while too SURFACE PREPARATION
much can result in spill-over. A continuous bead of Parts assembled with form-in-place gaskets may be
the proper width is essential to obtain a leak-free disassembled without unusual effort. In some
joint. instances, it may be necessary to lightly tap the part
Two types of form-in-place gasket materials are with a mallet or other suitable tool to break the seal
used in the engine area (Mopar Silicone Rubber between the mating surfaces. A flat gasket scraper
Adhesive Sealant and Mopar Gasket Maker). Each may also be lightly tapped into the joint but care
have different properties and cannot be used inter- must be taken not to damage the mating surfaces.
changeably. Scrape or wire brush all gasket surfaces to remove
all loose material. Inspect stamped parts to ensure
MOPAR SILICONE RUBBER ADHESIVE SEALANT gasket rails are flat. Flatten rails with a hammer on
Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Sealant, normally a flat plate, if required. Gasket surfaces must be free
black in color, is available in 3 ounce tubes. Moisture of oil and dirt. Make sure the old gasket material is
in the air causes the sealant material to cure. This removed from blind attaching holes.
material is normally used on flexible metal flanges.
It has a shelf life of a year and will not properly cure GASKET APPLICATION
if over aged. Always inspect the package for the expi- Assembling parts using a form-in-place gasket
ration date before use. requires care.
Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Sealant should be
applied in a continuous bead approximately 3 mm
(0.12 inch) in diameter. All mounting holes must be
circled. For corner sealing, a 3 or 6 mm (1/8 or 1/4
9-2 ENGINE XJ
inch) drop is placed in the center of the gasket con- taper and out-of-round as well as removing light
tact area. Uncured sealant may be removed with a scuffing, scoring or scratches. Usually a few strokes
shop towel. Components should be torqued in place will clean up a bore and maintain the required lim-
while the sealant is still wet to the touch (within 10 its.
minutes). The use of a locating dowel is recom-
mended during assembly to prevent smearing the CAUTION: DO NOT use rigid type hones to remove
material off location. cylinder wall glaze.
Mopar Gasket Maker should be applied sparingly
to one gasket surface. The sealant diameter should (2) Deglazing of the cylinder walls may be done if
be 1.00 mm (0.04 inch) or less. Be certain the mate- the cylinder bore is straight and round. Use a cylin-
rial surrounds each mounting hole. Excess material der surfacing hone, Honing Tool C-3501, equipped
can easily be wiped off. Components should be with 280 grit stones (C-3501-3810). 20-60 strokes,
torqued in place within 15 minutes. The use of a depending on the bore condition, will be sufficient to
locating dowel is recommended during assembly to provide a satisfactory surface. Using honing oil
prevent smearing the material off location. C-3501-3880 or a light honing oil available from
major oil distributors.
ENGINE PERFORMANCE CAUTION: DO NOT use engine or transmission oil,
It is important that the vehicle is operating to its mineral spirits or kerosene.
optimum performance level to maintain fuel economy
and the lowest emission levels. If vehicle is not oper- (3) Honing should be done by moving the hone up
ating to these standards, refer to Engine Diagnosis and down fast enough to get a crosshatch pattern.
outlined in this section. The following procedures can The hone marks should INTERSECT at 50° to 60°
assist in achieving the proper engine diagnosis. for proper seating of rings (Fig. 1).
(1) Test cranking amperage draw. Refer to Electri-
cal Group 8B, Cold Cranking Test.
(2) Check intake manifold bolt torque; Refer to
Group 11, Exhaust System and Intake Manifold.
(3) Perform cylinder compression test. Refer to
Cylinder Compression Pressure Test in the Engine
Diagnosis area of this section.
(4) Clean or replace spark plugs as necessary and
adjust gap as specified in Electrical Group 8D.
Tighten to specifications.
(5) Test resistance of spark plug cables. Refer to
Electrical Group 8D, Spark Plug Cables.
(6) Inspect the primary wires. Test coil output volt-
age and primary resistance. Replace parts as neces-
sary. Refer to Electrical Group 8D, for specifications.
(7) Test fuel pump for pressure. Refer to Group 14,
Fuel System Specifications.
(8) The air filter elements should be replaced as Fig. 1 Cylinder Bore Crosshatch Pattern
specified in Lubrication and Maintenance, Group 0. (4) A controlled hone motor speed between 200 and
(9) Inspect crankcase ventilation system as out 300 RPM is necessary to obtain the proper cross-
lined in Group 0, Lubrication and Maintenance. For hatch angle. The number of up and down strokes per
emission controls see Group 25, Emission Controls minute can be regulated to get the desired 50° to 60°
for service procedures. angle. Faster up and down strokes increase the cross-
(10) Road test vehicle as a final test. hatch angle.
(5) After honing, it is necessary that the block be
HONING CYLINDER BORES cleaned to remove all traces of abrasive. Use a brush
Before honing, stuff plenty of clean shop towels to wash parts with a solution of hot water and deter-
under the bores and over the crankshaft to keep gent. Dry parts thoroughly. Use a clean, white, lint-
abrasive materials from entering the crankshaft free cloth to check that the bore is clean. Oil the
area. bores after cleaning to prevent rusting.
(1) Used carefully, the Cylinder Bore Sizing Hone
C-823 equipped with 220 grit stones, is the best tool
for this job. In addition to deglazing, it will reduce
XJ ENGINE 9-3
MEASURING WITH PLASTIGAGE

CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARING CLEARANCE
Engine crankshaft bearing clearances can be deter-
mined by use of Plastigage, or equivalent. The follow-
ing is the recommended procedures for the use of
Plastigage:
(1) Remove oil film from surface to be checked.
Plastigage is soluble in oil.
(2) The total clearance of the main bearings can
only be determined by removing the weight of the
crankshaft. This can be accomplished by either of two
methods: Fig. 2 Placement of Plastigage in Bearing Shell
(2) Remove the bearing cap and compare the width
METHOD - 1 (PREFERRED) of the flattened Plastigage with the scale provided on
Shim the bearings adjacent to the bearing to be the package (Fig. 3). Plastigage generally comes in 2
checked. This will remove the clearance between scales (one scale is in inches and the other is a met-
upper bearing shell and the crankshaft. Place a min- ric scale). Locate the band closest to the same width.
imum of 0.254 mm (0.010 inch) shim between the This band shows the amount of clearance. Differ-
bearing shell and the adjacent bearing cap. Tighten ences in readings between the ends indicate the
the bolts to 18 N·m (13 ft. lbs.) torque. amount of taper present. Record all readings taken
• ALL ENGINES —When checking No.1 main (refer to Engine Specifications).
bearing; shim No.2 main bearing.
• ALL ENGINES —When checking No.2 main
bearing; shim No.1 and No.3 main bearing.
• 2.5L ENGINE —When checking No.5 main
bearing; shim No.4 main bearing.
bearing; shim No.5 and No.7 main bearing. Fig. 3 Clearance Measurement
• 4.0L ENGINE —When checking No.7 main (3) Plastigage is available in a variety of clearance
bearing; shim No.6 main bearing. ranges. The 0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.003 inch) range
is usually the most appropriate for checking engine
NOTE: Remove all shims before assembling
bearing clearances.
engine.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING CLEARANCE
METHOD - 2 (ALTERNATIVE) Engine connecting rod bearing clearances can be
The weight of the crankshaft is supported by a jack determined by use of Plastigage, or equivalent. The
under the counterweight adjacent to the bearing following is the recommended procedures for the use
being checked. of Plastigage:
(1) Place a piece of Plastigage across the entire (1) Remove oil film from surface to be checked.
width of the bearing cap shell (Fig. 2). Position the Plastigage is soluble in oil.
Plastigage approximately 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) off cen- (2) Place a piece of Plastigage across the entire
ter and away from the oil holes. In addition, suspect width of the bearing cap shell (Fig. 2). Position the
areas can be checked by placing the Plastigage in Plastigage approximately 6.35 mm (1/4 inch) off cen-
that area. Tighten the bearing cap bolts of the bear- ter and away from the oil holes. In addition, suspect
ing being checked to required torque. (Refer to the areas can be checked by placing the Plastigage in the
torque specifications at the rear of the engine’s sec- suspect area.
tion). DO NOT rotate the crankshaft or the Plas- (3) The crankshaft must be turned until the con-
tigage may be smeared, giving inaccurate necting rod to be checked starts moving toward the
results. top of the engine. Only then should the rod cap with
9-4 ENGINE XJ
Plastigage in place be assembled. Tighten the rod cap (1) Perform the Fuel Pressure Release Procedure
nuts to required torque. (Refer to the torque specifi- (refer to Group 14, Fuel System).
cations at the rear of the engine’s section). DO NOT (2) Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
rotate the crankshaft or the Plastigage may be (3) Inspect air cleaner, induction system and
smeared, giving inaccurate results. intake manifold to ensure system is dry and clear of
(4) Remove the bearing cap and compare the width foreign material.
of the flattened Plastigage with the scale provided on (4) Place a shop towel around the spark plugs to
the package (Fig. 3). Plastigage generally comes in 2 catch any fluid that may possibly be under pressure
scales (one scale is in inches and the other is a met- in the cylinder head. Remove the plugs from the
ric scale). Locate the band closest to the same width. engine.
This band shows the amount of clearance. Differ-
ences in readings between the ends indicate the CAUTION: DO NOT use the starter motor to rotate
amount of taper present. Record all readings taken the crankshaft. Severe damage could occur.
(refer to Engine Specifications).
(5) Plastigage is available in a variety of clearance (5) With all spark plugs removed, rotate the crank-
ranges. The 0.025-0.076 mm (0.001-0.003 inch) range shaft using a breaker bar and socket.
is usually the most appropriate for checking engine (6) Identify the fluid in the cylinders (i.e. coolant,
bearing clearances. fuel, oil, etc.).
(7) Make sure all fluid has been removed from the
REPAIR DAMAGED OR WORN THREADS cylinders.
(8) Repair engine or components as necessary to
Damaged or worn threads can be repaired. Essen-
prevent this problem from occurring again.
tially, this repair consists of:
(9) Squirt engine oil into the cylinders to lubricate
• Drilling out worn or damaged threads.
the walls. This will prevent damage on restart.
• Tapping the hole with a special Heli-Coil Tap, or
(10) Install new spark plugs. Tighten the spark
equivalent.
plugs to 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.) torque.
• Installing an insert into the tapped hole to bring
(11) Drain engine oil. Remove and discard the oil
the hole back to its original thread size.
filter.
CAUTION: Be sure that the tapped holes maintain (12) Install the drain plug. Tighten the plug to 34
the original center line. N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
(13) Install a new oil filter.
Heli-Coil tools and inserts are readily available (14) Fill engine crankcase with the specified
from automotive parts jobbers. amount and grade of oil (refer to Group 0, Lubrica-
tion and Maintenance).
SERVICE ENGINE ASSEMBLY (SHORT BLOCK) (15) Connect the negative cable to the battery.
A service replacement engine assembly (short (16) Start the engine and check for any leaks.
block) may be installed whenever the original cylin-
der block is defective or damaged beyond repair. It ENGINE OIL SERVICE
consists of the cylinder block, crankshaft, piston and
rod assemblies. If needed, the camshaft must be pro- WARNING: NEW OR USED ENGINE OIL CAN BE
cured separately and installed before the engine is IRRITATING TO THE SKIN. AVOID PROLONGED OR
installed in the vehicle. REPEATED SKIN CONTACT WITH ENGINE OIL.
A short block is identified with the letter “S” CONTAMINANTS IN USED ENGINE OIL, CAUSED BY
stamped on the same machined surface where the INTERNAL COMBUSTION, CAN BE HAZARDOUS TO
build date code is stamped for complete engine YOUR HEALTH. THOROUGHLY WASH EXPOSED
assemblies. SKIN WITH SOAP AND WATER. DO NOT WASH
Installation includes the transfer of components SKIN WITH GASOLINE, DIESEL FUEL, THINNER, OR
from the defective or damaged original engine. Fol- SOLVENTS, HEALTH PROBLEMS CAN RESULT. DO
low the appropriate procedures for cleaning, inspec- NOT POLLUTE, DISPOSE OF USED ENGINE OIL
tion and torque tightening. PROPERLY.
HYDROSTATIC LOCK ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATION

When an engine is suspected of hydrostatic lock
(regardless of what caused the problem), follow the CAUTION: Do not use non-detergent or straight
steps below. mineral oil when adding or changing crankcase
lubricant. Engine failure can result.
XJ ENGINE 9-5
API SERVICE GRADE CERTIFIED The engine oil level indicator (Dipstick) is located
Use an engine oil that is API Service Grade Certi- at the right rear of both 2.5L engines and 4.0L
fied. MOPAR provides engine oils that conform to the engines. Inspect engine oil level approximately every
latest recommended service grades. 800 kilometers (500 miles). Unless the engine has
Standard engine oil identification notations have exhibited loss of oil pressure, run the engine for
been adopted to aid in the proper selection of engine about five minutes before checking oil level. Checking
oil. The identifying notations are located on the label engine oil level on a cold engine is not accurate.
of engine oil plastic bottles and the top of engine oil To ensure proper lubrication of an engine, the
cans (Fig. 4). engine oil must be maintained at an acceptable level.
The acceptable levels are indicated between the ADD
and SAFE marks on the engine oil dipstick (Fig. 6)
(Fig. 7).
(1) Position vehicle on level surface.
(2) With engine OFF, allow approximately ten min-
utes for oil to settle to bottom of crankcase, remove
engine oil dipstick.
(3) Wipe dipstick clean.
(4) Install dipstick and verify it is seated in the
tube.
(5) Remove dipstick, with handle held above the
tip, take oil level reading (Fig. 6) (Fig. 7).
Fig. 4 Engine Oil Container Standard Notations (6) Add oil only if level is below the ADD mark on
dipstick.
SAE VISCOSITY
An SAE viscosity grade is used to specify the vis-
cosity of engine oil. SAE 10W–30 specifies a multiple
viscosity engine oil. Engine oils also have multiple
viscosities. These are specified with a dual SAE vis-
cosity grade which indicates the cold-to-hot tempera-
ture viscosity range. Select an engine oil that is best
suited to your particular temperature range and vari-
ation (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 Engine Oil Dipstick—2.5L Engine

ENGINE OIL CHANGE
Fig. 5 Temperature/Engine Oil Viscosity Change engine oil at mileage and time intervals
described in Maintenance Schedules.
ENERGY CONSERVING OIL Run engine until achieving normal operating tem-
An Energy Conserving type oil is recommended for
perature.
gasoline engines. The designation of ENERGY CON-
(1) Position the vehicle on a level surface and turn
SERVING is located on the label of an engine oil con-
engine off.
tainer.
(2) Hoist and support vehicle on safety stands.
(3) Remove oil fill cap.
CRANKCASE OIL LEVEL INSPECTION (4) Place a suitable drain pan under crankcase
CAUTION: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, drain.
oil foaming and oil pressure loss can result.
9-6 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 7 Engine Oil Dipstick—4.0L Engine Fig. 8 Oil Filter—2.5L Engine

(5) Remove drain plug from crankcase and allow
oil to drain into pan. Inspect drain plug threads for
stretching or other damage. Replace drain plug if
damaged.
(6) Install drain plug in crankcase.
(7) Lower vehicle and fill crankcase with specified
type and amount of engine oil described in this sec-
tion.
(8) Install oil fill cap.
(9) Start engine and inspect for leaks.
(10) Stop engine and inspect oil level.
ENGINE OIL FILTER CHANGE

FILTER SPECIFICATION
CAUTION: Do not use oil filter with metric threads.

Fig. 9 Oil Filter—4.0L Engine
The proper oil filter has SAE type 3/4 X 16 threads.
An oil filter with metric threads can result in oil OIL FILTER INSTALLATION
leaks and engine failure. (1) Lightly lubricate oil filter gasket with engine
oil or chassis grease.
All Jeep engines are equipped with a high quality (2) Thread filter onto adapter nipple. When gasket
full-flow, throw-away type oil filter. Chrysler Corpo- makes contact with sealing surface, (Fig. 10) hand
ration recommends a Mopar or equivalent oil filter be tighten filter one full turn, do not over tighten.
used. (3) Add oil, verify crankcase oil level and start
engine. Inspect for oil leaks.
OIL FILTER REMOVAL
(1) Position a drain pan under the oil filter.
(2) Using a suitable oil filter wrench loosen filter.
(3) Rotate the oil filter counterclockwise to remove
it from the cylinder block oil filter boss or filter
adapter housing (Fig. 8) (Fig. 9).
(4) When filter separates from adapter nipple, tip
gasket end upward to minimize oil spill. Remove fil-
ter from vehicle.
(5) Make sure old gasket comes off with oil filter.
With a wiping cloth, clean the gasket sealing surface
(Fig. 10) of oil and grime.
Fig. 10 Oil Filter Sealing Surface—Typical
XJ ENGINE 9-7
USED ENGINE OIL DISPOSAL
Care should be exercised when disposing used
engine oil after it has been drained from a vehicle
engine. Refer to the WARNING at beginning of this
section.
9-8 ENGINE XJ
ENGINE DIAGNOSIS
INDEX
page page
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ENGINE OIL LEAK INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

CYLINDER COMBUSTION PRESSURE ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
LEAKAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE TEST . . 8 INTAKE MANIFOLD LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . 8
ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET FAILURE SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . 13
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—PERFORMANCE . . . . . . 11
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING CYLINDER COMPRESSION PRESSURE TEST

The results of a cylinder compression pressure test
GENERAL INFORMATION can be utilized to diagnose several engine malfunc-
Engine diagnosis is helpful in determining the tions.
causes of malfunctions not detected and remedied by Ensure the battery is completely charged and the
routine maintenance. engine starter motor is in good operating condition.
These malfunctions may be classified as either per- Otherwise the indicated compression pressures may
formance (e.g., engine idles rough and stalls) or not be valid for diagnosis purposes.
mechanical (e.g., a strange noise). (1) Clean the spark plug recesses with compressed
Refer to the Service Diagnosis—Performance chart air.
and the Service Diagnosis—Mechanical chart for pos- (2) Remove the spark plugs.
sible causes and corrections of malfunctions. Refer to (3) Secure the throttle in the wide-open position.
Group 14, Fuel System for the fuel system diagnosis. (4) Disable the fuel system. (Refer to Group 14,
Additional tests and diagnostic procedures may be Fuel System for the correct procedure)
necessary for specific engine malfunctions that can (5) Disconnect the ignition coil.
not be isolated with the Service Diagnosis charts. (6) Insert a compression pressure gauge and rotate
Information concerning additional tests and diagno- the engine with the engine starter motor for three
sis is provided within the following diagnosis: revolutions.
• Cylinder Compression Pressure Test. (7) Record the compression pressure on the 3rd
• Cylinder Combustion Pressure Leakage Test. revolution. Continue the test for the remaining cylin-
• Engine Cylinder Head Gasket Failure Diagnosis. ders.
• Intake Manifold Leakage Diagnosis. Refer to Engine Specifications for the correct
engine compression pressures.
INTAKE MANIFOLD LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS
An intake manifold air leak is characterized by ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET FAILURE
lower than normal manifold vacuum. Also, one or DIAGNOSIS
more cylinders may not be functioning. A leaking engine cylinder head gasket usually
results in loss of power, loss of coolant and engine
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE misfiring.
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A An engine cylinder head gasket leak can be located
DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR between adjacent cylinders or between a cylinder and
HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR THE FAN. the adjacent water jacket.
DO NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING. • An engine cylinder head gasket leaking between
adjacent cylinders is indicated by a loss of power
(1) Start the engine.
and/or engine misfire.
(2) Spray a small stream of water at the suspected
• An engine cylinder head gasket leaking between
leak area.
a cylinder and an adjacent water jacket is indicated
(3) If a change in RPM is observed the area of the
by coolant foaming or overheating and loss of coolant.
suspected leak has been found.
(4) Repair as required.
XJ ENGINE 9-9
CYLINDER-TO-CYLINDER LEAKAGE TEST • Exhaust and intake valve leaks (improper seat-
To determine if an engine cylinder head gasket is ing).
leaking between adjacent cylinders; follow the proce- • Leaks between adjacent cylinders or into water
dures outlined in Cylinder Compression Pressure jacket.
Test. An engine cylinder head gasket leaking between • Any causes for combustion/compression pressure
adjacent cylinders will result in approximately a loss.
50-70% reduction in compression pressure. (1) Check the coolant level and fill as required. DO
NOT install the radiator cap.
CYLINDER-TO-WATER JACKET LEAKAGE TEST (2) Start and operate the engine until it attains
normal operating temperature, then turn the engine
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE OFF.
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A (3) Remove the spark plugs.
DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR (4) Remove the oil filler cap.
HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR THE FAN. (5) Remove the air cleaner.
DO NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING. (6) Calibrate the tester according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. The shop air source for testing
Remove the radiator cap. should maintain 483 kPa (70 psi) minimum, 1,379
Start the engine and allow it to warm up until the kPa (200 psi) maximum and 552 kPa (80 psi) recom-
engine thermostat opens. mended.
If a large combustion/compression pressure leak (7) Perform the test procedures on each cylinder
exists, bubbles will be visible in the coolant. according to the tester manufacturer’s instructions.
If bubbles are not visible, install a radiator pres- While testing, listen for pressurized air escaping
sure tester and pressurize the coolant system. through the throttle body, tailpipe and oil filler cap
If a cylinder is leaking combustion pressure into opening. Check for bubbles in the radiator coolant.
the water jacket, the tester pointer will pulsate with All gauge pressure indications should be equal,
every combustion stroke of the cylinder. with no more than 25% leakage.
FOR EXAMPLE: At 552 kPa (80 psi) input pres-
CYLINDER COMBUSTION PRESSURE LEAKAGE sure, a minimum of 414 kPa (60 psi) should be main-
TEST tained in the cylinder.
The combustion pressure leakage test provides an Refer to the Cylinder Combustion Pressure Leak-
accurate means for determining engine condition. age Test Diagnosis chart.
Combustion pressure leakage testing will detect:
CYLINDER COMBUSTION PRESSURE LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS CHART

AIR ESCAPES THROUGH Intake valve bent, burnt, or not Inspect valve and valve seat.
THROTTLE BODY seated properly Reface or replace, as necessary
AIR ESCAPES THROUGH Exhaust valve bent, burnt, or not Inspect valve and valve seat.
TAILPIPE seated properly Reface or replace, as necessary
AIR ESCAPES THROUGH Head gasket leaking or cracked Remove cylinder head and inspect.
RADIATOR cylinder head or block Replace defective part
MORE THAN 50% LEAKAGE Head gasket leaking or crack in Remove cylinder head and inspect.
FROM ADJACENT CYLINDERS cylinder head or block between Replace gasket, head, or block as
adjacent cylinders necessary
MORE THAN 25% LEAKAGE AND Stuck or broken piston rings; Inspect for broken rings or piston.
AIR ESCAPES THROUGH OIL cracked piston; worn rings and/or Measure ring gap and cylinder
FILLER CAP OPENING ONLY cylinder wall diameter, taper and out-of-round.
Replace defective part as necessary
9 - 10 ENGINE XJ
ENGINE OIL LEAK INSPECTION INSPECTION FOR REAR SEAL AREA LEAKS
Begin with a thorough visual inspection of the Since it is sometimes difficult to determine the
engine, particularly at the area of the suspected leak. source of an oil leak in the rear seal area of the
If an oil leak source is not readily identifiable, the engine, a more involved inspection is necessary. The
following steps should be followed: following steps should be followed to help pinpoint
(1) Do not clean or degrease the engine at this the source of the leak.
time because some solvents may cause rubber to If the leakage occurs at the crankshaft rear oil seal
swell, temporarily stopping the leak. area:
(2) Add an oil soluble dye (use as recommended by (1) Disconnect the battery.
manufacturer). Start the engine and let idle for (2) Raise the vehicle.
approximately 15 minutes. Check the oil dipstick to (3) Remove torque converter or clutch housing
make sure the dye is thoroughly mixed as indicated cover and inspect rear of block for evidence of oil.
with a bright yellow color under a black light. Use a black light to check for the oil leak:
(3) Using a black light, inspect the entire engine (a) Circular spray pattern generally indicates
for fluorescent dye, particularly at the suspected area seal leakage or crankshaft damage.
of oil leak. If the oil leak is found and identified, (b) Where leakage tends to run straight down,
repair per service manual instructions. possible causes are a porous block, distributor seal,
(4) If dye is not observed, drive the vehicle at var- camshaft bore cup plugs oil galley pipe plugs, oil
ious speeds for approximately 24km (15 miles), and filter runoff, and main bearing cap to cylinder
repeat inspection. block mating surfaces.
(5) If the oil leak source is not positively (4) If no leaks are detected, pressurize the crank-
identified at this time, proceed with the air leak case as outlined in the, Inspection (Engine oil Leaks
detection test method. in general).
Air Leak Detection Test Method CAUTION: Do not exceed 20.6 kPa (3 psi).
(1) Disconnect the breather cap to air cleaner hose
at the breather cap end. Cap or plug breather cap (5) If the leak is not detected, very slowly turn the
nipple. crankshaft and watch for leakage. If a leak is
(2) Remove the PCV valve from the cylinder head detected between the crankshaft and seal while
cover. Cap or plug the PCV valve grommet. slowly turning the crankshaft, it is possible the
(3) Attach an air hose with pressure gauge and crankshaft seal surface is damaged. The seal area on
regulator to the dipstick tube. the crankshaft could have minor nicks or scratches
that can be polished out with emery cloth.
CAUTION: Do not subject the engine assembly to
more than 20.6 kpa (3 PSI) of test pressure. CAUTION: Use extreme caution when crankshaft
polishing is necessary to remove minor nicks and
(4) Gradually apply air pressure from 1 psi to 2.5 scratches. The crankshaft seal flange is especially
psi maximum while applying soapy water at the sus- machined to complement the function of the rear oil
pected source. Adjust the regulator to the suitable seal.
test pressure that provide the best bubbles which
will pinpoint the leak source. If the oil leak is (6) For bubbles that remain steady with shaft
detected and identified, repair per service manual rotation, no further inspection can be done until dis-
procedures. assembled.
(5) If the leakage occurs at the rear oil seal area,
refer to the section, Inspection for Rear Seal Area ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
Leak. (1) Disconnect connector and remove oil pressure
(6) If no leaks are detected, turn off the air supply sending unit.
and remove the air hose and all plugs and caps. (2) Install Oil Pressure Line and Gauge Tool
Install the PCV valve and breather cap hose. C-3292 or equivalent. Start engine and record pres-
(7) Clean the oil off the suspect oil leak area using sure. Refer to Oil Pressure in Engine Specifications
a suitable solvent. Drive the vehicle at various for the correct pressures.
speeds approximately 24 km (15 miles). Inspect the
engine for signs of an oil leak by using a black light.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 11
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—PERFORMANCE
ENGINE PERFORMANCE DIAGNOSIS CHART
ENGINE WILL NOT CRANK 1. Weak or dead battery 1. Charge/Replace Battery. Refer to
Group 8A, Battery, for correct
procedures. Check charging system.
Refer to Group 8C, Charging
Systems, for correct procedures.
2. Corroded or loose battery 2. Clean/tighten suspect battery/
connections starter connections
3. Faulty starter or related circuit(s) 3. Check starting system. Refer to
Group 8B, Starting Systems, for
correct diagnostics/procedures
4. Siezed accessory drive component 4. Remove accessory drive belt and
attempt to start engine. If engine
starts, repair/replace siezed
component.
5. Engine internal mechanical failure 5. Refer to Group 9, Engine, for
or hydro-static lock correct diagnostics/procedures
ENGINE CRANKS BUT WILL 1. No spark 1. Check for spark. Refer to Group
NOT START 8D, Ignition System, for correct
procedures.
2. No fuel 2. Perform fuel pressure test, and if
necessary, inspect fuel injector(s) and
driver circuits. Refer to Group 14, Fuel
System, for correct procedures.
3. Low or no engine compression 3. Perform cylinder compression
pressure test. Refer to Group 9,
Engine, for correct procedures.
ENGINE LOSS OF POWER 1. Worn or burned distributor rotor 1. Install new distributor rotor
2. Worn distributor shaft 2. Remove and repair distributor
(Refer to group 8D, Ignition System
3. Worn or incorrect gapped spark 3. Clean plugs and set gap. (Refer to
plugs group 8D, Ignition System)
4. Dirt or water in fuel system 4. Clean system and replace fuel filter
5. Faulty fuel pump 5. Install new fuel pump
6. Incorrect valve timing 6. Correct valve timing
7. Blown cylinder head gasket 7. Install new cylinder head gasket
8. Low compression 8. Test cylinder compression
9. Burned, warped, or pitted valves 9. Install/Reface valves as necessary
10. Plugged or restricted exhaust 10. Install new parts as necessary
system
11. Faulty ignition cables 11. Replace any cracked or shorted
cables
12. Faulty ignition coil 12. Test and replace, as necessary
(Refer to Group 8D, ignition system)
9 - 12 ENGINE XJ
ENGINE STALLS OR ROUGH 1. Carbon build-up on throttle plate 1. Remove throttle body and
IDLE de-carbon. (Refer to Group 14 for
correct procedures)
2. Engine idle speed too low 2. Check Idle Air Control circuit.
(Refer to Group 14, Fuel System)
3. Worn or incorrectly gapped spark 3. Replace or clean and re-gap spark
plugs plugs (Refer to group 8D, Ignition
System)
4. Worn or burned distributor rotor 4. Install new distributor rotor
5. Spark plug cables defective or 5. Check for correct firing order or
crossed replace spark plug cables. (Refer to
Group 8D, Ignition System for correct
procedures.)
6. Faulty coil 6. Test and replace, if necessary
(Refer to group 8D, Ignition System)
7. Intake manifold vacuum leak 7. Inspect intake manifold gasket and
vacuum hoses. Replace if necessary
(Refer to Group 11, Exhaust System &
Intake Manifold)
8. EGR valve leaking or stuck open 8. Test and replace, if necessary
(Refer to group 25, Emission Control
Systems)
ENGINE MISSES ON 1. Worn or incorrectly gapped spark 1. Replace spark plugs or clean and
ACCELERATION plugs set gap. (Refer to group 8D, Ignition
System)
2. Spark plug cables defective or 2. Check Idle Air Control circuit.
crossed (Refer to Group 14, Fuel System)
3. Dirt in fuel system 3. Clean fuel system
4. Burned, warped or pitted valves 4. Install new valves
5. Faulty coil 5. Test and replace as necessary
(refer to group 8D, Ignition System)
XJ ENGINE 9 - 13
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—MECHANICAL
ENGINE MECHANICAL DIAGNOSIS CHART
NOISY VALVES/LIFTERS 1. High or low oil level in crankcase 1. Check for correct oil level. Adjust oil
level by draining or adding as needed
2. Thin or diluted oil 2. Change oil (Refer to Engine Oil
Service in this group)
3. Low oil pressure 3. Check engine oil level. If ok,
Perform oil pressure test. Refer to this
group for engine oil pressure
test/specifications
4. Dirt in tappets/lash adjusters 4. Clean/replace hydraulic tappets/
lash adjusters
5. Bent push rod(s) 5. Install new push rods
6. Worn rocker arms 6. Inspect oil supply to rocker arms
and replace worn arms as needed
7. Worn tappets/lash adjusters 7. Install new hydraulic tappets/lash
adjusters
8. Worn valve guides 8. Inspect all valve guides and replace
as necessary
9. Excessive runout of valve seats or 9. Grind valves and seats
valve faces
CONNECTING ROD NOISE 1. Insufficient oil supply 1. Check engine oil level. (Refer to
group 0, Lubrication and
Maintenance)
test/specifications
3. Thin or diluted oil 3. Change oil to correct viscosity.
Refer to this group for correct
procedure/engine oil specifications
4. Excessive connecting rod bearing 4. Measure bearings for correct
clearance clearance with plasti-gage. Repair as
necessary
5. Connecting rod journal out of round 5. Replace crankshaft or grind
journals
6. Misaligned connecting rods 6. Replace bent connecting rods
MAIN BEARING NOISE 1. Insufficient oil supply 1. Check engine oil level. (Refer to
group 0, Lubrication and
Maintenance)
test/specifications
9 - 14 ENGINE XJ
4. Excessive main bearing clearance 4. Measure bearings for correct

clearance. Repair as necessary
5. Excessive end play 5. Check crankshaft thrust bearing for
excessive wear on flanges
6. Crankshaft main journal out of 6. Grind journals or replace crankshaft
round or worn
7. Loose flywheel or torque converter 7. Inspect crankshaft, flexplate/
flywheel and bolts for damage.
Tighten to correct torque
LOW OIL PRESSURE 1. Low oil level 1. Check oil level and fill if necessary
2. Faulty oil pressure sending unit 2. Install new sending unit
3. Clogged oil filter 3. Install new oil filter
4. Worn oil pump 4. Replace worn gears or oil pump
assy
6. Excessive bearing clearance 6. Measure bearings for correct
clearance
7. Oil pump relief valve stuck 7. Remove valve to inspect, clean and
reinstall
8. Oil pump suction tube loose, 8. Inspect suction tube and clean or
broken, bent or clogged replace if necessary
9. Oil pump cover warped or cracked 9. Install new oil pump
OIL LEAKS 1. Misaligned or deteriorated gaskets 1. Replace gasket

2. Loose fastener, broken or porous 2. Tighten, repair or replace the part
metal part
3. Front or rear crankshaft oil seal 3. Replace seal
leaking
4. Leaking oil gallery plug or cup plug 4. Remove and reseal threaded plug.
Replace cup style plug
EXCESSIVE OIL 1. PCV System malfunction 1. Refer to group 25, Emission

CONSUMPTION OR SPARK Control System for correct operation
PLUGS OIL FOULED 2. Defective valve stem seal(s) 2. Repair or replace seal(s)
3. Worn or broken piston rings 3. Hone cylinder bores. Install new
rings
4. Scuffed pistons/cylinder walls 4. Hone cylinder bores and replace
pistons as required
5. Carbon in oil control ring groove 5. Remove rings and de-carbon piston
6. Worn valve guides 6. Inspect/replace valve guides as
necessary
7. Piston rings fitted too tightly in 7. Remove rings and check ring end
grooves gap and side clearance. Replace if
necessary
XJ 2.5L ENGINE 9 - 15
2.5L ENGINE
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION INTAKE MANIFOLD—2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . 29

ENGINE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 OIL PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
OIL PUMP PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS . . . . . . . . . 46
SERVICE PROCEDURES REAR MAIN OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
FITTING CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS . . . . . . 20 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . . 31
FITTING CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS . . . . . 23 TIMING CASE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
PISTON FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 TIMING CASE COVER OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . 36
PISTON RING FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 TIMING CHAIN AND SPROCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . 38
VALVE TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 VALVE SPRINGS AND OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . 32
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION VIBRATION DAMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CAMSHAFT PIN REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 VALVE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
CYLINDER HEAD COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . . 50
ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE MOUNTS—FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2.5L ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ENGINE MOUNT—REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 2.5L TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
EXHAUST MANIFOLD—2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . 30 SPECIAL TOOLS
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

ENGINE DESCRIPTION
The 2.5 liter (150 CID) four-cylinder engine is an
In-line, lightweight, overhead valve engine.
This engine is designed for unleaded fuel. The
engine cylinder head has dual quench-type combus-
tion chambers that create turbulence and fast burn-
ing of the air/fuel mixture. This results in good fuel
economy.
The cylinders are numbered 1 through 4 from front
to rear. The firing order is 1-3-4-2 (Fig. 1).
The crankshaft rotation is clockwise, when viewed
from the front of the engine. The crankshaft rotates
within five main bearings and the camshaft rotates
within four bearings.
Fig. 1 Engine Firing Order
9 - 16 2.5L ENGINE XJ
BUILD DATE CODE LUBRICATION SYSTEM
The engine Build Date Code is located on a A gear—type positive displacement pump is
machined surface on the right side of the cylinder mounted at the underside of the block opposite the
block between the No.3 and No.4 cylinders (Fig. 2). No. 4 main bearing. The pump draws oil through the
screen and inlet tube from the sump at the rear of
the oil pan. The oil is driven between the drive and
idler gears and pump body, then forced through the
outlet to the block. An oil gallery in the block chan-
nels the oil to the inlet side of the full flow oil filter.
After passing through the filter element, the oil
passes from the center outlet of the filter through an
oil gallery that channels the oil up to the main gal-
lery which extends the entire length of the block.
Galleries extend downward from the main oil gal-
lery to the upper shell of each main bearing. The
crankshaft is drilled internally to pass oil from the
main bearing journals (except number 4 main bear-
ing journal) to the connecting rod journals. Each con-
necting rod bearing cap has a small squirt hole, oil
passes through the squirt hole and is thrown off as
Fig. 2 Build Date Code Location the rod rotates. This oil throwoff lubricates the cam-
shaft lobes, distributor drive gear, cylinder walls, and
The digits of the code identify: piston pins.
• 1st Digit—The year (8 = 1998). The hydraulic valve tappets receive oil directly
• 2nd & 3rd Digits—The month (01 - 12). from the main oil gallery. Oil is provided to the cam-
• 4th & 5th Digits—The engine type/fuel system/ shaft bearing through galleries. The front camshaft
compression ratio (HX = A 2.5 liter (150 CID) 9.1:1 bearing journal passes oil through the camshaft
compression ratio engine with a multi-point fuel sprocket to the timing chain. Oil drains back to the
injection system). oil pan under the number one main bearing cap.
• 6th & 7th Digits—The day of engine build (01 - The oil supply for the rocker arms and bridged
31). pivot assemblies is provided by the hydraulic valve
FOR EXAMPLE: Code * 801HX23 * identifies a tappets which pass oil through hollow push rods to a
2.5 liter (150 CID) engine with a multi-point fuel hole in the corresponding rocker arm. Oil from the
injection system, 9.1:1 compression ratio and built on rocker arm lubricates the valve train components,
January 23, 1998. then passes down through the push rod guide holes
in the cylinder head past the valve tappet area, and
returns to the oil pan.
Oil Lubrication System—2.5L Engine

OIL PUMP PRESSURE MUST be replaced as complete sets. Tin coated

The MINIMUM oil pump pressure is 89.6 kPa (13 pistons should not be used as replacements for coated
psi) at 600 rpm. The NORMAL oil pump pressure is pistons.
255-517 kPa (37-75 psi) at 1600 rpm or more. (4) The coating material is applied to the piston after
the final piston machining process. Measuring the out-
side diameter of a coated piston will not provide accu-
SERVICE PROCEDURES rate results (Fig. 3). Therefore measuring the inside
diameter of the cylinder bore with a dial Bore Gauge is
VALVE TIMING MANDATORY. To correctly select the proper size pis-
Disconnect the spark plug wires and remove the ton, a cylinder bore gauge capable of reading in 0.003
spark plugs. mm (.0001 in.) increments is required.
Remove the engine cylinder head cover. (5) Piston installation into the cylinder bore
Remove the capscrews, bridge and pivot assembly, requires slightly more pressure than that required
and rocker arms from above the No.1 cylinder. for non-coated pistons. The bonded coating on the
Alternately loosen each capscrew, one turn at a piston will give the appearance of a line-to-line fit
time, to avoid damaging the bridge. with the cylinder bore.
Rotate the crankshaft until the No.4 piston is at
top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke.
Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise (viewed
from the front of the engine) 90°.
Install a dial indicator on the end of the No.1 cyl-
inder intake valve push rod. Use rubber tubing to
secure the indicator stem on the push rod.
Set the dial indicator pointer at zero.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (viewed from the
front of the engine) until the dial indicator pointer
indicates 0.305 mm (0.012 inch) travel distance (lift).
The timing notch index on the vibration damper
should be aligned with the TDC mark on the timing
degree scale.
If the timing notch is more than 13 mm (1/2 inch)
away from the TDC mark in either direction, the
valve timing is incorrect.
If the valve timing is incorrect, the cause may be a
broken camshaft pin. It is not necessary to replace
the camshaft because of pin failure. A spring pin is Fig. 3 Moly Coated Piston
available for service replacement.
PISTON SIZE CHART
PISTON FITTING CYLINDER BORE SIZE PISTON LETTER SIZE
98.438 to 98.448 mm (3.8755 to 3.8759 in.) . . . . . . A
BORE GAUGE METHOD 98.448 to 98.458 mm (3.8759 to 3.8763 in.) . . . . . . B
(1) To correctly select the proper size piston, a cyl- 98.458 to 98.468 mm (3.8763 to 3.8767 in.) . . . . . . C
inder bore gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm 98.468 to 98.478 mm (3.8767 to 3.8771 in.) . . . . . . D
(.0001 in.) INCREMENTS is required. If a bore 98.478 to 98.488 mm (3.8771 to 3.8775 in.) . . . . . . E
gauge is not available, do not use an inside microme- 98.488 to 98.498 mm (3.8775 to 3.8779 in.) . . . . . . F
ter.
(2) Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder
PISTON RING FITTING
bore at a point 49.5 mm (1-15/16 inches) below top of (1) Carefully clean the carbon from all ring
bore. Start perpendicular (across or at 90 degrees) to grooves. Oil drain openings in the oil ring groove and
the axis of the crankshaft at point A and then take pin boss must be clear. DO NOT remove metal from
an additional bore reading 90 degrees to that at point the grooves or lands. This will change ring-to-groove
B (Fig. 4). clearances and will damage the ring-to-land seating.
(3) The coated pistons will be serviced with the (2) Be sure the piston ring grooves are free of
piston pin and connecting rod pre-assembled. The nicks and burrs.
coated piston connecting rod assembly can be (3) Measure the ring side clearance with a feeler
used to service previous built engines and gauge fitted snugly between the ring land and ring
(Fig. 5) (Fig. 6). Rotate the ring in the groove. It
must move freely around circumference of the groove.
Fig. 4 Bore Gauge Fig. 6 Ring Side Clearance Measurement

Ring Side Clearance Measurement
Top Compression Ring . . . . . . . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm
(0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
Second Compression Ring . . . . . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm
(0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.06 to 0.21 mm
(0.0024 to 0.0083 in.)
(4) Place ring in the cylinder bore and push down
with inverted piston to position near lower end of the
ring travel. Measure ring gap with a feeler gauge fit-
ting snugly between ring ends (Fig. 7).
Fig. 5 Piston Dimensions
Fig. 7 Gap Measurement

Ring Gap Measurement
(0.0090 to 0.0240 inch)
(0.0190 to 0.0380 inch)
Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 to 1.500 mm
(0.010 to 0.060 inch)
(5) The oil control rings are symmetrical, and can
be installed with either side up. It is not necessary to
use a tool to install the upper and lower rails. Insert
oil rail spacer first, then side rails.
(6) The two compression rings are different and
cannot be interchanged. The top compression ring
can be identified by the shiny coating on the outer Fig. 10 Compression Ring Chamfer Location
sealing surface and can be installed with either side
up (Fig. 8).
(7) The second compression ring has a slight
chamfer on the bottom of the inside edge and a dot
on the top for correct installation (Fig. 9).
(8) Using a ring installer, install the second com-
pression ring with the dot facing up (Fig. 9) (Fig. 11).
(9) Using a ring installer, install the top compres-
sion ring (either side up).
Fig. 11 Compression Ring Installation

• Oil rails - gap 180° apart on centerline of piston
pin bore.
• No. 2 Compression ring - Gap 180° from top oil
rail gap.
• No. 1 Compression ring - Gap 180° from No. 2
Fig. 8 Top Compression ring identification compression ring gap.
FITTING CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

INSPECTION
BEARINGS
Inspect the connecting rod bearings for scoring and
bent alignment tabs (Fig. 13) (Fig. 14). Check the
bearings for normal wear patterns, scoring, grooving,
fatigue and pitting (Fig. 15). Replace any bearing
that shows abnormal wear.
Inspect the connecting rod journals for signs of
scoring, nicks and burrs.
Fig. 9 Second Compression Ring Identification CONNECTING RODS
Ring Gap Orientation Misaligned or bent connecting rods can cause
• Position the gaps on the piston as shown (Fig. abnormal wear on pistons, piston rings, cylinder
12). walls, connecting rod bearings and crankshaft con-
• Oil spacer - Gap on center line of piston skirt. necting rod journals. If wear patterns or damage to
Fig. 14 Locking Tab Inspection
Fig. 15 Scoring Caused by Insufficient Lubrication

or by Damaged Crankshaft Pin Journal
Fig. 12 Ring Gap Orientation (4) Use piston ring compressor to install the rod
and piston assemblies. The oil squirt holes in the
rods must face the camshaft. The arrow on the piston
crown should point to the front of the engine (Fig.
16). Verify that the oil squirt holes in the rods face
the camshaft and that the arrows on the pistons face
the front of the engine.
Fig. 13 Connecting Rod Bearing Inspection

any of these components indicate the probability of a
misaligned connecting rod, inspect it for correct rod
alignment. Replace misaligned, bent or twisted con-
necting rods.
Fig. 16 Rod and Piston Assembly Installation
BEARING-TO-JOURNAL CLEARANCE (5) Install the lower bearing insert in the bearing
(1) Wipe the oil from the connecting rod journal. cap. The lower insert must be dry. Place strip of Plas-
(2) Use short rubber hose sections over rod bolts tigage across full width of the lower insert at the cen-
during installation. ter of bearing cap. Plastigage must not crumble in
(3) Lubricate the upper bearing insert and install use. If brittle, obtain fresh stock.
in connecting rod.
(6) Install bearing cap and connecting rod on the
journal and tighten nuts to 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
torque. DO NOT rotate crankshaft. Plastigage will
smear, resulting in inaccurate indication.
(7) Remove the bearing cap and determine amount
of bearing-to-journal clearance by measuring the
width of compressed Plastigage (Fig. 17). Refer to
Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Plas-
tigage should indicate the same clearance
across the entire width of the insert. If the
clearance varies, it may be caused by either a
tapered journal, bent connecting rod or foreign
material trapped between the insert and cap or
rod.
(8) If the correct clearance is indicated, replace-
ment of the bearing inserts is not necessary. Remove
the Plastigage from crankshaft journal and bearing Fig. 17 Measuring Bearing Clearance with
insert. Proceed with installation. Plastigage
(9) If bearing-to-journal clearance exceeds the
specification, install a pair of 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) (10) The clearance is measured with a pair of
undersize bearing inserts. All the odd size inserts 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) undersize bearing inserts
must be on the bottom. The sizes of the service installed. This will determine if two 0.0254 mm
replacement bearing inserts are stamped on the (0.001 inch) undersize inserts or another combination
backs of the inserts. Measure the clearance as is needed to provide the correct clearance (refer to
described in the previous steps. Connecting Rod Bearing Fitting Chart).
CONNECTING ROD BEARING FITTING CHART
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL CORRESPONDING CONNECTING ROD BEARING INSERT
Color Code Diameter Upper Insert Size Lower Insert Size
Yellow 53.2257-53.2079 mm Yellow - Standard Yellow - Standard

(2.0955-2.0948 in.)
Orange 53.2079 - 53.1901 mm Yellow - Standard Blue - Undersize
(2.0948 - 2.0941 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)

0.0178 mm (0.0014 in.)
Undersize
Blue 53.1901 - 53.1724 mm Blue - Undersize Blue - Undersize
(2.0941 - 2.0934 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)

0.0356 mm (0.0014 in.)
Undersize
Red 52.9717 - 52.9539 mm Red - Undersize Red - Undersize

(2.0855 - 2.0848 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.)
0.254 mm (0.010 in.)
Undersize
(11) FOR EXAMPLE: If the initial clearance was
0.0762 mm (0.003 inch), 0.025 mm (0.001 inch)
undersize inserts would reduce the clearance by
0.025 mm (0.001 inch). The clearance would be 0.002
inch and within specification. A 0.051 mm (0.002
inch) undersize insert would reduce the initial clear-
ance an additional 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). The
clearance would then be 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch).
(12) Repeat the Plastigage measurement to verify
your bearing selection prior to final assembly.
(13) Once you have selected the proper insert,
install the insert and cap. Tighten the connecting rod
SIDE CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT

Slide snug-fitting feeler gauge between the con-
necting rod and crankshaft journal flange (Fig. 18). Fig. 19 Main Bearing Wear Patterns
Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clear-
ance. Replace the connecting rod if the side clearance
FITTING BEARINGS (CRANKSHAFT INSTALLED)
The main bearing caps, numbered (front to rear)
is not within specification.
from 1 through 5 have an arrow to indicate the for-
ward position. The upper main bearing inserts are
grooved to provide oil channels while the lower
inserts are smooth.
Each bearing insert pair is selectively fitted to its
respective journal to obtain the specified operating
clearance. In production, the select fit is obtained by
using various-sized color-coded bearing insert pairs
as listed in the Main Bearing Fitting Chart. The
bearing color code appears on the edge of the insert.
The size is not stamped on bearing inserts used
for engine production.
The main bearing journal size (diameter) is identi-
fied by a color-coded paint mark on the adjacent
cheek. The rear main journal, is identified by a color-
coded paint mark on the crankshaft rear flange.
When required, upper and lower bearing inserts of
Fig. 18 Checking Connecting Rod Side Clearace— different sizes may be used as a pair. A standard size
Typical insert is sometimes used in combination with a 0.025
FITTING CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS mm (0.001 inch) undersize insert to reduce the clear-
ance by 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). Never use a pair
INSPECTION of bearing inserts with greater than a 0.025 mm
(0.001 inch) difference in size (Fig. 20).
Wipe the inserts clean and inspect for abnormal
wear patterns and for metal or other foreign material
imbedded in the lining. Normal main bearing insert
wear patterns are illustrated (Fig. 19).
NOTE: If any of the crankshaft journals are scored,

remove the engine for crankshaft repair.
Inspect the back of the inserts for fractures, scrap-

ings or irregular wear patterns.
Inspect the upper insert locking tabs for damage.
Replace all damaged or worn bearing inserts.
Fig. 20 Bearing Insert Pairs

NOTE: When replacing inserts, the odd size inserts If the clearance exceeds specification, install a pair
must be either all on the top (in cylinder block) or of 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) undersize bearing inserts
all on the bottom (in main bearing cap). and measure the clearance as described in the previ-
ous steps.
Once the bearings have been properly fitted, pro- The clearance indicated with the 0.025 mm (0.001
ceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation. inch) undersize insert pair installed will determine if
this insert size or some other combination will pro-
BEARING-TO-JOURNAL CLEARANCE (CRANKSHAFT vide the specified clearance. FOR EXAMPLE: If the
INSTALLED)
clearance was 0.0762 mm (0.003 inch) originally, a
When using Plastigage, check only one bearing pair of 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) undersize inserts
clearance at a time. would reduce the clearance by 0.0254 mm (0.001
Install the grooved main bearings into the cylinder inch). The clearance would then be 0.0508 mm (0.002
block and the non-grooved bearings into the bearing inch) and within the specification. A 0.051 mm (0.002
caps. inch) undersize bearing insert and a 0.0254 mm
Install the crankshaft into the upper bearings dry. (0.001 inch) undersize insert would reduce the origi-
Place a strip of Plastigage across full width of the nal clearance an additional 0.0127 mm (0.0005 inch).
crankshaft journal to be checked. The clearance would then be 0.0381 mm (0.0015
Install the bearing cap and tighten the bolts to 108 inch).
CAUTION: Never use a pair of inserts that differ
NOTE: DO NOT rotate the crankshaft. This will more than one bearing size as a pair.
cause the Plastigage to shift, resulting in an inaccu-
rate reading. Plastigage must not be permitted to FOR EXAMPLE: DO NOT use a standard size
crumble. If brittle, obtain fresh stock. upper insert and a 0.051 mm (0.002 inch) undersize
lower insert.
Remove the bearing cap. Determine the amount of If the clearance exceeds specification using a pair
clearance by measuring the width of the compressed of 0.051 mm (0.002 inch) undersize bearing inserts,
Plastigage with the scale on the Plastigage envelope measure crankshaft journal diameter with a
(Fig. 21). Refer to Engine Specifications for the micrometer. If the journal diameter is correct, the
proper clearance. crankshaft bore in the cylinder block may be mis-
aligned, which requires cylinder block replacement or
machining to true bore.
If journals 1 through 5 diameters are less than
63.4517 mm (2.4981 inches), replace crankshaft or
grind crankshaft down to accept the appropriate
undersize bearing inserts.
Once the proper clearances have been obtained,
proceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER

(CRANKSHAFT REMOVED)
Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block
(refer to Cylinder Block - Disassemble).
Clean the oil off the main bearing journal.
Determine the maximum diameter of the journal
with a micrometer. Measure at two locations 90°
Fig. 21 Measuring Bearing Clearance with Plastigage apart at each end of the journal.
The maximum allowable taper and out of round is
Plastigage should indicate the same clearance
0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). Compare the measured
across the entire width of the insert. If clearance var-
diameter with the journal diameter specification
ies, it may indicate a tapered journal or foreign
(Main Bearing Fitting Chart). Select inserts required
material trapped behind the insert.
to obtain the specified bearing-to-journal clearance.
If the specified clearance is indicated and there are
Once the proper clearances have been obtained,
no abnormal wear patterns, replacement of the bear-
proceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
ing inserts is not necessary. Remove the Plastigage
from the crankshaft journal and bearing insert. Pro-
ceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
MAIN BEARING FITTING CHART
CRANKSHAFT JOURNALS #1 - 4 CORRESPONDING CRANKSHAFT BEARING INSERT

63.5025 - 63.4898 mm
Yellow Yellow - Standard Yellow - Standard
(2.5001 - 2.4996 in.)
63.4898 - 63.4771mm
(2.4996 - 2.4991 in.) Blue- Undersize 0.025 mm
Orange Yellow - Standard
0.0127 mm (0.0005 in.) (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4771 - 63.4644 mm
(2.4991 - 2.4986 in.) Blue- Undersize 0.025 mm Blue- Undersize 0.025 mm
Blue
0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) (0.001 in.) (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4644 - 63.4517 mm
(2.4986 - 2.4981 in.) Blue - Undersize Green - Undersize 0.051 mm
Green
0.0381 mm (0.0015 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) (0.002 in.)
Undersize
63.2485 - 63.2358 mm
(2.4901 - 2.4896 in.) Red - Undersize 0.254 mm Red - Undersize 0.254 mm
Red
0.254 mm (0.010 in.) (0.010 in.) (0.010 in.)
Undersize
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL #5 ONLY CORRESPONDING CRANKSHAFT BEARING INSERT

63.4873 - 63.4746 mm
(2.4995 - 2.4990 in.)
63.4746 - 63.4619 mm
(2.4990 - 2.4985 in.) Blue - Undersize 0.025 mm
0.0127 mm (0.0005 in. (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4619 - 63.4492 mm
(2.4985 - 2.4980 in.) Blue- Undersize 0.025 mm Blue- Undersize 0.025 mm
Blue
0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) (0.001 in.) (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4492 - 63.4365 mm
(2.4980- 2.4975 in.) Blue - Undersize 0.025 mm Green - Undersize 0.051 mm
Green
0.0381 mm (0.0015 in.) (0.001 in.) (0.002 in.)
Undersize
63.2333 - 63.2206 mm
(2.4895 - 2.4890 in.) Red - Undersize 0.254 mm Red - Undersize 0.254 mm
Red
0.254 mm (0.010 in.) (0.010 in.) (0.010 in.)
Undersize

ENGINE MOUNTS—FRONT
The front mounts support the engine at each side.
These supports are made of resilient rubber.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery.
(3) Support the engine.
(4) Remove through bolt nut (Fig. 22). DO NOT
remove the through bolt.
(5) Remove the retaining bolts and nuts from the
support cushions (Fig. 22).
(6) Remove the through bolt.
(7) Remove the support cushions.
Fig. 23 Engine Support Bracket—Right Side

(2) If the support cushion brackets were removed,
position the brackets onto the lower front sill (Fig.
22) (Fig. 24). Install the bolts and stud nuts. Tighten
the bolts to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque and the stud
nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
Fig. 24 Support Cushion Bracket—Left Side

Fig. 22 Front Mounts (3) Place the support cushions onto the support
cushion brackets (Fig. 22). Tighten the right support
INSTALLATION cushion nuts to 65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten
(1) If the engine support bracket was removed, the left support cushion bolt and nut to 41 N·m (30
position the LEFT bracket (Fig. 22) and the RIGHT ft. lbs.) torque.
bracket (Fig. 23) onto the cylinder block. Install the (4) Install the through bolt and the retaining nut
bolts and stud nuts. (Fig. 22). Tighten the through bolt nut to 65 N·m (48
(a) RIGHT SIDE (Fig. 23) —Tighten the bolts to ft. lbs.) torque.
61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten the stud nuts to (5) Remove the engine support.
46 N·m (34 ft. lbs.) torque. (6) Lower the vehicle.
(b) LEFT SIDE (Fig. 22) —Tighten the bolts to (7) Connect negative cable to battery.
ENGINE MOUNT—REAR
A resilient rubber cushion supports the transmis-
sion at the rear between the transmission extension
housing and the rear support crossmember or skid
plate.
REMOVAL
(2) Raise the vehicle and support the transmission.
(3) Remove the nuts holding the support cushion
to the crossmember (Fig. 25) (Fig. 26). Remove the
crossmember.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION:
a. Remove the support cushion nuts and remove
the cushion.
b. If necessary, remove the bolts holding the trans-
mission support bracket to the transmission (Fig. 25).
Remove the bracket.
Fig. 26 Rear Mount (Automatic Transmission)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION:
a. If removed, position the transmission support
adaptor bracket (2WD vehicles) to the transmission
and install the bolts. Tighten the bolts to 75 N·m (55
ft. lbs.) torque.
Fig. 25 Rear Mount (Manual Transmission) b. Position the transmission support bracket and
support cushion to the transmission and install the
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION: bolts. Tighten the bolts to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque.
a. Remove the support cushion bolts and remove (1) Position the crossmember onto the support
the cushion and the transmission support bracket. cushion studs and install the nuts. Tighten the nuts
b. If necessary on 2WD vehicles, remove the bolts to 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.) torque.
holding the transmission support adaptor bracket to (2) Install the crossmember to sill bolts and
the transmission (Fig. 26). Remove the adaptor tighten to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
bracket. (3) Remove the transmission support.
INSTALLATION (5) Connect negative cable to battery.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION: ENGINE ASSEMBLY

a. If removed, position the transmission support
bracket to the transmission and install the bolts. REMOVAL
Tighten the bolts to 43 N·m (32 ft. lbs.) torque. (1) Disconnect the battery cables. Remove the bat-
b. Position the support cushion onto the transmis- tery.
sion support bracket. Install and tighten the nuts to (2) Mark the hinge locations on the hood panel for
46 N·m (34 ft. lbs.) torque. alignment reference during installation. Remove the
engine compartment lamp. Remove the hood.
WARNING: THE COOLANT IN A RECENTLY OPER- (16) Remove latch clip and disconnect the quick-
ATED ENGINE IS HOT AND PRESSURIZED. USE connect fuel line at the fuel rail.
CARE TO PREVENT SCALDING BY HOT COOLANT. (17) Recover refrigerant (if equipped with A/C).
CAREFULLY RELEASE THE PRESSURE BEFORE (Refer to group 24, Heating and Air Conditioning for
REMOVING THE RADIATOR DRAIN COCK AND CAP. proper procedures.)
(18) Disconnect suction/discharge hose from A/C
(3) Loosen the radiator drain cock and radiator cap
compressor and cap off ports to prevent intrusion of
to drain the coolant. DO NOT waste usable coolant.
foreign material or refrigerant oil loss.
If the solution is clean, drain the coolant into a clean
(19) Remove the power brake vacuum check valve
container for reuse.
from the booster, if equipped.
(4) Remove the air cleaner assembly.
(20) If equipped with power steering:
(5) Remove the lower radiator hose.
(a) Disconnect the power steering hoses from the
(6) Remove the upper radiator hose and coolant
fittings at the steering gear.
recovery hose (Fig. 27).
(b) Drain the pump reservoir.
(7) Remove the fan shroud (Fig. 27).
(c) Cap the fittings on the hoses and steering
gear to prevent foreign material from entering the
system.
(21) Identify, tag and disconnect all necessary wire
connectors and vacuum hoses.
(23) Remove the oil filter.
(24) Remove the starter motor.
(25) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the exhaust
manifold.
(26) Remove the flywheel housing access cover.
(27) Remove the upper flywheel and converter
housing bolts and loosen the bottom bolts.
(28) Remove the engine support cushion-to-engine
compartment bracket bolts.
(29) Remove the engine shock damper bracket
Fig. 27 Upper Radiator Hose, Coolant Recovery from the sill.
Hose & Fan Shroud (30) Lower the vehicle.
(31) Attach a lifting device to the engine.
(8) Remove the radiator/condenser (if equipped (32) Raise the engine slightly off the front sup-
with air conditioning). ports.
(9) Remove fan assembly and install a 5/16 x 1/2- (33) Place a support stand under the converter or
inch SAE capscrew through fan pulley into water flywheel housing.
pump flange. This will maintain the pulley and (34) Lift the engine out of the engine compartment
water pump in alignment when crankshaft is rotated. and install on an engine stand.
(10) Disconnect the heater hoses. (35) Install the oil filter to keep foreign material
(11) Disconnect the throttle cable, speed control out of the engine.
cable (if equipped) and transmission cable (if
equipped). INSTALLATION
(12) Disconnect the body ground at the firewall. (1) Remove the oil filter.
(13) Disconnect the wires from the starter motor (2) Lift the engine off the stand and lower it into
solenoid. the engine compartment. For easier installation, it
(14) Disconnect all fuel injection harness connec- may be useful to remove the engine support cushions
tions. from the engine support brackets as an aide for
alignment of the engine-to-transmission.
WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER A CON-
(3) Insert the transmission shaft into the clutch
STANT PRESSURE (EVEN WITH THE ENGINE TURNED
spline. (M/T models)
OFF). BEFORE DISCONNECTING FUEL LINES, THE
(4) Align the flywheel housing with the engine.
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED.
(5) Install and tighten the flywheel housing lower
(15) Perform fuel pressure release procedure. bolts.
(refer to Group 14, Fuel System for the proper proce- (6) Install the engine support cushions (if
dure). removed).
(7) Lower the engine and engine support cushions (4) Remove the power steering pump and brackets
onto the engine compartment brackets. from the water pump and intake manifold. Secure
(8) Remove the engine lifting device. power steering pump and bracket out of the way.
(9) Raise the vehicle. (5) Perform fuel system pressure release procedure
(10) Install the converter-housing access cover. (refer to Group 14, Fuel System for correct proce-
(11) Install the exhaust pipe support. dure).
(12) Install the starter motor and connect the (6) Disconnect fuel supply tube from the fuel rail.
cable. Tighten the bolts to 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.) torque. Some fuel lines require a special tool for removal/in-
(13) Tighten the engine support cushion through- stallation (refer to Group 14, Fuel System - Quick
bolt nuts. Connect Fittings).
(14) Connect the exhaust pipe to the manifold. (7) Disconnect the accelerator cable, the cruise
(15) Install the oil filter. control cable (if equipped), and the transmission line
(16) Lower the vehicle. pressure cable (if equipped) from the throttle body
(17) Connect the coolant hoses and tighten the and remove them from the cable bracket.
clamps.
(18) If equipped with power steering: CAUTION: When disconnecting the cruise control
(a) Remove the protective caps. connector at the throttle body, DO NOT pry the con-
(b) Connect the hoses to the fittings at the steer- nector off with pliers or screwdriver. Use finger
ing gear. Tighten the nut to 52 N·m (38 ft. lbs.) pressure only. Prying the connector off could break
torque. it.
(c) Fill the pump reservoir with fluid.
(19) Remove the pulley-to-water pump flange (8) Disconnect the electrical connectors. Pull the
alignment capscrew and install the fan assembly. harnesses away from the manifold and secure them
(20) Install the fan shroud and radiator and con- so they do not interfere with the manifold removal
denser (if equipped with air conditioning). and installation process.
(21) Connect the radiator hoses. • The throttle position sensor.
(22) Connect the oxygen sensor wire connector. • The idle air control motor.
(23) Connect the throttle cable and install the rod. • The coolant temperature sensor at the thermo-
Connect the transmission and speed control cables (if stat.
equipped). • The manifold air temperature sensor at the
(24) Connect the fuel supply line to the injector rail. intake manifold.
push until a “click” is heard. Re-install latch clip. • The fuel injectors.
(25) Connect all the vacuum hoses and wire con- • The oxygen sensor.
nectors. (9) Disconnect the crankcase ventilation (CCV)
(26) Connect suction/discharge hose to compressor. vacuum hose and manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
(if equipped) sensor vacuum hose connector at the intake mani-
(27) Fill the power steering reservoir. fold.
(28) Connect the battery cables. (10) Disconnect vacuum hose from vacuum port on
(29) Install the air cleaner. the intake manifold.
(30) Install the hood. (11) Disconnect CCV hose at the cylinder head
(31) Add engine oil and coolant. cover (Fig. 28).
(32) Start the engine and inspect for leaks. (12) Remove the molded vacuum harness.
(33) Stop the engine and check the fluid levels. (13) Disconnect the vacuum brake booster hose at
Add fluid, as required. the intake manifold.
(34) Recharge air conditioning (Refer to group 24, (14) Remove bolts 2 through 5 securing the intake
Heating and Air Conditioning for proper procedures). manifold to the cylinder head (Fig. 29). Slightly
loosen bolt No.1 and nuts 6 and 7.
INTAKE MANIFOLD—2.5L ENGINE (15) Remove the intake manifold and gaskets.
Drain the coolant from the manifold.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the battery negative cable.
INSTALLATION
(2) Remove the air inlet hose from the throttle (1) Clean the intake manifold and cylinder head
body and air cleaner. mating surfaces. DO NOT allow foreign material
(3) Loosen the accessory drive belt tension and to enter either the intake manifold or the ports
remove the belt from the power steering pump (refer in the cylinder head.
to Group 07, Cooling Systems for proper procedures). (2) Install the new intake manifold gasket over the
locating dowels.
(11) Tighten the power steering pump bolts to 28
N·m (21 ft. lbs.) Tighten the tensioner bracket to
water pump bolts to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.).
(12) Connect the accelerator cable, cruise control
cable (if equipped), and the transmission line pres-
sure cable (if equipped) to the hold-down bracket and
the throttle lever.
(13) Install and tension the accessory drive belt.
Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for the proper pro-
cedure.
CAUTION: Ensure that the accessory drive belt is

routed correctly. Failure to do so can cause the
water pump to turn in the opposite direction result-
ing in engine overheating. Refer to Group 7, Cool-
ing System for the proper procedure.
(14) Connect the air inlet hose to the throttle body

and the air cleaner.
(16) Start the engine and check for leaks.
Fig. 28 Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) Hose—2.5L EXHAUST MANIFOLD—2.5L ENGINE

Engine
REMOVAL
(3) Position the manifold in place and finger (1) Disconnect the battery negative cable.
tighten the mounting bolts. (2) Raise the vehicle.
(4) Tighten the fasteners in sequence and to the (3) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the engine
specified torque (Fig. 29). exhaust manifold.
• Fastener No.1—Tighten to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (4) Lower the vehicle.
torque. (5) Remove intake manifold (refer to procedure in
• Fasteners Nos.2 through 7—Tighten to 31 N·m this section).
(23 ft. lbs.) torque. (6) Remove fasteners 2 through 5 and remove the
(5) Connect fuel supply tube to the fuel rail inlet. intake manifold (Fig. 29).
Push tube until a “click” is heard. Before connect- (7) Remove fasteners 1, 6 and 7 and remove the
ing the fuel line to the fuel rail replace the engine exhaust manifold (Fig. 29).
O-rings at the quick-connect fuel line coupling.
(6) Pull out on the fuel supply tube to ensure that
it is locked in place.
(7) Connect the molded vacuum hoses to the vac-
uum port on the intake manifold and the cylinder
head cover.
(8) Connect the electrical connectors.
• The throttle position sensor.
• The idle air control motor.
• The coolant temperature sensor at the thermo-
stat housing.
• The fuel injectors.
• The air manifold temperature sensor.
• The oxygen sensor.
(9) Connect the CCV vacuum hose and MAP sen-
sor vacuum hose connectors to the throttle body.
(10) Install the power steering pump and bracket
Fig. 29 Intake/Exhaust Manifold Removal/
assembly to the water pump and intake manifold.
Installation—2.5L Engine
Hand start the three (3) tensioner bracket to p/s
pump to intake manifold bolts and the two (2) ten-
sioner bracket to water pump bolts.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the intake and engine exhaust manifolds
and cylinder head mating surfaces. DO NOT allow
foreign material to enter either the intake man-
ifold or the ports in the cylinder head.
(2) Install a new intake manifold gasket over the
alignment dowels on the cylinder head.
(3) Install the engine exhaust manifold assembly.
Exhaust manifold must be centrally located
over the end studs and spacer (Fig. 29).
(4) Tighten bolt No.1 to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque
(Fig. 29).
(5) Install the intake manifold on the cylinder
head dowels (Fig. 29).
(6) Install bolts 2 through 5 (Fig. 29). Tighten
these bolts to 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.) torque.
(7) Install new engine exhaust manifold spacers
over the engine exhaust manifold mounting studs in
the cylinder head (Fig. 29).
(8) Tighten nuts 6 and 7 to 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
torque (Fig. 29).
(9) Install all components to the intake manifold.
(10) Raise the vehicle. Fig. 30 Engine Cylinder Head Cover
(11) Connect the exhaust pipe to the engine material are missing or are compressed, replace the
exhaust manifold. Tighten the bolts to 31 N·m (23 ft. engine cylinder head cover. However, sections with
lbs.) torque. minor damage such as small cracks, cuts or chips
(12) Lower the vehicle. may be repaired with a hand held applicator. The
(13) Connect the battery negative cable. new material must be smoothed over to maintain
(14) Start the engine and check for leaks. gasket height. Allow the gasket material to cure
prior to engine cylinder head cover installation.
CYLINDER HEAD COVER
A cured gasket is part of the engine cylinder head (2) If a replacement cover is installed, transfer the
cover. CCV valve grommet the oil filler cap from the origi-
nal cover to the replacement cover.
REMOVAL (3) Install engine cylinder head cover. Tighten the
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. mounting bolts to 13 N·m (115 in. lbs.) torque.
(2) Disconnect the Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) (4) Connect the CCV hoses (Fig. 30).
vacuum hose from engine cylinder head cover (Fig. (5) Connect negative cable to battery.
30).
(3) Disconnect the fresh air inlet hose from the ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS
engine cylinder head cover (Fig. 30). This procedure can be done with the engine in or
(4) Remove the engine cylinder head cover mount- out of the vehicle.
ing bolts.
(5) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. REMOVAL
(6) Remove any original sealer from the cover seal- (1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. (Refer
ing surface of the engine cylinder head and clean the to procedure in this section)
surface using a fabric cleaner. (2) Check for rocker arm bridges which are caus-
(7) Remove all residue from the sealing surface ing misalignment of the rocker arm to valve tip area.
using a clean, dry cloth. (3) Remove the capscrews at each bridge and pivot
assembly (Fig. 31). Alternately loosen the capscrews
INSTALLATION one turn at a time to avoid damaging the bridges.
(1) Inspect the engine cylinder head cover for (4) Remove the bridges, pivots and corresponding
cracks. Replace the cover, if cracked. pairs of rocker arms (Fig. 31). Place them on a bench
in the same order as removed.
NOTE: The original dark grey gasket material (5) Remove the push rods and place them on a
should NOT be removed. If sections of the gasket bench in the same order as removed.
(2) Remove cap screws, bridge and pivot assem-
blies and rocker arms for access to each valve spring
to be removed.
(3) Remove push rods. Retain the push rods,
bridges, pivots and rocker arms in the same
order and position as removed.
(4) Inspect the springs and retainer for cracks and
possible signs of weakening.
(5) Remove the spark plug(s) adjacent to the cylin-
der(s) below the valve springs to be removed.
(6) Install a 14 mm (1/2 inch) (thread size) air hose
adaptor in the spark plug hole.
(7) Connect an air hose to the adapter and apply
air pressure slowly. Maintain at least 621 kPa (90
psi) of air pressure in the cylinder to hold the valves
against their seats. For vehicles equipped with an air
conditioner, use a flexible air adaptor when servicing
the No.1 cylinder.
(8) Tap the retainer or tip with a rawhide hammer
to loosen the lock from the retainer. Use Valve Spring
Compressor Tool MD-998772A to compress the spring
and remove the locks (Fig. 32).
Fig. 31 Rocker Arm Assembly (9) Remove valve spring and retainer (Fig. 32).
(6) Clean all the components with cleaning sol- (10) Remove valve stem oil seals (Fig. 32). Note
vent. the valve seals are different for intake and exhaust
(7) Use compressed air to blow out the oil passages valves. The top of each seal is marked either INT
in the rocker arms and push rods. (intake/black in color) or EXH (exhaust/brown in
color). DO NOT mix the seals.
INSTALLATION
(1) Lubricate the ball ends of the push rods with
Mopar Engine Oil Supplement, or equivalent and
install push rods in their original locations. Ensure
that the bottom end of each push rod is centered in
the tappet plunger cap seat.
(2) Using Mopar Engine Oil Supplement, or equiv-
alent, lubricate the area of the rocker arm that the
pivot contacts. Install rocker arms, pivots and bridge
above each cylinder in their original position.
(3) Loosely install the capscrews through each
bridge.
(4) At each bridge, tighten the capscrews alter-
nately, one turn at a time, to avoid damaging the
bridge. Tighten the capscrews to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.)
torque.
(5) Install the engine cylinder head cover.
VALVE SPRINGS AND OIL SEALS

This procedure can be done with the engine cylin-
der head installed on the block.
REMOVAL Fig. 32 Valve and Valve Components

Each valve spring is held in place by a retainer
and a set of conical valve locks. The locks can be INSTALLATION
removed only by compressing the valve spring. Inspect the valve stems, especially the grooves. An
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. Refer Arkansas smooth stone should be used to remove
to procedure in this section. nicks and high spots.
CAUTION: Install oil seals carefully to prevent dam-
age from the sharp edges of the valve spring lock
grove.
(1) Lightly push the valve seal over the valve stem
and valve guide boss. Be sure the seal is completely
seated on the valve guide boss.
(2) Install valve spring and retainer.
(3) Compress the valve spring with Valve Spring
Compressor Tool MD-998772A and insert the valve
locks. Release the spring tension and remove the
tool. Tap the spring from side-to-side to ensure that
the spring is seated properly on the engine cylinder
head.
(4) Release air pressure and disconnect the air
hose. Remove the adaptor from the spark plug hole
and install the spark plug.
(5) Repeat the procedures for each remaining valve
spring to be removed.
(6) Install the push rods. Ensure the bottom end of
each rod is centered in the plunger cap seat of the
hydraulic valve tappet. Fig. 33 Rocker Arm Assembly
(7) Install the rocker arms, pivots and bridge at
their original location. pulley bracket (refer to Group 7, Cooling System for
(8) Tighten the bridge cap screws alternately, one the proper procedure).
at a time, to avoid damaging the bridge. Tighten the (8) If equipped with air conditioning, perform the
cap screws to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.) torque. following:
(9) Install the engine cylinder head cover. (a) Remove the bolts from the A/C compressor
mounting bracket and set the compressor aside.
CYLINDER HEAD (b) Remove the air conditioner compressor
This procedure can be done with the engine in or bracket bolts from the engine cylinder head.
out of the vehicle. (c) Loosen the through bolt at the bottom of the
bracket.
REMOVAL (9) If equipped, disconnect the power steering
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. pump bracket. Set the pump and bracket aside. DO
NOT disconnect the hoses.
WARNING: DO NOT REMOVE THE CYLINDER (10) Perform fuel pressure release procedure
BLOCK DRAIN PLUGS OR LOOSEN THE RADIATOR (Refer to Group 14, fuel systems for proper proce-
DRAIN COCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES- dures).
SURIZED BECAUSE SERIOUS BURNS FROM THE (11) Remove the latch clip and disconnect the fuel
COOLANT CAN OCCUR. supply hose.
(12) Remove the intake and engine exhaust mani-
(2) Drain the coolant and disconnect the hoses at folds from the engine cylinder head (refer to Group
the engine thermostat housing. DO NOT waste reus- 11, Exhaust System and Intake Manifold for the
able coolant. If the solution is clean and is being proper procedures).
drained only to service the engine or cooling system, (13) Number and disconnect the ignition wires and
drain the coolant into a clean container for reuse. remove the spark plugs.
(3) Remove the air cleaner assembly. (14) Disconnect the coolant temperature sending
(4) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. (Refer unit connector.
to procedure in this section) (15) Remove the engine cylinder head bolts.
(5) Remove the capscrews, bridge and pivot assem- (16) Remove the engine cylinder head and gasket
blies and rocker arms (Fig. 33). (Fig. 34).
(6) Remove the push rods (Fig. 33). Retain the (17) If this was the first time the bolts were
push rods, bridges, pivots and rocker arms in removed, put a paint dab on the top of the bolt. If the
the same order as removed. bolts have a paint dab on the top of the bolt or it
(7) Loosen the accessory drive belt at the power isn’t known if they were used before, discard the
steering pump bracket, if equipped or at the idler bolts.
(18) Stuff clean lint free shop towels into the cyl- (2) Install one dowel in bolt hole No.10 and the
inder bores. other dowel in bolt hole No.8 (Fig. 36).
NOTE: If valves, springs, or seals are to be inspect-

ed/replaced at this time, refer to Valves and Valve
Springs later in this section for proper procedures.
Fig. 36 Alignment Dowel Locations

(3) Remove the shop towels from the cylinder
bores. Coat the bores with clean engine oil.
(4) Place the engine cylinder head gasket (with the
numbers facing up) over the dowels.
(5) Place the engine cylinder head over the dowels.
CAUTION: Engine cylinder head bolts should be

Fig. 34 Engine Cylinder Head Assembly reused only once. Replace the head bolts if they
were used before or if they have a paint dab on the
INSTALLATION top of the bolt.
The engine cylinder head gasket is a composition
gasket. The gasket is to be installed DRY. DO NOT (6) Coat the threads of bolt No.7, only, with Loctite
use a gasket sealing compound on the gasket. PST sealant or equivalent.
If the engine cylinder head is to be replaced and (7) Install all head bolts, except No.8 and No.10.
the original valves used, measure the valve stem (8) Remove the dowels.
diameter. Only standard size valves can be used with (9) Install No.8 and No.10 head bolts.
a service replacement engine cylinder head unless
the replacement head valve stem guide bores are CAUTION: During the final tightening sequence,
reamed to accommodate oversize valve stems. bolt No.7 will be tightened to a lower torque than
Remove all carbon buildup and reface the valves. the rest of the bolts. DO NOT overtighten bolt No.7.
(1) Fabricate two engine cylinder head alignment
dowels from used head bolts (Fig. 35). Use the long- (10) Tighten the engine cylinder head bolts in
est head bolt. Cut the head of the bolt off below the sequence according to the following procedure (Fig.
hex head. Then cut a slot in the top of the dowel to 37):
allow easier removal with a screwdriver. (a) Tighten all bolts in sequence (1 through 10)
to 30 N·m (22 ft. lbs.) torque.
(b) Tighten all bolts in sequence (1 through 10)
(c) Check all bolts to verify they are set to 61
(d) Tighten bolts (in sequence):
• Bolts 1 through 6 to 149 N·m (110 ft. lbs.)
torque.
• Bolt 7 to 136 N·m (100 ft. lbs.) torque.
torque.
(e) Check all bolts in sequence to verify the cor-
rect torque.
(f) If not already done, clean and mark each bolt
with a dab of paint after tightening. Should you
encounter bolts which were painted in an earlier
Fig. 35 Fabricate Alignment Dowels service operation, replace them.
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN DIRECT
LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT HANDS NEAR
THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO NOT WEAR
LOOSE CLOTHING.
(27) Operate the engine with the radiator cap off.

Inspect for leaks and continue operating the engine
until the thermostat opens. Add coolant, if required.
CYLINDER HEAD
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Use Valve Spring Compressor Tool
MD-998772A and compress each valve spring.
(2) Remove the valve locks, retainers, springs and
Fig. 37 Engine cylinder head Bolt Tightening Sequence
valve stem oil seals. Discard the oil seals.
(11) Connect the coolant temperature sending unit (3) Use an Arkansas smooth stone or a jewelers
connector. file to remove any burrs on the top of the valve stem,
(12) Install the spark plugs and tighten to 37 N·m especially around the groove for the locks.
(27 ft. lbs.) torque. Connect the ignition wires. (4) Remove the valves, and place them in a rack in
(13) Install the intake and exhaust manifolds the same order as removed.
(refer to Group 11, Exhaust System and Intake Man-
ifold for the proper procedures). ASSEMBLY
(14) Install the fuel supply line. Push until a (1) Thoroughly clean the valve stems and the valve
“click” is heard. Reinstall latch clip. guide bores.
(15) If equipped, attach the power steering pump (2) Lightly lubricate the stem.
and bracket. (3) Install the valve in the original valve guide
(16) Install the push rods, rocker arms, pivots and bore.
bridges in the order they were removed. (4) Install the replacement valve stem oil seals on
(17) Install the engine cylinder head cover. the valve stems. If the 0.381 mm (0.015 inch) over-
(18) Attach the air conditioning compressor mount- size valve stems are used, oversize oil seals are
ing bracket to the engine cylinder head and block. required.
Tighten the bolts to 40 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque. (5) Position the valve spring and retainer on the
(19) Attach the air conditioning compressor to the engine cylinder head and compress the valve spring
bracket. Tighten the bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) with Valve Spring Compressor Tool MD-998772A.
torque. (6) Install the valve locks and release the tool.
(7) Tap the valve spring from side to side with a
CAUTION: The accessory drive belt must be routed hammer to ensure that the spring is properly seated
correctly. Incorrect routing can cause the water at the engine cylinder head. Also tap the top of the
pump to turn in the opposite direction causing the retainer to seat the valve locks.
engine to overheat.
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
(20) Install the accessory drive belt and correctly
tension the belt (refer to Group 7, Cooling System for
REMOVAL
the proper procedure).
Retain all the components in the same order as
(21) Install the air cleaner and ducting.
removed.
(22) Connect the hoses to the thermostat housing
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover (refer to
and fill the cooling system to the specified level (refer
procedure earlier in this section).
to Group 7, Cooling Systems for the proper proce-
(2) Remove the bridge and pivot assemblies and
dure).
rocker arms by removing the capscrews at each
(23) Install the coolant temperature sending unit
bridge. Alternately loosen each capscrew, one turn at
connector.
a time, to avoid damaging the bridges.
(3) Remove the push rods.
(25) Connect the upper radiator hose and heater
hose at the thermostat housing.
(26) Fill the cooling system. Check for leaks.
(4) Remove the tappets through the push rod open-
ings in the cylinder head with a Hydraulic Valve
Tappet Removal/Installation Tool (Fig. 38).
Fig. 39 Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697

INSTALLATION
(1) Apply Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Sealant
to the keyway in the crankshaft and insert the key.
With the key in position, align the keyway on the
vibration damper hub with the crankshaft key and
tap the damper onto the crankshaft.
(2) Install the vibration damper retaining bolt and
Fig. 38 Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal/Installation washer.
Tool (3) Tighten the damper retaining bolt to 108 N·m
INSTALLATION (80 ft. lbs.) torque.
It is not necessary to charge the tappets with (4) Install the serpentine drive belt and tighten to
engine oil. They will charge themselves within a very the specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling Sys-
short period of engine operation. tems for the proper specifications and procedures).
(1) Dip each tappet in Mopar Engine Oil Supple- (5) Connect negative cable to battery.
ment, or equivalent.
(2) Use Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal/Installa- TIMING CASE COVER OIL SEAL
tion Tool to install each tappet in the same bore from
where it was originally removed. REMOVAL
(3) Install the push rods in their original locations. This procedure is done with the timing case cover
(4) Install the rocker arms and bridge and pivot installed.
assemblies at their original locations. Loosely install (1) Disconnect negative cable from battery.
the capscrews at each bridge. (2) Remove the serpentine drive belt.
(5) Tighten the capscrews alternately, one turn at (3) Remove the vibration damper.
a time, to avoid damaging the bridges. Tighten the (4) Remove the radiator shroud.
capscrews to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.) torque. (5) Carefully remove the oil seal. Make sure seal
(6) Install the engine cylinder head cover. bore is clean.
VIBRATION DAMPER INSTALLATION

(1) Position the replacement oil seal on Timing
REMOVAL Case Cover Alignment and Seal Installation Tool
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. 6139 with seal open end facing inward. Apply a light
(2) Remove the serpentine drive belt and fan film of Perfect Seal, or equivalent, on the outside
shroud. diameter of the seal. Lightly coat the crankshaft with
(3) Remove the vibration damper retaining bolt engine oil.
and washer. (2) Position the tool and seal over the end of the
(4) Use Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697 to crankshaft and insert a draw screw tool into Seal
remove the damper from the crankshaft (Fig. 39). Installation Tool 6139 (Fig. 40). Tighten the nut
against the tool until it contacts the cover.
Fig. 40 Timing Case Cover Oil Seal Installation Fig. 41 Timing Case Cover Components
(3) Remove the tools. Apply a light film of engine oil (2) Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the timing
on the vibration damper hub contact surface of the seal. case cover. The open end of the seal should be toward
(4) Apply Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Sealant the inside of the cover. Support the cover at the seal
to the keyway in the crankshaft and insert the key. area while installing the seal. Force it into position
With the key inserted in the keyway in the crank- with Seal Installation Tool 6139.
shaft, install the vibration damper, washer and bolt. (3) Position the gasket on the cylinder block.
Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.) (4) Position the timing case cover on the oil pan
torque. gasket and the cylinder block.
(5) Install the serpentine belt and tighten to the (5) Insert Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal
specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling Systems Installation Tool 6139 in the crankshaft opening in
for the proper specifications and procedures). the cover (Fig. 42).
(6) Install the radiator shroud.
TIMING CASE COVER

REMOVAL
(2) Remove accessory drive belt (Refer to Group
07, Cooling System for proper procedure).
(3) Remove the accessory drive brackets that are
attached to the timing case cover.
(4) Remove the fan and hub assembly and remove
the fan shroud.
(5) Remove the A/C compressor (if equipped) and
generator bracket assembly from the engine cylinder
head and move to one side.
(6) Remove the vibration damper (Fig. 41). Fig. 42 Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal
(7) Remove the oil pan-to-timing case cover bolts Installation Tool 6139
and timing case cover-to-cylinder block bolts.
(8) Remove the timing case cover and gasket from (6) Install the timing case cover-to-cylinder block
the engine. and the oil pan-to-timing case cover bolts.
(9) Pry the crankshaft oil seal from the front of the (7) Tighten the 1/4 inch cover-to-block bolts to 7
timing case cover (Fig. 41). N·m (60 in. lbs.) torque. Tighten the 5/16 inch front
cover-to-block bolts to 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.) torque.
INSTALLATION Tighten the oil pan-to-cover bolts to 9.5 N·m (84 in.
(1) Clean the timing case cover, oil pan and cylin- lbs.) torque.
der block gasket surfaces. (8) Remove the cover alignment tool.
(9) Apply a light film of engine oil on the vibration
damper hub contact surface of the seal.
(10) Apply Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Seal-
ant to the keyway in the crankshaft and insert the
key. With the key inserted in the keyway in the
crankshaft, install the vibration damper, washer and
bolt. Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft.
lbs.) torque.
(11) Install the A/C compressor (if equipped) and
generator bracket assembly.
(12) Install the engine fan and hub assembly and
shroud.
(13) Install the accessory drive belt and tighten to
obtain the specified tension.
TIMING CHAIN AND SPROCKETS Fig. 44 Camshaft and Crankshaft Sprockets and
The timing chain tensioner reduces noise and pro- Chain
longs timing chain life. In addition, it compensates INSTALLATION
for slack in a worn or stretched chain and maintains (1) Turn the tensioner lever to the unlocked (down)
the correct valve timing. position (Fig. 45).
(2) Pull the tensioner block toward the tensioner
REMOVAL lever to compress the spring. Hold the block and turn
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. the tensioner lever to the lock position (Fig. 45).
(2) Remove the fan and shroud.
(3) Remove the serpentine drive belt.
(4) Remove the crankshaft vibration damper.
(5) Remove the timing case cover.
(6) Rotate crankshaft until the “0” timing mark is
closest to and on the center line with camshaft
sprocket timing mark (Fig. 43).
Fig. 45 Loading Timing Chain Tensioner

With the key in the crankshaft keyway, install the
crankshaft, camshaft sprockets and timing chain.
Ensure the timing marks on the sprockets are prop-
Fig. 43 Crankshaft—Camshaft Alignment erly aligned (Fig. 43).
(4) Install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
(7) Remove the oil slinger from the crankshaft. and washer. Tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
(8) Remove the camshaft retaining bolt and torque.
remove the sprockets and chain as an assembly (Fig. (5) To verify correct installation of the timing
44). chain, turn the crankshaft to position the camshaft
(9) To replace the timing chain tensioner, the oil sprocket timing mark as shown in (Fig. 46). Count
pan must be removed. the number of chain pins between the timing marks
of both sprockets. There must be 20 pins.
(6) For ease of installation, note the position of the
rotor and distributor housing in relation to adjacent
engine components.
(7) Remove the distributor and ignition wires.
(8) Remove the engine cylinder head cover.
(9) Remove the rocker arms, bridges and pivots.
(11) Remove the hydraulic valve tappets from the
engine cylinder head.
(12) Remove the vibration damper.
(13) Remove the timing case cover.
(14) Remove the timing chain and sprockets.
(15) Remove the camshaft (Fig. 47).
Fig. 46 Verify Sprocket—Chain Installation

(6) Turn the chain tensioner lever to the unlocked
(down) position (Fig. 45).
(7) Install the oil slinger.
(8) Replace the oil seal in the timing case cover.
(9) Install the timing case cover and gasket.
(10) With the key inserted in the keyway in the
crankshaft, install the vibration damper, washer and Fig. 47 Camshaft
bolt. Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. INSTALLATION
lbs.) torque. (1) Inspect the cam lobes for wear.
(11) Install the fan and shroud. (2) Inspect the bearing journals for uneven wear
(12) Connect negative cable to battery. pattern or finish.
(3) Inspect the bearings for wear.
CAMSHAFT (4) Inspect the distributor drive gear for wear.
(5) If the camshaft appears to have been rubbing
REMOVAL against the timing case cover, examine the oil pres-
sure relief holes in the rear cam journal. The oil
WARNING: THE COOLANT IN A RECENTLY OPER- pressure relief holes must be free of debris.
ATED ENGINE IS HOT AND PRESSURIZED. (6) Lubricate the camshaft with Mopar Engine Oil
RELEASE THE PRESSURE BEFORE REMOVING Supplement, or equivalent.
THE DRAIN COCK, CAP AND DRAIN PLUGS. (7) Carefully install the camshaft to prevent dam-
age to the camshaft bearings (Fig. 47).
(8) Turn the tensioner lever to the unlocked (down)
(2) Drain the cooling system. DO NOT waste reus-
position (Fig. 48).
able coolant. If the solution is clean, drain it into a
(9) Pull the tensioner block toward the tensioner
clean container for reuse.
lever to compress the spring. Hold the block and turn
(3) Remove the radiator or radiator and condenser,
the tensioner lever to the lock position (Fig. 48).
if equipped with A/C.
(10) Install the timing chain, crankshaft sprocket
(4) Scribe a mark on the distributor housing in
and camshaft sprocket with the timing marks
line with the lip of the rotor.
aligned.
(5) Scribe a mark on the distributor housing near
(11) Install the camshaft sprocket retaining bolt
the clamp and continue the scribe mark on the cylin-
and washer. Tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
der block in line with the distributor mark.
torque.
(12) Release the timing chain tensioner by moving CAMSHAFT PIN REPLACEMENT
the lever to the unlock position (Fig. 48).
(13) Install the timing case cover with a replace- REMOVAL
ment oil seal (Fig. 49). Refer to Timing Case Cover
Installation. WARNING: DO NOT LOOSEN THE RADIATOR
(14) Install the vibration damper. DRAIN COCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES-
SURIZED BECAUSE SERIOUS BURNS FROM COOL-
ANT CAN OCCUR.

(2) Drain the radiator. DO NOT waste reusable
coolant. Drain the coolant into a clean container.
(3) Remove the fan and shroud.
(4) Disconnect the radiator overflow tube, radiator
hoses, automatic transmission fluid cooler pipes (if
equipped).
(5) Remove the radiator.
(6) If equipped with air conditioning:
CAUTION: DO NOT loosen or disconnect any air

conditioner system fittings. Move the condenser
and receiver/drier aside as a complete assembly.
Fig. 48 Loading Timing Chain Tensioner
(a) Remove the A/C compressor serpentine drive
belt idler pulley.
(b) Disconnect and remove the generator.
(c) Remove the A/C condenser attaching bolts
and move the condenser and receiver/drier assem-
bly up and out of the way.
(7) Remove the serpentine drive belt.
(8) Remove the crankshaft vibration damper.
(9) Remove the timing case cover. Clean the gasket
material from the cover.
(10) Rotate crankshaft until the crankshaft
sprocket timing mark is closest to and on the center
line with the camshaft sprocket timing mark (Fig. 50).
Fig. 49 Timing Case Cover

(15) Install the hydraulic valve tappets.
(16) Install the push rods.
(17) Install the rocker arms, bridges and pivots.
(19) Position the oil pump gear. Refer to Distribu-
tor in the Component Removal/Installation section of
Group 8D, Ignition Systems.
(20) Install the distributor and ignition wires.
Refer to Distributor in the Component Removal/In-
stallation section of Group 8D, Ignition Systems.
(21) Install the radiator or radiator and condenser,
if equipped with A/C.
(22) Fill the cooling system. Fig. 50 Timing Chain Alignment
(23) Connect negative cable to battery. (11) Remove camshaft sprocket retaining bolt.
(12) Remove the crankshaft oil slinger.
(13) Remove the sprockets and chain as an assem-
bly (Fig. 51).
Fig. 51 Camshaft and Crankshaft Sprocket and

Chain
CAUTION: The following procedural step must be
accomplished to prevent the camshaft from damag- Fig. 52 Verify Crankshaft—Camshaft Installation
ing the rear camshaft plug during pin installation. (7) Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt to 108 N·m
(80 ft. lbs.) torque.
(14) Inspect the damaged camshaft pin.
(8) Check the valve timing.
(15) If the pin is a spring-type pin, remove the bro-
(9) Coat both sides of the replacement timing case
ken pin by inserting a self-tapping screw into the pin
cover gasket with gasket sealer. Apply a 3 mm (1/8
and carefully pulling the pin from the camshaft.
inch) bead of Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Seal-
(16) If the pin is a dowel-type pin, center-punch it.
ant, or equivalent to the joint formed at the timing
Ensure the exact center is located when center-
case cover and cylinder block.
punching the pin.
(10) Position the timing case cover on the oil pan
CAUTION: Cover the opened oil pan area to pre- gasket and the cylinder block.
vent metal chips from entering the pan. (11) Place Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal
Installation Tool 6139 in the crankshaft opening of
(17) Drill into the pin center with a 4 mm (5/32 the cover (Fig. 53).
inch) drill bit.
(18) Insert a self-tapping screw into the drilled pin
and carefully pull the pin from the camshaft.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the camshaft pin hole.
(2) Compress the center of the replacement spring
pin with vise grips.
(3) Carefully drive the pin into the camshaft pin
hole until it is seated.
(4) Install the camshaft sprocket, crankshaft
sprocket and timing chain with the timing marks
aligned (Fig. 50).
(5) To verify correct installation of the timing
chain, turn the crankshaft to position the camshaft
sprocket timing mark as shown in (Fig. 52). Count
the number of chain pins between the timing marks Fig. 53 Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal
of both sprockets. There must be 20 pins. Installation Tool 6139
(6) Install the crankshaft oil slinger.
(12) Install the timing case cover-to-cylinder block (5) Remove only one main bearing cap and lower
bolts. Install the oil pan-to-timing case cover bolts. insert at a time (Fig. 54).
(13) Tighten the 1/4 inch cover-to-block bolts to 7
N·m (60 in. lbs.) torque. Tighten the 5/16 inch front
cover-to-block bolts to 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.) torque.
Tighten the oil pan-to-cover 1/4 inch bolts to 14 N·m
(120 in. lbs.) torque. Tighten the oil pan-to-cover 5/16
inch bolts to 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.) torque.
(14) Remove the cover alignment tool and install a
replacement oil seal into the cover.
(15) Install the vibration damper on the crank-
shaft.
(16) Lubricate and tighten the damper bolt to 108
(17) If equipped with air conditioning:
(a) Install the A/C compressor serpentine drive
belt idler pulley.
(b) Install the generator.
(c) Install the A/C condenser and receiver/drier
assembly.
(18) Install the serpentine drive belt on the pulleys
and tighten (refer to Group 7, Cooling System for the
specifications and procedures).
(19) Install the radiator. Connect the radiator
hoses and automatic transmission fluid cooler pipes, Fig. 54 Removing Main Bearing Caps and Lower
if equipped. Fill the cooling system. Inserts
(20) Install the fan and shroud.
(21) Connect negative cable to battery. (6) Remove the lower insert from the bearing cap.
(7) Remove the upper insert by LOOSENING (DO
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS NOT REMOVE) all of the other bearing caps. Now
The camshaft rotates within four steel-shelled, insert a small cotter pin tool in the crankshaft jour-
babbitt-lined bearings that are pressed into the cyl- nal oil hole. Bend the cotter pin as illustrated to fab-
inder block and then line reamed. The camshaft ricate the tool (Fig. 55). With the cotter pin tool in
bearing bores and bearing diameters are not the place, rotate the crankshaft so that the upper bear-
same size. They are stepped down in 0.254 mm ing insert will rotate in the direction of its locking
(0.010 inch) increments from the front bearing (larg- tab. Because there is no hole in the No.3 main jour-
est) to the rear bearing (smallest). This permits eas- nal, use a tongue depressor or similar soft-faced tool
ier removal and installation of the camshaft. The to remove the bearing insert (Fig. 55). After moving
camshaft bearings are pressure lubricated. the insert approximately 25 mm (1 inch), it can be
removed by applying pressure under the tab.
NOTE: It is not advisable to attempt to replace (8) Using the same procedure described above,
camshaft bearings unless special removal and remove the remaining bearing inserts one at a time
installation tools are available. for inspection.
Camshaft end play is maintained by the load INSTALLATION

placed on the camshaft by the oil pump and distrib- (1) Lubricate the bearing surface of each insert
utor drive gear. The helical cut of the gear holds the with engine oil.
camshaft sprocket thrust face against the cylinder (2) Loosen all the main bearing caps. Install the
block face. main bearing upper inserts.
(3) Install the lower bearing inserts into the main
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS bearing caps.
(4) Install the main bearing cap(s) and lower
REMOVAL insert(s).
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. (5) Clean the rear main bearing cap (No.5) mating
(2) Remove the spark plugs. surfaces.
(3) Raise the vehicle. (6) Apply Mopart Gasket Maker, or equivalent on
(4) Remove the oil pan and oil pump. the rear bearing cap (Fig. 56). The bead should be 3
(11) Check crankshaft end play. Crankshaft end
play is controlled by the thrust bearing which is
flange and installed at the No.2 main bearing posi-
tion.
(a) Attach a magnetic base dial indicator to the
cylinder block at either the front or rear of the
engine.
(b) Position the dial indicator rod so that it is
parallel to the center line of the crankshaft.
(c) Pry the crankshaft forward, position the dial
indicator to zero.
(d) Pry the crankshaft forward and backward.
Note the dial indicator readings. End play is the
difference between the high and low measurements
(Fig. 57). Correct end play is 0.038-0.165 mm
(0.0015-0.0065 inch). The desired specifications are
0.051-0.064 mm (0.002-0.0025 inch).
(e) If end play is not within specification, inspect
crankshaft thrust faces for wear. If no wear is
apparent, replace the thrust bearing and measure
end play. If end play is still not within specifica-
tion, replace the crankshaft.
Fig. 55 Removing Upper Inserts (12) If the crankshaft was removed, install the
mm (0.125 in) thick. DO NOT apply Mopart Gasket crankshaft into the cylinder block (refer to Cylinder
Maker, or equivalent to the lip of the seal. Block - Assemble).
(7) Install the rear main bearing cap. DO NOT (13) Install the oil pan.
strike the cap more than twice for proper engage- (14) Install the drain plug. Tighten the plug to 34
ment. N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) Tighten the bolts of caps 1, 3, 4 and 5 to 54 (15) Install new rearmain seal. Refer to Rear Main
N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Now tighten these bolts to 95 Seal in this section.
N·m (70 ft. lbs.) torque. Finally, tighten these bolts to (16) Lower the vehicle.
108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.) torque. (17) Install the spark plugs. Tighten the plugs to
(9) Push the crankshaft forward and backward. 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.) torque.
Load the crankshaft front or rear and tighten cap (18) Fill the oil pan with engine oil to the safe
bolt No.2 to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Then tighten mark on the dipstick level.
to 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.) torque and finally tighten to (19) Connect negative cable to battery.
(10) Rotate the crankshaft after tightening each
main bearing cap to ensure the crankshaft rotates
freely.
Fig. 56 Location of MoparT Gasket Maker

OIL PAN
REMOVAL
(3) Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the
engine oil.
(4) Disconnect the exhaust pipe at the engine
exhaust manifold.
(5) Disconnect the exhaust hanger at the catalytic
converter and lower the pipe.
(6) Remove the engine starter motor.
(7) Remove the flywheel/torque converter housing
access cover.
(8) Position a jack stand directly under the engine
vibration damper.
Fig. 57 Crankshaft End Play Measurement (9) Place a piece of wood (2 x 2) between the jack
stand and the engine vibration damper.
(10) Remove the engine mount through bolts.
(11) Using the jack stand, raise the engine until
adequate clearance is obtained to remove the oil pan.
(12) If equipped, disconnect the transmission
cooler lines and oxygen sensor harness from oil pan
mounting studs.
(13) Remove the oil pan bolts and studs. Carefully
remove the oil pan and gasket.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the block and pan gasket surfaces.
(2) Fabricate 4 alignment dowels from 1/4 x 1 1/2
inch bolts. Cut the head off the bolts and cut a slot
into the top of the dowel. This will allow easier
installation and removal with a screwdriver (Fig. 58).
Fig. 60 Location of MoparT Silicone Adhesive

Sealant on Cylinder Block
Fig. 58 Fabrication of Alignment Dowels

(3) Install two dowels in the timing case cover.
Install the other two dowels in the cylinder block
(Fig. 59).
Fig. 61 Position of 5/16 inch Oil Pan Bolts

(8) Remove the dowels. Install the remaining 1/4
inch oil pan bolts. Tighten these bolts to 9.5 N·m (84
in. lbs.) torque.
(9) Lower the engine until it is properly located on
the engine mounts.
(10) Install the through bolts and tighten the nuts.
(11) Lower the jack stand and remove the piece of
wood.
(12) Install the flywheel and torque converter
housing access cover.
(13) Install the engine starter motor.
(14) Connect the exhaust pipe to the hanger and to
Fig. 59 Position of Dowels in Cylinder Block the engine exhaust manifold.
(15) Install the oil pan drain plug (Fig. 61).
(4) Apply Mopart Silicone Adhesive Sealant onto
Tighten the plug to 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
the cylinder block in four location as shown (Fig. 60).
(5) Slide the one-piece gasket over the dowels and
onto the block and timing case cover.
(18) Fill the oil pan with engine oil to the specified
(6) Position the oil pan over the dowels and onto
level.
the gasket.
(7) Install the 1/4 inch oil pan bolts. Tighten these
bolts to 9.5 N·m (84 in. lbs.) torque. Install the 5/16
inch oil pan bolts (Fig. 61). Tighten these bolts to 15
N·m (132 in. lbs.) torque.
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A
DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR
HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO
(19) Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
OIL PUMP
The positive-displacement gear-type oil pump is
driven by the distributor shaft, which is driven by a
gear on the camshaft. Oil is siphoned into the pump
through an inlet tube and strainer assembly that is
pressed into the pump body.
The pump incorporates a nonadjustable pressure
relief valve to limit maximum pressure to 517 kPa
(75 psi). In the relief position, the valve permits oil to
bypass through a passage in the pump body to the
inlet side of the pump.
Oil pump removal or replacement will not affect
the distributor timing because the distributor drive
gear remains in mesh with the camshaft gear.
Fig. 62 Oil Pump Assembly
REMOVAL (7) Drain the engine oil.
(1) Drain the engine oil. (8) Remove the oil pan and gasket.
(2) Remove the oil pan. (9) Remove the connecting rod bearing caps and
(3) Remove the pump-to-cylinder block attaching inserts. Mark the caps and rods with the cylinder
bolts. Remove the pump assembly with gasket (Fig. bore location. The connecting rods and caps are
62). stamped with a two letter combination (Fig. 63).
CAUTION: If the oil pump is not to be serviced, DO
NOT disturb position of oil inlet tube and strainer
assembly in pump body. If the tube is moved within
the pump body, a replacement tube and strainer
assembly must be installed to assure an airtight
seal.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install the oil pump on the cylinder block using
a replacement gasket. Tighten the bolts to 23 N·m
(2) Install the oil pan and gasket.
(3) Fill the oil pan with oil to the specified level.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS

Fig. 63 Stamped Connecting Rods and Caps
REMOVAL (10) Lower the vehicle until it is about 2 feet from
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. the floor.
(3) Remove the push rods. CAUTION: Ensure that the connecting rod bolts DO
(4) Remove the engine cylinder head. NOT scratch the crankshaft journals or cylinder
(5) Position the pistons one at a time near the bot- walls. Short pieces of rubber hose, slipped over the
tom of the stroke. Use a ridge reamer to remove the rod bolts will provide protection during removal.
ridge from the top end of the cylinder walls. Use a
protective cloth to collect the cuttings.
(11) Have an assistant push the piston and con-
necting rod assemblies up and through the top of the
cylinder bores (Fig. 64).

(8) The rod journal is identified during the engine
production by a color-coded paint mark on the adja-
cent cheek or counterweight toward the flange (rear)
end of the crankshaft. The color codes used to indi-
cate journal sizes are listed in the Connecting Rod
Bearing Fitting Chart.
(9) When required, upper and lower bearing
inserts of different sizes may be used as a pair (refer
to Connecting Rod Bearing Fitting Chart). A stan-
dard size insert is sometimes used in combination
Fig. 64 Removal of Connecting Rod and Piston with a 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) undersize insert to
Assembly reduce clearance 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch).
INSTALLATION CAUTION: DO NOT intermix bearing caps. Each
(1) Clean the cylinder bores thoroughly. Apply a
connecting rod and bearing cap are stamped with
light film of clean engine oil to the bores with a clean
the cylinder number. The stamp is located on a
lint-free cloth.
machined surface adjacent to the oil squirt hole
(2) Install the piston rings on the pistons if
that faces the camshaft side of the cylinder block.
removed.
(3) Lubricate the piston and rings with clean (10) Install the connecting rod bearing caps and
engine oil. inserts in the same positions as removed.
CAUTION: Ensure that connecting rod bolts do not CAUTION: Verify that the oil squirt holes in the
scratch the crankshaft journals or cylinder walls. rods face the camshaft and that the arrows on the
Short pieces of rubber hose slipped over the con- pistons face the front of the engine.
necting rod bolts will provide protection during
installation. (11) Install the oil pan and gaskets as outlined in
the installation procedure.
(4) Use a piston ring compressor to install the con- (12) Lower the vehicle.
necting rod and piston assemblies through the top of (13) Install the engine cylinder head, push rods,
the cylinder bores (Fig. 65). rocker arms, bridges, pivots and engine cylinder head
(5) Ensure the arrow on the piston top points to cover.
the front of the engine (Fig. 65). (14) Fill the crankcase with engine oil.
(7) Each bearing insert is fitted to its respective REAR MAIN OIL SEALS
journal to obtain the specified clearance between the
bearing and the journal. In production, the select fit REMOVAL
is obtained by using various-sized, color-coded bear- (1) Remove the flywheel or converter drive plate.
ing inserts as listed in the Connecting Rod Bearing Discard the old bolts.
Fitting Chart. The color code appears on the edge of (2) Pry out the seal from around the crankshaft
the bearing insert. The size is not stamped on inserts flange, making sure not to scratch or nick the crank-
used for production of engines. shaft (Fig. 66).
Replace valves displaying any damage.
VALVE REFACING
(1) Use a valve refacing machine to reface the
intake and exhaust valves to the specified angle.
(2) After refacing, a margin of at least 0.787 mm
(0.031 inch) must remain (Fig. 67). If the margin is
less than 0.787 mm (0.031 inch), the valve must be
replaced.
Fig. 66 Replacement of Rear Crankshaft Oil Seal

INSTALLATION
(1) Wipe the seal surface area of the crankshaft
until it is clean.
(2) Coat the outer lip of the replacement rear main
bearing seal with engine oil.
(3) Carefully position the seal into place. Use rear
main Seal Installer Tool 6271A to install the seal
flush with the cylinder block.
CAUTION: The felt lip must be located inside the

flywheel mounting surface. If the lip is not posi-
Fig. 67 Valve Facing Margin
tioned correctly the flywheel could tear the seal.
VALVE SEAT REFACING
(4) Install the flywheel or converter drive plate. (1) Install a pilot of the correct size in the valve
New bolts MUST be used when installing the fly- guide bore. Reface the valve seat to the specified
wheel or converter plate. Tighten the new bolts to 68 angle with a good dressing stone. Remove only
N·m (50 ft. lbs.) torque. Turn the bolts an additional enough metal to provide a smooth finish.
60°. (2) Use tapered stones to obtain the specified seat
width when required.
(3) Control valve seat runout to a maximum of
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 0.0635 mm (0.0025 in.)— (Fig. 68).
VALVE SERVICE VALVE STEM OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
Clean all carbon deposits from the combustion Valve stem oil seals are installed on each valve
chambers, valve ports, valve stems, valve stem stem to prevent rocker arm lubricating oil from
guides and head. entering the combustion chamber through the valve
Clean all grime and gasket material from the guide bores. One seal is marked INT (intake valve)
engine cylinder head machined gasket surface. and the other is marked EXH (exhaust valve).
Inspect for cracks in the combustion chambers and Replace the oil seals whenever valve service is per-
valve ports. formed or if the seals have deteriorated.
Inspect for cracks on the exhaust seat.
Inspect for cracks in the gasket surface at each VALVE GUIDES
coolant passage. The valve guides are an integral part of the engine
Inspect valves for burned, cracked or warped cylinder head and are not replaceable.
heads. When the valve stem guide clearance is excessive,
Inspect for scuffed or bent valve stems. the valve guide bores must be reamed oversize. Ser-
Fig. 68 Measurement of Valve Seat Runout

vice valves with oversize stems are available in 0.076
mm (0.003 inch) and 0.381 mm (0.015 inch) incre-
ments.
Corresponding oversize valve stem seals are also
available and must be used with valves having 0.381 Fig. 69 Measurement of Valve Guide Bore Diameter
mm (0.015 inch) oversize stems, 0.076mm (.003in.)
ALTERNATIVE METHOD:
oversize stems do not require oversize seals.
(1) Use a dial indicator to measure the lateral
NOTE: If the valve guides are reamed oversize, the movement of the valve stem (stem-to-guide clear-
valve seats must be ground to ensure that the valve ance). This must be done with the valve installed in
seat is concentric to the valve guide. its guide and just off the valve seat (Fig. 70).
(2) Correct clearance is 0.025-0.0762 mm
(0.001-0.003 inch). If indicated movement exceeds the
VALVE STEM-TO-GUIDE CLEARANCE specification ream the valve guide to accommodate
MEASUREMENT an oversize valve stem.
Valve stem-to-guide clearance may be measured by
NOTE: Valve seats must be ground after reaming
either of the following two methods.
the valve guides to ensure that the valve seat is
PREFERRED METHOD: concentric to the valve guide.
(1) Remove the valve from the head.
(2) Clean the valve stem guide bore with solvent
and a bristle brush.
(3) Insert a telescoping gauge into the valve stem
guide bore approximately 9.525 mm (.375 inch) from
the valve spring side of the head (Fig. 69).
(4) Remove and measure telescoping gauge with a
micrometer.
(5) Repeat the measurement with contacts length-
wise to engine cylinder head.
(6) Compare the crosswise to lengthwise measure-
ments to determine out-of-roundness. If the measure-
ments differ by more than 0.0635 mm (0.0025 in.),
ream the guide bore to accommodate an oversize
valve stem.
(7) Compare the measured valve guide bore diam-
eter with specifications (7.95-7.97 mm or 0.313-0.314 Fig. 70 Measurement of Lateral Movement Of Valve
inch). If the measurement differs from specification Stem
by more than 0.076 mm (0.003 inch), ream the guide
bore to accommodate an oversize valve stem.
VALVE SPRING TENSION TEST (4) Install the timing chain tensioner.
Use a Universal Valve Spring Tester and a torque (5) Install the camshaft.
wrench to test each valve spring for the specified ten- (6) Install the sprockets and chain as an assembly.
sion value (Fig. 71). (7) Install the oil slinger to the crankshaft.
Replace valve springs that are not within specifica- (8) Install the timing chain bumper.
tions. (9) Install the timing case cover seal.
(10) Install the timing case cover.
(11) Install the oil pan gasket and oil pan.
(12) Install the vibration damper.
(13) Install the water pump. Tighten the mounting
bolts to 31 N·m (270 in. lbs.) torque.
(14) Remove the distributor from the cylinder
block.
(15) Lubricate the oil filter seal with clean engine
oil. Tighten oil filter to 18 N·m (13 ft. lbs.) torque.
(16) Install the engine into the vehicle.
(17) Fill the engine with clean lubrication oil.
(18) Fill the cooling system.

ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS
Fig. 71 Valve Spring Tester
CYLINDER BLOCK CLEANING
Remove the Engine Assembly from the vehicle. Clean all the components with cleaning solvent.
Use compressed air to blow out the oil passages in
DISASSEMBLY the rocker arms and push rods.
(1) Drain the engine oil. Remove and discard the
oil filter. INSPECTION
(2) Remove the water pump from the cylinder Inspect the pivot surface area of each rocker arm.
block. Replace any that are scuffed, pitted, cracked or
(3) Remove the distributor from the cylinder block. excessively worn.
(4) Remove the vibration damper. Inspect the valve stem tip contact surface of each
(5) Remove the timing case cover and lay the cover rocker arm and replace any rocker arm that is deeply
upside down. pitted.
(6) Position a drift punch into the slot in the back Inspect each push rod end for excessive wear and
of the cover and tap the old seal out. replace as required. If any push rod is excessively
(7) Remove the timing chain bumper. worn because of lack of oil, replace it and inspect the
(8) Remove the oil slinger from crankshaft. corresponding hydraulic tappet for excessive wear.
(9) Remove the camshaft retaining bolt and Inspect the push rods for straightness by rolling
remove the sprockets and chain as an assembly. them on a flat surface or by shining a light between
(10) Remove the camshaft. the push rod and the flat surface.
(11) Remove the oil pan and gasket. A wear pattern along the length of the push rod is
(12) Remove the timing chain tensioner. not normal. Inspect the engine cylinder head for
(13) Remove the front and rear oil galley plugs. obstruction if this condition exists.
(14) Remove the connecting rods and the pistons.
Remove the connecting rod and piston assemblies ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD
through the top of the cylinder bores.
(15) Remove the crankshaft. CLEANING
Thoroughly clean the engine cylinder head and cyl-
ASSEMBLY inder block mating surfaces. Clean the intake and
(1) Install the crankshaft. exhaust manifold and engine cylinder head mating
(2) Install the connecting rods and the pistons surfaces. Remove all gasket material and carbon.
through the top of the cylinder bores. Check to ensure that no coolant or foreign material
(3) Install the front and rear oil galley plugs. has fallen into the tappet bore area.
Remove the carbon deposits from the combustion
chambers and top of the pistons.
INSPECTION
Use a straightedge and feeler gauge to check the
flatness of the engine cylinder head and block mating
surfaces.
CYLINDER BLOCK
CLEANING
Thoroughly clean the oil pan and engine block gas-
ket surfaces.
Use compressed air to clean out:
• The galley at the oil filter adaptor hole, the filter
bypass hole (Fig. 72).
Fig. 74 Rear Oil Galley Hole
threads of the front and rear oil galley plugs. Tighten
the plugs to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
INSPECTION—CYLINDER BORE
(1) It is mandatory to use a dial bore gauge to
measure each cylinder bore diameter (Fig. 75). To
correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore
gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001in.)
INCREMENTS is required. If a bore gauge is not
available, do not use an inside micrometer.
Fig. 72 Oil Filter Adaptor Hole

• The front and rear oil galley holes (Fig. 73) (Fig.
74).
Fig. 75 Cylinder Bore Measurement

Fig. 73 Front Oil Galley Hole bore at three levels below top of bore. Start perpen-
dicular (across or at 90 degrees) to the axis of the
• The feed holes for the crankshaft main bearings. crankshaft and then take two additional reading.
Once the block has been completely cleaned, apply
Loctite PST pipe sealant with Teflon 592 to the
(3) Measure the cylinder bore diameter crosswise Base Circle Runout . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm - max.
to the cylinder block near the top of the bore. Repeat (0.001 in. - max.)
the measurement near the middle of the bore, then Camshaft Lobe Lift
repeat the measurement near the bottom of the bore. Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.579 mm (0.259 in.)
(4) Determine taper by subtracting the smaller Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.477 mm (0.255 in.)
diameter from the larger diameter. Valve Lift
(5) Rotate measuring device 90° and repeat steps Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.528 mm (0.4145 in.)
above. Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.350 mm (0.4075 in.)
(6) Determine out-of-roundness by comparing the Intake Valve Timing
difference between each measurement. Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4° BTDC
(7) If cylinder bore taper does not exceed 0.025 Closes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58° ABDC
mm (0.001 inch) and out-of-roundness does not Exhaust Valve Timing
exceed 0.025 mm (0.001 inch), the cylinder bore can
Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52.8 BBDC
be honed. If the cylinder bore taper or out- of-round
Closes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2° ATDC
condition exceeds these maximum limits, the cylinder
Valve Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.6°
must be bored and then honed to accept an oversize
Intake Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.3°
piston. A slight amount of taper always exists in the
Exhaust Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259°
cylinder bore after the engine has been in use for a
period of time. Crankshaft
End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.038 to 0.165 mm
HONING—CYLINDER BORE (0.0015 to 0.0065 in.)
The honing operation should be closely coordinated Main Bearing Journal
with the fitting of pistons and rings. This will ensure Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.489 to 63.502 mm
specified clearances are maintained. (2.4996 to 2.5001 in.)
Main Bearing Journal Width
No. 1 . . . . . 27.58 to 27.89 mm (1.086 to 1.098 in.)
SPECIFICATIONS Main Bearing Journal Width
No. 2 . . . . . 32.28 to 32.33 mm (1.271 to 1.273 in.)
2.5L ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Main Bearing Journal Width
No. 3-4-5 . . 30.02 to 30.18 mm (1.182 to 1.188 in.)
Engine Description Main Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . 0.03 to 0.06 mm
Engine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-line 4 Cylinder (0.001 to 0.0025 in.)
Bore and Stroke . . . 98.4 x 81.0mm (3.88 x 3.19 in.) Main Bearing Clearance (Preferred) . . . 0.051 mm
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5L (150 cu. in.) (0.002 in.)
Compression Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1:1 Connecting Rod Journal
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–3–4–2 Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.17 to 53.23 mm
Lubrication . . . . Pressure Feed–Full Flow Filtration (2.0934 to 2.0955 in.)
Cooling System . . Liquid Cooled–Forced Circulation Connecting Rod Journal
Cylinder Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron Width . . . . 27.18 to 27.33 mm (1.070 to 1.076 in.)
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Nodular Iron Out-of-Round (Max. All Journals) . . . . . 0.013 mm
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron (0.0005 in.)
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron Taper (Max. – All Journals) . . . . . . . . . 0.013 mm
Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum Alloy (0.0005 in.)
Cylinder Combustion Cavity . . . . . . Double Quench Cylinder Block
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Malleable Iron Deck Height . . . . . . . . . . . . 236.73 mm (9.320 in.)
Deck Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 0.000 mm (0.000 in.)
Camshaft Cylinder Bore Diameter—
Hydraulic Tappet Clearance . . . . . . . . . Zero Lash Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98.45 to 98.48 mm
Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm (3.8759 to 3.8775 in.)
(0.001 to 0.003 in.) Cylinder Bore Diameter—
Bearing Journal Diameter Taper (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
No. 1 . . . . . 51.54 to 51.56 mm (2.029 to 2.030 in.) Cylinder Bore Diameter—
No. 2 . . . . . 51.28 to 51.31 mm (2.019 to 2.020 in.) Out-of-Round (Max.) . . . . . . 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
No. 3 . . . . . 51.03 to 51.05 mm (2.009 to 2.010 in.) Tappet Bore Diameter . . . . . 23.000 to 23.025 mm
No. 4 . . . . . 50.78 to 50.80 mm (1.999 to 2.000 in.) (0.9055 to 0.9065 in.)
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm per 25 mm Push Rod Length . . . . . . . 241.300 to 241.808 mm
(0.001 in. per 1 in.) (9.500 to 9.520in.)
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 mm per 152 mm Push Rod Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 to 8.00 mm
(0.002 in. per 6 in.) (0.312 to 0.315 in.)
Flatness Max. . . . . . . . . . 0.20 mm for total length Hydraulic Tappet Diameter . 22.962 to 22.974 mm
(0.008 in. for total length) (0.904 to 0.9045 in.)
Main Bearing Bore Tappet-to-Bore Clearance . . . . 0.025 to 0.063 mm
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.3514 to 68.3768 mm (0.001 to 0.0025 in.)
(2.691 to 2.692 in.) Valves
Connecting Rods Length (Tip-to-Gauge Dimension Line)
Total Weight (Less Bearing) . . . 657 to 665 grams Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124.435 to 125.070 mm
(23.17 to 23.45 oz.) (4.899 to 4.924 in.)
Length (Center-to-Center) . . 155.52 to 155.62 mm Length (Tip-to-Gauge Dimension Line)
(6.123 to 6.127 in.) Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125.120 to 125.755 mm
Piston Pin Bore Diameter . . . . 23.59 to 23.62 mm (4.927 to 4.952 in.)
(0.9288 to 0.9298 in.) Valve Stem Diameter . . . . . . . . 7.899 to 7.925 mm
Bore (Less Bearings) . . . . . . . . 56.08 to 56.09 mm (0.311 to 0.312 in.)
(2.2080 to 2.2085 in.) Stem-to-Guide Clearance . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm
Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.)
(0.001 to 0.003 in.) Valve Head Diameter—
Bearing Clearance (Preferred) . 0.044 to 0.050 mm Intake . . 48.387 to 48.641 mm (1.905 to 1.915 in.)
(0.0015 to 0.0020 in.) Valve Head Diameter—
Side Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 to 0.48 mm Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.973 to 38.227 mm
(0.010 to 0.019 in.) (1.495 to 1.505 in.)
Twist (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 mm per mm Valve Face Angle—Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45°
(0.001 in. per inch) Valve Face Angle—Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45°
Bend Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 mm per mm Tip Refinishing (Max. Allowable) . . . . . . 0.25 mm
(0.001 in. per inch.) (0.010 in.)
Cylinder Compression Pressure Valve Springs
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1:1 Free Length (Approx.) . . . . . 47.65 mm (1.876 in.)
Pressure Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 to 1,034 kPa Spring Tension—
(120 to 150 psi) Valve Closed . . . . . . . 316 to 351 N @ 41.656 mm
Max. Variation Between Cylinders . . . . . 206 kPa (71 to 79 lbf. @ 1.64 in.)
(30 psi) Spring Tension—
Cylinder Head Valve Open . . . . . . . . 898.6 to 969.7 N 30.89 mm
Combustion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . 49.9 to 52.9 cc (202 to 218 lbf @ 1.216 in.)
(3.04 to 3.23 cu. in.) Inside Diameter . . . . . . . . . 21.0 mm to 21.51 mm
Valve Guide I.D. (Integral) . . . . . 7.95 to 7.97 mm (0.827 to 0.847 in.)
(0.313 to 0.314 in.) Installed Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.656 mm
Valve Stem-to-Guide (1.640 in.)
Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm Pistons
(0.001 to 0.003 in.) Weight (Less Pin) . . . . . . . . . . . 417 to 429 grams
Intake Valve Seat Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5° (14.7 to 15.1 oz.)
Exhaust Valve Seat Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5° Piston Pin Bore (Centerline to Piston
Valve Seat Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.01 to 1.52 mm Top) . . . . . 40.61 to 40.72 mm (1.599 to 1.603 in.)
(0.040 to 0.060 in.) Piston-to-Bore Clearance . . . . . 0.018 to 0.038 mm
Valve Seat Runout . . . . . . . 0.064 mm (0.0025 in.) (0.0008 to 0.0015 in.)
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm per 25 mm Piston Ring Groove Height—
(0.001 in. per 1 in.) Compression Rings . . . . . . . . . 1.530 to 1.555mm
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 mm per 152 mm (0.0602 to 0.0612 in.)
(0.002 in. per 6 in.) Piston Ring Groove Height—
Flatness Max. . . . . . . . . . 0.20 mm for total length Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . 4.035 to 4.060 mm
(0.008 in. for total length) (0.1589 to 0.1598 in.)
Rocker Arms, Push Rods & Tappets Piston Ring Groove Diameter—Compression Ring
Rocker Arm Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6:1 #1 . . . . . . . . . 88.39 to 88.65 mm (3.48 to 3.49 in.)
Piston Ring Groove Diameter—Compression Ring DESCRIPTION TORQUE
#2 . . . . . . . 87.63 to 87.88 mm (3.45 to 3.4599 in.) Camshaft Sprocket
Piston Ring Groove Diameter— Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . 89.66 to 89.92 mm Clutch Cover to Flywheel
(3.53 to 3.54 in.) Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
Piston Pin Bore Diameter . . 23.650 to 23.658 mm Connecting Rod Cap
(0.9312 to 0.9315 in.) Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
Piston Pin Diameter . . . . . . 23.637 to 23.640 mm Cylinder Block
(0.9306 to 0.9307 in.) Drain Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Piston-to-Pin Clearance . . . . 0.0102 to 0.0208 mm Cylinder Head
(0.0005 to 0.0009 in.) Bolts #1–10 & #12–14 . . . . . 149 N·m (110 ft. lbs.)
Piston-to-Pin Connecting Rod (Press Fit) . . 8.9 kN Bolt #11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 N·m (100 ft. lbs.)
(2000 lbf.) Cylinder Head Cover
Piston Rings Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 N·m (115 in. lbs.)
Ring Gap Clearance—Top Compression Dipstick Tube Bracket to Cylinder Block
Ring . . . 0.229 to 0.610 mm (0.0090 to 0.0240 in.) Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (168 in. lbs.)
Ring Gap Clearance—2nd Compression Distributor Hold-Down Clamp
Ring . . . 0.483 to 0.965 mm (0.0190 to 0.0380 in.) Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.)
Ring Gap Clearance—Oil Control Steel Engine Mounts—Front
Rails . . . . . 0.254 to 1.500 mm (0.010 to 0.060 in.) Insulator Bracket Bolts . . . . . . 81 N·m (60 ft. lbs.)
Ring Side Clearance—Compression Insulator Bracket Nuts . . . . . . 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.)
Rings . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm (0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
Insulator Thru-Bolt . . . . . . . . . 81 N·m (60 ft. lbs.)
Ring Side Clearance—Oil Control
Engine Mounts—Rear
Ring . . . . . 0.06 to 0.21 mm (0.0024 to 0.0083 in.)
Support Cushion/Crossmember Nuts . . . . 22 N·m
Oil Pump
(192 in. lbs.)
Gear-to-Body Clearance
Support Cushion/Bracket Nuts . . . . . . . . . 46 N·m
(Radial) . . . 0.051 to 0.102 mm (0.002 to 0.004 in.)
(34 ft. lbs.)
Gear-to-Body Clearance (Radial)
Transmission Support Bracket Bolts . . . . . 43 N·m
(Preferred) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
(32 ft. lbs.)
Gear End Clearance—
Transmission Support Bracket/
Plastigage . 0.051 to 0.152 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in.)
Cushion Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Gear End Clearance—
Transmission Support Adaptor Bracket
Plastigage (Preferred) . . . . . 0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Gear End Clearance—Feeler
Exhaust Manifold/Pipe
Gauge . . 0.1016 to 0.2032 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.)
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Gear End Clearance—Feeler
Flywheel/Converter Housing
Gauge (Preferred) . . . . . . . 0.1778 mm (0.007 in.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.)
Oil Pressure
Flywheel to Crankshaft
Min. Pressure (600 rpm) . . . . . . 89.6 kPa (13 psi)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 N·m (105 ft. lbs.)
At Idle Speed (800 rpm) . . . . . . . . 172 to 241 kPa
Front Cover to Block
(25 to 35 psi)
Bolts 1/4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 N·m (60 in. lbs.)
At 1600 rpm & Higher . . . . . . . . . 255 to 517 kPa
Bolts 5/16–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.)
(37 to 75 psi)
Generator
Oil Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . 517 kPa (75 psi)
Adjusting Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.)
2.5L TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Pivot Bolt/Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.)
Mounting Bracket-to–Engine Bolts . . . . . . 38 N·m
DESCRIPTION TORQUE (28 ft. lbs.)
A/C Compressor Bracket-to-Engine Mounting/Head Bolts . . . . . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) Main Bearing Cap
A/C Compressor Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter
Block Heater Adaptor Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 N·m (75 ft. lbs.)
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 N·m (16 in. lbs.) Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.)
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 N·m (13 ft. lbs.)
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Oil Galley
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Oil Pan
1/4–20 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 N·m (84 in. lbs.)
5/16–18 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 N·m (132 in. lbs.)
Drain Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.)
Oil Pressure Sending Unit
Sending Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 N·m (130 in. lbs.)
Oil Pump
Short Attaching Bolts . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.)
Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal installation
Long Attaching Bolts . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.)
Tool 6139
Cover Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m (70 in. lbs.)
Power Steering Pump Pressure Hose
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 N·m (38 ft. lbs.)
Rocker Arm Assembly to Cylinder Head
Capscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.)
Spark Plugs
Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.)
Starter Motor
Tensioner Bracket ot Cylinder Block
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m (168 in. lbs.)
Thermostat Housing
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.)
Throttle Body
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.)
Vibration Damper Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697
Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Water Pump to Block
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
2.5L ENGINE
Rear Main Seal Installer Tool 6271A
Valve Spring Compressor Tool MD-998772A
Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal/Installation Tool

C-4129–A
4.0L ENGINE
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

ENGINE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS . . . . . . . . . 84
LUBRICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . . 74
OIL PUMP PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 TIMING CASE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
SERVICE PROCEDURES TIMING CASE COVER OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
FITTING CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS . . . . . . 61 TIMING CHAIN AND SPROCKETS . . . . . . . . . . . 79
FITTING CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS . . . . . 64 VALVE SPRINGS AND OIL SEALS . . . . . . . . . . . 74
PISTON FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
PISTON RING FITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 VIBRATION DAMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
VALVE TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 VALVE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS—REAR . . . . . . . . . . . 86 CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 CYLINDER HEAD COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
CYLINDER HEAD COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . . 91
ENGINE MOUNTS—FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE MOUNT—REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 4.0L ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EXHAUST MANIFOLD—4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . 73 4.0L TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 SPECIAL TOOLS
INTAKE MANIFOLD—4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . 72 4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
OIL PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

ENGINE DESCRIPTION
The 4.0 Liter (242 CID) six-cylinder engine is an
In-line, lightweight, overhead valve engine.
This engine is designed for unleaded fuel. The
engine cylinder head has dual quench-type combus-
tion chambers that create turbulence and fast burn-
ing of the air/fuel mixture. This results in good fuel
economy.
The cylinders are numbered 1 through 6 from front
to rear. The firing order is 1-5-3-6-2-4 (Fig. 1).
The crankshaft rotation is clockwise, when viewed
from the front of the engine. The crankshaft rotates
within seven main bearings. The camshaft rotates
within four bearings.
BUILD DATE CODE Fig. 1 Engine Firing Order
The engine Build Date Code is located on a • 4th & 5th Digits—The engine type/fuel system/
machined surface on the right side of the cylinder compression ratio (MX = A 4.0 Liter (242 CID) 8.7:1
block between the No.2 and No.3 cylinders (Fig. 2). compression ratio engine with a multi-point fuel
The digits of the code identify: injection system).
• 1st Digit—The year (8 = 1998). • 6th & 7th Digits—The day of engine build (01 -
• 2nd & 3rd Digits—The month (01 - 12). 31).
nels the oil to the inlet side of the full flow oil filter.
After passing through the filter element, the oil
passes from the center outlet of the filter through an
oil gallery that channels the oil up to the main gal-
lery which extends the entire length of the block.
Galleries extend downward from the main oil gal-
lery to the upper shell of each main bearing. The
crankshaft is drilled internally to pass oil from the
main bearing journals (except number 4 main bear-
ing journal) to the connecting rod journals. Each con-
necting rod bearing cap has a small squirt hole, oil
passes through the squirt hole and is thrown off as
the rod rotates. This oil throwoff lubricates the cam-
shaft lobes, distributor drive gear, cylinder walls, and
piston pins.
The hydraulic valve tappets receive oil directly
Fig. 2 Build Date Code Location from the main oil gallery. Oil is provided to the cam-
shaft bearing through galleries. The front camshaft
(1) FOR EXAMPLE: Code * 801MX12 * identi- bearing journal passes oil through the camshaft
fies a 4.0 Liter (242 CID) engine with a multi-point sprocket to the timing chain. Oil drains back to the
fuel injection system, 8.7:1 compression ratio and oil pan under the number one main bearing cap.
built on January 12, 1998. The oil supply for the rocker arms and bridged
pivot assemblies is provided by the hydraulic valve
LUBRICATION SYSTEM tappets which pass oil through hollow push rods to a
A gear—type positive displacement pump is hole in the corresponding rocker arm. Oil from the
mounted at the underside of the block opposite the rocker arm lubricates the valve train components,
No. 4 main bearing. The pump draws oil through the then passes down through the push rod guide holes
screen and inlet tube from the sump at the rear of in the cylinder head past the valve tappet area, and
the oil pan. The oil is driven between the drive and returns to the oil pan.
idler gears and pump body, then forced through the
outlet to the block. An oil gallery in the block chan-
Oil Lubrication System—4.0L Engine

OIL PUMP PRESSURE MUST be replaced as complete sets. Tin coated

The MINIMUM oil pump pressure is 89.6 kPa (13 pistons should not be used as replacements for coated
psi) at 600 rpm. The NORMAL oil pump pressure is pistons.
517 kPa (75 psi) at 1600 rpm or more. (4) The coating material is applied to the piston
after the final piston machining process. Measuring
the outside diameter of a coated piston will not pro-
SERVICE PROCEDURES vide accurate results (Fig. 3). Therefore measuring
the inside diameter of the cylinder bore with a dial
VALVE TIMING Bore Gauge is MANDATORY. To correctly select the
Disconnect the spark plug wires and remove the proper size piston, a cylinder bore gauge capable of
spark plugs. reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) increments is
Remove the engine cylinder head cover. required.
Remove the capscrews, bridge and pivot assembly, (5) Piston installation into the cylinder bore
and rocker arms from above the No.1 cylinder. requires slightly more pressure than that required
Alternately loosen each capscrew, one turn at a for non-coated pistons. The bonded coating on the
time, to avoid damaging the bridge. piston will give the appearance of a line-to-line fit
Rotate the crankshaft until the No.6 piston is at with the cylinder bore.
top dead center (TDC) on the compression stroke.
Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise (viewed
from the front of the engine) 90°.
Install a dial indicator on the end of the No.1 cyl-
inder intake valve push rod. Use rubber tubing to
secure the indicator stem on the push rod.
Set the dial indicator pointer at zero.
Rotate the crankshaft clockwise (viewed from the
front of the engine) until the dial indicator pointer
indicates 0.305 mm (0.012 inch) travel distance (lift).
The timing notch index on the vibration damper
should be aligned with the TDC mark on the timing
degree scale.
If the timing notch is more than 13 mm (1/2 inch)
away from the TDC mark in either direction, the
valve timing is incorrect.
If the valve timing is incorrect, the cause may be a
broken camshaft pin. It is not necessary to replace
the camshaft because of pin failure. A spring pin is
available for service replacement. Fig. 3 Moly Coated Piston
PISTON FITTING PISTON SIZE CHART
CYLINDER BORE SIZE PISTON LETTER SIZE
BORE GAGE METHOD 98.438 to 98.448 mm (3.8755 to 3.8759 in.) . . . . . . A
(1) To correctly select the proper size piston, a cyl- 98.448 to 98.458 mm (3.8759 to 3.8763 in.) . . . . . . B
inder bore gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm 98.458 to 98.468 mm (3.8763 to 3.8767 in.) . . . . . . C
(.0001 in.) INCREMENTS is required. If a bore 98.468 to 98.478 mm (3.8767 to 3.8771 in.) . . . . . . D
gauge is not available, do not use an inside microme- 98.478 to 98.488 mm (3.8771 to 3.8775 in.) . . . . . . E
ter. 98.488 to 98.498 mm (3.8775 to 3.8779 in.) . . . . . . F
bore at a point 49.5 mm (1-15/16 inches) below top of
PISTON RING FITTING
bore. Start perpendicular (across or at 90 degrees) to (1) Carefully clean the carbon from all ring
the axis of the crankshaft at point A and then take grooves. Oil drain openings in the oil ring groove and
an additional bore reading 90 degrees to that at point pin boss must be clear. DO NOT remove metal from
B (Fig. 4). the grooves or lands. This will change ring-to-groove
(3) The coated pistons will be serviced with the clearances and will damage the ring-to-land seating.
piston pin and connecting rod pre-assembled. The (2) Be sure the piston ring grooves are free of
coated piston connecting rod assembly can be nicks and burrs.
used to service previous built engines and
Fig. 4 Bore Gauge Fig. 6 Ring Side Clearance Measurement

(3) Measure the ring side clearance with a feeler Ring Side Clearance Measurement
gauge fitted snugly between the ring land and ring Top Compression Ring . . . . . . . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm
(Fig. 5) (Fig. 6). Rotate the ring in the groove. It (0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
must move freely around circumference of the groove. Second Compression Ring . . . . . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm
(0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.06 to 0.21 mm
(0.0024 to 0.0083 in.)
(4) Place ring in the cylinder bore and push down
with inverted piston to position near lower end of the
ring travel. Measure ring gap with a feeler gauge fit-
ting snugly between ring ends (Fig. 7).
Fig. 5 Piston Dimensions

Fig. 7 Gap Measurement
Ring Gap Measurement
(0.0090 to 0.0240 inch)
(0.0190 to 0.0380 inch)
Oil Control Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 to 1.500 mm
(0.010 to 0.060 inch)
(5) The oil control rings are symmetrical, and can
be installed with either side up. It is not necessary to
use a tool to install the upper and lower rails. Insert
oil rail spacer first, then side rails.
(6) The two compression rings are different and
cannot be interchanged. The top compression ring
can be identified by the shiny coating on the outer Fig. 10 Compression Ring Chamfer Location
sealing surface and can be installed with either side
up (Fig. 8).
(7) The second compression ring has a slight
chamfer on the bottom of the inside edge and a dot
on the top for correct installation (Fig. 9).
(8) Using a ring installer, install the second com-
pression ring with the dot facing up (Fig. 9) (Fig. 11).
(9) Using a ring installer, install the top compres-
sion ring (either side up).
Fig. 11 Compression Ring Installation

Ring Gap Orientation
• Position the gaps on the piston as shown (Fig.
12).
• Oil spacer - Gap on center line of piston skirt.
• Oil rails - gap 180° apart on centerline of piston
Fig. 8 Top Compression ring identification
pin bore.
• No. 2 Compression ring - Gap 180° from top oil
rail gap.
• No. 1 Compression ring - Gap 180° from No. 2
compression ring gap.
FITTING CONNECTING ROD BEARINGS

INSPECTION
BEARINGS
Inspect the connecting rod bearings for scoring and
bent alignment tabs (Fig. 13) (Fig. 14). Check the
bearings for normal wear patterns, scoring, grooving,
Fig. 9 Second Compression Ring Identification fatigue and pitting (Fig. 15). Replace any bearing
that shows abnormal wear.
Inspect the connecting rod journals for signs of
scoring, nicks and burrs.
Fig. 14 Locking Tab Inspection
Fig. 15 Scoring Caused by Insufficient Lubrication

or by Damaged Crankshaft Pin Journal
Fig. 12 Ring Gap Orientation
BEARING-TO-JOURNAL CLEARANCE
(1) Wipe the oil from the connecting rod journal.
(2) Use short rubber hose sections over rod bolts
during installation.
(3) Lubricate the upper bearing insert and install
in connecting rod.
(4) Use piston ring compressor to install the rod
and piston assemblies. The oil squirt holes in the
rods must face the camshaft. The arrow on the piston
crown should point to the front of the engine (Fig.
16). Verify that the oil squirt holes in the rods face
the camshaft and that the arrows on the pistons face
the front of the engine.
(5) Install the lower bearing insert in the bearing
cap. The lower insert must be dry. Place strip of Plas-
tigage across full width of the lower insert at the cen-
Fig. 13 Connecting Rod Bearing Inspection ter of bearing cap. Plastigage must not crumble in
use. If brittle, obtain fresh stock.
CONNECTING RODS (6) Install bearing cap and connecting rod on the
Misaligned or bent connecting rods can cause journal and tighten nuts to 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
abnormal wear on pistons, piston rings, cylinder torque. DO NOT rotate crankshaft. Plastigage will
walls, connecting rod bearings and crankshaft con- smear, resulting in inaccurate indication.
necting rod journals. If wear patterns or damage to (7) Remove the bearing cap and determine amount
any of these components indicate the probability of a of bearing-to- journal clearance by measuring the
misaligned connecting rod, inspect it for correct rod width of compressed Plastigage (Fig. 17). Refer to
alignment. Replace misaligned, bent or twisted con- Engine Specifications for the proper clearance. Plas-
necting rods. tigage should indicate the same clearance
across the entire width of the insert. If the

clearance varies, it may be caused by either a
tapered journal, bent connecting rod or foreign Fig. 17 Measuring Bearing Clearance with
material trapped between the insert and cap or Plastigage
rod. backs of the inserts. Measure the clearance as
(8) If the correct clearance is indicated, replace- described in the previous steps.
ment of the bearing inserts is not necessary. Remove (10) The clearance is measured with a pair of
the Plastigage from crankshaft journal and bearing 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) undersize bearing inserts
insert. Proceed with installation. installed. This will determine if two 0.0254 mm
(9) If bearing-to-journal clearance exceeds the (0.001 inch) undersize inserts or another combination
specification, install a pair of 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) is needed to provide the correct clearance (refer to
undersize bearing inserts. All the odd size inserts Connecting Rod Bearing Fitting Chart).
must be on the bottom. The sizes of the service
replacement bearing inserts are stamped on the
CONNECTING ROD BEARING FITTING CHART
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL CORRESPONDING ROD BEARING INSERT

53.2257 - 53.2079 mm
(2.0955 - 2.0948 in.)
53.2079 - 53.1901 mm
(2.0948 - 2.0941 in.) Blue - Undersize
0.0178 mm (0.0007 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
53.1901 - 53.1724 mm
Blue (2.0941 - 2.0934 in.) Blue - Undersize Blue - Undersize

0.0356 mm (0.0014 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
52.9717 - 52.9539 mm
(2.0855 - 2.0848 in.) Red - Undersize Red - Undersize
Red
0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.)
Undersize
(11) FOR EXAMPLE: If the initial clearance was
0.0762 mm (0.003 inch), 0.025 mm (0.001 inch)
undersize inserts would reduce the clearance by
0.025 mm (0.001 inch). The clearance would be 0.002
inch and within specification. A 0.051 mm (0.002
inch) undersize insert would reduce the initial clear-
ance an additional 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). The
clearance would then be 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch).
(12) Repeat the Plastigage measurement to verify
your bearing selection prior to final assembly.
(13) Once you have selected the proper insert,
install the insert and cap. Tighten the connecting rod
SIDE CLEARANCE MEASUREMENT

Slide snug-fitting feeler gauge between the con-
necting rod and crankshaft journal flange (Fig. 18). Fig. 19 Main Bearing Wear Patterns
Refer to Engine Specifications for the proper clear-
ance. Replace the connecting rod if the side clearance
FITTING BEARINGS (CRANKSHAFT INSTALLED)
The main bearing caps, numbered (front to rear)
is not within specification.
from 1 through 7 have an arrow to indicate the for-
ward position. The upper main bearing inserts are
grooved to provide oil channels while the lower
inserts are smooth.
Each bearing insert pair is selectively fitted to its
respective journal to obtain the specified operating
clearance. In production, the select fit is obtained by
using various-sized color-coded bearing insert pairs
as listed in the Main Bearing Fitting Chart. The
bearing color code appears on the edge of the insert.
The size is not stamped on bearing inserts used
for engine production.
The main bearing journal size (diameter) is identi-
fied by a color-coded paint mark (Fig. 20) on the
adjacent cheek or counterweight towards the rear of
the crankshaft (flange end). The rear main journal, is
identified by a color-coded paint mark on the crank-
Fig. 18 Checking Connecting Rod Side Clearance— shaft rear flange.
Typical When required, upper and lower bearing inserts of
FITTING CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS different sizes may be used as a pair. A standard size
insert is sometimes used in combination with a 0.025
INSPECTION mm (0.001 inch) undersize insert to reduce the clear-
ance by 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). Never use a pair
Wipe the inserts clean and inspect for abnormal
of bearing inserts with greater than a 0.025 mm
wear patterns and for metal or other foreign material
(0.001 inch) difference in size (Fig. 21).
imbedded in the lining. Normal main bearing insert
wear patterns are illustrated (Fig. 19). NOTE: When replacing inserts, the odd size inserts
must be either all on the top (in cylinder block) or
NOTE: If any of the crankshaft journals are scored,
all on the bottom (in main bearing cap).
remove the engine for crankshaft repair.
Once the bearings have been properly fitted, pro-
Inspect the back of the inserts for fractures, scrap-
ceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
ings or irregular wear patterns.
Inspect the upper insert locking tabs for damage. BEARING-TO-JOURNAL CLEARANCE (CRANKSHAFT
Replace all damaged or worn bearing inserts. INSTALLED)
When using Plastigage, check only one bearing
clearance at a time.
Fig. 20 Crankshaft Journal Size Paint I.D. Location
Fig. 21 Bearing Insert Pairs

Install the grooved main bearings into the cylinder
block and the non-grooved bearings into the bearing
caps.
Install the crankshaft into the upper bearings dry. Fig. 22 Measuring Bearing Clearance with
Place a strip of Plastigage across full width of the Plastigage
crankshaft journal to be checked.
Install the bearing cap and tighten the bolts to 108 If the specified clearance is indicated and there are
N·m (80 ft. lbs.) torque. no abnormal wear patterns, replacement of the bear-
ing inserts is not necessary. Remove the Plastigage
NOTE: DO NOT rotate the crankshaft. This will from the crankshaft journal and bearing insert. Pro-
cause the Plastigage to shift, resulting in an inaccu- ceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
rate reading. Plastigage must not be permitted to If the clearance exceeds specification, install a pair
crumble. If brittle, obtain fresh stock. of 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) undersize bearing inserts
and measure the clearance as described in the previ-
Remove the bearing cap. Determine the amount of ous steps.
clearance by measuring the width of the compressed The clearance indicate with the 0.025 mm (0.001
Plastigage with the scale on the Plastigage envelope inch) undersize insert pair installed will determine if
(Fig. 22). Refer to Engine Specifications for the this insert size or some other combination will pro-
proper clearance. vide the specified clearance. FOR EXAMPLE: If the
Plastigage should indicate the same clearance clearance was 0.0762 mm (0.003 inch) originally, a
across the entire width of the insert. If clearance var- pair of 0.0254 mm (0.001 inch) undersize inserts
ies, it may indicate a tapered journal or foreign would reduce the clearance by 0.0254 mm (0.001
material trapped behind the insert. inch). The clearance would then be 0.0508 mm (0.002
inch) and within the specification. A 0.051 mm (0.002 • Journal 7 diameter is less than 63.4365 mm
inch) undersize bearing insert and a 0.0254 mm (2.4975 inches).
(0.001 inch) undersize insert would reduce the origi- Once the proper clearances have been obtained,
nal clearance an additional 0.0127 mm (0.0005 inch). proceed to Crankshaft Main Bearing—Installation.
The clearance would then be 0.0381 mm (0.0015
inch). MAIN BEARING JOURNAL DIAMETER
(CRANKSHAFT REMOVED)
CAUTION: Never use a pair of inserts that differ Remove the crankshaft from the cylinder block
more than one bearing size as a pair. (refer to Cylinder Block - Disassemble).
Clean the oil off the main bearing journal.
FOR EXAMPLE: DO NOT use a standard size
Determine the maximum diameter of the journal
upper insert and a 0.051 mm (0.002 inch) undersize
with a micrometer. Measure at two locations 90°
lower insert.
apart at each end of the journal.
If the clearance exceeds specification using a pair
The maximum allowable taper and out of round is
of 0.051 mm (0.002 inch) undersize bearing inserts,
0.013 mm (0.0005 inch). Compare the measured
measure crankshaft journal diameter with a
diameter with the journal diameter specification
micrometer. If the journal diameter is correct, the
(Main Bearing Fitting Chart). Select inserts required
crankshaft bore in the cylinder block may be mis-
to obtain the specified bearing-to-journal clearance.
aligned, which requires cylinder block replacement or
Install the crankshaft into the cylinder block (refer
machining to true bore.
to Cylinder Block - Assemble and Crankshaft Main
Replace the crankshaft or grind to accept the
Bearings - Installation).
appropriate undersize bearing inserts if:
• Journal diameters 1 through 6 are less than
63.4517 mm (2.4981 inches)
MAIN BEARING FITTING CHART
Crankshaft Journals #1-6 Corresponding Crankshaft Bearing Insert

63.5025 -63.4898 mm
(2.5001 - 2.4996 in.)
63.4898 - 63.4771 mm
0.0127 mm (0.0015 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4771 - 63.4644 mm
(2.4991 - 2.4986 in.) Blue - Undersize Blue - Undersize
Blue
0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4644 - 63.4517 mm
(2.4986 - 2.4981 in.) Blue - Undersize Green - Undersize
Green
0.0381 mm (0.0015 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
Undersize
63.2485 - 63.2358 mm
Red
0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.)
Undersize
Crankshaft Journal #7 Only Corresponding Bearing Insert

63.4873 - 63.4746 mm
(2.4995 - 2.4990 in.)
63.4746 - 63.4619 mm
0.0127 mm (0.0005 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4619 - 63.4492 mm
(2.4985 - 2.4980 in.) Blue - Undersize Blue - Undersize
Blue
0.0254 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Undersize
63.4492 - 63.4365 mm
(2.4980 - 2.4975 in.) Blue - Undersize Green - Undersize
Green
0.0381 mm (0.0015 in.) 0.025 mm (0.001 in.) 0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
Undersize
63.2333 - 63.2206 mm
Red
0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.) 0.254 mm (0.010 in.)
Undersize
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Tighten the bolts to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque.
Tighten the nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
ENGINE MOUNTS—FRONT
The front mounts support the engine at each side.
These supports are made of resilient rubber.
REMOVAL
(3) Support the engine.
(4) Remove the nut from the through bolt (Fig. 23).
DO NOT remove the through bolt.
(5) Remove the retaining bolts and nuts from the
support cushions (Fig. 23).
(6) Remove the through bolt.
(7) Remove the support cushions.
Fig. 24 Support Cushion Bracket

(3) Place the support cushion into position on the
support cushion bracket (Fig. 23). Install and tighten
the bolts and nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque.
(4) Install the through bolt and the retaining nut
(Fig. 23). Tighten the through bolt nut to 65 N·m (48
ft. lbs.) torque.
(5) Remove the engine support.
ENGINE MOUNT—REAR
A resilient rubber cushion supports the transmis-
sion at the rear between the transmission extension
housing and the rear support crossmember or skid
Fig. 23 Front Mounts plate.
INSTALLATION REMOVAL
(1) If the engine support bracket was removed,
position the bracket onto the block and install the
(2) Raise the vehicle and support the transmission.
attaching bolts (Fig. 23). Tighten the engine support
(3) Remove the nuts holding the support cushion
bracket bolts to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
to the crossmember (Fig. 25) (Fig. 26). Remove the
(2) If the support cushion bracket was removed,
crossmember.
position the bracket onto the lower front sill (Fig.
24). Install support cushion bracket bolts and nuts. MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(Fig. 25)
a. Remove the support cushion nuts and remove
the cushion.
b. Remove the transmission support bracket bolts
and remove the bracket from the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(Fig. 26)
a. Remove the support cushion bolts and remove
the cushion and the support bracket from the trans-
mission (4WD) or from the adaptor bracket (2WD).
b. On 2WD vehicles, remove the bolts holding the
transmission support adaptor bracket to the trans-
mission (Fig. 26). Remove the adaptor bracket.
Fig. 26 Rear Mount (Automatic Transmission)

(1) Position the crossmember onto the support
cushion studs. Install the stud nuts and tighten to 22
N·m (192 in. lbs) torque.
(2) Install crossmember-to-sill bolts and tighten to
(3) Remove the transmission support.
Fig. 25 Rear Mount (Manual Transmission) (4) Lower the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
MANUAL TRANSMISSION:
a. Install the transmission support bracket to the REMOVAL
transmission. Install the bolts and tighten to 46 N·m (1) Disconnect the battery cables. Remove the bat-
(34 ft. lbs.) torque. tery.
b. Install the support cushion to the support (2) Mark the hinge locations on the hood panel for
bracket. Install the nuts and tighten to 75 N·m (55 alignment reference during installation. Remove the
ft. lbs.) torque. engine compartment lamp. Remove the hood.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION: WARNING: THE COOLANT IN A RECENTLY OPER-
a. On 2WD vehicles, position the transmission ATED ENGINE IS HOT AND PRESSURIZED. USE
support adaptor bracket to the transmission. Install CARE TO PREVENT SCALDING BY HOT COOLANT.
the bolts and tighten to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque. CAREFULLY RELEASE THE PRESSURE BEFORE
b. Position the transmission support bracket and REMOVING THE RADIATOR DRAIN COCK AND CAP.
support cushion to the adaptor bracket (2WD) or the (3) Remove the air cleaner assembly.
transmission (4WD). Install the bolts and tighten to (4) Loosen the radiator drain cock and radiator cap
75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque. to drain the coolant. DO NOT waste usable coolant.
If the solution is clean, drain the coolant into a clean
container for reuse.
(5) Remove the lower radiator hose.
recovery hose (Fig. 27).
(7) Remove upper radiator support retaining bolts
and remove radiator support.
(8) Remove the fan shroud (Fig. 27) and electric
cooling fan.
(9) Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler tubing
(automatic transmission).
(10) Disconnect radiator fan switch wire connector.
(11) Vehicles with Air Conditioning:
(a) Discharge A/C system (refer to group 24,
Heating and Air Conditioning for proper proce-
dures)
(b) Disconnect the suction/discharge hose and Fig. 28 Heater Hoses (RH Drive Vehicle)
cap off compressor ports to prevent foreign mate-
rial and refrigerant oil loss.
STANT PRESSURE (EVEN WITH THE ENGINE
(12) Remove the radiator or radiator and con-
TURNED OFF). BEFORE DISCONNECTING FUEL
denser (if equipped with A/C).
LINES, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE
(13) Remove the fan assembly from the idler pul-
RELEASED.
ley.
(14) Disconnect the heater hoses at the engine (20) Perform the Fuel System Pressure Release
thermostat housing and water pump (Fig. 27) (Fig. procedure (refer to Group 14, Fuel System).
28). (21) Remove the latch clip and disconnect fuel sup-
ply line.
(22) Remove the power brake vacuum check valve
from the booster, if equipped.
(23) If equipped with power steering:
(a) Disconnect the hoses from the fittings at the
steering gear.
(b) Drain the pump reservoir.
(c) Cap the fittings on the hoses and steering
gear to prevent foreign objects from entering the
system.
(24) Identify, tag and disconnect all necessary wire
connectors and vacuum hoses.
(26) Disconnect the wires from the starter motor
solenoid.
(27) Remove the starter motor.
Fig. 27 Upper Radiator Hose, Coolant Recovery (28) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the mani-
Hose, Fan Shroud & Heater hoses fold.
(29) Disconnect the engine speed sensor wire con-
(15) Disconnect the throttle cable.
nection.
(16) Disconnect the speed control cable (if
(30) Remove the exhaust pipe support.
equipped).
(31) Remove the flywheel and converter housing
(17) Disconnect the line pressure cable (if equipped
access cover.
with automatic transmission).
(32) Vehicles with Automatic Transmission:
(18) Disconnect the fuel injector harness at the
(a) Mark the converter and drive plate location.
injectors.
(b) Remove the converter-to-drive plate bolts.
(19) Disconnect the distributor electrical connec-
(33) Remove the upper flywheel and converter
tion and the oil pressure switch connector.
housing bolts and loosen the bottom bolts.
(34) Remove the engine mount cushion-to-engine
compartment bracket bolts.
(35) Lower the vehicle. (15) Install the starter motor and connect the
(36) Attach a lifting device to the engine. cable.
(37) Raise the engine off the front supports. (16) Connect the wires to the starter motor sole-
(38) Place a support or floor jack under the con- noid.
verter (or flywheel) housing. (17) Lower the vehicle.
(39) Remove the remaining converter (or flywheel) (18) Connect all the vacuum hoses and wire con-
housing bolts. nectors identified during engine removal.
(40) Lift the engine out of the engine compart- (19) Vehicles with Power Steering:
ment. (a) Remove the protective caps.
(b) Connect the hoses to the fittings at the steer-
INSTALLATION ing gear. Tighten the nut to 52 N·m (38 ft. lbs.)
torque.
CAUTION: When installing the engine into a vehicle (c) Fill the pump reservoir with fluid.
equipped with an automatic transmission, be care- (20) Install the power brake vacuum check valve
ful not to damage the trigger wheel on the flywheel. to the booster, if equipped.
(21) Connect the fuel supply hose the fuel rail.
(1) Attach a lifting device to the engine and lower Push until a “click” is heard. Install latch clip.
the engine into the engine compartment. For easier (22) Connect the fuel injector harness to the injec-
installation, it may be necessary to remove the tors.
engine mount cushions from the engine mount (23) Connect the distributor electrical connector
bracket as an aide in alignment of the engine to the and oil pressure switch connector.
transmission. (24) Connect the line pressure cable (if equipped
(2) Vehicles with Manual Transmission: with automatic transmission).
(a) Insert the transmission shaft into the clutch (25) Connect the speed control cable, if equipped.
spline. (26) Connect the throttle cable.
(b) Align the flywheel housing with the engine. (27) Connect the heater hoses at the engine ther-
(c) Install and tighten the flywheel housing mostat housing and water pump.
lower bolts finger tight. (28) Install the fan assembly to the idler pulley.
(3) Vehicles with Automatic Transmission: (29) Connect the suction/discharge hose to the
(a) Align the transmission torque converter compressor.
housing with the engine. (30) Connect automatic transmission fluid cooler
(b) Loosely install the converter housing lower lines, if equipped.
bolts and install the next higher bolt and nut on (31) Install the fan shroud, electric cooling fan and
each side. radiator and condenser (if equipped with A/C).
(c) Tighten all 4 bolts finger tight. (32) Connect the electric fan connector.
(4) Install the engine mount cushions (if removed). (33) Install upper radiator support.
(5) Lower the engine and engine mount cushions (34) Connect the upper radiator hose.
onto the engine compartment brackets. Install the (35) Connect the lower radiator hose.
bolts and finger tighten the nuts. (36) Align the hood to the scribe marks. Install the
(6) Remove the engine lifting device. hood.
(7) Raise and support the vehicle. (37) Install the air cleaner assembly.
(8) Install the remaining flywheel and converter (38) Install the battery and connect the battery
housing bolts. Tighten all bolts to 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.) cable.
torque. (39) Add the proper amount of engine oil and cool-
(9) Vehicles with Automatic Transmission: ant.
(a) Install the converter-to-drive plate bolts.
(b) Ensure the installation reference marks are WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE
aligned. ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A
(10) Install the flywheel and converter housing DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR
access cover. HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO
(11) Install the exhaust pipe support and tighten NOT WEAR LOOSE CLOTHING.
the screw.
(12) Tighten the engine mount-to-bracket bolts. (40) Start the engine, inspect for leaks and correct
(13) Connect the engine speed sensor wire connec- the fluid levels, as necessary.
tions and tighten the screws. (41) Charge the air conditioning system (refer to
(14) Connect the exhaust pipe to the manifold. Group 24, Heating and Air Conditioning for proper
procedures).
INTAKE MANIFOLD—4.0L ENGINE (11) Disconnect all electrical connectors on the

The intake and engine exhaust manifolds on the intake manifold.
4.0L engine must be removed and installed together. • The throttle position sensor.
The two manifolds use a common gasket at the cyl- • The idle air control motor.
inder head. • The coolant temperature sensor at the thermo-
stat.
REMOVAL • The manifold air temperature sensor at the
(1) Disconnect the battery negative cable. intake manifold.
(2) Remove air cleaner inlet hose from throttle • The fuel injectors.
plate assembly. • The oxygen sensor.
(3) Remove the air cleaner assembly. (12) Loosen the accessory drive belt tension and
(4) Remove the throttle cable, cruise control cable remove the belt from the power steering pump (refer
(if equipped) and the transmission line pressure to Group 07, Cooling Systems for proper procedures).
cable. (13) Remove the power steering pump and bracket
(5) Disconnect the crankcase ventilation (CCV) from the intake manifold and water pump and set
vacuum hose and manifold absolute pressure (MAP) aside.
sensor vacuum hose connector at the intake mani- (14) Raise the vehicle.
fold. (15) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the engine
(6) Disconnect vacuum hose from vacuum port on exhaust manifold. Discard the seal.
the intake manifold. (16) Lower the vehicle.
(7) Disconnect CCV hose at the cylinder head (17) Remove the intake manifold and engine
cover (Fig. 29). exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the mating surfaces of the cylinder head
and the manifold if the original manifold is to be re-
installed.
(1) If the manifold is being replaced, ensure all the
sensors, fittings, etc. are transferred to the replace-
ment manifold.
(2) Install a new exhaust/intake manifold gasket
over the alignment dowels on the cylinder head.
(3) Position the engine exhaust manifold to the
cylinder head. Install fastener No.3 and finger
tighten at this time (Fig. 30).
(4) Install intake manifold on the cylinder head
dowels.
(5) Install washers and fasteners Nos.1, 2, 4, 5, 8,
9, 10 and 11 (Fig. 30).
(6) Install washers and fasteners Nos.6 and 7 (Fig.
30).
(7) Tighten the fasteners in sequence and to the
specified torque (Fig. 30).
• Fasteners Nos.1 through 5—Tighten to 33 N·m
Fig. 29 Crankcase Ventilation (CCV) Hose —4.0L • Fasteners Nos.6 and 7—Tighten to 31 N·m (23
Engine ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) Perform fuel system pressure release procedure • Fasteners Nos.8 through 11—Tighten to 33 N·m
(refer to Group 14, Fuel System for correct proce- (24 ft. lbs.) torque.
dure). (8) Install the power steering pump and bracket to
(9) Remove fuel supply line latch clip at injector the intake manifold and water pump. Tighten the
rail. belt to specification (Refer to Group 7, Cooling Sys-
(10) Disconnect fuel supply tube from the fuel rail. tem for the proper procedures).
Some fuel lines require a special tool for removal/in- (9) Connect fuel supply tube to the fuel rail inlet.
stallation (refer to Group 14, Fuel System - Quick Push tube until a “click” is heard. Before connect-
Connect Fittings).
gasket. The grommet and limiter are retained in the
cylinder head cover.
There are two cylinder head bolts that have a pin
to locate the cylinder head cover gasket, they are
located at position 8 and 9 (Fig. 32).
REMOVAL
(2) Disconnect the Crankcase Ventilation (CCV)
vacuum hose from engine cylinder head cover.
(3) Disconnect the fresh air inlet hose from the
engine cylinder head cover.
(4) Disconnect the accelerator, transmission, and
speed (if equipped) control cables from the throttle
body (Fig. 31).
(5) Remove the three bolts that fasten the control
Fig. 30 Intake/Engine Exhaust Manifold Installation
cable bracket to the intake manifold.
(4.0L Engine)
(6) Remove control cables from cylinder head cover
ing the fuel line to the fuel rail replace the clip.
O-rings at the quick-connect fuel line coupling. (7) Position control cables and bracket away from
(10) Pull out on the fuel supply tube to ensure that cylinder head cover secure with tie straps.
it is locked in place. (8) Remove the engine cylinder head cover mount-
(11) Replace latch clip. ing bolts.
(12) Connect all electrical connections on the (9) Remove the engine cylinder head cover and
intake manifold. gasket.
(13) Connect the vacuum connector on the intake
manifold and install it in the bracket.
(14) Install throttle cable, cruise control cable (if
equipped).
(15) Install the transmission line pressure cable (if
equipped). Refer to Group 21, Transmission for the
adjustment procedures.
(16) Install air cleaner assembly.
(17) Connect air inlet hose to the throttle plate
assembly.
(18) Raise the vehicle on a side mounted hoist.
(19) Using a new seal, connect the exhaust pipe to
the engine exhaust manifold. Tighten the bolts to 31
Fig. 31 Engine Cylinder Head Cover
EXHAUST MANIFOLD—4.0L ENGINE
The intake and engine exhaust manifolds on the
4.0L engine must be removed and installed together.
The manifolds use a common gasket at the cylinder
head.
Refer to Intake Manifold—4.0L Engine in this sec-
tion for the proper removal and installation proce-
dures.
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

The cylinder head cover is isolated from the cylin-
der head via grommets and a reusable molded rubber Fig. 32 Cylinder Head Cover Gasket Locator Pins at
#8 & #9
(1) If a replacement cover is installed, transfer the (1) Lubricate the ball ends of the push rods with
CCV valve grommet and oil filler cap from the origi- Mopar Engine Oil Supplement, or equivalent and
nal cover to the replacement cover. install push rods in their original locations. Ensure
(2) Install cylinder head cover and gasket. Tighten that the bottom end of each push rod is centered in
the mounting bolts to 10 N·m (85 in. lbs.) torque. the tappet plunger cap seat.
(3) Connect the CCV hoses. (2) Using Mopar Engine Oil Supplement, or equiv-
(4) Install control cables and bracket on intake alent, lubricate the area of the rocker arm that the
manifold and tighten bolts to 8.7 N·m (77 in. lbs.) pivot contacts. Install rocker arms, pivots and bridge
torque. above each cylinder in their originally position.
(5) Connect control cables to throttle body linkage. (3) Loosely install the capscrews through each
(6) Snap control cables into cylinder head cover bridge.
clip. (4) At each bridge, tighten the capscrews alter-
(7) Connect negative cable to battery. nately, one turn at a time, to avoid damaging the
bridge. Tighten the capscrews to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.)
ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS torque.
This procedure can be done with the engine in or (5) Install the engine cylinder head cover.
out of the vehicle.
VALVE SPRINGS AND OIL SEALS
REMOVAL This procedure can be done with the engine cylin-
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. der head installed on the block.
(2) Check for rocker arm bridges which are caus-
ing misalignment of the rocker arm to valve tip area. REMOVAL
(3) Remove the capscrews at each bridge and pivot Inspect the valve stems, especially the grooves. An
assembly (Fig. 33). Alternately loosen the capscrews Arkansas smooth stone should be used to remove
one turn at a time to avoid damaging the bridges. nicks and high spots.
(4) Remove the bridges, pivots and corresponding Each valve spring is held in place by a retainer
pairs of rocker arms (Fig. 33). Place them on a bench and a set of conical valve locks. The locks can be
in the same order as removed. removed only by compressing the valve spring.
(5) Remove the push rods and place them on a (1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover.
bench in the same order as removed. (2) Remove cap screws, bridge and pivot assem-
blies and rocker arms for access to each valve spring
to be removed.
(3) Remove push rods. Retain the push rods,
bridges, pivots and rocker arms in the same
order and position as removed.
(5) Remove the spark plug(s) adjacent to the cylin-
der(s) below the valve springs to be removed.
against their seats. For vehicles equipped with an air
conditioner, use a flexible air adaptor when servicing
the No.1 cylinder.
Compressor Tool MD-998772A to compress the spring
and remove the locks (Fig. 34).
(8) Remove valve spring and retainer (Fig. 34).
(9) Remove valve stem oil seals (Fig. 34). Note the
valve seals are different for intake and exhaust
Fig. 33 Rocker Arm Assembly valves. The top of each seal is marked either INT
(intake/black in color) or EXH (exhaust/brown in
color). DO NOT mix the seals.
CYLINDER HEAD
This procedure can be done with the engine in or
out of the vehicle.
REMOVAL

DRAIN COCK WITH THE SYSTEM HOT AND PRES-
SURIZED BECAUSE SERIOUS BURNS FROM THE
COOLANT CAN OCCUR.
(2) Drain the coolant and disconnect the hoses at

the engine thermostat housing. DO NOT waste reus-
able coolant. If the solution is clean and is being
drained only to service the engine or cooling system,
drain the coolant into a clean container for reuse.
(3) Remove the air cleaner assembly.
(4) Remove the engine cylinder head cover and
gasket.
(5) Remove the capscrews, bridge and pivot assem-
Fig. 34 Valve and Valve Components blies and rocker arms.
(6) Remove the push rod. Retain the push rods,
INSTALLATION bridges, pivots and rocker arms in the same
order as removed.
CAUTION: Install oil seals carefully to prevent dam-
(7) Loosen the serpentine drive belt at the power
age from the sharp edges of the valve spring lock
steering pump, if equipped or at the idler pulley
grove.
(refer to Group 7, Cooling System for the proper pro-
(1) Lightly push the valve seal over the valve stem cedure).
and valve guide boss. Be sure the seal is completely (8) If equipped with air conditioning, perform the
seated on the valve guide boss. following:
(2) Install valve spring and retainer. (a) Remove the bolts from the A/C compressor
(3) Compress the valve spring with Valve Spring mounting bracket and set the compressor aside.
Compressor Tool MD-998772A and insert the valve (b) Remove the air conditioner compressor
locks. Release the spring tension and remove the bracket bolts from the engine cylinder head.
tool. Tap the spring from side-to-side to ensure that (c) Loosen the through bolt at the bottom of the
the spring is seated properly on the engine cylinder bracket.
head. (9) If equipped, disconnect the power steering
(4) Release air pressure and disconnect the air pump bracket. Set the pump and bracket aside. DO
hose. Remove the adaptor from the spark plug hole NOT disconnect the hoses.
and install the spark plug. (10) Perform the Fuel System Pressure Release
(5) Repeat the procedures for each remaining valve procedure (refer to Group 14, Fuel System).
spring to be removed. (11) Remove the fuel lines and vacuum advance
(6) Install the push rods. Ensure the bottom end of hose.
each rod is centered in the plunger cap seat of the (12) Remove the intake and engine exhaust mani-
hydraulic valve tappet. folds from the engine cylinder head (refer to Group
(7) Install the rocker arms, pivots and bridge at 11, Exhaust System and Intake Manifold for the
their original location. proper procedures).
(8) Tighten the bridge cap screws alternately, one (13) Disconnect the ignition wires and remove the
at a time, to avoid damaging the bridge. Tighten the spark plugs.
cap screws to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.) torque. (14) Remove the ignition coil and bracket assem-
(9) Install the engine cylinder head cover. bly.
(15) Remove the engine cylinder head bolts. Bolt
No.14 cannot be removed until the head is moved for-
ward (Fig. 35). Pull bolt No.14 out as far as it will go
and then suspend the bolt in this position (tape (5) Tighten the engine cylinder head bolts in
around the bolt). sequence according to the following procedure (Fig.
(16) Remove the engine cylinder head and gasket 36).
(Fig. 35).
(17) If this was the first time the bolts were CAUTION: During the final tightening sequence,
removed, put a paint dab on the top of the bolt. If the bolt No.11 will be tightened to a lower torque than
bolts have a paint dab on the top of the bolt or it the rest of the bolts. DO NOT overtighten bolt
isn’t known if they were used before, discard the No.11.
bolts.
(18) Stuff clean lint free shop towels into the cyl- (a) Tighten all bolts in sequence (1 through 14)
inder bores. to 30 N·m (22 ft. lbs.) torque.
(b) Tighten all bolts in sequence (1 through 14)
(c) Check all bolts to verify they are set to 61
(d) Tighten bolts (in sequence):
torque.
• Bolt 11 to 13 N·m (100 ft. lbs.) torque.
torque.
(e) Check all bolts in sequence to verify the cor-
rect torque.
(f) If not already done, clean and mark each bolt
with a dab of paint after tightening. Should you
encounter bolts which were painted in an earlier
service operation, replace them.
Fig. 35 Engine Cylinder Head Assembly

INSTALLATION
The engine cylinder head gasket is a composition
gasket. The gasket is to be installed DRY. DO NOT
use a gasket sealing compound on the gasket.
If the engine cylinder head is to be replaced and
the original valves used, measure the valve stem
diameter. Only standard size valves can be used with
a service replacement engine cylinder head unless
the replacement head valve stem guide bores are
reamed to accommodate oversize valve stems. Fig. 36 Engine Cylinder Head Bolt Tightening
Remove all carbon buildup and reface the valves. Sequence
(1) Remove the shop towels from the cylinder (6) Install the ignition coil and bracket assembly.
bores. Coat the bores with clean engine oil. (7) Connect the temperature sending unit wire
(2) Position the engine cylinder head gasket (with connector.
the numbers facing up) onto the cylinder block. (8) Install the spark plugs and tighten to 37 N·m
(27 ft. lbs.) torque. Connect the ignition wires.
CAUTION: Engine cylinder head bolts should be
(9) Install the intake and engine exhaust mani-
reused only once. Replace the head bolts if they
folds (refer to Group 11, Exhaust System and Intake
were used before or if they have a paint dab on the
Manifold for the proper procedures).
top of the bolt.
(10) Install the fuel lines and the vacuum advance
(3) With bolt No.14 held in place (tape around hose.
bolt), install the engine cylinder head. Remove the (11) If equipped, attach the power steering pump
tape from bolt No.14. and bracket.
(4) Coat the threads of stud bolt No.11 with Loc- (12) Install the push rods, rocker arms, pivots and
tite 592 sealant, or equivalent. bridges in the order they were removed (refer to
Rocker Arms and Push Rods in this section).
(13) Install the engine cylinder head cover and (4) Use a smooth stone or a jewelers file to remove
gasket. any burrs on the top of the valve stem, especially
(14) Attach the air conditioner compressor mount- around the groove for the locks.
ing bracket to the engine cylinder head and block. (5) Remove the valves, and place them in a rack in
Tighten the bolts to 40 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) torque. the same order as removed.
(15) Attach the air conditioning compressor to the
bracket. Tighten the bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) INSTALLATION
torque. (1) Thoroughly clean the valve stems and the valve
guide bores.
CAUTION: The serpentine drive belt must be routed (2) Lightly lubricate the stem.
correctly. Incorrect routing can cause the water (3) Install the valve in the original valve guide
pump to turn in the opposite direction causing the bore.
engine to overheat. (4) Install the replacement valve stem oil seals on
the valve stems. If the 0.381 mm (0.015 inch) over-
(16) Install the serpentine drive belt and correctly size valve stems are used, oversize oil seals are
tension the belt (refer to Group 7, Cooling System for required.
the proper procedure). (5) Position the valve spring and retainer on the
(17) Install the air cleaner and ducting. engine cylinder head and compress the valve spring
(18) Install the engine cylinder head cover. with Valve Spring Compressor Tool MD-998772A.
(19) Connect the hoses to the engine thermostat (6) Install the valve locks and release the tool.
housing and fill the cooling system to the specified (7) Tap the valve spring from side to side with a
level (refer to Group 7, Cooling Systems for the hammer to ensure that the spring is properly seated
proper procedure). at the engine cylinder head. Also tap the top of the
(20) The automatic transmission throttle linkage retainer to seat the valve locks.
and cable must be adjusted after completing the (8) Install the engine cylinder head.
engine cylinder head installation (refer to Group 21,
Transmissions for the proper procedures). HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
(21) Connect the fuel line. Retain all the components in the same order as
(22) Connect negative cable to battery. removed.
(23) Connect the upper radiator hose and heater
hose at the engine thermostat housing. REMOVAL
(24) Fill the cooling system. Check for leaks. (1) Remove the engine cylinder head (Refer to cyl-
inder head r&i in this section).
(3) Remove the tappets through the push rod open-
ings in the cylinder block with a Hydraulic Valve
Tappet Removal/Installation Tool (Fig. 37).
LOOSE CLOTHING.

until the engine thermostat opens. Add coolant, if
required.
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS

This procedure is done with the engine cylinder
head removed from the block.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head from the cyl-
inder block.
(2) Use Valve Spring Compressor Tool Fig. 37 Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal—
MD-998772A and compress each valve spring. Installation Tool
(3) Remove the valve locks, retainers, springs and
valve stem oil seals. Discard the oil seals.
It is not necessary to charge the tappets with (1) Apply Mopar Silicone Rubber Adhesive Sealant
engine oil. They will charge themselves within a very to the keyway in the crankshaft and insert the key.
short period of engine operation. With the key in position, align the keyway on the
(1) Dip each tappet in Mopar Engine Oil Supple- vibration damper hub with the crankshaft key and
ment, or equivalent. tap the damper onto the crankshaft.
(2) Use Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal/Installa- (2) Install the vibration damper retaining bolt and
tion Tool to install each tappet in the same bore from washer.
where it was originally removed. (3) Tighten the damper retaining bolt to 108 N·m
(3) Install the cylinder head assy (Refer to cylinder (80 ft. lbs.) torque.
head r&i in this section). (4) Install the serpentine drive belt and tighten to
(4) Install the push rods in their original locations. the specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling Sys-
(5) Install the rocker arms and bridge and pivot tems for the proper specifications and procedures).
assemblies at their original locations. Loosely install (5) Connect negative cable to battery.
the capscrews at each bridge.
(6) Tighten the capscrews alternately, one turn at TIMING CASE COVER
a time, to avoid damaging the bridges. Tighten the
capscrews to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.) torque. REMOVAL
(7) Pour the remaining Mopar Engine Oil Supple- (1) Disconnect negative cable from battery.
ment, or equivalent over the entire valve actuating (2) Remove the vibration damper.
assembly. The Mopar Engine Oil Supplement, or (3) Remove the fan and hub assembly and remove
equivalent must remain with the engine oil for at the fan shroud.
least 1 609 km (1,000 miles). The oil supplement (4) Remove the accessory drive brackets that are
need not be drained until the next scheduled oil attached to the timing case cover.
change. (5) Remove the A/C compressor (if equipped) and
(8) Install the engine cylinder head cover. generator bracket assembly from the engine cylinder
head and move to one side.
VIBRATION DAMPER (6) Remove the oil pan-to-timing case cover bolts
and timing case cover-to-cylinder block bolts.
REMOVAL (7) Remove the timing case cover and gasket from
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. the engine.
(2) Remove the serpentine drive belt and fan (8) Pry the crankshaft oil seal from the front of the
shroud. timing case cover (Fig. 39).
(3) Remove the vibration damper retaining bolt
and washer.
(4) Use Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697 to
remove the damper from the crankshaft (Fig. 38).
Fig. 39 Timing Case Cover Components

INSTALLATION
Clean the timing case cover, oil pan and cylinder
block gasket surfaces.
Fig. 38 Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697 (1) Install a new crankshaft oil seal in the timing
case cover. The open end of the seal should be toward
the inside of the cover. Support the cover at the seal (3) Remove the serpentine drive belt.
area while installing the seal. Force it into position (4) Remove the crankshaft vibration damper.
with Seal Installation Tool 6139. (5) Remove the timing case cover.
(2) Position the gasket on the cylinder block. (6) Rotate crankshaft until the “0” timing mark is
(3) Position the timing case cover on the oil pan closest to and on the center line with camshaft
gasket and the cylinder block. sprocket timing mark (Fig. 41).
(4) Insert Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal
Installation Tool 6139 in the crankshaft opening in
the cover (Fig. 40).
Fig. 40 Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal

Installation Tool 6139
(5) Install the timing case cover-to-cylinder block
and the oil pan-to-timing case cover bolts. Fig. 41 Crankshaft—Camshaft Alignment
(6) Tighten the 1/4 inch cover-to-block bolts to 7 (7) Remove the oil slinger from the crankshaft.
N·m (60 in. lbs.) torque. Tighten the 5/16 inch front (8) Remove the camshaft sprocket bolt and
cover-to-block bolts to 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.) torque. washer (Fig. 42).
Tighten the oil pan-to-cover 1/4 inch bolts to 9.5 N·m
(84 in. lbs.) torque.
(7) Remove the cover alignment tool.
(8) Apply a light film of engine oil on the vibration
damper hub contact surface of the seal.
With the key inserted in the keyway in the crank-
shaft, install the vibration damper, washer and bolt.
Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
torque.
(10) Install the A/C compressor (if equipped) and
generator bracket assembly.
(11) Install the engine fan and hub assembly and
shroud.
(12) Install the serpentine drive belt and tighten
to obtain the specified tension.
Fig. 42 Camshaft Sprocket and Thrust Plate
(9) Remove the crankshaft sprocket, camshaft
TIMING CHAIN AND SPROCKETS sprocket and timing chain as an assembly.
(10) Installation of the timing chain with the tim-
REMOVAL ing marks on the crankshaft and camshaft sprockets
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. properly aligned ensures correct valve timing. A worn
(2) Remove the fan and shroud. or stretched timing chain will adversely affect valve
1999 XJ Cherokee
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Continued) Publication No. 81-370-9146
TSB 26-11-98 November, 1998
timing. If the timing chain deflects more than 12.7 (11) Remove the vibration damper.
mm (1/2 inch) replace it. (12) Remove the timing case cover.
(13) Remove the timing chain and sprockets.
INSTALLATION (14) Remove the front bumper and/or grille, as
Assemble the timing chain, crankshaft sprocket required.
and camshaft sprocket with the timing marks (15) Remove the two thrust plate retaining screws,
aligned (Fig. 41). thrust plate and camshaft (Fig. 43).
With the key in the keyway on the crankshaft, install
the assembly on the crankshaft and camshaft.
(2) Install the camshaft sprocket bolt and washer
(Fig. 42). Tighten the bolt to 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.)
torque.
(3) To verify correct installation of the timing
chain, rotate the crankshaft 2 revolutions. The cam-
shaft and crankshaft sprocket timing mark should
align (Fig. 41).
(4) Install the crankshaft oil slinger.
(5) Replace the oil seal in the timing case cover.
(6) Install the timing case cover and gasket.
(7) With the key installed in the crankshaft key-
way, install the vibration damper, washer and bolt. Fig. 43 Camshaft
Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
torque. INSTALLATION
(8) Install the serpentine drive belt and tighten to (1) Inspect the cam lobes for wear.
the specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling Sys- (2) Inspect the bearing journals for uneven wear
tem for the proper procedure). pattern or finish.
(9) Install the fan and hub assembly. Install the (3) Inspect the bearings for wear.
shroud. (4) Inspect the distributor drive gear for wear.
(10) Connect negative cable to battery. (5) If the camshaft appears to have been rubbing
against the thrust washer, examine the oil pressure
CAMSHAFT relief holes in the rear cam journal. The oil pressure
relief holes must be free of debris.
REMOVAL (6) Lubricate the camshaft with Mopar Engine Oil
Supplement, or equivalent.
WARNING: THE COOLANT IN A RECENTLY OPER- (7) Carefully install the camshaft to prevent dam-
ATED ENGINE IS HOT AND PRESSURIZED. age to the camshaft bearings (Fig. 43).
RELEASE THE PRESSURE BEFORE REMOVING (8) Position the thrust plate and install the retain-
THE DRAIN COCK, CAP AND DRAIN PLUGS. ing screws. Tighten screws to 24 Nzm (18 ft. lbs.).
(9) Install the timing chain, crankshaft sprocket
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. and camshaft sprocket with the timing marks
(2) Drain the cooling system. DO NOT waste reus- aligned.
able coolant. If the solution is clean, drain it into a (10) Install the camshaft sprocket bolt/cup washer.
clean container for reuse. Tighten the bolt to 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.).
(3) Remove the radiator or radiator and condenser, (11) Install the timing case cover with a replace-
if equipped with A/C (refer to Group 7, Cooling Sys- ment oil seal (Fig. 44). Refer to Timing Case Cover
tem for the proper procedure). Installation.
(4) Remove the distributor cap and mark the posi- (12) Install the vibration damper (Fig. 44).
tion of the rotor. (13) Install the hydraulic valve tappets.
(5) Remove the distributor and ignition wires. (14) Install the cylinder head gasket with the
(6) Remove the engine cylinder head cover. numbers facing up.
(7) Remove the rocker arms, bridges and pivots. (15) Install the cylinder head and head bolts
(8) Remove the push rods. (Refer to cylinder head R&I in this section for torque
(9) Remove the engine cylinder head and gasket. values and tightening sequence).
(10) Remove the hydraulic valve tappets from the
engine cylinder block.
1999 XJ Cherokee
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (Continued) Publication No. 81-370-9146
TSB 26-11-98 November, 1998
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS
REMOVAL
The camshaft rotates within four steel-shelled,
babbitt-lined bearings that are pressed into the cyl-
inder block and then line reamed. The camshaft
bearing bores and bearing diameters are not the
same size. They are stepped down in 0.254 mm
(0.010 inch) increments from the front bearing (larg-
est) to the rear bearing (smallest). This permits eas-
ier removal and installation of the camshaft. The
camshaft bearings are pressure lubricated. Camshaft
end play is maintained by the thrust plate.
(1) Remove the camshaft. Refer to Camshaft in
this section for procedure.
Fig. 44 Timing Case Cover Components NOTE: It is not advisable to attempt to replace
(16) Install the push rods. camshaft bearings unless special removal and
(17) Install the rocker arms and pivot and bridge installation tools are available.
assemblies. Tighten each of the capscrews for each
(2) Using Special tool, remove the camshaft bear-
bridge alternately, one turn at a time, to avoid dam-
ings.
aging the bridge (Refer to Rocker Arms and Push
Rods in this section).
INSTALLATION
(1) Inspect the camshaft bearing journals for
(19) Position the oil pump gear. Refer to Distribu-
uneven wear pattern or finish.
tor in the Component Removal/Installation section of
(2) Inspect the camshaft lobes and distributor gear
Group 8D, Ignition Systems.
for wear.
(20) Install the distributor and ignition wires.
(3) Inspect the camshaft thrust plate for wear. If
Refer to Distributor in the Component Removal/In-
the plate shows excessive wear inspect the camshaft
stallation section of Group 8D, Ignition Systems.
oil pressure relief holes in the rear cam jounral. The
(21) Install the serpentine drive belt and tighten
relief holes must be clean and free of debris.
to the specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling
System for the proper procedure). CAUTION: Make sure outside diameter of number 1
bearing is clean. Make sure that the bearing is
NOTE: During installation, lubricate the hydraulic
properly installed in the engine block, align the oil
valve tappets and all valve components with Mopar
hole in the bearing with the oil gallery in the bear-
Engine Oil Supplement, or equivalent. The Mopar
ing bore. Failure to do so will cause inadequate oil
Engine Oil Supplement, or equivalent must remain
supply for the sprockets and timing chain.
with the engine oil for at least 1609 km (1,000
miles). The oil supplement need not be drained until (4) Using special tool, install new camshaft bear-
the next scheduled oil change. ings.
(5) Lubricate the camshaft with Mopart engine oil
(22) Install the A/C condenser and receiver/drier
supplement, or equivalent.
assembly, if equipped (refer to Group 24, Heating and
(6) Carefully install the camshaft to prevent dam-
Air Conditioning).
age to the camshaft bearings.
CAUTION: Both service valves must be opened (7) Position the thrust plate and install the two
before the air conditioning system is operated. retaining screws. Tighten screws to 24 N·m (18 ft.
lbs.).
(23) Install the radiator, connect the hoses and fill (8) Install the camshaft sprocket, crankshaft
the cooling system to the specified level (refer to sprocket and timing chain with the timing marks
Group 7, Cooling System for the proper procedure). aligned. Install the sprocket bolt.
(24) Check the ignition timing and adjust as nec- (9) Tighten the camshaft sprocket bolt and washer
essary. to 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.).
(25) Install the grille and bumper, if removed. (10) To verify correct installation of the timing
(26) Connect negative cable to battery. chain, turn the crankshaft two full revolutions then
position the camshaft sprocket timing mark as shown
in (Fig. 45). Count the number of chain pins between
the timing marks of both sprockets. There must be
21 pins.
Fig. 46 Removing Main Bearing Caps and Lower

Inserts
Fig. 45 Verify Crankshaft—Camshaft Installation—

Typical
(11) Install the timing chain cover refer to the pro-
cedure in this section.
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS

REMOVAL
(2) Remove the spark plugs.
(4) Remove the oil pan and oil pump.
(5) Remove only one main bearing cap and lower
insert at a time (Fig. 46).
(6) Remove the lower insert from the bearing cap.
(7) Remove the upper insert by LOOSENING (DO
NOT REMOVE) all of the other bearing caps. Now
insert a small cotter pin tool in the crankshaft jour-
nal oil hole. Bend the cotter pin as illustrated to fab-
ricate the tool (Fig. 47). With the cotter pin tool in
place, rotate the crankshaft so that the upper bear-
Fig. 47 Removing Upper Inserts
ing insert will rotate in the direction of its locking
tab. Because there is no hole in the No.3 main jour- INSTALLATION
nal, use a tongue depressor or similar soft-faced tool (1) Lubricate the bearing surface of each insert
to remove the bearing insert (Fig. 47). After moving with engine oil.
the insert approximately 25 mm (1 inch), it can be (2) Loosen all the main bearing caps. Install the
removed by applying pressure under the tab. main bearing upper inserts.
(8) Using the same procedure described above, (3) Install the lower bearing inserts into the main
remove the remaining bearing inserts one at a time bearing caps.
for inspection.
(4) Install the main bearing cap(s) and lower (9) If the crankshaft was removed, install the
insert(s). crankshaft into the cylinder block (refer to Cylinder
(5) Tighten the bolts of caps 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, and 7 to Block - Assemble).
54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Now tighten these bolts to (10) Install the oil pan.
95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.) torque. Finally, tighten these (11) Install the drain plug. Tighten the plug to 34
bolts to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.) torque. N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
(6) Push the crankshaft forward and backward. (12) Lower the vehicle.
Load the crankshaft front or rear and tighten cap (13) Install the spark plugs. Tighten the plugs to
bolt No.3 to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) torque. Then tighten 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.) torque.
to 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.) torque and finally tighten to (14) Fill the oil pan with engine oil to the full
108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.) torque. mark on the dipstick level.
(7) Rotate the crankshaft after tightening each (15) Connect negative cable to battery.
main bearing cap to ensure the crankshaft rotates
freely. OIL PAN
(8) Check crankshaft end play. Crankshaft end
play is controlled by the thrust bearing which is REMOVAL
flange and installed at the No.2 main bearing posi- (1) Disconnect negative cable from battery.
tion. (2) Raise the vehicle.
(a) Attach a magnetic base dial indicator to the (3) Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the
cylinder block at either the front or rear of the engine oil.
engine. (4) Disconnect the exhaust pipe at the exhaust
(b) Position the dial indicator rod so that it is manifold.
parallel to the center line of the crankshaft. (5) Disconnect the exhaust hanger at the catalytic
(c) Pry the crankshaft forward, position the dial converter and lower the pipe.
indicator to zero. (6) Remove the starter motor.
(d) Pry the crankshaft forward and backward. (7) Remove the engine flywheel and transmission
Note the dial indicator readings. End play is the torque converter housing access cover.
difference between the high and low measurements (8) If equipped with an oil level sensor, disconnect
(Fig. 48). Correct end play is 0.038-0.165 mm the sensor.
(0.0015-0.0065 inch). The desired specifications are (9) Position a jack stand directly under the engine
0.051-0.064 mm (0.002-0.0025 inch). vibration damper.
(e) If end play is not within specification, inspect (10) Place a piece of wood (2 x 2) between the jack
crankshaft thrust faces for wear. If no wear is stand and the engine vibration damper.
apparent, replace the thrust bearing and measure (11) Remove the engine mount through bolts.
end play. If end play is still not within specifica- (12) Using the jack stand, raise the engine until
tion, replace the crankshaft. adequate clearance is obtained to remove the oil pan.
(13) Remove transmission oil cooling lines (if
equipped) and oxygen sensor wiring supports that
are attached to the oil pan studs.
(14) Remove the oil pan bolts and studs. Carefully
slide the oil pan and gasket to the rear. If equipped
with an oil level sensor, take care not to damage the
sensor.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the block and pan gasket surfaces.
(2) Fabricate 4 alignment dowels from 1 1/2 x 1/4
inch bolts. Cut the head off the bolts and cut a slot
into the top of the dowel. This will allow easier
installation and removal with a screwdriver (Fig. 49).
(3) Install two dowels in the timing case cover.
Install the other two dowels in the cylinder block
(Fig. 50).
Fig. 48 Crankshaft End Play Measurement
(4) Apply Mopart Silicone Rubber Adhesive Seal-
ant on cylinder block to rear main bearing cap cor-
Fig. 49 Fabrication of Alignment Dowels

Fig. 52 Position of 5/16 inch Oil Pan Bolts
(8) Remove the dowels. Install the remaining 1/4
inch oil pan bolts. Tighten these bolts to 9.5 N·m (84
in. lbs.) torque.
(9) Lower the engine until it is properly located on
the engine mounts.
(10) Install the through bolts and tighten the nuts.
(11) Lower the jack stand and remove the piece of
wood.
(12) Install the engine flywheel and transmission
torque converter housing access cover.
(13) Install the engine starter motor.
(14) Connect the exhaust pipe to the hanger and to
the engine exhaust manifold.
(15) Install transmission oil cooling lines (if
equipped) and oxygen sensor wiring supports that
Fig. 50 Position of Dowels in Cylinder Block
attach to the oil pan studs.
ners and cylinder block to front cover joints (four (16) Install the oil pan drain plug (Fig. 52).
places) (Fig. 51). Tighten the plug to 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
(5) Slide the one-piece gasket over the dowels and (17) Lower the vehicle.
onto the block and timing case cover. (18) Connect negative cable to battery.
(6) Position the oil pan over the dowels and onto (19) Fill the oil pan with engine oil to the specified
the gasket. If equipped with an oil level sensor, take level.
care not to damage the sensor.
(7) Install the 1/4 inch oil pan bolts. Tighten these WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE
bolts to 9.5 N·m (84 in. lbs.) torque. Install the 5/16 ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN A
inch oil pan bolts (Fig. 52). Tighten these bolts to 15 DIRECT LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT YOUR
N·m (132 in. lbs.) torque. HANDS NEAR THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO
(20) Start the engine and inspect for leaks.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING RODS

REMOVAL
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head cover.
(4) Remove the engine cylinder head.
(5) Position the pistons one at a time near the bot-
tom of the stroke. Use a ridge reamer to remove the
ridge from the top end of the cylinder walls. Use a
Fig. 51 Oil Pan Sealer Location
protective cloth to collect the cuttings.
(6) Raise the vehicle. (12) Have an assistant push the piston and con-
(7) Drain the engine oil. necting rod assemblies up and through the top of the
(8) Remove the oil pan and gasket. cylinder bores (Fig. 55).
(9) Remove main bearing cap brace (Fig. 53).
Fig. 53 Main Bearings Caps and Brace

(10) Remove the connecting rod bearing caps and Fig. 55 Removal of Connecting Rod and Piston
inserts. Mark the caps and rods with the cylinder Assembly
bore location. The connecting rods and caps are
stamped with a two letter combination (Fig. 54). INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the cylinder bores thoroughly. Apply a
light film of clean engine oil to the bores with a clean
lint-free cloth.
(2) Install the piston rings on the pistons if
removed.
(3) Lubricate the piston and rings with clean
engine oil.
CAUTION: Ensure that connecting rod bolts DO

NOT scratch the crankshaft journals or cylinder
walls. Short pieces of rubber hose slipped over the
connecting rod bolts will provide protection during
installation.
(4) Use a piston ring compressor to install the con-

necting rod and piston assemblies through the top of
the cylinder bores (Fig. 56).
Fig. 54 Stamped Connecting Rods and Caps (5) Ensure the arrow on the piston top points to
(11) Lower the vehicle until it is about 2 feet from the front of the engine (Fig. 56).
the floor. (6) Raise the vehicle.
(7) Each bearing insert is fitted to its respective
CAUTION: Ensure that the connecting rod bolts DO journal to obtain the specified clearance between the
NOT scratch the crankshaft journals or cylinder bearing and the journal. In production, the select fit
walls. Short pieces of rubber hose, slipped over the is obtained by using various-sized, color-coded bear-
rod bolts will provide protection during removal. ing inserts as listed in the Connecting Rod Bearing
Fitting Chart. The color code appears on the edge of
the bearing insert. The size is not stamped on inserts
used for production of engines.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove transmission inspection cover.
(2) Remove oil pan. Refer to procedure in this sec-
tion.
(3) Remove main bearing cap brace.
(4) Remove rear main bearing cap (No.7).
(5) Push upper seal out of the groove. Ensure that
the crankshaft and seal groove are not damaged.
(6) Remove lower half of the seal from the bearing
cap.
INSTALLATION
(1) Wipe the seal surface area of the crankshaft
until it is clean.
Fig. 56 Rod and Piston Assembly Installation (2) Apply a thin coat of engine oil.
(8) The rod journal is identified during the engine (3) Coat lip of the seal with engine oil.
production by a color-coded paint mark on the adja- (4) Carefully position the upper seal into the
cent cheek or counterweight toward the flange (rear) groove in the cylinder block. The lip of the seal faces
end of the crankshaft. The color codes used to indi- toward the front of the engine.
cate journal sizes are listed in the Connecting Rod (5) Place the lower half of the seal into bearing cap
Bearing Fitting Chart. (No.7) (Fig. 57).
(9) When required, upper and lower bearing (6) Coat the outer curved surface of the lower seal
inserts of different sizes may be used as a pair (refer with soap and the lip of the seal with engine oil (Fig.
to Connecting Rod Bearing Fitting Chart). A stan- 57).
dard size insert is sometimes used in combination
with a 0.025 mm (0.001 inch) undersize insert to
reduce clearance 0.013 mm (0.0005 inch).
CAUTION: DO NOT intermix bearing caps. Each

connecting rod and bearing cap are stamped with
the cylinder number. The stamp is located on a
machined surface adjacent to the oil squirt hole
that faces the camshaft side of the cylinder block.
(10) Install the connecting rod bearing caps and

inserts in the same positions as removed.
CAUTION: Verify that the oil squirt holes in the

rods face the camshaft and that the arrows on the
pistons face the front of the engine.
(11) Install main bearing cap brace (Fig. 53).

Tighten nuts to 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.).
(12) Install the oil pan and gaskets as outlined in
the installation procedure.
(14) Install the engine cylinder head, push rods,
rocker arms, bridges, pivots and engine cylinder head Fig. 57 Rear Main Bearing Oil Seal
cover. (7) Apply Mopart Gasket Maker sealer on both
(15) Fill the crankcase with engine oil. sides of cylinder block as shown in (Fig. 58). The dab
of sealer should be 3 mm (0.125 in.) in diameter.
CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS—REAR (8) Position the lower seal into the bearing cap
The crankshaft rear main bearing oil seal consists recess and seat it firmly. Be sure the seal is flush
of two half pieces of viton with a single lip that effec- with the cylinder block pan rail.
tively seals the rear of the crankshaft. Replace the (9) Apply Mopart Gasket Maker on the rear bear-
upper and lower seal halves as a unit to ensure leaking cap (Fig. 58). The bead should be 2.3 mm (0.09
free operation.
Fig. 58 Location of Sealer

in.) in diameter. DO NOT apply sealer to the lip of bypass through a passage in the pump body to the
the seal. inlet side of the pump.
(10) Install the rear main bearing cap. DO NOT Oil pump removal or replacement will not affect
strike the cap more than twice for proper engage- the distributor timing because the distributor drive
ment. gear remains in mesh with the camshaft gear.
(11) Tighten all main bearing bolts to 108 N·m (80
ft. lbs.) torque. REMOVAL
(12) Install the main bearing cap brace. Tighten (1) Drain the engine oil.
nuts to 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.). (2) Remove the oil pan.
(13) Install the oil pan gasket and oil pan. Tighten (3) Remove the pump-to-cylinder block attaching
1/4 – 20 screws to 14 N·m (120 in. lbs.). Tighten 5/16 bolts. Remove the pump assembly with gasket (Fig.
– 18 screws to 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.). 59).
(14) Install transmission inspection cover.
CAUTION: If the oil pump is not to be serviced, DO
OIL PUMP NOT disturb position of oil inlet tube and strainer
A gear-type oil pump is mounted at the underside assembly in pump body. If the tube is moved within
of the cylinder block opposite the No.4 main bearing. the pump body, a replacement tube and strainer
The pump incorporates a nonadjustable pressure assembly must be installed to assure an airtight
relief valve to limit maximum pressure to 517 kPa seal.
(75 psi). In the relief position, the valve permits oil to
Fig. 60 Timing Case Cover Oil Seal Installation

With the key inserted in the keyway in the crank-
shaft, install the vibration damper, washer and bolt.
Fig. 59 Oil Pump Assembly Lubricate and tighten the bolt to 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
torque.
INSTALLATION (5) Install the serpentine belt and tighten to the
(1) Install the oil pump on the cylinder block using
specified tension (refer to Group 7, Cooling Systems
a replacement gasket. Tighten the bolts to 23 N·m
for the proper specifications and procedures).
(6) Install the radiator shroud.
(2) Install the oil pan.
(3) Fill the oil pan with oil to the specified level.
TIMING CASE COVER OIL SEAL DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

This procedure is done with the timing case cover
installed. VALVE SERVICE
Clean all carbon deposits from the combustion
REMOVAL chambers, valve ports, valve stems, valve stem
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. guides and head.
(2) Remove the serpentine drive belt. Clean all grime and gasket material from the
(3) Remove the vibration damper. engine cylinder head machined gasket surface.
(4) Remove the radiator shroud. Inspect for cracks in the combustion chambers and
(5) Carefully remove the oil seal. Make sure seal valve ports.
bore is clean. Inspect for cracks on the exhaust seat.
Inspect for cracks in the gasket surface at each
INSTALLATION coolant passage.
(1) Position the replacement oil seal on Timing Inspect valves for burned, cracked or warped
Case Cover Alignment and Seal Installation Tool heads.
6139 with seal open end facing inward. Apply a light Inspect for scuffed or bent valve stems.
film of Perfect Seal, or equivalent, on the outside Replace valves displaying any damage.
diameter of the seal. Lightly coat the crankshaft with
engine oil. VALVE REFACING
(2) Position the tool and seal over the end of the (1) Use a valve refacing machine to reface the
crankshaft and insert a draw screw tool into Seal intake and exhaust valves to the specified angle.
Installation Tool 6139 (Fig. 60). Tighten the nut (2) After refacing, a margin of at least 0.787 mm
against the tool until it contacts the cover. (0.031 inch) must remain (Fig. 61). If the margin is
(3) Remove the tools. Apply a light film of engine less than 0.787 mm (0.031 inch), the valve must be
oil on the vibration damper hub contact surface of replaced.
the seal.
VALVE GUIDES
The valve guides are an integral part of the engine
cylinder head and are not replaceable.
When the valve stem guide clearance is excessive,
the valve guide bores must be reamed oversize. Ser-
vice valves with oversize stems are available in 0.076
mm (0.003 inch) and 0.381 mm (0.015 inch) incre-
ments.
Corresponding oversize valve stem seals are also
available and must be used with valves having 0.381
mm (0.015 inch) oversize stems.
NOTE: If the valve guides are reamed oversize, the

valve seats must be ground to ensure that the valve
seat is concentric to the valve guide.
Fig. 61 Valve Facing Margin

VALVE STEM-TO-GUIDE CLEARANCE
VALVE SEAT REFACING MEASUREMENT
(1) Install a pilot of the correct size in the valve
Valve stem-to-guide clearance may be measured by
guide bore. Reface the valve seat to the specified
either of the following two methods.
angle with a good dressing stone. Remove only
enough metal to provide a smooth finish. PREFERRED METHOD
(2) Use tapered stones to obtain the specified seat
(1) Remove the valve from the head.
width when required.
(2) Clean the valve stem guide bore with solvent
(3) Control valve seat runout to a maximum of
and a bristle brush.
0.0635 mm (0.0025 in.) (Fig. 62).
(3) Insert a telescoping gauge into the valve stem
guide bore approximately 9.525 mm (.375 inch) from
the valve spring side of the head (Fig. 63).
Fig. 62 Measurement of Valve Seat Runout

VALVE STEM OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
Valve stem oil seals are installed on each valve
stem to prevent rocker arm lubricating oil from
entering the combustion chamber through the valve
guide bores. One seal is marked INT (intake valve)
and the other is marked EXH (exhaust valve).
Replace the oil seals whenever valve service is per- Fig. 63 Measurement of Valve Guide Bore Diameter
formed or if the seals have deteriorated.
(4) Remove and measure telescoping gauge with a
micrometer.
(5) Repeat the measurement with contacts length-
wise to engine cylinder head.
(6) Compare the crosswise to lengthwise measure-
ments to determine out-of-roundness. If the measure-
ments differ by more than 0.0635 mm (0.0025 in.),
ream the guide bore to accommodate an oversize
valve stem.
(7) Compare the measured valve guide bore diam-
eter with specifications (7.95-7.97 mm or 0.313-0.314
inch). If the measurement differs from specification
by more than 0.076 mm (0.003 inch), ream the guide
bore to accommodate an oversize valve stem.
ALTERNATIVE METHOD
(1) Use a dial indicator to measure the lateral
movement of the valve stem (stem-to-guide clear-
ance). This must be done with the valve installed in
its guide and just off the valve seat (Fig. 64).
(2) Correct clearance is 0.025-0.0762 mm Fig. 65 Valve Spring Tester
(0.001-0.003 inch). If indicated movement exceeds the
(2) Remove the water pump from the cylinder
specification ream the valve guide to accommodate
block.
an oversize valve stem.
(3) Remove the vibration damper.
NOTE: Valve seats must be ground after reaming (4) Remove the timing case cover and lay the cover
the valve guides to ensure that the valve seat is upside down.
concentric to the valve guide. (5) Position a drift punch into the slot in the back
of the cover and tap the old seal out.
(6) Remove the oil slinger from crankshaft.
(7) Remove the camshaft retaining bolt and
remove the sprockets and chain as an assembly.
(8) Remove the camshaft.
(9) Remove the oil pan and gasket.
(10) Remove the front and rear oil galley plugs.
(11) Remove the oil pump.
(12) Remove the connecting rods and the pistons.
Remove the connecting rod and piston assemblies
(13) Remove the crankshaft.
ASSEMBLY
Refer to the applicable sections for detailed
instructions.
(1) Install the crankshaft.
Fig. 64 Measurement of Lateral Movement of Valve
(2) Install the connecting rods and the pistons
Stem
VALVE SPRING TENSION TEST (3) Install the oil pump.
Use a universal Valve Spring Tester and a torque (4) Install the oil pan and gasket.
wrench to test each valve spring for the specified ten- (5) Install the camshaft.
sion value (Fig. 65). (6) Install the sprockets and chain as an assembly.
Replace valve springs that are not within specifica- (7) Install the oil slinger from the crankshaft.
tions. (8) Install the timing case cover seal.
(9) Install the timing case cover.
CYLINDER BLOCK (10) Install the vibration damper.
(11) Install the water pump. Tighten the mounting
DISASSEMBLY bolts to 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.) torque.
Refer to the applicable sections for detailed (12) Lubricate the oil filter seal with clean engine
instructions. oil. Tighten oil filter to 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.) torque.
(1) Drain the engine oil. Remove and discard the (13) Install the engine into the vehicle.
oil filter.
(14) Fill the engine with clean lubrication oil (refer INSPECTION
to Group 0, Lubrication and Maintenance). Inspect the pivot surface area of each rocker arm.
(15) Fill the cooling system. Replace any that are scuffed, pitted, cracked or
excessively worn.
Inspect the valve stem tip contact surface of each
CLEANING AND INSPECTION rocker arm and replace any rocker arm that is deeply
pitted.
CYLINDER HEAD Inspect each push rod end for excessive wear and
replace as required. If any push rod is excessively
CLEANING worn because of lack of oil, replace it and inspect the
Thoroughly clean the engine cylinder head and cyl- corresponding hydraulic tappet for excessive wear.
inder block mating surfaces. Clean the intake and Inspect the push rods for straightness by rolling
engine exhaust manifold and engine cylinder head them on a flat surface or by shining a light between
mating surfaces. Remove all gasket material and car- the push rod and the flat surface.
bon. A wear pattern along the length of the push rod is
Check to ensure that no coolant or foreign material not normal. Inspect the engine cylinder head for
has fallen into the tappet bore area. obstruction if this condition exists.
Remove the carbon deposits from the combustion
chambers and top of the pistons. HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
INSPECTION CLEANING
Use a straightedge and feeler gauge to check the Clean each tappet assembly in cleaning solvent to
flatness of the engine cylinder head and block mating remove all varnish, gum and sludge deposits.
surfaces.
INSPECTION
CYLINDER HEAD COVER Inspect for indications of scuffing on the side and
base of each tappet body.
CLEANING Inspect each tappet base for concave wear with a
Remove any original sealer from the cover sealing straightedge positioned across the base. If the base is
surface of the engine cylinder head and clean the concave, the corresponding lobe on the camshaft is
surface using a fabric cleaner. also worn. Replace the camshaft and defective tap-
Remove all residue from the sealing surface using pets.
a clean, dry cloth.
LEAK-DOWN TEST
INSPECTION After cleaning and inspection, test each tappet for
Inspect the engine cylinder head cover for cracks. specified leak-down rate tolerance to ensure zero-lash
Replace the cover, if cracked. operation (Fig. 66).
The original dark grey gasket material should Swing the weighted arm of the hydraulic valve tap-
NOT be removed. If sections of the gasket material pet tester away from the ram of the Leak-Down
are missing or are compressed, replace the engine Tester.
cylinder head cover. However, sections with minor (1) Place a 7.925-7.950 mm (0.312-0.313 inch)
damage such as small cracks, cuts or chips may be diameter ball bearing on the plunger cap of the tap-
repaired with a hand held applicator. The new mate- pet.
rial must be smoothed over to maintain gasket (2) Lift the ram and position the tappet (with the
height. Allow the gasket material to cure prior to ball bearing) inside the tester cup.
engine cylinder head cover installation. (3) Lower the ram, then adjust the nose of the ram
until it contacts the ball bearing. DO NOT tighten
ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS the hex nut on the ram.
(4) Fill the tester cup with hydraulic valve tappet
CLEANING test oil until the tappet is completely submerged.
Clean all the components with cleaning solvent. (5) Swing the weighted arm onto the push rod and
Use compressed air to blow out the oil passages in pump the tappet plunger up and down to remove air.
the rocker arms and push rods. When the air bubbles cease, swing the weighted arm
away and allow the plunger to rise to the normal
position.
(6) Adjust the nose of the ram to align the pointer
with the SET mark on the scale of the tester and
tighten the hex nut.
(7) Slowly swing the weighted arm onto the push
rod.
(8) Rotate the cup by turning the handle at the
base of the tester clockwise one revolution every 2
seconds.
(9) Observe the leak-down time interval from the
instant the pointer aligns with the START mark on
the scale until the pointer aligns with the 0.125
mark. A normally functioning tappet will require
20-110 seconds to leak-down. Discard tappets with
leak-down time interval not within this specification.
Fig. 67 Cylinder Bore Measurement

dicular (across or at 90 degrees) to the axis of the
crankshaft and then take two additional reading.
(3) Measure the cylinder bore diameter crosswise
to the cylinder block near the top of the bore. Repeat
the measurement near the middle of the bore, then
repeat the measurement near the bottom of the bore.
(4) Determine taper by subtracting the smaller
Fig. 66 Leak-Down Tester diameter from the larger diameter.
(5) Rotate measuring device 90° and repeat steps
CYLINDER BLOCK above.
(6) Determine out-of-roundness by comparing the
CLEANING difference between each measurement.
Thoroughly clean the oil pan and engine block gas- (7) If cylinder bore taper does not exceed 0.025
ket surfaces. mm (0.001 inch) and out-of-roundness does not
Use compressed air to clean out: exceed 0.025 mm (0.001 inch), the cylinder bore can
• The galley at the oil filter adaptor hole. be honed. If the cylinder bore taper or out- of-round
• The front and rear oil galley holes. condition exceeds these maximum limits, the cylinder
• The feed holes for the crankshaft main bearings. must be bored and then honed to accept an oversize
Once the block has been completely cleaned, apply piston. A slight amount of taper always exists in the
Loctite PST pipe sealant with Teflon 592 to the cylinder bore after the engine has been in use for a
threads of the front and rear oil galley plugs. Tighten period of time.
the plugs to 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) torque.
HONING—CYLINDER BORE
INSPECTION—CYLINDER BORE The honing operation should be closely coordinated
(1) It is mandatory to use a dial bore gauge to with the fitting of pistons and rings. This will ensure
measure each cylinder bore diameter (Fig. 67). To specified clearances are maintained.
correctly select the proper size piston, a cylinder bore Refer to Standard Service Procedures in the begin-
gauge, capable of reading in 0.003 mm (.0001 in.) ning of this Group for the proper honing of cylinder
INCREMENTS is required. If a bore gauge is not bores.
available, do not use an inside micrometer.
bore at three levels below top of bore. Start perpen-
SPECIFICATIONS Main Bearing Journal Width

No. 2-4-5-6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.02 to 30.18 mm
4.0L ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS (1.182 to 1.188 in.)
Main Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . 0.03 to 0.06 mm
Engine Description (0.001 to 0.0025 in.)
Engine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-line 6 Cylinder Main Bearing Clearance (Preferred) . . . 0.051 mm
Bore and Stroke . 98.4 x 86.69 mm (3.88 x 3.413 in.) (0.002 in.)
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.0L (242 cu. in.) Connecting Rod Journal
Compression Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8:1 Diameter . . . 53.17 to 53.23 mm (2.0934 to 2.0955
Firing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–5–3–6–2–4 in.)
Lubrication . . . . Pressure Feed–Full Flow Filtration Connecting Rod Journal
Width . . . . 27.18 to 27.33 mm (1.070 to 1.076 in.)
Cooling System . . Liquid Cooled–Forced Circulation
Out-of-Round (Max. All Journals) . . . . . 0.013 mm
Cylinder Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron
(0.0005 in.)
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Nodular Iron
Taper (Max. – All Journals) . . . . . . . . . 0.013 mm
Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron
(0.0005 in.)
Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Iron
Cylinder Block
Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum Alloy
Deck Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240.03 to 240.18 mm
Combustion Chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual-Quench
(9.450 to 9.456 in.)
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . Cast Malleable Iron
Deck Clearance (Below Block) . . . . . . . . 0.546 mm
Engine Specifications (0.0215 in.)
Cylinder Bore Diameter—
Camshaft Standard . . . 98.45 to 98.48 mm (3.8759 to 3.8775
Hydraulic Tappet Clearance . . . . . . . . . Zero Lash in.)
Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm Cylinder Bore Diameter—
(0.001 to 0.003 in.) Taper (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
Bearing Journal Diameter Cylinder Bore Diameter—
No. 1 . . . . . 51.54 to 51.56 mm (2.029 to 2.030 in.) Out-of-Round . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 mm (0.001 in.)
No. 2 . . . . . 51.28 to 51.31 mm (2.019 to 2.020 in.) Tappet Bore Diameter . . . . . 23.000 to 23.025 mm
No. 3 . . . . . 51.03 to 51.05 mm (2.009 to 2.010 in.) (0.9055 to 0.9065 in.)
No. 4 . . . . . 50.78 to 50.80 mm (1.999 to 2.000 in.) Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm per 25 mm
Base Circle Runout . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm - max. (0.001 in. per 1 in.)
(0.001 in. - max.) Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 mm per 152 mm
Valve Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.29 mm (0.405 in.) (0.002 in. per 6 in.)
Intake Valve Timing Flatness Max. . . . . 0.20 mm max. for total length
Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4° BTDC (0.008 in. max. for total length)
Closes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.9° ABDC Main Bearing Bore
Exhaust Valve Timing Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.3514 to 68.3768 mm
Opens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.8 BBDC (2.691 to 2.692 in.)
Closes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2° ATDC Connecting Rods
Valve Overlap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.6° Total Weight (Less Bearing) . . . 657 to 665 grams
Intake Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253.3° (23.17 to 23.45 oz.)
Exhaust Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259.° Length (Center-to-Center) . . 155.52 to 155.62 mm
Crankshaft (6.123 to 6.127 in.)
End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.038 to 0.165 mm Piston Pin Bore Diameter . . . . 23.59 to 23.62 mm
(0.0015 to 0.0065 in.) (0.9288 to 0.9298 in.)
Main Bearing Journal Diameter Bore (Less Bearings) . . . . . . . . 56.08 to 56.09 mm
No. 1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.489 to 63.502 mm (2.2080 to 2.2085 in.)
(2.4996 to 2.5001 in.) Bearing Clearance . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm
Main Bearing Journal Diameter (0.001 to 0.003 in.)
No. 7 . 63.449 to 63.487 mm (2.4980 to 2.4995 in.) Bearing Clearance (Preferred) . 0.044 to 0.050 mm
Main Bearing Journal Width (0.0015 to 0.0020 in.)
No. 1 . . . . . 27.58 to 27.89 mm (1.086 to 1.098 in.) Side Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25 to 0.48 mm
Main Bearing Journal Width (0.010 to 0.019 in.)
No. 3 . . . . . 32.28 to 32.33 mm (1.271 to 1.273 in.)
Twist (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 mm per mm Valve Face Angle—Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45°
(0.001 in. per inch) Tip Refinishing (Max. Allowable) . . . . . . 0.25 mm
Bend (Max.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.001 mm per mm (0.010 in.)
(0.001 in. per inch.) Valve Springs
Cylinder Compression Pressure Free Length (Approx.) . . . . . 47.65 mm (1.876 in.)
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8:1 Spring Tension—
Pressure Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 827 to 1,034 kPa Valve Closed . . . . . . . 316 to 351 N @ 41.656 mm
(120 to 150 psi) (71 to 79 lbf. @ 1.64 in.)
Max. Variation Between Cylinders . . . . . 206 kPa Spring Tension—
(30 psi) Valve Open . . . . . . . . 898.6 to 969.7 N 30.89 mm
Cylinder Head (202 to 218 lbf @ 1.216 in.)
Combustion Chamber . . . . . . . . . 52.22 to 58.22 cc Inside Diameter . . . . . . . . . 21.0 mm to 21.51 mm
(3.37 to 3.55 cu. in.) (0.827 to 0.847 in.)
Valve Guide I.D. (Integral) . . . . . 7.95 to 7.97 mm Pistons
(0.313 to 0.314 in.) Weight (Less Pin) . . . . . . . . . . . 417 to 429 grams
Valve Stem-to-Guide (14.7 to 15.1 oz.)
Clearance . 0.025 to 0.076 mm (0.001 to 0.003 in.) Piston Pin Bore (Centerline to Piston
Intake Valve Seat Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5° Top) . . . . . 40.61 to 40.72 mm (1.599 to 1.603 in.)
Exhaust Valve Seat Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.5° Piston-to-Bore Clearance . . . . . 0.018 to 0.038 mm
Valve Seat Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.02 to 1.52 mm (0.0008 to 0.0015 in.)
(0.040 to 0.060 in.) Ring Gap Clearance—Top Compression
Valve Seat Runout . . . . . . . 0.064 mm (0.0025 in.) Ring . . . 0.229 to 0.610 mm (0.0090 to 0.0240 in.)
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03 mm per 25 mm Ring Gap Clearance—2nd Compression
(0.001 in. per 1 in.) Ring . . . 0.483 to 0.965 mm (0.0190 to 0.0380 in.)
Flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05 mm per 152 mm Ring Gap Clearance—Oil Control Steel
(0.002 in. per 6 in.) Rails . . . . . 0.254 to 1.500 mm (0.010 to 0.060 in.)
Flatness Max. . . . 0.20 mm - max. for total length Ring Side Clearance—Compression
(0.008 in. max. for total length) Rings . . 0.042 to 0.084 mm (0.0017 to 0.0033 in.)
Rocker Arms, Push Rods & Tappets Ring Side Clearance—Oil Control
Rocker Arm Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6:1 Rings . . . . 0.06 to 0.21 mm (0.0024 to 0.0083 in.)
Push Rod Length . . . . . . . 244.856 to 245.364 mm Piston Ring Groove Height—Compression
(9.640 to 9.660 in.) Rings . . 1.530 to 1.555 mm (0.0602 to 0.0612 in.)
Push Rod Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . 7.92 to 8.00 mm Piston Ring Groove Height—Oil Control
(0.312 to 0.315 in.) Ring . . . 4.035 to 4.060 mm (0.1589 to 0.1598 in.)
Hydraulic Tappet Diameter . 22.962 to 22.974 mm Piston Ring Groove Diameter—No.1 Compression
(0.904 to 0.9045 in.) Ring . . . . . . . 88.39 to 88.65 mm (3.48 to 3.49 in.)
Tappet-to-Bore Clearance . . . . 0.025 to 0.063 mm Piston Ring Groove Diameter—No.2 Compression
(0.001 to 0.0025 in.) Ring . . . . . . . 87.63 to 87.88 mm (3.45 to 3.46 in.)
Valves Piston Ring Groove Diameter—Oil Control
Length (Tip-to-Gauge Dimension Line) Ring . . . . . . . 89.66 to 89.92 mm (3.53 to 3.54 in.)
Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122.479 to 122.860 mm Piston Pin Bore Diameter . . 23.650 to 23.658 mm
(4.822 to 4.837 in.) (0.9312 to 0.9315 in.)
Length (Tip-to-Gauge Dimension Line) Piston Pin Diameter . . . . . . 23.637 to 23.640 mm
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122.860 to 123.241 mm (0.9306 to 0.9307 in.)
(4.837 to 4.852 in.) Piston-to-Pin Clearance . . . . 0.0102 to 0.0208 mm
Valve Stem Diameter . . . . . . . . 7.899 to 7.925 mm (0.0005 to 0.0009 in.)
(0.311 to 0.312 in.) Piston-to-Pin Connecting Rod
Stem-to-Guide Clearance . . . . . 0.025 to 0.076 mm (Press Fit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 kN (2000 lbf.)
(0.001 to 0.003 in.) Oil Pump
Valve Head Diameter— Gear-to-Body Clearance
Intake . . 48.387 to 48.641 mm (1.905 to 1.915 in.) (Radial) . . . 0.051 to 0.102 mm (0.002 to 0.004 in.)
Valve Head Diameter— Gear-to-Body Clearance (Radial)
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.973 to 38.227 mm (Preferred) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.051 mm (0.002 in.)
(1.495 to 1.505 in.) Gear End Clearance—
Valve Face Angle—Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45° Plastigage . 0.051 to 0.152 mm (0.002 to 0.006 in.)
Gear End Clearance—Plastigage DESCRIPTION TORQUE
(Preferred) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.051 mm (0.002 in.) Support Cushion/Crossmember Nuts . . . . 22 N·m
Gear End Clearance—Feeler (192 in. lbs.)
Gauge . . 0.1016 to 0.2032 mm (0.004 to 0.008 in.) Support Cushion/Bracket Nuts (Manual) . 75 N·m
Gear End Clearance—Feeler Gauge (55 ft. lbs.)
(Preferred) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1778 mm (0.007 in.) Transmission Support Bracket Bolt
Oil Pressure (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 N·m (34 ft. lbs.)
At Idle Speed (600 rpm) . . . . . . . 89.6 kPa (13 psi) Transmission Support Bracket/
At 1600 rpm & Higher . . . . . . . . . 255 to 517 kPa Cushion Bolt (4WD Auto) . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
(37 to 75 psi) Transmission Support Adaptor Bracket
Oil Pressure Relief . . . . . . . . . . . 517 kPa (75 psi) Bolts (2WD Auto) . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Exhaust Manifold/Pipe
4.0L TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
Flywheel to Converter Housing
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.)
DESCRIPTION TORQUE Flywheel to Crankshaft
A/C Compressor Bracket-to-Engine Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 N·m (105 ft. lbs.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) Front Cover-to-Block
A/C Compressor Bolts 1/4–20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 N·m (60 in. lbs.)
Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) Bolts 5/16–18 . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.)
A/C Low Pressure Service Valve Fuel Rail
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.) Bolts/Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 N·m (108 in. lbs.)
Block Heater Generator
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 N·m (16 in. lbs.) Fixed Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.)
Camshaft Sprocket Thru Bolt/Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.)
Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.) Main Bearing Cap
Camshaft Thrust Plate to Cylinder Block Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.) Main Bearing Brace
Clutch Cover to Flywheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.) Oil Filter
Coil Bracket to Block Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m (192 in. lbs.) Connector (to adaptor) . . . . . . 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.)
Connecting Rod Connector (to block) . . . . . . . . 68 N·m (50 ft. lbs.)
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.) Adaptor Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 N·m (50 ft. lbs.)
Cylinder Block Oil Galley
Drain Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.) Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
Cylinder Head Oil Pan
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 N·m (100 ft. lbs.) 1/4–20 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 N·m (84 in. lbs.)
Cylinder Head Cover 5/16–18 Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 N·m (132 in. lbs.)
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (85 in. lbs.) Drain Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.)
Distributor Clamp Oil Pump
Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.) Short Attaching Bolts . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.)
Engine Mounts—Front Long Attaching Bolts . . . . . . 23 N·m (204 in. lbs.)
Support Bracket Bolts . . . . . . . 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.) Cover Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m (70 in. lbs.)
Support Cushion Bolts/Nuts . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) Power Steering Pump Pressure Hose
Support Cushion Bracket Bolts . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 N·m (38 ft. lbs.)
(40 ft. lbs.) Rocker Arm Assembly-to-Cylinder Head
Support Cushion Bracket Stud Nuts . . . . . . 41 N·m Capscrews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N·m (21ft. lbs.)
(30 ft. lbs.) Spark Plugs
Support Cushion Thru-Bolt . . . 65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.) Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.)
Engine Mounts—Rear Starter Motor
Crossmember-to-Sill Bolts (Automatic) . . . 41 N·m Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.)
(30 ft. lbs.) Thermostat Housing
Insulator Stud Assembly Nut . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 N·m (156 in. lbs.)
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Throttle Body
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m (90 in.lbs.)
Vibration Damper
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m (80 ft. lbs.)
Water Pump/Block
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
4.0L ENGINE
Vibration Damper Removal Tool 7697
Valve Spring Compressor Tool MD-998772A
Rear Main Seal Installer Tool 6271A
Timing Case Cover Alignment and Seal installation

Tool 6139
Hydraulic Valve Tappet Removal/Installation Tool

C-4129–A
XJ ENGINE 9-1
ENGINE
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION OIL PAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 OIL PUMP PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . 34
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PISTONS AND CONNECTING ROD
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—DIESEL— ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . 24
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—DIESEL— TIMING GEAR COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 TIMING GEAR COVER OIL SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TAPPET NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
SERVICE PROCEDURES VIBRATION DAMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
VALVE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.5L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 CYLINDER WALL LINER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 44
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CYLINDER HEAD COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 PISTONS AND CONNECTING ROD
CYLINDER WALL LINER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . 37 ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS . . . . . . . . . 43
ENGINE MOUNTS — LHD DIESEL . . . . . . . . . 13 SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE MOUNTS — RHD DIESEL . . . . . . . . . 16 ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
INTERNAL VACUUM PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 SPECIAL TOOLS
OIL FILTER ADAPTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 SPECIAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION
The engine model code and serial number are
stamped on the left side of the engine block, just
below the oil dipstick tube (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1 Engine Code Location

9-2 ENGINE XJ
ate the same tappet action. Check the lubrication
system from the intake strainer to the pump cover,
including the relief valve retainer cap. When tappet
noise is due to aeration, it may be intermittent or
constant, and usually more than 1 tappet will be
noisy. When oil level and leaks have been corrected,
operate the engine at fast idle. Run engine for a suf-
ficient time to allow all of the air inside the tappets
to be bled out.

SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—DIESEL—
PERFORMANCE
SERVICE DIAGNOSIS—DIESEL—MECHANICAL
TAPPET NOISE
(1) To determine source of tappet noise, operate
engine at idle with cylinder head covers removed.
(2) Feel each valve spring or rocker arm to detect
noisy tappet. The noisy tappet will cause the affected
spring and/or rocker arm to vibrate or feel rough in
operation.
NOTE: Worn valve guides or cocked springs are

sometimes mistaken for noisy tappets. If such is
Engine Description
the case, noise may be dampened by applying side
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS thrust on the valve spring. If noise is not apprecia-
Before disassembling any part of the engine to cor- bly reduced, it can be assumed the noise is in the
rect tappet noise, check the oil pressure. If vehicle tappet. Inspect the rocker arm push rod sockets
has no oil pressure gauge, install a reliable gauge at and push rod ends for wear.
the pressure sending unit. The pressure should be
between 4 bars (50 psi) at 3000 RPM. (3) Valve tappet noise ranges from light noise to a
Check the oil level after the engine reaches normal heavy click. A light noise is usually caused by exces-
operating temperature. Allow 5 minutes to stabilize sive leak down around the unit plunger or by the
oil level, check dipstick. The oil level in the pan plunger partially sticking in the tappet body cylinder.
should never be above the FULL mark or below the The tappet should be replaced. A heavy click is
ADD OIL mark on dipstick. Either of these 2 condi- caused by a tappet check valve not seating or by for-
tions could be responsible for noisy tappets: eign particles becoming wedged between the plunger
OIL LEVEL HIGH and the tappet body. This will cause the plunger to
If oil level is above the FULL mark, it is possible stick in the down position. This heavy click will be
for the connecting rods to dip into the oil. With the accompanied by excessive clearance between the
engine running, this condition could create foam in valve stem and rocker arm as valve closes. In either
the oil pan. Foam in oil pan would be fed to the case, tappet assembly should be removed for inspec-
hydraulic tappets by the oil pump causing them to tion and cleaning.
lose length and allow valves to seat noisily. The valve train generates a noise very much like a
OIL LEVEL LOW light tappet noise during normal operation. Care
Low oil level may allow oil pump to take in air. must be taken to ensure that tappets are making the
When air is fed to the tappets, they lose length which noise. In general, if more than one tappet seems to
allows valves to seat noisily. Any leaks on intake side be noisy, its probably not the tappets.
of oil pump through which air can be drawn will cre-
XJ ENGINE 9-3
9-4 ENGINE XJ
XJ ENGINE 9-5
9-6 ENGINE XJ
XJ ENGINE 9-7
9-8 ENGINE XJ
XJ ENGINE 9-9
9 - 10 ENGINE XJ
XJ ENGINE 9 - 11
9 - 12 ENGINE XJ
SERVICE PROCEDURES
VALVE SERVICE
This procedure is done with the engine cylinder
head removed from the block.
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove the engine cylinder head from the cyl-
inder block. Refer to cylinder head removal and
installation in this section.
(2) Use Valve Spring Compressor Tool and com-
press each valve spring.
(3) Remove the valve locks, retainers, and springs.
(4) Use an Arkansas smooth stone or a jewelers
file to remove any burrs on the top of the valve stem,
especially around the groove for the locks.
(5) Remove the valves, and place them in a rack in
the same order as removed.
VALVE CLEANING
(1) Clean all carbon deposits from the combustion
chambers, valve ports, valve stems, valve stem
Fig. 2 Valve Spring Chart
guides and head.
(2) Clean all grime and gasket material from the VALVE STAND DOWN
engine cylinder head machined gasket surface. Valve stand down is to maintain the adequate com-
pression ratio.
INSPECTION (1) Invert cylinder head.
(1) Inspect for cracks in the combustion chambers (2) Fit each valve to its respective valve guide.
and valve ports. (3) Using a straight edge and feeler gauge (Fig. 4),
(2) Inspect for cracks on the exhaust seat. check valve head stand down: Inlet valve head stand
(3) Inspect for cracks in the gasket surface at each down .80 to 1.2 mm (.031 to .047 in.) and exhaust
coolant passage. valve stand down .79 to 1.19 mm (.031 to .047 in).
(4) Inspect valves for burned, cracked or warped (4) If valve head stand down is not in accordance
heads. with above, discard original valves, check stand down
(5) Inspect for scuffed or bent valve stems. with new valves and recut valve seat inserts to
(6) Replace valves displaying any damage. obtain correct stand down.
(7) Check valve spring height (Fig. 2).
VALVE GUIDES
VALVE REFACING (1) Valve Guides height requirement.
(1) Use a valve refacing machine to reface the (2) Measurement A (Fig. 5): 13.50 - 14.00 mm.
intake and exhaust valves to the specified angle.
(2) After refacing, a margin of at least 4.52-4.49 VALVE STEM-TO-GUIDE CLEARANCE
mm (.178-.177 inch) must remain (Fig. 3). If the mar- MEASUREMENT
gin is less than 4.49 mm (.177 inch), the valve must (1) Measure and record internal diameter of valve
be replaced. guides. Valve guide internal diameter is 8.0 to 8.015
mm (.3149 to .3155 ins.).
VALVE SEAT REFACING (2) Measure valve stems and record diameters.
(1) Install a pilot of the correct size in the valve Intake valve stem diameter 7.94 to 7.96 mm (.3125 to
guide bore. Reface the valve seat to the specified .3133 in). Exhaust valve stem diameter 7.92 to 7.94
angle with a good dressing stone. Remove only mm (.3118 to .31215 in).
enough metal to provide a smooth finish. (3) Subtract diameter of valve stem from internal
(2) Use tapered stones to obtain the specified seat diameter of its respective valve guide to obtain valve
width when required. stem clearance in valve guide. Clearance of inlet
valve stem in valve guide is .040 to .075 mm (.0015
to .0029 in). Clearance of exhaust valve stem in valve
guide is .060 to .095 mm (.0023 to .0037 in).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 13
Fig. 4 Checking Valve Stand Down
Fig. 5 Valve Guide Height

(4) If valve stem clearance in valve guide exceeds
tolerances, new valve guides must be installed.

ENGINE MOUNTS — LHD DIESEL
The engine mounts support the engine at each
side. These supports are made of resilient rubber.
REMOVAL—RIGHT SIDE
(2) Remove the innercooler inlet hose from the tur-
bocharger and position it out of the way (Fig. 6).
(3) Remove the right engine mount upper sill plate
nuts.
(4) Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
(5) Remove the oil filter and adaptor from the
engine.
(6) Remove the engine mount throughbolt nut only.
Do not remove the bolt at this time.
the right engine mount.
(8) Remove the (2) engine mount lower sill plate
bolts.
(9) Remove the (4) engine mount bracket bolts
Fig. 3 Valve Specification from the engine block.
9 - 14 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 6 Engine Compartment View — Diesel Fig. 7 Engine Compartment View — Diesel
(10) Remove the engine mount throughbolt. (3) Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical con-
(11) Remove the right engine mount from the vehi- nector.
cle. (4) Remove the (2) engine mount upper sill plate
nuts (Fig. 8).
INSTALLATION—RIGHT SIDE
(1) Position the engine mount and bracket and
install the engine mount throughbolt and nut, leav-
ing them loose at this time.
lower sill plate bolts.
block retaining bolts and torque to 61 N·m (45 ft.
lbs.).
(4) Torque the engine mount lower sill plate bolts
to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
(6) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to 65
N·m (48 ft. lbs.).
(7) Install the oil filter and adaptor on the engine.
Torque the adaptor retaining bolt to 50 N·m (37 ft.
lbs.).
(9) Install the engine mount upper sill plate nuts.
Torque to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
(10) Install the innercooler inlet hose on the turbo-
charger (Fig. 7).
Fig. 8 Left Engine Mount Sill Plate Nuts
REMOVAL—LEFT SIDE (5) Make sure the steering shaft is in the unlocked
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. position. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
(2) Remove the refrigerant line support bracket (6) Remove the steering shaft pinchbolt. Remove
from the rear of the rocker cover. the shaft from the gearbox by sliding it straight off
the gearbox input shaft.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 15
CAUTION: Do not rotate the steering shaft while
removed from the gearbox input shaft. Damage to
the steering column clockspring will occur.
(7) Remove the left engine mount throughbolt nut

only (Fig. 9). Do not remove the bolt at this time.
Fig. 10 Left Engine Mount Retaining Bolts

INSTALLATION—LEFT SIDE
(1) Position the engine mount and bracket and
install the engine mount through bolt and nut, leav-
ing them loose at this time.
Fig. 9 A/C Compressor Position & Orientation lower sill plate bolt and the trackbar support bracket
(8) Loosen the (4) H-Block retaining bolts, Do not bolts (Fig. 11).
remove the bolts at this time.
NOTE: Mark the position of the H-Block in relation

to the power steering pump and the A/C Compres-
sor so it may be installed in its original position.
(9) Remove the (2) H-Block retaining bolts from

the power steering pump side of the block (Fig. 9).
(10) Support the A/C Compressor with mechanics
wire before proceeding to the next step.
(11) Remove the (4) A/C Compressor retaining
bolts (Fig. 9).
(12) Remove the remaining (2) bolts from the
H-Block and remove the H-Block from the compres-
sor.
the left engine mount.
from the engine block.
(15) Remove the (4) trackbar support bracket bolts
and remove the bracket (Fig. 10).
(16) Remove the remaining engine mount lower
sill plate bolt (Fig. 10).
(17) Remove the engine mount throughbolt. Fig. 11 Left Engine Mount Retaining Bolts
(18) Remove the left engine mount from the vehi- (3) Install the (4) engine mount bracket bolts.
cle. Torque to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.).
9 - 16 ENGINE XJ
(4) Torque the lower engine mount sill plate bolts
to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 11).
(5) Torque the larger trackbar support bracket
bolts to 125 N·m (92 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 11).
(7) Position the H-Block and the A/C Compressor
in there original positions and install the retaining
bolts (Fig. 12).
Fig. 13 Left Engine Mount Sill Plate Nuts

(3) Remove the steering shaft pinchbolt and slide
the steering shaft straight off the gearbox input
shaft.
CAUTION: Do not rotate the steering shaft while

removed from the gearbox input shaft. Damage to
the steering column clockspring will occur.
Fig. 12 A/C Compressor Position & Orientation
(4) Remove the oil filter adaptor retaining bolt and
(8) Torque the A/C Compressor mounting bolts to remove oil filter and adaptor from the vehicle.
41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 12). (5) Remove the engine mount upper sill plate nuts
(9) Torque all the H-Block retaining bolts to 18 (Fig. 14).
N·m (159 in. lbs.). (6) Remove the engine mount throughbolt nut only.
(10) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to Leave the bolt installed at this time.
65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 12). (7) Position a jack stand and raise the weight off
(11) Install the steering shaft. Torque the pinch- the right engine mount.
bolt to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.). (8) Remove the (4) trackbar support bracket
(12) Lower the vehicle from the hoist. retaining bolts and remove the bracket.
(13) Install the engine mount upper sill plate nuts. (9) Remove the (4) engine mount bracket bolts
Torque to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 13). from the engine block.
(14) Install the refrigerant line support bracket on (10) Remove the remaining engine mount lower
the rear of the rocker cover. sill plate bolt.
(15) Connect the A/C compressor electrical connec- (11) Remove the engine mount through bolt.
tor. (12) Remove the right engine mount from the vehi-
(16) Connect the negative battery cable. cle.
ENGINE MOUNTS — RHD DIESEL INSTALLATION—RIGHT SIDE

The engine mounts support the engine at each (1) Position the engine mount and bracket in posi-
side. These supports are made of resilient rubber. tion and install the engine mount through bolt and
nut, leaving them loose at this time.
REMOVAL—RIGHT SIDE (2) Install, but do not torque the engine mount
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. lower sill plate bolts and the trackbar support
(2) Make sure the steering wheel is in the bracket bolts.
unlocked position. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 17
Fig. 14 Right Engine Mount Sill Plate Nuts Fig. 15 A/C Compressor Position & Orientation
(3) Install the (4) engine mount bracket to engine NOTE: Mark the position of the H-Block in relation
block retaining bolts. Torque bolts to 61 N·m (45 ft. to the power steering pump and A/C Compressor so
lbs.). it may be installed in its original position.
(4) Torque the engine mount lower sill plate bolts
to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.). (8) Remove the (2) H-Block retaining bolts from
(5) Torque the larger trackbar support bracket the power steering pump side of the block (Fig. 15).
bolts to 125 N·m (92 ft. lbs.). (9) Support the A/C Compressor with mechanics
(6) Install the oil filter and adaptor on the engine. wire before proceeding to the next step.
Torque oil filter adaptor retaining bolt to 50 N·m (75 (10) Remove the (4) A/C Compressor mounting
ft. lbs.). bolts (Fig. 15).
(7) Remove the jack stand. (11) Remove the remaining (2) bolts from H-Block
(8) Install the engine mount upper sill plate nuts. and remove the H-Block from the compressor.
Torque to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.). (12) Position a jack stand and raise the weight off
(9) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to 65 the left engine mount.
N·m (48 ft. lbs.). (13) Remove the (2) engine mount upper sill plate
(10) Install the steering shaft and torque the nuts.
pinchbolt to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.). (14) Remove the (4) engine mount bracket bolts
(11) Lower the vehicle from the hoist. from the engine block.
(12) Connect the negative battery cable. (15) Remove the (2) engine mount lower sill plate
bolts.
REMOVAL—LEFT SIDE (16) Remove the engine mount troughbolt.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (17) Remove the left engine mount from the vehi-
(2) Remove the refrigerant line support bracket cle.
bolt from the upper radiator support crossmember..
(3) Remove the A/C filter-drier assembly support INSTALLATION—LEFT SIDE
bracket nuts from the left fenderwell. (1) Position the engine mount and bracket in posi-
(4) Disconnect A/C compressor electrical connector tion and install the engine mount through bolt and
(Fig. 15). nut, leaving them loose at this time.
(5) Raise the vehicle on a hoist. (2) Install, but do not torque engine mount lower
(6) Remove the engine mount throughbolt nut only sill plate bolts.
(Fig. 15). Leave the bolt installed at this time. (3) Install the (4) engine mount bracket to engine
(7) Loosen the (4) H-Block retaining bolts. Do not block retaining bolts. Torque to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.).
remove the bolts at this time.
9 - 18 ENGINE XJ
(4) Torque the (2) lower engine mount sill plate (3) Drill out the rivets retaining the hood latch
bolts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.). cable control assembly.
(5) Install the (2) engine mount upper sill plate (4) Remove the hood latch assemblies from the
nuts. Torque to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.). hood.
(6) Remove the jack stand. (5) Disconnect and remove the engine compart-
ment lamp.
(6) With assistance from another person, remove
the hood.
(7) Cover both of the fenders and the grill opening
panel to prevent paint damage.
(8) Remove the battery tray.
(9) Disconnect the radiator cooling fan electrical.
(10) Remove the manual cooling fan and let set
inside of the fan shroud.
(11) If equipped, recover the refrigerant. Refer to
Group 24, Heating and Air Conditioning for the pro-
cedure.
(12) Disconnect the suction and discharge lines
and remove the lines from the vehicle.
(13) Disconnect the breather hose and remove the
air filter outlet hose from the vehicle (Fig. 17).
Fig. 16 A/C Compressor Position & Orientation

(7) Position the H-Block and the A/C Compressor
in there original positions and install the retaining
bolts (Fig. 16).
(8) Torque the A/C Compressor mounting bolts to
41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 16).
(9) Torque all the H-Block bolts to 18 N·m (159 in.
lbs.) (Fig. 16).
(10) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to
65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 16).
(12) Install the refrigerant line support bracket.
(13) Install the A/C filter-drier support bracket.
2.5L DIESEL ENGINE

Fig. 17 LHD Engine Compartment — Diesel
REMOVAL (14) Disconnect the oil pressure sensor electrical
(1) Disconnect both of the battery cables and connector (Fig. 17).
remove the battery. (15) Disconnect the EGR vacuum supply hose from
(2) Mark the hinge locations on the hood for align- the engine (Fig. 17).
ment reference during installation. (16) Remove the coolant reservoir cap.
(17) Drain the cooling system. Refer to Group 7,
CAUTION: Wrap the appropriate size drillbit with Cooling System for the procedure.
masking tape 1/4 inch from tip. This will prevent (18) Remove the upper and lower radiator hoses
damaging the hood outer panel when drilling out from the engine.
the rivets retaining the hood latch cable control (19) Remove the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses
assembly. from the engine (Fig. 17).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 19
(20) Remove the coolant reservoir supply hose (34) Disconnect the exhaust system at the (3) bolt
from the engine (Fig. 17). flange (Fig. 19).
(21) On L.H.D. vehicles, disconnect the heater core
coolant supply and the brake vacuum supply hoses
from the engine.
(22) On R.H.D. vehicles, disconnect the heater core
coolant supply and the brake vacuum supply hoses
from the right side of the engine compartment.
Remove the line assembly retaining bolt and bracket
from the rear of the rocker cover and position the
assembly out of the way.
(23) Working inside of the vehicle, remove the cen-
ter console. Refer to Group 23, Body for the proce-
dure.
(24) Remove the shifter boot seal.
(25) Disconnect the shifter from the transmission
(27) Remove the lower fan shroud retaining bolts
and remove the lower fan shroud panel.
(28) Remove the engine ground wire (Fig. 18).
Fig. 19 Exhaust System Inlet Pipe Connection

(35) Remove the exhaust system support clamp
(Fig. 19).
(36) Remove the clutch slave cylinder from the
clutch housing (Fig. 20).
Fig. 18 Engine Ground Wire Location

(29) Remove the right and left engine mount
throughbolt nuts only. Do not remove the bolts at
this time (Fig. 18).
(30) Drain the transmission fluid. Refer to Group
21, Transmission and Transfer Case for the proce-
dure.
(31) Mark the position of the front and rear drive-
shafts in relation to there companion flanges.
(32) Remove the front driveshaft. Refer to Group
Fig. 20 Clutch Slave Cylinder
3, Differential and Driveline for the procedure.
(33) Remove the rear driveshaft. Refer to Group 3, (37) Remove the (3) nuts retaining the transfer
Differential and Driveline for the procedure. case shift linkage and position the linkage aside (Fig.
21).
9 - 20 ENGINE XJ
(53) Remove the right and left engine mount
throughbolts.
(54) Carefully lift the engine out of the engine
compartment.
INSTALLATION
(1) Carefully place the engine assembly into the
engine compartment..
(2) Install the engine mount throughbolts and nuts
in there original position. Leaving them loose at this
time.
(3) Install the fuel / water separator and mounting
bracket on the bulkhead.
(4) Install the fuel lines on the fuel / water sepa-
rator.
(5) Connect the electrical connectors to the bottom
of the fuel/water separator.
(6) Install the power steering fluid pressure line
on the steering gear.
(7) Install the oil filter and adaptor on the engine.
Torque adaptor retaining bolt to 50 N·m (37 ft. lbs.).
Fill the oil filter prior to installation.
Fig. 21 Transfer Case Shift Linkage — 4x4 (8) Install the fan shroud and both cooling fans as
an assembly in the vehicle.
(38) Disconnect the electrical connectors and the
vent hose and from the transfer case and transmis-
(10) Install the transmission and transfer case
sion.
assembly in the vehicle.
(39) Support the rear of the transmission with a
(11) Install the bolts securing the transmission to
jack.
the engine assembly. Torque to 74.6 N·m (55 ft. lbs.).
(40) Remove the transmission support crossmem-
(12) Position, connect and secure all electrical con-
ber.
nectors and vent hoses on the transfer case and
(41) Lower the transmission to gain access to the
transmission in there original positions.
transmission to engine retaining bolts.
(13) Install the transmission support crossmember.
(42) Remove all the bolts securing the transmis-
Torque bolts to 50 N·m (37 ft. lbs.).
sion to the engine assembly. Remove the transmis-
(14) Install the (3) nuts retaining the transfer case
sion and the transfer case assembly from the vehicle.
shift linkage (Fig. 22).
(15) Install the clutch slave cylinder on the clutch
(44) Remove the fan shroud and both cooling fans
housing, making sure the cylinder pushrod is prop-
as an assembly.
erly aligned with the clutch fork (Fig. 23).
(45) Remove the oil filter and adaptor from the
(16) Connect the exhaust system at the (3) bolt
vehicle as an assembly.
flange (Fig. 24).
(46) Remove the power steering fluid pressure line
(17) Install the exhaust system support clamp
from the steering gear.
(Fig. 24).
(47) Disconnect the electrical connectors from the
(18) Install the rear driveshaft in its original posi-
bottom of the fuel / water separator.
tion.
(48) Drain the fuel / water separator. Refer to
(19) Install the front driveshaft in its original posi-
Group 9, Fuel System for the procedure.
tion.
(49) Remove the fuel lines from the fuel / water
(20) Install the lower fan shroud panel and retain-
separator and cap.
ing bolt.
(50) Remove the fuel / water separator and mount-
(21) Install the engine ground wire (Fig. 25).
ing bracket assembly from the bulkhead.
(51) Remove all the remaining wiring from the
(23) Working inside the vehicle, install the shifter
engine assembly and position it out of the way.
on the transmission
(52) Attach a lifting device to the engine lifting
(24) Install the shifter boot seal.
brackets and slightly raise the weight off the engine
mounts.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 21
Fig. 22 Transfer Case Shift Linkage — 4x4 Fig. 24 Exhaust System Inlet Pipe Connection
Fig. 23 Clutch Slave Cylinder Fig. 25 Engine Ground Wire Location

(25) Install the center console. Refer to Group 23, (29) Install the coolant reservoir supply hose on
Body for the procedure. the engine (Fig. 26).
(26) Position, connect and secure all engine wiring (30) Install the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses
in its original position on the engine (Fig. 26).
(27) On L.H.D. vehicles, connect the heater core (31) Install the upper and lower radiator hoses on
coolant supply and brake vacuum supply hoses on the engine.
the engine. (32) Fill the cooling system. Refer to Group 7,
(28) On R.H.D. vehicles, position the steel line Cooling System, for the procedure.
assembly and connect the heater core coolant supply (33) Connect the oil pressure sensor electrical con-
and the brake vacuum supply hoses on the engine. nector (Fig. 26).
9 - 22 ENGINE XJ
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

REMOVAL

COOLANT CAN OCCUR.
(2) On right hand drive vehicles, drain the cooling

system. Refer to Group 7, Cooling System for the pro-
cedure.
(3) Recover the air conditioning system, if
equipped. Refer to Group 24, Heating and Air Condi-
tioning for the procedure.
(4) Remove the A/C lines at the compressor and
cap all openings. Refer to Group 24, Heating and Air
Conditioning for the procedure. Remove the A/C line
support bracket attached to cylinder head cover, and
Fig. 26 LHD Engine Compartment — Diesel move the A/C, vacuum lines away from the cylinder
head.
(34) Connect the EGR vacuum supply hose on the (5) Remove the generator support brace.
engine (Fig. 26). (6) Remove the Crankcase breather hose from the
(35) Install the air filter outlet hose and connect rear of the valve cover
the breather hose on the engine (Fig. 26). (7) Remove the cylinder head cover bolts.
(36) Install the refrigerant suction and discharge (8) Remove the cylinder head cover.
lines. Torque the retaining bolts on the A/C compres-
sor to 22 Nzm (200 in. lbs.). Make sure the O-Rings INSTALLATION
are well lubricated and free of tears. (1) Install the cylinder head cover. Torque the bolts
(37) Charge the refrigerant system. Refer to Group to 15 N·m (133 in. lbs.).
24, Heating and Air Conditioning for the procedure. (2) Connect the crankcase breather hose.
(38) Install the manual cooling fan. (3) Install the generator support brace. Torque
(39) Connect the electric cooling fan electrical con- bolts to 7 N·m (62 in. lbs.).
nector. (4) Install the A/C lines on the compressor and
(40) Install the battery tray. install the support bracket on the cylinder head
(41) With assistance from another person, install cover. Torque bolt to 7 N·m (62 in. lbs.).
the hood. (5) Connect the negative battery cable.
(6) If equipped with A/C, evacuate and charge the
NOTE: Use the previously marked hinge locations air conditioning system. Refer to Group 24, Heater
for alignment reference. and Air Conditioning.
(7) On right hand drive vehicles, fill the cooling
(42) Install the hood retaining bolts.
system. Check for leaks.
(43) Install the rivets on the hood latch cable con-
trol assembly. WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN THE
(44) Install the hood latch assemblies on the hood. ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN DIRECT
(45) Install and connect the engine compartment lamp. LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT HANDS NEAR
(46) Install the battery and connect both of the THE PULLEYS, BELTS OR FAN. DO NOT WEAR
battery cables. LOOSE CLOTHING.
(47) Fill the power steering fluid. Refer to Group
19, Steering — Power Steering Pump-Initial opera- (8) Operate the engine with the radiator cap off.
tion for the procedure. Inspect for leaks and continue operating the engine
(48) Fill the transmission fluid. Refer to Group 21, until the thermostat opens. Add coolant, if required.
Transmission and Transfer Case for the procedure.
(49) Check the engine oil level before engine start
up.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 23
HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
REMOVAL
Fig. 28 Tappet And Retainer

CAUTION: The plunger and tappet bodies are not
interchangeable. The plunger and valve must
always be fitted to the original body. It is advisable
to work on one tappet at a time to avoid mixing of
parts. Mixed parts are not compatible. DO NOT dis-
assemble a tappet on a dirty work bench.
INSTALLATION
Fig. 27 Tappet And Rocker Arm Assembly
(1) Lubricate the tappets.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (2) Install the tappets and retainers in their origi-
(2) Discharge the air conditioning system, if nal positions. Ensure that the oil feed hole in the
equipped. Refer to Group 24, Heating and Air Condi- side of the tappet body faces up (away from the
tioning for procedure. crankshaft).
(3) If equipped with air conditioning, remove the (3) Install the cylinder head, intake manifold, and
A/C lines at the compressor and cap. exhaust manifold. Refer to cylinder head removal
(4) Remove the A/C line bracket attached to the and installation in this section.
cylinder head cover and move the lines away from (4) Install the push rods.
the cylinder head. (5) Install the rocker arms. Refer to rocker arms
(5) Remove cylinder head cover. Refer to cylinder and push rod removal and installation in this section.
head cover removal and installation procedure in this (6) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin-
section. der head cover removal and installation in this sec-
(6) Remove the rocker assemblies and push rods. tion.
Refer to rocker arms and push rod removal and (7) Connect the negative battery cable.
installation procedure in this section. Identify push
rods to ensure installation in original location. CAUTION: To prevent damage to valve mechanism,
(7) Remove cylinder head, intake manifold, and engine must not be run above fast idle until all
exhaust manifold. Refer to cylinder head removal hydraulic tappets have filled with oil and have
and installation in this section. become quiet.
(8) Remove the tappet retainers (Fig. 28).
(9) Slide Hydraulic Tappet Remover/Installer Tool (8) Start and operate engine. Warm up to normal
through opening in block and seat tool firmly in the operating temperature.
head of tappet.
(10) Pull the tappet out of the bore with a twisting
motion. If all tappets are to be removed, identify tap-
pets to ensure installation in original location.
9 - 24 ENGINE XJ
ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS (5) Install the generator bracket. Torque bolts to 7
N·m (4 ft. lbs.).
REMOVAL (6) If equipped, evacuate and charge the air condi-
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. tioning system. Refer to Group 24, Heater and Air
(2) Discharge the air conditioning system, if Conditioning.
equipped. Refer to Group 24, Heating and Air Condi- (7) Connect the negative battery cable.
tioning for procedure.
(3) If equipped with air conditioning, remove the VALVE SPRINGS
service valves and cap the compressor ports. Refer to This procedure can be done with the engine cylin-
Group 24, Heating and Air Conditioning. der head installed on the block.
(4) Remove the generator bracket.
(5) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin- REMOVAL
der head cover removal and installation in this sec- (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
tion. Each valve spring is held in place by a retainer
(6) Remove the rocker arm retaining nut (Fig. 29). and a set of conical valve locks. The locks can be
removed only by compressing the valve spring.
(2) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin-
der head cover removal and installation in this sec-
tion.
(3) Remove the rocker arms assemblies and push
rods. Refer to rocker arm and push rod removal and
installation in this section. Retain the push rods, and
rocker arms assemblies in the same order and posi-
tion as removed.
(5) Install an air hose adaptor in the fuel injector
hole.
against their seats.
Compressor Tool to compress the spring and remove
the locks.
(8) Remove the valve spring and retainer.
(9) Inspect the valve stems, especially the grooves.
Fig. 29 Rocker Arm Retaining Nut An Arkansas smooth stone should be used to remove
(7) Remove the rocker assembly. Place them on a nicks and high spots.
bench in the same order as removed.
(8) Remove the push rods and place them on a INSTALLATION
bench in the same order as removed. (1) Install the valve spring and retainer.
(2) Compress the valve spring with Valve Spring
INSTALLATION Compressor Tool and insert the valve locks. Release
(1) Rotate the crankshaft until the mark lines up the spring tension and remove the tool. Tap the
with the TDC mark on the timing cover. spring from side-to-side to ensure that the spring is
(2) Install the push rods in the same order as seated properly on the engine cylinder head.
removed. (3) Disconnect the air hose. Remove the adaptor
(3) Install the rocker arm assemblies in the same from the fuel injector hole and install the fuel injec-
order as removed. Torque nuts to 29.4 N·m (264 in. tor.
lbs.). (4) Repeat the procedures for each remaining valve
(4) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin- spring to be removed.
der head cover removal and installation in this (5) Install the push rods. Ensure the bottom end of
group. each rod is centered in the plunger cap seat of the
hydraulic valve tappet.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 25
(6) Install the rocker arm assemblies, in their orig-
inal locations. Torque nuts to 29.4 N·m (264 in. lbs.).
(7) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin-
tion.
ENGINE CYLINDER HEAD

REMOVAL

COOLANT CAN OCCUR.

Cooling System for procedure.
(3) Discharge the air conditioning system, if
equipped. Refer to Group 24, Heating and Air Condi-
tioning for procedure. Fig. 30 Turbocharger
(4) If equipped with air conditioning, remove the
A/C lines at the compressor and cap. Refer to Group
24, Heating and Air Conditioning. Remove A/C line
bracket attached to cylinder head cover, and move
A/C lines away from cylinder head.
(5) Remove the air cleaner hose from turbocharger
and breather hose.
(6) Remove the air cleaner assembly and breather
hose.
(7) Remove the generator support bracket.
recovery hose.
(9) Remove the water manifold and recovery hose.
(10) Disconnect the heater hoses and coolant
recover bottle hose.
(11) Disconnect the EGR tube from EGR valve.
(12) Remove the EGR valve
(13) Remove the exhaust heat shield from exhaust Fig. 31 Rocker Arm Oil Feed Lines
manifold. (21) Remove the Crankcase breather hose from
(14) Remove the exhaust heat shield from down rear of the valve cover
pipe. (22) Remove the injector sensor wire and the glow
(15) Remove the exhaust down pipe from turbo- plug hot lead.
charger (Fig. 30). (23) Remove the fuel lines and fuel filter. Refer to
(16) Disconnect the oil feed line from turbocharger. Group 14, Fuel Systems for procedure.
(17) Disconnect the oil drain line from turbo- (24) Remove the injector fuel lines from injectors
charger. to pump.
(18) Remove the Exhaust manifold. Refer to Group (25) Remove the fuel injectors with tool VM.1012
11, Exhaust System and Turbocharger. (Fig. 32). Refer to Group 14, Fuel System for proce-
(19) Remove the Intake manifold. Refer to intake dure.
manifold removal and installation procedure in this (26) Remove the engine cylinder head cover.
section. (27) Remove the rocker retaining nuts (Fig. 34).
(20) Remove the oil feed line for rocker arm (28) Remove the rocker arm assemblies. Place
assemblies (Fig. 31). them on a bench in the same order as removed.
9 - 26 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 32 Fuel Injector Tool VM.1012
Fig. 34 Rocker Arm Retaining Nuts
Fig. 33 Fuel Injector

(29) Remove the push rods and place them on a
bench in the same order as removed.
(30) Mark the cylinder head positions.
(31) Remove the engine cylinder head bolts with
special tool VM.1018 and VM.1019.
(32) Remove the engine cylinder head and gasket.
(33) Stuff clean lint free shop towels into the cyl-
inder bores.
CYLINDER HEAD GASKETS

A steel cylinder head gasket is used for all four cyl-
Fig. 35 Steel Type Cylinder Head Gasket—
inder heads.
identification
Cylinder head gaskets are available in three thick-
nesses. Identification holes in the right front corner CAUTION: Piston protrusion must be measured, to
of the gasket indicate the thickness of the gasket determine cylinder head gasket thickness, if one or
(Fig. 35). more cylinder wall liners have been replaced.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 27
NOTE: If cylinder wall liners have not been INSTALLATION
removed; the same thickness head gasket removed, (1) Remove the shop towels from the cylinder
may be used. bores. Coat the bores with clean engine oil.
(2) Install cylinder head alignment studs VM.1009.
(3) After determining the correct head gasket
MEASURING PISTON PROTRUSION
thickness, clean the block and head mating surfaces,
(1) Use special tool VM.1010 with dial indicator place the engine cylinder head gasket over the align-
special tool VM.1013 (Fig. 36). ment studs.
(4) Place the engine cylinder head over the align-
ment studs.
CAUTION: New cylinder head bolts should be used.

(5) Tighten the engine cylinder head bolts in
sequence according to the following procedure (Fig.
38):
a. The threads and underside heads of the bolts
should be lubricated. Use the cylinder head align-
ment studs tool number VM-1009. Position the heads
on the block and secure with the ten large center
bolts and spacers (clamps), finger tight only.
b. Ensure that the various clamps are installed
correctly and the head gasket remains in it’s proper
position, completely covered. Then, lubricate and
install the eight small bolts, also finger tight.
Fig. 36 Measuring Piston Protrusion (6) Install the intake and exhaust manifolds with
a new gasket, partially tightening the nuts to a max-
(2) Bring the piston of cylinder no. 1 exactly to top imum of 5 N·m (44 in. lbs.). This will align the heads.
dead center. Refer to Group 11, Exhaust System and Turbo-
(3) Zero the dial indicator on the cylinder block charger for the proper procedure. Install lift eye and
mating surface. brake vacuum tube at this time.
(4) Setup the dial indicator on the piston crown (7) Then, tighten the 12mm bolts with special tool
(above the center of the piston pin) 5mm (1/8 in.) VM.1019 in the following manner:
from the edge of the piston and note the measure- (8) 1st Phase: Tightening Head Bolts (Fig. 38).
ment (Fig. 37). Central bolts (A-L): Tighten all bolts, starting with
(5) Repeat the procedure with the rest of the cyl- bolt H then G-F-E-D-C-B-A-L-I, to 30 N·m. Tighten
inders. all bolts an additional 70°, starting with bolt A and
(6) Establish the thickness of the steel gasket for continuing in alphabetical order. Finally, tighten all
all four cylinder heads on the basis of the greatest bolts an additional 70°, starting again with bolt A
piston protrusion (Fig. 35). and continuing in alphabetical order.
(9) Tighten the 14mm bolts in the following man-
ner:
(10) Side bolts (M1-M2): Tighten M1 bolts to 30
N·m, then rotate them 85° (65). Tighten M2 bolts to
30 N·m, then rotate them 85° (65).
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with A/C do not install

A/C lines to compressor and charge A/C till Phase 2
is complete.
(11) 2nd Phase: After 20 minutes of engine oper-

ation at operating temperature, allow engine to cool
Fig. 37 Piston Protrusion Chart down completely. Then retorque the head bolts as fol-
CAUTION: Gaskets are to be installed DRY. DO NOT lows:
use a gasket sealing compound on the gasket. (12) Central bolts A-L: Completely back off bolts
one-by-one and then retighten to 30 N·m plus 130°
(65°). Then proceed in the same way, bolt by bolt,
following alphabetical order, as indicated.
9 - 28 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 38 Engine Cylinder Head Bolt Tightening Sequence

(13) Side bolts M1-M2: Without slackening, (22) Install the water manifold. Torque bolts to 12
torque bolts M1 then bolts M2 to 90 N·m (66 ft. lbs.). N·m (106 in. lbs.).
(14) Torque intake nuts to 32 N·m (24 ft. lbs.) and (23) Install the generator support bracket.
exhaust manifolds nuts to 32 N·m (24 ft. lbs.) after (24) Raise the vehicle on hoist.
completing the cylinder head torquing procedure. (25) Install the exhaust down pipe to turbocharger,
tighten bolts to 22 N·m (16 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: If the engine cylinder head is to be replaced (26) Install the exhaust down pipe heat shield.
and the original valves used, measure the valve (27) Install the exhaust heat shield, Tighten bolts
stem diameter. Only standard size valves can be to 11 N·m (8 ft. lbs.).
used with a service replacement engine cylinder (28) Install the EGR valve to intake manifold,
head unless the replacement head valve stem guide tighten bolts to 26 N·m (19 ft. lbs.).
bores are reamed to accommodate oversize valve (29) Install the EGR tube to EGR valve, tighten
stems. Remove all carbon buildup and reface the bolts to 26 N·m (19 ft. lbs.).
valves. (30) Install the lower Charge air cooler hose to tur-
bocharger.
(15) Install the oil feed lines for the rocker arm (31) Install the air cleaner assembly and hose.
assemblies and oil pressure switch. Torque oil feed (32) Install the oil breather hose to air cleaner
lines to 13 N·m (115 in. lbs.). hose.
(16) Install the push rods and rocker arm assem- (33) Install the upper charge cooler hose to turbo-
blies, tighten nuts to 29 N·m (22 ft. lbs.). charger.
(17) Install the cylinder head cover. Torque bolts to (34) Connect the recover bottle hose to water man-
15 N·m (133 in. lbs.). ifold.
(18) Connect the crankcase breather hose. (35) Install the fuel injectors using special tool
(19) Connect the injector sensor wire and the glow VM.1012. Refer to Group 14, Fuel System for proce-
plug hot lead. dures.
(20) Install the turbocharger oil feed line. Torque (36) Install the fuel injector lines from the pump
banjo bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs). to injectors. Torque nuts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.).
(21) Install the turbocharger oil drain line. Torque (37) Connect the A/C lines to compressor and
bolts to 11 N·m (97 in. lbs.). install bracket on cylinder head cover, if equipped
with air conditioning.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 29
(38) Install the fuel filter, Tighten bolts to 28 N·m (3) Install the accessary drive belt. Refer to Group
(250 in. lbs.) 7, Cooling System for procedure.
(39) Connect the fuel supply and return lines (4) Connect the negateive battery cable.
(40) Connect the upper radiator hose.
(41) Connect the negative cable battery. TIMING GEAR COVER OIL SEAL
(42) If equipped with A/C, evacuate and charge the
air conditioning system. Refer to Group 24, Heater REMOVAL
and Air Conditioning. (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
(43) Fill the cooling system. Check for leaks. (2) Remove the vibration damper. Refer to vibra-
tion damper removal and installation in this section.
ENGINE IS OPERATING. DO NOT STAND IN DIRECT CAUTION: Use care when removing the old seal.
LINE WITH THE FAN. DO NOT PUT HANDS NEAR Be sure not to damage the timing gear cover.
LOOSE CLOTHING. (3) Pry out the old seal.
(44) Operate the engine with the radiator cap off. INSTALLATION
Inspect for leaks and continue operating the engine Remove the oil seal ring. The seating diameter
until the thermostat opens. Add coolant, if required. must be 68.000 - 68.030 mm.
(1) Install the new seal using special tool
CAUTION: After rebuild or cylinder head gasket VM.1015A.
replacement, the cylinder head must be retorqued (2) Install the vibration damper. Refer to vibration
within the first 20,000km. If individual fiber type damper removal and installation in this section.
head gaskets were used. (3) Connect the negative battery cable.
NOTE: The one piece steel type head gasket does

not require, the above mentioned, retorque proce-
dure.
CYLINDER HEAD RE-TORQUE

Within the first 20,000 km (12,000 miles) after
rebuild, retorque the cylinder head bolts as follows:
(Fig. 38) Central bolts A-L: Without slackening the
bolts, following alphabetical order tighten the bolts
through an angle of 15°. Side bolts M1-M2: Without
slackening, tighten M1 then M2 bolts through an
angle of 15°.
VIBRATION DAMPER
Fig. 39 Timing Gear Cover Oil Seal
REMOVAL
TIMING GEAR COVER
(2) Remove the fan and set fan inside fan shroud
then remove fan shroud and fan as an assembly. REMOVAL
(3) Remove the accessary drive belt. Refer to (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Group 7, Cooling System for procedure. (2) Remove the fan and set fan inside fan shroud
(4) Remove the vibration damper nut. then remove fan shroud and fan as an assembly.
(5) Install special tool VM.1000-A to remove vibra- (3) Remove the accessary drive belt. Refer to
tion damper. Group 7, Cooling System for procedure.
(4) Remove the vibration damper nut.
INSTALLATION (5) Install special tool VM.1000-A to remove the
(1) Install the vibration damper and align with vibration damper.
key way. (6) Remove the fan pulley.
(2) Install the vibration damper nut. Torque nut to
NOTE: The idler pulley bolt has left hand thread.
196 N·m (147 ft. lbs.).
9 - 30 ENGINE XJ
(7) Remove the idler pulley and bracket. CAMSHAFT
(8) Remove the automatic belt tensioner.
(9) Remove the Power steering pump pulley. REMOVAL
(10) Remove the timing gear cover.
INSTALLATION
(1) Be sure the mating surfaces of the gear case
cover and the cylinder block are clean and free from
burrs.
(2) Apply a continuous 3 mm bead of Silicone
Sealer (Fig. 40) to timing cover, install within 10
minutes, tighten 6mm bolts to 10.3 N·m (91 in. lbs)
and tighten 8mm bolts to 26.2 N·m (19 ft. lbs.).
Fig. 41 Camshaft Assembly

(2) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin-
tion.
(3) Remove the cylinder heads. Refer to cylinder
head removal and installation in this section.
(4) Remove the rocker arm assemblies, push rods,
and hydraulic tappets. Refer to the respective groups
in this section.
(5) Remove the fan and set fan inside fan shroud
then remove fan shroud and fan as an assembly.
(6) Remove the accessary drive belt. Refer to
Group 7, Cooling System for procedure.
(7) Remove the radiator. Refer to Group 7, Cooling
System for procedure.
Fig. 40 Front Cover Sealer Location
(8) Remove the A/C condenser. Refer to Group 24,
(3) Install Power steering pump pulley. Torque nut Heating and Air Conditioning for procedure.
to 130 N·m (96 ft. lbs.). (9) Remove the vibration damper. Refer to vibra-
(4) Install the automatic belt tensioner. tion damper removal and installation in this section.
(5) Install the idler pulley bracket. Torque bolts to (10) Remove the power steering pump pulley.
40 N·m (29 ft. lbs.). (11) Remove timing gear cover. Refer to timing
gear cover removal and installation in this section.
NOTE: The idler pulley has left hand thread. (12) Rotate the engine to align the timing marks
as shown (Fig. 42).
(6) Install the idler pulley. Torque nut to 48 N·m
(13) Unscrew the flange bolts and remove cam-
(35 ft. lbs.).
shaft (Fig. 43).
(7) Install the fan pulley. Torque bolts to 56 N·m
(41 ft. lbs.).
THRUST PLATE INSPECTION
(8) Install the vibration damper. torque nut to 196
Check the thickness (Fig. 44) of the plate at points
N·m (147 ft. lbs.).
a-b-c-d. If the measurement is not between 3.950 -
(9) Install the accessary drive belt. Refer to Group
4.050 it must be changed.
7, Cooling System for procedure).
(10) Install the fan and fan shroud.
INSTALLATION
(1) Coat the camshaft journals with clean engine
oil and carefully install the camshaft complete with
XJ ENGINE 9 - 31
Fig. 42 Timing Marks Fig. 44 Camshaft Thrust Plate
Fig. 43 Camshaft Removal Fig. 45 Timing Marks

thrust plate and gear. Tighten retaining bolts to 24 (5) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin-
N·m (18 ft. lbs.) torque. Be sure to align the timing der head cover removal and installation in this sec-
marks as shown (Fig. 45). tion.
(2) Install the hydraulic tappets and retainers. (6) Install the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
Refer to hydraulic tappet removal and installation in gear cover removal and installation in this section.
this section. (7) Install the vibration damper. Refer to the
(3) Install the cylinder heads. Refer to cylinder vibration damper removal and installation in this
head removal and installation in this section. section.
(4) Install the push rods and rocker arm assem- (8) Install the A/C condenser. Refer to Group 24,
blies. Refer to the respective sections. Heating and Air Conditioning for procedure.
9 - 32 ENGINE XJ
(9) Install the radiator. Refer to Group 7, Cooling (5) Remove the bolts from oil pan. Remove the 6
System for procedure. bolts that are on the inside of the oil pan.
(10) Install the fan and fan shroud,. Torque fan to (6) Remove the oil pan.
56 N·m (41 ft. lbs.).
(11) If equipped, evacuate and charge the air con-
ditioning system. Refer to Group 24, Heater and Air
Conditioning for procedure.
(13) Fill the cooling system. Check for leaks.

LOOSE CLOTHING.

until the thermostat opens. Add coolant, if required.
CAMSHAFT BEARINGS Fig. 46 Oil Pan

This procedure requires that the engine is removed INSTALLATION
from the vehicle. (1) Remove all gasket material from cylinder block.
Be careful not gouge or scratch aluminum pan seal-
REMOVAL ing surface.
(1) With the engine completely disassembled, (2) Apply a continuous 3 mm bead of Silicone
remove camshaft rear plate and o-ring. Sealer to oil pan, install within 10 minutes. Install
(2) Install the proper size adapters and horseshoe the oil pan.
washers (part of Camshaft Bearing Remover/Installer (3) Install the inside oil pan bolts. Torque bolts to
Tool C-3132–A) at back of each bearing shell. Drive 11 N·m (8 ft. lbs.).
out the bearing shells. (4) Torque the smaller oil pan bolts to 11 N·m (8 ft.
lbs.). Torque the larger oil pan bolts to 25 N·m (18 ft.
INSTALLATION lbs.).
(1) Install the new camshaft bearings with Cam- (5) Install the oil drain plug. Torque to 79 N·m (58
shaft Bearing Remover/Installer Tool C3131–A by ft. lbs).
sliding the new camshaft bearing shell over proper (6) Lower the vehicle from hoist.
adapter. (7) Fill engine with proper amount of oil.
(2) Position the rear bearing in the tool. Install (8) Connect the negative battery cable.
horseshoe lock and by reversing removal procedure,
carefully drive bearing shell into place. OIL PUMP
(3) Install the remaining bearings in the same
manner. The Bearings must be carefully aligned to REMOVAL
bring oil holes into full register with oil passages (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
from the main bearing. If the camshaft bearing shell (2) Remove the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
oil holes are not in exact alignment, remove and gear cover removal and installation in this section).
install them correctly. Install a new rear plate o-ring (3) Remove the oil pump (Fig. 47).
at the rear of camshaft. Be sure this seal does not
leak. INSTALLATION
(1) Install new O-ring and lubricate with clean
OIL PAN engine oil.
(2) Install the oil pump. Torque screws to 24.5-29.9
REMOVAL N·m (22.7-28.3 ft. lbs.). Check for normal backlash
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. between pump and crankshaft gears.
(2) Raise the vehicle on hoist. (3) Install the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
(3) Drain the oil. gear cover removal and installation in this section.
(4) Remove the oil pan lower cover (Fig. 46).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 33
Fig. 47 Oil Pump Removal Fig. 49 Vacuum Pump

INTERNAL VACUUM PUMP (5) Remove the internal vacuum pump.
REMOVAL
(2) Remove the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
gear cover removal in this section.
(3) Align all the timing marks before removing the
vacuum pump (Fig. 48).
(4) Remove the vacuum pump retaining bolts..
Fig. 50 Vacuum Pump Parts

INSTALLATION
(1) To install the vacuum pump, align the outer
part of the gear with the inner part using a screw-
driver or similar tool, align with timing marks on
gear set and install (Fig. 48). Torque bolts to 20 N·m
(15 ft. lbs.).
(2) Install the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
gear cover removal in this section.
Fig. 48 Timing Marks
9 - 34 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 51 Vacuum Pump Mounting Hole Fig. 52 Oil Pressure Relief Valve
OIL PUMP PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (4) Remove the oil filter base, allen bolt in center
of adapter.
REMOVAL (5) Remove the oil cooler adapter bolt.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable (6) Remove the oil cooler (Fig. 53).
(2) Remove the oil pan. Refer to oil pan removal
and installation procedure in this section.
(3) Remove the relief valve snap ring.
(4) Remove the relief valve cap, spring, and
plunger (Fig. 52).
(5) Check the relief valve spring length. Relief
valve spring free length is 57.5mm (2.263 in.). If
spring length is less or spring is distorted it must be
replaced.
(6) Check the plunger for scoring, replace if neces-
sary.
INSTALLATION
(1) Thoroughly clean all components and relief
valve pocket in cylinder block.
(2) Fit plunger, spring and cap into block.
(3) Compress spring and install the snap ring.
Ensure the snap ring is completely seated in groove.
(4) Install the oil pan. Refer to oil pan removal
and installation procedure in this section.
OIL FILTER ADAPTER Fig. 53 Oil Cooler
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (1) Install the oil cooler with new gasket. Torque
(2) Remove the oil filter. the oil cooler adapter bolt to 60 N·m (44 ft. lbs.).
(3) Remove the oil filter adapter. (2) Install the oil filter base with new o-ring.
Torque bolt to 46.6 N·m (34 ft. lbs.).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 35
(3) Install the oil filter adapter to oil filter base.
Torque to 46.6 N·m (34 ft. lbs.).
(4) Install the oil filter. Torque to 18 N·m (13 ft.
lbs.) and add oil.
PISTONS AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the battery cable.
(2) Remove cylinder heads, refer to cylinder head
removal in this section.
(3) Raise vehicle on host.
(4) Remove oil pan, refer to oil pan removal in this
section.
(5) Remove top ridge of cylinder bores with a reli-
able ridge reamer before removing pistons from cyl-
inder block. Be sure to keep tops of pistons
covered during this operation. Mark piston with
matching cylinder number.
(6) Pistons and connecting rods must be removed
from top of cylinder block. Rotate crankshaft so that
each connecting rod is centered in cylinder bore.
(7) Remove connecting rod cap. Install connecting
rod bolt protectors on connecting rod bolts. Push each
piston and rod assembly out of cylinder bore.
NOTE: Be careful not to nick crankshaft journals.

Fig. 54 Piston Assembly
(8) After removal, install bearing cap on the mat-
ing rod.
PISTON PIN—REMOVAL
(1) Secure connecting rod in a soft jawed vice.
(2) Remove 2 clips securing piston pin.
(3) Push piston pin out of piston and connecting
rod.
PISTON RING—REMOVAL
(1) ID mark on face of upper and intermediate pis-
ton rings must point toward piston crown.
(2) Using a suitable ring expander, remove upper
and intermediate piston rings (Fig. 55).
(3) Remove the upper oil ring side rail, lower oil
ring side rail and then oil ring expander from piston.
(4) Carefully clean carbon from piston crowns,
skirts and ring grooves ensuring the 4 oil holes in Fig. 55 Piston Rings—Removing and Installing
the oil control ring groove are clear. .0137 in.). Oil control ring gap .25 to .58mm (.0098 to
.0228 in.).
PISTON RING FITTING (2) If ring gaps exceed dimension given, new rings
(1) Wipe cylinder bore clean. Insert ring and push or cylinder liners must be fitted. Keep piston rings in
down with piston to ensure it is square in bore. The piston sets.
ring gap measurement must be made with the ring (3) Check piston ring to groove clearance (Fig. 57).
positioning at least 12 mm (0.50 in.) from bottom of Top compression ring gap .08 to .130mm (.0031 to
cylinder bore. Check gap with feeler gauge. Top com- .0051 in.). Second compression ring gap .070 to
pression ring gap .25 to .50mm (.0098 to .0196 in.).
Second compression ring gap .25 to .35mm (.0098 to
9 - 36 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 56 Ring Gap Measurement Fig. 58 Piston Rings—Removing and Installing

.102mm (.0027 to .0040 in.). Oil control ring gap .040
to .072mm (.0015 to .0028 in.).
Fig. 59 Piston Ring Identification

(4) Second piston ring gap should be positioned on
the opposite side of the combustion chamber recess.
(5) Oil control ring gap to be located 30 degrees to
the left of combustion chamber recess.
(6) When assembling pistons check that compo-
nents are installed in the same position as before dis-
assembly, determined by the numbers stamped on
Fig. 57 Piston Ring to Groove Clearance the crown of individual pistons. Engine cylinders are
PISTON RINGS—INSTALLATION numbered starting from gear train end of the engine.
(1) Install rings on the pistons using a suitable Face chamber recess side of piston towards
ring expander (Fig. 58). camshaft. Therefore, the numbers stamped on con
(2) Top compression ring is tapered and chromium rod big end should also face in the same direction. To
plated. The second ring is of the scraper type and insert piston into cylinder use a ring compressor as
must be installed with scraping edge facing bottom of shown in (Fig. 58).
the piston. The third is an oil control ring. Ring gaps
must be positioned, before inserting piston into the PISTON PIN INSTALLATION
liners, as follows (Fig. 60). (1) Secure connecting rod in soft jawed vice.
(3) Top ring gap must be positioned at 30 degrees (2) Lubricate piston pin and piston with clean oil.
to the right of the combustion chamber recess (look- (3) Position piston on connecting rod.
ing at the piston crown from above).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 37
CAUTION: Ensure combustion recess in piston (4) Face chamber recess side of piston towards
crown and the bearing cap numbers on the con- camshaft.
necting rod are on the same side. (5) Install connecting rod bolt protectors on rod
bolts.
(4) Install piston pin. (6) Rotate crankshaft so that the connecting rod
(5) Install clips in piston to retain piston pin. journal is on the center of the cylinder bore. Insert
(6) Remove connecting rod from vice. rod and piston into cylinder bore and guide rod over
the crankshaft journal.
INSTALLATION (7) Tap the piston down in cylinder bore, using a
(1) Before installing pistons, and connecting rod hammer handle. At the same time, guide connecting
assemblies into the bore, be sure that compression rod into position on connecting rod journal.
ring gaps are staggered so that neither is in line with (8) Install rod caps. Install nuts on cleaned and
oil ring rail gap (Fig. 60). oiled rod bolts and tighten nuts to 29.5 N·m (22 ft.
lb.) plus 60°.
CYLINDER WALL LINER ASSEMBLY

REMOVAL
(1) Remove cylinder heads.
(2) Remove Oil pan.
(3) Remove pistons.
(4) Use tool VM-1001 to remove liners (Fig. 62).
Fig. 60 Piston Ring Gap Location

(2) Before installing the ring compressor, make
sure the oil ring expander ends are butted and the
rail gaps located as shown in (Fig. 60).
Fig. 61 Installing Piston

Fig. 62 Liner Removal Tool
(3) Immerse the piston head and rings in clean
engine oil, slide the ring compressor, over the piston (5) Remove shims from cylinder liner or cylinder
and tighten with the special wrench (Fig. 61). block recess. Keep shims with each cylinder liner.
Ensure position of rings does not change dur-
ing this operation.
9 - 38 ENGINE XJ
comes into contact with the liners. Install the liners
in the crankcase as shown (A), rotating them back
and forth by 45° in order to guarantee correct posi-
tioning (Fig. 64).
(2) Measure the liner recess relative to block deck
with a dial indicator mounted on a special tool
VM-1010 A. All the measurements must be taken
on camshaft side. Zero dial gauge on block deck.
(3) Move dial gauge to cylinder liner record read-
ing on dial gauge.
(4) Remove liner and special tool.
(5) Then select the correct shim thickness to give
proper protrusion (0.01 - 0.06 mm).
(6) Fit the shim and the O-rings onto the liner.
(7) Lubricate the lower liner location in the block.
Apply LOCTITE AVX to the corner of the liner seat.
Fig. 63 Liner Inspection Apply LOCTITE AVX uniformly to the upper part of
the liner at area.
INSTALLATION
(8) Fit the liners in the crankcase making sure
(1) Carefully clean residual LOCTITE from liner
that the shim is positioned correctly in the seat. Lock
and crankcase, and degrease the crankcase where it
Fig. 64 Liner Installation

XJ ENGINE 9 - 39
the liners in position using special tool (VM-1016) (7) Remove the intake manifold, exhaust manifold
and bolts (Fig. 65). Clean the residual LOCTITE on and turbocharger. Refer to Group 11, Exhaust Sys-
the upper surface of the block deck. tem and Turbocharger.
(8) Remove the water manifold.
(9) Remove the oil feed lines to rocker arms.
(10) Remove the cylinder heads. Refer to cylinder
head removal and installation in this section.
(11) Remove the oil pan and oil pick-up.
(12) Remove the pistons and connecting rods.
(13) Remove the vibration damper. Refer to vibra-
tion damper removal and installation in this section.
(14) Remove the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
gear cover removal and installation in this section.
(15) Remove the oil pump and vacuum pump from
block.
(16) Install special tool VM.1004 onto crankshaft
over gear (Fig. 67).
(17) Remove the main bearing oil feed and crank-
shaft support locators from block.
(18) Remove the flywheel and adaptor plate from
engine block.
(19) Remove the thrust bearings from rear main
bearing carrier.
(20) Slide the crankshaft and bearing carriers
rearward to rear of block. If you encounter difficulty
in removing the complete assembly as previously
described, slide the assembly rearward sufficiently to
gain access to the main bearing carrier bolts. Mark
the carriers for assembly and remove the bolts, two
for each carrier (Fig. 68).
(21) Separate the two halves of each carrier,
Fig. 65 Liner Clamp Location remove from the crankshaft and temporarily re-as-
semble the carriers (Fig. 69). Withdraw the crank-
(9) Recheck the liner protrusion. It should be 0.01 shaft through the rear of the crankcase.
- 0.06 mm.
INSTALLATION
NOTE: A period of six hours must elapse between
the liners being installed and engine start-up. If NOTE: Be sure the oil jets are facing the front of
engine assembly is not continued after liner instal- the engine.
lation, the liners need to be clamped for twelve
hours minimum. (1) Fit the main bearing supports together. Torque
to 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.)
(2) Check internal diameter of bearings.
CRANKSHAFT MAIN BEARINGS (3) If internal diameter of original bearing is being
checked and figures are not within specifications,
REMOVAL new bearings must be used.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable. (4) Check the crankshaft main bearing journals to
(2) Remove the engine from vehicle. Refer to bearing clearances. Clearances of main bearings is
engine removal and installation in this section. .03 to .088mm (.0011 to .0035 in.).
(3) Install the engine on an engine stand.
(4) Remove the accessary drive system. NOTE: Assemble engine according to sequence
(5) Remove the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin- described, thus saving time and preventing dam-
der head cover removal and installation in this sec- ages to engine components. Clean parts with a suit-
tion. able solvent and dry them with compressed air
(6) Remove the rocker arm assemblies and push before assembly. Use new gaskets where applicable
rods. Refer to rocker arm and push rod removal and and torque wrenches for correct tightening of com-
installation in this section. ponents.
9 - 40 ENGINE XJ
Fig. 66 Crankshaft and Bearing Assembly
Fig. 68 Crankshaft Support Locator Bolts

into the crankcase in the same manner used for
removal.
(8) Align the holes in the lower supports, with the
center of the crankcase webs (Fig. 70).
Fig. 67 Crankshaft Special Tool VM.1004
(9) Secure each support assembly to the crankcase
(5) Thoroughly clean crankcase and oil passages, with the main bearing oil feed and support locators.
and blow dry with compressed air. Torque to 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs).
(6) Install new main bearing shells in each of the (10) Install the rear main bearing support onto
carrier halves. Assemble the carriers to the crank- crankshaft ensuring arrow on bearing support aligns
shaft journals, ensuring that the carriers are with vertical web in center of crankcase.
installed in their original locations and that the pis- (11) Install the rear oil seal.
ton jet notch is towards the front of the crank- (12) Install the new O-rings in adaptor plate.
shaft. Secure each carrier with the two bolts (13) Install the adaptor plate to block. Torque nuts
tightening evenly to 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.). Check that to 26.5 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
the oil jet is in position (Fig. 69). (14) Install the Allen bolts through adaptor plate
(7) Slide special tool VM.1004 over the crankshaft to rear main bearing support. Torque to 11 N·m (97
gear and, insert the crankshaft and support assembly in. lbs.).
XJ ENGINE 9 - 41
(18) Move crankshaft toward front of engine and
zero indicator.
(19) Move crankshaft toward the rear of engine
and record measurement.
(20) Subtract specified crankshaft end play from
figure obtained. Crankshaft end play .153 to .304mm
(.0060 to .0119 in.).
(21) Select thrust washers which will give correct
end play.
(22) Remove tools and flywheel.
(23) Lubricate thrust washer halves and fit them
into the rear main bearing carrier.
(24) Ensure that crankshaft end and flywheel mat-
ing surfaces are clean and dry. Install ‘‘O’’ ring in fly-
wheel groove.
(25) To verify correct end play, install 2 flywheel
bolts 180° apart, and tighten bolts to 20 N·m plus 60°
(15 ft. lbs. plus 60°).
(26) Measure crankshaft end play with a dial
gauge. Crankshaft end play should not exceed .153 to
.304mm (.0060 to .0119 in.) (Fig. 71).
Fig. 69 Crankshaft and Carrier Bearing Assembly
Fig. 71 Measuring Crankshaft End Play

CAUTION: Use NEW flywheel bolts for the following
procedure.
(27) Install a new O-ring on flywheel. Install fly-

wheel on crankshaft. The 6 flywheel bolts must be
tightened as follows:
Fig. 70 Main Bearing Support Alignment a. Lubricate and install the 6 new flywheel bolts.
b. Torque the 6 flywheel bolts to 49 N·m (36 ft.
(15) Position the flywheel and O-ring on crank- lbs.) starting one bolt and following with the opposite
shaft and align bolt holes. one (cross tightening) until completion, in a clockwise
direction..
NOTE: For purposes of checking crankshaft end
c. Loosen one bolt at a time and tighten to 19.6
play, used flywheel bolts may be used. Final assem-
N·m (14 ft. lbs.) plus 75° using the cross tightening
bly requires new flywheel bolts.
method.
(16) Install 2 flywheel bolts, 180° apart, and (28) Install the pistons and connecting rod assem-
tighten bolts to 20 N·m plus 60° (15 ft. lbs.) plus 60°. blies. Refer to piston and connecting rods removal
(17) Attach dial indicator to engine block. and installation in this section.
9 - 42 ENGINE XJ
(29) Install the oil pick up tube. Torque bolts to 25 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
N·m (18 ft. lbs.).
(30) Install the oil pan. Refer to oil pan removal HYDRAULIC TAPPETS
and installation in this section.
(31) Install the vacuum pump, being careful to DISASSEMBLE
align the gear timing marks with those on the crank- (1) Pry out plunger retainer spring clip.
shaft gear. Torque screws to 20 N·m (15 ft. lbs.). (2) Clean varnish deposits from inside of tappet
(32) Before installing the oil pump check pump body above plunger cap.
bore depth in block (A) and pump body height (B) (3) Invert tappet body and remove plunger cap,
(Fig. 72). Difference between A and B should be plunger, check valve, check valve spring, check valve
0.020-0.082 mm (.0007 to 0032 in.). retainer and plunger spring. Check valve could be
flat or ball.
ASSEMBLE
(1) Clean all tappet parts in a solvent that will
remove all varnish and carbon.
(2) Replace tappets that are unfit for further ser-
vice with new assemblies.
(3) If plunger shows signs of scoring or wear,
install a new tappet assembly. If valve is pitted, or
valve seat on end of plunger is prevented from seat-
ing, install a new tappet assembly.
(4) Assemble tappets.

CYLINDER HEAD
CLEANING
Thoroughly clean the engine cylinder head and cyl-
inder block mating surfaces. Clean the intake and
exhaust manifold and engine cylinder head mating
Fig. 72 Oil Pump Bore Depth surfaces. Remove all gasket material and carbon.
Check to ensure that no coolant or foreign material
(33) Install the oil pump. Torque screws to 27 N·M has fallen into the tappet bore area.
(20 ft. lbs.). Check for normal backlash between Remove the carbon deposits from the combustion
pump and crankshaft gears. chambers and top of the pistons.
(34) Install the timing gear cover. Refer to timing
gear cover removal and installation in this section. INSPECTION
(35) Install the vibration damper. Refer to vibra- Use a straightedge and feeler gauge to check the
tion damper removal and installation in this section. flatness of the engine cylinder head and block mating
(36) Install the cylinder heads. Refer to cylinder surfaces (Fig. 73).
head removal and installation in this section. Minimum cylinder head thickness 89.95mm (3.541
(37) Install the rocker arms and push rods. Refer in.)
to rocker arm and push rod removal and installation
in this section. CAUTION: If only one cylinder head is found to be
(38) Install the cylinder head cover. Refer to cylin- distorted and requires machining, it will also be
der head cover removal and installation in this sec- necessary to machine the remaining cylinders
tion. heads and end plates by a corresponding amount
(39) Install the accessary drive system. to maintain correct cylinder alignment.
(40) Install the engine in vehicle. Refer to engine
removal and installation in this section.
(41) Fill engine with the correct amount of fluids
specified.
XJ ENGINE 9 - 43
Inspect the valve stem tip contact surface of each
rocker arm and replace any rocker arm that is deeply
pitted.
Inspect each push rod end for excessive wear and
replace as required. If any push rod is excessively
worn because of lack of oil, replace it and inspect the
corresponding hydraulic tappet for excessive wear.
Inspect the push rods for straightness by rolling
them on a flat surface or by shining a light between
the push rod and the flat surface.
A wear pattern along the length of the push rod is
not normal. Inspect the engine cylinder head for
Fig. 73 Checking Cylinder Head Flatness
obstruction if this condition exists.
ROCKER ARMS AND PUSH RODS
PISTONS AND CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY
CLEANING
Clean all the components (Fig. 74) with cleaning INSPECTION—PISTONS
solvent. (1) Piston Diameter: Size Group A: 91.93-91.94mm
(3.6191-3.6196 in.) Size Group B: 91.94-91.95mm
(3.6196-3.6200 in.). Maximum wear limit .05mm
(.0019 in.).
(2) Check piston pin bores in piston for roundness.
Make 3 checks at 120° intervals. Maximum out of
roundness .05mm (.0019 in.).
(3) The piston diameter should be measured
approximately 15 mm (.590 in.) up from the base.
(4) Skirt wear should not exceed 0.1 mm (.00039
in.).
(5) The clearance between the cylinder liner and
piston should not exceed 0.25 mm (.0009 in.).
(6) Make sure the weight of the pistons does not
differ by more than 5 g.
INSPECTION—CONNECTING ROD
(1) Assemble bearing shells and bearing caps to
their respective connecting rods ensuring that the
serrations on the cap and reference marks are
aligned.
(2) Tighten bearing cap bolts to 29N·m (21 ft. lbs.)
plus 60°.
(3) Check and record internal diameter of crank
end of connecting rod.
NOTE: When changing connecting rods, all four

must have the same weight and be stamped with
the same number. Replacement connecting rods
Fig. 74 Rocker Arm Components will only be supplied in sets of four.
Use compressed air to blow out the oil passages in Connecting rods are supplied in sets of four since
the rocker arms and push rods. they all must be of the same weight category. Max
allowable weight difference is 18 gr.
INSPECTION
Inspect the pivot surface area of each rocker arm.
Replace any that are scuffed, pitted, cracked or
excessively worn.
9 - 44 ENGINE XJ
NOTE: On one side of the big end of the con-rod INSPECTION—PISTON PIN
there is a two-digit number which refers to the (1) Measure the diameter of piston pin in the cen-
weight category. On the other side of the big end ter and both ends.
there is a four digit number on both the rod and the (2) Piston pin diameter is 29.990 to 29.996mm
cap. These numbers must both face the camshaft (1.1807 to 1.1809 in.).
as well as the recess on the piston crown (Fig. 76).
Lightly heat the piston in oven. Insert piston pin in INSPECTION—CRANKSHAFT JOURNALS
position and secure it with provided snap rings. (1) Using a micrometer, measure and record crank-
shaft connecting rod journals, take reading of each
The Four digit numbers marked on con rod journal 120° apart. Crankshaft journal diameter is
big end and rod cap must be on the same side 53.84 to 53.955mm (2.1196 to 2.1242 in.).
as the camshaft (Fig. 76). After having coated (2) Crankshaft journals worn beyond limits or
threads with Molyguard, tighten con rod bolts to 29 show signs of out of roundness must be reground or
N·m (21 ft. lbs.) plus 60°. replaced. Minimum reground diameter is 53.69mm
(2.1137 in.).
BEARING-TO-JOURNAL CLEARANCE
Compare internal diameters of connecting rod with
crankshaft journal diameter. Maximum clearance
between connecting rod and crankshaft journals .022
to .076mm (.0008 to .0029 in.).
Fig. 75 Connecting Rod Identification
Fig. 77 Bearing Clearance

CYLINDER WALL LINER ASSEMBLY
INSPECTION
The cylinder walls should be checked for out-of-
round and taper with dail bore gauge. The cylinder
bore out-of-round is 0.100 mm (.0039 inch) maximum
and cylinder bore taper is 0.100 mm (0.0039 inch)
maximum. If the cylinder walls are badly scuffed or
scored, new liners should be installed and honed, and
new pistons and rings fitted.
Measure the cylinder bore at three levels in direc-
tions A and B (Fig. 78). Top measurement should be
10 mm ( 3/8 inch) down and bottom measurement
should be 10 mm ( 3/8 inch.) up from bottom of bore.
Fig. 76 Piston and Connecting Rod Assembly
XJ ENGINE 9 - 45
Fig. 78 Liner Inspection Fig. 80 Oil Pump Inner and Outer Rotors
OIL PUMP
CLEANING
Wash all parts in a suitable solvent and inspect
carefully for damage or wear.
INSPECTION
(1) Before installing oil pump check pump bore
depth in block (A) and pump body height (B) (Fig.
79). Difference between A and B should be
0.020-0.082 mm.
Fig. 81 Checking Rotor Clearance
Fig. 79 Oil Pump Bore Depth

(2) Check clearance between rotors (Fig. 81).
9 - 46 ENGINE XJ
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
XJ ENGINE 9 - 47
9 - 48 ENGINE XJ
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS DESCRIPTION TORQUE

Front timing cover
DESCRIPTION TORQUE 6 mm bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m
Adaptor Plate to Block 8 mm bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 N·m
Nuts (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.5 N·m ( 20 ft. lbs.) Fuel filter
Automatic Belt Tensioner to Block Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
Bolts (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 N·m Glow plug
Automatic Belt Tensioner to Mounting Bracket Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0 N·m
Bolt (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m Idler pulley bracket
Generator belt Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 N·m
Tensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 N·m Idler pulley
Generator bracket Bolt (left hand thread) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m
Mounting bolts (6 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m Injection pump fuel lines
Mounting bolts (8 mm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.4 N·m Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m
Generator Injection pump gear
Mounting bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m Lock nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 N·m
Camshaft thrust plate Injection pump
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 N·m Mounting nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5 N·m
Connecting rod Injector
Mounting bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.5 N·m +60° Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.5 N·m
Crankshaft bearing Intake manifold
Carrier screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 N·m Mounting nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5 N·m
Crankshaft pulley Main bearing oil delivery
Locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 N·m Union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m
Crossmember Water hose to cylinder head
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 N·m Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 to 10 N·m
Diesel delivery Oil cooler adaptor
Union nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.5 N·m Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 N·m
EGR valve Oil feed line
To intake manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 N·m For rocker arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 N·m
EGR tube To block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m
To EGR valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 N·m To vacuum pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 N·m
Engine mount—Front Oil filter
Engine support bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 N·m
Support Cushion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m Oil filter adapter
Support cushion bracket bolts . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46.6 N·m
Support cushion bracket stud nuts . . . . . . . . 41 N·m Oil filter base
Support Cushion through bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 65 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46.6 N·m
Engine mount—Rear Oil pan
Transmission support bracket . . . . . . . . . . . 46 N·m Mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 N·m
Support Cushion nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m Oil pickup tube
Support Cushion through bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 65 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 N·m
Exhaust down pipe Oil pump
To turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m Mounting screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m
Exhaust heat shield Oil sump drain plug
Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m
Exhaust manifold collar Power steering pressure hose
Mounting nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.5 to 29.5 N·m Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
Exhaust manifold Power steering pulley
Mounting nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5 N·m Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 N·m
Fan drive Rear crankshaft bearing carrier Allen Bolts
To fan hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 N·m Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m
Flywheel Rocker cover
Lock bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 N·m +60° Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 N·m
XJ ENGINE 9 - 49
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Rocker mounting
Lock Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 N·m
Steering pump
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
Turbocharger
Mounting nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5 N·m
Turbocharger
Oil delivery fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5 N·m
Turbocharger oil drain
Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 N·m
Vacuum pump
Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m
Water manifold
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 N·m
Water pump pulley
Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m Crankshaft Bearing Remover/Replacer VM. 1002
SPECIAL TOOLS
SPECIAL TOOLS
Injection Pump Puller and Gear retainer VM. 1003
Crankshaft Pulley and Gear Remover VM. 1000A
Crankshaft Remover/Replacer Sleeve VM. 1004
Cylinder Liner Puller VM, 1001

9 - 50 ENGINE XJ
Torque Angle Gauge VM. 1005 Cylinder Liner Protrusion Tool VM. 1010
Cylinder Head Bolt Wrench VM. 1006A Bosch Pump Timing Adapter VM. 1011
Cylinder Head Guide Studs VM. 1009 Injector Remover/Replacer Socket VM. 1012
XJ ENGINE 9 - 51
Dial Indicator Gauge VM. 1013 Cylinder Retainer VM. 1016
Flywheel Locking Tool VM. 1014
Crankshaft and Water Pump Pulley Holder VM. 1017
Timing Cover Oil Seal Replacer VM. 1015
Cylinder Head Bolt Wrench M12 VM. 1018

9 - 52 ENGINE XJ
Cylinder Head Bolt Wrench M14 VM. 1019 Cylinder Leakage Tester Adapter VM. 1021
XJ EXHAUST SYSTEM 11 - 1
EXHAUST SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION EXHAUST PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MUFFLER AND EXHAUST TAILPIPE . . . . . . . . . . 4
EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 SPECIFICATIONS
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
CATALYTIC CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL INFORMATION The 4.0L engines use a seal between the engine
exhaust manifold and exhaust pipe to assure a tight
EXHAUST SYSTEM seal and strain free connections.
The basic exhaust system consists of an engine The exhaust system must be properly aligned to
exhaust manifold, exhaust pipe with oxygen sensor, prevent stress, leakage and body contact. If the sys-
catalytic converter with oxygen sensor, muffler and tem contacts any body panel, it may amplify objec-
exhaust tailpipe (Fig. 1). tionable noises originating from the engine or body.
When inspecting an exhaust system, critically
inspect for cracked or loose joints, stripped screw or
bolt threads, corrosion damage and worn, cracked or
broken hangers. Replace all components that are
badly corroded or damaged. DO NOT attempt to
repair.
When replacement is required, use original equip-
ment parts (or their equivalent). This will assure
proper alignment and provide acceptable exhaust
noise levels.
CAUTION: Avoid application of rust prevention

compounds or undercoating materials to exhaust
system floor pan exhaust heat shields. Light over
spray near the edges is permitted. Application of
coating will result in excessive floor pan tempera-
tures and objectionable fumes.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
The stainless steel catalytic converter body is
designed to last the life of the vehicle. Excessive heat
can result in bulging or other distortion, but exces-
sive heat will not be the fault of the converter. If
unburned fuel enters the converter, overheating may
occur. If a converter is heat-damaged, correct the
cause of the damage at the same time the converter
is replaced. Also, inspect all other components of the
exhaust system for heat damage.
Fig. 1 Exhaust System—2.5L/4.0L Unleaded gasoline must be used to avoid contami-
The exhaust system uses a single muffler with a cat- nating the catalyst core.
alytic converter consisting of dual ceramic monoliths.
11 - 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM XJ
EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHART
EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE OR 1. Leaks at pipe joints. 1. Tighten clamps/bolts at leaking

LEAKING EXHAUST GASES joints.
2. Rusted or blown out muffler. 2. Replace muffler. Inspect exhaust
system.
3. Broken or rusted out exhaust 3. Replace exhaust pipe.
pipe.
4. Exhaust pipe leaking at manifold 4. Tighten/replace flange attaching
flange. nuts/bolts.
5. Exhaust manifold cracked or 5. Replace exhaust manifold.
broken.
6. Leak between exhaust manifold 6. Tighten exhaust manifold to
and cylinder head. cylinder head bolts.
7. Catalytic converter rusted or 7. Replace catalytic converter assy.
blown out.
8. Restriction in exhaust system. 8. Remove restriction, if possible.
Replace restricted part if necessary.
When servicing and replacing exhaust system components, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector(s). Allowing
the exhaust to hang by the oxygen sensor wires will damage the harness and/or sensor.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (6) Remove the clamp nuts and clamp (Fig. 2). To
remove the exhaust pipe from the catalytic converter,
EXHAUST PIPE apply heat until the metal becomes cherry red. Dis-
connect the exhaust pipe from the catalytic converter
WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORK- (Fig. 2). Remove the exhaust pipe.
ING ON THE EXHAUST SYSTEM, DO NOT ALLOW
THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINES. INSTALLATION
(1) Assemble exhaust pipe to manifold and cata-
lytic converter loosely to permit proper alignment of
CAUTION: When servicing exhaust system compo- all parts.
nents, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector. (2) Use a new clamp and tighten the nuts to 61
Allowing the exhaust system to hang by the oxygen N·m (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
sensor harness will damage the wiring and/or sen- (3) Connect the exhaust pipe to the engine exhaust
sor. manifold. Install a new seal between the exhaust
manifold and the exhaust pipe (4.0L engine only).
Tighten the nuts to 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.) torque (Fig.
REMOVAL 2).
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. (4) Install the rear crossmember. Install and
(2) Saturate the bolts and nuts with heat valve tighten the four (4) crossmember to rear mount nuts
lubricant (Fig. 2). Allow 5 minutes for penetration. to 22 N·m (16 ft. lbs.) Install and tighten the cross-
(3) Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector (Fig. member to sill bolts to 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.) torque.
3). Remove the support from the transmission.
(4) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the engine (5) Coat the oxygen sensor with anti-seize com-
exhaust manifold. Discard the seal (4.0L engine, pound. Install the sensor and tighten the nut to 27
only). N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
(5) Support the transmission and remove the rear (6) Lower the vehicle.
crossmember.
Fig. 2 Exhaust Pipe Removal—2.5L/4.0L

CAUTION: When servicing exhaust system compo-
nents, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector.
Allowing the exhaust system to hang by the oxygen
sensor harness will damage the wiring and/or sen-
sor.
REMOVAL
(2) Remove the clamps from the catalytic converter
and muffler connection (Fig. 4).
(3) Disconnect and remove the oxygen sensor from
the catalytic converter.
(4) Heat the catalytic converter and muffler con-
nection with an oxyacetylene torch until the metal
becomes cherry red.
(5) While the metal is still cherry red, twist the
muffler assembly back and forth to separate it from
the catalytic converter.
(6) Disconnect the exhaust pipe from the catalytic
converter (Fig. 4). If needed, heat up the pipes to sep-
arate.
Fig. 3 Oxygen Sensor Location—2.5L/4.0L
INSTALLATION
(7) Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks (1) Connect the catalytic converter to the exhaust
and exhaust system contact with the body panels. pipe and the muffler/tailpipe assy. (Fig. 4). Use a new
Adjust the alignment, if needed. clamp and tighten the nuts to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.)
torque.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (2) Install the muffler onto the catalytic converter
until the alignment tab is inserted into the align-
WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORK-
ment slot.
THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINES.
11 - 4 EXHAUST SYSTEM XJ
(3) Remove the front exhaust clamp from the cat-
alytic converter and muffler connection (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Catalytic Converter to Muffler and Exhaust

Pipe Connection
(3) Install a new clamp at the muffler and cata-
lytic converter connection (Fig. 4). Tighten the clamp Fig. 5 Front Exhaust Tailpipe Hanger
nut to 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.) torque.
(4) Coat the oxygen sensor with anti-seize com-
pound. Install the sensor and tighten the nut to 27
(6) Start the engine and inspect for exhaust leaks
and exhaust system contact with the body panels.
Adjust the alignment, if needed.
MUFFLER AND EXHAUST TAILPIPE

All original equipment exhaust systems are manu-
factured with the exhaust tailpipe welded to the muf-
fler. Service replacement mufflers and exhaust
tailpipes are either clamped together or welded
together.
WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORK- Fig. 6 Catalytic Converter to Muffler Connection
THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINE. (4) Heat the catalytic converter-to-muffler connec-
tion with an oxyacetylene torch until the metal
becomes cherry red.
CAUTION: When servicing exhaust system compo- (5) While the metal is still cherry red, remove the
nents, disconnect the oxygen sensor connector. exhaust muffler/tailpipe assembly from the catalytic
Allowing the exhaust system to hang by the oxygen converter.
sensor harness will damage the wiring and/or sensor. (6) Slide the muffler/tailpipe assy. rearward and
out of the rear exhaust tailpipe mounting bracket
REMOVAL (Fig. 7).
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. (7) Remove the muffler from the exhaust tailpipe:
(2) Disconnect front tailpipe hanger from the insu- • To remove an original equipment exhaust muf-
lator (Fig. 5). fler/tailpipe combination, cut the exhaust tailpipe
(6) Align the tailpipe and install a new clamp at
the muffler to tailpipe connection.
(7) Tighten the muffler to tailpipe clamp to 61 N·m
(45 ft. lbs.)
SPECIFICATIONS
Description Torque
Catalytic Converter/Exhaust Pipe
Exhaust Clamp Nut . . . . . . . . . . 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.)
Crossmember to Sill
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.)
Crossmember to Transmission Mount
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m (16 ft. lbs.)
Exhaust Pipe to Manifold
Fig. 7 Rear Exhaust Tailpipe Mounting Bracket Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
close to the muffler. Collapse the part remaining in Exhaust Manifold–2.5L Engine
the muffler and remove. Bolt #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.)
• To remove a service exhaust tailpipe/muffler Exhaust Manifold–2.5L Engine
combination, apply heat until the metal becomes Nuts #6&7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
cherry red. Remove the exhaust tailpipe/muffler Exhaust Manifold–4.0L Engine
clamp and twist the exhaust tailpipe out of the muf- Nuts #6&7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
fler. Bolt #3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 N·m (24 ft. lbs.)
Intake Manifold–2.5L Engine
INSTALLATION Bolt #2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
(1) Install the muffler onto the catalytic converter. Intake & Exhaust Manifold–2.5L Engine
Install the clamp and tighten the nut finger tight. Bolts #2–5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 N·m (23 ft. lbs.)
(2) Install the exhaust tailpipe into the rear of the Intake & Exhaust Manifold–4.0L Engine
muffler. Nuts/Bolts #1,2,4,5,8–11 . . . . . . . 33 N·m (24 ft. lbs.)
(3) Install the exhaust tailpipe/muffler assembly Muffler to Catalytic Converter
on the rear exhaust tailpipe mounting bracket. Make Exhaust Clamp Nut . . . . . . . . . . 61 N·m (45 ft. lbs.)
sure that the exhaust tailpipe has sufficient clear- Oxygen Sensors
ance from the floor pan. Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
(4) Install front tailpipe hanger into the insulator Rear Tail Pipe Hanger
(Fig. 5).
Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
(5) Align the muffler and tighten the nuts on the
muffler-to-catalytic converter clamp to 61 N·m (45 ft.
lbs.) torque (Fig. 6).
XJ EXHAUST SYSTEM AND TURBOCHARGER 11 - 1
EXHAUST SYSTEM AND TURBOCHARGER

CONTENTS
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION EXHAUST PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

EXHAUST HEAT SHIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 INTAKE MANIFOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
EXHAUST SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MUFFLER AND EXHAUST TAILPIPE . . . . . . . . . . 2
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
(LHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER
(RHD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
GENERAL INFORMATION EXHAUST HEAT SHIELDS

Exhaust heat shields are needed to protect both
EXHAUST SYSTEM the vehicle and the environment from the high tem-
The basic exhaust system consists of an engine peratures (Fig. 1).
exhaust manifold, exhaust pipe, exhaust heat DO NOT allow the engine to operate at fast idle for
shield(s), muffler and exhaust tailpipe. extended periods (over 5 minutes). This condition
The exhaust system uses a single muffler. may result in excessive temperatures in the exhaust
The exhaust system must be properly aligned to system and on the floor pan.
prevent stress, leakage and body contact. If the sys-
tem contacts any body panel, it may amplify objec-
tionable noises originating from the engine or body.
When inspecting an exhaust system, critically
inspect for cracked or loose joints, stripped screw or
bolt threads, corrosion damage and worn, cracked or
broken hangers. Replace all components that are
badly corroded or damaged. DO NOT attempt to
repair.
When replacement is required, use original equip-
ment parts (or equivalent). This will assure proper
alignment and provide acceptable exhaust noise lev-
els.
CAUTION: Avoid application of rust prevention

compounds or undercoating materials to exhaust
system floor pan exhaust heat shields. Light over-
Fig. 1 Heat Shields
spray near the edges is permitted. Application of
coating will result in excessive floor pan tempera-
tures and objectionable fumes.
11 - 2 EXHAUST SYSTEM AND TURBOCHARGER XJ

(1) Assemble exhaust pipe to muffler, loosely to
EXHAUST PIPE permit proper alignment of all parts.
(2) Connect the exhaust pipe to the turbo down
WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORK- pipe manifold. Tighten the bolts to 22.5 N·m torque.
ING ON THE EXHAUST SYSTEM, DO NOT ALLOW (3) Use a new clamp and tighten the nuts to 43
THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINES. N·m torque.
REMOVAL and exhaust system contact with the body panels.
(1) Raise and support the vehicle. Adjust the alignment, if needed.
(2) Saturate the bolts and nuts at turbo down pipe
to exhaust pipe with heat valve lubricant. Allow 5 MUFFLER AND EXHAUST TAILPIPE
minutes for penetration. All original equipment exhaust systems are manu-
(3) Disconnect bolts from exhaust pipe to turbo factured with the exhaust tailpipe welded to the muf-
down pipe (Fig. 2). fler. Service replacement mufflers and exhaust
tailpipes are either clamped together or welded
together.
WARNING: IF TORCHES ARE USED WHEN WORK-

THE FLAME NEAR THE FUEL LINES.
REMOVAL
(2) Remove the front muffler clamp from the
exhaust pipe and muffler connection.
(3) Remove the rear exhaust tailpipe hanger clamp
and remove the exhaust tailpipe from the front
exhaust tailpipe hanger.
(4) Remove the exhaust tailpipe assembly from the
Fig. 2 Exhaust Down Pipe to Front Exhaust Pipe muffler.
(4) Remove the clamp nuts at muffler (Fig. 3). To INSTALLATION
remove the exhaust pipe from the muffler, apply heat (1) Install the muffler onto the exhaust pipe.
until the metal becomes cherry red. Disconnect the Install the clamp and tighten the nuts finger tight.
exhaust pipe from the muffler. Remove the exhaust (2) Install the exhaust tailpipe into the rear of the
pipe. muffler.
(3) Install the exhaust tailpipe/muffler assembly
on the rear exhaust tailpipe hanger. Make sure that
the exhaust tailpipe has sufficient clearance from the
floor pan.
(4) Install the remaining clamps and the front
exhaust tailpipe hanger.
(5) Tighten the nuts on the muffler-to-exhaust pipe
clamp to 43 N·m torque.
(6) Tighten the nuts on the muffler-to-exhaust pipe
clamp to 43 N·m torque.
Fig. 3 Front Pipe to Muffler

EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER

(LHD)
REMOVAL
(2) Disconnect the breather hose from air cleaner
outlet hose (Fig. 4).
Fig. 4 Engine Compartment

(3) Remove the air filter cover and hose from tur-
bocharger, remove the assembly (Fig. 4).
(4) Remove the EGR vacuum supply hose from the
EGR valve.
(5) Remove the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses
from the engine (Fig. 4).
(6) Remove the (2) bolts holding the EGR tube to
the EGR valve.
(7) Remove the intake manifold elbow and EGR
valve as an assembly.
(Fig. 5). Fig. 6 Exhaust Downpipe Heatshield
(11) Disconnect the exhaust system at the (3) bolt
flange (Fig. 5).
(15) Remove the EGR tube from exhaust manifold.
CAUTION: Heatshield is very sharp. Wear gloves to (16) Remove the (2) exhaust manifold heatshield
prevent injury. retaining bolts and remove the heatshield.
(17) Remove the heater core supply hoses from the
(12) Unstrap the exhaust downpipe heatshield vehicle.
(Fig. 6). (18) Remove the oil pressure supply line bango
(13) Disconnect the turbocharger oil return hose bolt from the turbocharger.
from the engine block (Fig. 7).
Fig. 7 Turbocharger Oil Return Hose Fig. 8 Turbocharger / Exhaust Manifold Assembly
prevent injury.
(19) Remove the exhaust downpipe heatshield by

pulling straight up.
(20) Remove the (5) bolts from exhaust manifold
downpipe and remove pipe.
(21) Remove the (8) exhaust manifold retaining
bolts, it is necessary to access the bolt behind the
manifold outlet from the underneath of the vehicle.
(22) Remove the exhaust manifold and turbo-
charger assembly from the vehicle.
(23) Place assembly in a vice to remove the (3)
exhaust manifold to turbocharger retaining nuts (Fig.
8).
Cleaning
All old gaskets should be inspected for any tears or
signs of prior leakage. If any gaskets show such indi-
cations, they should be replaced with new gaskets.
All gasket mating surfaces must be cleaned of old
gasket material to produce a smooth and dirt free
sealing surface for the new gasket. Fig. 9 Turbocharger / Exhaust Manifold Assembly
INSTALLATION (5) Install the exhaust manifold downpipe. Torque

(1) Transfer the oil return hose to the new turbo- bolts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.).
charger (Fig. 9).
(2) Install the turbo on the exhaust manifold (Fig.
prevent injury.
9). Torque the nuts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.).
(3) Install the exhaust manifold and turbocharger (6) Slide the exhaust downpipe heatshield down
assembly in the vehicle. over pipe. Do not attempt to strap heatshield in posi-
(4) Install the (8) exhaust manifold retaining nuts. tion at this time, wait until vehicle is raised on hoist.
Torque nuts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.).
(7) Install the oil pressure supply line on turbo-
charger. Torque bango bolt fitting to 27 N·m (20 ft.
lbs.).
(8) Install the heater core supply hoses.
(9) Position and install the exhaust manifold heat-
shield. Torque bolts to 11 N·m (97 in. lbs.).
(11) Install the turbocharger oil return hose on the
engine block (Fig. 10).
Fig. 10 Turbocharger Oil Return Hose

(12) Strap the exhaust downpipe heatshield in its
original position.
flange (Fig. 11). Torque the bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft.
lbs.).
(Fig. 11). Torque nuts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.).
(16) Install the intake manifold elbow and EGR
valve as an assembly. Torque bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft.
lbs.).
(17) Install the (2) bolts holding the EGR tube to
the EGR valve. Torque bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(18) Install the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses Fig. 12 Engine Compartment
on the engine (Fig. 12). (24) Start the engine and check for leaks.
(19) Install the EGR vacuum supply hose on the
EGR valve. EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND TURBOCHARGER
(20) Install the air filter cover and outlet hose on (RHD)
turbocharger (Fig. 12).
(21) Connect the breather hose on the air cleaner REMOVAL
outlet hose (Fig. 12). (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
(22) Fill the cooling system. Refer to Group 7, (2) Disconnect the breather hose from the air
Cooling System for procedure. cleaner outlet hose.
(23) Connect the negative battery cable
(3) Remove the air filter cover and the hose from
the turbocharger, remove the assembly.
Cooling System for the procedure.
(Fig. 13).
Fig. 14 Exhaust Downpipe Heatshield

(7) Disconnect the exhaust system at the (3) bolt
flange (Fig. 13).

prevent injury.
(8) Unstrap the exhaust downpipe heatshield (Fig.

14).

prevent injury.
(9) Remove the exhaust downpipe heatshield by

pulling straight down.
(10) Disconnect the turbocharger oil return hose
from the engine block (Fig. 15). Fig. 15 Turbocharger Oil Return Hose
(12) Disconnect the heater core coolant supply and (15) Remove the (2) bolts holding the EGR tube to
the brake vacuum supply hoses from the right side of the EGR valve.
the engine. Remove the steel line support bracket (16) Remove the intake manifold elbow and the
from the top of the rocker cover and position the EGR valve as an assembly.
assembly out of the way. (17) Remove the EGR tube from the exhaust man-
(13) Remove the EGR vacuum supply hose from ifold.
the EGR valve. (18) Remove the (2) exhaust manifold heatshield
(14) Remove the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses retaining bolts and remove the heatshield (Fig. 16).
from the engine. (19) Remove the oil pressure supply line from the
turbocharger (Fig. 16).
(24) Disconnect the neutral safety switch electrical
connector at the clutch pedal.
(25) Remove the (2) clutch master cylinder retain-
ing nuts from the bulkhead.
(26) Working from the inside of the engine com-
partment, remove the clutch master cylinder from
the bulkhead and position the cylinder and line
assembly out of the way.
(27) Remove the (5) bolts from the exhaust mani-
fold downpipe and remove the pipe.
(28) Remove the (8) exhaust manifold retaining
bolts, it is necessary to access the bolt behind the
manifold outlet from the underneath of the vehicle.
(29) Remove the steering shaft pinchbolt and slide
the shaft straight off of the gearbox input shaft. Posi-
tion aside.
(30) Remove the exhaust manifold and the turbo-
charger assembly from the vehicle.
(31) Place the turbo assembly in a vice to remove
the (3) exhaust manifold to turbocharger retaining
nuts (Fig. 18).
Fig. 16 2.5L Turbo Diesel — Heatshields

(20) Remove the clutch master cylinder heatshield
(Fig. 16).
(21) Remove the wastegate actuator vacuum sup-
ply hose from the actuator (Fig. 17).
Fig. 18 Turbocharger / Exhaust Manifold Assembly

Cleaning
All old gaskets should be inspected for any tears or
signs of prior leakage. If any gasket shows such indi-
cations, it must be replaced with a new gasket. All
gasket mating surfaces must be cleaned of all old
Fig. 17 R.H.D. Turbo Position & Orientation gasket material to produce a smooth and dirt free
(22) Remove the turbocharger oil pressure supply sealing surface for the new gasket.
line from the engine block (Fig. 17).
(23) Working inside of the vehicle, remove the INSTALLATION
Knee Blocker. Refer to Group 8E, Instrument Panel (1) Install the turbocharger on the exhaust mani-
Systems for the procedure. fold (Fig. 19). Torque nuts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.).
(5) Position the turbocharger oil pressure supply
line in its original position (Fig. 20). Torque the turbo
fitting to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(6) Install the wastegate actuator vacuum supply
hose on the actuator (Fig. 20).
(7) Install the exhaust manifold heatshield (Fig.
21). Torque bolts to 11 N·m (97 in. lbs.).
Fig. 19 Turbocharger / Exhaust Manifold Assembly

(2) Install the exhaust manifold and turbocharger
assembly in the vehicle.
(3) Install the (8) exhaust manifold retaining nuts,
it is necessary to access the bolt behind the manifold
outlet from the underneath of the vehicle. Torque
nuts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.).
(4) Install the exhaust manifold downpipe. Torque Fig. 21 2.5L Turbo Diesel — Heatshields
the bolts to 32 N·m (23 ft. lbs.). (8) Install the EGR tube on the exhaust manifold.
Leave loose at this time.

prevent injury.
(10) Slide the exhaust downpipe heatshield up

over the pipe and strap it in its original position (Fig.
22).
(11) Install the steering shaft. Torque the pinch
bolt to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.).
(12) Install the turbocharger oil return hose on the
engine block (Fig. 23).
flange (Fig. 24). Torque the bolts to 23 N·m (17 ft.
lbs.).
(Fig. 24). Torque nuts to 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.).
(15) Lower the vehicle on hoist.
(16) Install the clutch master cylinder through the
bulkhead.
(17) Working from the inside of the vehicle, Install
Fig. 20 R.H.D. Turbo Position & Orientation the (2) clutch master cylinder retaining nuts.
(18) Connect the neutral safety switch at the
clutch pedal.
Fig. 22 Exhaust Downpipe Heatshield Fig. 24 Exhaust System Inlet Pipe Connection
(20) Install the clutch master cylinder heatshield.
(21) Install the intake manifold elbow and the
EGR valve as an assembly. Torque the intake elbow
bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(22) Install the (2) bolts holding the EGR tube to
the EGR valve. Torque to bolts 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(23) Torque the EGR tube on the exhaust manifold
to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.).
(24) Install the innercooler inlet and outlet hoses
on the engine.
(25) Install the EGR vacuum supply hose on the
EGR valve.
(26) Install the air filter cover and outlet hose on
the turbocharger.
(27) Connect the breather hose on the air cleaner
outlet hose.
(28) Install the heater core coolant supply and the
brake vacuum supply lines in there original position.
(30) Fill the cooling system. Refer to Group 7,
Cooling System for the procedure.
Fig. 23 Turbocharger Oil Return Hose
(19) Install the Knee Blocker. Refer to Group 8E,
Instrument Panel Systems for procedure.
INTAKE MANIFOLD SPECIFICATIONS

REMOVAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
(1) Remove exhaust manifold and turbocharger
assembly. Description Torque
(2) Remove water manifold. EGR
(3) Remove intake manifold. Attaching Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
EGR
CLEANING Tube Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 N·m
Clean the intake manifold and cylinder head mat- EGR
ing surfaces. DO NOT allow foreign material to Tube Flange Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 N·m
enter either the intake manifold or the ports in Exhaust Manifold
the cylinder head. Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N·m
Exhaust Manifold
INSTALLATION
Heat Shield Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 N·m
(1) Install the new intake manifold gasket.
Exhaust Pipe
(2) Position the intake manifold in place and fin-
Support Clamp Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 N·m
ger tighten the mounting nuts.
Exhaust Pipe
(3) Tighten the fasteners in sequence and to the
specified torque 30 N·m. Support Clamp Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 N·m
(4) Position the water manifold in place and finger Intake Manifold
tighten the mounting nuts. Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N·m
(5) Tighten the fasteners to the specified torque 12 Muffler-to-Exhaust Pipe
N·m. Clamp Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 N·m
(6) Install exhaust manifold and turbocharger Tail Pipe Clamp
assembly. Hanger bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 N·m
(7) Install charge air cooler hose to intake mani- Turbocharger-to-Exhaust manifold
fold. Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m
(8) Connect the battery negative cable. Turbocharger
(9) Start engine and check for leaks. Oil Feed Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4 N·m
Turbocharger Down Pipe-to-Exhaust Pipe
Bolts/Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.5 N·m
Turbocharger Down Pipe-to-Turbocharger
Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m
XJ FRAME AND BUMPERS 13 - 1
FRAME AND BUMPERS

CONTENTS
page page
BUMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
BUMPERS
INDEX
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION REAR BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

FRONT BUMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REAR BUMPER END CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FRONT BUMPER END CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 REAR TOW HOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
FRONT TOW HOOK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION FRONT BUMPER

FRONT BUMPER END CAP REMOVAL
(1) Remove bumper end caps.
REMOVAL (2) If equipped, disengage fog lamp wire harness
(1) Remove the rivet attaching the end cap to the connectors.
air deflector. (3) Disconnect vacuum line from reservoir (Fig. 3).
(2) Remove the bolts and nuts attaching the end (4) Remove Torx-head bolts that attach bumper to
cap to the bumper (Fig. 1). mounting brackets (Fig. 1).
(3) Pull back the wheelhouse liner and remove the (5) Remove bumper from vehicle.
screws attaching the end cap to the front fender. (6) If necessary, remove bolts attaching bumper
(4) Lifting the end cap from the bottom, tilt mounting brackets to frame.
slightly upward and slide it outward to disengage the
retainer tab from the bumper (Fig. 2). INSTALLATION
(5) Separate the end cap from the bumper. (1) If removed, install bolts attaching bumper
mounting brackets to frame. Tighten bolts to 55 N·m
INSTALLATION (41 ft. lbs.) torque.
(1) Position the end cap on the bumper and engage (2) Position bumper on front of vehicle.
the retaining tab. (3) Install Torx-head bolts that attach bumper to
(2) Install the screws attaching the end cap to the mounting brackets. Tighten bolts to 55 N·m (41 ft.
front fender. lbs.) torque.
(3) Install the bolts attaching the end cap to the (4) Connect vacuum line to reservoir.
bumper. Tighten the nut to 9 N·m (7 ft. lbs.) torque. (5) If equipped, engage fog lamp wire harness con-
(4) Install the rivet attaching the end cap to air nectors.
deflector. (6) Install bumper end caps.
13 - 2 FRAME AND BUMPERS XJ
Fig. 1 Front Bumper
Fig. 2 Bumper End Cap

FRONT TOW HOOK
Fig. 3 Vacuum Reservoir
REMOVAL
(1) Remove bolts attaching tow hook to tow hook (3) Install bolts attaching tow hook to tow hook
reinforcement (Fig. 4). reinforcement. Tighten bolts to 100 N·m (74 ft. lbs.)
(2) Separate tow hook from reinforcement. torque.
(3) If necessary, remove bolt attaching tow hook
reinforcement to frame. REAR BUMPER END CAP
(1) If removed, install bolt attaching tow hook (1) Remove the bolts and nuts attaching the
reinforcement to frame. Tighten bolt to 30 N·m (22 ft. underside of the end cap to the bumper (Fig. 5).
lbs.) torque. (2) Remove the screw attaching the front of the
(2) Position tow hook on reinforcement. end cap to the underside of the quarter panel.
(4) Install the bolts and nuts attaching the under-
side of the end cap to the bumper.
REAR BUMPER
REMOVAL
(1) For vehicles equipped with a trailer hitch,
remove hitch before removing bumper. If necessary,
refer to removal procedure within Group 13, Frame
and Bumpers.
(2) Remove bumper end caps.
(3) Remove upper nuts that attach bumper to
bumper support brackets (Fig. 5).
(4) Remove lower bolts that attach bumper to
bumper support brackets.
(5) Remove bumper from vehicle.
Fig. 4 Front Tow Hook (6) If necessary, remove bumper support brackets
(3) Lift the end cap slightly upward and slide it from the rear sill.
rearward to release it from the retainer.
(4) Separate the end cap from the vehicle. INSTALLATION
(1) If removed, install bumper support brackets on
INSTALLATION the rear sill. Tighten bolts to 55 N·m (41 ft. lbs.)
(1) Position the end cap on the rear of the retainer torque.
and the outer edge of the bumper. (2) Position bumper on support brackets.
(2) Slide the end cap forward onto the retainer. (3) Install bolts that attach bumper to bumper
Ensure the end cap overlaps the lip of the rear support brackets. Tighten nuts to 55 N·m (41 ft. lbs.)
wheelhouse liner. torque.
(3) Install the screw attaching the front of the end (4) Install bumper end caps.
cap to the underside of the quarter panel. (5) If removed, install trailer hitch.
Fig. 5 Rear Bumper

REAR TOW HOOK

REMOVAL
(1) Remove bolts that attach tow hook bracket and
tow hook to frame rail (Fig. 6).
(2) Remove bracket and tow hook from frame rail.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position bracket and tow hook on frame rail.
(2) Install bolts that attach tow hook bracket and
tow hook to frame rail. Tighten bolts to 94 N·m (70
ft. lbs.) torque.
Fig. 6 Rear Tow Hook

FRAME
INDEX
page page
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TRANSFER CASE SKID PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

FRONT SKID PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL TANK SKID PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FRAME DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
TRAILER HITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FRAME TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . 8
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION TRANSFER CASE SKID PLATE

FRONT SKID PLATE REMOVAL
(1) Support skid plate.
REMOVAL (2) Remove bolts that attach skid plate to trans-
(1) Remove the screws that attach skid plate to mission support crossmember and frame sill (Fig. 2).
side sills. (3) Remove support and skid plate from vehicle.
(2) Remove the nuts that attach the skid plate to
the crossmember (Fig. 1).
(3) Remove the skid plate from the vehicle.
Fig. 2 Transfer Case Skid Plate

INSTALLATION
(1) Position and support skid plate at frame sill
and transmission support crossmember.
(2) Attach skid plate to frame sill and crossmem-
ber with bolts. Tighten bolts to 22 N·m (16 ft. lbs.)
torque.
FUEL TANK SKID PLATE

Fig. 1 Front Skid Plate
(1) Position the skid plate at front crossmember (1) Position a support under skid plate.
and side sills. (2) Remove bolts that attach skid plate to under-
(2) Install the nuts to attach the skid plate to body side rails (Fig. 3).
crossmember. (3) Remove support and skid plate from vehicle.
(3) Install the screws to attach skid plate to side
sills. INSTALLATION
(1) Position and support skid plate under fuel
tank.
INSTALLATION
Fig. 3 Fuel Tank Skid Plate

(2) Install bolts to attach skid plate to underbody Fig. 5 Trailer Hitch
rails. Tighten bolts to 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque.
(1) Install frame reinforcement brackets, if
(3) Remove support from under skid plate.
removed. Slide the brackets through the vehicle rear
sill openings and attach to the frame sills with blind
TRAILER HITCH rivets.
(2) Using an adequate lifting device, position hitch
REMOVAL at the proper location for installation on vehicle and
(1) If necessary, remove the trailer tow wire har- support it.
ness connector from the hitch (Fig. 4). (3) If equipped, position fuel tank skid plate on
(2) Support the hitch. vehicle frame sills.
(3) Remove the bolts that attach the trailer hitch (4) Loosely install the bolts to attach the trailer
to the frame sills and reinforcement brackets (Fig. 5). hitch (and the skid plate) to frame sills and reinforce-
(4) If equipped, remove the fuel tank skid plate. ment brackets.
(5) Tighten all bolts/nuts to 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: The reinforcement brackets are held on the
torque.
frame sills with two blind rivets.
(6) Remove the lift/support.
(7) If removed, attach the trailer wire harness con-
nector to the hitch.
SPECIFICATIONS
FRAME DIMENSIONS
Frame dimensions are listed in millimeter scale.
All dimensions are from center to center of Principal
Locating Point (PLP), or from center to center of PLP
and fastener location (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Trailer Hitch Harness Connector

Fig. 6 Frame Dimensions

FRAME TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Front Skid Plate Screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 N·m
(31 ft. lbs.)
Front Skid Plate Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 N·m
(125 in. lbs.)
Transfer Case Skid Plate Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . 22 N·m
(16 ft. lbs.)
Fuel Tank Skid Plate Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m
(55 ft. lbs.)
Front Bumper End Cap to
Mounting Bracket Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 N·m
(7 ft. lbs.)
Front Bumper Mounting
Bracket to Frame Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m
(41 ft. lbs.)
Front Bumper to
Mounting Bracket Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m
(41 ft. lbs.)
Front Tow Hook Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 N·m
(74 ft. lbs.)
Front Tow Hook
Reinforcement Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N·m
(22 ft. lbs.)
Rear Bumper to
Mtg. Bracket Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m
(41 ft. lbs.)
Rear Bumper Mtg. Bracket to
Rear Sill Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 N·m
(41 ft. lbs.)
Rear Tow Hook Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 N·m
(70 ft. lbs.)
Trailer Tow
Reinforcement Brkt Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m
(55 ft. lbs.)
FRAME AND BUMPERS

CONTENTS
page page
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 SWING AWAY SPARE TIRE CARRIER . . . . . . . . . 1
SWING AWAY SPARE TIRE CARRIER
INDEX
page

SWING AWAY SPARE TIRE CARRIER
MOUNTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
SWING AWAY SPARE TIRE CARRIER MOUNTING
Fig. 1 Spare Tire Carrier Mounting

FRAME
INDEX
page
GENERAL INFORMATION
EMERGENCY TOW EYES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
EMERGENCY TOW EYES
If your vehicle is equipped with emergency tow
eyes, one is mounted in the front and one in the rear.
The front tow eye has two holes, the front hole is
for towing use only and the rear angled hole is for
shipping use only.
CAUTION: Do not use the angled hole for towing.

You could damage your vehicle.
WARNING: Stand clear of vehicles when pulling

with tow eyes. Tow straps and chains may break,
causing serious injury.
CAUTION: Tow eyes are for emergency use only, to

rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
eyes for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You
could damage your vehicle.
Fig. 1 Emergency Tow Eyes
XJ FUEL SYSTEM 14 - 1
FUEL SYSTEM
CONTENTS
page page
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SERVICE PROCEDURES

FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE
FUEL FILTER/FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR . . . 4 PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FUEL TUBES/LINES/HOSES AND CLAMPS . . . . 10
FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
FUEL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FUEL PUMP MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ACCELERATOR PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
FUEL RAIL/FUEL DAMPER—2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . 5 FUEL FILTER/FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR . . 13
FUEL RAIL—4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FUEL INJECTOR RAIL—2.5L ENGINE . . . . . . . . 16
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUEL INJECTOR RAIL—4.0L ENGINE . . . . . . . . 17
FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
PCM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 FUEL PUMP INLET FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FUEL PUMP MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ROLLOVER VALVE(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 THROTTLE CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
FUEL INJECTOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN TEST . . . . . . . . . 7 FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL PUMP AMPERAGE TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 FUEL TANK CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL PUMP CAPACITY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TEST—ALL ENGINES
WITH PRESSURE TEST PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION FUEL REQUIREMENTS

Your engine is designed to meet all emissions reg-
PCM REPLACEMENT ulations and provide excellent fuel economy and per-
USE THE DRB SCAN TOOL TO REPROGRAM formance when using high quality unleaded gasoline
THE NEW POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium
(PCM) WITH THE VEHICLES ORIGINAL IDEN- gasoline is not recommended. The use of premium
TIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) AND THE VEHI- gasoline will provide no benefit over high quality reg-
CLES ORIGINAL MILEAGE. IF THIS STEP IS ular gasoline, and in some circumstances may result
NOT DONE, A DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE in poorer performance.
(DTC) MAY BE SET. Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not
harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy
spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and
immediate service is required. Engine damage result-
14 - 2 FUEL SYSTEM XJ
ing from operation with a heavy spark knock may SULFUR IN GASOLINE
not be covered by the new vehicle warranty. If you live in the northeast United States, your
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as vehicle may have been designed to meet California
hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experi- low emission standards with clean-burning, low-sul-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline fur, California gasoline. Gasoline sold outside of Cal-
before considering service for the vehicle. ifornia is permitted to have higher sulfur levels
The American Automobile Manufacturers Associa- which may affect the performance of the vehicle’s cat-
tion, AAMA, has issued gasoline specifications to alytic converter. This may cause the Check Engine or
define the minimum fuel properties necessary to Service Engine Soon light to illuminate.
deliver enhanced performance and durability for your Illumination of either light while operating on high
vehicle. Chrysler recommends the use of gasoline sulfur gasoline does not necessarily mean your emis-
that meet the AAMA specifications if they are avail- sion control system is malfunctioning. Chrysler rec-
able. ommends that you try a different brand of unleaded
gasoline having lower sulfur to determine if the prob-
REFORMULATED GASOLINE lem is fuel related prior to returning your vehicle to
Many areas of the country require the use of an authorized dealer for service.
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “reformulat-
ed” gasoline. Reformulated gasoline contain oxygen- CAUTION: If the Check Engine or Service Engine
ates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle Soon light is flashing, immediate service is
emissions and improve air quality. required; see on-board diagnostics system section.
Chrysler strongly supports the use of reformulated
gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
provide excellent performance and durability for the MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
engine and fuel system components. All gasoline sold in the United States and Canada
are required to contain effective detergent additives.
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS Use of additional detergents or other additives is not
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with needed under normal conditions.
oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE.
Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide
emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may CAUTION: Follow these guidelines to maintain your
be used in your vehicle. vehicle’s performance:
CAUTION: DO NOT use gasoline containing METH- • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal
ANOL. Gasoline containing methanol may damage law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
critical fuel system components. mance, damage the emission control system, and
could result in loss of warranty coverage.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
MMT malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
Gasoline blended with MMT provide no performance malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane num- Contact your dealer for service assistance.
ber without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT • When pulling a heavy load or driving a fully
reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system loaded vehicle when the humidity is low and the tem-
performance in some vehicles. Chrysler recommends perature is high, use a premium unleaded fuel to
that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. help prevent spark knock. If spark knock persists,
The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated lighten the load, or engine piston damage may result.
on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your • The use of fuel additives which are now being
gasoline retailer whether or not his/her gasoline con- sold as octane enhancers is not recommended. Most
tains MMT. of these products contain high concentrations of
It is even more important to look for gasoline with- methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
out MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels
levels higher than allowed in the United States. or additives is not the responsibility of Chrysler Cor-
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California refor- poration and may not be covered under the new vehi-
mulated gasoline. cle warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • A separate fuel pick-up filter (strainer)
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed • An electric fuel pump
against you. • A threaded locknut to retain module to tank
• A gasket between tank flange and module
• Fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor)
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM • Fuel supply tube (line) connection
The fuel delivery system consists of: The fuel gauge sending unit, pick-up filter and fuel
• the fuel pump module containing the electric filter/fuel pressure regulator may be serviced sepa-
fuel pump, fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator, fuel rately. If the electrical fuel pump requires service,
gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) and a separate the entire fuel pump module must be replaced.
fuel filter located at bottom of pump module
• fuel tubes/lines/hoses
• quick-connect fittings
• fuel injector rail
• fuel injectors
• fuel tank
• fuel tank filler/vent tube assembly
• fuel tank filler tube cap
• accelerator pedal
• throttle cable
Fuel is returned through the fuel pump module
and back into the fuel tank through the fuel filter/
fuel pressure regulator. A separate fuel return line
from the engine to the tank is not used.
The fuel tank assembly consists of: the fuel tank,
fuel pump module assembly, fuel pump module lock-
nut/gasket, and rollover valve (refer to Group 25,
Emission Control System for rollover valve informa-
tion).
A fuel filler/vent tube assembly using a pressure/
Fig. 1 Fuel Tank/Fuel Pump Module (Top View)
vacuum fuel filler cap is used. The fuel filler tube
contains a spring-loaded flap (door) located below the
fuel fill cap. The flap is used as a secondary way of
sealing the fuel tank if the fuel fill cap has not been
properly tightened. The flap is used as part of the
EVAP monitor system when the vehicle is equipped
with a Leak Detection Pump (LDP). The flap will be
installed to all fuel filler tubes (equipped/not
equipped with LDP and EVAP monitor system).
Also to be considered part of the fuel system is the
evaporation control system. This is designed to
reduce the emission of fuel vapors into the atmo-
sphere. The description and function of the Evapora-
tive Control System is found in Group 25, Emission
Control Systems.
Both fuel filters (at bottom of fuel pump module
and within fuel pressure regulator) are designed for
extended service. They do not require normal sched- Fig. 2 Fuel Pump Module Components
uled maintenance. Filters should only be replaced if
FUEL PUMP
a diagnostic procedure indicates to do so.
DESCRIPTION
FUEL PUMP MODULE The electric fuel pump is located inside of the fuel
The fuel pump module is installed in the top of the pump module.
fuel tank (Fig. 1) or (Fig. 2). The fuel pump module
contains the following components:
• A combination fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator
OPERATION FUEL FILTER/FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
The fuel pump used in this system has a permanent A combination fuel filter and fuel pressure regula-
magnet electric motor. Fuel is drawn in through a filter tor is used on all engines. It is located on the top of
at the bottom of the module and pushed through the fuel pump module (Fig. 1). A separate frame mounted
electric motor gearset to the pump outlet. fuel filter is not used with any engine.
Check Valve Operation: The pump outlet con- Fuel Pressure Regulator Operation: The pres-
tains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel flow back sure regulator is a mechanical device that is not con-
into the tank and to maintain fuel supply line pres- trolled by engine vacuum or the Powertrain Control
sure (engine warm) when pump is not operational. It Module (PCM).
is also used to keep the fuel supply line full of gaso- The regulator is calibrated to maintain fuel system
line when pump is not operational. After the vehicle operating pressure of approximately 339 kPa 6 34
has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop to 0 psi kPa (49.2 psi 6 5 psi) at the fuel injectors. It con-
(cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will remain tains a diaphragm, calibrated springs and a fuel
in fuel supply line between the check valve and fuel return valve. The internal fuel filter is also part of
injectors. Fuel pressure that has dropped to 0 the assembly.
psi on a cooled down vehicle (engine off) is a
normal condition. Refer to the Fuel Pressure Leak
Down Test for more information.
Voltage to operate the electric pump is supplied
through the fuel pump relay.
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

DESCRIPTION
The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) is
attached to the side of the fuel pump module. The
sending unit consists of a float, an arm, and a vari-
able resistor (track).
OPERATION
The resistor track is used to send electrical signals to
the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for fuel gauge
operation and for OBD II emission requirements.
For fuel gauge operation: As fuel level
increases, the float and arm move up. This decreases Fig. 3 Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator
the sending unit resistance, causing the fuel gauge to
read full. As fuel level decreases, the float and arm Fuel is supplied to the filter/regulator by the elec-
move down. This increases the sending unit resis- tric fuel pump through an opening tube at the bot-
tance causing the fuel gauge to read empty. tom of filter/regulator (Fig. 3).
After this fuel level signal is sent to the PCM, the The regulator acts as a check valve to maintain
PCM will transmit the data across the CCD bus cir- some fuel pressure when the engine is not operating.
cuits to the instrument panel. Here it is translated This will help to start the engine. A second check
into the appropriate fuel gauge level reading. valve is located at the outlet end of the electric fuel
For OBD II emission monitor requirements: A pump. Refer to Fuel Pump—Description and
voltage signal is sent from the resistor track on the Operation for more information. Also refer to
sending unit to the PCM to indicate fuel level. The pur- the Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test and the Fuel
pose of this feature is to prevent the OBD II system Pump Pressure Tests.
from recording/setting false misfire and fuel system If fuel pressure at the pressure regulator exceeds
monitor trouble codes. The feature is activated if the approximately 49 psi, an internal diaphragm closes
fuel level in the tank is less than approximately 15 per- and excess fuel is routed back into the tank through
cent of its rated capacity. If equipped with a Leak the pressure regulator. A separate fuel return line is
Detection Pump (EVAP system monitor), this feature not used.
will also be activated if the fuel level in the tank is
more than approximately 85 percent of its rated capac-
ity.
FUEL TANK
DESCRIPTION
The fuel tank is constructed of a plastic material.
Its main functions are for fuel storage and for place-
ment of the fuel pump module.
OPERATION
All models pass a full 360 degree rollover test
without fuel leakage. To accomplish this, fuel and
vapor flow controls are required for all fuel tank con-
nections.
A rollover valve(s) is mounted into the top of the
fuel tank (or pump module). Refer to Emission Con-
trol System for rollover valve information.
An evaporation control system is connected to the
rollover valve(s) to reduce emissions of fuel vapors Fig. 4 Fuel Injector—Typical
into the atmosphere. When fuel evaporates from the injector pulse width based on various inputs it
fuel tank, vapors pass through vent hoses or tubes to receives.
a charcoal canister where they are temporarily held. During start up, battery voltage is supplied to the
When the engine is running, the vapors are drawn injectors through the ASD relay. When the engine is
into the intake manifold. Certain models are also operating, voltage is supplied by the charging sys-
equipped with a self-diagnosing system using a Leak tem. The PCM determines injector pulse width based
Detection Pump (LDP). Refer to Emission Control on various inputs.
System for additional information.
FUEL RAIL/FUEL DAMPER—2.5L ENGINE
ROLLOVER VALVE(S) The fuel rail supplies the necessary fuel to each
Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for individual fuel injector and is mounted to the intake
information. manifold (Fig. 5). On the 2.5L engine, a fuel
damper is located at the front of the fuel rail (Fig.
FUEL INJECTORS 5). The damper is used only to help control fuel pres-
The fuel injectors (Fig. 4) are electrical solenoids. sure pulsations. These pulsations are the result of
The injector contains a pintle that closes off an ori- the firing of the fuel injectors. It is not used as a
fice at the nozzle end. When electric current is sup- fuel pressure regulator. The fuel pressure regulator is
plied to the injector, the armature and needle move a not mounted to the fuel rail on any engine. It is
short distance against a spring, allowing fuel to flow located on the fuel tank mounted fuel pump module.
out the orifice. Because the fuel is under high pres- Refer to Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator in this
sure, a fine spray is developed in the shape of a pen- group for information.
cil stream. The spraying action atomizes the fuel, Depending on vehicle model/engine, the fuel rail
adding it to the air entering the combustion chamber. may/may not be equipped with a fuel pressure test
An individual fuel injector is used for each individ- port. Refer to the Fuel Pump Pressure Test for addi-
ual cylinder. The top (fuel entry) end of the injector is tional information.
attached into an opening on the fuel rail. The fuel rail is not repairable.
The nozzle (outlet) ends of the injectors are posi-
tioned into openings in the intake manifold just FUEL RAIL—4.0L ENGINE
above the intake valve ports of the cylinder head. The fuel rail supplies the necessary fuel to each
The engine wiring harness connector for each fuel individual fuel injector and is mounted to the intake
injector is equipped with an attached numerical tag manifold (Fig. 6). The fuel pressure regulator is not
(INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.). This is used to identify each fuel mounted to the fuel rail on any 4.0L engine. It is
injector. located on the fuel tank mounted fuel pump module.
The injectors are energized individually in a Refer to Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator in this
sequential order by the powertrain control module group for information.
(PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by Depending on vehicle model/engine, the fuel rail
switching the ground path to each individual injector may/may not be equipped with a fuel pressure test
on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time port. Refer to the Fuel Pump Pressure Test for addi-
that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust tional information.
must be pressed (opened) to relieve fuel tank pres-
sure.
QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS
Different types of quick-connect fittings are used to
attach various fuel system components. These are: a
single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer
ring type. Some are equipped with safety latch clips.
Refer to the Removal/Installation section for more
information.
CAUTION: The interior components (o-rings, spac-

ers) of quick-connect fitting are not serviced sepa-
rately, but new pull tabs are available for some
types. Do not attempt to repair damaged fittings or
fuel lines/tubes. If repair is necessary, replace the
complete fuel tube assembly.
Fig. 5 Fuel Rail/Fuel Damper—2.5L Engine
The fuel rail is not repairable.
FUEL PUMP PRESSURE TEST—ALL ENGINES
WITH PRESSURE TEST PORT
Use this test in conjunction with the Fuel Pump
Capacity Test, Fuel Pressure Leak Down Test and
Fuel Pump Amperage Test found elsewhere in this
group.
Check Valve Operation: The electric fuel pump
outlet contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel
flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply
line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not oper-
ational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line
full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After
the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop
to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will
remain in fuel supply line between the check valve
and fuel injectors. Fuel pressure that has
dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle
Fig. 6 Fuel Rail—4.0L Engine (engine off) is a normal condition. When the elec-
FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP tric fuel pump is activated, fuel pressure should
The loss of any fuel or vapor out of filler neck is immediately (1–2 seconds) rise to specification.
prevented by the use of a pressure-vacuum fuel tank All fuel systems are equipped with a fuel tank
filler tube cap. Relief valves inside the cap will module mounted, combination fuel filter/fuel pressure
release fuel tank pressure at predetermined pres- regulator. The fuel pressure regulator is not con-
sures. Fuel tank vacuum will also be released at pre- trolled by engine vacuum.
determined values. This cap must be replaced by a
WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER CON-
similar unit if replacement is necessary. This is in
STANT FUEL PRESSURE EVEN WITH THE ENGINE
order for the system to remain effective.
OFF. BEFORE DISCONNECTING FUEL LINE AT
CAUTION: Remove fuel tank filler tube cap before FUEL RAIL, THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED.
servicing any fuel system component. This is done REFER TO THE FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE
to help relieve tank pressure. If equipped with a RELEASE PROCEDURE.
California emissions package and a Leak Detection
(1) Remove protective cap at fuel rail test port.
Pump (LDP), the secondary seal below the fill cap
Connect the 0–414 kPa (0-60 psi) fuel pressure gauge
(from gauge set 5069) to test port pressure fitting on (6) To activate fuel pump and pressurize system,
fuel rail (Fig. 7). obtain DRB scan tool and actuate ASD Fuel System
Test.
(7) A good fuel pump will deliver at least 1/4 liter
of fuel in 7 seconds. Do not operate fuel pump for
longer than 7 seconds with fuel line disconnected as
fuel pump module reservoir may run empty.
(a) If capacity is lower than specification, but
fuel pump can be heard operating through fuel fill
cap opening, check for a kinked/damaged fuel sup-
ply line somewhere between fuel rail and fuel
pump module.
(b) If line is not kinked/damaged, and fuel pres-
sure is OK, but capacity is low, replace fuel filter/
fuel pressure regulator. The filter/regulator may be
serviced separately on certain applications. Refer
to Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal/In-
stallation for additional information.
Fig. 7 Fuel Pressure Test Gauge (Typical Gauge (c) If both fuel pressure and capacity are low,
Installation at Test Port) replace fuel pump module assembly. Refer to Fuel
Pump Module Removal/Installation.
(2) Start and warm engine and note pressure
gauge reading. Fuel pressure should be 339 kPa 6 34 FUEL PRESSURE LEAK DOWN TEST
kPa (49.2 psi 6 5 psi) at idle. Use this test in conjunction with the Fuel Pump
(3) If engine runs, but pressure is below 44.2 psi, Pressure Test and Fuel Pump Capacity Test.
check for a kinked fuel supply line somewhere Check Valve Operation: The electric fuel pump
between fuel rail and fuel pump module. If line is not outlet contains a one-way check valve to prevent fuel
kinked, but specifications for either the Fuel Pump flow back into the tank and to maintain fuel supply
Capacity, Fuel Pump Amperage or Fuel Pressure line pressure (engine warm) when pump is not oper-
Leak Down Tests were not met, replace fuel pump ational. It is also used to keep the fuel supply line
module assembly. Refer to Fuel Pump Module full of gasoline when pump is not operational. After
Removal/Installation. the vehicle has cooled down, fuel pressure may drop
(4) If operating pressure is above 54.2 psi, electric to 0 psi (cold fluid contracts), but liquid gasoline will
fuel pump is OK, but fuel pressure regulator is defec- remain in fuel supply line between the check valve
tive. Replace fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator. Refer and fuel injectors. Fuel pressure that has
to Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator Removal/In- dropped to 0 psi on a cooled down vehicle
stallation for more information. (engine off) is a normal condition. When the elec-
(5) Install protective cap to fuel rail test port. tric fuel pump is activated, fuel pressure should
immediately (1–2 seconds) rise to specification.
FUEL PUMP CAPACITY TEST Abnormally long periods of cranking to restart a
Before performing this test, verify fuel pump hot engine that has been shut down for a short
pressure. Refer to Fuel Pump Pressure Test. period of time may be caused by:
Use this test in conjunction with the Fuel Pres- • Fuel pressure bleeding past a fuel injector(s).
sure Leak Down Test. • Fuel pressure bleeding past the check valve in
(1) Release fuel system pressure. Refer to Fuel the fuel pump module.
Pressure Release Procedure. (1) Disconnect the fuel inlet line at fuel rail. Refer
(2) Disconnect fuel supply line at fuel rail. Refer to to Fuel Tubes/Lines/Hoses and Clamps in this section
Quick-Connect Fittings. Some engines may require of the group for procedures. On some engines, air
air cleaner housing removal before line disconnection. cleaner housing removal may be necessary before
(3) Obtain correct Fuel Line Pressure Test Adapter fuel line disconnection.
Tool Hose. Tool number 6539 is used for 5/16” fuel (2) Obtain correct Fuel Line Pressure Test Adapter
lines and tool number 6631 is used for 3/8” fuel lines. Tool Hose. Tool number 6539 is used for 5/16” fuel
(4) Connect correct Fuel Line Pressure Test lines and tool number 6631 is used for 3/8” fuel lines.
Adapter Tool Hose into disconnected fuel supply line. (3) Connect correct Fuel Line Pressure Test
Insert other end of Adaptor Tool Hose into a gradu- Adapter Tool Hose between disconnected fuel line
ated container. and fuel rail (Fig. 8).
(5) Remove fuel fill cap.
Note: A quick loss of pressure usually indicates a
defective check valve in the filter/regulator. A slow
loss of pressure usually indicates a defective check
valve in the electric fuel pump.
The electric fuel pump is not serviced separately.
Replace the fuel pump module assembly. The filter/
regulator may be replaced separately on certain
applications. Refer to Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Reg-
ulator Removal/Installation for additional informa-
tion.
FUEL PUMP AMPERAGE TEST

This amperage (current draw) test is to be done in
conjunction with the Fuel Pump Pressure Test, Fuel
Pump Capacity Test and Fuel Pressure Leak Down
Test. Before performing the amperage test, be sure
the temperature of the fuel tank is above 50° F (10°
C).
The DRB Scan Tool along with the DRB Low Cur-
rent Shunt (LCS) adapter (Fig. 9) and its test leads
will be used to check fuel pump amperage specifica-
tions.
Fig. 8 Connecting Adapter Tool—Typical
(4) Connect the 0-414 kPa (0-60 psi) fuel pressure
test gauge (from Gauge Set 5069) to the test port on
the appropriate Adaptor Tool. The fittings on both
tools must be in good condition and free from
any small leaks before performing the proceed-
ing test.
(5) Start engine and bring to normal operating
temperature.
(6) Observe test gauge. Normal operating pressure
should be 339 kPa 6 34 kPa (49.2 psi 6 5 psi).
(7) Shut engine off.
(8) Pressure should not fall below 30 psi for five
minutes.
(9) If pressure falls below 30 psi, it must be deter-
mined if a fuel injector, the check valve within the
fuel pump module, or a fuel tube/line is leaking.
(10) Again, start engine and bring to normal oper-
ating temperature.
(11) Shut engine off. Fig. 9 Low Current Shunt Adapter
(12) Testing for fuel injector or fuel rail leak-
(1) Be sure fuel tank contains fuel before starting
age: Clamp off the rubber hose portion of Adaptor
test. If tank is empty or near empty, amperage read-
Tool between the fuel rail and the test port “T” on
ings will be incorrect.
Adapter Tool. If pressure now holds at or above 30
(2) Obtain LCS adapter.
psi, a fuel injector or the fuel rail is leaking.
(3) Plug cable from LCS adapter into DRB scan
(13) Testing for fuel pump check valve, filter/
tool at SET 1 receptacle.
regulator check valve or fuel tube/line leakage:
(4) Plug DRB into vehicle 16–way connector (data
Clamp off the rubber hose portion of Adaptor Tool
link connector).
between the vehicle fuel line and test port “T” on
(5) Connect (-) and (+) test cable leads into LCS
Adapter Tool. If pressure now holds at or above 30
adapter receptacles. Use 10 amp (10A +) receptacle
psi, a leak may be found at a fuel tube/line. If no
and common (-) receptacles.
leaks are found at fuel tubes or lines, one of the
check valves in either the electric fuel pump or filter/
regulator may be leaking.
(6) Gain access to MAIN MENU on DRB screen.
(7) Press DVOM button on DRB.
(8) Using left/right arrow keys, highlight CHAN-
NEL 1 function on DRB screen.
(9) Press ENTER three times.
(10) Using up/down arrow keys, highlight RANGE
on DRB screen (screen will default to 2 amp scale).
(11) Press ENTER to change 2 amp scale to 10
amp scale. This step must be done to prevent
damage to DRB scan tool or LCS adapter
(blown fuse).
(12) Remove cover from Power Distribution Center
(PDC).
(13) Remove fuel pump relay from PDC. Refer to
label on PDC cover for relay location.
WARNING: BEFORE PROCEEDING TO NEXT STEP, Fig. 10 Type–1 Relay

NOTE THE FUEL PUMP WILL BE ACTIVATED AND
SYSTEM PRESSURE WILL BE PRESENT. THIS WILL
OCCUR AFTER CONNECTING TEST LEADS FROM
LCS ADAPTER INTO FUEL PUMP RELAY CAVITIES.
THE FUEL PUMP WILL OPERATE EVEN WITH IGNI-
TION KEY IN OFF POSITION. BEFORE ATTACHING
TEST LEADS, BE SURE ALL FUEL LINES AND FUEL
SYSTEM COMPONENTS ARE CONNECTED.
CAUTION: TO PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO

THE VEHICLE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM AND LCS
ADAPTER, THE TEST LEADS MUST BE CON-
NECTED INTO RELAY CAVITIES EXACTLY AS
SHOWN IN FOLLOWING STEPS.
Depending upon vehicle model, year or engine con-

figuration, three different types of relays may be Fig. 11 Type–2 Relay
used: Type-1, type-2 and type–3.
(14) If equipped with type–1 relay (Fig. 10),
attach test leads from LCS adapter into PDC relay
cavities number 30 and 87. For location of these cav-
ities, refer to numbers stamped to bottom of relay
(Fig. 10).
cavities number 30 and 87. For location of these cav-
ities, refer to numbers stamped to bottom of relay
(Fig. 11).
cavities number 3 and 5. For location of these cavi-
ties, refer to numbers stamped to bottom of relay
(Fig. 12).
(17) When LCS adapter test leads are attached into
Fig. 12 Type–3 Relay
relay cavities, fuel pump will be activated. Determine
fuel pump amperage on DRB screen. Amperage Fuel Pump Capacity and Fuel Pressure Leak Down
should be below 10.0 amps. If amperage is below 10.0 tests were met, the fuel pump module is OK.
amps, and specifications for the Fuel Pump Pressure,
(18) If amperage is more than 10.0 amps, replace CAUTION: Steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 must be performed to
fuel pump module assembly. The electric fuel pump relieve high pressure fuel from within fuel rail. Do
is not serviced separately. not attempt to use following steps to relieve this
(19) Disconnect test leads from relay cavities pressure as excessive fuel will be forced into a cyl-
immediately after testing. inder chamber.
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT (7) Unplug connector from any fuel injector.
The fuel gauge sending unit contains a variable (8) Attach one end of a jumper wire with alligator
resistor (track). As the float moves up or down, elec- clips (18 gauge or smaller) to either injector terminal.
trical resistance will change. Refer to Instrument (9) Connect other end of jumper wire to positive
Panel and Gauges for Fuel Gauge testing. To test the side of battery.
gauge sending unit only, it must be removed from (10) Connect one end of a second jumper wire to
vehicle. The unit is part of the fuel pump module. remaining injector terminal.
Refer to Fuel Pump Module Removal/Installation for
CAUTION: Powering an injector for more than a few
procedures. Measure the resistance across the send-
seconds will permanently damage the injector.
ing unit terminals. With float in up position, resis-
tance should be 20 ohms (+/- 5%). With float in down (11) Momentarily touch other end of jumper wire
position, resistance should be 270 ohms (+/- 5%). to negative terminal of battery for no more than a
few seconds.
FUEL INJECTOR TEST (12) Place a rag or towel below fuel line quick-con-
To perform a complete test of the fuel injectors and nect fitting at fuel rail.
their circuitry, use the DRB scan tool and refer to the (13) Disconnect quick-connect fitting at fuel rail.
appropriate Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures man- Refer to Quick-Connect Fittings.
ual. To test the injector only, refer to the following: (14) Return fuel pump relay to PDC.
Disconnect the fuel injector wire harness connector (15) One or more Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s)
from the injector. The injector is equipped with 2 may have been stored in PCM memory due to fuel
electrical terminals (pins). Place an ohmmeter across pump relay removal. The DRB scan tool must be
the terminals. Resistance reading should be approxi- used to erase a DTC.
mately 12 ohms 61.2 ohms at 20°C (68°F).
FUEL TUBES/LINES/HOSES AND CLAMPS
SERVICE PROCEDURES
OPERATION
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE Also refer to Quick-Connect Fittings.
PROCEDURE WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER A CON-
Use following procedure if fuel rail is or is STANT PRESSURE (EVEN WITH THE ENGINE OFF).
not equipped with fuel pressure test port. BEFORE SERVICING ANY FUEL SYSTEM HOSES,
(1) Remove fuel fill cap. FITTINGS OR LINES, THE FUEL SYSTEM PRES-
(2) The fuel filler tube contains a spring-loaded SURE MUST BE RELEASED. REFER TO THE FUEL
flap (door) located below fuel fill cap. The flap is used SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE PROCEDURE IN
as a secondary way of sealing fuel tank if fuel fill cap THIS GROUP.
has not been properly tightened. It is part of EVAP
monitor system when vehicle is equipped with a Inspect all hose connections such as clamps, cou-
Leak Detection Pump (LDP). The vehicle may be plings and fittings to make sure they are secure and
equipped with flap installed into fuel filler tube leaks are not present. The component should be
even though vehicle is not equipped with LDP replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deg-
and EVAP monitor system. Place a nonmetallic radation that could result in failure.
object into fuel fill tube and press on flap to relieve Never attempt to repair a plastic fuel line/tube.
any tank pressure. Replace as necessary.
(3) Remove Fuel Pump relay from Power Distribu- Avoid contact of any fuel tubes/hoses with other
tion Center (PDC). For location of relay, refer to label vehicle components that could cause abrasions or
on underside of PDC cover. scuffing. Be sure that the plastic fuel lines/tubes are
(4) Start and run engine until it stalls. properly routed to prevent pinching and to avoid heat
(5) Attempt restarting engine until it will no sources.
longer run. The lines/tubes/hoses used on fuel injected vehicles
(6) Turn ignition key to OFF position. are of a special construction. This is due to the
higher fuel pressures and the possibility of contami- (5) Two-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting is
nated fuel in this system. If it is necessary to replace equipped with tabs located on both sides of fitting
these lines/tubes/hoses, only those marked EFM/EFI (Fig. 16). The tabs are supplied for disconnecting
may be used. quick-connect fitting from component being serviced.
If equipped: The hose clamps used to secure rub-
ber hoses on fuel injected vehicles are of a special
rolled edge construction. This construction is used to
prevent the edge of the clamp from cutting into the
hose. Only these rolled edge type clamps may be
used in this system. All other types of clamps may
cut into the hoses and cause high-pressure fuel leaks.
Use new original equipment type hose clamps.
Tighten hose clamps to 3 N·m (25 in. lbs.) torque.
QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS
Also refer to Fuel Tubes/Lines/Hoses and Clamps.
attach various fuel system components, lines and
tubes. These are: a single-tab type, a two-tab type or
a plastic retainer ring type. Safety latch clips are
used on certain components/lines. Certain fittings Fig. 13 Single-Tab Type Fitting
may require use of a special tool for disconnection.
DISCONNECTING
STANT PRESSURE (EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF).
BEFORE SERVICING ANY FUEL SYSTEM HOSE,
FITTING OR LINE, FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST
BE RELEASED. REFER TO FUEL SYSTEM PRES-
SURE RELEASE PROCEDURE.
CAUTION: The interior components (o-rings, spac-

ers) of some types of quick-connect fitting are not
serviced separately. If service parts are not avail-
able, do not attempt to repair a damaged fitting or
fuel line. If repair is necessary, replace complete
fuel line assembly. Fig. 14 Disconnecting Single-Tab Type Fitting
(1) Perform fuel pressure release procedure. Refer (a) To disconnect quick-connect fitting, squeeze
to Fuel Pressure Release Procedure in this group. plastic retainer tabs (Fig. 16) against sides of
(2) Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. quick-connect fitting with your fingers. Tool use is
(3) Clean fitting of any foreign material before dis- not required for removal and may damage plastic
assembly. retainer.
(4) Single-Tab Type Fitting: This type of fitting (b) Pull fitting from fuel system component
is equipped with a single pull tab (Fig. 13). The tab being serviced.
is removable. After tab is removed, quick-connect fit- (c) The plastic retainer will remain on compo-
ting can be separated from fuel system component. nent being serviced after fitting is disconnected.
(a) Press release tab on side of fitting to release The o-rings and spacer will remain in quick-con-
pull tab (Fig. 14). If release tab is not pressed nect fitting connector body.
prior to releasing pull tab, pull tab will be (6) Plastic Retainer Ring Type Fitting: This
damaged. type of fitting can be identified by the use of a full-
(b) While pressing release tab on side of fitting, round plastic retainer ring (Fig. 17) usually black in
use screwdriver to pry up pull tab (Fig. 14). color.
(c) Raise pull tab until it separates from quick- (a) To release fuel system component from quick-
connect fitting (Fig. 15). connect fitting, firmly push fitting towards compo-
Fig. 15 Removing Pull Tab
Fig. 17 Plastic Retainer Ring Type Fitting
Fig. 16 Typical Two-Tab Type Quick-Connect Fitting

nent being serviced while firmly pushing plastic
retainer ring into fitting (Fig. 17). With plastic ring
depressed, pull fitting from component. The plas-
tic retainer ring must be pressed squarely
into fitting body. If this retainer is cocked
during removal, it may be difficult to discon- Fig. 18 Latch Clip—Type 1
nect fitting. Use an open-end wrench on (a) Type 1: Pry up on latch clip with a screw-
shoulder of plastic retainer ring to aid in dis- driver (Fig. 18).
connection. (b) Type 2: Separate and unlatch 2 small arms
(b) After disconnection, plastic retainer ring will on end of clip (Fig. 19) and swing away from fuel
remain with quick-connect fitting connector body. line.
(c) Inspect fitting connector body, plastic retainer (c) Slide latch clip toward fuel rail while lifting
ring and fuel system component for damage. with screwdriver.
Replace as necessary. (d) Insert special fuel line removal tool (Snap-On
(7) Latch Clips: Depending on vehicle model and number FIH 9055-1 or equivalent) into fuel line
engine, 2 different types of safety latch clips are used (Fig. 20). Use tool to release locking fingers in end
(Fig. 18) or (Fig. 19). Type-1 is tethered to fuel line of line.
and type-2 is not. A special tool will be necessary to (e) With special tool still inserted, pull fuel line
disconnect fuel line after latch clip is removed. The from fuel rail.
latch clip may be used on certain fuel line/fuel rail
connection, or to join fuel lines together.
(4) Continue pushing until a click is felt.
(5) Single-tab type fitting: Push new tab down
until it locks into place in quick-connect fitting.
(6) Verify a locked condition by firmly pulling on
fuel tube and fitting (15-30 lbs.).
(7) Latch Clip Equipped: Install latch clip (snaps
into position). If latch clip will not fit, this indi-
cates fuel line is not properly installed to fuel
rail (or other fuel line). Recheck fuel line con-
nection.
(9) Start engine and check for leaks.

FUEL FILTER/FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
The combination Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regula-
tor is located on the fuel pump module. The fuel
pump module is located on top of fuel tank.
The filter/regulator may be removed without
removing fuel pump module although fuel tank must
Fig. 19 Latch Clip—Type 2 be removed.
REMOVAL
(1) Remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/
Installation.
(2) Clean area around filter/regulator.
(3) Disconnect fuel line at filter/regulator. Refer to
Quick-Connect Fittings in this group for procedures.
(4) Remove retainer clamp from top of filter/regu-
lator (Fig. 21). Clamp snaps to tabs on pump module.
Discard old clamp.
(5) Pry filter/regulator from top of pump module
with 2 screwdrivers. Unit is snapped into module.
(6) Discard gasket below filter/regulator (Fig. 22).
(7) Before discarding filter/regulator assembly,
inspect assembly to verify that o-rings (Fig. 23) are
intact. If the smallest of the two o-rings can not be
found on bottom of filter/regulator, it may be neces-
Fig. 20 Fuel Line Disconnection Using Special Tool sary to remove it from the fuel inlet passage in fuel
(f) After disconnection, locking fingers will pump module.
remain within quick-connect fitting at end of fuel
line. INSTALLATION
(8) Disconnect quick-connect fitting from fuel sys- (1) Clean recessed area in pump module where fil-
tem component being serviced. ter/regulator is to be installed.
(2) Obtain new filter/regulator (two new o-rings
CONNECTING should already be installed) .
(1) Inspect quick-connect fitting body and fuel sys- (3) Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to
tem component for damage. Replace as necessary. o-rings. Do not install o-rings separately into
(2) Prior to connecting quick-connect fitting to fuel pump module. They will be damaged when
component being serviced, check condition of fitting installing filter/regulator.
and component. Clean parts with a lint-free cloth. (4) Install new gasket to top of fuel pump module.
Lubricate with clean engine oil. (5) Press new filter/regulator into top of pump
(3) Insert quick-connect fitting into fuel tube or module until it snaps into position (a positive click
fuel system component until built-on stop on fuel must be heard or felt).
tube or component rests against back of fitting.
Fig. 21 Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator Fig. 23 Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator O-Rings
FUEL PUMP MODULE
Fuel tank removal will be necessary for fuel pump
module removal.
REMOVAL
STANT PRESSURE EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF.
BEFORE SERVICING THE FUEL PUMP MODULE,
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED.
(1) Drain fuel tank and remove tank. Refer to the

Fuel Tank Removal/Installation section of this group.
(2) Thoroughly wash and clean area around pump
module to prevent contaminants from entering tank.
(3) Disconnect fuel line at filter/regulator. Refer to
(4) The plastic fuel pump module locknut is
threaded onto fuel tank (Fig. 24). Install Special Tool
Fig. 22 Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Regulator Gasket 6856 to fuel pump module locknut and remove lock-
nut (Fig. 25). The fuel pump module will spring up
(6) The arrow (Fig. 21) molded into top of fuel
when locknut is removed.
pump module should be pointed towards front of
(5) Remove module from fuel tank.
vehicle (12 o’clock position).
(7) Rotate filter/regulator until fuel supply tube INSTALLATION
(fitting) is pointed towards front of vehicle (12 o’clock
position). CAUTION: Whenever fuel pump module is serviced,
(8) Install new retainer clamp (clamp snaps over module gasket must be replaced.
top of filter/regulator and locks to flanges on pump
module). (1) Thoroughly clean locknut threads and mating
(9) Connect fuel line at filter/regulator. Refer to fuel tank threads. Use a soap/water solution. Do not
Quick-Connect Fittings in this group for procedures. use carburetor cleaner to clean threads.
(10) Install fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/ (2) Using a new gasket, position gasket and fuel
Installation. pump module into opening in fuel tank.
(3) Apply clean water to gasket and locknut
threads.
FUEL PUMP INLET FILTER

The fuel pump inlet filter (strainer) is located on
the bottom of fuel pump module (Fig. 26). The fuel
pump module is located on top of fuel tank.
Fig. 24 Top View of Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump

Module
Fig. 26 Fuel Pump Inlet Filter

REMOVAL
Installation.
(2) Remove fuel pump module. Refer to Fuel Pump
Module Removal/Installation.
(3) Remove filter by prying from bottom of module
with 2 screwdrivers. Filter is snapped to module.
(4) Clean bottom of pump module.
INSTALLATION
(1) Snap new filter to bottom of module.
(2) Install fuel pump module. Refer to Fuel Pump
Fig. 25 Locknut Removal/Installation—Typical Module Removal/Installation.
(3) Install fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/
(4) Position locknut over top of fuel pump module. Installation.
(5) Rotate module until molded arrow (Fig. 24) is
pointed toward front of vehicle (12 o’clock position). FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
This step must be done to prevent float/float rod
The fuel gauge sending unit (fuel level sensor) and
assembly from contacting sides of fuel tank.
float assembly is located on the side of fuel pump
(6) Install Special Tool 6856 to locknut.
module (Fig. 27). The fuel pump module is located
(7) Tighten locknut to 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) torque.
within the fuel tank.
(8) Rotate fuel filter/fuel pressure regulator until
its fitting is pointed toward front of vehicle (12 REMOVAL
o’clock position).
(9) Connect fuel line at filter/regulator. Refer to
Installation.
(2) Remove fuel pump module. Refer to Fuel Pump
(10) Install fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Installa-
tion in this section.
(3) Remove electrical wire connector at sending
unit terminals.
(4) Press on release tab (Fig. 28) to remove send-
ing unit from pump module.
(1) Remove fuel tank filler tube cap.
(2) Perform Fuel System Pressure Release Proce-
dure as described in this Group.
(4) Remove air tube at top of throttle body. Note:
Some engine/vehicles may require removal of air
cleaner ducts at throttle body.
(5) Remove injector harness electrical connectors
at each injector. Each injector connector should have
a numerical tag attached identifying its correspond-
ing cylinder (Fig. 29). If not, identify each connector
before removal.
Fig. 27 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Location
Fig. 29 Fuel Rail Mounting—2.5L Engine

(6) Disconnect fuel supply line latch clip and fuel
line at fuel rail. Refer to Quick-Connect Fittings in
this group for procedures.
(7) Disconnect throttle cable at throttle body. Refer
Fig. 28 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Release Tab to Throttle Cable Removal/Installation in this group
for procedures.
INSTALLATION
(8) Disconnect speed control cable at throttle body
(1) Position sending unit to pump module and
(if equipped). Refer to Speed Control Cable in Group
snap into place.
8H, Speed Control System for procedures.
(2) Connect electrical connector to terminals.
(9) Disconnect automatic transmission cable at
(3) Install fuel pump module. Refer to Fuel Pump
throttle body (if equipped).
(10) Remove cable routing bracket (Fig. 29) at
(4) Install fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/
intake manifold.
Installation.
(11) Remove nut securing crankshaft position sen-
sor pigtail harness to fuel rail mounting stud.
FUEL INJECTOR RAIL—2.5L ENGINE Remove clamp and harness from fuel rail mounting
stud.
REMOVAL (12) Clean dirt/debris from each fuel injector at
intake manifold.
WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER CON-
(13) Remove fuel rail mounting nuts/bolts (Fig.
STANT FUEL PRESSURE EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF.
29).
THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED BEFORE
(14) Remove fuel rail by gently rocking until all
SERVICING FUEL RAIL.
the fuel injectors are out of intake manifold.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean each injector bore at intake manifold.
(2) Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to
each injector o-ring. This will aid in installation.
(3) Position tips of all fuel injectors into the corre-
sponding injector bore in intake manifold. Seat injec-
tors into manifold.
(4) Install and tighten fuel rail mounting bolts to
11 63 N·m (100 625 in. lbs.) torque.
(5) Position crankshaft position sensor pigtail wire
harness clamp and wire harness to fuel rail mount-
ing stud. Install nut securing harness to fuel rail
mounting stud.
(6) Connect tagged injector harness connectors to
appropriate injector.
(7) Connect fuel line and fuel line latch clip to fuel
rail. Refer Quick-Connect Fittings in this group for
procedures.
(8) Install protective cap to pressure test port fit-
ting (if equipped). Fig. 30 Fuel Rail Mounting—4.0L Engine
(9) Install cable routing bracket to intake mani- (6) Disconnect fuel supply line latch clip and fuel
fold. line at fuel rail. Refer to Quick-Connect Fittings in
(10) Connect throttle cable at throttle body. this group for procedures.
(11) Connect speed control cable at throttle body (if (7) Disconnect throttle cable at throttle body. Refer
equipped). to Throttle Cable Removal/Installation in this group
(12) Connect automatic transmission cable at for procedures.
throttle body (if equipped). (8) Disconnect speed control cable at throttle body
(13) Install air tube (or duct) at top of throttle (if equipped). Refer to Speed Control Cable in Group
body. 8H, Speed Control System for procedures.
(14) Install fuel tank cap. (9) Disconnect automatic transmission cable at
(15) Connect negative battery cable to battery. throttle body (if equipped).
(16) Start engine and check for fuel leaks. (10) Remove cable routing bracket (Fig. 30) at
intake manifold.
FUEL INJECTOR RAIL—4.0L ENGINE (11) Remove nut securing crankshaft position sen-
sor pigtail harness to fuel rail mounting stud.
REMOVAL Remove clamp and harness from fuel rail mounting
stud.
WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER CON- (12) Clean dirt/debris from each fuel injector at
STANT FUEL PRESSURE EVEN WITH ENGINE OFF. intake manifold.
THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED BEFORE (13) Remove fuel rail mounting nuts/bolts (Fig.
SERVICING FUEL RAIL. 30).
(14) Remove fuel rail by gently rocking until all
(1) Remove fuel tank filler tube cap.
the fuel injectors are out of intake manifold.
(2) Perform Fuel System Pressure Release Proce-
dure as described in this Group.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean each injector bore at intake manifold.
(4) Remove air tube at top of throttle body. Note:
(2) Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to
Some engine/vehicles may require removal of air
each injector o-ring. This will aid in installation.
cleaner ducts at throttle body.
(3) Position tips of all fuel injectors into the corre-
(5) Remove injector harness electrical connectors
sponding injector bore in intake manifold. Seat injec-
at each injector. Each injector connector should have
tors into manifold.
a numerical tag attached identifying its correspond-
(4) Install and tighten fuel rail mounting bolts to
ing cylinder (Fig. 30). If not, identify each connector
11 63 N·m (100 625 in. lbs.) torque.
before removal.
(5) Position crankshaft position sensor pigtail wire
harness clamp and wire harness to fuel rail mount-
ing stud. Install nut securing harness to fuel rail
mounting stud.
(6) Connect tagged injector harness connectors to
appropriate injector.
(7) Connect fuel line and fuel line latch clip to fuel
rail. Refer Quick-Connect Fittings in this group for
procedures.
(8) Install protective cap to pressure test port fit-
ting (if equipped).
(9) Install cable routing bracket to intake mani-
fold.
(10) Connect throttle cable at throttle body.
(11) Connect speed control cable at throttle body (if
equipped).
(12) Connect automatic transmission cable at
throttle body (if equipped).
(13) Install air tube (or duct) at top of throttle
body.
(14) Install fuel tank cap.
(16) Start engine and check for fuel leaks.
FUEL INJECTORS Fig. 32 Injector Retaining Clips—Typical Injector
REMOVAL FUEL TANK

(1) Remove fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Injector Rail WARNING: THE FUEL SYSTEM IS UNDER CON-
Removal in this section. STANT FUEL PRESSURE EVEN WITH THE ENGINE
(2) Remove clip(s) that retain fuel injector(s) to OFF. THIS PRESSURE MUST BE RELEASED
fuel rail (Fig. 31) or (Fig. 32). BEFORE SERVICING FUEL TANK.
Two different procedures may be used to drain fuel

tank (lowering tank or using DRB scan tool).
The quickest draining procedure involves lowering
the fuel tank.
As an alternative procedure, the electric fuel pump
may be activated allowing tank to be drained at fuel
rail connection. Refer to DRB scan tool for fuel pump
activation procedures. Before disconnecting fuel line
at fuel rail, release fuel pressure. Refer to the Fuel
System Pressure Release Procedure in this group for
procedures. Attach end of special test hose tool num-
ber 6541, 6539, 6631 or 6923 at fuel rail disconnec-
tion (tool number will depend on model and/or engine
application). Position opposite end of this hose tool to
Fig. 31 Injector Mounting an approved gasoline draining station. Activate fuel
pump and drain tank until empty.
INSTALLATION If electric fuel pump is not operating, tank must be
(1) Install fuel injector(s) into fuel rail assembly lowered for fuel draining. Refer to following proce-
and install retaining clip(s). dures.
(2) If same injector(s) is being reinstalled, install
new o-ring(s). REMOVAL
(3) Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to (1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
each injector o-ring. This will aid in installation. (2) Release fuel system pressure. Refer to the Fuel
(4) Install fuel rail. Refer to Fuel Rail Installation System Pressure Release Procedure in this group.
in this section. (3) Raise and support vehicle.
(5) Start engine and check for fuel leaks.
(4) If Equipped: Remove fuel tank skid plate. Refer
to Group 23, Body for procedures.
(5) Remove 4 fuel hose shield mounting bolts and
remove fuel hose shield (Fig. 33) from body.
Fig. 35 Fuel Tank Connections at Front of Fuel Tank
Fig. 33 Fuel Hose Shield

(6) Remove fuel tank fill hose and vent hose
clamps at fuel tank filler tube (Fig. 34). Remove both
hoses at fuel filler tube (Fig. 34).
Fig. 36 Fuel Tank Mounting Straps/Nuts

WARNING: PLACE A SHOP TOWEL AROUND FUEL
LINES TO CATCH ANY EXCESS FUEL.
(9) Disconnect fuel supply line from fuel extension

line near front of fuel tank (Fig. 35). Refer to Fuel
Tubes/Lines/Hoses and Clamps in this group. Also
refer to Quick-Connect Fittings for procedures.
Fig. 34 Fuel Fill and Vent Hoses
(10) Disconnect EVAP canister vent line near front
(7) Remove exhaust tailpipe heat shield mounting of tank (Fig. 35).
bolts and remove shield. (11) Disconnect fuel pump module electrical con-
nector (pigtail harness) near front of tank (Fig. 35).
CAUTION: To protect fuel tank from exhaust heat, Harness connector is clipped to body.
this shield must reinstalled after tank installation. (12) Remove two fuel tank strap nuts (Fig. 36).
Position both tank support straps away from tank.
(8) Place a hydraulic jack to bottom of fuel tank.
(13) Carefully lower right side of tank while feed-
ing both fuel hoses through access hole in body. Fuel
(9) Position fuel hose shield to body. Install and
tighten 4 mounting bolts.
(10) Connect fuel pump module pigtail harness
electrical connector near front of tank.
(11) Connect fuel pump module supply line near
front of tank. Refer to Quick-Connect Fittings for
procedures.
(12) Connect EVAP hose near front of tank.
(13) Install exhaust tailpipe heat shield.
(14) Install fuel tank skid plate (if equipped).
(15) Lower vehicle and connect battery cable to
battery.
FUEL TANK FILLER TUBE CAP

If replacement of the fuel tank filler tube cap is
necessary, it must be replaced with an identical cap
to be sure of correct system operation.
CAUTION: Remove the fuel tank filler tube cap to

Fig. 37 Fuel Fill/Vent Hose Index Marks relieve fuel tank pressure. The cap must be
removed prior to disconnecting any fuel system
Tank Full And Not Drained Using DRB Scan
component or before draining the fuel tank.
Tool: To prevent fuel loss through hoses, keep left
side of tank higher than right side while lowering.
Do not allow hose openings to drop lower than top of ACCELERATOR PEDAL
tank.
The accelerator pedal is connected to the throttle
(14) Continue lowering tank until clear of vehicle.
body linkage by the throttle cable. The cable is pro-
Place tank on floor with left side (hose side) higher
tected by a plastic sheathing and is connected to the
than right side.
throttle body linkage by a ball socket. It is connected
(15) Drain tank by removing fuel fill hose at tank.
to the upper part of the accelerator pedal arm by a
Fuel fill hose is largest of 2 hoses (Fig. 37). Insert the
plastic retainer (clip) (Fig. 38). This retainer (clip)
drain hose (from an approved gasoline draining sta-
snaps into the top of the accelerator pedal arm.
tion) into hose opening. Drain tank until empty.
Retainer tabs (built into the cable sheathing) (Fig.
(16) If fuel pump module removal is necessary,
38) fasten the cable to the dash panel.
refer to Fuel Pump Module Removal/Installation in
Dual throttle return springs (attached to the throt-
this group for procedures.
tle shaft) are used to close the throttle.
INSTALLATION CAUTION: Never attempt to remove or alter these
(1) If fuel pump module is being installed, refer to springs.
Fuel Pump Module Removal/Installation in this
group for procedures.
(2) Install fuel fill/vent hoses to tank fittings. To CAUTION: Be careful not to damage or kink the
prevent hose from kinking, rotate each hose until cable core wire (within the cable sheathing) while
index mark on hose is aligned to index tang on fuel servicing the accelerator pedal or throttle cable.
tank (Fig. 37).
(3) Install hose clamps to hoses. Position clamps
between index marks on each hose (Fig. 37). REMOVAL
(4) Position fuel tank to hydraulic jack. (1) From inside the vehicle, hold up accelerator
(5) Raise tank into position while guiding fuel fill pedal. Remove plastic cable retainer (clip) and throt-
and vent hoses into and through access hole in body. tle cable core wire from upper end of accelerator
(6) Continue raising tank until positioned to body. pedal arm (Fig. 38). Plastic cable retainer (clip) snaps
(7) Attach two fuel tank mounting straps and into pedal arm.
mounting nuts. Tighten nuts to 10 N·m (90 in. lbs.) (2) Remove accelerator pedal mounting bracket
torque. Do not over tighten nuts. nuts. Remove accelerator pedal assembly.
(8) Install both fuel hoses to fuel fill tube. Tighten
both retaining clamps.
Fig. 39 Cable Guide and Squeeze Tabs—Typical

Fig. 38 Accelerator Pedal Mounting—Typical
INSTALLATION
(1) Place accelerator pedal assembly over studs
protruding from floor pan. Tighten mounting nuts to
(2) Slide throttle cable into opening in top of pedal
arm. Push plastic cable retainer (clip) into accelera-
tor pedal arm opening until it snaps into place.
(3) Before starting engine, operate accelerator
pedal to check for any binding.
THROTTLE CABLE
REMOVAL
(1) From inside vehicle, hold up accelerator pedal.
Remove plastic cable retainer (clip) and throttle cable Fig. 40 Throttle (Accelerator) Cable at Throttle
core wire from upper end of accelerator pedal arm Body—Typical
(Fig. 38). Plastic cable retainer (clip) snaps into pedal
arm. INSTALLATION
(2) Remove cable core wire at pedal arm. (1) Slide throttle cable through hole in throttle
(3) From inside vehicle, pinch both sides of cable body bracket until retainer tabs lock into bracket.
housing retainer tabs (Fig. 38) at dash panel. (2) Connect cable ball end to throttle body linkage
Remove cable housing from dash panel and pull into ball (snaps on).
engine compartment. (3) Snap cable into cable guide on engine cylinder
(4) Remove cable from cable guide on engine cylin- head (valve) cover.
der head (valve) cover (Fig. 39). (4) Push other end of cable through opening in
(5) Remove throttle cable ball end socket at throt- dash panel until retaining tabs lock into panel.
tle body linkage (snaps off) (Fig. 40). (5) From inside drivers compartment, slide throttle
(6) Remove throttle cable from throttle body cable core wire into opening in top of accelerator
mounting bracket by compressing squeeze tabs (Fig. pedal arm. Push cable retainer (clip) into pedal arm
39) and pushing cable through hole in bracket. opening until it snaps in place.
(7) Remove throttle cable from vehicle. (6) Before starting engine, operate accelerator
pedal to check for any binding.
SPECIFICATIONS TORQUE CHART

FUEL TANK CAPACITY DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Accelerator Pedal Bracket Mounting Nuts . . . 5 N·m
Models Liters U.S. Gallons (36 in. lbs.)
All 76 20 Fuel Hose Clamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 N·m (25 in. lbs.)
Nominal refill capacities are shown. A variation may Fuel Rail Mounting Bolts . . . . . 11 N·m (100 in. lbs.)
be observed from vehicle to vehicle due to Fuel Tank Mounting Strap Nuts . . . . . . . . . 10 N·m
manufacturing tolerance and refill procedure. (90 in. lbs.)
Fuel Pump Module Locknut . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE

339 kPa 6 34 kPa (49.2 psi 6 5 psi).
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY— OIL PRESSURE SENSOR—PCM INPUT . . . . . . 31
PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)—PCM INPUT . . . . . 30
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CONTROLS—PCM POWER GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH—
AUTO SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY—PCM PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) . . . . 24
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY RADIATOR FAN RELAY—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . 35
SENSE—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SENSOR RETURN—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR—PCM SPEED CONTROL SOLENOIDS—PCM
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
BATTERY VOLTAGE—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES—PCM INPUT . . . 32
BRAKE SWITCH—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 TACHOMETER—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR—PCM THROTTLE BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)—PCM
CCD BUS (+/-) CIRCUITS-PCM OUTPUTS . . . . . 34 INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR—PCM TRANSMISSION PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH—
INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DATA LINK CONNECTOR—PCM INPUT AND VEHICLE SPEED AND DISTANCE SENSOR—
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
DUTY CYCLE EVAP PURGE SOLENOID DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
VALVE-PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 ASD AND FUEL PUMP RELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR— ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
EXTENDED IDLE SWITCH—PCM INPUT . . . . . . 30 EXTENDED IDLE SWITCH TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
FIVE VOLT SENSOR SUPPLY—PRIMARY . . . . . 28 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FIVE VOLT SENSOR SUPPLY—SECONDARY . . 28 INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
FUEL INJECTORS—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . 34 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . 28 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
FUEL PUMP RELAY-PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . 35 SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
GENERATOR FIELD DRIVER (-)—PCM OXYGEN (O2S) SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH . . . . . 42
GENERATOR FIELD SOURCE (+)—PCM THROTTLE BODY MINIMUM AIR FLOW
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 CHECK PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
GENERATOR LAMP—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . 35 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) . . . . . . . 44
GENERATOR OUTPUT—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . 30 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR—PCM VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—PCM INPUT . . . . . 30 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (FILTER) . . . . . . . . . . 49
IGNITION COIL—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY . . . . . . 45
INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE DUTY CYCLE EVAP CANISTER PURGE
SENSOR—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
LEAK DETECTION PUMP (SWITCH) SENSE— ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . 50
PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 FUEL PUMP RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
LEAK DETECTION PUMP—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . 35 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . 47
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP—ECM/PCM INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
SENSOR—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
OXYGEN SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH—2.5L SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) . . . . 47 SPECIAL TOOLS
THROTTLE BODY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) . . . . . . . 46
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION coolant temperature and from inputs it receives from
the air conditioning clutch switch and brake switch.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Based on inputs that it receives, the PCM adjusts
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (Fig. 1) ignition coil dwell. The PCM also adjusts the gener-
operates the fuel system. The PCM was formerly ator charge rate through control of the generator
referred to as the SBEC or engine controller. The field and provides speed control operation.
PCM is a pre-programmed, triple microprocessor dig-
NOTE: PCM Inputs:
ital computer. It regulates ignition timing, air-fuel
ratio, emission control devices, charging system, cer- • A/C request (if equipped with factory A/C)
tain transmission features, speed control, air condi- • A/C select (if equipped with factory A/C)
tioning compressor clutch engagement and idle • Auto shutdown (ASD) sense
speed. The PCM can adapt its programming to meet • Battery temperature
changing operating conditions. • Battery voltage
• Brake switch
• CCD bus (+) circuits
• CCD bus (-) circuits
• Camshaft position sensor signal
• Crankshaft position sensor
• Data link connection for DRB scan tool
• Engine coolant temperature sensor
• Extended idle switch (4.0L engine with police
package)
• Fuel level
• Generator (battery voltage) output
• Ignition circuit sense (ignition switch in on/off/
crank/run position)
• Intake manifold air temperature sensor
• Leak detection pump (switch) sense (if equipped)
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
Fig. 1 PCM Location • Oil pressure
• Oxygen sensors
The PCM receives input signals from various
• Park/neutral switch (auto. trans. only)
switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the
• Power ground
PCM regulates various engine and vehicle operations
• Power steering pressure switch (2.5L engine
through different system components. These compo-
only)
nents are referred to as Powertrain Control Module
• Sensor return
(PCM) Outputs. The sensors and switches that pro-
• Signal ground
vide inputs to the PCM are considered Powertrain
• Speed control multiplexed single wire input
Control Module (PCM) Inputs.
• Throttle position sensor
The PCM adjusts ignition timing based upon
• Vehicle speed sensor
inputs it receives from sensors that react to: engine
rpm, manifold absolute pressure, engine coolant tem- NOTE: PCM Outputs:
perature, throttle position, transmission gear selec-
tion (automatic transmission), vehicle speed, power • A/C clutch relay
steering pump pressure (2.5L engine only), and the • Auto shutdown (ASD) relay
brake switch. • CCD bus (+/-) circuits for: speedometer, voltme-
The PCM adjusts idle speed based on inputs it ter, fuel gauge, oil pressure gauge/lamp, engine temp.
receives from sensors that react to: throttle position, gauge and speed control warn. lamp
vehicle speed, transmission gear selection, engine • Data link connection for DRB scan tool
• EGR valve control solenoid (if equipped) and cruise modes, (with the engine at operating tem-
• EVAP canister purge solenoid perature) are Closed Loop modes.
• Five volt sensor supply (primary)
• Five volt sensor supply (secondary) IGNITION SWITCH (KEY-ON) MODE
• Fuel injectors This is an Open Loop mode. When the fuel system
• Fuel pump relay is activated by the ignition switch, the following
• Generator field driver (-) actions occur:
• Generator field driver (+) • The powertrain control module (PCM) pre-posi-
• Idle air control (IAC) motor tions the idle air control (IAC) motor.
• Ignition coil • The PCM determines atmospheric air pressure
• Leak detection pump (if equipped) from the MAP sensor input to determine basic fuel
• Malfunction indicator lamp (Check engine lamp). strategy.
Driven through CCD circuits. • The PCM monitors the engine coolant tempera-
• Radiator cooling fan relay ture sensor input. The PCM modifies fuel strategy
• Speed control vacuum solenoid based on this input.
• Speed control vent solenoid • Intake manifold air temperature sensor input is
• Tachometer (if equipped). Driven through CCD monitored.
circuits. • Throttle position sensor (TPS) is monitored.
• Transmission convertor clutch circuit • The auto shutdown (ASD) relay is energized by
the PCM for approximately three seconds.
MODES OF OPERATION • The fuel pump is energized through the fuel
As input signals to the powertrain control module pump relay by the PCM. The fuel pump will operate
(PCM) change, the PCM adjusts its response to the for approximately three seconds unless the engine is
output devices. For example, the PCM must calculate operating or the starter motor is engaged.
different injector pulse width and ignition timing for • The O2S sensor heater element is energized via
idle than it does for wide open throttle (WOT). the ASD relay. The O2S sensor input is not used by
The PCM will operate in two different modes: the PCM to calibrate air-fuel ratio during this mode
Open Loop and Closed Loop. of operation.
During Open Loop modes, the powertrain control
module (PCM) receives input signals and responds ENGINE START-UP MODE
only according to preset PCM programming. Input This is an Open Loop mode. The following actions
from the oxygen (O2S) sensors is not monitored dur- occur when the starter motor is engaged.
ing Open Loop modes. The powertrain control module (PCM) receives
During Closed Loop modes, the PCM will monitor inputs from:
the oxygen (O2S) sensors input. This input indicates • Battery voltage
to the PCM whether or not the calculated injector • Engine coolant temperature sensor
pulse width results in the ideal air-fuel ratio. This • Crankshaft position sensor
ratio is 14.7 parts air-to-1 part fuel. By monitoring • Intake manifold air temperature sensor
the exhaust oxygen content through the O2S sensor, • Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
the PCM can fine tune the injector pulse width. This • Throttle position sensor (TPS)
is done to achieve optimum fuel economy combined • Camshaft position sensor signal
with low emission engine performance. The PCM monitors the crankshaft position sensor.
The fuel injection system has the following modes If the PCM does not receive a crankshaft position
of operation: sensor signal within 3 seconds of cranking the
• Ignition switch ON engine, it will shut down the fuel injection system.
• Engine start-up (crank) The fuel pump is activated by the PCM through
• Engine warm-up the fuel pump relay.
• Idle Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the
• Cruise ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control
• Acceleration the injection sequence and injector pulse width by
• Deceleration turning the ground circuit to each individual injector
• Wide open throttle (WOT) on and off.
• Ignition switch OFF The PCM determines the proper ignition timing
The ignition switch On, engine start-up (crank), according to input received from the crankshaft posi-
engine warm-up, acceleration, deceleration and wide tion sensor.
open throttle modes are Open Loop modes. The idle
ENGINE WARM-UP MODE • Power steering pressure switch (2.5L engine
This is an Open Loop mode. During engine warm- only)
up, the powertrain control module (PCM) receives Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
inputs from: • Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the
• Battery voltage ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control
• Crankshaft position sensor injection sequence and injector pulse width by turn-
• Engine coolant temperature sensor ing the ground circuit to each individual injector on
• Intake manifold air temperature sensor and off.
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor • The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and
• Throttle position sensor (TPS) adjusts air-fuel ratio by varying injector pulse width.
• Camshaft position sensor signal (in the distributor) It also adjusts engine idle speed through the idle air
• Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal—auto. control (IAC) motor.
trans. only) • The PCM adjusts ignition timing by increasing
• Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) and decreasing spark advance.
• Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) • The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch
Based on these inputs the following occurs: through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done
• Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and
ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control specified pressures are met at the high and low–pres-
the injection sequence and injector pulse width by sure A/C switches. Refer to Group 24, Heating and
turning the ground circuit to each individual injector Air Conditioning for additional information.
on and off. The optional Extended Idle Switch is used to raise
• The PCM adjusts engine idle speed through the and hold the engine idle speed to approximately 1000
idle air control (IAC) motor and adjusts ignition tim- rpm. This is when the shifter is in either the Park or
ing. Neutral position and throttle pedal is not used. A
• The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch rocker-type switch (extended idle switch) is mounted
through the A/C compressor clutch relay. This is done to the instrument panel. This switch will supply a
if A/C has been selected by the vehicle operator and ground circuit (input) to the powertrain control mod-
specified pressures are met at the high and low–pres- ule (PCM). The switch is available only with 4.0L
sure A/C switches. Refer to Group 24, Heating and engine when supplied with optional police
Air Conditioning for additional information. package.
• When engine has reached operating tempera- On 2.5L 4–cylinder engines, a power steering pres-
ture, the PCM will begin monitoring O2S sensor sure switch is used to supply an input to the PCM
input. The system will then leave the warm-up mode when steering pump pressure is high. This will raise
and go into closed loop operation. engine speed. Refer to Power Steering Pressure
Switch in this group for additional information. The
IDLE MODE 4.0L 6–cylinder engine does not use this switch.
When the engine is at operating temperature, this
is a Closed Loop mode. At idle speed, the powertrain CRUISE MODE
control module (PCM) receives inputs from: When the engine is at operating temperature, this
• Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) is a Closed Loop mode. At cruising speed, the power-
• Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) train control module (PCM) receives inputs from:
• Battery voltage • Air conditioning select signal (if equipped)
• Crankshaft position sensor • Air conditioning request signal (if equipped)
• Engine coolant temperature sensor • Battery voltage
• Extended idle switch (4.0L engine with police • Engine coolant temperature sensor
package only) • Crankshaft position sensor
• Intake manifold air temperature sensor • Intake manifold air temperature sensor
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor • Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
• Throttle position sensor (TPS) • Throttle position sensor (TPS)
• Camshaft position sensor signal (in the distribu- • Camshaft position sensor signal (in the distribu-
tor) tor)
• Battery voltage • Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal—auto.
• Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal—auto. trans. only)
trans. only) • Oxygen (O2S) sensors
• Oxygen sensors Based on these inputs, the following occurs:
• Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the WIDE OPEN THROTTLE MODE
ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then adjust This is an Open Loop mode. During wide open
the injector pulse width by turning the ground circuit throttle operation, the powertrain control module
to each individual injector on and off. (PCM) receives the following inputs.
• The PCM monitors the O2S sensor input and • Battery voltage
adjusts air-fuel ratio. It also adjusts engine idle • Crankshaft position sensor
speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor. • Engine coolant temperature sensor
• The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the • Intake manifold air temperature sensor
ground path to the coil on and off. • Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
• The PCM operates the A/C compressor clutch • Throttle position sensor (TPS)
through the clutch relay. This happens if A/C has • Camshaft position sensor signal (in the distribu-
been selected by the vehicle operator and requested tor)
by the A/C thermostat. During wide open throttle conditions, the following
occurs:
ACCELERATION MODE • Voltage is applied to the fuel injectors with the
This is an Open Loop mode. The powertrain control ASD relay via the PCM. The PCM will then control
module (PCM) recognizes an abrupt increase in the injection sequence and injector pulse width by
throttle position or MAP pressure as a demand for turning the ground circuit to each individual injector
increased engine output and vehicle acceleration. The on and off. The PCM ignores the oxygen sensor input
PCM increases injector pulse width in response to signal and provides a predetermined amount of addi-
increased throttle opening. tional fuel. This is done by adjusting injector pulse
width.
DECELERATION MODE • The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the
When the engine is at operating temperature, this ground path to the coil on and off.
is an Open Loop mode. During hard deceleration, the
powertrain control module (PCM) receives the follow- IGNITION SWITCH OFF MODE
ing inputs. When ignition switch is turned to OFF position,
• Air conditioning select signal (if equipped) the PCM stops operating the injectors, ignition coil,
• Air conditioning request signal (if equipped) ASD relay and fuel pump relay.
• Battery voltage
• Engine coolant temperature sensor AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CONTROLS—PCM
• Crankshaft position sensor
INPUT
• Intake manifold air temperature sensor
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
OPERATION
• Throttle position sensor (TPS)
The A/C control system information applies to fac-
• Camshaft position sensor signal (in the distribu-
tory installed air conditioning units.
tor)
A/C SELECT SIGNAL: When the A/C switch is in
• Park/neutral switch (gear indicator signal—auto.
the ON position, an input signal is sent to the Pow-
trans. only)
ertrain Control Module (PCM). The signal informs
• Vehicle speed sensor
the PCM that the A/C has been selected. The PCM
If the vehicle is under hard deceleration with the
adjusts idle speed to a pre-programmed rpm through
proper rpm and closed throttle conditions, the PCM
the idle air control (IAC) motor to compensate for
will ignore the oxygen sensor input signal. The PCM
increased engine load.
will enter a fuel cut-off strategy in which it will not
A/C REQUEST SIGNAL: Once A/C has been
supply a ground to the injectors. If a hard decelera-
selected, the PCM receives the A/C request signal
tion does not exist, the PCM will determine the
from the clutch cycling pressure switch. The input
proper injector pulse width and continue injection.
indicates that the evaporator pressure is in the
Based on the above inputs, the PCM will adjust
proper range for A/C application. The PCM uses this
engine idle speed through the idle air control (IAC)
input to cycle the A/C compressor clutch (through the
motor.
A/C relay). It will also determine the correct engine
The PCM adjusts ignition timing by turning the
idle speed through the idle air control (IAC) motor
ground path to the coil on and off.
position.
If the A/C low-pressure switch or high-pressure
switch opens (indicating a low or high refrigerant
pressure), the PCM will not receive an A/C request
signal. The PCM will then remove the ground from
the A/C relay. This will deactivate the A/C compres- BATTERY VOLTAGE—PCM INPUT
sor clutch.
If the switch opens, (indicating that evaporator is OPERATION
not in proper pressure range), the PCM will not The battery voltage input provides power to the
receive the A/C request signal. The PCM will then Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It also informs
remove the ground from the A/C relay, deactivating the PCM what voltage level is supplied to the igni-
the A/C compressor clutch. tion coil and fuel injectors.
If battery voltage is low, the PCM will increase
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY injector pulse width (period of time that the injector
SENSE—PCM INPUT is energized). This is done to compensate for the
A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the PCM reduced flow through injector caused by the lowered
that the ASD has been activated. The ASD relay is voltage.
located in the Power Distribution Center (PDC). The
PDC is located in the engine compartment (Fig. 2). BRAKE SWITCH—PCM INPUT
Refer to label on PDC cover for relay location. The
relay is used to connect the oxygen sensor heater ele- OPERATION
ments, ignition coil and fuel injectors to 12 volt + When the brake light switch is activated, the Pow-
power supply. ertrain Control Module (PCM) receives an input indi-
cating that the brakes are being applied. After
receiving this input, the PCM maintains idle speed to
a scheduled rpm through control of the Idle Air Con-
trol (IAC) motor. The brake switch input is also used
to disable vent and vacuum solenoid output signals
to the speed control servo.
FIVE VOLT SENSOR SUPPLY—PRIMARY

OPERATION
Supplies the required 5 volt power source to the
crankshaft position sensor, camshaft position sensor,
MAP sensor and throttle position sensor.
FIVE VOLT SENSOR SUPPLY—SECONDARY

OPERATION
Supplies the required 5 volt source to certain sen-
sors.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR—PCM INPUT
Fig. 2 Power Distribution Center (PDC) OPERATION

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies
This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay
power to the fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending
is energized. If the powertrain control module (PCM)
unit). The fuel level sensor will then return a signal
does not see 12 volts at this input when the ASD
to the PCM to indicate fuel level. The purpose of this
should be activated, it will set a diagnostic trouble
feature is to prevent a false setting of misfire and
code (DTC).
fuel system monitor trouble codes. This is if the fuel
level is less than approximately 15 percent, or, if
BATTERY TEMPERATURE SENSOR—PCM equipped with a Leak Detection Pump (LDP), more
INPUT than approximately 85 percent of its rated capacity.
This input is also used to send a signal to the PCM
OPERATION for fuel gauge operation via the CCD or J1850 bus
Provides a signal to the PCM corresponding to the circuits.
battery temperature.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR—PCM INPUT

A sync signal is provide by the camshaft position
sensor located in the distributor (Fig. 3). The sync
signal from this sensor works in conjunction with the
crankshaft position sensor to provide the Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) with inputs. This is done to
establish and maintain correct injector firing order.
Refer to Camshaft Position Sensor in Group 8D,
Ignition System for more information.
Fig. 4 Crankshaft Position Sensor—Typical

tance changes. The change in resistance results in a
different input voltage to the PCM.
Fig. 3 Camshaft Position Sensor—Typical When the engine is cold, the PCM will operate in
Open Loop cycle. It will demand slightly richer air-
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR—PCM fuel mixtures and higher idle speeds. This is done
INPUT until normal operating temperatures are reached.
This sensor is a hall effect device that detects Refer to Open Loop/Closed Loop Modes of Opera-
notches in the flywheel (manual transmission) or tion in this section of the group for more information.
flexplate (automatic transmission).
This sensor is used to indicate to the powertrain
control module (PCM) that a spark and or fuel injec-
tion event is to be required. The output from this
sensor, in conjunction with the camshaft position sen-
sor signal, is used to differentiate between fuel injec-
tion and spark events.
The sensor is bolted to the transmission bellhous-
ing (Fig. 4).
Refer to Group 8D, Ignition System for more
crankshaft position sensor information.
The engine will not operate if the PCM does not
receive a crankshaft position sensor input.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR—

PCM INPUT
The engine coolant temperature sensor is installed
in the thermostat housing (Fig. 5) and protrudes into
the water jacket. The sensor provides an input volt-
age to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relating Fig. 5 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor—Typical
coolant temperature. The PCM uses this input along
with inputs from other sensors to determine injector
pulse width and ignition timing. As coolant tempera-
ture varies, the coolant temperature sensor’s resis-
EXTENDED IDLE SWITCH—PCM INPUT UPSTREAM HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR

The upstream O2S sensor is located in the exhaust
OPTIONAL POLICE PACKAGE WITH 4.0L ENGINE downpipe (Fig. 6). It provides an input voltage to the
ONLY PCM. The input tells the PCM the oxygen content of
The extended idle switch is used to raise the the exhaust gas. The PCM uses this information to
engine idle speed to approximately 1000 rpm. This is fine tune the air/fuel ratio by adjusting injector pulse
when the shifter is in either the Park or Neutral width.
position. A rocker-type switch (extended idle switch)
is mounted to the instrument panel. This switch will
supply a ground circuit to the powertrain control
module (PCM). The switch is available only with
4.0L engine when supplied with the optional
police package.
For testing and diagnosis of this switch and its cir-
cuit, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing section of this
group.
GENERATOR OUTPUT—PCM INPUT

OPERATION
Provides a charging system voltage input to the
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). It is sensed at the
battery input to the PCM.
Fig. 6 Heated Oxygen Sensors
OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)—PCM INPUT DOWNSTREAM HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
Two heated O2S sensors are used. The sensors pro-
The downstream heated oxygen sensor is located
duce voltages from 0 to 1 volt, depending upon the
near the outlet end of the catalytic convertor (Fig. 6).
oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the exhaust
The downstream heated oxygen sensor input is used
manifold. When a large amount of oxygen is present
to detect catalytic convertor deterioration. As the con-
(caused by a lean air/fuel mixture), the sensors pro-
vertor deteriorates, the input from the downstream
duces a low voltage. When there is a lesser amount
sensor begins to match the upstream sensor input
present (rich air/fuel mixture) it produces a higher
except for a slight time delay. By comparing the
voltage. By monitoring the oxygen content and con-
downstream heated oxygen sensor input to the input
verting it to electrical voltage, the sensors act as a
from the upstream sensor, the PCM calculates cata-
rich-lean switch.
lytic convertor efficiency.
The oxygen sensors are equipped with a heating
When the catalytic converter efficiency drops below
element that keeps the sensors at proper operating
emission standards, the PCM stores a diagnostic
temperature during all operating modes. Maintaining
trouble code and illuminates the Malfunction Indica-
correct sensor temperature at all times allows the
tor Lamp (MIL). For more information, refer to
system to enter into closed loop operation sooner.
Group 25, Emission Control Systems.
Also, it allows the system to remain in closed loop
operation during periods of extended idle.
In Closed Loop operation, the PCM monitors the
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—PCM INPUT
O2S sensor input (along with other inputs) and
adjusts the injector pulse width accordingly. During
OPERATION
Open Loop operation, the PCM ignores the O2S sen- The ignition circuit sense input tells the Power-
sor input. The PCM adjusts injector pulse width train Control Module (PCM) the ignition switch has
based on preprogrammed (fixed) values and inputs energized the ignition circuit.
from other sensors.
The Automatic Shutdown (ASD) relay supplies bat- INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE
tery voltage to both the upstream and downstream SENSOR—PCM INPUT
heated oxygen sensors. The oxygen sensors are The intake manifold air temperature sensor is
equipped with a heating element. The heating ele- installed in the intake manifold with the sensor ele-
ments reduce the time required for the sensors to ment extending into the air stream (Fig. 7) or (Fig.
reach operating temperature. 8). The sensor provides an input voltage to the Pow-
ertrain Control Module (PCM) indicating intake man-
ifold air temperature. The input is used along with MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
inputs from other sensors to determine injector pulse
SENSOR—PCM INPUT
width. As the temperature of the air-fuel stream in
The MAP sensor reacts to absolute pressure in the
the manifold varies, the sensor resistance changes.
intake manifold. It provides an input voltage to the
This results in a different input voltage to the PCM.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM). As engine load
changes, manifold pressure varies. The change in
manifold pressure causes MAP sensor voltage to
change. The change in MAP sensor voltage results in
a different input voltage to the PCM. The input volt-
age level supplies the PCM with information about
ambient barometric pressure during engine load
while the engine is running. The PCM uses this
input along with inputs from other sensors to adjust
air-fuel mixture.
The MAP sensor is mounted on the side of the
engine throttle body (Fig. 7). The sensor is connected
to the throttle body with a rubber L-shaped fitting.
OIL PRESSURE SENSOR—PCM INPUT

DESCRIPTION
The engine oil pressure sensor (sending unit) is
located in an engine oil pressure gallery.
Fig. 7 Intake Man. Air Temp. Sensor Location—4.0L OPERATION

Engine A signal is sent from the oil pressure sensor to the
LEAK DETECTION PUMP (SWITCH) SENSE— Powertrain Control Module (PCM) relating to engine
oil pressure.
POWER GROUND
OPERATION
The power ground is used to control ground cir-
cuits for the following Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) loads:
• Generator field winding
• Fuel injectors
• Ignition coil(s)
• Certain relays/solenoids
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH—PCM

INPUT
A pressure sensing switch is included in the power
steering system (mounted on the high-pressure line).
This switch will be used only on vehicles equipped
with a 2.5L engine and power steering. The switch
Fig. 8 Intake Man. Air Temp. Sensor Location—2.5L (Fig. 9) provides an input to the Powertrain Control
Engine Module (PCM). This input is provided during periods
of high pump load and low engine rpm; such as dur-
PCM INPUT ing parking maneuvers. The PCM will then increase
Provides an input to the PCM that the leak detec- the idle speed through the Idle Air Control (IAC)
tion pump (LDP) has been activated. Refer to Group motor. This is done to prevent the engine from stall-
25, Emission Control System for LDP information. ing under the increased load.
When steering pump pressure exceeds 3275 kPa 6
690 kPa (475 psi 6 100 psi), the normally closed
switch will open and the PCM will increase the TRANSMISSION PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH—
engine idle speed. This will prevent the engine from
PCM INPUT
stalling.
The park/neutral switch is located on the transmis-
When pump pressure drops to approximately 1379
sion housing and provides an input to the Powertrain
kPa (200 psi), the switch circuit will re-close and
Control Module (PCM). This will indicate that the
engine idle speed will return to its previous setting.
automatic transmission is in Park, Neutral or a drive
gear selection. This input is used to determine idle
speed (varying with gear selection), fuel injector
pulse width and ignition timing advance. Refer to
Group 21, Transmissions, for testing, replacement
and adjustment information. It is also used as a con-
dition for speed control operation.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)—PCM

INPUT
The TPS is mounted on the throttle body (Fig. 7).
The TPS is a variable resistor that provides the Pow-
ertrain Control Module (PCM) with an input signal
(voltage) that represents throttle blade position. The
sensor is connected to the throttle blade shaft. As the
position of the throttle blade changes, the resistance
of the TPS changes.
The PCM supplies approximately 5 volts to the
TPS. The TPS output voltage (input signal to the
PCM) represents the throttle blade position. The
Fig. 9 Power Steering Pump Pressure Switch—2.5L PCM receives an input signal voltage from the TPS.
Engine This will vary in an approximate range of from .26
SENSOR RETURN—PCM INPUT volts at minimum throttle opening (idle), to 4.49 volts
at wide open throttle. Along with inputs from other
OPERATION sensors, the PCM uses the TPS input to determine
Sensor Return provides a low noise ground refer- current engine operating conditions. In response to
ence for all engine control system sensors. engine operating conditions, the PCM will adjust fuel
injector pulse width and ignition timing.
SPEED CONTROL SWITCHES—PCM INPUT
Two separate speed control switch modules are VEHICLE SPEED AND DISTANCE SENSOR—
mounted on the steering wheel to the left and right PCM INPUT
side of the driver’s airbag module. Within the two The vehicle speed sensor is located on the speed-
switch modules, five momentary contact switches, ometer pinion gear adapter (Fig. 10) or (Fig. 11). The
supporting seven different speed control functions pinion gear adapter is located on the extension hous-
are used. The outputs from these switches are fil- ing of the transmission (drivers side—2WD), or on
tered into one input. The Powertrain Control Module the transfer case (4WD). The sensor input is used by
(PCM) determines which output has been applied the powertrain control module (PCM) to determine
through resistive multiplexing. The input circuit vehicle speed and distance traveled.
voltage is measured by the PCM to determine which The speed sensor generates 8 pulses per sensor
switch function has been selected. revolution. These signals, in conjunction with a
A speed control indicator lamp, located on the closed throttle signal from the throttle position sen-
instrument panel cluster is energized by the PCM via sor, indicate a closed throttle deceleration to the
the CCD Bus. This occurs when speed control system PCM. When the vehicle is stopped at idle, a closed
power has been turned ON, and the engine is run- throttle signal is received by the PCM (but a speed
ning. sensor signal is not received).
The two switch modules are labeled: ON/OFF, SET, Under deceleration conditions, the PCM adjusts
RESUME/ACCEL, CANCEL and COAST. Refer to the idle air control (IAC) motor to maintain a desired
Group 8H, Speed Control System for more informa- MAP value. Under idle conditions, the PCM adjusts
tion. the IAC motor to maintain a desired engine speed.
Fig. 10 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—2WD— Fig. 12 Power Distribution Center (PDC)
Typical The powertrain control module (PCM) activates the
A/C compressor through the A/C clutch relay. The
PCM regulates A/C compressor operation by switch-
ing the ground circuit for the A/C clutch relay on and
off.
When the PCM receives a request for A/C from A/C
evaporator switch, it will adjust idle air control (IAC)
motor position. This is done to increase idle speed.
The PCM will then activate the A/C clutch through
the A/C clutch relay. The PCM adjusts idle air control
(IAC) stepper motor position to compensate for
increased engine load from the A/C compressor.
By switching the ground path for the relay on and
off, the PCM is able to cycle the A/C compressor
clutch. This is based on changes in engine operating
conditions. The PCM will also de-energize the relay if
coolant temperature exceeds 125°C (257°F).
AUTO SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY—PCM

OUTPUT
DESCRIPTION
The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution
Fig. 11 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—4WD— Center (PDC).
Typical
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY— OPERATION
The ASD supplies battery voltage to the fuel injec-
PCM OUTPUT tors and ignition coil(s). With certain emissions pack-
The A/C relay is located in the Power Distribution
ages it also supplys voltage to the oxygen sensor
Center (PDC). The PDC is located in the engine com-
heating elements. The ground circuit for the coil in
partment (Fig. 12). Refer to label on PDC cover for
the ASD relay is controlled by the Powertrain Con-
relay location.
trol Module (PCM). The PCM operates the relay by
switching the ground circuit on and off.
CCD BUS (+/-) CIRCUITS-PCM OUTPUTS with an attached numerical tag (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.).
The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) sends cer- This is used to identify each fuel injector.
tain output signals through the CCD bus circuits. The injectors are energized individually in a
These signals are used to control certain instrument sequential order by the powertrain control module
panel located items and to determine certain identi- (PCM). The PCM will adjust injector pulse width by
fication numbers. switching the ground path to each individual injector
Refer to Group 8E, Instrument Panel and Gauges on and off. Injector pulse width is the period of time
for additional information. that the injector is energized. The PCM will adjust
injector pulse width based on various inputs it
DATA LINK CONNECTOR—PCM INPUT AND receives.
During start up, battery voltage is supplied to the
OUTPUT injectors through the ASD relay. When the engine is
The 16–way data link connector (diagnostic scan operating, voltage is supplied by the charging sys-
tool connector) links the Diagnostic Readout Box tem. The PCM determines injector pulse width based
(DRB) scan tool or the Mopar Diagnostic System on various inputs.
(MDS) with the powertrain control module (PCM).
The data link connector is located under the instru-
ment panel to the left of the steering column (Fig.
13). For operation of the DRB scan tool, refer to the
vice manual.
Fig. 14 Fuel Rail and Injectors—4.0L 6–Cyl. Engine
Fig. 13 Data Link Connector Location

DUTY CYCLE EVAP PURGE SOLENOID
VALVE-PCM OUTPUT
Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for
information.
FUEL INJECTORS—PCM OUTPUT

Six individual fuel injectors are used with the 4.0L
6-cylinder engine (Fig. 14). Four individual fuel injec-
tors are used with the 2.5L 4-cylinder engine (Fig.
15). The fuel injectors are attached to the fuel rail.
The nozzle ends of the injectors are positioned into
openings in the intake manifold just above the intake
valve ports of the cylinder head. The engine wiring
harness connector for each fuel injector is equipped Fig. 15 Fuel Rail and Injectors—2.5L 4–Cyl. Engine
FUEL PUMP RELAY-PCM OUTPUT positioned when the ignition key is turned to the On
position.
DESCRIPTION A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechani-
The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distri- cally limit the position of the throttle body throttle
bution Center (PDC). plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle
speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are
OPERATION controlled by the PCM.
The PCM energizes the electric fuel pump through
the fuel pump relay. Battery voltage is applied to the IGNITION COIL—PCM OUTPUT
fuel pump relay when the ignition key is ON. The System voltage from the Automatic Shutdown
relay is energized when a ground signal is provided (ASD) relay is supplied to the ignition coil positive
by the PCM. terminal. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
The fuel pump will operate for approximately three operates the ignition coil. Ignition timing is not
seconds unless the engine is operating or the starter adjustable. The PCM adjusts ignition timing to
motor is engaged. meet changing engine operating conditions.
Refer to Group 8D, Ignition System for additional
GENERATOR FIELD SOURCE (+)—PCM information.
OUTPUT
LEAK DETECTION PUMP—PCM OUTPUT
OPERATION Certain engines with certain emissions packages
are equipped with a leak detection pump (LDP). The
This output from the Powertrain Control Module
LDP is activated through this PCM output. Refer to
(PCM) regulates charging system voltage to the gen-
Group 25, Emission Control System for additional
erator field source (+) circuit. The voltage range is
information.
12.9 to 15.0 volts. Models of previous years had used
the ASD relay (directly) to apply the 12 volt + power
supply to the generator field source (+) circuit. RADIATOR FAN RELAY—PCM OUTPUT
An electric radiator cooling fan is used with certain
GENERATOR FIELD DRIVER (-)—PCM OUTPUT models/engines. It is controlled by the powertrain
control module (PCM) through the radiator fan relay.
OPRATION The relay is energized when coolant temperature is
This output from the Powertrain Control Module above 103°C (217°F). It will then de-energize when
(PCM) regulates charging system ground control to coolant temperature drops to 98°C (208°F). Refer to
the generator field driver (-) circuit. Group 7, Cooling Systems for more information.
The relay is located in the power distribution cen-
ter (PDC) (Fig. 12).
GENERATOR LAMP—PCM OUTPUT
If the powertrain control module (PCM) senses a
low charging condition in the charging system, it will
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP—ECM/PCM
illuminate the generator lamp (if equipped) on the OUTPUT
instrument panel. For example, during low idle with Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for
all accessories turned on, the lamp may momentarily information.
go on. Refer to Groups 8A and 8C for charging sys-
tem information. SPEED CONTROL SOLENOIDS—PCM OUTPUT
Speed control operation is regulated by the power-
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR—PCM train control module (PCM). The PCM controls the
OUTPUT vacuum to the throttle actuator through the speed
control vacuum and vent solenoids. Refer to Group
The IAC motor is mounted on the throttle body
8H for Speed Control Information.
(Fig. 7) and is controlled by the Powertrain Control
Module (PCM).
The throttle body has an air control passage that TACHOMETER—PCM OUTPUT
provides air for the engine at idle (the throttle plate The powertrain control module (PCM) supplies
is closed). The IAC motor pintle protrudes into the engine rpm values to the instrument cluster tachom-
air control passage and regulates air flow through it. eter. Refer to Group 8E for tachometer information.
Based on various sensor inputs, the PCM adjusts
engine idle speed by moving the IAC motor pintle in THROTTLE BODY
and out of the air control passage. The IAC motor is Filtered air from the air cleaner enters the intake
manifold through the throttle body (Fig. 16). Fuel
does not enter the intake manifold through the throt-
tle body. Fuel is sprayed into the manifold by the fuel
injectors. The throttle body is mounted on the intake
manifold. It contains an air control passage (Fig. 16)
controlled by an Idle Air Control (IAC) motor. The air
control passage is used to supply air for idle condi-
tions. A throttle valve (plate) is used to supply air for
above idle conditions.
Fig. 17 Powertrain Control Module (PCM)

(3) Inspect fuel pump relay and air conditioning
compressor clutch relay (if equipped). Inspect ASD
relay connections. Inspect starter motor relay connec-
tions. Inspect relays for signs of physical damage and
corrosion. The relays are located in Power Distribu-
tion Center (PDC) (Fig. 18). Refer to label on PDC
cover for relay location.
Fig. 16 Throttle Body (4.0L Engine Shown)

The Throttle Position Sensor (TPS), IAC motor and
Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor (MAP) are
attached to the throttle body. The accelerator pedal
cable, speed control cable (when equipped) and auto-
matic transmission control cable (when equipped) are
connected to the throttle arm.
A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechani-
cally limit the position of the throttle body throttle
plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle
speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are
controlled by the PCM.

VISUAL INSPECTION
A visual inspection for loose, disconnected or incor-
rectly routed wires and hoses should be made. This
should be done before attempting to diagnose or ser- Fig. 18 Power Distribution Center (PDC)
vice the fuel injection system. A visual check will
help spot these faults and save unnecessary test and (4) Inspect ignition coil connections. Verify coil sec-
diagnostic time. A thorough visual inspection will ondary cable is firmly connected to coil (Fig. 19) or
include the following checks: (Fig. 20).
(1) Verify the three 32–way electrical connectors (5) Verify distributor cap is correctly attached to
are fully inserted into the connector of the power- distributor. Be sure spark plug cables are firmly con-
train control module (PCM) (Fig. 17). nected to distributor cap and spark plugs are in their
(2) Inspect battery cable connections. Be sure they correct firing order. Be sure coil cable is firmly con-
are clean and tight. nected to distributor cap and coil. Be sure camshaft
(9) Inspect fuel tube quick-connect fitting-to-fuel
rail connections.
(10) Verify hose connections to all ports of vacuum
fittings on intake manifold are tight and not leaking.
(11) Inspect accelerator cable, transmission throt-
tle cable (if equipped) and cruise control cable con-
nections (if equipped). Check their connections to
throttle arm of throttle body for any binding or
restrictions.
(12) If equipped with vacuum brake booster, verify
vacuum booster hose is firmly connected to fitting on
intake manifold. Also check connection to brake vac-
uum booster.
(13) Inspect air cleaner inlet and air cleaner ele-
ment for dirt or restrictions.
(14) Inspect radiator grille area, radiator fins and
air conditioning condenser for restrictions.
(15) Verify intake manifold air temperature sensor
wire connector is firmly connected to harness connec-
Fig. 19 Ignition Coil—2.5L Engine tor (Fig. 21) or (Fig. 22).
Fig. 20 Ignition Coil—4.0L Engine Fig. 21 Intake Manifold Air Temp. Sensor Location—
2.5L Engine
position sensor wire connector (at distributor) is
firmly connected to harness connector. Inspect spark (16) Verify MAP sensor electrical connector is
plug condition. Connect vehicle to an oscilloscope and firmly connected to MAP sensor (Fig. 22). Also verify
inspect spark events for fouled or damaged spark rubber L-shaped fitting from MAP sensor to throttle
plugs or cables. Refer to Group 8D, Ignition System body is firmly connected (Fig. 23).
for additional information. (17) Verify fuel injector wire harness connectors
(6) Verify generator output wire, generator connec- are firmly connected to injectors in correct order.
tor and ground wire are firmly connected to genera- Each harness connector is numerically tagged with
tor. injector number (INJ 1, INJ 2 etc.) of its correspond-
(7) Inspect system body grounds for loose or dirty ing fuel injector and cylinder number.
connections. Refer to Group 8, Wiring for ground (18) Verify harness connectors are firmly con-
locations. nected to idle air control (IAC) motor and throttle
(8) Verify crankcase ventilation (CCV) operation. position sensor (TPS) (Fig. 22).
Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for addi- (19) Verify wire harness connector is firmly con-
tional information. nected to engine coolant temperature sensor (Fig.
24).
Fig. 22 Sensor Locations—4.0L Engine Fig. 24 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor—

Typical
Fig. 25 Location of Oxygen Sensors
Fig. 23 Rubber L-Shaped Fitting—MAP Sensor-to- (26) 2.5L 4–Cylinder Engine Only: Verify good
Throttle Body electrical connection at power steering pressure
switch (Fig. 28). This switch is not used with 4.0L
(20) Raise and support vehicle. engines.
(21) Verify both oxygen sensor wire connectors are (27) Verify good electrical connections at fuel pump
firmly connected to sensors. Inspect sensors and con- module connector at front of fuel tank (Fig. 29).
nectors for damage (Fig. 25). (28) Verify good EVAP canister vent line connec-
(22) Inspect for pinched or leaking fuel tubes. tion at front of fuel tank (Fig. 29).
Inspect for pinched, cracked or leaking fuel hoses. (29) Verify good fuel supply line connection at
(23) Inspect for exhaust system restrictions such front of fuel tank (Fig. 29).
as pinched exhaust pipes, collapsed muffler or (30) Inspect all fuel lines/hoses for cracks or leaks.
plugged catalytic convertor. (31) Inspect transmission torque convertor housing
(24) If equipped with automatic transmission, ver- (automatic transmission) or clutch housing (manual
ify electrical harness is firmly connected to park/neu- transmission) for damage to timing ring on drive
tral switch. Refer to Automatic Transmission section plate/flywheel.
of Group 21. (32) Verify battery cable and solenoid feed wire
(25) Verify electrical harness connector is firmly connections to starter solenoid are tight and clean.
connected to vehicle speed sensor (Fig. 26) or (Fig. Inspect for chaffed wires or wires rubbing up against
27). other components.
Fig. 28 Power Steering Pressure Switch—2.5L

Engine
Fig. 26 Vehicle Speed Sensor—2WD
Fig. 29 Fuel Tank Connections at Front of Fuel Tank

OPERATION
• Terminal number 30 is connected to battery volt-
age. For both the ASD and fuel pump relays, termi-
Fig. 27 Vehicle Speed Sensor—4WD
nal 30 is connected to battery voltage at all times.
ASD AND FUEL PUMP RELAYS • The PCM grounds the coil side of the relay
The following description of operation and through terminal number 85.
tests apply only to the Automatic Shutdown • Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil
(ASD) and fuel pump relays. The terminals on the side of the relay.
bottom of each relay are numbered (Fig. 30) or (Fig. • When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and fuel
31). pump relays, terminal number 87A connects to termi-
nal 30. This is the Off position. In the off position,
voltage is not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Ter-
minal 87A is the center terminal on the relay.
of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt
power source.
(6) Connect one end of another jumper wire (16
gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt
power source. Do not attach the other end of the
jumper wire to the relay at this time.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CON-

TACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST.
(7) Attach the other end of the jumper wire to

relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohm-
meter should now show continuity between relay ter-
minals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show
continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30.
(8) Disconnect jumper wires.
Fig. 30 ASD and Fuel Pump Relay Terminals (9) Replace the relay if it did not pass the continu-
ity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests,
it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD
and fuel pump relay circuits. Refer to the Wiring
Diagrams.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)

SENSOR TEST
To perform a complete test of MAP sensor (Fig. 32)
and its circuitry, refer to DRB scan tool and appro-
priate Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures manual. To
test the MAP sensor only, refer to the following:
(1) Inspect rubber L-shaped fitting from MAP sen-
sor to throttle body (Fig. 33). Repair as necessary.
Fig. 31 ASD and Fuel Pump Relay Terminals

• When the PCM energizes the ASD and fuel
pump relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30.
This is the On position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage
to the rest of the circuit.
TESTING
The following procedure applies to the ASD and
fuel pump relays.
(1) Remove relay from connector before testing.
(2) With the relay removed from the vehicle, use
an ohmmeter to check the resistance between termi-
nals 85 and 86. The resistance should be between 75
65 ohms.
(3) Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 30
and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity
Fig. 32 Sensor Location (4.0L Engine Shown)
between terminals 30 and 87A.
(4) Connect the ohmmeter between terminals 87 CAUTION: When testing the MAP sensor, be sure
and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at that the harness wires are not damaged by the test
this time. meter probes.
(5) Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or
smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end (2) Test MAP sensor output voltage at MAP sensor
connector between terminals A and B (Fig. 34). With
OXYGEN (O2S) SENSORS

To perform a complete test of the O2S sensors and
their circuitry, refer to the DRB scan tool and appro-
priate Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures manual. To
test the O2S sensors only, refer to the following:
The upstream O2S sensor is located on the exhaust
downpipe (Fig. 35).
The downstream O2S sensor is located near the
outlet end of the catalytic converter (Fig. 35).
Fig. 33 Rubber L-Shaped Fitting—MAP Sensor-to-

Throttle Body
ignition switch ON and engine OFF, output voltage
should be 4-to-5 volts. The voltage should drop to 1.5-
to-2.1 volts with a hot, neutral idle speed condition.
Fig. 35 Oxygen Sensor Location

Each O2S heating element can be tested with an
ohmmeter as follows:
Disconnect the O2S sensor connector. Connect the
ohmmeter test leads across the white wire terminals
of the sensor connector. Resistance should be
between 4.5 6.5 ohms and 7 ohms. Replace the sen-
sor if the ohmmeter displays an infinity (open) read-
ing.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

To perform a complete test of the engine coolant
temperature sensor and its circuitry, refer to DRB
scan tool and appropriate Powertrain Diagnostics
Procedures manual. To test the sensor only, refer to
Fig. 34 MAP Sensor Connector Terminals—Typical the following:
(3) Test Powertrain Control Module (PCM) cavity (1) Disconnect wire harness connector from coolant
A-27 for same voltage described above to verify wire temperature sensor (Fig. 36).
harness condition. Repair as necessary. (2) Test the resistance of sensor with a high input
(4) Test MAP sensor supply voltage at sensor con- impedance (digital) volt-ohmmeter. Refer to SENSOR
nector between terminals A and C (Fig. 34) with igni- RESISTANCE (OHMS)—COOLANT TEMPERA-
tion ON. The voltage should be approximately 5 volts TURE SENSOR/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(60.5V). Five volts (60.5V) should also be at cavity SENSOR chart. The resistance (as measured across
A-17 of the PCM wire harness connector. Repair or sensor terminals) should be within range shown in
replace wire harness as necessary. chart. If not, replace sensor.
(5) Test the MAP sensor ground circuit at sensor (3) Test continuity of the wire harness between the
connector terminal—A (Fig. 34) and PCM connector PCM wire harness connector and the coolant sensor
A-4. Repair wire harness if necessary. connector terminals. Refer to Group 8, Wiring for ter-
Refer to Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams for cavity minal/cavity locations. Repair the wire harness if an
locations. open circuit is indicated.
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR

To perform a complete test of the IAC motor and
its circuitry, refer to DRB scan tool and appropriate
Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures manual.
INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
To perform a complete test of the intake manifold
air temperature sensor and its circuitry, refer to DRB
tester and appropriate Powertrain Diagnostics Proce-
dures manual. To test the sensor only, refer to the
following:
(1) Disconnect wire harness connector from intake
manifold air temperature sensor (Fig. 37) or (Fig.
38).
Fig. 36 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor—

Typical
SENSOR RESISTANCE (OHMS)—COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR/INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
TEMPERATURE RESISTANCE (OHMS)
°CEL. °FAHR. MIN. MAX.
-40 -40 291,490 381,710

-20 -4 85,850 108,390
-10 14 49,250 61,430
0 32 29,330 35,990
10 50 17,990 21,810
Fig. 37 Intake Manifold Air Temperature Sensor—
20 68 11,370 13,610 4.0L Engine
25 77 9,120 10,880 (2) Test the resistance of sensor with a high input
30 86 7,370 8,750 impedance (digital) volt-ohmmeter. Refer to SENSOR
40 104 4,900 5,750 RESISTANCE (OHMS)—COOLANT TEMPERA-
TURE SENSOR/INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
50 122 3,330 3,880
SENSOR chart. The resistance (as measured across
60 140 2,310 2,670 sensor terminals) should be within range shown in
70 158 1,630 1,870 chart. If not, replace sensor.
80 176 1,170 1,340 (3) Test resistance of wire harness. Do this
between PCM wire harness connector A-15 and sen-
90 194 860 970 sor connector terminal. Also check between PCM con-
100 212 640 720 nector A-4 to sensor connector terminal. Repair wire
110 230 480 540 harness as necessary if resistance is greater than 1
ohm.
120 248 370 410
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH
2.5L 4–Cylinder Engine Only
This switch (Fig. 39) provides an input to the Pow-
ertrain Control Module (PCM). The input is provided
Fig. 38 Intake Manifold Air Temperature Sensor— Fig. 39 Power Steering Pump Pressure Switch—2.5L
2.5L Engine Engine
during periods of high pump load and low engine EXTENDED IDLE SWITCH TEST
rpm; such as during parking maneuvers. The PCM
will then increase idle speed through the Idle Air OPTIONAL POLICE PACKAGE ONLY
Control (IAC) motor. This is done to prevent the The extended idle switch is used to raise engine
engine from stalling under the increased load. idle speed to approximately 1000 rpm when the
When steering pump pressure exceeds 3275 kPa 6 shifter is in either Park or Neutral position. A rocker-
690 kPa (475 psi 6 100 psi), the normally closed type switch (extended idle switch) is mounted to
switch circuit will open and the PCM will increase instrument panel. This switch is available only
the engine idle speed. with 4.0L engine when supplied with optional
When power steering pump pressure drops to police package.
approximately 1379 kPa (200 psi), the switch circuit The extended idle switch will control a ground cir-
will re-close and idle speed will return to normal. cuit going to the powertrain control module (PCM).
To test switch: When a ground signal (through the switch) has been
(1) Disconnect electrical connector at switch. received at pin/cavity A-12 (circuit K78) of the PCM,
(2) Connect a pair of jumper wires to switch termi- engine idle speed will increase.
nals. Route and secure jumper wires away from fan (1) Bring engine to normal operating temperature
blades and fan belt. and turn extended idle switch to ON position. Engine
(3) Connect an ohmmeter to jumper wires and idle speed should now increase to approximately
observe continuity. Circuit should be closed with 1000 rpm when shifter is in either Park or Neutral
engine not running. If continuity is observed, switch position.
is OK. If switch circuit is open, replace switch. (2) If idle speed does not increase, unplug 4–way
(4) Start engine and observe ohmmeter. With electrical connector from switch.
engine at idle speed, continuity should be observed (3) Check circuit Z1L for ground. Ground should
until steering wheel has been turned to left or right be present at all times. If not, repair open circuit to
position. Do not hold steering wheel in full left ground. Refer to Group 8W, Wiring Diagrams for cir-
or right position for more than a few seconds. cuit and wiring information.
Damage to power steering pump may occur. (4) If ground is present at Z1L, check continuity of
(5) If continuity is still observed after turning switch between circuits Z1L and K78. If continuity is
wheel (circuit did not open) , replace switch. not present, replace switch. If switch is OK proceed
to next step.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR (5) With 4–way electrical connector still unplugged
To perform a complete test of the sensor and its from switch, apply a good ground to circuit K78.
circuitry, refer to DRB scan tool and appropriate Engine idle speed should increase. If not, proceed to
Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures manual. next step.
(6) Ground pin/cavity A-12 directly at PCM using a (1) Start the engine and bring to operating tem-
small paper clip. Be careful not to damage wiring perature. Be sure all accessories are off before per-
with paper clip. If engine idle speed increases, it can forming this test.
be assumed that PCM is functioning correctly. Repair (2) Shut off engine and remove air duct at throttle
open circuit in circuit K78. If engine idle speed will body.
not increase after applying a ground to pin/cavity (3) 2.5L 4–Cylinder Engine: Near front/top of
A-12 (circuit K78) directly at PCM, replace PCM. valve cover, disconnect CCV tube at fixed orifice fit-
ting (Fig. 41). Insert Special Tool 6714 into end of
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS) disconnected CCV tube (insert either end of tool into
To perform a complete test of the TPS (Fig. 37) and tube). Let tool and tube hang disconnected at side of
its circuitry, refer to the DRB scan tool and appropri- engine.
ate Powertrain Diagnostics Procedures manual. To (4) 4.0L 6–Cylinder Engine: Disconnect CCV
test the TPS only, refer to the following: tube (Fig. 42) at intake manifold fitting. Attach a
The TPS can be tested with a digital voltmeter. short piece of rubber hose to special tool 6714 (insert
The center terminal of the TPS is the output termi- rubber hose to either end of tool). Install rubber hose/
nal. tool to intake manifold fitting. Let CCV tube hang
With the ignition key in the ON position, check the disconnected at side of engine.
TPS output voltage at the center terminal wire of the
connector. Check this at idle (throttle plate closed)
and at Wide Open Throttle (WOT). At idle, TPS out-
put voltage should be greater than .26 volts but less
than .95 volts. At wide open throttle, TPS output
voltage must be less than 4.49 volts. The output volt-
age should increase gradually as the throttle plate is
slowly opened from idle to WOT.
THROTTLE BODY MINIMUM AIR FLOW CHECK

PROCEDURE
The following test procedure has been developed to
check throttle body calibrations for correct idle condi-
tions. The procedure should be used to diagnose the
throttle body for conditions that may cause idle prob-
lems. This procedure should be used only after
normal diagnostic procedures have failed to
produce results that indicate a throttle body
related problem. Be sure to check for proper
operation of the idle air control motor before
performing this test.
A special fixed orifice tool (number 6714) (Fig. 40)
must be used for the following test. This tool has a Fig. 41 Install Orifice Tool 2.5L 4–Cylinder Engine
fixed internal diameter of 0.185”. (5) Connect DRB scan tool to 16–way data link
connector. This connector is located at lower edge of
instrument panel near steering column. Refer to
vice manual for DRB operation.
(6) Start engine and allow to warm up.
(7) Using the DRB scan tool, scroll through menus
as follows: select—Stand Alone DRB III, select 1999
Diagnostics, select—Engine, select—System Test,
select—Minimum Air Flow.
(8) The DRB scan tool will count down to stabilize
idle rpm and display minimum air flow idle rpm. The
idle rpm should be between 500 and 900 rpm. If idle
Fig. 40 6714 Fixed Orifice Tool
speed is outside these specifications, replace throttle
body. Refer to Throttle Body Removal/Installation.
(9) Disconnect DRB scan tool from vehicle.
Fig. 42 Install Orifice Tool 4.0L 6–Cylinder Engine Fig. 43 Power Distribution Center (PDC)
(10) Remove orifice tool and connect CCV tube to REMOVAL
engine. (1) Remove PDC cover.
(11) Install air duct to throttle body. (2) Remove relay from PDC.
(3) Check condition of relay terminals and PDC
connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION if necessary before installing relay.
(4) Check for pin height (pin height should be the
AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN (ASD) RELAY same for all terminals within the PDC connector).
The ASD relay is located in the Power Distribution Repair if necessary before installing relay.
Center (PDC) (Fig. 43). Refer to label on PDC cover
for relay location. INSTALLATION
(1) Install relay to PDC.
REMOVAL (2) Install cover to PDC.
(1) Remove PDC cover.
(2) Remove relay from PDC. THROTTLE BODY
(3) Check condition of relay terminals and PDC A (factory adjusted) set screw is used to mechani-
connector terminals for damage or corrosion. Repair cally limit the position of the throttle body throttle
if necessary before installing relay. plate. Never attempt to adjust the engine idle
(4) Check for pin height (pin height should be the speed using this screw. All idle speed functions are
same for all terminals within the PDC connector). controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM).
Repair if necessary before installing relay.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION (1) Remove air cleaner tube at throttle body.
(1) Install relay to PDC. (2) Disconnect throttle body electrical connectors
(2) Install cover to PDC. at MAP sensor, IAC motor and TPS (Fig. 44) or (Fig.
45).
FUEL PUMP RELAY (3) Remove all control cables from throttle body
The fuel pump relay is located in the Power Distri- (lever) arm. Refer to the Accelerator Pedal and Throt-
bution Center (PDC) (Fig. 43). Refer to label on PDC tle Cable section of this group for additional informa-
cover for relay location. tion.
(4) Remove four throttle body mounting bolts.
(5) Remove throttle body from intake manifold.
THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (TPS)

The TPS is mounted to the throttle body (Fig. 44)
or (Fig. 45).
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect TPS electrical connector.
(2) Remove TPS mounting screws (Fig. 46).
(3) Remove TPS.
Fig. 44 Throttle Body and Sensor Locations—4.0L

Engine
Fig. 46 TPS Mounting Screws

INSTALLATION
The throttle shaft end of the throttle body slides
into a socket in the TPS (Fig. 47). The TPS must be
installed so that it can be rotated a few degrees. (If
the sensor will not rotate, install the sensor with the
throttle shaft on the other side of the socket tangs).
The TPS will be under slight tension when rotated.
Fig. 45 Throttle Body and Sensor Locations—2.5L

Engine
(6) Discard old throttle body-to-intake manifold
gasket.
INSTALLATION
(1) Clean mating surfaces of throttle body and
intake manifold.
(2) Install new throttle body-to-intake manifold
gasket. Fig. 47 Throttle Position Sensor—Installation
(3) Install throttle body to intake manifold. (1) Install TPS and retaining screws.
(4) Install four mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 11 (2) Tighten screws to 7 N·m (60 in. lbs.) torque.
N·m (100 in. lbs.) torque. (3) Connect TPS electrical connector to TPS.
(5) Install control cables. (4) Manually operate throttle (by hand) to check
(6) Install electrical connectors. for any TPS binding before starting engine.
(7) Install air cleaner at throttle body.
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) MOTOR

The IAC motor is located on the side of the throttle
body (Fig. 44) or (Fig. 45).
REMOVAL
(1) Remove air cleaner tube at throttle body.
(2) Disconnect electrical connector from IAC motor.
(3) Remove two mounting bolts (screws) (Fig. 48).
(4) Remove IAC motor from throttle body.
Fig. 49 MAP Sensor Mounting

(3) Install MAP sensor mounting bolts (screws).
Tighten screws to 3 N·m (25 in. lbs.) torque.
(4) Install air cleaner intake tube.
DUTY CYCLE EVAP CANISTER PURGE

Fig. 48 Mounting Bolts (Screws)—IAC Motor SOLENOID
INSTALLATION Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for
removal/installation procedures.
(1) Install IAC motor to throttle body.
(2) Install and tighten two mounting bolts (screws)
to 7 N·m (60 in. lbs.) torque.
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
(3) Install electrical connector. The PCM is located in the engine compartment
(4) Install air cleaner tube to throttle body. next to the air cleaner assembly (Fig. 50).
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)

SENSOR
The MAP sensor is mounted to the side of the
throttle body (Fig. 44) or (Fig. 45). An L-shaped rub-
ber fitting is used to connect the MAP sensor to
throttle body (Fig. 49).
REMOVAL
(1) Remove air cleaner intake tube at throttle
body.
(2) Remove two MAP sensor mounting bolts
(screws) (Fig. 49).
(3) While removing MAP sensor, slide the rubber
L-shaped fitting (Fig. 49) from throttle body.
(4) Remove rubber L-shaped fitting from MAP sen-
sor. Fig. 50 PCM Location
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION To avoid possible voltage spike damage to the
(1) Install rubber L-shaped fitting to MAP sensor. PCM, ignition key must be off, and negative battery
(2) Position sensor to throttle body while guiding cable must be disconnected before unplugging PCM
rubber fitting over throttle body vacuum nipple. connectors.
Fig. 52 Power Steering Pressure Switch

(2) Place a small container or shop towel beneath
switch to collect any excess fluid.
Fig. 51 PCM Mounting (3) Remove switch. Use back-up wrench on power
(2) Remove cover over electrical connectors. Cover steering line to prevent line bending.
snaps onto PCM.
(3) Carefully unplug the three 32–way connectors INSTALLATION
(Fig. 51) from PCM. (1) Install power steering switch into power steer-
(4) Remove three PCM mounting bolts and remove ing line.
PCM from vehicle. (2) Tighten to 14–22 N·m (124–195 in. lbs.) torque.
(3) Connect electrical connector to switch.
INSTALLATION (4) Check power steering fluid and add as neces-
(1) Install PCM and mounting bolts to vehicle. sary.
(2) Tighten bolts to 4 N·m (35 in. lbs.). (5) Start engine and again check power steering
(3) Check pin connectors in the PCM and the three fluid. Add fluid if necessary.
32–way connectors for corrosion or damage. Also, the
pin heights in connectors should all be same. Repair OXYGEN SENSOR
as necessary before installing connectors. The upstream O2S sensor is located in exhaust
(4) Install three 32–way connectors. downpipe. The downstream sensor is located near
(5) Install cover over electrical connectors. Cover outlet end of catalytic converter. Refer to (Fig. 53).
snaps onto PCM.
(6) Install battery cable.
(7) Use the DRB scan tool to reprogram new PCM
with vehicles original Identification Number (VIN)
and original vehicle mileage.
POWER STEERING PRESSURE SWITCH—2.5L

ENGINE
This switch is not used with 4.0L six-cylinder
engines.
The power steering pressure switch is installed in
the power steering high-pressure hose (Fig. 52).
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect electrical connector from power
steering pressure switch. Fig. 53 Oxygen Sensor Locations
REMOVAL
WARNING: THE EXHAUST MANIFOLD, EXHAUST
PIPES AND CATALYTIC CONVERTER BECOME
VERY HOT DURING ENGINE OPERATION. ALLOW
ENGINE TO COOL BEFORE REMOVING OXYGEN
SENSOR.

(2) Disconnect wire connector from O2S sensor.
CAUTION: When disconnecting sensor electrical

connector, do not pull directly on wire going into
sensor.
(3) Remove O2S sensor. Snap-On oxygen sensor

wrench (number YA 8875) may be used for removal
and installation.
INSTALLATION Fig. 54 Air Cleaner Housing and Element (Filter)

Threads of new oxygen sensors are factory coated
with anti-seize compound to aid in removal. DO
NOT add any additional anti-seize compound to
threads of a new oxygen sensor.
(1) Install O2S sensor. Tighten to 30 N·m (22 ft.
lbs.) torque.
(2) Connect O2S sensor wire connector.
(3) Lower vehicle.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT (FILTER)

REMOVAL
(1) Unlock air tube clamp (Fig. 54) at air cleaner
cover. To unlock clamp, attach adjustable pliers to
clamp and rotate pliers as shown in (Fig. 55).
(2) Remove air tube at cover. Fig. 55 Clamp Removal
(3) Pry back three clips retaining air cleaner cover
to air cleaner housing.
(4) Remove housing cover and remove air cleaner
element.
(5) Clean inside of housing before replacing ele-
ment.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install air cleaner element into housing.
(2) Install air cleaner cover to housing (three
clips). Be sure cover is properly seated to air cleaner
housing.
(3) Install air tube and clamp to cover. Compress
clamp snugly with adjustable pliers as shown in (Fig.
56).
Fig. 56 Clamp Installation


WARNING: HOT, PRESSURIZED COOLANT CAN
CAUSE INJURY BY SCALDING. COOLING SYSTEM
MUST BE PARTIALLY DRAINED BEFORE REMOV-
ING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR.
REFER TO GROUP 7, COOLING.
The coolant temperature sensor is installed in the

thermostat housing (Fig. 57).
Fig. 58 IAT Sensor Location—4.0L Engine
Fig. 57 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor—

Typical
REMOVAL
(1) Partially drain cooling system until coolant
level is below cylinder head. Observe the WARN-
INGS in Group 7, Cooling.
(2) Disconnect coolant temperature sensor wire
connector.
(3) Remove sensor from thermostat housing.
Fig. 59 IAT Sensor Location—2.5L Engine
INSTALLATION
(1) Apply sealant to sensor threads (new replace- REMOVAL
ment sensors will have sealant already applied). (1) Disconnect electrical connector from IAT sen-
(2) Install coolant temperature sensor into thermo- sor.
stat housing. Tighten to 11 N·m (8 ft. lbs.) torque. (2) Remove sensor from intake manifold.
(3) Connect wire connector.
(4) Fill cooling system. Refer to Group 7, Cooling INSTALLATION
System. (1) Install IAT sensor into intake manifold.
Tighten sensor to 28 N·m (20 ft. lbs.) torque.
INTAKE MANIFOLD AIR TEMPERATURE (2) Connect electrical connector to sensor.
SENSOR
The intake manifold air temperature (IAT) sensor VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
is installed into intake manifold plenum near throttle The vehicle speed sensor is located on the speed-
body (Fig. 58) or (Fig. 59). ometer pinion gear adapter (Fig. 60) or (Fig. 61). The
pinion gear adapter is located on the extension hous-
ing of transmission (drivers side).
Fig. 62 Sensor Removal/Installation

Fig. 60 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—2WD— INSTALLATION
Typical (1) Clean inside of speedometer pinion gear
adapter before installing speed sensor.
(2) Install sensor into speedometer gear adapter
and install mounting bolt. Before tightening bolt,
verify speed sensor is fully seated (mounted
flush) to speedometer pinion gear adapter.
(3) Tighten sensor mounting bolt to 2.2 N·m (20 in.
lbs.) torque.
(4) Connect electrical connector to sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Air Cleaner Housing Mount. Bolts . . . . . . . . . 8 N·m
(71 in. lbs.)
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor . . . . . . 11 N·m
(96 in. lbs.)
IAC Motor-To-Throttle Body Bolts . . . . . . . . . 7 N·m
(60 in. lbs.)
Intake Manifold Air Temp. Sensor . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
Fig. 61 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—4WD— (20 ft. lbs.)
Typical MAP Sensor Mounting Screws . . 3 N·m (25 in. lbs.)
Oxygen Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 N·m (22 ft. lbs.)
REMOVAL PCM Mounting Screws . . . . . . . . 4 N·m (35 in. lbs.)
Power Steering Pressure Switch . . . . . . . 14–22 N·m
(2) Disconnect electrical connector from sensor.
(124–195 in. lbs.)
(3) Remove sensor mounting bolt (Fig. 62).
Throttle Body Mounting Bolts . 11 N·m (100 in. lbs.)
(4) Remove sensor (pull straight out) from speed-
Throttle Position Sensor Mounting Screws . . 7 N·m
ometer pinion gear adapter (Fig. 62). Do not remove
(60 in. lbs.)
gear adapter from transmission.
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Vehicle Speed Sensor Mounting Bolt . . . . . . 2.2 N·m
(20 in. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
FUEL SYSTEM
O2S (Oxygen Sensor) Remover/Installer—C-4907
Spanner Wrench, Fuel Pump Module Locknut—6856
Test Kit, Fuel Pressure—5069
Adapters, Fuel Pressure Test—6539 and/or 6631
Test Kit, Fuel Pressure—C-4799-B
Fitting, Air Metering—6714
Fuel Line Removal Tool—6782

XJ FUEL SYSTEM—2.5L DIESEL ENGINE 14 - 1
FUEL SYSTEM—2.5L DIESEL ENGINE

CONTENTS
page page
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM— GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2.5L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM—
2.5L DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
GENERAL INFORMATION
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

FUEL REQUIREMENTS—2.5L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION pedal. When the ignition (key) switch is OFF, the
solenoid is shut off and fuel flow is not allowed to the
FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID fuel injection pump. When the key is placed in the
The fuel shutdown solenoid is controlled and ON or START positions, fuel supply is allowed at the
operated by the MSA. injection pump.
The fuel shutdown (shut-off) solenoid is used to
electrically shut off the diesel fuel supply to the high- FUEL REQUIREMENTS—2.5L DIESEL
pressure fuel injection pump. The solenoid is Premium quality diesel fuel with a minimum Cet-
mounted to the rear of the injection pump. ane rating of 50 or higher is required.
The solenoid controls starting and stopping of the
engine regardless of the position of the accelerator
14 - 2 FUEL SYSTEM—2.5L DIESEL ENGINE XJ
FUEL DELIVERY SYSTEM—2.5L DIESEL ENGINE
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION FUEL SUPPLY RESTRICTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

FUEL DRAIN TUBES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . . 3 HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL LINE LEAK TEST . . . . . 12
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 VISUAL INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
FUEL HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SERVICE PROCEDURES
FUEL HEATER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 AIR BLEED PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
FUEL INJECTION PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 FUEL INJECTION PUMP TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ACCELERATOR PEDAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE WARNING . . . . . . . . 2 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FUEL DRAIN TUBES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
FUEL TANK MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR . . . . . . . . . . 14
FUEL TUBES/LINES/HOSES AND CLAMPS— FUEL HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
LOW-PRESSURE TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUEL HEATER RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 FUEL INJECTION PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 FUEL INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS—LOW PRESSURE FUEL LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 FUEL RESERVOIR MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
AIR IN FUEL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 HIGH-PRESSURE LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL HEATER RELAY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL INJECTION PUMP TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FUEL INJECTOR FIRING SEQUENCE . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL INJECTOR / NEEDLE MOVEMENT FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 FUEL TANK CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL INJECTOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 IDLE SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID TEST . . . . . . . . . 12
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LEAKS. INSPECT FOR

HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LEAKS WITH A SHEET OF
INTRODUCTION CARDBOARD (Fig. 1). HIGH FUEL INJECTION
This Fuel Delivery section will cover components PRESSURE CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY IF
not controlled by the PCM. For components con- CONTACT IS MADE WITH THE SKIN.
trolled by the PCM, refer to the Fuel Injection Sys-
tem—2.5L Diesel Engine section of this group.
The fuel heater relay, fuel heater and fuel gauge
FUEL TANK
The fuel tank and tank mounting used with the
are not operated by the PCM. These components are
diesel powered engine is the same as used with gas-
controlled by the ignition (key) switch. All other fuel
oline powered models, although the fuel tank module
system electrical components necessary to operate
is different.
the engine are controlled or regulated by the PCM.
The fuel tank contains the fuel tank module and
two rollover valves. Two fuel lines are routed to the
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE WARNING
fuel tank module. One line is used for fuel supply to
WARNING: HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LINES DELIVER the fuel filter/water separator. The other is used to
DIESEL FUEL UNDER EXTREME PRESSURE FROM return excess fuel back to the fuel tank.
THE INJECTION PUMP TO THE FUEL INJECTORS. The fuel tank module contains the fuel gauge elec-
THIS MAY BE AS HIGH AS 45,000 KPA (6526 PSI). trical sending unit. An electrical fuel pump is not
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN INSPECTING FOR used with the diesel engine.
Fig. 1 Typical Fuel Pressure Test at Injector Fig. 2 Fuel Filter/Water Separator Location
FUEL TANK MODULE The combination fuel filter/water separator pro-
An electric fuel pump is not attached to the fuel tects the fuel injection pump by helping to remove
tank module for diesel powered engines. Fuel is water and contaminants from the fuel. Moisture col-
siphoned by the fuel injection pump. lects at the bottom of the filter/separator in a plastic
The fuel tank module is installed in the top of the bowl.
fuel tank. The fuel tank module contains the follow- The fuel filter/water separator assembly contains
ing components: the fuel filter, fuel heater element, and fuel drain
• Fuel reservoir valve.
• A separate in-tank fuel filter For information on the fuel heater, refer to Fuel
• Electric fuel gauge sending unit Heater in this group.
• Fuel supply line connection Refer to the maintenance schedules in Group 0 in
• Fuel return line connection this manual for the recommended fuel filter replace-
ment intervals.
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT For periodic draining of water from the bowl, refer
The fuel gauge sending unit is attached to the side to Fuel Filter/Water Separator Removal/Installation
of the fuel pump module. The sending unit consists of in this group.
a float, an arm, and a variable resistor (track). The
track is used to send an electrical signal used for fuel FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID
gauge operation. The fuel shutdown solenoid is controlled and
As the fuel level increases, the float and arm move operated by the MSA.
up. This decreases the sending unit resistance, caus- The fuel shutdown (shut-off) solenoid is used to
ing the PCM to send a signal to the fuel gauge on the electrically shut off the diesel fuel supply to the high-
instrument panel to read full. As the fuel level pressure fuel injection pump. The solenoid is
decreases, the float and arm move down. This mounted to the rear of the injection pump.
increases the sending unit resistance, causing the The solenoid controls starting and stopping of the
PCM to send a signal to the fuel gauge on the instru- engine regardless of the position of the accelerator
ment panel to read empty. pedal. When the ignition (key) switch is OFF, the
solenoid is shut off and fuel flow is not allowed to the
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR fuel injection pump. When the key is placed in the
The fuel filter/water separator assembly is located ON or START positions, fuel supply is allowed at the
in the engine compartment near the strut tower (Fig. injection pump.
2).
FUEL INJECTION PUMP fuel injector). Outputs from the Accelerator Pedal
The fuel injection pump is a mechanical distribu- Position sensor, engine speed sensor (engine rpm)
tor–type, Bosch VP36 series (Fig. 3). A gear on the and engine coolant temperature sensor are also used.
end of the injection pump shaft meshes with the The MSA will then compare its set values to these
drive gear at the front of engine. The pump is outputs to electrically adjust the amount of fuel tim-
mechanically timed to the engine. The MSA can ing (amount of advance) within the injection pump.
make adjustments to the timing of the injection This is referred to as “Closed Loop” operation. The
pump. MSA monitors fuel timing by comparing its set value
to when the injector #1 opens. If the value is greater
than a preset value a fault will be set.
Actual electric fuel timing (amount of advance) is
accomplished by the fuel timing solenoid mounted to
the bottom of the injection pump (Fig. 3). Fuel timing
will be adjusted by the MSA, which controls the fuel
timing solenoid.
An overflow valve is attached into the fuel return
line at the rear of the fuel injection pump (Fig. 3).
This valve serves two purposes. One is to ensure that
a certain amount of residual pressure is maintained
within the pump when the engine is switched off.
This will prevent the fuel timing mechanism within
the injection pump from returning to its zero posi-
tion. The other purpose is to allow excess fuel to be
returned to the fuel tank through the fuel return
line. The pressure values within this valve are preset
and can not be adjusted.
The fuel injection pump supplies high–pressure
fuel of approximately 45,000 kPa (6526 psi) to each
Fig. 3 Fuel Injection Pump injector in precise metered amounts at the correct
The injection pump contains the fuel shutdown time.
solenoid, fuel temperature sensor, control sleeve sen- For mechanical injection pump timing, refer to
sor, fuel quantity actuator and the fuel timing sole- Fuel Injection Pump Timing in the Service Proce-
noid (Fig. 3). dures section of this group.
In the electronically controlled injection pump, the
pump plunger works the same as the pump plunger FUEL INJECTORS
in a mechanically controlled injection pump, but the Fuel drain tubes (Fig. 4) are used to route excess
amount of fuel and the time the fuel is injected is fuel back to the overflow valve at the rear of the
controlled by the vehicle’s MSA, instead of by a injection pump. This excess fuel is then returned to
mechanical governor assembly. A solenoid controlled the fuel tank through the fuel return line.
by the MSA is used in place of the mechanical gover- The injectors are connected to the fuel injection
nor assembly, and it moves a control sleeve inside the pump by the high–pressure fuel lines. A separate
pump that regulates the amount of fuel being injector is used for each of the four cylinders. An
injected. There is no mechanical connection between injector containing a sensor (Fig. 5) is used on the
the accelerator pedal and the electronically controlled cylinder number one injector. This injector is called
injection pump. Instead, a sensor connected to the instrumented injector #1 or needle movement sensor.
accelerator pedal sends a signal to the MSA that rep- It is used to tell the MSA when the #1 injector’s
resents the actual position of the accelerator pedal. internal spring-loaded valve seat has been forced
The MSA uses this input, along with input from open by pressurized fuel being delivered to the cylin-
other sensors to move the control sleeve to deliver der, which is at the end of its compression stroke.
the appropriate amount of fuel. This system is known When the instrumented injector’s valve seat is force
as “Drive-By-Wire”. open, it sends a small voltage spike pulse to the
The actual time that the fuel is delivered is very MSA. This tells the MSA that cylinder #1 is firing. It
important to the diesel combustion process. The MSA is not used with the other three injectors.
monitors outputs from the engine speed sensor (fly- Fuel enters the injector at the fuel inlet (top of
wheel position in degrees), and the fuel injector sen- injector) and is routed to the needle valve bore. When
sor (mechanical movement within the #1 cylinder fuel pressure rises to approximately 15,000–15,800
A copper washer (gasket) is used at the base of
each injector (Fig. 5) to prevent combustion gases
from escaping.
Fuel injector firing sequence is 1–3–4–2.
FUEL TUBES/LINES/HOSES AND CLAMPS—

LOW-PRESSURE TYPE
Also refer to the proceeding section on Quick–Con-
nect Fittings.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps, cou-
plings and fittings to make sure they are secure and
leaks are not present. The component should be
replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deg-
radation that could result in failure.
Never attempt to repair a plastic fuel line/tube or a
quick–connect fitting. Replace complete line/tube as
necessary.
Avoid contact of any fuel tubes/hoses with other
vehicle components that could cause abrasions or
scuffing. Be sure that the fuel lines/tubes are prop-
erly routed to prevent pinching and to avoid heat
sources.
Fig. 4 Fuel Injectors and Drain Tubes The lines/tubes/hoses are of a special construction.
If it is necessary to replace these lines/tubes/hoses,
use only original equipment type.
The hose clamps used to secure the rubber hoses
are of a special rolled edge construction. This con-
struction is used to prevent the edge of the clamp
from cutting into the hose. Only these rolled edge
type clamps may be used in this system. All other
types of clamps may cut into the hoses and cause
fuel leaks.
Where a rubber hose is joined to a metal tube
(staked), do not attempt to repair. Replace entire
line/tube assembly.
Use new original equipment type hose clamps.
Tighten hose clamps to 2 N·m (20 in. lbs.) torque.
QUICK-CONNECT FITTINGS—LOW PRESSURE

TYPE
attach various fuel system components. These are: a
Fig. 5 Fuel Injector Sensor single-tab type, a two-tab type or a plastic retainer
kPa (2175–2291 psi), the needle valve spring tension ring type (Fig. 6). Refer to Quick-Connect Fittings in
is overcome. The needle valve rises and fuel flows the Removal/Installation section for more informa-
through the spray holes in the nozzle tip into the tion.
combustion chamber. The pressure required to lift
the needle valve is the injector opening pressure set- CAUTION: The interior components (o-rings, spac-
ting. This is referred to as the “pop-off” pressure set- ers) of quick-connect fitting are not serviced sepa-
ting. rately, but new pull tabs are available for some
Fuel pressure in the injector circuit decreases after types. Do not attempt to repair damaged fittings or
injection. The injector needle valve is immediately fuel lines/tubes. If repair is necessary, replace the
closed by the needle valve spring and fuel flow into complete fuel tube assembly.
the combustion chamber is stopped. Exhaust gases
are prevented from entering the injector nozzle by
the needle valve.
injected into the combustion chamber. This fuel
drains into the fuel drain tubes (Fig. 7) and back to
the tee banjo fitting, which is connected to the same
line as the overflow valve, which allows a variable
quantity to return to the fuel tank. The overflow
valve is calibrated to open at a preset pressure.
Excess fuel not required by the pump to maintain the
minimum pump cavity pressure is then returned
through the overflow valve and on to the fuel tank
through the fuel return line.
Fig. 6 Plastic Retainer Ring-Type Fitting

HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL LINES
CAUTION: The high–pressure fuel lines must be
held securely in place in their holders. The lines
cannot contact each other or other components. Do
not attempt to weld high–pressure fuel lines or to
repair lines that are damaged. Only use the recom-
mended lines when replacement of high–pressure
fuel line is necessary.
Fig. 7 Fuel Drain Tubes
High–pressure fuel lines deliver fuel under pres-
sure of up to approximately 45,000 kPa (6526 psi) FUEL HEATER
from the injection pump to the fuel injectors. The The fuel heater is used to prevent diesel fuel from
lines expand and contract from the high–pressure waxing during cold weather operation. The fuel
fuel pulses generated during the injection process. All heater is located in the bottom plastic bowl of the
high–pressure fuel lines are of the same length and fuel filter/water separator (Fig. 8).
inside diameter. Correct high–pressure fuel line The element inside the heater assembly is made of
usage and installation is critical to smooth engine a Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) material,
operation. and has power applied to it by the fuel heater relay
anytime the ignition key is in the “on” position. PTC
WARNING: USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN material has a high resistance to current flow when
INSPECTING FOR HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LEAKS. its temperature is high, which means that it will not
INSPECT FOR HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LEAKS WITH generate heat when the temperature is above a cer-
A SHEET OF CARDBOARD. HIGH FUEL INJECTION tain value. When the temperature is below 7°C (45°
PRESSURE CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY IF F), the resistance of the PTC element is lowered, and
CONTACT IS MADE WITH THE SKIN. allows current to flow through the fuel heater ele-
ment warming the fuel. When the temperature is
above 29°C (85° F), the PTC element’s resistance
FUEL DRAIN TUBES rises, and current flow through the heater element
These rubber tubes are low–pressure type. stops.
Some excess fuel is continually vented from the Voltage to operate the fuel heater is supplied from
fuel injection pump. During injection, a small amount the ignition (key) switch and through the fuel heater
of fuel flows past the injector nozzle and is not relay. Refer to the following Fuel Heater Relay for
VISUAL INSPECTION
A visual inspection for loose, disconnected, or incor-
rectly routed wires and hoses should be made before
attempting to diagnose or service the diesel fuel
injection system. A visual check will help find these
conditions. It also saves unnecessary test and diag-
nostic time. A thorough visual inspection of the fuel
injection system includes the following checks:
(1) Be sure that the battery connections are tight
and not corroded.
(2) Be sure that the 60 way connector is fully
engaged with the PCM (Fig. 9).
(3) Be sure that the 68 way connector is fully
engaged with the MSA (Fig. 10).
Fig. 8 Fuel Heater Temperature Sensor and Element

Location
additional information. The fuel heater and fuel
heater relay are not controlled by the Power-
train Control Module (ECM).
Current draw for the heater element is 150 watts
at 14 volts (DC).
FUEL HEATER RELAY

Voltage to operate the fuel heater is supplied from
the ignition (key) switch through the fuel heater
relay. The PCM or MSA is not used to control
this relay.
The fuel heater relay is located in the PDC. The
PDC is located next to the battery in the engine com-
partment. For the location of the relay within the
PDC, refer to label on PDC cover.
Fig. 9 PCM Location—Typical
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING (4) Verify that the electrical connections for the
ASD relay are clean and free of corrosion. This relay
GENERAL INFORMATION is located in the PDC. For the location of the relay
This section of the group will cover a general diag- within the PDC, refer to label on PDC cover.
nosis of diesel engine fuel system components. (5) Verify that the electrical connections for the
Diagnostic Trouble Codes: Refer to On-Board fuel heater relay are clean and free of corrosion. This
Diagnostics in Group 25, Emission Control System relay is located in the PDC. For the location of the
for a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) for cer- relay within the PDC, refer to label on PDC cover.
tain fuel system components. (6) Be sure the electrical connectors at the ends of
The PCM and MSA must be tested with the the glow plugs (Fig. 11) are tight and free of corro-
DRBIII scan tool. The DRBIII should be the first sion.
step in any diagnosis of engine performance com- (7) Be sure that the electrical connections at the
plaints. Refer to the 1997 ZJ/ZG 2.5L Diesel Power- glow plug relay are tight and not corroded. The glow
train Diagnostic Procedures manual for diagnosis plug relay is located in the engine compartment on
and testing of the diesel engine control system. the left–inner fender (Fig. 12).
(8) Inspect the starter motor and starter solenoid
connections for tightness and corrosion.
Fig. 10 MSA Location—Typical Fig. 12 Glow Plug Relay Location
Fig. 11 Glow Plug Connector

(9) Verify that the Fuel Injection Pump electrical
connector is firmly connected. Inspect the connector
for corrosion or damaged wires. The solenoid is
mounted to the rear of the injection pump (Fig. 13).
(10) Verify that the fuel heater electrical connector
is firmly attached to the filter bowl at the bottom of Fig. 13 Fuel Shutdown Solenoid Location
the fuel filter/water separator. Inspect the connector (14) Verify turbocharger wastegate operation.
for corrosion or damaged wires. Refer to Group 11, Exhaust System and Intake Man-
(11) Verify that the electrical pigtail connector ifold Group for information.
(sensor connector) (Fig. 14) for the fuel injector sen- (15) Verify that the harness connector is firmly
sor is firmly connected to the engine wiring harness. connected to the engine coolant temperature sensor.
Inspect the connector for corrosion or damaged wires. The sensor is located on the side of cylinder head
This sensor is used on the #1 cylinder injector only. near the rear of fuel injection pump (Fig. 17).
(12) Inspect for exhaust system restrictions such (16) Check for air in the fuel system. Refer to the
as pinched exhaust pipes or a collapsed or plugged Air Bleed Procedure.
muffler. (17) Inspect all fuel supply and return lines for
(13) Verify that the harness connector is firmly signs of leakage.
connected to the vehicle speed sensor (Fig. 15) or
(Fig. 16).
Fig. 14 Fuel Injector Sensor
Fig. 16 Vehicle Speed Sensor—4 Wheel Drive
Fig. 15 Vehicle Speed Sensor—2 Wheel Drive Fig. 17 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
(18) Be sure that the ground connections are tight Location
and free of corrosion. Refer to Group 8, Wiring for pump is located in the front of engine (internal) and
locations of ground connections. is driven from the crankshaft gear (Fig. 18). Discon-
(19) Inspect the air cleaner element (filter) for nect the hose and check for minimum vacuum from
restrictions. the pump. Refer to Group 5, Brake System for spec-
(20) Be sure that the turbocharger output hose is ifications and procedures.
properly connected to the charge air cooler (inter- (22) Be sure that the accessory drive belt is not
cooler) inlet tube. Verify that the charge air cooler damaged or slipping.
output hose is properly connected to the cooler and (23) Verify there is a good connection at the engine
the intake manifold. Refer to Group 11, Exhaust Sys- speed sensor. Refer to the Fuel Injection System in
tem and Intake Manifold for information. this section for location of the engine speed sensor
(21) Be sure that the vacuum hoses to the vacuum location.
pump are connected and not leaking. The vacuum
FUEL INJECTOR TEST

The fuel injection nozzles, located on the engine
cylinder head, spray fuel under high pressure into
the individual combustion chambers. Pressurized
fuel, delivered by the fuel injection pump, unseats a
spring-loaded needle valve inside the injector, and
the fuel is atomized as it escapes through the injector
opening into the engine’s combustion chamber. If the
fuel injector does not operate properly, the engine
may misfire, or cause other driveability problems.
A leak in the injection pump–to–injector high–pres-
sure fuel line can cause many of the same symptoms
as a malfunctioning injector. Inspect for a leak in the
high–pressure lines before checking for a malfunc-
tioning fuel injector.
WARNING: THE INJECTION PUMP SUPPLIES

HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL OF UP TO APPROXI-
MATELY 45,000 KPA (6526 PSI) TO EACH INDIVID-
UAL INJECTOR THROUGH THE HIGH–PRESSURE
LINES. FUEL UNDER THIS AMOUNT OF PRESSURE
CAN PENETRATE THE SKIN AND CAUSE PER-
Fig. 18 Vaccum Pump at Front of Engine SONAL INJURY. WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND
(24) Verify there is a good connection at the Boost ADEQUATE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING. AVOID CON-
Pressure Sensor, which is a part of the air intake TACT WITH FUEL SPRAY WHEN BLEEDING HIGH–
assembly. PRESSURE FUEL LINES.
AIR IN FUEL SYSTEM WARNING: DO NOT BLEED AIR FROM THE FUEL
Air will enter the fuel system whenever the fuel SYSTEM OF A HOT ENGINE. DO NOT ALLOW FUEL
supply lines, fuel filter/water separator, fuel filter TO SPRAY ONTO THE EXHAUST MANIFOLD WHEN
bowl, injection pump, high–pressure lines or injectors BLEEDING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM.
are removed or disconnected. Air will also enter the
fuel system whenever the fuel tank has been run To determine which fuel injector is malfunctioning,
empty. run the engine and loosen the high–pressure fuel line
Air trapped in the fuel system can result in hard nut at the injector (Fig. 19). Listen for a change in
starting, a rough running engine, engine misfire, low engine speed. If engine speed drops, the injector was
power, excessive smoke and fuel knock. After service operating normally. If engine speed remains the
is performed, air must be bled from the system same, the injector may be malfunctioning. After test-
before starting the engine. ing, tighten the line nut to 30 N·m (22 ft. lbs.)
Inspect the fuel system from the fuel tank to the torque. Test all injectors in the same manner one at
injectors for loose connections. Leaking fuel is an a time.
indicator of loose connections or defective seals. Air Once an injector has been found to be malfunction-
can also enter the fuel system between the fuel tank ing, remove it from the engine and test it. Refer to
and the injection pump. Inspect the fuel tank and the Removal/Installation section of this group for pro-
fuel lines for damage that might allow air into the cedures.
system. After the injector has been removed, install it to a
For air bleeding, refer to Air Bleed Procedure in bench–mount injector tester. Refer to operating
the Service Procedures section of this group. instructions supplied with tester for procedures.
The opening pressure or “pop” pressure should be
FUEL HEATER RELAY TEST 15,000–15,800 kPa (2175–2291 psi). If the fuel injec-
The fuel heater relay is located in the Power Dis- tor needle valve is opening (“popping”) to early or to
tribution Center (PDC). Refer to Relays—Operation/ late, replace the injector.
Testing in Fuel Injection System section of this group
for test procedures.
A defective fuel injection pump, defective fuel tim-
ing solenoid or misadjusted mechanical pump timing
can cause starting problems or prevent the engine
from revving up. It can also cause:
• Engine surge at idle
• Rough idle (warm engine)
• Low power
• Excessive fuel consumption
• Poor performance
• Low power
• Black smoke from the exhaust
• Blue or white fog like exhaust
• Incorrect idle or maximum speed
The electronically controlled fuel pump has no
mechanical governor like older mechanically con-
trolled fuel pumps. Do not remove the top cover of
Fig. 19 Typical Inspection of Fuel Injector the fuel pump, or the screws fastening the wiring
pigtail to the side of the pump. The warranty of
FUEL INJECTOR / NEEDLE MOVEMENT the injection pump and the engine may be void
SENSOR TEST if those seals have been removed or tampered
The needle movement sensor is used only on the with.
number–1 cylinder fuel injector (Fig. 20). It is not
used on the injectors for cylinders number 2, 3, or 4. FUEL SUPPLY RESTRICTIONS
LOW–PRESSURE LINES
Restricted or Plugged supply lines or fuel filter can
cause a timing fault that will cause the ECM to oper-
ate the engine in a “Limp Home” mode. See the
introduction of the Fuel Injection System in this
group for more information on the Limp Home mode.
Fuel supply line restrictions can cause starting prob-
lems and prevent the engine from revving up. The
starting problems include; low power and blue or
white fog like exhaust. Test all fuel supply lines for
restrictions or blockage. Flush or replace as neces-
sary. Bleed the fuel system of air once a fuel supply
line has been replaced. Refer to the Air Bleed Proce-
dure section of this group for procedures.
HIGH–PRESSURE LINES
Restricted (kinked or bent) high–pressure lines can
cause starting problems, poor engine performance
Fig. 20 Needle Movement Sensor Location and black smoke from exhaust.
Examine all high–pressure lines for any damage.
Testing the needle movement sensor requires the Each radius on each high–pressure line must be
use of a DRB Scan tool. Refer to the Powertrain smooth and free of any bends or kinks.
Diagnostic Procedures manual for additional infor- Replace damaged, restricted or leaking high–pres-
mation. sure fuel lines with the correct replacement line.
FUEL INJECTION PUMP TEST CAUTION: The high–pressure fuel lines must be
The injection pump is not to be serviced or clamped securely in place in the holders. The lines
the warranty may be voided. If the injection cannot contact each other or other components. Do
pump requires service, the complete assembly not attempt to weld high–pressure fuel lines or to
must be replaced. repair lines that are damaged. Only use the recom-
Incorrect injection pump timing (mechanical or mended lines when replacement of high–pressure
electrical) can cause poor performance, excessive fuel line is necessary.
smoke and emissions and poor fuel economy.
FUEL SHUTDOWN SOLENOID TEST SERVICE PROCEDURES

Refer to 1997 ZJ/ZG 2.5L Diesel Powertrain Diag-
nostic Manual for the Fuel Shutdown Solenoid test. AIR BLEED PROCEDURES
HIGH-PRESSURE FUEL LINE LEAK TEST AIR BLEEDING AT FUEL FILTER
High–pressure fuel line leaks can cause starting A certain amount of air may become trapped in the
problems and poor engine performance. fuel system when fuel system components are ser-
viced or replaced. Bleed the system as needed after
WARNING: DUE TO EXTREME FUEL PRESSURES OF fuel system service according to the following proce-
UP TO 45,000 KPA (6526 PSI), USE EXTREME CAU- dures.
TION WHEN INSPECTING FOR HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL
LEAKS. DO NOT GET YOUR HAND, OR ANY PART OF WARNING: DO NOT BLEED AIR FROM THE FUEL
YOUR BODY NEAR A SUSPECTED LEAK. INSPECT SYSTEM OF A HOT ENGINE. DO NOT ALLOW FUEL
FOR HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LEAKS WITH A SHEET TO SPRAY ONTO THE EXHAUST MANIFOLD WHEN
OF CARDBOARD. HIGH FUEL INJECTION PRESSURE BLEEDING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM.
CAN CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY IF CONTACT IS
MADE WITH THE SKIN. Some air enters the fuel system when the fuel fil-
ter or injection pump supply line is changed. This
Start the engine. Move the cardboard over the small amount of air is vented automatically from the
high–pressure fuel lines and check for fuel spray onto injection pump through the fuel drain manifold tubes
the cardboard (Fig. 21). If a high–pressure line con- if the filter was changed according to instructions.
nection is leaking, bleed the system and tighten the Ensure the bowl of the fuel filter/water separator is
connection. Refer to the Air Bleed Procedure in this full of fuel.
group for procedures. Replace damaged, restricted or It may be necessary to manually bleed the system
leaking high–pressure fuel lines with the correct if:
replacement line. • The bowl of the fuel filter/water separator is not
partially filled before installation of a new filter
• The injection pump is replaced
• High–pressure fuel line connections are loosened
or lines replaced
• Initial engine start–up or start–up after an
extended period of no engine operation
• Running fuel tank empty
FUEL INJECTION PUMP BLEEDING

(1) If the fuel injection pump has been replaced,
air should be bled at the overflow valve before
attempting to start engine.
(a) Loosen the overflow valve (Fig. 22) at the
rear of the injection pump.
(b) Place a towel below the valve.
WARNING: WHEN CRANKING THE ENGINE TO

BLEED AIR FROM THE INJECTION PUMP, THE
ENGINE MAY START. PLACE THE TRANSMISSION
IN NEUTRAL OR PARK AND SET PARKING BRAKE
BEFORE ENGAGING THE STARTER MOTOR.
Fig. 21 Typical Fuel Pressure Test at Injector CAUTION: Do not engage the starter motor for
CAUTION: The high–pressure fuel lines must be more than 30 seconds at a time. Allow 2 minutes
clamped securely in place in the holders. The lines between cranking intervals.
cannot contact each other or other components. Do
not attempt to weld high–pressure fuel lines or to
repair lines that are damaged. Only use the recom-
mended lines when replacement of high–pressure
fuel line is necessary.
Fig. 23 Bleeding High–Pressure Fuel Line—Typical

FUEL INJECTION PUMP TIMING
Fig. 22 Overflow Valve Refer to Removal/Installation and Adjusting Fuel
Pump Timing in this Group.
(2) Crank the engine for 30 seconds at a time to
allow air trapped in the injection pump to vent out
the fuel injector drain tubes. Continue this procedure REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
until the engine starts. Observe the previous WARN-
ING and CAUTION. ACCELERATOR PEDAL
(3) Tighten overflow valve.
REMOVAL
HIGH–PRESSURE FUEL LINE BLEEDING (1) Disconnect electrical connector.
(2) Remove accelerator pedal mounting bracket
WARNING: THE INJECTION PUMP SUPPLIES HIGH- nuts. Remove accelerator pedal assembly.
–PRESSURE FUEL OF APPROXIMATELY 59,000 KPA
(8,557 PSI) TO EACH INDIVIDUAL INJECTOR INSTALLATION
THROUGH THE HIGH–PRESSURE LINES. FUEL (1) Place accelerator pedal assembly over studs
UNDER THIS AMOUNT OF PRESSURE CAN PENE- protruding from floor pan. Tighten mounting nuts to
TRATE THE SKIN AND CAUSE PERSONAL INJURY. 5 N·m (46 in. lbs.) torque.
WEAR SAFETY GOGGLES AND ADEQUATE PRO- (2) Connect electrical connector.
TECTIVE CLOTHING AND AVOID CONTACT WITH (3) Before starting the engine, operate the acceler-
FUEL SPRAY WHEN BLEEDING HIGH–PRESSURE ator pedal to check for any binding.
FUEL LINES.
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
WARNING: DO NOT BLEED AIR FROM THE FUEL
SYSTEM OF A HOT ENGINE. DO NOT ALLOW FUEL REMOVAL
TO SPRAY ONTO THE EXHAUST MANIFOLD WHEN (1) Remove hose clamp at Mass Air Flow Sensor.
BLEEDING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM. (2) Remove hose from Mass Air Flow Sensor.
(3) Loosen 2 clamps holding air cleaner housing
Bleed air from one injector at time. halves together.
(1) Loosen the high–pressure fuel line fitting at (4) Remove left side of air cleaner housing.
the injector (Fig. 23). (5) Remove element from air cleaner housing.
(2) Crank the engine until all air has been bled
from the line. Do not operate the starter motor INSTALLATION
for longer than 30 seconds. Wait 2 minutes (1) Install a new element in housing.
between cranking intervals. (2) Position left side of housing.
(3) Start the engine and bleed one injector at a (3) Snap clamps into place.
time until the engine runs smoothly. (4) Install hoses and clamps.
Fig. 26 Fuel Filter/Water Separator Location

The fuel filter/water separator assembly contains
the fuel filter, fuel heater element, and fuel drain
valve (Fig. 26).
DRAINING WATER FROM FILTER BOWL

Fig. 24 Accelerator Pedal Mounting-Typical Moisture (water) collects at the bottom of the filter/
separator in a plastic bowl. Water entering the fuel
FUEL DRAIN TUBES injection pump can cause serious damage to the
The fuel drain tubes (Fig. 25) are low–pressure pump. Note that the bulb will be illuminated for
type. approximately 2 seconds each time the key is
Pull each tube from the injector for removal. Push initially placed in the ON position. This is done
on for installation. Clamps are not required for these for a bulb check.
tubes.
WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRAIN WATER
FROM THE FILTER/SEPARATOR WITH THE ENGINE
HOT.
(1) The bottom of the filter/separator bowl is

equipped with a drain valve (Fig. 26). The drain
valve is equipped with a fitting. Attach a piece of
rubber hose to this fitting. This hose is to be used as
a drain hose.
(2) Place a drain pan under the drain hose.
(3) With the engine not running, open the drain
valve (unscrew—drain valve has right hand threads)
from the filter/separator bowl. To gain access to this
fitting, the two filter–to–mounting bracket nuts (Fig.
Fig. 25 Fuel Injectors and Drain Tubes 26) may have to be loosened a few turns.
FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR (4) Hold the drain open until clean fuel exits the
The fuel filter/water separator is located in the drain.
engine compartment on the left side near the shock (5) After draining, close drain valve.
tower. (Fig. 26). (6) Remove rubber drain hose.
(7) Dispose of mixture in drain pan according to
applicable local or federal regulations.
FUEL FILTER REMOVAL
(1) Drain all fuel and/or water from fuel filter/wa-
ter separator assembly. Refer to the previous Drain-
ing Water From Filter Bowl.
(2) Unplug the electrical connectors at bottom of
plastic bowl.
(3) Remove plastic bowl from bottom of fuel filter
(unscrews).
(4) Remove fuel filter from bottom of filter base
(unscrews).
FUEL FILTER INSTALLATION

(1) Clean bottom of fuel filter base.
(2) Apply clean diesel fuel to new fuel filter gasket.
(3) Install and tighten filter to filter base. The bev-
eled part of the rubber gasket should be facing up
towards the filter base.
(4) Clean the inside of bowl with a soap and water
mixture before installation. Carefully clean any resi-
due between the two metal probes at the top of the
water–in–fuel sensor. Do not use chemical cleaners
as damage to the plastic bowl may result.
(5) Pour diesel fuel into the plastic bowl before Fig. 27 Power Distribution Center (PDC) Location
installing bowl to bottom of fuel filter. Do this to help
prevent air from entering fuel injection pump while
attempting to starting engine.
(6) Install filter bowl to bottom of filter.
(7) Install the electrical connectors at bottom of
bowl.
(8) Tighten the filter–to–mounting bracket nuts
(Fig. 26) to 28 N·m (250 in. lbs.) torque.
FUEL HEATER
If the fuel heater element needs replacement, the
plastic filter bowl assembly must be replaced. Refer
to Fuel Filter/Water Separator for information.
FUEL HEATER RELAY

The fuel heater relay is located in the PDC. For
the location of the relay within the PDC (Fig. 27),
refer to label on PDC cover.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR Fig. 28 Fuel Level Sensor

The fuel level sensor is located on the side of the
fuel pump module (Fig. 28). FUEL INJECTION PUMP
REMOVAL REMOVAL
(1) Remove fuel tank. Refer to Fuel Tank Removal/ (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Installation. (2) Thoroughly clean the area around the injection
(2) Remove fuel pump module. Refer to Fuel Pump pump and fuel lines of all dirt, grease and other con-
Module Removal/Installation. taminants. Due to the close internal tolerances
(3) Remove electrical wire connector at sending of the injection pump, this step must be per-
unit terminals. formed before removing pump.
(4) Press on release tab (Fig. 29) to remove send-
ing unit from pump module.
(9) Disconnect the four high–pressure fuel lines
from the fuel injection pump. Also disconnect fuel
lines at the fuel injectors. For procedures, refer to
High–Pressure Fuel Lines in this group. Place a rag
beneath the fittings to catch excess fuel.
(10) Remove the plug from timing gear cover.
(11) The “Top Dead Center” (TDC) compression fir-
ing stroke for the #1 cylinder can be determined as
follows:
(a) Using a socket attached to the front of the
crankshaft, rotate the engine clockwise until spe-
cial alignment tool VM# 1035 can be inserted
through the hole in the bottom of the clutch hous-
ing, stopping the flywheel rotation. This position is
TDC or 180° away from TDC. Engine must be at
TDC #1 compression firing stroke.
(b) To verify that you are at TDC. Remove the
oil fill cap from the cylinder head cover and the
alignment tool from the clutch housing.
(c) Rotate the crankshaft one-quarter turn clock-
wise and counter-clockwise while observing the
rocker arm through the oil fill cap hole. If the
Fig. 29 Fuel Level Sensor Release Tab rocker arm moves you are not at TDC.
(d) If TDC was found continue, if not rotate the
(3) Remove the engine accessory drive belt. Refer
crankshaft one revolution until the alignment tool
to Group 7, Cooling System for procedures.
can be re-installed in the flywheel. You are now at
(4) Remove the generator assembly.
TDC for the #1 cylinder compression firing stroke.
(5) Remove the rubber fuel return and supply
Mark the damper and timing cover for reference to
hoses from the metal lines at the pump (Fig. 30).
TDC. Remove the alignment tool from the clutch
housing.
(12) Remove access plug and plug washer at rear
of pump (Fig. 31). Thread special dial indicator and
adapter tool VM.1011 (Fig. 32) into this opening.
Hand tighten only.
(13) Slightly rotate the engine in a counter-clock-
wise direction until the dial gauge indicator stops
moving (20°-25° before TDC).
(14) Remove injection pump drive gear nut (Fig.
33).
(15) A special 3–piece gear removal tool set
VM.1003 (Fig. 34) must be used to remove the injec-
tion pump drive gear from the pump shaft.
(a) Thread the adapter (Fig. 35) into the timing
cover.
(b) Thread the gear puller into the injection
pump drive gear (Fig. 35). This tool is also used to
hold the gear in synchronization during pump
removal.
Fig. 30 Fuel Injection Pump (c) Remove the three injection pump–to–gear
(6) Remove the electrical connector at engine cool- cover mounting nuts (Fig. 36). CAUTION: This
ant temperature sensor. step must be done to prevent injection pump
(7) Disconnect the Fuel Injection Pump electrical damage.
connector at fuel pump (Fig. 30). (d) Install the drive bolt into the gear puller
(8) Disconnect the main engine wiring harness (Fig. 35). Tighten the drive bolt to press (remove)
from the glow plugs. the drive gear from injection pump shaft while
Fig. 31 Access Plug at Rear of Pump Fig. 33 Removing Pump Drive Gear Nut
Fig. 34 Pump Gear Tools

(2) Install a new injection pump–to–timing gear
cover gasket.
(3) Remove the gear removing bolt (drive bolt)
from gear puller. CAUTION: Do not remove the
special gear puller or timing cover adapter
Fig. 32 Installing Dial Indicator and Special Adapter tools from timing cover at this time. Gear mis-
Tools alignment will result.
driving injection pump rearward from timing gear (4) Place the key way on the pump shaft to the 11
cover mounting studs. o’clock position as viewed from the front of pump.
(16) Remove pump from engine. Do not rotate Install the pump into the rear of timing gear cover
engine while gear puller is installed. Engine while aligning key way on pump shaft into pump
damage will occur. gear.
(5) Install and snug the 3 injection pump mount-
INSTALLATION/ADJUSTING PUMP TIMING ing nuts. This is not the final tightening sequence.
(1) Clean the mating surfaces of injection pump (6) Remove the special gear puller and adapter
and timing gear cover. tools from timing gear cover.
Fig. 35 Installing Pump Drive Gear Removal Tools Fig. 37 Access Plug at Rear of Pump
Fig. 36 Injection Pump Mounting Nuts

(7) Install the injection pump drive gear nut.
Tighten nut to 88 N·m (65 ft. lbs.) torque.
(8) Remove the access plug and plug washer at
rear of pump (Fig. 37). Thread special dial indicator
adapter tool VM.1011 (Fig. 38) into this opening.
Hand tighten only. Fig. 38 Installing Dial Indicator and Special Adapter
(9) Attach special dial indicator tool VM.1013 into Tools
the adapter tool (Fig. 38). (12) The “Top Dead Center” (TDC) compression fir-
(10) Using a socket attached to the front of the ing stroke can be determined as follows:
crankshaft, rotate the engine in a counter-clockwise (a) Rotate the engine clockwise until special
direction until the dial gage indicator stops moving alignment tool VM# 1035 can be inserted through
(20–25° before TDC). the hole in the bottom of the clutch housing, stop-
(11) Set the dial indicator to 0mm. Be sure the tip ping the flywheel rotation. This position is TDC or
of the dial indicator is touching the tip inside the 180° away from TDC. Engine must be at TDC #1
adapter tool. compression firing stroke.
(b) To verify that you are at TDC. Remove the (25) Install engine accessory drive belt. Refer to
oil fill cap from the rocker cover and the alignment Group 7, Cooling System for procedures.
tool from the clutch housing. (26) Install negative battery cable to battery.
(c) Rotate the crankshaft one-quarter turn clock- (27) Start the engine and bring to normal operat-
wise and counter-clockwise while observing the ing temperature.
rocker arm through the oil fill cap hole. If the (28) Check for fuel leaks.
rocker arm moves you are not at TDC.
(d) If TDC was found continue, if not rotate the FUEL INJECTORS
crankshaft one revolution until the alignment tool Four fuel injectors are used on each engine. Of
can be re-installed in the flywheel. You are now at these four, two different types are used. The fuel
TDC. injector used on cylinder number one is equipped
(13) The gauge reading should be at 0.60 mm. If with a fuel injector sensor (Fig. 39). The other three
not, the pump must be rotated for adjustment: fuel injectors are identical. Do not place the fuel
(a) Loosen the three injection pump mounting injector equipped with the fuel injector sensor
nuts at the mounting flanges. These flanges are into any other location except the cylinder
equipped with slotted holes. The slotted holes are number one position.
used to rotate and position the injection pump for
fuel timing. Loosen the three nuts just enough to
rotate the pump.
(b) Rotate the pump until 0.60 mm is indicated
on the dial indicator gauge. If while rotating the
pump the 0.60mm specification is passed do not
attempt to rotate the pump in the opposite direc-
tion. You must rotate the pump back below the
0.60mm specification and start the procedure over
from the start of the TDC procedure. This will pre-
vent a false reading due to gear backlash.
(c) Tighten the three pump mounting nuts to 30
(d) Recheck the dial indicator after tightening
the pump mounting nuts. Gauge should still be
reading 0.60 mm.
(14) Remove dial indicator and adapter tools.
(15) Install access plug and washer to rear of
injection pump.
(16) Install plug at timing gear cover.
Fig. 39 Fuel Injector Sensor — #1 Cylinder
(17) Install and connect the four high–pressure
fuel lines to the fuel injection pump. Also connect REMOVAL
fuel lines at the fuel injectors. For procedures, refer (1) Disconnect negative battery cable at battery.
to High–Pressure Fuel Lines in this group. (2) Thoroughly clean the area around the injector
(18) Install electrical connector at engine coolant with compressed air.
temperature sensor. (3) Remove the fuel drain hoses (tubes) at each
(19) Connect electrical connector at fuel shutdown injector (Fig. 40) being serviced. Each of these hoses
solenoid. is slip–fit to the fitting on injector.
(20) Connect the main engine wiring harness to (4) Remove the high–pressure fuel line at injector
the glow plugs. being removed. Refer to High–Pressure Fuel Lines in
(21) Connect the fuel timing solenoid pigtail har- this group for procedures.
ness to the engine wiring harness. (5) Remove the injector using special socket tool
(22) Connect the overflow valve/banjo fitting (fuel number VM.1012A. When removing cylinder number
return line assembly). Replace copper gaskets before one injector, thread the wiring harness through the
installing. access hole on the special socket (Fig. 41).
(23) Connect the rubber fuel return and supply (6) Remove and discard the copper washer (seal) at
hoses to metal lines at pump. Tighten hose clamps to bottom of injector (Fig. 39).
(24) Install generator assembly.
(3) Drain fuel tank dry into holding tank or a
properly labeled diesel safety container.
(5) Disconnect both the fuel fill and fuel vent rub-
ber hoses at the fuel tank.
(6) Disconnect fuel supply and return lines from
the steel supply line (Fig. 42).
Fig. 40 Fuel Injector—Typical
Fig. 42 Fuel Tank Connections at Front of Tank
Fig. 41 Wiring Harness Through Socket

INSTALLATION
(1) Clean the injector threads in cylinder head.
(2) Install new copper washer (seal) to injector.
(3) Install injector to engine. Tighten to 70 N·m
(4) Install high–pressure fuel lines. Refer to High–
Pressure Fuel Lines in this group for procedures.
(5) Install fuel drain hoses (tubes) to each injector.
Do not use clamps at fuel drain hoses.
(7) Bleed the air from the high–pressure lines.
Refer to the Air Bleed Procedure section of this
group. Fig. 43 Fuel Fill/Vent Hose Index Marks
The fuel reservoir module electrical connec-
FUEL TANK tor has a retainer that locks it in place.
(7) Slide electrical connector lock to unlock.
REMOVAL (8) Push down on connector retainer (Fig. 44) and
(1) Disconnect negative cable from battery. pull connector off module.
(2) Insert fuel siphon hose into fuel filler neck and (9) Use a transmission jack to support fuel tank.
push it into the tank. Remove bolts from fuel tank straps.
(2) Drain fuel tank dry into holding tank or a
properly labeled diesel safety container.
(4) Use a transmission jack to support the fuel
tank. Remove bolts from fuel tank straps. Lower
tank slightly.
(5) Clean area around fuel reservoir module and
tank to keep dirt and foreign material out of tank.
(6) Disconnect fuel lines from fuel module by
depressing quick connect retainers with thumb and
fore finger.
(7) Slide module electrical connector lock to
unlock.
(8) Push down on connector retainer and pull con-
nector off module.
Fig. 44 Module Connector Retainer and Lock (9) Using Special Tool 6856, remove plastic locknut
counterclockwise to release pump module (Fig. 45).
(10) Lower tank slightly. Carefully remove filler
hose from tank.
(11) Lower the fuel tank. Remove clamp and
remove fuel filler tube vent hose. Remove fuel tank
from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
(1) Position fuel tank on transmission jack. Con-
nect fuel filler tube vent hose and replace clamp.
(2) Raise tank into position and carefully work
filler tube into tank. A light coating of clean engine
oil on the tube end may be used to aid assembly.
(3) Feed filler vent line thorough frame rail. Care-
ful not to cross lines.
(4) Tighten strap bolts to 9 N·m (80 in. lbs.).
Remove transmission jack.
CAUTION: Ensure straps are not twisted or bent Fig. 45 Fuel Reservoir Module Lock Nut Removal
before or after tightening strap nuts.
(10) Carefully remove module and o-ring from
(5) Connect module electrical connector. Place tank.
retainer in locked position. (11) Discard old o-ring.
(6) Lubricate the fuel supply and return lines with
clean 30 weight engine oil, install the quick connect INSTALLATION
fuel fitting. Refer to Tube/Fitting Assembly in the (1) Thoroughly clean locknut threads and mating
Fuel Delivery section of this Group. fule tank threads. Use a soap/water solution. Do not
(7) Attach filler line to filler tube. Pull on connec- use carburetor cleaner to clean threads.
tor to make sure of connection. (2) Apply clean water to the o-ring seal and place
(8) Fill fuel tank, replace cap, and connect battery on the mating fuel tank threads.
negative cable. (3) Wipe seal area of tank clean and place a new
o-ring seal in position on pump.
FUEL RESERVOIR MODULE (4) Position fuel reservoir module in tank with
locknut.
REMOVAL (5) Tighten locknut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.).
(6) Connect fuel lines.
WARNING: THE FUEL RESERVOIR OF THE FUEL (7) Plug in electrical connector. Slide connector
MODULE DOES NOT EMPTY OUT WHEN THE TANK lock into position.
IS DRAINED. THE FUEL IN THE RESERVOIR WILL (8) Raise fuel tank, install bolts into fuel tank
SPILL OUT WHEN THE MODULE IS REMOVED. straps and tighten.
(9) Lower vehicle on hoist.
(10) Connect negative cable from battery. (5) Very carefully remove each line from the
(11) Fill fuel tank. Check for leaks. engine. Note the position (firing order) of each line
(12) Install fuel filler cap. while removing. Do not bend the line while
removing.
HIGH-PRESSURE LINES
All high–pressure fuel lines are of the same length CAUTION: Be sure that the high–pressure fuel lines
and inside diameter. Correct high–pressure fuel line are installed in the same order that they were
usage and installation is critical to smooth engine removed. Prevent the injection pump delivery valve
operation. holders from turning when removing or installing
high–pressure lines from injection pump.
CAUTION: The high–pressure fuel lines must be
clamped securely in place in the holders. The lines
cannot contact each other or other components. Do INSTALLATION
not attempt to weld high–pressure fuel lines or to (1) Carefully position each high–pressure fuel line
repair lines that are damaged. Only use the recom- to the fuel injector and fuel injection pump delivery
mended lines when replacement of high–pressure valve holder in the correct firing order. Also position
fuel line is necessary. each line in the correct line holder.
(2) Loosely install the line clamp/holder bolts.
(3) Tighten each line at the delivery valve to 30
REMOVAL N·m (22 ft. lbs.) torque.
(1) Disconnect negative battery cable from battery. (4) Tighten each line at the fuel injector to 30 N·m
(2) Remove the necessary clamps holding the lines (22 ft. lbs.) torque.
to the engine. Be sure the lines are not contacting each
(3) Clean the area around each fuel line connec- other or any other component.
tion. Disconnect each line at the top of each fuel (5) Tighten the clamp bracket bolts to 24 N·m (18
injector (Fig. 46). ft. lbs.) torque.
(6) Bleed air from the fuel system. Refer to the Air
Bleed Procedure section of this group.
SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
75 Liters (20.0 Gals.)
Nominal refill capacities are shown. A variation
may be observed from vehicle to vehicle due to man-
ufacturing tolerances, ambient temperatures and
refill procedures.
IDLE SPEED
900 rpm 625 rpm with engine at normal operat-
ing temperature.
FUEL INJECTOR FIRING SEQUENCE

1–3–4–2
FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE

Peak Injection Pressure/Fuel Injection Pump
Operating Pressure: 40,000–45,000 kPa (5801–
Fig. 46 Fuel Lines at Fuel Injectors
6526 psi).
(4) Disconnect each high–pressure line fitting at Opening Pressure of Fuel Injector:
each fuel injection pump delivery valve. 15,000–15,800 kPa (2175–2291 psi).
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM—2.5L DIESEL ENGINE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION SENSOR RETURN—ECM/PCM INPUT

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 (ANALOG GROUND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SPEED CONTROL—ECM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CONTROLS— SPEED CONTROL—PCM OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . 28
ECM INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 TACHOMETER—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
AIR CONDITIONING RELAY—ECM OUTPUT . . . 28 TIMING SOLENOID—ECM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . 29
ASD RELAY—ECM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR—ECM INPUT . . . . . 27
BATTERY VOLTAGE—PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . 25 VEHICLE THEFT ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
BOOST / PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING
BRAKE SWITCH—ECM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ASD RELAY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
DATA LINK CONNECTOR—PCM AND ECM BOOST / PRESSURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
INPUT AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ELECTRIC VACUUM MODULATOR (EVM)— DIESEL DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ECM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
ENGINE COOLANT GAUGE—PCM OUTPUT . . . 28 SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR— ENGINE SPEED SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
ECM/PCM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 GLOW PLUG RELAY TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE— GLOW PLUG TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 RELAYS—OPERATION/TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
ENGINE SPEED/CRANK POSITION SENSOR— VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ECM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
FIVE VOLT POWER—ECM/PCM OUTPUT . . . . . 28 A/C CLUTCH RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
FUEL INJECTOR SENSOR—GROUND . . . . . . . . 26 ASD RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
GLOW PLUG LAMP—PCM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . 28 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . 34
GLOW PLUG RELAY—ECM OUTPUT . . . . . . . . 29 ENGINE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
GLOW PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 GLOW PLUG RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—MSA/PCM INPUT . 25 GLOW PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—PCM INPUT . . . . . 26 POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) . . . . 35
NEEDLE MOVEMENT OR INSTRUMENTED VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
FIRST INJECTOR—ECM INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . 26 SPECIFICATIONS
POWER GROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 GLOW PLUG CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) . . . . 24 TORQUE CHART—2.5L DIESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
GENERAL INFORMATION important to know that the ECM has a feature

where, if possible, it will ignore the failed sensor, set
INTRODUCTION a code related to the sensor, and operate the engine
This section will cover components either regulated in a “Limp Home” mode. When the ECM is operating
or controlled by the ECM controller and the Power- in a “Limp Home” mode, the Check Engine Lamp on
train Control Module (PCM). The fuel heater relay the instrument panel may be constantly illuminated,
and fuel heater are not operated by the ECM control- and the engine will most likely have a noticeable loss
ler or the PCM. These components are controlled by of performance. An example of this would be an
the ignition (key) switch. All other fuel system elec- Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor failure, and in that
trical components necessary to operate the engine situation, the engine would run at a constant 1100
are controlled or regulated by the ECM controller, RPM, regardless of the actual position of the pedal.
which interfaces with the PCM. Refer to the follow- This is the most extreme of the three “Limp Home”
ing description for more information. modes.
Certain fuel system component failures may cause When the Check Engine Lamp is illuminated con-
a no start, or prevent the engine from running. It is stantly with the key on and the engine running, it
usually indicates a problem has been detected some-
where within the fuel system. The DRBIII scan tool
is the best method for communicating with the ECM
and PCM to diagnose faults within the system.

On LHD vehicles, the ECM is mounted behind the
lower Instrument Panel to the right of the accelera-
tor pedal (Fig. 1). On RHD vehicles, the ECM is
mounted behind the lower Instrument Panel to the
left of the clutch pedal. The Powertrain Control Mod-
ule (PCM) is mounted in the engine compartment.
(Fig. 2).
Fig. 2 PCM Location

and switches that provide inputs to the ECM are
considered ECM Inputs.
ECM Inputs are:
• Air Conditioning Selection
• Theft Alarm
• ASD Relay
• Control Sleeve Position Sensor
• Fuel Temperature Sensor
• Mass Air Flow Sensor
• Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
• Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
Fig. 1 ECM Controller Location • Low Idle Position Switch
The ECM Controller is a pre–programmed, digital • 5 Volt Supply
computer. It will either directly operate or partially • Vehicle Speed Sensor
regulate the: • Engine Speed/Crank Position Sensor (rpm)
• Speed Control • Needle Movement Sensor
• Speed Control lamp • Starter Signal
• Fuel Timing Solenoid • Brake Switch
• Check Engine Light • Speed Control Switch
• Glow Plug Relay • Power Ground
• Glow Plugs • Ignition (key) Switch Sense
• Glow Plug Lamp ECM Outputs:
• ASD Relay After inputs are received by the ECM and PCM,
• Air Conditioning certain sensors, switches and components are con-
• Tachometer trolled or regulated by the ECM and PCM. These are
• Electric Vacuum Modulator (EVM) considered ECM Outputs. These outputs are for:
The ECM can adapt its programming to meet • A/C Clutch Relay (for A/C clutch operation)
changing operating conditions. • Speed Control Lamp
The ECM receives input signals from various • ASD Relay
switches and sensors. Based on these inputs, the • 5 Volts Supply
ECM regulates various engine and vehicle operations • Fuel Quantity Actuator
through different system components. These compo- • Fuel Timing Solenoid
nents are referred to as ECM Outputs. The sensors • Fuel Shutdown Solenoid
• Glow Plug Lamp the intake manifold. When the intake manifold pres-
• Check Engine Lamp (“On/Off” signal) sure is low, the voltage is low, and when the pressure
• Electric Vacuum Modulator (EVM) is high, the voltage is high. The PCM uses the volt-
• Glow Plug Relay age signals from the Boost Pressure Sensor, and the
• Tachometer Intake Air Temperature Sensor to determine the
The PCM sends and recieves signals to and from amount of air flowing through the intake manifold.
the ECM controller. PCM inputs are:
• Power Gound
• 5 Volts Supply
• Vehicle Speed Sensor
• Water-In-Fuel Sensor
• Coolant Temperature Sensor
• Low Coolant Sensor
• Sensor Return
• Fuel Level Sensor
• Oil Pressure Sensor
• Tachometer Signal
• Glow Plug Lamp
• Check Engine Lamp (“On/Off” signal)
• Brake On/Off Switch
• Battery Voltage
• ASD Relay
PCM Outputs:
• A/C On Signal
• Vehicle Theft Alarm “Ok to Run” signal
• Body Control Module CCD Bus (+) Fig. 3 Boost Pressure Sensor Location
• Body Control Module CCD Bus (–)
• Scan Tool Data Link Recieve VEHICLE THEFT ALARM
• Scan Tool Data Link Transmit The PCM can learn if the vehicle has a Vehicle
• Low Coolant Lamp Theft Alarm (VTA) system. Once it detects the vehi-
• Generator Control cle having VTA, the controller can ONLY BE
USED ON VEHICLES WITH VTA.
BOOST / PRESSURE SENSOR If the PCM is put it on a vehicle without VTA the
The Boost Pressure Sensor is mounted to the top of Glow Plug Lamp will start to blink and the vehicle
the intake manifold (Fig. 3). It is a sensor that mea- will not start.
sures both manifold vacuum and turbo boost, and it The PCM cannot be flashed to remove the VTA.
also contains an integrated intake air temperature
sensor. The Boost Pressure Sensor takes the place of BATTERY VOLTAGE—PCM INPUT
the Mass Air Flow (MAF). In the Intake Air Temper- The battery voltage input provides power to the
ature Sensor component, there is a ceramic element PCM. It also informs the PCM what voltage level is
that changes its resistance based on temperature. being supplied by the generator once the vehicle is
The ceramic element is part of an electronic circuit running.
connected to the PCM, and has a voltage applied to The battery input also provides the voltage that is
it. The ceramic element is exposed to the air inside needed to keep the PCM memory alive. The memory
the intake. This air has a cooling effect on the stores Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) messages.
ceramic element, and its resistance changes. This Trouble codes will still be stored even if the battary
causes the voltage flowing through the intake air voltage is lost.
temperature circuit to vary. The voltage signal pro-
duced by the Intake Air Temperature Sensor changes SENSOR RETURN—ECM/PCM INPUT (ANALOG
inversely to the temperature, and is measured by the GROUND)
PCM. As a general rule, when the temperature of the Sensor Return provides a low noise Analog ground
air in the intake is high, the voltage signal produced reference for all system sensors.
by the Intake Air Temperature Sensor is low. The
component of the Boost Pressure Sensor that mea- IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—MSA/PCM INPUT
sures manifold vacuum and turbo boost produces a
The ignition circuit sense input signals the MSA
voltage signal that is proportional to the pressure in
and PCM that the ignition (key) switch has been
turned to the ON position. This signal initiates the ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR—
glow plug control routine to begin the “pre–heat”
ECM/PCM INPUT
cycle.
The 0–5 volt input from this sensor tells the ECM
and PCM the temperature of the engine coolant.
IGNITION CIRCUIT SENSE—PCM INPUT Based on the voltage received at the ECM, it will
The ignition circuit sense input signals the PCM then determine operation of the fuel timing solenoid,
that the ignition (key) switch has been turned to the glow plug relay, electrical vacuum modulator (emis-
ON position. This signal initiates the glow plug con- sion component) and generator (charging system).
trol routine to begin the “pre–heat” cycle. The sensor is located on the side of the #3 cylinder
head near the rear of fuel injection pump (Fig. 5).
POWER GROUND
Provides a common ground for power devices (sole-
noid and relay devices).
NEEDLE MOVEMENT OR INSTRUMENTED

FIRST INJECTOR—ECM INPUT
This input from the ECM supplies a constant 30
mA electrical current source for the first injector sen-
sor. It will vary the voltage to this sensor when it
senses a mechanical movement within the injector
needle (pintle) of the number–1 cylinder fuel injector.
When this voltage has been determined by the ECM,
it will then control an output to the fuel timing sole-
noid (the fuel timing solenoid is located on the fuel
injection pump). Also refer to Fuel Injection Pump for
additional information.
The first injector sensor is a magnetic (inductive)
type.
The first injector sensor is used only on the fuel
injector for the number–1 cylinder (Fig. 4). It is not Fig. 5 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor Location
used on the injectors for cylinders number 2, 3, or 4.
ENGINE SPEED/CRANK POSITION SENSOR—
FUEL INJECTOR SENSOR—GROUND ECM INPUT
The engine speed sensor is mounted to the trans-
mission bellhousing at the left/rear side of the engine
block (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Fuel Injector Sensor Fig. 6 Engine Speed Sensor Location

Provides a low noise ground for the fuel injector
sensor only.
The engine speed sensor produces its own output PCM will then remove the ground from the A/C relay.
signal. If this signal is not received, the ECM will not This will deactivate the A/C compressor clutch. Also,
allow the engine to start. if the engine coolant reaches a temperature outside
The engine speed sensor input is used in conjunc- normal of its normal range, or it overheats, the ECM
tion with the first injector sensor to establish fuel will deactivate the A/C clutch.
injection pump timing.
The flywheel has four notches at its outer edge BRAKE SWITCH—ECM INPUT
(Fig. 7). Each notch is spaced equally every 90°. The When the brake light switch is activated, the ECM
notches cause a pulse to be generated when they receives an input indicating that the brakes are
pass under the speed sensor (Fig. 7). These pulses being applied. After receiving this input, the ECM is
are the input to the ECM. The input from this sensor used to control the speed control system. There is a
determines crankshaft position (in degrees) by moni- Primary and a Secondary brake switch. The Second-
toring the notches. ary brake switch is closed until the brake pedal is
pressed.
DATA LINK CONNECTOR—PCM AND ECM

INPUT AND OUTPUT
The 16–way data link connector (diagnostic scan
tool connector) links the Diagnostic Readout Box
(DRB) scan tool with the PCM and ECM. The data
link connector is located under the instrument panel
near the bottom of steering column (Fig. 8).
Fig. 7 Speed Sensor Operation

The sensor also generates an rpm signal to the
ECM. This signal is used as an input for the control
of the generator field, vehicle speed control, and
instrument panel mounted tachometer.
If the engine speed sensor should fail, the system
is unable to compensate for the problem and the car Fig. 8 Data Link Connector Location
will stop.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR—ECM INPUT
AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CONTROLS—ECM The vehicle speed sensor is located in the extension
housing of the transmission (2WD) (Fig. 9) or on the
INPUTS transfer case extension housing (Fig. 10). The sensor
The A/C control system information applies to fac- input is used by the ECM to determine vehicle speed
tory installed air conditioning units. and distance traveled.
A/C REQUEST SIGNAL: When either the A/C or The speed sensor generates 8 pulses per sensor
Defrost mode has been selected and the A/C low and revolution. These signals, in conjunction with a
high–pressure switches are closed, an input signal is closed throttle signal from the accelerator pedal posi-
sent to the ECM. The ECM uses this input to cycle tion sensor, indicate an idle deceleration to the ECM.
the A/C compressor through the A/C relay. When the vehicle is stopped at idle, a released pedal
If the A/C low or high–pressure switch opens, the signal is received by the ECM (but a speed sensor
ECM will not receive an A/C request signal. The signal is not received).
speed has been selected. The Resume input indicates
to the ECM that the previous fixed speed is
requested.
Speed control operation will start at 50 km/h–142
km/h (35–85 mph). The upper range of operation is
not restricted by vehicle speed. Inputs that effect
speed control operation are vehicle speed sensor and
accelerator pedal position sensor.
Refer to Group 8H for further speed control infor-
mation.
ASD RELAY—ECM INPUT

A 12 volt signal at this input indicates to the ECM
that the ASD relay has been activated. The ASD
relay is located in the PDC. The PDC is located next
to the battery in the engine compartment. For the
location of the relay within the PDC, refer to label on
PDC cover.
This input is used only to sense that the ASD relay
is energized. If the ECM does not see 12 volts (+) at
this input when the ASD relay should be activated, it
will set a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).
Fig. 9 Vehicle Speed Sensor—Typical
FIVE VOLT POWER—ECM/PCM OUTPUT
This circuit supplies approximately 5 volts to
power the Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor, and the
Boost / Pressure Sensor.
ENGINE COOLANT GAUGE—PCM OUTPUT

Refer to the Instrument Panel and Gauges group
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE—PCM

OUTPUT
Refer to the Instrument Panel and Gauges group
GLOW PLUG LAMP—PCM OUTPUT

The Glow Plug lamp (malfunction indicator lamp)
illuminates on the message center each time the igni-
tion (key) switch is turned on. It will stay on for
about two seconds as a bulb test.
Fig. 10 Vehicle Speed Sensor—4 Wheel Drive Fig. 11 Glow Plug Lamp Symbol
In addition to determining distance and vehicle SPEED CONTROL—PCM OUTPUTS
speed, the output from the sensor is used to control These two circuits control the fuel quantity actua-
speed control operation. tor to regulate vehicle speed. Refer to Group 8H for
Speed Control information.
SPEED CONTROL—ECM INPUT
The speed control system provides five separate AIR CONDITIONING RELAY—ECM OUTPUT
inputs to the ECM: On/Off, Set, Resume/Accel, Can- This circuit controls a ground signal for operation
cel, and Decel. The On/Off input informs the ECM of the A/C clutch relay. Also refer to Air Conditioning
that the speed control system has been activated.
The Set input informs the ECM that a fixed vehicle
(A/C) Controls—ECM Input for additional informa-
tion.
The A/C relay is located in the Power Distribution
Center (PDC). The PDC is located next to the battery
in the engine compartment. For the location of the
relay within the PDC, refer to label on PDC cover.
TIMING SOLENOID—ECM OUTPUT

The timing solenoid is located on the bottom of the
fuel injection pump (Fig. 12).
Fig. 13 Glow Plug Relay Location

plug relay is activated, it will control the 12V+ 100
amp circuit for the operation of the four glow plugs.
With a cold engine, the glow plug relay and glow
plugs may be activated for a maximum time of 200
seconds. Refer to the following Glow Plug Control
chart for a temperature/time comparison of glow plug
relay operation.
In this chart, Pre–Heat and Post–Heat times are
mentioned. Pre–heat is the amount of time the glow
Fig. 12 Timing Solenoid plug relay circuit is activated when the ignition (key)
switch is ON, but the engine has yet to be started.
This 12(+) volt, pulse width modulated (duty–cycle)
Post–heat is the amount of time the glow plug relay
output controls the amount of fuel timing (advance)
circuit is activated after the engine is operating. The
in the fuel injection pump. The higher the duty–cy-
Glow Plug lamp will not be illuminated during the
cle, the lower the advance. The lower the duty–cycle,
post–heat cycle.
the more advanced the fuel timing.
The duty–cycle is determined by the ECM from GLOW PLUG CONTROL
inputs it receives from the fuel injector sensor and
engine speed sensor.
TACHOMETER—PCM OUTPUT
The PCM recieves engine rpm values from the
ECM controller, and then supplies engine rpm values
to the Body Controller that then supplies the instru-
ment cluster mounted tachometer (if equipped). Refer
to Group 8E for tachometer information.
GLOW PLUG RELAY—ECM OUTPUT

When the ignition (key) switch is placed in the ON
position, a signal is sent to the ECM relating current
engine coolant temperature. This signal is sent from
the engine coolant temperature sensor.
After receiving this signal, the ECM will determine
if, when and for how long a period the glow plug
relay should be activated. This is done before, during
and after the engine is started. Whenever the glow
GLOW PLUGS ASD RELAY TEST

Glow plugs are used to help start a cold or cool To perform a test of the relay and its related cir-
engine. The plug will heat up and glow to heat the cuitry, refer to the DRB scan tool. To test the relay
combustion chamber of each cylinder. An individual only, refer to Relays—Operation/Testing in this sec-
plug is used for each cylinder. Each plug is threaded tion of the group.
into the cylinder head above the fuel injector (Fig. Diagnostic Trouble Codes: Refer to On-Board
14). Diagnostics in Group 25, Emission Control System
for a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) for cer-
tain fuel system components.
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR TEST

To perform a test of the engine speed sensor and
its related circuitry, refer to the DRB scan tool.
Diagnostic Trouble Codes: Refer to On-Board
Diagnostics in Group 25, Emission Control System

TEST
The sensor is located on the side of cylinder head
near the rear of fuel injection pump (Fig. 15).
Fig. 14 Glow Plug

Each plug will momentarily draw approximately 25
amps of electrical current during the initial key–on
cycle. This is on a cold or cool engine. After heating,
the current draw will drop to approximately 9–12
amps per plug.
Total momentary current draw for all four plugs is
approximately 100 amps on a cold engine dropping to
a total of approximately 40 amps after the plugs are
heated.
Electrical operation of the glow plugs are con-
trolled by the glow plug relay. Refer to the previous
Glow Plug Relay—ECM Output for additional infor-
mation.
ELECTRIC VACUUM MODULATOR (EVM)—ECM

OUTPUT
This circuit controls operation of the Electric Vac-
uum Modulator (EVM). The EVM controls operation Fig. 15 Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor
of the EGR valve. Location
Refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) for
information. See Electric Vacuum Modulator. certain fuel system components, refer to On-Board
Diagnostics in Group 25, Emission Control System.
To test the sensor only, refer to the following:
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING (1) Disconnect wire harness connector from coolant
temperature sensor.
DIESEL DIAGNOSTICS (2) Test the resistance of the sensor with a high
The ECM controllers perform engine off diagnostic input impedance (digital) volt–ohmmeter. The resis-
tests, which may be heard for about 60 seconds after tance (as measured across the sensor terminals)
turning the key off. should be less than 1340 ohms with the engine
warm. Refer to the following Sensor Resistance
(OHMS) chart. Replace the sensor if it is not within
the range of resistance specified in the chart.
SENSOR RESISTANCE (OHMS)
Fig. 16 Typical Glow Plug Tester

(3) Attach the black lead of the tester to the 12V–
(negative) side of the battery.
(4) Fit the glow plug into the top of the tester and
(3) Test continuity of the wire harness. Do this
secure it with the spring loaded bar (Fig. 16).
between the ECM wire harness connector and the
(5) Attach the third lead wire of the tester to the
sensor connector terminal. Also test continuity of
electrical terminal at the end of the glow plug.
wire harness to the sensor connector terminal. Refer
(6) When performing the test, the tester button
to Group 8W for wiring connector and circuitry infor-
(Fig. 16) should be held continuously without release
mation. Repair the wire harness if an open circuit is
for 20 seconds as indicated by the 4 timer lamps.
indicated.
Each illuminated lamp represents a 5 second time
(4) After tests are completed, connect electrical
lapse.
connector to sensor.
(a) Press and hold the tester button (Fig. 16)
and note the amp gauge reading. The gauge read-
GLOW PLUG TEST ing should indicate a momentary, initial current
Hard starting or a rough idle after starting may be draw (surge) of approximately 25 amps. After the
caused by one or more defective glow plugs. Before initial surge, the amp gauge reading should begin
testing the glow plugs, a test of the glow plug relays to fall off. The glow plug tip should start to glow
should be performed. This will ensure that 12V+ is an orange color after 5 seconds. If the tip did not
available at the plugs when starting the engine. glow after 5 seconds, replace the glow plug. Before
Refer to the Glow Plug Relay Test for information. discarding the glow plug, check the position of the
For accurate test results, the glow plugs should be circuit breaker on the bottom of the plug tester. It
removed from the engine. The plugs must be checked may have to be reset. Reset if necessary.
when cold. Do not check the plugs if the engine (b) Continue to hold the tester button while
has recently been operated. If plugs are observing the amp gauge and the 4 timer lamps.
checked when warm, incorrect amp gauge When all 4 lamps are illuminated, indicating a 20
readings will result. second time lapse, the amp gauge reading should
Use Churchill Glow Plug Tester DX.900 or an indicate a 9–12 amp current draw. If not, replace
equivalent (Fig. 16) for the following tests. This the glow plug. Refer to Glow Plug Removal/Instal-
tester is equipped with 4 timer lamps. lation.
(1) Remove the glow plugs from the engine. Refer (7) Check each glow plug in this manner using one
to Glow Plug Removal/Installation. 20 second cycle. If the glow plug is to be retested, it
(2) Attach the red lead of the tester to the 12V+ must first be allowed to cool to room temperature.
(positive) side of the battery.
WARNING: THE GLOW PLUG WILL BECOME TESTING:
EXTREMELY HOT (GLOWING) DURING THESE Disconnect and isolate the electrical connectors
TESTS. BURNS COULD RESULT IF IMPROPERLY (Fig. 18) at all four glow plugs. With the engine cool
HANDLED. ALLOW THE GLOW PLUG TO COOL or cold, and the key in the ON position, check for
BEFORE REMOVING FROM TESTER. 10–12 volts + at each electrical connector. 10–12 volts
+ should be at each connector whenever the ECM is
(8) Remove the glow plug from the tester. operating in the pre–heat or post–heat cycles (refer
to the following Glow Plug Control chart). Be very
GLOW PLUG RELAY TEST careful not to allow any of the four discon-
The glow plug relay is located in the engine com- nected glow plug electrical connectors to con-
partment on the left–inner fender (Fig. 17). tact a metal surface. When the key is turned to
the ON position, approximately 100 amps at 12
volts is supplied to these connectors. If 10–12
volts + is not available at each connector, check con-
tinuity of wiring harness directly to the relay. If con-
tinuity is good directly to the relay, the fault is either
with the relay or the relay input from the ECM. To
test the relay only, refer to Relays—Operation/Test-
ing in this section of the group. If the relay test is
good, refer to the DRB scan tool.

When the ignition (key) switch is placed in the ON
position, a signal is sent to the ECM relating current
engine coolant temperature. This signal is sent from
the engine coolant temperature sensor.
After receiving this signal, the ECM will determine
if, when and for how long a period the glow plug
relay should be activated. This is done before, during
and after the engine is started. Whenever the glow
plug relay is activated, it will control the 12V+ 100
amp circuit for the operation of the four glow plugs. Fig. 18 Wiring Connection at Glow Plug
The Glow Plug lamp is tied to this circuit. Lamp RELAYS—OPERATION/TESTING
operation is also controlled by the ECM. The following description of operation and
With a cold engine, the glow plug relay and glow tests apply only to the ASD and other relays.
plugs may be activated for a maximum time of 200 The terminals on the bottom of each relay are num-
seconds. Refer to the Glow Plug Control chart for a bered (Fig. 19).
temperature/time comparison of glow plug relay oper-
ation. OPERATION
In this chart, Pre–Heat and Post–Heat times are • Terminal number 30 is connected to battery volt-
mentioned. Pre–heat is the amount of time the glow age. For both the ASD and other relays, terminal 30
plug relay circuit is activated when the ignition (key) is connected to battery voltage at all times.
switch is ON, but the engine has yet to be started. • The ECM grounds the coil side of the relay
Post–heat is the amount of time the glow plug relay through terminal number 85.
circuit is activated after the engine is operating. The • Terminal number 86 supplies voltage to the coil
Glow Plug lamp will not be illuminated during the side of the relay.
post–heat cycle.
GLOW PLUG CONTROL nals 85 and 86. The resistance should be between 75
65 ohms.
and 87A. The ohmmeter should show continuity
between terminals 30 and 87A.
and 30. The ohmmeter should not show continuity at
this time.
(5) Connect one end of a jumper wire (16 gauge or
smaller) to relay terminal 85. Connect the other end
of the jumper wire to the ground side of a 12 volt
power source.
(6) Connect one end of another jumper wire (16
gauge or smaller) to the power side of the 12 volt
power source. Do not attach the other end of the
jumper wire to the relay at this time.
WARNING: DO NOT ALLOW OHMMETER TO CON-

TACT TERMINALS 85 OR 86 DURING THIS TEST.
(7) Attach the other end of the jumper wire to

relay terminal 86. This activates the relay. The ohm-
meter should now show continuity between relay ter-
minals 87 and 30. The ohmmeter should not show
continuity between relay terminals 87A and 30.
(8) Disconnect jumper wires.
(9) Replace the relay if it did not pass the continu-
ity and resistance tests. If the relay passed the tests,
it operates properly. Check the remainder of the ASD
and other relay circuits. Refer to group 8W, Wiring
Diagrams.
BOOST / PRESSURE SENSOR

• When the PCM de-energizes the ASD and other
relays, terminal number 87A connects to terminal 30.
This is the Off position. In the off position, voltage is
not supplied to the rest of the circuit. Terminal 87A
is the center terminal on the relay.
• When the ECM energizes the ASD and other
relays, terminal 87 connects to terminal 30. This is
the On position. Terminal 87 supplies voltage to the
rest of the circuit.
TESTING
The following procedure applies to the ASD and
other relays. Fig. 20 Boost Pressure Sensor Location
(1) Remove relay from connector before testing. If the boost pressure sensor fails, the PCM records
(2) With the relay removed from the vehicle, use a DTC into memory and continues to operate the
an ohmmeter to check the resistance between termi-
engine in one of the three “limp-in” modes. When the
PCM is operating in this mode, a loss of power will
be present, as if the turbocharger was not operating.
The best method for diagnosing faults with the boost
pressure sensor is with the DRB III scan tool. Diag-
nostic Trouble Codes: Refer to On-Board Diagnos-
tics in Group 25, Emission Control System for a list
of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s) for certain fuel
system components.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR TEST

To perform a test of the sensor and its related cir-
cuitry, refer to DRB scan tool.
tain fuel system components. Fig. 21 Engine Speed Sensor
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The sensor is located on the side of cylinder head
For a list of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC’s),
near the rear of fuel injection pump.
refer to Group 25, Emission Control System for infor-
mation. See On-Board Diagnostics.
REMOVAL
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION WARNING: HOT, PRESSURIZED COOLANT CAN

CAUSE INJURY BY SCALDING. COOLING SYSTEM
MUST BE PARTIALLY DRAINED BEFORE REMOV-
ASD RELAY
ING THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR.
The ASD relay is located in the PDC. For the loca-
REFER TO GROUP 7, COOLING.
tion of the relay within the PDC, refer to label on
PDC cover. (1) Partially drain cooling system. Refer to Group
7, Cooling.
A/C CLUTCH RELAY (2) Disconnect electrical connector from sensor.
The A/C clutch relay is located in the PDC. For the (3) Remove sensor from cylinder head.
location of the relay within the PDC, refer to label on
PDC cover. INSTALLATION
(1) Install a new copper gasket to sensor.
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR (2) Install sensor to cylinder head.
The engine speed sensor is mounted to the trans- (3) Tighten sensor to 18 N·m (13 ft. lbs.) torque.
mission bellhousing at the rear of the engine block (4) Connect electrical connector to sensor.
(Fig. 21). (5) Replace any lost engine coolant. Refer to Group
7, Cooling System.
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the harness (on the sensor) from GLOW PLUGS
the main electrical harness. The glow plugs are located above each fuel injector
(2) Remove the sensor mounting bolts. (Fig. 22). Four individual plugs are used.
(3) Remove the sensor.
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable at the
(1) Install the sensor flush against the opening in battery.
the transmission housing. (2) Clean the area around the glow plug with com-
(2) Install and tighten the sensor mounting bolt to pressed air before removal.
19 N·m (14 ft. lbs.) torque. (3) Disconnect electrical connector (Fig. 23) at glow
(3) Connect the electrical connector to the sensor. plug.
(4) Remove the glow plug (Fig. 22) from cylinder
head.
Fig. 22 Glow Plug

(2) Install electrical connector to relay.
(3) Install relay to inner fender.

The PCM is mounted to a bracket mounted to the
inner side of the right fender well behind the air
cleaner assembly (Fig. 25).
Fig. 23 Glow Plug Electrical Connector

INSTALLATION
(1) Apply high–temperature anti–seize compound
to glow plug threads before installation.
(2) Install the glow plug into the cylinder head.
Tighten to 23 N·m (203 in. lbs.) torque.
GLOW PLUG RELAY

The glow plug relay is located in the engine com-
partment on the left–inner fender (Fig. 24).
REMOVAL
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable at the
battery.
(2) Remove relay mounting bolt.
(3) Disconnect electrical connector at relay and
remove relay. Fig. 25 PCM Location
REMOVAL
INSTALLATION (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable at the
(1) Check condition of electrical connector for dam- battery.
age or corrosion. Repair as necessary.
(2) Loosen the 60–Way connector (Fig. 25). The
electrical connector has a sliding bar which moves
inward to lock or outward to unlock.
(3) Remove the electrical connector by pulling
straight out.
(4) Remove PCM.
INSTALLATION
(1) After the PCM electrical connector has been
separated from the PCM, inspect the pins for corro-
sion, being spread apart, bent or misaligned. Also
inspect the pin heights in the connector. If the pin
heights are different, this would indicate a pin has
separated from the connector. Repair as necessary.
(2) Engage 60–way connector into PCM. Move
slide bar to lock connector.
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR

The vehicle speed sensor (Fig. 26) is located on the
extension housing of the transmission for 2 wheel
drive vehicle, or on the transfer case housing for 4 Fig. 27 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—4WD
wheel drive vehicles (Fig. 27).
Fig. 28 Sensor Removal/Installation—Typical

Fig. 26 Vehicle Speed Sensor Location—2 Wheel (5) Pull the sensor from the speedometer pinion
Drive gear adapter for removal.
REMOVAL
(1) Raise and support vehicle. INSTALLATION
(2) Clean the area around the sensor before (1) Install new sensor into speedometer gear
removal. adapter.
(3) Disconnect the electrical connector from the (2) Tighten sensor mounting bolt. To prevent dam-
sensor (Fig. 28). age to sensor or speedometer adapter, be sure the
(4) Remove the sensor mounting bolt (Fig. 28). sensor is mounted flush to the adapter before tight-
ening.
(3) Connect electrical connector to sensor.
SPECIFICATIONS
GLOW PLUG CURRENT DRAW
Initial Current Draw: Approximately 22–25
amps per plug.
After 20 seconds of operation: Approximately
9–12 amps per plug.
TORQUE CHART—2.5L DIESEL

XJ STEERING 19 - 1
STEERING
CONTENTS
page page
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 STEERING LINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
POWER STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
POWER STEERING
INDEX
page page

STEERING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 POWER STEERING SYSTEM
DIAGNOSIS CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
GENERAL INFORMATION
STEERING SYSTEM
The power steering system has a hydraulic pump.
The pump is a constant flow rate and displacement ,
vane-type pump. The pump on the 4.0L engine has a
reservoir mounted to it (Fig. 1). The 2.5L engine has
a remote mounted reservoir.
The steering gear used is a recirculating ball type
gear. The gear acts as a rolling thread between the
worm shaft and the rack piston. When the steering
wheel is turned the worm shaft turns which moves
the rack piston. The rack piston movement turns the
pitman shaft which is connected to the steering link-
age by the pitman arm. This gear is used on all mod-
els.
The power steering system consists of:
• Hydraulic pump Fig. 1 Power Steering Gear & Pump - 4.0L
• Recirculating ball steering gear
NOTE: Right hand drive (RHD) and left hand drive
• Steering column
(LHD) service procedures and torque specifications
• Steering linkage
for steering linkage, gear and column are the same.
The power steering pump procedures are different.
Refer to appropriate service procedures regarding
each component in the system.
19 - 2 STEERING XJ
POWER STEERING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS CHARTS
STEERING NOISE
There is some noise in all power steering systems. One of the most common is a hissing sound evident at a
standstill parking. Or when the steering wheel is at the end of it’s travel. Hiss is a high frequency noise similar
to that of a water tap being closed slowly. The noise is present in all valves that have a high velocity fluid passing
through an orifice. There is no relationship between this noise and steering performance.
OBJECTIONAL HISS OR 1. Steering intermediate shaft to dash panel 1. Check and repair seal at dash
WHISTLE seal. panel.
2. Noisy valve in power steering gear. 2. Replace steering gear.
RATTLE OR CLUNK 1. Gear mounting bolts loose. 1. Tighten bolts to specification.

2. Loose or damaged suspension 2. Inspect and repair suspension.
components.
3. Loose or damaged steering linkage. 3. Inspect and repair steering
linkage.
4. Internal gear noise. 4. Replace gear.
5. Pressure hose in contact with other 5. Reposition hose.
components.
CHIRP OR SQUEAL 1. Loose belt. 1. Adjust or replace.
WHINE OR GROWL 1. Low fluid level. 1. Fill to proper level.

2. Pressure hose in contact with other 2. Reposition hose.
components.
3. Internal pump noise. 3. Replace pump.
SUCKING AIR SOUND 1. Loose return line clamp. 1. Replace clamp.

2. O-ring missing or damaged on hose 2. Replace o-ring.
fitting.
3. Low fluid level. 3. Fill to proper level.
4. Air leak between pump and reservoir. 4. Repair as necessary.
SCRUBBING OR 1. Wrong tire size. 1. Verify tire size.

KNOCKING 2. Wrong gear. 2. Verify gear.
XJ STEERING 19 - 3
BINDING AND STICKING
DIFFICULT TO TURN WHEEL 1. Low fluid level. 1. Fill to proper level.

STICKS OR BINDS 2. Tire pressure. 2. Adjust tire pressure.
3. Steering component. 3. Inspect and lube.
4. Loose belt. 4. Adjust or replace.
5. Low pump pressure. 5. Pressure test and replace if
necessary.
6. Column shaft coupler binding. 6. Replace coupler.
7. Steering gear worn or out of 7. Repair or replace gear.
adjustment.
INSUFFICIENT ASST. OR POOR RETURN TO CENTER
HARD TURNING OR MOMENTARY 1. Tire pressure. 1. Adjust tire pressure.

INCREASE IN TURNING EFFORT 2. Low fluid level. 2. Fill to proper level.
3. Loose belt. 3. Adjust or replace.
4. Lack of lubrication. 4. Inspect and lubricate steering and
suspension compnents.
5. Low pump pressure. 5. Pressure test and repair as
necessary.
6. Internal gear leak. 6. Pressure and flow test, and repair
as necessary.
STEERING WHEEL 1. Tire pressure. 1. Adjust tire pressure.

DOES NOT WANT TO RETURN TO 2. Wheel alignment. 2. Align front end.
CENTER POSITION
3. Lack of lubrication. 3. Inspect and lubricate steering and
suspension compnents.
4. High friction in steering gear. 4. Test and adjust as necessary.
19 - 4 STEERING XJ
LOOSE STEERING AND VEHICLE LEAD
EXCESSIVE PLAY IN STEERING 1. Worn or loose suspension or 1. Repair as necessary.

WHEEL steering components.
2. Worn or loose wheel bearings. 2. Repair as necessary.

3. Steering gear mounting. 3. Tighten gear mounting bolts to
specification.
4. Gear out of adjustment. 4. Adjust gear to specification.
5. Worn or loose steering coupler. 5. Repair as necessary.
VEHICLE PULLS OR LEADS TO 1. Tire Pressure. 1. Adjust tire pressure.

ONE SIDE 2. Radial tire lead. 2. Cross front tires.
3. Brakes dragging. 3. Repair as necessary.
4. Wheel alignment. 4. Align vehicle.
5. Weak or broken spring. 5. Replace spring.
6. Loose or worn steering or 6. Repair as necessary.
suspension components.
XJ STEERING 19 - 5
POWER STEERING PUMP
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION PUMP RESERVOIR-2.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . .......... 5 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING PUMP PULLEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
POWER FLOW AND PRESSURE . . . .......... 5 PUMP RESERVOIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PUMP LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . .......... 6 FLOW CONTROL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
POWER STEERING PUMP – INITIAL TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... 6 SPECIAL TOOLS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . .......... 7

POWER STEERING PUMP
Hydraulic pressure is provided for operation of the
power steering gear by a belt driven power steering
pump. The power steering pump is a constant flow
rate and displacement, vane-type pump. The internal
parts in the housing operate submerged in fluid. The
flow control orifice is part of the high pressure line
fitting. The pressure relief valve inside the flow con-
trol valve limits the pump pressure. The reservoir is
attached to the pump body with spring clips on the
4.0L engine. On the 2.5L engine the reservoir is sep-
arate from the pump.
The power steering pump is connected to the steer-
ing gear by the pressure and return hoses. The pump
shaft has a pressed-on drive pulley that is belt driven
by the crankshaft pulley (Fig. 1).
NOTE: Power steering pumps have different pres-

sure rates and are not interchangeable with other
pumps. Fig. 1 Pump With Integral Reservoir
FLOW AND PRESSURE TEST
(1) Check the power steering belt to ensure it is in
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING good condition and adjusted properly.
(2) Connect pressure gauge hose from the Power
POWER FLOW AND PRESSURE Steering Analyzer to Tube 6865.
The following procedure is used to test the operation (3) Connect Adapter 6826 to Power Steering Ana-
of the power steering system on the vehicle. This test lyzer test valve end.
will provide the gallons per minute (GPM) or flow rate (4) Disconnect high pressure hose at gear or pump.
of the power steering pump along with the maximum Use a container for dripping fluid.
relief pressure. Perform test any time a power steering (5) Connect Tube 6865 to the pump hose fitting.
system problem is present. This test will determine if (6) Connect the power steering hose from the
the power steering pump or power steering gear is not steering gear to Adapter 6826.
functioning properly. The following pressure and flow
test is performed using Power Steering Analyzer Tool
Kit 6815 (Fig. 2) and Adapter Kit 6893.
19 - 6 STEERING XJ
CAUTION: Do not force the pump to operate
against the stops for more than 2 to 3 seconds at a
time because, pump damage will result.
PUMP SPECIFICATIONS
RELIEF
ENGINE PRESSURE 6 FLOW RATE (GPM)
50
9653 kPa
2.5L
(1400 psi) 1500 RPM
9653 kPa 2.4 - 2.8 GPM
4.0L
(1400 psi)
PUMP LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS

Fig. 2 Power Steering Analyzer
(7) Open the test valve completely.
(8) Start engine and let idle long enough to circu-
late power steering fluid through flow/pressure test
gauge and to get air out of the fluid. Then shut off
engine.
(9) Check fluid level, add fluid as necessary. Start
engine again and let idle.
(10) Gauge should read below 862 kPa (125 psi), if
above, inspect the hoses for restrictions and repair as
necessary. The initial pressure reading should be in
the range of 345-552 kPa (50-80 psi).
(11) Increase the engine speed to 1500 RPM and
read the flow meter. The reading should be 2.4 - 2.8
GPM, if the reading is below this specification the
pump should be replaced.
CAUTION: The next step involves testing maximum

pump pressure output and flow control valve oper-
ation. Do not leave valve closed for more than three
seconds as the pump could be damaged.
(12) Close valve fully three times and record high-

est pressure indicated each time. All three read-
ings must be above specifications and within
345 kPa (50 psi) of each other.
• Pressures above specifications but not within SERVICE PROCEDURES
345 kPa (50 psi) of each other, replace pump.
• Pressures within 345 kPa (50 psi) of each other POWER STEERING PUMP – INITIAL
but below specifications, replace pump. OPERATION
(13) Open the test valve, turn steering wheel
extreme left and right positions against the stops. WARNING: THE FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE
Record the highest indicated pressure at each posi- CHECKED WITH ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT INJURY
tion. Compare readings to specifications. If highest FROM MOVING COMPONENTS.
output pressures are not the same against either
stop, the gear is leaking internally and must be
CAUTION: Use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid or
repaired.
equivalent. Do not use automatic transmission fluid
and do not overfill.
XJ STEERING 19 - 7
Wipe filler cap clean, then check the fluid level. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
The dipstick should indicate COLD when the fluid is
at normal temperature. POWER STEERING PUMP
(1) Fill the pump fluid reservoir to the proper level
and let the fluid settle for at least two minutes. NOTE: The power steering pump is mounted in the
(2) Start the engine and let run for a few seconds same position on LHD and RHD vehicles. On 4.0L
then turn engine off. RHD vehicles the front bracket is different. The ser-
(3) Add fluid if necessary. Repeat the above proce- vice procedures are the same.
dure until the fluid level remains constant after run-
ning the engine.
(4) Raise the front wheels off the ground. REMOVAL
(5) Slowly turn the steering wheel right and left, (1) Remove serpentine drive belt, refer to Group 7
lightly contacting the wheel stops at least 20 times. Cooling.
(6) Check the fluid level add if necessary. (2) Remove pressure and return hoses from pump,
(7) Lower the vehicle, start the engine and turn and drain pump.
the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock. (3) Remove 3 pump mounting bolts through pulley
(8) Stop the engine and check the fluid level and access holes .
refill as required. (4) Loosen the 3 pump bracket bolts (Fig. 3) and
(9) If the fluid is extremely foamy or milky look- (Fig. 4).
ing, allow the vehicle to stand a few minutes and (5) Tilt pump downward and remove from engine.
repeat the procedure. (6) Remove pulley from pump.
CAUTION: Do not run a vehicle with foamy fluid for INSTALLATION

an extended period. This may cause pump damage. (1) Install pulley on pump.
(2) Install pump on engine.
(3) Tighten pump bracket bolts to 47 N·m (35 ft.
lbs.).
Fig. 3 Pump Mounting

19 - 8 STEERING XJ
Fig. 4 Pump Mounting 4.0L RHD

(4) Install 3 pump mounting bolts and tighten to
27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
(5) Install the pressure and return hoses to pump.
(6) Install drive belt, refer to Group 7 Cooling.
(7) Add power steering fluid and perform Power
Steering Pump Initial Operation.
PUMP RESERVOIR-2.5L
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the hoses from the bottom of the res-
ervoir and drain the reservoir.
(2) Remove the push-in fastener from the top of
the fan shroud.
(3) Slide reservoir up off the fan shroud.
INSTALLATION Fig. 5 Pulley Removal

(1) Slide reservoir down onto fan shroud.
(2) Install the push-in fastener in the top of fan ASSEMBLY
shroud. (1) Replace pulley if bent, cracked, or loose.
(3) Install the pump hoses. (2) Install pulley on pump with Installer C-4063-B
(4) Fill reservoir to proper level. Refer to Power (Fig. 6) flush with the end of the shaft. Ensure the
Steering Pump Initial Operation. tool and pulley remain aligned with the pump shaft.
(3) Install pump assembly.
(4) With Serpentine Belt, run engine until warm (5
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY min.) and note any belt chirp. If chirp exists, move
pulley outward approximately 0.5 mm (0.020 in.). If
PUMP PULLEY noise increases, press on 1.0 mm (0.040 in.). Be
careful that pulley does not contact mounting
DISASSEMBLY bolts.
(1) Remove pump assembly.
(2) Remove pulley from pump with Puller C-4333
(Fig. 5).
XJ STEERING 19 - 9
ASSEMBLY
(1) Lubricate new O-ring Seal with Mopar Power
Steering Fluid or equivalent.
(2) Install O-ring seal in housing.
(3) Install reservoir onto housing.
(4) Slide and tap in new reservoir retainer clips
until tab locks to housing.
(5) Install power steering pump.
(6) Add power steering fluid, refer to Pump Initial
Operation.
FLOW CONTROL VALVE

DISASSEMBLY
(1) Clean area around fitting to prevent dirt from
entering pump. Remove pressure hose from pump fit-
Fig. 6 Pulley Installation ting.
PUMP RESERVOIR (2) Remove fitting from pump housing (Fig. 8).
Prevent flow control valve and spring from
DISASSEMBLY sliding out of housing bore.
(1) Remove power steering pump.
(2) Clean exterior of pump.
(3) Clamp the pump body in a soft jaw vice.
(4) Pry up tab and slide the retaining clips off (Fig.
7).
NOTE: Use new retaining clips for installtion.
Fig. 8 Flow Control Valve

(3) Remove and discard O-ring seal.
ASSEMBLY
(1) Install spring and flow control valve into pump
housing bore. Be sure the hex nut end of the
valve is facing in toward pump.
(2) Install O-ring seal onto fitting.
(3) Install flow control valve in pump housing and
(4) Install pressure hose to valve.
Fig. 7 Pump Reservoir Clips

(5) Remove fluid reservoir from pump body.
Remove and discard O-ring seal.
19 - 10 STEERING XJ
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Power Steering Pump
Bracket to Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
(21 ft. lbs.)
Bracket to Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 N·m
(35 ft. lbs.)
Flow Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 N·m Installer, Power Steering Pulley C-4063–B
(55 ft. lbs.)
Pressure Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
(21 ft. lbs.)
SPECIAL TOOLS
POWER STEERING PUMP
Adapters, Power Steering Flow/Pressure Tester

6893
Analyzer Set, Power Steering Flow/Pressure 6815
Puller C-4333
XJ STEERING 19 - 11
POWER STEERING GEAR
INDEX
page page
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION SPOOL VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

POWER STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 RACK PISTON AND WORM SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING ADJUSTMENTS
POWER STEERING GEAR LEAKAGE STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 SPECIFICATIONS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION POWER STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY SPECIAL TOOLS
HOUSING END PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 POWER STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PITMAN SHAFT/SEALS/BEARING . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION rack piston teeth mesh with the pitman shaft. Turn-
ing the worm shaft turns the pitman shaft, which
POWER STEERING GEAR turns the steering linkage.
The power steering gear is a recirculating ball type
CAUTION: Components attached with a nut and
gear (Fig. 1). The gear acts as a rolling thread
cotter pin must be torqued to specification. Then if
between the worm shaft and rack piston. The worm
the slot in the nut does not line up with the cotter
shaft is supported by a thrust bearing at the lower
end and a bearing assembly at the upper end. When
the nut to align the cotter pin hole.
the worm shaft is turned the rack piston moves. The
19 - 12 STEERING XJ
Fig. 1 Recirculating Ball Type Gear

XJ STEERING 19 - 13

POWER STEERING GEAR LEAKAGE DIAGNOSIS
Fig. 2 Steering Gear Mounting (LHD)

HOUSING END PLUG
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Unseat and remove retaining ring from groove
with a punch through the hole in the end of the
housing (Fig. 3).
STEERING GEAR
REMOVAL
(1) Place the front wheels in the straight ahead
position with the steering wheel centered.
(2) Disconnect and cap the fluid hoses from steer-
ing gear.
(3) Remove the column coupler shaft from the
gear.
(4) Remove pitman arm from gear.
(5) Remove the steering gear retaining bolts and
remove the gear (Fig. 2) .
INSTALLATION
(1) Align the column coupler shaft to steering gear.
(2) Install steering gear (and bracket) on the frame
rail and tighten bolts to 95 N·m (70 ft. lbs.)
(3) Align and install the pitman arm and tighten
nut to 251 N·m (185 ft. lbs.).
(4) Connect fluid hoses to steering gear and
tighten to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.). Fig. 3 End Plug Retaining Ring
(5) Fill power steering system to proper level. (2) Slowly rotate stub shaft with 12 point socket
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE to force the end plug out
from housing.
19 - 14 STEERING XJ
CAUTION: Do not turn stub shaft any further than PITMAN SHAFT/SEALS/BEARING
necessary. The rack piston balls will drop out of the
rack piston circuit if the stub shaft is turned too far. DISASSEMBLY
(3) Remove O-ring from the housing (Fig. 4). (1) Clean exposed end of pitman shaft and housing
with a wire brush.
(2) Remove preload adjuster nut (Fig. 6).
(3) Rotate the stub shaft with a 12 point socket
from stop to stop and count the number of turns.
(4) Center the stub shaft by rotating it from the
stop 1/2 of the total amount of turns.
(5) Remove side cover bolts and remove side cover,
gasket and pitman shaft as an assembly (Fig. 6).
NOTE: The pitman shaft will not clear the housing

if it is not centered.
Fig. 4 End Plug Components

ASSEMBLY
(1) Lubricate O-ring with power steering fluid and
install into the housing.
(2) Install end plug by tapping the plug lightly
with a plastic mallet into the housing.
(3) Install retaining ring so one end of the ring
covers the housing access hole (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 Side Cover and Pitman Shaft

(6) Remove pitman shaft from the side cover.
(7) Remove dust seal from the housing with a seal
pick (Fig. 7).
CAUTION: Use care not to score the housing bore

when prying out seals and washer.
(8) Remove retaining ring with snap ring pliers.

(9) Remove washer from the housing.
(10) Remove oil seal from the housing with a seal
Fig. 5 Installing The Retaining Ring pick.
(11) Remove pitman shaft bearing from housing
with a bearing driver and handle (Fig. 8).
XJ STEERING 19 - 15
(9) Install preload adjuster nut. Do not tighten
nut until after Over-Center Rotation Torque
adjustment has been made.
(10) Install gasket to side cover and bend tabs
around edges of side cover (Fig. 6).
(11) Install pitman shaft assembly and side cover
to housing.
(12) Install side cover bolts and tighten to 60 N·m
(44 ft. lbs.).
(13) Perform over-center rotation torque adjustment.
SPOOL VALVE
DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove lock nut (Fig. 9).
(2) Remove adjuster nut with Spanner Wrench
Fig. 7 Pitman Shaft Seals & Bearing C-4381.
(3) Remove thrust support assembly out of the
housing (Fig. 10).
(4) Pull stub shaft and valve assembly from the
housing (Fig. 11).
Fig. 9 Lock Nut and Adjuster Nut
Fig. 8 Needle Bearing Removal

ASSEMBLY
(1) Install pitman shaft bearing into housing with
a bearing driver and handle.
(2) Coat the oil seal and washer with special
grease supplied with the new seal.
(3) Install the oil seal with a driver and handle.
(4) Install backup washer.
(5) Install the retainer ring with snap ring pliers.
(6) Coat the dust seal with special grease sup-
plied with the new seal.
(7) Install dust seal with a driver and handle.
(8) Install pitman shaft to side cover by screwing
shaft in until it fully seats to side cover.
Fig. 10 Thrust Support Assembly
19 - 16 STEERING XJ
Fig. 11 Valve Assembly With Stub Shaft Fig. 13 Spool Valve

(5) Remove stub shaft from valve assembly by
lightly tapping shaft on a block of wood to loosen
shaft. Then disengage stub shaft pin from hole in
spool valve and separate the valve assembly from
stub shaft (Fig. 12).
Fig. 14 Valve Seals

ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Clean and dry all components, then lubri-
cate with power steering fluid.
Fig. 12 Stub Shaft
(6) Remove spool valve from valve body by pulling (1) Install spool valve spool O-ring.
and rotating the spool valve from the valve body (Fig. (2) Install spool valve in valve body by pushing
13). and rotating. Hole in spool valve for stub shaft pin
(7) Remove spool valve O-ring and valve body must be accessible from opposite end of valve body.
teflon rings and O-rings underneath the teflon rings (3) Install stub shaft in valve spool and engage
(Fig. 14). locating pin on stub shaft into spool valve hole (Fig.
(8) Remove the O-ring between the worm shaft 15).
and the stub shaft.
NOTE: Notch in stub shaft cap must fully engage
valve body pin and seat against valve body shoul-
der.
XJ STEERING 19 - 17
RACK PISTON AND WORM SHAFT

DISASSEMBLY
(1) Remove housing end plug.
(2) Remove rack piston plug (Fig. 17).
(3) Remove side cover and pitman shaft.
Fig. 15 Stub Shaft Installation

(4) Install O-rings and teflon rings over the
O-rings on valve body.
(5) Install O-ring into the back of the stub shaft
cap (Fig. 16).
Fig. 17 Rack Piston End Plug

(4) Turn stub shaft COUNTERCLOCKWISE until
the rack piston begins to come out of the housing.
(5) Insert Arbor C-4175 into bore of rack piston
(Fig. 18) and hold tool tightly against worm shaft.
(6) Turn the stub shaft with a 12 point socket
COUNTERCLOCKWISE, this will force the rack pis-
ton onto the tool and hold the rack piston balls in
place.
Fig. 16 Stub Shaft Cap O-Ring

(6) Install stub shaft and valve assembly in the
housing. Line up worm shaft to slots in the valve
assembly.
(7) Install thrust support assembly.
NOTE: The thrust support is serviced as an assem-

bly. If any component of the thrust support is dam-
aged the assembly must be replaced.
(8) Install adjuster nut and lock nut.

(9) Adjust Thrust Bearing Preload and Over-Cen- Fig. 18 Rack Piston with Arbor
ter Rotating Torque.
19 - 18 STEERING XJ
(7) Remove the rack piston and tool together from
housing.
(8) Remove tool from rack piston.
(9) Remove rack piston balls.
(10) Remove clamp bolts, clamp and ball guide
(Fig. 19).
(11) Remove teflon ring and O-ring from the rack
piston (Fig. 20).
Fig. 21 Worm Shaft

ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Clean and dry all components and lubricate
with power steering fluid.
(1) Check for scores, nicks or burrs on the rack

piston finished surface. Slight wear is normal on the
Fig. 19 Rack Piston worm gear surfaces.
(2) Install O-ring and teflon ring on the rack pis-
ton.
(3) Install worm shaft in the rack piston and align
worm shaft spiral groove with rack piston ball guide
hole (Fig. 22).
Fig. 20 Rack Piston Teflon Ring and O-Ring

Fig. 22 Installing Balls in Rack Piston
(12) Remove the adjuster lock nut and adjuster
nut from the stub shaft. CAUTION: The rack piston balls must be installed
(13) Pull the stub shaft with the spool valve and alternately into the rack piston and ball guide. This
thrust support assembly out of the housing. maintains worm shaft preload. There are 12 black
(14) Remove the worm shaft from the housing balls and 12 silver (Chrome) balls. The black balls
(Fig. 21). are smaller than the silver balls.
XJ STEERING 19 - 19
(4) Lubricate and install rack piston balls through ADJUSTMENTS
return guide hole while turning worm shaft COUN-
TERCLOCKWISE (Fig. 22). STEERING GEAR
(5) Install remaining balls in guide using grease to
hold the balls in place (Fig. 23). CAUTION: Steering gear must be adjusted in the
proper order. If adjustments are not performed in
order, gear damage and improper steering response
may result.
NOTE: Adjusting the steering gear in the vehicle is

not recommended. Remove gear from the vehicle
and drain the fluid. Then mount gear in a vise to
perform adjustments.
WORM THRUST BEARING PRELOAD

(1) Mount the gear carefully into a vise.
CAUTION: Do not overtighten the vise on the gear

case. This may affect the adjustment
(2) Remove adjuster plug locknut (Fig. 24).

(3) Rotate the stub shaft back and forth with a 12
point socket to drain the remaining fluid.
Fig. 23 Balls in the Return Guide

(6) Install the guide onto rack piston and install
clamp and clamp bolts. Tighten bolts to 58 N·m (43
ft. lbs.).
(7) Insert Arbor C-4175 into bore of rack piston
and hold tool tightly against worm shaft.
(8) Turn the worm shaft COUNTERCLOCKWISE
while pushing on the arbor. This will force the rack
piston onto the arbor and hold the rack piston balls
in place.
(9) Install the races and thrust bearing on the
worm shaft and install shaft in the housing (Fig. 21).
(10) Install the stub shaft with spool valve, thrust
support assembly and adjuster nut in the housing. Fig. 24 Adjuster Lock Nut
(11) Install the rack piston and arbor tool into the
housing. (4) Turn the adjuster in with Spanner Wrench
(12) Hold arbor tightly against worm shaft and C-4381. Tighten the plug and thrust bearing in the
turn stub shaft CLOCKWISE until rack piston is housing until firmly bottomed in the housing about
seated on worm shaft. 34 N·m (25 ft. lbs.).
(13) Install pitman shaft and side cover in the (5) Place an index mark on the housing even with
housing. one of the holes in adjuster plug (Fig. 25).
(14) Install rack piston plug and tighten to 150 (6) Measure back (counterclockwise) 5.08 mm (0.20
N·m (111 ft. lbs.). in) and mark housing (Fig. 26).
(15) Install housing end plug. (7) Rotate adjustment cap back (counterclockwise)
(16) Adjust worm shaft thrust bearing preload and with spanner wrench until hole is aligned with the
over-center rotating torque. second mark (Fig. 27).
19 - 20 STEERING XJ
Fig. 25 Alignment Marking On Housing

Fig. 27 Aligning To The Second Mark
(2) Starting at either stop, turn the stub shaft
back 1/2 the total number of turns. This is the center
of the gear travel (Fig. 28).
Fig. 26 Second Marking On Housing

(8) Install and tighten locknut to 108 N·m (80 ft.
lbs.). Be sure adjustment cap does not turn while
tightening the locknut.
OVER-CENTER Fig. 28 Steering Gear Centered

NOTE: Before performing this procedure, the worm (3) Place the torque wrench in the vertical position
bearing preload adjustment must be performed. on the stub shaft. Rotate the wrench 45 degrees each
side of the center and record the highest rotational
(1) Rotate the stub shaft with a 12 point socket torque in this range (Fig. 29). This is the Over-Cen-
from stop to stop and count the number of turns. ter Rotating Torque.
XJ STEERING 19 - 21
NOTE: The stub shaft must rotate smoothly without (8) Prevent the adjuster screw from turning while
sticking or binding. tightening adjuster lock nut. Tighten the adjuster
lock nut to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.).
(4) Rotate the stud shaft between 90° and 180° to
the left of center and record the left off-center pre-
load. Repeat this to the right of center and record the SPECIFICATIONS
right off-center preload. The average of these two
recorded readings is the Preload Rotating Torque. POWER STEERING GEAR
(5) The Over-Center Rotating Torque should be
0.45-0.9 N·m (4-8 in. lbs.) higher than the Preload Steering Gear
Rotating Torque.
(6) If an adjustment to the Over-Center Rotating Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recirculating Ball
Torque is necessary, first loosen the adjuster lock Gear Ratio
nut. Then turn the pitman shaft adjuster screw back RHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
(COUNTERCLOCKWISE) until fully extended, then LHD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:1
turn back in (CLOCKWISE) one full turn. Worm Shaft Bearing
Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.45–1.13 N·m
(4–10 in. lbs.)
Pitman Shaft Overcenter Drag
New Gear (under 400 miles) . . . . . 0.45–0.90 N·m
(4–8 in. lbs.)
+ Worm Shaft Preload
Used Gear (over 400 miles) . . . . . . . . 0.5–0.6 N·m
(4–5 in. lbs.)
+ Worm Shaft Preload
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Power Steering Gear
Adjustment Cap Locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 N·m
(80 ft. lbs.)
Adjustment Screw Locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m
(36 ft. lbs.)
Gear to Frame Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 N·m
(70 ft. lbs.)
Pitman Shaft Nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 N·m
(185 ft. lbs.)
Fig. 29 Checking Over-center Rotation Torque Rack Piston Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 N·m
(75 ft. lbs.)
(7) Remeasure Over-Center Rotating Torque. If Side Cover Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 N·m
necessary turn the adjuster screw and repeat mea- (44 ft. lbs.)
surement until correct Over-Center Rotating Torque Pressure Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
is reached. (21 ft. lbs.)
Return Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 N·m
NOTE: To increase the Over-Center Rotating Torque
(21 ft. lbs.)
turn the screw CLOCKWISE.
Return Guide Clamp Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 N·m
(43 ft. lbs.)
19 - 22 STEERING XJ
SPECIAL TOOLS
POWER STEERING GEAR
Remover, Pitman Arm C-4150A
Remover/Installer, Steering Plug C-4381
Remover/Installer Steering Rack Piston C-4175

XJ STEERING 19 - 23
STEERING LINKAGE
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DRAG LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

STEERING LINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 STEERING DAMPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
STEERING LINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS
TIE ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 STEERING LINKAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PITMAN ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

STEERING LINKAGE STEERING LINKAGE
The steering linkage consist of a pitman arm, drag The tie rod end and ball stud seals should be
link, tie rod, tie rod ends and a steering damper (Fig. inspected during all oil changes. If a seal is damaged,
1) and (Fig. 2). The service procedures and torque it should be replaced. Before installing a new seal,
specifications are the same for LHD and RHD vehi- inspect ball stud at the throat opening. Check for
cles. lubricant loss, contamination, ball stud wear or cor-
rosion. If these conditions exist, replace the tie rod. A
CAUTION: Components attached with a nut and replacement seal can be installed if lubricant is in
cotter pin must be torqued to specification. Then if good condition. Otherwise, a complete replacement
the slot in the nut does not line up with the cotter ball stud end should be installed.
the nut to align the cotter pin hole. CAUTION: If any steering components are replaced
or serviced an alignment must be performed, to
ensure the vehicle meets all alignment specifica-
tions.
Fig. 1 Steering Linkage—LHD

19 - 24 STEERING XJ
Fig. 2 Steering Linkage—RHD

CAUTION: Components attached with a nut and REMOVAL
cotter pin must be torqued to specification. Then if (1) Remove the cotter pins and nuts at the tie rod
the slot in the nut does not line up with the cotter ball studs and drag link.
pin hole, tighten nut until it is aligned. Never loosen (2) Loosen the ball studs with a puller tool to
the nut to align the cotter pin hole. remove the tie rod.
(3) Loosen clamp bolts and unthread the tie rod
end from the tube.
INSTALLATION
(1) Thread the tie rod end into the tube and posi-
TIE ROD
tion the clamp to it’s original position (Fig. 4).
CAUTION: Use a Puller tool C-3894-A for tie rod Tighten the clamp bolts to 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.).
removal. Failure to use this tool could damage the
ball stud and seal (Fig. 3).
Fig. 4 Tie Rod/Drag Link Clamps

(2) Install the tie rod on the drag link and steering
Fig. 3 Ball Stud Puller knuckle. Install the retaining nuts.
XJ STEERING 19 - 25
(3) Tighten the ball stud nut on the steering (4) Remove drag link from the steering knuckle
knuckle to 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.). Tighten the ball stud and pitman arm.
nut to drag link to 88 N·m (65 ft. lbs.). Install new
cotter pins. INSTALLATION
(1) Install the drag link onto steering knuckle and
PITMAN ARM pitman arm.
(2) Install nut at steering knuckle and tighten to
REMOVAL 47 N·m (35 ft. lbs.). Install new cotter pins.
(1) Remove the cotter pin and nut from the drag (3) Install nut at pitman arm and tighten to 75
link at the pitman arm. N·m (55 ft. lbs.). Install new cotter pins.
(2) Remove the drag link ball stud from the pit- (4) Install tie rod onto drag link and install nut.
man arm with a puller. Tighten nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) and install new
(3) Remove the nut and washer from the steering cotter pins.
gear shaft. Mark the pitman shaft and pitman arm (5) Install steering damper onto drag link and
for installation reference. Remove the pitman arm install nut. Tighten nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.) and
from steering gear with Puller C-4150-A (Fig. 5). install a new cotter pin.
STEERING DAMPER
REMOVAL
(1) Remove the steering damper retaining bolt
from the axle bracket.
(2) Remove the cotter pin and nut from the ball
stud at the drag link.
(3) Remove the steering damper ball stud from the
drag link with Puller C-3894-A.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install steering damper onto the axle bracket
and drag link.
(2) Install steering damper bolt in axle bracket
and tighten nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.).
(3) Install ball stud nut at the drag link and
tighten nut to 75 N·m (55 ft. lbs.). Install a new cot-
ter pin.
SPECIFICATIONS
Fig. 5 Pitman Arm Puller
TORQUE CHART
INSTALLATION
(1) Align and install the pitman arm on steering
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
gear shaft.
Pitman Arm
(2) Install the washer and nut on the shaft and
Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 N·m (185 ft. lbs.)
tighten nut to 251 N·m (185 ft. lbs.).
Drag Link
(3) Install drag link ball stud to pitman arm
Ball Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
install nut and tighten to 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.). Install
a new cotter pin. Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
Tie Rod Ends
DRAG LINK Ball Studs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 N·m (20 ft. lbs.)
REMOVAL Tie Rod
(1) Remove cotter pins and nuts from drag link Ball Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 N·m (65 ft. lbs.)
(2) Remove the steering damper ball stud from the Steering Damper
drag link. Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
(3) Remove tie rod from drag link Drag Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 N·m (55 ft. lbs.)
19 - 26 STEERING XJ
SPECIAL TOOLS
STEERING LINKAGE
Remover Pitman C-4150A
Puller C-3894–A
XJ STEERING 19 - 27
STEERING COLUMN
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS

STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

STEERING COLUMN STEERING COLUMN
The standard non-tilt and tilt steering column has
been designed to be serviced as an assembly. The key WARNING: BEFORE SERVICING THE STEERING
cylinder, switches, clock spring, trim shrouds and COLUMN THE AIRBAG SYSTEM MUST BE DIS-
steering wheel are serviced separately. On the non- ARMED. REFER TO GROUP 8M RESTRAINT SYS-
tilt column the upper mounting bracket is also ser- TEMS FOR SERVICE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO
viced separately. DO SO MAY RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOY-
The column is mounted to the column support MENT OF THE AIRBAG AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
bracket studs and secured by four nuts. The column INJURY.
is connected to the steering gear by a one piece col-
lapsible shaft with a coupler at each end. The cou-
plers secure the shaft to the steering column and REMOVAL
steering gear. (1) Position front wheels straight ahead.
(2) Remove and isolate the negative battery
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS ground cable.
Safety goggles should be worn at all times when (3) Remove the airbag, refer to Group 8M
working on steering columns. Restraint Systems for service procedures.
To service the steering wheel, switches or airbag,
NOTE: If equipped with cruise control, disconnect
refer to Group 8M and follow all WARNINGS and
clock spring harness from cruise switch harness on
CAUTIONS.
the steering wheel.
(4) Remove the steering wheel with an appropriate
COMPLEX ELECTRO-MECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE
puller (Fig. 1).
ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE, REMOVE OR INSTALL
THE AIRBAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS YOU MUST CAUTION: Ensure the puller bolts are fully engaged
FIRST DISCONNECT AND ISOLATE THE BATTERY into the steering wheel and not into the clock-
NEGATIVE (GROUND) CABLE. THEN WAIT TWO spring, before attempting to remove the wheel. Fail-
MINUTES FOR THE SYSTEM CAPACITOR TO DIS- ure to do so may damage the steering wheel.
CHARGE. FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN
ACCIDENTAL DEPLOYMENT OF THE AIRBAG AND (5) Turn ignition cylinder to the on position and
POSSIBLE PERSONAL INJURY. THE FASTENERS, remove cylinder by pressing release through lower
SCREWS, AND BOLTS, ORIGINALLY USED FOR shroud access hole (Fig. 2).
THE AIRBAG COMPONENTS, HAVE SPECIAL COAT- (6) Remove knee blocker cover and knee blocker,
INGS AND ARE SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE Refer to Group 8E Instrument Panel Systems.
AIRBAG SYSTEM. THEY MUST NEVER BE (7) Remove screws from the lower column shroud
REPLACED WITH ANY SUBSTITUTES. ANYTIME A (Fig. 3) and remove lower shroud.
NEW FASTENER IS NEEDED, REPLACE WITH THE (8) Remove the steering coupler bolt and column
CORRECT FASTENERS PROVIDED IN THE SERVICE mounting nuts (Fig. 4) then lower column off the
PACKAGE OR FASTENERS LISTED IN THE PARTS mounting stud.
BOOKS. (9) Remove upper column shroud (Fig. 3).
19 - 28 STEERING XJ
Fig. 1 Steering Wheel Fig. 4 Tilt Steering Column Mounting
Fig. 2 Key Cylinder Release Access Hole Fig. 5 Steering Column Harness
Group 21 Transmission and Transfer Case for pro-
cedure.
(11) Remove column.

(12) Remove nut and bolt from the upper column
mounting bracket on non-tilt column (Fig. 6). Remove
the bracket from the column and note the mount-
ing location and orientation of the bracket. .
(13) Remove clock spring, switches, (SKIM if
equipped) and ignition key cylinder, refer to Group 8
Electrical for service procedures.
INSTALLATION
(1) Install upper column mounting bracket on non-
tilt column. Install the mounting bolt and tighten the
nut to 17 N·m (150 in. lbs.).
Fig. 3 Column Shrouds (2) Install switches, refer to Group 8 Electrical for
(10) Disconnect and remove the wiring harness service procedures.
from the column (Fig. 5). (3) Align and install column into the steering cou-
pler.
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with automatic trans- (4) Install column harness and connect harness to
mission, remove shifter interlock cable. Refer to switches.
XJ STEERING 19 - 29
(10) Install lower column shroud and install
mounting screws.
(11) Install ignition cylinder.
(12) Install knee blocker and knee blocker cover,
Refer to Group 8E Instrument Panel Systems.
(13) Install steering wheel and tighten nut to 54
N·m (40 ft. lbs.).
NOTE: If equipped with cruise control, connect

clock spring harness to cruise switch harness on
the steering wheel.
(14) Install airbag, refer to Group 8M Restraint

Systems for service procedures.
(15) Install negative battery terminal.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Fig. 6 Non-Tilt Column Tilt Steering Column
Steering Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with automatic trans- Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
mission install shifter interlock cable. Refer to
Coupler Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
Group 21 Transmission and Transfer Case for pro-
Non-Tilt Steering Column
cedure.
Steering Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
(5) Install upper column shrouds. Mounting Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 N·m (17 ft. lbs.)
(6) Install column onto the mounting studs. Coupler Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
(7) Install mounting nuts and tighten to 23 N·m Upper Bracket Nut . . . . . . . . 17 N·m (150 in. lbs.)
(17 ft. lbs.).
(8) Install steering column coupler bolt and tighten
to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.).
(9) Center the clock spring and install it on the
column, refer to Group 8 Electrical for service proce-
dures.
XJ STEERING 19 - 1
STEERING
CONTENTS
page page
POWER STEERING PUMP—2.5L VM DIESEL . . . 2 STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

POWER STEERING—2.5L VM DIESEL . . . . . . . . 1
POWER STEERING—2.5L VM DIESEL
INDEX
page
GENERAL INFORMATION
POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
POWER STEERING PUMP
The power steering pump used with the 2.5L VM
Diesel engine operates the same way as the power
steering pump used with the 2.5/4.0L gasoline
engines. Refer to the Description and Operation sec-
tion for the 2.5/4.0L gasoline engine power steering
pump for more information.
19 - 2 STEERING XJ
POWER STEERING PUMP—2.5L VM DIESEL
INDEX
page page

POWER STEERING PUMP – INITIAL POWER STEERING PUMP — LHD . . . . . . . . . . . 2
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 POWER STEERING PUMP — RHD . . . . . . . . . . . 5

POWER STEERING PUMP – INITIAL POWER STEERING PUMP — LHD
OPERATION
Removal
WARNING: THE FLUID LEVEL SHOULD BE (1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
CHECKED WITH ENGINE OFF TO PREVENT INJURY (2) Remove the A/C line support bracket from the
FROM MOVING COMPONENTS. rear of the rocker cover.
(3) Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical con-
nector.
CAUTION: Use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid or (4) Remove the (2) engine mount upper sill plate
equivalent. Do not use automatic transmission fluid nuts (Fig. 1).
and do not overfill.
Wipe filler cap clean, then check the fluid level.

The dipstick should indicate COLD when the fluid is
at normal ambient temperature.
(1) Fill the pump fluid reservoir to the proper level
and let the fluid settle for at least two minutes.
(2) Start the engine and let run for a few seconds
then turn engine off.
(3) Add fluid if necessary. Repeat the above proce-
dure until the fluid level remains constant after run-
ning the engine.
(4) Raise the front wheels off the ground.
(5) Slowly turn the steering wheel right and left,
lightly contacting the wheel stops at least 20 times.
(6) Check the fluid level add if necessary.
(7) Lower the vehicle, start the engine and turn
the steering wheel slowly from lock to lock.
(8) Stop the engine and check the fluid level and
refill as required.
(9) If the fluid is extremely foamy or milky look-
ing, allow the vehicle to stand a few minutes and
repeat the procedure.
Fig. 1 Engine Mount Sill Plate Nuts
CAUTION: Do not run a vehicle with foamy fluid for (5) Make sure the steering wheel is in the
an extended period. This may cause pump damage. unlocked position.
XJ STEERING 19 - 3
(6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist. (15) Remove the remaining 2 bolts from the
(7) Remove the steering shaft pinch bolt and slide H-Block and remove the H-Block from the compres-
the steering shaft straight off the gearbox input sor.
shaft, position the shaft aside. (16) Support the A/C compressor with mechanics
wire before proceding to the next step.
CAUTION: Avoid turning the steering shaft while (17) Remove the (4) A/C compressor retaining
disconnected from the steering gearbox. Damage to bolts.
steering column clockspring could occur. (18) Remove the left engine mount throughbolt nut
only. Do not remove the bolt at this time.
(8) Remove the power steering fluid supply hose (19) Position a jack stand and raise weight off left
from the pump and let the fluid drain. engine mount.
(9) Loosen the (4) H-Block retaining bolts. Do not (20) Remove the track bar support bracket retain-
remove the bolts at this time. ing bolts and remove bracket (Fig. 3).
(10) Remove the accessory drive belt from the
power steering pump pulley. Refer to Group 7, Cool-
ing System for procedure.
(11) Remove the power steering pump pulley. Use
a hex socket to secure the pump shaft while remov-
ing the pulley nut with a box wrench (Fig. 2).
Fig. 3 Engine Mount Retaining Bolts

(21) Remove the lower engine mount bolt from the
sill plate (Fig. 3).
Fig. 2 Removing the Power Steering Pump Pulley (23) Remove the engine mount throughbolt.
(24) Remove the engine mount and engine mount
NOTE: Mark the position of the H-Block in relation bracket from the vehicle.
to the A/C Compressor so it may be reinstalled in (25) Remove the (2) power steering pump retaining
the same position. nuts (Fig. 4).
(26) Remove the power steering pump from the
(12) Remove the (2) bolts retaining the H-Block to
vehicle.
the power steering pump shaft coupler.
(13) Loosen the coupler pinch bolt and slide the
Installation
coupler towards the pump.
(14) Remove the power steering pump pressure WARNING: Power steering system fluid may be
line from the steering gear. This is more accessible, contaminated with metal shavings, overheated or
but will require you to install the pressure line on improper fluid. All fluid should be drained from the
the new pump prior to installation. system. After component replacement, system
should be flushed and filled with Mopar Power
Steering Fluid, or equivalent.
19 - 4 STEERING XJ
and track bar support bracket bolts (Fig. 6).
Fig. 4 Power Steering Pump

(1) Transfer the pressure line to the new pump ,
making sure line is in original position. Fig. 6 Engine Mount Retaining Bolts
(2) Transfer the coupler to the new pump leaving (7) Install the (4) engine mount bracket to engine
pinch bolt lose at this time (Fig. 5). block retaining bolts. Torque bolts to 47 N·m (35 ft.
(3) Install the power steering pump (Fig. 5). lbs.).
(8) Torque the engine mount sill plate bolts to 41
N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
(9) Torque the larger trackbar support bracket
bolts to 125 N·m (92ft. lbs.).
(11) Install the H-Block on the A/C compressor in
its original position and leave the bolts loose at this
time.
(12) Position and install the A/C compressor.
(13) Slide the drive coupler in its original position
and install the remaining (2) H-Block bolts.
(14) Install the power steering pump pulley (Fig.
7). Torque nut to 166 N·m (120 ft. lbs.).
(15) Install the accessory drive belt. See Group 7,
(16) Torque all the H-Block bolts.
(17) Install the steering shaft. Torque the steering
shaft pinch bolt to 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.).
(18) Install the pressure line on steering gear.
Torque nut to 28 N·m (21 ft. lbs.).
(19) Install the power steering fluid supply hose on
the pump.
Fig. 5 Power Steering Pump (20) Lower the vehicle from the hoist.
(21) Install and torque the engine mount upper sill
(4) Install the engine mount and the engine mount
plate nuts to 41 N·m (30 ft. lbs.) (Fig. 8).
bracket in the vehicle.
(22) Connect the A/C compressor electrical connec-
(5) Install the engine mount throughbolt and leave
tor.
loose at this time.
XJ STEERING 19 - 5
POWER STEERING PUMP — RHD

Removal
(2) Remove the refrigerent line support bracket
bolt from the top of the radiator.
(3) Remove the A/C filter-drier assembly support
bracket nuts from left fender well.
(4) Disconnect the A/C compressor electrical con-
nector.
(6) Remove the power steering fluid supply hose
from pump and drain fluid.
(7) Remove power steering line support bracket
bolt from below radiator.
(8) Remove the engine mount upper sill plate nuts.
(9) Loosen the (4) H-Block retaining bolts. Do not
remove at this time.
(10) Remove the accessory drive belt from the
power steering pump pulley. See Group 7, Cooling
System for procedure.
(11) Remove the power steering pump pulley. Use
Fig. 7 Installing Pump Pulley a hex socket to secure the pump shaft while remov-
ing the pulley nut with a box wrench (Fig. 9).
Fig. 8 Engine Mount Sill Plate Nuts

(23) Install the A/C line support bracket bolt at the Fig. 9 Removing Pump Pulley
rear of the valve cover. NOTE: Mark position of the H-Block in relation to
(24) Fill the power steering fluid. See Group 19, the A/C Compressor so it can be installed in the
Steering for Power Steering Pump-Initial operation same position.
procedure.
(25) Connect the negative battery cable. (12) Remove the (2) bolts retaining the H-Block to
the power steering pump shaft coupler.
(13) Loosen the coupler pinch bolt and slide cou-
pler towards pump.
19 - 6 STEERING XJ
(14) Remove the left engine mount throughbolt nut (1) Install the pressure line on pump in original
only. Do not remove the bolt at this time. position.
(15) Remove the remaining 2 bolts from the (2) Transfer the drive coupler to new pump leaving
H-Block and remove the H-Block from the compres- pinch bolt lose at this time (Fig. 11).
sor. (3) Install the power steering pump in the engine
(16) Position a jack stand and raise weight off left block. Torque retaining nuts to 24 N·m (18 ft. lbs.)
engine mount. (Fig. 11).
(17) Remove the (2) engine mount sill plate bolts.
(19) Remove the engine mount throughbolt.
(20) Remove the engine mount and engine mount
bracket from vehicle.
(21) Remove the (2) power steering pump retaining
nuts (Fig. 10).
Fig. 11 Power Steering Pump

bracket in vehicle.
(5) Install the engine mount throughbolt and leave
loose at this time.
(6) Install, do not torque engine mount sill plate
nuts and bolts.
(7) Install (4) engine mount bracket to engine
Fig. 10 Power Steering Pump block retaining bolts and Torque to 61 N·m (45 ft.
(22) Slide pump off mounting studs and position so lbs.).
pressure line can be removed. This will require you (8) Torque the engine mount sill plate nuts to 41
to install pressure line on the new pump prior to N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
installing it in the engine block. (9) Torque the engine mount sill plate bolts to 41
(23) Remove the power steering pump from the N·m (30 ft. lbs.).
vehicle. (10) Remove jack stand.
(11) Install the H-Block on the A/C compressor in
Installation the original position and leave bolts loose at this
time.
WARNING: Power steering system fluid may be (12) Position and install A/C compressor.
contaminated with metal shavings, overheated or (13) Slide the drive coupler into its original posi-
improper fluid. All fluid should be drained from the tion and start remaining (2) H-Block bolts.
system. After component replacement, system (14) Install the power steering pump pulley (Fig.
should be flushed and filled with Mopar Power 12). Torque nut to 166 N·m (120 ft. lbs.).
Steering Fluid, or equivalent.
XJ STEERING 19 - 7
(15) Install the accessory drive belt. See Group 7,
Cooling for procedure.
(16) Torque all the H-Block bolts.
(17) Torque the engine mount throughbolt nut to
65 N·m (48 ft. lbs.).
(18) Install the power steering fluid supply hose on
pump.
(19) Install the power steering line support
bracket bolt.
(20) Lower the vehicle from hoist.
(21) Install the refrigerent line support bracket
and bolt on the top of the radiator.
(22) Install the A/C filter-drier assembly support
bracket nuts on the left fender well.
(23) Reconnect the A/C compressor electrical con-
nector.
(24) Re-fill the power steering fluid. Refer to
Group 19, Steering for Power Steering Pump-Initial
Operation for procedure.
Fig. 12 Installing Pump Pulley

19 - 8 STEERING XJ
STEERING COLUMN
INDEX
page page

STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 TORQUE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GENERAL INFORMATION ATTEMPTING TO DIAGNOSE, REMOVE OR INSTALL

THE AIRBAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS YOU MUST
STEERING COLUMN FIRST DISARM THE AIRBAG FIRING MECHANISM.
The tilt and standard column (Fig. 1) has been FAILURE TO DO SO COULD RESULT IN ACCIDEN-
designed to be serviced as an assembly; less wiring, TAL DEPLOYMENT OF THE AIRBAG AND POSSI-
switches, shrouds, steering wheel, etc. Most steering BLE PERSONAL INJURY.
column components can be serviced without remov-
ing the steering column from the vehicle. WARNING: THE FASTENERS, SCREWS, AND
BOLTS, ORIGINALLY USED FOR THE AIRBAG COM-
SERVICE PRECAUTIONS PONENTS, HAVE SPECIAL COATINGS AND ARE
Safety goggles should be worn at all times when SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR THE AIRBAG SYS-
working on steering columns. TEM. THEY MUST NEVER BE REPLACED WITH ANY
To service the steering wheel, switches or airbag, SUBSTITUTES. ANYTIME A NEW FASTENER IS
refer to Group 8 M and follow all WARNINGS and NEEDED, REPLACE WITH THE CORRECT FASTEN-
CAUTIONS. ERS PROVIDED IN THE SERVICE PACKAGE OR
FASTENERS LISTED IN THE PARTS BOOKS.
COMPLEX ELECTRO-MECHANICAL UNIT. BEFORE

XJ STEERING 19 - 9
CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove the pivot pins
to disassemble the tilting mechanism. Do not
remove ignition locking link, shaft lock plate or
plate retainer. This will damage the column (Fig. 2)
and (Fig. 3).
Fig. 4 Steering Column Flash Removal And

Non-Serviceable Components
slot at any point lightly file the slider or slot until
clearance is achieved.
(3) If no binding is found, lightly file the ramp on
Fig. 2 Observe Cautions the ignition switch, (The ramp fits into the casting)
until binding no longer occurs.

STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: BEFORE SERVICING THE STEERING
COLUMN THE AIRBAG SYSTEM MUST BE DIS-
ARMED, REFER TO GROUP 8M RESTRAINT SYS-
TEMS FOR SERVICE PROCEDURES. FAILURE TO
DO SO MAY RESULT IN ACCIDENTAL DEPLOY-
MENT OF THE AIRBAG AND POSSIBLE PERSONAL
INJURY.
REMOVAL
Fig. 3 Observe Cautions (1) Position the front wheels straight ahead .
(2) Remove the negative (ground) cable from the
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING battery.
(3) Disarm and remove airbag, steering wheel and
IGNITION SWITCH clockspring, refer to group 8M Restraint Systems for
service procedures.
TEST AND REPAIR (4) Remove lower instrument panel/knee blocker.
If the ignition switch effort is excessive, remove the (5) Remove column coupler upper pinch bolt (Fig.
ignition switch from the steering column. Refer to 5).
Group 8D Ignition System. Using a key cylinder, (6) Remove relay box.
check the turning effort of the switch. If the ignition (7) Remove tilt lever (if equipped) from column.
switch binds look for the following conditions. (8) Remove upper and lower steering column
(1) Look for rough areas or flash in the casting shrouds.
and if found remove with a file (Fig. 4). (9) Remove lower fixed column shroud.
(2) With the ignition switch removed, slide the (10) Remove column braces (Fig. 6).
slider in its slot in the sleeve and verify a loose fit (11) Remove column bracket mounting nuts and
over the length of the slot. If the slider binds in the lower column.
19 - 10 STEERING XJ

(16) Remove ignition switch.
(17) Remove interlock cable from the steering col-
umn, refer to Group 21 Automatic Transmission
Shifter/Ignition Interlock.
(18) Remove the column.
INSTALLATION
(1) Align and install the column to the coupler. Do
not apply force at the top of the steering col-
umn shaft.
(2) Ensure the ground clip is position (Fig. 8).
(3) Install interlock cable from the steering col-
umn, refer to Group 21 Automatic Transmission
Shifter/Ignition Interlock.
(4) Install wiring harness connections to steering
column.Ensure the wiring is not pinched and all
Fig. 6 Steering Column Braces connections are correctly locked in place.
(12) Remove upper fixed column shroud. (5) Install wiring harness connector onto multi
(13) Remove multi-function switch tamper proof function switch. Tighten function switch wiring har-
mounting screws and connector screw. Connector ness connector retaining bolt to 2 N·m (17 in. lbs.).
screw will stay in the connector. (6) Plug in wiring harness connector to remaining
(14) Unplug wiring harness from the column switches.
switches (Fig. 7). (7) Install ignition switch.
(15) Remove the wiring harness from steering col- (8) Install upper fixed column shroud cover.
umn. (9) Install shaft coupler pinch bolt loose, load col-
umn up to panel bracket.
XJ STEERING 19 - 11
Fig. 7 Steering Column Wiring Harness

(15) Install lower instrument panel/knee blocker.
(16) Install clockspring, steering wheel and airbag.
Refer to Group 8M Restraint Systems for service pro-
cedures.
(17) Remove the column shaft shipping lock pin
(installed in service column).
(18) Connect the battery ground (negative) cable.
SPECIFICATIONS
TORQUE CHART
DESCRIPTION TORQUE
Tilt Steering Column
Fig. 8 Ground Clip & Spacer Steering Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
(10) Be sure both spacers are fully seated in the Coupler Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
column support bracket. Tighten the column panel Non-Tilt Steering Column
bracket support nuts to 12 N·m (105 in. lbs.). Steering Wheel Nut . . . . . . . . 54 N·m (40 ft. lbs.)
(11) Tighten the coupler pinch bolt to 47 N·m (35
ft. lbs.).
Coupler Bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 N·m (36 ft. lbs.)
(12) Install lower fixed shroud.
Upper Bracket Nut . . . . . . . . 17 N·m (150 in. lbs.)
(13) Install upper and lower shrouds. Install the
tilt lever (if equipped).
(14) Install relay box.
XJ TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER CASE 21 - 1
TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER CASE

CONTENTS
page page
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION—30RH . . . . . . . . 73 AX5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

AW–4 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . 163 NV231 TRANSFER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
AX15 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 NV242 TRANSFER CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
AX5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION
INDEX
page page
GENERAL INFORMATION DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

AX5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 ADAPTER/EXTENSION HOUSING AND FRONT
GEAR RATIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 BEARING RETAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 COUNTERSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY INFORMATION . . . . 2 INPUT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 OUTPUT SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING SEMI-SYNCHRONIZED REVERSE
HARD SHIFTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3 IDLER GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
LOW LUBRICANT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3 SHIFT MECHANISM AND GEARTRAIN . . . . . . . . 15
TRANSMISSION NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 4 CLEANING AND INSPECTION
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION AX5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS . . . 32
ADAPTER HOUSING SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 SPECIFICATIONS
EXTENSION HOUSING SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
FRONT BEARING RETAINER SEAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SPECIAL TOOLS
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 AX5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
GENERAL INFORMATION ture. The next series of numbers is the transmission

serial number.
AX5 MANUAL TRANSMISSION
The AX5 is a five speed manual transmission with GEAR RATIOS
fifth gear being the overdrive range. An adapter Gear ratios for the AX5 manual transmission are
housing is used to attach the transmission to the as follows:
transfer case on 4-wheel drive applications. A stan- • First gear: 3.93:1
dard style extension housing is used for the 2-wheel • Second gear: 2.33:1
drive applications. The shift mechanism is integral to • Third gear: 1.45:1
the transmission assembly and mounted in the shift • Fourth gear: 1.00:1
tower portion of the adapter/extension housing (Fig. • Fifth gear: 0.85:1
1). • Reverse gear: 4.74:1
TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT

The AX5 identification code is on the bottom sur- Recommended lubricant for AX5 transmissions is
face of the transmission case near the fill plug (Fig. Mopart 75W–90, API Grade GL–3 gear lubricant, or
2). The first number is year of manufacture. The sec- equivalent.
ond and third numbers indicate month of manufac-
21 - 2 TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER CASE XJ
Fig. 1 AX5 Manual Transmission

• 3.5 liters (3.70 quarts) for 2–wheel drive applica-
tions.
Fig. 3 Fill Plug Location

Fig. 2 Transmission Identification
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY INFORMATION
Correct lubricant level is from the bottom edge, to
Lubricate the transmission components with
no more than 6 mm (1/4 in.) below the bottom edge of
Mopart 75W–90, GL 3 gear lubricant during assem-
the fill plug hole.
bly. Use petroleum jelly to lubricate seal lips and/or
The fill plug is on the passenger side of the
hold parts in place during installation.
adapter housing (Fig. 3). The drain plug is on the
Refer to (Fig. 4) during assembly for AX5 gear
bottom of the case.
assembly identification.
Approximate dry fill lubricant capacity is:
• 3.3 liters (3.49 quarts) for 4–wheel drive applica-
tions.
Fig. 4 Geartrain Components

DIAGNOSIS AND TESTING the lubricant level after any addition of fluid to avoid
an incorrect lubricant level condition.
LOW LUBRICANT LEVEL
A low transmission lubricant level is generally the HARD SHIFTING
result of a leak, inadequate lubricant fill, or an incor- Hard shifting is usually caused by a low lubricant
rect lubricant level check. level, improper, or contaminated lubricants. The con-
Leaks can occur at the mating surfaces of the gear sequence of using non–recommended lubricants is
case, intermediate plate and adaptor or extension noise, excessive wear, internal bind, and hard shift-
housing, or from the front/rear seals. A suspected ing. Substantial lubricant leaks can result in gear,
leak could also be the result of an overfill condition. shift rail, synchro, and bearing damage. If a leak
Leaks at the rear of the extension or adapter hous- goes undetected for an extended period, the first indi-
ing will be from the housing oil seals. Leaks at com- cations of component damage are usually hard shift-
ponent mating surfaces will probably be the result of ing and noise.
inadequate sealer, gaps in the sealer, incorrect bolt Component damage, incorrect clutch adjustment,
tightening, or use of a non–recommended sealer. or a damaged clutch pressure plate or disc are addi-
A leak at the front of the transmission will be from tional probable causes of increased shift effort. Incor-
either the front bearing retainer or retainer seal. rect adjustment or a worn/damaged pressure plate or
Lubricant may be seen dripping from the clutch disc can cause incorrect release. If the clutch problem
housing after extended operation. If the leak is is advanced, gear clash during shifts can result.
severe, it may also contaminate the clutch disc caus- Worn or damaged synchro rings can cause gear clash
ing the disc to slip, grab, and/or chatter. when shifting into any forward gear. In some new or
A correct lubricant level check can only be made rebuilt transmissions, new synchro rings may tend to
when the vehicle is level. Also allow the lubricant to stick slightly causing hard or noisy shifts. In most
settle for a minute or so before checking. These rec- cases, this condition will decline as the rings wear–
ommendations will ensure an accurate check and in.
avoid an underfill or overfill condition. Always check
TRANSMISSION NOISE (13) Secure transfer case, if equipped, to jack with

Most manual transmissions make some noise dur- safety chains.
ing normal operation. Rotating gears generate a mild (14) Disconnect transfer case shift linkage at
whine that is audible, but generally only at extreme transfer case, if equipped.
speeds. (15) Remove nuts attaching transfer case to trans-
Severe, highly audible transmission noise is gener- mission, if equipped.
ally the initial indicator of a lubricant problem. (16) Remove transfer case, if equipped.
Insufficient, improper, or contaminated lubricant will (17) Remove crankshaft position sensor (Fig. 6),
promote rapid wear of gears, synchros, shift rails, (Fig. 7).
forks and bearings. The overheating caused by a
lubricant problem, can also lead to gear breakage.

TRANSMISSION
REMOVAL
(1) Shift transmission into first or third gear.
(2) Raise and support vehicle on suitable safety
stands.
(3) Disconnect necessary exhaust system compo-
nents.
(4) Remove skid plate, if equipped.
(5) Remove slave cylinder from clutch housing.
(6) Mark rear propeller shaft and rear axle yokes
for installation alignment (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 Crankshaft Position Sensor—2.5L Engine
Fig. 5 Marking Propeller Shaft And Axle Yokes

(7) Mark front propeller shaft, axle, and transfer
case yokes for installation alignment, if equipped.
(8) Remove propeller shaft(s).
(9) Unclip wire harnesses from transmission and
transfer case, if equipped.
(10) Disconnect transfer case vent hose, if
equipped.
(11) Disengage any wire connectors attached to
transmission or transfer case, if equipped, compo-
nents.
(12) Support transfer case, if equipped, with trans- Fig. 7 Crankshaft Position Sensor —4.0L Engine
mission jack.
CAUTION: It is important that the crankshaft posi-
tion sensor be removed prior to transmission
removal. The sensor can easily be damaged if left
in place during removal operations.
(18) Support engine with adjustable jack stand.

Position wood block between jack and oil pan to
avoid damaging pan.
(19) Support transmission with transmission jack.
(20) Secure transmission to jack with safety
chains.
(21) Disconnect rear cushion and bracket from
transmission.
(22) Remove rear crossmember.
(23) Disconnect transmission shift lever as follows:
(a) Lower transmission–transfer case assembly
approximately 7–8 cm (3 in.) for access to shift
lever.
(b) Reach up and around transmission case and
unseat shift lever dust boot from transmission shift
tower (Fig. 8). Move boot upward on shift lever for
access to retainer that secures lever in shift tower.
(c) Reach up and around transmission case and
press shift lever retainer downward with finger
pressure. Turn retainer counterclockwise to release
it.
(d) Lift lever and retainer out of shift tower (Fig.
8). Do not remove the shift lever from the floor con-
sole shifter boots. Leave the lever in place for Fig. 9 Clutch Housing
transmission installation. INSTALLATION
(1) Install clutch housing on transmission. Tighten
housing bolts to 37 N·m (27 ft. lbs.) torque.
(2) Lubricate contact surfaces of release fork pivot
ball stud and release fork with high temp grease.
(3) Install release bearing, fork, and retainer clip.
(4) Position and secure transmission on transmis-
sion jack.
(5) Lightly lubricate pilot bearing and transmis-
sion input shaft splines with Mopart high temp
grease.
(6) Raise transmission and align transmission
input shaft and clutch disc splines. Then slide trans-
mission into place.
(7) Install and tighten clutch housing-to-engine
bolts to 38 N·m (28 ft. lbs.) torque (Fig. 9). Be sure
the housing is properly seated on engine block
Fig. 8 Removing/Installing Shift Lever before tightening bolts.
(24) Remove clutch housing brace rod. (8) Install clutch housing brace rod.
(25) Remove clutch housing-to-engine bolts. (9) Lower transmission approximately 7–8 cm (3
(26) Pull transmission jack rearward until input in.) for access to shift tower. Be sure transmission is
shaft clears clutch. Then slide transmission out from in first or third gear.
under vehicle. (10) Reach up and around transmission and insert
(27) Remove clutch release bearing, release fork, shift lever in shift tower. Press lever retainer down-
and retainer clip. ward and turn it clockwise to lock it in place. Then
(28) Remove clutch housing from transmission install lever dust boot on shift tower.
(Fig. 9).
(11) Install rear crossmember. Tighten crossmem- (28) Install and tighten propeller shaft U–joint
ber-to-frame bolts to 41 N·m (31 ft. lbs.) torque. clamp bolts to 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.) torque.
(12) Install fasteners to hold rear cushion and (29) Install slave cylinder in clutch housing.
bracket to transmission. Then tighten transmission- (30) Install skid plate, if equipped. Tighten bolts to
to-rear support bolts/nuts to 45 N·m (33 ft. lbs.) 42 N·m (31 ft. lbs.) torque. Tighten stud nuts to 17
torque. N·m (150 in. lbs.) torque.
(13) Remove support stands from engine and (31) Fill transmission and transfer case, if
transmission. equipped, with recommended lubricants. Refer to the
(14) Install and connect crankshaft position sensor. Lubricant Recommendation sections of the appropri-
(15) Position transfer case on transmission jack, if ate component for correct fluid.
equipped. (32) Lower vehicle.
(16) Secure transfer case to jack with safety
chains, if equipped. FRONT BEARING RETAINER SEAL
(17) Raise transfer case, if equipped, and align
transfer case input shaft to the transmission output REMOVAL
shaft. (1) Remove release bearing and lever from the
(18) Slide transfer case forward until case is transmission.
seated on transmission, if necessary. (2) Remove the bolts holding the front bearing
(19) Install nuts to attach transfer case to trans- retainer to the transmission case.
mission, if equipped. Tighten transfer case-to-trans- (3) Remove the front bearing retainer from the
mission nuts to 35 N·m (26 ft. lbs.) torque. transmission case.
(20) Connect transfer case shift linkage at transfer (4) Using a suitable pry tool, remove the front
case, if equipped. bearing retainer seal.
(21) Connect transfer case vent hose, if equipped.
(22) Secure wire harnesses in clips/tie straps on INSTALLATION
transmission and transfer case, if equipped. (1) Using Tool Handle C-4171 and Seal Installer
(23) Engage wire connectors attached to all neces- 8211, install new seal in to the front bearing retainer
sary transmission or transfer case, if equipped, com- (Fig. 11).
ponents.
(24) Install rear propeller shaft slip yoke to trans-
mission or transfer case, if equipped, output shaft.
(25) Align marks on rear propeller shaft and rear
axle yokes (Fig. 10).
Fig. 10 Align Propeller Shaft And Rear Axle Yokes

Alignment Marks Fig. 11 Install Front Bearing Retainer Seal
(26) Install and tighten propeller shaft U–joint (2) Remove any residual gasket material from the
clamp bolts to 19 N·m (170 in. lbs.) torque. sealing surfaces of the bearing retainer and the
(27) Align marks on front propeller shaft, axle, transmission case.
and transfer case yokes, if equipped. (3) Install new front bearing retainer gasket to the
front bearing retainer.
(4) Install the front bearing retainer onto the
transmission case.
(5) Install the bolts to hold the bearing retainer
onto the transmission case.
(6) Tighten the bolts to 17 N·m (12 ft. lbs.).
(7) Install release bearing and lever onto the
transmission.
EXTENSION HOUSING SEAL

REMOVAL
(2) Remove propeller shaft. Refer to Group 3, Dif-
ferential and Driveline, for proper procedures.
(3) Using a suitable seal puller or screw with a
slide hammer, remove the extension housing seal
(Fig. 12). Fig. 13 Install Extension Housing Seal
Fig. 12 Remove Extension Housing Seal Fig. 14 Remove Adapter Housing Seal
(1) Clean seal bore of extension housing of any (1) Clean seal bore of adapter housing of any
residual sealer material from original seal. residual sealer material from original seal.
(2) Using Tool Handle C-4171 and Seal Installer (2) Using Tool Handle C-4171 and Seal Installer
8212, install new extension housing seal so that the 8208, install new seal so that the seal is located 0 6
seal is located 0 6 0.5 mm (0 6 0.02 in.) to the face 0.2 mm (0 6 0.008 in.) to the seal bore face of
of the extension housing (Fig. 13). adapter housing (Fig. 15).
(3) Install propeller shaft. Refer to Group 3, Differ- (3) Install transfer case.
ential and Driveline, for proper procedures. (4) Check and add fluid to transmission as neces-
(4) Check and add fluid to transmission as necessary. Refer to the Recommended Lubricant section for
sary. Refer to the Recommended Lubricant section for proper fluid requirements.
proper fluid requirements. (5) Lower vehicle.
(5) Lower vehicle.
ADAPTER HOUSING SEAL

REMOVAL
(1) Hoist and support vehicle.
(2) Remove transfer case.
(3) Using a suitable pry tool, or a slide hammer
mounted screw, remove the adapter housing seal
(Fig. 14).
Fig. 17 Remove Shift Tower Gasket

(8) Remove detent ball plug (Fig. 19).
(9) Remove detent spring and ball with pencil
magnet (Fig. 20), (Fig. 21).
Fig. 15 Install Adapter Housing Seal

DISA

98 Jeep Cherokee Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

98 Jeep Cherokee Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

98 Jeep Cherokee Repair Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GROUP TAB LOCATOR

IN Introduction 8O Power Distribution Systems

INa Introduction 8P Power Lock Systems

0 Lubrication and Maintenance 8Q Vehicle Theft/Security Systems

0a Lubrication and Maintenance 8Qa Vehicle Theft/Security Systems

2 Suspension 8R Power Seats Systems

3 Differential and Driveline 8S Power Window Systems

5 Brakes 8T Power Mirror Systems

6 Clutch 8U Chime/Buzzer Warning Systems

6a Clutch 8V Overhead Console Systems

7 Cooling System 8W Wiring Diagrams

7a Cooling System 9 Engine

8B Starting System 11 Exhaust System and Intake Manifold

8Ba Starting Systems 11a Exhaust System and Intake Manifold

8C Charging System 13 Frame and Bumpers

8Ca Charging System 13a Frame and Bumpers

8D Ignition System 14 Fuel System

8E Instrument Panel Systems 14a Fuel System–2.5L Diesel Engine

8Ea Instrument Panel Systems 19 Steering

8F Audio Systems 19a Steering

8G Horn Systems 21 Transmission and Transfer Case

8H Vehicle Speed Control System 21a Transmission and Transfer Case

8Ha Vehicle Speed Control System 22 Tires and Wheels

8J Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Systems 23 Body

8K Wiper and Washer Systems 24 Heating and Air Conditioning

8L Lamps 24a Heating and Air Conditioning

8La Lamps 25 Emission Control Systems

8M Passive Restraint Systems 25a Emission Control System

8N Electrically Heated Systems

GENERAL INFORMATION METRIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

GENERAL INFORMATION • Body Code Plate.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DECODING CHART

POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

VEHICLE SAFETY CERTIFICATION LABEL

DIGITS 13, 14, AND 15

DIGITS 16, 17, AND 18

INTERNATIONAL CONTROL AND DISPLAY SYMBOLS

FASTENER IDENTIFICATION GRADE/CLASS IDENTIFICATION

Fig. 4 Thread Notation Chart – SAE and Metric

FASTENER USAGE Figure art, specifications and torque references in

THREADED HOLE REPAIR

METRIC SYSTEM Fig. 5 Metric Prefixes

CONVERSION FORMULAS AND EQUIVALENT VALUES

GENERAL INFORMATION MANUFACTURER PLATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

GENERAL INFORMATION • Vehicle Safety Certification Label.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER DECODING CHART

POSITION INTERPRETATION CODE = DESCRIPTION

E-MARK LABEL MANUFACTURER PLATE

Fig. 2 Manufacturer Plate

Fig. 1 E-Mark Label

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

GENERAL INFORMATION INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

GENERAL INFORMATION PARTS AND LUBRICANT RECOMMENDATIONS

Fig. 1 International Symbols

CLASSIFICATION OF LUBRICANTS GEAR LUBRICANTS

API QUALITY CLASSIFICATION

Fig. 2 API Symbol

FLUID CAPACITIES MANUAL TRANSMISSION

FUEL TANK AX5 (4X2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 L (3.7 qts.)